WA-725-3 - Irrigation Manual (Volume III) Technical Specifications

Q
C
C - C
op V1
y
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Document No: TR-511

First Edition
December-2016
Department of Municipal Affairs and Transport
PO Box 20
Abu Dhabi, United Arab Emirates
© Copyright 2016, by the Department of Municipal Affairs and Transport. All Rights Reserved.
This document, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form without written permission of
the publisher
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS VOLUME III
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. ABBREVIATION
2. PREAMBLE
op V1
3. DIVISION-01 : GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
4. C -
DIVISION-02 : SITE WORKS
y
C
5. DIVISION-03 : CONCRETE
C
6. DIVISION-04 : MASONRY
Q
7. DIVISION-05 : METALS
8. DIVISION-09 : FINISHES
9. DIVISION -11: PUMPS
10. DIVISION-13 : SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
11. DIVISION-15 : ELECTRO MECHANICAL
12. DIVISION-16 : ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
13. DIVISION-17 : OTHERS
TOC PAGE I FIRST EDITION - DECEMBER 2016

ABBREVIATION
Abbreviation Meaning
ACI American Concrete Institute
AIMS Archiving& Information Management System
A Ampere
A/C Air Conditioning
ADGCE/GC Gulf Computers
ADM Municipality of Abu Dhabi City
op V1
BS British Standard
cm Centimetre
cd Candela
CMMS C - Computerised Maintenance Management System
y
CPM
C
Construction Project Management
CAR Construction Authorization Request
C
ccs Characteristic Compressive Strength
CAD Computer Aided Drafting
Q
d Day
OFT Dry Film Thickness
DIN Deutsches lnstitut fur Normung e.V.
DI Ductile Iron
On Diameter Nominal
DWG Drawing format file from GIS
OFT Dry Film Thickness
DMAT Department of Municipal Affairs and Transport
ESRI Environmental System research Institute (GIS File format)
Eta (Efficiency)
11
FAC Final Acceptance Certificate
Fy Yield Strength
GL Ground Level
GGBS OPC concrete with not less than 60% Ground Granulated Blast
furnace Slag replacement of cement
GIS Geographic Information System
GRP Glass Reinforced Plastic
hr Hour
HOPE High Density Polyethylene
HSCR High Stress Crack Resistant
IRID Internal Road and Infrastructure Department - ADM
ID Inside Diameter
lmpG Imperial Gallon
ABBREVIATION PAGE II FIRST EDITION - DECEMBER 2016

ABBREVIATIONS
ITP Inspecting and Testing Plan.
K Kelvin
kG Kilogram's
kW Kilo Watt
I Litre
/
I hr Litre/ Hour
1/s Litre / Second
op V1
MSRPC Medium Sulphate Resisting Cement Concrete
MFR Melt Mass-Flow Rate.
Mpa Mega Pascal
MRS Minimum Required Strength
C -
y
MS Method Statement.
mol
C
Mal
MW Mega Watt
C
m Meter
m2 Square Meter
Q
m3 Cubic Meter
mm Millimetre
mA Mille Ampere
µm Micro Meter (1/1000,000 meter)
NDM Non Disturbed Method
N/A Not Available
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NCR Non Conformance Report
OD Outside Diameter
0/1 Output/ Input
OPC Ordinary Portland Cement concrete
OIT Oxidation Induction Time
PPM Project Portfolio and Management
PAC Provisional Acceptance Certificate
PPE Personal Protective Equipment
PFA Pulverized Fuel Ash
PFA Pulverised Fly Ash not less than 25% of the mix cement content
pH Pondus Hydrogenii
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
PN Pressure Nominal
PE Polyethylene
ABBREVIATION PAGE III FIRST EDITION - DECEMBER 2016

PVC polyvinyl Chloride
PRFD Parks & Recreational Facilities Division - ADM
QCP Quality Control Program
QA/QC Quality Assurance / Quality Control
RC Reinforced Pipe
RCCB'S Residual Current Circuit Breaker
RTU Remote Terminal Unit
op V1
SRS Software Requirements Specification
S.S.D Saturated Surface Dry
SF Silica Fume
SRPC Sulphate Resistant Portland Cement
C -
y
s Second
s
C
Pipe Series.
SCR Stress Crack Resistance.
C
SOR Standard Dimension Ratio.
SF Concrete with not less than 4% Silica Fume
Q
SRC Sulphate Resisting Cement concrete

TRT Target Response Time
TIG Tungsten Inert Gas.
TPI Third party Inspector
UV Ultraviolet
USG USA Gallon
UTM Universal Transverse Mercator
V Volt
WPC Waterproof Concrete
WGS World Geodetic System
w Watt
WPC Waterproof Concrete
WPM Waterproof Membrane
WFT Wet Film Thickness
2D/3D Two Dimension (X, Y) / Three Dimension (X,Y,Z)
s Zeta (friction loss coefficient)
PAGE IV
ABBREVIATION FIRST EDITION - DECEMBER 2016
PREAMBLE
This document was developed keeping in mind the older version of the specifications that was
used by all stakeholders.
To facilitate the transition from the old version to the new version of the specifications the
sections numbers of within each division kept the same for ease of reference.
A comparison between the old numbering system and the new one is given below to
explain to the users how to search and navigate through the specification document.
op V1
Old Numbering system
In the old numbering the document sequence was based on the Section Number and
subsequent Part Numbers, Part-1 General, Part-2 Products and Part-3 Execution as shown
below
C -
y
SECTION 01019
C
CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS
Part 1 General
C
1.1 Related Sections
Q
Section 01025 - Measurement and Payment.
Section 01027 - Applications for Payment.
Section 01028 - Modification Requirements.
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
New Numbering System
In the new system an Additional Level has been added to allow for a continuous numbering
throughout each division. Section numbers however; were kept between parenthesis for
users’ ease of reference and ease of relating to old numbering.
1 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS
1.1 (SECTION 01019) Part 1 General
1.1.1 Related Sections

PAGE V
PREAMBLE FIRST EDITION - DECEMBER 2016
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
op V1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
C - (VOLUME III)
y
C
DIVISION-01
C
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Q
DOCUMENT NO: 511

FIRST EDITION
DECEMBER- 2016
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Document No: 511

First Edition
December-2016
PO Box 20
© Copyright 2016, by the Department of Municipal Affairs and Transport. All Rights Reserved. This
document, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form without written permission of the
publisher
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of Contents............................................................................................................................. I
1. CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS (SECTION 01019) ................................................................ 1
1.1 Part 1 General .....................................................................................................................................1
1.1.1 Related Sections ...........................................................................................................................1
1.1.2 Advance Payment .........................................................................................................................1
1.1.3 Compensation for Damage to Property ........................................................................................1
1.2 Part 2 Products ...................................................................................................................................1
op V1
1.3 Part 3 Execution .................................................................................................................................1
2. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (SECTION 01025) .............................................................. 2
2.1 General ................................................................................................................................................2
2.1.1
C -
Related Sections ...........................................................................................................................2
y
2.1.2
C
Authority ........................................................................................................................................2
2.1.3 Measurement of Quantities ..........................................................................................................2
C
2.1.4 Payment ........................................................................................................................................2
2.1.5 Defect Assessment .......................................................................................................................2
Q
2.1.6 Non-Payment for Rejected Products ............................................................................................3

2.2 Part 2 Products ...................................................................................................................................3
2.3 Part 3 Execution .................................................................................................................................3
3. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT (SECTION 01027) ............................................................... 4
3.1 Part 1 General .....................................................................................................................................4
3.1.2 Format...........................................................................................................................................4
3.1.3 Preparation of Applications ...........................................................................................................4
3.1.4 Submittal Procedures ...................................................................................................................5
3.1.5 Substantiating Data ......................................................................................................................5
3.2 Part 2 Products ...................................................................................................................................5
3.3 Part 3 Execution .................................................................................................................................5
4. MODIFICATION REQUIREMENTS (SECTION 01028) ............................................................. 6
4.1 Part 1 General .....................................................................................................................................6
4.1.1 Submittals .....................................................................................................................................6
4.1.2 Documentation of Change in Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time .........................................6
4.1.3 Change Procedures ......................................................................................................................6
4.1.4 Construction Change Directive .....................................................................................................7
4.1.5 Stipulated Sum Change Order .....................................................................................................7
4.1.6 Unit Price Change Order ..............................................................................................................7
4.1.7 Time and Material Change Order .................................................................................................7
4.1.8 Execution of Change Orders ........................................................................................................8
PAGE I
TOC FIRST EDITION - DECEMBER 2016
4.1.9 Correlation of Contractor Submittals ............................................................................................8

4.2 Part 2 Products ...................................................................................................................................8
4.3 Part 3 Execution .................................................................................................................................8
5. ALTERNATIVES (SECTION 01030) ......................................................................................... 9
5.1 Part 1 General .....................................................................................................................................9
5.1.2 Submission Requirements ............................................................................................................9
5.1.3 Schedule of Alternatives ...............................................................................................................9
5.2 Part 2 Products ...................................................................................................................................9
op V1
5.3 Part 3 Execution .................................................................................................................................9
6. COORDINATION AND MEETINGS (SECTION 01039) ........................................................... 10
6.1 Part 1 General ...................................................................................................................................10
6.1.1
C -
Related Sections .........................................................................................................................10
y
6.1.2
C
Coordination and Project Conditions ..........................................................................................10
6.1.3 Site Handover Meeting ...............................................................................................................10
C
6.1.4 Start-Up Meeting .........................................................................................................................11
6.1.5 Progress Meetings ......................................................................................................................11
Q
6.1.6 Handing Over Inspection/Meeting ..............................................................................................11

6.2 Part 2 Products .................................................................................................................................11
6.3 Part 3 Execution ...............................................................................................................................11
7. MAINTENANCE ENGINEER (SECTION 01049) ..................................................................... 14
7.1 Part 1 General ...................................................................................................................................14
7.1.1 Maintenance Engineer ................................................................................................................14
7.1.2 Submittals for Review .................................................................................................................14
7.1.3 Observation of Work ...................................................................................................................14
7.1.4 Documentation ............................................................................................................................14
7.1.5 Mains Electricity & Liaison with ADWEA ....................................................................................14
7.1.6 Equipment Start-Up ....................................................................................................................15
7.1.7 Inspection and Acceptance of Equipment ..................................................................................15
7.2 Part 2 Products .................................................................................................................................15
7.3 Part 3 Execution ...............................................................................................................................15
8. FIELD ENGINEERING (SECTION 01050)............................................................................... 16
8.1 Part 1 General ...................................................................................................................................16
8.1.1 Related Sections .........................................................................................................................16
8.1.2 Quality Assurance .......................................................................................................................16
8.1.3 Submittals for Review .................................................................................................................16
8.1.4 Project Record Documents .........................................................................................................16
8.1.5 Examination ................................................................................................................................16
8.1.6 Survey Reference Points ............................................................................................................17
PAGE II
8.1.7 Survey Requirements .................................................................................................................17

8.1.8 Surveys for Measurement and Payment ....................................................................................18
8.1.9 Non-Compliance .........................................................................................................................18
8.2 Part 2 Products .................................................................................................................................18
8.3 Part 3 Execution ...............................................................................................................................18
9. REFERENCE STANDARDS (SECTION 01090) ..................................................................... 19
9.1 Part 1 General ...................................................................................................................................19
op V1
9.1.3 Purpose of Standards .................................................................................................................20
9.1.4 International Standards...............................................................................................................20
9.1.5 Local Regulations .......................................................................................................................21
9.1.6
C -
ISO Standards ............................................................................................................................21
y
9.1.7
9.1.8
C
BS EN ISO Standards ................................................................................................................24
BS EN Standards ........................................................................................................................25
C
9.1.9 BS Standards ..............................................................................................................................32
9.1.10 ACI Standards ............................................................................................................................37
9.1.11 PD Standards .............................................................................................................................37
Q
9.1.12 ASTM Standards ........................................................................................................................37

9.1.13 AASHTO Standards ....................................................................................................................44
9.1.14 WIS Standards ............................................................................................................................44
9.1.15 DIN Standards ............................................................................................................................44
9.1.16 UK Engineering Recommendations ...........................................................................................45
10. ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES (SECTION 01120) ............................................. 46
10.1 Part 1 General ...................................................................................................................................46
10.2 Part 2 Products .................................................................................................................................46
10.2.1 Products for Patching and Extending Work ................................................................................46
10.3 Part 3 Execution ...............................................................................................................................46
10.3.1 Examination ................................................................................................................................46
10.3.2 Preparation .................................................................................................................................46
10.3.3 Installation ...................................................................................................................................47
10.3.4 Transitions ..................................................................................................................................47
10.3.5 Adjustments ................................................................................................................................47
10.3.6 Repair of Damaged Surfaces .....................................................................................................47
10.3.7 Finishes.......................................................................................................................................48
10.3.8 Cleaning ......................................................................................................................................48
11. SUBMITTALS (SECTION 01300) ........................................................................................ 49
11.1 Part 1 General ...................................................................................................................................49
PAGE III

11.1.2 Submittal Procedures .................................................................................................................49
11.1.3 Site Assets ..................................................................................................................................51
11.1.4 Staff Organization Chart .............................................................................................................51
11.1.5 Health and Safety Policy Document ...........................................................................................52
11.1.6 Product Data ...............................................................................................................................52
11.1.7 Reports and Records ..................................................................................................................53
11.1.8 Correspondence .........................................................................................................................53
11.1.9 Drawing Coordination Considerations ........................................................................................53
op V1
11.1.10 Working Drawings .......................................................................................................................54
11.1.11 Shop Drawings ...........................................................................................................................55
11.1.12 Record Drawings ........................................................................................................................56
11.1.13 Samples ......................................................................................................................................56
C -
y
11.1.14 Design Data ................................................................................................................................56
11.1.15
C
Equipment Data ..........................................................................................................................57
11.1.16 Test Reports ...............................................................................................................................57
C
11.1.17 Certificates ..................................................................................................................................57
11.1.18 Manufacturer's Instructions .........................................................................................................57
Q
11.1.19 Manufacturer's Field Reports......................................................................................................57

11.1.20 Progress Reports ........................................................................................................................58
11.1.21 Correspondence .........................................................................................................................59
11.2 Part 2 Products .................................................................................................................................60
11.3 Part 3 Execution ...............................................................................................................................60
12. WORK PLANS (SECTION 01310) ....................................................................................... 61
12.1 Part 1 General ...................................................................................................................................61
12.1.3 Format.........................................................................................................................................61
12.1.4 Programmed ...............................................................................................................................61
12.1.5 Analysis.......................................................................................................................................63
12.1.6 Review and Evaluation ...............................................................................................................64
12.1.7 Updating Programs .....................................................................................................................64
12.1.8 Distribution ..................................................................................................................................64
12.2 Part 2 Products .................................................................................................................................65
12.3 Part 3 Execution ...............................................................................................................................65
12.3.1 Works Program ...........................................................................................................................65
13. PHOTOGRAPHS (SECTION 01380) ................................................................................... 66
13.1 Part 1 General ...................................................................................................................................66
PAGE IV
13.1.2 Photography ...............................................................................................................................66

13.1.3 Digital File ...................................................................................................................................67
13.1.4 Technique ...................................................................................................................................67
13.1.5 Views ..........................................................................................................................................67
13.1.6 Submittals ...................................................................................................................................67
13.1.7 Copyright ....................................................................................................................................67
13.2 Part 2 Products .................................................................................................................................68
13.3 Part 3 Execution ...............................................................................................................................68
14. QUALITY CONTROL (SECTION 01400) ............................................................................. 69
op V1
14.1 Part 1 General ...................................................................................................................................69
14.1.2 Quality Control Program .............................................................................................................69
14.1.3
C -
Samples ......................................................................................................................................70
y
14.1.4
14.1.5
C
Mock-Up......................................................................................................................................71
Manufacturers' Field Services ....................................................................................................71
C
14.2 Part 2 Products .................................................................................................................................72
14.2.1 Identification Mark-up .................................................................................................................72
14.3 Part 3 Execution ...............................................................................................................................72
Q
14.3.1 Examination ................................................................................................................................72

14.3.3 Tolerances ..................................................................................................................................73
14.3.4 Preparation .................................................................................................................................73
14.3.5 Non-conformance .......................................................................................................................73
14.3.6 Audits ..........................................................................................................................................74
15. TESTING SERVICES (SECTION 01410) ............................................................................. 75
15.1 Part 1 General ...................................................................................................................................75
15.1.2 References .................................................................................................................................75
15.1.3 Selection .....................................................................................................................................76
15.1.5 Contractor’s Submittals...............................................................................................................77
15.1.6 Inspection Firm Responsibilities .................................................................................................77
15.1.7 Inspection Reports ......................................................................................................................77
15.1.8 Limits on Testing Authority .........................................................................................................78
15.1.9 Contractor Responsibilities .........................................................................................................78
15.1.10 Programme of Tests ...................................................................................................................79
15.2 Part 2 Products .................................................................................................................................79
15.3 Part 3 Execution ...............................................................................................................................79
16. INSPECTION SERVICES (SECTION 01411)....................................................................... 80
PAGE V
16.1 Part 1 General ...................................................................................................................................80

16.1.2 References .................................................................................................................................80
16.1.3 Selection .....................................................................................................................................80
16.1.5 Contractor Submittals .................................................................................................................81
16.1.6 Inspection Company or Agency Responsibilities .......................................................................81
16.1.7 Inspection Reports ......................................................................................................................82
16.1.8 Limits on Authority ......................................................................................................................82
op V1
16.1.9 Contractor Responsibilities .........................................................................................................82
16.1.10 Inspections Programme ..............................................................................................................83
16.2 Part 2 Products .................................................................................................................................83
16.3 Part 3 Execution ...............................................................................................................................83
C -
y
17.
17.1
C
TEMPORARY UTILITIES (SECTION 01510) ....................................................................... 84
Part 1 General ...................................................................................................................................84
C
17.1.2 Temporary Electricity ..................................................................................................................84
17.1.3 Temporary Lighting for Maintenance Purposes .........................................................................85
Q
17.1.4 Temporary Heating .....................................................................................................................85

17.1.5 Temporary Cooling .....................................................................................................................85
17.1.6 Temporary Ventilation .................................................................................................................86
17.1.7 Telephone Service ......................................................................................................................86
17.1.8 Internet Service ...........................................................................................................................86
17.1.9 Facsimile Service ........................................................................................................................86
17.1.10 Temporary Water Service ...........................................................................................................86
17.1.11 Temporary Sanitary Facilities .....................................................................................................87
17.1.12 Temporary Drainage ...................................................................................................................87
17.1.13 Temporary Fire Fighting Services ..............................................................................................87
17.2 Part 2 Products .................................................................................................................................88
17.3 Part 3 Execution ...............................................................................................................................88
18. HEALTH AND SAFETY (SECTION 01540) ......................................................................... 89
18.1 Part 1 General ...................................................................................................................................89
18.1.1 Scope ..........................................................................................................................................89
18.1.2 References and Related Sections ..............................................................................................89
18.1.3 ‘Ask Yourself’ Guidance Notes ...................................................................................................89
18.1.4 Responsibilities ...........................................................................................................................90
18.1.5 Non-Compliance of H&S Related Items .....................................................................................90
18.1.6 Penalties for Non-Compliance Safety Related Items .................................................................90
18.1.7 Site Safety Notice Boards ...........................................................................................................91
PAGE VI
18.1.8 Impact on Environment and Services .........................................................................................91

18.1.9 Setting up Site ............................................................................................................................93
18.1.10 Working In Heat and Humidity ....................................................................................................95
18.1.11 Barriers .......................................................................................................................................95
18.1.12 Noise Control ..............................................................................................................................96
18.1.13 Traffic Management ....................................................................................................................96
18.1.14 Personal Protective Equipment ..................................................................................................97
18.1.15 Manual Handling .........................................................................................................................97
18.1.16 Mechanical Plant and Equipment ...............................................................................................97
op V1
18.1.17 Excavations for Shafts, Tunnels and Headings ..........................................................................97
18.1.18 Tower and Mobile Cranes...........................................................................................................97
18.1.19 Lifting Equipment ........................................................................................................................98
18.1.20 Working at Height .......................................................................................................................98
C -
y
18.1.21 Mobile Scaffold Towers ..............................................................................................................98
18.1.22
C
Ladders .......................................................................................................................................99
18.1.23 Welding and Use of LPG ............................................................................................................99
C
18.1.24 Fixed and Temporary Electrical Distribution Systems ................................................................99
18.1.25 Guarding of Machinery ...............................................................................................................99
Q
18.1.26 Power Operated Tools ..............................................................................................................100

18.1.27 Portable Hand/Compressed Air Tools ......................................................................................100
18.1.28 Hazardous Substances.............................................................................................................100
18.1.29 Entering and Working In Confined Spaces...............................................................................100
18.1.30 Requirements at Construction ..................................................................................................101
18.2 Part 2 Products ...............................................................................................................................102
18.3 Part 3 Execution .............................................................................................................................102
19. ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING (SECTION 01550) ....................................................... 103
19.1 Part 1 General .................................................................................................................................103
19.1.1 Related Sections .......................................................................................................................103
19.1.2 General .....................................................................................................................................103
19.2 Part 2 Products ...............................................................................................................................104
19.2.1 Materials ...................................................................................................................................104
19.3 Part 3 Execution .............................................................................................................................104
19.3.1 Preparation ...............................................................................................................................104
19.3.2 Access Roads ...........................................................................................................................104
19.3.3 Parking ......................................................................................................................................104
19.3.4 Existing Pavements and Parking Areas ...................................................................................104
19.3.5 Permanent Pavements and Parking Facilities ..........................................................................104
19.3.6 Maintenance .............................................................................................................................105
19.3.7 Removal, Repair .......................................................................................................................105
PAGE VII
19.3.8 Mud from Site Vehicles .............................................................................................................105

20. SITE FACILITIES (SECTION 01555) ................................................................................. 106
20.1 Part 1 General .................................................................................................................................106
20.1.2 Progress Cleaning and Waste Removal ...................................................................................106
20.2 Part 2 Products ...............................................................................................................................106
20.3 Part 3 Execution .............................................................................................................................106
21. TEMPORARY CONTROL (SECTION 01560) .................................................................... 107
21.1 Part 1 General .................................................................................................................................107
op V1
21.1.2 Approvals ..................................................................................................................................107
21.1.3 Barriers .....................................................................................................................................107
21.1.4
C -
Water Control ............................................................................................................................107
y
21.1.5
C
Exterior Enclosures ...................................................................................................................107
21.1.6 Interior Enclosures ....................................................................................................................107
C
21.1.7 Protection of Installed Work ......................................................................................................108
21.1.8 Dust Control ..............................................................................................................................108
Q
21.1.9 Noise Control ............................................................................................................................108

21.1.10 Pest Control ..............................................................................................................................108
21.1.11 Pollution Control .......................................................................................................................108
21.1.12 Rodent Control ..........................................................................................................................109
21.1.13 Plantations and Trees (Soft Landscape) ..................................................................................109
21.1.14 Work Sequence ........................................................................................................................109
21.1.15 Closing of Roads ......................................................................................................................110
21.1.16 Nuisance ...................................................................................................................................110
21.1.17 Loading of Structures................................................................................................................110
21.1.18 Protection of Finishes ...............................................................................................................110
21.1.19 Working Adjacent to Existing GRP Pipelines ...........................................................................111
21.1.20 Removal of Temporary Conduits ..............................................................................................111
21.2 Part 2 Products ...............................................................................................................................111
21.3 Part 3 Execution .............................................................................................................................111
22. TRAFFIC REGULATIONS (SECTION 01570) ................................................................... 112
22.1 Part 1 General .................................................................................................................................112
22.1.2 General .....................................................................................................................................112
22.1.3 Shop Drawings .........................................................................................................................112
22.1.4 Failure to Comply......................................................................................................................112
22.2 Part 2 - Products .............................................................................................................................113
22.2.1 Signs, Signals and Devices ......................................................................................................113
PAGE VIII
22.2.2 Barriers .....................................................................................................................................113

22.3 Part 3 Execution .............................................................................................................................114
22.3.1 General .....................................................................................................................................114
22.3.2 Construction Parking Control ....................................................................................................114
22.3.3 Flag Persons .............................................................................................................................114
22.3.4 Flares and Lights ......................................................................................................................115
22.3.5 Haul Routes ..............................................................................................................................115
22.3.6 Detours .....................................................................................................................................115
22.3.7 Traffic Signs and Signals ..........................................................................................................116
op V1
22.3.8 Removal ....................................................................................................................................117
23. PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS (SECTION 01580)........................................... 118
23.1 Part 1 General .................................................................................................................................118
23.1.1
C -
Quality Assurance .....................................................................................................................118
y
23.2
23.1.2
C
Submittals .................................................................................................................................118
Part 2 Products ...............................................................................................................................118
C
23.2.1 Sign Materials ...........................................................................................................................118
23.2.2 Project Identification Sign .........................................................................................................118
23.2.3 Project Informational Signs .......................................................................................................119
Q
23.2.4 Safety Notice Board ..................................................................................................................119

23.3 Part 3 Execution .............................................................................................................................119
23.3.1 Installation .................................................................................................................................119
23.3.2 Maintenance .............................................................................................................................119
23.3.3 Removal ....................................................................................................................................119
24. OFFICES, BUILDING AND FACILITY (SECTION 01590) ................................................. 120
24.1 Part 1 General ................................................................................................................................120
24.1.2 Use of Existing Facilities ...........................................................................................................120
24.2 Part 2 Products ..............................................................................................................................120
24.2.1 Contractor Office and Facilities ................................................................................................120
24.2.2 Engineer Facilities Provided By the Contractor ........................................................................121
24.2.3 Communication Facilities ..........................................................................................................123
24.2.4 Storage Areas and Sheds.........................................................................................................123
24.2.5 Materials, Equipment, Furnishings ...........................................................................................123
24.2.6 Construction ..............................................................................................................................123
24.2.7 Environmental Control ..............................................................................................................124
24.3 Part 3 Execution .............................................................................................................................124
24.3.1 Preparation ...............................................................................................................................124
24.3.2 Installation .................................................................................................................................124
24.3.3 Maintenance and Cleaning .......................................................................................................124
PAGE IX
24.3.4 Removal ....................................................................................................................................124

25. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT (SECTION 01600) .......................................................... 125
25.1 Part 1 General .................................................................................................................................125
25.1.2 Products ....................................................................................................................................125
25.1.3 The Division’s Policy for Material Approval ..............................................................................125
25.1.4 Transportation and Handling ....................................................................................................126
25.1.5 Storage and Protection .............................................................................................................127
25.1.6 Product Options ........................................................................................................................127
op V1
25.1.7 Substitutions .............................................................................................................................128
25.2 Part 2 Products ...............................................................................................................................128
25.2.1 General .....................................................................................................................................128
25.3 Part 3 Execution .............................................................................................................................129
C -
y
25.3.1
C
General .....................................................................................................................................129
26. COMMISSIONING SYSTEM (SECTION 01650) ................................................................ 130
C
26.1 Part 1 General .................................................................................................................................130
Q
26.1.2 Commissioning of Systems ......................................................................................................130

26.1.3 Demonstration and Instructions ................................................................................................130
26.1.4 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing ............................................................................................131
26.2 Part 2 Products ...............................................................................................................................131
26.3 Part 3 Execution .............................................................................................................................131
27. CONTRACT CLOSE OUT (SECTION 01700).................................................................... 132
27.1 Part 1 General .................................................................................................................................132
27.1.2 Provisional Acceptance ............................................................................................................132
27.1.3 Final Cleaning ...........................................................................................................................132
27.1.4 Adjusting ...................................................................................................................................133
27.1.5 Project Record Documents .......................................................................................................133
27.1.6 Asset Data ................................................................................................................................134
27.1.7 Spare Parts and Maintenance Products ...................................................................................134
27.1.8 Final Account ............................................................................................................................135
27.1.9 Maintenance Service ................................................................................................................135
27.1.10 Final Acceptance ......................................................................................................................135
27.1.11 Issue of Completion Certificate .................................................................................................135
27.2 Part 2 Products ...............................................................................................................................135
27.3 Part 3 Execution .............................................................................................................................135
28. OPERATION AND MAINENANCE DATA (SECTION 01730) ............................................ 136
28.1 Part 1 General .................................................................................................................................136
PAGE X
28.1.1 Quality Assurance .....................................................................................................................136

28.1.2 Format.......................................................................................................................................136
28.1.3 Contents, Each Volume ............................................................................................................136
28.1.4 Manual for Materials and Finishes ............................................................................................137
28.1.5 Manual for Equipment and Systems .........................................................................................137
28.1.6 Instruction of Division Personnel ..............................................................................................138
28.1.7 Submittals .................................................................................................................................139
28.1.8 Schedule of Submittals .............................................................................................................139
28.2 Part 2 Products ...............................................................................................................................139
op V1
28.3 Part 3 Execution .............................................................................................................................139
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE XI
LIST OF TABLES
Table ‎6-1: Start-Up Meeting Agenda ..................................................................................................................12
Table ‎9-1: ISO Standards ...................................................................................................................................21
Table ‎9-2: BS EN ISO Standards .......................................................................................................................24
Table ‎9-3: BS EN Standards ..............................................................................................................................25
Table ‎9-4: BS Standards ....................................................................................................................................32
Table ‎9-5: ACI Standards ...................................................................................................................................37
Table ‎9-6: PD Standards ....................................................................................................................................37
op V1
Table ‎9-7: ASTM Standards ...............................................................................................................................38
Table ‎9-8: AASHTO Standards ..........................................................................................................................44
Table ‎9-9: WIS Standards ..................................................................................................................................44
C -
y
C
Table ‎9-10: DIN Standards .................................................................................................................................44
Table ‎9-11: UK Engineering Recommendations ................................................................................................45
C
Q
PAGE XII
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS- TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS VOLUME III
1. CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS (SECTION

01019)
1.1 Part 1 General
op V1
C -
y
1.1.2 Advance Payment
C
A. Advance payment of 25% of Contract Sum up to a maximum of Dhs 5,000,000 is
available to locally owned companies upon written application to the Engineer.
C
B. The Contractor shall provide Bank Guarantee for the full value of the advance.
Q
1.1.3 Compensation for Damage to Property

A. The Contractor shall reinstate all public and private property if affected by the
Works, Temporary Works, labour, materials and transport to a condition at least
equal to that existing before first entry onto them.
B. If the Contractor fails to reinstate private property affected by the Works

adequately and promptly the Division reserves right to:
1. Arrange for the work to be completed by others,
2. Make payments to the owners and occupiers.
C. All such costs incurred to be deducted from payments due from the Division to the
Contractor.
1.2 Part 2 Products

1.3 Part 3 Execution
END OF SECTION
PAGE 1
DIVISION 01 - SECTION 01019 FIRST EDITION - DECEMBER 2016

2. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (SECTION

01025)
2.1 General
Section 01019 - Contract Considerations.
op V1
2.1.2 Authority
A. Measurement methods delineated in the Schedule of Rates / BOQ complement
C -
the criteria of this section. In the event of conflict, the requirements of the
y
C
Schedule of Rates / BOQ govern.
B. The Contractor shall take all measurements and compute quantities. The
C
Contractor and Engineer will verify and sign measurements and quantities for
approval by the Division.
Q
2.1.3 Measurement of Quantities

A. Measurement: Items shall be measured by weight, volume, area, or linear means
or combination, as appropriate, as a completed item or unit of the Work as
indicated in the Bill of Quantities.
2.1.4 Payment
A. Payment Includes: Full compensation for all required labour, products, tools,
equipment, transportation, services and incidentals; erection, application or
installation of an item of the Work; overhead and profit.
B. Final payment for Work will be made on the basis of the actual measurements and
quantities accepted by the Engineer multiplied by the unit sum/price for Work which
is incorporated in or made necessary by the Work.
2.1.5 Defect Assessment

A. The Contractor shall replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to
specified requirements.
B. If, in the opinion of the Engineer and Division, it is not practical to remove and
replace the Work, the Engineer will direct one of the following remedies:
1. The defective Work may remain, but the unit sum/price will be adjusted to a
new sum/price at the discretion of the Division
Page 2
DIVISION 01-SECTION 01025 FIRST EDITION -DECEMBER 2016
2. The defective Work will be partially repaired to the instructions of the Engineer,
and the unit sum/price will be adjusted to a new sum/price at the discretion of
the Division.
C. The individual specification sections may modify these options or may identify a
specific formula or percentage sum/price reduction.
D. The authority of the Division to assess the defect and identify payment adjustment
is final.
2.1.6 Non-Payment for Rejected Products
op V1
A. Payment will not be made for any of the following:
1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable.
2.
C -
Products determined as unacceptable before or after placement.
y
3.
C
Products not completely unloaded from the transporting vehicle.
C
4. Products placed beyond the lines and levels of the required Work.
5. Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work unless otherwise

Q
directed by the Division.
6. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected Products.
2.2 Part 2 Products

Not Used.

Not Used.
END OF SECTION
Page 3
3. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT (SECTION

01027)
3.1 Part 1 General
Section 01019 - Contract Considerations
Section 01028 - Modification Requirements
Section 01300 - Submittals: Submittal procedures.
op V1
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Final account.
3.1.2 Format
C -
y
A. For each item, the Contractor shall provide a column for listing each of the
following:
C
C
1. Item Number.
2. Description of work.
Q
3. Scheduled Values.
4. Previous Applications.
5. Work in Place [and Stored Materials] under this Application.
6. Authorised Change Orders.
7. Total Completed [and Stored] to Date of Application.
8. Percentage of Completion.
9. Balance to Finish.
10. Retainage.
3.1.3 Preparation of Applications

A. The Contractor shall present required information on the standard form provided
by the Client.
B. The Contractor shall execute certification by signature of authorised officer.
C. The Contractor shall use data from approved Schedule of Rates / BOQ. He shall
provide Dirham value in each column for each line item for portion of work
performed and for materials on site.
D. The Contractor shall list each authorised Change listing Change Order number
and Dirham amount as for an original item of Work.
E. The Contractor shall prepare Application for Final Payment as specified in Section
01700.
Page 4
3.1.4 Submittal Procedures

A. The Contractor shall submit proof that all insurances have been effected and are
valid
B. The Contractor shall submit three copies of each Application for Payment.
C. The Contractor shall submit an updated schedule with each Application for
Payment.
D. Payment Period: The Contractor shall submit Applications for Payment at
intervals stipulated in the Agreement.
E. The Contractor shall submit the Application for Payment with transmittal letter as
op V1
specified for Submittals in Section 01300.
F. The Contractor shall submit waivers when appropriate.
3.1.5 Substantiating Data

C -
y
A.
C
When Engineer requires substantiating information; the Contractor shall submit
the data justifying Dirham amounts in question.
C
B. The Contractor shall provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of
submittal. He shall show application number and date, and line item by number
and description.
Q
C. The Contractor shall include the following with the application:

1. Partial release of liens from major Subcontractors and vendors.
2. Record documents as specified in Section 01300, for review by the
Division which will be returned to the Contractor.
3. Affidavits attesting to materials on site.
4. Progress schedules, revised and current in a format to be agreed with
Division.
3.2 Part 2 Products

END OF SECTION
Page 5
4. MODIFICATION REQUIREMENTS (SECTION

01028)
4.1 Part 1 General
4.1.1 Submittals
A. The Contractor shall submit the name of the individual authorized to receive
change documents, and be responsible for informing others in Contractor's
employ or Subcontractors of changes to the Work.
B. Change Order Forms: The Contractor shall use the model form agreed with the
op V1
Engineer.
4.1.2 Documentation of Change in Contract Sum/Price and
C -
Contract Time
y
A.
C
The Contractor shall maintain detailed records of work done on a time and
material basis. He shall provide full information required for evaluation of proposed
changes, and to substantiate costs of changes in the Work.
C
B. The Contractor shall document each quotation for a change in cost or time with
sufficient data to allow evaluation of the quotation.
Q
C. The Contractor shall provide additional data to support computations:

1. Quantities of products, labour, and equipment.
2. Taxes, insurance, and bonds.
3. Overhead and profit.
4. Justification for any change in Contract Time.
5. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented.
D. The Contractor shall support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on
a time and material basis, with additional information:
1. Origin and date of claim.
2. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom.
3. Time records and wage rates paid.
4. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly
documented.
4.1.3 Change Procedures

A. The Engineer will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment
to Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time by issuing supplemental instructions.
B. The Engineer may issue a Notice of Change which includes a detailed description
of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications,
a change in Contract Time for executing the change and the period of time during
Page 6
which the requested price will be considered valid. Contractor shall prepare and
submit an estimate within two days.
C. The Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to the
Engineer, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a
statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract
Sum/Price and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing
the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. The Contractor shall
document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01600.
4.1.4 Construction Change Directive
op V1
A. Engineer may issue a document, signed by the Division, instructing the Contractor
to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change
Order.
B. The document will describe changes in the Work, and will designate method of
C -
determining any change in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time.
y
C.
C
The Contractor shall promptly execute the change in Work.
C
4.1.5 Stipulated Sum Change Order
A. Stipulated sum Change Orders will be based on Notice of Change and
Q
Contractor's maximum price quotation or Contractor's request for a Change Order

as approved by the Division.
4.1.6 Unit Price Change Order

A. For pre-determined unit prices and quantities, the Change Order will be executed
on a fixed unit price basis.
B. For unit costs or quantities of units of work which are not pre-determined, the
Work will be executed under a Construction Change Directive.
C. Changes in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time will be computed as specified for
Time and Material Change Order.
4.1.7 Time and Material Change Order

A. The Contractor shall submit itemized account and supporting data after completion
of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. Division will determine the change allowable in Contract Sum/Price and Contract
Time as provided in the Contract Documents.
C. The Contractor shall maintain detailed records of work done on Time and Material
basis.
D. The Contractor shall provide full information required for evaluation of proposed
changes, and to substantiate costs for changes in the Work.
Page 7
4.1.8 Execution of Change Orders

A. Execution of Change Orders: Engineer will issue Change Orders for signatures of
parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract.
4.1.9 Correlation of Contractor Submittals

A. The Contractor shall promptly revise Schedule of Rates and Application for
Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item
and adjust the Contract Sum/Price.
B. The Contractor shall promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in
Contract Time, revise sub-schedules to adjust times for other items of work
op V1
affected by the change, and resubmit.
C. The Contractor shall promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents.
4.2 Part 2 Products

C -
y
C
C
Q
END OF SECTION
Page 8
5. ALTERNATIVES (SECTION 01030)

5.1 Part 1 General
Section 01300 - Submittals.
Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment: Product options and substitutions.
5.1.2 Submission Requirements
op V1
A. The Contractor shall submit alternatives identifying the effect on adjacent or
related components.
B. Alternatives quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at the
C -
Division’s option. Accepted alternatives will be identified in the Agreement.
y
C.
C
For each alternative the Contractor shall coordinate and modify surrounding work
for its integration in the Scope of Works.
C
5.1.3 Schedule of Alternatives
Q
A. The Contractor shall provide a schedule of alternatives on request to the Engineer

in writing.
5.2 Part 2 Products
END OF SECTION
Page 9

6. COORDINATION AND MEETINGS (SECTION

01039)
6.1 Part 1 General
Section 01120 - Alteration Project Procedures.
6.1.2 Coordination and Project Conditions
op V1
A. The Contractor shall coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various
sections of the Contract Documents to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of
the Works, with provisions for accommodating additional items later.
B.
C -
The Contractor shall verify when appropriate, utility requirements and
y
C
characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with irrigation utilities.
Coordinate the work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for
installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.
C
C. The Contractor shall coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of
mechanical and electrical Work. He shall utilise space efficiently to maximise
Q
accessibility for other installations, for maintenance and for repairs.

D. The Contractor shall coordinate completion and clean-up of Work of separate
sections in preparation for Contract Closeout.
E. The Contractor shall coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work to
minimise disruption of Division’s activities.
6.1.3 Site Handover Meeting

A. The Engineer will schedule a meeting at the Project site prior to Contractor’s
occupancy and after signing Agreement.
B. Attendance Required: Representatives of DMAT, Engineer and Contractor.
C. Agenda:
1. Inspection of Site
2. Observe and record conditions, obstructions, special features
3. Take photographs of salient features
4. Identify and record location and elevation of benchmarks
D. The Contractor shall record observations and distribute copies of Report and
signed Site Handover Certificate to participants within one week after meeting.
Page 10

6.1.4 Start-Up Meeting

A. Engineer will schedule a meeting.
B. Attendance required: representatives of DMAT, Engineer, Contractor and any
Subcontractors.
C. Agenda: See Section Attachments.
D. Engineer will record minutes and distribute copies within one week after meeting
to participants.
6.1.5 Progress Meetings
op V1
A. Engineer will schedule and administer weekly meetings throughout progress of the
Work.
B. Engineer will make arrangements for meetings as necessary, prepare agenda with
copies for participants and preside at meetings, throughout progress of the Work.
C -
y
C. Attendance required: representatives of DMAT, Engineer, Contractor,
C
Subcontractors, and Suppliers etc. as appropriate to agenda topics for each
meeting.
C
D. Agenda: See Section Attachments
E. Engineer will record minutes and distribute copies within one week after meeting
Q
to participants and those affected by decisions made.
6.1.6 Handing Over Inspection/Meeting

A. The Contractor shall include Handing over Schedule in Programme of Work.
B. The Contractor shall notify DMAT and Engineer one week in advance.
C. The Contractor shall require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by,
work of the specific section.
D. The Contractor shall provide documentation as required by Section 01700.
6.2 Part 2 Products

END OF SECTION
Attachments: SF 8, SF 10.
Page 11

Table 6-1: Start-Up Meeting Agenda
Title Start-Up Meeting Agenda Sf 8
No. Item Action
1 Apologies
2 Minutes of Handover Meeting
3 Staff Appointments
4 Programme
5 Notices of Intent
op V1
6 Mobilisation/Offices etc.
7 Procedures/Requirements
7.1 Correspondence
C -
y
7.2 Work Methods
7.3
C
Work Inspection/Approval
7.4 Work in Hazardous Areas
C
7.5 Access to Security Areas
7.6 Route Fixing
Q
7.7 Drawings
7.8 Materials
7.9 Mech/Elect Equipment
7.10 Records
7.11 Additional Works
7.12 Work days
7.13 Claims
7.14 Monthly Progress Reports
7.15 Quality
7.16 Insurances
7.17 Special Requirements
8 Safety, Security and Welfare Obligations
9 Progress Meeting Schedule
10 Immediate Priorities
11 Next Meeting
Page 12

No Item Action
1 Minutes of Previous Meeting
2 Progress
3 Progress vs. Programme
4 Programme
5 Site Safety, Security and Welfare
6 Staff Matters
op V1
7 Labour and Material Returns
8 Working Hours
9
C -
Coordination with other works
y
10 Sub-Contractors
C
11 Work Methods
C
12 Site Instructions
Q
13 Financial
14 Handover
15 Any other Business
16 Next Meeting
Attachments:
Page 13

7. MAINTENANCE ENGINEER (SECTION 01049)

7.1 Part 1 General
7.1.1 Maintenance Engineer
A. The Contractor shall employ and pay for services of a number of persons,
technically qualified and administratively experienced in field of maintenance for all
type of assets required for this Project, for the duration of the contracted work.
B. The Contractor shall submit duties and powers delegated to Contract Manager.
op V1
7.1.2 Submittals for Review
A. The Contractor shall submit the curriculum vitae of Maintenance Engineer(s) for
review and approval by DMAT.
B.
C -
The Contractor shall submit details and powers delegated to Maintenance
y
Engineer.
C
7.1.3 Observation of Work
C
A. Maintenance Engineer shall review the activities in compliance with Contract
Documents.
Q
B. He shall maintain a list of observed deficiencies and defects and promptly submit.
7.1.4 Documentation
Maintenance Engineer shall:
A. Observe and maintain a record of tests and shall record:
1. Specification section number, Product, and name of Subcontractor /
Supplier.
2. Name of testing agency and name of inspector.
3. Name of manufacturer's representative present.
4. Date, time, and duration of tests.
5. Type of test, and results.
6. Retesting required.
B. Assemble background documentation for dispute and claim settlement by

Engineer and Department.
7.1.5 Mains Electricity & Liaison with ADWEA

Electrical Maintenance Engineer shall:
A. Be acquainted with ADWEA regulations and requirements.
B. Liaise with ADWEA to determine the power supply required and all other pertinent
information, as required, and make all necessary arrangements for its connection.
Page 14

C. Arrange through written request for ADWEA to undertake the testing and
inspection necessary in order that the electricity supplies may be connected when
required. Bear the costs of this.
7.1.6 Equipment Start-Up

A. Verify utilities, connections, and controls are complete and equipment is in
operable condition as required by Specification
B. Observe start-up and adjustments, test run, record time and date of start-up, and
results.
op V1
C. Observe equipment demonstrations to DMAT; record times and additional
information required for operation and maintenance manuals.
7.1.7 Inspection and Acceptance of Equipment

C -
y
C
A. Prior to inspection, verify that equipment is tested, operational, clean, and ready
for operation.
C
B. Assist Engineer with review. Prepare list of items to be completed and corrected.
Q
7.2 Part 2 Products

END OF SECTION
Page 15

8. FIELD ENGINEERING (SECTION 01050)

8.1 Part 1 General
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Project Record Documents.
Section 17100 - GIS standards
Section 17110 - CAD standards
8.1.2 Quality Assurance
op V1
A The Contractor shall maintain in good working order at all times the instruments
provided by him for the setting out of the Works, and shall make such instruments
available to the Engineer as required for checking out or taking measurements.
B.
C -
The Contractor shall employ a Surveyor acceptable to Engineer and Department,
y
C
to perform survey work.
C. The Contractor shall set out the Works using methods and necessary instruments
C
described in BS 5606 "Code of Practice for Accuracy in Building" Section 5.

Q
A. The Contractor shall submit name of Surveyor before starting survey work.
B. The Contractor shall prepare a plan detailing the location of the Bench Marks and
keep up to date throughout the period of the Contract. Reproducible copies of the
plan so prepared shall be supplied to the Engineer as and when he may require.
C. The Contractor shall plot site levels on drawings and after they have been signed
by both the Engineer and the Contractor, the Contractor shall submit the original
with three (3) copies to the Engineer.
D. On request, the Contractor shall submit documentation verifying accuracy of
survey work.
E. The Contractor shall confirm the elevations and locations of the Work are in
conformance with Contract Documents.
8.1.4 Project Record Documents

A. The Contractor shall maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey
work as it progresses.
B. The Contractor shall submit Record Documents under provisions of Section
01700.
8.1.5 Examination
A. The Contractor shall verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work
and check periodically and whenever required.
Page 16
B. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Engineer any discrepancies discovered.
C. Before the Works or any part thereof are commenced, the Contractor and the
Engineer shall together make a complete survey and take levels of the Site and
agree all particulars upon which setting out of the Works shall be based, including
existing systems, buildings and services.
D. Such levels shall be related to the Bench Marks as aforesaid and plotted by the
Contractor and, after agreement of the Drawings, shall be signed by the Engineer
and the Contractor, and shall form, the basis of setting out of the Works.
E. Failing such surveys and agreements being prepared and/or signed by the
Contractor, the surveys of the Engineer shall be final and binding upon both
op V1
parties.
F. The Engineer reserves the right to order levels to be taken at any time considered
necessary for the full and proper supervision and measurement of the Works.
C -
8.1.6 Survey Reference Points
y
A.
C
Site Bench Marks shall be accurately and safely established, maintained and
cleared away upon completion of the Works all to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
C
The Engineer will indicate the position and value of Bench Marks near the Works.
Such Bench Marks shall be related to the nearest permanent Bench Mark fixed by
the Municipality.
Q
B. The Contractor shall control that the datum for survey is that established by
DMAT.
C. The Contractor shall protect the survey control points prior to starting site work; he
shall preserve permanent reference points during field work.
D. The Contractor shall promptly report to Engineer the loss or destruction of any
reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other
reasons.
E. The Contractor shall replace dislocated survey control points based on original
survey control. He shall not make changes without prior written notice to
Engineer.
8.1.7 Survey Requirements

A. The Contractor shall provide field engineering services. He shall utilize recognized
engineering survey practices.
B. The Contractor shall establish at approved locations, permanent bench marks on
site using AISI 316 S31 stainless steel plates, referenced to established control
points. He shall record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on project
record documents.
C. Any delay or loss resulting from errors in the setting out of the Works will be not
accepted.
Page 17
D. The Contractor shall provide all assistance which the Engineer may require for
checking setting out and for taking measurements of the Works, including labour,
equipment and transportation.
E. Setting out shall be approved by the Engineer before commencing the Works, but
such approval shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the
correct execution of the Work.
8.1.8 Surveys for Measurement and Payment

A. The Contractor shall perform surveys to determine quantities of work, including
control surveys to establish measurement reference lines. He shall notify to the
Engineer prior to starting work.
op V1
B. The Contractor shall verify all measurements for their correctness.
C. Contractor's Engineer Responsibilities: Sign surveyor's field notes or keep
duplicate field notes.
C -
y
8.1.9 Non-Compliance
C
A. Work which fails to meet the specified levels of accuracy must not be rectified
C
without approval.
B. The Contractor shall propose rectification measures for parts of the Works which
Q
do not meet the specified levels of accuracy to the Engineer for approval.
Rectification measures necessitating removal and replacement of sub-standard
work may not be approved. The Contractor shall pay all costs and losses
associated with rectification of sub-standard work.
8.2 Part 2 Products

END OF SECTION
Page 18
9. REFERENCE STANDARDS (SECTION 01090)

9.1 Part 1 General
Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment

A. The Contractor shall comply with all codes, regulations, specifications and
standards referred to throughout the contract documents and listed herein.
op V1
B. All references to codes, regulations, specifications and standards referred to in the
Contract documents and drawings shall, unless stated otherwise, mean the latest
edition, amendment or revision of such reference standard in effect as of date of
submission of these bid documents by the Tenderers.
C -
y
C.
C
Obtain an original copy of the latest edition of all codes, regulations, standards
and technical literature referred to in the Contract documents and the same shall
be kept on the project site, properly indexed and maintained in good order and
C
readily available to DMAT at all times. Upon completion of the works the said
codes, standards, etc., shall be handed over to DMAT.
Q
D. Present an affidavit from the manufacturer certifying that the product complies with
the specified section. Where requested or specified, submit supporting test data to
substantiate compliance in conformity with specified standards with a statement
from the manufacturer that non-conformities have been observed.
E. Where a reference standard referred to herein is in the form of a recommendation
or suggestion, such recommendation or suggestion shall be deemed to be
mandatory under this Contract unless conflicting with the particular specifications
contained herein.
F. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade or other consensus
standards, the Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the standard,
except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable
codes.
G. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract documents, the
Contractor shall request clarification from DMAT before proceeding.
H. References to published standards shall be construed as reference to a
recognised equivalent standard.
I. Neither the contractual relationship, duties nor responsibilities of the parties in
Contract nor those of DMAT shall be altered by the Contract documents by
mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.
Page 19

9.1.3 Purpose of Standards

A. Equipment, plant, materials, installation and systems, etc. proposed to be used in
the projects shall be strictly in compliance with all codes, regulations,
specifications and standards.
B. Standards shall be treated as a documented agreement with respect to the
technical specifications and shall be followed throughout as rules and guidelines to
ensure that the equipment, plant, materials, installation and systems, etc. are in
accordance with the requirements of the specification.
C. To ensure that the proposed equipment, plant, materials, installation and systems,
etc. have been carefully examined by the Contractor that ensure product full
op V1
compliance with the those requirements specified in the basic standards, product
manufacturing standard, functional standards and quality standards.
9.1.4 International Standards

C -
y
A. All equipment, plant, materials, systems, components, workmanship, working
C
practices, procedures and all other items and activities shall comply with the
quoted standards and regulations in this Section of this specification and as
C
qualified and amended throughout this specification.
B. This Section covers the main standards and codes of practice that cover the large
Q
majority of the contract requirements. Some requirements will be covered by other

sections of the technical specifications.
C. Some requirements will not be covered by the above quoted standards, but
regardless of whether or not a particular standard is specified, all products and
services shall comply with any International ISO, BS EN, BS, ACI, PD and ASTM
covering such items, as a minimum, unless otherwise specified.
D. Unless otherwise stated, ISO shall take precedent over BS EN, which shall take
precedence over BS, which will take precedence over all remaining standards.
E. The following International Standards shall be used:
i. ISO International Organization for Standardization
ii. BS EN British Standards European Norm
iii. BS British Standards
iv. ACI American Concrete Institute
v. PD Published Documents
vi. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
Page 20

vii. AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation

Officials
viii. WIS Water Industry Specification
ix. DIN German Institute for Standardization
9.1.5 Local Regulations

A. The following Local Regulations shall be followed:
i. ADWEA Abu Dhabi Water Electricity Authority
op V1
ii. ADDC Abu Dhabi Distribution Company and other ADWEA Group
Companies
iii. ADM Abu Dhabi Municipality
C -
y
iv.
C
FEA Federal Environmental Agency
C
v. ETISALAT The Emirates Telecommunication Corporation Ltd.
vi. DCD The General Directorate of Civil Defense

Q
9.1.6 ISO Standards

Table 9-1: ISO Standards
No. STANDARD DESCRIPTION
1 ISO 161 Thermoplastics pipes for the conveyance of fluids.

Nominal outside diameters and nominal pressures.
2 ISO 527 Plastics. Determination of tensile properties.
3 ISO 527-5 Plastics -- Determination of tensile properties – Part 5:

Test conditions for unidirectional fiber-reinforced
plastic composites.
4 ISO 1083 Spheroidal graphite cast iron - classification.
5 ISO 1133 Plastics. Determination of the melt mass-flow rate

(MFR) and the melt volume-flow rate (MVR) of
thermoplastics.
Page 21

6 ISO 1167 Thermoplastics pipes, fittings and assemblies for the

conveyance of fluids. Determination of resistance to
internal pressure.
7 ISO 1183-3 Plastics. Methods for determining the density of non-

cellular plastics. Gas pycnometer method.
8 ISO 1461 Hot dipped galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and
op V1
steel particles. Specifications and test methods.
9 ISO 2045 Single sockets for Unplasticised polyvinyl chloride
C - (PVC-u) and chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (PVC-c)
y
C pressure pipes with elastic sealing ring type joints.
Minimum depths of engagement.
C
10 ISO 2048 Double socket fittings for Unplasticised polyvinyl
Q
chloride (PVC-u) pressure pipes with elastic sealing

ring type joints. Minimum depths of engagement.
11 ISO 2505 Thermoplastics pipes. Longitudinal reversion.
12 ISO 2505-1 Thermoplastic pipes. Longitudinal reversion.

Determination methods.
13 ISO 2505-2 Thermoplastic pipes. Longitudinal reversion.

Determination parameters.
14 ISO 2507 Unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (PVC-u) pipes and

fittings. Vicat softening temperature. Test methods
and specification.
15 ISO 2560 Welding consumables. Covered electrodes for

manual metal arc welding of non-alloy and fine grain
steels. Classification.
16 ISO 3126 Plastic pipes. Measurement of dimensions wall

thickness table.
Page 22

17 ISO 3127 Thermoplastic pipes. Determination of resistance to

external blows. Round the clock method.
18 ISO 4065 Thermoplastic pipes. Universal wall thickness table.
19 ISO 4427 Polyethylene (PE) pipes for water supply.

Specifications.
op V1
20 ISO 4624 Paints and varnishes. Pull off test for adhesion.
21 ISO 4633 Joint rings for water supply, drainage and sewerage
pipelines: Specification for materials.
C -
y
22
C
ISO 6964 Polyolefin pipes and fittings. Determination of carbon
black content by calcination or pyrolysis Test method
C
and basic specification.
Q
23 ISO 8180 Ductile iron pipelines. Polyethylene sleeving for site

application.
24 ISO 9000 Quality management systems.
25 ISO 9864 Geosynthetics – Test method for the determination of

mass per unit area of geotextiles and geotextile
related products.
26 ISO 9934-1 Nondestructive testing. Magnetic particle testing.

General principles.
27 ISO 10319 Geotextiles. Wide-width tensile test.
28 ISO 11058 Geotextiles and geotextile related products –

Determination of water permeability characteristics
normal to the plane without load.
29 ISO 11600 Building Construction. Jointing Products.

Classification and requirements for sealants.
Page 23

30 ISO 11922 Thermoplastic pipes for the conveyance of fluids.

Dimensions and tolerances.
31 ISO 11922-1 Thermoplastic pipes for the conveyance of fluids.
32 ISO 12236 Geotextiles and geotextile related products. Static

puncture test (CBR test).
op V1
33 ISO 12956 Geotextiles and geotextile related products.
Determination of the characteristic opening size.
34
C -
ISO 13479 Polyolefin pipes for conveyance of fluids –
y
C Determination of resistance to crack propagation Test
method for slow crack growth on notched pipes.
C
35 ISO 13967 Thermoplastics fittings. Determination of ring
Q
stiffness.
36 ISO 15607 Specification and qualification of welding procedures

for metallic materials. General rules’;
37 ISO 15609-1 Specification and qualification of welding procedures

for metallic materials. Welding procedure
specification. Arc welding.
38 ISO 18553 Method for assessment of the degree of pigment or

carbon black dispersion in polyolefin pipes, fittings
and compounds.
9.1.7 BS EN ISO Standards

Table 9-2: BS EN ISO Standards
1 BS EN ISO Thermoplastics pipes. Determination of creep ratio.

9967
Page 24

2 BS EN ISO Plastics. Determination of resistance to environmental

20088-3 stress cracking (ESC). Bent strip method.
9.1.8 BS EN Standards
Table 9-3: BS EN Standards
op V1
1 BS EN 124 Gully tops and manhole tops for vehicular and
pedestrian areas. Design requirements, type testing,
marking, quality control.
2
C -
BS EN 197-1 Cement. Composition, specifications and conformity
y
C criteria for common cements.
C
3 BS EN 206-1 Concrete. Specification, performance, production and
conformity.
Q
4 BS EN 287-1 Qualification test of welders. Fusion welding. Steels.
5 BS EN 440 Welding consumables. Wire electrodes and deposits

for gas shielded metal arc welding of non-alloy and
fine grain steels. Classification.
6 BS EN 450 Fly ash for concrete. Definition, requirements and

quality control.
7 BS EN 473 Nondestructive testing. Qualification and certification

of NDT personnel. General principles.
8 BS EN 480 Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout.
9 BS EN 480-1 Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Test

methods. Reference concrete and reference mortar
for testing.
10 BS EN 480-2 Admixtures for concrete mortar and grout. Test

methods. Determination of setting time.
Page 25


methods. Determination of bleeding of concrete.

methods. Determination of capillary absorption.

methods. Infrared analysis.
op V1
methods. Determination of the conventional dry
C - material content.
y
15
C
BS EN 480-10 Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Test
C
methods. Determination of water soluble chloride
content.
Q
16 BS EN 480 11 Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Test

methods. Determinations of air void characteristics in
hardened concrete.

methods. Determination of the alkali content of
admixtures.
18 BS EN 545 Ductile iron pipes, fittings and their joints for water
pipelines. Requirements and test methods.
19 BS EN 598 Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints

for sewerage applications. Requirements and test
methods.
20 BS EN 681 Elastomeric seals. Material requirements for pipe joint

seals used in water and drainage applications.
21 BS EN 681-1 Elastomeric seals – Materials requirements for pipe

joint seals used in water and drainage applications.
Page 26

Vulcanized rubber.
22 BS EN 727 Plastics piping and ducting systems. Thermoplastics

pipes and fittings. Determination of Vicat softening
temperature.
23 BS EN 728 Plastics piping and ducting systems. Polyolefin pipes
op V1
and fittings. Determination of oxidation induction time.
24 BS EN 744 Plastics piping and ducting systems. Thermoplastic

pipes. Test method for resistance to external blows by
C -
y
the round-the-clock method.
C
25 BS EN 771-2 Specification for masonry units. Aggregate concrete
C
masonry units (dense and light weight aggregates).
Q
26 BS EN 772-1 Methods of tests for masonry units. Determination of

compressive strength.
27 BS EN 933-1 Tests for geometrical properties of aggregates.

Determination of particle size distribution. Sieving
method.

Determination of particle size distribution. Test sieves,
nominal size of apertures.

Determination of shell content. Percentage of shells in
coarse aggregates.
30 BS EN 970 Nondestructive examination of fusion welds. Visual

examination.
31 BS EN 1011 Welding. Recommendations for welding of metallic

materials.
Page 27

32 BS EN 1053 Plastics piping systems. Thermoplastics piping

systems for non-pressure applications. Test methods
for water tightness.
33 BS EN 1092-2 Flanges and their joints. Circular flanges for pipes,

valves, fittings and accessories, PN designated. Cast
iron flanges.
op V1
34 BS EN 1339 Concrete paving flags. Requirements and test
methods.
35
C -
BS EN 1367-4 Tests for thermal and weathering properties of
y
C aggregates. Determination of drying shrinkage.
C
36 BS EN 1394 Plastic piping system Glass reinforced thermosetting
plastic (GRP) pipes. Determination of the apparent
Q
initial circumferential tensile strength
37 BS EN 1401-1 Plastics, piping system for not pressure underground

drainage and sewerage. Unplasticised
polyvinylchloride (PVC-u). Specification for pipes
fittings and the system
38 BS EN 1435 Nondestructive examination of welds. Radiographic

examination of welded joints.
39 BS EN 1437 Plastics piping systems. Piping systems for

underground drainage and sewerage. Test method for
resistance to combined temperature cycling and
external loading.
40 BS EN 1542 Products and systems for the protection and repair of

concrete structures. Test methods.
41 BS EN 1563 Founding spheroidal graphite cast iron
42 BS EN 1610 Construction and testing of drains and sewers.
Page 28

43 BS EN 1714 Nondestructive examination of welded joints.

Ultrasonic examination of welded joints.
44 BS EN 1744-1 Tests for chemical properties of aggregates. Chemical

analysis.
45 BS EN 1852-1 Plastics piping systems for non-pressure underground

drainage and sewerage -Polypropylene (PP).
op V1
46 BS EN 1916 Concrete pipes and fittings, unreinforced, steel fiber
and reinforced
C -
y
47 BS EN 1917 Concrete manholes and inspection chambers,
C unreinforced, steel fiber and reinforced.
C
48 BS EN 10088 Stainless Steel. List of Stainless steels
Q
49 BS EN 10088- Stainless steels. List of stainless steels.

1
50 BS EN 10210- Hot finished structural hollow sections of non-alloy

1-2 and fine grain structural steels.
51 BS EN 10210- Hot finished structural hollow sections of non-alloy

2 and fine grain structural steels. Tolerances,
dimensions and sectional properties.
52 BS EN 10244- Steel wire and wire products. Non-ferrous metallic

2 coatings on steel wire. Zinc or zinc alloy coatings.
53 BS EN 10255 Non-alloy steel tubes suitable for welding and

threading. Technical delivery conditions.
54 BS EN 10250- Open steel die forgings for general engineering

1 to-4 purposes.
55 BS EN 10296- Welded circular steel tubes for mechanical and

2 general engineering purposes. Technical delivery
Page 29

conditions. Stainless steel.
56 BS EN 12020- Aluminum and aluminum alloys. Extruded precision

1 profiles in alloys EN AW-6060 and EN AW 6063.
Technical conditions for inspection and delivery.
57 BS EN 12061 Plastic piping systems. Thermoplastics fittings. Test
op V1
method for impact resistance.
58 BS EN 12256 Plastic piping systems. Thermoplastic fittings. Test

method for mechanical strength or flexibility of
C -
y
fabricated fittings.
C
59 BS EN 12350- Testing fresh concrete. Slump Test.
C
2
Q
60 BS EN 12350- Testing fresh concrete. Density.

6
61 BS EN 12373- Aluminum and aluminum alloys. Anodizing. Method

1 for specifying decorative and protective anodic
oxidation coatings on aluminum.
62 BS EN 12390- Testing hardened concrete. Making and curing

2 specimens for strength tests.
63 BS EN 12390- Testing hardened concrete. Compressive strength of

3 test specimens.
64 BS EN 12390- Testing hardened concrete. Density of hardened

7 concrete.
65 BS EN 12390- Testing hardened concrete. Depth of penetration of

8 water under pressure.
66 BS EN 12504- Testing concrete in structures. Cored specimens.

1 Taking, examining and testing in compression.
Page 30

67 BS EN 12620 Aggregates for concrete.
68 BS EN 13101 Steps for underground man-entry chambers –

Requirements, marking, testing and evaluation of
conformity.
69 BS EN 13139 Aggregates for mortar.
op V1
70 BS EN 13369 Common rules for precast concrete products.
71 BS EN 13476 Plastics piping systems for non-pressure underground

drainage and sewerage. Structured-wall piping
C -
y
systems of Unplasticised poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U),
C polypropylene (PP) and polyethylene (PE)
C
72 BS EN 13566- Plastics piping systems for renovation of underground
1 non-pressure drainage and sewerage networks. Part
Q
1 General.
73 BS EN 13566- Plastics piping systems for renovation of underground

3 non-pressure drainage and sewerage networks. Part
3 Lining with close fit pipes.
74 BS EN 13689 Guidance on the classification and design of plastics

piping systems used for renovation.
75 BS EN 14020 Specification for textile glass rovings.
76 BS EN 14020- Reinforcements. Specification for textile glass rovings.

1 Designation.

2 Methods of test and general requirements.

3 Specific requirements.
79 BS EN 14091 Epoxy coating (heavy duty) of ductile iron fittings and
Page 31

accessories.
80 BS EN 14118 Specification for textile glass mats (chopped strand

and continuous filament mats).
81 BS EN 14118- Reinforcement. Specifications for textile glass mats

1 (chopped strand and continuous filament mats).
Designation.
op V1
82 BS EN 14118- Reinforcement. Specifications for textile glass mats
C - Methods of test and general requirements.
y
83
C
BS EN 14118- Reinforcement. Specifications for textile glass mats
C
Specific requirements.
Q
83 BS EN 14364 Plastics piping system for drainage and sewerage

with or without pressure. Glass reinforced-
thermosetting plastics (GRP) based on unsaturated
polyester resin (UP). Specifications for pipes and
fittings.
84 BS EN 14399 High-strength structural bolting assemblies for

preloading.
9.1.9 BS Standards
Table 9-4: BS Standards
1 BS 4-1 Structural steel sections. Specification for hot rolled

sections.
2 BS 410 Test sieves.
Page 32

3 BS 812-105.1 Testing aggregates. Methods for determination of

particle shape. Flakiness index.
4 BS 812-105.2 Testing aggregates. Methods for determination of

particle shape. Elongation index of coarse aggregate.
5 BS 812-109 Testing aggregates. Methods for determination of

moisture content.
6 BS 812-112 Testing aggregates. Method for determination of
op V1
aggregate impact value.
7 BS 1377 Methods of test for soils for civil engineering
C - purposes.
y
8
C
BS 1722-10 Fences. Specification for anti-intruder fences in chain
C
link and welded mesh.
9 BS 1881-124 Testing concrete. Method for analysis of hardened

Q
concrete.
10 BS 3148 Methods of test for water for making concrete.
11 BS 3396 Woven glass fiber fabrics for plastics reinforcement.
12 BS 3532 Method of specifying unsaturated polyester resin

systems.
13 BS 3837-1 Expanded polystyrene boards. Boards and blocks

manufactured from expandable beads. Requirements
and test methods.
14 BS 3892-1 Pulverized-fuel ash. Specification for pulverized- fuel

ash for use with Portland cement.
15 BS 4027 Specification for sulfate-resisting Portland cement.
16 BS 4102 Specification for steel wire for general fencing

purposes.
Page 33

17 BS 4190 ISO metric black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts.

Specification.
18 BS 4395 Specification for high strength friction grip bolts and

associated nuts and washers for structural
engineering.
19 BS 4449 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete. Wieldable

reinforcing steel. Bar, coil and decoiled product.
op V1
Specification.
20 BS 4483 Steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete.

Specification.
C -
y
21
C
BS 4550-0 Methods of testing cement. General introduction.
C
22 BS 4550-3.1 Methods of testing cement. Physical tests.
Introduction.
Q
23 BS 4550-3.4 Methods of testing cement. Physical tests. Strength

tests.
24 BS 4550-3.8 Methods of testing cement. Physical tests. Test for

heat of hydration.
25 BS 4550-6 Methods of testing cement. Standard sand for mortar

cubes.
26 BS 4551 Mortar. Methods of test for mortar. Chemical analysis

and physical testing.
27 BS 4549-1 Guide to quality control requirements for reinforced

plastics moldings. Guide to the preparation of a
scheme to control the quality of glass reinforced
polyester moldings.
28 BS 4592 Industrial type flooring, walkways and stair treads.
Page 34

29 BS 4652 Specification for zinc rich priming paint (organic

media).
30 BS 5228-1 Code of practice for basic information and procedures

for noise control.
31 BS 5228-2 Guide for noise control legislation for construction and

demolition, including road construction and
maintenance.
op V1
32 BS 5395 Stairs, ladders and walkways.
33 BS 5400-2 Steel, concrete and composite bridges. Specification
C - for loads.
y
C
34 BS 5531 Code of practice for safety in erecting structural
C
frames.
35 BS 5834-2 Surface boxes, guards and underground chambers

Q
for gas and waterworks purposes. Specification for

small surface boxes.
36 BS 5911-1 Concrete pipes and ancillary concrete products.

Specification for unreinforced concrete pipes
(including jacking pipes) with flexible joints.
37 BS 5930 Code of practice for site investigations.
38 BS 5950 Structural use of steelwork in building.
39 BS 5975 Code of practice for falsework.
40 BS 6031 Code of practice for earthworks.
41 BS 6164 Code of practice for safety in tunneling in the

construction industry.
42 BS 6319-2 Testing of resin and polymer/cement compositions for

use in construction. Method for measurement of
Page 35

compressive strength.

use in construction. Methods for measurement of
modulus of elasticity in flexure and flexural strength.

use in construction. Method for measurement of
tensile strength.
op V1
45 BS 6398 Specification for bitumen damp proof courses for
masonry.
46 BS 6399
C - Loading for buildings.
y
C
47 BS 6699 Specification for ground granulated blast furnace slag
C
for use with Portland cement.
48 BS 6744 Stainless steel bars for the reinforcement of and use

Q
in concrete. Requirements and test methods.
49 BS 6906-3 Methods of test for geotextiles. Determination of water

flow normal to the plane of the geotextile under a
constant head.
50 BS 7123 Specification for metal arc welding of steel for

concrete reinforcement.
51 BS 8004 Code of practice for foundations.
52 BS 8007 Code of practice for design of concrete structures for

retaining aqueous liquids.
53 BS 8008 Safety precautions and procedures for the

construction and descent of machine-bored shafts for
piling and other purposes.
54 BS 8217 Reinforced bitumen membranes for roofing. Code of

practice.
Page 36

55 BS 8666 Scheduling, dimensioning, bending and cutting of

steel reinforcement for concrete. Specification.
56 BS 10025 Hot rolled products of structural steels.
9.1.10 ACI Standards

Table 9-5: ACI Standards
op V1
1 ACI 117-06 Specifications for tolerances for concrete construction
and materials and commentary.
C -
y
2 ACI 305R Hot weather concreting.
C
3 ACI 347-04 Guide to formwork for concrete.
C
4 ACI 506 Guide to shotcrete.
Q
5 ACI 506.2 Specification for shotcrete.
6 ACI 506.3 Guide to certification of shotcrete nozzle men.
7 ACI 506.4 Guide for the evaluation of shotcrete.
8 ACI 548.1 Guide for the use of polymers in concrete.
9.1.11 PD Standards
Table 9-6: PD Standards
1 PD 970 Wrought steels for mechanical and allied engineering

purposes. Requirements for carbon, carbon
manganese and alloy hot worked or cold finished
steels.
9.1.12 ASTM Standards
Page 37

Table 9-7: ASTM Standards
1 ASTM A252 Standard specification for welded and seamless steel

pipe piles.
2 ASTM A775 Standard specification for epoxy-coated reinforcing

steel bars.
op V1
3 ASTM B584 Standard specification for copper alloy sand castings
for general applications.
4 ASTM C76 Standard specification for reinforced concrete culvert,

C -
y
storm drain and sewer pipe.
C
5 ASTM C88 Standard test method for soundness of aggregates by
C
use of sodium sulfate or magnesium sulfate.
Q
6 ASTM C123 Standard test method for lightweight particles in

aggregate.
7 ASTM C127 Standard test method for density, relative density

(specific gravity) and absorption of coarse aggregate.
8 ASTM C128 Standard test method for density, relative density

(specific gravity) and absorption of fine aggregate.
9 ASTM C131 Standard test method for resistance to degradation of

small size coarse aggregate by abrasion and impact
in the Los Angeles machine.
10 ASTM C138 Standard test method for density (unit weight), yield
and air content (gravimetric) of concrete.
11 ASTM C142 Standard test method for clay lumps and friable
particles in aggregates.
12 ASTM C173 Standard test method for air content of freshly mixed
concrete by the volumetric method.
Page 38

13 ASTM C227 Standard test method for Test for potential alkali
reactivity of cement-aggregate combinations. (Mortar
bar method).
14 ASTM C231 Standard test method for air content of freshly mixed
concrete by the pressure method.
15 ASTM C232 Standard test methods for bleeding of concrete.
op V1
16 ASTM C289 Standard test method for potential alkali-silica
reactivity of aggregates. (Chemical method).
C -
y
17 ASTM C309 Standard specification for liquid membrane forming
C compounds for curing concrete.
C
18 ASTM C361 Standard specification for reinforced concrete low
head pressure pipe.
Q
19 ASTM C497M Standard test methods for concrete pipe, manhole

sections, or tile. (Metric version).
20 ASTM C581 Standard practice for determining chemical resistance

of thermosetting resins used in glass fiber reinforced
structures intended for liquid service.
21 ASTM C881 Standard specification for epoxy resin base bonding

systems.
22 ASTM C1064 Standard test method for temperature of freshly mixed

hydraulic-cement concrete.
23 ASTM C1202 Standard test method for electrical indication of

concrete’s ability to resist chloride ion penetration.
24 ASTM C1260 Standard test method for potential alkali reactivity of

aggregates. (Mortar-bar method).
25 ASTM D36 Standard test method for softening point of bitumen
Page 39

(ring-and-ball apparatus).
26 ASTM D146 Standard test methods for sampling and testing

bitumen-saturated felts and woven fabrics for roofing
and waterproofing.
27 ASTM D412 Standard test method for vulcanized rubber and

thermoplastic rubbers and thermoplastic elastomers
op V1
tension.
28 ASTM D512 Standard test methods for chloride ion in water.
C -
y
29 ASTM D513 Standard test methods for total and dissolved carbon
C dioxide in water.
C
30 ASTM D516 Standard test method for sulfate in water.
Q
31 ASTM D543 Standard practices for evaluating the resistance of

plastics to chemical reagents.
32 ASTM D570 Standard test method for water absorption of plastics.
33 ASTM D624 Standard test method for tear strength of conventional

vulcanized rubber and thermoplastic elastomers.
34 ASTM D638 Standard test method for tensile properties of plastics.
35 ASTM D746 Standard test method for brittleness temperature of

plastics and elastomers by impact.
36 ASTM D747 Standard test method for apparent bending modulus

of plastics by means of a cantilever beam.
37 ASTM D790 Standard test methods for flexural properties of

unreinforced and reinforced plastics and electrical
insulating materials.
38 ASTM D991 Standard test method for rubber property. Volume

resistivity of electrically conductive and antistatic
Page 40

products.
39 ASTM D1238 Standard test method for melt flow rates of thermo-
plastics by extrusion plastometer.
40 ASTM D1248 Standard specification for polyethylene plastics

extrusion materials for wire and cable.
op V1
41 ASTM D1505 Standard test method for density of plastics by the
density-gradient technique.
42
C -
ASTM D1525 Standard test method for vicat softening temperature
y
C of plastics.
C
43 ASTM D1693 Standard test method for environmental stress-
cracking of ethylene plastics.
Q
44 ASTM D1751 Standard specification for preformed expansion joint

filler for concrete paving and structural construction.
45 ASTM D1784 Standard specification for rigid poly (vinyl chloride)

(PVC) compounds and chlorinated poly (vinyl
chloride) (CPVC) compounds.
46 ASTM D2122 Standard test method for determining dimensions of

thermosetting pipe and fittings.
47 ASTM D2152 Standard test method for adequacy of fusion of

extruded poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC) pipe and molded
fittings by acetone Immersion.
48 ASTM D2240 Standard test method for rubber property -Durometer

hardness.
49 ASTM D2290 Standard test method for apparent hoop tensile

strength of plastic or reinforced plastic pipe by split
disc method.
Page 41

50 ASTM D2412 Standard test method for determination of external

loading characteristics of plastic pipe by parallel-plate
loading.
51 ASTM D2583 Standard test method for indentation hardness of rigid

plastics by means of a Barcol impresser.
52 ASTM D2584 Standard test method for ignition loss of cured
op V1
reinforced resins.
53 ASTM D2665 Standard Specification for PVC plastic drain, waist
C - and vent pipe and fit.
y
54
C
ASTM D2924 Standard test method for external pressure resistance
of “fiberglass” (Glass fiber reinforced thermosetting
C
resin) pipe.
Q
55 ASTM D3262 Standard specification for “fiberglass” (Glass fiber

reinforced thermosetting resin) sewer pipe.
56 ASTM D4073 Standard test method for tensile-tear strength of

bituminous roofing membranes.
57 ASTM D4161 Standard specification for “fiberglass” (Glass fiber

reinforced thermosetting resin) pipe joints using
flexible elastomeric seals.
58 ASTM D2837 Standard test method for obtaining hydrostatic design

basis for thermoplastic pipe materials or pressure
design basis for thermostatic pipe products.
59 ASTM D3350 Standard specification for polyethylene plastics pipe

and fittings materials.
60 ASTM D4703 Standard practice for compression molding

thermoplastic materials into test specimens, plaques
or sheets.
Page 42

61 ASTM E84 Standard test method for surface burning

characteristics of building materials.
62 ASTM F585 Standard practice for insertion of flexible polyethylene

pipe into existing sewers.
63 ASTM F714 Standard specification for polyethylene (PE) plastic

pipe (SDR-PR) based on outside diameter.
op V1
64 ASTM F1055 Standard specification for electrofusion type
polyethylene fittings for outside diameter controlled
C - polyethylene pipe and tubing.
y
65
C
ASTM F1216 Standard practice for rehabilitation of existing
C
pipelines and conduits by the inversion and curing of
a resin-impregnated tube.
Q
66 ASTM F1248 Standard test method for determination of

environmental stress crack resistance (ESCR) of
polyethylene pipe.
67 ASTM F1533 Standard specification for deformed polyethylene (PE)

liner.
68 ASTM F1606 Standard practice for rehabilitation of existing sewers

and conduits with deformed polyethylene (PE) liner
reinstated.
69 ASTM F1697 Standard specification for poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC)

profile strip for machine spiral-wound liner pipe
rehabilitation of existing sewers and conduits.
70 ASTM F1741 Standard practice for installation of machine spiral

wound poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC) liner pipe for
rehabilitation of existing sewers and conduits.
71 ASTM G14 Standard test method for impact resistance of pipeline
Page 43

coatings.
72 ASTM G42 Standard test method for cathodic disbanding of

pipeline coatings subjected to elevated temperatures.
9.1.13 AASHTO Standards

Table 9-8: AASHTO Standards
op V1
1 AASHTO HS20 44+100% - Surcharge loading.

C -
y
9.1.14
C
WIS Standards
C
Table 9-9: WIS Standards
Q
1 WIS 4-24-01 Specification for mechanical fittings and joints for

polyethylene pipes for nominal sizes 90 to 1000.
9.1.15 DIN Standards

Table 9-10: DIN Standards
1 DIN 4262-1 Pipes and fittings for subsoil drainage of trafficked

areas and underground engineering - Part 1: Pipes,
fittings and their joints made from PVC-U, PP and PE.
2 DIN 8074 Polyethylene (PE) – Pipes PE63, PE80, PE100, PE-

HD. Dimensions.
Page 44

9.1.16 UK Engineering Recommendations

Table 9-11: UK Engineering Recommendations
1 CIRIA R092M Reinforcement connector and anchorage methods.
2 CIRIA C511 Controlled permeability formwork.
op V1
END OF SECTION
C -
y
C
C
Q
Page 45

10. ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES

(SECTION 01120)
10.1 Part 1 General
Section 01555 - Site Facilities: Cleaning during Contract.
Section 01560 - Temporary Controls: existing utilities, temporary enclosures,
protection of installed work.
op V1
10.2 Part 2 Products
10.2.1 Products for Patching and Extending Work
A.
C -
New materials shall be as specified in product sections; the Contractor shall match
y
C
existing Products and work for patching and extending work with the approval of
the Engineer.
C
B. Type and quality of existing products shall be determined by inspecting and testing
Products where necessary, referring to existing Work as a standard.
Q

10.3.1 Examination
A. The Contractor shall verify that demolition is complete by the Engineer and areas
are ready for installation of new Work. Seek all approvals from the Engineer
before work commences.
B. Beginning of restoration Work means acceptance of existing conditions.
10.3.2 Preparation
A. The Contractor shall cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to
alterations and renovation Work. He shall replace and restore the items at
completion.
B. The Contractor shall remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, such as
rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete. He shall
replace materials as specified for finished Work.
C. The Contractor shall remove debris and abandoned items from area and from
concealed spaces.
D. The Contractor shall prepare surface and remove surface finishes to provide for
proper installation of new work and finishes.
E. The Contractor shall close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work
from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity.
Page 46
10.3.3 Installation
A. The Contractor shall coordinate work of alterations and renovations to expedite
completion.
B. The Contractor shall remove, cut, and patch Work in a manner to minimise
damage and to provide a means of restoring Products and finishes to specified
condition.
C. The Contractor shall refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated
locations, to specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent
finishes.
D. In addition to specified replacement the Contractor shall restore existing systems
op V1
to full operational condition.
E. The Contractor shall re-cover and refinish Work that exposes mechanical and
electrical work exposed accidentally during the work.
F.
C -
The Contractor shall install Products as specified in individual sections.
y
C
10.3.4 Transitions
C
A. Where new Work abuts or aligns with existing items, the Contractor shall perform
a smooth and even transition. He shall patch Work to match existing adjacent
Q
Work.
B. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new Work is not
possible, the Contractor shall terminate existing surface along a straight line at a
natural line of division and make recommendation to Engineer.
10.3.5 Adjustments
A. Where removal of partitions or walls results in adjacent spaces becoming one, the
Contractor shall rework floors, walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without
breaks, steps, or bulkheads.
B. Where a change of plane of greater than specified tolerance occurs, the
Contractor shall submit recommendation for providing a smooth transition for
Engineer review.
C. The Contractor shall trim existing doors as necessary to clear new floor finish.
Refinish trim as required.
D. The Contractor shall fit work at penetrations of surfaces as specified.
10.3.6 Repair of Damaged Surfaces

A. The Contractor shall patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are
damaged, lifted, discoloured, or showing other imperfections.
B. The Contractor shall repair substrate prior to patching finish.
Page 47
10.3.7 Finishes
A. The Contractor shall finish surfaces as specified in individual Product sections.
B. The Contractor shall finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over
entire area. When finish cannot be matched, he shall refinish entire surface to
nearest intersections.
10.3.8 Cleaning
A. In addition to cleaning specified in Section 01555, clean adjacent DMAT’s
occupied areas of work.
op V1
END OF SECTION
C -
y
C
C
Q
Page 48
11. SUBMITTALS (SECTION 01300)

11.1 Part 1 General
Section 01380 - Photographs.
Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturers' field services and reports.
op V1
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Contract Closeout submittals.
Section 17100 - GIS Standards.
Section 17110 - CAD Standards.
C -
y
11.1.2
C
Submittal Procedures
A. Within one week after signing the Agreement the Contractor shall submit a
C
schedule of all required submittals. It shall list the forecast date for submission of
each item by which all submittal shall be completed.
Q
B. The Division’s approved materials and manufacturers Data Base List is available
for review at the offices of the Engineer. It serves merely as guide and
information for “Form-A” submissions.
C. The Contractor shall however consider that materials and / or manufacturers

listed in the Division’s Data Base List are not approved for forever usage and may
require further test(s) if instructed by the Engineer and will not be automatically
re-approved.
D. Approvals are given subject to the material / workmanship being in compliance

with the Specifications and/or Standards.
E. In case of any conflicts or non-performance such approval will be revoked at any

time and the Contractor shall arrange for replacement, reconstruction at the
Contractor’s costs.
F. The Contractor shall allow a minimum of four weeks for the review of each
submittal and / or re-submittal by the Engineer or Division. However the
Contractor shall allow in his program for the period required by the Division /
Engineer to check submittal, inspection and testing that may be necessary for
assessing the quality of each material proposed. Large or multiple submittals may
require up to 45 calendar days.
G. All submittals shall be through the Contractor. Submittals are not acceptable
directly from Sub-Contractors, suppliers or manufacturers.
Page 49
H. Submittals shall be neatly bound and shall have an index listing the contents,
shall be dated, signed and sequentially numbered (e.g., first submittal: original
numbers plus (a) and repetitions shall receive (b), (c) etc.) with Company
letterhead individually for each submittal.
I. Drawing numbers and Specification Sections, articles and paragraphs to which

the submittal pertains shall be listed.
J. The manufacturer's name and address, trade or brand name, local supplier's
name and address, catalogue numbers and cuts, brochures, terms and
conditions of manufacturer's guarantee and warranty, other required information
shall be included to fully describe the item, and supplementary information as
op V1
may be required for approval. Where several types or models are contained the
Contractor shall delete non-applicable portions or specifically indicate which
portions are intended and applicable.
K. Submittals shall clearly indicate any deviation, substitution or variation from the
C -
y
contract specification and shall state the reason for the same. All corrections shall
C
be highlighted on the submittal / re-submittal to expedite review.
C
L. Unless otherwise specified, each submittal shall include one original and three
sets of copies.
Q
M. For material previously approved by the Division for DMAT projects use “Form-A”.
N. “Form-B” shall be used for new material.
O. All sections of the Forms (A & B) must be completed with typed characters and
copies of all the relevant portions of specifications, drawings, manufacturer’s
certifications, etc. must accompany each submittal.
P. Where sections of submittal are not applicable, the selection must be clearly
marked with N/A.
Q. The material proposed in submittals must be clear and accurate marked with
arrows or underlining and must show the manufacturer’s ordering code. Colour
marking is not permitted.
R. Certify by stamp and signature that review, approval, verification of products

required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of
information are in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract
Documents.
S. Delays to the works, resulting from incorrect and incomplete submittals, are the
sole responsibility of the Contractor and no claim will be entertained in this
respect.
T. The Contractor shall identify and immediately report to the Engineer any
variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations that may
be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.
Page 50
U. The Contractor shall distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate and

as directed by the Engineer. Request parties to promptly report any inability to
comply with requirements.
V. Make all required corrections and resubmit the required number of corrected
submittals until approved. Direct specific attention in writing to revisions other
than the corrections called for on previous submittals.
W. Check submittals returned for correction and ascertain if the corrections result in
extra cost above that included under the Contract Documents. Give written notice
to the Division and the Engineer within five days if such extra cost results from
corrections. By failing to notify the Division/Engineer or by starting any Work
op V1
covered by a submittal, all claims for extra costs resulting from required
corrections are waived.
X. Whenever a variation causes a change to the information contained in previously

approved submittals, submit information and data corresponding to the changed
C -
y
requirements for approval.
C
Y. Revision submittals shall be submitted following the procedures required for
C
previously approved submittals.
Z. Claims for time extension and/or costs will not be entertained in case of any
Q
prolonged approval processes.
11.1.3 Site Assets

A. During Site Hand-over acknowledge and agree with the Engineer all assets at
each site by the provision of plans and data base asset information in accordance
with the specifications in this document.
B. Within 60 days of completion of Site Hand-over submit a Report which shall include,
but not be limited to, the following:
1. Site location plans

2. Site Asset Register as per Section 17100
3. Site Asset condition
4. Site Asset refurbishment / replacement proposals (Note: these maybe
submitted on a monthly basis not necessarily within the first 30 days.)
11.1.4 Staff Organization Chart

A. No later than two weeks from the start of the mobilisation period and before
commencement of major activity on Site, submit a full listing of proposed site staff
for the organisation, management and supervision of the Works. The list shall
include all personnel from Project Manager through to labour level and shall
amplify and reflect the details already given by the Contractor in the Bidder's
Schedule of Data submitted with his Bid and incorporated in the Contract. Such
Page 51
listing shall be supported by authenticated details of the qualifications and

experience of such personnel, for review and approval by the Division / Engineer.
B. Before being approved, the Division / Engineer will have the right to interview any
of the Contractor's proposed staff and notwithstanding their approval the Division
retains the right to instruct the removal of any person employed by the Contractor
in or about the Works, who, in their opinion misconducts himself, or is incompetent
or negligent in the proper performance of his duties, or whose employment is
otherwise considered to be undesirable.
11.1.5 Health and Safety Policy Document
op V1
A. Company Health and Safety Policy Document shall be submitted to the
Division/Engineer for approval during the mobilization period. Document to
include:
1. Company Health and Safety Policy Statement, signed by the authorized

C -
signatory of the Company.
y
2.
C
Details of the Company’s safety organization, including curriculum vitae of
Company safety officers.
C
3. Safety responsibilities of all Company staff.
4. Details of the Company health and safety procedures.
Q
5. Detailed information on how the Company intends to eliminate, control or

contain the main hazards/risks applicable to the Contract.
11.1.6 Product Data

A. Product Data for Review:
1. The Contractor shall submit Product data to the Engineer for checking for
conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in
the contract documents.
2. After review, the Contractor shall provide copies and distribute in
accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article above and for record
documents purposes described in Section 01700 - CONTRACT
CLOSEOUT.
B. Product Data for Information:
1. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer as contract administrator or to

the Division.
C. Product Data for Project Close-out:
1. The Contractor shall submit to the Division during and after project
completion.
D. The Contractor shall submit the number of copies which the Contractor requires,
plus two copies which will be retained by the Engineer.
Page 52
E. The Contractor shall mark each copy to identify applicable products, models,
options, and other data. He shall supplement manufacturers' standard data to
provide information specific to this Project.
F. The Contractor shall indicate Product utility and electrical characteristics, utility
connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional
equipment and appliances.
G. After review the Contractor shall distribute Product data in accordance with the
Submittal Procedures article above and provide copies for record documents
described in Section 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT.
op V1
11.1.7 Reports and Records
A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit Progress Reports in a form approved by
the Engineer in soft and hard copy. Work activities and procurement reports
should be referenced where relevant to the approved Contractor's Schedule.
C -
y
B Attendance records shall be submitted monthly or when requested in an agreed
C
format with the Engineer.
C
11.1.8 Correspondence
A. Except where more are required by the Contract, all correspondence to the
Q
Engineer shall be submitted as follows:
1. One original and three photocopies of transmittals and letters including

attachments/ enclosures.
2. All correspondence from the Contractor to the Engineer shall be submitted
on A4 size paper whenever possible. All correspondence shall clearly
indicate:
a) Contract Number
b) Title of the Project
c) Contractor's Name
d) Date and reference number of the correspondence.
11.1.9 Drawing Coordination Considerations

A. All generic terms shall be used on drawings as per latest Division format to ensure
nomenclature parallel with the Specification Section. In addition any interpretation
required may be referred Section 17110.
B. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings accompanied by approved transmittal

forms.
1. The format of the transmittal forms is to be agreed with the Engineer.

2. The submittal form includes the following, and it must be filled out using a
typewriter or word processor and a copy retained.
Contractor Job No. - Contractor's name and job number
Page 53
Submitted by - Name and signature of the Contractor's

employee responsible for Contractors review and
co-ordination.
Contract Work Title - Title of Contract, Contract number.

Transmittal Number - Transmittal numbers shall be consecutive for the
Works and shall incorporate the project element
identification system.
Date submitted - Date leaving Contractor's office
Sub-Contractor - Name of the firm preparing original documents.
op V1
Drawing - Number of the drawing. Title of the submission
(where possible) Date of the preparation and
date of the submission. Where a group of related
drawings is submitted as one unit, only one
transmittal form is required with a general
C - description of what is included. Drawings should
y
C then be numbered consecutively and have the
same date.
C
Submission No. - A, B, C etc. depending on previous submission
for same items (see resubmittal procedure).
Q
Specification - The Specification Section number where item is

specified (do not submit items from more than
one Specification Section on the same form).
Specification - Specific paragraph under which item is specified
Copies & Type - Number of copies submitted and type of material

submitted (sepia, print, brochure or sample, etc.)
Contractor's - Clearly note any exceptions or deviations from

the Contract Documents and state reasons for
them.
11.1.10 Working Drawings

A. Prior to the execution of any Works the Contractor shall prepare detailed working
drawings, as per Section 17110, required for the proper execution of the Works
and submit these with full explanatory notes for the Engineer’s approval.
B. The Contractor shall base the working drawing on the Contract Drawings and
include all necessary additional information and details to enable proper execution
of Works.
C. Working drawings shall also apply to all temporary works which shall include
where required such aspects as:
1. Traffic diversions
2. Dewatering systems and discharge routes
Page 54
3. Dealing with existing services

4. Concreting sequence
5. Pipeline test sections and methods
6. Formwork
7. Arrangements for Non-Disruptive Method of Pipeline Construction
8. Phasing of works
D. The Contractor shall submit 3 hard copies to the Engineer’s approval the below
listed drawings. One copy shall be returned to the Contractor stamped
“APPROVED” and/or marked up with any necessary alteration. Where any
op V1
modification or revision is required, the Contractor shall make the amendments
and resubmit the drawing as specified. After the drawing has been approved the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer 6 hard copies and one digital copy.
E. The Contractor shall submit:

C -
y
a. Layouts showing actual distances, offsets etc. of manholes, chambers, road
C
crossings, sections where works shall be carried out in the NDM method
b. Civil work drawings including structural analysis, formwork drawings, bar
C
bending schedules, supports, openings through walls and slabs, conduits etc.
c. Detailed layout of site installations, including those for NDM works
Q
d. Detailed drawings and calculations for trench supports.

e. Any other drawings and calculations required for the proper execution of the
works and required by the Engineer.
F. Structural Drawings shall be accompanied by the consent of the appropriate
Authorities (if so required under the regulations in force) and it shall be the
Contractor’s responsibility to obtain such permits.
G. Structural analysis shall be submitted to the Engineer after obtaining the approval of
the Municipality’s Structural Engineer.
11.1.11 Shop Drawings

A. Each shop drawing submittal shall be complete with respect to dimensions, design
criteria, materials, connections, bases, foundations, anchors, and the like, and
shall be accompanied by technical and performance data as necessary to fully
illustrate the information in the shop drawings.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Formwork
2. Structural steel and miscellaneous iron work
3. Architectural items
4. Mechanical, Electrical, Instrumentation and Contract work
5. Other submittals required by the Specification
Page 55
C. The Contractor shall manufacture, ship and deliver to site only items with shop
drawings approved.
D. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall include six prints of each shop
drawing with each submittal. Three sets of copies will be returned to the
Contractor marked to show the required corrections or approval.
11.1.12 Record Drawings

In addition to the requirements under "Shop Drawings" given above, full details of the
following shall be presented to the Engineer:
a. Position and extent of all support construction left in any excavation
op V1
b. Precise location of all services encountered
c. Soils encountered during all excavation work
d. Amendments to approved working drawings as a consequence of construction
C -
y
e. Measured depths of construction
f.
C
Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and
appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements
C
g. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in
construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work
Q
h. Field changes of dimension and detail

i. Details not on original Contract drawings.
11.1.13 Samples
A. Unless otherwise specified, each submittal shall include two sets of samples. One
set of approved samples and all disapproved samples will be returned. Samples
of value retained by the Division will be returned after completion of the Work if the
first transmittal for the sample requests its return. Approved samples of
manufactured items returned may be installed in the Work if the locations are
recorded and the samples bear temporary identification as such.
B. The Contractor shall submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic

characteristics of the Product, with integral parts and attachment devices. He shall
coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.
C. The Contractor shall include identification on each sample, with full Project
information.
D. Samples shall not be used for testing purposes unless specifically stated in the
specification section.
11.1.14 Design Data

A. Unless otherwise specified the Contractor shall submit 3 copies of Calculations
certified by the approved Qualified Designer under all sections for review and
approval by the Engineer.
Page 56
11.1.15 Equipment Data

A. The Contractor shall submit six copies, one of which must be an original, of
complete technical and catalog data for every item of mechanical and electrical
equipment and machinery to be incorporated in the Works, including components
as specified under Sections dealing with mechanical and electric equipment.
11.1.16 Test Reports

A. Test reports shall be submitted to the Engineer as contract administrator or to the
Division.
B. The Contractor shall submit test reports for the purpose of assessing conformance
op V1
with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract
documents.
11.1.17 Certificates
C -
y
A.
C
When specified in individual Specification Sections, the Contractor shall submit six
copies of manufacturer’s certificate(s) to the Engineer for review. The
manufacturer’s original certificate(s) should be included with this submittal.
C
B. The Contractor shall indicate what materials have been used in the manufacture of
a product and ensure that the said materials conform or exceed the requirements
Q
of the Contract Documents. He shall submit supporting references, dates,

affidavits and certificates as appropriate.
C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on source material or products,

but must be acceptable to Engineer.
D. The Contractor shall provide updated test certificates of relevant

materials/products supplied to site for comparison with contract submission.
11.1.18 Manufacturer's Instructions

A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for
delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, to
Engineer for delivery to Division.
B. The Contractor shall indicate special procedures, conditions requiring special

attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation.
C. Refer to Section 01400 - Quality Control, Manufacturers' Field Services.
11.1.19 Manufacturer's Field Reports

A. Manufacturer’s field reports shall be submitted to the Engineer as contract
administrator or to the Division.
B. The Contractor shall submit reports in duplicate within four weeks of observation
to Engineer for information.
Page 57
C. The Contractor shall submit the reports for the purpose of assessing conformance
with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract
documents.
11.1.20 Progress Reports

A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit Progress Reports described hereinafter
in a form approved by the Engineer. Work activities and procurement reports
should be referenced where relevant to the approved Contractor's Construction
Schedule.
1. Daily Report
op V1
i. The Contractor shall prepare for each working site separate Daily Reports in
the form approved by the Engineer. Reports shall be submitted daily, signed
by the Contractor’s Project Manager, to the Engineer’s Representative,
preferably at the end of the working hours but not later than the following day,
C -
for comments and signature. The original of these reports shall be kept at the
y
C
Engineer’s Site Office, one copy shall be returned to the Contractor after
review and signature of the Engineer’s representative.
ii. Daily reports shall record staff on site as number of engineers, foremen,
C
surveyor, skilled labourers (each category), unskilled labourer, number and
type of plant (separately stating working, idling, break-down), work executed
during the day, work tested and accepted, details of tests carried out,
Q
sufficient space shall provide for recording remarks of the Engineer’s

representative and the Contractor.
iii. Within 2 weeks after award of Contract the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer, for the Engineer’s approval, the form of daily reports he proposes to
use. Any amendment required by the Engineer shall be complied with.
2. Procurement Status Report

i. The Contractor shall submit a Procurement Status Report on weekly basis.
The report shall include a list of materials and items that have been procured
and a list of materials and items that have been delivered to Site. The report
shall also give references to all correspondence and transmittals between the
Contractor and the Engineer regarding approval of such materials and items.
3. Monthly Report
i. The Contractor shall report monthly progress to the Engineer on charts
showing actual work done superimposed on copies of his agreed program.
He shall state his proposals for improving progress should this be lacking in
any respect.
ii. The report shall be delivered to the Engineer within one week after the end of
each month. The report shall detail all equipment, its value and labor
employed on Site together with details of their location on the Works as well
as includes a list of all materials delivered to the Site.
iii. The Contractor shall provide a digital photographic record of the execution of
the Works by having color photographs taken at monthly intervals from such
points as the Engineer may direct from time to time. The number of such
photographs shall not exceed 15 per month. The Contractor shall supply 5
sets of hard copies, size 9x13 cm, fixed onto album sheets, captioned and
Page 58
dated.
iv. The monthly progress report shall include:
a. The updated program as specified.
b. A list of manpower detailing number of skilled laborer in each trade,
unskilled laborers, engineers, foremen, surveyors, technicians etc. actual
on site shall be printed against the originally foreseen personnel.
c. A list of equipment under construction and detailing works on Site, in
working condition, idling, under repair shall be plotted against the originally
scheduled equipment.
d. A monthly list of Material submittals containing:
1. Date of re-submittal(s)
op V1
2. Number of submittal
3. Short description of submittal
4. Date of submittal
5. Date of Engineer’s comments, if any.
C -
6. Date of Engineer’s comments on re-submittal(s), if any.
y
C
7. Date of Engineer’s approval.
8. Date of placing order (copy of order to be enclosed).
C
e. A monthly list of shop drawings containing:
1. Number of shop drawing submittal.
Q
2. Short description of shop drawing submittal.

3. Date of shop drawing submittal.
4. Date of Engineer’s comments, if any.
5. Date of shop drawing re-submittal(s).
6. Date of Engineer’s comments on re-submittal(s), if any.
7. Date of Engineer’s approval
f. Three hard copies of each report in a suitable scale plus a copy of the
updated program(s) / report(s) in digital format shall be submitted to the
Engineer at the end of each month.
11.1.21 Correspondence
A. Except where more are required by the Contract, all correspondence to the
Engineer shall be submitted as follows:
1. One original and three photocopies of transmittals and letters including

attachments/ enclosures to Engineer’s Main office / site office as instructed
by the Engineer
2. All correspondence from the Contractor to the Engineer shall be submitted
on A4 size paper whenever possible. All correspondence shall clearly
indicate:
a) Contract Number
b) Title of the Project
c) Contractor's Name
Page 59
d) Date and reference number of the correspondence.

op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Page 60
12. WORK PLANS (SECTION 01310)

12.1 Part 1 General
Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings.
Section 01300 - Submittals.
op V1
A. Planner: Contractor's personnel specializing in CPM planning to have specified
qualifications and experience in scheduling construction and O&M work of a
complexity comparable to the Project, and having use of computer facilities
capable of delivering a detailed graphic printout within 24 hours of request.
C -
y
12.1.3 Format
C
A. The Contractor shall prepare in Gantt chart form and critical path diagram.
C
B. The Contractor shall use the latest version of Primavera or equal computer
software approved by the Engineer.
Q
C. Sequence of Listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of Work.
D. Scale and Spacing: The Contractor shall provide space for notation and revisions.
E. Paper Size: to the approval of the Engineer.
F. The Contractor shall include scheduled conferences and meetings.
12.1.4 Programmed
A All programmes shall be prepared using the CPM technique on the latest edition of
Primavera.
B Work-breakdown structure of the programme is subject to the approval of the

Engineer.
C Breakdown of works in activities shall be such that the duration of each individual
activity does not exceed 21 calendar days.
D Programmes shall be prepared as follows:
a. Overall Programme
b. Detailed bi-monthly Programme
c. Handing over Programme
E The Contractor shall submit construction programmes within two weeks of signing
the Contract Agreement, with proposed network diagrams, Gantt charts, resource
Page 61
histogram, S-curve, mathematical analysis etc. along with written certification that
sub-contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed Programme.
F The Contractor shall provide one copy of the working programme in digital format
and 5 hard copies in approved format and size.
G The programme for civil works shall include in chronological order of the start, the
periods required for all applicable activities:
a. Mobilization
b. Obtaining approvals (incl. permission for night shifts)
c. Establishing benchmarks
op V1
d. Setting out of works
e. Recording existing services
f. Preparation record of drawings
g.
C -
Submittal and Approval dates
y
h.
C
Procurement and delivery of critical products.
i. Flow measurement
C
j. Sewer cleaning
k. Over pumping
Q
l. Rehabilitation
m. Excavation
n. Concreting
o. Dewatering
p. Excavation
q. Pipe laying, placing manholes, testing, finishing
r. Any other activities, which in the opinion of the Engineer are required for
working construction.
H The work programme shall illustrate complete the sequence of construction by

activity, identifying work of separate stages. Dates shall be provided for all
submittals and return of submittals, dates for procurement and delivery of critical
products, dates for installation and provisions for testing, meetings, conferences
and other off-site activities.
I If at any time it should appear to the Engineer that the actual progress of the
Works does not conform to the approved programme, the Contractor shall
produce, at the request of the Engineer, a revised programme showing the
modifications to the approved programme necessary to ensure completion of the
Works within the time for completion as defined in the Contract.
Page 62
J The approval by the Engineer of such programme or the furnishing of such

particulars shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his duties or responsibilities
under the Contract.
K Sub-Programmes for activities shall be prepared if required by the Engineer.
L The Contractor shall participate in review of Programmes, network diagrams and

analysis jointly with the Division and Engineer for each submittal.
M After review, the Contractor shall revise as necessary or as required by the

Division/Engineer as result of review, and resubmit within one week.
N The Engineer has the authority to instruct the Contractor to execute certain works
op V1
ahead of the programmed time and the Contractor shall comply with this
instruction and adjust his work program accordingly.
O For works in security areas, the Contractor shall take into account that all material,
C -
construction equipment, etc. may not be permitted to remain over night or during
y
C
holidays inside the security area but must be stored / parked outside.
12.1.5 Analysis
C
A The work programme shall tabulate each activity of detailed network diagrams,
using calendar dates, and identify for each activity:
Q
a. Activity number
b. Activity description
c. Duration of activity in work days
d. Earliest start date
e. Earliest finish date
f. Actual start date
g. Actual finish date
h. Latest start date
i. Latest finish date
j. Total and free float
k. Monetary value of activity
l. Earned value of activity
m. Manpower and plant utilization for each activity.
n. Percentage of activity completed
o. Responsibility
p. Work area code.
B The work programme shall be capable of compiling monetary value of

completed and partially completed activities, of accepting revised completion
dates, and re-computation of all dates and float.
Page 63
C Activities shall be listed in sorts or groups:
a. By preceding work item or event number from lowest to highest.

b. By amount of float, then in order of early start.
c. By responsibility in order of earliest possible start date.
d. In order of latest allowable start dates.
e. In order of latest allowable finish dates.
f. Listing of basic input data, which generates the report.
g. Listing of activities on the critical path.
12.1.6 Review and Evaluation
op V1
A. The Contractor shall participate in joint review and evaluation of network diagrams
and analysis with Engineer at each submittal.
B. The Contractor shall evaluate the project status to determine work behind
C -
y
Programme and work ahead of Programme.
C
C. After review, revise as necessary or as required by the Division/Engineer as result
C
of review, and resubmit within one week.
12.1.7 Updating Programs

Q
A. The Contractor shall maintain bi-monthly Programme at the end of each month.
B. The Contractor shall show Programmes recording actual start and finish dates of
completed activities.
C. The Contractor shall indicate the progress of each activity to date of revision, with
projected completion date of each activity. Annotate and update diagrams to
graphically depict current status of Work.
D. The Contractor shall identify activities modified since previous submittal, major
changes in Work, and other identifiable changes.
E. The Contractor shall show changes required to maintain Date of Completion.
F. The Contractor shall submit sorts required to support recommended changes.
G. The Contractor shall provide narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated
delays, and impact on the Program. The Contractor shall report corrective action
taken or proposed and its effect including the effects of changes on Programmes
of separate Contractors.
12.1.8 Distribution
A. The Contractor shall follow joint review, distribute copies of updated Programmes
to Subcontractors, suppliers, Engineer, Division and other concerned parties.
Page 64
B. The Contractor shall request recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems

anticipated by projections shown in Programmes.

12.3.1 Works Program
A. The Contractor shall execute works in accordance with latest approved
Programme.
op V1
END OF SECTION
C -
y
C
C
Q
Page 65
13. Photographs (SECTION 01380)

13.1 Part 1 General
Section 01019 - Contract Considerations: Dates for applications for payment.
Section 01300 - Submittals
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Project record documents.
op V1
13.1.2 Photography
A. The first series of photographs shall be taken prior to commencement of any work
and during the Initial Site Survey. The objective shall be to fully record details of
existing site conditions. Supply one (1) copy of digital photographs, on CD or DVD,
C -
to the Engineer, in for his approval. After approval the Contractor shall supply
y
C
three (3) CDs/DVD’s which shall be labelled and photographs catalogued. The
location of the photography shall be catalogued on plans in a format agreed with
C
the Engineer using a numbering system and date. These copies supplied shall
then be signed and dated by the Contractor and the Engineer and one set
returned to the Contractor.
Q
B. The Contractor shall provide photographs of the site and equipment / plant
throughout progress of Work produced by an experienced photographer,
acceptable to the Engineer.
C. The Contractor shall take photographs when deemed necessary but not limited to:
i. M&E Installations (including water features if directed by the Engineer)

ii. Valve Chambers
iii. Site Works
iv. Perimeter Fence / Walls
v. Structures
vi. Damage to property
vii. Existing Downstream irrigation items.
viii. And any items as instructed by the Engineer.
D. When submitting the Monthly Report, relevant photographs should be included as

appropriate. Photograph format, quality and quantity shall be agreed with the
Engineer.
Page 66

13.1.3 Digital File

A. The digital file shall be produced by a colour digital camera of a three (3) mega
pixel rating. The camera shall be approved by the Engineer and a sample
provided before photographs are submitted. The photograph shall be produced
using the highest picture quality setting in the cameras specification.
Image mode: colour

Minimum camera megapixel rating: 3 megapixels
DPI / resolution: highest
op V1
B. The Contractor shall catalogue and index the photographs in chronological
sequence. He shall provide a table of contents using file name. The format must
be agreed with the Engineer.
13.1.4 C -
Technique
y
A.
C
The Contractor shall provide factual presentation. Each photograph should aim to
describe one point.
C
B. The Contractor shall provide correct exposure and focus, high resolution and
sharpness, maximum depth of field, and minimum distortion.
Q
13.1.5 Views
A. The Contractor shall provide photographs from views at each specified time, until
Date of Substantial Completion.
B. The Contractor shall consult with the Engineer for instructions on views required.
C. The Contractor shall provide detailed examples using close up photographs if

necessary.
13.1.6 Submittals
A. Photographs shall be submitted using the following schedule;
i. Deliver photographs within thirty (30) days of site handover,

ii. with each monthly report and at
iii. Contract Closeout, and
iv. Before the commencement of any work order or maintenance.
v. And at any time as requested by the Engineer.
13.1.7 Copyright
A Photographs taken under the provision of this Section shall not be used for
commercial advertisement either of his organisation or of any materials or
Page 67

equipment used on the Works, without the written approval of the Division/
Engineer.
B The rights of all photographs remain with DMAT.

END OF SECTION
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Page 68

14. QUALITY CONTROL (SECTION 01400)

14.1 Part 1 General
Section 01090 - Reference Standards.
Section 01300 – Submittals.
Section 01410 - Testing Services.
op V1
Section 01411 - Inspection Services.
Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment: Requirements for material and product
quality.
C -
y
14.1.2
C
Quality Control Program
A. QC responsibilities lie with the Contractor with the exception of those additional
C
inspections, tests, and/or audits that may be required and will be conducted by the
Engineer.
Q
B. Before starting work the Contractor shall designate, in writing, the name,
qualifications, and experience of the manager of quality control, who, on approval
of the Engineer/Department shall have full authority to represent and act for the
Contractor on all quality related matters.
C. The Contractor shall develop, implement and maintain a Quality Control Program
(QCP) that assures equipment and material conformance to the applicable
requirements of every Section of the Specifications. Documentation shall include
organisation chart, plans, procedures, detailed work instructions and records.
D. The Contractor shall develop procedures as follows:
1. To implement the QCP, specify responsibilities assigned, and clearly

delineated individual job authorities.
2. To identify potential quality problems with work or materials, and
appropriate directions for solving and reporting such problems.
3. To establish preventive measures and maintaining effective QC practices
in all areas of the project.
4. To define the methods and responsibilities for the identification,
documentation, control, and processing of non-conforming equipment and
material.
E. The Quality Control Program shall be subject to evaluation by the Engineer.
F. The Contractor shall submit six copies of QCP to the Engineer no later than four
weeks from the start of the Contract.
Page 69
G. No work covered by the QCP shall start until acceptance has been obtained.
H. The Contractor shall submit prior to procurement of items and materials, a list of
suppliers and Sub-Contractors that shall include items to be supplied, item
numbers, specifications, inspection and test requirements, performance data,
anticipated inspection test dates, and other pertinent information as appropriate.
I. The Contractor shall submit inspection/test results, Certificates of Compliance,

and Certified Material Test Reports to the Engineer in accordance with Section
01300 prior to incorporation of the equipment or material into the Works.
J. The Contractor shall develop and maintain a receiving inspection log, which shall
op V1
contain the following information, as a minimum:
1. Purchase order number

2. Item number
3.
C -
Supplier name
y
4. Quantity
C
5. Item description
C
6. Reference to applicable contract requirements
7. Date received
Q
8. Heat number, serial number or other I.D., as applicable

9. Verification of receipt of all required supporting documentation
10. QC acceptance sign-off and date
11. Nonconformance number, if applicable.
14.1.3 Samples
A. After Contract award, the Contractor shall submit the specified samples to the
Engineer according to the Technical Specifications and Section 01300.
B. All items and materials must be approved by the Engineer and Department prior to
use on the Project.
C. The Contractor shall verify, through appropriate inspections and tests, that the
samples submitted meet the Specifications and provide inspection and test data
with the samples.
D. The review, comments, acceptance or approval will not relieve the Contractor of
his responsibility for completion of the Contract.
E. One sample will be returned to the Contractor and will be stamped in accordance
with Section 01300
F. Samples to be corrected shall be resubmitted in the same manner as the original

sample submittal.
Page 70
G. The Contractor shall ensure items/materials are available in quantities required to

complete the work. No change or substitution will be permitted after a sample has
been approved unless a request for change or substitution has been submitted in
writing to the Engineer and accepted in writing by the Engineer. In such case the
submittal process shall then be repeated.
H. Samples will only be considered if taken at random. The Contractor shall permit
Engineer’s Representative or a member of his staff to witness the selection of
samples. Inspection or tests of items or materials that fail may be sufficient cause
to terminate further inspections/tests of the same brand, make, or source of the
product.
op V1
14.1.4 Mock-Up
A. Mock-ups will be performed under provisions identified in this Division and
identified in the respective product specification sections.
B. C -
The Contractor shall assemble and erect specified items with specified
y
C
attachments, etc.
C. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work.

C
D. Where mock-up has been accepted, and is specified in product specification, the
Q
sections shall be removed; the Contractor shall remove facilities and clear area
when directed to do so.
14.1.5 Manufacturers' Field Services

A. When specified in individual specification sections, the Contractor shall require
material or Product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel
to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of
workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment as
applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.
B. The Contractor shall submit qualifications of observer to Engineer two weeks in

advance of required observations. Nomination of the observer is subject to
approval of Engineer and Division.
C. The Contractor shall report observations and site decisions or instructions given to
applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written
instructions.
D. Refer to Section 01300.
Page 71

14.2.1 Identification Mark-up
A. Manufacturers product identification marks and the conforming applicable
standards, third party product testing and certification marks shall be embossed in
each manufactured item arriving at site.

14.3.1 Examination
op V1
A. The Contractor shall verify that existing site conditions are acceptable for
subsequent Work. The starting of new Work means acceptance of existing
conditions.
B. The Contractor shall verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support
C -
y
or attachment of new Work being applied or attached.
C.
C
The Contractor shall examine and verify specific conditions described in individual
specification sections.
C
D. The Contractor shall verify that utility services are available, of the correct
characteristics, and in the correct locations.
Q

A. The Contractor shall monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers,
Products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of
specified quality.
B. The Contractor shall comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step
in sequence.
C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, the

Contractor shall request clarification from Engineer before proceeding.
D. The Contractor shall comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the
Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements
indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.
E. The Contractor shall perform Work by persons qualified to produce required and
specified quality.
F. The Contractor shall verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop
drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer.
G. The Contractor shall secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices
designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, or
disfigurement.
Page 72
14.3.3 Tolerances
A. The Contractor shall monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of
Products to produce acceptable Work. He shall not permit tolerances to
accumulate.
B. The Contractor shall comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should
manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, he shall request
clarification from Engineer before proceeding.
C. The Contractor shall adjust Products to appropriate dimensions; position before
securing Products in place.
op V1
14.3.4 Preparation
A. The Contractor shall follow instructions as outlined in each section and pertaining
to individual systems or materials.
B.
C -
It is not intended that these specifications will cover standards, practices and
y
C
techniques that are part of the expected working practices and disciplines normally
associated with any manufacture, technology, science, assembly or construction.
C
14.3.5 Non-conformance
A. The dispositions for non-conforming items/materials will be subject to approval by
Q
the Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall take prompt action to identify the basic causes of non-
conformances and the corrective action to prevent recurrence. Information
developed during construction, tests, and inspections, that support the
implementation of required improvements and corrections shall be used to support
the adequacy of corrective action taken.
C. The Contractor shall provide the following to prevent use of non-conforming
items/materials:
1. Identification of non-conformance
2. Documentation
3. Evaluations / recommendations
4. Separation / removal
5. Immediate notification to the Engineer
6. Cause of non-conformance
7. Proposed corrective action.
D. The Contractor shall maintain non-conformance log to enable tracking of all non-
conformances that contain the following information as a minimum:
1. Sequential reference number
2. Date issued
3. Originator
Page 73
4. Description of item deemed to be of non-conformance

5. Description of non-conformance
6. Recommended / final disposition
7. Date closed
8. QC Manager's initials
9. Remarks, as applicable.
E. The contractor's QC personnel shall have the authority to stop that portion of the
work which does not comply with the Contract requirements.
op V1
14.3.6 Audits
A. The Contractor shall perform programmed internal audits to verify that QC
procedures ensure total compliance with the Specifications and reference
standards.
C -
y
B. The Contractor shall maintain records of internal audits as quality records and
C
make them available to the Engineer upon request. He shall provide access to the
audit locations upon notice by the Engineer.
C
END OF SECTION
Q
Page 74
15. TESTING SERVICES (SECTION 01410)

15.1 Part 1 General
Section 01300 - Submittals: Manufacturer's certificates.
Section 01411 - Inspection Services.
op V1
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Project record documents.
15.1.2 References
A.
C -
ASTM C802 - Practice for Conducting an Inter-laboratory Test Program to
y
C
Determine the Precision of Test Methods for Construction.
B. ASTM C1021 - Practice for Laboratories Engaged in the Testing of Building

C
Sealants.
C. ASTM C1077 - Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete

Q
Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation.
D. ASTM C1093 - Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Unit Masonry.
E. ASTM D290 - Recommended Practice for Bituminous Mixing Plant Inspection.
F. ASTM D3740 - Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or

Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction.
G. ASTM D4561 - Practice for Quality Control Systems for an Inspection and Testing
Agency for Bituminous Paving Materials.
H. ASTM E329 - Practice for Use in the Evaluation of Inspection and Testing
Agencies as Used in Construction.
I. ASTM E543 - Practice for Determining the Qualification of Non-destructive Testing

Agencies.
J. ASTM E548 - Practice for Preparation of Criteria for Use in the Evaluation of
Testing Laboratories and Inspection Bodies.
K. ASTM E699 - Practice for Criteria for Evaluation of Agencies Involved in Testing,
Quality Assurance, and Evaluating Building Components in Accordance with Test
Methods Promulgated by ASTM Committee E6.
Page 75
15.1.3 Selection
A. The Contractor shall employ the services of an approved independent certified
material testing laboratory/laboratories to perform materials and quality control
testing of items incorporated into the works, or provides an on-site laboratory as
required or stipulated.
B. The Division reserves the right to employ the services of an independent testing
agency or laboratory to perform specified testing.
C. Employment of testing agency or laboratory in no way relieves the Contractor of

any obligation to perform Work in accordance with the requirements of the
op V1
Contract Documents.

A. The Contractor shall comply with requirements of the relevant Standard.
C -
y
B. Laboratory:
C
1. Approved by the Division.
C
2. Local to meet local order requirements.
3. Extend to meet NAMAS, NATA or other approved standards.
Q
C. The Contractor shall submit valid accreditation certificate.
D. Laboratory Staff: The Contractor shall maintain specialists covering relevant areas
of technology monitor, advice on technical and management matters and control
the work functions.
E. Testing Equipment: The Contractor shall calibrate the testing equipment at

reasonable intervals in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
He shall establish and maintain a system to control the accuracy at periodic

intervals of all equipment which includes provisions for the unique identification of
each piece of measuring and test equipment with a number or designation
permanently affixed to the device.
F. The Contractor shall perform inspections and tests to verify compliance with the
specified requirements with approved QC personnel
G. The Contractor shall use written test procedures that have been reviewed and
approved by the Engineer. The test procedures shall include the following as
minimum:
1. Prerequisites for the given test

2. Required tools, equipment, and instrumentation
3. Necessary environmental conditions
4. Acceptance criteria
5. Data to be recorded
Page 76
6. Test results reporting forms

7. Identification of items tested.
H. When methods of inspection and test are changed, revisions shall be reflected in
approved written procedures prior to implementation of the change on any work.
Adherence to methods and processes reflected in approved work procedures and
instruction shall be completed and continuous.
15.1.5 Contractor’s Submittals

A. Prior to start of Work, the Contractor shall submit testing laboratory name,
address, telephone number, and names of specialists and heads of Departments.
op V1
B. The Contractor shall submit copy of report of laboratory inspection and audit made
by qualified and registered Third Party Inspectorate or agencies.
15.1.6 Inspection Firm Responsibilities

C -
y
A. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor.
C
B. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Engineer and Contractor in
C
performance of services.
C. Perform specified sampling and testing of Products in accordance with specified

Q
standards.
D. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract

Documents.
E. Promptly notify the Engineer and the Contractor of observed irregularities or non-
conformance of work or products practices or materials at site, at the
manufacturers or supplier’s premises or during transportation.
F. Perform additional tests as required by the Engineer.
G. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings as required.
15.1.7 Inspection Reports

A. After each test, promptly Inspection Firms shall submit six copies of report to
Contractor for transmittal to the Division and Engineer.
B. Inspection Reports shall include:
1. Date issued.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name of inspector.
4. Date and time of sampling or inspection.
5. Identification of product and specifications section.
6. Location in the Project.
Page 77
7. Type of inspection or test.

8. Date of test.
9. Record observations, analysis results and conclusions.
10. Secure evidence or specimens along with photographs.
11. Conformance with Contract Documents.
C. When requested by Engineer, interpretation of test results shall be provided.
15.1.8 Limits on Testing Authority

A. The laboratory shall not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge the requirements of
op V1
Contract Documents.
B. The laboratory shall not approve any portion of the Work.
C. The laboratory shall not assume any duties of the Contractor.

C -
y
D.
C
The laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.
15.1.9 Contractor Responsibilities

C
A. The Contractor shall deliver the laboratory at designated location, adequate
numbers samples of materials or specimens which require testing. When
Q
stipulated or instructed (intra or extra specification) the Contractor shall ensure

that the Engineer accompanies the transport of material or specimens from its
location to the laboratory. Such stipulations or instruction shall include the
witnessing and auditing the test, test procedure and interpretation of the results.
B. The Contractor shall cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to
the Work and to manufacturers' facilities.
C. The Contractor shall provide incidental labour and tools and other facilities:
1. To provide access to Work to be tested.

2. To obtain and secure samples at the site or at the origins.
3. To facilitate tests.
4. To provide proper storage, protection and curing of test samples.
D. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer and the laboratory two days prior to
expected time for operations requiring testing services.
E. The Contractor shall arrange and pay for additional samples and tests required by
the Contract beyond specified requirements.
F. The Contractor shall submit inspection/test reports immediately upon completion

of the tests to the Engineer prior to incorporating the item(s) into the work. He shall
submit inspection/test reports showing non-compliance (failure) with written
remedial actions to be taken to the Engineer immediately. He shall submit
Page 78
certificates of compliance two weeks prior to the products' incorporation into the
Works.
G. Inspections and tests conducted by persons, laboratories or agencies other than

the Contractor, shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility and
obligation to meet all Specifications and the referred standards.
H. The Contractor shall maintain records of inspection and testing activity and
frequencies identifying the following as minimum:
1. Name of items
2. Quantity of items
op V1
3. Inspection /test reference, standards and procedures
4. Relevant dates
5. Name of inspector/tester
6.
C -
Observations, analysis, informed opinion and conclusions
y
7.
C
Specified requirements
8. Acceptability
C
9. Deviations / nonconformance
10. Approved remedial actions
Q
11. Signature of authorized evaluator.
I. The Contractor shall maintain a documented system to clearly identify the

inspections and test status of materials and equipment throughout construction.
Identification may be accomplished by means of stamps, tags, or other unique
control devices attached to, or accompanying, the material or equipment.
15.1.10 Programme of Tests

A. Individual Specification Sections: The Contractor shall follow the tests and
procedures as stipulated in these specifications, standards (intra or extra
specification) and along normal lines of accepted scientific knowledge and
experience.

END OF SECTION
Page 79
16. INSPECTION SERVICES (SECTION 01411)

16.1 Part 1 General
Section 01019 - Contract Considerations
Section 01300 - Submittals: Manufacturer's certificates
Section 01410 - Testing Services
op V1
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Project record documents
16.1.2 References
C -
ASTM D290 - Recommended Practice for Bituminous Mixing Plant Inspection.
y
C
ASTM D3740 - Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or
Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction.
C
ASTM D4561 - Practice for Quality Control Systems for an Inspection and Testing
Agency for Bituminous Paving Materials.
Q
ASTM E329 - Practice for Use in the Evaluation of Inspection and Testing
Agencies as Used in Construction.
ASTM E548 - Practice for Preparation of Criteria for Use in the Evaluation of
Testing Laboratories and Inspection Bodies.
16.1.3 Selection
A. The Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent inspection
company or agency to perform specified inspecting.
B. Division reserves the right to employ services of an independent inspection

company or agency to perform specified inspection.
C. Employment of Inspection Company or agency in no way relieves Contractor of

obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract
Documents.

A. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the relevant standard.
B. The Inspection Firm shall be authorized to operate in the UAE and Country of
origin of the material, assembly or item.
C. The Inspection Firm shall maintain a full time specialist on staff to review services.
Page 80
D. Testing Equipment shall be calibrated at reasonable intervals in accordance with

the standards, manufacturer’s instructions and the Division’s requirements.
16.1.5 Contractor Submittals

A. Prior to start of the works, the Contractor shall submit inspection firm name,
address, and telephone number, and names of full time specialist and person in
authority.
B. The Contractor shall submit copy of latest Certificate of Accreditation and date of
most recent inspection, with any memorandum of remedies to any deficiency
reported by the inspector.
op V1
16.1.6 Inspection Company or Agency Responsibilities
A. Provide qualified personnel. Cooperate with Engineer and Contractor in
performance of services.
C -
y
B.
C
Perform specified inspection of Products in accordance with specified standards.
C. Ascertain compliance of materials and products with requirements of Contract

C
Documents.
D. Promptly notify the Engineer and the Contractor of observed irregularities or non-
Q
conformance of Work or Products.
E. Perform additional inspection required by the Engineer.
F. Attend meetings as required.
G. Examine manufacturer’s Quality Control System and ensure that the whole
manufacturing process is covered.
H. Witness tests carried out by the Quality Control Department. Instruct as required
additional tests to be performed by the Quality Control Department.
I. Report on all activities and results pertaining to the contract.
J. If a manufacturer is certified under the ISO System (9001, 9002 and 9003) then
the Third Party Inspector shall witness at least 5% of the tests carried out by the
Manufacturer’s Quality Control department. If a manufacturer is not so certified
then the Third Party Inspector shall witness all tests carried out by the Quality
Control Department.
K. Review manufacturer’s quality control reports on items not actually witnessed.
L. Witness additional tests on random items in accordance with requirements.
M. Confirm dimensions, quantities and marking in accordance with the Specification

and Bill of Quantities.
N. Mark, indelibly, items physically inspected and conforming to Specification.
Page 81
O. Inspect and certify packing.
P. Issue Release Note to manufacturer, copy to Division and Engineer.
Q. Issue Inspection Report covering all matters.
R. If on arrival at site, and if materials are found to be defective, then the UAE agent
of the Third Party Inspector may be required to attend further inspections with the
Division and the Engineer.
16.1.7 Inspection Reports

A. After each inspection, the Inspection Company shall promptly submit six copies of
op V1
report to the Contractor for onward transmittal to the Engineer and the Division.
B. The inspection report shall include as minimum:
1. Date of issue.
C -
y
2. Contract and Project title and number.
3.
C
Name of inspector.
C
4. Date and time of inspection.
5. Identification of product and specifications references.
Q
6. Location within the Project.

7. Type of inspection.
8. Conformance with Contract Documents.
9. Observations, analysis, conclusions and informed opinions.
C. When requested, interpretation of inspection results shall be provided.
16.1.8 Limits on Authority

A. Inspection company or agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on
requirements of Contract Documents.
B. Inspection firm shall not have the authority to approve or accept any portion of the
Work.
C. Inspection firm shall not assume any duties of Contractor.
D. Inspection firm shall not exercise any form of authority which is vested in the
Engineer, the Division or their staff.
16.1.9 Contractor Responsibilities

A. The Contractor shall cooperate with inspection company or agency staff and
provide access to the Work, to manufacturers' facilities and facilitate an
independent report.
B. The Contractor shall provide incidental labour and facilities:
Page 82
1. To provide access to Work to be inspected.
2. To facilitate inspections to be made without let or hindrance.

C. The Contractor shall give prior notice to the Engineer and the Inspection Company
or agency at least two weeks for inspections, if possible.
16.1.10 Inspections Programme

A. Individual Specification Sections: Inspections, documents and relevant standards.
op V1
C -
y
C END OF SECTION
C
Q
Page 83
17. TEMPORARY UTILITIES (SECTION 01510)

17.1 Part 1 General
Section 01555 - Site Facilities
Section 01560 - Temporary Controls
Section 01590 – Offices, Buildings and Facilities
op V1
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Final cleaning
17.1.2 Temporary Electricity

A.
C -
The Contractor shall make all arrangements with ADWEA and Division.
y
B.
C
The Contractor shall provide all necessary equipment and pay all fees and
expenses for the installation of a temporary electrical service to field offices and
C
sheds.
C. The Contractor shall provide the energy meter.

Q
D. Electrical service shall be of adequate capacity for all needs without overloading
other facilities and shall be made available for power, lighting and operations of all
trades throughout the contract period (including night-work and work done outside
normal working hours if required).
E. If a temporary supply is not possible, make alternative arrangements to provide

and maintain a temporary electrical supply.
F. The Contractor shall provide and maintain power distribution as required

throughout the Works for power tools of all kinds and for temporary buildings.
G. Termination of power distribution shall be at locations approved by Engineer.
H. Termination shall be provided complete with circuit breakers, disconnect switches

and other electrical devices as required to protect the power supply system.
I. The Contractor shall complement existing power service capacity and

characteristics as required.
J. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction with the

prior approval of the Division.
K. The Contractor shall provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets
to provide single phase branch circuits for power and lighting.
L. Temporary equipment and wiring for power and lighting shall be in accordance
with the applicable provisions of ADWEA and governing codes. Temporary wiring
Page 84
shall be maintained in a safe manner and utilized so as not to constitute a hazard

to persons or property.
M. At the completion of the Work, or at such times as the Engineer may direct,
remove all temporary electrical installations and equipment and replace all worn or
damaged parts of the permanent systems, leaving such systems in first-class
condition equal to new.
17.1.3 Temporary Lighting for Maintenance Purposes

A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain a temporary lighting system as required
throughout the Works and to satisfy the minimum requirements of visibility, safety,
op V1
security and to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and adequate for emergency
personnel.
B. The Contractor shall provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes
with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required.
C -
y
C.
C
The Contractor shall maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.
D. Permanent building lighting may be utilized.

C
17.1.4 Temporary Heating
Q
A. The Contractor shall provide and pay for heating devices and heat as needed to
maintain specified conditions for operations and storage.
B. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, the

Contractor shall verify that installation is approved for operation, equipment is
lubricated and filters are in place. The Contractor shall provide and pay for
operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed
parts.
C. The Contractor shall maintain minimum ambient temperature of 10°C in areas

where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications.
17.1.5 Temporary Cooling

A. The Contractor shall provide and pay for cooling devices and cooling as needed to
maintain specified conditions for operations and storage.
B. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary cooling purposes, the

Contractor shall verify that installation is approved for operation, equipment is
lubricated and filters are in place. The Contractor shall provide and pay for
operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed
parts.
C. The Contractor shall maintain maximum ambient temperature of 26°C in areas

where temporary cooling is provided, unless indicated otherwise in specifications.
Page 85
17.1.6 Temporary Ventilation

A. The Contractor shall ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to
dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapours, or gases.
B. The Contractor shall extend and supplement equipment with temporary fan units,
as required, to maintain clean air for construction operations.
C. The Contractor shall provide temporary filters to adequately filter air being
distributed through duct-work to the supply outlets; disposable filters shall be
placed in front of all exhaust registers to keep construction dirt out of exhaust
duct-work
op V1
17.1.7 Telephone Service
A. The Contractor shall provide, maintain, and pay for telephone service and call
charges for field offices and install at time of contract mobilization. All costs shall
C -
be borne by the Contractor.
y
C
17.1.8 Internet Service
C
A. The Contractor shall provide, maintain, and pay for internet service and all
charges for field offices and install at time of contract mobilization. All costs shall
Q
17.1.9 Facsimile Service

A. The Contractor shall provide, maintain and pay for facsimile service and all call
charges for Field Offices and install at time of contract mobilization. All costs shall
17.1.10 Temporary Water Service

A. The Contractor shall provide adequate supply of water.
B. All water shall be clean, clear, drinkable and free of deleterious substances. No
brackish water will be used.
C. The Contractor shall provide adequate supplies of drinking water from approved
sources of acceptable quality, satisfactorily cooled, for employees. Drinking water
dispensers shall be conveniently located.
D. The Contractor shall provide and maintain a network for water distribution to the
various outlets including storage tanks, pumps, etc., and to all necessary hot and
/or cold water plumbing installation required for Field Offices.
E. Temporary pipe lines and connections from the permanent service line, either
outside or within the Works or within each relevant part of the Works, necessary
for the use of the Contractor and his Sub-Contractors shall be installed, protected
and maintained by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Page 86
F. The Contractor shall make provisions for drainage or collection of excess or spilled
water.
G. Temporary connections shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of

ADWEA and governing codes. Temporary piping shall be maintained in a safe
manner and utilized so as not to constitute a hazard to persons or property.
H. At the completion of the Work, or at such times as the Engineer may direct,
remove all temporary water service installations and equipment and replace all
worn or damaged parts of the permanent systems, leaving such systems in
first-class condition equal to new.
op V1
17.1.11 Temporary Sanitary Facilities
A. Facilities shall be provided with a continuous water supply and all WC's shall be
connected to a drain and run to a temporary interceptor septic tank and
percolating pit or connected into the existing drains.
C -
y
B.
C
In addition, facilities meeting with all the requirements of the Municipal and Health
Authorities shall be provided on Site on temporary basis as directed and approved
by the Engineer regarding number of facilities and location on Site.
C
C. Toilets must be kept clean and sanitary at all times.
Q
D. Labour, workmen or staff found to be using areas other than these

accommodations shall be discharged immediately.
E. At completion of the work, or at such times as the Engineer may direct, remove all
temporary drainage installations and make good existing to the Engineer's
satisfaction and as required by the concerned authorities.
17.1.12 Temporary Drainage

A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain such temporary drainage installations,
as may be necessary, in a manner approved by the Engineer and so as not to
adversely affect adjacent areas and properties.
B. Temporary drainage installations (storm water and foul water) may be connected
to existing drains provided written permission is obtained from the Division, and
provided such connection work is executed and maintained in strict accordance
with the Division’s regulations and directions.
C. At completion of the work, or at such times as the Engineer may direct, remove all
temporary drainage installations and make good existing to the Engineer's
satisfaction and as required by the concerned authorities.
17.1.13 Temporary Fire Fighting Services

A. The Contractor shall ensure and take all reasonable precautions to avoid
out-breaks of fire on the works, temporary works, offices, stores and other places
and things connected therewith.
Page 87
B. The Contractor shall safely store petroleum products, paints and other
combustible, dangerous or hazardous goods. Comply with all rules regulations
and orders made by any authorities having jurisdiction
C. The Contractor shall provide and maintain in good order and hold available at all
times, a sufficiency of efficient firefighting facilities and equipment together with
personnel trained in its use.
D. The Contractor shall ensure all firefighting facilities and equipment is as required
and approved by the Civil Defence Authority.
E. Firefighting equipment shall always be fully operational and be tested routinely
op V1
and approved by the Civil Defence Authority.
F. The Contractor shall take adequate safety precautions during metal welding and
torch cutting operations.
C -
G. Gasoline and other flammable liquids shall be stored in and dispensed from listed
y
C
safety containers and in conformance with requirements of the Civil Defence.
H. The Contractor shall make all arrangements for periodical inspection by Civil
C
Defence and Insurance Under-writer's Inspectors, cooperate with such Authorities
and promptly carry out their recommendations. All costs are borne by the
Contractor.
Q
I. The Contractor shall ensure that adequate, and to the extent possible, unimpeded
means of egress from all parts of the Works, is available at all times in case of fire.
J. At the completion of the Work, or at such time as the Engineer may direct, remove
all temporary firefighting installations and equipment.

END OF SECTION
Page 88
18. HEALTH AND SAFETY (SECTION 01540)

18.1 Part 1 General
18.1.1 Scope
A. Health, Safety and Environmental Standards shall maintain a safe place of work
and safe systems of work ensuring that work is carried out without risk to
Contractor’s staff or others throughout the Contract duration.
18.1.2 References and Related Sections
op V1
Federal Law No. 8 Year 1980 (Rags of Labour Relations)
Federal Law No 24 (1999) on Protection and Development of the Environment
C -
General Directorate of Civil Defence Inspection Regulations
y
C
Abu Dhabi Water & Electricity Authority (ADWEA) Inspection Regulations
C
Relevant Oil and Gas Authorities
Abu Dhabi Police Traffic Section Regulations

Q
Traffic Control Devices Manual Section 7 Road works Traffic Control
Section 01300 – Submittals: Health & Safety Policy Document.
18.1.3 ‘Ask Yourself’ Guidance Notes

A. Definition of a hazard – Anything that could harm the employees.
B. How likely is it that the employees could come into contact with that hazard and
what’s the worst thing that could happen to them? How serious is the risk?
C. Can the hazard be:
i. Removed.
ii. Substituted.
iii. Enclosed.
Or
iv. Can I move my employees?
v. Reduce exposure.
Or as a last resort
vi. Use personal protective equipment.
Page 89
18.1.4 Responsibilities
A. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the health, safety of all staff involved
and the environmental impact of the works. The works can include public and
private roads, alleyways, lands, gardens, Contractor’s associated off site labour
camps and off-site storage warehousing/workshops and shall mean the maximum
extent of each such public and private land as in the opinion of the Engineer is
necessary or practicable for the construction of the works. The Contractor shall at
all times comply with and ensure that its employees, sub-contractors and vendors
comply with all health, safety and environmental rules and regulations applicable
to the UAE, the specification and his company.
op V1
B. Contractor shall take, or cause to be taken, any additional measures, which
Engineer may direct to protect against injury or death of any person or damage to
or loss of any property or to the environment during the Contractors performance
of the works. The Contractor shall maintain his Company Standards.
C -
y
C. The Contractor shall as far as is reasonably practicable comply with health and
C
safety (H&S) standards.
C
18.1.5 Non-Compliance of H&S Related Items
A. If the Engineer or his staff observes or is informed of a contravention of the safety
Q
rules/procedures or unsafe acts and if those contravention(s)/unsafe act(s)

identified is/are not considered likely to present an immediate risk, but are likely to
lead to injury or ill health, Engineer shall bring these to the attention of the
Contractor concerned.
18.1.6 Penalties for Non-Compliance Safety Related Items

A. If contravention(s)/unsafe act(s) persist or present an imminent risk of serious
injury or ill health to the persons involved, Engineer, or his staff shall have the right
to suspend work being performed and order a suspension of the execution of any
new work in that part, or parts of the Works affected by the Contractor’s health and
safety violation or negligence.
B. Suspension of the work will be measured from date of issue of a ‘Health and
Safety Instruction’ indicating that, the Engineer and his staff shall not inspect and
approve that particular part of the work until the unacceptable affects in the Work
are repaired. In any instance where an order is given for suspension of work
affected by the Contractor’s health and safety violations or negligence, the
Contractor shall have no right to claim any extension of the completion date or to
claim for compensation for the suspension of the Work or for the waiving of the
liquidated damages.
C. In addition, if the Contractor does not fulfil his obligations under the Contract for
the performance of proper safe working practices, a deduction shall be made to
the monies due to the Contractor. The value of this penalty is in addition to and
does not form part of Contract Delay penalties.
Page 90
18.1.7 Site Safety Notice Boards

A. The Contractor shall set up, maintain and remove, when directed by the Engineer,
throughout the course of the contract, safety notice boards in prominent places on
the site for his labour force. These notice boards shall be located in positions
approved by the Engineer such that they are clearly visible to the Contractor’s
employees. The Contractor shall select safety signs appropriate to the hazards
and relevant emergency contact information and these shall be to the approval of
the Engineer before manufacture. The Contractor shall ensure that appropriate
safety signs are maintained as required relevant to the hazards. The Contractor’s
staff and labour force shall be made fully aware of the safety signs and emergency
contact information prior to commencing duties on site.
op V1
18.1.8 Impact on Environment and Services
A. The Contractor shall take account of the impact of his activities on the
environment and existing services in the vicinity of the works as given below. This
C -
y
information is not exhaustive and therefore the Contractor shall examine the
C
contract documents/specification, contract drawings and program of works to
identify any other effects of his activities. The Contractor shall comply with the
C
federal law and enforcing regulations on environmental protection and also any
local orders currently in place. The Contractor shall identify wherever any
activities, which take place as part of the project, may have an impact on the
Q
environment, which shall comprise, but not necessarily be limited to:
i. The disposal of waste water to surface water drains, sewers or land.

ii. The disposal of solid and liquid wastes arising from construction activities,
e.g. oil, chemicals, concrete, timber, packaging.
iii. The production of noise, dusts or fumes arising from construction activities.
iv. The dewatering of ground water and its disposal.
v. The damage to existing wildlife habitats due to construction activities.
vi. The contamination of aquifers.
B. The Contractor shall consider the aspects applicable below on the existing
environment and propose control measures for:
i. SITE PROXIMITY
a) Settlement and potential damage of buildings and/or roads caused by the
works.
b) Occupants of buildings/surrounding area – e.g. consider risks to children &
public near schools and in residential areas regarding security, noise and
air quality requirements.
ii. EXISTING GROUND CONDITIONS
a) Describe existing ground conditions to the extent they are known and
identify areas of risk of:
Page 91
1. Contaminated land.
2. Instability or subsidence.
3. Landfill.
iii. RESTRICTIONS
a) The Contractor shall identify all potential restrictions involved in the works
and abide by all requirements of the authorities concerning restricted areas
when working within their vicinity considering:
1. Access/egress routes to be kept clear for emergency access,
pedestrians or vehicles.
2. Works crossing service utilities.
op V1
3. Road works.
4. Noise.
5. Air quality, dust, fumes etc.
C -
6. Government department restrictions e.g. by military and/or traffic
y
police.
C
7. Over sailing rights, i.e. crane jib perimeter.
b) Buried services crossing the site e.g. gas, oil, water, sewage, storm water,
C
electricity and telecommunications. Prior to digging, the Contractor shall:
1. Study all service utilities on project drawings.
Q
2. Check with all public and private utilities and the owner of the land for
existence of services in the proposed work area.
3. Request special measures and detailed procedures from the relevant
oil and Gas Company for work in the vicinity of oil and gas transmission
pipelines.
4. Obtain certificate of “no objection” from the service utilities authorities
for all existing underground services.
5. Submit to the Engineer detailed drawings showing the service and/or
obstructions in relation to the permanent and temporary work.
6. After obtaining approvals from all concerned authorities carefully dig as
necessary trial pits by hand to locate all services and obstructions.
7. As soon as an existing sewer or other service is encountered in the
excavation the contractor shall notify the Engineer and the appropriate
authority thereto.
8. Properly support all exposed services to avoid unnecessary stresses.
Foundations of such utilities should not be undermined.
9. In addition, for electrical services check area with an approved cable
locator and position marker posts to indicate both the line and position
of any detected cables. If any services are detected in the area to be
excavated, dig by hand until exposed.
iv. OVERHEAD SERVICES
a) Where a roadway or passage is required under a line, the crossing should
be at right angles to the line and be restricted to the smallest possible
Page 92
working width for the type of plant using the roadway. This width should
not exceed 10m.
b) Crossings should be restricted to the smallest possible number and should
be fenced to give a clear indication of the roadway.
c) Goalposts should be erected on both sides of the overhead line to act as
both gateways and height limit.
d) Height and position of such goalposts will depend on the voltage of the
overhead line and ADWEA should be contacted to advice on clearance
required.
18.1.9 Setting up Site
op V1
A. Setting up site shall be undertaken in accordance with the following particular
requirements.
i. SITE SECURITY
C -
a) At all sites where it is reasonably practicable to do so, a fence should be
y
C
erected enclosing all construction activities. In this case:
1. The fence should not be less than 2m high and not be capable of being
easily climbed.
C
2. Should be close boarded or covered with mesh of a size not exceeding
30mm.
Q
3. All support posts must be securely anchored and fencing properly

maintained.
4. Site access opening should be fitted with gates, which should be
manned during working hours, and locked off during nonworking hours.
5. Suitable warning notices should be fixed to the fence.
ii. Electrical Installation
a) The Contractor shall prior to the connection of power ensure the following:
1. Contact certified and trained Contractors/Engineers from the relevant
authority to carry out an initial inspection of electrical mains and sub
mains distribution boards.
2. Ensure installation is checked by ADWEA or their associated group
companies.
3. On successful completion of inspection and verification, obtain a
certificate from the relevant authority.
4. Ensure thereafter relevant certificates are valid.
5. Provide periodic inspections to mains and sub mains distribution
boards to ensure safety of the system and operating devices.
iii. Fire Safety
a) The Contractor shall on completion of the following activities notify civil
defense to inspect the premises to obtain a fire certificate and submit this
to the Engineer before temporary buildings may be considered safe for
use.
Page 93
1. Maintain a fire service access which must be at least 3m wide and 4m

high.
2. Layout of temporary buildings must include a minimum of 6m fire
break/space between buildings.
3. Layout to provide two opposite doors to be used as a means of escape
and should open outwards and be kept unlocked during working hours.
4. Portable fire extinguishers to be provided in line with the requirements
of civil defense.
5. Prominently display in offices, “Action in case of fire” procedure with the
fire emergency number plus directional signage indicating fire escape
routes and escape doors.
op V1
6. All office staff to receive appropriate training in the evacuation
procedure and action to be taken in case of fire.
7. Position waste disposal points in safe prominent locations as
necessary and arrange routine collection/removal from site.
C -
y
iv. Emergency Response and First Aid
C
a) The following actions shall be carried out.
1. Appoint a suitably qualified and experienced first aider.
C
2. Provide approved first aid boxes, suitable for the number of workers
employed on site, regularly maintained and replenished as required.
Q
3. Prominently display in offices and on the site “Accident response”

procedure to be taken in the event of an accident with the ambulance
emergency number, name and telephone number of first aider and
location of first aid boxes.
v. Accommodation for Rest Breaks
a) The Contractor shall provide, erect, maintain and finally remove and make
good the site thereof, rest accommodation and shelters to accommodate
all site staff and workmen.
b) The Contractor shall provide, erect, maintain and finally remove and make
good the site thereof sufficient sanitary accommodation for the use of his
staff and workmen and shall keep the same in a proper and sanitary
condition during the period of use, consisting of:
1. Washbasins, troughs or buckets.
2. Soap, towels and/or drying tissues.
3. Hot & cold water.
4. Toilets and urinals.
c) The Contractor shall provide on the site at all times an adequate supply of
potable water to drinking water standards for the use of his staff and
workmen.
1. Potable water including water for bathing shall be chlorinated.
2. The Contractor shall adopt a procedure for ensuring filtered drinking
water is available by maintaining water supply lines with filters,
ensuring that filters are replaced and records are kept.
Page 94
3. Where water cannot be made available direct to the site through the
mains, the Contractor shall arrange for the conveyance of bulk supply
of water to the site and shall ensure that a sufficient supply of water is
available at all times.
d) The Contractor shall identify, provide and maintain all artificial lighting as
required to ensure the continuation of the works.
e) The Contractor shall provide and maintain at all times, safe access/egress
to, from, on the site, and to places of work within the site.
18.1.10 Working In Heat and Humidity

A. The Contractor shall take in consideration the effects of working in heat and
op V1
humidity and shall carry out the following control measures:
i. The Contractor should be aware of heat exhaustion and heat stroke and
know that the treatment of the two conditions differs.
ii. Assess all workers health and abilities and locate workers accordingly during
C -
y
summer months.
iii.
C
Move workers to activities in shaded areas to prevent buildup of body heat.
iv. In accordance with ministry of health requirements, adjust the working hours
C
to avoid working in the heat of the day. All physically intensive work is
required to start early in the day with a break for no less than 3 hours during
the hottest part of the day.
Q
v. Provide shade over the task area if practicable and ensure shade is set up at
work locations.
vi. In extreme temperatures, each worker may need 5-10 liters of water per day.
vii. Provide proper cooled resting facilities during afternoon breaks.
viii. Provide laborers in the field with light, loose coveralls.
ix. Ensure proper nutrition, salt tablets are not advisable.
18.1.11 Barriers
A. Barriers shall be provided in accordance with Abu Dhabi police traffic section
regulations.
B. Security fencing, concrete barriers, metal guardrails, plastic mesh, plastic rope
with warning tape tied and screens must be selected for and applicable to the risk
and maintained/adapted daily as work proceeds. The Contractor shall, as a
minimum, consider:
i. To protect children and public from high risk hazards full perimeter sealed
security fencing/panels.
ii. To protect the public full perimeter plastic mesh.
iii. To protect public from dust and/or noise assess all public areas to identify
where screens are required.
iv. To protect traffic adjacent to trenches continuous concrete barriers with
warning lights at junctions.
Page 95
18.1.12 Noise Control

A. Contractor shall assess all noise sources on site with a sound meter near to where
staff is working and record anywhere there is noise in excess of 90dBA. As a rule
of thumb, excessive noise can be found anywhere persons have to shout to be
heard at a distance 2m away from the person they are talking to.
B. In all instances when the danger limits from noise are identified, Contractor shall,
as far as is reasonably practicable reduce noise by:
Siting or locating the noise source away from persons.
Control of noise at source e.g. acoustic hoods/covers.
op V1
C If noise levels cannot be reduced, hearing protection must be provided and all
steps taken to ensure that it is used.
18.1.13
C -
Traffic Management
y
A.
C
The Contractor shall comply with Abu Dhabi police traffic section regulations or
safety measures as directed by the Engineer.
C
B. The Contractor shall at all times maintain pedestrian access along all public
highways and to all houses and other public or private properties fronting onto
Q
highways where works are under construction and where such properties have
vehicular access the Contractor shall at all times provide for the provision of such
access unless the Engineer shall decide such provision is impracticable and will
instruct the Contractor accordingly.
C. All traffic diversions shall be in accordance with Abu Dhabi Municipality “Traffic
control devices manual” section 7.
D. Signs shall be positioned where they are clearly visible to approaching drivers by
both day and night, and in all weather conditions.
E. Road works ahead signs shall be the first signs to be seen by the driver and shall
be placed in advance of the road works.
F. Road narrows ahead signs shall be placed midway between the road works ahead
signs and the beginning of the taper of traffic cones.
G. On roads with speed limits of 80km/h or more, all advance signs should have
plates giving the distance to the works in meters.
H. A line of traffic cones shall be placed at a taper and guide traffic past the works in
accordance with Abu Dhabi Municipality “Traffic control devices manual” section 7,
Figure 7.1.
I. The maximum spacing distance of cones in longitudinal lengths of coning shall be

9m, but no less than 2 cones shall be used in any length between tapers.
Page 96
J. Keep right or left signs shall be placed at the beginning and end of the lead in
taper of cones.
K. Road danger lamps shall be added at night, in poor daytime visibility and in bad
weather and shall not be higher than 1.2m above the road.
18.1.14 Personal Protective Equipment

A. The Contractor shall provide all their site staff and workers with a minimum of a
safety helmet and safety boots and shall ensure that both their own and sub-
contractors staff and workforce fully comply with this requirement.
B. The Contractor shall class all construction sites as “Hard hat areas” and enforce
op V1
the same to visitors.
C. The Contractor shall assess all work operations and identify PPE requirements
only as a last resort where a risk cannot be controlled adequately by other means.
C -
PPE shall be selected for e.g. head, feet, body, eyes, ears, respiratory protection
y
as necessary.
C
D. All PPE chosen must carry a CE mark or other mark to an international standard.
C
18.1.15 Manual Handling
Q
A. The Contractor shall assess his work methods and identify where manual handling
is required and provide necessary control measures.
18.1.16 Mechanical Plant and Equipment

A. The Contractor shall assess his work methods and identify all mechanical plant
and equipment required and provide necessary control measures.
18.1.17 Excavations for Shafts, Tunnels and Headings

A. Excavations for shafts, tunnels and headings shall be in accordance with particular
requirements of the method of work and the relevant sections of the specification.
B. The amount of excavation in terms of length and depth shall be kept to a minimum
during the construction period and all completed excavation shall be backfilled as
soon as practicable.
18.1.18 Tower and Mobile Cranes

A. In accordance with UAE law, cranes must be tested and certified by an approved
tester every 12 months.
B. Crane operators must be 18 or over, properly trained and certified.
C. Crane slingers must be properly trained and certified, easily identifiable with a
different colour hat and/or high visibility jacket with duties to properly sling the
Page 97
load, direct the crane driver and ensure a safe area under and in the surrounding
area of the load.
D. All crane operations must be controlled only between the crane operator and
slinger. It is preferable that the crane operator and slinger communicate by means
of cordless communication.
18.1.19 Lifting Equipment

A. All lifting operations must be under the direct control of an experienced slinger.
B. All lifting equipment shall be tested and examined by a competent person and a
certificate obtained.
op V1
C. All lifting gear to be clearly marked with their safe working load (SWL) and this
should never be exceeded.
D.
C -
All lifting equipment to be of good construction, sound material, adequate strength,
y
suitable quality and free from patent defects.
C
18.1.20 Working at Height
C
A. The Contractor shall erect safe working platforms supported by scaffold for any
work from 2m height by qualified and experienced scaffolders. Scaffolding design
Q
must ensure:
i. A minimum platform width of 600mm.

ii. Scaffold is placed on firm level ground resting on spreader boards and
base plates.
iii. Guard rails are at 1m height.
iv. Proper boarding covering the full width.
v. Kick boards.
vi. Scaffold is adequately tied to the structure at regular intervals.
vii. Proper and safe access is provided to every landing stage.
18.1.21 Mobile Scaffold Towers

A. The following rules shall apply.
i. Must only be used on firm level ground.

ii. Wheels must be locked before climbing tower.
iii. Tower shall not to be moved if there are persons or materials on the working
platform.
iv. Maximum height of free standing tower should not be more than 3½ times
the width of the shortest base. If height to base ratio has to be exceeded,
outriggers must be used.
v. Adequate means of access to the working platform should be provided by
means of internal ladders.
Page 98
18.1.22 Ladders
A. For ladders the following rules shall apply.
i. Ladders shall be in good condition and free from obvious defects.

ii. Properly secured near the top, or if this is not practicable, secured near the
bottom, weighted or footed.
iii. Set ladder at correct angle, 1m out for every 4m height.
iv. Ensure that ladder rises at least 1.05m above the landing point.
v. When handling and using ladders, make sure that no overhead power lines
are in the vicinity.
op V1
18.1.23 Welding and Use of LPG
A. Ensure that all welding operators are properly trained in the safe use and
maintenance of welding equipment.
C -
y
B. Regulators must always be fitted to cylinders to reduce the gas pressure to the
blowpipe.
C
C
C. Ensure correct colour coding of cylinders and always transport in an upright
position.
Q
D. Keep and use cylinders fixed upright, in purpose made trolleys.
18.1.24 Fixed and Temporary Electrical Distribution Systems

A. Ensure system is designed with due consideration of its purpose, external
influences, compatibility of equipment and maintainability of equipment used.
B. The Contractor shall appoint, in accordance with ADWEA regulations a

“Competent person” who shall be responsible for the installation, its use and
modification during the construction phase of the contract. The name of the
designated person shall be prominently displayed close to the main switch or
circuit breaker controlling the installation.
C. The Contractor shall ensure appropriate “Electrical safety and first aid” signs are
displayed.
18.1.25 Guarding of Machinery

A. Every moving part of machinery such as V belts, chains, drive shafts etc. must be
effectively guarded at all times.
B. Guards must be so designed so that they cannot easily be removed.
C. Power tools such as grinders, cutters etc. whether electrically or air operated,
must have a guard fitted which as a minimum must protect half the diameter of the
cutting or grinding wheel.
Page 99
18.1.26 Power Operated Tools

A. The Contractor shall ensure that all operators are properly trained in their safe use
and maintenance.
B. All external switching devices, protection devices, plugs and sockets must be
weather proof IP 55 minimum.
C. All individual circuits shall have their own residual current circuit breaker (RCCB’s)
in accordance with the regulations imposed by ADWEA and their associated group
companies.
op V1
18.1.27 Portable Hand/Compressed Air Tools
A. The Contractor shall ensure that:
i. Manufacturer’s safe operating pressure for hoses and attachments should

never be exceeded.
C -
y
ii.
C
All hoses exceeding 12mm inside diameter shall have a safety device at
the source to reduce pressure in case of hose failure.
iii. Air supply lines to be protected from damage by vehicles and materials by
C
use of channels or ramps.
Q
18.1.28 Hazardous Substances

A. Contractor shall submit to Engineer, details of the following:
i. Hazardous substances should be identified from material hazard data sheets

e.g. harmful, flammable.
ii. Provide a safe working procedure and provide the necessary
information/training to relevant persons using the materials regarding:
a) Transport.
b) Handling and storage.
c) Exposure controls/personal protection.
d) Use.
e) Accidental release measures.
f) Firefighting measures.
g) First aid.
h) Disposal considerations.
i) Ensure all containers holding hazardous substances have the correct
hazard warning labels and identification clearly printed on them.
18.1.29 Entering and Working In Confined Spaces

A. The Contractor shall identify all required confined space entries on the contract
and assess the risks to provide work method statements for every entry.
Page 100
Categorization of confined spaces by risk will be acceptable only if the category is

clearly defined and the Engineer agrees the work method statement.
B. As a minimum, the Contractor is required to provide details of:
i. Man/supervision and number of entry persons.

ii. Gas monitoring multiple type.
iii. Forced ventilation blower and exhaust type with hose.
iv. Appropriate entry clothing and equipment.
v. Emergency escape/rescue.
vi. Training
op V1
C. Appropriate assistance shall be given to the Engineer and his staff and DMAT
when making inspections into confined spaces.
D.
C -
Supply all necessary safety equipment for the Engineer and his staff and DMAT to
y
carry out handover and maintenance inspections as required. All equipment
C
supplied shall be in good working order and to the approval of the Engineer.
C
E. Provide adequate wash down facilities to the approval of the Engineer for the
personnel working in manholes and chambers.
Q
18.1.30 Requirements at Construction

A. The Contractor shall develop and submit a Construction HSE Plan, to establish
and detail how he intends to eliminate, control or contain all the hazards/risks
identified above and any other hazards/risks they themselves may have identified.
B. The Contractor shall attend all HSE meetings as required and arranged by the
Engineer and in particular, shall attend a pre-construction meeting specific for
HSE to address all items identified above and any other hazards/risks they
themselves may have identified to ensure that:
i. The construction HSE plan meets the minimum health and safety standards
on the contract.
ii. Rules are established.
iii. The Contractor manages safety in an effective manner.
iv. Relevant training is conducted to implement the plan.
v. An enforcement policy for any non-compliance.
vi. Suitable appointment of safety personnel is made.
C. Safety officer
i. The Contractor shall during the mobilization period and before the
commencement of the works, appoint and approve one number full time
suitably qualified and experienced safety officer relevant to the size,
complexity and particular risks for the contract.
Page 101
ii. In accordance with Ministerial order 32, article 26, part c, the Contractor
shall obtain approval and certification of their nominated safety officer
qualifications from the ministry of labor and social affairs. The Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer the proposed candidate’s CV which should
include details and certified proof of education, qualifications and training
received, together with the ministry of labor approval notification.
iii. If the proposed candidate meets the required standards he will be
approved subject to a satisfactory assessment and a three-month
probationary period after which, he will be classed as permanent.
iv. In any instance where the safety officer is not available, his tasks will have
to be assigned to a satisfactory qualified replacement before he leaves.
D First Aiders
op V1
i. The Contractor shall during the mobilization period and before
commencement of the works appoint and approve one number fully trained
first aider, trained as a minimum to “Appointed persons” standard in
accordance with ministerial order 32, article 4, part c, and the Contractor
C -
shall obtain approval and certification of their nominated first aider
y
qualifications from the ministry of health.
C
ii. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the proposed candidate’s
qualification, together with the ministry of health approval notification before
C
the works are commenced.
iii. In any instance where the first aider is not available, his tasks will have to be
Q
assigned to a satisfactory qualified replacement before he leaves.

END OF SECTION
Page 102
19. ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING (SECTION

01550)
19.1 Part 1 General
19.1.2 General
op V1
A. The Contractor shall make own arrangements for access to the various parts of
the site where works are to be performed.
B. All such access shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
C -
y
C. Where the proposed access to the site lies across the land of any third party,
C
produce to the Engineer the written consent of the owner and occupier of the land
over which the access lies before making use of the same.
C
D. The Contractor shall record before use and to the approval of the Engineer,
conditions of the surfaces of any land (and of any crops on such land) over which
Q
access lies.
E. The Division will serve the necessary notices to permit work in private lands in
accordance with the agreed programme of work and the Contractor. Entry onto
those lands is not permitted until given permission by the Engineer.
F. The Contractor shall carry out all operations necessary for the execution of the
Works and the construction of any Temporary Works so as not to interfere
unnecessarily or improperly with the public convenience or the access to use and
occupation of public or private roads and footpaths or to or of properties whether
in the possession of the Division or of any other person.
G. The Contractor shall save harmless and indemnify the Division in respect of all
claims, demands, proceedings, damages, costs, charges and expenses
whatsoever arising out of or in relation to any such matters in so far, as he is
responsible for.
H. The Contractor shall provide and maintain at all times pedestrian access along all
public highways and to all houses and other public or private properties fronting
onto highways where works are being performed and where such properties
normally have vehicular access.
I. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of any Traffic Safety Codes,
Traffic Police Regulations or safety measures as directed by the Engineer.
Page 103

19.2.1 Materials
A. Temporary Construction: Contractor's proposals to be approved by Engineer.
B. Permanent Construction: As specified in product specification sections when

used.

19.3.1 Preparation
op V1
A. The Contractor shall clear areas, parking, area premises, and adjacent areas.
19.3.2 Access Roads

A.
C -
The Contractor shall provide unimpeded access for emergency vehicles. Maintain
y
C
6m width driveways with turning space between and around combustible
materials.
C
B. The Contractor shall provide and maintain access to existing utility apparatus free
of obstructions.
Q
19.3.3 Parking
A. The Contractor shall only use parking locations as approved by the Engineer.
19.3.4 Existing Pavements and Parking Areas

A. Use of existing on-site streets and driveways used for Division traffic is permitted.
Tracked vehicles are not allowed on paved areas.
B. The Contractor shall use only designated areas of existing parking facilities.
C. The Contractor shall not allow heavy vehicles or maintenance equipment in

parking areas.
19.3.5 Permanent Pavements and Parking Facilities

A. The base for permanent roads and parking areas may be used for maintenance
traffic with the prior written approval of the Division.
B. The Contractor shall avoid traffic loading beyond paving design capacity. Check
with the Engineer. Tracked vehicles are not allowed.
C. Use of permanent parking structures is permitted with the prior written approval of
the Division.
Page 104
19.3.6 Maintenance
A. The Contractor shall maintain traffic and parking areas in a sound condition free of
excavated material, construction equipment, Products and mud.
B. The Contractor shall maintain existing and permanent paved areas used for
maintenance.
19.3.7 Removal, Repair

A. The Contractor shall remove temporary materials from sites immediately work is
completed.
op V1
B. The Contractor shall repair facilities damaged by use, to original or specified
condition.
19.3.8 Mud from Site Vehicles

C -
y
A. The Contractor shall provide means and remove mud from vehicle wheels before
C
entering streets.
C
END OF SECTION
Q
Page 105
20. SITE FACILITIES (Section 01555)

20.1 Part 1 General
A. Section 01550 - Access Roads and Parking Areas.
B. Section 01560 - Temporary Controls.
C. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Final cleaning.
op V1
20.1.2 Progress Cleaning and Waste Removal
A. The Contractor shall maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish.
Maintain Sites in a clean and orderly condition.
C -
y
B.
C
The Contractor shall remove debris and rubbish from closed or remote spaces.
C. The Contractor shall broom and vacuum clean interior areas to eliminate dust.
C
D. The Contractor shall collect and remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from
site and dispose off-site in an approved manner.
Q

END OF SECTION
Page 106
21. TEMPORARY CONTROL (SECTION 01560)

21.1 Part 1 General
Section 01570 – Traffic regulations
21.1.2 Approvals
op V1
A. The Contractor shall obtain approval from Town Planning Department and “DND”
for the location of all temporary works, dewatering lines, etc.
21.1.3 Barriers
C -
y
A.
C
The Contractor shall provide barriers to prevent unauthorised entry to
maintenance areas and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from
damage from maintenance operations.
C
B. The Contractor shall provide barricades and covered walkways required by
governing authorities for public rights-of-way and for public access to existing
Q
building.
C. The Contractor shall provide protection for plant life designated to remain.
D. The Contractor shall protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site,
and structures from damage.
E. The Contractor shall refer to items listed in Section 1570 – Traffic regulations.
21.1.4 Water Control

A. The Contractor shall maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and
maintain pumping equipment.
21.1.5 Exterior Enclosures

A. The Contractor shall provide temporary weather tight closure of exterior openings
to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to
allow for temporary heating or cooling and maintenance of required ambient
temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of
unauthorised persons.
21.1.6 Interior Enclosures

A. The Contractor shall provide temporary partitions as indicated to separate work
areas from Division’s occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture
Page 107
into Division’s occupied areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and
equipment.
B. The Contractor shall paint surfaces exposed to view from Division occupied areas.
21.1.7 Protection of Installed Work

A. The Contractor shall protect installed Work and provide special protection where
specified in individual specification sections.
B. The Contractor shall provide temporary and removable protection for installed
Products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage.
op V1
C. The Contractor shall provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills,
and soffits of openings.
D. The Contractor shall protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic,
C -
dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable
y
sheet materials.
C
E. The Contractor shall prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed
C
surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection
from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer.
Q
F. The Contractor shall prohibit general traffic from landscaped areas.
21.1.8 Dust Control

A. The Contractor shall execute the Work by methods to minimise raising dust from
maintenance operations.
B. The Contractor shall provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from
dispersing into atmosphere.
21.1.9 Noise Control

A. The Contractor shall provide methods, means, and facilities to minimise noise
produced by maintenance operations.
21.1.10 Pest Control

A. The Contractor shall provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent damaging
of landscape by pests and insects.
21.1.11 Pollution Control

A. The Contractor shall provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent
contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic
substances, and pollutants produced by maintenance operations.
Page 108
21.1.12 Rodent Control

A. The Contractor shall provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents
from accessing or invading premises.
21.1.13 Plantations and Trees (Soft Landscape)

A. Soft Landscape Works planted outside the premises of plots are the property of
the Government.
B. No one is authorised to remove any plantations, tree or grass.
C. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer if any soft landscape is conflicting with
op V1
the works. The Engineer shall approach the Division and Town Planning for
realignment of the concerned work.
D. The Contractor shall protect plants and grass from excavation, spoils or other
C -
maintenance materials, throughout the period of contract.
y
21.1.14
C
Work Sequence
A. A sequence of work shall be adopted such as to permit the satisfactory completion
C
of the Works and to limit disturbance and damage to a minimum.
Q
B. Materials and equipment used in the execution of the Works shall be of a design
and be used in a manner approved by the Engineer.
C. Due to the importance of the effluent for irrigation it is essential that no infiltration
of ground water into chambers or reservoirs occur. This means that workmanship
of the highest standard only will be accepted.
D. The Engineer may at any time withdraw his approval to the Contractor's method of
working and the Contractor shall immediately adopt another method of working
and if such change shall be required to achieve satisfactory progress or
workmanship the Contractor shall have no claim against the Division for costs
incurred by him in changing the method of working or in the provision and use of
other plant or equipment.
E. Notwithstanding the contents of the Conditions of Contract (in particular those

Clauses referring to Progress and Delays) the Contractor shall ensure that there
shall be no delay or disruption of the works programme as a result of his
requesting a change in materials programme or design whether or not such a
change is approved by the Engineer.
F. No change in the type or class of material shall be made without the prior written
approval of the Engineer.
G. The Contractor shall modify working to accommodate the requirements of other

contractors.
Page 109
21.1.15 Closing of Roads

A. The Contractor shall not close any road without having first obtained the written
consent of the Traffic Police and the consent of the Services Coordination
Committee.
B. In the event of such consent being refused the Contractor shall no claim for any
additional payment.
C. In the event of such consent being given the Contractor shall give appropriate
warning in writing in advance of the date of the commencement of the road
closure to all appropriate Authorities and other persons that may be affected by
op V1
such closure
D. The Contractor shall provide fix and maintain all warning signs and diversion
notices as may be required by the Road Authority, the Police and the Engineer.
21.1.16 C -
Nuisance
y
A.
C
All operations for the execution of the Works shall, so far as compliance with the
requirements of the Contract permits, be carried on so as not to interfere
C
unnecessarily or improperly with the convenience of the public or the access to or
use or occupation of public or private roads and footpaths to or of properties
Q
whether in the possession of the Employer or of any other person. The Contractor
shall indemnify the Division in respect of all claims, demands, proceedings,
damages, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever arising out of or in relation to
any such matters.
21.1.17 Loading of Structures

A. No load of any kind shall be applied to any part of a concrete structure until the
concrete has matured for at least 7 days and then only with the approval of the
Engineer and after confirmation that the specified 7 day cube strengths have been
met.
B. The full design load shall not be applied until a period of 28 days has elapsed after
casting.
C. The Contractor shall not backfill around any structure incorporating a ground or
floor slab before that slab has been cast and properly cured for a period of 28
days.
D. The Contractor shall ensure that at all times during maintenance any structure
shall be capable of withstanding any hydrostatic pressure to which it may be
subjected.
21.1.18 Protection of Finishes

A. The Contractor shall prevent damage to the Works
Page 110
B. The Contractor shall ensure that adequate protection is given to all works from the
activities of any following trades and sub-contractors and any third party.
C. Works shall be deemed to be insured against damage in accordance with the

Conditions of Contract (in particular the Clauses referring to Insurance).
21.1.19 Working Adjacent to Existing GRP Pipelines

A. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to limit the drawdown of
groundwater over existing pipelines to the minimum practicable.
B. The Contractor shall install dewatering well points remote from existing pipelines
and at the minimum practical depth.
op V1
C. The Contractor shall use cut-off walls to reduce the potential for groundwater flow
along pipe trenches. Dewatering shall not result in the flow of water along the pipe
zone material. The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer’s approval, details of
C -
proposed method of working and temporary works installations to achieve this.
y
D.
C
The Contractor shall monitor the ground water level over the existing sewers.
E. The Contractor shall undertake a deflection survey of the existing pipelines before
C
commencing any dewatering works when excavation is to be undertaken within 10
meters of an existing pipeline:
Q
1. Measure vertical and horizontal pipe deflections at two (2) meter intervals
and at each side of a joint.
F. The Contractor shall repeat the deflection survey on completion of the work and
removal of the dewatering installation.
G. The Contractor shall reinstate existing pipeline where method of working causes a
change in the deflection of the existing pipeline or adversely affects the sewer in
any way. The maximum deflection of the reinstated pipe is 3 per cent.
21.1.20 Removal of Temporary Conduits

A. The Contractor shall remove discharge pipelines and dewatering ports
immediately on completion of dewatering.

END OF SECTION
Page 111
22. TRAFFIC REGULATIONS (SECTION 01570)

22.1 Part 1 General
Section 01039 - Project Coordination.
Section 01540 - Health and Safety.
Section 01550 - Access roads and parking areas.
op V1
Section 01580 - Project Identification and Signs.
22.1.2 General
A.
C -
The contractor shall maintain and protect vehicular and pedestrian traffic through
y
C
areas of construction and furnish, erect and maintain temporary traffic control
devices including barriers, barricades, cones, drums, warning signs and lights.
C
B. The contractor shall not perform work during the hours of darkness unless
otherwise authorized in writing by the Engineer.
Q
C. The contractor shall provide competent Safety Officer as required under Section
01540 Article 1.30C. He shall have received traffic safety training or shall have
had previous experience in supervising maintenance and protection of traffic
through highway construction work areas.
D. The contractor shall coordinate with, and gain approval from all relevant
authorities for the maintenance and protection of traffic operation as required by
the Contract Documents.
22.1.3 Shop Drawings

A. The contractor shall submit shop drawings for all areas of traffic regulation
whether shown on the contract drawings or instructed by the Engineer.
B. Shop Drawings shall include but not be limited to:
1. Survey of existing conditions identifying levels, existing services and

access to existing properties or facilities, 1:200 scale.
2. Areas where services are congested shall be detailed at 1:100.
3. Details of vehicular and pedestrian segregations.
4. All shop drawings shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
22.1.4 Failure to Comply

A. Failure to provide satisfactory maintenance and protection of vehicular and
pedestrian traffic through areas of construction, or failure to adequately maintain
Page 112
access to properties and facilities affected by the work, or failure to furnish,

maintain, repair or replace any traffic control devices within 24 hours of being
given written notice by the Engineer, the Division reserves the right to apply a
penalties as per the Schedule of Rates
22.2 Part 2 - Products

22.2.1 Signs, Signals and Devices
A. Traffic control devices shall conform to the requirements of Traffic Police. All
traffic control devices shall be approved by the Engineer before installation on
Site. After initial use is complete, reuse any approved items as the need arises.
op V1
B. All sign panels, barricades, cones and flagmen's paddles shall be reflectorized.
Painting shall not constitute an approved substitute for achieving reflectorization.
C. Barricades shall be made of concrete.
D.
C -
Cones shall be manufactured of a material capable of withstanding impact without
y
C
damage to the cones or vehicles. All cones shall be red coloured with a white
reflectorized band. Cones shall be capable of remaining upright during normal
C
traffic flow and wind conditions in the area where they are used.
E. Post mounted and wall mounted traffic control and information signs as per
Q
Section 01580.
F. Warning lights shall meet the minimum requirement of the Traffic Police
G. Temporary traffic signals shall be to the approval of the Engineer and the Traffic
Police. Pre-timer control or alternative methods of vehicle detection may be
proposed where signals are proposed for short-term operation. The proposals
shall be approved by the Engineer and the Traffic Police.
22.2.2 Barriers
A. Barriers
i. In accordance with Abu Dhabi Police Traffic Section Regulations

ii. Security fencing, concrete barriers, metal guardrails, plastic mesh, plastic rope
with warning tape tied and screens must be selected for and applicable to the
risk and maintained/adapted daily as work proceeds. The Contractor shall, as
a minimum, consider these issue as follows;
a) Location of the works
b) Hazards inside the work area
c) To protect children and public from high risk hazards: Full perimeter sealed
security fencing/panels
d) To protect the public: Full perimeter plastic mesh
e) To protect public from dust and/or noise: Assess all public areas to identify
where screens are required
Page 113
f) To protect traffic adjacent to trenches: Continues concrete barriers with

warning lights at junctions

22.3.1 General
A. Traffic control devices shall be provided and maintained both inside and outside
the Contract Area as needed to facilitate traffic guidance and to ensure that all
traffic, whether vehicular or pedestrian, will be accommodated safely.
B. Prior to start of construction operations, erect such signs, barricades, and other
op V1
traffic control devices as may be required in the Contract Documents, on
proposals submitted and approved by the Engineer or as directed by the Engineer.
C. During non-working hours and following completion of a particular construction

operation, all warning signs, except those necessary for the safety of the public,
C -
shall be removed or entirely covered with either metal or, plywood sheet so that
y
C
the entire sign panel will be invisible to traffic.
D. Traffic Control devices shall be in place and operated only as long as they are
C
needed. Only those devices that apply to conditions actually in existence shall be
in place. If not needed, the traffic control devices shall be transported to a storage
Q
area for further reuse on the project.
22.3.2 Construction Parking Control

A. The contractor shall control vehicular parking to prevent interference with public
traffic and parking, access by emergency vehicles, and Owner's operations.
B. The contractor shall monitor parking of construction personnel's vehicles. He shall

maintain vehicular access to and through parking areas.
C. The contractor shall prevent parking on or adjacent to access roads or in non-

designated areas.
22.3.3 Flag Persons

A. The contractor shall provide trained and equipped flag persons to regulate traffic
when construction operations or traffic encroach on public traffic lanes.
B. Each flagman on duty shall be identified with appropriate and distinctive apparel
approved by the Engineer. Reflective apparel is required for flagging during
darkness.
C. The contractor shall employ flagmen only where approved by the Engineer and
relevant Authorities.
Page 114
22.3.4 Flares and Lights

A. The contractor shall use flares and lights during hours of low visibility to delineate
traffic lanes and to guide traffic.
B. Temporary lighting shall be installed, on proposals submitted and approved by the

Engineer or as directed by the Engineer. The location and spacing of light
standards shall be approved by the Engineer unless the required spacing is
indicated on the Contract Drawings.
C. The contractor shall maintain the temporary lighting installations and carry out
routine inspections to ensure all installations are functioning satisfactorily.
op V1
D. The contractor shall replace or repair any faulty or malfunctioning lamps or
installations. The Engineer shall be informed promptly of any traffic damaged
installation and such installation shall be replaced or repaired as directed by the
Engineer.
C -
y
E.
C
During the Construction of the Works, temporary lighting may be required to be
removed and reinstalled in other locations as directed or approved by the
Engineer.
C
22.3.5 Haul Routes
Q
A. The contractor shall establish public thoroughfares to be used for haul routes and
site access.
B. The contractor shall confine construction traffic to designated haul routes.
C. The contractor shall provide traffic control at critical areas of haul routes to
regulate traffic, to minimize interference with public traffic.
22.3.6 Detours
A. The contractor shall execute detours of the following types, on proposals
submitted and approved by the Engineer or as directed by the Engineer
i. Type I - Temporary Unsurfaced

ii. Type II - Temporary Surfaced
B. Type I, Temporary Unsurfaced Detour, the existing ground surface shall be graded
and compacted to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The contractor shall ensure
satisfactory dust control.
C. Type II, Temporary Surfaced Detour, the surface of the Detour shall be prepared
as noted for Type I Detour and shall then be treated with a prime coat followed by
a 50 mm thick layer of approved flexible surfacing.
D. The application of other parts of this section shall apply to detour work.
Page 115
E. Earthworks shall be constructed in accordance with proposals submitted by the

Contractor and approved by the Engineer or as directed by the Engineer.
Acceptable grades and grade transitions shall be provided where Detours join
existing pavements.
22.3.7 Traffic Signs and Signals

A. The contractor shall provide required signs and signals at approaches to site and
on site, install at crossroads, detours, parking areas, and elsewhere as needed to
direct construction and affected public traffic.
B. The contractor shall install and operate automatic traffic control signals to direct
op V1
and maintain orderly flow of traffic in areas under Contractor's control, and areas
affected by Contractor's operations.
C. The Contractor shall relocate as Work progresses, to maintain effective traffic

control.
C -
y
D
C
The Contractor shall make the necessary arrangements with the ADWEA/ Works
Department for the connection of the control cabinets of the lighting systems to a
suitable power supply network.
C
E. All regulations of the ADWEA/Works Department shall be strictly observed in the
Q
distribution and use of the supply. Under no circumstances shall any installation
be connected to such supply until authorized by the Engineer.
F. Reflective materials on signs, drums, barricades, and other devices shall be kept
clean, free from dirt, mud and road grime. Scratches, rips, and tears in the
sheeting shall be promptly repaired to the Engineer's satisfaction.
G. Sign panels, barricades, cones, vertical panels and drums shall be installed as
shown in the Contract Documents, on proposals and approved by the Engineer or
as directed by the Engineer.
H. Traffic control devices shall not be removed from the Contract without the
Engineer's written agreement.
I. Lights shall be securely fixed to barricades or drums used singly or installed as

shown in the Contract Documents, on proposals submitted by the Contractor and
approved by the Engineer or as directed by the Engineer.
J. At existing signal-controlled junctions, the contractor shall utilize the existing

equipment and supply and install such additional equipment required for any
modified road layout or traffic management system at the junction.
K. The contractor shall maintain and replace promptly any broken lamps and replace
and repair any damaged or malfunctioning equipment.
L. Unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer, new permanent traffic signal
equipment shall not be installed at a junction until the permanent carriageway
works are complete at the particular junction.
Page 116
22.3.8 Removal
A. The contractor shall remove equipment and devices when no longer required.
B. The contractor shall repair any damage caused by installation.
C. The contractor shall remove post settings.
END OF SECTION
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Page 117
23. PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS

(SECTION 01580)
23.1 Part 1 General
A. The Contractor shall design signs and structures to withstand a 140 km/hr
wind velocity.
B. The Contractor shall employ an experienced professional sign painter for a
op V1
minimum of three years.
C. Finishes and painting shall be adequate to withstand UV light, weathering,
fading, and chipping for the duration of the construction.
23.1.2
C -
Submittals
y
A.
C
Section 01300 - Submittals: Shop drawings and product data.
B. Show content, layout, lettering, colour, foundation, structure, sizes and
C
grades of members.

Q
23.2.1 Sign Materials

A. Structure and Framing shall be new, manufactured from steel, structurally
adequate and embedded in a concrete foundation.
B. Sign Surfaces shall be of exterior grade plywood sheets with medium density
overlay, a minimum 19 mm thick, and have a minimum number of joints.
C. Rough Hardware shall be stainless steel, aluminium or brass.
D. Paint and Primers shall be exterior quality. Two coats of each shall be
applied. Sign background will be white.
E. Lettering shall be done in exterior quality paint, in approved colours.
23.2.2 Project Identification Sign

A. The Contractor shall manufacture, paint and design signs with content as
shown on Contract Drawings.
B. Content shall include:
i. Project number, title, logo, address, telephone number and name of
Department.
ii. Logo, name and address of Consultant.
iii. Logo, name and address of Prime Contractor and his major
Subcontractors.
C. Graphic Design, Colours, Style of Lettering shall be as shown on Contract
Drawings
D. Text shall be in Arabic and English.
Page 118
23.2.3 Project Informational Signs

A. Painted informational signs shall be of the same colours and lettering as the
Project Identification sign, or standard products, with lettering sized to
provide legibility at 30m distance.
B. Signs shall be provided at each field office, storage shed and relocated as
Work progress requires.
C. The Contractor shall provide standard traffic directional traffic signs to and
within site.
23.2.4 Safety Notice Board
op V1
A. The Contractor shall manufacture one safety notice board of construction,
design, and content as shown on Drawings. The location shall be approved
by Engineer.
B. Content shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings with a choice of
symbols to suit operations.
C -
y
C. Graphic Design, Colours, Style of Lettering shall be as shown on Contract
Drawings.
C
D. Text shall be in Arabic and English and in other appropriate languages of the
C
workforce.

Q
23.3.1 Installation
A. The Contractor shall install project identification signs during the mobilisation
period.
B. The Contractor shall erect signs at approved locations.
C. The Contractor shall erect supports and framing on secure foundations.
They shall be rigidly braced and framed to resist wind loadings.
D. The Contractor shall install signs surface plumb and level, with butt joints
and anchor same securely.
E. The Contractor shall paint exposed surfaces of signs, supports, and framing.
F. The Contractor shall erect Safety Notice boards in prominent places at each
work site and relocate these as work progresses.
23.3.2 Maintenance
A. The Contractor shall maintain signs and supports clean, and repair
deterioration and damage.
23.3.3 Removal
A. The Contractor shall remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations at
completion of the Project and restore the area.
END OF SECTION
Page 119
24. OFFICES, BUILDING AND FACILITY (SECTION

01590)
24.1 Part 1 General
Section 01510 - Temporary Utilities.
Section 01550 - Access Roads and Parking Areas.
Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment: Storage and protection.
op V1
24.1.2 Use of Existing Facilities
A. Only supplied existing facilities shall be used for field offices or for storage.
C -
y
C
C
24.2.1 Contractor Office and Facilities
A General
Q
i. The Contractor shall set up an Operations and Maintenance Project Office for his
team which shall be continuously manned to receive information and instructions
from the Division / Engineer and for relaying the necessary instructions to the
relevant staff.
ii. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the approval of Town Planning
Department and other authorities for establishing Project offices.
B Location
i. The office location shall be approved by the Engineer. The office must be
located in a suitable place in the Abu Dhabi as approved by the Division /
Engineer; preferably in a suitable place with proximity to the contract area and
approved by the Engineer.
C Availability
i. The Office shall be allocated for the duration of the Contract. Use of the Site is
restricted to the purposes of this Contract only and the Contractor must not rent
the Site, or any portion of it, to others.
D Office Building
i. The Contractor shall provide enough office space to accommodate his essential
staff at the Project Office.
E Office fittings and furnishings
i. Electricity: As specified in Section 01510.

ii. Water: As specified in Section 01510.
Page 120
iii. Telephone / internet: As specified in Section 01510.

iv. Facsimile: As specified in Section 01510.
v. Meeting Area: Conference table and chairs to seat twelve (12) people.
vi. Other Furnishings: Contractor's option.
24.2.2 Engineer Facilities Provided By the Contractor

A General
i. The Contractor shall provide facilities for the Engineer as detailed in this section.
B Location
op V1
i. The site location will be advised by the Division / Engineer.
C Office Building
i.
C -
The Contractor shall provide, maintain and clean an office as required and having
y
C
a floor area of not less than three hundred (300) square meters for the exclusive
use of the Engineer and their Staff.
ii. The suggested office areas shall be partitioned and agree with the Engineer as a
C
minimum as follows:
1x CRE Office 25 Sq. m.
Q
1x R. E. Office 25 Sq. m.
1x Meeting Room 60 Sq. m.
4x A.R.E. and Q.S. Room 20 Sq. m.
6x Senior Inspector 12 Sq. m.
6x Inspector 10 Sq. m.
Files and Drawing Room Complete with Shelving 20 Sq. m.
Kitchen 10 Sq. m.
D Office fittings and furnishings
i. The Contractor shall provide and install all the furniture fittings equipment and
conveniences in the offices for the Engineer as listed above. This shall include
but not limited to:
a) Desks
b) Side Tables
c) Conference Table and chairs
d) High Back Swivel Arm Chairs
e) Plain Arm Chairs
f) Four (4) “6” Drawer Plan Chest (suit AO size drawings)
g) Four (4) free standing drawing hanging file (suit AO size drawings)
Page 121
h) Four (4) Lockable Drawer filing Cabinets (with hanging files)

i) Three (3) Fire Extinguishers - 1 kg capacity, powder type
j) Two (2) Wall-mounted first Aid Kit
k) One (1) portable first Aid Kit
l) One (1) waste basket per desk and table and as required.
m) Telephone connection of the switching system type with an intercom
facility, comprising one main telephone and extensions as required to suit
office layout in accordance with Section 01510
n) Computer equipment for twenty (20) employees to the latest specification
and approved by the Engineer. (include two laptops within 20)
op V1
o) One (1) A4 size color scanner.
p) One (1) photocopier suitable for A3 size. (including scanning function)
q) One (1) digital camera, minimum four (4) mega pixel as approved.
r)
C -
Separate facsimile connection and facsimile machine.
y
s)
C
Conference room table and chairs to seat twelve (12).
t) Two double seat waiting area sofa’s or other suitable to seat 4 waiting
C
people
u) One waiting area coffee table
Q
v) One water cooler with filtered water.

w) Shelving
E Office facilities
i. The Contractor shall provide and maintain electricity by linking into a mains
supply.
ii. The Contractor shall provide an adequate supply of water suitable for potable
purposes.
iii. The Contractor shall provide, maintain and clean approved toilet facilities,
including three (3) individual cubical (or as approved by the Engineer) and
washing basins for the exclusive use of the Division and the Engineer together
with their staff adjacent to the offices.
iv. The Contractor's may provide other furnishings not detailed at his discretion or
include facilities currently within the proposed building. All these must have
approval by the Engineer. These other Furnishings that are not detailed in this
contract are the responsibly of the Contractor.
v. The Contractor shall provide suitable kitchen / beverage preparing facilities
including but not limited to;
a) one electric cordless kettle
b) one sink
c) storage for kitchen items
d) one large fridge
e) one microwave
Page 122
f) crockery
g) cutlery
F ENGINEER Vehicle
i. The Contractor shall provide two (2) fully maintained vehicles for use by the
Engineer and to be located at the office for the duration of the contract.
ii. The contractor shall provide six (6) permanent vehicle shade covers and parking
for the Engineer’s staff and two (2) permanent vehicle shade covers and parking
for visitors in an appropriate location adjacent to offices as approved by the
Engineer.
24.2.3 Communication Facilities
op V1
A The Contractor shall establish and maintain a suitably equipped communications
facility with telephone, facsimile and e-mail / internet facilities for his Project Office.
This shall be continuously manned 24 hours a day and 365 days per year with
adequate contact arrangements with key staff. The Contractors Project Office shall
C -
be the default point of contact for receipt of instructions from the Division /
y
Engineer.
C
24.2.4 Storage Areas and Sheds
C
A. Storage requirements, allowing for access and orderly provision for maintenance
and for inspection of products, shall fulfill the requirements of Section 1600.
Q
Enough space shall also be provided for temporary storage of spare parts,
consumables and tools required for operations and maintenance functions.
24.2.5 Materials, Equipment, Furnishings

A Materials, equipment, and furnishings shall be serviceable, new or nearly new,
adequate for required purpose and in agreement with the Engineer
24.2.6 Construction
A. Portable or mobile buildings will not be accepted.
B. Construction: The Contractor shall provide structurally sound, secure, insulated,
weather tight enclosures for office and storage spaces. The enclosures must be
maintained during progress of Work and removed upon issue of the Provisional
Acceptance Certificate.
C. Temperature transmission resistance of floors, walls, and ceilings shall be
compatible with occupancy and storage requirements.
D. Exterior materials shall be weather resistant, finished and in color acceptable to
Division.
E. Interior materials in offices shall be sheet type materials for walls and ceilings,
pre-finished or painted; floors and bases shall be resilient.
F. Lighting for offices shall be adequate at desk top height. The Contractor shall
provide exterior lighting at entrance doors.
G. Fire extinguishers shall be appropriate and approved type at each office or
storage area.
Page 123
H. Interior materials in storage sheds shall be as required to provide specified

conditions for storage of products.
24.2.7 Environmental Control

A. Heating, cooling, and ventilating for offices equipment shall be automatic to
maintain comfort conditions.
B. Storage Spaces shall be provided with heating and ventilation as needed to
maintain Products in accordance with Contract Documents. The Contractor shall
provide adequate lighting for maintenance and inspection of Products.
op V1
24.3.1 Preparation
A. The Contractor shall fill and grade sites for temporary structures to provide
drainage away from buildings if necessary or as directed by the Engineer.
C -
y
24.3.2
C
Installation
A. The Contractor shall install required facilities and keep them ready for occupancy
during mobilization period.
C
B. Employee Residential Occupancy: Not allowed on Division’s property.
Q
24.3.3 Maintenance and Cleaning

A. The Contractor shall provide daily janitorial, services, periodic cleaning and
maintenance for office and storage areas.
B. The Contractor shall maintain and clean approved toilet facilities, washrooms and
kitchen facilities (including appliances).
C. The Contractor shall maintain the facilities until the issue of the Final Acceptance
Certificate.
D. The Contractor shall maintain approach walks free of mud and water or other
hazards.
24.3.4 Removal
A. At completion of Work the Contractor shall remove all installed work as part of this
contract.
B. The Contractor shall restore areas to a condition at least equal to that in which it
was handed over.
END OF SECTION
Page 124
25. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT (SECTION 01600)

25.1 Part 1 General
Section 01400 - Quality Control: Product quality monitoring.
25.1.2 Products
A. The term “product” shall mean any material including proprietary goods,
equipment and manufactured items that is to form part of the final Works. It does
op V1
not include machinery and equipment used for the preparation, fabrication,
conveying and erection of the Works.
B. Only new materials and equipment shall be used unless otherwise specified.
C. C -
Products of a similar nature shall be standardized, interchangeable and supplied
y
C
by the same manufacturer as far as is possible.
D. Products not detailed in the specification shall be to the highest quality and shall
C
be to approve standards where applicable.
Q
E. The Contractor shall not use materials and equipment removed from existing
premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents.
F. The Contractor shall provide interchangeable components of the same

manufacture for components being replaced.
G. The Contractor shall obtain product conformity based on continued testing

together with details of the manufacturers’ quality assurance system certificate.
25.1.3 The Division’s Policy for Material Approval

A. All materials for inclusion in the Permanent works must conform to the contract
specifications in all respects and shall be duly approved for the specific application
on prescribed Forms. However materials having higher performance properties
may be considered for approval provided the suppliers/manufacturers establish
beyond doubt that the proposed materials are of superior quality.
B. The Division maintains a database of materials, which have been previously

approved for specific applications and used on various Contracts. This database
is available for guidance. Owing to the fact that the database is a live document
and is subject to regular updates, it must be stressed that any proposal to use a
material, which is on the database, does not guarantee the qualification of the
material for the respective application. However, once a material has been
Page 125
approved for use on a particular Contract for particular set of specifications, the
approval will only be withdrawn under exceptional circumstances.
The process of materials approval can be time demanding and adequate
resources may be required. Therefore in order to facilitate the process the
following procedure should be adopted:-
1. The Contractor shall submit within two weeks after signing the agreement a
list of all materials which he plans to incorporate in the permanent works,
along with a forecast date for each material submittal. Substitute or backup
op V1
suppliers, wherever required shall be included in the list. However in case of
using material from the Substitute or backup suppliers Division’s approval will
be essentially required.
2.
C -
No work represented by the required submittal shall be purchased or
y
C
commenced until the applicable submittal has been formally approved by all
concerned.
C
3. Materials identified as being taken from the Division’s Database shall be
Q
submitted with “Form A”, (obtain latest form from DMAT). (The approval
process is swift provided all requirement of Form A are met with).
4. Materials identified as not being on the Division Database shall be submitted

with “Form B” (obtain latest form from DMAT). (The documentation required
for approval on “Form B”, is extensive and the Division may require a visit to
the supplier’s premises and/or factory or site(s) where the material has been
previously applied/installed. The respective Contractor on his own expenses
shall arrange all such visits. As a consequence, the “Form B” approval
process may be extensive and time consuming.
25.1.4 Transportation and Handling

A. Materials, products and equipment shall be properly packed and protected to
prevent damage during transportation and handling.
B. More detailed requirements for transportation and handling of specific items are
specified under other Sections.
C. The Contractor shall transport and handle Products in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions.
D. The Contractor shall promptly inspect shipments to ensure that Products comply
with requirements, quantities are correct, and Products are undamaged.
Page 126
E. The Contractor shall provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by

methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.
25.1.5 Storage and Protection

A. The Contractor shall store and protect Products in accordance with manufacturers'
instructions.
B. The Contractor shall store Products with seals and labels intact and legible.
C. The Contractor shall store sensitive Products in weather tight, climate controlled,
enclosures in an environment favourable to Product.
op V1
D. For exterior storage of fabricated Products, the Contractor shall place them on
sloped supports above ground.
E. The Contractor shall provide [bonded] off-site storage and protection when site
C -
does not permit on-site storage or protection.
y
F.
C
Cover Products subject to deterioration shall be protected with impervious sheet
covering. The Contractor shall provide ventilation to prevent condensation and
C
degradation of Products.
G. The Contractor shall store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-
Q
drained area and prevent mixing with foreign matter.
H. The Contractor shall provide equipment and personnel to store Products by

methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.
I. The Contractor shall arrange storage of Products to permit access for inspection.
He shall inspect periodically the Products to verify they are undamaged and
maintained in acceptable condition.
25.1.6 Product Options

A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any Product
meeting those standards or description.
B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of

manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions
allowed.
C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for

Substitutions: The Contractor shall submit a request for substitution for any
manufacturer not named in accordance with the following article.
D. Where the Contract Documents require that a certain product is to comply with a
particular standard, the Contractor shall present an affidavit from the manufacturer
certifying that the product complies therewith. Where requested or specified, the
Contractor shall submit supporting test data to substantiate compliance.
Page 127
25.1.7 Substitutions
A. Substitutions may be considered when a Product becomes unavailable through no
fault of the Contractor.
B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of

proposed Substitution with Contract Documents.
C. A request constitutes a representation that the Contractor:
i. Has investigated proposed Product and determined that it meets or

exceeds the quality level of the specified Product.
ii. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution.
op V1
iii. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may
be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to
Division.
iv.
C -
Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may
y
subsequently become apparent.
v.
C
Will reimburse Division for review or redesign services associated with re-
approval by authorities.
C
D. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop
drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when
Q
acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents.
E. Substitution Submittal Procedure:
i. Submit three copies of request for Substitution for consideration. Limit

each request to one proposed Substitution.
ii. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to
the proposed Product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer.
iii. The Engineer will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject
request.

25.2.1 General
A. Products List: Section 01300 - Submittals
B. Name plates and other identifying markings shall not be affixed on exposed
surfaces of manufacturer's items installed in finished spaces.
C. All products shall be tested as required by the Specification. Additional testing may
be requested by the Engineer at any time and at no extra cost.
D. When required by the Specification or the Engineer, testing of products shall be

undertaken by an independent organization or national organization.
E. The Contractor shall allow for all costs associated with the testing of products
including labour, transportation and the cost of the test itself.
Page 128
F. Samples for testing shall be taken at the place of origin, place of fabrication or
from the site as required by the Engineer. Samples that are of value after testing
shall remain the property of the Contractor. Samples used for testing may only be
incorporated into the Works with the written approval of the Engineer.
G. The Contractor shall provide all necessary facilities required for on-site testing of
products.
H. The Contractor shall ensure that products are made available for testing
sufficiently in advance of intended use so as to allow for testing. Delays resulting
from the time taken to test a product shall not be acceptable as cause for a claim.
op V1
25.3.1 General
A. Manufactured articles, materials and equipment shall be applied, installed,
C -
connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned as directed by the respective
y
manufacturers unless more stringent requirements are specified.
C
B. The Contractor shall not deliver material to the Work without prior approval from
C
the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
Q
Page 129
26. COMMISSIONING SYSTEM (SECTION 01650)

26.1 Part 1 General
Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturers field reports.
26.1.2 Commissioning of Systems
op V1
A. The Contractor shall coordinate the schedule for commissioning of various
equipment and systems.
B. The Contractor shall notify Engineer two (2) weeks prior to start-up of each item.
C.
C -
The Contractor shall verify that each piece of equipment or system has been
y
C
checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and
for conditions which may cause damage.
C
D. The Contractor shall verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical
characteristics are in line with requirements of the equipment or system
Q
manufacturer.
E. The Contractor shall verify that wiring and support components for equipment are
complete and tested.
F. The Contractor shall execute commissioning under supervision of applicable

manufacturer's representative, where specified, and Contractors' personnel in
accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
G. When specified in individual specification Sections, the Contractor shall require to

the manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to
inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to
commissioning, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.
H. The Contractor shall submit a written report that equipment or system has been
properly installed and is functioning correctly, in accordance with Section 01300.
26.1.3 Demonstration and Instructions

A. The Contractor shall, demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to
Division’s personnel one week prior to date of Substantial Completion.
B. The Contractor shall demonstrate Project equipment by a qualified manufacturers'

representative who is knowledgeable about the Project.
C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, the Contractor shall

perform demonstration for any other season to suit.
Page 130
D. The Contractor shall utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for
instruction. He shall review in detail the contents of the manuals with Division’s
personnel to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.
E. The Contractor shall demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-

shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at
scheduled and agreed time, at equipment location.
F. The Contractor shall prepare and insert additional data in operations and
maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during
instruction.
op V1
G. The amount of time required for instruction on each item of equipment and system
is that specified in individual sections.
26.1.4 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

A.
C -
Division reserves the right to appoint and employ services of an independent firm
y
C
to perform testing, adjusting, and balancing. Contractor shall be paid for services
from contingency allowance specified in Section 01019.
C
B. The independent firm will perform services as specified.
C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Engineer indicating

Q
observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance

with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

END OF SECTION
Page 131
27. CONTRACT CLOSE OUT (SECTION 01700)

27.1 Part 1 General
Section 01555 - Site Facilities
Section 01650 - Commissioning of Systems
op V1
Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Data
C -
y
27.1.2
C
Provisional Acceptance
A. The Contractor shall submit written certification that Contract Documents have
C
been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in
accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Engineer's review.
Q
B. The Contractor shall provide submittals that are required by governing or other
authorities.
C. The Contractor shall request inspection by Division upon Engineer’s approval.
27.1.3 Final Cleaning

A. The Contractor shall execute final cleaning prior to issue Provisional Acceptance
Certificate.
B. The Contractor shall clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view;
remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and
glossy surfaces, vacuum remove dust.
C. The Contractor shall clean equipment and fixtures with cleaning materials
appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned and as specified.
D. The Contractor shall clean debris from enclosed spaces.
E. The Contractor shall clean site, sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped
surfaces.
F. The Contractor shall remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and
construction facilities from the Site.
G. The Contractor shall clean all components of the site, constructional, agricultural,
general waste, garbage and all wastes of works.
Page 132
H. The Contractor shall clean worship places and their facilities assigned for the
users (or public) of the site (i.e. park, garden, other public places like are coming
in the site) as well as cleanliness of water circles throughout the periods being
used by the public.
I. The Contractor shall remove all wastes outside the sites to the places allocated for
in accordance with the concerned authorities or as directed by the Engineer.
27.1.4 Adjusting
A. The Contractor shall adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth
and unhindered operation.
op V1
A. The Contractor shall maintain on site one set of the following record documents;
record actual revisions to the Work:
C -
y
i.
C
Drawings.
ii. Specifications.
C
iii. Addenda.
iv. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
Q
v. Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.

vi. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.
B. The Contractor shall ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future
reference by Division.
C. The Contractor shall store record documents separate from documents used for
maintenance.
D. The Contractor shall record information concurrent with maintenance contract

progress, whenever applicable.
E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of

actual Products installed, including the following:
i. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.

ii. Product substitutions or alternates utilised.
iii. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.
F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual
maintenance including:
i. Measured depths of construction.

ii. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and
appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.
Page 133
iii. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in

construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.
iv. Field changes of dimension and detail.
v. Details not on original Contract drawings.
G. The Contractor shall submit the following documents to Engineer with request for
Provisional Acceptance Certificate.
i. All guarantees and warranties required by the Contract including those

required of manufacturers, suppliers and Sub-Contractors.
op V1
ii. Reports containing certified results/readings of all tests required by the
Contract.
iii. All operation and maintenance instruction manuals brochures, catalogue
cuts, etc., required by the Contract.
iv.
C -
All as-built drawings required by the Contract.
y
v.
C
All spare parts, tools and maintenance equipment required by the
Contract.
C
vi. Complete listing of all consumable stores and spare parts used by the
Contractor in operating and maintaining the electro-mechanical works
throughout the maintenance period.
Q
H As-Built Record Drawings shall be prepared and submitted in accordance with

Sections 01300 and 17110.
I All maintenance records shall be handed over to the Division at the end of the
Contract Period in a format as described in Section 01300.
27.1.6 Asset Data

A The Contractor shall submit Asset Survey forms as per AIMS Asset Manual.
B The Contractor shall submit Asset GIS data as per Section 17100.
27.1.7 Spare Parts and Maintenance Products

A. The Contractor shall provide spare parts, maintenance, and extra Products in
quantities specified in individual specification sections.
B. The Contractor shall deliver to and place in location as directed; he shall obtain
receipt prior to final payment.
C. The Contractor shall label and store spare parts separately in applicable sections,
provide a detailed inventory stating but not limited to, type of spare, model,
ordering number, description and all information deemed necessary or as directed
by the Engineer.
Page 134
27.1.8 Final Account

A. The Contractor shall submit Final Account identifying total adjusted Contract Sum,
previous payments, and sum remaining due.
27.1.9 Maintenance Service

A. The Contractor shall furnish service and maintenance of components indicated in
specification sections for one year from date shown on Provisional Acceptance
Certificate.
B. The Contractor shall examine system components at a frequency consistent with

reliable operation. He shall clean, adjust, and lubricate as required.
op V1
C. The Contractor shall include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication
of components, repair or replace parts whenever required. He shall use parts
produced by the manufacturer of the original component.
C -
y
D. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or
C
Subcontractor without prior written consent of the Division.
C
27.1.10 Final Acceptance
A. The Contractor shall submit written certification that Contract Documents have
Q
been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in
accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Engineer's review.
B. The Contractor shall request inspection by Division upon Engineer’s approval.
27.1.11 Issue of Completion Certificate

A. The Completion Certificate for any section of works will only be issued if the
Contractor submits, together with his application, a written statement of the
appropriate authorities confirming that reinstatement of surfaces, land etc. has
been carried out to the owner’s satisfaction.

END OF SECTION
Page 135
28. OPERATION AND MAINENANCE DATA

(SECTION 01730)
28.1 Part 1 General
A. The Contractor shall prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in
maintenance and operation of described products.
28.1.2 Format
op V1
A. The Contractor shall prepare data in the form of an instructional manual.
B. Binders: Commercial quality, A4 210x297mm, three D side ring binders with

durable plastic covers; 75mm maximum ring size. When multiple binders are
C -
used, the Contractor shall correlate data into related consistent groups.
y
C.
C
Cover: The Contractor shall identify each binder with typed or printed title
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS, identify title of Project and
C
identify subject matter of contents.
D. The Contractor shall provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and
Q
system, with typed description of product and major component parts of

equipment.
E. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound paper.
F. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold
larger drawings to size of text pages.
G. The Contractor shall arrange content under section numbers and sequence of
Table of Contents of the Project Manual.
28.1.3 Contents, Each Volume

A. Table of Contents: The Contractor shall provide title of Project; names, addresses,
and telephone numbers of Engineer and Contractor with name of responsible
parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the volume.
B. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of
Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement
parts.
C. Product Data: The Contractor shall mark each sheet to clearly identify specific
products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. He shall delete
inapplicable information.
D. Drawings: The Contractor shall supplement product data to illustrate relations of

component parts of equipment and systems and show control and flow diagrams.
Page 136
E. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. The Contractor shall

provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating
manufacturer's instructions specified in Section 01400.
28.1.4 Manual for Materials and Finishes

A. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: The Contractor shall include
product data, with catalo number, size, composition, and colour and texture
designations. He shall provide information for re-ordering custom manufactured
Products.
B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: The Contractor shall include
op V1
manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions
against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning
and maintenance.
C. Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products: The Contractor shall include
C -
product data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and
y
C
details of installation. He shall provide recommendations for inspections,
maintenance, and repair.
C
D. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual Product specification sections.
Q
E. The Contractor shall provide a list in Table of Contents for design data, with
tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data.
28.1.5 Manual for Equipment and Systems

A. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: The Contractor shall include
description of each unit, system and component parts. He shall identify function,
normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Performance curves,
with engineering data and tests and complete nomenclature and model number of
replaceable parts shall be included. Also details of manufacturers recommended
spares and maintenance task descriptions, Motor Control Centres, single line
diagrams, together with wiring diagrams for circuits and sub circuits shall be
included. He shall provide a method of control description, details of controls and
telemetry system.
B. Panel board Circuit Directories: The Contractor shall provide electrical service
characteristics, controls, and communications;
C. The Contractor shall include colour coded wiring diagrams as installed.
D. Operating Procedures: The Contractor shall include start-up, break-in, and routine
normal operating instructions and sequences. Regulation, control, stopping, shut-
down, and emergency instructions shall be included. Also summer, winter, and
any special operating instructions shall be included.
E. The Contractor shall provide Shutdown Procedures
Page 137
F. Maintenance Requirements: The Contractor shall include routine procedures and

guide for preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair,
reassembly instructions; alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking
instructions.
G. The Contractor shall provide servicing and lubrication schedule, including list of
lubricants required.
H. The Contractor shall include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance

instructions.
I. The Contractor shall include sequence of operation by controls’ manufacturer.
op V1
J. The Contractor shall provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations,
assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance.
K. The Contractor shall provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as
C -
installed, including detailed circuit operation description with programmable
y
C
controller ladder diagrams, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams for
maintenance.
C
L. The Contractor shall provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with colour
coded piping diagrams as installed.
Q
M. The Contractor shall provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and
function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams.
N. The Contractor shall provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts with current
prices and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
O. The Contractor shall include test and balancing reports as specified in Section
01400.
P. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual Product specification sections.
Q. The Contractor shall provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with
tabbed dividers and space for insertion of data.
R. The Contractor shall provide as-built schematics and wiring diagrams with the
final/proposed asset codes as per Asset Manual specified in Section 17100.
S. The Contractor shall provide Contractor's record drawings.
28.1.6 Instruction of Division Personnel

A. Before final inspection, the Contractor shall instruct Division's designated
personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and
systems, at agreed upon times.
B. For equipment requiring seasonal operation, the Contractor shall perform

instructions for other seasons to suit.
Page 138
C. The Contractor shall use operation and maintenance manuals as basis for
instruction. The contents of the manuals shall be reviewed in detail with Division's
designated personnel to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.
D. The Contractor shall prepare and insert additional data in Operation and
Maintenance Manual when need for such data becomes apparent during
instruction.
28.1.7 Submittals
A. The Contractor shall submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats
and outlines of contents before start of Work. Engineer will review draft and return
op V1
one copy with comments.
B. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during

construction and operated by Division, the Contractor shall submit documents
within ten days after acceptance.
C -
y
C.
C
The Contractor shall submit 1 copy of completed volumes two weeks prior to
handing over inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned after handing
over inspection, with Engineer comments. Revise content of all document sets as
C
required prior to final submission.
Q
D. The Contractor shall submit four sets of revised final volumes in final form within
two weeks after handing over inspection.
28.1.8 Schedule of Submittals

A. The Contractor shall provide Schedule of Submittals as required.

END OF SECTION
Page 139
op V1
C -
y
C
C
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
Q
(VOLUME III)
DIVISION-02
SITE WORKS
DOCUMENT NO: 511

FIRST EDITION
DECEMBER- 2016
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Document No: 511

First Edition
December-2016
PO Box 20
publisher
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of Contents .......................................................................................................................... i
List of Tables ............................................................................................................................. xiv
1. BUILDING DEMOLITION (SECTION 02060).......................................................................... 1
1.1. Part 1 General ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1.1 Related Documents ..................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.2 Submittals .................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.3 Project Record Documents .......................................................................................................... 1
1.1.4 Qualifications................................................................................................................................ 1
op V1
1.1.5 Regulatory Requirements ............................................................................................................ 1
1.1.6 Sequencing .................................................................................................................................. 2
1.1.7 Scheduling ................................................................................................................................... 2
1.2. Part 2 Products...................................................................................................................... 2
C -
y
1.2.1
C
Fill Materials ................................................................................................................................. 2
1.3. Part 3 Execution .................................................................................................................... 2
C
1.3.1 Preparation................................................................................................................................... 2
1.3.2 Demolition Requirements ............................................................................................................. 3
Q
1.3.3 Demolition .................................................................................................................................... 3

2. MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELLING (SECTION 02072) ........................................... 5
2.1. Part 1 General ........................................................................................................................ 5
2.1.1 Related Documents ..................................................................................................................... 5
2.1.2 Submittals for Review .................................................................................................................. 5
2.1.3 Submittals for Closeout ................................................................................................................ 5
2.1.5 Sequencing .................................................................................................................................. 6
2.1.6 Scheduling ................................................................................................................................... 6
2.1.7 Project Conditions ........................................................................................................................ 6
2.2. Part 2 Products...................................................................................................................... 7
2.3. Part 3 Execution .................................................................................................................... 7
2.3.1 Preparation................................................................................................................................... 7
2.3.2 Demolition .................................................................................................................................... 7
2.3.3 Schedules .................................................................................................................................... 7
3. SITE CLEARING (SECTION 02110) ....................................................................................... 8
3.1. Part 1 General ........................................................................................................................ 8
3.1.1 Related Sections .......................................................................................................................... 8
3.2. Part 2 Products...................................................................................................................... 8
3.2.1 Materials....................................................................................................................................... 8
3.3. Part 3 Execution .................................................................................................................... 8
Page i
TOC FIRST EDITION -DECEMBER 2016
3.3.1 Preparation................................................................................................................................... 8
3.3.2 Protection ..................................................................................................................................... 8
3.3.3 Clearing ........................................................................................................................................ 9
3.3.4 Removal ....................................................................................................................................... 9
3.3.5 Topsoil Excavation ....................................................................................................................... 9
4. STRUCTURE MOVING (SECTION 02120) ........................................................................... 10
4.1. Part 1 General ...................................................................................................................... 10
4.1.1 Related Documents ................................................................................................................... 10
4.1.2 Submittals at Project Closeout ................................................................................................... 10
4.1.3 Quality Assurance ...................................................................................................................... 10
op V1
4.1.4 Regulatory Requirements .......................................................................................................... 10
4.1.5 Pre-Moving Conference ............................................................................................................. 10
4.1.6 Project Condition ........................................................................................................................ 11
C -
4.2. Part 2 Products.................................................................................................................... 11
y
4.2.1
C
Equipment and Materials ........................................................................................................... 11
4.3. Part 3 Execution .................................................................................................................. 11
C
4.3.1 Examination ............................................................................................................................... 11
4.3.2 Preparation................................................................................................................................. 11
Q
4.3.3 Raise Structure .......................................................................................................................... 12

4.3.4 Move Structure ........................................................................................................................... 12
4.3.5 Reinstall Structure ...................................................................................................................... 12
4.3.6 Re-Installation Tolerances ......................................................................................................... 12
4.3.7 Damage Repair .......................................................................................................................... 13
4.3.8 Original Site................................................................................................................................ 13
4.3.9 Cleaning ..................................................................................................................................... 13
5. SOIL MATERIAL (SECTION 02205) ..................................................................................... 14
5.1. Part 1 General ...................................................................................................................... 14
5.1.1 Related Sections ........................................................................................................................ 14
5.1.2 References ................................................................................................................................. 14
5.1.3 Submittals for Review ................................................................................................................ 14
5.1.4 Submittals for Information .......................................................................................................... 15
5.2. Part 2 Products.................................................................................................................... 15
5.2.1 Subsoil Materials ........................................................................................................................ 15
5.2.2 Topsoil Materials ........................................................................................................................ 15
5.2.3 Source Quality Control ............................................................................................................... 16
5.3. Part 3 Execution .................................................................................................................. 16
5.3.1 Soil Removal .............................................................................................................................. 16
5.3.2 Stockpiling .................................................................................................................................. 16
5.3.3 Stockpile Clean-up ..................................................................................................................... 16
Page ii
6. AGGREGATE MATERIALS (SECTION 02207) .................................................................... 17

6.1. Part 1 General ...................................................................................................................... 17
6.1.2 References ................................................................................................................................. 17
6.1.4 Submittals for Information .......................................................................................................... 18
6.2. Part 2 Products.................................................................................................................... 18
6.2.1 Coarse Aggregate Materials ...................................................................................................... 18
6.2.2 Fine Aggregate Materials ........................................................................................................... 18
op V1
6.2.3 Source Quality Control ............................................................................................................... 18
6.3. Part 3 Execution .................................................................................................................. 19
6.3.1 Stockpiling .................................................................................................................................. 19
6.3.2
C -
Stockpile Clean-up ..................................................................................................................... 19
y
7.
C
ROUGH GRADING (SECTION 02211) ................................................................................. 20
7.1. Part 1 General ...................................................................................................................... 20
C
Q
7.1.3 Project Record Documents ........................................................................................................ 20

7.2. Part 2 Products.................................................................................................................... 20
7.3. Part 3 Execution .................................................................................................................. 20
7.3.1 Examination ............................................................................................................................... 20
7.3.2 Preparation................................................................................................................................. 21
7.3.3 Subsoil Excavation ..................................................................................................................... 21
7.3.4 Filling .......................................................................................................................................... 21
7.3.5 Tolerances ................................................................................................................................. 21
7.3.6 Field Quality Control ................................................................................................................... 22
7.3.7 Schedules .................................................................................................................................. 22
8. DEWATERING IN AREAS OF HIGH WATER TABLE (SECTION 02221) ............................ 23
8.1. Part 1 General ...................................................................................................................... 23
8.1.1.1. References ............................................................................................................................ 23
8.2. Part 2 Products.................................................................................................................... 23
8.3. Part 3 Execution .................................................................................................................. 23
8.3.1 Submittals .................................................................................................................................. 23
8.3.2 Execution ................................................................................................................................... 23
9. EXCAVATION (SECTION 02222) ......................................................................................... 25
9.1. Part 1 General ...................................................................................................................... 25
Page iii
9.1.2 Field Measurements .................................................................................................................. 25

9.1.3 References ................................................................................................................................. 25
9.1.5 Protection of Antiquities ............................................................................................................. 25
9.2. Part 2 Products.................................................................................................................... 26
9.3. Part 3 Execution .................................................................................................................. 26
9.3.1 General ...................................................................................................................................... 26
9.3.2 Preparation................................................................................................................................. 27
9.3.3 Support of Excavations .............................................................................................................. 27
9.3.4 Excavating.................................................................................................................................. 28
op V1
9.3.5 Slips, fall and Excess Excavation. ............................................................................................. 28
9.3.6 Maintaining and Supporting Services and Structures ................................................................ 29
9.3.7 Keeping the Excavations in Dry Condition and Dewatering ....................................................... 31
9.3.8
C -
Removal of Unsound Foundations and Soft Spots .................................................................... 33
y
9.3.9
C
Field Quality Control ................................................................................................................... 33
10. BACKFILLING (SECTION 02223) ........................................................................................ 34
C
10.1. Part 1 General .................................................................................................................. 34
Q
10.1.2 References ................................................................................................................................. 34

10.2. PART 2 Products ............................................................................................................. 35
10.2.1 Fill Materials and Accessories for Backfilling of Excavations Other than in Roads and
Paved/Tiled Areas. .................................................................................................................................. 35
10.2.2 Fill Materials and Accessories for Backfilling of Excavations in Roads and Paved/tiled Areas. 35
10.3. Part 3 Execution .............................................................................................................. 35
10.3.1 Examination ............................................................................................................................... 35
10.3.2 Preparation................................................................................................................................. 35
10.3.3 Backfilling ................................................................................................................................... 35
10.3.4 Tolerances ................................................................................................................................. 37
10.3.6 Protection of Finished Work ....................................................................................................... 37
10.3.7 Schedule .................................................................................................................................... 37
10.3.8 Reinstatement of Surfaces Other Than Asphalt Paved Roads .................................................. 39
11. TRENCHING (SECTION 02225) ........................................................................................... 40
11.1. Part 1 General .................................................................................................................. 40
11.1.2 References ................................................................................................................................. 40
11.1.3 Definitions .................................................................................................................................. 41
11.1.4 Field Measurements .................................................................................................................. 41
11.1.5 Coordination ............................................................................................................................... 41
11.2. Part 2 Products................................................................................................................ 41
Page iv
11.2.1 Fill Materials and Accessories for Backfilling of Trenches other than in Roads or Paved / Tiled
Areas. 41
11.2.2 Fill Materials and Accessories for Backfilling of Trenches in Roads and Paved/Tiled Areas. ... 41
11.3. Part 3 Execution .............................................................................................................. 41
11.3.1 General ...................................................................................................................................... 41
11.3.2 Preparation................................................................................................................................. 42
11.3.3 Support of Trenches .................................................................................................................. 43
11.3.4 Excavation.................................................................................................................................. 43
11.3.5 Backfilling ................................................................................................................................... 44
11.3.6 Tolerances ................................................................................................................................. 45
op V1
11.3.8 Protection of Finished Work ....................................................................................................... 45
12. ROCK REMOVAL (SECTION 02229) ................................................................................... 46
Part 1 General .................................................................................................................. 46
12.1.
C -
y
C
12.1.2 Definitions .................................................................................................................................. 46
C
Q

12.1.6 Project Conditions ...................................................................................................................... 46
12.1.7 Scheduling ................................................................................................................................. 47
12.2. Part 2 Products................................................................................................................ 47
12.2.1 Materials..................................................................................................................................... 47
12.3. Part 3 Execution .............................................................................................................. 47
12.3.1 Examination ............................................................................................................................... 47
12.3.2 Preparation................................................................................................................................. 47
12.3.3 Rock Removal by a Mechanical Method .................................................................................... 47
13. AGGREGATE BASE COURSE (SECTION 02231) ............................................................... 49
13.1. Part 1 General .................................................................................................................. 49
13.1.2 References ................................................................................................................................. 49
13.2. Part 2 Products................................................................................................................ 50
13.2.1 Material Requirements ............................................................................................................... 50
13.2.2 Fine Aggregates ......................................................................................................................... 50
13.2.3 Coarse Aggregates .................................................................................................................... 50
13.2.4 Types of Aggregate Sub-Base and Base Courses .................................................................... 51
13.2.5 Spreaders................................................................................................................................... 52
13.2.6 Central Mixers ............................................................................................................................ 52
13.3. Part 3 Execution .............................................................................................................. 52
Page v
13.3.1 Examination ............................................................................................................................... 52

13.3.2 Preparation................................................................................................................................. 52
13.3.3 Screening and Mixture of the Materials ..................................................................................... 52
13.3.4 Aggregate Spreading and Compacting ...................................................................................... 53
13.3.5 Protection of Surface ................................................................................................................. 54
13.3.6 Tolerances ................................................................................................................................. 54
14. RIPRAP (SECTION 02275) ................................................................................................... 56
14.1. Part 1 General .................................................................................................................. 56
op V1
14.2. Part 2 Products................................................................................................................ 56
14.2.1 Materials..................................................................................................................................... 56
14.3.
C -
Part 3 Execution .............................................................................................................. 56
y
C
14.3.1 Placement .................................................................................................................................. 56
15. ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING (SECTION 02510) ............................................................ 57
C
15.1. Part 1 General .................................................................................................................. 57
15.1.1. Related Documents ............................................................................................................... 57
Q
15.1.2. References ............................................................................................................................ 57

15.1.3. Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................. 58
15.1.4. Regulatory Requirements ...................................................................................................... 58
15.1.5. Environmental Requirements ................................................................................................ 58
15.2. Part 2 Products................................................................................................................ 58
15.2.1 Bituminous Prime Coat Materials ............................................................................................... 58
15.2.2 Materials for Asphalt Mixes ........................................................................................................ 58
15.2.3 Bituminous Tack Coat ................................................................................................................ 59
15.2.4 Asphaltic Concrete Base and Wearing Courses ........................................................................ 59
15.2.5 Asphalt Paving Mix ..................................................................................................................... 59
15.2.6 Source Quality Control and Tests .............................................................................................. 60
15.3. Part 3 Execution .............................................................................................................. 61
15.3.1 Examination ............................................................................................................................... 61
15.3.2 Subbase ..................................................................................................................................... 61
15.3.3 Preparation - Bituminous Prime Coat ........................................................................................ 61
15.3.4 Preparation - Tack Coat ............................................................................................................. 61
15.3.5 Preparation - Other .................................................................................................................... 61
15.3.6 Placing Asphalt Pavement - Base Course ................................................................................. 61
15.3.7 Spreading and Finishing ............................................................................................................ 62
15.3.8 Rolling ........................................................................................................................................ 62
15.3.9 Transverse Joints ....................................................................................................................... 63
15.3.10 Longitudinal Joints ................................................................................................................. 64
Page vi
15.3.11 Edges..................................................................................................................................... 64
15.3.12 Breakdown Rolling ................................................................................................................. 64
15.3.13 Intermediate Rolling ............................................................................................................... 65
15.3.14 Finish Rolling ......................................................................................................................... 65
15.3.15 Placing Asphalt Pavement - Wearing Course ....................................................................... 65
15.3.16 Curbs ..................................................................................................................................... 65
15.3.17 Tolerances ............................................................................................................................. 66
15.3.18 Field Quality Control .............................................................................................................. 66
15.3.19 Protection............................................................................................................................... 66
16. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING (SECTION 02520) ......................................... 67
op V1
16.1. Part 1 General .................................................................................................................. 67
16.1.2 Referenes .................................................................................................................................. 67
C -
16.1.3 Performance Requirements ....................................................................................................... 67
y
C
C
16.1.7 Environmental Requirements ..................................................................................................... 68
Q
16.2. Part 2 Products................................................................................................................ 68

16.2.1 Form Materials ........................................................................................................................... 68
16.2.2 Reinforcement............................................................................................................................ 68
16.2.3 Concrete Materials ..................................................................................................................... 68
16.2.4 Accessories ................................................................................................................................ 68
16.2.5 Concrete Mix .............................................................................................................................. 69
16.2.6 Source Quality Control and Tests .............................................................................................. 69
16.3. Part 3 Execution .............................................................................................................. 69
16.3.1 Examination ............................................................................................................................... 69
16.3.2 Subbase ..................................................................................................................................... 69
16.3.3 Preparation................................................................................................................................. 69
16.3.4 Forming ...................................................................................................................................... 69
16.3.5 Reinforcement............................................................................................................................ 70
16.3.6 Placing Concrete ........................................................................................................................ 70
16.3.7 Joints .......................................................................................................................................... 70
16.3.8 Exposed Aggregate.................................................................................................................... 70
16.3.9 Finishing ..................................................................................................................................... 70
16.3.10 Joint Sealing .......................................................................................................................... 71
16.3.11 Tolerances ............................................................................................................................. 71
16.3.12 Field Quality Control .............................................................................................................. 71
16.3.13 Protection............................................................................................................................... 71
17. CHAMBERS AND COVERS (SECTION 02607) ................................................................... 72
Page vii
17.1. Part 1 General .................................................................................................................. 72

17.1.2 References ................................................................................................................................. 72
17.1.4 Qualifications.............................................................................................................................. 72
17.2. Part 2 Products................................................................................................................ 72
17.2.1 Materials..................................................................................................................................... 72
17.2.2 Quality Control ........................................................................................................................... 74
17.3. Part 3 Execution .............................................................................................................. 75
17.3.1 General ...................................................................................................................................... 75
op V1
17.3.2 Examination ............................................................................................................................... 75
17.3.3 Preparation................................................................................................................................. 75
17.3.4 Chamber Construction ............................................................................................................... 75
C -
17.3.5 Construction of New Chambers on Existing Irrigation Water Systems ...................................... 76
y
C
18. GRP PIPES (SECTION 02630) ............................................................................................. 77
18.1. Part 1 General .................................................................................................................. 77
C
18.1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 77
Q
18.1.3 Standards ................................................................................................................................... 77

18.1.4 Submittals .................................................................................................................................. 78
18.1.4.1 Products and Materials Approval ........................................................................................... 78
18.1.4.2 Method Statements................................................................................................................ 80
18.1.4.3 Drawings ................................................................................................................................ 80
18.1.5 Quality Control ........................................................................................................................... 81
18.1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling.................................................................................................. 81
18.2. Part 2 Products................................................................................................................ 82
18.2.1 Pipe Design Requirements ........................................................................................................ 82
18.2.2 Pipes and Fittings....................................................................................................................... 82
18.2.2.1 Buried GRP............................................................................................................................ 82
18.2.2.2 Exposed GRP ........................................................................................................................ 89
18.2.3 Quality Control Tests.................................................................................................................. 90
18.2.3.1 GRP Pipes and Fittings ......................................................................................................... 90
18.2.4 Product Warranty ....................................................................................................................... 93
18.3. Part 3 Execution .............................................................................................................. 93
18.3.1 Pipe Installation .......................................................................................................................... 94
18.3.2 Mandatory Installation Monitoring .............................................................................................. 95
18.3.3 Field Hydrostatic Testing Of Pipelines ....................................................................................... 95
18.3.3.1 General. ................................................................................................................................. 95
18.3.3.2 Field Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Pipelines .................................................................... 96
18.3.4 Field Deflection Measurement of Pipelines ................................................................................ 97
Page viii
19. DI PIPES (SECTION 02640) ................................................................................................. 99

19.1. Part 1 General .................................................................................................................. 99
19.1.1 Scope ......................................................................................................................................... 99
19.1.3 Standards ................................................................................................................................... 99
19.1.4 Submittals ................................................................................................................................ 100
19.1.4.1 Products and Materials Approval. ........................................................................................ 100
19.1.4.2 Method Statements.............................................................................................................. 100
19.1.4.3 Working drawings. ............................................................................................................... 100
19.1.5 Quality Control ......................................................................................................................... 101
op V1
19.1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling................................................................................................ 101
19.2. Part 2 Products.............................................................................................................. 102
19.2.1 General Requirements ............................................................................................................. 102
C -
19.2.2 Wall, Floor, Slab and Roof Penetrations .................................................................................. 102
y
C
19.2.3 Protective Coatings .................................................................................................................. 102
19.2.4 Marking of Pipes and Fittings ................................................................................................... 104
C
19.3. Part3 Execution ............................................................................................................ 104
19.3.1 Installation ................................................................................................................................ 104
Q
19.3.2 Jointing Pipes and Fittings ....................................................................................................... 104

19.3.3 Testing ..................................................................................................................................... 104
20. HDPE PIPES (SECTION 02650) ......................................................................................... 105
20.1. Part 1 General ................................................................................................................ 105
20.1.1 Scope ....................................................................................................................................... 105
20.1.2 Related Documents ................................................................................................................. 105
20.1.3 Applicable Standards and Codes ............................................................................................. 105
20.1.4 Submittals ................................................................................................................................ 106
20.1.4.1 Products and Materials Approval. ........................................................................................ 106
20.1.4.2 Method Statements.............................................................................................................. 107
20.1.4.3 Drawings .............................................................................................................................. 107
20.1.5 Quality Control ......................................................................................................................... 107
20.1.6 Delivery, Storage, and Handling............................................................................................... 108
20.2. Part 2 Products.............................................................................................................. 108
20.2.1 Technical Requirements .......................................................................................................... 108
20.2.1.1. Material Requirements .................................................................................................... 109
20.2.1.2. Physical Properties .......................................................................................................... 109
20.2.1.3. Pipe Dimensions (Geometrical Characteristics).............................................................. 110
20.2.1.4. Pipe Appearance ............................................................................................................. 110
20.2.1.5. Fittings ............................................................................................................................. 110
20.2.1.6. Fittings Appearance ........................................................................................................ 110
20.2.1.7. Fittings Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 110
Page ix
20.2.1.8. Wall Thickness of Fittings ............................................................................................... 110

20.2.2 Quality Control Tests................................................................................................................ 113
20.3. Part 3 Execution ............................................................................................................ 115
20.3.1 Pipe Installation ........................................................................................................................ 115
20.3.2 Butt Fusion Jointing.................................................................................................................. 116
20.3.3 Saddle/Sidewall Jointing .......................................................................................................... 117
20.3.4 Electro fusion Jointing .............................................................................................................. 117
20.3.5 Mechanical Joints and Fittings ................................................................................................. 118
20.3.6 Hydrostatic Testing .................................................................................................................. 118
20.3.7 Deflection Measurement of Pipelines ...................................................................................... 119
op V1
21. UPVC PIPES (SECTION 02660) ......................................................................................... 121
21.1. Part 1 General ................................................................................................................ 121
21.1.1 Scope ....................................................................................................................................... 121
C -
y
C
21.1.3 Standards ................................................................................................................................. 121
21.1.4 Submittals ................................................................................................................................ 122
C
21.1.4.1 Products and materials approval. .................................................................................... 122
21.1.4.2 Method Statements ......................................................................................................... 123
Q
21.1.4.3 Drawings ......................................................................................................................... 123

21.1.5 Quality Control ......................................................................................................................... 123
21.1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling................................................................................................ 124
21.2. Part 2 Products.............................................................................................................. 124
21.2.1 Pipe Design Requirements ...................................................................................................... 124
21.2.2 Pipes and Fittings..................................................................................................................... 125
21.2.3.1 uPVC Pipes and Fittings. ................................................................................................ 126
21.2.3.2 Type Tests ....................................................................................................................... 126
21.3. Part 3 Execution ............................................................................................................ 128
21.3.2 Hydrostatic Testing of Pipelines ............................................................................................... 129
21.3.3 Deflection Measurement of Pipelines ...................................................................................... 131
22. STEEL PIPES (SECTION 02670) ....................................................................................... 132
22.1. Part 1 General ................................................................................................................ 132
22.1.1 Scope ....................................................................................................................................... 132
22.1.3 Standards ................................................................................................................................. 132
22.1.4 Submittals ................................................................................................................................ 133
22.1.4.1 Products and materials approval. .................................................................................... 133
22.1.4.3 Drawings ......................................................................................................................... 134
Page x
22.1.5 Quality Control ......................................................................................................................... 134

22.2. Part 2 Products.............................................................................................................. 135
22.2.1 Design Considerations ............................................................................................................. 135
22.2.2 Pipes ........................................................................................................................................ 135
22.2.3 Fittings...................................................................................................................................... 135
22.2.4 Flanges .................................................................................................................................... 136
22.2.5 Gaskets and Bolting ................................................................................................................. 136
22.3. Part 3 Execution ............................................................................................................ 137
op V1
22.3.2 Hydrostatic Testing .................................................................................................................. 138
23. SUBSOIL DRAINAGE (SECTION 02722)........................................................................... 140
23.1.
C -
Part 1 General ................................................................................................................ 140
y
C
23.1.1 Related Sections ...................................................................................................................... 140
23.1.2 Standards ................................................................................................................................. 140
C
23.1.3 Definitions ................................................................................................................................ 140
23.1.4 Submittals for Review .............................................................................................................. 140
Q
23.1.5 Submittals for Information ........................................................................................................ 141

23.1.6 Submittals at Project Closeout ................................................................................................. 141
23.1.7 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................... 141
23.1.8 Qualifications............................................................................................................................ 141
23.1.9 Coordination ............................................................................................................................. 141
23.1.10 Delivery, Storage, and Handling .......................................................................................... 141
23.2. Part 2 Products.............................................................................................................. 142
23.2.1 Pipe Materials .......................................................................................................................... 142
23.2.2 Drain Pipes............................................................................................................................... 142
23.2.3 Gravel Envelope Materials ....................................................................................................... 142
23.2.4 Geo-Textile Filter for Gravel Envelope ..................................................................................... 143
23.3. Part 3 Execution ............................................................................................................ 143
23.3.1 Examination ............................................................................................................................. 143
23.3.2 Preparation............................................................................................................................... 144
23.3.3 Bedding .................................................................................................................................... 144
23.3.4 Installation –Pipes .................................................................................................................... 144
23.3.5 Installation – Drain Pipes ......................................................................................................... 144
23.3.6 Installing Pipes through Structures .......................................................................................... 145
23.3.7 Construction of Thrust Blocks .................................................................................................. 146
23.3.8 Field Quality Control ................................................................................................................. 146
23.3.9 Protection ................................................................................................................................. 147
24. IRRIGATION SYSTEM (SECTION 02800) .......................................................................... 148
Page xi
24.1. Part 1 General ................................................................................................................ 148

24.1.1 Scope ....................................................................................................................................... 148
24.1.2 Related Sections ...................................................................................................................... 148
24.1.3 Standards ................................................................................................................................. 148
24.1.4 Quality Control ......................................................................................................................... 149
24.1.5 Additional Conditions ............................................................................................................... 150
24.2. Part 2 New Installations ................................................................................................ 150
24.2.1 Scope ....................................................................................................................................... 150
24.2.2 Submittals ................................................................................................................................ 150
op V1
24.2.4 Warranty .................................................................................................................................. 154
24.2.5 Compliances ............................................................................................................................ 154
24.3. Part 3 Material Specifications ...................................................................................... 155
C -
24.3.1 General .................................................................................................................................... 155
y
C
24.3.2 Pipes and Fittings..................................................................................................................... 155
24.3.3 Detectable Underground Warning Tape .................................................................................. 156
C
24.3.4 Thrust Blocks ........................................................................................................................... 156
24.3.5 Valves and Accessories ........................................................................................................... 156
Q
24.3.6 Valve Chambers and Valve Boxes .......................................................................................... 160

24.3.7 Bubbler ..................................................................................................................................... 162
24.3.8 Drippers.................................................................................................................................... 163
24.3.9 Sprinklers ................................................................................................................................. 164
24.3.10 Filters ................................................................................................................................... 167
24.3.11 Irrigation Control System. .................................................................................................... 168
24.4. Part 4 Execution ............................................................................................................ 171
24.4.1 Design Criteria ......................................................................................................................... 171
24.4.2 Installation Procedure .............................................................................................................. 171
24.4.3 Excavation................................................................................................................................ 172
24.4.4 Backfilling ................................................................................................................................. 172
24.4.5.1 Storage ............................................................................................................................ 172
24.4.5.2 Installation ....................................................................................................................... 172
24.4.5.3 uPVC installation ............................................................................................................. 173
24.4.5.4 Pipe laying on a Granular Bed......................................................................................... 174
24.4.5.5 Pipe laying on Natural Formation .................................................................................... 174
24.4.6 Anchor and Thrust Blocks ........................................................................................................ 174
24.4.7 Valves ...................................................................................................................................... 175
24.4.8 Valve Boxes and Chambers .................................................................................................... 176
24.4.9 End Flushing Points ................................................................................................................. 176
24.4.10 Irrigation Equipment............................................................................................................. 176
Page xii
24.4.11 Electrical Installations .......................................................................................................... 176

24.4.12 Field Controllers Installations ............................................................................................... 176
24.4.13 Field Testing ........................................................................................................................ 177
24.4.14 Automatic System Commissioning ...................................................................................... 178
24.4.15 Irrigation and Control System .............................................................................................. 178
25. IRRIGATION SYSTEM (SECTION 02850) .......................................................................... 179
25.1. Part 1 General ................................................................................................................ 179
25.1.1 Scope ....................................................................................................................................... 179
25.2. Part 2 Operation and Maintenance .............................................................................. 179
25.2.1 General .................................................................................................................................... 179
op V1
25.2.2 Operations and Maintenance Manuals .................................................................................... 179
25.2.3 Organizational Structure .......................................................................................................... 179
25.2.4 System Operation .................................................................................................................... 179
C -
25.2.5 Landscape Irrigation Scheduling .............................................................................................. 181
y
C
25.2.6 Initial Operation Evaluation ...................................................................................................... 183
25.2.7 System Maintenance................................................................................................................ 184
C
25.2.8 Maintenance Components ....................................................................................................... 185
25.2.9 Emergency Repairs.................................................................................................................. 189
Q
Page xiii
LIST OF TABLES
Table 13.2-1: Types of Aggregate Sub-Base and Base Courses .................................................. 51
Table 18.1-1: Product Information for GRP Pipe and Fittings ....................................................... 79
Table 18.2-1: Summary of test requirements for non-end-load-bearing flexible joints ................... 88
Table 18.2-2: GRP Quality Control Tests ...................................................................................... 92
Table 18.2-3: GRP Type Tests (Long Term Tests for a minimum of 10,000 hrs.) ......................... 93
Table 19.2-1: Thickness of Internal Polyurethane Application ..................................................... 103
Table 19.2-2: External Coating of the Pipes Depending on the Soil Conditions .......................... 103
Table 20.1-1: Product Information for HDPE Pipe and Fittings ................................................... 106
Table 20.2-1: HDPE Resin Properties......................................................................................... 111
Table 20.2-2: HDPE Pipe Properties .......................................................................................... 112
Table 20.2-3: HDPE Injection Molded Fittings Properties ........................................................... 113
op V1
Table 21.1-1: Product Information For uPVC Pipe and Fittings ................................................... 122
Table 21.2-1: uPVC Hydraulic Test ............................................................................................. 127
Table 23.2-1: Gradation relationship between the base material and gravel envelope for most soils
................................................................................................................................................... 142
Table 23.2-2: Minimum Requirements for Geotextile .................................................................. 143
C -
Table 24.3-1: Valve Boxes - ASTM standards ............................................................................ 161
y
Table 25.2-1: Guidelines for corrective measures ....................................................................... 183
C
Table 25.2-2: Maintenance Component ...................................................................................... 188
C
Q
Page xiv
1. BUILDING DEMOLITION (SECTION 02060)
1.1. Part 1 General
1.1.1 Related Documents

01300 Submittals
01400 Quality Control
op V1
01600 Materials and Equipment
01700 Contract Close Out
02110
C -
General Earthworks
y
02205
C
Soil Materials
02207 Aggregate Materials

C
02223 Backfilling
Q
1.1.2 Submittals
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate demolition and removal sequence and location of

salvageable items; location and construction of barricades, fences and temporary
work.
C. Method Statement: Submit for the Engineer’s review and approval a method
statement indicating demolition procedure, proposed measures to protect existing,
but not limited to, permanent structures, roads and pavements from demolition
activities.

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Accurately record the conditions of existing permanent structures, actual locations

of capped utilities and subsurface obstructions.
1.1.4 Qualifications
A. Demolition Firm: Company specialising in performing the Work of this Section with
minimum 5 years documented experience.
1.1.5 Regulatory Requirements

A. Conform to applicable codes for demolition of structures, safety of adjacent
structures, dust control, runoff control and disposal.
PAGE 1
B. Obtain required permits from authorities.
C. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their
requirements.
D. Do not close or obstruct roadways, sidewalks or hydrants without permits.
E. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures when discovering hazardous or

contaminated materials.
F. Obtain written permission from property owner.
1.1.6 Sequencing
op V1
A. Sequence work under the provisions of the relevant Sections.
B. Sequence activities to demolish the Work in stages as agreed with the Division
and Engineer.
1.1.7 Scheduling C -
y
A.
C
Schedule work under the provisions of the relevant Sections.
C
B. Schedule Work to follow new construction.
C. Describe demolition removal procedures and schedule.

Q
D. Working hours for demolition work to be agreed with Division/Engineer.
1.2. Part 2 Products

1.2.1 Fill Materials
A. Fill Material: specified in Section 02205 and 02207.
1.3. Part 3 Execution

1.3.1 Preparation
A. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices.
B. Protect existing landscaping materials, appurtenances and structures, which are

not to be demolished.
C. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. Provide bracing and

shoring.
D. Mark location of utilities.
E. Disconnect all affected services as directed by the Engineer and make sure any
necessary temporary arrangements are made.
F. Before demolishing pumping stations and valve chambers thoroughly flush out the
pumps, wet wells and pumping mains. De-sludge and clean the sump and dispose
of all surplus water and residuals in accordance with regulatory requirements.
PAGE 2
G. Take out, clean and make good salvageable items, such as the pump guide rails,
delivery pipe work, valves, fittings, float switches, cables, control equipment, kiosk
basket stone traps, access covers, frames and ladders. Deliver all salvaged items
to nominated warehouse.
H. De-sludge and clean septic tanks, cesspits, soak away pits, manholes and
chambers. Dispose of all surplus water and residuals in accordance with
regulatory requirements before proceeding with the demolition of these structures.
1.3.2 Demolition Requirements

A. Survey and record the conditions of the existing permanent structures before
commencing demolition activities.
op V1
B. Conduct demolition to minimise interference with adjacent structures and
occupancies.
C. Cease operations immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger.

Notify the Engineer. Do not resume operations until directed.
C -
y
D.
C
Conduct operations with minimum interference to public or private accesses.
Maintain protected egress and access at all times.
C
E. Obtain written permission from adjacent property Divisions when demolition
equipment will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property.
Q
F. Sprinkle Work with water to minimise dust. Provide hoses and water connections
for this purpose.
G. Submit in writing to the Engineer the proposals for de-sledging and cleaning of
structures such as septic tanks, cesspits, soak pits, manholes, chambers,
pumping station sumps or other. Should these methods be found unsatisfactory,
immediately employ improved method for de-sledging and cleaning as directed by
the Engineer. Do not break out any structure until the sludge within it has been
totally removed.
1.3.3 Demolition
A. Disconnect, cap and identify designated utilities within demolition areas.
B. Demolish the existing structures on Site to a minimum depth of 500 mm below

any new permanent works or finished ground level or to such other level as
directed by the Engineer.
C. Remove reinforced concrete slabs on grade.
D. Upon de-sledging and cleaning of structures such as septic tanks, cesspits, soak
pits, manholes, chambers, pumping station sumps and the like and receipt of the
Engineer’s acceptance, puncture the base of the structure and break out the roof
slab and tops of walls and use this material to partially fill the void. Fill the
remaining void with sand watered and well compacted in accordance with Section
02223. Remove manhole frames and covers and hand them over as directed by
the Engineer.
E. Empty any other buried tanks located within demolition area. Remove buried
tanks, components, and piping from site or Fill tanks with sand or fine gravel and
cover with fill, remove piping as directed by the Engineer.
PAGE 3
F. When instructed by the Engineer to abandon only and not fully demolish a
structure, fill the void with sand watered and well compacted in accordance with
Section 02223 or grout as directed by the Engineer up to the underside of the
cover slab. Remove and hand over manhole covers and frames as directed by the
Engineer, seal all openings with a concrete slab and reinstate the final surfaces in
accordance with the Engineer’s instructions.
G. Remove materials to be re-installed or retained in a manner to prevent damage.

Store and protect in accordance with requirements of Section 01600.
H. Backfill open pits and holes caused as a result of demolition in accordance with
Section 02223.
I. Rough grade and compact areas affected by demolition to maintain site grades
op V1
and contours.
J. Except as provided for above, remove demolished materials from site. Any
remaining debris resulting from demolition work shall become the property of the
Contractor who shall be responsible for its disposal off Site to an approved tip or
otherwise. C -
y
K.
C
Do not burn or bury materials on site. Leave site in clean condition.
C
L. Remove temporary works.
Q
END OF SECTION
PAGE 4
2. MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELLING

(SECTION 02072)
2.1. Part 1 General

A. This section includes building interior demolition work such as removing interior
partitions, capping utilities, altering exterior wall cladding or roof membrane
construction, clean up and preparation for renovations or new work. This work is
op V1
usually non-structural, not affecting the building frame.

01300 Submittals
01310
C -
Work Plans
y
01400
C
Quality Control
C
01700 Contract Close Out

Q
01730 Operation and Maintenance
02205 Soil Materials
02223 Backfilling

A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate demolition, removal sequence and location of

salvageable items, location and construction of temporary work.
2.1.3 Submittals for Closeout

A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance
Data
B. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities

and subsurface obstructions

A. Conform to applicable code and ADM requirements for demolition work, dust
control, products requiring electrical disconnection and re-connection and disposal
of waste material.
B. Obtain required permits from authorities.
PAGE 5
C. Do not close or obstruct egress width to any building or site exit.
D. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without prior written
notice to Division.
E. Conform to procedures applicable when hazardous or contaminated materials are

discovered.
2.1.5 Sequencing
A. Sequence activities in the order and stages shown on the drawings and as
specified
2.1.6 Scheduling
op V1
A. Section 01300 – Submittals and Section 01310 – Work Plans.
B. Program work in coordination and coincidence with the new construction.
C.
C -
Describe demolition removal procedures and schedule.
y
D.
C
Perform noisy, malodorous and dusty works only during the timings advised by
the Engineer.
C
2.1.7 Project Conditions
A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building
Q
areas.
B. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger and notify the

Engineer. Do not resume operations until directed.
C. Carry out demolition of existing structures on Site to the minimum depth of 500
mm below any new permanent works or finished ground level or to such other
level as directed by the Engineer.
D. Any remaining debris resulting from demolition work is the property of the
Contractor who will be responsible for its disposal off Site to an approved tip or
otherwise.
E. Reinstate all Properties whether public or private affected by the Works,

Temporary Works, constructional plant, labour materials or transport to a
condition at least equal to the existing before the first entry onto them.
F. If in the opinion of the Engineer the Contractor has failed to take reasonable and
prompt action to discharge his obligations in the matter of reinstatements, the
Engineer will inform the Contractor in writing of his opinion in which circumstances
the Division reserves the right to carry out the reinstatement himself or to arrange
for it to be carried out by others or to make payments to the Divisions and the
occupiers in respect of such matters for which the Contractor is responsible. All
such costs incurred and payments made will be deducted from any monies due or
which will become due from the Division to the Contractor.
PAGE 6

2.3.1 Preparation
A. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and fencing at locations indicated.
B. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings.
C. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, odours, and
noise to permit continued Division occupancy.
op V1
D. Protect existing materials and areas which are not to be demolished.
E. Prevent movement of structure; provide bracing and shoring.
F.
C -
Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their
y
requirements.
C
G. Disconnect all affected services as directed by the Engineer and make any
temporary arrangements necessary.
C
H. Mark location and termination of utilities.
Q
I. Provide appropriate temporary signage including signage for exit or building

egress.
J. Prepare pump stations, valve chambers, septic tanks, cesspits, soak pits,
manholes and chambers for demolition in accordance with Section 02060.
2.3.2 Demolition
A. Disconnect, remove, cap, and identify designated utilities within demolition areas.
B. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing supporting structural

members and related works.
C. Remove demolished materials from site except where specifically noted

otherwise. Do not burn or bury materials on site.
D. Remove materials as Work progresses. Upon completion of Work, leave areas in

clean condition.
E. Remove temporary Work.
2.3.3 Schedules
A. Prepare Schedules for items that are to be salvaged and reused in construction
later or turned over to the Division.
B. List known items considered for retention by Division. These may include light
fixtures, special equipment, etc.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 7
3. SITE CLEARING (SECTION 02110)
3.1. Part 1 General

01300 Submittals
op V1
02211 Rough Grading.
02229 Rock Removal.

C -
y
C
A. Conform to applicable code for environmental requirements, disposal of debris,
C
burning debris on site and use of herbicides.
B. Coordinate clearing Work with utility companies.

Q
3.2.1 Materials
A. Herbicide: If used, it should be in accordance with the manufacturer's specification
and should be fit for its intended use. Whilst using such material all practicable
steps should be taken in terms of health and safety requirements.
3.3.1 Preparation
A. Verify that existing plant life designated to remain is tagged or identified.
B. Identify a salvage area for placing removed materials.
3.3.2 Protection
A. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain, from damage.
B. Protect trees, plant growth, and features designated to remain, as final

landscaping.
C. Protect bench marks, survey control points and existing structures from damage
or displacement.
PAGE 8
3.3.3 Clearing
A In the event that the Contractor is granted permission to remove planted areas, he
shall follow the instruction of DMAT. Any holes left by removal of trees and shrubs
shall be filled and compacted to the approval of the Engineer. Any debris shall be
disposed of to an approval tip.
B. Clear areas required for access to site and execution of Work.
C. Clear undergrowth and deadwood, without disturbing subsoil.
D. Apply herbicide to remaining stumps to inhibit growth.
3.3.4 Removal
op V1
A. Remove debris, rock, and extracted plant life from site.
B. Remove paving and curbs.
C.
C -
Kerbstones together with their concrete hunching and foundation shall be broken
y
C
out and disposed off from site.
D Paving slabs and their foundation shall be broken out and disposed off from site.
C
E. Paving slabs such as interlocking blocks bedded in sand shall be carefully
removed and stored, should the Engineer approve their subsequent re-use in the
Q
works or elsewhere.
F. Existing road signs shall be carefully taken down and handed over to the
appropriate authority.
3.3.5 Topsoil Excavation

A. Excavate topsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re-graded,
without mixing with foreign materials.
B. Do not excavate wet topsoil.
C. Stockpile in area designated on site to depth not exceeding 2.5 m and protect
from erosion.
D. Remove excess topsoil not intended for reuse, from site.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 9
4. STRUCTURE MOVING (SECTION 02120)
4.1. Part 1 General

A. This section includes the preparation and relocation of structures and directly
associated activities

01039 Coordination and Meetings
op V1
01300 Submittals
01600
C -
Materials and Equipment
y
01700
C
Contract Close Out
01730 Operations and Maintenance Data

C
4.1.2 Submittals at Project Closeout
Q
A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance

Data: Procedures for submittals.
B. Record actual locations of new utilities and services and foundation.

A. Mover Qualifications: Company specializing in relocation building structures with
minimum five years documented experience.
B. Retain services of a Structural Engineer for the following:

A. Arrange with authorities for traffic control, police escorts, and relocation of
services including the following:
1. Arrange for route of move with authorities.
2. To schedule disturbance of overhead utility services on route.
4.1.5 Pre-Moving Conference

A. Section 01039 - Coordination and meetings: Pre-move meetings.
B. Convene one week before starting work of this section to discuss the following:
1. Ascertain the method of determining damage to existing structure and

finishes, before and after the move.
2. Identify existing damage to sidewalks, roads, and curbs.
3. Identify method and responsibility for repairs after moving.
PAGE 10
4. Review the intended route for moving and dimensional clearances of

obstructions.
5. Coordination with affected utility companies.
6. Address coordination with authorities for permits, municipalities affected,
and traffic control.
4.1.6 Project Condition

A. Section 01039 - Coordination and meetings.
B. Sequence installation to ensure utility connection and reconnections are achieved

in an orderly and expeditious manner.
C. Arrange schedule with the Division's requirements.
op V1
C -
4.2.1 Equipment and Materials
y
A.
C
Transport, Equipment and Supports: As required to achieve a successful structure
move.
C
B. Fill Materials shall be as specified in the relevant Sections
Q
4.3.1 Examination
A. Section 01039 - Coordination and meeting: Verification of existing conditions and
condition of structure to be moved before starting work.
B. Verify availability and accessibility of transport routes. Verify route load limits to
ensure conditions are adequate to support moving loads of structure.
C. Identify utility services and obstructions to be removed, relocated, or abandoned

during progress of the work.
D. Damage Determination:
1. Before the move, inspect existing structure thoroughly and notify the
Division in writing of visible defects and factors which could affect safe
movement of structure to final location.
2. Compile a list of visible defects to building structure, finishes, and
accessories. This list will form the basis of determining required repair
work after the move.
3. Photograph interior surfaces for record purposes.
4.3.2 Preparation
A. Prepare site, route of transport, and destination site.
B. Reinforce, protect, cut, fill, and compact access bed, grade, and surface road as
necessary to safely move the structure and to prevent damage.
PAGE 11
C. Coordinate the work of municipal utility disconnection and re-connection with the
work of this section.
D. Disconnect and cap existing site utility services. Remove overhead or exposed
utility services to provide clear working and moving space around and below
structure.
E. Remove building protrusions prior to move.
F. Secure supplementary framing and bracing to structure.
G. Secure operating, moving, or suspended items, such as doors, windows, and light
fixtures, in a manner to prevent damage to items or to the structure during move.
op V1
H. Protect elements surrounding the structure from damage.
4.3.3 Raise Structure

A. Cut structure free of foundation and portions of structure not being moved.
C -
y
B.
C
Reinforce, brace, and raise structure clear of foundation, in manner to prevent
damage.
C
C. Provide necessary framing, bracing, closures, supports, and blocking.
D. Secure structure to temporary supporting structural members to prevent shifting of

Q
structure during move.
4.3.4 Move Structure

A. Provide transport vehicles for moving structure to new site.
B. Move structure, control speed, and provide anchor and restraining devices to
maintain the integrity of the structure.
C. During move, protect adjacent structures, and private and public property from
damage.
4.3.5 Reinstall Structure

A. Position and anchor structure over prepared foundation site and lower onto site
foundation.
B. Remove moving equipment.
C. Leave reinforcing, framing, and bracing intact until structure is fully attached and
structure loads are supported by new foundation.
D. Reinstall building protrusions removed prior to move.
4.3.6 Re-Installation Tolerances

A. Maximum Variation from Level and Plumb: 6 mm.
B. Maximum Offset from True Position: 6 mm.
C. Adjust structure on foundation:
PAGE 12
1. To permit doors to swing freely.

2. So that floor surfaces are level, walls are plumb.
4.3.7 Damage Repair

A. Repair damage to structure not identified in writing prior to move.
B. Refinish repaired surfaces to match adjacent work.
C. Pay all third party claims for incidental damage.
4.3.8 Original Site

A. Remove original foundation, sub-grade concrete slab in accordance with the
op V1
relevant Sections
B. Backfill and compact to requirements of the relevant Section to place to elevations

of original grades.
C.
C -
Provide top cover to elevations of original grade
y
C
4.3.9 Cleaning
C
A. Remove moving equipment and materials from original site, final site, and route of
travel.
Q
B. Remove road base constructed by this section, fill and return grades and contours
to original condition and dimension.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 13
5. SOIL MATERIAL (SECTION 02205)

5.1. Part 1 General

01300 Submittals
01410 Testing Services
op V1
02211 Rough Grading
02223
C -
Backfilling
y
02225
C
Trenching
5.1.2 References
C
AASHTO T180 - Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54 kg Rammer
and 457 mm Drop.
Q
ASTM D698 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and

Soil-Aggregate Mixtures, Using 2.49 Kg Rammer and 304.8 mm Drop.
ASTM D1556 - Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone
Method.

Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Using 4.54 Kg Rammer and 457 mm Drop.
ASTM D2167 - Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the
Rubber Balloon Method.
ASTM D2487 - Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes.
ASTM D2922 - Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by
Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth.
ASTM D3017 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in
Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth.
Abu Dhabi Municipality Specification for Backfilling of Trenches and Excavations

in Asphalt Roads, Tiled/Paved Parking and Roads.
BS1377 – Methods of Test for Soils for Civil Engineering Purposes.

PAGE 14
B. Samples: Submit, in air-tight containers, 25 kg sample of each type of fill to

testing laboratory. If CBR test is required, a minimum of 50 kg sample is
required.
5.1.4 Submittals for Information

B. Materials Source: Submit name of imported materials source.

A. Perform Work in accordance with Abu Dhabi Municipality standards, unless
otherwise specified.
op V1
5.2.1 Subsoil Materials
A. C -
Subsoil Type: Conforming to Abu Dhabi Municipality standard.
y
C
B. Subsoil Type S2:
C
1. Select or local borrow.
2. Graded.
Q
3. Free of lumps larger than 75 mm, rocks larger than 50 mm, and debris.
4. Conforming to ASTM D2487 Group Symbol OL.
5.2.2 Topsoil Materials

A. Topsoil Type S3: Conforming to Abu Dhabi Municipality standard.
B. Topsoil Type S4:
1. Excavated and reused material if suitable, or selected material. Select.
2. Graded.
3. Free of roots, rocks larger than 12 mm, subsoil, debris, large weeds and
foreign matter.
4. Conforming to ASTM D2487 Group Symbol OH.
C. Topsoil Type S5:
1. Imported borrow.
2. Friable loam.
3. Reasonably free of roots, rocks larger than 12 mm, subsoil, debris, large
weeds, and foreign matter.
4. Acidity range (pH of 5.5 to 7.5.
PAGE 15
5. Containing a minimum of 4 percent and a maximum of 25 percent

inorganic matter.
6. Conforming to ASTM D2487 Group Symbol OH.
5.2.3 Source Quality Control

A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: 01410 - Testing Services: Testing and analysis
of soil material.
B. Testing and Analysis of Subsoil Material: Perform in accordance with ASTM

D1557, AASHTO T180, ASTM D1556 and BS 1337
C. Testing and Analysis of Topsoil Material: Perform in accordance with ASTM
op V1
D1557, AASHTO T180, ASTM D1556 and ASTM D698
D. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material

and retest.
C -
y
E. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work.
C
C
5.3.1 Soil Removal
Q
A. Excavate subsoil and topsoil from areas designated.
B. Remove lumped soil, boulders, and rock.
C. Stockpile excavated material at approved location and remove excess material

not being used, from site.
5.3.2 Stockpiling
A. Stockpile materials on site at approved locations.
B. Stockpile in sufficient quantities to meet Project schedule and requirements.
C. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile apart to prevent mixing.
D. Prevent intermixing of soil types or contamination.
E. Direct surface water away from stockpile site to prevent erosion or deterioration
of materials.
5.3.3 Stockpile Clean-up

A. Remove stockpile, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade site surface
to prevent free standing surface water.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 16
6. AGGREGATE MATERIALS (SECTION 02207)

6.1. Part 1 General
01300 Submittals
op V1
02211
C -
Rough Grading
y
02223 Backfilling
C
02225 Trenching
C
03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete
Q
6.1.2 References
AASHTO - M147 - Materials for Aggregate and Soil-Aggregate.
ASTM C88 - Test Method of soundness of aggregates
ASTM C136 – Sieve Analysis of Fine and course aggregate.
ASTM C142 - Clay Lumps and Friable particles in aggregate.
ASTM C294 – Constituents of Natural Mineral Aggregate.
ASTM C535 - Los Angeles abrasion test.
ASTM D2419 – Sand Equivalent.
ASTM D2940 – Graded Aggregate for bases or sub bases.
ASTM D4318 - Test Method for Liquid Limit and Plasticity Index of soil.
ASTM D75 – Sampling Aggregate.
BS 1377 Part 3 - Chemical Tests, Sulphates contents.
Abu Dhabi Municipality Building Regulations and Guidelines.

B. Samples: Submit, in air-tight containers, minimum 50 kg sample in accordance

with ASTM D75 of each type of aggregate to testing laboratory.
Page 17

B. Materials Source: Submit name of imported materials crusher and location.

A. Perform Work in accordance with Abu Dhabi Municipality standards. Maintain one
copy on site.
op V1
6.2.1 Coarse Aggregate Materials
A. Coarse Aggregate Type A1: Conforming to Abu Dhabi Municipality standard.
B. Coarse Aggregate Type A2 Gravel: AASHTO M147 and ASTM D2940, Grade A;
C -
passing 50 mm sieve
y
C.
C
Coarse Aggregate Type A3 Wade Gravel: Coarse Stone or Crushed Gravel:
natural, free of shale, clay, friable material and debris; graded in accordance with
ASTM C136, ASTM D2487 Group Symbol (GW-GC within the following limits:
C
Sieve Size Total Percent Passing
Q
(50 mm) 100

(25 mm) 75 to 95
(19 mm) 65 to 90
(9.5 mm) 40 to 75
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 30 to 60
No. 10 (2.0 mm) 20 to 45
No. 40 (425 micro n) 15 to 30
No. 200 (75 micro n) 5 to 12
6.2.2 Fine Aggregate Materials

A. Fine Aggregate Type A5: Conforming to Abu Dhabi Municipality standard. With a
liquid limit of not more than 25; a plasticity index of not more than 6 in accordance
with ASTM D4318.

A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: 01410 - Testing Services: Source testing and
analysis of aggregate material.
B. All test results shall comply with Abu Dhabi Municipality standard, unless
C. Course Aggregate Material - Testing and Analysis: Perform in accordance to

related Section requirements.
Page 18
D. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material or

material source and retest.
E. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work.

6.3.1 Stockpiling
A. Stockpile materials on site at approval locations.
B. Stockpile in sufficient quantities to meet Project schedule and requirements.
C. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile apart to prevent mixing.
op V1
D. Direct surface water away from stockpile site so as to prevent erosion or
deterioration of materials.
C -
6.3.2 Stockpile Clean-up
y
A.
C
Remove stockpile, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade site surface to
prevent free standing surface water.
C
Q
END OF SECTION
Page 19
7. ROUGH GRADING (SECTION 02211)

7.1. Part 1 General

01300 Submittals
op V1
01700 Contract Close out
C -
y
C
C
02229 Rock Removal.
02222 Excavation
Q
02223 Backfilling
02225 Trenching

A. Perform work in accordance with related Section requirements of Abu Dhabi
Municipality standards. Maintain one copy standards on site.

B. Accurately record actual locations of utilities remaining by horizontal dimensions,

elevations or inverts, and slope gradients.
Not Used.
7.3.1 Examination
A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039.
B. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as
indicated.
PAGE 20
7.3.2 Preparation
A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.
B. Stake and flag locations of known utilities.
C. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain, from damage.
D. Protect above and below grade utilities that remain.
Protect plant life, lawns, rock outcropping and other features remaining as a portion of
final landscaping.
F. Protect bench marks, survey control point, existing structures, fences, sidewalks,
op V1
paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.
G. Comply with the directives set forth in Section 02222 Clause 3.6 for maintaining
and supporting services and structures.
C -
7.3.3 Subsoil Excavation
y
A.
C
Excavate subsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re-graded.
B. Do not excavate wet subsoil.

C
C. When excavating through roots, perform work by hand and cut roots with sharp
axe.
Q
D. Remove subsoil from site.
E. Benching Slopes: Horizontally bench existing slopes greater than 1:4 to key
placed fill material to slope to provide firm bearing.
F. Stability: Replace damaged or displaced subsoil to same requirements as for

specified fill.
7.3.4 Filling
A. Install Work in accordance with Abu Dhabi Municipality standards.
B. Fill areas to the required contours and elevations with materials accepted by the
Engineer.
C. Place fill material on continuous layers and compact in accordance with the
schedule at end of this section.
D. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction

density.
E. Slope grade away from building minimum 50 mm in 3m, unless noted otherwise.
Make grade changes gradual. Blend slope into level areas.
G. Remove surplus fill materials from site.
7.3.5 Tolerances
A. Top Surface of Subgrade: Plus or minus 20 mm from required elevation.
PAGE 21
7.3.6 Field Quality Control

A. Section 01400 - Quality Assurance: Field inspection and testing.
All test results shall comply with Abu Dhabi Municipality standard unless otherwise
specified.
C. Testing: In accordance with related Section requirements.
D. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work,
replace and retest.
E. Frequency of Tests: One sample every 1,000m2
op V1
7.3.7 Schedules
A. Structural Fill:
1. Fill Type S2: Maximum 150 mm layers up to the required compacted

depth.
C -
y
2. Compact to minimum 95 percent of maximum density.
C
B. Pervious Structural Fill:
C
depth.
Q
C. Subsoil Fill:

depth.
D. Topsoil Fill:
1. Fill Type S2: 200 mm layers up to the required compacted depth.

END OF SECTION
PAGE 22
8. DEWATERING IN AREAS OF HIGH WATER

TABLE (SECTION 02221)
8.1. Part 1 General

01300 Submittals
op V1
8.1.1.1.
C -
References
y
C
Abu Dhabi Municipality requirements.
C
Q
Not used.
8.3.1 Submittals
A. In addition to Submittal Section - Procedure for submittals.
1 Submit working drawings and data for review and approval showing the
intended plan for dewatering operations.
2 Submit not less than 30 days prior to start of dewatering operations.
8.3.2 Execution
A. Dewatering as required so that all work of the contract is installed on dry areas
and excavations, including without limitations the construction of all structures and
underground piping.
B. Dewatering shall be carried out only to a depth sufficient for the required
excavation.
C. Ensure that, at all times, during construction no ground water shall come into
contact with any concrete surface or reinforcement and that any structure shall be
capable of withstanding any hydrostatic pressure to which it may be subjected
during construction and until completed.
PAGE 23
D. Any water removed from the excavations shall, wherever practicable, be pumped
directly into the sea or to storm sewers, if approved, via an efficient system of
discharge lines.
E. No water to be discharged into the sewerage system, the sewerage treatment

works or onto open spaces.
F. The Contractor shall include for the diversion of all watercourses encountered in
the works until the complete drainage scheme for the site is completed and put
into operation.
G. Notwithstanding any previous approval, the Contractor shall be fully responsible

for and for the effects of his works for maintaining dry excavations.
op V1
H. The Contractor shall, where extensive dewatering is required be fully qualified to
perform the dewatering operations or shall furnish the services of an experienced,
qualified and equipped Dewatering Subcontractor to design and operate the
dewatering and groundwater recharging systems required for the works, all
subject to the Engineer’s approval.
C -
y
I.
C
Where required to do so by the Engineer, the Contractor shall establish a
specified number of groundwater level monitoring stations at each site which will
be observed during the work. These shall be located as directed by the Engineer
C
and consist of acceptable open tube piezometers. Settlement gauges will be
provided to the site, times and locations to monitor settlement of new and existing
facilities shall be as directed by the Engineer.
Q
J. The release of groundwater to its static level shall be performed so as to maintain

the undisturbed state of natural foundation soils, prevent flotation or movement of
structures, pipelines and sewers.
K. No dewatering system shall be removed without the approval of the Engineer.

Monitoring and settlement measurement systems shall be maintained in operation
until removal is approved by the Engineer, to the extent approved by the
Engineer, well points and like items may be abandoned in place.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 24
9. EXCAVATION (SECTION 02222)

9.1. Part 1 General

01300 Submittals
op V1
02211 Rough Grading
02223 Backfilling
02225 Trenching
C -
y
02229 Rock removal
C
9.1.2 Field Measurements
C
A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as
indicated.
Q
9.1.3 References
BS 6031:1981 - Code of Practice for Earthworks
DIN 4124 - Building Pits and Trenches

A Employ or retain the services of a recognized specialist in groundwater control
system installation and operation, with a minimum of 10 years’ experience in this
field. The specialist shall be present initially when each new groundwater control
system is installed and operated, and periodically thereafter, to consult on
installation and equipment problems as the need arises, or as requested by the
Engineer.
B. Adhere to the applicable requirements of all ordinances, codes and regulations of

authorities having jurisdiction over disposal of discharge waters.
C. Evaluate collected data relative to groundwater control system performed and

modify systems as necessary to dewater sites in accordance with the Contract
requirements.
D. If for any reason the groundwater control system is found to be inadequate, make
additions, changes and replacements as necessary to provide a satisfactory
system at no additional cost to the Employer.
9.1.5 Protection of Antiquities

A. No requirements of the Specification regarding the disposal of material arising from
site clearance or excavation shall override any provision in the Conditions of Contract
PAGE 25
as to the discovery or ownership of fossils, coins, articles of value or antiquity or

anything of geological or archaeological interest found on the Site. The Contractor
shall inform the Antiquities and Tourism Division within 24 hours of any fossils or
antiquities discovered.
9.3.1 General
op V1
A. Make sure the extent of all excavations in open cut is the minimum necessary or
practicable for the construction of the Works.
B. Do not make battered excavations in public highways, private gardens or within 30

meters from any building or structure, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
C -
y
C.
C
Provide supports as needed in accordance with Clause 3.3 and other
requirements of this Specification.
C
D. Limit amount of excavation to such sizes, depths and inclinations as may be
necessary to construct the Works or as directed by the Engineer.
Q
Deposit excavated material in approved location as referenced herein for

backfilling, compact in such a manner that will avoid causing any damage or
inconvenience. The stockpiling of excavated material in or adjacent to the work
areas will not be permitted. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the
Contractor must allow for immediately loading and transporting all excavated
material to an approved off-site storage area to avoid any nuisance to persons or
property. The Contractor shall transport excavated material which is suitable for
backfill back to the site for backfilling of trenches as soon as backfilling operations
start. The Contractor shall allow for this double handling in his unit rates.
Excavated material stockpiled in the approved off-site storage areas shall not
obstruct entrances, sidewalks, driveways, hydrants, manholes, and any other
service, and shall not cause any obstruction to traffic. The Contractor shall ensure
that stockpiled excavated material does not obstruct pedestrian or driver visibility
at road crossings or junctions.
Any damage resulting from Contractor’s failure to comply shall be rectified at the
Contractor’s own expense, all as directed by the Engineer.
F. Do not lay pipes or concrete or commence any permanent works until the
Engineer has inspected and accepted the excavation.
G. Do not use blasting or explosives during the works, as these are not generally
permitted in Abu Dhabi.
H. The Division reserves the right to stop the works at any time if in its opinion it is
considered that methods of work are not safe.
I. Where dewatering is required, provide qualified and experienced crew to perform

the dewatering operation, or furnish the services of a Dewatering Subcontractor
approved by the Engineer / Division to design and operate the dewatering works.
PAGE 26
9.3.2 Preparation
A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations.
B. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain, from damage in accordance with
Clause 3.6 of this Section.
C. Notify all utility authorities weekly or more often as necessary, of the construction
schedule.
D. Protect trees, plant, lawns, rock outcroppings and other features remaining as a
portion of final landscaping.
E. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks,
op V1
paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.
F. Carefully strip and set aside the surface materials for re-use as directed by the
Engineer.
C -
G. Break up and dispose of the concrete of concrete roads and foundations as
y
directed by the Engineer. Cut any existing reinforcement and bend it to the sides
C
of the excavation in order to lap the new reinforcement to be provided in the
reinstatement of the surface with the existing reinforcement by at least 300
C
millimetres.
9.3.3 Support of Excavations

Q
A. Submit the proposal for the support of excavations in accordance with BS

6031:1981, at least seven days prior to the commencement of any excavation
work.
B. In the proposal, take into account the nature of the ground to be excavated, the
level of water table at the site and the proximity of buildings and roads.
C. Where the depth of excavation exceeds one and a half meters, do the following:
1. Batter back the sides of the excavation to soil angle of repose or,
2. Support the sides of the excavation with a system of sheet piling, trench
sheeting and shoring or,
3. Adopt a combination of these.
D. Submit to the Engineer detailed calculations and drawings of the measures

proposed and obtain his written acceptance thereof.
E. Include in the calculations the slope stability calculations, details of lateral earth
pressures, supporting site investigation results and anticipated surcharge and
equipment loads during installation, removal and backfilling.
F. Do not remove temporary works supporting the excavations until in the opinion of
the Engineer the permanent work is sufficiently advanced to permit such removal.
Execute removal of temporary works under the personal supervision of a
competent foreman. Any advice, permission, acceptance or instruction given by
the Engineer relative to such support or its removal will not relieve the Contractor
from his responsibilities under the Contract.
PAGE 27
G. Remove all temporary works supporting the excavation during backfilling, unless
previous acceptance has been obtained from the Engineer.
H. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, all open excavations and other
hazardous areas shall be totally enclosed from all sides by temporary fencing.
Damaged sections of temporary fencing shall be repaired or replaced. Temporary
fencing shall not be removed from any location without the Engineer’s permission
which will not be given until the trench excavation has been refilled and reinstated.
9.3.4 Excavating
A. Maintain and support the existing services and structures in accordance with
Clause 3.6.
Excavate subsoil to accommodate building foundations, slabs-on-grade, paving
op V1
and site structures.
C. Compact disturbed load bearing soil in direct contact with foundations to original
bearing capacity; perform compaction in accordance with Section 02223 and
02225.
C -
y
D.
C
Slope embankments and stockpiles to angle of repose or less until shored.
E. Do not encroach on 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.

C
F. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into
excavation.
Q
G. Hand trim excavation. Remove loose matter.
H Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 0.25 cu m measured by

volume. Remove larger material under Section 02229.
I. Notify Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected

Work in area until notified to resume work.
Correct areas over excavated in accordance with Clause 3.5.
K. Stockpile excavated material at approved locations in accordance with Section

02205, 02207 and in accordance with Clause 3.1E. Remove excess or unsuitable
material from site.
L. Remove excavated material from site if site conditions dictate, return if required
for backfill.
M. Keep all excavations free from water and sewage in accordance with Clause 3.7.
N. Remove unsound foundations and soft spots in accordance with Clause 3.8.
O. On completion of the permanent works, backfill the excavations in accordance

with Section 02223.
9.3.5 Slips, fall and Excess Excavation.

A. Take every precaution to prevent slips and falls of earth and other materials in the
excavation.
B. Fill all voids formed as a result of:
PAGE 28
1. Slips or falls occurring or,

2. Excavation being made in excess of the minimum necessary or practicable
for the construction of the Works or,
3. Any over excavation whether or not necessary beneath the formation of a
structure or,
4. Any combination of the above.
C. Use concrete Class ‘C’ to fill voids so formed if such voids when backfilled would
provide support for the permanent Works or adjacent structures and services.
D. In all other cases, fill voids with coarse aggregate Type 2. Ensure that the material
is thoroughly compacted.
op V1
9.3.6 Maintaining and Supporting Services and Structures
A. Ascertain the actual locations of all existing services and obstructions by hand
excavation before commencing any part of the Works. The Contractor shall
contact all concerned authorities to secure all information, and shall obtain
C -
approvals and any required permits from all concerned authorities before
y
C
commencing any part of the work.
Services shall mean any utilities ranging from the water, gas and oil supply
C
networks, electrical and telephone networks, poles, pylons, lighting columns and
traffic signals, storm water drainage and sewerage networks as well as roads,
gardens, trees, and other public or private services.
Q
B. Some, but not all, of the existing utilities are shown on the Drawings. It should be
emphasized that all the locations of services where shown on the Drawings are for
guidance only and does not necessarily show the exact locations, depths and
spacing nor the smaller branches of services which are not normally indicated on
such drawings. After obtaining approvals from all concerned Authorities, the
Contractor shall carefully excavate at his own expense all necessary trial pits by
hand to locate all services and obstructions. The Contractor shall backfill test pits
immediately after their purpose has been satisfied and restore the surface in a
manner satisfactory to the governing authority and to the Engineer.
C. Do not exceed a maximum distance of 25 meters between trial pits. Minimum of

three trial pits between successive manholes.
D. Submit to the Engineer detailed drawings showing the services and/or

obstructions in relation to the permanent and temporary works. It should be noted
that the Contractor shall not be allowed to work in any area where services are
still not located that are immediately adjacent to or conflict with the pipeline to be
installed. The Engineer shall have the right to stop work in the area of the Works
where the Contractor fails to take the necessary measures to locate these
services and the Contractor shall not be entitled to claim for compensation in time
or money.
E. If the proposed method of working will damage, expose or affect these in any way,
obtain written acceptance from the appropriate Authority and the Engineer for this
method of working before commencing work. Such acceptance will in no way
relieve the Contractor from any of his responsibilities under the Contract.
F. Call the attention of the Engineer and the appropriate Authority as soon as any
existing service is encountered in the excavation. Take photographs to illustrate
the existing damage or conditions. If the Contractor determines that certain
PAGE 29
utilities require temporary relocation in order to permit the Works to be completed,

he shall coordinate with the relevant service authority to carry out, or have carried
out, the relocation of the utility in accordance with their current regulations and
specifications.
The Contractor shall not move any utility or service line, conduit or any structures,
above or below the ground, within the limits of the Works until receiving written
permission from the utility authority, or the permission from the Engineer in
writing.
In the case of temporary relocation, the utility shall be restored to its original
location prior to restoration of the site.
op V1
The Contractor shall perform any protection work for utilities and any temporary
relocation or maintaining services in operation at his own expense.
The Division reserves the right during the progress of the work, upon
determination of the actual position of the existing utilities and utility structures, to
C -
make changes in the grade or alignment of the pipelines, wherever by so doing
y
C
the necessity for relocation of utility or structure will be avoided. Such changes will
be ordered in writing by the Engineer.
C
G. Authorities shall be notified, weekly or more often as necessary, of the
construction schedule with regard to exposing known services. Services
encountered during the excavation work shall be uncovered and identified and the
Q
concerned authority shall be notified. Where so required by the concerned

authority, operations shall not proceed until the concerned authority is represented
on Site. In such cases, the Contractor will not be entitled to submit any claim for
additional money or time. The Contractor shall also submit every two weeks
details of the work contemplated for execution in order to enable the service
authority to inspect and/or to indicate their services on the site and/or to take any
measures deemed necessary.
The Contractor shall curtail his activities in areas where the services are being
relocated by others until the relocation work is complete.
The Contractor must ensure that he pays all fees and obtains any work or
excavation permits from the service authorities necessary to allow him to carry out
construction works in the vicinity of existing services.
H. Safeguard and maintain all watercourses, sewers, drains, gas pipes, water pipes,
electricity and telecommunication cables and all other services and structures
encountered during the construction of the Works and take any remedial
measures necessary to make good immediately any damage arising out of the
construction of the Works.
I. Where permanent relocation or support of services is necessary to enable

construction of the Permanent Works to proceed, the Engineer may elect to order
its removal and relocation into its allotted reservation. All work in connection with
the removal and relocation shall be carried out by the Contractor under the
supervision of the Engineer and/or the concerned utility authority. Alternatively,
the concerned authority, should it prefer to, will carry out the work itself, in which
case the Contractor shall afford all reasonable assistance and access during the
undertaking of the work.
PAGE 30
All relocation work shall be designed by the Contractor in conjunction with the
utility authority and shall comply in all respects with their current regulations and
specifications. The Contractor must allow for the preparation of all shop drawings
and for obtaining approvals for the designs from concerned authorities. The cost
of permanent relocation of utilities, if required, will be borne by the Division.
J. The Contractor may be required to work in the vicinity of high tension electric
cables/lines in certain locations. These locations are to be ascertained and
confirmed on site with the appropriate Government Division and their consultants.
The use of mechanical excavation plant in these areas will not be permitted.
K. Replace all diverted and supported services and structures on completion of the
Works.
op V1
9.3.7 Keeping the Excavations in Dry Condition and Dewatering
A. Keep all excavations free from water and sewage whether affected by tides,
floods storms or otherwise. Ensure that the work is constructed in dry conditions.
C -
y
B. Do not leave in any sub-drainage pipes, unless they are filled with concrete Class
C
‘C’ or other accepted material.
C. Enwrap any sub-drainage left in below the permanent Works completely in an

C
approved geotextile membrane material.
D. Make sure that the subgrade left in place provides support at least equal to that
Q
which would have been available if the sub-drain was not present.
E. Do not discharge water into any watercourse or sewer including those sewers laid
under this Contract.
F. Obtain written permission of owner for water discharge into an existing facility.
Perform dewatering as required so that all work of the Contract is installed in dry
areas and excavations.
Make sure that dewatering is carried out only to a depth sufficient for the required
excavation.
I. Make sure that at all times during construction, no groundwater comes into
contact with any concrete surface or reinforcement and that any structure is
capable of withstanding any hydrostatic pressure to which it may be subjected
during construction and until completed.
J. Pump water removed from excavations, wherever practicable, directly to the sea
or to storm sewers if accepted via an efficient system of discharge lines. Do not
discharge any water into the sewerage system, into the Works or onto open
spaces.
K. Fully comply with the requirements of Abu Dhabi Municipality or any other
Government Division in regard to the Works for maintaining excavations,
dewatering and the discharge of groundwater arising from dewatering.
L. Include for the diversion of all watercourses encountered in the work until the
complete drainage scheme for the Site in completed and put into operation.
PAGE 31
M. Notwithstanding any previous acceptance, the Contractor will be fully responsible

for the effects of his works for maintaining dry excavations. The methods of
controlling groundwater are to be the option of the Contractor who shall be solely
responsible for the location, arrangement and depth of any system or systems
selected to accomplish the Work. The primary purpose of groundwater control is
to preserve the undisturbed bearing capacity of the subgrade soils.
N. Submit working drawings and data for review and acceptance showing the
intended plan for dewatering operations, where deemed necessary by the
Engineer.
O. Include details of locations and capacities of dewatering wells, well points, pumps,
sumps, collection and discharge lines, standby units, water disposal methods,
op V1
monitoring and settlement. Submit all these not more than 30 days prior to start of
dewatering operations.
P. Draw the static water level down to a minimum of 500mm below the bottom of the
excavation so as to maintain the undisturbed state of the foundation soils and to
C -
allow the placement of any fill or backfill to the required density. Maintain and
y
control the water level in backfill to prevent flotation of the completed Work, and at
C
a minimum of 500 mm below the top of backfill during backfill placement and
compaction operations.
C
Q. Install and operate the dewatering system so that the groundwater level outside
the excavation is not reduced to the extent that would damage or endanger
adjacent roads, structures or property. Repair damage, disruption or interference
Q
resulting directly or indirectly from groundwater control system operation at no

additional cost to the Employer.
R. Establish at several site locations, approved by the Engineer groundwater level

monitoring stations, open tube piezometers which can be observed during the
work. Also, provide settlement gauges as directed, accepted and designated by
the Engineer at several locations to monitor settlement of new and existing
facilities.
S. Perform dewatering so that no flow of water occurs along the pipe zone material.
Use where applicable cut-off walls to reduce the potential groundwater flow along
pipe trenches. Submit to the Engineer for his approval details of the proposed
method of working and temporary works installations to achieve this.
T. Perform the restoration of groundwater to its original static level so as to maintain

the undisturbed state of the natural foundation soils, prevent disturbance of
compacted fill or backfill and prevent flotation or movement of structures,
pipelines and sewers.
U. Do not remove any dewatering systems without the Engineer’s acceptance.

Maintain monitoring and settlement measurement systems in operation until
removal is accepted by the Engineer. Where necessary, maintain until final
compaction is completed.
At the completion of all excavation and backfilling work, and when approved by
the Engineer, all deep wells, well points, pumps, generators, piezometers, other
equipment and accessories used for the groundwater and surface water control
systems shall be removed from the site. All materials and equipment shall
become the property of the Contractor. All areas disturbed by the installation and
PAGE 32
removal of groundwater control systems and piezometers shall be restored to

their original condition.
Where piezometer casings are pulled, holes shall be filled with sand. Where left in
place, piezometer casings should be filled with sand and cut off below ground
level as necessary to restore the ground to its original condition. When directed by
the Engineer, piezometers should be left in place for continued monitoring. When
so directed, cut casings flush with final ground level and provide protective
lockable boxes with locking devices. The protective boxes shall be suitable for the
traffic and for any other conditions to which the piezometers will be exposed.
9.3.8 Removal of Unsound Foundations and Soft Spots

A. Excavate further on directions from the Engineer if on reaching the specified
op V1
levels of trench or structure, the inspected exposed ground, or part of the ground
is considered naturally unstable by the Engineer or became unacceptable due to
exposure to weather conditions or due to flooding or have become puddled, soft
or loose during the progress of work. Backfill the further excavation with concrete
Class ‘C’ or with such materials as the Engineer may direct.
C -
y
B.
C
Remove the backfill over its full depth and for the full width of the pipe trench
shown on the Drawings, where a pipe is being laid into a port in an existing
structure, manhole, chamber or thrust block, and where the backfill material to the
C
previous excavation beneath the pipe formation is not concrete. Fill the resulting
void with concrete Class ‘C’ to a level approved by the Engineer.
Q
C. The omission by the Engineer to give an instruction under this Clause will not
relieve the Contractor from any responsibility for defects in the Works due to the
construction being placed upon an unsuitable formation if prior to the construction
of the work the Contractor failed to advise the Engineer in writing.

B. Provide for visual inspection of bearing surfaces.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 33
10. BACKFILLING (SECTION 02223)
10.1.Part 1 General

01019 Contract Consideration
01025 Measurement for Payment
op V1
01300 Submittals
C -
y
C
C
02222 Excavation
02225 Trenching
Q
03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete
10.1.2 References
AASHTO T180 - Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54 kg Rammer and
457 mm Drop.
ASTM D1556 - Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method.

ASTM D1883 – CBR Test
ASTM D2487 – Classification of Soil
BS 1377 - Part 1 to Part 9 - Methods of tests for soils.
BS 6031:1981 - Code of Practice for Earthworks.
Appendix 1 -Abu Dhabi Municipality Specification for Backfilling of Trenches &

Excavations in Asphaltic Roads, Tiled/Paved Parking and Roads.
U.A.E. Public Works Division: Standard Specifications for Roads.
PAGE 34
10.2.PART 2 Products
10.2.1 Fill Materials and Accessories for Backfilling of Excavations

Other than in Roads and Paved/Tiled Areas.
A. Fill Type S2: As specified in Section 02205.
B. Structural Fill Type S2: As specified in Section 02205.
C. Concrete: Class ‘C’ with a compressive strength of 17.5 Mpa.
10.2.2 Fill Materials and Accessories for Backfilling of Excavations
op V1
in Roads and Paved/tiled Areas.
A. Ensure that the specifications of materials for backfilling of excavations in roads
and paved/tiled areas conform with the specifications defined in the ‘Abu Dhabi
Municipality Specification for Backfilling of Trenches & Excavations in Asphaltic
C -
Roads, Tiled/Paved Parking and Roads’, reproduced in Appendix 2, Clauses
y
C
1.1.1, 1.2, 1.3.1, 1.3.2 and in accordance with any other agency which may have
jurisdiction of the roadway area.
C
10.3.Part 3 Execution
Q
10.3.1 Examination
A. Verify sub-drainage, damp-proofing, or waterproofing installation has been
inspected.
B. Verify underground tanks are anchored to their own foundations to avoid flotation
after backfilling.
C. Verify structural ability of unsupported walls to support imposed loads by the fill.
10.3.2 Preparation
A. Compact subgrade to density requirements for subsequent backfill materials.
B. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with
Type A3 fill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for
subsequent fill material.
C. Scarify and proof roll subgrade surface to a depth of 250 millimeters to identify
soft spots; fill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for
subsequent fill material.
10.3.3 Backfilling
A. This section includes backfilling of structural foundation, building perimeter, and
site structures up to required subgrade elevations, fill under interior and exterior
slabs-on-grade or pavement, and fill under landscaped areas. Backfilling for utility
is included in Section 02225.
PAGE 35
B. Commence backfilling of excavations as soon as practicable after the permanent

works have been tested, inspected and accepted by the Engineer.
C. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not

backfill over porous, wet or spongy subgrade surfaces.
D. Backfill in layers not exceeding 150 millimeters, the first 500 millimeters over
permanent work after its acceptance by the Engineer in the excavations other
than in roads and paved/tiled areas by hand with lightly compacted selected
excavated material. Refill the remaining voids with selected excavated material in
layers not exceeding 300 millimeters in depth to obtain minimum 90% compaction
of the maximum dry density of the material in accordance with ASTM D1557.
op V1
E. Backfill all excavations in roads and paved/tiled areas, including areas designated
as future “roads and paved/tiled areas” as directed by the Engineer, in
accordance with the ‘Abu Dhabi Municipality Specification for Backfilling of
Trenches and Excavations in Asphaltic roads, Tiled/Paved Parking and
Sidewalks’, reproduced in Appendix 2 and in accordance with any other agency
C -
which may have jurisdiction of the roadway area.
y
F.
C
Fill the voids formed as a result of slips or falls or excavation being made in
excess of the minimum necessary or practicable for the construction of the Works
C
or any over excavation whether or not necessary beneath the formation of a
structure with concrete Class ‘C’ in all cases where support for the permanent
works or adjacent structures and services is required.
Q
G. In all other cases fill the voids so formed with selected excavated material
thoroughly compacted.
H. Fill all sub-drainage pipes to be left in with concrete Class ‘C’.
I. Fill holes made for dewatering pipes with bentonite as soon as the dewatering
equipment is withdrawn.
J. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work.
K. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required

compaction density.
L. Water well to the acceptance of the Engineer all filling materials which are in his
opinion of a non-cohesive nature in the layers specified to obtain the specified
compaction.
M. Backfill against supported foundation walls. Do not backfill against unsupported

foundation walls.
N. Backfill simultaneously on each side of unsupported foundation walls until

supports are in place.
O. Slope grade away from building 50 mm in 3 m, unless noted otherwise.
P. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas.
Q. Remove surplus backfill materials from site.
PAGE 36
R. Leave fill material stockpile areas free of excess fill materials.
S. Remove from the site any excavated material which is in the opinion of the
Engineer unsuitable for backfill.
T. Where instructed by the Engineer, arrange for an approved independent testing

laboratory to carry out tests to determine in-situ the density of the backfill material.
10.3.4 Tolerances
A. Backfilling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 20 millimeters from required
elevations for subgrade, 10 millimeters for granular sub-base, in accordance with
the ‘Abu Dhabi Municipality Specification for Backfilling of Trenches &
op V1
Excavations in Asphaltic Roads, Tiled/Paved Parking’s and Roads’.
B. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 25 millimeters from required

elevations.
C -
y
A.
C
Section 01400 - Quality Assurance: Field inspection and testing.
C
B. All test results shall comply with Abu Dhabi Municipality standard unless otherwise
specified.
Q
C. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D1556, ASTM

D1557 and AASHTO T180.
D. CBR testing as per ASTM D1883.
E. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work,
replace and retest. Refer to Section 01019, 01025 Defect Assessment.
F. Frequency of Tests: Every 1000m2 or any area ready for test, whichever is less.
G. Proof roll compacted fill surfaces under slabs-on-grade, pavers, paving, and
structures.
10.3.6 Protection of Finished Work

A. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic.
10.3.7 Schedule
A. Interior Crawl Spaces:
1. Fill Type S, 150 mm thick layers, compacted to 90 percent,

2. Cover with Fill Type A, 50 mm thick, compacted to 95 percent.
B. Interior Slab-On-Grade:
1. Fill Type S, 150 mm thick layers, compacted to 95 percent,
PAGE 37
C. Exterior Side of Foundation Walls, Retaining Walls and Over Granular Filter
Material and Foundation Perimeter Drainage:
1. Fill Type S, to subgrade elevation, each lift compacted to 95 percent.
D. Underground Tanks:
1. Initial fill of Fill Type S, 10 inches (250 mm thick, compacted to 95 percent,

2. Remaining fill of Fill Type S, to subgrade elevation, compacted to 95
percent.
E. Fill for French Drains:
1. Fill Type A, 250 mm below finish grade.
op V1
F. Fill Under Interlocking Pavers:
1. Embankment Fill: See Clause 1.1.1 of the ‘Abu Dhabi Municipality

Specification for Backfilling of Trenches & Excavations in Asphaltic Roads,
C -
Tiled/Paved Parking and Sidewalks’, reproduced in Appendix 2.
y
2.
C
Subgrade Fill: See Clause 1.2 of the ‘Abu Dhabi Municipality Specification
for Backfilling of Trenches & Excavations in Asphaltic Roads, Tiled/Paved
C
Parking and Sidewalks’, reproduced in Appendix 2.
3. Filter Fill Material: See Clause 1.3.1 of the ‘Abu Dhabi Municipality
Q

Tiled/Paved Parking and Sidewalks’, reproduced in Appendix 2. (If used as
road or parking area.)
4. Geotextile fabric: See Clause 1.3.1 of the ‘Abu Dhabi Municipality

Tiled/Paved Parking and Sidewalks’, reproduced in Appendix 2. (If used as
road or parking area.)
5. Granular Sub-base Material: See Clause 1.3.2 of the ‘Abu Dhabi
Municipality Specification for Backfilling of Trenches & Excavations in
Asphaltic Roads, Tiled/Paved Parking and Sidewalks’, reproduced in
Appendix 2. (If used as road or parking area.)
G. Fill Under Asphalt Concrete Paving: same as Clause 3.7/F of this specification.
H. Planter Boxes:
1. Fill Type S, to the required height of lightly tamped.
I. Fill to Correct Over-excavation:
1. Concrete Class ‘C’.
J. Fill Over Drainage Piping Gravel Cover:
1. Fill Type S, to finish grade, compacted to 90 percent, using 150 mm layers
PAGE 38
10.3.8 Reinstatement of Surfaces Other Than Asphalt Paved

Roads
A. This Section covers reinstatement of all surfaces other than asphalt roads. All
non-asphalt roads and all other surfaces shall be restored to their original condition
by the Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the appropriate authority.
This reinstatement is deemed to be entirely covered by the Contractor’s rates for
pipelines. All reinstatement of cultivated surfaces will be carried out by the
Agriculture Division of Abu Dhabi Municipality at the Contractor’s expense and
shall be carried out immediately upon completion of construction in the affected
area.
B. All permanent reinstatement shall include the Contractor’s return to Site at regular
op V1
intervals during the Period of maintenance to carry out works necessary to ensure
that surfaces are finally left in a condition at least equal to that existing before the
contractor first entered thereon.
C -
y
C END OF SECTION
C
Q
PAGE 39
11. TRENCHING (SECTION 02225)

11.1.Part 1 General

01019 Contract Considerations
01025 Measurement for Payment
op V1
01300 Submittals
02205
C -
Soil Materials
y
02207
C
Aggregate Materials
C
02211 Rough Grading
02222 Excavation
Q
02223 Backfilling
02229 Rock Removal
02722 Subsoil drainage
03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete
16110 Cables and wires
16111 Conduit systems
11.1.2 References
AASHTO T180 - Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using 4.54 kg Rammer and 457
mm Drop.
ASTM C136 - Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
ASTM D1556 - Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method.

Appendix 1 -Abu Dhabi Municipality Specification for Backfilling of Trenches &

Excavations in Asphaltic Roads, Tiled/Paved Parking and Sidewalks.
U.A.E. Public Works Division: Standard Specifications for Roads.
BS 6031:1981 Code of Practice for Earthworks.
H. Abu Dhabi Municipality Building Regulations.
PAGE 40
11.1.3 Definitions
A. Utility: Any buried pipe, duct, conduit, or cable.
11.1.4 Field Measurements

A. Verify that survey bench mark, control point, and intended elevations for the Work
are as shown on drawings.
B. Take and record levels in the manner specified or agreed with the Engineer
before disturbing any part of the Site or beginning the works thereon. Give the
Engineer two working days’ notice so that the recording of levels can be
performed in his presence.
op V1
11.1.5 Coordination
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039.
B.
C -
Verify work associated with lower elevation utilities is complete before placing
y
higher elevation utilities.
C
11.2.Part 2 Products
C
11.2.1 Fill Materials and Accessories for Backfilling of Trenches
Q
other than in Roads or Paved / Tiled Areas.

A. Fill Type S2: As specified in Section 02205.
B. Structural Fill Type S2: As specified in Section 02205.
C. Concrete: Class ‘C’, Lean concrete with a compressive strength of 17.5 (MPA.
D. Geotextile Filter Fabric: In accordance with Section 02722 Clause 2.5B
11.2.2 Fill Materials and Accessories for Backfilling of Trenches

in Roads and Paved/Tiled Areas.
A. The specifications of materials for backfilling of excavations in roads and
paved/tiled areas will conform with the specifications defined in the ‘Abu Dhabi
Municipality Specification for Backfilling of Trenches & Excavations in Asphaltic
Roads, Tiled/Paved Parking lots and sidewalks, reproduced in Appendix 2,
Clauses 1.1.1, 1.2, 1.3.1 and 1.3.2 and in accordance with any other agency which
may have jurisdiction of the roadway area.
11.3.1 General
A. Make sure the extent of all trenches in open cut is the minimum necessary or
practicable for the construction of the Works.
B. Do not exceed the maximum total length of 500 metres for open trenches for
pipelines.
PAGE 41
C. Do not make battered trenches in public highways, private gardens or within 30

metres of any building or other structure.
D. Provide supports in accordance with Clause 3.3 of this Specification, in the event
of adopting the method of trenching with battered sides.
E. Form that portion of the trench which extends from the formation to a point 300
millimetres above the crown of the pipe when laid in its correct position, with
vertical sides the minimum practicable distance apart, unless otherwise specified
by the pipe manufacturer and/or accepted by the Engineer.
F. Make the top edge of the trench as straight as practicable.
G. Deposit any excavated material stored in approved location for backfilling or any
op V1
other purpose compacted in such a manner that will avoid damage or
inconvenience. The stockpiling of excavated material in or adjacent to the work
areas will not be permitted. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the
Contractor must allow for immediately loading and transporting all excavated
material to an approved off-site storage area to avoid any nuisance to persons or
C -
property. The Contractor shall transport excavated material which is suitable for
y
C
backfill back to the site for backfilling of trenches as soon as backfilling operations
start. The Contractor shall allow for this double handling in his unit rates.
C
Excavated material stockpiled in the approved off-site storage areas shall not
obstruct entrances, sidewalks, driveways, hydrants, manholes, and any other
service, and shall not cause any obstruction to traffic. The Contractor shall ensure
Q
that stockpiled excavated material does not obstruct pedestrian or driver visibility
at road crossings or junctions.
Any damage resulting from Contractor’s failure to comply shall be rectified at the
Contractor’s own expense, all as directed by the Engineer.
H. Do not lay pipes or concrete or commence any permanent works until the
Engineer has inspected and accepted the trenching.
I. Do not use blasting or explosives during the works, as these are not generally
11.3.2 Preparation
A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations.
B. Protect plant life, lawns, rock outcropping and other features remaining as a
portion of final landscaping.
C. Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs
from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.
D. Maintain and protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain in
accordance with Section 02222 Clause 3.6.
E. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with
Fill Type A and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for
subsequent backfill material or backfill with concrete class C.
F. Carefully strip and set aside the surface materials for re-use as directed by the
Engineer.
PAGE 42
G. Break up and dispose of the concrete of concrete roads and foundations as the
Engineer directs. Cut any existing reinforcement and bend it to the sides of the
trench in order to lap the new reinforcement to be provided in the reinstatement of
the surface with the existing reinforcement by at least 300 millimetres.
11.3.3 Support of Trenches

A. Submit the proposals for the support of trenches at least seven days prior to the
commencement of any excavation work.
B. In the proposal, take into account the nature of the ground to be excavated, the
level of the water table at the site and proximity of buildings and roads.
C. Where the depth of trenches exceeds one and a half metres, do the following:
op V1
1. Batter back the sides of the trenches to a gradient compatible with the
angle of repose of the soil or,
2. Support the sides of the trenches with a system of sheeting piling, trench
sheeting and shoring or,
C -
y
3. Adopt a combination of these.
C
D. Submit to the Engineer detailed calculations and drawings of the measures
C
proposed to adopt and for approval.
E. Include in the calculations the slope stability calculations, details of lateral earth
Q
pressures, supporting site investigation results and anticipated surcharge and

equipment loads during installation, removal and backfilling.
F. The proposed support for trenching should be approved by the Engineer prior to
installation.
G. Do not remove temporary works supporting the trenches until in the opinion of the
Engineer the permanent work is sufficiently advanced to permit such removal.
Execute removal of temporary works under the personal supervision of a
competent foreman. Any advice, permission, acceptance or instruction given by
the Engineer relative to such support or its removal will not relieve the Contractor
from his responsibilities under the contract.
H. Remove all temporary works supporting the trenches during backfilling, unless
previous acceptance has been obtained from the Engineer.
I Fix timbering, steel sheeting, shuttering and sheet piling for the support of
trenching where provided in accordance with BS 6031.
J. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, all open excavations and other
hazardous areas shall be totally enclosed from all sides by temporary fencing.
Damaged sections of temporary fencing shall be repaired or replaced. Temporary
fencing shall not be removed from any location without the Engineer’s permission
which will not be given until the trench excavation has been refilled and reinstated.
11.3.4 Excavation
A. Excavate subsoil required by contract documents.
B. Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable installation and allow inspection. Remove
water or materials that interfere with Work.
C. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.
PAGE 43
D. Hand trim excavation. Remove loose matter.

E. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 0.25 cu m, measured by
volume. Larger material will be removed under Section 02229.
F. Correct areas over excavated in accordance with Section 02222.
G. Stockpile excavated material at approved locations in accordance with Section
02205, 02207 and in accordance with Clause 3.1G of this section. Remove
excess or unsuitable material from site.
H. Take every precaution to prevent slips and falls of earth and other materials in the
trenches.
I. Comply with the orders from the Engineer on the restoration of the trench width,
or the use of an alternative bedding material, or taking any other remedial action
op V1
as in his opinion is necessary in the event of any trench for pipelines exceeding
the maximum allowable widths as specified or shown on the Drawings.
J. Maintain and support the existing services and structures in accordance with
Section 02222.
C -
y
K. Keep all trenches free from water and sewage whether affected by tides, floods,
C
and storms or otherwise so that the Works will be constructed in dry conditions.
Perform dewatering in accordance with Section 02222.
C
L. Remove unsound foundations and soft spots in accordance with Section 02222.
11.3.5 Backfilling
Q
A. Backfill trenches to contours and elevations with fill materials accepted by the
Engineer.
B. Pipe with concrete encasement or arches shall not be backfilled before three days
after placing concrete for encasement or arches.
C. Where pipe is to be installed in granular bedding, the granular bedding shall be
placed and compacted to the total depth required (rough grade elevation and then
re-shaped for pipe installation.
D. As soon as practicable after the pipe has been laid, jointed, inspected and
approved by the Engineer, backfilling shall begin and thereafter be prosecuted
expeditiously. Granular bedding shall be placed and compacted under and around
the pipe to mid-diameter. Granular bedding shall continue to a depth of 300 mm
over the top of the pipe. The granular bedding shall be carried up evenly in
maximum 150 mm layers measured prior to compaction and compacted.
Compaction of granular bedding shall be accomplished by a minimum of four
passes of a vibratory plate or drum compactor suitable for trench compaction.
E. Where pipes are laid cross country, the remainder of the trench above the
granular bedding or concrete encasement shall be filled with Common Fill in
layers not to exceed 200 mm prior to compaction and compacted to at least 90
percent of maximum density as determined by ASTM D698. The backfill shall be
mounded 150 mm above the existing grade or as directed. Wherever a loam or
gravel surface exists prior to cross country excavations, it shall be replaced to the
full original depth as part of the work under the pipe items. In some areas it may
be necessary to remove excess material during the clean-up process, so that the
ground may be restored to its original level and conditions. If the Contractor
prefers not to store loam or topsoil he shall replace it with loam or topsoil of equal
quality and in equal quantity.
PAGE 44
F. Where the pipes are laid in existing or future roadways or other paved/tiled areas,
the remainder of the trench above the granular bedding or concrete encasement
and up to the bottom of the sub-grade level shall be backfilled in accordance with
the Abu Dhabi Municipality Specification for Backfilling of Trenches and
Excavations in Asphaltic Roads, Tiled/Paved Parking lots and Sidewalks
presented in Appendix 2 and in accordance with any other agency which may
have jurisdiction of the roadway area.
G. Water well all filling materials which are in the opinion of the Engineer of a non-
cohesive nature to his acceptance in the layers specified to obtain the specified
compaction.
H. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage foundation
perimeter drainage and utilities in trench.
op V1
I. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction
density.
J. Remove surplus fill materials from site.
K.
C -
Leave fill material stockpile areas completely free of excess fill materials.
y
11.3.6 Tolerances
C
A. Top Surface of Backfilling under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 20 mm for subgrade
C
and 10 mm for granular sub-base from required elevations.
B. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 25 mm from required

Q
elevations.

B. All test results shall comply with Abu Dhabi Municipality standard unless otherwise
specified.
C. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D1556, ASTM

D1557, and AASHTO T180.
D. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work,
replace, compact, and retest. Refer to Section 01019, 01025 Defect Assessment.
E. Frequency of Tests: 1 test every 100 linear meters or for each manhole to
manhole, whichever is less. Compacted test will be performed for each layer of
backfilling, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

A. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic during construction.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 45
12. ROCK REMOVAL (SECTION 02229)
12.1.Part 1 General

01300 Submittals
op V1
02211 Rough Grading
02222 Excavation
C -
y
02223 Backfilling
C
02225 Trenching
C
03300 Cast-In Place Concrete
Q
12.1.2 Definitions
A. Site Rock: Solid mineral material with a volume in excess of 0.25 cu m or solid
material that cannot be removed with a 0.57 cu m capacity power shovel without
drilling or blasting.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate the proposed method of rock fracturing and removal.

A. Seismic Survey Firm: Company specializing in seismic surveys with five years
documented experience.

A. Conform to applicable code for disintegration of rock.
B. Obtain permits from authorities having jurisdiction before drilling is started.
C. Do not use blasting or explosives for rock fracturing as these are not generally
12.1.6 Project Conditions

A. Conduct survey and document conditions of buildings near locations of rock
removal, prior to the commencement of the works, and photograph existing
conditions identifying existing irregularities.
PAGE 46
B. Advise owners of adjacent buildings or structures in writing, prior to executing

seismographic survey. Explain planned seismic operations.
C. Obtain a seismic survey prior to rock excavation to determine the most

appropriate method of rock fracturing and removal without damaging adjacent
properties or other work.
12.1.7 Scheduling
A. Schedule work under the provisions of Section 01300.
B. Schedule Work to avoid working hours of and disruption to occupants of nearby

buildings.
op V1
12.2.1 Materials
C -
y
A. Mechanical Disintegration Compound: Grout mix of materials that expand on
curing.
C
C
Q
12.3.1 Examination
B. Verify site conditions and note subsurface irregularities affecting work of this
section.
12.3.2 Preparation
A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.
12.3.3 Rock Removal by a Mechanical Method

A. Excavate and remove rock by the mechanical method.
B. Drill holes and utilize expansive tools, wedges, mechanical disintegration

compound to fracture rock.
C. Cut away rock at bottom of excavation to form level bearing.
D. Remove shale layers to provide sound and un-shattered base for footings,
foundations.
E. In utility trenches, excavate to 150 mm below invert elevation of pipe and 600 mm
wider than pipe diameter.
F. Remove excavated materials from site and reuse for site landscaping as
approved/directed by the Engineer.
PAGE 47
G. Correct unauthorized rock removal in accordance with backfilling and compacting

requirements of Section 02223, with lean concrete fill in accordance with Section
02223, 03300, or to directions of the Engineer.

A. Section 01400 - Quality Assurance: Field inspection.
B. Provide for visual inspection of foundation bearing surfaces and cavities formed
by removed rock.
op V1
END OF SECTION
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 48
13. AGGREGATE BASE COURSE (SECTION 02231)
13.1.Part 1 General

01300 Submittals
op V1
02207 Aggregate Materials.
02211 Rough Grading
02223
C -
Backfilling.
y
02225 Trenching.
C
02275 Riprap
C
13.1.2 References
Q
AASHTO T-89 - Determining the Liquid Limit of Soils.
AASHTO T-90 - Determining the Plastic Limit and the Plasticity Index of Soils.
AASHTO T-96 - Resistance to Abrasion of Small Size Coarse Aggregates.
AASHTO T-180 - Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54 kg Rammer

457 mm Drop.
ASTM C88 - Standard Test Method for Soundness of aggregate by use of Sodium
Sulphate or Magnesium Sulphate
ASTM C131 - Los Angeles Abrasion Test
ASTM C136 - Sieve analysis of fine and course aggregate.
ASTM C142 - Clay Lumps and Friable Partials
ASTM D1556 - Density of Soil in Place by Sand Cone method.
ASTM D1557 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-
Aggregate Mixtures Using 4.54 Kg Rammer and 457 mm Drop.
ASTM D1883 - CBR (California Bearing Ratio of laboratory Compacted Soil.
ASTM D2419 - Sand Equivalent Value of Materials.
ASTM D2940 - Graded Aggregate for bases and sub-bases.
ASTM D75 - Sampling Aggregate.
BS 812 - Testing Aggregates.
PAGE 49
BS 1377 Part 4 - Compaction related tests.
Abu Dhabi Municipality Specifications - Road and Bridge Construction.
U.A.E. Public Works Department: Standard Specifications for Roads.
13.2.1 Material Requirements

A. Submit samples of all materials to the Engineer for acceptance prior to furnishing
and placing any materials.
op V1
B. Provide natural aggregate sub-base and base courses consisting of coarse and
fine mineral aggregates which have been screened and blended to the various
gradations specified herein and constructed to the thickness as indicated on the
Drawings.
C.
C -
Provide crushed aggregate sub-base and base courses consisting of crushed
y
C
coarse aggregate and crushed or natural fine aggregate screened and blended in
accordance with the gradation specified herein and constructed to the thicknesses
as indicated on the Drawings.
C
13.2.2 Fine Aggregates
Q
A. Provide fine aggregates (passing the No. 4 sieve consisting of natural sand and/or
crushed sand. Ensure that the fine material is of such gradation that when
combined with other required aggregate fractions in proper proportions, the
resultant mixture will meet the gradation specified.
B. The aggregates shall be clean with a maximum 0.15% content of organic matter,
clay and other extraneous or detrimental materials.
C. Ensure that the portion of fine aggregates passing the No. 200 (75 micron sieve
does not exceed 2/3 of the portion passing the No. 40 (425 micron sieve.
D. Ensure that the materials passing the No. 40 (425 micron sieve have the
maximum liquid limit of 25, and the plasticity index does not exceed 6.
E. When the source of fine aggregates does not meet the above requirements, add
with the Engineer’s approval additional fine aggregate and/or filler to correct the
gradation or to change the characteristics of material passing the No. 40 sieve so
as to meet the Specifications. Add such additional material in a manner, which
ensures a completely homogenous gradation as accepted by the Engineer.
13.2.3 Coarse Aggregates

A. Provide coarse aggregate retained on the No. 4 sieve (4.75 mm consisting of
crushed stone, crushed gravel or natural gravel. Ensure that aggregates are of
such gradation that when combined with other required aggregate fractions in
proper proportion, the resultant mixture will meet the gradation specified.
B. When crushed aggregate is required, not less than 50 percent by weight of the
particles retained on the No. 4 sieve shall have at least one fractured face. The
Flakiness Index of the crushed aggregate shall not exceed 35 percent.
PAGE 50
C. Ensure that the percentage of wear of coarse aggregate does not exceed 40
percent when tested for resistance to abrasion (AASHTO T-96).
D. Provide hard and durable coarse aggregates free from organic matter, clay and
other extraneous or detrimental materials.
E. Ensure that the maximum sodium sulphate soundness loss of the coarse
aggregate does not exceed 18 percent in conformance with ASTM C88
13.2.4 Types of Aggregate Sub-Base and Base Courses

A. Ensure that the combined gradation including fine and coarse aggregates
conform to the gradation of Type A or B or C as listed below.
op V1
Table 13.2-1: Types of Aggregate Sub-Base and Base Courses
No. of Sieve Percent Passing by Weight
C -
Size Gradation A Gradation B Gradation C
y
50 mm
C - - 100
C
37.5 mm - 100 75-100
25 mm 100 70-100 55-85

Q
19 mm 70-100 60-90 50-80
9.5 mm 50-80 45-75 40-70
No. 4 35-65 30-60 30-60
No. 10 25-50 20-50 20-50
No. 40 15-30 10-30 10-30
No. 200 5-15 5-15 5-15
B. The gradation of materials to be used in the aggregate sub-base and base

courses as shown in the above table indicates the limits within which the material
could be accepted.
C. Keep the continuous smooth gradation of materials used within the specified
gradation limits and avoid gap grading.
D. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or in these Specifications, use

gradation C when aggregate base or sub-base is specified.
E. The aggregate should have a minimum 80% CBR in accordance with ASTM
D1883, 4 days water soaking at 100% of Maximum Dry Density in accordance
with ASTM D 1557
F. The ‘sand equivalent’ value of materials shall be a minimum 40% in conformance

with ASTM D2419. Loss by abrasion shall be a maximum 40%.
PAGE 51
G. Acid soluble sulphates (Combined Aggregates) shall not be greater than 0.5% in
conformance with (BS 812:P118). Clay lumps and friable particles shall be a
maximum 0.25% in conformance with ASTM C142.
H. Acid soluble chlorides (Combined aggregates) shall not be greater than 1% in

conformance with (BS 812:P117).
13.2.5 Spreaders
A. Use spreaders with a screen and vibrator that strikes off and distributes the
material to the required width and level for each layer and capable of spreading
the sub-base and base materials in one operation so as to make it ready for
compaction with minimum shaping.
op V1
B. Ensure that the width of each spread is not less than a traffic lane wide. Use a
spreader with a screen that can be adjustable to the required cross-section.
Screed action includes any practical motion that produces a finished surface
texture of uniform appearance.
C -
y
13.2.6 Central Mixers
C
A. Provide central mixing plant of either an approved drum or pug mill type with a
C
moisture control system so that the material may be spread without further mixing
or processing.
Q
B. Mixing should be done before spreading (out of site.

13.3.1 Examination
A. Verify subgrade has been inspected and complies with the Specification, is
compacted to the maximum dry density of 100%, Maximum dry density in
conformance with ASTM D1557 and Field density with ASTM D1556, and its
levels and slopes comply with the longitudinal and cross-section drawings (see
Clause 3.2).
B. Obtain acceptance of the Engineer before commencing spreading of material for

the sub-base and base courses.
13.3.2 Preparation
A. Correct irregularities in substrate/subgrade gradient and elevation by scarifying,
reshaping, and re-compacting, to obtain smooth, hard, uniform surface.
B. Do not place fill on soft or muddy surfaces.
13.3.3 Screening and Mixture of the Materials

A. Apply screening for the materials used in aggregate sub-base and base courses.
B. Use screens of the size and number required to remove oversize aggregate and,
if necessary, to separate the materials into two or more fractions so that they may
be combined to meet the required gradation.
PAGE 52
C. When conveyor belt samples from the end of the screening and/or crushing-
screening operation yield a product consistently within the specified gradation, no
further mixing will be required at the plant and the material may be loaded and
hauled directly to the road.
D. Stockpile material, if required, so as to prevent segregation.
E. Mix the material through using central mixing plant.
F. Where separate size materials are to be blended to meet the gradation, blend
them as directed by the Engineer, prior to delivery to the roadway. Mixing of
separate materials on the roadway by the motor grader will not be permitted.
op V1
13.3.4 Aggregate Spreading and Compacting
A. Take samples of the screened mixed and approved material in order to determine
the optimum moisture content in accordance to ASTM D1557
B. Spread the material on the prepared surface in layers not more than 15 cm
C -
y
compacted thickness to achieve the total thickness as indicated on the Drawings.
C.
C
Ensure that the geotextile fabric is not damaged by spreading and compacting the
aggregate sub-base.
C
D. Determine the natural moisture content of materials constituting the sub-base and
base courses. If it is less than the optimum moisture content, add the necessary
Q
amount of water to obtain the optimum moisture content. Allow for the quantity
which may be lost by evaporation in the process of raking, levelling and
compacting, depending on atmospheric temperature, quantity of material and the
equipment and plant to be used in this operation, provided that the layer is
compacted when the moisture content therein is within +1 of the optimum
moisture content in order to obtain maximum dry density, and moisture content is
uniform in all parts of the section where the work is being carried out and in the
various depths of the layer thickness. Any segregated spots to be replaced to fill
depth with well graded material.
E. Aerate the material in order to reach the optimum moisture content, if the natural
moisture content in materials exceeds the optimum moisture content.
F. Start the compaction immediately thereafter, by means of pneumatic and steel

rollers or vibratory rollers and in accordance with the instructions from the
Engineer.
G. Start the compaction with rollers from extreme sides proceeding gradually toward
the road axis.
H. Continue rolling until an average relative density of not less than 100 percent but
no single value below 98% (for sub-base and for road base layer) of the Maximum
Dry Density has been obtained as determined by the Moisture-Density
Relationship Test AASHTO T-180 by test method ASTM D1557. Ensure that the
CBR (ASTM D1883) of the sub-base material and road base is not less than 80%
at 100% compaction, 96 hours water soaking.
I. Take care during the operations of mixing spreading compacting and levelling of
sub-base and base course materials so that layers already compacted under the
layer being executed are not affected, or that the finished sub-grade or base
surface is also not affected.
PAGE 53
J. Where equipment makes turns in going back and forth, make good any damage
that results in mixing the various layers constituting the different sub grades and
base courses at your own expense and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
K. Where the finished total compacted thickness exceeds 150 mm, execute each
layer in composite layers not exceeding 150 mm in thickness after compaction
unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer in writing.
13.3.5 Protection of Surface

A. Protect the sub-base or base course and maintain it sound during work progress,
after its completion and prior to receiving the bituminous layers or prior to laying
the surface overlay thereon.
op V1
B. Repair damages caused to the layer to the satisfaction of the Engineer, if exposed
to traffic or natural conditions resulting in damage to the surface.
C. Do not roll the sub-base and base courses when the underlying material is soft or
C -
yielding or when the rolling causes a wave-like motion in this course.
y
D.
C
When the rolling develops irregularities.
1. Loose the irregular surface, then refill it with the same kind of material as
C
used in constructing the course and again roll according to the
specifications.
Q
2. Tamp thoroughly the sub-base and base course material with mechanical
tampers along places inaccessible to rollers.
E. Do not work on the sub-base and base course during rainy weather.
F. Hauling equipment may be routed over completed portions of the sub-base and
base courses provided no damage results and provided that such equipment are
routed over the full width of the course to avoid rutting or uneven compaction.
G. The Engineer has the right to stop all hauling over completed or partially
completed sub-base and base courses when in his opinion such hauling is
causing damage.
13.3.6 Tolerances
A. Flatness: Maximum variation of 10 mm measured with 3 m straight edge.
B. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within 8 mm.
C. Variation from Design Elevation: Within 10 mm.

A. Section 01400 - Quality Assurance: Field inspection.
B. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D1556, ASTM

D1557 and AASHTO T180.
C. Test the aggregate sub-base and/or base courses. Obtain acceptance of the
Engineer prior to the application of any prime coat or any other paving course.
PAGE 54
D. The minimum requirements for the aggregate sub-base and base courses shall
be as follows:
1. Compaction: Wherever the degree of compaction is found to be less than

the average 100% and for any single value of 98% specified, re-compact
and correct the area of sub-base or road base course involved
satisfactorily so that the minimum specified density is achieved.
2. Gradation: Wherever the gradation is found to be outside the limits

specified, scarify, remove or otherwise rework the area of sub-base and/or
base course involved as directed by the Engineer to provide a material
within the specified limits.
op V1
3. Thickness: In the event of the constructed thickness of the aggregate sub-
base or base course being 8 mm more than the total thickness indicated
on the Drawings, correct the area involved as directed by the Engineer by
removing excess material in an accepted manner.
C -
y
In the event of the constructed thickness of the aggregate sub-base or
C
base course being 8 mm less than the total thickness indicated on the
drawings, provide additional material in the next course (base course or
wearing course.
C
Construct the aggregate sub-base or base course to the grade level as
indicated on the Drawings, as specified, and as accepted by the Engineer.
Q
Do not allow the total sum thickness of the sub-base course, base course
and wearing course to be less than the total sum thickness of all courses
as indicated on the Drawings.
4. Evenness of surface and grade level:
a. Test the final surfaces of the sub-base or base courses by means of a

3 meter long straight edge.
b. Ensure that no rises or depressions in excess of 10 mm appear on the

surface. Otherwise, strip such areas, correct and compact to comply
with all specification requirements and as accepted by the Engineer.
c. Construct the finished surface of the sub-base or base course to

within 10 mm of the grade levels indicated on the Drawings.
E. Minimum frequency test requirements for road base shall be as follows:
1. One sample every 1,000m3 shall be tested for gradation, P.I., S.E.,
Soundness, Maximum Dry Density, CBR and L.A.
2. One in-situ density test for every 300m2 of the laid aggregate road base,
base and sub-base.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 55
14. RIPRAP (SECTION 02275)
14.1.Part 1 General

01300 Submittals
op V1
02211 Rough Grading
02222 Excavation
02223 Backfilling
C -
y
02225 Trenching
C
C
A. Perform work in accordance with the standards of Abu Dhabi Municipality or
Works Department’s standards
Q
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
14.2.1 Materials
A. Riprap: Granite Limestone type; broken stone, irregular shaped rock; solid and no
friable; 150 mm minimum size, 450 mm maximum size.
B. Binder: SR Portland cement
C. Geotextile Fabric: In accordance with Engineers Specifications.
14.3.1 Placement
A. Place geotextile fabric over substrate, lap edges and ends. The area shall be
cleared of any angular objects or sharp undulations and prepared to a relatively
smooth condition prior to fabric placement.
B. Place riprap at culvert pipe ends, at embankment slopes, as indicated.
C. Installed Thickness: In accordance with Contract Document.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 56
15. ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING (SECTION 02510)
15.1.Part 1 General
15.1.1. Related Documents

01300 Submittals
op V1
15.1.2. References
C -
AASHTO M17 - Mineral filler for bituminous paving mixture.
y
C
AASHTO M20 – Standard Specification for Penetration-Graded Asphalt Cement
AASHTO M29 - Fine aggregate for bituminous paving mixtures.

C
AASHTO M33 - Preformed expansion joint filler for concrete (bituminous type.
Q
AASHTO M82 - Cutback asphalt (medium curing type
AASHTO M140 – Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt
AASHTO M208 – Standard Specification for Cationic Emulsified Asphalt
AASHTO T96 – Standard Method of test for Resistance to Degradation of small-size

Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine
AASHTO T104 – Standard Method of Test for Soundness of Aggregate by Use of

Sodium Sulphate or Magnesium Sulphate
AASHTO T176 – Standard Method of Test for Plastic Fines in Graded Aggregates and
Soils by Use of the Sand Equivalent Test
ASTM D 946 -Penetration-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction.
AIM - (Asphalt Institute Manual - MS-2 Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and
Other Hot Mix Types.
AIM - MS-3 Asphalt Plant Manual.
AIM - MS-8 Asphalt Paving Manual.
AIM - MS-19 Basic Asphalt Emulsion Manual.
Abu Dhabi Municipality Building Regulations.
Abu Dhabi Municipality (ADM Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction.
PAGE 57
Appendix 1 – Abu Dhabi Municipality Specification for Backfilling of Trenches and

Excavations in Asphaltic Roads, Tiled/Paved Park lots and Sidewalks.
15.1.3. Quality Assurance

A. Perform Work and all tests in accordance with ADM Standard Specifications for
Road and Bridge Construction, or as directed by the Engineer to meet the latest
Specifications of ADM, and AIM (MS-8).
B. Mixing Plant: Conform to AIM (MS-3).
C. Obtain materials from same source throughout.
op V1
15.1.4. Regulatory Requirements
A. Conform to the requirements of Clause 1.2 above and with any other agency,
which may have jurisdiction of the roadway area.
C -
y
15.1.5. Environmental Requirements
A.
C
Do not place asphalt when base surface is wet.
C
B. Conform to the latest requirements of ADM and any other agency, which may
have jurisdiction of the roadway area.
Q
15.2.1 Bituminous Prime Coat Materials

A. Use liquid asphalt MC-70 medium curing cutback asphalt as a prime coat
conforming to AASHTO M82.
15.2.2 Materials for Asphalt Mixes

A. Use aggregates consisting of fine and coarse mineral aggregates uniformly mixed
with hot asphalt cement.
B. Coarse aggregate: Coarse aggregate is that portion of the mineral aggregate

retained on the No. 8 Sieve. Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed natural
stones and gravel. Crushed particles shall be cubic and angular in shape and
shall not be thin, flaky or elongated.
Coarse aggregate shall be clean and free from organic matter, clay,
cemented particles and other extraneous or detrimental material. The degree of
crushing shall be such that at least 100 percent by weight of the material retained
on the No. 8 sieve has at least one fractured faced and at least 70 percent shall
be totally crushed. The flakiness of each individual stockpile shall not exceed 30
percent when tested in accordance with B.S. 812.
Coarse aggregate shall have a maximum Sodium Sulphate Soundness of 10
percent when tested in accordance with AASHTO T-104. The abrasion loss
(AASHTO T-96) shall not exceed 40 percent except that a maximum abrasion
loss of 50 percent will be allowed for asphaltic base and binder courses when the
surface of these courses is not to be subjected to traffic.
PAGE 58
C. Fine aggregate: Fine aggregate is that portion of the mineral aggregate passing
the No. 8 Sieve. Fine aggregate shall consist of natural sand and/or crushed sand
and shall be of such gradation that when combined with other aggregates in
proper proportions, the resultant mixture shall meet the required gradation.
Crushed sand shall be produced by crushing clean course aggregate and shall
not be thin, flaky or elongated.
If natural sand is included in the fine aggregate mixture, this material shall be fed
to the dryer as a separate aggregate and the amount used shall be limited to 25
percent by weight. No rounded windblown or desert sand will be permitted.
Fine aggregate shall be clean and free from organic matter, clay, cemented
particles and other extraneous or detrimental materials. Individual stockpiles of
op V1
natural sand when tested in accordance with AASHTO T-176 shall have a sand
equivalent of not less than 45. Individual stockpiles of crushed sand shall have a
sand equivalent of not less than 30.
Fine aggregate shall have a maximum Sodium Sulphate Soundness of 10 percent
C -
and a maximum Magnesium Sulphate Soundness of 15 percent when tested in
y
accordance with AASHTO T-104.
D.
C
Mineral filler: Mineral filler shall consist of finely ground particles of limestone,
cement, or hydrated lime in accordance with AASHTO M-17. It shall be thoroughly
C
dry and free from lumps and shall meet the graduation requirements of AASHTO
M-17.
Q
E. Bitumen: The asphalt cement for use in the asphalt mixes shall be 60-70
penetration grade in accordance with AASHTO M-20 and ADM Standard
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, or as directed by the Engineer to
meet the latest Specifications of ADM.
F. Combined mineral aggregates gradation: Use the combined mineral aggregates

gradation for base and wearing courses as per the specifications requirements of
ADM Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, or as directed by
the Engineer to meet the latest Specifications of ADM.
15.2.3 Bituminous Tack Coat

A. Use tack coat of emulsified asphalt of the CSS 1h grade in accordance with
AASHTO M-208, or SS 1h grade in accordance with AASHTO –M140.
15.2.4 Asphaltic Concrete Base and Wearing Courses

A. Asphaltic concrete mixes for base and wearing courses shall comply with the
composition requirements of Types I and II respectively as specified in the ADM
Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, or as directed by the
Engineer to meet the latest Specifications of ADM.
15.2.5 Asphalt Paving Mix

A. Submit the job mix formulae to the Engineer at least 30 days in advance of
commencing the particular work. Submit details regarding source, properties and
test results of all mineral aggregates, filler, and asphalt cement, together with a
single definite percentage of aggregate passing each required sieve size, a single
definite temperature at which the mixtures are to be delivered on site, all of which
must fall within the acceptable limits of mix specification.
PAGE 59
B. Base Course Mix Design Criteria: The Base Course design criteria shall meet the
following:
Stability minimum (KN) 12

Flow, 0.25 mm 8 - 16
V.M.A. 10 - 13
Air Voids, % 3-5
Aggregate Voids filled with bitumen, % 65-75
Filler/Bitumen Ratio 0.8-1.2
Asphalt Cement (% by weight of Total Agg.) 3.0 - 4.0
C. Wearing Course Mix design criteria: The Wearing Course design criteria shall meet
the following:
op V1
Stability minimum (KN) 15
Flow, 0.25 mm 8 - 16
V.M.A. 12 - 15
Air Voids, % 3-5
C -
Aggregate Voids filled with bitumen, % 65-75
y
C
Filler/Bitumen Ratio
Asphalt Cement (% by weight of Total Agg.)
0.8-1.2
4.0 - 5.0
C
15.2.6 Source Quality Control and Tests
A. Sampling and testing requirements shall be In accordance with the ADM Standard
Q
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, or as directed by the Engineer to

meet the latest Specifications of ADM. Also, the Engineer will collect as many
samples of materials and mixtures both for independent laboratory and on -site as
he considers necessary for testing purposes. No time or date limit will apply to
sampling of mixtures.
B. Submit proposed mix formulae together with all applicable design data of each
type of mix for review at least one month prior to beginning of work.
C. Ensure that all mixtures delivered on site conform to the approved mixes.
D. The Engineer may, if he considers it necessary, change the job mix formulae if
results obtained from collected samples give unsatisfactory results.
E. After the job mix formulae have been established and approved, comply thereto
with all mixes furnished within the following tolerances:
Passing Sieve No. 4 and larger :  5.0%

Passing Sieves between No. 4 and No. 200 :  4.0%
Passing Sieve No. 200 :  1.5%
Asphalt Cement :  0.2%
Temperature of mix when emptied from mixer :  10C
F. Notify any change in material source or characteristics to the Engineer. In such

event, prepare a new job mix. Obtain approval of the Engineer before the use of
new or changed material.
PAGE 60
15.3.1 Examination
A. Verify that compacted sub grade, sub base, etc. is ready to support paving and
imposed loads.
B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.
15.3.2 Subbase
A. The Aggregate Sub base and Base Courses shall be in accordance with the ADM
op V1
Engineer to meet the latest Specifications of ADM, and the relevant Section of the
Project Specifications.
15.3.3
C -
Preparation - Bituminous Prime Coat
y
A.
C
Apply bituminous prime coat on aggregate base or sub base in accordance with
the ADM Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, or as
directed by the Engineer to meet the latest Specifications of ADM.
C
B. Apply bituminous prime coat to contact surfaces only. All other areas shall be
protected from the bituminous prime coat.
Q
C. Use clean sand to blot excess prime coat.
15.3.4 Preparation - Tack Coat

A. Apply tack coat on asphalt or concrete surfaces in accordance with the ADM
Engineer to meet the latest Specifications of ADM.
B. Apply tack coat to contact surfaces only. All other areas shall be protected from
the bituminous tack coat.
C. Coat surfaces of manhole, catch basin frames with oil to prevent bond with
asphalt pavement. Do not tack coat these surfaces.
15.3.5 Preparation - Other

A. Construct all openings or structures in the road for water, drainage and other
specified utilities and determine their levels and positions before the start of
paving operations.
B. Backfill, compact and prepare for paving all utility trenches cut in the bituminous
road surfaces.
15.3.6 Placing Asphalt Pavement - Base Course

A. Install Work in accordance with the ADM Standard Specifications for Road and
Bridge Construction, or as directed by the Engineer to meet the latest
Specifications of ADM.
PAGE 61
B. Place asphalt not less than 48 hours after applying bituminous prime coat, at a
temperature range of a minimum 120ºC, Maximum 160C. lay the mix on an
approved surface and weather conditions.
C. The Engineer may stop laying and compaction of asphalt if he considers the
prevailing wind and resulting sand storm is injurious to the asphalt. No claim will
be entertained as a result of this action.
D. Place to minimum allowable compacted thickness of 100 millimetres.
E. Spread the asphalt mix upon its arrival at the point of use and strike it off to the
grade, elevation and cross-section shape intended, either over the entire width or
over such partial width as may be required. Discard the mix if it does not comply
with the requirements of this specification.
op V1
F. Install gutter drainage grilles and frames and manhole/chamber frames in correct
position and elevation.
G. Compact pavement by rolling to specified density. Do not displace or extrude
pavement from position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment.
H.
C -
During the laying of asphalt and until the completion of compaction no standing
y
C
plant will be allowed on the road surface.
15.3.7 Spreading and Finishing

C
A. Construct the homogeneous asphalt course to proposed levels, providing after
compaction an even surface free from undulation, rises or depressions, and within
Q
the tolerances stipulated.
B. Do not begin construction of a new asphaltic concrete course until the previously
laid course has been tested and approved.
C. Lay the asphalt course in more than one layer, with no layer exceeding five
centimetres in thickness unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or accepted
in writing by the Engineer.
D. Place the second layer as soon as practicable after the first layer has been
finished, rolled and cooled. The Engineer may at his discretion request cleaning of
the first layer and the application of a thin tack coat thereon if he so deems
necessary.
E. Offset transverse joints in succeeding layers at least 2 meters and longitudinal

joints at least 30 centimetres. Longitudinal joints of final course shall be located at
the centre of the lane or at joints between two lanes.
F. Do not use motor graders or hand spreading of the asphalt mix. This will be
specifically permitted by the Engineer where it is impractical to use pavers.
G. Provide automatic screed controls on all pavers. Use it for paving courses as
instructed by the Engineer.
15.3.8 Rolling
A. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish without
roller marks.
B. After the longitudinal joints and edges have been compacted, start rolling
longitudinally at the sides and gradually progress towards the centre.
PAGE 62
C. On super-elevated sections begin rolling on the low side and progress to the high
side, overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half the width of tandem
rollers and uniformly lapping each preceding track.
D. Move the rollers at a slow but uniform speed to be accepted by the Engineer with
the drive wheels nearest the paver. Do not exceed the speed of 4.8 km/h for steel-
wheeled rollers or 8.0 km/h for pneumatic-tired rollers.
E. Do not change the line of rolling suddenly and do not reverse the direction of
rolling suddenly.
F. If rolling causes displacement of the material, loosen the affected areas at once
with hand tools and restore to the original grade of the loose material before being
re-rolled.
op V1
G. Do not leave heavy equipment or rollers to stand on the finished surface before it
has been compacted and has thoroughly cooled.
H. To prevent adhesion of the mix to steel-wheeled rollers, keep the wheels properly
C -
moistened. Excess water; however, will not be permitted by the Engineer.
y
I.
C
When paving in a single width, roll the first lane placed in the following order:
C
1. Transverse joints
2. Longitudinal joints
3. Outside edge
Q
4. Initial or breakdown rolling (beginning on the low side and progressing

towards the high side
5. Second rolling
6. Finish rolling
J. When paving in echelon, leave unrolled five to ten centimetres of the edge, which
the second paver is following. Do not expose edges more than fifteen minutes
without being rolled. Give particular attention to the construction of the transverse
and longitudinal joints in all courses.
15.3.9 Transverse Joints

A. Carefully construct and thoroughly compact transverse joints to provide a smooth
riding surface.
B. Check joints with a straight edge to ensure smoothness and true alignment.
C. Form joints with a bulkhead such as a board to provide a straight line and vertical
face.
D. If the joint has been distorted by traffic or by other means, trim it to line and paint
the face with a thin coating of emulsified asphalt before the fresh material is
placed against it.
E. To obtain thorough compaction of the joints, push the material placed against the
joint against the vertical face with a steel-wheel roller. Place the roller on the
previously compacted material transversely so that no more than 15 centimetres
of the rear rolling wheel rides on the edge of the joint. Operate the roller to pinch
and press the mix into transverse joint. Continue rolling along this line, shifting the
position of the roller gradually across the joint in 15 to 20 centimetres increments,
until the joint has been rolled with the entire width of the roller wheel.
PAGE 63
F. Continue rolling until a thoroughly compacted, neat joint is obtained more than 15
centimetres of the rear rolling wheel rides on the edge of the joint.
G. Operate the roller to pinch and press the mix into place at the transverse joint.
Continue rolling along this line, shifting the position of the roller gradually across
the joint in 15 to 20 centimetres increments, until the joint has been rolled with the
entire width of the roller wheel.
15.3.10 Longitudinal Joints

A. Roll longitudinal joints directly behind the paving operations.
B. Ensure that the first lane placed is true to line and grade and have a vertical face.
op V1
C. Push the material being placed in the abutting lane tightly against the face of the
previously placed lane.
D. Before rolling, carefully remove the coarse aggregate in the material overlapping
the joint with a rake and discard it.
C -
y
E.
C
Perform rolling with a steel-wheeled roller.
F. Shift the roller onto the previously placed lane so that not more than 15
C
centimetres of the roller wheel rides on the edges of the newly laid lane. Then
operate the rollers to pinch and press the fine material gradually across the joint.
Continue rolling until a thoroughly compacted, neat joint is obtained.
Q
G. When the abutting lane is not placed in the same day, or the joint is distorted
during the day’s work by traffic or by other means, carefully trim the edge of the
lane to line, clean and paint it with a thin coating of emulsified asphalt before the
abutting lane is placed.
15.3.11 Edges
A. Roll the edges of the asphalt concurrently with or immediately after rolling the
longitudinal joint.
B. Take care in consolidating the course along the entire length of the edges.
C. Slightly elevate the material along the unsupported edges with hand tools before
compacting. This will permit the full weight of the roller wheel to bear on the
material to the extreme edges of the mat.
15.3.12 Breakdown Rolling

A. Immediately follow the rolling of the longitudinal joints and edges with breakdown
rolling.
B. Operate rollers as close to the paver as possible to obtain adequate density

without causing undue displacement. Do not allow in any case the mix
temperature to drop below 107C prior to breakdown rolling.
C. If the breakdown roller is steel-wheeled, operate it with the drive wheel nearest the
finishing machine. Pneumatic-tired rollers may be used as breakdown rollers.
PAGE 64
15.3.13 Intermediate Rolling

A. Use pneumatic-tired or steel-wheeled rollers for intermediate rolling.
B. Follow the breakdown rolling with intermediate rolling as closely as possible and
while the paving mix is still of a temperature that will result in maximum density
from this operation.
C. Use rollers continuously after the initial rolling until all of the mix placed has been
thoroughly compacted. Turning of rollers on the hot paving mix which causes
undue displacement will not be permitted by the Engineer.
15.3.14 Finish Rolling
op V1
A. Perform finish rolling with three-axle tandem rollers unless otherwise permitted by
the Engineer. Accomplish finish rolling while the material is still warm enough for
the removal of roller marks.
B. Conduct all rolling operations in close sequence.
C -
y
C. In places inaccessible for the operation of standard rollers as specified, perform
C
compaction by manual or mechanical tampers of such design as to give the
desired density.
C
D. Check the smoothness, levels, cross-falls, density and thickness after final rolling.
Correct any irregularity of the surface exceeding the specified limits and any areas
Q
defective in texture, density or composition as directed by the Engineer, including

removal and displacement at no additional cost.
15.3.15 Placing Asphalt Pavement - Wearing Course

A. Base course shall be clean and dry before applying the tack coat.
B. Place wearing course on a base course treated with tack coat.
C. Place wearing course to 50 mm compacted thickness.
D. Spread the asphalt mix in accordance with Clause 3.6 of this Section upon its
arrival at the point of use and strike it off to the grade, elevation and cross-section
shape intended, either over the entire width or over such partial width as may be
required. Discard the mix if it does not comply with the requirements.
E. Install gutter drainage grilles and frames and manhole/chamber frames in correct
position and elevation.
F. Compact pavement by rolling to specified density. Do not displace or extrude

pavement from position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment.
G. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish,
without roller marks, in accordance with Clause 3.8.
15.3.16 Curbs
A. Install extruded asphalt curbs of profile as indicated.
PAGE 65
15.3.17 Tolerances
A. Flatness: Maximum variation of 3 millimetres for both base course and wearing
course measured with a four meter straight edge in any direction. Do not accept
the surface if more than 10% of gross area exceeds the allowable tolerance.
B. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within 6 mm.
C. Variation from True Elevation: Within 8 mm.
D. Minimum Degree of Compaction: 98% for both base course and wearing course.
The degree of compaction is the ratio of the specific gravity of the pavement
sample to the specific gravity of the laboratory Marshall Specimen prepared in
accordance with the Job Mix Formula.
op V1
A. In accordance with Clause 2.6 of this Section.
15.3.19 Protection
C -
y
A.
C
In no case will traffic be permitted less than 24 hours after completion of the
asphalt course unless a shorter period is authorized by the Engineer.
C
END OF SECTION
Q
PAGE 66
16. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING

(SECTION 02520)
16.1.Part 1 General

op V1
01300 Submittals

C -
y
02231
C
Aggregate Base Course
03100 Concrete Formwork

C
03200 Concrete Reinforcement
03300 Cast-in Place Concrete

Q
16.1.2 Referenes
ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings
ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for

Curing Concrete
ASTM C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural
Construction.
ASTM D1752 - Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete
Paving and Structural Construction.
16.1.3 Performance Requirements

A. Paving: Designed for parking, Light duty commercial vehicles and residential
streets.

PAGE 67
B. Product Data: Provide data on joint filler, admixtures and curing compounds.
C. Samples: Submit two sample panels, illustrating required finish.

A. Perform work in accordance with requirements of Sections 03100, Section 03200
and Section 03300.
B. Obtain cementitious materials from same source throughout.

A. Conform to applicable standards for paving work on public property.
op V1
16.1.7 Environmental Requirements
A. Do not place concrete when base surface is wet.
16.2.Part 2
C -
Products
y
C
16.2.1 Form Materials
C
A. Form Materials: Conform to ACI 301 and as specified in Section 03100.
B. Joint Filler: Conform to ASTM D1751 and as shown on drawings

Q
16.2.2 Reinforcement
A. Reinforcing Steel and Wire Fabric: Type specified in Section 03200.
B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: Deformed type, A497in flat sheets.
C. Dowels: ASTM A615; 40 ksi (276 MPA yield grade, plain steel,
16.2.3 Concrete Materials

A. Concrete Materials: As specified in Section 03300.
B. Fine and Coarse Mix Aggregates: ASTM C33 as per requirements of Section
02207.
C. Exposed Aggregate: Marble, Limestone, Gravel washed natural mineral

aggregate, of approved colour, from a single source.
D. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete.
E. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260 as per requirements of Section 03300.
F. Chemical Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A- Water Reducing, Type B- Retarding.

As per requirements of Section 03300
16.2.4 Accessories
A. Curing Compound: ASTM C309, as per Requirements of Section 03300.
B. Joint Sealers: As specified in relevant Sections
PAGE 68
16.2.5 Concrete Mix

A. Mix concrete in accordance with section 03300.
B. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by the
Engineer.

A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Provide mix design.
B. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete for review prior to
commencement of work.
C. Tests on cement and aggregates will be performed to ensure conformance with
op V1
specified requirements.
D. Test samples in accordance with ACI 301 and as per requirements of Section
03300.
E. C -
Perform testing to concrete in accordance with Section 03300.
y
C
C
16.3.1 Examination
Q
A. Verify base conditions under provisions of Section 01039.
B. Verify compacted sub grade or granular base is acceptable and ready to support
paving and imposed loads.
C. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.
16.3.2 Subbase
A. Section 02231 - Aggregate Base Course forms the base construction for work of
this Section.
B. Prepare sub base in accordance with procedures described in relevant sections
16.3.3 Preparation
A. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete.
B. Coat surfaces of manholes and catch basin frames with oil to prevent bond with
concrete pavement.
C. Notify the Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting

operations.
16.3.4 Forming
A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient.
B. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging

concrete.
PAGE 69
C. Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during
concrete placement.
16.3.5 Reinforcement
A. Place reinforcement as indicated.
B. Interrupt reinforcement at contraction and expansion joints.
C. Place dowels to achieve pavement and curb alignment as detailed.
D. Provide doweled joints as shown on drawings with one end of dowel set in capped
sleeve to allow longitudinal movement.
op V1
16.3.6 Placing Concrete
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301.as specified in Section 03300
B. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joints and filler boards are
not disturbed during concrete placement.
C -
y
C.
C
Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between
predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours
such that cold joints occur.
C
D. Place concrete to pattern indicated.
Q
16.3.7 Joints
A. Place expansion and contraction joints at maximum 6 m intervals or as shown on
drawings. Align curb, gutter, and sidewalk joints.
B. Place joint filler between paving components and building or other appurtenances.
Recess the top of filler by 20 mm for sealant placement.
C. Provide scored joints between sidewalks and curbs, and between curbs and
pavement, as shown on drawings
D. Provide keyed joints as indicated.
16.3.8 Exposed Aggregate

A. Wash exposed aggregate surface with clean water and scrub with stiff bristle
brush exposing aggregate to match sample panel.
OR
B. Sand blast concrete surfaces to achieve aggregate exposure to match sample

panel.
16.3.9 Finishing
A. Area Paving: Light broom, wooden float. , or exposed aggregate.
B. Sidewalk Paving: Light broom, wooden float or exposed aggregate as indicated

on drawings.
C. Median Barrier: Light broom, edges rounded to 20 mm radius, and trowel joint
edges.
PAGE 70
D. Curbs and Gutters: Light broom
E. Direction of Texturing: Parallel to pavement direction or transverse to pavement

direction as shown on drawings
F. Inclined Vehicular Ramps: Boomed perpendicular to slope or V-jointed

perpendicular to slope as shown on drawings. Place curing compound sealer
on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing. Apply in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
16.3.10 Joint Sealing

A. Separate pavement from vertical surfaces with 20 mm thick joint filler.
op V1
B. Place joint filler in pavement pattern placement sequence. Set top to required
elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.
C. Extend joint filler from bottom of pavement to within 13 mm of finished surface.
16.3.11 Tolerances
C -
y
A.
C
Section 01400 - Quality Assurance
B. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 6 mm in 3 m.

C
C. Maximum Variation from True Position: 6 mm.
Q

A. Section 01400 - Quality Assurance:
B Testing works; perform the work as indicated in section 03300
C. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather and cured on site
under same conditions as concrete it represents.
D. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken.
E. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity,
air temperature, and test samples taken.
16.3.13 Protection
A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive
hot temperatures, and mechanical injury.
B. Do not permit pedestrian or vehicular traffic over pavement for 7 days minimum
after finishing or until 75 percent design strength of concrete has been achieved.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 71
17. CHAMBERS AND COVERS (SECTION 02607)
17.1.Part 1 General

Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete
op V1
17.1.2 References
BS 970 Part 4 - Specification for wrought steels for mechanical and allied
engineering purposes. Valve steels.
C -
BS 1387 - Specification for screwed and socketed steel tubes and tubulars and for
y
C
plastic and steel tubes suitable for welding or for screwing to BS 21 pipe threads.
BS 2789 - Specification for spheroidal graphite or modular graphite cast iron:

C
Ductile iron.

Q
A. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings shall indicate details of chamber locations,

elevations, dimensions, sizes, configuration, lifting eyes and penetrations.
B. Product Data: Products data shall be submitted for covers, component

construction, features, configuration and dimensions.
C. Samples: Samples of material shall be submitted for testing and for approval by
the Engineer.
A. Manufacturer: The Company shall be specialized in manufacturing products
specified in this section with documented experience.
17.2.1 Materials
A. Valve Chambers: Irrigation Water Systems
B. Covers and frames:
1. Covers and frames for access to reservoirs, pumping station sumps and
valve chambers shall comply with BS EN 124. A GRP sealing plate and
heavy grease seal, to be formed between the cover and frame, shall be
provided to prevent the ingress of sand.
PAGE 72
2. Covers and frames shall be watertight and made of spheroidal graphite

cast iron (ductile iron. They shall be supplied to suit the clear openings
shown in the Drawings.
3. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings or instructed by the Engineer or

specified in this Section the class of covers and frames shall be Class
D400 in locations subject to vehicular traffic and Class B125 in locations
not subject to vehicular traffic.
4. Covers and frames shall be coated with metallic zinc primer and
300micron abrasion resistant epoxy.
5. Provide the following cover face badging in Arabic and English:-
op V1
A. Irrigation Main
Abu Dhabi Municipality
For covers on irrigation main valve chambers;

C -
y
C B. Irrigation
For irrigation main size 150 x 150 surface boxes.

C
6. Multiple ducts covers and frames shall be cast iron, water proof and non-
rocking. They shall be of the type incorporating integral removable
Q
intermediate beams to give the required clear pit opening shown in the
Drawings. All covers frames and supporting metal work shall be designed
for loading to BS 5400.
1 No. manhole cover lifting trolley compatible with the manhole covers
shall be provided.
7. Covers and frames and multiple ducts covers and frames shall be coated
in accordance with Section 09900, exposure class C2. Coated covers and
frames shall not be handled and transported until full cure has been
achieved. An original of the approved coating specialist's quality control
report for each itemized component shall be provided with each delivery.
The report shall bear an original company stamp and signature.
8. Surface boxes shall include a cast iron heavy duty cover and frame and be
suitable for wheel loads of up to 11.43 tones. They shall be coated in
accordance with section 09900, exposure class C2. Surface boxes
shall have a 150mm diameter clear opening and the cover shall be
attached to the frame by a hinge.
9. Cover badging shall include: Cast iron/ductile iron, size (clear opening,
foundry logs and name, foundry batching number to covers and frames
and class.
C. Grab Handles:
1. Provide a grab handle in all cover slabs above circular access shafts to
chambers. Form the grab handle from a 20 millimeters stainless steel bar Grade
PAGE 73
316S16 to BS970:Part 4 or mild steel bar shot blasted and resin sealed, coated
with Vinylester resin rich GRP laminate.
D. Sealing Plates:
1. Sealing plates shall be provided to chambers and sump access covers

where there is risk of ingress of surface water.
2. The sealing plate thickness shall be a minimum 5 millimeters and the
minimum design load is 7.5 kn/sq.m.
3. The sealing plate shall be in the form of a plug with a flange to prevent the
plate dropping into the manhole.
4. The sealing plate shall incorporate a peripheral retained rubber ring such
that when the cover is closes a gas tight seal formed.
op V1
5. The plate shall be designed such that a watertight seal is obtained without
the use of bolts.
6. The rubber rings shall be made from nitrile rubber, SBR or EPDM
formulations, in compliance of BS2494.
7. The sealing plates shall have two securely laminated GRP lifting handles.
8.
C -
The underside of the plate shall be protected with a resin only liner 1.5
y
C
millimeters thick. Fibers shall not protrude into the resin layer or form
bridges to the free surface.
9. Cuts and/or drilled faces shall be sealed with resin only.
C
10. Pigments shall not be added to the GRP formulations.
11. GRP sealing plates shall be seated on the lips of the frames without
causing any reduction to the dimensions of the specified openings.
Q
E. Ladders:
1. The ladders shall be made of GRP as detailed on the Drawings.

F. Step Irons:
1. Step Irons shall be plastic encapsulated and shall comply with BS1247:
part 2 and be of the general purpose or precast concrete manhole pattern
as applicable.
G. Tanking:
1. All manholes and chambers shall be protected externally with tanking.
H. Safety Chains:
1. Safety Chains shall be high density polyethylene or stainless steel of

accepted size and strength with suitable hooks at one end to permit
access.
I. Hand railing:
1. Hand railing shall be Molded GRP as detailed in the Drawings.
17.2.2 Quality Control

A. Shop testing and inspection of covers shall be provided as per Section 01400.
B. Sample covers shall be tested by an approved laboratory.
C. Testing frequency per batch delivery shall be as follows:
PAGE 74
1 - 50 units one unit for each size and class

Up to 250 units two units for each size and class
Up to 500 units three units for each size and class
Over 500 units four units for each size and class
17.3.1 General
A. Chambers shall be constructed in accordance with the Drawings in the positions
indicated thereon or wherever else instructed by the Engineer. Chambers along
with all construction joints shall be watertight.
op V1
B. Pipes entering and leaving chambers shall be laid soffit to soffit unless otherwise
shown on the Drawings. Provide details of pipes entering and leaving chambers
through structures.
C.
C -
Holes will not be allowed to be made through the shaft rings and liners.
y
D.
C
Unless otherwise directed, cut-off walls shall be constructed to prevent the
formation of drainage paths within the pipe bedding. They shall be extended from
the base to both sides of the excavation and keyed into the native soil to a depth
C
of 150 millimetres. They shall be constructed 300 millimetres above the top of the
pipe bedding as detailed on the Drawings.
Q
17.3.2 Examination
A. Items provided by other sections of Work shall be verified for proper size and
location.
B. Built-in items shall be verified for proper location, and for being ready for roughing
into Work.
17.3.3 Preparation
A. Placement of inlet and outlet pipe or duct sleeves required by other sections shall
be coordinate.
17.3.4 Chamber Construction

A. Chamber covers shall be set in paved areas accurately to the level and slopes of
the surrounding surface. The cover and frame shall have a bed of 15 millimetres
thick cement mortar No.2, and then a course of concrete blockwork shall be set
above the cover slab with suitable pointing. Concrete surround Class ‘B’ shall be
applied to the blockwork, cover and frame up to the underside of the base course
of the paved area and to the extent indicated in the Drawings.
B. The chamber covers shall be set accurately on a course of concrete blockwork to

the level and slopes of the surrounding surfaces unless otherwise shown on the
Drawings or instructed by the Engineer. The blockwork, cover and frame shall
have a bed of 15 millimetres thick cement mortar No.2 and shall be surrounded by
concrete Class ‘B’ to the level of the surrounding surfaces.
C. Immediately prior to the inspection of the Works all covers and frames shall be
cleaned thoroughly by accepted means to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
PAGE 75
D. Other sections of work shall be coordinated in order to provide correct size,

shape, and location.
17.3.5 Construction of New Chambers on Existing Irrigation Water

Systems
A. Where new chambers are to be constructed on existing irrigation pipelines the
Contractor will be responsible for providing temporary bypass arrangements to
ensure the continuity of the irrigation service.
B. The Contractor shall be deemed to have included all the necessary costs for the
required temporary works in his rates. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any
additional costs or extension of time arising from these temporary works.
op V1
C. The Contractor shall obtain from the Operating Authority prior permission in
writing before carrying out any work on the existing system.
D. Adequate precautions shall be taken to ensure the existing pipelines bedding and
stability are not disturbed as a result of excavation, dewatering or any other
C -
y
construction works.
C
END OF SECTION
C
Q
PAGE 76
18. GRP PIPES (SECTION 02630)
18.1.Part 1 General
18.1.1 Introduction
A. This section of the specification gives the requirements for Glass Reinforced
Plastic (GRP pipeline materials and the installation and testing. The
Manufacturer's design shall satisfy the minimum requirements set herein.
op V1
A. The following sections of the specification shall be read in conjunction with this
section.
C -
y
Section 01300 Submittals
Section 01400
C Quality Control
Section 01600 Material and equipment
C
Section 02222 Excavation
Section 02223 Backfilling
Q
Section 02225 Trenching

Section 15121 Pipe Expansion Compensation
Section 15245 Vibration Isolation
Section 15140 Pipe Supports
18.1.3 Standards
A. All activities relating to this section of the standard specification shall comply
with the following or approved equal standards
ASTM D2584 Standard test method for ignition loss of cured reinforced
resins.
ASTM D4161 Standard specification for “fiberglass” (Glass fiber reinforced
thermosetting resin pipe joints using flexible elastomeric seals.
BS 4549-1 Guide to quality control requirements for reinforced plastics
moldings. Guide to the preparation of a scheme to control the
quality of glass reinforced polyester moldings.
BS EN 681 Elastomeric seals. Material requirements for pipe joint seals
used in water and drainage applications.
BS EN 1394 Plastic piping system Glass reinforced thermosetting plastic
(GRP pipes. Determination of the apparent initial
circumferential tensile strength
BS EN 1092-2 Circular flanges for pipes, valves and fittings (PN
designated. Steel, cast iron and copper alloy flanges.
Specification for cast iron flanges.
PAGE 77
BS EN 14364 Plastic piping system for drainage and sewerage with or

without pressure. Glass reinforced-thermosetting plastics
(GRP based on unsaturated polyester resin (UP.
Specification for pipes and fittings
ISO 9000 Quality management systems.
DIN/BS EN 14364 Plastics piping systems for drainage and sewerage with or
without pressure – Glass-reinforced thermosetting plastics
(GRP based on unsaturated polyester resin (UP
DIN-53769- Part 3 Testing of GRP pipes - Determination of Initial and Long
term Ring stiffness
DIN-53769 - Part 6 Testing of GRP pipes under pulsating internal pressure
op V1
DIN EN 1120 Plastics piping systems – Glass-reinforced thermosetting
plastics (GRP pipes and fittings – Determination of the
resistance to chemical attack from the inside of a section in a
deflected condition
C -
DIN EN ISO 75 Plastics – Determination of temperature of deflection under
y
load
DIN EN 1119
C Plastics piping systems – Joints for glass-reinforced
thermosetting plastics (GRP pipes and fittings – Test
C
methods for leak tightness and resistance to damage of
flexible and reduced articulation joints
Plastics piping systems – Glass-reinforced thermosetting
Q
DIN EN 1447
plastics (GRP pipes – Determination of long-term resistance
to internal pressure
ASTM C-581 Standard Practice for Determining Chemical Resistance of
Thermosetting Resins Used in Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
Structures Intended for Liquid Service
ASTM D3681 Standard Test Method for Chemical Resistance of
“Fiberglass” (Glass–Fiber–Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin
Pipe in a Deflected Condition
DIN 53769 Testing of glass fiber reinforced plastics pipes; determination
of the longitudinal shear strength of type B pipe fittings
ASTM D2992 Standard Practice for Obtaining Hydrostatic or Pressure
Design Basis for “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
Thermosetting-Resin Pipe and Fittings
18.1.4 Submittals
18.1.4.1 Products and Materials Approval

A. In order to verify compliance with the specification the Contractor shall
submit information for all products and materials used in the Works to the
Engineer for approval sufficiently in advance of their use in accordance
with the Contract programme allowing for ordering and approval times.
Reference shall also be made to Section 01600 of the specification on
products and materials approval. Information to be submitted shall
comprise but not necessarily be limited to:
PAGE 78
i. The manufacturers design calculations, complete and detailed

specification, standard Quality Control test results including the latest
Type Tests (Long Term test) results not later than three years from
the date of approval submission of the proposed GRP pipes and
fittings required for the Works including Manufacturers Certificates of
compliance with this section of the standard specification. Information
on all items listed in Table 18.1-1 below shall be given.
ii. Should any details, including materials of the pipes and fittings be
altered in any way during manufacture from those proposed and
approved by the Engineer, submit for the Engineer's approval the
revised details and test results, including Type Test results [in case of
altering of material (Long Term 10,000hrs tests.)]
op V1
iii. Submit to the Engineer the results of all standard quality control tests
carried out on the manufactured pipes and fittings as soon as
practicable after testing as and in any case not later than the time of
delivery of the relevant pipes and fittings to the site.
Pipe manufacturer’s guarantee that the pipe and its materials are
iv.
C -
y
suitable for its intended use and application.
v.
C
Joint materials and gaskets.
vi. Standard produced pipe lengths shall be 12 meter for Filament
C
Wound (FW) and 6 meter for Centrifugal Cast (CC. Tolerance shall be
governed by the relevant manufacturing standard.
Q
Table 18.1-1: Product Information for GRP Pipe and Fittings
Product Information Units

Manufacturing Details
Name of manufacturer -
Manufacturing process for pipes -
Manufacturing process for bends and fittings -
Joint type -
Summary of Design Criteria

Nominal internal /external diameter mm
Pressure Class of pipe (PN kn/m2
Minimum depth of cover m
Maximum depth of cover m
2
Maximum working pressure kn/m
Design test pressure kn/m2
Internal vacuum pressure kn/m2
Pipe Wall Structure
Nominal total wall thickness mm
Inner liner Resin** Type %
PAGE 79
Glass* Type %
Thickness mm
Structural wall Resin** Type %
Chopped Glass** Type %
Hoop Glass** Type %
Aggregate** Type %
Thickness mm
External layer Resin***Type %
op V1
Glass***Type %
Thickness mm
Minimum Initial Pipe Properties
2
Stiffness (SN N/m
C -
y
C
Longitudinal tensile strength N/mm
Hoop flexural modulus GN/m2
C
Hoop tensile strength N/mm2
Last date of publishing the Type Test (Long Term results)
Q
Notes to Table 18.1-1

A • Pipe data to be provided for every diameter in each class of pipe.
* By weight of liner.
** By weight of structural wall.
*** By weight of layer.
18.1.4.2 Method Statements

A. The Contractor shall submit method statements to the Engineer for
approval, 4-8 weeks in advance of commencing the site activity in
accordance with Section 01300 of the specification. These shall comprise
but not necessarily be limited to:
i. Procedures for handling, storage and installation of pipes.

ii. Hydrostatic testing procedures for GRP none pressure pipelines,
where necessary, as per manufacturing standard.
iii. Hydrostatic testing procedures for GRP pressure pipelines.
iv. Deflection measurement procedures for GRP pipelines, where
necessary, as per manufacturing standard.
18.1.4.3 Drawings
A. The Contractor shall submit drawings to the Engineer for approval well in
advance of commencing the site activity in accordance with Section
01300 of the specification. These shall comprise but not necessarily be
limited to:
PAGE 80
i. Drawings of the pipes, fittings, joints, pipe specials and the assembly
thereof.
ii. Pipe laying diagram and schedule showing location, length, design
designation and designation by number of each pipe section and pipe
special to be furnished and installed.
iii. All data on curve and bends for both horizontal and vertical alignment.

A. Inspection of the products by the manufacturer shall be in accordance with
the definitions in the product standards and in additional quality specification,
as per the selected technique of the manufacturing.
a) Prior to dispatch of any product and/or material from source the Contractor
op V1
shall notify the Engineer in writing in sufficient time to allow the Engineer the
opportunity to inspect and test the product and/or material prior to delivery in
accordance with Section 01400 of the specification.
b)
C -
Products and materials shall be from a manufacturer/supplier who operates a
y
quality control system which is registered to ISO 9000 series or approved
equal.
C
C
c) To allow the Engineer to inspect the Works the Contractor shall give the
Engineer a minimum of 48 hours’ notice of carrying out the following activities
on site:
Q
i. Installation of pipeline.
ii. Hydrostatic testing of pipeline.
iii. Deflection measurement of pipeline.
18.1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling

A. Delivery, storage and handling of products and materials shall be in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, Section 01600 of the
specification and the following provisions:
a) Delivery storage and handling shall at all times be performed in a

manner to avoid product damage.
b) Pipes and fittings shall not come in contact with any sharp projections
that may cause damage to the pipes and fittings during transportation
loading and unloading. Ensure that pipes and fittings are well secured
during transit and adequately supported along their length. Cover pipes
and fittings of plastic materials during transportation. Do not allow pipe to
overhang the end of a vehicle during transportation.
c) Ensure that pipes and fittings are lifted using nylon or large diameter
rope slings positioned at a quarter of the pipe length from each end. Do
not allow the use of wire rope chains or unpadded forks or clamps on
forklifts to lift pipes.
d) Store pipes and fittings on a flat level area as recommended by the pipe
manufacturer. Ensure that pipes and fittings supplied either on pallets or
crated, remain on the pallets or in their crates until required.
PAGE 81
i. Stack non-crated pipes to the approval of the Engineer.

ii. Stack spigot and socket pipes so that successive pipe layers have
sockets protruding at opposite ends of the stack.
iii. Stack pipes of different sizes and thickness separately.
iv. Do not allow stacked pipes to exceed 2m in height or as recommended
by the supplier whichever is the lesser.
e) Store GRP pipes and fittings under opaque cover and out of direct
sunlight at all times. Maintain a free flow of air around the pipes at all
times.
f) Store rubber joint rings in a well-ventilated place free from exposure to
sunlight and in their original packing until they are needed.
g) The Contractor shall visually inspect all products upon delivery to site
and report any damage to the Engineer.
op V1
i. Any products damaged during delivery, storage and handling shall be
marked by the Contractor and set aside.
ii. Proposals for repair of any repairable products shall be submitted in
writing to the Engineer for approval.
iii.
C -
Any damaged products deemed unsuitable for repair by the Engineer
y
shall be removed from the site and replaced, with an equal.
C
C
18.2.1 Pipe Design Requirements
Q
A. The design requirements for GRP pipes shall be, as given below unless
otherwise indicated on the drawings or on recommendations of Manufacturer
depending on site conditions (soil, installation, compaction, loads etc.) in
compliance to the Special Warranty conditions, quoted elsewhere in this
document.
B. Design Requirements of GRP pipes
a) Minimum initial specific stiffness shall be 10000 N/m2.
b) Any variance due to the site condition such as native soil condition,
installation, burial depths, deflection limits, buckling and vacuum
requirements or others which necessitates increasing the stiffness (SN value
of GRP pipe shall be governed by the Manufacturer’s design.
c) Pressure mains shall be designed as per the requirement of Table 15 of

BS/DIN EN 14364.
d) All GRP pipes installed up to 10.0m cover depth shall be buried in granular
surround or as specified by the Manufacturer according to the ground
conditions. For cover depths exceeding 10.0m, the pipe shall have concrete
surround or Manufacturer to suggest suitable higher stiffness pipe.
18.2.2 Pipes and Fittings

18.2.2.1 Buried GRP
A. General
a) All GRP components shall be designed and fabricated by one manufacturer.
PAGE 82
b) GRP pipes and fittings shall be manufactured in compliance with BS/DIN EN

14364 and fabricated to meet the minimum strength requirements.
c) Manufacture all pipes by an approved process utilizing a rotating mound or

mandrel besides equipment which accurately control the quantities and
placement of all resins, glass and aggregates.
d) Use resins, reinforcements, and aggregates to produce pipes and fittings

when combined as a composite structure to satisfy the performance
requirements of this section of the specification. Pipes and fittings must be
designed to achieve a minimum working life of 60 years under all applicable
standard loadings, environmental and installation conditions.
op V1
e) Both internal and external surfaces shall be free from irregularities, which
would impair the ability of the component to conform to the requirements of
European Standard BS/DIN EN 14364.
B. Materials and pipe wall construction

C -
y
a) The pipe or fitting shall be constructed using chopped and/or continuous
C
glass filaments, strands or roving, mats or fabric, synthetic veils, and
polyester/ vinyl ester resin without fillers and if applicable additives necessary
C
to impart specific properties to the resin. The pipe as whole and the part of
pipe used for fittings may also incorporate aggregates. All the raw materials
used shall be from the pre-approved DMAT’s approved list of suppliers.
Q
C. Filament Wound (FW) GRP pipes and fittings:
a) Resins.
- Vinyl ester shall be used in the internal resin rich liner of the pipe and
fittings. Is phthalic or vinyl ester shall be used in the structural wall of the
pipes and fittings, as per the design application requirements. All resins
shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C-581or applicable standard.
Provide resin systems to the requirements of BS 3532 type-B or to
applicable standard.
- Resins shall be cured to achieve 90% of the manufacturer’s
recommended Barcol hardness value, and may be tested by external
laboratories for their authenticity of type by random sampling, during the
project.
b) B Additives.
- The use of additives such as fire retardant, UV inhibitors or colored
pigments or dyes shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and will
only be approved in exceptional circumstances.
c) C Aggregates and fillers.

- Sand aggregates shall be clean, graded silica sand containing no
impurities and be in accordance with BS/DIN EN 14364.
- Fillers (other than sand aggregates) shall be permitted in accordance to
BS/DIN/ EN 14364, provided the necessity is scientifically tested, justified
and approved by the Engineer on all accounts of performance, including
Qualifying Tests using Long Term type tests, at minimum a of 10,000 hrs.
PAGE 83
Note: Filled pipes and fittings shall only be allowed on a project once the
satisfactory Long Term test results are in hand & all conditions as stipulated
above are met in advance.
d) Wall construction
- Liner layer
The inner liner layer shall comprise minimum 1.5 mm thick rich Vinyl
ester Resin suitably reinforced with C glass veil and backed up by
remainder of liner in layers of powder bound acid resistant glass
chopped strand mat or roving depending on the method of
manufacture with a glass content of between 25% and 35% by
weight. Sand aggregate shall not be used in the liner layer
op V1
The pure resin used in this inner liner layer must conform to
requirements given in BS/ DIN EN 14364 and to stipulation of section
“a” as above.
Resins shall be cured to achieve 90% of the manufacturer’s

C -
recommended Barcol hardness value.
y
-
C
Structural layer
C
Build up the structural layers by acid resistant glass chop roving or
continuous roving with a glass content of between 25% and 35% by
weight.
Q
The structural layer shall consist of glass reinforcement and a

thermosetting isophthalic polyester resin with or without sand
aggregates.
Aggregates can be used as per the manufacturing techniques

applied, however ensure no aggregate becomes embedded in the
internal resin rich liner layer.
- Outer layer
Pipes shall be provided with an external vinyl ester resin rich layer,
with C- glass Veil.
The resin used in the outer layer will be Vinyl ester and in
accordance to BS/DIN EN 14364 shall have a Glass Transition
temperature of at least 75 °C. In addition a sample shall be tested
for HDT in accordance with Method A of DIN EN ISO 75 - 2.
The use of special constructions is permitted when the pipe is
expected to be exposed to extreme climatic, environmental or
ground conditions, for example provision for the inclusion of
pigments or inhibitors for extreme climatic conditions or fire
retardation, upon the approval of the Engineer.
e) Wall thickness
i. The minimum total wall thickness, including the liner shall be
declared by the manufacturer.
ii. Use pipes with wall thickness that achieve a minimum hoop
flexural modulus of 15.0 GN/m2 over the whole pipe wall thickness
2
for pipes of 350mm diameter and above, and 12.0 GN/m for
pipes of less than 350mm diameter. This shall be demonstrated
PAGE 84
3
by the application of the equation S = (EI/D to show that the hoop
flexural modulus of a pipe is not less than the required minimum
figure where S is the stiffness of the manufactured pipe, D is the
mean diameter of the manufactured pipe, E the required hoop
3
flexural modulus and “I “being given by t /12 where t is the whole
wall thickness of the manufactured pipe.
f) Fittings
i. Fittings shall be manufactured similar to the pipe construction or
better thereof as per the existing worldwide standard
manufacturing techniques, complying with applicable standards on
performance and testing.
op V1
D. Centrifugally cast (CC GRP pipes and fittings:
a) Resin
Vinyl ester shall be used in the internal resin rich liner of the pipe and
fittings. is phthalic or vinyl ester shall be used in the structural wall of the
C -
pipes and fittings, as per the design application requirements. All resins
y
shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C-581or applicable standard.
C
Provide resin systems to the requirements of BS 3532 type-B or to
applicable standard.
C
The resin used in the liner layer will be Vinyl ester and in accordance to
BS/DIN/EN 14364 shall have a Glass Transition temperature of at least
75 °C. In addition a sample shall be tested for HDT in accordance with
Q
Method A of DIN EN ISO 75 - 2.

recommended Barcol hardness value and may be tested by external
laboratories for their authenticity of type by random sampling, during the
project.
b) Additives.
The use of additives such as fire retardant, UV inhibitors or colored
pigments or dyes shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and will
only be approved in exceptional circumstances.
c) Aggregates and fillers.
Sand aggregates shall be clean, graded silica sand containing no
impurities and be in accordance with BS/DIN EN 14364.
Fillers (other than sand aggregates) shall be permitted in accordance to
BS/DIN/ EN 14364, provided the necessity is scientifically tested, justified
and approved by the Consultant and the Client on all accounts of
performance, including Qualifying Tests using Long Term type tests, at
minimum a of 10,000 hrs.
Note: Filled pipes and fittings shall only be allowed on a project once the
satisfactory Long Term test results are in hand & all conditions as
stipulated above are met in advance.
d) Wall construction
- Liner layer
The inner liner layer shall comprise minimum 1.5 mm thick pure Vinyl
ester Resin without Glass reinforcement and sand aggregates.
PAGE 85
The pure resin used in this inner liner layer must conform to
requirements given in BS/DIN EN 14364 and to stipulation of
section “a” as above.
recommended Barcol hardness value.
- Structural layer
The structural layer shall consist of glass reinforcement and a
thermosetting is phthalic polyester resin with sand aggregates.
Aggregates can be used as per the manufacturing techniques
applied, however ensure no aggregate becomes embedded in the
internal resin rich liner.
op V1
- Outer layer
This layer shall be formed of mortar in vinyl ester resin with sand
aggregates and without reinforcement of glass or synthetic
filaments.
C -
y
The resin used in the outer layer will be Vinyl ester and in
C
accordance to BS/DIN EN 14364 shall have a Glass Transition
temperature of at least 75 °C. In addition a sample shall be tested
C
for HDT in accordance with Method A of DIN EN ISO 75 - 2.
The outer protective layer shall have a sand content with a minimum
percentage of 65 % of sand for corrosion protection.
Q
The use of special constructions is permitted when the pipe is

expected to be exposed to extreme climatic, environmental or
ground conditions, for example provision for the inclusion of
pigments or inhibitors for extreme climatic conditions or fire
retardation, upon the approval of the Engineer.
e) Wall thickness
ii. The minimum total wall thickness, including the liner and outer
protective layer shall be declared by the manufacturer, which shall
be complying with the standard performance criteria.
iii. Use pipes with wall thickness that achieve a minimum hoop
2
flexural modulus of 15.0 GN/m over the reinforced wall thickness
for pipes of 350mm diameter and above, and 12.0 GN/m2 for
pipes of less than 350mm diameter. This shall be demonstrated
3
by the application of the equation S = (EI/D to show that the hoop
flexural modulus of a pipe is not less than the required minimum
figure where S is the stiffness of the manufactured pipe, D is the
mean diameter of the manufactured pipe, E the required hoop
flexural modulus and I being given by t3/12 where t is the
reinforced wall thickness of the manufactured pipe.
f) Fittings
i. Fittings shall be manufactured similar to the pipe construction or
better thereof as per the existing standard manufacturing
techniques, complying with applicable standards on performance
and testing.
PAGE 86
E. Mechanical and other characteristics

The pipe class for a specific application shall depend on the required diameter (DN,
the pressure rating (PN necessary for the application, and the pipe stiffness (SN
derived from the structural analysis depending on site conditions (soil, installation,
compaction, loads etc.).
a) Minimum initial specific stiffness.

- As detailed in section 2.1.as above.
- For other nominal stiffness class in certain areas in accordance to defined
parameters of BS/DIN EN 14364.
b) Minimum initial specific longitudinal tensile strength shall be in

- Accordance to BS/DIN EN 14364.
op V1
c) Fabricate pipes and fittings capable of withstanding the working pressures,
test pressures and loadings specified.
d)
C -
Pipes and fittings shall be suitable for carrying domestic sewage at
y
temperatures up to 50ºC and having a maximum sulphates concentration of
C
50 mg/liter.
C
e) Pipes and fittings to be designed to withstand up to 5% long term deflection
in their installed conditions.
Q
f) Conform to BS/DIN EN 14364 for pipe dimensions and tolerances. Deviations

in diameters and wall thicknesses of pipe ends and coupling shall be such
that the seal at the joints is not affected.
g) Ensure that the internal surfaces of the pipes and fittings are smooth, and
that the internal and external surfaces are clean and free from defects such
as protruding fibers, pits, cracks, blisters tackiness and embedded foreign
matter. The core of the pipe wall shall be free of bubbles, voids, and cracks
and de-bonding.
h) All bends shall be long radius bends unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
i) Latest Type Tests (Long Term test) results not later than three years from the
date of submission of the proposed GRP pipes and fittings required for the
Works including Manufacturers Certificates of compliance with this section of
the standard specification, to be provided. (Refer to table 18.2-1 given below)
F. Joints
a) General
Joint performance shall be according to section 07 of BS/DIN EN 14364; in
general.
i. All buried joints shall be Non-end-load-bearing flexible joints of spigot and

socket type (including double socket designs) with EPDM rubber in full faced
elements or rings in accordance with BS/DIN EN 681; manufactured
according to the individual manufacturing technique and supplied as integral
part of the pipe or separately. The sealing rings shall be supplied by the pipe
manufacturer.
PAGE 87
ii. Non-end-load-bearing flexible joints with elastomeric seals shall be tested

using test pieces conforming to BS/DIN EN 14364, for conformance to the
test performance requirements under hydrostatic pressure.
iii. For pipes up to and including 600mm nominal internal diameter joints shall be
capable of withstanding a deflection of not less than one and a half degrees
in any direction and remaining watertight. For pipes over 600mm nominal
internal diameter joints shall be capable of withstanding a deflection of half
degree in any direction and remaining watertight.
iv. Joints shall be capable of withstanding a draw of 13mm over and above the
initial jointing allowance and remaining watertight. The initial jointing
op V1
allowance is the gap between the spigot and the shoulder of the socket
measured parallel to the center line of the pipeline and must not be less than
6mm or greater than 13mm or as recommended by the pipe manufacturer.
v. Additionally the pipe joints shall be capable of withstanding an external

C -
pressure equivalent to 10 m head of water without leakage in both the
y
C
straight and deflected positions.
vi. Joint couplers may be used adjacent to structures or special fittings.

C
vii. When a pipe is cut or turned down in order to form a joint fully seal the
exposed surfaces with a continuous coating of vinyl ester resin.
Q
viii. Do not use butt/wrap joints without obtaining the approval of the Engineer.
Approval will only be given if the Contractor can demonstrate that this type of
joint is the most suitable method of forming the joint. Such joints will be
formed by specialist operatives under the supervision of the pipe
manufacturer and fully in accordance with his recommendations. Use
materials to be compatible with the pipes to be joined. Obtain the Engineer’s
approval for the material along with the method, before work commences.
Table 18.2-1: Summary of test requirements for non-end-load-bearing flexible joints
Property to be tested Tests to be Test pressure Duration

performed in Bars
Initial Leakage Initial Pressure 1.5 x PN 15 min
External pressure differential Negative pressure a - 0.8 bar (- 0.08 1 h

MPA
Misalignment and Draw Positive static pressure 2.0 x PN 24 h
Angular deflection and draw Initial pressure 1.5 x PN 15 min
Positive static pressure 2.0 x PN 24 h
a) Relative to atmospheric, i.e. approximately 0.2 bar (0.02 MPA absolute.
PAGE 88
G. Marking
a) Ensure that all pipes including cut lengths and all fittings before dispatch from the
pipe manufacturer's works are indelibly marked as follows:
i. The manufacturer's name, initials, or identification mark.
ii. The nominal internal diameter in mm.
iii. The length in m.
iv. Mark the classification i.e. pressure rating, stiffness.
op V1
v. The date of manufacture and batch number.
vi. A stamp to show that they meet the required inspection requirements and
hydraulic tests (where applicable at the point of manufacturer.
C -
y
C
vii. Stencil in legible letters the pipe identification number on the inside and
outside at each end. Ensure that the same number appears on all record
sheets and documents relating to the manufacture delivery and testing of that
C
pipe.
viii. The manufacturing standard.

Q
ix. The project or contract number.
18.2.2.2 Exposed GRP

A. GRP pipes and fittings utilized for exposed service inside pumping stations, and
valve chambers shall be designed to resist all bending stresses, thrust forces,
surge pressures, negative pressures and vibratory forces.
B. Exposed pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in the same manner and with
the same materials as buried pipe, along with the following requirements unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer.
i. Resin in the structural wall shall be is phthalic or Vinyl ester.
ii. Additional exterior stiffeners may be required to maintain circularity on large

diameter pipes and shall be installed to the manufacturer’s requirements.
iii. Design of the outer layer of the pipes shall be formed of a vinyl ester resin
with or without sand aggregates and with or without reinforcement of glass.
The outer protective layer shall have a minimum thickness of 1 mm and
protect the structural layer against extraneous causes (atmospheric
conditions, mechanical damage, UV and chemical stress). For Centrifugally
Cast GRP Pipe the outer protective layer shall have a sand content with a
minimum percentage of 65 % of sand against ultra – violet influences.
iv. Use flanged joints for all exposed pipes and fittings inside treatment plants,
process structures, pumping stations, and valve chambers.
PAGE 89
v. Flanges shall be filament wound, tape wound, contact molded, hot or cold
pressed with epoxy or vinyl ester resins only.
vi. All bolts shall be stainless steel grade 316.
vii. Flanged pipe joints must incorporate an annular gasket at the joints and
these gaskets must cover the full face of the flange with holes cut in the
corresponding to the bolt holes in the flanges. Drill flanges to BS EN 1092
(metric units) type PN16. If approved by the Engineer, use a plain ring
covering the flange between the bolt circle and the bore of the pipe. Use
3mm thick gaskets incorporating two layers of cotton fabric insertions evenly
spaced in the gasket. When flanged joints are to be made, secure the bolts
and the nuts initially to finger tightness. Thereafter the final tightening of the
op V1
nuts shall be effected by torque spanners in such sequence that diametrically
opposite nuts are tightened together to achieve the manufacturers
recommended torque.
viii. All joints shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

C -
y
18.2.3
C
Quality Control Tests
C
18.2.3.1 GRP Pipes and Fittings
A. Routine Factory Quality Control Tests.
Q
i. Carry out the quality control tests listed below at the frequency stated.
ii. Ensure that records of all tests and inspections are maintained by the
manufacturer.
iii. Provide the Engineer with two copies of all test certificates and reports.
B. Raw Material Inspection.

i. Inspect all raw materials to ensure that they comply with the relevant
standard.
ii. Check all deliveries of resin for consistency by viscosity and reactivity.
Do not use any resins deviating from the manufacturer's published
figures.
iii. Check all deliveries of sand and aggregates for grading, moisture
content and purity.
iv. All resin type may be tested for quality and authenticity in external
laboratories as and when deemed fit by the Engineer.
C. Hydraulic Test as per relevant manufacturing & testing standard
D. For Filament wound GRP pipes.

a) Perform an internal hydraulic pressure test for every pipe at the
manufacturer's works prior to delivery.
PAGE 90
b) Apply 1.5 times the pipe design pressure or surge pressure, whichever is
greater for all pressure pipes. Apply the test pressure for a minimum period
of 5 minutes without signs of leakage.
c) In addition to the above:

i. Maintain at test pressure the first pipe and thereafter every 360 meter of
pressure pipe of each diameter produced for a minimum of 4 hours
without signs of leakage.
ii. Perform an internal low pressure air test for every pipe fitting at the
manufacturer's works prior to delivery. Apply a test pressure of 0.1 bars
for a minimum period of 5 minutes without signs of leakage or distress.
Manufacture fittings which are of mired construction from pipe which has
op V1
successfully passed the tests defined above.
iii. Follow section (K ,given below for Rejections
E. For Centrifugally cast GRP pipes

C -
y
a) Perform an internal hydraulic burst pressure test for minimum 1 pipe
C
specimen or 360 meters, whichever comes first of pressure pipes produced.
b) Burst pressure shall be more than 4 times the pressure rating of the Pipe.
C
Testing is to be carried out as per relevant standard.
Q
F. In addition to the above.

a) Maintain at test pressure the first pipe and thereafter every 360 meter of
pressure pipe of each diameter produced for a minimum of 4 hours without
signs of leakage.
b) Perform an internal low pressure air test for every pipe fitting at the
manufacturer's works prior to delivery. Apply a test pressure of 0.1 bars for a
minimum period of 5 minutes without signs of leakage or distress.
Manufacture fittings which are of mired construction from pipe which has
successfully passed the tests defined above.
G. Wall Thickness.
a) Measure the wall thickness for each pipe and fitting. Maintain the total
thickness of nowhere less than the minimum or greater than the maximum
quoted by the manufacturer's specification relating to initial stiffness.
However minimum is governed by section 5.1.2 of BS/EN/14364.
H. Stiffness.
a) Test a minimum of one pipe, for every 360 m pipe length manufactured or
any pipe length supplied for a project, whichever comes first to determine the
initial specific stiffness in accordance with the test method detailed in BS/DIN
EN 14364.
b) Test a minimum of one pipe of each class and diameter of pipe.
c) Ensure that no test specimen has an initial specific stiffness of less than as
defined in section 2.1.
PAGE 91
d) In addition.
- Deflect each of the stiffness test specimens to the amounts indicated in
Table 18.2-2 below according to its nominal stiffness. Ensure that at the
lower deflection there is no visible damage as evidenced by surface
cracks, and at the higher deflection there is no indication of structural
damage as evidenced by inter laminar separation, separation of the liner
or coating (if incorporated from the structural wall, tensile failure of the
glass fiber reinforcement, fracture or buckling of the pipe wall as per
standard for inspection available.
Table 18.2-2: GRP Quality Control Tests
op V1
Nominal Stiffness 10,000N/m2
No visible damage in liner layer as evidenced by 9%

surface cracks at a deflection of:
C -
y
C
No structural damage at a deflection of: 15%
e) Longitudinal Tensile Strength.

C
Measure in accordance with BS/DIN EN 14364 the tensile strength of a
minimum of one pipe, for every 360 m pipe length manufactured or any pipe
length supplied for a project, whichever comes first for each class and
Q
diameter, as per applied standard.
f) Cure.
Perform in accordance with BS 4549 Part 1 Barcol hardness test on a
minimum of one in every 30 pipes manufactured.
g) Loss on Ignition.
Test in accordance with ASTM D2584 a minimum of one pipe, for every 360
m pipe length manufactured or any pipe length supplied for a project,
whichever comes first for each class and diameter, as per applied standard.
h) Joint Tests.
Test in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D4161 or, DIN EN 1119 a
minimum of two jointed pipes in every 1200 meter of pipes manufactured with
the following additions.
- Conduct the positive test pressure.
- Conduct the negative pressure test to determine the adequacy of the joint
design against infiltration. Apply an external test pressure of 1.0 bar
(gauge to two sections of pipe assembled with a deflected joint.
i) Initial Circumferential Tensile strength.

Determine the initial circumferential tensile strength of pressure pipes in
accordance with BS/DIN EN 1394.
j) Rejection
i. Proceed as stipulated below if any pipe or fitting which fails any one of the
quality control tests as per this section 2.3.
PAGE 92
ii. In the event of a pipe failing any of the tests outlined, carry out the
relevant test on a further 120 meters of pipes of that class and diameter
as follows:
iii. Carry out the relevant test on 60 meters of these pipes produced
sequentially and immediately prior to the failed pipe and 60 meters
immediately following.
iv. If any one of these test on 120 meters of length fails, cease the
manufacturing of pipes of that class and diameter. Discussions will be
held between the Contractor and the Engineer to establish the
significance of the failures. The suitability of manufactured pipes for the
proposed installation conditions will be determined in the light of the test
failures and the Engineer reserves the right to reject all the pipes of that
op V1
class and diameter.
v. Use the results of appropriate type tests to the proposed pipes and
fittings to determine the properties of pipes. Carry out each type test on
C -
representative samples of the pipes. If the manufacturer does not have
y
results of these tests available or if alterations are proposed to the
C
method of manufacture, pipe design or laminate structure, carry out all
the type tests required by the Engineer to prove the adequacy of the
C
proposed pipes. Conduct the type tests as stipulated in Table 2.3.2 in
accordance with the requirements of the mentioned standards and that
the tests will be conducted at 23 +/-2ºC ambient temperature except for
Q
strain corrosion & long term failure pressure which will be tested at 40ºC
+/- 2ºC.
Table 18.2-3: GRP Type Tests (Long Term Tests for a minimum of 10,000 hrs.)
Property Test method to BS/EN/14364

Long term specific stiffness ISO 10468, ISO 14828, ISO 10471, DIN 53769 the test
and creep factor under wet results shall be extrapolated to 60 years. Section 5.2.2
and deflected condition.(min of BS/EN/DIN 14364 shall be governing.
18 samples)
Long term resistance to ASTM D3681, DIN 53769, DIN EN 1120, the test results
strain corrosion .(min 18 to be extrapolated to 60 years. Section 5.2.8 of
samples) BS/EN/DIN 14364 shall be governing. However, the
95% lower confidence limit failure strain must not be
less than 0.85%,
Long term failure ASTM D2992, DIN EN 1447, DIN 53769-2 the test
pressure.(min 18 samples) results shall be extrapolated to 60 years Section 5.2.7 of
BS/EN/DIN 14364 shall be governing.
18.2.4 Product Warranty

A. Corporate product warranty shall be provided by the Manufacturer for intended
use/application of the product for a period of 60 years from the date of the Final
Acceptance Certificate of the project issued by the Client.
PAGE 93
18.3.1 Pipe Installation

A. Trench excavation shall be carried out in accordance with Section 02225 of the
specification.
B. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with BS 8010, EN 1610 and
i. Provide qualification details of the manufacturer's technical expert to

be assigned to the Contract. The technical expert shall have
expertise, experience and skills necessary for advising and
monitoring all aspects of transport, storage, handling and installation
of pipes as appropriate.
op V1
ii. The technical expert shall provide comprehensive technical
assistance to the Contractor throughout the Contract and regularly
monitor the Contractor's activities and report on shortcomings.
iii.
C -
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer copies of all instructions
y
C
advice or reports given by the manufacturer's technical expert to
him. The technical expert shall immediately inform the Engineer of
any omission, variations and detractions from the approved handling
C
and installation specification.
C. Install bedding, surround and backfill as specified in Section 02223 of the

Q
specification and shown on the drawings.
D. Lay pipes from downstream to upstream with the socket end at the upstream end of
each pipe.
E. The pipeline shall be within 20mm of the specified line and the invert level shall be
within 6mm of the specified value and shall be such that there is no back fall at any
point on a gravity pipeline.
F. Obtain satisfactory initial deflection test results for sections of pipeline laid between
consecutive manholes or chambers prior to commencement of pipe laying in further
sections.
G. When cut pipe is required, ensure that the cutting is done by a machine, leaving a
smooth cut at right angles to the axis of the pipe.
H. When installing pipes, ensure the joint is cleaned and lubricated and that the rubber
gasket is inserted in the groove of the socket end of the pipe. Align the spigot and
insert home in the socket end. Use a metal feeler to check that the rubber gasket is
correctly located. Spigot and socket flexible joints shall have the annular space
between the pipe and socket sealed with an approved joint sealant to prevent the
ingress of loose material or concrete. This sealing shall be carried out immediately
on completion of a satisfactory initial hydraulic test prior to concreting or backfilling
but not prior to the test.
I. Ensure that all pipes and fittings are sound and clean before laying. When pipe
laying is not in progress, ensure that the pipe ends are at all times fitted with
watertight plugs or caps. The plugs or caps shall only be removed for the purposes
of making a connection of the pipe end or testing the pipeline. The plugs or cap
shall be replaced immediately on completion of the test.
PAGE 94
J. Protect bolted connections by an approved heat shrunk PVC sheath. Wrap the PVC
sheath with a protective wrapping tape prior to backfilling in accordance with the
specification.
K. Excavation for or laying of GRP shall not proceed until an approved device for
gauging pipe deflections is on site.
i. Use a suitable mechanized device to the approval of the Engineer for

gauging pipe deflections. Maintain devices for gauging pipe deflections
in good working order. Submit calibration certificates before every
period of use.
ii. For pipes of less than 600mm diameter: Diametric dimensional
op V1
measurement of the pipe, both vertically and horizontally shall be made
and recorded. Each deflection measurement taken along the length of
the pipeline shall be identified and recorded. Provide a continuous print
out or a visual display of the measurements on a remote monitor. The
device shall be calibrated before each pipe length is tested.
C -
y
iii.
C
For pipes of 600mm diameter and greater. Measure deflection by
physical entry into the pipes. Use a regularly calibrated telescopic
spring loaded graduated rod to measure percentage deflections in
C
each diameter. Provide a suitable trolley to facilitate access into the
pipe. Record all measurements.
Q
18.3.2 Mandatory Installation Monitoring

A. It shall be absolutely mandatory for the manufacturer to give proper training with
certification to educate contractor’s representative (name of the person and copy of
the certificate to be provided for installation procedures for their products and depute
qualified personnel to monitor the installations intermittently throughout the course of
the project execution and till the final commissioning test approvals from the
designated authority. Any discrepancies or non-compliance thereof, if observed, shall
be promptly reported to Engineer or Client for remedial measures. NOTE: In case of
non-compliance to the installation procedures set forth by the Manufacturer, further
installation shall be stopped with immediate effect, by the Engineer without placing
any project time lapse liability on the Engineer or Client, by the main Contractor of
award until it is otherwise advised. However a project delay penalty clause may be
applied on the main Contractor as per the rules and regulations set by Client.
18.3.3 Field Hydrostatic Testing Of Pipelines

18.3.3.1 General.
A. Submit for the Engineer's approval details of the proposed methods and
program for testing, including details of test equipment. Arrange for all tests
to be witnessed by the Engineer or other person appointed by the Engineer.
Provide everything necessary for carrying out testing and cleaning including
water, pumps, gauges, piped connections, stop ends and all other temporary
works. Ensure that pipelines are properly completed and supported before
being put under test except as hereinafter detailed.
i. No testing will be permitted until seven days after thrust blocks and
other holding down works have been completed.
PAGE 95
ii. In addition to any tests of individual joints or other interim tests, which
may be specified elsewhere, submit all parts of the pipelines to a
final test.
iii. Notwithstanding the foregoing, carry out at any stage of construction

other tests that the Engineer considers desirable to check materials
and workmanship on the pipeline. Ensure that the obligations to
perform successful tests under the Contract are achieved.
B. Use potable water for hydrostatic testing and pipeline cleaning.
C. Test the pipeline in lengths between valve pits or such shorter lengths as the
Engineer may direct or permit.
op V1
D. Use properly designed fittings for the purpose of temporarily closing the
openings in pipelines to be tested. Use fittings adequately strutted to
withstand the pressure specified.
C -
E. Ensure that the arrangement for testing a pipeline includes provision for the
y
C
purging of air from the pipeline prior to a water test.
F. Where multiple pipelines are laid in common trench, test only one line at any
C
one time.
G. Ensure that gauges used for testing pipelines have a dial diameter of not less
Q
than 100mm and a full scale reading not greater than twice the specified test
pressure. Before any gauge is used, arrange for independent laboratory to
check the accuracy of the gauge. Provide a dated certificate of its
accuracy/calibration to the Engineer.
H. The Contractor must make his own arrangement for the supply and disposal
of water used for testing which must be obtained from a source accepted by
the Engineer.
I. The Contractor must complete the pipelines between the ends of laid and
tested lengths of pipeline by tie-in sections of the shortest practical length.
J. Any other testing method if intended to be used shall be according to the

adequate and satisfactory reference provided along with Engineer & Client
approval.
18.3.3.2 Field Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Pipelines

A. Divide pressure pipelines into sections not exceeding 500m in length or as
directed by Engineer. Test each section separately.
B. Before pressure testing is started, re-check the pipes and the valves for
cleanliness, and re-check the operation of all valves. Cap off the open ends
of the pipeline (or sections thereof with blank flanges or cap ends
additionally secured where necessary with temporary struts and wedges.
Complete all anchor and thrust blocks and fasten securely all pipe straps
and other devices intended to prevent the movement of pipes.
C. Apply test pressure to the entire pipeline or section being tested to 1.5
times working pressure or 1.5 times the surge pressure whichever is
PAGE 96
greater. Immediately prior to commissioning, complete the pipeline and test

the entire pipeline.
i. Fill each pipeline or section with water and displace all free air from
the pipeline.
ii. Raise the pressure in the pipeline by pumping water until the highest
of the working pressure/surge pressure is attained in the lowest part
of the section.
iii. Maintain at this level by further pumping until it is steady for a period
of not less than 24 hours.
op V1
iv. Monitor the pipeline over a period of 24 hours without further
pressurization.
v. At the end of this period, measure the reduced pressure in the

pipeline, the original test pressure restored by pumping and the loss
C -
measured by drawing off water or air from the pipeline until the
y
C
pressure has fallen to match the reduced pressure previously noted.
vi. Ensure that the loss does not exceed 0.02 liter per millimeter of pipe
C
diameter per kilometer of pipe per day for each bar of head applied.
vii. If the pipeline fails the test, locate the faults, repair the repairable or
Q
replace with equivalent and retest the pipeline until it passes.
viii. Visually inspect all exposed pipe, fittings, valves and joints during the
tests.
ix. After satisfactory completion of the 24 hour period test, bring the
pipeline to test pressure and maintain it at this pressure, by pumping
if necessary, for one hour. Disconnect the pumping and no water is
allowed to enter the pipeline for a further period of two hours.
x. At the end of the two hours period, restore the original test pressure
by pumping water into the pipeline. Determine the volume of makeup
water required to achieve the test pressure specified and deemed to
represent the cumulative loss during the two hour period of test.
xi. Ensure the loss does not exceed the limit stated in ‘vi’ above. If the
pipeline fails the test, locate and repair the faults and repeat the test.
D. Ensure that all valves in the pipeline are satisfactorily operating under working
pressure and that the pipelines have been finally cleaned out as specified hereafter.
E. Do not test pipes against closed valves.
18.3.4 Field Deflection Measurement of Pipelines

A. For pipeline length greater than 6.0m measure the horizontal and vertical
deflections for all GRP pipes at each end at points 100mm away from the joint,
1.5m away from the joint and at 3.0m intervals hereafter. For pipeline lengths of
equal to and less than 6.0m, measure the mentioned deflections at each end at a
point 100mm away from the joint, and at the mid-point. For GRP pipes installed
PAGE 97
with granular bed and surround, take measurements on at least three separate
occasions as follows.
i. After the pipe surround material has been placed and compacted to
150mm above the pipe crown. Do not proceed with further pipe
laying until this test has been satisfactorily completed.
ii. On completion of all backfill material up to ground level but before
the dewatering is removed. Take this measurement within one day
of the completion of backfilling.
iii. Immediately prior to the issue of a Provisional Acceptance
Certificate.
B. For GRP pipes with concrete surround, carry out the deflection testing as in stages
op V1
(I and (ii above. For proving the pipes immediately prior to the issue of the
Provisional Acceptance Certificate, draw a pig or ball through the pipeline, sized so
that it will not pass any point in the pipeline which has been deflected to a greater
degree than that permitted in the long term.
C.
C -
For pipes exhibiting any negative deflection in the vertical in excess of 2% in (I
y
C
above and pipes exhibiting any deflection in excess of 4% in (ii above, expose the
pipe and replace and re-compact the surrounding bedding material. Replace the
pipe should the deflection exceed 5% in (iii above. Any pipe to be replaced must be
C
taken away from site and not be incorporated into the permanent works.
D. Subject pipes exposed for re-compaction and pipes replaced for other reasons, to
Q
the three deflection checks listed in clause 3.4.a above. Carry out deflection
checks on adjacent pipes for 50m either side of the re-compacted or replacement
pipes.
E. Tabulate the results of the deflection measurements. Submit copies of the results
to the Engineer immediately after each set of measurements has been taken.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 98
19. DI PIPES (SECTION 02640)

19.1.Part 1 General
19.1.1 Scope
A. This section of the specification gives the requirements for Ductile Iron (DI
pipes and fitting materials, installation and testing.
op V1
section.
Section 01400 Quality control
C -
y
Section 01600 Materials and equipment
Section 02222
C Excavation
C
Q

19.1.3 Standards
A. All activities relating to this section of the specification shall comply with the
following or approved equal standards.
BS EN 545 Ductile iron pipes, fittings and their joints for water pipelines.
Requirements and test methods
ISO 2531 Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for
water applications
BS 10025 Hot rolled products of structural steels
BS EN 681-1 Elastomeric seals – Materials requirements for pipe joint seals
used in water and drainage applications. Vulcanized rubber
BS EN 1092-2 Flanges and their joints. Circular flanges for pipes, valves,
fittings and accessories, PN designated. Cast iron flanges
BS EN 1563 Founding spheroidal graphite cast iron
EN 14901 Ductile iron pipes, fittings and accessories. Epoxy coating
(heavy duty) of ductile iron fittings and accessories.
Requirements and test methods
EN 15655 Ductile iron pipes, fittings and accessories. Internal
polyurethane lining for pipes and fittings. Requirements and
test methods
ISO 8180 Ductile iron pipelines. Polyethylene sleeping for site application
PAGE 99
BS 6920 Suitability of non-metallic products for use in contact with water

intended for human consumption with regard to their effect on
the quality of the water Methods of test.
19.1.4 Submittals
19.1.4.1 Products and Materials Approval.

A. In order to verify compliance with the specification the Contractor shall
op V1
i. Manufacturers name.
ii. Suppliers name.
C -
y
iii. Pipe diameters and pressure ratings.
C
iv. Manufacturer’s technical data.
C
v. Support details.
vi. Connection details.
Q
vii. Manufacturer’s quality control and test procedures.

viii. Manufacturer’s hydraulic test reports.
ix. Manufacturers guarantee.
x. Joint materials and gaskets.
xi. Detailed information on coatings.
xii. Certificate of compliance of the used nonmetallic materials with
requirements of the BS6920.

approval 4 weeks in advance of commencing the site activity in
i. Procedures for handling, storage and installation of pipes

including cleaning and repair.
ii. Hydrostatic testing procedures.
iii. A detailed statement for local application of coatings.
19.1.4.3 Working drawings.

A. The Contractor shall submit drawings to the Engineer for approval in
advance of commencing the site activity in accordance with Section 01300
of the specification. These shall comprise but not necessarily be limited to:
thereof.
PAGE 100

A. Prior to dispatch of any product and/or material from source the Contractor
B. Products and materials shall be from a manufacturer/supplier who operates a

quality system which is registered to ISO 9000 series or approved equal.
C. Manufacturers shall have a minimum of 5 years manufacturing experience with

the type of pipes and fittings being proposed.
op V1
D. To allow the Engineer to inspect the Works the Contractor shall give the
on site.
C -
y
C
C
A Delivery, storage and handling of products and materials shall be in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, Section 01600 of the
specification and the following provisions.
Q
i. Delivery storage and handling shall at all times be performed in a manner to

avoid product damage.
ii. Pipes and fittings shall not come in contact with any sharp projections that
may cause damage to the pipes and fittings during transportation loading
and unloading. Ensure that pipes and fittings are well secured during transit
and adequately supported along their length. Do not allow pipe to overhang
the end of a vehicle during transportation.
iii. Ensure that pipes and fittings are protected from damage while being lifted.
The hooks used shall be padded. Use only nylon or reinforced fabric slings
and ropes if they are in direct contact with pipes and fittings.
iv. Store pipes and fittings on a flat level area and raised above the ground on
timber bearers. Provide timber bearers at spacing recommended by the
pipe manufacturer.
v. Store joint materials and gaskets in a well ventilated place free from
exposure to sunlight and in their original packings until they are needed.
vi. The Contractor shall visually inspect all products upon delivery to site and
report any damage to the Engineer.
 Any products damaged during delivery, storage and handling shall be

 Proposals for repair of any damaged products shall be submitted in
 Any damaged products deemed unsuitable for repair by the Engineer
shall be removed from site and replaced.
PAGE 101
19.2.1 General Requirements

A. Pipework and fitting materials and coatings shall be suitable for their intended
use, shall be internally chemically resistant to the conveyed fluid and any
gasses produced by the fluid and shall externally be chemically resistant to
the surrounding environment.
B. Pipework and fittings shall be manufactured to the requirements of BS EN 545
or ISO 2531 as appropriate.
C. Class designation of the socket spigot pipes shall be K9 or C30 for pipes in
range from DN150 to DN300 and C40 for pipes in range from DN300 to
op V1
DN600.
D. Class designation of the double flange pipes and flanged fittings with integrally
casted flames shall be K12.
E.
C -
Class designation of the double flange pipes with welded flanges shall be K9
y
for body and K12 for flanges.
F.
C
Flanges shall be PN16 to BS EN 1092-2. Face of the flanges shall be at right
angle to the directional access and shall be concentric with it. Flanges of the
C
fittings shall be integrally casted and rotatable. Welded flanges shall be
permitted only in case of double flanged pipes.
Q
G. Flanged pipe and fittings shall be factory produced and shall not be fabricated
on site.
H. Bolts, nuts, washers, anchor plates and all fixings shall be of stainless steel
grade 316 and shall remain unpainted.
I. Contact between dissimilar materials shall be prevented by the use of suitable
washers, bushes and bedding pads so as to avoid galvanic reactions.
19.2.2 Wall, Floor, Slab and Roof Penetrations

A. Pipework passing through concrete walls, floors, slabs and roofs shall have
integrally cast paddle flanges as shown on the drawings and shall provide a
watertight installation. The coating to the paddle flange shall be similar to that
of the pipe/fitting.
B. Thrust/anchor flanges shall be used were pipework or fittings are cast into walls
etc. and shall be designed to restrain the installed equipment. Thrust/anchor
flanges shall be integrally cast or factory welded onto the pipe piece as
approved by the Engineer. Bolted or screwed on flanges are not acceptable.
The coating to the thrust/anchor flange shall be similar to that of the pipe/fitting.
19.2.3 Protective Coatings

A. Pipes shall be protected internally with factory applied cement mortar, fusion
bonded epoxy or polyurethane. Thickness of the cement mortar shall comply
with BS EN 545 requirements. The minimum dry film thickness of the fusion
bonded epoxy coating shall be 300 μm. Thickness of the polyurethane
application is given in the Table 19.2-1
B. Selection of the internal coating shall be made based on TSE properties and
manufacturer recommendations. Internal coatings shall comply with BS 6920
PAGE 102
requirements.
Table 19.2-1: Thickness of Internal Polyurethane Application
DN Nominal thickness of polyurethane (μm

100 - 600 1500
700-1000 1800
1100-1500 2200
1600-2000 2500
C. Pipes shall be protected externally with metallic zinc coat (min 200g/m2) and
op V1
epoxy finish layer (min thickness 80μM, metallic zinc coat (min 200g/m2) and
bituminous paint (min thickness 100μM or polyurethane. Selection of the
external coating shall be made on the base of soil conditions, refer to Table
19.2-2.
C -
Table 19.2-2: External Coating of the Pipes Depending on the Soil Conditions
y
C
Soil characteristics External Coating
C
Resistivity >1500Ohmcm without water Metallic zinc + epoxy finish layer Metallic
table >2500Ohmcm with water table zinc + bituminous paint
Q
750Ohmcm <Resistivity ≤ 1500 Ohmcm Metallic zinc + epoxy finish layer +

without water table polyethylene sleeve Metallic zinc +
1500Ohmcm<Resistivity ≤ 2500Ohmcm bituminous paint + polyethylene sleeve
with water table
Resistivity ≤750Ohmcm without water Polyurethane with average thickness

table ≤1500Ohmcm with water table 1000 μm
Resistivity ≤250Ohmcm without water Polyurethane with average thickness

table ≤500Ohmcm with water table 2000 μm
D. Fittings shall be protected internally and externally with a factory applied fusion
bonded powder epoxy resin coating. The minimum dry film thickness of the
coating shall be 300μm.
E. Epoxy coatings shall comply with EN 14901 requirements.
F. Polyurethane coatings shall comply with EN 15655 requirements.
G. Pipework and fittings shall be blast cleaned to SA2½ and grease and other
foreign matter shall be removed prior to application of the coating.
H. The coating shall be free from holidays, blisters, pinholes, runs, sags or any
other irregularities and shall have uniform color, gloss and thickness.
I. Method of site application of the internal and external coatings at the cut-off or
repaired pipes has to be produced by the pipe supplier and approved by the
Engineer
J. Polyethylene sleeve, when, used shall be in accordance with ISO 8180. The PE
PAGE 103
sleeve shall be black, UV resistant with the thickness 250 μm with maximum
minus tolerance of 10%
K. Dismantling joints, step couplings and flange adapters shall of be of steel grade
S275 to BS EN 10025 or ductile iron grade 420/12 to BS EN 1563 with factory
applied fusion bonded epoxy coating or Rilsan Nylon coating of minimum
thickness of 300 μm. Bolts, nuts, studs, and washers shall be stainless steel
SS316.
19.2.4 Marking of Pipes and Fittings

A. Marking shall be applied to pipes and fittings in such a manner that it is legible
after installation and durable throughout the construction period. Each pipe and
fitting shall be marked before dispatch from the pipe manufacturer’s works as
op V1
specified in BS EN 545 or ISO 2531.
19.3.Part3 Execution
19.3.1
C -
Installation
y
A.
C
Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions.
B. Verify dimensions of valves and fittings to assure work will fit together properly
C
and conform to the arrangement shown on the drawings.
C. Accurately determine dimensions essential for proper location and orientation

Q
of cast in items.
19.3.2 Jointing Pipes and Fittings

A. Thoroughly clean the faces of the flanges of all oil, grease, and foreign material
prior to connecting flanged pipe.
B. Check gaskets for proper fit and thoroughly clean.
C. Assure proper seating of the flange gasket.
D. Tighten bolts so that the pressure on the gasket is uniform. Use torque-limiting
wrenches to ensure uniform bearing insofar as possible.
E. If bolted joints leak when the hydrostatic test is applied, remove gaskets and
reset and retighten bolts.
19.3.3 Testing
A. Testing of the pipes and fittings shall be in accordance with BS EN 545
requirements.
B. All sections of DI pipeline and fittings shall be hydrostatically tested to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. The test pressure shall be such that the section
being tested will be subjected to 1.5 times the working pressure. The working
pressure shall be the maximum pressure that can be developed in the system.
C. All coatings and linings shall be tested in accordance to BS EN 545, EN 14901
and EN 15655 requirements. Where holidays are detected or the DFT is less
than required, the area shall be recoated in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 104
20. HDPE PIPES (SECTION 02650)
20.1.Part 1 General
20.1.1 Scope
A. This Material Specification details the minimum requirements for the design,
manufacture, testing, inspection and supply of High Density Polyethylene (HDPE
or High Performance Polyethylene (HPPE pipe material and fittings used in
irrigation systems.
op V1
A. The following sections of the specification shall be read in conjunction with
this section.
C -
y
Section 01300
C Submittals
Section 01400 Quality Control
C
Q

20.1.3 Applicable Standards and Codes

A. The following codes and standards, to the extent specified herein, form a part of
this specification. The latest edition of these codes and standards shall govern
the work.
ISO 4427 Polyethylene (PE pipes for water supply – specifications

ISO 161-1 Thermoplastic pipes for conveyance of fluids – nominal
outside diameter and nominal pressure- part 1: Metric series
ISO 1167-1to4 Thermoplastic pipes, fittings and assemblies for the
conveyance of fluids
ISO 3126 Plastic pipes – Measurement of dimensions
ISO 4065 Thermoplastic pipes – Universal wall thickness table
ISO 6964 Polyolefin pipes and fittings – Determination of carbon black
content by calcination and pyrolysis – Test method and basic
specification.
ISO 9080 Thermoplastic pipes for the transport of fluids – Method of
extrapolation of hydrostatic stress rupture data to determine
the long-term hydrostatic strength of thermoplastic pipe
materials.
PAGE 105
ISO 11922-1 Thermoplastic pipes for the conveyance of fluids – Dimensions and
tolerances Part: 1: Metric series.
ISO 12162 Thermoplastic materials for pipes and fittings for pressure
applications – Classification and designation – overall service
(design coefficient.
ISO 13761 Plastic pipes and fittings – pressure reduction factors for polyethylene
pipeline systems for use at temperatures above 200C.
ISO 7005 – 3 Metallic flanges – Part 3, Copper alloy and composite flanges
BS EN 12201 Plastic piping systems for water supply - polyethylene
ISO 974 Determination of the brittleness temperature by impact
ISO 2505 Thermoplastics pipes - Longitudinal reversion
ISO 6259 Determination of tensile properties
ISO 1133 Determination of the melt mass-flow rate (MFR) and the melt
op V1
Volume - flow
ISO 877 Methods of exposure to direct weathering
20.1.4 Submittals
C -
y
20.1.4.1
C
Products and Materials Approval.
A. In order to verify compliance with the specification the Contractor shall submit
C
information for all products and materials used in the Works to the Engineer for
approval sufficiently in advance of their use in accordance with the Contract
programme allowing for ordering and approval times. Reference shall also be
Q
made to Section 01600 of the specification on products and materials approval.

Information to be submitted shall comprise but not necessarily be limited to:
i. The manufacturers design calculations, complete and detailed specification

and test results of the proposed HDPE pipes and fittings required for the
Works including manufacturer’s certificates of compliance with this section of
the standard specification. Information on all items listed in Table 20.1-1
below shall be given for every diameter in each class of pipe.
ii. Should any details of the pipes and fittings be altered in any way during
manufacture from those proposed and approved by the Engineer, submit for
the Engineer's approval the revised details and test results.
iii. Submit to the Engineer the results of all quality control tests carried out on
the manufactured pipes and fittings as soon as practicable after testing as
and in any case not later than the time of delivery of the relevant pipes and
fittings to the site.
Table 20.1-1: Product Information for HDPE Pipe and Fittings

Joint type -
PAGE 106
Details of all additives used in the manufacture -

Polymer classification and certificate of origin -
Rated working pressure MPa
Design test pressure (165hrs or 100 hrs.) MPa
Internal vacuum pressure MPa
Minimum required strength (MRS) MPa
Pipe Details
op V1
Nominal external diameter mm
Wall thickness mm
Standard dimension ratio (SDR) -
Standard pipe length m
C -
y
C
C
A. The Contractor shall submit method statements to the Engineer for approval 4
weeks in advance of commencing the site activity in accordance with Section
01300 of the specification. These shall comprise but not necessarily be limited to:
Q

ii. Procedures for building pipes into concrete structures.
iii. Hydrostatic testing procedures for HDPE pressure pipelines.
20.1.4.3 Drawings
A. The Contractor shall submit drawings to the Engineer for approval in advance of
commencing the site activity in accordance with Section 01300 of the
specification. These shall comprise but not necessarily be limited to:
B. Drawings of the pipes, fittings, joints, pipe specials and the assembly thereof.
C. Pipe laying diagram and schedule showing location, length, design designation
and designation by number of each pipe section and pipe special to be furnished
and installed.
D. All data on curve and bends for both horizontal and vertical alignment.

A. Prior to dispatch of any product and/or material from source the Contractor shall
notify the Engineer in writing in sufficient time to allow the Engineer the

PAGE 107
C. To allow the Engineer to inspect the Works the Contractor shall give the
Engineer a minimum of 24 hours’ notice of carrying out the following activities on
site:
20.1.6 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

A. Delivery, storage and handling of products and materials shall be in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations, Section 01600 of the specification
and the following provisions.
op V1
avoid product damage and be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
may cause damage to the pipes and fittings during transportation loading and
C -
unloading. Ensure that pipes and fittings are well secured during transit and
y
C
adequately supported along their length. Do not allow pipe to overhang the
end of a vehicle during transportation.
iii. Ensure that pipes and fittings are lifted using nylon or large diameter rope
C
slings positioned at a quarter of the pipe length from each end. Do not allow
the use of wire rope chains or unpadded forks or clamps on forklifts to lift
pipes.
Q
iv. Store pipes and fittings on a flat level area as recommended by the pipe
v. Stack non-crated pipes to the approval of the Engineer.
 Stack pipes of different sizes and thickness separately.
 Do not allow stacked pipes to exceed 2m in height or as recommended by
the supplier whichever is the lesser.
vi. The Contractor shall visually inspect all products upon delivery to site and
 Scratching or scoring of pipe surface to a depth greater or equal to 10%
of wall thickness shall constitute an automatic rejection of that pipe
section.
20.2.1 Technical Requirements
PAGE 108
20.2.1.1. Material Requirements

A. The CONTRACTOR shall identify the manufacturer of the resin, the resin type
and classification. In addition, the CONTRACTOR shall provide evidence that the
resin proposed is suitable for use at the design temperature and under the
design pressures indicated.
B. Any change in the material, the material specification, or the manufacturer's

location shall be subject to prior approval of the Client/End users/ENGINEER.
C. Pipes and fittings shall be homogenous throughout and free from visible cracks,
holes, foreign inclusions, blisters, dents or other damaging defects.
D. Material shall be uniform in opacity, density, interior smoothness, and other
op V1
physical properties. It shall have adequate resistance to weathering and other
ageing from storage for a minimum of two years after manufacture.
E. For the manufacturing of pipes & fittings only new materials to be used (Rework
C -
material is not acceptable.
y
C
F. Pipe manufacturer shall confirm that all fittings to be provided for the pipe
systems shall meet the same quality requirements as for the pipes to ensure the
C
same performance for design life cycle.
G. The pipes and fittings shall be manufactured from polyethylene containing only
Q
those antioxidants, UV stabilizers and pigments necessary for the manufacturing

process to fulfill the requirements of the specification.
H. All pipes and fittings shall be suitable for butt fusion or electro fusion techniques.
Contractor shall provide PE manufacturers guideline for the applicability of the
material used. If required PE manufacturers shall provide assistance and
training.
20.2.1.2. Physical Properties

A. Pipes and fittings shall be made of high density polyethylene (HDPE) and shall
comply with the requirements of ISO 4427 PE 100. The material shall be
produced by a member of the PE 100 + Association.
B. The material used for the manufacturer of pipes and fittings shall be in
accordance with Table 1 and Table 2 of clause 4.4 of ISO 4427-1
C. The minimum required strength (MRS) of the material compound shall be 10

MPa at 200 C. The design stress shall be 8 MPa.
D. Lifecycle durability of 80 years is to be confirmed.
E. The design temperature shall be 36º C
F. For design calculation, pressure, reducing coefficients 4427-1, Annex A are

applicable. The thermal stability of polyethylene material shall meet the
requirements of ISO 4427.
PAGE 109
20.2.1.3. Pipe Dimensions (Geometrical Characteristics)

A. The pipe dimensions for water systems shall be based on standard dimensions
according to ISO 4427 and measured in accordance with ISO 3126.
B. Straight pipe shall be supplied in standard lengths measured at 23º C +/- 2º C.

unless otherwise specified, coil lengths shall not exceed 100 m.
C. Coiled pipes shall be coiled such that localized deformation is voided and the
minimum internal diameter of the coil shall not be less than 18 Dn.
20.2.1.4. Pipe Appearance
op V1
A. When viewed without magnification the internal and external surfaces of pipes
shall be smooth, clean and free from scoring, cavities and other surface defects.
The pipe ends shall be cut cleanly and square to the axis of the pipe.
B. The carbon black content in the compound shall be 2.25 + 0.25 % by mass when
C -
measured in accordance with ISO 6964. The dispersion of carbon black when
y
C
determined in accordance with ISO 11420 shall be equal to or less than grade 3.
20.2.1.5. Fittings
C
A. Only fittings supplied or recommended by the pipe manufacturer and approved
by the Engineer shall be used. Fittings shall be installed in accordance with the
Q
approved method statement.
B. The fittings shall be injection molded or formed from material compatible to that
of the pipe and shall be as resistant to the external and internal environments as
the other demands' of the pipe system.
C. At locations where HDPE to metal connections are specified, Nylon based

polyamide 11 coating system complying with the requirement of AWWC224 or
epoxy coated backing rings shall be used, or special restrained transition fittings
subject to approval by Client/End users/ENGINEER. The flanges shall be drilled
to ISO 7005-2, as per the design requirements.
20.2.1.6. Fittings Appearance

A. When viewed without magnification the internal and external surfaces of fittings
shall be smooth, clean and free from scoring, cavities and other surface defects.
The fitting shall be blue or black.
20.2.1.7. Fittings Dimensions

A The dimensions shall be measured in accordance with EN/ISO 3126
20.2.1.8. Wall Thickness of Fittings

A The wall thickness of the body of the fitting at any point shall be equal to or
greater than the minimum wall thickness of the corresponding pipe.
B The properties of the polymer, extruded pipe and fittings shall be as shown in
Tables 2.1.1, 2.1.2, and 2.1.3 below.
PAGE 110
Table 20.2-1: HDPE Resin Properties
Property Required Value Test Method Test Method

European ASTM
3
Density >940kg/m ISO 1183-3 D1505
Melt mass flow index or 0.2 to 1.4g/10min* ISO 1133 D1238 4

rate (2.16) condition 4
Melt mass flow index or 0.2 to 1.4g/10min* ISO 1133 D1238 5

rate (5.00) condition T
op V1
Melt mass flow index or >8g/10min ISO 1133 D1238 6
rate (21.6) condition G
Environmental stress >250hrs BS EN ISO D1693

crack resistance (10% 20088
C -
y
stabilizer)
C
Resistance to internal >165hrs ISO 4427 DIN -
pressure 8047
C
Oxidation induction time >20mins BS EN 728 -
0
Q
(200 C
Flexural creep modulus >900MPa - D790

0
Shore D hardness (40 C >50 - D2240
Tensile strength at yield >20MPa ISO 527 D638

(50mm/min
Elongation at break >600% ISO 527 -
Modulus of elasticity >1000MPa - -
Chirpy impact No break - -

0
Vicat softening point >125 C BS EN 727 -
0
Thermal expansion (20- <0.20mm/m/ C - -
0
90 C
Thermal conductivity <0.6W/mk - -

0
(20 C
Carbon black content >2.4 ISO 6964
Carbon black dispersion ≤60μm (grade 3) ISO 18533

*- Maximum deviation of +/- 20% of the nominated value
PAGE 111
Table 20.2-2: HDPE Pipe Properties
Property Required Value Test Method Test Method

European ASTM
3
Density >940 kg/m ISO 1183-3 D1505
Melt mass flow index or 0.2 to 1.4/10min* ISO 1133 D1238 5

0
rate (5.00kg, 190 C condition 1T
Oven test Defects shall not ISO 12091 -

develop
op V1
Resistance to internal No failure or defects ISO 1167 ISO -
0
pressure (20 C, water in 4427
water, hoop stress
1
12.4MPa, 100hrs)
C -
y
Resistance to internal
0
C No failure or defects ISO 1167 ISO -
water, hoop stress
C
1
5.5MPa, 165hrs)
Q
Resistance to internal No failure or defects ISO 1167 ISO -

0
water, hoop stress
1
5.0MPa, 1000hrs)
Creep ratio >900MPa BS EN ISO 9967 -
Longitudinal reversion <3% ISO 2505 -

0
(100 C
Shore D hardness >50 - D2240
Tensile strength at yield >20MPa ISO 527 D638

50mm/min
Elongation at break >350% ISO 527 -
Ring flexibility Refer standard BS EN 1446 -
Impact strength TIR 10% BS EN 744 -
Ring stiffness To SN or SD required BS EN ISO 9969 -
Quality Grade N ISO 11922

0
Thermal stability (200 C 20mins BS EN 728 -
Notch test (at 500 hours) Refer Standard ISO 13479
PAGE 112
Legend to Table 20.2-2

1) Either on pipe or from sample pipe using same resin and process.
*- Change of MFR by processing +/- 20% of the compound value
Table 20.2-3: HDPE Injection Molded Fittings Properties
Test Method Test Method

Property Required Value
European ASTM
3
Density >940kg/m ISO 1183-3 D1505
op V1
Melt mass flow index or rate 0.2 to ISO 1133 condition
0 D1238
(5.00kg, 190 C 1.4g/10min* 1T
Stiffness As required ISO 13967 -
Impact
C - Refer standard BS EN 12061 -
y
Mechanical strength or
C
Refer standard BS EN 12256
flexibility
C
0
Thermal stability (200 C >20 mins BS EN 728 -
Q
Resistance to internal pressure

0
(80 C, water in water, hoop No failure ISO 1167 ISO 4427 -
1
stress 5.5MPa, 165hrs)
Resistance to internal pressure

0
(80 C, water in water, hoop No failure ISO 1167 ISO 4427 -
1
stress 5.0MPa, 1000hrs)
Water tightness No leakage EN 1053 -
Legend to Table 20.2-3

1) For mounded materials use either an injection mounded or extruded pipe from
same materials.
*- Change of MFR by processing +/- 20% of the compound value
20.2.2 Quality Control Tests

A. The routine factory quality control tests listed below shall be carried out at the
required frequencies and records of all tests and inspections shall be maintained
by the manufacturer. The Engineer shall be provided with two copies of all test
certificates and reports.
i. Quality testing of all raw materials to ensure that they comply with the
relevant specification.
ii. Control of processing parameters in terms of temperature, pressure, flow
rates, haul-off speed and energy input.
PAGE 113
iii. Visual inspection of the pipes to check general appearance, dimensional

compliance and any indication of inclusions or processing flows in pipe
barrels and joining ends.
iv. Production short-term tests to identify any variations in the plant
functioning.
v. The following tests shall be performed in accordance with the
vi. Relevant standards in order to ensure the quality of the extruded pipes:
 Melt mass-flow rate of raw material.

 Density of raw material.
 Carbon black content.
 Carbon black dispersion.
 Long-term stress crack resistance at 80°C.
op V1
 Long-term MRS at 20°C on the raw material (data not older than 24
months)
 Appearance.
 Long term hydrostatic test at 20°C. (100hrs test)

C -
Welding.
y
 Slow tear test

C
Oxidation induction time value.
 Visual inspection of pipes.
C
 Dimensional check of pipes.
 Heat reversion of pipes.
 Hydrostatic creep strength tests of pipes.
Q
 Bend test / reverse bend test
B. When conditioning is required for laboratory tests, condition the specimens in

accordance with the appropriate standard.
C. Tensile testing for pipe resin, pipes and welds shall be performed on an
approved densitometer capable of delivering safely and accurately 120 % of the
stress required by the sample. The densitometer shall be connected to a
computerized system capable of delivering information in data and graphical
form. The information required from tensile measurements are tensile strength at
yield and peak and elongation at yield and peak.
i. Test specimens shall be milled to exact size using approved designated

milling machines. Each specimen shall be measured to an accuracy of 10
microns
ii. The Contractor shall submit statistical analysis based on minimum sample
populations of 32. Cumulative analysis based on overall and on individual
pipe resin batch based data shall also be provided.
iii. Welded samples shall be visually examined after tensile testing for signs of
adequate bonding and ductile and brittle failure. Weld samples with
greater than 25 % brittle failure shall be rejected.
iv. Tensile graphs indicating brittle failure shall be considered as failures.
D. The selection of samples of pipe, resin and welds for testing shall be as directed
by the Engineer.
E. If the results of any test fail to meet the requirements of this specification, the test
shall be repeated once again. If, upon retest, failure occurs, the batch quantity of
product represented by the test shall be rejected.
PAGE 114
F. The Contractor shall conduct quality checks at the manufacturer's premises to

ensure that the in-process manufacturing quality checks are being conducted
correctly and at the stated frequency. Test certificates relating to the batch shall
be furnished to the Engineer before acceptance of the delivery. The test
certificates shall contain all the details in the agreed format of reporting.
G. Marking shall be applied to the pipe in such a manner that it is legible after
installation and durable throughout the construction period. Each standard and
random length of pipe and every fitting shall be marked before dispatch from the
pipe manufacturer’s works as required in ISO 4427 and as follows:
i. The manufacturer’s name, initials, or trade mark.
op V1
ii. The dimensions nominal outside diameter X nominal wall thickness.
iii. The outside diameter tolerance.
iv. The designation of the pipe material.
v. The nominal pressure.
vi. The pipe series.
C -
vii. The date of manufacture and batch number.
y
C
viii. Stencil in legible letters the pipe identification number on the inside and
sheets and documents relating to the manufacture, delivery and testing of
C
that pipe.
ix. The manufacturing standard.
Q

A. Trench excavation shall be carried out in accordance with Section 02225 of the
specification.
B. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.
i. Provide qualification details of the manufacturer's technical expert to be

assigned to the Contract. The technical expert shall have expertise,
experience and skills necessary for advising and monitoring all aspects of
transport, storage, handling, installation and testing of pipes as
appropriate.
ii. The technical expert shall provide comprehensive technical assistance to
the Contractor throughout the Contract and regularly monitor the
Contractor's activities and report on shortcomings.
iii. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer and DMAT copies of all
instructions advice or reports given by the manufacturer's technical expert
to him. The technical expert shall immediately inform the Engineer and
DMAT of any omission, variations and detractions from the specification.
C. The pipeline shall be within 20mm of the specified line and the invert level shall
be within 6mm of the specified value and shall be such that there is no back fall
at any point on a gravity pipeline.
PAGE 115
D. Install bedding, surround and backfill in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s
requirements or if not given as specified in Section 02223 of the specification
and shown on the drawings.
E. Lay pipes from downstream to upstream unless agreed otherwise with the
Engineer.
F. HDPE pipelines can accommodate gradual changes of direction in the vertical

and horizontal plane. However the pipe should not normally be bent to a radius
less than 25 times the outside diameter of the pipe.
G. When cut pipe is required, ensure that the cutting is done by a machine, leaving
a smooth cut at right angles to the axis of the pipe.
op V1
H. Ensure that all pipes and fittings are sound and clean before laying. When pipe
laying is not in progress, ensure that the pipe ends are at all times fitted with
watertight plugs or caps. The plugs or caps shall only be removed for the
purposes of making a connection of the pipe end or testing the pipeline. The
C -
plugs or cap shall be replaced immediately on completion of the test.
y
C
20.3.2 Butt Fusion Jointing
C
A. Butt fusion jointing shall only be used to join pipes of the same PE material with
compatible Melt Flow Rate (MFR) and with the same nominal wall thickness and
outside diameter. The following procedures shall serve as a general guide only.
Q
The Contractor shall obtain detailed jointing instructions from the manufacturer
who shall have a technical representative available at the Engineer’s request
during the jointing process.
i. The butt fusion machine should be sited within a shelter and the ends of
the pipe being joined should be covered or plugged to prevent through
drafts.
ii. Each component that is to be fused should be held in position in the
purpose built clamping jig. The lengths of pipe hanging outside the jig
should be supported by means of roller cradles.
iii. The pipe ends should be faced so that the finished surfaces are perfectly
smooth free of visible ridges, valleys or other surface imperfections.
iv. The outside diameters of the pipe ends should match closely without the
offset exceeding 10%
v. The pipe ends should be heated to the pipe manufacturer’s recommended
temperature and interfacial pressure. The Contractor should use a
pyrometer or other surface temperature measuring device to confirm and
record the actual surface temperature for each weld. Temperature
indicating crayons should not come into contact with the surface to be
welded.
vi. After the pipe ends have been properly melted, the heater tool should be
removed within the specified time. The molten pipe ends should be
brought together and allowed to cool without disturbance to form the
permanent weld. The proper bead size and geometry specified for the pipe
being welded should be formed.
PAGE 116
20.3.3 Saddle/Sidewall Jointing

A. Saddle /sidewall fusion jointing shall be accomplished by using a mechanical
saddle fusion machine that has been designed for this purpose to ensure proper
alignment, temperature and force control. The following procedures shall serve
as a general guide only. The Contractor shall obtain detailed jointing instructions
from the manufacturer who shall have a technical representative available at the
Engineer’s request during the jointing process.
i. Any dirt or coating that might interfere with the proper operation of the
saddle fusion machine should be removed from the pipe and the surfaces
of the pipe and saddle roughened to expose fresh material and any reside
brushed away.
op V1
ii. Test fit the saddle fusion machine to ensure that alignment and contact
are as they should be.
iii. Commence the fusion process and periodically verify the surface
temperature using a pyrometer or other surface temperature measuring
C -
device. If temperature indicating crayons are used, they should not be
y
C
used on a surface which comes into contact with the surfaces to be
welded.
iv. After the heating period, remove the heater plate and check for the correct
C
melt pattern on both the fitting and the pipe. Join the fitting to the pipe with
the prescribed fusion force.
Q
v. Cool the joint without disturbance until the melt has formed a permanent
weld. The joint should not be subjected to any external stresses until the
fusion joint has cooled.
20.3.4 Electro fusion Jointing

A. Electrofusion jointing involves heating the electrofusion joint internally, either by
a wire coil at the interface of the joint or by a conductive polymer. Heat is
created by an electric current passed to the conductive material in the fitting.
i. Ensure that the fitting is dimensionally appropriate for welding to the pipe.
Clean the pipe surface in the joint area. Cut the end of the pipe square.
Mark on the pipe surface the proper position of the fitting to be installed.
Scrape the surface of pipe area to be joined, removing all surface
degradation and contamination. Avoid contamination of the scraped pipe
surfaces.
ii. Place the pipe and fitting in the clamping fixture to prevent movement of
the pipe or fitting.
iii. Connect the electrofusion control box to the fitting and to the power
source. Apply electric current to the fitting as specified in the
manufacturer’s instructions. Turn off the current when the proper time has
elapsed to heat the joint properly.
iv. Allow the joint to cool for the recommended time and remove the clamping
fixtures. Do not remove prematurely from the clamps as any strain on a
joint that has not fully cooled can be detrimental to joint performance.
PAGE 117
20.3.5 Mechanical Joints and Fittings

A. Many types of mechanical connection styles and methods exist. The Contractor
shall submit suitable mechanical joints. All such joints shall be recommended and
acceptance tested by the manufacturer of the pipe. Where marked on the
drawings end-load resistant fittings of an approved type shall be used.
B. When tightening polyethylene flanges care shall be taken to produce an equal

torque load to the limits given by the manufacturer. A torque wrench shall be
used. Since polyethylene creeps under load it is essential that the bolts are re-
tightened several times prior to commissioning to minimize the risk of leakage.
C. All joint materials and gaskets shall be suitable for use in the prevailing climate,
op V1
soil, ground water, potable water and irrigation water conditions.
20.3.6 Hydrostatic Testing

A. Hydrostatic tests shall be as per BS EN 805 – Appendix A – Section A.27,
C -
unless indicated otherwise by Engineer.
y
C
B. Proposed methods and program for testing, including details of test equipment,
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. All tests shall be witnessed by
the Engineer or other person appointed by the Owner. All equipment necessary
C
for carrying out testing and cleaning including water, pumps, gauges and
calibration certificates, piped connections, stop ends and all other temporary
works shall be provided prior to commencement of testing.
Q
C. In addition to any tests of individual joints or other interim tests, which may be
specified elsewhere, submit all parts of the pipelines to a final test. Carry out at
any stage of construction other tests that the Engineer considers desirable to
check materials and workmanship on the pipeline. Ensure that the obligations to
perform successful tests under the Contract are achieved.
D. Use potable water for hydrostatic testing and pipeline cleaning. The Contractor
must make his own arrangement for the supply and disposal of water used for
testing which must be obtained from a source accepted by the Engineer.
E. The pipeline shall be tested in sections as the Engineer may direct or permit.
Each section shall be tested separately. Testing shall not be carried out against
closed valves.
F. Use properly designed fittings for the purpose of temporarily closing the
openings in pipelines to be tested. Use fittings adequately strutted to withstand
the pressure specified.
G. Where multiple pipelines are laid in common trench, test only one line at any
one time.
H. The pipeline shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to testing.
I. Ensure that gauges used for testing pipelines have a dial diameter of not less
check the accuracy of the gauge. Provide a dated certificate of its accuracy to
the Engineer.
J. Before pressure testing commences pipes and valves shall be rechecked for
cleanliness and the operation of all valves shall be rechecked. The open ends of
the pipeline, or sections thereof, shall be blanked off and additionally secured
where necessary by temporary struts and wedges. All anchor and thrust blocks
PAGE 118
shall be completed and all pipe straps and other devices intended to prevent the
movement of pipes shall be in place.
K. Tables for pressure testing and for make-up water for testing at elevated
temperatures between 230°C up to 400 °C shall be provided by the resin
manufacturer of the pipe.
L. When the temperature of the pipe wall, test water and air temperature are all
less than 35°C the test pressure shall be 1.5 times the rated pressure of the
lowest rated component in the section of pipeline under test.
M. Pipelines that have been pressurized and depressurized shall be kept
depressurized for a period of at least 12 hours to stress relax before applying
pressure again
op V1
N. During summer months all pressure testing shall be carried out when ambient
temperatures are at their lowest in order to avoid excessive stresses on the pipe
during testing. Exposed areas of pipe in trenches, such as at joint locations,
shall be shaded during hydraulic testing at all times throughout the year.
C -
O. The fill and test position shall be located at the lowest point of the pipeline profile
y
to encourage the expulsion of air as the pipe is being filled. Adequate air release
C
mechanisms shall be sited at all high points. An air bleed shall be incorporated
as close to the crown of the pipe at the highest point and at each end of the test
section.
C
P. The pipeline shall be filled taking all appropriate precautions to avoid air
entrapment as the presence of air could invalidate the test. The pipeline shall
Q
then be left to stabilize for a minimum of 3 hours and air released as necessary
by opening the bleed valves.
Q. Visually inspect all exposed pipe, fittings, valves and joints during the tests
R. Ensure that all valves in the pipeline are satisfactorily operating under working
pressure.
20.3.7 Deflection Measurement of Pipelines

A. Deflection measurement of pipelines shall be carried out at the discretion of the
Engineer, but the Contractor shall be deemed to have included for deflection
testing in his rates.
B. Excavation for or laying of HDPE pipelines shall not proceed until an approved
device for gauging pipe deflections is on site.
gauging pipe deflections. Maintain devices for gauging pipe deflections in
good working order. Submit calibration certificates before every period of
use. For pipes of 600mm diameter and greater. Measure deflection by
physical entry into the pipes. Use a regularly calibrated telescopic spring
loaded graduated rod to measure percentage deflections in each diameter.
Provide a suitable trolley to facilitate access into the pipe. Record all
measurements.
C. The pipeline shall be inspected for deflection and orality immediately after 600
mm of the soil envelope has been placed to obtain a reference status. The final
deflection shall be taken 30 days after the backfill has been built up to final
ground level. The Contractor is advised to check for deflection at all times so that
he may make corrections during the backfill construction phase.
PAGE 119
D. When fully installed and completely backfilled to ground level the deflection
inclusive of any initial orality shall not be more than 5.0 % based on the base
outside diameter and measured 30 days after installation.
E. If the visual inspection or the deflection test indicates excess deflection, the
Contractor shall determine the exact cause of the deflection before proposing a
remedy.
i. Isolated areas of severe deflection may be the result of construction loads
being on the pipe before adequate cover has been placed. These areas
may be able to be re-rounded with special equipment without any
excavation. Long lengths of pipe with high deflection levels may be
indicative of overall installation deficiencies. The Contractor shall submit
proposals for corrective action in the event of unacceptable deflection or
op V1
upon indications of poor installation likely to cause future distress to the
pipeline.
ii. Depending on the severity, the material around the pipe may have to be
excavated and replaced with the recommended backfill and compacted.
C -
Provided the pipe has not deflected to the point of reverse curvature, it
y
C
may be allowed to be returned to its original round shape before
acceptance.
C
END OF SECTION
Q
PAGE 120
21. UPVC PIPES (SECTION 02660)
21.1. Part 1 General

21.1.1 Scope
A. This section of the specification gives the requirements for unplasticised
Polyvinyl Chloride (uPVC pipeline materials and the installation and testing
thereof for irrigation systems.
op V1
section.
C -
y
C
C
Q
21.1.3 Standards
A. All activities relating to this section of the standard specification shall comply
with the following or approved equal standards.
ASTM D2564 Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl
Chloride (PVC Plastic Piping Systems.
ASTM F 656 Specification for Primers for Use in Solvent Cement Joints of
Poly (Vinyl Chloride (PVC Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
BS EN 681 Elastomeric seals. Material requirements for pipe joint seals
used in water and drainage applications.
BS EN 1092-2 Circular flanges for pipes, valves and fittings (PN designated.
Steel, cast iron and copper alloy flanges. Specification for cast
iron flanges.
ISO 161-1 Thermoplastics pipes for the conveyance of fluids -- Nominal
outside diameters and nominal pressures
ISO 1167 Thermoplastic pipes for the transport of fluids. Resistance to
internal pressure. Test method.
ISO 2045 Single sockets for unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (PVC-u) and
chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (PVC-C pressure pipes with elastic
sealing ring type joints. Minimum depths of engagement.
ISO 2048 Double socket fittings for unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (PVC-
u) pressure pipes with elastic sealing ring type joints. Minimum
depths of engagement.
ISO 2505-1 Thermoplastic pipes. Longitudinal reversion. Determination
methods.
ISO 2505-2 Thermoplastic pipes. Longitudinal reversion. Determination
parameters.
PAGE 121
ISO 2507 Unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (PVC-u) pipes and fittings. Vicat
softening temperature. Test methods and specification.
ISO 3126 Plastic pipes. Measurement of dimensions.
ISO 3127 Thermoplastic pipes. Determination of resistance to external
blows. Round the clock method.
ISO 4065 Thermoplastic pipes. Universal wall thickness table.
ISO 11922-1 Thermoplastic pipes for the conveyance of fluids. Dimensions
and tolerances.
21.1.4 Submittals
op V1
21.1.4.1 Products and materials approval.
A In order to verify compliance with the specification the Contractor shall submit
information for all products and materials used in the Works to the Engineer
for approval sufficiently in advance of their use in accordance with the
C -
Contract program allowing for ordering and approval times. Reference shall
y
C
also be made to Section 01600 of the specification on products and materials
approval. Information to be submitted shall comprise but not necessarily be
limited to:
C
i. The manufacturer's complete and detailed specification and test results of
the proposed uPVC pipes and fittings required for the Works including
Q
Manufacturer’s Certifications of compliance with this section of the

standard specification. Information on all items listed in Table 21.1-1 shall
be given.
manufacture from those proposed and approved by the Engineer, submit
for the Engineer's approval the revised details and test results.
the manufactured pipes and fittings as soon as practicable after testing as
and in any case not later than the time of delivery of the relevant pipes and
fittings to the site.
Table 21.1-1: Product Information For uPVC Pipe and Fittings

Joint type -
Details of all additives used in the manufacture -
Minimum depth of cover m
Maximum depth of cover m
2
Maximum working pressure KN/m
PAGE 122
2
Design test pressure KN/m
2
Internal vacuum pressure KN/m
Pipe Details
Class of pipe -
Nominal external diameter mm
Wall thickness mm
Standard pipe length m
Notes to Table 21.1-1
op V1
1) Pipe data to be provided for every diameter in each class of pipe.

C -
01300 of the specification. These shall comprise but not necessarily be limited
y
to.
C
C
ii. Hydrostatic testing procedures for uPVC none pressure pipelines...
iii. Deflection measurement procedures for uPVC pipelines.
Q
21.1.4.3 Drawings
A. The Contractor shall submit drawings to the Engineer for approval in advance
of commencing the site activity in accordance with Section 01300 of the
thereof.
ii. Pipe laying diagram and schedule showing location, length, design
iii. All data on curve and bends for both horizontal and vertical alignment.

A Prior to dispatch of any product and/or material from source the Contractor
B Products and materials shall be from a manufacturer/supplier who operates a

quality control system which is registered to ISO 9000 series or approved
equal.
C To allow the Engineer to inspect the Works the Contractor shall give the
on site:
iii. Deflection measurement of pipeline.
PAGE 123

A Delivery, storage and handling of products and materials shall be in
specification and the following provisions:
i. Delivery storage and handling shall at all times be performed in a manner
to avoid product damage.
and unloading. Ensure that pipes and fittings are well secured during
op V1
transit and adequately supported along their length. Cover pipes and
fittings of plastic materials during transportation. Do not allow pipe to
slings positioned at a quarter of the pipe length from each end. Do not
C -
allow the use of wire rope chains or unpadded forks or clamps on forklifts
y
C
to lift pipes.
iv. Store pipes and fittings on a flat level area as recommended by the pipe
C
Q
 Stack spigot and socket pipes so that successive pipe layers have
sockets protruding at opposite ends of the stack.
 Stack pipes of different sizes and thickness separately.
 Do not allow stacked pipes to exceed 2m in height or as recommended
 Store uPVC pipes and fittings under opaque cover and out of direct
sunlight at all times. Maintain a free flow of air around the pipes at all
times.
 Store rubber joint rings in a well ventilated place free from exposure to
sunlight and in their original packings until they are needed.
 The Contractor shall visually inspect all products upon delivery to site

21.2.1 Pipe Design Requirements
A uPVC pipe shall conform to ISO 161/1 and shall be PN16 / PN10.
B Pipes up to 90 mm nominal diameter shall have solvent welded joints and

pipes of 110 mm and above diameter shall have rubber ring sealing.
PAGE 124
C All uPVC fittings shall be ISO/DIN specification and have a minimum rating of
16 kg/cm² at 20 °C.
D Fittings shall be suitable for use with the above specified pipes. Where uPVC
flanges are required these shall be drilled to PN16 as detailed in BS EN 1092.

A All uPVC components shall be designed and fabricated by one manufacturer.
B Use polyvinyl chloride, together with those additives that are needed for the
manufacture and performance of pipe to this section of the standard
op V1
specification. Pigments may be added to achieve the manufacturer's nominal
pipe color.
C Provide uPVC pipes and fittings capable of withstanding the working pressure,
test pressure, and the loading specified.
C -
y
C
D Recycled material shall not be used.
E Supply pipes in straight lengths of not greater than 6 meters excluding the
C
depth of any socket.
F Determine the nominal pipe wall thicknesses from the table in ISO 4065.
Q
G Comply with the limits specified in ISO 11922 when measuring the nominal
outside diameters and wall thicknesses in accordance with ISO 3126.
H All bends shall be long radius bends unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
I uPVC-u cement and thinner shall be of the type approved by the Engineer.
i. The solvent cement shall have a minimum working pressure of 16 bar and
a tensile strength of 112 bar after 72 hours.
ii. The cement shall have heavy viscosity, medium cure speed, and clear
color and be suitable for pipe diameters up to 315 mm.
iii. The cement will conform to ASTM-D-2564 and be NSF/UPC approved.
iv. The primer shall be certified to contain a minimum of 25 % THF and must
meet ASTM F656.
v. All cans of solvent cement primer and lubricant shall have labels intact and
shall be stamped with the date of manufacture and shelf life. No cans with
an expired shelf life will be permitted.
J EPDM rubber sealing rings shall be in accordance with BS EN 681. The

sealing rings shall be supplied by the pipe manufacturer.
i. Joints shall be capable of withstanding a "draw" of 13mm over and above

the initial jointing allowance and remaining watertight. The initial jointing
allowance is the gap between the spigot and the shoulder of the socket
measured parallel to the center line of the pipeline and must not be less
PAGE 125
than 6mm or greater than 13mm or as recommended by the pipe

manufacturer.
ii. Joints shall be capable of withstanding a deflection of not less than one
and a half degrees in any direction and remaining watertight.
iii. The pipe joints shall be capable of withstanding an external pressure
equivalent to 10m head of water without leakage in both the straight and
deflected positions.
iv. Single sockets shall be in accordance with ISO 2045.
v. Double sockets shall be in accordance with ISO 2048 may be used
adjacent to structures or special fittings.
vi. The ends of cut pipes shall be suitably chamfered prior to making the joint.
op V1
K Joints compound for threaded connection shall be PTFE tape or an approved
equal thread sealant.
L
C -
Ensure that all pipes including cut lengths and all fittings before dispatch from
y
the pipe manufacturer's works are indelibly marked as follows:
i.
C
The letters uPVC.
ii. The manufacturer's name initials or identification mark.
C
iii. The nominal external diameter in millimeters.
iv. The pressure classification in MPa.
Q

hydraulic tests at the point of manufacture.
vii. Stencil on each end of the pipe in legible letters the pipe identification
number. Ensure that the same number appears on all record sheets and
documents relating to the manufacture delivery and testing of that pipe.
21.2.3.1 uPVC Pipes and Fittings.

Use the results of appropriate type tests for the proposed pipes and fittings to
determine the properties of the pipes. Carry out each type test on representative
samples of the pipes and fittings to be used. If the manufacturer does not have
appropriate results of these tests available or if alterations are proposed to the
method of manufacture, pipe design or pipe composition, carry out all the type
tests required by the Engineer to prove the adequacy of the proposed pipes.
21.2.3.2 Type Tests

A Vicat Softening Point. Ensure that the deformation temperature of each tested
sample is not lower than 79°C, when two random samples taken from the pipe
are tested in accordance with ISO 2507.
B Impact Resistance. Ensure that the pipe sample when tested to ISO 3127,
have a true impact rate (TIR) below 10 % at a confidence level of 90 %.
PAGE 126
C Heat Reversion. Ensure that at no position around the pipe the length changes
by more than 5 % when three samples of each pipe size are tested to
ISO 2505. Samples shall not show faults such as cracks, cavities or blisters
during or after the tests.
D Hydraulic Test. Test specimens of pipe of each pipe size in accordance with
ISO 1167, three specimens at 20°C and a further three specimens at 60°C.
Ensure that samples of pipe will sustain the stresses without failure for the
times and temperatures given in table 21.2-1 below.
Table 21.2-1: uPVC Hydraulic Test
op V1
0 2
Test Temperature C Minimum Time to Failure Hrs Induced Stress N/mm
20 1 42
C -
60 1000 10
y
C
E Joint Tests. Two jointed pipes of each pipe size to be tested in accordance
with the requirements of Section 6.5 of ASTM D3262 but applying the
C
following parameters in substitution.
i. Use a positive test pressure of 6m water head.

Q
ii. Conduct the negative pressure test to determine the integrity of the joint
against infiltration. Apply an external test pressure of 6m water head to two
sections of pipe assembled with a deflected joint.
iii. Maintain 1.5° deflection during the deflected joint tests.
iv. The Engineer may require fittings to undergo similar type tests to those
specified above. Carry out such tests in accordance with the appropriate
ISO standard. Use fittings of similar quality to those of the pipes being
tested.
v. Quality Control Tests. Carry out the quality control tests listed below at the
frequency stated. Records of all tests and inspections to be maintained by
the manufacturer. Forward two copies of all test certificates and reports to
the Engineer. Ensure that the raw materials are checked for compliance
with the relevant standard.
 Superficial appearance. Ensure that the internal and external surfaces
of every pipe are visually inspected both before shipment and after
offloading at site and that they are free from defects.
 Impact Resistance. Perform a programme of testing to ensure that the
pipe complies with the type tests.
 Heat Reversion. Test at least one specimen during every 8 hours
production run from each machine. Test in accordance with ISO 2505.
Ensure that the length does not change by more than 5 % at any point
around the sample. The tested samples should not show faults, such as
cracks, cavities or blisters.
 Hydraulic Test. Test at least one specimen during every 8 hour
production run from each machine to comply with the requirements of
PAGE 127
the type test at 20°C.

 Joint Test. Perform a programme of testing to demonstrate that the pipe
joints continue to comply with the type tests.
vi. Reject any pipe or fitting which fails any of the quality control tests
stipulated in this specification. In the event that the pipe fails any of the
tests outlined above, repeat the relevant test on a further ten pipes of that
class and diameter as follows.
 Carry out the relevant test on five of these pipes produced immediately
and sequentially prior to and five immediately following the failed pipe. If
any of the ten pipes fail, cease the fabrication of pipes of that class and
diameter. Discussions will be held between the Contractor and the
Engineer to establish the significance of the failures. The suitability of
op V1
manufactured pipes for the proposed installation will be determined and
the Engineer reserves the right to reject all the pipes of that class and
diameter.
21.3. Part 3 C -
Execution
y
C
C
A Trench excavation shall be carried out in accordance with Section 02225 of
the specification.
Q
B Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with BS 8010 and

i. Provide qualification details of the manufacturer's technical expert to be

assigned to the Contract. The technical expert shall have expertise,
transport, storage, handling and installation of pipes as appropriate.
ii. The technical expert shall provide comprehensive technical assistance to
instructions advice or reports given by the manufacturer's technical expert
to him. The technical expert shall immediately inform the Engineer and
DMAT of any omission, variations and detractions from the approved
handling and installation specification.
C Install bedding, surround and backfill as specified in Section 02223 of the

specification and shown on the drawings.
D Lay pipes from downstream to upstream with the socket end at the upstream
end of each pipe.
E The pipeline shall be within 20mm of the specified line and the invert level
shall be within 6mm of the specified value and shall be such that there is no
backfill at any point on a gravity pipeline.
PAGE 128
F Obtain satisfactory initial deflection test results for sections of pipeline laid
between consecutive manholes or chambers prior to commencement of pipe
laying in further sections.
G When cut pipe is required, ensure that the cutting is done by a machine,
leaving a smooth cut at right angles to the axis of the pipe.
H When installing pipes, ensure the joint is cleaned and lubricated and that the
rubber gasket is inserted in the groove of the socket end of the pipe. Align the
spigot and insert home in the socket end. Use a metal feeler to check that the
rubber gasket is correctly located. Spigot and socket flexible joints shall have
the annular space between the pipe and socket sealed with an approved joint
sealant to prevent the ingress of loose material or concrete. This sealing shall
op V1
be carried out immediately on completion of a satisfactory initial hydraulic test
prior to concreting or backfilling but not prior to the test.
I Ensure that all pipes and fittings are sound and clean before laying. When
pipe laying is not in progress, ensure that the pipe ends are at all times fitted
C -
with watertight plugs or caps. The plugs or caps shall only be removed for the
y
C
purposes of making a connection of the pipe end or testing the pipeline. The
plugs or cap shall be replaced immediately on completion of the test.
C
J Excavation for or laying of uPVC pipes shall not proceed until an approved
Q
K Use a suitable mechanized device to the approval of the Engineer for gauging
pipe deflections. Maintain devices for gauging pipe deflections in good working
order. Submit calibration certificates before every period of use. Diametric
dimensional measurement of the pipe, both vertically and horizontally shall be
made and recorded. Each deflection measurement taken along the length of
the pipeline shall be identified and recorded. Provide a continuous print out or
a visual display of the measurements on a remote monitor. The device shall
be calibrated before each pipe length is tested.
21.3.2 Hydrostatic Testing of Pipelines

A Proposed methods and program for testing, including details of test
equipment, shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. All tests shall be
witnessed by the Engineer or other person appointed by the Owner. All
equipment necessary for carrying out testing and cleaning including water,
pumps, gauges and calibration certificates, piped connections, stop ends and
all other temporary works shall be provided prior to commencement of testing.
B Use potable water for hydrostatic testing and pipeline cleaning. The Contractor
must make his own arrangement for the supply and disposal of water used for
testing which must be obtained from a source accepted by the Engineer.
C The pipeline shall be tested in sections as the Engineer may direct or permit.
Each section shall be tested separately. Testing shall not be carried out
against closed valves.
D Use properly designed fittings for the purpose of temporarily closing the
openings in pipelines to be tested. Use fittings adequately strutted to withstand
PAGE 129
E Where multiple pipelines are laid in common trench, test only one line at any
one time.
F The pipeline shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to testing.
G Ensure that gauges used for testing pipelines have a dial diameter of not less
check the accuracy of the gauge. Provide a dated certificate of its accuracy to
the Engineer.
H Before pressure testing commences pipes and valves shall be rechecked for
cleanliness and the operation of all valves shall be rechecked. The open ends
op V1
of the pipeline, or sections thereof, shall be blanked off and additionally
secured where necessary by temporary struts and wedges. All anchor and
thrust blocks shall be completed and all pipe straps and other devices
intended to prevent the movement of pipes shall be in place.
I
C -
During summer months all pressure testing shall be carried out when ambient
y
C
temperatures are at their lowest in order to avoid excessive stresses on the
pipe during testing. Exposed areas of pipe in trenches, such as at joint
locations, shall be shaded during hydraulic testing at all times throughout the
C
year.
J The fill and test position shall be located at the lowest point of the pipeline
Q
profile to encourage the expulsion of air as the pipe is being filled. Adequate
air release mechanisms shall be sited at all high points. An air bleed shall be
incorporated as close to the crown of the pipe at the highest point and at each
end of the test section.
K The pipeline shall be filled taking all appropriate precautions to avoid air
entrapment as the presence of air could invalidate the test. The pipeline shall
then be left to stabilize for a minimum of 3 hours and air released as
necessary by opening the bleed valves.
L Visually inspect all exposed pipe, fittings, valves and joints during the tests
M Ensure that all valves in the pipeline are satisfactorily operating under working
pressure.
N Pressure testing shall begin by pumping slowly until the pressure reaches 1.5
times the rated pressure of the lowest rated component in the section of
pipeline under test. This pressure shall be kept for maximum 24 hours or
O A maximum water loss of 3 liters per 1000m lengths per 25mm nominal bore
per 24 hours shall be considered acceptable.
P Keep a record of all tests and make them available for inspection. Hand over
test records to the Engineer for approval.
Q Pipes or joints shall not be accepted if any leakage or damage is visible during
an internal inspection.
PAGE 130
R If the result of any test or inspection does not comply with the requirements of
the specification, the Contractor shall investigate the reason and carry out
remedial work to the approval of the Engineer at no cost to DMAT. The
pipeline shall then be re-tested. This process shall be repeated until the
requirements of the specification are satisfied.
21.3.3 Deflection Measurement of Pipelines

A. Deflection measurement of pipelines shall be carried out at the discretion of
the Engineer, but the Contractor shall be deemed to have included for
deflection testing in his rates.
B. Excavation for or laying of uPVC pipelines shall not proceed until an approved
op V1

gauging pipe deflections. Maintain devices for gauging pipe deflections in
good working order. Submit calibration certificates before every period of
C -
use. Use a regularly calibrated telescopic spring loaded graduated rod to
y
C
measure percentage deflections in each diameter. Provide a suitable
trolley to facilitate access into the pipe. Record all measurements.
C
C. The pipeline shall be inspected for deflection and orality immediately after
600 mm of the soil envelope has been placed to obtain a reference status.
The final deflection shall be taken 30 days after the backfill has been built up
Q
to final ground level. The Contractor is advised to check for deflection at all
times so that he may make corrections during the backfill construction phase.
D. When fully installed and completely backfilled to ground level the deflection
inclusive of any initial orality shall not be more than 5.0 % based on the base
outside diameter and measured 30 days after installation.
E. If the visual inspection or the deflection test indicates excess deflection, the
Contractor shall determine the exact cause of the deflection before proposing
a remedy.
i. Isolated areas of severe deflection may be the result of construction loads

being on the pipe before adequate cover has been placed. These areas
may be able to be re-rounded with special equipment without any
excavation. Long lengths of pipe with high deflection levels may be
indicative of overall installation deficiencies. The Contractor shall submit
proposals for corrective action in the event of unacceptable deflection or
upon indications of poor installation likely to cause future distress to the
pipeline.
ii. Depending on the severity, the material around the pipe may have to be
excavated and replaced with the recommended backfill and compacted.
Provided the pipe has not deflected to the point of reverse curvature, it
may be allowed to be returned to its original round shape before
acceptance.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 131
22. STEEL PIPES (SECTION 02670)

22.1.1 Scope
A. This specification defines the technical requirements for Stainless Steel Piping
materials such as pipes, fittings, flanges, gaskets, bolts, nuts, etc. This covers
Stainless Steel piping materials up to and including DN 65 mm (2 ½ " NB.
op V1
section.
C -
y
C
Section 01600 Material and Equipment
C
Section 9900 Painting and Corrosion Protection
Q

22.1.3 Standards
A. All materials and workmanship shall comply with the latest edition of the applicable
standards and codes which shall include but are not be limited to the following:
ASME B 31.3 Process Piping
ASME B 36.19 Stainless Steel Pipe
ASME B16.9 Factory Made, Wrought Steel Butt Welded Fittings
ASME B 16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Wildings and
Threaded
ASME B1.1 Unified Inch Screw Threads
ASTM A 312/A 312M Alloy Steel Seamless Pipes
ASTM A 403/A 403M Alloy Steel Fittings
ASTM A 182/A 182M Standard Specification for Forgings, Alloy Steel for
Piping Components
ASTM A193 Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for
High Temperature Service
ASTM A 194/A 194M Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High
Pressure and High Temperature Service
PAGE 132
BS 1092-1 Circular Flanges for Pipes, Valves and Fittings (PN

Designated. Specification for Steel Flanges
22.1.4 Submittals

Contract programme allowing for ordering and approval times. Reference
shall also be made to Section 01600 of the specification on products and
op V1
materials approval. Information to be submitted shall comprise but not
necessarily be limited to:

specification and test results of the proposed Steel pipes and fittings
C -
required for the Works including manufacturer’s certificates of
y
C
compliance with this section of the standard specification. Information
on all items listed below shall be given for every diameter in each class
of pipe.
C
manufacture from those proposed and approved by the Engineer,
submit for the Engineer's approval the revised details and test results.
Q
iii. Submit to the Engineer the results of all quality control tests carried out
on the manufactured pipes and fittings as soon as practicable after
testing as and in any case not later than the time of delivery of the
relevant pipes and fittings to the site.
 Detailed reference list to fulfill criteria for acceptance.
 Catalogues/Brochures.
 Cross section drawings with detailed parts list, as applicable.
 Detailed material specifications.
 Completely filled-in and stamped data sheet.
 Dimensioned general arrangement drawing, as applicable.
 Complete details of testing facilities at manufacturer’s works.
 Local (UAE agent name and address.

ii. Hydrostatic testing procedures for steel pipes.
PAGE 133
22.1.4.3 Drawings
of the specification. These shall comprise but not necessarily be limited to:
A Drawings of the pipes, fittings, joints, pipe specials and the assembly
thereof.
B Pipe laying diagram and schedule showing location, length, design

C All data on curve and bends for both horizontal and vertical alignment.
op V1
notify the Engineer in writing in sufficient time to allow the Engineer the opportunity
C -
y
to inspect and test the product and/or material prior to delivery in accordance with
C
Section 01400 of the specification.
B. B Products and materials shall be from a manufacturer/supplier who operates a

C
Q
C. To allow the Engineer to inspect the Works, the Contractor shall give the Engineer a
minimum of 24 hours’ notice of carrying out the following activities on site:

A. Delivery, storage and handling of products and materials shall be in accordance with
the manufacturer’s recommendations, Section 01600 of the specification and the
following provisions.
i. Delivery storage and handling shall at all times be performed in a

manner to avoid product damage and be in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Pipes shall be provided with
adequate cushioned support during all stages of handling, transport
and storage in order to prevent damage to the pipe.
ii. Pipes and fittings shall not come in contact with any sharp projections
that may cause damage to the pipes and fittings during transportation
loading and unloading. Ensure that pipes and fittings are well secured
during transit and adequately supported along their length. Do not
allow pipe to overhang the end of a vehicle during transportation.
iii. The flanges of pipes and fittings shall be protected by wooden discs
attached by means of service bolts or by other approved means.
Service bolts shall not be incorporated in the works.
iv. The Contractor shall visually inspect all products upon delivery to site
PAGE 134


22.2.1 Design Considerations
A. The wall thickness of the piping components shall be determined by the
Design Engineer considering the applicable design conditions with ASME
op V1
B 31.3 code.
B. Piping shall be capable to withstand satisfactorily all resultant forces
exerted by normal pressures and any surge pressures, which may arise
from sudden reversal of flow during starting up or shutting down of any
C -
portion of the system.
y
C
C. Material grades, wall thickness, branch connections, etc. shall be as per
applicable drawings. No corrosion allowance considered for stainless steel
pipes and fittings.
C
22.2.2 Pipes
Q
A. Pipes shall conform to ASTM A 312/A 312M TP 316 Seamless quality,

unless specifically mentioned otherwise.
B. All pipe sizes shall be designated as nominal pipe sizes (NPS) only. The
following range of nominal pipe sizes shall be used. Outside diameter of
pipe shall meet the requirements of ASME B 36.19.
Nominal Pipe Size
Metric (mm Equivalent to Inch

DN 15 ½
DN 20 ¾
DN 25 1
DN 40 1 ½
DN 50 2
DN 65 2 ½
22.2.3 Fittings
A. Fittings shall conform to ASME B16.9 and shall be seamless. Elbows with
butt welded ends shall be long radius type (radius equals 1.5 times the
nominal pipe size. Short radius elbows shall not be used. For diameters <
DN 40 forged 45°, 90° elbows shall be used.
B. Minimum branch connection size on the pipeline shall be DN 25. Smaller
sizes if required shall be reduced from DN 25.
C. Threaded fittings may be used where joints must be disconnected such as
plugs in vents, drains and clean outs connections to equipment and
instruments and for the first block valve downstream of instrument taps.
PAGE 135
Threaded joints on the pressure side of the first block valve shall be seal
welded.
D. Full length couplings with threaded or socket in one end only may be used
wherever necessary for vents and drains.
E. Material for elbows, reducers, and tees shall conform to ASTM A 182/A
182M Type 316. Wall thickness shall be same as the connecting pipe wall
thickness.
F. Material for threaded and socket welded fittings shall conform to ASTM A
182/A 182M Type 316 with a pressure rating of 3000 lbs.
G. Elbowlets shall not be used for branch connections, instrument taps or
vent and drain connections unless space considerations dictate. Drain and
op V1
vent connections shall not be installed in elbows.
H. Reducing tees and reducers shall be supplied with butt weld end with
schedules to match the pipe. The allowable size combinations are as
shown in ASME B16.9.
I.
C -
Branch connections shall be made from equal tees, reducing tees, integral
y
reinforced branch fittings as approved by Engineer. In case reducing tee of
C
required combinations is not available a combination of reducing tee and
reducer shall be used.
C
22.2.4 Flanges
Q
A. Flanges shall be welding neck raised face type and the dimensions
conforming to BS 1092 unless otherwise specified in the data sheet. The
rating of the flanges shall be as per the data sheet.
B. The gasket contact surface shall be formed by continuous spiral groove
with a surface roughness between Ra 6.3 and 12.5 μm.
22.2.5 Gaskets and Bolting

A. Material of gaskets shall be EPDM rubber, having 3mm thickness, suiting
flange dimensions of the applicable standards. The gasket shall extend
from the inside diameter of the flange to at least the inside edge of the bolt
holes or may laid beyond the bolt circle to the outside diameter of the
flange.
B. Bolts and nuts shall be stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 193 Gr B8 /
A 194/A 194M Gr 8 and have regular square and hexagonal dimensions.
Bolts and nuts shall be supplied with necessary washers.
C. Screw threads shall be UNC for 1 inch and smaller bolt diameters and 8-
UN for larger diameters, Class 2 fit, in accordance with ASME B1.1.

A The routine factory quality control tests listed below shall be carried out at
the required frequencies and records of all tests and inspections shall be
maintained by the manufacturer. The Engineer shall be provided with two
copies of all test certificates and reports.
i. Quality testing of all raw materials to ensure that they comply with the
relevant specification.
PAGE 136
ii. Visual inspection of the pipes to check general appearance,

dimensional compliance and any indication of inclusions or processing
flows in pipe barrels and joining ends.
iii. Production short-term tests to identify any variations in the plant
functioning.
B Contractor shall submit a detailed Inspection and Test Plan (ITP or Quality
Control Plan (QCP for approval showing manufacturing, inspection and
testing activities, its acceptance criteria prior to commencement of
manufacturing. All Certification shall be 3.1.B as per ISO 10474. The
radiography test and hydro test shall be witnessed by Engineer.
C The Contractor shall conduct quality checks at the manufacturer's premises
op V1
to ensure that the in-process manufacturing quality checks are being
conducted correctly and at the stated frequency. Test certificates relating to
the batch shall be furnished to the Engineer before acceptance of the
delivery. The test certificates shall contain all the details in the agreed
format of reporting.
C -
y
C
D The Contractor/Manufacturer shall make suitable provisions for testing and
inform Client/Engineer sufficiently (at least one month in advance to enable
their representatives to witness the test. If witnessing of any tests is not
C
satisfactory and a retest is required, the cost of the witnessed retest shall
there be borne by the Contractor.
Q
E Manufacturer shall ensure that all the applicable codes and standards
available at their works for Client/Engineer's reference during their visit to
manufacturer's works for shop inspection/test. The test and material
certificates for all the items shall be entered in the manufacturing data /
project record books. These shall include the witnessed tests, and the
documents shall be submitted to Client/Engineer prior to the dispatch of the
materials.
F Each pipe and fitting shall be indelibly marked over any factory applied
coating with the diameter, nominal pipe thickness, class, grade of steel,
length of pipe and works test pressure and shall in addition carry a unique
reference number to enable items to be correlated to works fabrication
records, works test certificates, delivery notes and the like. It shall be
marked with wall thickness and steel grade. Wherever possible, the marks
shall be painted on the outside of pipes and fittings close to one end.

A Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
i. Provide qualification details of the manufacturer's technical expert to

be assigned to the Contract. The technical expert shall have
expertise, experience and skills necessary for advising and monitoring
all aspects of transport, storage, handling, installation and testing of
pipes as appropriate.
PAGE 137
ii. The technical expert shall provide comprehensive technical

assistance to the Contractor throughout the Contract and regularly
monitor the Contractor's activities and report on shortcomings.
instructions advice or reports given by the manufacturer's technical
expert to him. The technical expert shall immediately inform the
Engineer and DMAT of any omission, variations and detractions from
the specification.
22.3.2 Hydrostatic Testing

A Proposed methods and program for testing, including details of test
op V1
equipment, shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. All tests shall
be witnessed by the Engineer or other person appointed by the Owner. All
equipment necessary for carrying out testing and cleaning including water,
pumps, gauges and calibration certificates, piped connections, stop ends
and all other temporary works shall be provided prior to commencement of
C -
testing.
y
C
B In addition to any tests of individual joints or other interim tests, which may
be specified elsewhere, submit all parts of the piping to a final test. Carry
C
out at any stage of construction other tests that the Engineer considers
desirable to check materials and workmanship on the piping. Ensure that
the obligations to perform successful tests under the Contract are achieved.
Q
C Use potable water for hydrostatic testing and pipeline cleaning. The
Contractor must make his own arrangement for the supply and disposal of
water used for testing which must be obtained from a source accepted by
the Engineer.
D The piping shall be tested in sections as the Engineer may direct or permit.
Each section shall be tested separately. Testing shall not be carried out
against closed valves.
E Use properly designed fittings for the purpose of temporarily closing the
openings in piping to be tested. Use fittings adequately strutted to withstand
F The piping shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to testing.
G Ensure that gauges used for testing pipelines have a dial diameter of not
less than 100mm and a full scale reading not greater than twice the
specified test pressure. Before any gauge is used, arrange for independent
laboratory to check the accuracy of the gauge. Provide a dated certificate of
its accuracy to the Engineer.
H Before pressure testing commences pipes and valves shall be rechecked

for cleanliness and the operation of all valves shall be rechecked. The open
ends of the piping, or sections thereof, shall be blanked off and additionally
secured where necessary by temporary struts and wedges. All anchor and
thrust blocks shall be completed and all pipe straps and other devices
intended to prevent the movement of pipes shall be in place.
PAGE 138
I During summer months all pressure testing shall be carried out when
ambient temperatures are at their lowest in order to avoid excessive
stresses on the pipe during testing.
J The fill and test position shall be located at the lowest point of the piping
profile to encourage the expulsion of air as the pipe is being filled.
Adequate air release mechanisms shall be sited at all high points. An air
bleed shall be incorporated as close to the crown of the pipe at the highest
point and at each end of the test section.
K The piping shall be filled taking all appropriate precautions to avoid air
entrapment as the presence of air could invalidate the test.
op V1
L Visually inspect all exposed pipe, fittings, valves and joints during the tests.
M Ensure that all valves in the pipeline are satisfactorily operating under
working pressure.
C - END OF SECTION
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 139
23. SUBSOIL DRAINAGE (SECTION 02722)

23.1.Part 1 General
A. This Section must be read in conjunction with related Sections.
op V1
Section 02205 Soil Materials
Section 02207
C - Aggregate Materials
y
Section 02222
C Excavation

C
Q
Section 02607 Chambers and covers
Section 02630 GRP pipes
Section 02660 uPVC pipes
Section 15115 Valves Penstocks Actuators
23.1.2 Standards
A. BS EN 1610 Construction and testing of drains and sewers
B. BS EN 13476 Plastic piping systems for non-pressure underground drainage and

sewerage – Structured-wall piping systems of unplasticised poly (vinyl chloride
(PVC-U), polypropylene (PP and polyethylene (PE.
23.1.3 Definitions
A. Envelope: Fill placed under, beside and directly over pipe, prior to subsequent
backfill operations, used to provide a permeable path for water to move into the
pipe openings from the base material and to hold the base material in place.

A Product Data: All data pertaining to pipe and pipe accessories’ manufacturer &
supplier, constituent materials, process of manufacture, properties, compliance
certificates, design calculations, etc. shall be provided.
B. Detailed shop drawings shall be submitted as per Section 01300, of the pipes,
joints, reinforcement cage assemblies, all pipe specials, together with the pipe
laying diagram and schedule showing the following:
PAGE 140
1. Full details of each pipe, fittings, joints and assembly, location, length, design
designation and designation by number.
2. Joint materials, gaskets and details.
3. Liner materials and details.
4. All data on curve and bends for both horizontal and vertical alignment.
5. All details relating to handling and storage of pipes.
6. All testing procedures and details, with diagrams, of deflection measurement
apparatus.
7. Procedures for building pipes into concrete structure.
8. Detail and location of existing utilities as determined by manual excavation.
op V1
A. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Special procedures required to install
C -
specified Products shall be indicated.
y
B.
C
Manufacturer's Certifications of compliance with standard specifications for all
pipe products shall be submitted.
C
A. Actual locations of pipe runs, connections, catch basins, cleanouts, and invert
Q
elevations shall be accurately recorded.
B. Unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities shall

be identified and described.

A. All details of shop testing, inspection of pipes and fittings including Quality Control
Plan with test regimes, test Standards, test frequency and a compliance
statement to the requirements of this Specification and Section 01400 shall be
provided.
B. Each type of pipe and fitting shall be furnished by a single manufacturer with
documented experience in the manufacture of the type of pipe specified.
A. The manufacture of the pipes & fittings and ancillary goods/materials shall be a
DMAT approved company.
23.1.9 Coordination
A. The Work shall be coordinated in accordance with other Sections

A. Products shall be delivered, stored, protected and handled to site under provisions
of Section 01600 and to the recommendations/requirements of the product
manufacturer.
PAGE 141

23.2.1 Pipe Materials
A. See relevant Section for Pipeline Materials
23.2.2 Drain Pipes

A. Drains pipes shall be corrugated structured-wall plastic pipes according to BS EN
13476.
B. The minimum ring stiffness of drain pipes (SN shall be 4kN/m2.
op V1
C. The minimum diameter of drain pipes shall be 100 mm.
D. The drain pipes shall be fully perforated in rectangular shapes around the pipes in
an angle of 60 degrees. The gap of perforations shall be 0.6 to 1.4 mm. The
space for water inlet shall be 20 cm2/m, as minimum.
C -
y
23.2.3
C
Gravel Envelope Materials
A. Envelopes shall be 100 mm thick around the pipe drain as minimum.
C
B. To determine whether a material is well graded, coefficients describing the slope
and the shape of the gradation curve are defined as follows:
D60
Coefficient of uniformity, Cu 
Q
D10
Coefficient of curvature, Cc 
D30 2
D10 D60 
Where D60, D30 and D10 are the respective diameters corresponding to
60%, 30%, and 10 % finer particles in the particle-size distribution curve.
C. The coefficient of uniformity shall be greater than 4 for gravels and greater than 6
for sands.
D. The coefficient of curvature shall be between 1 and 3 for both gravels and sands.
The following table shows the gradation relationship between the base material
and gravel envelope for most soils.
Table 23.2-1: Gradation relationship between the base material and gravel envelope
for most soils
5Base soil Lower limits (mm Upper limits (mm

limits for
Percentage passing Percentage passing
d60 (mm
100 60 30 10 5 0 100 60 30 10 5 0
0.020-0.050 9.52 2.0 0.81 0.33 0.3 0.074 38.1 10.0 8.7 2.5 - 0.59
0.050-0.100 9.52 3.0 1.07 0.38 0.3 0.074 38.1 12.0 10.0 3.0 - 0.59
0.100-0.250 9.52 4.0 1.30 0.40 0.3 0.074 38.1 15.0 13.1 3.8 - 0.59
0.250-1.000 9.52 5.0 1.45 0.42 0.3 0.074 38.1 20.0 17.3 5.0 - 0.59
PAGE 142
23.2.4 Geo-Textile Filter for Gravel Envelope

A Geo-textile shall be of woven or non-woven ultra violet stabilised polypropylene
fibre type.
B The geotextile shall have minimum properties as in the following table.
Table 23.2-2: Minimum Requirements for Geotextile
Physical Properties
Weight EN 965 140 g/m2
Thickness 2kPa EN 964-1 1.2 mm
op V1
Mechanical Properties
Static puncture EN/ISO 12236
(CBR-test) X 1500 N
Elongation
C - 50 %
y
Wide-width tensile test
C
(Strip-test, 200mM EN/ISO 10319
C
Longitudinal direction 8.0 kn/m
Transverse direction 9.0 kn/m
Q
Elongation at break 50 %
Dynamic perforation EN 918
Cone drop test 25.0 mm
Hydraulic Properties
Water permeability EN ISO 11058
Without load: Permittivity 2.9 sec-1
Water flow 145.0 l/sec/ m2
Water permeability PR DIN 60500-4
At 2 kpa Kdarcy 20.0 m/sec x10-4
Water flow 160.0 l/sec/ m2
Pore size d 90% EN/ISO 12956 85.0 micron
Minimum Wall Thickness: 5 mm
Coating: 120 µm thick u/v-resistant powder coating – finishing coat colour to
be as directed by Engineer.
Lettering: Minimum 80 mm high permanent fluorescent lettering indicating
service, pipe diameter, Department
A. Construction shall be as per BS EN 1610.
23.3.1 Examination
A. The condition of the pipes and fittings shall be verified and examined for damage
prior to laying.
PAGE 143
23.3.2 Preparation
A. Excavations shall be hand trimmed to required elevations. Over excavation shall
be corrected with fine or coarse aggregate or lean concrete as required by the
Engineer.
B. Large stones or other hard matter which could damage piping or impede
consistent backfilling or compaction shall be removed.
C. Dewatering arrangements shall be provided in areas of high ground water table to

ensure the excavation is kept free of water.
D. The Contractor shall ensure that the pipes and fittings are carefully cleaned
immediately before laying.
op V1
E. The Contractor shall ensure that the formation of excavations for pipelines are
firm, dry, even, true to grade, free of stones, and other protrusions and
compacted to a minimum of 90 per cent Proctor before placing of pipe bedding.
C -
y
23.3.3 Bedding
C
A. Pipe trench shall be excavated in accordance with Sections 02222 and 02225 for
work of this section. Excavation shall be hand trimmed for accurate placement of
C
pipe to elevations indicated.
B. Granular Material for Bedding of Pipelines. Refer to relevant Sections.

Q
C. Moisture content of bedding material shall be maintained at optimum to attain

required compaction density.
23.3.4 Installation –Pipes

A. Laying pipes: Refer to other Sections of Specification
23.3.5 Installation – Drain Pipes

A. Pipe, fittings, and accessories shall be installed in accordance with BS EN 1610
and manufacturer's instructions.
B. Pipe shall be laid to slope gradients noted on drawings with maximum variation
from true slope of the 10 % of the inside diameter of the drain pipe, and in no
case should the misalignment exceed 0.03 meter.
C. Pipe shall be laid to alignment with maximum variation from true alignment of the
20% of the inside diameter of the drain pipe.
D. Pipe shall not be displaced or damaged when compacting.
E. Colour marking tape shall be installed continuous over top of pipe, 300mm below
finish grade, above pipeline.
F. The Contractor shall ensure that the dewatering arrangement for the high ground
water table areas are properly connected and working at all time.
G. Generally pipes should be laid from downstream end to upstream end.
H. Each pipe shall be laid accurately to line and gradient. The Contractor shall
ensure that the finished pipeline is in a straight line both in horizontal and vertical
PAGE 144
planes. Satisfactory initial deflection test results shall be obtained prior to

commencement of pipe laying. Steel pins driven into the trench formation shall not
be used.
I. An approved independent laboratory shall be provided to carry out tests by sand

cone method to determine the in-situ density of the pipe bedding material as
instructed by the Engineer.
J. Where pipelines are to be constructed in the tunnel heading or duct provided by

the Contractor, a minimum clearance of 150mm between the inside face of the
tunnel heading or duct and the pipe shall be used, unless otherwise shown on the
Drawings.
K. A suitable method of controlling the alignment of a pipeline installed in a tunnel
op V1
heading or duct shall be adopted, to the approval of the Engineer.
L. When cutting pipe is required, the Contractor shall ensure that the cutting is done
by machine, leaving a smooth cut at right angles to the axis of the pipe.
C -
M. When installing pipes, the Contractor shall ensure that the rubber gasket is
y
C
inserted in the groove of the bell [spigot] end of the pipe, and the joint is cleaned
and lubricated. The spigot end of the pipe to be jointed shall be laid with socket.
Align and insert home in the bell end. A metal feeler shall be used to check the
C
rubber gasket is correctly located.
N. The Contractor shall ensure that all pipes and fittings are sound and clean before
Q
laying. When pipe laying is not in progress, the Contractor shall ensure that the
pipe end is closed at all times by watertight plug or other approved means.
23.3.6 Installing Pipes through Structures

A. The Contractor shall ensure that pipes and pipe specials through concrete walls
and floors are as far as possible located and built in during construction. The pipe
shall be located exactly in the positions and with puddle flanges as shown in the
Drawings. The Contractor shall ensure that the pipe is true to line and level and
that fully compacted concrete is in contact with the pipe at all points.
B. Where it is impracticable to cast pipes and specials in the concrete, box-outs shall
be formed in the shuttering. Boxes of six or eight sides, depending on the pipe
diameter, shall be formed. The sides of the box-outs shall be provided with a
tapered central annular recess to provide a positive key. The box-outs shall be
provided with a grout hole and, at the top of the central annular recess with a vent
hole. The box-outs shall be stripped from the main shuttering and thoroughly
clean and roughen the concrete surface.
C Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the pipes passing through a concrete
wall or structure shall be protected with a surround of concrete Class 'B' integral
with the external face(s) of the structure.
1. For pipes of less than 500 mm diameter, extend the surround from the wall
or structure by 300 mm, and extend the width and depth of the surround
beyond the outside face of the pipe at its horizontal and vertical diameters
by a minimum of 300 mm or as otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
2. For pipes of 500 mm diameter or greater, extend the surround from the
wall or structure by 500 mm, and extend the width and depth of the
PAGE 145
surround beyond the outside face of the pipe at its horizontal and vertical
diameters by 500 mm or as otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
D. On spigot and socket pipelines of GRP or other plastic materials the socket end of
the pipe passing through the wall shall protrude 300 mm from the concrete
surround. A protective synthetic rubber strip 6 mm thick and 150mm wide shall be
provided around the pipe at the limit of the concrete surround as shown on the
Drawings.
E. A short length of either spigot and socket or double spigot shall be used as the
first pipe that is clear of concrete surround beyond the external face of a concrete
wall or structure to suit the flow direction and pipe material. A short pipe with
length of 1.5 times the nominal internal diameter or 600 mm, whichever is the
greater, shall be used.
op V1
F. Any over excavation adjacent to a structure and beneath the formation level of a
pipe trench to be constructed shall be backfilled with concrete Class 'C' to the
formation level of the pipe trench, to make a connection to a plugged or capped
pipe laid. This concrete shall be extended to the limit of the over excavation along
C -
the line of the pipe trench and across the full width of the pipe trench shown on
y
C
the Drawings or the limit of the excavation whichever is least.
23.3.7 Construction of Thrust Blocks

C
A. Construct thrust blocks when required, to the design drawings and to other
Sections.
Q

A The pipes shall be inspected for proper elevation below ground surface, grade,
alignment, joint spacing, collapsing, broken or cracked pipe, and thickness of
gravel envelope before backfilling.
B. It shall be ensured that the pipe drains and all manholes (including existing
manholes used for outlets for new drains) are free of deposits of mud, sand,
gravel, or other foreign matter, and are in good working condition.
C. Before being accepted as completed, each drain pipe shall be tested for
obstructions. If a clean and unobstructed view of the complete bore of the pipe
cannot be obtained by use of a high-powered light, a test plug having a diameter
about 25 mm less than the drain pipe shall be drawn through the drain. When a
test plug is used, it should be rigid and tapered at both ends. The length of the
plug, excluding tapered ends, shall be twice the diameter of the pipe. The plug
shall be pulled by hand with a steady pull. A rope shall be tied to both ends of the
plug so that the plug can be backed out if necessary because of an obstruction.
The rope also serves as a means for determining the location of the plug and
obstruction if one is encountered.
D. Visual inspection of large diameter pipe is recommended when practical. If not

practical then other means of ensuring no crushed, broken, separated joints or
other obstructions exist shall be used.
E. Field inspection and testing of other works and equipment shall be done as per
requirements outlined in other Sections
PAGE 146
23.3.9 Protection
A. Protect finished Work under provisions of other Sections.
B. Protect pipe and aggregate cover from damage or displacement until backfilling
operation is in progress.
END OF SECTION
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 147
24. IRRIGATION SYSTEM (SECTION 02800)

24.1.Part 1 General
24.1.1 Scope
A. This section includes the execution and material used in irrigation system for
DMAT gardens and landscapes including piping, sprinkler heads, emitters,
bubblers, valves, controls, control wiring, fittings and necessary accessories in all
respects and in accordance with the project documentation.
op V1
Section 01400 - Quality Control

C -
y
C
Section 01600 - Material and equipment
Section 02222 - Excavation

C
Section 02223 - Backfilling
Section 02225 - Trenching

Q
Section 02607 - Chambers and covers
Section 02660 - uPVC Pipes
Section 03300 - Cast-in-place concrete
Section 15115 - Valves and actuators
Section 16111 - Conduit systems
24.1.3 Standards
A. The International Standards and codes of practice referred to in this specification
are listed below.
B. Reference shall make to the latest editions together with all current amendments
and additions thereto at the time of tender.
 ISO 161/1 Thermoplastics pipes for the transport of fluids – Nominal outside
diameters and nominal pressures – Part 1: Metric Series.
 ISO 3126 Plastic Pipes – Measurement of dimensions.
 ISO 3607 Polyethylene (PE pipes -- Tolerances on outside diameters and wall
thicknesses.
 ISO 4065 Thermoplastic pipes – Universal wall thickness table.
PAGE 148
 ISO 4427 Polyethylene (PE pipes for Water Supply.

 ISO 7749 Agricultural irrigation equipment -- Rotating sprinklers -- Part 1:
Design and operational requirements
 ISO 8026 Agricultural irrigation equipment -- Sprayers -- General
requirements and test methods
 ISO/TR 8059 Irrigation equipment -- Automatic irrigation systems -- Hydraulic
control
 ISO 9000 Quality management systems
 ISO 9261 Agricultural irrigation equipment -- Emitters and emitting pipe --
Specification and test methods
op V1
 ISO 9635-2 Agricultural irrigation equipment -- Irrigation valves -- Part 2:
Isolating valves
Check valves

C -
ISO 9635-4 Agricultural irrigation equipment -- Irrigation valves -- Part 4: Air
y
valves
C
Control valves
C
 ISO 9911 Agricultural irrigation equipment -- Manually operated small plastics
valves
Q
 ISO 9912-2 Agricultural irrigation equipment -- Filters -- Part 2: Strainer-type

filters
 ISO 9912-3 Agricultural irrigation equipment -- Filters -- Part 3: Automatic self-
cleaning strainer-type filters
 ISO 10522 Agricultural irrigation equipment -- Direct-acting pressure-
regulating valves
 ISO 11922-1 Thermoplastics pipes for the transport of fluids – Dimensions
and tolerances. Metric series.
 ISO 12162 Thermoplastics materials for pipes and fittings for pressure
applications pipes – Classification and designation – overall service (design
coefficient).
 ISO/FDIS16399 Meters for irrigation water

A. Products and materials shall be from a manufacturer/supplier that operates a
quality system that is registered to ISO 9000 series or approved equal.
B. The contractor shall allow the Engineer to inspect the Works the Contractor shall
give the Engineer a minimum of 24 hours notice of carrying out the activities on
site.
1. Hold and Witness points:

a) Monthly progress reports.
b) Visible deficiencies resulting from irrigation system performance
c) As Built drawings prior to PAC
PAGE 149
C. The contractor shall notify the Engineer 72 hours prior to the inspection of the
above. Such notification shall be given by a written inspection request (in a format
acceptable to the Engineer) each and every time various areas of the work are to
be carried out or covered up so as to prevent subsequent inspection.
D. These activities shall be identified as hold points in the Contractor’s programme

and inspection and test plans.
E. If the Contractor does not notify the Engineer in sufficient time to allow for his
inspection prior to covering up or complete installations governed by a hold point,
the Contractor shall remove all such materials / equipment as deemed necessary
by the Engineer to verify compliance of the work. Any delays, additional work or
additional costs attributed to the above shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
op V1
24.1.5 Additional Conditions
A. The Directorate may take any reasonable action necessary to control damage or
protect the health, safety, and welfare of the public in the event of problems
C -
involving the landscape. Such action on the part of the Directorate shall not relieve
y
C
the contractor of any responsibilities related to the problem.
B. No part of this work shall be performed or installed in any location or manner

which may endanger the health, safety, or welfare of the public now or in the
C
future. Means, methods, techniques, sequencing, etc. are the sole responsibility
of the contractor.
Q
C. The contractor agrees that he/she shall assume sole and complete responsibility
for his/her work, including safety of all persons and property; and that the
contractor shall defend, indemnify, and hold the Directorate harmless from any
and all liability, real or alleged, in connection with the contractor's performance of
work on this project, excepting for liability arising from the sole negligence of the
Directorate or its employees.
D. Any requirement of this specification which conflicts with or is in violation of any

government rule, ordinance, regulation, etc. shall be void. The contractor shall
notify the Directorate immediately of any such requirement found in this
specification.
E. The contractor shall, throughout the course of this work, comply with all rules,
ordinances, regulations, etc. set forth by agencies having jurisdiction, which apply
to the work site, the contractor, and/or his/her employees.
24.2.Part 2 New Installations

24.2.1 Scope
A. This section covers installation of new systems or components according to the
changes made in the landscape. The operation and maintenance contractor is not
necessarily the selected contractor (Contractor) for installing new systems.
24.2.2 Submittals
A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the following documentation, as per
Section 01300, for review and approval before commencing any new installation
or modifications:
PAGE 150
1. Existing Irrigation System.

a) The Contractor shall locate and identify the existing irrigation system,
electrical control and monitoring network, pumping stations and reservoirs
within and feeding the project area and shall submit them as ‘As Built’
drawings, as per Section 17110, for Engineer’s approval in a suitable
scale agreed with the Engineer. The Contractor shall then propose the
suitable take off points for new irrigation system if not nominated or
shown in the design drawing and the Engineer shall decide as to which
pipe etc. are to be retained, relocated, removed or abandoned.
2. Irrigation Demand Checking

a) After obtaining the final approved soft landscape modifications shop
op V1
drawing and plant list, the Contractor shall re-compute the water
requirement and budget, as per DMAT’s Irrigation Manual - Design
Manual, for each irrigation circuit valve and submit to Engineer for
approval.
b) Using updated data gathered the Contractor’s irrigation engineer shall
C -
prepare water application schedule coordinated with the pump station
y
C
available irrigation water, field satellite number, irrigation valve circuit
number, cubic meter per hour discharge per circuit valve, number of
hour/minute operation per circuit valve, and proposed time of operation for
C
each valves. The Contractor shall submit the schedules to the Engineer for
approval.
Q
3. Shop Drawings and Verification of Dimensions

a) The Contractor shall carefully check and verify all dimensions on the
proposed drawings and shall report all variations to the Engineer. Metric
units shall be used. Imperial units are not allowed.
b) All drawings shall be submitted for approval with supporting calculations
prior to starting the work on site.
c) Shop drawings shall be prepared to detail any installation not completely
detailed in the proposed modification drawings, or to detail any alterations
to the contract drawings and shall include, but not be limited to:
i. Civil works, mechanical pipe work and electrical

control equipment with circuit diagrams.
ii. Details of mainline, lateral pipes and other typical
connections.
iii. Details of typical connections.
iv. Wiring diagrams including conduits, pull boxes,
sizing and calculations to verify that cable sizing
is in accordance with valve manufacturer’s printed
recommendations wherever applicable.
v. Electrical power and control wiring diagram
system for irrigation controller, field wiring and
grounding.
vi. Details for drip line layout in shrub and ground
cover beds and showing interface with planting
layout.
d) The approval of modified shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of
any of his responsibility under the contract for a successful and timely
completion of the work.
PAGE 151
4. Additional Materials and Equipment Schedules

a) The Contractor shall submit all additional catalogue cuts, diagrams,
drawings, and such other data as may be required to demonstrate
compliance with the specifications.
b) All new and additional materials shall be as described in the specifications.
The Contractor shall submit material approvals for all the materials, which
are proposed to be used in the system, sufficiently in advance, to the
engineer, prior to their installation. Any material used, which is not
approved, shall be removed from the site and the Contractor shall replace
them at his own cost.
c) The Contractor shall submit certification of coefficient of Manufacturer’s
variation and emitter head-flow curve.
op V1
B. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the following documentation for
review and approval before obtaining completion certificates for the works.
C -
1. Recommendation of the Manufacturer
y
C
The Contractor shall submit any new manufacturers’ recommendation for
each material or procedure, including recommended spare parts to be
utilized, and all relevant operational data. The Contractor shall have a
C
copy of the manufacturers’ instructions available on-site at all times while
work is in progress, and shall follow these instructions unless otherwise
authorize to deviate by the Engineer.
Q
2. List of Spare Parts

The Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s listing of spare parts for
approval prior to commissioning any piece of equipment.
Recommendations shall include stocking recommendations; exploded
assembly diagrams illustrating location and spare parts to be utilized and
all relevant operational data.
3. Installations and Testing

The Contractor shall submit his proposed work method statement for
approval prior to commencing work. The statement shall detail proposed
sequence of work, hold points, testing frequency and document control.
4. Manufacturers’ Literature
As the Engineer has approved the list of materials, the Contractor shall
provide four (4) sets of manufacturer’s technical and maintenance
literature to the Engineer. Data sheets shall provide sufficient technical
information to identify each product and shall include the name and the
address of the nearest supplier and details of the local representative.
Preformatted Technical Data Sheet for all the approved irrigation items
are maintained by DMAT and maybe submitted for this purpose.
5. Modified As Built Drawings

The Contractor shall maintain one set of “As Built” drawings showing
modifications. All approved changes and all completed and approved
work shall be recorded on these drawings. The Contractor shall maintain
PAGE 152
these drawings on a daily basis and submit to the Engineer the modified
“As Built” set of drawings for approval with his monthly progress report.
6. Modified Operation and Maintenance Manuals

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer four sets (4) of the modified
operation and maintenance manuals for approval. The final content of the
manual shall be agreed with the Engineer but must include the following
as minimum:
a) Design basis of irrigation system.
b) A3 copies of As Built drawing.
c) Logic of operation of the systems.
d) Description of equipment:
op V1
i. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting
conditions
ii. Performance curves, data sheets, test reports, relevant
catalogues and warranties
C -
y
iii. Complete nomenclature, illustrations, assembly drawings,
C diagrams required for maintenance and commercial number of
replaceable parts
C
e) Operating Procedures:
i. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions
Q
ii. Regulation, control, stopping, shut down and emergency

instructions
iii. Summer and winter operating instructions
iv. Special operating instructions
f) Maintenance Procedures:
i. Routine operations
ii. Guide to trouble shooting
iii. Disassembly repairs and reassembles
iv. Alignment, adjusting and checking
g) Valve charts and Irrigation valve operation schedule c/w controller
station No., size, flows sequence of operation and operating time
h) Spare parts.
i. List of additional recommended spare parts
ii. Names, contact numbers and addresses of spare part
suppliers.
i) Bill of Quantities of Material used in the modification works.
Once approved the Contractor shall prepare and submit three (3) sets of fully book bound
manuals with original manufacturer’s technical catalogues, literature etc. and three (3)
sets of soft PDF copy on CD with scanned literature as necessary at final completion
handing over.
Note: Allow 15 working days for Engineer's review of drawings and manuals.
PAGE 153
7. As-built data
As-built spatial data shall be submitted in any of the formats stated in Section
17100 “GIS Standards for Utilities: Irrigation Network”. Additionally all the as-
built assets must have its Asset Form as per requirements of AIMS’ Asset
Manual. As-built drawings shall be submitted as stated in Section 17110
“CAD Standards”.
Note: Allow 15 working days for Engineer's review of drawings and manuals.

with Section 01600, the manufacturer's recommendations and the following
op V1
provisions:
1. Delivery, storage and handling shall at all times be performed in a manner to

2. Only nylon slings shall be allowed for lifting products.
C -
y
3.
C
Products shall be stored off the ground on timber blocks of sufficient size and
spacing to provide adequate support.
4. Products shall be stored at site in a temperature, humidity etc. environment
C
as recommended by the manufacturer.
5. Products that are stored outside at site shall be stored under cover to prevent
Q
ultra violet deterioration and as recommended by the manufacturer.

6. The Contractor shall inspect all products upon delivery to site and report any
damage to the Engineer.
7. Any products damaged during delivery, storage and handling shall be
8. Proposals for repair of any damaged products shall be submitted in writing to
the Engineer for approval.
9. Any damaged products deemed unsuitable for repair by the Engineer shall
be removed from site and replaced.
24.2.4 Warranty
A. All work included under this section shall be warranted by the Contractor against
all defects and malfunction of materials and workmanship for a period of one year
from the date of final acceptance of the irrigation system. Should problems arise
with the system during the warranty period the Contractor shall make all
necessary repairs and / or replacements in an expedient manner at no additional
cost to DMAT
24.2.5 Compliances
A. The Contractor shall comply with the DMAT’s Irrigation Manual, safety standards
and governing regulations for cleaning operations. He shall not burn waste
materials, bury debris or excess materials on site, discharge volatile or other
harmful dangerous materials into irrigation or drainage systems; He shall remove
waste materials from site on a day-to-day basis and dispose of in a lawful manner.
PAGE 154
24.3.Part 3 Material Specifications

24.3.1 General
A. All equipment, fittings and accessories shall be suitably rated to comply with the
system design and operating parameters. Whenever, materials are required to
comply with International Standards they shall be marked with acceptable
certification trade mark. For specifications of pipes and fittings, refer to the
relevant section(s).

A. uPVC Pipes and Fittings.
op V1
Refer to Section 02660.
B. Low Density Polyethylene (LDPE Pipes and Fittings
C -
Polyethylene pipe shall be manufactured from linear low-density polyethylene
y
incorporating a minimum of 2.8% carbon black, properly dispersed and
C
antioxidants in an amount not exceeding 0.5%. Working pressure shall be
minimum 0.4 MPa or more, as per ISO 4427.
C
A random sample of drip pipes shall be subjected to the Teepol crack resistance
test. The sample shall be immersed in a bath containing a solution of 10% Teepol
Q
and 90% water maintained at 50 °C. The pipe should resist the solution without
showing any fatigue or crack for a period of 150 hours.
Polyethylene pipes shall be legibly and durably marked with letters of minimum
height 3mm. The marking shall be reproduced at intervals of not more than 1m.
The following information shall be marked on the pipe:
1. The manufacturer’s name or registered trademark.
2. The type number and designation ‘PE’ in the form “PE 32” as appropriate.
3. The class of pipe in the form ‘PN 0.4’.
4. The nominal inside diameter and wall thickness.
5. Identification of place of manufacture. The manufacture’s code is
acceptable.
Polyethylene pipes shall be fixed intact to the ground using heat resistant stakes
at every 10 m and an automatic end flush valve shall be installed at the end of the
line. When polyethylene pipe is laid continuously in a loop there should be two
stakes at the corners in order to keep the pipe fixed intact to the ground.
The maximum length of the pipe to one side shall be based on manufacturers’
recommendation
All fittings for drip lines shall be insert type manufactured from black
Polypropylene and all fittings should be secured by plastic ratchet clips.
The pipe for sprayers and quick coupling valve connections shall be as per
ISO 4427 with minimum 1.0 MPa nominal pressure rating.
PAGE 155
The fittings for the above pipes should be compression quick joint type with
minimum 1.0 MPa nominal pressure rating.
24.3.3 Detectable Underground Warning Tape

A. Marking tape shall be laminated polyethylene and aluminium foil construction
capable of detection by low output generator equipment. Tapes shall remain
legible and colour fast in soil conditions at pH values of 2.5 to 11.0 inclusive. The
tapes shall be of the type specially manufactured for making and locating
underground utilities.
B. The tape shall be not less than 150mm wide and shall have the phrase “CAUTION
– IRRIGATION PIPELINE AND CONTROL CABLES” in English and Arabic
stamped in black letters and repeated at maximum intervals of two meters. Tape
op V1
shall be terminated inside valve boxes to allow clipping of detector equipment to
the tape. The tape shall be laid 300mm above pipeline.
24.3.4 Thrust Blocks

A.
C -
Thrust blocks shall be provided to anchor all mechanically jointed pipes. Heavy-
y
C
duty polyethylene sheet shall be used to wrap the pipe at the point off contact
between pipeline fittings and thrust block.
C
B. Where manifolds and laterals pass under roads or paved areas and through
foundations and walls shall be in ducts.
Q
C. Construct a thrust block at every bend and junction on pressure pipelines of

concrete Class 'B' to the dimensions shown on the Drawings or ordered by the
Engineer.
D. Ensure that the thrust block has been tanked before additional excavation is made
to obtain a firm thrust face against undisturbed ground. Place the concrete backfill
to the excavation the same day as the additional excavation is carried out.
E. No pressure is to be applied to thrust blocks until the concrete has matured in

accordance with Section 03300 Cast-in-place concrete (Loading of structures).
F. Where individual non-end resistant fittings are used, or when connections are
made to non-end-load resistant pipe systems, local anchor blocks must be
provided as described above.
G. Where manifolds and laterals pass under roads or paved areas and through
foundations and walls they shall be placed in ducts.
24.3.5 Valves and Accessories

A. Isolation Gate Valves
Isolation valves shall comply with ISO 9635-2. All isolation gate valves shall be
ductile iron with flange end connection to PN16. For additional specifications refer
to Section 15115.
B. Quick Coupling Valve and Fittings.
The valves shall provide plug-in type, underground water outlets for the temporary
connection of hosepipes. Connection and operation shall be by means of special
coupler keys inserted into the valve throat. The valves and key are to be of the
PAGE 156
same manufacturer to ensure compatibility of the connection. Valve construction

shall be red brass or bronze with a self-closing protective cover. The valve shall
be a single piece design with single slot and stainless steel spring. The valve
should have locking mechanism to vandal resistance. The valve shall have a
maximum of 0.5 bar pressure loss at the rate of 3.2 L/s.
The internal part shall be removable for service. The keys shall be brass with
machined shanks for a positive seal. Valves shall have 25 mm female pipe
threaded connection and keys shall have 25 mm male connection. The valve and
key shall be 25 mm bore with no size reduction.
Swivel hose ELLs shall be of red brass or bronze construction used to connect to
quick coupler keys so that hose can be turned a full 360 degree without breaking
op V1
hose near the coupler key. The hose ELLS shall have a female pipe thread of
25 mm and a male thread of 25 mm.
C. Check Valve
C -
Check valves shall comply with ISO 9635-3.
y
C
Check valves three inches (3") and above shall be double flanged single door
swing type having ductile iron body and gunmetal seat. Pressure rating shall be
C
PN 16 or more.
Check valves of two inches (2") and smaller shall be spring type manufactured
Q
from Brass or Bronze. Inlet and outlet shall be BSP female threaded. The spring
shall be of stainless steel. Pressure rating shall be PN16 or more.
For additional specifications refer to Section 15115.
D. Air Valve
Air valves shall comply with ISO 9635-4.
Air valve shall be of the double orifice type, rated a minimum working pressure of
16 bar. The air valve shall be for the following functions:
• Large volume of air release on pipeline filling.

• Vacuum relief in the event of pipe drainage.
• Air release under pressure when the pipe is operational
Pressure rating of the valve shall be PN16. The internal components shall be
stainless steel. For additional specifications refer to Section 15115.
E. Pressure Reducing Control Valve
Pressure reducing control valves shall comply with ISO 9635-5. Direct acting
pressure regulating valves shall comply with ISO 10522.
The pressure reducing control valve shall be of the hydraulic type with 2-way or 3-
way pressure reducing pilot model. The valve shall be diaphragm-operated,
designed to automatically reduce a fluctuating higher upstream (inlet) pressure to
a constant lower downstream (outlet) pressure. The regulation action of the valve
shall be controlled by an externally mounted pressure reducing pilot designed to
open when downstream pressure is below its adjustable set point, and close when
PAGE 157
downstream pressure is above its adjustable set point. The valve shall have a
minimum pressure rating of 16 bars. The only moving parts inside the valve shall
be the diaphragm used as the direct sealing surface and the spring. The valve
shall be fully serviceable in place without removal from the line.
F. Pressure Sustaining Valve
Pressure sustaining valves shall comply with ISO 9635-5. Direct acting pressure
regulating valves shall comply with ISO 10522.
Pressure sustaining valve shall be installed to regulate the pressure. Valve shall
op V1
open and close in modulating action as required maintaining constant system
pressure. On pressure reversal valve shall close tightly. Operation shall be
completely automatic with only one adjustment required to change the pressure
setting. Adjustable pressure shall range from 1 to 8.5 bar.
C -
y
C
G. Pressure Relief Valve
C
Pressure relief valves shall comply with ISO 9635-5
Pressure relief valve shall be installed to release excess pressure away from the
Q
system. The valve shall be flanged, diaphragm type, hydraulically operated, pilot
controlled and modulating type. The valve shall be fast opening and slow closing.

H. Electric Remote Control Solenoid Valve Complete With Pressure Regulating
Module.
a) The valve body and bonnet shall be constructed of heavy duty glass
reinforced nylon body and internal parts shall be stainless steel diaphragm
made of nylon reinforced nitrile rubber and provide for a positive seal
between bonnet and body. Solenoid coils shall be encapsulated in mounded
epoxy.
b) Valves shall be normally closed diaphragm type with slow opening and
closing action for protection against surge pressure. Actuation shall be by
encapsulated type solenoids rated at 24 volts, 50 cycles, and 2.0 watts
unless otherwise specified. Maximum pressure rating shall be not less than
16 bar inlet/outlet, solenoid plunger shall in co-operate with self-flushing type
stainless or internal filter.
c) There shall be provision for manual open/close and flow control stem with
cross handle for regulating the flow. All valves shall be provided with a
pressure regulator to regulate the pressure between 1 to 7 bars (within an
accuracy of ± 0.35 bar regardless of upstream pressure. It shall provide full
and accurate pressure capabilities irrespective of whether it is operated
electrically or manually. The pressure measurement shall be possible via
Schrader valve or integral pressure gauge. The pressure regulator shall be
with a calibrated dial for setting the outlet pressure.
PAGE 158
d) The valve shall be capable for pressure regulating electrical and manual
mode operation using external and internal bleeds. Valve shall be suited for
dirty or treated sewage effluent water.
e) The valves shall be inline or angle configuration as per the requirements.

The valve construction shall be such as to provide for all internal parts to be
removable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation.
f) Only mounded PVC-u/Brass fittings shall be used with solenoid valve

assemblies.
i. Underground Cables
All electric wires for underground use shall be single core solid "Underground
op V1
Feeder" type insulated with flame retardant thermoplastic compound rated for
600 volts and suitable for direct burial. The contractor shall prepare a wire-
sizing chart with effective lengths of each station and common wires, which
shall be submitted for approval prior to commencement of the works.
C -
y
Cable markers shall be used for indicating valve numbers for each cable at
C
both ends as well as at splices. Cables shall be laid in PVC conduits in Main
Line trenches. Power and signal cables shall be laid in separate conduits.
C
Separate wire shall be laid for each solenoid valve and one spare cable shall
be provided for every five cables.
Q
Size of the cable depends on the distance between the Irrigation Controller
Unit and the solenoid valve and according with MANUFACTURERS
recommendation.
Irrigation control cables shall be color coded as follows:
Common wire - Black

Drip valve wire - Green
Bubbler valve wire - Blue
Spray valve wire - Red
Sprinkler valve wire - Orange
Spare wire - White
Sizes of the conduits should be as per Section 16111.
ii. Wire Connectors

All wire connections at electric control valves and all splices of wire in the field
shall be made using wire connectors. The wire connectors shall be specially
designed to ensure waterproof underground wire connectors. The connector
shall consist of precision mounded PVC base socket, mounded sealing plug,
wire crimping sleeve and shall be easily installed in the field to give a
permanent water-proof joint by using sealer for joint make up. All wire
connections to be arranged in plastic pull boxes.
iii. Pull boxes

Pull boxes shall be provided as detailed in the installation drawing at every
100 meter, every change in direction of conduit piping and near to solenoid
valves. Each electric remote valve should have a separate pull box beside the
PAGE 159
valve box. In any case spacing between adjacent pull boxes in a line shall not
exceed 50 meters
I. Pressure gauges
Pressure gauges shall be installed at the suction and at the discharge side of the
pumps, at strainer in- and outlet, and at other places where pressure
control/reading is necessary for proper plant control. The gauges shall be
provided with a pressure gauge cock with "T" passage to allow pressure vent and
pressure reading. The dials shall be concentric 150 mm diameter and graduated
in [bar]. Gauge graduation shall be such that the gauge is not used continuously
beyond 70 % of the maximum graduation. The gauges shall be sealed from the
sewage by means of a diaphragm or capsule and shall be filled with silicon oil or
op V1
similar and approved. All gauges shall be calibrated and a test certificate of an
independent institute for each individual gauge shall be provided by the
Contractor.
Pressure gauges for filtration shall be stainless steel, direct reading, Glycerin filled
C - 2 2
capable of 0-10 kg/cm register with 0.25 kg/cm graduations. Gauge shall be of
y
C
glass or Plexiglas faced drip-proof and minimum diameter of 50 mm. Gauge cock
shall be of same size as pressure gauge and be fabricated from stainless steel.
C
J. Line End Auto Flush Valve
The line flushing valve shall be constructed of brown molded plastic and shall be a
Q
normally open hydraulic valve which flushes based on volumetric quantities of

water. The connection of the valve shall be of one of the following configurations:
 ½” MPT, or
 Barbed insert fitting with collar.
The line flushing valve shall be serviceable by removing a threaded cover from a
base, exposing the internal components. The internal components of the line
flushing valve shall consist of:
 A molded diaphragm retainer,

 A high density plastic flush regulator, and
 A diaphragm 2” in diameter.
The line flushing valve shall be capable of automatically operating during initial
system pressure build-up to discharge approximately 5 liters of water. One line
3
flushing valve shall be used for each 5 m /h of zone flow, and be able to operate
2 2
at 4 kg/cm maximum, or 0.1 kg/cm minimum pressure at line ends.
K. Flush Valve Assembly
The Contractor shall install where required and as shown on the drawings,
flushing points consisting of gate valve, valve box, valve supports, gravel bed, 1.5
meters of polyethylene pipe coiled inside the valve box.
24.3.6 Valve Chambers and Valve Boxes

A. Valve Chambers
The isolation valve chambers shall be RCC chambers or as specified on the
PAGE 160
drawings. Contractor should submit shop drawings as per site conditions for
approvals.
The valve chamber covers shall be ductile iron medium duty and epoxy coated.
The word of “IRRIGATION” in English and Arabic should be casted on the covers.
Valve chamber with depth more than 1.5m shall be provided with heavy duty GRP
ladder 400 mm wide.
B. Valve Boxes
Solenoid valves, isolating valves, flush valves and quick couplers shall be installed
in an access box of sufficient size to permit ready removal of the valve inner
op V1
assemblies without removing the box from the ground. Valve numbers and station
numbers must be clearly marked inside and outside of the box with permanent
paint or by using plastic tags.
C -
Valve boxes shall be composite service boxes constructed of high strength
y
cellular foam ABS or HDPE plastic. The valve boxes should have additional
C
ribbing to strength the chamber & to counteract the side loading pressures. The
valve boxes shall be green color and should have Ultra Violet resistance property.
C
The valve boxes shall conform to the following ASTM standards
Q
Table 24.3-1: Valve Boxes - ASTM standards
Properties ASTM Test Method Value –HDPE Value – ABS
Tensile strength D-638 504 to 385 bar 546 to 441 bar
Plexular Modulus D-790 1050 to 1470 bar 1750 to 2450 bar
Notched Izod D-256 0.5 to 20 ft lbs/in 0.5 to 7.5 ft lbs/in
Impact strength
Deflection D-648 140 to 170°F 210 to 225°F
Temperature
The valve box covers shall be labelled in Arabic and English.
The valve box covers shall be lockable or bolt down as directed by the Engineer.
 Valve boxes shall be with following dimensions (Top External Dimension:
 Quick coupler 50 mm dia and below – 254 mm dia round green color box
with minimum depth 254 mm. Weight minimum 1.4 kg
 Solenoid valves 40 mm dia and below – 305 x 430 x 305 mm deep

rectangular green color box. Weight minimum 3.5 kg.
PAGE 161
 Solenoid valves 50 and 75 mm dia, Air valve, isolating valve 100 mm dia
and below –381 x 635 x 381 mm deep rectangular green color box.
Weight minimum 11.30 kg
 For drip solenoid valve assembly with Y strainer – 812.8 x 482.6 x 304.8
mm deep rectangular green color box. Weight minimum 14.50 kg.
 For pull boxes – 254 mm dia round green color box with minimum depth
254 mm. Weight minimum 1.4 kg
Valve identification tags shall be made of brass or aluminum and a minimum of 75

mm x 50 mm. They shall be stamped with the valve function number size. The
valve shall be similarly identified on the “as installed” drawings. Valve boxes to
op V1
have a 2-year warranty confirmed by the manufacturer.
24.3.7 Bubbler
A. Pressure Compensating Bubbler
C -
y
The bubbler shall be a pressure compensating type capable of providing a
C
consistent discharge rate at 2 to 5 bar pressure.
C
Bubblers shall be constructed from UL stabilized engineering grade plastic.
The bubbler assembly shall have a plastic inlet screen to protect the nozzle
Q
against clogging.
B. Adjustable Flow Bubbler
The bubbler body and screen shall be constructed of plastic. The adjusting screw
shall be of stainless steel. The bubbler shall have a 15/21 female threaded inlet.
All performance data tests shall be conform to ASAE S 398.1 standard
procedures. The bubbler shall have an inlet screen to protect nozzle against
clogging, and adjusting screw, capable of shutting off the bubbler and regulating
the flow.
C. Bubbler Stake
Stakes for bubblers shall be constructed from strong temperature resistant

Polypropylene plastic construction with protective stop collar and length shall be
300 mm. Double barb inlet shall accept 13mm ID polyethylene tubing and ensure
a firm connection. Outlet for bubbler shall be ½” external male thread.
D. Bubbler Riser
Riser for Bubbler shall be constructed from UV resistant thermoplastic materials

for long life. It shall be one piece, black design with no extra fittings or adapters. It
should be able to withstand pressure up to 5.5 bar and temperature up to 65 deg
C.
a) Bubbler Pop-Up Bodies
i. The body and stem shall be constructed of high impact, corrosion

resistant ABS.
PAGE 162
ii. The pop-up body shall have co-mounded (or) separated wiper seal in the
top cover constructed from EPR rubber in polypropylene base for
cleaning debris from pop-up stem as it retracts into case to prevent from
sticking up. Full sealing around the pop-up stem shall occur at 0.6 bar.
The wiper seal form an integral part of the cap and shall not be
detachable.
iii. The riser shall have a strong stainless steel retracts spring for positive
pop down. Pop-up height shall be not less than 10.2 or 30.5 cm as
required. The sprinkler shall have a screen under the nozzle to protect it
from clogging and for any removal of cleaning and flushing system. The
sprinkler shall have 15/21 threaded inlet. The sprinkler shall have a built
in check valve to prevent low head drainage. If the elevation is above 3.0
op V1
m, use check valve. The pop-up shall have a ratcheting mechanism and a
full flow inlet unit.
24.3.8 Drippers
A.
C -
Drippers shall comply with ISO 9261.
y
B.
C
Single Outlet Turbulent Dripper
i. Emitter shall be the single outlet fully turbulent type with an emitter exponent
C
of 0.5. The flow rates available shall be in the range of 2 to 24 lph at 1 bar of
pressure. The emitter shall give a constant flow rate for temperature up to
60°C.
Q
ii. The complete unit must be resistant to standard agricultural

chemical/fertilizers and withstand UAE environmental conditions. The
labyrinth shall give the emitters large path. The emitter shall have built in
filtration system in the inlet barb.
iii. The emitter shall have a barbed inlet and nipple outlet to accept 4mm
micro tube. The outlet shall have a baffle to deter insect entry.
iv. The coefficient of manufacturing variation shall be less than 0.03.
v. All emitters shall be stamped with the manufacturer name, product type
and flow rate.
C. Single Outlet Pressure Compensating Dripper
i. Emitter shall be the single outlet fully pressure compensating type

capable of providing constant discharge over the pressure range from 1.0
to 3 bar. The flow rates available shall be in the range of 2 to 24 lph. The
emitter shall give a constant flow rate for temperature up to 60°C.
ii. Each emitter shall have “dual flow regulations” utilizing both turbulent flow
labyrinth and EPDM or mounded silicone diaphragm. The complete unit
must be resistant to standard agricultural chemical/fertilizers and
withstand UAE environmental conditions. The labyrinth shall give the
emitters large path and works at pressure below 0.35 bar. So no emission
spikes occur at low pressures.
PAGE 163
iii. The diaphragm shall free floating and controls the emission flow rate from
1 to 3 bars. The emitter shall be continuously self-cleaning. The emitter
shall have built in filtration system in the inlet barb.
iv. The emitter shall have a barbed inlet and nipple outlet to accept 4mm
micro tube. The outlet shall have a baffle to deter insect entry.
v. The coefficient of manufacturing variation shall be less than 0.05.
vi. All emitters shall be stamped with the manufacturer name, product type
and flow rate.
vii. An alternative to the above dripper is a drip emitter involving a micro-
op V1
flapping device. Range of Operating pressure: 1 - 3 bars. The emitter
material shall be U.V. protected Polyethylene body. The micro-flapping
device shall be made of elastomer (mounded silicone flow diaphragm.
D. Pressure Compensating Dripper Line (In-Line

C -
y
C
i. The dripper line shall consists of linear low-density polyethylene (LLDPE
tubing with pressure compensating emitters welded to the inside surface at
selected intervals. The pressure compensating emitter shall consist of “dual
C
regulation” utilizing both turbulent flow labyrinth and EPDM or mounded
silicone diaphragm. Alternatively it can involve a micro-flapping mechanism
made of elastomer (mounded silicone. The dripper shall be continuously
Q
self-cleaning and should have an inlet filter capable of being cleaned by

flushing the line. Pressure compensation shall be between 1 to 3 bars. The
coefficient of manufacturing variation must be less than 0.05 as determined
by an independent organization.
ii. The dripper line must be guaranteed against solar damage for 7 years. The
dripper line shall be able to be installed with the dripper in any orientation.
Temperature up to 60°C shall not affect the dripper flow rate. The dripper
shall have a large “water path” outlet that acts as a mechanical barrier to
root intrusion.
iii. The drip line shall have an inside diameter of 13.6 mm ± 3 % and in dripper
flow rates of 2 or 4 lph as agreed with the Engineer. Pressure compensating
dripper line spacing shall be 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70 or 100 cm. Minimum 7
years continuous testing in sub-surface application by an independent
organization is required, when applicable.
iv. Pipes shall be fixed intact to the ground using heat resistant stakes at every
10 meters and an automatic flush system shall be installed at the end of the
line.
v. The maximum length of the pipe to one side shall be based on

manufacturers’ recommendation
24.3.9 Sprinklers
A. Sprinklers shall comply with ISO 7749 and ISO 8026.
B. Spray Head Pop Up Sprinkler
PAGE 164
i. The sprinkler body, stem, nozzle and screen shall be constructed of high
impact, corrosion resistant heavy duty plastic.
ii. The sprinkler shall have co-mounded (or) separated wiper seal in the top
cover constructed from EPR rubber in polypropylene base for cleaning
debris from pop-up stem as it retracts into case to prevent sprinkler from
sticking up. Full sealing around the pop-up stem shall occur at 0.6 bar. The
wiper seal form an integral part of the cap and shall not be detachable. The
sprinkler shall have a matched precipitation rate (MPR) plastic adjustable arc
nozzle with an adjusting screw capable of regulating the radius and flow.
Nozzles shall be removable to allow for pattern change and easy
maintenance.
op V1
iii. The sprinkler shall have a strong stainless steel retracts spring for positive
pop down. The sprinkler shall have a screen under the nozzle to protect it
from clogging and for any removal of cleaning and flushing system.
iv. The sprinkler shall have a ratcheting mechanism and a full flow inlet unit shall
C -
come complete with a flush plug and nozzle.
y
C.
C
Matched Precipitation (MP Rotator
C
i. The pop up rotator shall produce and maintain a matched precipitation not
greater than 15mm per hour throughout the arc and radius adjustment range
and it shall be of viscous fluid brake rotary type and produce multiple
Q
streams.
ii. Part circle rotator shall have arc adjustment capabilities. The adjustment
should be effective only while the sprinkler is popped up and should be
ineffective while the sprinkler is popped down. When turned past the
minimum or maximum arc limits the adjustment mechanism shall have a slip
clutch action to prevent internal damage.
iii. The pop up rotator shall have a pop up that occurs approximately 1 bar of
water pressure. Upon cessation of water pressure, the sprinkler shall pop
down.
iv. The pop up rotator shall be fitted with detachable filter stem and nozzle orifice
shall be manufactured from urethane for durability
D. Pop-Up Sprinkler
i. The sprinkler shall be of the gear driven rotary type and shall include a set of
five (5) interchangeable nozzles and be available interchangeable nozzles
discharging from 0.08 to 0.25 L/site sprinkler shall be available in an
adjustable part circle configuration.
ii. The sprinkler shall be available in both full circle and adjustable part circle
configurations. The adjustments part circle unit shall be minutely adjustable
from 40° to 360°. The adjustable unit shall be adjustable in all phases of
installation. (I.e. before installation, after installation while static, and after
installation while in operation.
iii. The pop-up sprinkler shall have a built in check valve to prevent low head
drainage, and be capable of checking up to 2 m of elevation change.
PAGE 165
iv. The sprinkler shall be serviceable after installation by unscrewing the body
cap, removing the riser assembly, and extracting the inlet filter screen.
v. The body and the riser of the sprinkler shall be constructed of non-corrosive,
heavy duty plastic. The sprinkler shall carry a two-year warranty.
E. Heavy Duty Gear Driven Sprinkler
i. The sprinklers shall be of the rotary type gear-driven. The sprinklers shall be
available with eight (8) standard nozzles discharging from 0.06 to 0.52 L/s or
four (4) low angle discharging from 0.1 to 0.30 L/s. The sprinkler shall have
radius adjustment screw. The sprinkler shall have a provision to enable the
op V1
user to stop the water flow through an individual sprinkler head.
ii. The sprinkler shall be available in both full circle and adjustable part circle
configurations. The adjustments part circle unit shall be minutely adjustable
from 40° to 360°. The adjustable unit shall be adjustable in all phases of
C -
installation. (I.e. before installation, after installation while static, and after
y
C
installation while in operation.
iii. The sprinkler shall have a 10.2 cm pop-up stroke to bring the rotating nozzle
C
turret into a clean environment. The sprinkler shall have a rubber firmly
attached to the top of the sprinkler riser. When specified the sprinkler shall
have a cover mounded of purple Acryl rubber to indicate the use of
Q
reclaimed water.
iv. The sprinkler shall be serviceable after installation in the field by unscrewing
the body cap, removing the riser assembly, and extracting the inlet filter
screen.
v. The body and the riser of the sprinkler shall be constructed of non-corrosive,
heavy duty plastic and nozzle-turret assembly shall be encased in stainless
steel. The sprinkler shall carry a five-year exchange warranty (not prorated.
F. Big Gun Sprinkler
i. The big gun sprinkler shall be constructed from non-corrosive materials and
easy hand adjustable stops for precise arc control. The Big Gun sprinkler
drive shall incorporate a pressure and flow compensating drive spoon. A
spreader nozzle for close in watch coverage shall also be incorporated as
part of the drive arm unit. All the ball bearing shall be greased and sealed
type.
ii. The Big Gun sprinkler shall be available with a fixed bore nozzle with female
threaded body cap (or) an optional ring nozzle incorporating nozzle body
and d seven interchangeable flow ring discs. The Big Gun sprinkler
discharge shall be 20 - 25° trajectory.
iii. The Big Gun Sprinkler shall incorporate a key mechanism bolted to the base
of the sprinkler, which shall be compatible for fitment to a mating quick
coupling valve key. There shall be multiple size interchangeable nozzle
choices and the nozzles shall be selected to match the required precipitation
rates.
PAGE 166
Operating pressure : 3.0 to 7.0 kg/cm²

Discharge : 45.0 to 70.0 m³/hr.
Radius of throw ; 28.0 to 58.0 meter
iv. The ‘quick coupling valve’ shall be of heavy-duty cast iron body construction
with stainless steel and brass internal components. The quick coupling valve
shall have a 3” female BSP inlet and spring loaded diaphragm outlet
compatible for use with bayonet type base connection on a mating quick
coupling valve key attachment, which shall form part of the Big Gun
sprinkler.
24.3.10 Filters
op V1
A. Automatic Self-cleaning Screen Filter
Automatic Self-cleaning Screen filters shall comply with ISO 9912 – Part 3.
Automatic self-cleaning screen filter shall be provided at the pump head. Cleaning
shall be effected by hydraulically powered suction scanner automatically activated
C -
when the pressure across the filter reaches 0.5 bar.
y
i.
C
Automatic self-cleaning filter shall be specifically suitable for use with
organic contaminants. The maximum velocity through the net screen area
(excluding sieve wire area shall be 0.3 m/s. In any case the maximum
C
velocity through the total screen area (including sieve wire area shall be
0.9 m/s. The filter body and internal parts including flanges shall be
Q
stainless steel. Flushing line shall be connected to the nearest surface

water drainage. If it is not possible, connection has to be made to a soak
pit.
ii. Capacity of the filter shall be 1.5 times the system capacity at 0.2 bar
maximum pressure loss. The control system shall feature a fail-safe timer
to prevent continuous flushing due to malfunction. Filter should not flush
when the irrigation system or pumps are not working.
iii. Primary stage filtration shall be performed by a one piece perforated PVC
coarse screen. Secondary stage filtration shall be provided by a stainless
steel grade 316 screen with 65 – 140 micron mesh size, according to the
requirements of the emitters downstream. Only flat screens are allowed.
iv. Filter shall be equipped with electrical control system contained in a Nema
4X enclosure, which shall regulate the filter rinse cycles and prevent the
filter from engaging in a continuous rinse. The control system shall be
microprocessor based and shall be suitable for control of up to ten (10)
filters. The system shall provide for rinse cycle activation by one of four
options: differential pressure, timer external signal or manually, and shall
include an integral rinse cycle counter which shall record the rinse cycles
activated by each method. The system shall include local alarm and
remote contacts to indicate filter malfunction.
v. Filter shall have flush valve actuator of a heavy duty construction threaded
into a brass valve body.
vi. The filter shall clean itself automatically at 2.5 bars without the need for an
external energy source.
vii. The filter shall provide uninterrupted flow and also provide filtration during
the flushing cycle.
PAGE 167
viii. Fine screen elements shall be easily replaceable without requiring any
changes to be made in the construction of the elements of the cleaning
system or the need to remove the filter from the pipeline.
ix. Installation shall be possible in any desired position (horizontal, up-side
down, vertical or inclined.
x. Filter shall have isolation valves in the suction as well on delivery side for
easy maintenance. The controller for the filters shall be equipped with
timer and pressure differential control unit.
xi. Pressure gauges shall be connected to suction and delivery side of each
filter.
B. Basket strainer
op V1
Basket strainers shall comply with ISO 9912 – Part 2.
The basket strainer shall be ductile iron with bolted cover, inlet and outlet to be
flanged and drilled to PN 16. The strainer shall be stainless steel with 1/8 inch
C -
y
perforations. Working pressure should be minimum 10 bar. The basket strainer
C
shall be coated internally and externally with coal tar epoxy to minimum DFT 300
micron.
i. Basket strainers shall be specifically suitable for use with organic
C
contaminants. The maximum velocity through the net screen area
(excluding sieve wire area shall be 0.2 m/s. In any case the maximum
velocity through the total screen area (including sieve wire area shall be
Q
0.6 m/s.
ii. Capacity of the strainer shall be 1.5 times the system capacity at 0.2 bar
maximum pressure loss.
iii. Filtration shall be provided by a stainless steel grade 316 screen with 65 –
140 micron mesh size, according to the requirements of the emitters
downstream.
iv. Screen elements shall be easily replaceable without the need of removing
the strainer from the pipeline.
v. Installation shall be possible in any desired position (horizontal, up-side
down, vertical or inclined.
vi. Strainer shall have isolation valves in the suction as well on delivery side
for easy maintenance.
vii. Pressure gauges shall be connected to suction and delivery side of each
filter.
24.3.11 Irrigation Control System.

A. General
Irrigation control systems shall comply with ISO/TR 8059 and integrate with DMAT
SCADA system.
B. Central Control
The central control station shall be available to satisfy the system requirements
and shall be user friendly. The central computer shall communicate with the field
controller’s directly. Central Control and Monitoring Program shall use a strong
PAGE 168
protocol to exchange. This communication shall be direct real time without any
field interface unit.
The central control software shall allow remote access from different locations by
means of dial-up telephone line for control and monitoring. Central controller
software shall be easy to use and utilizes pointer mouse and single screen user
programming functionality. That is, user definable selections for each area of
operation are performed on a single “at-a-glance” windows screen and can be
navigated using only the mouse and not the keyboard. For example, each
controller’s watering schedule program i.e. Water days, Start times, Station run
times, Station flow rates, budgets etc. can be viewed and changed by viewing a
single screen.
op V1
The software screens mimic the user screens on the touch screen panel of each
controller. Terminology and screen thought layouts in both the software and
controllers make it much easier for an irrigation technician to operate both
because of the consistency of design
C -
The central control system Software shall have the following minimum capabilities:
y
i.
C
Support more than one project
ii. True windows User Interface
iii. Allows printing of any report
C
iv. Allow Uploading of data and programs from Field Units
v. Support moisture sensor
Q
vi. Paging Facility shall be supported and engineered by the system

manufacturer, sending alphanumeric messages
vii. Flow prediction: To analyze the demand on the Hydraulic design
viii. Complete Flow management by enabling flow sensor
ix. Water Network protection
x. Effective Water management using ET sensor
xi. Sensor Measurements
xii. Comprehensive and User-friendly irrigation programming screens
(Time based, quantity based and irrigation depth
xiii. Define multiple landscape coefficients and adjust water factor for each
type.
xiv. Off-Line programming for Field Units
Central controllers shall contain full data processing, program intelligence and
communication capability and do not require added hardware or modification to
“link” field controllers to the central base. The basic central system architecture
communicates to and from the base PC via point-to-point, point-to-multipoint,
point-to-point repeater or point-to multipoint repeater with total functionality being
available in each standard controller unit. A multitude of communication options
exist that minimize cost yet increase range potential.
C. Field Controller
The central control system shall be responsible for the monitoring of the
equipment’s under contract scope of work and override local control with manual
commands locally from controller or central. All field controllers shall be field
programmable. The Controllers shall be modular units capable of processing local
control. It shall control and monitor the pumps, valves and flow sensors connected
to it.
PAGE 169
The Controller shall be smart and have the intelligence to accumulate data and
make decision locally. Comprehensive standard application development and
diagnostic program shall be used for programming the controller locally or
remotely. The Irrigation Central Control System shall use a communication
protocol, compatible with DMAT SCADA, allowing real time, two-way
communication between the central and controller. The communication shall be
direct with central without any field interface unit.
The Controller shall be installed in a weatherproof enclosure equivalent to IP55

standards. The controller shall have solid-state design utilizing touch screen/
liquid screen display. The processor module (CPU) shall be real time process
controller and shall support the Data transfer with I/O modules, system memory
allocation, and communication port protocol. The CPU shall allow LAN
op V1
capabilities.
The Controller shall be supplied with required number of Input / Output points and
shall include the following minimum configuration:
i.
C -
Mother Board
y
ii. Input /Output (I/O modules or Boards.
iii.
C
Power supply
iv. Radio Communication Interface, if specified.
C
v. Combination of radio, telephone & hardwire board.
The field controller shall have independent control over each station start time,
Q
duration of irrigation (maximum 99 hours, 59 minutes, 59 seconds), days of

operation and cycle length (1 to 30 days), and exempt station operation by day of
week or by date. .A “mimic” function shall provide the ability to copy station timing
to any other station. The Controller must operate at ambient temperature range of
30 to 60 °C with relative and humidity up to 95 %.
The Controller shall carry irrigation programs with the following minimum
capabilities and requirements:
i. Control Irrigation system based on time and quantity.
ii. Control Irrigation system based on climate and/or soil moisture.
iii. Initiate alarms based on high flow, low flow, main line leak.
iv. Flexible programming to change valve set combinations.
v. Possibility to create programs based on conditions.
vi. Run/Stop main line.
vii. Local or host control may be initiated at the keypad along with satellite
address.
viii. Universal water budget may be modified from 1% to 300% in one
percent steps.
ix. Individual station programs or all programming may be erased
through a two-step process.
x. A security code can be entered allowing only authorized access to
programming functions.
xi. Four windows of irrigation for more flexible operation.
D. Surge Protection and Grounding

The controllers shall have a surge protection unit (SPU) to protect components
from electrical surges. Refer to Section 16670.
E. ETO Sensor
PAGE 170
The ETO Sensor shall be compatible with the Irrigation Central Control System
and automatically provide data to the central computer to analyses the current
irrigation requirements for optimal water management. The ETO Sensor shall
automatically monitor meteorological conditions that affect water consumption.
The central computer shall calculate the Reference Evapotranspiration (ETO by
modified Penman equation relevant climate sensors and then adjusts the
irrigation schedule of each program.
F. Moisture Sensors
Moisture sensors (up to eight) shall be connected to the satellite via a two wire
path or use existing valve wires (one sensor per path and shall automatically
modify or skip any station. The user shall be able to assign any station to any
sensor. The controller shall have local override capability.
op V1
G. Flow Meters
Flow meters (up to two shall automatically shut down and bypass any station in
the event of a flow variance (either excess or sub normal as defined by the user).
C -
The satellite shall shutdown the master valve in the event that flow variance
y
C
cannot be corrected by an individual station shutdown. Controller shall have local
override capability.
C
H. Other Sensors
Other types of sensing (up to eight) such as rain, wind speed and direction,
Q
temperature, Evapotranspiration/humidity, etc. shall be connected to the satellite

via a two wire path (one sensor per path and shall automatically modify or skip
any station. The user shall be able to assign any station to any sensor. The
controller shall have local override capability.
The controller shall have the ability to automatically calculate and adjust watering
times based on Evapotranspiration. The controller shall be able to detect leaks
and report to the main controller and shut the system if the leak is continuous.
The central controller shall display projected flow by program using graphics. The
graph will calculate and display the maximum instantaneous flow as well as the
total volume. Maximum flow and volume will be displayed in user-selected units.
Graphs may be displayed for a flow source, for all selected programs or for an
individual field controller.

A. The Contractor shall perform the execution as detailed here below whenever there
is any new installation or modification to the existing works.
24.4.1 Design Criteria

A. The contractor shall follow the guidelines stated in the Irrigation Manual - Volume
I–Design Manual.
24.4.2 Installation Procedure

A. The Contractor shall carry out the modification works according to the following
sequence or as agreed with the Engineer:
 Marking out of pipe line route and end valve locations

 Trenching and sand bedding
PAGE 171
 Installation of mains, sub main and control valve take offs

 Installation of isolation valves
 Pipe pressure testing for main and sub main
 Installation of manifolds and laterals
 Backfilling
 Lateral pipes system leak test
 Installation of electric remote control solenoid valves
 Flushing of the system
 Installation of irrigation heads
 Installation of controllers
 Final testing and commissioning
24.4.3 Excavation
op V1
A. The Contractor shall follow Sections 02222 and 02225.
24.4.4 Backfilling
A.
C -
The Contractor shall follow Section 02223.
y
24.4.5
C
Pipe Installation
C
24.4.5.1 Storage
A. Pipes shall be properly shielded from direct UV, especially uPVC pipes.
Q
B. Pipe stacks shall not be greater than seven layers or two metres high.
C. Pipes shall be shielded from the sun at all times and shall be placed on a sand
bed or on supports at least 75mm wide and placed not greater than 1.50 m apart.
D. Side supports shall be similarly constructed and placed not greater than 3.00 m
apart. The pipe store shall allow for circulation of air.
E. Pipes shall be transported on the site on a flatbed trailer and shall never be
dropped or dragged along the ground.
F. Rubber sealing rings shall be stored inside closed boxes in a shaded place and
shall not be exposed to sunlight for more than a few days.
24.4.5.2 Installation
A. Pipes cut on site should be cut square to the pipe axis with a fine-toothed saw. All
swarf and burrs should be removed from the pipe prior to assembly of joints. Pipe
cutters may be used for OD 32 mm pipe and smaller.
B Because of high coefficient of linear expansion the pipes shall be allowed to cool
to within 10 °C of the ambient temperature at the shaded bottom of the trench
before back filling commences.
C Where manifolds and laterals pass under roads or paved areas and through
foundations and walls they shall be in ducts.
D. Junctions shall be formed using 90° tees only. Not more than two tees shall be
connected in line barrel to barrel. If third tee is required on the same line it must
be separated from the first two by a pipe not less than 2m long.
PAGE 172
E. When a pipeline is complete or when construction is delayed, the open ends shall
be stopped or sealed off until the pipeline is required to operate or work
recommences. Care shall be taken that the system does not become silted up.
F. At each point where pipeline is temporarily terminated, temporary end caps shall
be used and a marker shall be attached to the end of the pipeline and fixed at
ground level.
24.4.5.3 uPVC installation

A. uPVC spigot ends of all pipes shall be chamfered to a depth of half the wall
thickness at an angle of 15 degree.
B. Spigot insertion depth shall be measured and marked on all pipes larger than OD
op V1
90 mm using indelible ink to allow checking at a later date.
C. Ring Joints shall be made using an approved non-ionic lubricant compatible with
the sealing ring. Pipes sized up to OD 225 mm may be jointed using a crowbar
C -
and a timber protection piece. Joints larger than OD 225 mm shall be assembled
y
using a clamped lever device. Before backfilling, joints shall be checked to ensure
C
that the spigot is inserted at least 90% of the socket depth.
D. Solvent welding shall be carried out by experienced fitters who fully understand
C
the technique and have successfully made a solvent weld joint in the presence of
and to the approval of the Engineer. Helpers brought up on site may only be
allowed to make solvent joints after inspection of their technique by the Engineer.
Q
E. Solvent welded joints made on pipe OD 90 mm and above shall be proceeded by

lightly abrading both surfaces to be jointed using a medium glass paper or clean
emery cloth. Solvent “cleaner” (colour) shall be applied to all mating surfaces
using a dauber or brush (application using rags are not allowed. After ensuring
that the mating surfaces are clean and dry, solvent cement shall be applied in
sufficient quantities to ensure good bonding but not in excessive quantities that
will leave appreciable residues inside the pipe.
E. Brush size shall be 3/8” round for OD 32 mm pipes; 1” flat for OD 50 mm and 2”
flat for larger pipes.
F. Solvent cement should be applied by two people simultaneously for pipe OD

90mm and above. Immediately after application of the solvent cement the pipes
shall be pushed together in a smooth continuous motion that ensures that the
spigot is at least 90% inserted in to the socket. The joint shall be held for a
minimum of 20 seconds after insertion and then surplus cement shall be cleaned
from the outside of the pipe using a rag or paper. Solvent cement and cleaner
shall be provided in tins with brush or dauber fixed to the lid of tin. The lids shall
be firmly closed at all times except during application. Any tins of solvent cement
that become viscous or harden shall be discarded.
G. Brushes on which the solvent cement has hardened must be discarded. All fitters
involved in solvent cement jointing shall be provided with safety gloves that
prevent solvent touching the skin. The gloves shall be kept in good condition and
shall be replaced periodically.
H. Jointing shall not be carried out in windy conditions (wind speeds greater than
18km/hour).
PAGE 173
I. Where direction of flow is apparent the pipes shall be laid so that the flow is from
spigot to socket.
J. Where PVC-u pipes are to be partially encased in concrete, they shall first be
wrapped in compressible material in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
24.4.5.4 Pipe laying on a Granular Bed.

A. Granular material shall be laid to a minimum thickness of 100 mm on the trench
floor and shall extend to the full width of the trench.
B. Pipes shall be laid with the sockets upstream directly on the granular bed, which
op V1
shall be adjusted to ensure exact line and level uniform bearing. Pipes shall rest
evenly on the granular bed for the full length of packing such as timber, bricks or
stones. Socket holes, where needed, shall be short as practicable and shall be
scraped in the granular bed deep enough to prevent the socket from bearing on
the bottom. Socket holes shall be repacked after pipe laying.
C -
y
C.
C
Adjustments to the level of the pipes shall be by raising or lowering the granular
bedding. The pipes shall rest evenly on the adjusted bedding throughout the
length of their barrels. Adjustments shall never be made by local packing.
C
24.4.5.5 Pipe laying on Natural Formation
Q
A. Where shown on the drawings and when in the opinion of the Engineer the
ground is such as to allow the trench formation to be trimmed so as to provide a
uniform solid bearing, pipes shall be laid upon the formation. Socket and joint
holes where needed, shall be as short as practicable and shall be scraped or cut
in the foundation, deep enough to give a minimum clearance of 50 mm between
the socket and the formation.
B. If the formations inadvertently low at any point, it shall be brought up to the correct
level, and care shall be taken to ensure uniformity of pipe support. Pipes shall rest
evenly on the formation throughout the length of the barrels. Adjustment shall
never be made by local packing.
24.4.6 Anchor and Thrust Blocks

A. Where pipes are laid in common trenches and the thrust block shall not bear onto
undisturbed ground due to other services, the block shall be extended into
undisturbed ground and shall encase these services with a 150 mm minimum
surround.
B. The metal straps and anchor bolts shall be non-corrosive, of adequate strength
and dimension to prevent movement and rubber strips shall be provide under all
straps at contact surfaces.
C. The contractor shall install thrust blocks at bends, tees, dead ends, and reducers
or at fittings where changes in pipe diameter occur as detailed on the approved
shop drawings and as required by the Engineer. Calculation and design of the
thrust blocks shall be done and to be approved by the Engineer.
D. Where concrete thrust blocks encase PVC pipe a membrane of polythene film
(1000 gauge shall be used between the concrete and the PVC pipe.
PAGE 174
24.4.7 Valves
A. All valves and accessories shall be designed, manufactured and tested in
accordance with the appropriate standards and codes.
B. The Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval a complete valve schedule,
showing for each individual valve the identification number, service, type &
manufacturer, size, pipe identification number, location, mode of operation
(normally closed [NC] or open [NO], drain, etc.).
C. Valves shall be designed for a nominal pressure of 16 bar unless otherwise
op V1
specified.
D. Manually operated valves with a size ≥ DN 250 shall be provided with a gearbox
for easier operation unless otherwise specified.
E.
C -
For motorized valve actuators the closing/opening time shall not exceed 0.25
y
C
sec/mm hub, indication with flickering lamp during closing / open operation shall
be provided at MCC.
C
F. Valves with a size > DN 150 shall be equipped with a drain/vent valve DN 25 at
the upstream port unless otherwise specified.
Q
G. Valve spindle shall be of the non-rising type unless otherwise specified.
H. Open/close direction shall be indicated at the operation wheels. Plastic hand

wheels will not be accepted. All manual operated valves shall be fitted with locking
facilities.
I. For directional valves the flow direction shall be clearly indicated with an arrow on
the valve body.
J. Each valve shall be fitted with a name plate. The name plate shall incorporate the
colour code corresponding to the service of the piping, and to the valve asset
code, as per AIMS Asset Manual (refer to Section 17100).
K. The material of valves with accessories and corrosion protection shall be as

described for gate valves unless otherwise specified.
L. Where valves are exposed to outdoor conditions adequate protection covers

against dust, sand, etc. for the rotating parts shall be provided.
M. Valves shall be arranged for convenient operation from appropriate floor level and
shall be provided with extension spindles or gearing if necessary. Where
extension spindles are fitted, all the thrust when operating the valve shall be taken
direct on the valve body and all pedestals necessary shall be mounted directly on
the floor.
N. Full manual or semi manual operated valves installed at a height of more than 2
meter above floor or service level shall be fitted with a chain operated wheel.
Valves on horizontal sections of pipe work shall be installed with the spindle
vertical. All valves shall be installed to be as accessible as possible.
O. Valve identification tags shall be wired to all valves.
PAGE 175
P. Air release valves shall be installed at high points in the system as required by the
Engineer. Gate valves, Air valves and Solenoid valves shall be installed as shown
on the drawings.
24.4.8 Valve Boxes and Chambers

A. Valve boxes shall be bedded in cement sand mortar on a concrete or concrete
block chamber and shall be flush with the surrounding surface.
B. Valve chambers shall be executed as per Section 02607. Block chambers shall
have in-situ concrete bases to the Engineer requirements. Blocks shall be laid in
stretcher bond. Beds and vertical joints shall be completely filled with mortar as
the blocks are laid and joints shall be flush cut as the work proceeds.
op V1
C. Valve boxes shall be re-set to the correct position if necessary and levelled if any
settlement occurs.
24.4.9 End Flushing Points

A.
C -
The contractor shall install where required and as shown on the drawings sub
y
C
main and lateral flushing points consisting of a brass valve, PVC riser and
adapter, thrust block, valve box bedded on engineering block and gravel, a
flexible 1.5 m length of pipe and a steel anchor with rubber padding between the
C
PVC-u pipe and anchor.
24.4.10 Irrigation Equipment

Q
A. Equipment shall be installed to achieve optimum irrigation efficiency and to

accommodate the requirements of the landscaping. All irrigation equipment such
as spray heads, bubblers and emitters shall be installed only after the laterals and
risers are flushed thoroughly. The installation shall be as per the irrigation detail
drawing. The top of the sprinkler case shall be flush with the final grade level.
Riser assemblies shall be snag free and free of leaks. The half circle spray heads
should be installed at least 30 cm away from the kerbstone.
24.4.11 Electrical Installations

A. Electrical installations shall be executed as per relevant Sections in Division 16.
24.4.12 Field Controllers Installations

A. The field controllers shall be installed at the locations shown on the approved
shop drawings.
B. Controllers shall be installed onto concrete bases, control wire shall be colour
coded and provided with tags.
C. Control cable shall be bundles and tied with a plastic cable tie at least every 6 m
interval. Installation of cable bundles in conduits shall be carried out in such a way
as to preclude the possibility of stretching the cable without damaging the
insulation.
D. All the cables splices shall be waterproof and made inside valve or conduit boxes
leaving at least one metre of spare cable neatly coiled and each joint and bend.
Controllers shall be individually earthed by an approved copper clad grounding rod
minimum 15 mm x 3 m driven down into the water table and connected to the
controller by a brass clamp and a 4 mm2 grounding wire. Decoders, encoders and
PAGE 176
terminators shall be installed in plastic valve boxes and their function and
reference number shall be clearly indicated in indelible ink.
E. Manufacturers’ representative shall supervise all stages of the control system

installations.
24.4.13 Field Testing

Pipeline Pressure Test
A. All pipelines shall be tested before brought into service. The test shall be a
hydraulic test performed by filling the pipe with water and raising the pressure to
test pressure.
op V1
B. The contractor shall give adequate notice to the Engineer of the time and place at
which all tests are to be held. Tests shall be made in the presence of the
Engineer. Clean water shall be used for the hydraulic test and promptly removed
upon completion of the test, as required by the Engineer.
C.
C -
The flushing of each section shall be attended to promptly. Care is to be taken to
y
drive out all dirt/foreign materials before installing heads.
C
D. The length of tests section shall be maximum 500 m or as directed by the
Engineer. The pipe length to be tested may be blanked off using blank iron or
C
steel flange previously drilled and tapped for test equipment connection and
strutted as necessary against end thrust. The blank flange may be attached to the
pipeline by a flange adaptor or similar.
Q
E. Testing should not be carried out against closed valves. All charging should be
carried out from the lowest point of the under test section and all testing
equipment should be located at this point.
F. The pressure gauge should also be located at the lowest point or adjustment must
be made for the level of the pressure gauge relative to the pipes location.
G. Prior to testing care should be taken to ensure that all anchor blocks have
attained adequate maturity and that any solvent welded joints included in the pipe
system have developed full strength. Correct support and anchorage of any above
ground sections of the pipeline is also necessary. Underground pipelines should
be back-filled taking particular care to consolidate around lengths which may have
been deflected to negotiate curves.
H. All joints should be left exposed until testing is completed. The main pipe should
be charged slowly from the lowest point with any air cock in the open position. Air
cocks should then be closed in sequence from the lowest point, only when water
visibly free from aeration is being discharged through them. Satisfactory charge,
the main should be allowed to stand overnight to allow any residual air to rise out.
Re-venting is then necessary and any water deficiency should be made up.
I. Pressure testing can then begin by pumping slowly as per relevant technical
specifications.
J. In case no test method is stated in the contract or in the specifications pressure

testing can then done by pumping slowly until the pressure reaches 1.5 times the
operational pressure. This pressure shall be kept for maximum 24 hours or
otherwise approved by the Engineer. A maximum water loss of 3 litres per 1000 m
lengths per 25 mm nominal bore per 24 hours shall be considered acceptable.
PAGE 177
Painting
A. Dry film thickness (DFT) of all painted valves and spool pieces shall be measured
on delivery to site. DFT shall be the average of no less than three measurements
with no measurement less than 75% of nominal average DFT. Holiday tests shall
be carried out on internal and external surfaces on delivery and also on external
surfaces prior to backfilling.
Electrical Tests
B. Each electrical equipment cable and complete system shall be thoroughly
inspected and tested before finally placing in to service. All tests shall be made in
compliance with respective regulations, recommendations and standards. Any
modifications or repairs deemed necessary upon completion of the tests shall be
op V1
executed at the contractor’s expenses. The Employer shall carry out further tests
on any modified or repaired equipment until it is certified trouble free and
acceptable for its intended service. All testing shall be demonstrated to the
Engineer.
24.4.14
C -
Automatic System Commissioning
y
A.
C
Commissioning of fieldwork and equipment shall include all works required to
bring the system into service and to make sure that system is operating efficiently
and shall include but not be limited to the following:
C
1. Flushing all the pipelines.
2. Adjustment of valve outlet pressure +/- 10% of normal.
Q
3. Replacing all clogged or partially clogged emitter lines - delivering less than
50% of normal flow or any emitter overflowing by more than 50% (squirting.
4. Carrying out emission uniformity, test involving at least 40 emitters on up to
10 valves as directed by the Engineer
5. Ensure that all valve boxes and sprayers are flush with finish grade
6. Trials shall only be carried out after all valves pressure have been adjusted
7. Adjusting sprayers and sprinklers to ensure spray onto pavement and paths
are minimized.
8. Adjusting spray pattern to ensure optimal coverage.
9. Preparing of irrigation schedules.
10. Adjusting of controllers to give an optimal flow regime generally in accordance
with the drawings and as instructed by the Engineer. Valves sequence may be
modified to ensure that valves operate in a logical sequence to facilitate
maintenance operations. Irrigation cycles for sprinklers and sprayers should
be programmed during nighttime and early morning.
B. A full cycle shall be run four times and total system flow rates shall be recorded
and stations shall be adjusted in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer
based on the results of these trials. Trials shall only be carried out after all valves
pressure has been adjusted.
24.4.15 Irrigation and Control System

A. Each particular function of the Irrigation system shall be demonstrated in
accordance with an approved commissioning procedure developed and to the
requirements of the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 178
25. IRRIGATION SYSTEM (SECTION 02850)

25.1.1 Scope
A. This section includes the operation and maintenance irrigation system for DMAT
gardens and landscapes including piping, sprinkler heads, emitters, bubblers,
valves, controls, control wiring, fittings and necessary accessories in all respects
and in accordance with the project documentation.
op V1
B. This also, includes reinstallation, modification or installation of new systems or
components according to the changes made in the landscape.
C -
25.2. Part 2 Operation and Maintenance
y
C
25.2.1 General
C
A. The uniformity of water application and efficiency in water delivery of an irrigation
system tends to decrease with each operation because of aging, weathering and
corrosion of different parts. The goal of irrigation system maintenance is to
Q
maintain system performance close to the initial benchmark operating values.
25.2.2 Operations and Maintenance Manuals

A. The Contractor should follow and maintain in current order the operations and
maintenance manual for his Contract as detailed in the Irrigation Manual –
Volume 2 – Operation and Maintenance. At any time this document may be
requested by the Engineer for review.
25.2.3 Organizational Structure

A. The contractor shall ensure that a senior qualified supervisor and planning
Engineer are made available for organising and running the maintenance
program. The contractor shall also have available an experienced irrigation
technician who can supervise a team of plumbers and helpers on a day-to-day
basis who would be responsible for operation and maintenance in the downstream
side. The maintenance team should carry the essential tools and the spare fittings
at all times.
25.2.4 System Operation

A. General
The purpose of an irrigation system is to provide supplemental water when
rainfall is not sufficient to maintain the turf and landscape for its intended
purpose. A quality irrigation system and its proper management are required to
distribute supplemental water in a way that adequately maintains plant health
while conserving and protecting water resources and the environment. Assuring
the overall quality of the system requires attention to system design, installation,
maintenance and management, in particular:
PAGE 179
 The irrigation system shall be efficient with a uniform water distribution.

 The irrigation system shall be regularly maintained to preserve the integrity of
the design and to sustain efficient operation.
 The irrigation schedule shall be managed to maintain a healthy and functional
landscape with the minimum required amount of water.
 The irrigation system shall be installed according to the irrigation design
specifications.
B. Contractor Obligations
 The contractor is responsible for the complete operation of the irrigation
system. The contractor shall carefully observe plant materials for signs of
wilting, indicating a lack of water. Plants which die due to irrigation failure will
op V1
be considered to have died due to the contractor's negligence and shall be
replaced at the contractor's expense.
 Irrigation shall be made by the use of the permanent irrigation systems. Hand
water as needed to supplement the permanent system only as a temporary
C -
solution. Failure of the irrigation system to provide full and proper coverage
y
C
shall not relieve the landscape maintenance contractor of the responsibility to
provide adequate irrigation. It is the contractor's responsibility to make sure
that the irrigation system is maintained and operates properly and that plants
C
receive adequate water regardless of weather conditions.
 It is the responsibility of the contractor to conserve water and assure that all
Q
watering rules and regulations are followed. Any penalties, fines, or citations
for watering ordinance violations shall be paid by the contractor.
 Watering times must be adjusted each week. Run-off from any irrigation into
or onto streets, sidewalks, stairs, or gutters is not permitted. For spray and
rotor systems, multiple-start times and short run times must be used to
prevent run-off.
 Drip systems should be left on for sufficient time to allow for saturation of the
root zone. Shorter runs with drip irrigation do not provide sufficient water
penetration for healthy root development. Multiple-start times with drip
systems must be avoided, if possible.
 To the extent possible, watering should be completed early morning to avoid

excess evaporation and subsequent salt accumulation. This is particularly
relevant to spray systems. For street medians, this is also the time of low wind
and low traffic. No sprayers should spray water beyond the median
boundaries.
 The Contractor must familiarize himself with existing conditions and existing
operation procedures. These procedures will form the starting point for the
implementation of possible improvements. He is expected to analyse existing
conditions and operation procedures and identify areas for possible
improvement in efficiency and distribution uniformity.
 On a periodic basis, the Contractor must monitor soil conditions for any salt
accumulation and must take necessary corrective measures to maintain salt
balance in the root zone at an acceptable level. For areas prone to salinity
problems, irrigation system must be turned on in the event of a rain shower
which will push salts to the root zone level thus affecting plants.
PAGE 180
C. Operation Principles
Effective operation of landscape irrigation water requires accurate evaluation of
plant need for water and the performance of the irrigation system in delivering
that water. Irrigation water use depends on the plant water requirement, weather,
the uniformity of the distribution of the water within the root zone, and the extra
amount of water applied by management for uncertainty in the plant water
requirement, risk aversion and so forth. Effective water management seeks to
balance the needs of the landscape without wasting water.
The total amount of irrigation water is the amount required to:
(1) Meet the plant water needs after taking into account any rain that has entered
op V1
the root zone,
(2) Meet the leaching requirements,
C -
(3) Offset system non-uniformity in distributing the water to the root zone, and
y
C
(4) Account for extra water applied by the manager to account for uncertainties,
risk aversion, or to offset irrigation water lost to runoff, evaporation,
C
overspray, wind drift, etc.
The distribution uniformity is a measure of the uniformity of water distribution

Q
within the station/zone. This measure is largely determined by the design,

installation, and maintenance of the irrigation system and greatly affects the
amount of irrigation water used in the landscape.
The overall irrigation system efficiency is the percent of irrigation water supplied
to the landscape that is beneficially used by the plants; that is, contributes
directly to the plant water requirement. It is based on the distribution uniformity of
the irrigation water application and the efficiency of landscape irrigation water
management.
25.2.5 Landscape Irrigation Scheduling

Irrigation scheduling is the process of defining when irrigation is to occur to various
zones of the landscape and how much water to apply. The objective is to maintain the
health of the plants without overwatering.
Irrigation should occur when the actual soil moisture depletion reaches the target
management allowable depletion. The amount of irrigation water to apply is the
amount required to bring the soil moisture content back to the desired level. Under
normal irrigation, this desired level is field capacity.
The following methods estimate when the soil moisture is at or near the target
management allowable depletion:
(1) Use historical average daily reference ETO derived from monthly historical
reference ETO data to estimate daily plant water consumption. Reference
ETO, whether historical or current, is based on atmospheric measurements
and is thus an indirect estimate of soil moisture content. However, the
estimate of average historical daily plant water consumption does not always
compare well with actual day-to-day consumption and can result in over or
under-watering.
PAGE 181
(2) Use current (daily) reference ETO to estimate daily plant water consumption.
The primary advantage of scheduling with current (daily) reference ETO is
that the schedule is based on current weather conditions. However, daily
adjustments must be implemented in the irrigation regime.
(3) Use soil moisture or soil tension sensors to indicate to the controller when
irrigation should occur. The sensors measure the cumulative and combined
effects of plant water consumption, applied irrigation, and retained rainfall
within the root zone. The primary advantage of using soil moisture or soil
tension sensors is direct feedback to the controller of actual soil moisture
content within the root zone. This feedback integrates actual plant water
consumption, applied irrigation and retained rainfall (effective rainfall. Thus,
op V1
with soil moisture sensors there is no need for current ETO data for
scheduling purposes. However, due to the small area covered by soil
moisture sensors, ETO data is still useful for cross-checking, budgeting and
management purposes.
C -
No method should be implemented with a “set it and forget it” approach.
y
C
Regardless of the method chosen, the landscape should be observed periodically
and adjustments made to the schedule as needed.
C
A. Rainfall
The aridity of the climate causes salts to deposit following irrigation operations.
Q
Salt deposits are particularly visible in drip systems as salt rings around drip
emitters. Occasional rainfalls cause salts to migrate toward the root zone thus
damaging plants. For such cases, it is important to operate the irrigation system
even during rainfall to avoid salts accumulation in the root zone. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor to assess the risk and extent of salinity and
identify the valves to operate during rainfall events.
B. Avoiding Run-off
To avoid run-off, and depending on the slope, soil intake rate and the
precipitation rate of the station/zone, the base run time for each irrigation may
need to be divided into multiple cycles (also called cycle starts or repeat cycles)
with soak time between the cycles.
The number of cycle starts can be determined by the “observation” method or the
“basic intake rate” method. By observing the landscape while irrigating a
representative station/zone of the hydrosome the total elapsed time until run-off
is visible is noted. The required irrigation time can then be divided into a number
of cycles with each cycle time being less than the time required for runoff to
appear.
For relatively flat hydrosomes only, the number of cycle starts can also be
determined with the “basic intake rate” method. The basic intake rate is the rate
at which water percolates into the soil after infiltration has decreased to a low and
nearly constant value.
Depending on soil and other site conditions, runoff may not always be a limiting
factor. In that case, only one cycle start is required.
PAGE 182
For more details on the definition of cycle starts and soak time refer to the
Irrigation Manual – Volume I – Design Manual.
25.2.6 Initial Operation Evaluation

Initial irrigation schedules are based on design values such as historic weather
and estimates of distribution uniformity. Because of the use of estimated data for
design irrigation water requirement, actual irrigation water use must be compared
to the design requirement after the system has been placed in operation. It is
important to make appropriate adjustments to the irrigation schedule, system
components, or both, to bring actual water use near or below the design target.
Whenever actual water use is higher than the design target, leaks and faulty
op V1
operation are amongst the reasons. Over application may be due to factors such
as operating pressure problems, higher ETO than planned, failure of a rain shut-
off device, or the actual operating distribution uniformity is lower than planned.
The following table below provides a guideline for corrective measures
C -
Table 25.2-1: Guidelines for corrective measures
y
Condition
C
Effect Corrective Measures
C
Improvements to the design or irrigation
Es < 65 % DU is Low - The system
system components that affect the
Ewm ≥ 85 % is likely wasting water.
distribution uniformity.
Q
Ewm is low – The

Es < 65 %
system is likely wasting The system management must be revised.
DU ≥ 85 %
water.
Es > 65% The system is Areas of the system or irrigation schedule

Ewm ≥ 85 % functioning properly. that could be targets for improvement.
The terms used in the above table are defined as follows:
Es: Overall system efficiency calculated as is the ratio of the ideal volume of
water to be beneficially used by the plants to the total amount actually
applied.
Ewm: Actual water management efficiency calculated as the ratio of the amount
of irrigation water not including management requirements such as
leaching and offset for low uniformities to the total amount including
management requirements
DU: Distribution uniformity calculated as the ratio of volume outflow for the
lower quarter of all irrigation emitters to that of the total volume outflow
A. Periodic Operation Evaluation
The Contractor’s primary responsibility is to periodically observe the landscape
and take corrective measures to balance plant health with water conservation.
These observations will likely lead to modifications in the prescribed irrigation
interval, or an occasional supplemental irrigation.
The distribution uniformity measurement should be made when the system is

placed in service and at least every three to five years thereafter. If consumption
PAGE 183
targets are routinely exceeded with no obvious explanation, then the distribution
uniformity should be re-measured.
System performance should be measured at least monthly by comparing actual

use with the design irrigation water requirement.
25.2.7 System Maintenance

A. General.
The contractor shall examine the irrigation system for damage or malfunction
weekly and shall repair damage or malfunction promptly. If the contractor fails to
repair the broken or malfunctioning irrigation system components within one week
of the breakage or malfunction, the contractor shall be responsible for all ensuing
op V1
damages and repair fines.
The contractor shall check the entire system weekly for items such as dry spots
and missing or malfunctioning irrigation components. Leaking valves, water
C -
running across sidewalks, water standing in puddles, or any other conditions
y
which hamper the correct operation of the system or the public safety must be
C
corrected. Signs of leakage include particularly green spots, soggy areas around
spray heads and above ground hoses, jammed spray heads and torn hoses.
C
Each valve zone shall be observed for signs of damage on a weekly basis during
the irrigation season. The landscape maintenance contractor shall maintain the
Q
irrigation system, including cleaning of filter screens on a bi-monthly basis or more

often as needed, and flushing pipes, as part of this contract.
Drip irrigation systems need periodic flushing to remove sediment. When flushing
is necessary, it shall be performed as part of this contract. Drip systems shall be
flushed at least once a year. Open ends of drip lines and run for at least 15
minutes at full flow to flush. It may be necessary to install flush outlets in order to
flush the drip system.
Run-off of water from irrigation is not permitted. The contractor shall immediately
shut down the irrigation system and make adjustments, repairs, or replacements
as soon as possible to correct the source of the run-off.
As plants mature, system components must be added or relocated as needed to

maintain uniform distribution of water. It is critical that system modifications do not
exceed the system watering capacity.
B. Irrigation System Repair

The Contractor shall replace or repair at his own expense, any damaged irrigation
components within one week of the day the damage occurred. Regardless of the
cause of damage, the contractor shall take immediate action to prevent further
damage by shutting off the damaged part of the irrigation system and
commencing with hand watering as needed.
Any replacement of irrigation system components shall be made with materials of

the same manufacturer and model as the original equipment. Substitutions of
materials other than original equipment will be approved by the Department only
when the original equipment has been discontinued and is no longer available for
PAGE 184
purchase at any location. The substituted equipment must be equal or superior in

quality and must be completely compatible with the original system.
All repairs to the system shall be identical to the original installation, unless
approved otherwise in advance by the Department. Changes will be considered
positively if a change to the installation will result in lower future maintenance
costs, less frequent breakage, or an increase in public safety. All effected repairs
must be tested.
For safety purposes, sprinklers on risers above the ground level should never be
installed, even if the risers are flexible. Existing situations of pop-up systems
above ground level shall be corrected. If the existing sprinklers are mounted on
above-ground risers, the replacements shall be pop-up type sprinklers. No
op V1
exceptions, ever.
Plastic sprinkler nozzles with bad patterns shall be replaced with new nozzles of
the same gallon age and arc as part of the regular maintenance of the sprinkler
system. Do not attempt to clean plastic nozzles by sticking knife blades or wire
C -
into the openings. The plastic will be scratched and the pattern will be ruined.
y
C
Brass nozzles may be carefully cleaned if needed.
25.2.8 Maintenance Components

C
A. System Pressure.
The system pressure has to be monitored on the daily basis. The pressure drop is
Q
mainly due to leakage in the system, which has to be attended immediately.

Prevailing low pressure resulting from faulty designs must be corrected by
increasing the re-grouping individual valves into a larger number.
The pressure drop in the filter needs to be checked and if the drop exceeds 0.5
bars then flushing should start.
B. Irrigation Controller
The following is a checklist for the controller.
 Check the scheduled functioning of the controller

 Check for any faulty or tripped stations
 Reset automatic controllers according to the changing/seasonal needs of the
plants. Irrigation systems should be rescheduled quarterly to correct run
times.
 Program the irrigation controller for multiple start times on watering by
sprayers to reduce runoff and deep percolation below root zone. Drip
systems should NOT be cycled in this manner.
 Any changes or an alteration in the controller has to be with prior permission
of the Engineer.
C. Drip lines and emitters

With constant movement of people and machinery during maintenance of the
landscape drip lines and emitters are likely to get displaced from its original
position causing wilting of plants. Therefore the position has to be adjusted as
and when required.
PAGE 185
The chances of salt build up and sand accumulation are high in drip irrigation
system and hence drip tubes are to be flushed and emitters are to be cleaned
periodically. A regular maintenance program of inspection and flushing will
prevent emitter clogging.
D. Bubblers.
The debris in the water can clog the filters of the bubbler and water emission
uniformity will be substantially reduced, affecting the efficiency of the system.
Filter cleaning has to be performed frequently. If the flow of bubbler is still low,
check the point of connection for blockage or bending and rectify.
E. Sprayers
op V1
The coverage radius and the flow may have to change depending on water
application rate and can be adjusted by turning the screw on top of the nozzle.
The tension of the spring has to be checked for positive retraction under any
conditions. Faulty springs resulting in a fixed erect position of the pop-up must be
replaced. Inspect alignment of the check valves for eliminating leaks and puddles
C -
at the lower heads, protecting landscape from damage and erosion while reducing
y
C
wastage of water. The filter beneath the nozzle gets clogged with debris and
needs to be cleaned to ensure uniform coverage.
C
F. Rotors
Arc and radius adjustment has to be made from time to time for proper coverage.
Q
The tension of the spring has to be checked for positive retraction under any
conditions. Inspect alignment of the check valves for eliminating leaks and
puddles at the lower heads, protecting landscape from damage and erosion while
reducing wastage of water. The filter at the bottom of the rotors gets clogged and
should be cleaned regularly to ensure uniform coverage.
G. Solenoid Valves
For solenoid valves fitted with pressure regulators, the downstream pressure has
to be adjusted in the pressure regulator module of the solenoid valve and set to
the design pressure before starting the irrigation system.
With the use of TSE water, the solenoid valves are subjected to clogging and
interrupt in the continuous operation of the system. Hence periodic servicing is
required. The contractor should follow the manufacturer’s instruction for the
servicing. Any part, which is faulty, has to be replaced immediately.
The gate valve in the solenoid valve assembly should be closed and opened
slowly in order to avoid surge.
If the valve and or the valve box need to be changed, make sure that the
identifying tags are maintained on the box and the valve.
The strainer installed with solenoid valve also needs to be cleaned thoroughly
periodically in every 2 months or more frequently so as to improve the smooth
working of the system
H. Isolation Valves: Gate, Globe and Butterfly Valves

These valves must be checked for rust and possible leaks. Rust will hinder the
movement of these valves. Leaks may result from debris in addition to ageing. It
PAGE 186
is important that all valves operate easily with no obstructions. Faulty valves must
be replaced.
I. Check Valves
Damages to check valves occur as a result of pressure surges and ageing. The
seal often breaks and causes backward flow and/or leaks. Faulty check valves
must be replaced completely.
J. Quick Coupling Valves and Air Valves

These valves are to be monitored for efficient working during the operation of the
system. Quick coupling valves must be inspected for leaks or faulty and rusty
op V1
couplings. Air valves must be inspected for confirming a free movement of the air
release mechanism. All valves must be inspected to see if they operate without
slamming open or closed in order to prevent damage from surges.
K. System Flushing
C -
y
Flush valves are provided at the end of the main line if it is not a ring main design
C
and at the end of each drip laterals. Lateral lines have to be flushed every 3
weeks to maintain the proper workings of the system. The entire system must be
flushed on a bi-monthly basis.
C
L. Maintenance Schedule
Q
1. The following schedules are the minimum requirements, however these

schedules might be modified based on the manufacturers recommendation
against their operation and maintenance manuals and subject to the
approval of DMAT / Engineer.
2. The schedules of maintenance shall be provided in agreed forms between
the Contractor and the DMAT / Engineer
3. The maintenance shall be provided by a skilled labor and under supervision
of contractors engineer
4. DMAT have the full right to check and supervise the operation and
maintenance process
5. The proper functioning of the irrigation system remains the responsibility of
the contractor rregardless of maintenance activities.
PAGE 187
Table 25.2-2: Maintenance Component
Recommended
Item No. Task
Frequency
Irrigation
1 Checking for leaks Daily
2 Checking loose fittings Weekly
3 Checking for signs of wilting Daily
4 Checking adequacy of irrigation program Weekly
5 Checking for clogged nozzles Daily
op V1
6 Checking functionality of solenoid valves Weekly
7 Cleaning strainer in solenoid valves Bi-monthly
8 Checking controller Weekly
9
C -
Cleaning strainers Monthly
y
10
C
Flushing filter At pressure drops
11 Checking pressure and normal operation Weekly
C
12 Checking uniformity: visual Daily
13 Checking distribution uniformity Annually
Q
14 Computing overall system efficiency Monthly

15 System flushing Every 3 weeks
16 Checking soil salinity Quarterly
Valves
Butterfly Valves
17 Operate valve through a full cycle Monthly
18 Inspect and lubricate valves and hand levers Semi-Annually
19 General valve inspection Semi-Annually
20 Check shaft seal for leakage Annually
Check Valves
Check proper operation, check and rectify stuffing box
21 Monthly
leaks
Check valve bypass where fitted for leaks, lubricate and
22 Monthly
operate
23 Remove valve cover, clean disk for free movement Annually
Clean sump in bottom of valve, clean valve faces, restore
24 Annually
valve cover
Rising Stem Gate Valves
25 Operate valve through a full cycle Monthly
26 Check and service gland packing Monthly
27 Clean and lubricate valve screw and nut Monthly
28 Check all nuts for tightness Annually
PAGE 188
Recommended
Item No. Task
Frequency
29 Check coating for damage and repair as necessary Annually
Non-Rising Stem Gate Valves
30 Operate valve though a full cycle Monthly
31 Check and service stem seal Monthly
32 Check all nuts for tightness Annually
33 Check coating for damage and repair as necessary Annually
Pressure Reducing, Pressure Control & Pressure
34
Sustaining Valves
op V1
Inspect thoroughly, provide service in accordance with
35 Yearly
O&M Manual
General
36 Check premises for storm damage, vandalism, etc. Weekly
37
C -
Log all gauge and instrument readings. Daily
y
38
C
Visual inspection of all equipment for tightness of nuts and
Monthly
bolts.
Clean and grease threads on screw penstocks and clean
C
39 Quarterly
guides, including a gate valves and non-return valves.
40 Calibrate pressure and vacuum gauges Annually
Q
41 Flushing of lateral lines 3 Weeks

42 System flushing Bi-Monthly
43 Flush air release valve Quarterly
44 Check operation of air release valve and air inlet valve Quarterly
Provide calibration in accordance with manufacturer's
Annually
45 standards & certification by an appropriate certifying
authority
25.2.9 Emergency Repairs

A. The Contractor team should be adequately equipped with tools and fittings to
attend to the repair immediately in coordination with the supervisor and Engineer if
required. If excavation is to be done, the following points should be considered.
 The excavation area should be demarked with warning tape.

 The area must be isolated using the isolation valve.
 Care should be taken for not to damage the nearby plants and vegetation.
 For excavating grass area, lay plastic sheet and put the excavated soil on
the plastic.
 Care should be taken not to mix the topsoil with soil of lower layer.
 The replacing materials should be the same as specified and used in the
system. Any materials other than specified require prior permission of the
Engineer and As Built drawings updated accordingly.
 Proper thrust block have to be provided if required.
 After backfilling, proper levelling has to be done to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 189
op V1
C -
y
C
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
C
(VOLUME III)
Q
DIVISION 03
CONCRETE
DOCUMENT NO: TR 511

FIRST EDITION
DECEMBER- 2016
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Document No: TR 511

First Edition
December-2016
PO Box 20
publisher
TABLE OF CONTENTS
List of Table .................................................................................................................................. x
1. CONCRETE FORMWORK (SECTION 03100) ....................................................................... 1
1.1. Part 1 General........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1.1 Related Documents .................................................................................................................. 1
1.1.2 References ............................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.3 Design Requirements ............................................................................................................... 1
op V1
1.1.4 Performance Requirement ....................................................................................................... 2
1.1.5 Submittals for Review ............................................................................................................... 2
1.1.6 Quality Assurance ..................................................................................................................... 2
1.1.7 Job Mock-Up............................................................................................................................. 3
C -
y
1.1.8 Delivery, Storage, and Protection ............................................................................................. 3
C
1.2. Part 2 Products .................................................................................................................... 3
1.2.1 Fabricated Metal from Materials ............................................................................................... 3
C
1.2.2 Formwork Accessories ............................................................................................................. 3
1.2.3 Fabrication ................................................................................................................................ 4
Q
1.3. Part 3 Execution .................................................................................................................... 4

1.3.1 Examination .............................................................................................................................. 4
1.3.2 Earth Forms .............................................................................................................................. 4
1.3.3 Erection - Formwork ................................................................................................................. 4
1.3.4 Construction Joints ................................................................................................................... 5
1.3.5 Movement Joints....................................................................................................................... 6
1.3.6 Application - form Release Agent ............................................................................................. 7
1.3.7 Inserts, Embedded Parts, and Openings .................................................................................. 7
1.3.8 Form Cleaning .......................................................................................................................... 7
1.3.9 Formwork Tolerances ............................................................................................................... 8
1.3.10 Field Quality Control ................................................................................................................. 8
1.3.11 Form Removal .......................................................................................................................... 8
1.3.12 Removal of Formwork .............................................................................................................. 8
2. CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT (SECTION 03200) .............................................................. 9
2.1. Part 1 General........................................................................................................................ 9
2.1.1 Scope ........................................................................................................................................ 9
2.1.2 Related Documents .................................................................................................................. 9
2.1.3 Standards ................................................................................................................................. 9
2.1.4 Submittals ................................................................................................................................. 9
2.1.5 Quality Control ........................................................................................................................ 11
2.1.6 Delivery, Storage, and Handling ............................................................................................. 12
Page i
2.2. Part 2 Products ................................................................................................................... 13

2.2.1 Steel Reinforcement ............................................................................................................... 13
2.2.2 Accessories ............................................................................................................................ 13
2.3. Part 3 Execution .................................................................................................................. 13
2.3.1 Fabrication .............................................................................................................................. 13
2.3.2 Repairs to Epoxy Coated Reinforcement, if Epoxy is specified .............................................. 14
2.3.3 Placement ............................................................................................................................... 14
2.3.4 Cleaning and Adjustment of Reinforcement ........................................................................... 15
3. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (SECTION 03300) ................................................................ 16
3.1. Part 1 General...................................................................................................................... 16
op V1
3.1.1 Related Documents ................................................................................................................ 16
3.1.2 References ............................................................................................................................. 16
3.1.3 Design Requirements ............................................................................................................. 21
3.1.4
C -
Submittals for Review ............................................................................................................. 22
y
3.1.5
C
Submittals for Information....................................................................................................... 22
3.1.6 Submittals at Project Closeout................................................................................................ 23
C
3.1.7 Quality Assurance ................................................................................................................... 23
3.1.8 Qualifications of Off-Site Ready-Mix Plant.............................................................................. 23
Q
3.1.9 Mock-Up ................................................................................................................................. 24

3.1.10 Delivery and Storage .............................................................................................................. 25
3.1.11 Preliminary Mix Tests ............................................................................................................. 25
3.1.12 Concrete Trial Mixes ............................................................................................................... 26
3.1.13 Concrete under Water ............................................................................................................ 27
3.2. Part 2 Products ................................................................................................................... 27
3.2.1 Concrete Materials .................................................................................................................. 27
3.2.2 Admixtures .............................................................................................................................. 30
3.2.3 Accessories ............................................................................................................................ 30
3.2.4 Joint Devices and Filler Materials ........................................................................................... 31
3.2.5 Batching and Mixing of Concrete ............................................................................................ 31
3.3. Part 3 Execution .................................................................................................................. 32
3.3.1 Examination ............................................................................................................................ 32
3.3.2 Preparation ............................................................................................................................. 32
3.3.3 Concrete Placing and Compacting ......................................................................................... 33
3.3.4 Adverse Weather Concreting ................................................................................................. 34
3.3.5 Placing of Concrete in or Under Water ................................................................................... 35
3.3.6 Concrete Blinding Layer.......................................................................................................... 35
3.3.7 Separate Floor Toppings ........................................................................................................ 35
3.3.8 Concrete Finishing .................................................................................................................. 36
3.3.9 Curing and Protection ............................................................................................................. 36
3.3.10 Field Quality Control ............................................................................................................... 36
Page ii
3.3.11 Loading of Structures.............................................................................................................. 38

3.3.12 Patching .................................................................................................................................. 39
3.3.13 Defective Concrete ................................................................................................................. 39
3.3.14 Schedule - Concrete Types and Finishes ............................................................................... 39
3.3.15 Testing for Water tightness of Water-Retaining Structures .................................................... 41
4. CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING (SECTION 03346) ............................................................ 42
4.1. Part 1 General...................................................................................................................... 42
4.1.2 References ............................................................................................................................. 42
4.1.3 Submittals ............................................................................................................................... 42
op V1
4.1.4 Maintenance Data ................................................................................................................... 42
4.1.6 Mock-Up ................................................................................................................................. 42
4.1.7
C -
Delivery, Storage, and Handling ............................................................................................. 42
y
4.1.8
C
Environmental Requirements ................................................................................................. 43
4.1.9 Coordination ........................................................................................................................... 43
C
4.2. Part 2 Products ................................................................................................................... 43
4.2.1 Compounds, Hardeners, and Sealers .................................................................................... 43
Q
4.3. Part 3 Execution .................................................................................................................. 43

4.3.1 Examination ............................................................................................................................ 43
4.3.2 Floor Finishing ........................................................................................................................ 43
4.3.3 Floor Surface Treatment ......................................................................................................... 44
4.3.4 Tolerances .............................................................................................................................. 44
5. EXPOSED AGGREGATE CONCRETE FINISH (SECTION 03355) ...................................... 45
5.1. Part 1 General...................................................................................................................... 45
5.1.2 References ............................................................................................................................. 45
5.1.3 Submittals for Review ............................................................................................................. 45
5.1.5 Mock-Up ................................................................................................................................. 45
5.1.6 Pre-Installation Meeting .......................................................................................................... 46
5.1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Protection ........................................................................................... 46
5.2. Part 2 Products ................................................................................................................... 46
5.2.1 Concrete Materials .................................................................................................................. 46
5.2.2 Accessory Materials ................................................................................................................ 46
5.2.3 Concrete Mix ........................................................................................................................... 46
5.2.4 Source Quality Control ............................................................................................................ 46
5.3. Part 3 Execution .................................................................................................................. 46
5.3.1 Examination ............................................................................................................................ 46
Page iii
5.3.2 Preparation ............................................................................................................................. 46

5.3.3 Placing Concrete .................................................................................................................... 47
5.3.4 Aggregate Exposure ............................................................................................................... 47
5.3.5 Curing ..................................................................................................................................... 47
5.3.6 Cleaning .................................................................................................................................. 47
5.3.7 Defective Concrete ................................................................................................................. 47
5.3.8 Protection of Finished Work ................................................................................................... 48
5.3.9 Schedules ............................................................................................................................... 48
6. CONCRETE CURING (SECTION 03370) ............................................................................. 49
6.1. Part 1 General...................................................................................................................... 49
op V1
6.1.2 References ............................................................................................................................. 49
6.1.3 Submittals ............................................................................................................................... 49
6.1.4
C -
Quality Assurance ................................................................................................................... 49
y
6.1.5
C
Delivery, Storage, and Handling ............................................................................................. 49
6.2. Part 2 Products ................................................................................................................... 50
C
6.2.1 Materials ................................................................................................................................. 50
6.3. Part 3 Execution .................................................................................................................. 50
Q
6.3.1 Examination ............................................................................................................................ 50

6.3.2 Execution ................................................................................................................................ 50
6.3.3 Execution - Vertical Surfaces.................................................................................................. 51
6.3.4 Protection of Finished Work ................................................................................................... 51
7. STRUCTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE (SECTION 03411).................................................. 52
7.1. Part 1 General...................................................................................................................... 52
7.1.2 References ............................................................................................................................. 52
7.1.3 Design Requirements ............................................................................................................. 52
7.1.4 Submittals for Review ............................................................................................................. 53
7.1.5 Submittals for Information....................................................................................................... 53
7.1.7 Samples .................................................................................................................................. 53
7.1.8 Drawings ................................................................................................................................. 53
7.1.9 Delivery, Storage, and Protection ........................................................................................... 54
7.2. Part 2 Products ................................................................................................................... 54
7.2.1 Precast Concrete Yard Requirements .................................................................................... 54
7.2.2 Materials ................................................................................................................................. 54
7.2.3 Reinforcement ........................................................................................................................ 54
7.2.4 Accessories ............................................................................................................................ 54
7.2.5 Mix .......................................................................................................................................... 54
Page iv
7.2.6 Fabrication .............................................................................................................................. 54

7.2.7 Finishes .................................................................................................................................. 55
7.2.8 Fabrication Tolerances ........................................................................................................... 55
7.2.9 Source Quality Control and Tests ........................................................................................... 55
7.3. Part 3 Execution .................................................................................................................. 55
7.3.1 Examination ............................................................................................................................ 55
7.3.2 Preparation ............................................................................................................................. 56
7.3.3 Erection ................................................................................................................................... 56
7.3.4 Erection Tolerances ................................................................................................................ 56
7.3.5 Protection ................................................................................................................................ 56
op V1
7.3.6 Appendix 1 .............................................................................................................................. 57
8. CONCRETE REPAIR (SECTION 03500) .............................................................................. 69
8.1. Part 1-General ..................................................................................................................... 69
8.1.1
C -
Scope and General Requirements ......................................................................................... 69
y
8.1.2
C
Related Documents ................................................................................................................ 69
8.1.3 Standards ............................................................................................................................... 69
C
8.1.4 SUBMITTALS ......................................................................................................................... 70
8.1.4.1 Products and Materials Approval .................................................................................... 70
Q

8.1.4.3 Drawings ......................................................................................................................... 72
8.1.4.4 Mock Up .......................................................................................................................... 72
8.1.4.5 Progress Reporting ......................................................................................................... 73
8.1.5 Quality Control ........................................................................................................................ 73
8.1.6 Delivery, Storage and Protection ............................................................................................ 74
8.1.7 Warranty ................................................................................................................................. 75
8.2. Part 2 Products ................................................................................................................... 75
8.2.1. Epoxy Fillers ........................................................................................................................... 75
8.2.2. Epoxy Repair Mortar ............................................................................................................... 75
8.2.3. Cementitious Repair Mortar .................................................................................................... 76
8.2.4. Polymer Modified Cementitious Repair Mortar ....................................................................... 76
8.2.5. Shotcrete ................................................................................................................................ 76
8.2.6. Concrete ................................................................................................................................. 78
8.2.7. Micro-Concrete ....................................................................................................................... 78
8.2.8. Epoxy Lining Mortar ................................................................................................................ 79
8.2.9. Concrete Coating Systems ..................................................................................................... 79
8.2.10. Reinforcement ........................................................................................................................ 79
8.2.11. Coating to Reinforcement ....................................................................................................... 79
8.2.12. Epoxy Crack Injection Resins ................................................................................................. 79
8.2.13. Polyester Crack Injection Resins ............................................................................................ 80
8.3. Part 3 Execution .................................................................................................................. 80
Page v
8.3.1. Condition Survey..................................................................................................................... 80

8.3.2. Repair Strategy ....................................................................................................................... 81
8.3.3. Trial and Demonstration Repairs ............................................................................................ 82
8.3.4. Removal of Areas of Defective Concrete ............................................................................... 83
8.3.5. Repair of Reinforcement ......................................................................................................... 85
8.3.5.1. Provision for Extra Reinforcement Using Straight Laps .................................................. 85
8.3.5.2. Provision for Extra Reinforcement which is Anchored .................................................... 85
8.3.5.3. Provision for Extra Reinforcement Using Connectors ..................................................... 85
8.3.5.4. Provision for Extra Reinforcement using Welding .......................................................... 85
8.3.6. Concrete Repair General Requirements ................................................................................ 87
op V1
8.3.7. Repair Using Epoxy Resin Mortars ......................................................................................... 88
8.3.8. Repair Using Cementitious Mortars ........................................................................................ 88
8.3.9. Repair Using Shotcrete........................................................................................................... 89
8.3.10.
C -
Repair Using in-Situ Concrete ................................................................................................ 90
y
8.3.11.
C
Repair Using Free Flowing Cementitious Micro-Concrete ..................................................... 90
8.3.12. Repair of Surface Cracks ....................................................................................................... 91
C
8.3.13. Crack Injection ........................................................................................................................ 91
8.3.14. Application of Epoxy Lining Mortar ......................................................................................... 91
Q
8.3.15. Final Protective Coating .......................................................................................................... 91

9. CONCRETE PROTECTION AND WATERPROOFING SYTEM (SECTION 03600) ............. 93
9.1. Part 1 General...................................................................................................................... 93
9.1.1 Scope and General Requirements ......................................................................................... 93
9.1.3 Standards ............................................................................................................................... 93
9.1.4 Submittals ............................................................................................................................... 94
9.1.4.1 Products and Materials Approval .................................................................................... 94
9.1.4.2 Method Statement ........................................................................................................... 95
9.1.4.3 Drawings ......................................................................................................................... 95
9.1.4.4 Samples .......................................................................................................................... 95
9.1.4.5 Mock Up .......................................................................................................................... 96
9.1.5 Quality Control ........................................................................................................................ 96
9.1.6 Delivery, Storage and Protection ............................................................................................ 96
9.1.7 Warranty ................................................................................................................................. 97
9.2. Part 2 Products ................................................................................................................... 97
9.2.1 General ................................................................................................................................... 97
9.2.2 Epoxy Coating......................................................................................................................... 97
9.2.3 Polyurethane Elastomeric Membrane..................................................................................... 98
9.2.4 PVC and HDPE Lining ............................................................................................................ 98
9.2.5 GRP Lining ............................................................................................................................. 99
9.2.5.1 Raw Materials.................................................................................................................. 99
Page vi
9.2.5.2 Preformed GRP Lining. ................................................................................................. 100

9.2.5.3 In-Situ GRP Lamination. ............................................................................................... 101
9.2.5.4 Pipe Connections. ......................................................................................................... 101
9.2.6 GRP Formwork ..................................................................................................................... 101
9.2.7 Waterproof Membrane ......................................................................................................... 102
9.3. Part 3 Execution ................................................................................................................ 103
9.3.1 General ................................................................................................................................. 103
9.3.2 Preparation of Concrete Surfaces ........................................................................................ 104
9.3.3 Application of Epoxy Coatings .............................................................................................. 104
9.3.4 Application of Polyurethane Elastomeric Membranes .......................................................... 105
op V1
9.3.5 Installation of PVC and HDPE Lining .................................................................................... 105
9.3.6 Installation of Preformed GRP Lining ................................................................................... 106
9.3.7 Application of in-Situ GRP Lamination.................................................................................. 107
9.3.8
C -
Installation of Waterproof Sheet Membrane ......................................................................... 108
y
C
10. JOINTS IN CONCRETE (SECTION 03700) ........................................................................ 110
10.1. Part 1 General ................................................................................................................. 110
C
10.1.1 Scope .................................................................................................................................... 110
10.1.2 Related Documents .............................................................................................................. 110
Q
10.1.3 Standards ............................................................................................................................. 110

10.1.4 Submittals ............................................................................................................................. 110
10.1.4.1. Products and Materials Approval .................................................................................. 110
10.1.4.2. Method Statements ....................................................................................................... 112
10.1.4.3. Samples ........................................................................................................................ 112
10.1.5 Quality Control ...................................................................................................................... 112
10.1.6 Delivery, Storage, and Handling ........................................................................................... 112
10.1.7 Warranty ............................................................................................................................... 113
10.2. Part 2 Products ............................................................................................................... 113
10.2.1 General ................................................................................................................................. 113
10.2.2 Water stops .......................................................................................................................... 113
10.2.3 Injection Hose Water stop System ....................................................................................... 114
10.2.4 Self-Swelling Water bars ...................................................................................................... 114
10.2.5 Joint Filler ............................................................................................................................. 114
10.2.6 Joint Sealant ......................................................................................................................... 115
10.3. Part3 Execution .............................................................................................................. 115
10.3.1 Construction Joints ............................................................................................................... 115
10.3.2 Movement Joints................................................................................................................... 116
10.3.3 Joint Sealant ......................................................................................................................... 116
11. PREPARATION FOR RESURFACING CONCRETE (SECTION 03721) ............................ 118
11.1. Part 1 General ................................................................................................................. 118
Page vii
11.1.1 Scope .................................................................................................................................... 118

11.1.2 Related Sections ................................................................................................................... 118
11.1.3 Mock-Up ............................................................................................................................... 118
11.1.4 Scheduling ............................................................................................................................ 118
11.2. Part 2 Products ............................................................................................................... 118
11.2.1. Materials ............................................................................................................................... 118
11.3. Part 3 Execution ............................................................................................................. 118
11.3.1 Examination .......................................................................................................................... 118
11.3.2 Preparation ........................................................................................................................... 119
11.3.3 Cleaning ................................................................................................................................ 119
op V1
11.3.4 Field Quality Control ............................................................................................................. 119
11.3.5 Schedule ............................................................................................................................... 119
12. REHABILITATION WORKS (SECTION 03732) .................................................................. 120
C -
12.1. Part 1 General ................................................................................................................. 120
y
12.1.1
C
Scope .................................................................................................................................... 120
C
12.1.3 References ........................................................................................................................... 120
12.1.4 Definitions ............................................................................................................................. 121
Q
12.1.5 Preliminary, Temporary Works and General Requirements ................................................. 122

12.1.6 Submittals ............................................................................................................................. 124
12.1.7 Quality Control ...................................................................................................................... 127
12.1.8 Delivery, Storage, and Handling ........................................................................................... 127
12.2. Part 2- Products .............................................................................................................. 128
12.2.1 General ................................................................................................................................. 128
12.2.2 Epoxy Fillers ......................................................................................................................... 128
12.2.3 Epoxy Repair Mortars ........................................................................................................... 129
12.2.4 Cementitious Repair Mortars ................................................................................................ 129
12.2.5 Rapid Setting Mortars ........................................................................................................... 129
12.2.6 Micro-Concrete ..................................................................................................................... 130
12.2.7 Crack Injection Resins .......................................................................................................... 130
12.2.8 Shotcrete .............................................................................................................................. 130
12.2.9 Grout ..................................................................................................................................... 132
12.3. Part 3 - Execution ........................................................................................................... 132
12.3.1 Detailed Inspection Prior to Site Works ................................................................................ 132
12.3.2 General Requirements.......................................................................................................... 134
12.3.3 Repair of Expansion Joints ................................................................................................... 135
12.3.4 Crack Injection ...................................................................................................................... 136
12.3.5 Crack Filling (Surface) .......................................................................................................... 136
12.3.6 Repair of the Deteriorated / Contaminated Existing Concrete .............................................. 137
12.3.7 Repair Systems .................................................................................................................... 138
Page viii
12.3.8 Sand blasting ........................................................................................................................ 138

12.3.9 Concrete Removal ................................................................................................................ 138
12.3.10 Rebar Repair and Replacement ........................................................................................... 139
12.3.11 Application of Epoxy Fillers ................................................................................................... 139
12.3.12 Application of Epoxy Mortars ................................................................................................ 139
12.3.13 Application of Cementitious Mortars ..................................................................................... 140
12.3.14 Application of Micro-Concrete............................................................................................... 141
12.3.15 Application of Shotcrete ........................................................................................................ 142
12.3.16 Application of Grout .............................................................................................................. 143
12.3.17 Quality Control ...................................................................................................................... 144
op V1
12.3.18 Surface Coating .................................................................................................................... 145
12.3.19 Repair of Settled Elements ................................................................................................... 146
12.4. Part 4 - Structure Protection and Miscellaneous Works .............................................. 146
12.4.1
C -
General ................................................................................................................................. 146
y
12.4.2
C
Rectification of Disorders in Finishes ................................................................................... 147
12.4.3 Rectification of Disorders in Waterproofing Works............................................................... 149
C
12.4.4 Construction of Pavement .................................................................................................... 150
12.4.5 Other Protection and Miscellaneous Work ........................................................................... 151
Q
13. TESTING OF WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES (SECTION 03800) .............................. 153

13.1. Part 1 General ................................................................................................................. 153
13.1.1 Scope .................................................................................................................................... 153
13.1.3 Standards ............................................................................................................................. 153
13.1.4 Submittals ............................................................................................................................. 153
13.1.5 Water .................................................................................................................................... 154
13.1.6 Repair Materials .................................................................................................................... 154
13.2. Part 2 Execution ............................................................................................................. 154
13.2.1 General ................................................................................................................................. 154
13.2.2 Cleaning ................................................................................................................................ 154
13.2.3 Test Preparation ................................................................................................................... 154
13.2.4 Test Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 155
13.2.5 Remedial Work ..................................................................................................................... 156
13.2.1 Disposal of Water Used for Testing...................................................................................... 156
Page ix
LIST OF TABLE
Table 1.3-1: Average air temperature approximately 250 C ............................................................ 8
Table 2.3-1: Concrete Cover to Reinforcement ............................................................................. 14
Table 3.1-1: Ready-mixed concrete ingredients: ........................................................................... 24
Table 3.2-1: Concrete Classification, Mix Design, and Material Specification ............................... 28
Table 3.3-1: Testing frequencies and reference standards for Fresh Concrete. ........................... 38
Table 3.3-2: Testing frequencies and reference standards for Hardened Concrete ...................... 38
Table 7.3-1: Commercial Precast Concrete Yard Check List: ....................................................... 57
Table 7.3-2: Site precast concrete yard check list: ........................................................................ 63
Table 8.2-1: Shotcrete Properties ................................................................................................. 77
Table 8.2-2: Shotcrete Aggregate Grading ................................................................................... 77
op V1
Table 8.2-3: Micro-Concrete Properties ........................................................................................ 78
Table 8.2-4: Epoxy Lining Mortar Properties ................................................................................. 79
Table 9.2-1: Epoxy Coating Requirements ................................................................................... 97
Table 9.2-2: Polyurethane Elastomeric Membrane Requirements ................................................ 98
Table 9.2-3: Physical Properties PVC and HDPE Linings ............................................................. 99
C -
Table 9.2-4: GRP Lining Properties ............................................................................................ 100
y
C
Table 9.2-5: Waterproof Membrane Requirements ..................................................................... 102
Table 10.2-1: Water stops Physical Properties ........................................................................... 113
Table 10.2-2: Self Swelling Water bars Physical Properties........................................................ 114
C
Table 12.2-1: Sieve Size and Passing ........................................................................................ 131
Table 12.3-1: Quality Control ...................................................................................................... 145
Q
Page x
1. CONCRETE FORMWORK (SECTION 03100)

1.1. Part 1 General
01300 Submittals
op V1
01600 Materials and equipment
03300 Cast in-Place Concrete
C -
y
03700 Joints in Concrete
C
1.1.2 References
C
ACI 117-06 Specifications for tolerances for concrete construction and materials
and commentary
Q
ACI 347-04 Guide to formwork for concrete.
BS 5975 Code of practice for falsework.
CIRIA C511 Controlled permeability formwork.
1.1.3 Design Requirements

A. Design Formwork, taking into account the following:
1. Vertical load (Dead load and Live load).

2. Lateral pressure of concrete.
3. Unit stress.
4. Safety factors for accessories.
5. Height and rate of pour.
6. Thickness of member.
7. Placing temperature.
8. Concrete slump and density.
9. Wind load.
10. Impact load
PAGE 1
1.1.4 Performance Requirement

A. Sufficiently rigid and must be designed so that concrete slab, walls, and other
members will be of correct dimensions, shape, alignment, elevation, and position
and within tolerances as specified. Design Formwork to safely support all vertical
and lateral loads that might be applied until such load can be supported by the
concrete structure.

A. Submit to the requirements of Section 01300 - Submittals.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit design calculations sheet and detailed working drawings
op V1
of the proposed formwork for review as follow.
Design calculations sheet includes:
1.
C -
All major design values and loading conditions, include assumed value of
y
live and dead loads; the compressive strength of the concrete for
C
formwork removal and for application of construction loads; wind load;
impact load; rate of placement, temperature, height and drop of concrete;
C
weight of moving equipment operated on formwork; camber diagrams.
Working drawings include:

Q
1. Details of the individual panel.

2. Anchors, form ties, shores, lateral bracing, and horizontal lacing.
3. Field adjustment of forms and tolerance.
4. Water stops, keyways, and inserts.
5. Working scaffolds and runways.
6. Weep holes, cleaning holes and vibratory holes when required.
7. Detailed size, location, and dimension of tendon conduit in post tensioned
concrete structures.
8. Construction joints, contraction joints, and expansion joints to conform to
design drawings.
9. Sequence of concrete placement and minimum elapsed time between
adjacent placements.
10. Notes to formwork erector showing size and location of conduits and pipes
embedded in concrete.
11. Special provisions such as safety, fire, drainage, and protection from
debris at water crossing.
12. Procedures, sequence, and criteria for removal of forms, shores, and
reshores.

A. The design and the erection of the formwork is the responsibility of the contractor.
PAGE 2
B. Design formwork to the correct dimensions, shape, alignment, elevation, and

position.
1.1.7 Job Mock-Up

A. Provide Mock-ups to the requirements of Section 01400 - Quality control.
B. Construct a job mock-up of formwork to a reasonable size include items such as

reinforcement, accessories, expansion and control joints, stiffeners, bracings,
penetrations through concrete, and obtain Engineer’s approval prior to
commencement of related work; columns, slabs, girders and beams, walls, and
staircases.
op V1
C. Upon approval by the Engineer, the job mock-up may remain as part of the
finished work.
1.1.8 Delivery, Storage, and Protection

C -
y
A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products to the requirements of Section
C
01600 - Material and Equipment.
C
B. Store off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from
moisture.
Q

1.2.1 Fabricated Metal from Materials
A. In accordance to manufacturer’s design and instructions and Engineer’s approval.
1.2.2 Formwork Accessories

A. Form Ties: Removable or snap-off type, galvanized metal or plastic, fix or
adjustable length, factory -fabricated, cone ends if required by the drawings.
B. Form Release Agent: Colourless mineral oil, which will not stain concrete, or
absorb moisture, or impair natural bonding or colour characteristics of coating.
C. Corners: Filleted chamfered, rigid plastic or wood strip type; (20x20) mm size on
all exposed corners of finished concrete of columns, walls, and beams unless
otherwise stated in the contract specification.
D. Dovetail Anchor Slot: Galvanized steel, foam filled or non-filled, release tape
sealed slots.
E. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, and Anchorages: Sized as required, of
sufficient strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing
concrete.
F. Water stops: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC).
1 All construction joints and movement joints in water retaining structure

must incorporate water stops.
PAGE 3
2. PVC Water stops:
a. Minimum tensile strength 13.7N/mm2

b. Minimum web thickness without provision for wiring to reinforcement
10 mm.
c. Average web thickness with provision for wiring to reinforcement 4
mm. Provision for wiring to reinforcement shall be with use of brass
eyelets.
d. Site jointing heat welding using apparatus as provided by the water
stop manufacturer.
op V1
e. Elongation at break: Minimum 300%.
3. Minimum width of water stop is 230 mm.
4. Minimum width for surface type water stop is 230 mm with a minimum of
C -
two flange integral ribs to the approval of the engineer.
y
5.
C
All water stop intersections and joints must be factory made.
G. Form Anchors: Factory-fabricated metal. Select form anchors in accordance with

C
the manufacturers publish design data and test information.
Q
H. Form Hanger: Factory-fabricated metal
I. Side form Spacer: Factory-fabricated or job-site fabricated, equivalent to main

body concrete with non-smooth surfaces.
1.2.3 Fabrication
A. Fabricate movement joints water stop into the longest practical units at the
supplier’s works. Ensure that the fabricated water stop is continuous throughout
the structure below highest water level.

1.3.1 Examination
A. Verify lines, levels and centres before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that
dimensions agree with drawings.
1.3.2 Earth Forms

A. Earth forms are not permitted.
1.3.3 Erection - Formwork

A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements.
B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork

subject to overstressing by construction loads.
PAGE 4
C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not

damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores.
D. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum.

E. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members, which are not
indicated on Drawings.
F. Provide fillet and chamfer strips on external exposed corners of beams, joists
columns and slabs.
G. Coordinate this section with other sections of work, which require attachment of
components to formwork.
op V1
H. Formwork placed after reinforcement shall have sufficient concrete cover over
reinforcement before proceeding.
I. Maintain safe working condition for workmen and public during erection.
C -
y
J.
C
Provide top formwork to concrete faces where the slope exceeds 1 in 2.5.
K. Provide a uniform pattern of joint lines to face of concrete when erecting forms.
C
L. Provide a uniform joint with a batter of approved dimension for non-vertical joints
to give a straight and neat joint line.
Q
M. Do not use form supports, which result in holes or tie-wires extended through the
full width of a member.
N. Where part of a metal tie remains embedded in concrete, it shall not have less
cover than reinforcement. Fill holes with concrete or mortar.
O. Position chamfer-moulding strips on exposed corners.
P. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces receive special finishes
or coating, which may be affected by agent.
1.3.4 Construction Joints

A. Form construction joints as required in slabs and beams at the quarter point of the
span and at right angles to the member except where otherwise approved by the
Engineer. Where slabs are supported by beams, construct both beams and slabs
in one operation.
B. In all cases, provide vertical stop boards at the end of each section of work, which
is to be concreted in one operation. Thoroughly compact concrete against these
stop boards.
C. Construct construction joint panels consecutively where slabs, beams and walls
incorporate. Where this is not possible, form a gap not exceeding 1 meter
between adjacent panels. Do not concrete the gap until a minimum interval of 7
days has expired since the casting of the most recent adjacent panel.
PAGE 5
D. The size of bays for reinforced floors walls and roofs shall not exceed 7.5 meters
in either direction or 6 meters when unreinforced or with nominal reinforcement.
E. Provide construction joints of plain butt type or rebated type as directed or

F. Expose the aggregates at the construction joint of the freshly poured concrete
over the full section to provide have a sound irregular surface by means of water
spray and light brushing or other means approved by the Engineer prior to placing
new concrete against it.
G. Thoroughly clean away all foreign matter, moisten the surface immediately before
op V1
placing the new concrete.
H. Provide water stops to construction joints in water retaining structures.
I. Ensure that all such construction joints are watertight and any joints, which may
C -
leak or weep to be rectified to the Engineer's satisfaction.
y
J.
C
If during the course of the Contract it should become apparent that the
Contractor's methods of forming construction joints are not proving effective the
C
Engineer may order the Contractor to execute at the Contractor's expense such
preventative measures, as the Engineer may consider necessary to ensure the
Q
water tightness of construction joints in further work.
1.3.5 Movement Joints

A. Construct movement joints for expansion and contraction in accordance with the
details and to the dimensions shown on the drawings or where otherwise ordered
by the Engineer.
B. Pay particular attention to the effect of climatic extremes on any material used in
any movement joint. Submit for the approval of the Engineer your proposals for
the proper handling and use of the said materials having due regard for any
recommendations made by manufacturers.
C. Incorporate water stops into all expansion and contraction joints of structures,
which retain liquid, or any structures below water level.
1. Do not use different types of water stop material together in any complete
installation.
2. For horizontally placed surface type water stop, use water stop of an
interposing sliding plate.
3. Maintain water stops carefully in the position shown on the drawings.
Support the water stop on accurately profiled stop boards to create rigid
conditions.
D. Fix the joint filler to the required dimensions of the joint cross section. Provide a
firm base for the joint sealer. Where the depth of joint between the concrete
surface and the water stop does not exceed 500 mm place filler in a single pieces.
E. Carry out the sealing of movement joints only when adjacent concrete surfaces
are perfectly dry.
PAGE 6
F. Clean the joint grooves, insert a bond breaker, and adequately prime and fill the
groove with approved sealer strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
G. Store the sealer in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Do not use
sealer after its shelf life has elapsed.
1.3.6 Application - form Release Agent

A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded
op V1
items.
C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special
finishes or applied coatings, which are effected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of
C -
untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of
y
concrete.
C
1.3.7 Inserts, Embedded Parts, and Openings
C
A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded or pass
through concrete work.
Q
B. Locate and set in place items which will be cast directly into concrete.
C. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots,
regrets, recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other
Work.
D. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, straight, level,
and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.
E. Install water stops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions continuous
without displacing reinforcement.
F. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate
cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing
water to drain.
G. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms,
and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces.
H. Do not allow form support ties, bolts and other devices to be embedded in the
concrete without prior approval from the Engineer.
1. Ensure that the embedded portions of the ties in concrete have a minimum
cover of that to the reinforcement.
1.3.8 Form Cleaning

A. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms.
B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete.
PAGE 7
C. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter.
Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.
1.3.9 Formwork Tolerances

A. Formwork shall be fixed in perfect alignment and to the true shape and dimension
for the permanent work shown on the Drawings.

A. Field inspection and testing to the requirements of Section 01400 - Quality
Control.
op V1
B. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in
accordance with formwork design, and that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties,
and items are secure.
C. Do not reuse damaged wood formwork for concrete surfaces exposed to view. Do
C -
not patch formwork.
y
C
1.3.11 Form Removal
C
A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to
carry its own weight and imposed loads.
Q
B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish
concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view.
C. Store removed forms in manner that surfaces to be in contact with fresh concrete
will not be damaged. Discard damaged forms.
D. Do not remove formwork without the approval of the engineer.
E. No claim for delay of work will be considered if the Engineer requires to delay the
removal of the formwork for a period of time not exceeding 28 day on account of
the weather or other reasons such as a transference of loading on the newly
completed work that might occur on the removal of any timbers or supports struts
waling’s or soldiers.
1.3.12 Removal of Formwork

Table 1.3-1: Average air temperature approximately 250 C
Removal of formwork to: Minimum period prior to Removal

Slab and beam sides walls and unloaded columns 1 Day
Slab and beam soffits props left in position 7 Days
Removal of props to slab and beam soffits 14 Days
END OF SECTION
PAGE 8
2. CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT (SECTION 03200)
2.1. Part 1 General

2.1.1 Scope
A. This section of the specification gives the requirements for concrete
reinforcement, fabrication and placing.
op V1
01300 Submittals
01600
C -
Materials and equipment
y
2.1.3 Standards
C
C
All activities relating to this section of the specification shall comply with the following
or approved equal standards.
Q
ASTM A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel

Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A775 Standard specification for epoxy coated reinforcing steel bars.
BS 4449 Specification for carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of
concrete.
BS 4483 Steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete.
BS 8666 Specification for scheduling, dimensioning, bending and
cutting of steel reinforcement for concrete.
2.1.4 Submittals
A. Products and materials approval.
In order to verify compliance with the specification the Contractor shall submit
program allowing for ordering and approval times. Reference shall also be made
to Section 01600 of the specification on products and materials approval.
1. Manufacturer’s mill certificates with results of chemical composition,

tensile properties, elongation, bend and re-bend tests shall be provided for
each heat in each consignment of reinforcement.
2. Manufacturer’s certificate of compliance for each delivery of reinforcement

showing manufacturer’s name and including details of:
PAGE 9
a. Chemical and physical properties of the reinforcement.
b. Carbon equivalent value.
c. Results of tensile tests bend and re-bend tests, including the effective
cross sectional area for tensile tests.
d. Bond classification of deformed bar reinforcement and of fabric

reinforcement.
e. Results of bond performance tests for deformed bar reinforcement

and for fabric reinforcement.
op V1
f. Results of weld tests for fabric reinforcement.
3. Manufacturer’s certificate of compliance for each delivery of epoxy coated

(or other), where specified by drawings/Engineer, reinforcement showing
manufacturer’s name and including results of tests for:
C -
y
a. Thickness of coating.
C
b. Chemical resistance.
C
c. Resistance to applied voltage.
Q
d. Chloride permeability.
e. Adhesion of coating.
f. Bond strength to concrete.
g. Abrasion resistance.
h. Impact resistance.
i. Hardness.
4. Where Epoxy coating is specified by drawings/Engineer, the factory must

retain test results for seven years and they should be available to the
Division upon request.
5. Where Epoxy coating material is specified by drawings/Engineer, the intended

for use to repair damaged epoxy coated reinforcement.
6. Spacers.
7. Mechanical splicing devices.
B. Method statements.
The Contractor shall submit method statements to the Engineer for approval
Four (4) weeks in advance of commencing the site activity in accordance with
Section 01600 of t h e specification. These shall comprise but not necessarily
be limited to:
1. Proposals for cleaning reinforcement from any deleterious material
PAGE 10
before fabrication commences.
2. Proposals for welding connections between reinforcing bars including

epoxy coated bars where specified. Certificates for welders shall be
provided and verified by a recognized authority.
C. Drawings
The Contractor shall submit drawings to the Engineer for approval in advance of
1. Detailed fabrication and placement drawings for all reinforcement

indicating:
op V1
a. Layout of the individual panels.
b. Plans and sections showing bar sizes, spacing, splicing locations,

position of construction joints and control joints.
C -
y
c. Quantities of reinforcing steel and wire fabric, bending and cutting
C
schedules in accordance with BS 8666.
d. Supporting and spacing devices and notes to reinforcement erector
C
showing size and location of embedded conduits, pipes and sleeves.
D. Samples
Q
Representative samples, as agreed with the Engineer, must be submitted for all
reinforcement that the Contractor proposes to use in the Works, at the same
time as the particulars are submitted.

opportunity to inspect and test the product and / or material prior to delivery in
B. Products and materials shall be from a manufacturer/supplier that operates a

quality system, which is registered to ISO 9000 series, or approved equal.
C. To allow the Engineer to inspect the Works, the Contractor shall give the Engineer
a minimum 24-hour notice to carrying out the following activities on site:
1. Commencement of fixing of steel reinforcement to allow inspection of

formwork.
2. Completion of fixing of steel reinforcement for final approval by the

Engineer prior to concreting.
D. The Engineer shall have access to the fabrication plant for inspection and
verification of length, size and bending of steel reinforcement as indicated in the
bending schedules. Advance notice of the date of commencement and duration of
shop fabrication shall be provided by the Contractor.
PAGE 11
E. The Engineer reserves the right to sample and test each batch of reinforcement
upon its arrival at the work site.
1. The following tests shall be carried out for each delivery of reinforcement,
to the procedures and frequencies given in BS 4499 unless otherwise
a. Mass per unit length.
b. Ultimate tensile strength.
c. Yield stress.
d. Elongation.
op V1
e. Bend and rebind test.
2. Test results for each bar diameter shall be submitted to the Engineer
Three (3) weeks before concrete works commences on site.
C -
y
Reinforcement not meeting the required standards shall be removed from
C
site at the Contractor’s expense.
3. Further tests may be called for, at the Contractor’s expense, if the source
C
of supply of reinforcement changes.
Q

with the manufacturer’s recommendations, Section 01300 of the specification and
the following provisions:
1. Every delivery of steel reinforcement shall be legibly tagged by the

manufacturer.
a. The tag shall show the manufacturers test number, batch number
and other applicable data that will identify the material with the
corresponding certificate issued for that batch of steel.
b. Steel reinforcement shall be delivered clean and free of rust.
2. Store steel reinforcement at all stages on suitable supports a minimum of

200mm above the ground surface or as directed by the Engineer and in such
a manner that permits easy access for inspection and identification.
3. All steel reinforcement shall be covered with suitable canvas tarpaulins.

Plastic sheeting is not allowed.
4. Steel reinforcement shall not be rough handled, dropped from a height or

subject to shock loading or mechanical damage.
5. Equipment handling for epoxy coated reinforcement if specified shall be

adequately padded to prevent damage to coating and the reinforcement shall
be adequately supported to prevent bar to bar abrasion from sags in the
bundle when lifting.
6. Provide tags for all bundles of reinforcement and include bar schedule and
PAGE 12
bar mark reference after bending. The bundle tag shall be traceable back to
the manufacturer’s consignment.

2.2.1 Steel Reinforcement
A. Steel reinforcement shall conform to BS 4449 unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
B. Deformed high yield bars shall have yield strength of 460N/mm2 and shall be
classified as Type 2 unless otherwise specified.
op V1
C. Welded steel wire fabric reinforcement shall conform to BS 4483.
D. Where specified by drawings/Engineer, epoxy coating to steel reinforcement shall

be in accordance with ASTM A775.
1.
C -
The coating shall be applied by the electrostatic spray method at a
y
C
factory approved by the Engineer.
2. The film thickness of the coating after curing shall be at least 0.15mm and
C
shall not exceed 0.25mm over the complete periphery including
deformations and ribs. The bond classification of coated bars to concrete
determined in bond performance tests shall not be less than that of
Q
uncoated bars.
2.2.2 Accessories
A. Tie wires shall be 1.6mm diameter soft annealed steel wires. For epoxy-coated
reinforcement, this shall be PVC coated.
B. Steel chairs, bolsters and bar supports shall be of sufficient size, shape and
strength to provide adequate support to steel reinforcement during placement of
concrete.
C. Spacers shall be made of concrete, plastic or other material as approved by the

Engineer. Concrete spacers shall have the same or greater strength as the
surrounding concrete and have an embedded plastic coated tie wire.

2.3.1 Fabrication
A. Bend all steel reinforcement bars cold, to the forms and the dimensions shown on
the drawings and in accordance with BS 8666 or approved equal.
B. Steel reinforcement shall not be flame cut or hand bent.
C. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on drawings, at point of minimum stress.

Review location of splices with Engineer and ensure that the minimum lap length
is provided.
PAGE 13
D. Rebinding of incorrectly bent bars shall not be permitted without the approval of
the Engineer.
2.3.2 Repairs to Epoxy Coated Reinforcement, if Epoxy is specified

A. If the coating to epoxy coated reinforcement is delaminated, split at any point or
otherwise damaged then that part of the reinforcement shall not be used in the
permanent work unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer that the damage is
minimal and can be repaired in a manner to be approved by the Engineer.
2.3.3 Placement
op V1
A. All steel reinforcement shall be securely and accurately fixed in position as shown
on the drawings and supported to ensure that the reinforcement cage as a whole
shall retain its shape and correct position in the forms during the process of
depositing and compacting the concrete.
C -
y
B. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcement to within + or - 5mm of the values
C
given in Table 2.3-1 below.
C
Table 2.3-1: Concrete Cover to Reinforcement
Table 1 - Concrete Cover To Reinforcement

Q
Concrete cover to Reinforcement Minimum cover
External work, work against earth faces 75mm

and in liquid retaining structures.
External work in a tidal environment and 75mm

concrete placed in or under water.
Internal work in non-liquid retaining

structures.
Walls, beams and columns. 50mm to the nearest bar including links
Slab reinforcement. 30mm to ball bars or diameter of the

largest bar whichever is the greater.
Distance between parallel bars. 25mm or the diameter of the largest bar
whichever is the greater.
C. Turn ends of the wires into the main body of the concrete. Do not allow tie wire to
project towards the surface.
D. Place chairs, bolsters, or bar supports between parallel layers of steel

reinforcement in slabs.
E. Place spacers against steel reinforcement to separate layers of reinforcement

from concrete blinding and formwork.
F. Do not use shapes of steel reinforcement not shown on the drawings.
PAGE 14
G. Where epoxy coated reinforcement is specified provide adequate scaffolding

system to ensure that the coating is not damaged during fixing and concreting.
H. Welding of steel reinforcement shall not be carried out unless authorized by the
Engineer.
I. Mechanical splices shall only be used as indicated on the drawings or as

authorized by the Engineer.
J. Steel reinforcement shall be fixed so that it does not come into contact with other
non-ferrous or dissimilar metals.
K. Do not damage forms or linings when fixing steel reinforcement.
op V1
L. Do not fix reinforcement above membranes applied to blinding and other
horizontal surfaces until cement mortar screed protection has been applied.
C -
M. Protect exposed steel reinforcement from all aggressive elements.
y
C
2.3.4 Cleaning and Adjustment of Reinforcement
A. At the time of concreting, all steel reinforcement shall be thoroughly cleaned and
C
freed from all loose rust, loose mill scale, oil, grease, mud, paint and other
deleterious material to the satisfaction of the Engineer including partially set
Q
concrete which may have been deposited during the placing of a previous lift of
concrete.
B. Immediately prior to concrete placing, all reinforcing steel shall be thoroughly

washed with high pressure potable water jets and shall be free off and corrosion
product.
C. Check position of steel reinforcement during concreting operations and if

movement is observed adjust to the satisfaction of the Engineer or stop
concreting.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 15
3. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (SECTION 03300)

3.1. Part 1 General
01300 Submittals
op V1
03100 Concrete Formwork
C -
y
C
03700 Joints in Concrete
C
3.1.2 References
Q
ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
ASTM C920 Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
ASTM D994 Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous

Type)
ASTM D1751 Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and
Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)
ASTM D1752 Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers
for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
BS 4254 Specification for two-part poly-sulphide-base sealants
BS 5215 Specification for one-part gun grade poly-sulphide-base sealants
BS 8110-1 Structural Use of Concrete: Code of practice for design and

construction
1. Cement
A. ASTM C150 Specification for Portland Cement
B. BS EN 197-1 Cement. Composition, specifications and conformity

criteria for common cements.
C. BS 410 Specification for Test Sieves
D. BS 4027 Specification for sulfate-resisting Portland cement.
PAGE 16
E. BS 4550-0 Methods of testing cement. General introduction.
F. BS 4550-3.1 Methods of testing cement. Physical tests. Introduction.
G. BS 4550-3.4 Methods of testing cement. Physical tests. Strength

tests.
H. BS 4550-3.8 Methods of testing cement. Physical tests. Test for

heat of hydration.
I. BS 4550-6 Methods of testing cement. Standard sand for mortar

cubes.
2. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBS)
op V1
A. BS 6699 Specification for ground granulated blast furnace slag
for use with Portland cement.
3. Pulverized Fuel Ash (PFA)
C -
y
A.
C
BS 3892-1 Pulverized-fuel ash. Specification for pulverized- fuel
ash for use with Portland cement
C
B. BS EN 450 Fly ash for concrete. Definition, requirements and
quality control
4. Silica Fume
Q
a. ASTM C1240 Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in

Cementitious Mixtures
5. Aggregates
A. ASTM C88 Standard test method for soundness of aggregates by

use of sodium sulfate or magnesium sulfate.
B. ASTM C123 Standard test method for lightweight particles in

aggregate.
C. ASTM C127 Standard test method for density, relative density

(specific gravity) and absorption of coarse aggregate.
D. ASTM C128 Standard test method for density, relative density

(specific gravity) and absorption of fine aggregate.
E. ASTM C131 Standard test method for resistance to degradation of

small size coarse aggregate by abrasion and impact in
the Los Angeles machine.
F. ASTM C142 Standard test method for clay lumps and friable
particles in aggregates.
G. ASTM C227 Standard test method for Test for potential alkali
reactivity of cement-aggregate combinations. (mortar
bar method)
PAGE 17
H. ASTM C289 Standard test method for potential alkali-silica reactivity

of aggregates. (chemical method)
I. ASTM C535 Standard test method for Resistance to Degradation of

Large size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and impact
in the Los Angeles Machine
J. ASTM C1260 Standard test method for potential alkali reactivity of

aggregates. (mortar-bar method)
K. BS 812-105.1 Testing aggregates. Methods for determination of

particle shape. Flakiness index.
op V1
L. BS 812-105.2 Testing aggregates. Methods for determination of
particle shape. Elongation index of coarse aggregate.
M. BS 812-109 Testing aggregates. Methods for determination of

moisture content.
C -
y
N.
C
BS 812-112 Testing aggregates. Method for determination of
aggregate impact value.
C
O. BS 882 Specification for Aggregates from Natural Sources for
Concrete
Q
P. BS EN 933-1 Tests for geometrical properties of aggregates.

Determination of particle size distribution. Sieving
method.
Q. BS EN 933-2 Tests for geometrical properties of aggregates.

Determination of particle size distribution. Test sieves,
nominal size of apertures.
R. BS EN 933-7 Tests for geometrical properties of aggregates.

Determination of shell content. Percentage of shells in
coarse aggregates.
S. BS EN 1367-4 Tests for thermal and weathering properties of

aggregates. Determination of drying shrinkage.
T. BS EN 1744-1 Tests for chemical properties of aggregates. Chemical

analysis.
U. BS EN 12620 Aggregates for concrete.
6. Concrete admixtures
A. ASTM C494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
B. BS EN 480-1 Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Test

methods. Reference concrete and reference mortar for
testing.
C. BS EN 480-2 Admixtures for concrete mortar and grout. Test

methods. Determination of setting time
PAGE 18
D. BS EN 480-4 Admixtures for concrete mortar and grout. Test

methods. Determination of bleeding of concrete.
E. BS EN 480-5 Admixtures for concrete mortar and grout. Test

methods. Determination of capillary absorption.
F. BS EN 480-6 Admixtures for concrete mortar and grout. Test

methods. Infrared analysis.
G. BS EN 480-8 Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Test

methods. Determination of the conventional dry
material content.
op V1
H. BS EN 480-10 Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Test
methods. Determination of water soluble chloride
content.
I. BS EN 480 11 Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Test
C - methods. Determination of air void characteristics in
y
C hardened concrete.
J. BS EN 480-12 Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Test

C
methods. Determination of the alkali content of
admixtures.
Q
K. BS 5075 Concrete admixture
7. Water
A. ASTM D512 Standard test methods for chloride ion in water.
B. ASTM D513 Standard test methods for total and dissolved carbon
dioxide in water.
C. ASTM D516 Standard test method for sulfate in water.
D. BS 3148 Methods of test for water for making concrete.
E. DIN 1048-5 Testing Concrete – Water Permeability
8. Concrete
A. ACI 301 Structural Concrete for Buildings
B. ACI 304 Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing,

Transporting and Placing Concrete
C. ACI 305R Hot Weather Concreting
D. ACI 308 Standard Practices for Curing Concrete
E. ASTM C33 Specifications for Concrete Aggregate
F. ASTM C94 Ready-Mixed Concrete
PAGE 19
G. ASTM C138 Standard test method for density (unit weight), yield
and air content (gravimetric) of concrete.
H. ASTM C143 Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement

Concrete
I. ASTM C173 Standard test method for air content of freshly mixed
concrete by the volumetric method.
J. ASTM C231 Standard test method for air content of freshly mixed
concrete by the pressure method.
K. ASTM C232 Standard test methods for bleeding of concrete.
op V1
L. ASTM C497M Standard test methods for concrete pipe, manhole
sections, or tile. (Metric version)
M. ASTM C1064 Standard test method for temperature of freshly mixed
C - hydraulic-cement concrete.
y
N.
C
ASTM C1202 Standard test method for electrical indication of
concrete’s ability to resist chloride ion penetration.
C
O. BS 1704 Specification for Soiled-stem general purpose
thermometers
Q
P. BS 1881 Testing Concrete
Part 101 - Method of sampling fresh concrete on site.
Part 102 - Method for determination of slump.
Part 103 - Method for determination of compacting factor.
Part 114 – Method for determination of density of hardened concrete.
Part 115 – Specification for Compression testing machines for

concrete.
Part 116 – Method of determination of compressive strength of

concrete cubes.
Q. BS 5328 Specification for the procedures to be used in

sampling, testing, and assessing compliance of
concrete
R. BS EN 206-1 Concrete. Specification, performance, production and

conformity
S. BS EN 12350-2 Testing fresh concrete. Slump test.
T. BS EN 12350-6 Testing fresh concrete. Density.
PAGE 20
U. BSEN12390-2 Testing hardened concrete. Making and curing

specimens for strength tests
V. BS EN 12390-3 Testing hardened concrete. Compressive strength of

test specimens
1) BS EN 12309-7 Testing hardened concrete. Density of

hardened concrete
W. BS EN 12390-8 Testing hardened concrete. Depth of

penetration of water under pressure.
op V1
1) BS EN 12504-1 Testing concrete in structures. Cored
specimens. Taking, examining and testing in
compression.
X. C -
DIN 4235 Compacting Concrete by Vibrating
y
C
9. Curing compounds
C
A. ASTM C309 Standard specification for liquid membrane forming
compounds for curing concrete.
Q
10. General
A. ISO 9000 Quality management systems

A. Design a mix for each grade of concrete as indicated in Section 03300 to be used
throughout the course of work.
B. Use concrete class A, or B, or C for different type of concrete works as indicated

in table 03300-01 unless otherwise noted elsewhere.
C. Maintain and control the water content in the concrete mix to the minimum
required to obtain a workable concrete suitable for the nature of the work to be
executed. Ensure that the free water cement ratio does not exceed 0.45 for Class
A concrete and B concrete and 0.5 for Class C concrete.
D. Ensure that the addition of proprietary admixtures intended to change the flow
characteristics cohesion or rate of setting of the concrete should not be made
without the approval of the Engineer. Ensure that the chloride content is NIL to BS
5075.
E. Ensure that the concrete mixes are to produce concrete cube strength at 28 days
of not less than 40 MPa for grade C40 concrete and 20 MPa for grade C20
concrete together with all other property requirement.
F. Produce a workable non-segregated concrete when handled, transported and

compacted.
PAGE 21

1. Submit concrete mix design on S.S.D. basis for each class of concrete to
be used for the specific project. Include:
a. Name and qualification of the supplier.

b. Location of the supplier plant.
c. Certification of quality assurance.
d. Quality control facility.
op V1
e. Mix design ingredients and its proportion.
f. Certificate and test reports on concrete ingredient.
g. Sources of concrete ingredients.
h. Production capacity.
C -
y
i.
C
C.V. of the quality control personnel.
B. Product Data: Provide data on concrete ingredient, attachment accessories, and

C
admixtures
Q
C. Method of statement: Submit method statement during the mobilization period,

detailing the proposals for the organization of concrete activities on site.
1. Plant proposed.
2. Layout of concrete production facility.
3. Proposed method of organization of the concrete production facility.
4. Quality control procedures for concrete and concrete materials.
5. Transport and placing of concrete.
6. Details of formwork and procedure of temporary support for beams and

slabs.
D. Submit quality assurance and quality control plan and procedures for the ready
mix plant proposed to use for the specific job.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and

interface required with adjacent Work.
C. Manufacturer's Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification of compliance for

each consignment of cement certifying compliance with the relative standard.
PAGE 22

A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
B. Submit accurate record and as-built drawings of embedded utilities and
components, which are concealed from view.

A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301.
C. Acquire cement and aggregate from same source for all work.
op V1
D. Conform to ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
E. Develop and observe strict quality control procedures.
C -
3.1.8 Qualifications of Off-Site Ready-Mix Plant
y
A.
C
All ready-mix plant must be off-site commercial plant unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer or allowed in the contract document.
C
B. Aggregate bins compartments must adequately separate the different type of
aggregates.
Q
C. Ready-mix plant must contain a mechanical batching mixer approved by the

Engineer.
D. Ready-mix plant must have cement and aggregates weight batchers.
1. Submit recent certified calibrations for weight batching systems.

2. Perform calibration tests for the weight batching systems as requested by
the engineer.
E. Ready-mix plant must have a computerized batching system with print out as per
the latest requirements of Abu Dhabi Municipality and a delivery ticket, which must
print out the minimum following information:
1. Name of batching plant

2. Serial number of the ticket
3. Date
4. Name of purchaser
5. Project designation
6. Class or designation of concrete
7. Weights and quantities of each concrete ingredient
8. Time of loading
9. Time of departure
10. Amount of concrete batched
PAGE 23
11. Type and amount of admixture

12. Slump at plant and site
13. Proposed concrete strength
14. Vehicle number
15. Driver’s name
16. Concrete Temperature at plant and site
17. Time of adding water for the first time in the mix.
F. The Ready-mix plant must be equipped with separate automatic dosing
dispensers for each type of admixture, and feeds a fixed quantity of additive into
op V1
the mixing water before the water is discharged into the mix.
G. The batching plant shall comply with the following tolerance limits for ready-mixed
concrete ingredients:
C - Table 3.1-1: Ready-mixed concrete ingredients:
y
C
No Ingredients Individual Batch (%) Load Cumulative (%)
C
1 Coarse aggregate (20mm) ±2 ±1
2 Coarse aggregate (10mm) ±2 ±1
Q
3 Fine aggregate (5mm) ±2 ±1

4 Dune Sand ±2 ±1
5 Cement ±2 ±1
6 Water ±1 ±1
7 Ice ±1 ±1
8 Liquid Admixture(s) ±3 ±3
H. Plant must be equipped with a sufficient capacity water chillier capable of

maintaining the water temperature in the water storage tank to 5oC during the hot
weather. There shall be facilities to monitor the temperature of cement in the silos
and water.
I. Plant must have an automatic computer controlled flaked ice supply.
J. Qualified personnel at the ready-mix plant.
K. Sufficient number of concrete mixing trucks and concrete pumps capable to

maintain the smooth flow of the concrete to the job site during the concrete pours.
L. A fully equipped testing laboratory.
M. Back up facilities.
3.1.9 Mock-Up
A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Requirements for mock-up.
PAGE 24
B Construct and erect a field sample for architectural concrete surfaces receiving
special treatment or special formwork finish.
C. Sample Panel: Sufficient size to indicate special treatment or finish required.

Include all items such as stiffeners, sheet, ties, etc.
D. If requested by Engineer, cast concrete against sample panel. Obtain acceptance
of resultant surface finish prior to erecting formwork.
E. Accepted sample panel is considered basis of quality for the finished work. Keep
sample panel exposed to view for duration of concrete work.
F. Mock-up may remain as part of the work with the approval of the Engineer.
op V1
3.1.10 Delivery and Storage
A. Material and Equipment: Transport, handle, store, and protect products to the
requirements of Section 01600.
C -
y
B. Storage of cement, aggregates, and admixtures.
C
1. Cement:
C
a. Store and protect cement from deterioration and contamination.
b. Store above the ground in filtered or an approved ventilation dust
Q
control dry waterproofed silos.

c. Provide separate cement silos for each consignment of cement. Do
not mix cement consignments.
d. Maintain the temperature of cement in the silo at less than 45 degrees
C. This can be accomplished be shading the silos and painting white
to reflect sunrays.
e. Store bagged cement above ground on wooden slats or duckboards
to allow the efficient circulation of air around the bags in a dry
waterproofed storage facility.
2. Aggregates:
a. Store in a special bin or on a specially prepared shaded and covered

concrete platform. The heap of the aggregate must be capable of
draining freely.
b. Maintain a separate storage facility for different type or grade of
aggregates. Prevent contamination of aggregates.
3. Admixtures: Store in waterproofed shaded closed container fitted with a

circulation pump.
3.1.11 Preliminary Mix Tests

A. Perform preliminary mix tests before commencement of the main concreting
operation.
B. Determine for each class of concrete, minimum water-cement ratio, and the actual
mix proportions of the fine and coarse aggregates required.
PAGE 25
C. Determine accurately the weight of materials in the preliminary mix test,

allowances must be made for the moisture content of the aggregates.
D. Test the preliminary mix design for strength and workability.
E. Repeat and adjust proportions of the preliminary mixes as necessary until

concrete mixes meet the relevant requirements.
3.1.12 Concrete Trial Mixes

A. Perform and test concrete trial mixes of concrete in the presence of the Engineer
after preliminary mix tests have been completed and when the Engineer has
approved the mix design for each class of concrete.
op V1
B. Ensure that the trial mixes of concrete is made in accordance with BS 1881. Mix
and handle and test trial mixes under full-scale site conditions by means of the
same plant as proposed to use in the Works.
C.
C -
Test trial mixes test results to determine to the following:
y
1.
C
Durability of the concrete mixes (Water permeability to DIN 1048)
2. Free water-cement ratio.
C
3. Workability.
4. Wet and dry density.
Q
5. Crushing strength.
6. Bleed.
7. Water Absorption
8. Air Content
D. Submit the test report of trial mix test results and include the following:
1. Slump.
2. Strength at 7 days and 28 days.
3. Maximum aggregate size.
4. Unit weight of concrete mix.
5. Free water-cement ratio, water content, and water adjustment.
6. Type of cement and dose.
7. Gradation of coarse and fine aggregate.
8. Combined coarse and fine aggregate ratio.
9. Ratio of the fine to coarse aggregate.
10. Percentage of absorption for coarse and fine aggregate, based on
saturated surface dry material.
11. Volume of batch for trial mix.
12. Results of the permeability, Bleed & Water Absorption tests.
E. Make a minimum of two separate batches of concrete for each class of concrete.
Make a minimum of one set of cubes for each batch.
PAGE 26
F. Repeat and adjust proportions of the mixes as necessary for each class of
concrete until the trial mixes meet the relevant requirements.
3.1.13 Concrete under Water

A. Ensure that the actual mix proportions and selection of aggregates for concrete to
be placed in or under water will result in a concrete with a good flow and cohesion
characteristics.
B. Provide the concrete for under water including piles with cement content of 10%
greater than for a comparable mix for use in dry conditions. Use a mix designs
capable of producing minimum works cube strength for all concrete as given in
Section 03300 for the comparable mixes for use in dry conditions.
op V1
C. The slump of the concrete must not be less than 125 mm when tested in the dry
condition in accordance with BS 1881.

C -
y
C
A. Cement: Comply with ASTM C150 Type I & Type II – Ordinary Portland Cement
C
and Moderate Sulphate Resisting Cement, respectively.
Q
1. Use Type I Ordinary Portland cement throughout the works except for the
substructures, piling and sanitary related structure where moderate
sulphates-resisting cement type II shall be used unless otherwise stated
on the contract documents or drawings or dependent on soil conditions as
determined by the Engineer.
B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: Shall be examined for classification by petro
graphical examination and shall comply with the requirements of Section 02207
and the following:
1. Hard strong and durable. Contain no harmful material in sufficient quantity

to affect adversely the strength or the durability of the concrete or in the
case of reinforced concrete to attack the reinforcement.
2. Clay, silt and dust shall be to the minimum level acceptable in accordance
with BS 882.
3. Coarse aggregates: Crushed quarried gabbro type, or limestone that
meets the physical requirements and chemical properties specified
hereinafter.
4. Fine aggregates: Natural gabbro sand or Crushed quarried gabbro or lime
stone types that meet the physical requirements and physical properties
specified hereinafter.
5 Physical requirement:
a. Weight of voided shells in fine aggregates not to exceed 3 percent.
b. Clay, silts, and dust content not to exceed the following limits:
 Coarse aggregates 1 percent by weight.
PAGE 27
 Crushed stone sands 5 percent by weight.
 Natural sands 3 percent by weight.
c. Combined Flakiness index of coarse aggregates not to exceed 35

percent as determined in accordance with BS 812
d. Combined Elongation index of coarse aggregates not to exceed 35

percent as determined in accordance with BS 812.
e. Absorption of fine and coarse aggregates not to exceed 2.5 percent

as determined in accordance with BS 812.
op V1
f. 10% fines value of coarse aggregates shall not be less than 75kN as
determined in accordance with BS 812-111.
g. Los Angeles abrasion value shall not exceed 30% as determined to

ASTM C131 or C535.
C -
y
h.
C
Nominal size of coarse aggregates except otherwise stated in the
contract document to be as follow:
C
 Concrete class 'A' 10 mm.
 Concrete class 'B' 20 mm.

Q
 Concrete class 'C' (unreinforced) 20 mm.
C. Water: Comply with the requirement of BS 3148.
1. Potable, clean, fresh, and free from sand grit and all mater, this is
detrimental to concrete.
2. PH of water in concrete work not be less than 5 and no more than 9.
3. The maximum content of acid soluble chlorides (as NaCl) in any concrete
mix not to exceed 0.4 % by weight of cement.
Table 3.2-1: Concrete Classification, Mix Design, and Material Specification
No Item Class of concrete

A B C
1 Typical applications Reinforced Unreinforced
Precast Anchor blocks Circular Infilling soft areas
Work shafts
Slabs  and over break.
Slabs < 250mm thick Blinding & pipe
200mm thick
surround
Columns and
beams.
2 Grade C40 C20
2
3 Minimum Cube Strength N/mm
PAGE 28

A B C
7 Days 30 min 15
28 Days 40 min 20
4 Cement
Type Above GL OPC
Below GL MSRC MSRC
Content Minimum 390 250

3
op V1
Kg/m Maximum 450 325
Age >
| 3 months
5 Aggregate
Nominal Size(mm) 10 20
C -
y
% Fine 30-45 45-55
Combined
C
Flakiness >
| 35%
Index
C
Combined Elongation >
| 35%
Index
Q
10% fines value ≥75kN

>
Los Angeles abrasion >
| 30%
value
Grading Fine >
| 10% > 5mm
Coarse >
| 5% > 10mm >
| 5% > 20mm >
| 10% < 5mm
>
| 10% < 5mm
Clay Lumps (by Fine >
| 3% Coarse >
| 1% by Weight
weight)
Absorption >
| 2.5%
Voided Shells >
| 3.0%
Chlorides Fine >
| 0.06% Coarse >
| 0.03%
Sulphates >
/ 0.4%
Soundness Loss of Na3SO4 >
| 10% & MgSO4 >
| 15%
Alkali Reaction None
Thermal Expansion >
| Low
Friable Particles (by Fine >
| 1% Course >
| 0.5% by Weight
weight)
6 Water
Free Water/Cement >
| 0.40 >
| 0.5
Ratio
Ph 7 < pH < 9
Chlorides >
| 0.025%
PAGE 29

A B C
Sulphates >
| 0.035%
Alkali Carbonates & >
| 0.05%
Bicarbonates
TDS >
| 0.2%
7 Density
Minimum Kg/m3 2400 2300
8 Slump To be determined during design mix tests but normal range 75-
op V1
125mm
9 Admixtures Strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s N/A
instructions with CaCl2 content zero
10 Temperature
Cement
C - | 45oc when entering mixers
>
y
Concrete
C | 32oc
At Placement >
Shade | 40oc & Rising or < 43oc & Falling
>
C
11 Quality Control on fresh and hardened concrete in accordance with clause 3.10 of this
section
Q
3.2.2 Admixtures
A. Chemical: ASTM C494 and BS 5075.
1. Do not use admixtures containing chlorides.

2. Use water reducing admixture, retarding admixture, and accelerating
admixture in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
3. Conduct trial mixes in the presence of the Engineer and the manufacturer
representative.
4. Do not use admixture together with other admixture in the same mix.
5. Do not use admixture intended to change the flow characteristics,
cohesion or rate of setting of the concrete without the approval of the
Engineer.
3.2.3 Accessories
A. Bonding Agent: Polymer resin emulsion, Polyvinyl Acetate, Latex emulsion, two
component modified epoxy resin, Non-solvent two-component polysulfide epoxy,
Mineral filled polysulfide polymer epoxy, Mineral filled polysulfide polymer epoxy
resin, cured epoxy.
B. Vapour Retarder: 0.25 mm or 0.5 mm thick clear polyethylene film type, for below
grade application.
PAGE 30
C. Non-Shrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate,

cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum
compressive strength of 17 MPa in 48 hours and 48 MPa in 28 days;
D. Curing Compounds: High efficiency curing compound ASTM C309, BS 8110, or

Water base concrete curing compound ASTM C309.
1. Store, handle, and apply curing compound in accordance with the

manufacture's specification and instructions.
2. Must be capable of retaining moisture and water in the fresh concrete and
provide an effective barrier to acidic atmospheric gases and water borne
salts responsible for the corrosion mechanism of concrete.
op V1
3.2.4 Joint Devices and Filler Materials
A. Joint Filler: ASTM D 1751; ASTM D 994; Bitumen impregnated fibreboard, for use
C -
in dry structures.
y
B.
C
Joint Filler: ASTM D 1752; High performance cross linked, closed cell, non-
absorbent, polyethylene for use in liquid bearing structures.
C
C. Joint Sealant: Non-degradable for its particular application, suitable for use in hot
climates, elastoplastic, with a movement accommodation factor of at least + 12
Q
percent.
1. Joint sealer suitable for sealing movement, control, or construction joints in

liquid bearing structures. Resistant to aerobic and anaerobic
bacteriological attack, acids, alkalis and UV to ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, class 25.
2. Joint sealer suitable for sealing movement, control, or construction joints in
dry structures:
a. Polyurethane to ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, type M.
b. Poly-sulphide- to ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Type M, and BS
4254 gun grade.
3.2.5 Batching and Mixing of Concrete

A. Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94.
B. Determine accurately the weights of all materials accounted in the mix in a
weight-batching machine.
C. Adjust the weight of fine and coarse aggregate to allow either for the free water
contained in it or for aggregate absorption. Reduce the amount of water to be
added to the mix by the quantity of free water contained in the fine and coarse
aggregates or increased to allow for aggregate absorption.
D. Mix the concrete materials in a mechanical batch mixer manufactured in
accordance with BS 1305 and to the approval of the Engineer. Mix each batch
continuously until there is a uniform distribution of the materials and uniformity of
color and consistency of the concrete.
E. Use approved automatic dosing equipment when admixture is introduced into the
concrete. Include a glass-measuring cylinder for calibration, which feeds a fixed
PAGE 31
quantity of additive into the mixing water before the mixing water is discharged
into the mix.
F. Ensure that no residual materials remain in the mixer after depositing each batch
of concrete. Wash and clean out the mixer drum immediately following the
completion of each concreting operation or when changing to a mix using a
different type of cement.
G. All ready mix concrete batching plants must have computer print-out facility
showing the target and actual concrete mix designs, source, timing, amount and
tolerances of ingredients (i.e. ice, water, admixture, additives, aggregates,
cement, etc.), the identity of the concrete supplier and other mandatory
requirements. The print out facility shall be non-simulated type and directly
connected to the concrete station-batching computer.
op V1
H. If under certain conditions, the Engineer allows hand mixing.
1. Prepare concrete on a watertight platform of suitable area.
2. Spread cement and aggregates, mixed dry, in thin layers until a unified
C -
color is attained.
y
3.
C
Add water and turn the whole mix over throughout.
4. Add 10% more cement than the quantities specified herein for machine
mixing.
C
5. Include the cost of this additional cement in the rates for concrete.
Q

3.3.1 Examination
B. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement.
C. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into
concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship
in placing concrete.
3.3.2 Preparation
A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning and chipping to remove all oil,
laitance, loose fragments of rock, earth, mud, timber, and other debris and
standing water to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
B. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing
concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout.
C. Coordinate the placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and
placement of form accessories.
D. Install and repair vapor damaged retarder under interior slab. Overlap joints or
damaged areas minimum 150 mm and seal watertight.
E. Fix joint filler for movement joints to the required dimensions of the joint cross-
section. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. Extend joint filler from
bottom of slab to within 25 mm. Provide a firm base for the joint sealer. Where the
depth of joint between the concrete surface and the water stops does not exceed
500 mm, place a filler in single depth sections.
PAGE 32
3.3.3 Concrete Placing and Compacting

A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301, ACI 318 & ACI 304.
B. Notify Architect/Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of
operations to enable appropriate inspections to be carried out. If concrete is not
placed within 24 hours of approval being given, obtain future approval prior to
concreting. Perform inspection immediately prior to concreting to check the
cleanliness of the forms.
C. Do not place concrete until the Engineer has inspected and approved the
surfaces upon which the concrete is to be placed, the formwork and the
reinforcing steel.
D. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed expansion and
op V1
contraction joints, are not disturbed during concrete placement.
E. Obtain the approval of the Engineer to the proposed arrangements before
commencing concreting.
C -
F. Perform the work of placing and compacting of concrete under the direct
y
supervision of a competent member of the staff and in a manner to produce a
C
watertight concrete of maximum density and strength.
G. Place concrete in its final position before initial setting has commenced. Do not
C
subsequently disturb the concrete when setting.
H. Do not exceed 90 minutes for the concrete from the time of loading to the time of
Q
final deposit when the concrete is carried in purpose-made agitators unless

agreed with the Engineer that the slump is sufficient for continued working. Under
no circumstances will addition of water or admixture be allowed after batching.
I. Place concrete in horizontal layers and keep it at an even height throughout the
Work. Do not allow concrete to slide or flow down sloping surfaces directly into its
final position. Place concrete to its final position from skips, trucks, and barrows,
down pipes or other placing machines or devices or, if this is impossible, shovel
concrete into position. Avoid separation of the constituent materials. Ensure that
the concrete placed in horizontal slabs from barrows or other tipping vehicles is
tipped into the face of the previously placed concrete.
J. Submit full details and operation techniques of the type of concrete pump
proposing to use for the Engineer's approval. Ensure no shock to be transferred
from the pipeline to the formwork and previously laid concrete.
Keep the end of the supply pipe of the concrete pump immersed in the concrete
to assist compaction during placement.
K. Do not allow the concrete to be dropped freely from a height greater than 1.5
meter. Use chutes, or conveyor belts designed to insure there is no segregation
or loss of mortar.
L. Compact concrete thoroughly during the placing operation. Thoroughly work the
concrete around the reinforcement and any embedded fixtures and into corners of
the formwork and molds. Avoid direct contact of vibrators with the reinforcement
or formwork. Use engineer's approved designed mechanical vibrators. Use a
sufficient number of vibrators to handle the maximum rate of concrete production
with an allowance for spares. Do not disturb concrete after it is compacted and
placed in its final position. Remove from site, concrete that has been partially set
before placing.
PAGE 33
M. Avoid and prevent the occurrence of honeycombing, porosity and grout/matrix

loss.
N. Avoid and prevent cracks and crazing of the concrete during the hot weather.
Arrange the placement of concrete in the early morning or late evening as
O. Take particular regard to the requirements specified herein for curing.
P. Provide shading for formwork from direct exposure to the sun both prior to the
placement of concrete and during its setting. Take appropriate measures to
ensure that reinforcement in and projecting from the section to be concreted is
maintained at the lowest temperature practicable.
Q. Ensure that the concrete immediately after compaction has ceased to have a
op V1
temperature of not less than 5o C and not more than 32o C. Use chilled water
during hot weather and, if necessary, use ice to maintain the concrete
temperature within required tolerance.
R. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air
C -
temperature and test samples taken.
y
C
S. Place the Concrete continuously between the control joints and construction
joints. When placing concrete against horizontal or inclined elements of water
stops, lift the water stops, place concrete, and compact it to a level slightly higher
C
than the underside of the water stops before releasing the water stops to ensure
complete compaction of the concrete around the water stops.
Q
T. Do not interrupt successive placement. Do not permit cold joints to occur.

U. Place floor slabs in saw cut pattern indicated.
V. Saw cut joints within 24 hours after placing. Use 5mm thick blade, cut into 1/4
depth of slab thickness.
W. Screed floors and slabs on grade level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum
6 mm /3 m.
3.3.4 Adverse Weather Concreting

A. Take precautions to prevent the temperature of fresh concrete rising above 35
Deg. C.
B. Maintain concrete at or below 35 Deg. C. until it has hardened.
C. Do not mix or place concrete when the ambient shade temperature exceeds 43
Deg. C. and above.
D. Do not execute concrete work during the hours of 0900 to 1500 during the months
from May to September, without approval.
E. Take the following precautions in hot weather.
1. Cool water to between 0 to 15 Deg. C. If ice is used:
a. Take account in computing water/cement ratios.
b. Ensure that ice is melted before the concrete leaves the mixer.
2. Cool aggregate with draughts and protect from sunlight with heat reflecting
covers.
PAGE 34
3. Cool formwork and reinforcement by sprinkling with water and protect from
direct sunlight, however, do not dilute or damage any form release agents.
4. Use mixed concrete without delay. Do not expose wet concrete, or concrete
carrying vehicles to the hot sun for more than the minimum practicable time.
5. Insulate the rotating mixer drum externally to prevent overheating of the

metal and excessive heat transfer.
6. Any additional recommendations of ACI-305.
F. Do not execute concreting during heavy sandstorms or heavy rains.
op V1
3.3.5 Placing of Concrete in or Under Water
A. Submit and obtain the Engineer’s approval to your detailed proposals for
concreting in or under water.
B. Keep as much as possible of the concrete being placed out of direct contact with
the water.
C -
y
C
C. Avoid any rapid movement or agitation of the exposed surface.
D. Carry out the concrete work where possible in one operation. Remove, if possible,
C
laitance, washed out aggregate or foreign matter that may have accumulated on
the previously placed concrete prior to additional concrete being placed.
Q
E. Provide smooth bored watertight termite pipes fitted with quick release joints and
have an adequate cross-section for the size of aggregate to be used.
F. Ensure that the bottom opening skips have straight sided perfectly smooth and
fitted with externally operated bottom opening double doors and overlapping
canvas flaps.
G. Use toggle bags only for small pours and for depositing small discrete quantities
of concrete. Do not use bagged concrete for permanent work.
3.3.6 Concrete Blinding Layer

A. Place a concrete blinding layer immediately upon completion of the excavation
and where shown on the drawings or ordered by the engineer, to prevent
deterioration of the formation and to form a clean working surface for the
structure.
B. Place a concrete Class C blinding layer of a minimum thickness of 100 mm or to
the depth shown on the contract drawing
3.3.7 Separate Floor Toppings

A. Prior to placing floor topping, roughen substrate concrete surface and remove
deleterious material. Broom and vacuum clean.
B. Place required dividers, edge strips, reinforcing and other items to be cast in as
shown in the drawings.
C. Apply sand and cement slurry coat on base course, immediately prior to placing
toppings.
D. Place concrete floor toppings to required lines and levels.
E. Screed toppings level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1:1000.
PAGE 35
3.3.8 Concrete Finishing

A. See section 03300 - 3.14. Schedule - Concrete types and finishes
3.3.9 Curing and Protection

A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively
hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.
B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature
for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.
C. Cure concrete floor surfaces to requirements of section 03370.
op V1
D. Pond the concrete surface with a minimum depth of potable water of 25 mm.
Monitor the depth of water regularly to ensure that this minimum depth is
maintained at all times during the curing period.
E. Spraying: Spray water over floor slab areas and maintain wet for 7 days.
C -
As an alternate, cover exposed surfaces of fresh concrete with hessian or similar
y
other approved material and maintain it continuously in a damp condition for a
C
minimum of seven days after the placing of the concrete. This shall be achieved
by the regular application of potable water.
C
Or apply an approved combined concrete curing compound and sealing system to
cure concrete as soon as is practicable. Use compound capable of retaining
Q
moisture and water in the fresh concrete and provide an effective barrier to acidic
atmospheric gases and water borne salts responsible for the corrosion
mechanism of concrete, whilst at the same time allowing moisture vapor to slowly
dissipate from the structure.
F. Protect concrete from all damage and contamination from any cause whatsoever.
G. Protect the concrete pour with sufficient materials to be available at the place of
work prior to the commencement of concreting.
H. Submit full details of the proposals for curing of concrete during the mobilization
period.
I. Water curing is always preferable. However, in special cases where curing
compound is deemed necessary, special permission be requested from the
Division subject to specific application.

A. Section 01400 - Quality Assurance, 01650 - Commissioning of Systems: Field
inspection, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Provide free access to visit and inspect the material stockpiles and work facilities.
C. Submit the approved mix design of each class of concrete to the testing firm for
review prior to commencement of work.
D. Sample and test concrete materials as required by the Engineer or when material
or material source changes.
E. Take concrete test cubes in sets as determined and directed by the Engineer in
order to conduct tests listed in the tables in clause 3.10 P of this section. Acquire
concrete for these cubes from actual mixes for the work and prepare and test in
accordance with the Standards and to the frequencies listed in the tables. Test
PAGE 36
three of these cubes for compressive strength at 7 days and the other three at 28
days and three for water permeability as per DIN 1048 or BSEN 12390-8 and
three for water absorption.
F. Provide record to identify casting bed and members.
G. Perform slump tests at such times and places as the Engineer may direct in
accordance with BS 1881: Part 102:1983. Use the slump as a guide to the
consistency of each class of mix. Degree of slump will be decided by the Engineer
following trial mix tests, use the figure given thereafter.
H. Concrete inspector must be physically present at the batching plant during the
first batch and should periodically observe that the specified type and amount of
materials conforming to the design mixture proportions are batched.
op V1
I. Allow the testing company and the Engineer to police and inspect the batching
plant and its operation at any time during the course of the work. Provide access
to the Engineer and the testing company to inspect and sample the material
supplied by the ready mix company. Maintain records available to the Engineer
C -
and the testing company upon request.
y
C
J. Provide and maintain the following equipment on site for the Engineer's use
during the contract:
C
1. 1 No. set of sieves
2. 30 No. (Minimum) 150 mm molds for test cube molds
Q
3. 2 No. cones for slump tests with steel base plates

4. 1 No. balance reading to 30 kg
K. Arrange and carry out concrete tests in accordance with Clause 3.10P of this
section unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
L. Make arrangements for concrete quality control tests to be carried out to the
M. All work in connection with the tests specified and for making modifications to the
mixes shall be at the Contractor's expense.
N. Carry out density and crushing tests on concrete cubes formed in 150 mm molds.
1. If a cube fails to produce the minimum specified strength or density when

tested at 7 days remove the structure which the cube represents or await,
at your own risk, the result of the 28 days test.
2. If the 28 days results also fail to attain the average strength specified
remove the structure which the cubes represents or, as an alternate,
execute such additional works or adopt such additional measures as the
Engineer may direct at the Contractor, s own expense.
3. In certain cases the Contractor may with the prior approval of the Engineer
obtain approved samples of the concrete from the structure by drilling or
coring and after dressing the samples for testing, submit the samples to
density and crushing tests in order to obtain further information as to the
concrete actually deposited in the structure and to assist the engineer in
making his decision. Should the Engineer refuse to sanction the obtaining
of such samples, the Contractor shall not make any claim in consequence
PAGE 37
thereof. Do not allow samples dressed for testing to contain any

reinforcement.
O. Submit to the Engineer a copy of record information for each sample cube taken.
P. Testing frequencies and reference standards for Fresh Concrete.
Table 3.3-1: Testing frequencies and reference standards for Fresh Concrete.
No. Test Frequency Standard

1 Temperature Every load for structural & every ASTM C1064 or
alternative load for non-structural BS 1704
concrete
op V1
2 Slump Every load for structural & every ASTM C143 or BS
alternative load for non-structural EN 12350-2
concrete
3
C -
Unit Weight During trial mixes and further up to the ASTM C138 or BS
y
engineer EN 12350-6
4
C
Air Content During trial mixes for structural ASTM C231 or
concrete and further up to the ASTM C173
C
Engineer
5 Identification Every load for all grades None/ by washing
of aggregates
Q
6 Bleed During trial mixes for structural ASTM C232

concrete and once every month
Table 3.3-2: Testing frequencies and reference standards for Hardened Concrete
No. Test Frequency Standard
7 Density All cylinders and cubes required ASTM or BS1881

for compressive strength Pt. 114
8 Compressive Min. one set per casting per day ASTM or BS
strength and every 50m3 for structural 1881Pt. 116
concrete.
Min. one set every 100m3
cumulative for non-structural
concrete
9 Concrete coring As directed by the Engineer ASTM or BS
from structure
10 Nondestructive Up to the engineer As per contract
(NDT) requirements
11 Water permeability One set for every 100m3 BS EN 12390-8 or
cumulative for structural concrete DIN 1048
12 Water absorption As directed by the Engineer ASTM C497M test
Method B
3.3.11 Loading of Structures
PAGE 38
A. Do not apply load of any kind to any part of a concrete structure until the concrete
has matured for at least 7 days and then apply load only with the approval of the
Engineer and after confirmation that the specified 7-day cube strengths have
been met.
B. Do not apply the full design load until a period of 28 days has elapsed after
casting.
C. Do not permit backfilling around any structure incorporating a ground or floor slab
before that slab has been cast and properly cured for a period of 28 days.
D. Ensure that at all time during construction, the structure is capable of withstanding
any hydrostatic pressure to which it may be subjected.
3.3.12 Patching
op V1
A. Allow Architect/Engineer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal
of forms.
B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify
C -
Architect/Engineer upon discovery.
y
C
C. Patch imperfections as directed in accordance with ACI 301.
D. Do not treat concrete surfaces until the Engineer's inspection is completed.
C
3.3.13 Defective Concrete
Q
A. Defective concrete shall be defined as one or more of the following:
1. Not conforming to required level, lines, details and elevations.
2. Defective in required concrete strengths.
3. Defective in appearance in ultimate exposed areas due to improper

replacement or preparation of concrete formwork resulting in bowed
formwork, improper formwork joints, honey combing, damaged surfaces,
exposed reinforcement, improperly placed snap on or cone ties,
unsatisfactory conditions for the performance of sandblasting work, etc.
B. Defective concrete work must be reported to the Engineer or Engineer’s
Representative, and no remedial work shall be performed without the prior
agreement of the Engineer or Engineer’s Representative, with respect to timing,
method of repair, and final acceptable standard and appearance of completed
repair work.
C. The Engineer or Engineer’s Representative’s decision shall be final in all aspects
related to the correction of defective concrete, to the extent that if a satisfactory
appearance (accepting satisfactory strength requirements), cannot be achieved,
even after the completion of remedial work, the defective concrete members shall
be totally removed and replaced. Members with unsatisfactory strength
requirements shall also be totally removed and replaced, including any adjacent
members so affected.
3.3.14 Schedule - Concrete Types and Finishes

A. See table 03300 - 01 for concrete type.
B. Provide qualities of finish as indicated in the description of the works. Ensure that
the quality of finish is not inferior to those described below. Any defective concrete
PAGE 39
finish will be rejected and the Engineer may, at his discretion, order the defects to
be cut out and made good to his satisfaction. Do not allow fins and featheredges
in the concrete surfaces.
C. Apply the following requirements for the finish of concrete surfaces as
appropriate:
1. Exposed surfaces and surfaces in contact with liquid other than upper
surfaces: Surface texture to be obtained from the use of formwork of a
smooth impervious face of metal or the like.
2. Concealed surfaces: Surface texture required to be obtained from the use

of formwork of sawn close jointed timber or the like.
op V1
3. Exposed upper surfaces and upper surface in contact with liquid: Surface
to be floated with a steel trowel to a smooth finish.
4. Other exposed upper surfaces to have a smooth finish with a wood trowel.
C -
The troweling shall be executed so that an excessive amount of fine
y
C
material is not brought to the surface.
5. Tanked surfaces: Surface texture required to be obtained from the use of

C
formwork of the "mechanical face" of hardboard or the like.
6. Road and hard standing surfaces: Surface finish to be obtained by the

Q
conventional use of a hand tamper or vibrating beam.
7. Rendered or surfaces areas: Areas to be subsequently rendered or to

receive a surfacing other than as (3) must be adequately scored to provide
an effective key.
8. Surfaces adjacent to block work: All necessary wall ties to be cast in to
concrete faces against which block work is to be subsequently built. Space
the ties 400 mm vertically and 800 mm horizontally.
9. Non-slip surfaces: Surface texture to be obtained by the use of a wood
float. Stipple the concrete whilst wet to roughen it.
10. Exposed arises: To be formed with a 20mm by 20mm chamfer.
Plastering of defective concrete as a means of making good will not be permitted,

except in the case of minor surface porosity when the Engineer may approve a
surface treatment by running in cement and sand mortar of the same richness as the
concrete. Perform this treatment immediately after removing the formwork.
PAGE 40
3.3.15 Testing for Water tightness of Water-Retaining

Structures
A. All hydraulic structures (water retaining structures) including but not limited to
pump station wet wells, reservoirs, tanks and clarifiers shall be proved watertight
by testing to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
B. Ensure that the water retaining structures are capable of withstanding the
following tests for water tightness:
1. Clean the structure and fill with water up to the water level of the tank at a
uniform rate of not greater than 2 meters in 24 hours or as ordered by the
Engineer and kept it filled to the test level for 7 days while absorption and
op V1
autogenously healing take place.
2. On the eighth day a shallow watertight G.I. evaporation tray of area of 0.4
sq. meters to be filled with 75 mm depth of water and placed to float in the
tank.
3. C -
Record the water level in the tank and in the tray every 24 hours and for 7
y
days.
C
4. If the average per day for the fall of water level in the tank over a test
C
period of 7 days minus the fall accounted for by the evaporation does not
exceed 3 mm, the tank shall be deemed watertight.
5. If signs of leakage including damp patches or water level dropped at the
Q
end or during the test period.

a. Search and mark the areas of defects.
b. Empty the tank, repair or replace defective or damaged concrete, at
Contractor’s expense.
c. Refill the tank, and repeat the test until the tank is watertight to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
6. Testing of water tightness shall be carried out prior to backfilling, before
applying protective coatings and before sealing the joints of any lining
systems.
C. Use potable water when testing for water tightness. Obtain the Engineer's
approval for the source of water prior to use.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 41
4. CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING (SECTION

03346)
4.1. Part 1 General
01300 Submittals
op V1
Materials and equipment
C -
y
4.1.2 References
C
ACI 301 Structural Concrete for Buildings
C
ACI 302 Guides for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.
Liquid Membrane – Forming compound having special properties for

Q
ASTM C1315
curing and sealing concrete.
4.1.3 Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide data on concrete hardener, sealer, compatibility, and
limitations.
4.1.4 Maintenance Data

A. Maintenance Data: Provide data on maintenance renewal of applied coatings.

A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.
4.1.6 Mock-Up
A. Provide mock-up of floor finish.
B. Construct mock-up area under conditions similar to those, which will exist during
actual placing with coatings applied.
C. Locate where directed.
D. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
PAGE 42
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site as per the requirements of the
Contract Document and the manufacturers’ recommendations.
B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's packaging including application instructions.

A. Temporary Lighting: Minimum 200 W light source, placed (2.5 m) above the floor
surface, for each (40 sq. m) of floor being finished.
4.1.9 Coordination
A. Coordinate work under the relevant section of the Contract Document.
op V1
B. Coordinate the work with concrete floor placement and concrete floor curing.
C -
4.2.1 Compounds, Hardeners, and Sealers
y
A.
C
Non-Metallic Hardener: Premixed, dry powder, clear, emery aggregate and
abrasion resistant hardener.
C
B. Clear, waterborne, membrane-forming curing and sealing compound: ASTM
C1315, Type I, Class A.
Q
C. Use Hardeners and Sealers in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendation. Obtain the engineer’s approval prior to commencing the work.

4.3.1 Examination
A. Verify site conditions under the relevant section of the Contract Document.
B. Verify that floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the work of this section.
4.3.2 Floor Finishing

A. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.
B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if

area is small, or inaccessible to power driven floats. Re-straighten, cut down high
spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and re-straightening until surface is
uniform, smooth and has a granular texture.
1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish,

and to floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet
waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.
C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate
concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue trowelling passes and re-
straighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and
PAGE 43
appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through
applied coatings or floor coverings.
D. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second
trowelling to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic tile is to be
installed by either thickset or thin-set method. Immediately after second trowelling
and when concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.
E. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and
ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by
op V1
booming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.
Coordinate required final finish with Engineer before application.
4.3.3 Floor Surface Treatment

A.
C -
Mineral Dry-Shake Floor Hardener Finish: After initial floating, apply mineral dry-
y
shake materials to surfaces according to manufacturer’s written instructions and
as follows:
C
C
1. Uniformly apply mineral dry-shake materials at a rate of 100 lb. /100 sq.
(49 kg/10 sq.) unless greater amounts are recommended by manufacturer.
2. Uniformly distribute approximately two-thirds of mineral dry-shake materials
Q
over surface by hand or with mechanical spreader, and embed by power

floating. Follow power floating with a second mineral dry-shake application,
uniformly distributing remainder of material, and embed by power floating.
3. After final floating, apply a trowel finish. Cure concrete with curing compound
recommended by dry-shake material manufacturer and apply immediately
after final finishing.
B. Apply sealer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions on floor surfaces.
4.3.4 Tolerances
A. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an
un-levelled freestanding 3.0 m long straightedge, resting on two high spots and
placed anywhere on the surface, does not exceed the following:
1. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness for Exposed Concrete Floors: 6mm in

3 meters.
2. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness Under Seamless Resilient Flooring:
3 mm in 3 meters.
3. Correct defects in the defined traffic floor by grinding or removal and
replacement of the defective work. Areas requiring corrective work will be
identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 44
5. EXPOSED AGGREGATE CONCRETE FINISH

(SECTION 03355)
5.1. Part 1 General
01300 Submittals
op V1
C -
y
C
C
03370 Concrete Curing
5.1.2 References
Q
ACI 303R - Guide to Cast-in-Place Architectural Concrete.

A Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
B Samples: Submit two (2) five (5) Kg plastic buckets of each aggregate
specified, illustrating size, colour and the extremes of colour range.

A. Perform Work in accordance with section 03300 and ACI 303R.
B. Maintain one (1) copy of the document on site.
5.1.5 Mock-Up
B. Construct one horizontal field sample panel, two (2) meters long by three (3)
meters wide, with full aggregate colour range represented.
C. Locate as directed by the Engineer.
D. Mock-up may not remain as part of the permanent Work.
PAGE 45
5.1.6 Pre-Installation Meeting

A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Pre-installation meeting.
B. Convene one (1) week prior to commencing work of this section.

A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Transport, handle, store, and protect
products.
B. Provide all product information in manufacturer's packaging, including use

instructions to the Engineer or as directed.
op V1
C -
y
A.
C
Cement, Water, Admixtures: as Specified in Section 03300.
5.2.2 Accessory Materials

C
A. Surface Retarder as approved by the Engineer.
Q
B. Acid Etch Solution as approved by the Engineer.
5.2.3 Concrete Mix

A. Utilize concrete mix design specified in Section 03300.

A. Provide testing and analysis of concrete mix design.
B. Test samples in accordance with Section 03300 requirements.

5.3.1 Examination
A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions and
readiness of formwork and reinforcement prior to beginning work.
B. Verify that items to be cast into concrete are placed securely and will not impede
placing concrete.
C. Notify the Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting

operations.
5.3.2 Preparation
A. Clean formwork surfaces.
PAGE 46
B. Apply surface retarder to formwork in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.
C. Clean previously placed concrete with steel brush and apply bonding agent in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
5.3.3 Placing Concrete

A. Place concrete in accordance with Section 03300.
B. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction and contraction

joints. Do not interrupt successive placement such that cold joints occur.
op V1
C. Cast test panels, size approved by Engineer, simultaneously with approved cu m
of concrete placed. Use test panels to determine when each section of work is
ready for exposed aggregate treatment.
C -
5.3.4 Aggregate Exposure
y
A.
C
Remove forms after seven (7) days.
B. After removal of formwork, wet concrete surfaces with water and scrub with acid
C
etch solution exposing aggregate to match accepted sample panel.
Q
C. Do not expose more than forty percent (40%) of aggregate surface.
5.3.5 Curing
A. Cure concrete floor surfaces in accordance with Concrete Curing, section 3370.
B. Spraying: Spray water over floor slab areas and maintain wet for seven (7) days.
C. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for
a period necessary for hydration of cement and concrete hardening.
5.3.6 Cleaning
A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Cleaning installed work.
B. When desired finish is achieved, wash and rinse exposed aggregate surfaces.
5.3.7 Defective Concrete

A. Remove and replace any exposed concrete, which displays surface defects
unless the Engineer approves patching or other remedial measures.
B. Defects include colour and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles,
honeycombs, fins and other projections on the surface, stains and discolorations
that cannot be removed by cleaning and other defects which in the opinion of the
Engineer adversely affects the finish appearance.
C. Permission for patching or other remedial measures is not a waiver of the

Engineer’s right to require complete removal of the defective work in his opinion
PAGE 47
such measure does not satisfactorily restore the quality and appearance of the
surface.

A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Protecting installed work.
B. Protect concrete from premature drying or staining, excessively hot or cold

temperatures, or mechanical injury.
5.3.9 Schedules
A. Exterior Main Entry: Light brown aggregate, 6mm minimum and 9mm maximum
op V1
size, 25 percent exposure.
B. Exterior Spandrels: Medium brown aggregate, 12mm minimum and 20mm

maximum size, 35 percent exposure.
C -
y
C END OF SECTION
C
Q
PAGE 48
6. CONCRETE CURING (SECTION 03370)

6.1. Part 1 General
01300 Submittals
op V1
C -
y
C
6.1.2 References
C
ACI 308 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete.
Q
ASTM C171 Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
ASTM C309 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.
ASTM D2103 Polyethylene Film and Sheeting.
BS 8110 Structural Use of Concrete: Code of practice for design and

construction.
6.1.3 Submittals
B. Product Data: Provide data on equipment, materials, organization, management

and names of concreting crew, names of compacting crew, their skills and training
received to perform the tasks on specified in the works.

A. Perform Work in accordance with the specification.

Deliver, store, protect, and handle products under provisions of Section 01600.
PAGE 49

6.2.1 Materials
A. Hessian shall be close-knit hessian. Hessian shall be new. Hessian used
previously for packaging shall not be used.
B. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete.

6.3.1 Examination
op V1
A. Verify substrate conditions under provisions of Section 01039.
B. Curing shall be applied immediately after compaction and finishing and shall not
be delayed.
C -
y
6.3.2 Execution
C
A. a. Immediately after finishing, the concrete shall be protected by placing
C
overlapped polyethylene sheets of 500 gauge for the first 24 hours.
Overlapping shall be at least 150 mm.
Q
b. The polyethylene sheet shall be kept in contact or near contact with the
surface of the concrete and prevented from displacement by wind, foot
traffic or other disturbances.
c. After the lapse of the first 24 hours, remove the polyethylene sheet.
Overlapped hessian that has been pre-wetted shall be placed in direct
contact with the surface of the concrete. The hessian shall be overlapped by
at least 150mm.
d. Cover the wet hessian immediately with polyethylene sheet overlapped by at

least 150mm. The overlapped edges of the polyethylene shall not be
coincident with the overlapped edges of the hessian underneath it.
e. Secure the polyethylene and wet hessian against displacement by wind, foot
traffic or other disturbances.
f. The concrete surface shall be kept wet or at 100% relative humidity

continuously for a period of at least 5 days.
g. A system of wet drip plumbing akin to that used in the agricultural industry
shall be installed to keep the concrete wet.
h. The system shall be monitored and managed. Corrections and adjustments

shall be made if necessary by a nominated staff and approved by the
Engineer.
i. For free standing vertical columns the polyethylene for the first 24 hours and
the polyethylene and wet hessian subsequently shall be wrapped helically
and secured by tying tightly against the column.
PAGE 50
j. Exposed free ends containing protecting reinforcements shall be protected

and kept wet by stuffing with crumpled strips of wet hessian and
polyethylene into the spaces in between the protruding reinforcements.
B. Ponding shall not be allowed.
C. Where pipes and cavities enter the structure the open areas of the pipes
shall be stopped with loose stuffing and the free openings taped up with
polyethylene to prevent moisture loss from the concrete surface into such
cavities.
D. In manholes or completely enclosed spaces it may only be necessary to

keep the cavity completely isolated and closed with a ten (10)-liter bucket of
op V1
water contained within. The Engineers prior approval shall be sought before
implementing this form of curing.
E. Chemical curing membranes shall not be used unless the geometry is of

such a nature that there is no alternative upon which it shall be used with
C -
the prior approval of the Engineer. If curing membranes are used, at least
y
C
three of four coats shall be applied depending on the nature and
characteristics of the proprietary material.
C
6.3.3 Execution - Vertical Surfaces
A. Refer to relevant Sections
Q

A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 51
7. STRUCTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE (SECTION

03411)
7.1. Part 1 General
01300 Submittals
op V1
C -
y
03300
C
Cast-in-Place Concrete
7.1.2 References
C
ACI 301 Structural Concrete for Buildings.
Q
ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
PCI MNL-116 Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Pre-
cast and Pre-stressed Concrete Products.
PCI MNL-120 Design Handbook Pre-cast and Pre-stressed Concrete.
BS 5911 Concrete Pipes and Ancillary Concrete Products. Specification

for unreinforced and reinforced concrete products
BS 8110-1 Structural Use of Concrete: Code of practice for design and

construction
BS EN 13369 Common rules for pre-cast concrete products

A. Design unit to withstand all loading such as service, wind, suction, deflection,
and thermal movement loads and restraint conditions from initial fabrication to
the completion of the structure, including form removal, storage, transportation,
and erection.
B. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of other

building structural members and clearances of intended openings.
C. Design anchor bolts, inserts, plates, angles and other cast in items with
sufficient anchorage and embedment to support applicable loads.
PAGE 52
A. Section 01300 – Submittals: Procedure for Submittals.
B. Submit Shop Drawings which will indicate layout, unit locations, configuration, unit
identification marks, reinforcement, connection and joints details, support items,
bearing seats, inserts, anchors, concrete cover, location of lifting devices,
dimensions, openings, embedded items and relationship to adjacent materials.
C. Submit design calculations for the reinforcing, hoisting and connection and
anchorage devices.
D. Do not proceed with the fabrication until the design calculation and the shop
drawing are approved by the Engineer.
E. Submit a method statement for lifting, transporting, and erection of the recast
units.
op V1
F. Product Data: Indicate standard component configurations, design loads,
deflections, cambers, bearing requirements, and special design condition.

C -
y
A.
C
Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
B. Submit design data reports indicating calculations for loadings and stresses of
fabricated, designed framing.
C
C. Submit quality assurance and quality control procedures for the fabrication of the
pre-cast units.
Q

A. Perform work under the provisions of section 01400 - Quality Control and in
accordance with the requirements of PCI MNL-116, and PCI MNL-120.
B. Design recast concrete members under direct supervision of a Professional
licensed Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work.
C. Maintain plant records on production runs and make records available to the
engineer upon request.
7.1.7 Samples
A. Representative samples, as agreed with the Engineer, must be submitted for at
least the following items at the same time as the particulars are submitted.
Sample of pre-cast panel as agreed with the Engineer to be representative of the
Works to be constructed to demonstrate adequacy of pre-casting operations.
7.1.8 Drawings
B. Layout plans and detailed fabrication and placement drawings for each structural
pre-cast unit which shall include:
 Reinforcement details.
 Connection and anchorage details.
 Lifting devices, locations and handling limitations.
PAGE 53
 Openings, sleeves, inserts and embedded items.
 Precast concrete unit location.
 Relationship to adjacent units and/or structures.
 Pre-cast concrete unit identification number.

A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products under the provisions of section
01600 - Material and Equipment:
B. Handle pre cast members in position consistent with their shape and design. Lift
and support only from support points.
C. Lifting or Handling Devices: Capable of supporting member in positions
op V1
anticipated during manufacture, storage, transportation, and erection.
D. Protect members to prevent staining, chipping, or spalling of concrete.
E. Mark each member with date of production and final position in structure.
C -
y
C
7.2.1 Precast Concrete Yard Requirements
C
A. Commercial and Site Pre-cast Concrete yards shall meet the requirements
stipulated in the check lists given in Appendix 1
Q
7.2.2 Materials
A. Cement: Cement is covered under the provisions of section 03300 - cast-in-place
concrete.
B. Aggregate materials covered under the provisions of section 02207 – Aggregate
materials.
C. Water and admixtures are covered under the provisions of section 03300 – Cast-
in-place concrete.
7.2.3 Reinforcement
A. Reinforcing Steel: This is covered under the provisions of section 03200.
7.2.4 Accessories
Not used
7.2.5 Mix
A. Concrete: Class A to the provisions of section 03300 table 03300.01 for concrete
mix design.
7.2.6 Fabrication
A. Fabrication procedure to conform to PCI MNL-116.
B. Maintain plant records and quality control program during production of recast
members and make these available to the Engineer upon request.
PAGE 54
C. Ensure that reinforcing steel, anchors, inserts, plates, angles, and other cast-in
items are embedded and located as indicated on Contract drawings.
D. Place and vibrate concrete to ensure proper consolidation, elimination of cold
joints, and minimise entrapped air on vertical surfaces.
E. Locate lifting devices to permit removal after erection.
F. Observe the formwork while the concrete is being placed.
G. Provide an individual number or letter for identification purposes for each mould
and ensure that the number or letter is either embossed on or recessed in to the
mould so that each unit cast in a particular mould will bear the identification of that
mould.
H. Provide date of casting the product, either scratched or painted on the unit.
I. Test concrete for pre cast units as specified in section 03300.
op V1
J. Place and compact concrete for pre cast concrete units by means approved by
the Engineer.
K. Ensure finish surfaces of pre cast concrete units are uniform.
L.
C -
Do not move or transport pre cast concrete from the place of casting until an
y
C
approved curing period elapsed and the design strength has been attained.
7.2.7 Finishes
C
A. Ensure exposed-to-view finish surfaces of pre-cast concrete members are
uniform in colour and appearance.
Q
B. Cure members under identical conditions to develop required concrete quality,

and minimise appearance blemishes such as non-uniformity, staining, or surface
cracking.
C. Architectural Finish (Finish C): Surface holes or bubbles over 1/4 inch (6 mm)
filled with matching cementitious paste, and fins or protrusions removed and the
surface ground smooth.
7.2.8 Fabrication Tolerances

Fabrication tolerances on pre cast units shall be as noted below:
A. Maximum Variation from Nominal Dimension: 25 mm.
B. Maximum Out of Square: 10-mm/3 m, non-cumulative.
C. N/A

A. Quality control and concrete testing will be carried out under the provisions of
Section 01400 and Section 03300 respectively.

7.3.1 Examination
PAGE 55
A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and field measurements are
as shown on shop drawings or as instructed by the fabricator.
7.3.2 Preparation
A. Prepare support equipment for the erection procedure.
7.3.3 Erection
A. Erect members without damage to structural integrity, shape, or finish and
replace or repair damaged members.
B. Maintain temporary bracing in place until final support is provided. Protect

members from staining.
op V1
C. Level differential elevation of adjoining horizontal members with grout to
maximum slope of 1:12.
D. Grout between underside of unit and bearing surface.
E.
C -
Lift pre-cast unit from the design lifting hooks.
y
F.
C
Secure units in place.
C
7.3.4 Erection Tolerances
A. Tolerances: These are described under the provisions of section 01400 - Quality
Q
Control.
B. Erect members’ level and plumb within allowable tolerances.
7.3.5 Protection
A. Protect members from damage caused by erection operations.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 56
7.3.6 Appendix 1
Abu Dhabi Municipality, Roads and Technical Services, DMAT- Division
Form No:
Table 7.3-1: Commercial Precast Concrete Yard Check List:
Precast Concrete Yard Name Location Inspection Date
Compliance Comments
Sl
Requirement
(Obtain details where
No. Yes No N/A
op V1
applicable )
A General
1. General layout of pre-cast area to scale
2. C -
The area of the yard shall be of
y
C
sufficient size to accommodate the
following facilities,
C
 Rebar fabrication
 Casting area
Q
 Curing area
 Storage area
 Coating area
 Laboratory area
 Office for the Client’s

representative
3. The yard boundary wall shall be min.

2.5m high for protection from wind-
blown sand.
4. Contract specifications shall be

available for casting units and shall
comply with.
5. Approved shop-drawings of related

ADSS Contract’s shall be available.
6. Form-works shall be clean, stable,

water-tight and true to required
dimension
7. Access gates shall be facilitated at
suitable locations
PAGE 57
Compliance Comments
Sl
Requirement
No. Yes No N/A
applicable )
8. The yard shall have concrete or asphalt

paved flooring and be provided with
elevated platforms
9. Covered roofing area shall be provided

for green concrete sampling zones.
op V1
10. Water points shall be provided at
convenient locations with easy
regulating valves and flexible hoses.
C -
11. The yard shall be adequately
y
C
illuminated and provided with overhead
floodlights.
C
12. Adequate lifting and transportation
equipment shall be facilitated.
Q
13. Suitable pumps, conveyer buckets,

chutes, hoppers and platforms shall be
properly prepared to the satisfactory in-
time and easy casting of concrete.
14. The yard shall be equipped with

sufficient number of poker vibrators,
mound mounted vibrators, vibrating
table and sufficient additional working
pokers as spare.
15. Water used for curing and cleaning
shall be in-compliance with the relevant
standards. Provide details.
B Casting Area
1. Cast units identification numbering

system shall be maintained
2. Handling, placing and stacking of post-

cured units shall be in accordance with
the int. code of practice.
3. (Please Specify) shall be provided for

Office facilities
Client’s representatives.
4. Safety regulatory sign boards shall be

available.
PAGE 58
Compliance Comments
Sl
Requirement
No. Yes No N/A
applicable )
5. Yard shall be clean from debris and

dust
C Curing Area
1. The area shall be facilitated with
op V1
effective water sprinklers and covering
hessians, polythene sheets etc.
2. Water curing method shall be

satisfactory to the int. code of practice.
C -
(please specify)
y
3.
C
Water supply shall be facilitated with
proper storage capacity and as,
C
 Ground level tank capacity:
Q
minimum 4000 USG
 Overhead tank capacity:

minimum 2000 USG
 Overhead tank height: minimum
6m.
D Bar bending, Caging Area
1. The area shall be provided with a

suitable roof designed so as to
accommodate the lifting and the
transportation equipment.
2. The area shall have a raised floor for

storage of rebars.
3. Bar bending, cutting machines and all

relevant tools shall be available.
4. For Fusion Bond Epoxy coated (FBEC)
rebars,
 Teflon mandrels shall be used
of sufficient diameters as per
relevant standard.
 Approved touch-up epoxy
material shall be available.
 Plastic coated tie-wire shall be
used.
PAGE 59
Compliance Comments
Sl
Requirement
No. Yes No N/A
applicable )
E Coating Area
1. The yard shall be fully covered,

enclosed and properly ventilated.
2. The yard shall be equipped with the
op V1
suitable equipment for surface
preparation, mixing and application in
accordance with the coating
manufacturer recommendations.
C -
y
3. Calibrated testing equipment shall be
C
made available for the following,
 Humidity and ambient
C
temperature measurement
 Surface moisture and contact
temperature measurement
Q
 Coating thickness (WFT and

DFT) measurement
 Pull – off test
 Holiday test
4. Applicators shall be trained and

certified at least by the approved
coating manufacturer. Provide
certificates.
5. QC - Records shall be maintained.

Provide details.
F Laboratory
1. Relevant International Standards for

sampling and
2. Testing
Curing shall
waterbe temperature
available. shall be
maintained
o
3. Relevant
at 22 +/- 2sampling
C. and testing facilities
shall be provided.
4. Placement of cubes in the curing tanks

shall be as per the International Code
of practice. Provide details.
PAGE 60
Compliance Comments
Sl
Requirement
No. Yes No N/A
applicable )
5. Qualified QC-technician shall be

available for sampling and testing.
6. All measuring and testing instruments

shall be calibrated.
op V1
7. Written sampling and testing
procedures shall be available.
G Storage Area
C -
y
1. Storage areas shall be clean, well-
C
drained and stabilized.
C
2. Storage for paints, chemicals, rubber,
sealants, etc. shall be air-conditioned,
and stored as per manufacturer
Q
recommendations.
3. UV sensitive products such as PVC-U,

GRP shall be stored under shaded and
ventilated area.
H Quality Control
4. QC Manual shall be available
5. Organization chart and responsibility

matrix shall be available
6. Qualified QC Engineers & Inspectors
shall be available at all time.
7. Pre-cast units shall have unique
identification serial numbers and
casting dates.
8. Training plan and records for all

activities shall be maintained.
PAGE 61
Compliance Comments
Sl
Requirement
No. Yes No N/A
applicable )
9. Method statements and procedures for

the following shall be available at the
yard.
 Mold preparation
op V1
 Casting
 Demolding
C -
y
 Handling
C
 Curing
C
 Repairing
Q
 Coating
 Storage of materials and UV

sensitive products
 Transportation
10. QC Records of following shall be

available.
 Casting and sampling records.

 Curing of concrete units.
 Repairs
 Testing of cubes.
 Coating
11. Current international standards and

technical leaf-lets of chemicals,
sealants, membranes, etc., shall be
made available and accessible.
12. Operation and maintenance plan and

records for plant and all equipment
shall be available.
13. NCR and CAR shall be maintained.
PAGE 62
Abu Dhabi Municipality, Roads and Technical Services & DMAT- Division
Form no. :
Table 7.3-2: Site precast concrete yard check list:
Contractor: Adss contract no. Location: Inspection date:
Compliance Comments
Sl.
Requirement
No.
op V1
Yes NO N/A ( Obtain details where applicable )
A General
General layout of pre-cast area
1. to scale
C -
y
2.
C
Approved shop-drawings shall
be available
C
3. The yard boundary wall shall be
having protection from wind-
blown sand.
Q
4. The area of the yard shall be of

sufficient size to accommodate
the following facilities,
 Casting area
 Curing area
 Storage area
 Coating area
5. Access gates shall be facilitated

at suitable locations
6. The yard shall have elevated

concrete or asphalt paved
flooring.
7. Covered roofing area shall be

provided for green concrete
sampling zones.
8. Water points shall be provided

at convenient locations with
easy regulating valves and
flexible hosepipes.
PAGE 63
Compliance Comments
Sl.
Requirement
No.
9. The yard shall be adequately

illuminated and provided with
overhead floodlights.
10. Adequate lifting and

transportation equipment shall
be facilitated.
op V1
11. Suitable pumps, conveyer
buckets, chutes, hoppers and
platforms shall be properly
prepared to the satisfactory in-
C -
time and easy casting of
y
concrete.
C
12. The yard shall be equipped with
C
sufficient number of poker
vibrators, mound mounted
vibrators, vibrating table and
Q
sufficient additional working

pokers as spare.
B Casting Area
1. Cast units identification
numbering system shall be
maintained
2. Handling, placing and stacking

post-cured units shall be in
adequate with the methods
approved.
3. Safety regulatory sign boards

shall be available
4. Yard should be clean from

debris and dust
C Curing Area
1. Sweet water (e.g. ADWEA) shall
be adequately supplied for
curing, cleaning and cooling
reinforcement.
PAGE 64
Compliance Comments
Sl.
Requirement
No.
2 The Area shall be facilitated with

effective covering hessians,
polythene sheets etc.
3. Water supply shall be facilitated

with proper storage capacity.
op V1
D Bar bending, caging Area
1.
C -
The area shall be provided with
y
a suitable roof designed so as to
C
accommodate the lifting and the
transportation equipment.
C
2. The area of the yard should be
of sufficient size
Q
3. The reinforcement shall be

stored at elevated platform and
shall be completely wrapped.
4. Bar bending, cutting machines

and all relevant tools shall be
available.
5. The area shall have a raised

floor for storage of rebar.
E Coating Area
1. The yard shall be of sufficient
area and shall have sufficient
protection against wind-blown
sand, dust.
The yard shall be equipped with

coating manufacture’s
2.
recommended equipment. And
shall be provided with facilities
of wire brush, stone abrasion
tools, compressed air, pressure
water jetting, etc.
PAGE 65
Compliance Comments
Sl.
Requirement
No.
3. Calibrated testing equipment

shall be made available for the
following,
Hygrometer
Surface moisture and contact
temperature meters
op V1
Coating thickness (DFT and
WFT) measuring tools
Pull – off Tester
4. C -
Applicators shall be trained and
y
C
certified at least by the approved
coating manufacturer. Provide
certificates.
C
5. Experienced and qualified
Q
personnel shall supervise the

coating work.
6. QC - Records shall be
maintained. Provide details.
F Laboratory
Curing water temperature shall
be maintained at 22 +/- 2oC.
Minimum sampling facilities like

green concrete sampling cube
preparation slump and temp.
Check and wet density checks,
etc., shall be provided.
All measuring and testing

instruments shall be calibrated.
Qualified QC-technician shall be

available for sampling and
testing.
Written sampling and testing

procedures shall be available.
G Storage Area
PAGE 66
Compliance Comments
Sl.
Requirement
No.
1.
Are storage areas shall be clean
and well drained.
2. Storage for paints, chemicals,

rubber, sealants, etc. shall be
air-conditioned, and stored as
per manufacturer
op V1
recommendations.
3. UV sensitive products such as

PVC-U, GRP shall be stored
C -
under shaded and ventilated
y
area.
H Quality Control
C
Qualified QC inspector shall be
C
available
Control and testing methods

Q
shall be defined
In-house and routine test results

shall be properly filed and up to
date.
4. Method statements and

procedures for the following
shall be available at the yard.
 Mold preparation
 Casting
 De-molding
 Handling
 Curing
 Repairing
 Coating
 Storage of materials and
UV sensitive products
 Transportation
PAGE 67
Compliance Comments
Sl.
Requirement
No.
5. QC Records of following shall be

available.
 Casting and sampling
records.
 Repairs
 Curing of concrete units.
op V1
 Testing of cubes.
 Coating
6. C -
Current international standards
y
C
shall be made available and
accessible.
C
7. Daily mound and cast repair and
delivery check sheets shall be
Q
available.
8. NCR and CAR shall be

accessible
PAGE 68
8. CONCRETE REPAIR (SECTION 03500)

8.1. Part 1-General
8.1.1 Scope and General Requirements
This section of the specification gives the requirements for concrete repair.
The repair system to be utilized for a particular area or member will be subject to a trial
demonstration as designated by the Engineer and will generally be as follows:
Epoxy fillers shall be utilized to fill small cavities and pinholes on all concrete surfaces to
op V1
receive epoxy coating.
Epoxy and cementitious repair mortars shall be utilized for small surface repairs.
Shotcrete, concrete and micro concrete shall be used for large, deep repairs.
C -
y
C
Cracks up to 0.3mm wide shall be filled with an epoxy filler or epoxy crack injection resin.
Cracks or joints which are leaking shall be injected with a polyester resin.
C
Q
The following sections of the specification shall be read in conjunction with this section.
01300 Submittals.
01400 Quality control.
01600 Materials and equipment.
03100 Concrete formwork
03200 Concrete reinforcement.
03300 Cast in place concrete.
03600 Concrete protection and waterproofing systems.
8.1.3 Standards
A All activities relating to this section of the specification shall comply with the following
ACI 506 Guide to shotcrete.
ACI 506.2 Specification for shotcrete.
ACI 506.3 Guide to certification of shotcrete nozzle men.
ACI 506.4 Guide for the evaluation of shotcrete.
ACI 548.1 Guide for the use of polymers in concrete.
PAGE 69
ASTM C157 Standard test method for length change of hardened hydraulic-
cement, mortar and concrete.
ASTM C881 Standard specification for epoxy resin base bonding systems
for concrete.
ASTM C1202 Standard test method for electrical indication of concrete’s

ability to resist chloride penetration.
BS 1881 Testing Concrete
BS 4449 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete. Wieldable reinforcing

steel. Bar, coil and decoiled product. Specification
op V1
BS 4551 Mortar. Methods of test for mortar. Chemical analysis and
physical testing.
BS 4652
C - Specification for zinc rich priming paint (organic media).
y
BS 6319-2
CTesting of resin and polymer/cement compositions for use in
construction. Method for measurement of compressive
C
strength.
BS 6319-3 Testing of resin and polymer/cement compositions for use in

Q
construction. Methods for measurement of modulus of elasticity

in flexure and flexural strength.
BS 6319-7 Testing of resin and polymer/cement compositions for use in

construction. Method for measurement of tensile strength.
BS 6744 Stainless steel bars for the reinforcement of and use in

concrete. Requirements and test methods.
BS 7123 Specification for metal arc welding of steel for concrete

reinforcement.
BS EN 1542 Products and systems for the protection and repair of concrete
structures. Test methods. Measurement of bond strength by
pull off.
BS EN 12390-3 Testing hardened concrete. Compressive strength of test

specimen
CIRIA R092M Reinforcement connector and anchorage methods.
8.1.4 SUBMITTALS
In order to verify compliance with the specification the Contractor shall submit
PAGE 70

programme allowing for ordering and approval times. Reference shall also be made to
Section 01600 of the specification on products and materials approval. Information to
be submitted shall comprise but not necessarily be limited to:
1. Repair materials.
a. Manufacturers name.
b. Suppliers name.
c. Product name (if applicable).
op V1
d. Product description.
e. Manufacturer’s technical data.
f. Manufacturers guarantee
C -
y
g.
C
Manufacturer’s statement that the material is suitable for the intended
purpose.
C
h. Mix design.
i. Test results or certificates.

Q
j. Storage instructions.
k. Application instructions.
l. Product health and safety requirements.
m. Endorsements of previous long term successful usage.
2. Once materials have been approved, substitution will not be permitted unless
otherwise agreed by the Engineer.

A The Contractor shall submit method statements to the Engineer for approval 4 weeks
in advance of commencing the trial and demonstration repairs specified in Clause 3.03
in accordance with Section 01300 of the specification. These shall comprise but not
1. Procedures for surface preparation and application of repair materials for all
concrete repair methods including reinforcement cleaning and coating.
2. Procedures for mixing and application of shotcrete.
3. Procedures for crack injection.
4. Procedures for coating application.
5. Statements shall, if relevant, address at least the following points.
a. Description of problem.
PAGE 71
b. Description of how the proposed materials will prevent a recurrence of

the problem.
c. The projected life of the repair.
d. Identification of the expertise and skills required to perform the repair.
e. Identification of the workforce with the required expertise and skills.
f. Pre works precautions and planning.
g. Safety arrangements.
h. Substrate preparation.
i. Work schedules.
op V1
j. Materials application plan with descriptions and methods.
k. Equipment and tools.
l. Finishing operations.
m. Removal of debris and cleaning.
C -
y
n.
C
Quality control forms and schedules.
o. Inspection and approval forms.
C
p. Measurements techniques and methods.
q. Records and forms list and samples.
Q
r. Acceptance by material manufacturers.

s. CV’s of qualified supervision staff.
t. Material, location and sample labelling system.
u. Scheduling and project management report format.
B The Contractor shall follow the approved method statements. No change to the
method statements shall be allowed unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Proposals for revisions to the method statements shall be submitted for the Engineer’s
approval. The Engineer may require to alter the work sequence and method statement
if he deems it necessary or if the Contractor has made omissions, deviated from the
proposed plan or caused damage deliberately or accidentally to sound structures.
The Contractor shall bear all costs in the latter event.
8.1.4.3 Drawings
A The Contractor shall submit drawings to the Engineer for approval in advance of
commencing the site activity in accordance with Section 01300 of the specification.
These shall comprise but not necessarily be limited to:
1. Drawings of repair areas showing the location, size, depth and proposed
repair method.
8.1.4.4 Mock Up
A Provide a mock-up of each type of proposed concrete repair method as directed by the
Engineer for the Engineers approval.
PAGE 72
B Mock up shall be of sufficient size to illustrate repair method, colour and texture of
repair surface.
8.1.4.5 Progress Reporting

A The Contractor shall submit a detailed and summary work schedule showing all
activities to be carried out for the Engineers approval.
B The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer daily progress reports. The progress
report shall include a description of activities carried out, materials delivered and used
on site, test results, safety records, problems encountered and the approved solutions.
op V1
C Weekly reports shall be submitted to include but not be limited to an updated work
schedule reflecting the actual progress of the works, a summary statement of the
salient points in the daily progress reports and dated photographs comprising a set of
negatives and 150mm X 100mm prints.
C -
y
C
A Prior to dispatch of any product and/or material from source the Contractor shall notify
C
the Engineer in writing in sufficient time to allow the Engineer the opportunity to inspect
and test the product and/or material prior to delivery in accordance with Section 01400
of the specification.
Q
B Products and materials shall be from a manufacturer/supplier that operates a quality

system which is registered to ISO 9000 series or approved equal.
C To allow the Engineer to inspect the Works the Contractor shall give the Engineer a
minimum of 24 hours notice of carrying out the following activities on site:
1. Removal of areas of defective concrete.

2. Commencement of surface preparation.
3. Repair of reinforcement.
4. Application of repair method.
5. Application of final protective coating.
D Only specialist contractors thoroughly familiar with concrete repair techniques shall
carry out the work.
E The Contractor shall appoint a QA/QC Engineer approved by the Engineer. The
QA/QC Engineer shall be conversant with the aims of quality control, the materials
being used in the contract and the levels of workmanship required.
F The Contractor shall be responsible for all testing as specified and shall supply the
Engineer with the test results immediately after completion of the tests. Cost of all
testing including those for trial purposes shall be borne by the Contractor.
G The level of quality and workmanship required and that will be imposed on the work is
high. The Contractor shall ensure that materials, systems and skilled personnel are
sourced with the level of quality and workmanship required of the works.
PAGE 73
H Cost of testing carried out which is not in accordance with the specification or of
unapproved items shall be borne by the Contractor.
I Samples shall be taken, and testing shall be conducted, in locations and at intervals
stipulated by the Engineer. The Engineer’s representative shall witness all sampling
and testing unless the Engineer decides otherwise.
J All samples shall be properly labelled and secured at site and accompanied by the
Engineers representative during transportation to the testing laboratory.
K All repair works shall be carried out in the presence of the Engineer or his
representative unless prior agreement otherwise is obtained from the Engineer.
L The Contractor shall keep a daily record of the maximum and minimum ambient
op V1
temperature and relative humidity in the application areas.
M The number, frequency and selection of tests prescribed in the documents and the
Engineers study is a reflection of the depth of inquiry and the quality expected of the
C -
respective works and shall be binding on the Contractor. Depending on circumstances,
y
the Engineer may require additional tests to be conducted to satisfy the Client queries
C
on material, workmanship or adequacy of the repair.
N The Client sound construction, machinery or devices associated with the repair areas
C
such as pipelines, pumps, chambers shall not be damaged during the repair period.
The Contractor shall take all precautions to safeguard the Client property. Any damage
Q
accidental or deliberate shall be made good to its original condition finish and
functionality at the Contractors own cost.
O All damage caused by in-situ destructive testing shall be repaired using the approved
materials and to the Engineer’s satisfaction.
8.1.6 Delivery, Storage and Protection

A Delivery, storage and handling of products and materials shall be in accordance with
the manufacturer’s recommendations, Section 01600 of the specification and the
following provisions:
1. Delivery, storage and handling shall at all times be performed in a manner to avoid
product damage.
2. Store materials on a flat level area and raised above the ground on timber bearers.
3. Where product manufacturer recommends storage under controlled temperatures,
the Contractor shall provide an enclosed, insulated cool store maintained at the
proper temperature at all times.
4. If stored outside, store materials under opaque cover and out of direct sunlight at all
times. Maintain a free flow of air around the materials at all times.
5. Bulk mixed shotcrete shall be suitably stored on polythene sheets and kept covered
with additional sheets to provide complete protection as directed by the Engineer and
be used within 3 days unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer.
6. The Contractor shall visually inspect all products upon delivery to site and report any
a. Any products damaged during delivery, storage and handling shall be marked by the
Contractor and set aside.
PAGE 74
b. Proposals for repair of any damaged products shall be submitted in writing to the
Engineer for approval.
c. Any damaged products deemed unsuitable for repair by the Engineer shall be
removed from site and replaced.
d. All products shall be clearly labeled with date of manufacture and shelf life or date of
expiry. Any expired products shall be removed from site.
8.1.7 Warranty
A The manufacturer and the Contractor shall jointly guarantee the completed repairs to
be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 10 years from the
date of completion of the Works.
op V1
B The Contractor shall furnish the Client with the manufacturer’s guarantee and warranty
certificates for all materials and components used.
C -
C If the concrete repairs are found to be defective during the warranty period, the
y
C
manufacturer and Contractor shall replace and/or repair the concrete to the
satisfaction of the Client and at no cost to the Client.
C
8.2.1. Epoxy Fillers
Q
A Epoxy fillers shall be two component solvent free epoxy resin compounds, suitable for
repair of small activities, pinholes, offsets or imperfections.
B All fillers shall be special purpose products manufactured in premeasured quantities
for easy site mixing.
C Bonding agents and ancillary products shall be as recommended by the manufacturer,
unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
D Epoxy fillers shall meet the requirements of ASTM C881, Type 1, Grade 3, classes B
and C.
8.2.2. Epoxy Repair Mortar

A Epoxy repair mortar shall be a two part epoxy resin mortar suitable for use in the
climatic conditions prevailing in Abu Dhabi with regard to pot life, useable life of freshly
mixed components and curing.
B Mortar shall be packaged in pre measured quantities for easy site mixing.
C Bonding agents and ancillary materials shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.
D Mortar shall have a minimum compressive strength of 50N/mm2 at 7 days when tested
in accordance with BS 6319-2.
E Mortar shall have a minimum tensile strength of 10N/mm2 at 7 days when tested in
accordance with BS 6319-7.
F Mortar shall have a rapid chloride penetration of 1000 coulombs maximum when
tested in accordance with ASTM C1202.
PAGE 75
8.2.3. Cementitious Repair Mortar

A Cementitious repair mortar shall be a single component general purpose concrete
reinstatement mortar exhibiting the following characteristics.
1. Low permeability to provide good protection against carbon dioxide and chloride
penetration.
2. Excellent bond to the concrete substrate.
3. Shrinkage compensated.
4. Pre bagged to overcome site batched variations requiring only the site addition of
potable water.
5. Contains no chloride admixtures.
op V1
6. Bonding agents and ancillary materials shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer.
7. Minimum compressive strength of 28N/mm2 at 28 days when tested in accordance
with BS 6319-2.
C -
y
8. Rapid chloride penetration of 1000 coulombs maximum when tested in accordance
with ASTM C1202.
C
8.2.4. Polymer Modified Cementitious Repair Mortar
C
A Polymer modified cementitious repair mortar shall be a single component lightweight
polymer modified concrete reinstatement mortar exhibiting the following
Q
characteristics.
1. Lightweight formulation to allow high build.
2. Low permeability to provide good protection against carbon dioxide and chloride
penetration.
3. Excellent bond to the concrete substrate.
5. Pre bagged to overcome site batched variations requiring only the site addition of
potable water.
6. Bonding agents and ancillary materials shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer.
7. Contains no chloride admixtures.
8. Minimum compressive strength of 40N/mm2 at 28 days when tested in accordance
with BS 6319-2.
9. Rapid chloride penetration of 1000 coulombs maximum when tested in accordance
with ASTM C1202.
8.2.5. Shotcrete
A Pre-bagged shotcrete shall be a single component cementitious material suitable for
dry or wet mix applications with the properties given in Table 8.2-1 below.
1. A suitable approved fiber shall be added to the shotcrete to reduce crack
propagation.
PAGE 76
a. The use of fiber shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions
and as approved by the Engineer.
b. Prior to the approval of shotcrete the Contractor shall carry out trials mixes in the
presence of the Engineer.
Table 8.2-1: Shotcrete Properties
Property Test Method Value
Max aggregate size - 12.5mm
Min compressive strength BS 4551-1 40 N/mm2 at 28 days
op V1
Min flexural strength BS 6319-3 10 N/mm2 at 28 days
Min tensile strength BS 6319-7 5 N/mm2 at 28 days
C -
Water absorption BS 1881 < 2%
y
C < 300 macrostrain at 7 days
Drying shrinkage ASTM C157
C
< 500 macrostrain at 28 days
Rapid chloride penetration ASTM C1202 1000 coulombs max

Q
B Bulk mixed shotcrete compliant with the recommendations of ACI 506.2 may be
utilized in lieu of pre-bagged shotcrete, if approved by the Engineer.
1. Aggregates shall meet the requirements in Section 03300 of the specification except
as modified hereunder.
2. The combined grading shall be within the limits given in Table 8.2-2 below unless
Table 8.2-2: Shotcrete Aggregate Grading
Sieve Size (mm) Percent Passing

12.5 100
9.5 90-100
4.75 70-85
2.36 50-70
1.18 35-55
0.6 20-35
0.3 8-20
0.15 2-10

propagation.
a. The use of fiber shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions
and as approved by the Engineer.
PAGE 77
b. Prior to the approval of shotcrete the Contractor shall carry out trials mixes in the
presence of the Engineer.
4. Minimum cement content shall be 415 kg/m3.
a. Type of cement shall be ASTM Type I, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
5. Shotcrete shall have the properties given in Table 8.2-2 above.
6. The temperature of the mix shall not be more than 32ºC.
op V1
7. Where applicable shotcrete shall comply with the ACI 506, ACI 506.2, ACI 506.3,
ACI 506.4 and ACI 548.1.
C -
8. Prior to the start of the work each nozzle man will be subject to certification by the
y
Engineer in accordance with ACI 506.3
C
9. The Contractor has to spray shotcrete in to the approved molds for cutting cores.
C
Cores shall be taken as directed by the Engineer for the specified tests.
Q
10. The Contractor shall be allowed to start the works only after the Engineer has
approved the materials mix design, nozzle men and the site procedure including
mixing procedure.
11. The finished surface shall be smooth, free from voids, cracks, honeycombing, and
suitable for the application of surface coatings or other finishes as applicable.
8.2.6. Concrete
A Requirements for C40/10 concrete shall be in accordance with Section 03300 of the
specification.
8.2.7. Micro-Concrete
A Shall be supplied as a pre-bagged special purpose product requiring only the addition
of a pre-determined volume of water at site to produce a mix of predictable
performance.
B Micro-concrete shall be a single component, shrinkage controlled, free flowing
concrete without segregation of the materials with the properties given in Table 8.2-3
below.
Table 8.2-3: Micro-Concrete Properties

Min compressive BS 4551 60 N/mm2 at 28 days
strength
Min flexural BS 6319-3 9 N/mm2 at 28 days
PAGE 78
strength
Min tensile BS 6319-7 5 N/mm2 at 28 days
strength
Water absorption BS 1881 < 2%
Drying shrinkage ASTM C157 < 300 macrostrain at 7 days
< 500 macrostrain at 28 days
Rapid chloride ASTM C1202 1000 coulombs max
penetration
C Bonding agents and ancillary material shall be as recommended by the repair material
op V1
manufacturer, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
8.2.8. Epoxy Lining Mortar

A Epoxy lining mortar shall be a heavy duty, high strength, durable, chemical and
C -
abrasion resistant trowel-applied epoxy resin lining mortar with the physical properties
y
C
given in Table 8.2-4 below.
Table 8.2-4: Epoxy Lining Mortar Properties
C
Compressive BS 6319-2 70 N/mm2
Q
strength
Flexural strength BS 6319-3 28 N/mm2
Tensile strength BS 6319-7 12 N/mm2
Density - 1750 kg/m3
8.2.9. Concrete Coating Systems

A Coating systems for concrete shall comply with the requirements of Section 03600 of
the specification.
8.2.10. Reinforcement
A Reinforcement shall comply with the requirements of Section 03200 of the
specification.
8.2.11. Coating to Reinforcement

A Coating to reinforcement shall be a single component zinc epoxy primer meeting the
requirements of BS 4652 Type 2 with a minimum zinc content of 85% dry film.
8.2.12. Epoxy Crack Injection Resins

A Epoxy crack injection resins shall be two part epoxy resins suitable for use in the
climatic conditions prevailing in Abu Dhabi with regard to pot life and curing and shall
be generally used for structural repairs
B The resin and hardener shall be pre-packaged.
PAGE 79
C Resins shall have a minimum compressive strength of 70 N/mm2 at 7 days when

tested in accordance with BS 6319-2.
8.2.13. Polyester Crack Injection Resins

A Polyester crack injection resins shall be two part polyester resins suitable for use in the
climatic conditions prevailing in Abu Dhabi with regard to pot life and curing and shall
generally be used for stopping water leakage.
B The resin and catalyst shall be pre-packaged.
C The end product shall be a foam, gel or solid according to the specific repair
requirement as agreed by the Engineer.
op V1
8.3.1. Condition Survey
A A detailed study of the condition of the structures shall be carried out by the Contractor
C -
y
under the direction and supervision of the Engineer. The detailed condition survey
C
shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
B The condition survey shall include testing to assess the quality and mechanical
C
properties of the concrete and reinforcing steel in a structure.
C Test samples shall be obtained by core sampling using diamond studded bits and by
random sampling of broken concrete.
Q
1. The number, size and location of core samples shall be selected to permit all
necessary laboratory tests and be agreed with the Engineer.
2. The core diameter for strength properties shall have a minimum diameter of
three times the maximum aggregate size, or 50mm, whichever is the greater.
3. The core length for testing of strength property shall be a minimum of twice the
diameter. Allowance shall be made for possible break off damage at the base of
the core where the core does not completely penetrate the structure.
Reinforcement shall not be included in a core that is to be tested for strength. A
minimum of three cores shall be removed at each location to determine strength.
The average value shall be used.
4. Small bore core samples may be used for chemical sampling.
5. Samples of broken concrete shall not be used to determine the strength of the
concrete. Random samples of broken concrete shall only be used to determine
the chemical properties of the deteriorated concrete.
D The following properties of aggregates shall be determined by petrographic evaluation
of concrete samples as agreed with the Engineer.
1. Particle shape, size distribution and composition.
2. The extent to which particles are coated, and the nature of the coating
substance.
3. The potential for deleterious reactions between the aggregate and cement
alkalis, sulphates and sulphates.
4. Presence of unsound aggregate (fractured, porous and degree of weathering).
E The following properties of the concrete shall be determined by petrographic analysis
as agreed with the Engineer.
PAGE 80
1. The density of the paste and color of the cement.

2. Homogeneity of the concrete.
3. Occurrence and distribution of cracking.
4. Characteristic and distribution of voids.
5. Presence of contaminating substances.
6. Proportion of un-hydrated cement.
7. Presence of mineral admixtures.
8. Volumetric proportion of aggregates, cement paste and air voids.
9. Air content and various dimensional characteristics of the air void system.
op V1
10. Weathering pattern from surface to bottom.
11. Presence of deterioration due to abrasion, chemical or fire exposure.
F The following chemical properties of the concrete shall be determined by chemical
tests as agreed with the Engineer.
C -
y
1.
2.
C
Chloride ion content.
Sulphates content.
G Where destructive testing of specimens of reinforcement steel is required, the samples
C
should be removed as follows:
1.At location of minimum stress in the reinforcement.
2.No two samples shall be removed from the same cross section of a structural
Q
member.
3. Samples shall be a minimum of 400mm long.
H Non-destructive testing of concrete surface shall consist of:
1. Delamination tests to determine and map areas of delamination.
2. Cover meter reading and recording of the results to determine the depth of
reinforcement. This shall be undertaken in 1m2 panels.
I A condition survey report shall be prepared for submission to the Engineer. The report
shall include the results of the testing with laboratory report, photographs, drawings
and recommended repairs in accordance with this section of the specification. Two
copies of the condition survey report are to be submitted to the Engineer.
8.3.2. Repair Strategy

A Upon receipt of the condition survey report the Engineer shall study the same and give
his written instructions backed up by marked up copies of plans showing the repairs to
be carried out.
B Depending on the nature, location and extent of defects the Engineer will need time to
construct the appropriate instructions for the repairs. The Engineer may need to carry
out further selected investigations, calculation, and analysis, hold meetings with the
Client and seek approvals through the various bodies. The Contractor shall therefore
in his programme, allow the Engineer a reasonable period of time of not less than 14
days to carry out his study, analysis and repair strategies and consult the Client to
enable the Engineer to formulate the necessary instructions. For this reason the
Contractor must notify the Engineer immediately of any unreasonable delay or
disruption that the Contractor may envisage due to late instructions by the Engineer.
Any claim citing late instructions by the Engineer as a cause will not be considered
PAGE 81
unless written notifications with satisfactory proofs have been forwarded to the
Engineer immediately after the cause has occurred. The Contractor shall not claim
ignorance of the event as a justification for his delayed or late submission of claims.
C The repair strategy shall be determined by the Engineer. This shall include but
not be limited to the following:
1. Concrete to be repaired and methods proposed based on the approved
system.
2. Basis for concrete removal and replacement. This shall extend to areas of
concrete contaminated with aggressive agents such as chlorides, sulphates,
physical defects such as spalling, cracking and rust staining; chemical
deterioration such as alkali-silicate reaction, carbonation, magnesium and
op V1
sulphates attack; or any other form of attack.
3. Extent and limitations and pre-repair preparations.
4. Repair systems and materials to be used.
C -
5. Management and supervision.
y
C
6. Quality control.
D On receipt of the repair strategy from the Engineer, the Contractor shall prepare
C
detailed methodologies for undertaking the repair. These shall include, if appropriate,
safeguards, including structural support system, before staged removal of the
Q
defective areas of concrete.
8.3.3. Trial and Demonstration Repairs

A In order to ensure that materials, equipment and methods of application proposed by
the Contractor are suitable for the intended purpose, trial and demonstration repairs
shall be carried for each and every application and scenario prior to commencement of
the actual work. Tests shall be carried out regarding materials. Testing programmes
shall be dependent on the material, application and exposure. Methods are therefore
subject to modification and change depending on the trial results.
B No work shall start until successful trials have been carried out and the test reports
have been studied, analysed and approved by the Engineer.
C Sample trial repairs for approval shall be undertaken for each type of designated repair
or system not less than six weeks before the relevant work is scheduled to begin. Trial
repairs shall be carried out using the same materials intended to be used in the works.
If any of the materials, system or formulas are changed during the course of the works
new trials shall be carried out.
D The Contractor shall ensure that the operators he selects have the necessary skills to
complete the application in a professional manner. In the event the Contractor is
unable to recruit skilled staff, he shall propose a professional subcontractor.
E Trial repairs shall be assessed by the Engineer to ensure that the required standards
will be achieved with the materials, methods and workmanship proposed and
demonstrated by the Contractor. Trial repair areas shall be used as a standard against
which subsequent work shall be compared and judged.
PAGE 82
F Sample repairs shall be chosen, as far as it is reasonably possible to emulate the

geometry, complexity and orientation of the structure to be repaired.
G The Contractor shall prepare a complete record of the trials, to include but not be
limited to the following:
1. Date, time, location of trials and ambient conditions.

2. Method of substrate preparation and standard.
3. Materials used together with the mix proportions.
4. Equipment and tools used.
5. Material handling, mixing and application methods and records.
op V1
6. Man hours expended.
7. Location and name of laboratory and results.
8. Expert interpretation, analysis, conclusions and informed opinion and
C -
knowledge.
y
9.
C
Record omission, difficulties, failures and defects.
H On submission of the trial report, the Engineer shall review the report and add his
C
comments and instructions accordingly.
I Until the Contractor proves that the trials have been carried out to the requirements of
Q
the specification and to the Engineer’s satisfaction, no permanent repair works will be
allowed to begin.
8.3.4. Removal of Areas of Defective Concrete

A Areas to be repaired shall be surveyed, inspected and marked out by the Contractor in
accordance with the preliminary repair maps accompanying the Engineer’s
instructions.
B Prior to commencement of concrete removal the Engineer shall inspect the area
marked, verify and issue instructions accordingly.
C The Contractor shall map the depth of the reinforcement using an electronic cover
meter over the area to be repaired before cutting the concrete. Each repair area shall
be cut in a series of straight lines on the surface to a depth of approximately 25mm,
10mm for repairs using epoxy mortar, using a disc cutter or similar. The concrete shall
be chipped out to the depths required. The exposed concrete surfaces shall be
roughened and cleaned by sand blasting followed by high pressure water wash at the
same time as cleaning the reinforcement.
D No cutting out of either reinforcement or concrete shall be carried out without the
Engineer’s approval. Before cutting out an area the Engineer shall check that the
structure is safe or made safe by propping or other suitable means.
E Where the cover is low, disc cutting shall be omitted or limited in order to avoid
damage to the reinforcement. Care shall be exercised when roughening the disc-cut
surfaces to prevent damage to the surrounding sound concrete.
PAGE 83
F The power, size and suitability of the equipment used for concrete removal shall be
relevant to the demands of the individual repair and shall be subject to the approval of
the Engineer. Where percussive equipment is used particular care shall be taken to
ensure that damage is not caused to adjoining sound concrete substrate and
reinforcement.
G Where there are environmental constraints it may be necessary to use environmentally

friendly methods.
H Where concrete is to be replaced by shotcrete the slope of the cut out shall be
approximately 60o to the surface of the sound concrete.
op V1
I Loose aggregate and concrete pieces shall be removed by light chipping hammers,
stone chisels and bolsters.
J Concrete in repair areas shall not be removed to expose the main reinforcement
unless it is required and instructed by the Engineer.
C -
y
C
K The repair area shall be initially cleaned by oil free compressed air. The area shall be
inspected by the Engineer and the Engineers instructions shall be followed.
C
L Additional concrete removal shall be carried out in any of the following circumstances:
1. Remove concrete to assess condition deeper inside the concrete.

Q
2. When the reinforcement is badly corroded and requires full exposure to allow
replacement if necessary.
3. If it is found that the carbonated depth has not been fully cleaned out.
4. Where reinforcement has corroded and adjacent continuous length of 50mm of
corrosion free reinforcement needs to be exposed. The boundaries of active
corrosion areas shall be assessed by the Engineer.
5. An additional length of un-corroded bar, up to 200mm, shall be broken out if couplers
are to be used for replacement reinforcement.
6. If concrete surrounding the exposed area is not sound or is contaminated.
7. When chloride initiated corrosion is evident and not completely cut out.
8. When insufficient cover to the reinforcement is noted and that reinforcement is of
small diameter to allow the reinforcement to be pushed back to provide enough
cover.
9. When the reinforcement has become loose as a result of cover removal operations
and the concrete needs to be cut back to areas of sound embedment.
M When instructions are given to cut concrete behind the embedded reinforcement a
minimum gap of 20mm shall be created behind the reinforcement to allow the full
circumference of the reinforcement to be sand blasted as specified. Removal shall not
be more than 50mm measured from the back of the reinforcement.
N The extent of concrete removal shall be agreed by the Engineer before any
reinforcement preparation and repair commences.
O All necessary precautions shall be taken to ensure that dust or falling debris does not
constitute a hazard to personnel, equipment, the structure and the general public.
PAGE 84
Effective means of clearing dust and debris away from the working area shall be
continuously implemented. Repair work shall not be allowed amidst debris, dust, waste
and rubbish.
P The extent and depth of concrete removal required shall be measured and recorded
on drawings by the Contractor and verified by the Engineer as the work proceeds.
8.3.5. Repair of Reinforcement

A The Contractor and Engineer shall assess the extent and type of deterioration in the
affected area. If the structural appraisal indicates that the area requires to be
strengthened the Engineer shall so instruct.
op V1
B Additional reinforcement shall generally be of the same size and type as the
reinforcement to be replaced and shall be in accordance with Section 03200 of the
specification.
8.3.5.1. C -
Provision for Extra Reinforcement Using Straight Laps
y
C
A Where existing concrete remains bonded to the main bars, no breaking out shall take
place to provide lap lengths for supplementary reinforcement unless applied loads are
C
relieved by temporary propping. If propping is not feasible then other methods of
strengthening the member should be considered. Lap lengths should be a minimum of
Q
40 times the reinforcement bar diameter and be greater if the repair material does not
provide a bond strength equivalent to that of the substrate concrete.
8.3.5.2. Provision for Extra Reinforcement which is Anchored

A Extra reinforcement may be installed with reduced lap lengths by anchoring the ends
at 90o to the concrete face. The ends shall be grouted into holes drilled into the
concrete using resin or cementitious mortars. Care must be taken to avoid damaging
adjacent areas where the existing reinforcement to concrete bond remains intact,
unless the structure or member can be temporarily propped or as agreed by the
Engineer. Bond and bearing stresses of the anchors shall be adequate.
8.3.5.3. Provision for Extra Reinforcement Using Connectors

A This method of supplementing reinforcement may require greater access around the
reinforcement in order to make the connection. The finished connections will in some
cases significantly reduce the cover to the reinforcement.
B The connector shall be capable of transferring all the forces in the reinforcement and
the properties of the connected reinforcement shall correspond as closely as possible
to those of the original reinforcement.
8.3.5.4. Provision for Extra Reinforcement using Welding
PAGE 85
A Site welding of reinforcement shall be avoided if alternative methods of repair are

available.
B If site welding is to be carried out the following essential features shall be included in
the programme of work:
1. The relevant standard shall be applied.

2. A written procedure shall be agreed before work commences, covering method,
type of welding, competencies, sampling and testing.
3. Qualification tests to certify all welders shall be carried out both before the
beginning of the work and at intervals during the course of work.
op V1
4. A quality control programme shall be instituted which shall include visual
assessment, tensile testing, radiographic inspection and other non-destructive
testing.
5. Reference shall be made to BS 7123 and CIRIA report 92.
6.
C -
In some cases it may be necessary to dowel in additional small diameter
y
reinforcement to anchor back repairs to corners and arises. If adequate cover
C
cannot be obtained reinforcement shall be of stainless steel to BS 6744. The
method of doweling in reinforcement shall be approved by the Engineer.
C
7. All stainless steel reinforcement shall be pickled and passivated to approved
methods before installation.
Q
C When instructed by the Engineer, all tie rod inserts, tie wires, chairs, steel spacers and
other accessories shall have a concrete cover of 40mm.
D Rust, scale, corrosion products and other deposits shall be removed from exposed
reinforcement in the area of repair by grit blasting to achieve SA 2½.
E Consideration shall be given to the protection of the general public and the immediate
environs from grit and dust nuisance, noise pollution, undue disturbances and
considerations of respect for quiet periods.
F Grit blasting shall be carried out in such a way as to enable the shadow faces at the
backs of bars and at intersections of bars to be cleaned to the same standard.
G Grit blasting abrasives shall be new, clean, and dry and of a grade suitable for the
preparation of steel to the standard indicated above. Abrasives shall be of a type
approved by the Engineer. Exhausted abrasive shall be bagged up and removed from
site.
H Equipment shall be capable of delivering abrasives at a nozzle pressure sufficient to

achieve the standard of cleaning specified above and the air supply shall be free of
entrained oil and water.
I All reinforcement shall be adequately fixed and tied in position such that it will not be
displaced during the repair process. The clear distance between newly placed
reinforcement and existing reinforcement shall be 35mm for shotcrete applications.
J All sand blasted areas shall be washed with high pressure washing and dried prior to
coating of reinforcement.
PAGE 86
K Reinforcement in the repair area shall be primed using a single component zinc rich
epoxy resin which shall be an active type capable of avoiding the generation of
incipient anodes and shall be fully compatible with the repair material. The
reinforcement shall be in surface condition SA2½ at the time of application of the
primer. Any reinforcement not meeting this standard shall be reblasted before the
protective system is applied.
L The number of coats, time between coats, mixing and application of the reinforcement
protective system shall all be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
M Damaged epoxy coated reinforcement shall be repaired in accordance with the epoxy
coating manufacturers recommendations.
op V1
N Concrete repair shall not proceed until 7 days have elapsed after the application of the
zinc rich primer or epoxy coating repair.
8.3.6. Concrete Repair General Requirements

C -
y
C
A The Contractor shall ensure that the ambient conditions are suitable for the application
of the repair materials. The suitability of ambient conditions during application are
either stipulated for the generic class of materials or is dependent on the
C
manufacturer’s statements. The Contractor shall submit the relevant information in
each case. Bonding polymers shall be used in bonding new cementitious products to
Q
old matured concrete. Bonding polymers must be suitable for external environments.
The polymer must be un-saponifiable if embedded or laid on concrete surfaces.
B Where breaking out of concrete is not required the surface to be repaired shall be
roughened and any laitance removed by sand blasting.
C All surfaces to receive repair material shall be clean and free from dust, unsound or
contaminated material, oil, paint, grease, corrosion deposits and algae.
D The substrate should be primed and the agreed material to be used for the repair
mixed, applied and cured all in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
E Surface finishes and tolerances for all repair areas shall comply with Sections 03100
and 03300 of the specification, unless approved otherwise by the Engineer.
F Contractor shall conduct pull-off tests on all concrete repair applications as directed by
the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Client in accordance with the requirements of
BS EN 1542. All failures shall either be in the substrate or if the failure occurs at the
interface between repair material and substrate or within the repair material the
minimum pull off value shall be 1.5N/mm2. One pull off test shall be conducted for
every 50m2 of each type of repair.
G Frequency of sampling and test requirements for concrete repair systems shall be as
follows:
1. Cementitious mortars. 6 cubes shall be taken for every 400 bags utilized with 3
cubes being tested for compressive strength and 3 cubes for rapid chloride
penetration at 28 days.
PAGE 87
2. Shotcrete. Two number 800mm X 800mm X 200mm samples shall be taken from
shotcrete applications on a daily basis. 3 cores shall be taken at 7 days and 3
cores at 28 days and tested for compressive strength. For every 15th sample 1
core shall be taken at 28 days and tested for rapid chloride penetration.
3. Concrete shall be sampled and tested for compressive strength and rapid
chloride penetration in accordance with the requirements of Section 03300 of the
specification.
4. Micro-concrete. 6 cubes shall be taken for every 100 bags utilized with 3 cubes
being tested for compressive strength and 3 cubes for rapid chloride penetration
at 28 days.
H In the event of the test results not achieving the specified requirements the Contractor
op V1
shall remove the defective work and reinstate the repaired area at no cost to the Client
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
8.3.7. Repair Using Epoxy Resin Mortars
C -
A Primer shall be applied to the substrate ensuring that it is well brushed into the
y
C
prepared surface taking care to avoid uneven film thicknesses. Only one coat of primer
shall be allowed.
C
B The epoxy resin mortar shall be applied after 24 hours has elapsed after the
application of the primer.
Q
C The mixed epoxy resin mortar material shall be applied to the primed surface in layers
not exceeding the manufacturer’s recommended maximum thickness per layer.
D Subsequent layers shall be applied within the open time of the mortar or if the previous
layer has stage cured before the next layer is applied, the surface shall be roughened
by abrading to provide a key.
E Intermediate stages and the completed repair shall be protected from rain until at least
24 hours after the application. The repair shall be shaded from direct sunlight for at
least 24 hours after application.
8.3.8. Repair Using Cementitious Mortars

A The repair mortar shall be non-shrink and shall be applied in layers not exceeding the
thickness specified by the manufacturer of the mortar.
B Each layer shall be thoroughly worked and compacted into the repair zone and around
or between reinforcement ensuring that the substrate and reinforcement are
thoroughly wetted. The technique employed shall ensure that air is not entrapped
within and in the boundary of the reinforcement/mortar or mortar/substrate.
C Successive layers shall be applied as soon as the preceding layer has become
sufficiently stiff but still open to ensure bonding to the subsequent layer. The time
between layers shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. If
sagging occurs the material shall be completely removed and reapplied at a reduced
thickness.
PAGE 88
D If the previous layer has dried out and loses its open time before the next layer is
applied the surface shall be prepared according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations before the subsequent layer is applied.
E The final layer within a repair shall be levelled off or profiled using trowelling
techniques to produce an acceptable and matching finish.
F Curing to retain moisture shall be implemented immediately on completion of each

layer of application. The surface of the mortar shall be protected from sunlight and
drying winds.
G The repair shall be cured by the method and for the period recommended by the
op V1
manufacturer of the repair system. During this period the repair shall be shaded from
direct sunlight. Curing membranes shall not be permitted unless otherwise agreed by
the Engineer in exceptional situations where the geometry is complex.
8.3.9. Repair Using Shotcrete

C -
y
C
A Spraying equipment, nozzles, assemblies, equipment, tools and accessories shall be
regularly checked for working efficiency, freedom from leaks and that worn parts are
regularly replaced. The air supply shall be adequate in volume and pressure and be
C
dry and free from pressure fluctuations.
B The Contractor or his sub-contractor shall demonstrate his ability to satisfactorily spray
Q
cementitious mortars and concrete. He should also be fully conversant with the
relevant codes of practice relating to the spraying of mortars and concrete.
C The Contractor shall employ operatives who are competent and experienced in
spraying. Nozzle men shall have at least 3 years of experience in spraying concrete.
Moreover, they will be subject to qualifying tests as directed by the Engineer.
D Profile guides shall be used to ensure that concrete is placed to the required
thickness, uniformity and texture with minimum surface trimming or finishing work.
E Interfaces shall be dampened for at least 12 hours, with no excess free water, prior to
commencement of spraying. During spraying operations, interfaces, joints and
subsequent layers of sprayed concrete shall be subject to continuous removal of
trapped rebound, overshoot and laitance.
F Spraying shall commence at the bottom of vertical panels and progress upwards. The
position and type of construction joints shall be approved by the Engineer.
G For each particular area, the maximum thickness of each layer shall be determined
beforehand to avoid slumping. The surface of each layer shall be dampened again
upon initial set before the application of the next layer.
H Sand pockets and laminations are not acceptable. The finished surface shall not
deviate from the required plane by more than 3mm per metre in any direction when
measured with a straight edge 1m long.
I Uninterrupted wet curing for at least 10 days shall be ensured. Means of curing shall
vary depending on condition on site, size, shape and position of the concrete in
PAGE 89
question. Wet hessian with polyethylene cover as a minimum shall be used throughout
the curing period.
J Cracks appearing in the new works are not acceptable and shall be repaired at the
Contractor’s own cost and to the Engineer’s satisfaction.
8.3.10. Repair Using in-Situ Concrete

A When it is possible to pour in-situ concrete using conventional methods such as repair
to slabs, walls etc. the requirements for cast in place concrete as given in Section
03300 of the specification shall apply.
op V1
B Aggregate sizes may have to be changed in view of the repair geometry. The
Contractor shall submit proposals for approval by the Engineer.
C Cracks appearing in the new works are not acceptable and shall be repaired at the
Contractor’s own cost and to the Engineer’s satisfaction.
C -
y
8.3.11.
C
Repair Using Free Flowing Cementitious Micro-Concrete
A Adequate formwork shall be provided in accordance with the relevant codes of
C
practice. This shall be securely fixed to withstand the hydraulic pressures of the fluid
micro-concrete repair material without distortion or movement during placement.
Q
B The formwork shall be sealed and made watertight at all joints between panels and
between the formwork and the existing concrete surface so as to prevent grout loss.
C The formwork shall be constructed from appropriate materials as agreed with the
Engineer to achieve the required finish as specified in Section 03100.
D Formwork surfaces that are to be in contact with the micro-concrete shall be treated
with a suitable mould release agent. This shall be used in accordance with the
E The entry point of the feed pipe into the form shall be at the lowest point of the void.
F Sufficient hydrostatic head or pumping pressure shall be maintained to ensure that the
void is filled completely and air is not entrapped.
G Where necessary, provision shall be made for controlled bleed points to prevent air
entrapment and enable the extent of flow of the repair material to be assessed.
H The micro-concrete shall be mixed and placed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations, particularly with regard to water content, mixing equipment and
placing time.
I The placing of the micro-concrete shall be, as far as possible, continuous. The mixing
operation shall be timed so that there is minimal interruption in the material flow. If
however, placing is interrupted, the operation shall recommence as soon as possible
while the repair material retains its flow characteristics.
J The formwork shall not be removed until the area repaired with micro concrete has
achieved a compressive strength of at least 10 N/mm2 or as directed by the Engineer.
PAGE 90
K Immediately after the removal of the formwork the area shall be cured in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Details of method of curing shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval.
8.3.12. Repair of Surface Cracks

A Surface cracks less than or equal to 0.3mm in width shall be chased out by an
approved mechanical means to the depth of the crack or where no further cracking to
the substrate is visible. The chase shall be profiled to a ‘V’ section of equal depth to
width.
B The mixed epoxy filler shall be applied using a trowel, scraper or filling knife ensuring
that full compaction is achieved into the chased section and providing a flush finish
op V1
with the host concrete.
C Allow to cure for up to 24 hours before applying subsequent protective coating

systems.
C -
y
8.3.13. Crack Injection
C
A Crack injection shall be performed as directed by the Engineer with epoxy resins
C
generally being used for structural repairs and polyester resins used to stop water
leakage.
Q
B All injection shall be carried out by drilling holes at approximately 45o to the surface in
order to intersect the crack at the centre of the member.
C Crack injection shall typically start at the bottom of vertical surfaces and shall continue
upwards as resin is seen to exit the crack.
8.3.14. Application of Epoxy Lining Mortar

A All surface laitance, traces of curing membrane and other forms of contamination shall
be entirely removed by high pressure water jetting or light abrasive blasting followed by
rinsing with water and complete surface drying. Priming of the prepared substrate shall
be carried out if so recommended by the manufacturer.
B The minimum application thickness shall be 3 mm or as recommended by the

manufacturer.
C All surface preparation, priming, mixing and application of the epoxy resin lining mortar
shall be carried out in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8.3.15. Final Protective Coating

A At the discretion of the Engineer, where it is required to provide a uniform texture to
the overall exposed concrete surface, an epoxy filler and protective coating shall be
applied, strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
B In preparation for the protective coating all existing surfaces shall be free from oil,
grease, loose particles, decayed matter, moss or algae growth and general curing
PAGE 91
compounds. All surface contamination and surface laitance must be removed through
the use of high pressure water jetting or sand blasting.
C Blow holes and areas of substantial pitting shall then be filled with an epoxy filler. The
mixing and application of this must be in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
D Coating materials are required to provide in-depth protection against chlorides and
carbonation whilst providing excellent abrasion resistance.
E The Contractor is required to adhere strictly to the manufacturer’s specifications

regarding the use, storage, application and safety rules in respect of the approved
op V1
materials.
F The exposed concrete surfaces as agreed with the Engineer shall be coated with 2
coats of a high build solvent free epoxy resin coating in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions and Section 03600 of the specification. The finished
C -
coating shall be pinhole free and have a total minimum dry film thickness of 400
y
microns.
C
END OF SECTION
C
Q
PAGE 92
9. CONCRETE PROTECTION AND

WATERPROOFING SYTEM (SECTION 03600)
9.1. Part 1 General
9.1.1 Scope and General Requirements
A. This section of the specification gives the requirements for the manufacture and
application of protection and waterproofing systems to concrete surfaces and
includes coatings, membranes, linings and waterproof membranes.
op V1
B. The internal surfaces of surface water drainage pumping station wet sumps,
culverts, chambers, tanks, manholes, and other concrete structures shall be
protected by polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or high density polyethylene (HDPE) linings to
C -
the floors, walls and soffits of roof and reducer slabs and by epoxy coating to the
y
benching to manholes unless specified otherwise.
C
C. The internal faces of pumping station wet sumps, culverts, chambers, tanks,
manholes, and other concrete structures in contact with sewage or sewage gas
C
shall be protected with a preformed glass reinforced plastic (GRP) lining. Where it
is impracticable to construct a preformed GRP lining such faces shall be protected
Q
by means of an in situ GRP lamination unless specified otherwise.
D. Waterproofing systems shall be applied to upper faces of concrete blinding layers

and below ground horizontal and vertical faces of substructures unless specified
otherwise.

section:
01300 Submittals
01400 Quality control
03500 Concrete repair
9.1.3 Standards
ASTM D36 Standard test method for softening point of bitumen (ring-and-
ball apparatus).
ASTM D146 Standard test methods for sampling and testing bitumen-
saturated felts and woven fabrics for roofing and waterproofing.
ASTM D570 Standard test method for water absorption of plastics.
ASTM D638 Standard test method for tensile properties of plastics.
PAGE 93
ASTM D2240 Standard test method for rubber property – Durometer

hardness.
ASTM D2583 Standard test method for indentation hardness of rigid plastics
by means of a Barcol impresser.
ASTM D4073 Standard test method for tensile-tear strength of bituminous
roofing membranes.
BS 3396 Woven glass fabrics for plastics reinforcement.
BS 3532 Method of specifying unsaturated polyester resin systems.
BS EN 14020-1 Reinforcements. Specification for textile glass roving’s.
Designation.
op V1
BS EN 14020-2 Reinforcements. Specification for textile glass roving’s.
Methods of test and general requirements.
BS EN 14020-3 Reinforcements. Specification for textile glass roving’s. Specific
requirements.
C -
y
BS EN 14118-1 Reinforcement. Specifications for textile glass mats
C (Chopped strand and continuous filament mats). Designation.
C
(Chopped strand and continuous filament mats).
Methods of test and general requirements.
Q

(Chopped strand and continuous filament mats).
Specific requirements.
BS EN 14364 Plastic piping system for drainage and sewerage with
Or without pressure. Glass reinforced-thermosetting
Plastics (GRP) based on unsaturated polyester resin
(UP). Specification for pipes and fittings.
ISO 527-2 Plastics -- Determination of tensile properties – Part 2:
Test conditions for molding and extrusion plastics
ISO 527-5 Plastics -- Determination of tensile properties – Part 5:
Test conditions for unidirectional fiber-reinforced plastic
composites
9.1.4 Submittals

PAGE 94

1 Each proposed product.
a) Manufacturers name.
b) Suppliers name.
c) Product name (if applicable).
d) Product description.
e) Manufacturer’s technical data.
f) Test results or certificates.
op V1
g) Storage instructions.
h) Application instructions.
9.1.4.2 Method Statement
A.
C -
The Contractor shall submit method statements to the Engineer for approval
y
4 weeks in advance of commencing the site activity in accordance with
C
Section 01300 of the specification. These shall comprise but not necessarily
be limited to:
C
1. Procedures for surface preparation, application and testing of
coatings.
Q
2. Procedures for surface preparation, application and testing of

membranes.
3. Procedures for installation, welding and testing of PVC-u and GRP
linings.
4. Procedures for installation and testing of GRP linings.
5. Procedures for application of in-situ GRP lamination.
6. Procedures for installation of waterproof membranes.
9.1.4.3 Drawings
1. Preformed GRP lining layout including details of anchorage and
sealing around pipes and openings.
2. PVC and HDPE lining layout including details of anchorage and sealing
around pipes and openings.
3. Waterproof membrane details including details of sealing to concrete
surfaces above ground level, sealing at intersection of horizontal and
vertical membranes and sealing at openings and projections.
9.1.4.4 Samples
A. Representative samples, as agreed with the Engineer, must be submitted for
at least the following items at the same time as the particulars are submitted.
1. Samples of primers and coatings.
PAGE 95
2. Samples of PVC and HDPE linings.

3. Samples of GRP lining.
4. Samples of waterproof membrane sheet.
9.1.4.5 Mock Up
A. Provide a 2m by 2m mockup of each type of coating, membrane, lining and
waterproof membrane system as directed by the Engineer for the Engineers
approval.

op V1

quality system which is registered to ISO 9000 or approved equal.
C -
y
C.
C
To allow the Engineer to inspect the Works the Contractor shall give the Engineer a
minimum of 24 hours’ notice of carrying out the following activities on site.
C
1. Application of coatings after surface preparation.
2. Casting of concrete for embedded lining.
Q
3. Application of in-situ GRP lamination.

4. Application of waterproof membrane and protection system.
D. Only specialty trained personnel thoroughly familiar with the application of

protection and waterproofing systems shall carry out the work.
E. The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer before the work begins, instruments
for measuring the substrate and coating properties as listed below:
1. Surface moisture determining instruments.
2. Wet and dry film thickness instruments.
3. Holiday tester.
4. Adhesion testers.
9.1.6 Delivery, Storage and Protection

the following provisions.
1. Delivery, storage and handling shall at all times be performed in a manner to avoid
product damage.
2. Store materials on a flat level area and raised above the ground on timber bearers.
3. Where product manufacturer recommends storage under controlled temperatures,
the Contractor shall provide an enclosed, insulated cool store maintained at the
proper temperature at all times.
PAGE 96
4. If stored outside, store materials under opaque cover and out of direct sunlight at all
times. Maintain a free flow of air around the materials at all times.
5. The Contractor shall visually inspect all products upon delivery to site and report any
a. Any products damaged during delivery, storage and handling shall be

b. Proposals for repair of any damaged products shall be submitted in

c. Any damaged products deemed unsuitable for repair by the Engineer
op V1
d. All products shall be clearly labeled with date of manufacture and shelf
life or date of expiry. Any expired products shall be removed from site.
9.1.7 Warranty
C -
y
A.
C
The manufacturer and the Contractor shall jointly guarantee the completed
concrete protective coating, membrane, lining and waterproof membrane systems
C
to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 10 years from
the date of completion of the Works.
Q
B. The Contractor shall furnish the Client with the manufacturer’s guarantee and
warranty certificates for all materials and components used.
C. If the concrete protective coating, membrane, lining and waterproof membrane

systems are found to be defective during the warranty period, the manufacturer and
Contractor shall replace and/or repair the concrete protective coating, membrane,
lining and waterproof membrane systems to the satisfaction of the Client and at no
cost to the Client.

9.2.1 General
A. Each type of coating, membrane, lining and waterproof membrane system
including primers and accessories as necessary shall be compatible and supplied
by the same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
9.2.2 Epoxy Coating

A. Epoxy coatings shall be solvent free, two component high build epoxies meeting
the requirements of Table 9.2-1 below.
Table 9.2-1: Epoxy Coating Requirements
Property Requirement
Volume of solids 100%
Number of coats Minimum of 2
PAGE 97
Dry film thickness Minimum of 250 microns per coat
Adhesion to concrete Minimum of 1.0N/mm2
Color (Inside manholes an chambers) Light grey or off white
B. Coal tar epoxies shall not be used.
C. Coating system shall have a proven track record of not less than 5 years in Abu
Dhabi or in similar environmental conditions. Coating system shall be suitable for
use in the climatic conditions prevailing in Abu Dhabi with regard to pot life, useable
life of freshly mixed components and curing.
op V1
D. Intermediate coats shall be tinted to facilitate inspection of coverage for each coat.
E. UV resistant over coating for external applications shall be as recommended by the

manufacturer.
C -
y
9.2.3 Polyurethane Elastomeric Membrane
C
A. The polymer shall be a two part solvent free polyurethane with the properties given
C
in Table 9.2-2 below, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Table 9.2-2: Polyurethane Elastomeric Membrane Requirements

Q
Property Requirement
Elongation at Break Minimum of 250%
Tensile strength Minimum of 8N/mm2
Nominal hardness Minimum of 80 (Shore A)
Nominal thickness 3mm
Average adhesion Minimum of 1.0N/mm2
B. Application shall be made with specialized spray equipment to produce a fast

curing, seamless membrane in a single coat.
C. A penetrating primer must be utilized to assure permanent bond with substrate.
D. Abrasive for non-slip wearing surface shall be as recommended by the

manufacturer.
E. UV resistant over coating for external applications shall be as recommended by the

manufacturer.
9.2.4 PVC and HDPE Lining

A. Lining shall be manufactured from PVC or HDPE specially compounded to retain
flexibility in manufacturing the lining. All joint, corner and welding strips shall be
made from similar materials.
PAGE 98
B. The actual resin used in the manufacture must constitute not less than 99% of the
resin used in the formulation. Copolymer resins will not be permitted.
C. The lining shall be permanently and physically attached to the concrete with an
anchoring system manufactured from the same material as the lining and shall be
suitable for casting into concrete. The anchoring system shall withstand a pull out
test of at least 18kN/m applied perpendicular to the concrete surface for a period of
one minute without rupture of the anchors or withdrawal from the concrete.
D. All joints in the lining shall be sealed using appropriate welding techniques.
E. Lining shall have a smooth glossy finish, be impermeable to gases and liquids and
non-conducive to bacteria or fungus growth.
F. Lining shall have good impact resistance, be flexible and have an elongation
op V1
sufficient to bridge up to 6mm wide settling cracks which may occur after
installation without breaking the lining.
G. Lining shall be capable of being repaired at any time during the life of the structure
in accordance with the lining manufacturer’s instructions.
H.
C -
The lining shall be capable of withstanding a back hydrostatic pressure of 2 bars
y
C
applied to the under surface of the lining without losing anchorage and without
rupture and leakage.
I. All linings shall be factory tested for pin holes using an electrical spark tester set at
C
20,000 volts minimum. Sheets having holes shall be satisfactorily repaired in the
factory prior to delivery.
Q
J. All lining sheets, joints, corner and welding strips shall meet the requirements of
Table 9.2-3 below when tested at a temperature of 43ºC.
Table 9.2-3: Physical Properties PVC and HDPE Linings
Tensile strength at break ASTM D638 Min 15 N/mm2
Elongation at break ASTM D638 Min 200%
Weld strength at break Shear - Min 60 kg/25mm weld
Peel - Min 35 kg/25mm weld
Hardness, Shore D ASTM D2240 50
Thickness - Min 1.65 mm
Distance between anchors - Max 65 mm
9.2.5 GRP Lining
9.2.5.1 Raw Materials

A. Materials used in the manufacture of the lining shall be new stock and of the best
quality.
B. Materials shall be free from all defects and imperfections that might affect the
performance of the finished product.
PAGE 99
C. Resins shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 3532 Type B, unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer. Vinylester resins shall have an elongation at
break of 3 to 6%.
D. Glass shall comply with the relevant provisions of the following standards unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer. Surface tissues shall also comply with one of
the following standards.
1. BS EN 14020-1, BS EN 14020-2 and BS EN 14020-3 for roving.
2. BS 3396 for woven fabric.
3. BS EN 14118-1, BS EN 14118-2 and BS EN 14118-3 for chopped strand mat.
E. All glass shall be corrosion resistant glass, unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
op V1
F. Roving size shall not exceed 2400 Tex.
G. Chopped strand mat shall not exceed 450g/m2.
H. Sand aggregate used for non-slip surfaces on benching shall be clean graded silica
sand, nominal size 2mm.
C -
y
C
9.2.5.2 Preformed GRP Lining.
A. All linings shall be designed to protect the concrete for a period of at least 60
C
years. They shall be keyed and bonded into the concrete at the time of
concrete casting. They shall be designed to withstand a back pressure of 2
bars without deflection.
Q
B. Lining shall be composed of a minimum 1.5 mm thick inner layer (layer in

contact with liquid) and a minimum 5.5 mm structural layer as follows:
1. The inner layer shall comprise one layer of glass surface veil 30g/m2 and two
layers of chopped strand mat 300 g/m2, “Advantix” powder bound corrosion
resistance or equivalent approved, impregnated with Vinylester resin of
approved type. Resin to glass ratio shall be 70% to 30% by weight with a
tolerance of ± 5%. Fillers and aggregates shall not be used.
2. The structural layer shall comprise six layers of chopped strand mat
450 g/m2, “Advantix” powder bound corrosion resistance or equivalent
approved, impregnated with is phthalic resin of approved type and 0.5 mm
flow coat on the external surface with Vinylester resin of approved type.
Resin to glass ratio shall be 70% to 30% by weight with a tolerance of ± 5%.
Fillers and aggregates shall not be used.
3. Overall properties of the lining shall be as given in Table 9.2-4 below.
Table 9.2-4: GRP Lining Properties
Axial tensile strength ISO 527-2 100 N/mm2
Water absorption maximum ASTM D570 0.15% not short term boiling method
Barcol hardness ASTM D2583 Min 35 prior to dispatch
4. Lining shall have bonding lugs consisting of 100mm long GRP strips or GRP
round studs bonded to the concrete, adjacent to the face of each GRP panel.
PAGE 100
Lugs shall be spaced in a grid pattern not exceeding 500 mm x 500 mm

approximately.
5. The shape of each bonding lug shall be such that it produces a secure bond
in the cast-in-situ concrete such that the lining is held firmly in place and in
contact with the concrete surface, alleviating any tendency of the lining to
become deboned from the concrete.
6. All bonding lugs shall be orientated in the vertical direction to allow the
concrete to easily flow around or through the anchors.
9.2.5.3 In-Situ GRP Lamination.

A. Field joints shall be at least 150 mm wide by 7 mm thick and shall be constructed
op V1
with similar materials and in a similar fashion to the preformed GRP lining, except
that all resin used at site shall be Vinylester.
B. In-situ GRP lamination shall be constructed with similar materials and in a similar
fashion to the preformed GRP lining, except that all resin used at site shall be
Vinylester.
C -
y
C
9.2.5.4 Pipe Connections.
A. GRP benching shall be fitted with pipe sockets or spigots suitable for connection to
C
the designated pipes.
B. GRP benching for connection to PVC-u pipes shall utilize PVC-u sockets, couplers or
Q
spigots manufactured by the same PVC-u manufacturer as the pipes to which they
will connect.
C. GRP benching for connection to GRP pipes shall utilize GRP sockets, couplers or
spigots manufactured by the same GRP manufacturer as the pipes to which they will
connect.
D. Backdrops for connection to PVC-u pipes shall be made with long radius non
pressure PVC-u fittings manufactured by the same PVC-u manufacturer as the pipes
to which they will connect.
E. Backdrops for connection to GRP pipes shall be made with long radius non pressure
GRP fittings manufactured by the same GRP manufacturer as the pipes to which
they will connect.
F. Any GRP lamination to PVC-u sockets, couplers or spigots shall comply with the
following:
1. The surface of the PVC-u fitting shall be roughened to accept a 100mm wide
GRP lamination on the inside of the fitting and a 25 mm wide GRP lamination
on the inside of the fitting.
2. Is phthalic resin shall then be applied to the roughened areas and one layer of
chopped strand mat 300 g/m2 applied and wetted out with the resin.
3. The PVC-u fitting shall be inspected by the Engineer prior to placing in the
benching.
9.2.6 GRP Formwork

A. GRP formwork which remains in place shall be fabricated as follows unless
PAGE 101
1. The outer layer shall comprise one layer of glass surface veil 30 g/m2 of
approved type impregnated with corrosion resistant Vinylester resin of
approved type.
2. The structural layer shall comprise one layer of chopped strand mat 450 g/m2,
two layers of 800 g/m2 woven roving and one layer of chopped strand mat 450
g/m2 of approved type impregnated with corrosion resistant is phthalic resin of
approved type.
3. The inner layer shall comprise one layer of glass surface veil 30 g/m2 of
approved type impregnated with corrosion resistant Vinylester resin of
approved type.
4. Resin to glass ratio shall be 70% to 30% by weight with a tolerance of ± 5%.
op V1
5. Total mi thickness shall be 4 mm.
B. Suitable straps or anchors shall be fitted to the formwork to prevent handling
damage and hold the formwork in place during concreting.
C. Any surfaces shall be given a 100 micron thick gel coat with ultra violet inhibitor.
C -
y
C
9.2.7 Waterproof Membrane
A. The waterproof membrane system shall have a proven track record of not less than
C
5 years in Abu Dhabi or in similar environmental conditions.
B. The waterproof membrane shall be an impervious torch applied purpose formulated
modified bituminous membrane consisting of an tactic polypropylene (APP) bitumen
Q
compound reinforced with a polyester fabric core

C. Self-adhesive tanking membranes shall not be used.
D. Waterproof membrane shall meet or exceed the properties given in Table 9.2-5
below.
Table 9.2-5: Waterproof Membrane Requirements
Nominal thickness - 4 mm (for single layer) 6mm
(for double layer)
Weight of reinforcing fabric - 200 g/m2
Tensile strength ASTM D146 500 N/50mm in either
direction
Elongation at break ASTM D146 40% in either direction
Tear resistance ASTM D4073 440 N in transverse direction
550 N in longitudinal direction
Softening point ASTM D36 110°C
E. Accessories
PAGE 102
1. Waterproof membrane primer shall be:

a. Compatible with the waterproof membrane.
b. Recommended by the membrane manufacturer.
c. Formulated for use in hot climates.
2. Bituminous mastic for molding into 40 mm by 40 mm fillets for use at 90 degree
internal junctions and sealing around pipes and penetrations through walls shall be a
cold applied gun grade rubber/bitumen compound as recommended by the
membrane manufacturer and be formulated for use in hot climates.
3. 40 mm x 40 mm triangular fillets shall be hollow triangular PVC extrusions, fixed to
the concrete or other surfaces using adhesives as recommended by the
manufacturer.
op V1
4. Protection board shall be minimum 6mm thick plywood or blackboard as approved by
the Engineer.
5. Cement sand screed shall comprise 1 part cement to 3 parts sand or as approved by
the Engineer.
C -
y
C
6. Flashing shall be 1 mm thick aluminum.

C
9.3.1 General
Q
A. Prior to the application of coatings, membranes, inset lamination or waterproofing

and periodically as work progresses the services of the manufacturer’s technical
representative must be provided at the work site as often as deemed necessary by
the Engineer to advise on all phases of the work. This service shall be provided at no
cost to the Client.
B. The Contractor shall follow the manufacturer’s recommendations for specific
procedures and details not specified herein at any additional cost to the Client.
C. The following conditions shall apply wherever coatings, membranes, in-situ GRP
lamination or waterproofing work is being carried out.
1. Work shall only be undertaken when the ambient temperature is within the
ranges recommended by the manufacturer.
2. Sufficient lighting to the approval of the Engineer shall be provided and used
whenever work is in progress.
3. Forced draught ventilation to the approval of the Engineer shall be provided
and used whenever work is in progress.
4. When the humidity rises above 85% where there is a danger of condensation
on the surface affecting operations, works shall cease and re-start only with
the approval of the Engineer.
5. No work shall be carried out during a sand storm as determined by the
Engineer.
6. Primers to concrete shall not be applied until the moisture content of the
cementitious surface is less than 5% when measured by an electronic
moisture meter or other instrument approved by the Engineer.
7. Where appropriate adjacent surfaces shall be protected by the use of drop
cloths or other approved precautionary measures.
PAGE 103
8. The manufacturer's recommendations concerning health and safety shall be

followed.
9. Operatives shall work not less than two in number.
10. Procedures and treatment plans shall be in force in the event of any
accidents occurring.
D. The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to prevent damage to install
coating/membrane/lining/waterproofing from equipment, materials and personnel
until completion of the Works. Any damage resulting from the Contractor’s
operations shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the Contractor’s
expense.
9.3.2 Preparation of Concrete Surfaces
op V1
A. Concrete surfaces to be protected with coatings, membranes in-situ GRP lamination
or waterproof membrane shall be a minimum 30 days old and be prepared as
follows.
1. C -
Concrete surfaces to receive coating/membrane/lining /waterproofing shall be
y
C
prepared by sand blasting or as otherwise recommended by the product
manufacturer with the surface being uniformly roughened but not damaged by
excessive sand blasting.
C
2. In locations where the Engineer determines that sand blasting is not practical
the surface shall be etched with a solution of muriatic acid and the surface
Q
subsequently cleaned to the approval of the Engineer.

3. Prepared surfaces shall be dry, clean and free of oil, grease and loose
materials. Surface protrusions and offsets shall be removed.
4. Any previously applied coatings or surface treatments must be removed.
5. Surface repairs shall be carried out with the appropriate repair system prior to
the application of coating/membrane/lining /waterproofing as specified in
9.3.3 Application of Epoxy Coatings

A. Coatings shall be mixed and applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
B. Special attention shall be given to ensure that edges, corners, crevices and other
areas receive a film thickness at least equivalent to that of adjacent coated surfaces.
C. The penetrating solvent containing two component epoxy amine primer shall be
applied over the whole area to be coated by suitable nylon bristle brush or spray.
The primer shall soak into the concrete and shall not leave a resin rich layer on the
surface. Primers containing fillers or pigments shall not be used. A minimum of 24
hours shall lapse before filling the surface.
D. The surface of the primed concrete shall be scraped with approved two component
solvent free epoxy filler supplied by the coating manufacturer. The filler shall be
squeezed into blowholes. The filler shall have the property of being resin rich such
that the finished surface shall look semi glossed when finished.
E. There shall be strict control of surface cleanliness between coats. Dust and sand
shall be used by vacuuming and any dust embedded in the coated surface shall be
removed with abrasive paper.
PAGE 104
F. Two coats of a solvent free coating system as specified above shall be used. Any
thick runs or collections of coating shall be removed before they harden. Any
blowholes visible after each topcoat shall be filled and sealed.
G. Wet film thickness shall be continually checked by the coating operators to verify that
sufficient coating is being applied to achieve the required dry film thickness.
H. Dry film thickness shall be checked for every 100 m2 of coated surface.
I. Coated surfaces shall be visually inspected to ensure proper and complete coverage
has been obtained.
J. At least one adhesion test shall be conducted for every 100m2 of coated surface.
The resulting test specimens shall show no evidence of poor adhesion to the
substrate, residual laitance or intercoat adhesion weakness.
op V1
9.3.4 Application of Polyurethane Elastomeric Membranes
A. Coatings shall be mixed and applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
C -
y
B. Application shall be made using specialized spray equipment to produce a fast
C
curing (within seconds) seamless, flexible membrane in one coat.
C. The membrane shall be applied in sufficient thickness to cover all air holes, pinholes
C
and irregularities without the application of a second coat.
D. Coated surfaces shall be visually inspected to ensure proper and complete coverage
Q
has been obtained.

E. At least one adhesion test shall be conducted for every 100m2 of coated surface.
The resulting test specimens shall show no evidence of poor adhesion to the
substrate, residual laitance or intercoat adhesion weakness.
9.3.5 Installation of PVC and HDPE Lining

A. All work for and in connection with the installation of the lining including any
accessories and welding of joints shall be carried out in strict conformity with the
B. On completion the lining shall be continuous and free of holes in the lining itself and
in the joints.
C. The lining shall be in sheets made or cut to fit the forms to which it is to be closely
fitted and properly secured, using a minimum number of separate pieces. Care shall
be taken not to puncture the lining in anyway.
D. Joints between adjacent sheets shall not be more than 3 mm wide and shall be
sealed on the concrete side to prevent loss of grout during concreting.
E. Concrete poured against the lining shall be compacted by suitable methods in a
careful manner so as not to damage the lining and produce a dense, homogenous
concrete securely anchoring the ribs or anchors into the concrete. The Engineer
shall reject any work if he considers that any part of that work contains defective
concrete and the work shall be removed and reinstated at no cost to the ADSSC.
F. After pouring, the concrete shall be left to cure for a minimum of 48 hours prior to
striking the formwork. When removing formwork care shall be taken to protect the
lining from damage.
1. Sharp instruments or tools shall not be used to pry formwork from the lining.
PAGE 105
2. Any formwork materials that remain in the lining shall be removed and the
resulting holes clearly marked.
3. Formwork tie holes shall be marked before ties are broken off and all areas of
abrasion or damage shall be marked.
G. All abraded areas in the lining shall be patched. Any one patched area shall not
exceed 0.25m2 or as directed by the Engineer.
1. Patch shall be made of the same material as the parent lining.
2. All surfaces shall be prepared and all patching work shall be carried out in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
op V1
H. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings the lining shall be returned at least 100mm
onto built in items such as manhole frames, gate guides and pipes or to where the
type of lining is changed or new work is built against existing unlined concrete. At
each return the lining shall be sealed to the adjacent material with an approved
adhesive system or if this is not acceptable an alternative proposal shall be
C -
submitted to the Engineer for approval.
y
I.
C
The lining at joints shall be free of all foreign matter and shall be clean and dry
before the joints are welded.
C
J. All jointing materials shall be similar to that of the parent lining for thickness,
corrosion resistance and impermeability unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Q
K. Welded joints shall show no cracks or separations.
L. Welding strips which extend beyond the edge of the lining shall be tested as follows:
1. Welding strips shall extend 50mm beyond the edge of the lining to provide a
tab to which a 5 kg pull will be applied.
2. Force shall be applied normal to the face of the structure by means of a spring
balance.
3. Lining adjacent to the welding strip shall be held against the concrete during
application of the force.
4. The 5 kg force shall be maintained if a weld failure develops until no further
separation occurs.
5. Defective welds shall be retested after repairs have been made and following
successful testing the tabs shall be neatly trimmed away.
M. Hot joint compounds such as coal tar shall not come into contact with the lining.
9.3.6 Installation of Preformed GRP Lining

A. The GRP lining shall be prefabricated and shaped to match the required dimensions
and configurations, as shown on the drawings.
B. Installation shall be in sections as part of the concrete works and as required for
proper concrete placement and GRP field jointing techniques.
C. The prefabricated GRP lining shall be adequately braced and carefully handled so
that excessive damaging deflections or cracking of the lining do not occur during
handling and installation.
PAGE 106
D. The sheet lining shall be keyed and bonded into the concrete at the time of concrete
casting. It shall be closely fixed to the formwork before erection and shall be cut and
shaped to fit curved or complex profiles in a manner to minimize the number of
joints. Care shall be taken not to puncture the lining in any way.
E. Any holes formed by nails for fixing the sheet lining to the formwork shall be in the
zone that is to be covered by the subsequently applied sealing strips on the external
face. All nails shall be of the headless type.
F. Joints between the sheets of lining shall be sealed on the concrete side to prevent
loss of grout during concreting. After casting the concrete shall be left to cure for a
minimum of 48 hours prior to striking the formwork. Shutters shall then be carefully
removed allowing any nails to pull through the liner. Joints between the sheets of
op V1
lining shall then be sealed.
G. Where pipes enter or leave lined structures the joints between the ends of the pipes
and the lining shall be sealed as specified or shown on the drawings with sealants
C -
y
C
H. Where penstocks or the like are to be fitted to concrete walls protected with linings,
the linings shall be constructed behind the penstock frame with a minimum gap of 50
mm. Subsequent to the grouting in of the frame the joint between the lining and the
C
frame shall be satisfactorily sealed with materials approved by the Engineer.
I. Joints between sheets shall be laminated over with a 100mm wide resin rich glass
Q
tape of minimum thickness 4mm to provide a gas and watertight seal. The strip shall
be formed using the same resin and glass used for the lining. The joint shall be
finished with a resin rich layer to give a surface to match the lining.
J. Joints in the lining at internal corners shall have a GRP covering bonded with
adhesive to the lining and laminated over as described above.
K. Where non-slip surfaces to GRP linings are specified or shown on the drawings the
surface shall be ground to receive a coat of catalysed Vinylester resin. The resin
shall be dusted with an approved silica sand to produce the non-slip finish and
surplus sand shall be brushed off no less than 24 hours after application.
9.3.7 Application of in-Situ GRP Lamination

A. Contractor shall demonstrate all his methods, equipment and materials for the
Engineers approval before any work commences.
B. GRP lamination shall only be carried out by experienced, trained personnel, familiar
with GRP lamination techniques.
C. Contractor shall ensure that working areas are well ventilated when inset GRP
lamination is being carried out.
D. Prime surfaces with catalysed is phthalic resin primer to a maximum 0.125 mm
thickness by rolling, brushing or spraying.
E. Once the primer coat has set, fill up voids in concrete surface with a resin paste.
F. Lamination is to be applied as agreed with the Engineer and shall comprise:
1. In situ lamination shall be a total of 7 mm minimum thickness.
2. The first six layers applied to the concrete surface shall consist of chopped
2
strand mat 450 g/m , “Advantix” powder bound corrosion resistance or
PAGE 107
equivalent approved, impregnated with is phthalic resin of approved type. Resin

to glass ratio shall be 70% to 30% by weight with a tolerance of ± 5% to
provide a lining of 5.5 mm thickness
3. The next two layers shall consist of chopped strand mat 300 g/m2, “Advantix”
powder bound corrosion resistance or equivalent approved, impregnated with
vinyl ester resin of approved type. Resin to glass ratio shall be 70% to 30% with
a tolerance of ± 5%.
4. The final layer shall consist of glass surface veil 30 g/m2 of approved type
impregnated with corrosion resistant Vinylester resin of approved type.
G. When laminating vertical and overhead surfaces, add 2% Thixotropic agent to the
resin to prevent slumping of the coating.
op V1
9.3.8 Installation of Waterproof Sheet Membrane
A. Installation procedures shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
C -
B. All items that penetrate the surfaces receiving the waterproofing shall have been
y
securely installed.
C
C. A primer as recommended by the membrane manufacturer shall be applied evenly
C
and allowed to dry and cure as stated by the manufacturer and approved by the
Engineer.
D. The membrane shall be applied in one or two layers so that the total thickness is at
Q
least 4 mm for single layer applications and at least 6 mm for double layer
applications. The tanking edges shall be overlapped on to the next sheet by at least
100 mm. Where two layers are applied, laps shall be staggered from one layer to the
next by a minimum of 300 mm.
E. Membranes applied to vertical and inclined surfaces shall terminate 300 mm above
ground level except where otherwise shown on the drawings, by turning it into a
20 mm by 30 mm chased groove which shall subsequently be neatly pointed with a
sealant recommended by the tanking manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.
The sealant and the membrane shall be trimmed with an aluminium flashing fixed to
the concrete wall above the membrane as shown on the drawings and approved by
the Engineer. Above and to a minimum of 150 mm below finished ground level,
applied membranes shall be protected with a layer of mineral finished bituminous felt
glued with a suitable adhesive.
F. Areas around penetrations through the membrane shall receive an additional layer of
membrane for a minimum distance of 300 mm around the penetration, the
membrane edges shall be coated and the gap between the membrane and
penetration filled with an approved sealant.
G. Membranes shall be applied in a single uninterrupted operation and shall be
protected immediately following the completion of application. Traffic shall not be
allowed over unprotected or uncovered membrane.
H. Protection to membranes.
1. Membranes applied to vertical and inclined surfaces shall be protected below
finished ground level by means of an approved plywood or block board not less
than 4mm thick.
PAGE 108
2. Membranes applied to upper faces of concrete blinding layers and upper

horizontal faces of the substructures below finished ground level shall be
protected by a 50mm thick cement sand mortar screed.
3. The protection material shall be placed against the membrane and be firmly
held in position by temporary struts or other means while backfill is being
placed. Struts that apply point loading shall not be used.
4. Damage to the membrane during protection and backfilling shall not be
accepted. Damaged membranes shall be repaired by means of a method
END OF SECTION
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 109
10. JOINTS IN CONCRETE (SECTION 03700)

10.1.Part 1 General
10.1.1 Scope
A. This section of the specification gives the requirements for joints in concrete,
including joints in water retaining structures and water tight structures.
op V1
section.
01300 Submittals
01400
C -
Quality control
y
C
10.1.3 Standards
C
Q
ASTM D624 Standard test method for tear strength of conventional

vulcanized rubber and thermoplastic elastomers.
ASTM D638 Standard test method for tensile properties of plastics.
ASTM D747 Standard test method for apparent bending modulus of
plastics by means of a cantilever beam.
ASTM D1751 Standard specification for preformed expansion joint filler for
concrete paving and structural construction.
ASTM D2240 Standard test method for rubber property – Durometer
hardness.
ISO 11600 Building Construction. Jointing Products. Classification and
requirements for sealants
10.1.4 Submittals
10.1.4.1. Products and Materials Approval

made to Section 01300 - Submittals of the specification on products and materials
approval. Information to be submitted shall comprise but not necessarily be limited
to:
1. Manufacturer’s literature for water stops and water bars, including details of
intersections, reducers and junctions and a certificate showing the
PAGE 110
manufacturer’s name and that the water stops and water bars comply with
the requirements of the specification and include results of tests for:
a. Manufacturer’s literature for water stops and water bars, including

details of intersections, reducers and junctions and a certificate
showing the manufacturer’s name and that the water stops and water
bars comply with the requirements of the specification and include
results of tests for:
1. Tensile strength.
2. Elongation at break point.
3. Tear strength.
op V1
4. Stiffness in flexure.
5. Hardness.
b. Manufacturer’s literature and a certificate for joint filers showing the

manufacturer’s name and that the joint filers comply with the
C -
y
requirements of the specification and including results of tests for:
C
1. Disintegration and shrinkage.
2. Recovery value and reduction in mass.
C
3. Extrusion.
c. Manufacturer’s literature for joint sealants, including details of the

Q
method and time required for mixing the different components, and a
certificate showing the manufacturer’s name, and that the joint sealants
comply with the requirements of the specification and including results
of tests as appropriate for:
1. Rheological properties.
2. Plastic deformation.
3. Adhesion and tensile modulus.
4. Application life.
5. Adhesion in peel.
6. Loss of mass after heat ageing.
7. Staining.
8. Movement range.
9. Extension.
10. Flow.
11. Penetration.
12. Degradation.
d. Particulars of joint sealant primers, backing rods and bond breaker

tape.
e. Confirmation that all materials in the joint system are compatible with
each other.
PAGE 111
f. Complete instructions for handling and storage of all materials and

mixing, priming, installation and curing of each type of sealant.
10.1.4.2. Method Statements

1. Installation procedures for water stops, water bars, joint fillers and sealants.
10.1.4.3. Samples
op V1
A. Representative samples, as agreed with the Engineer, must be submitted for at
least the following items at the same time as the particulars are submitted:
1. Water stops and water bars including intersections, reducers and junctions.
C -
2. Joint fillers.
y
C
3. Fully cured sealant samples 300mm long installed between the materials to
be sealed.
C
Q

C. To allow the Engineer to inspect the Works the Contractor shall give the Engineer
a minimum of 24 hours’ notice of carrying out the following activities on site.
1. Installation of water stops, water bars, joint filers and joint sealants.

1. Store all materials in a dry, temperature controlled if required, weatherproof

store with a raised floor in such a manner as to prevent damage or intrusion
of foreign matter.
2. All materials shall be fully identified with brand, type, grade, class and all
other qualifying information.
3. Any damaged materials shall be clearly marked “rejected” and removed from
site.
PAGE 112
10.1.7 Warranty
A. The manufacturer and the Contractor shall jointly guarantee the joint system to be
watertight and free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 10
years from the date of completion of the works.
B. The Contractor shall furnish the Client with the manufacturer’s guarantee and
warranty certificates for all materials used.
C. If the joint system is found to be defective during the warranty period, the
manufacturer and the Contractor shall replace and/or repair the joint system to the
satisfaction of the Division at no cost to the Client.
op V1
10.2.1 General
A.
C -
Materials for joints in water retaining structures and water tight structures for
y
C
sewage shall be resistant to aerobic and anaerobic bacteriological attack and to
attack by petrol, diesel oil, mineral acids, alkalis, sabkha soils and be suitable for
long term immersion in seawater.
C
10.2.2 Water stops
Q
A. Materials shall be a proprietary type and be sourced and supplied by a single

manufacturer.
B. Type and configuration shall be as shown on drawings and as specified below.
C. Water stops shall be extruded from a high grade elastomeric polyvinylchloride

compound and manufactured from virgin materials necessary to meet the
performance requirements below:
o
1. Suitable for storage, handling, installation and service within arrange of 15 C
to 50oC.
2. All water stop intersections and joints shall be factory made.
3. Site jointing shall be limited to butt joints, heat sealed using equipment and
instructions as provided by the manufacturer.
4. All water stops shall have reinforced fixing eyes or clips for fixing in place.
5. Water stops shall be fabricated into the longest practical units at the
manufacturer’s works.
6. Water stops shall have the physical properties given in Table 10.2-1.
Table 10.2-1: Water stops Physical Properties
Property Test Method Minimum Requirements
Tensile strength ASTM D638 12N/mm2
Ultimate elongation ASTM D638 250%
PAGE 113
Tear resistance ASTM D624 50KN/m
Stiffness in flexure ASTM D747 4N/mm2
Hardness, shore A/15 ASTM D2240 70 to 80
a. Base slab expansion/movement joints shall incorporate external water

stops at least 230mm wide with a 25mm wide center bulb which shall
be flat to accept joint filler.
b. Base slab construction and contraction joints shall incorporate external
water stops at least 230 mm wide.
op V1
c. Wall and roof expansion/movement joints shall incorporate internal
water stops at least 230mm wide with four ribs, a center bulb to
accommodate movement with a web thickness of 10mm.
d. Wall and roof construction and contraction joints shall incorporate
internal water stops at least 230mm wide.
C -
y
C
10.2.3 Injection Hose Water stop System
A. Injection hose shall be a flexible polyvinyl chloride compound with at least 3
C
continuous rows of release holes suitable for resin injection.
Q
B. Resin used for injection shall be water swelling Vinylester suitable for use in saline
ground water conditions for which a typical analysis for Abu Dhabi is given in
Division 1.
10.2.4 Self-Swelling Water bars

A. Self-swelling water bars shall be polymer based, be reactive with saline ground
water, for which a typical analysis for Abu Dhabi is given in Division1, and have the
physical properties given in Table 10.2-2 below.
Table 10.2-2: Self Swelling Water bars Physical Properties
Property Test Method Minimum Requirements
Elongation ASTM D638 200%
Water migration at or through joint - None
Expansion in saline ground water - 20%
10.2.5 Joint Filler

A. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings joint filler shall be a proprietary type and
shall be a firm, preformed compressible cellular, single thickness, non-rotting filler
to ASTM D1751. For joints in water retaining structures and watertight structures
the filler shall be non-absorbent.
PAGE 114
B. The filler shall be able to recover more than 98% after 50% compression and shall
have a compressive strength of at least 0.15N/mm2.
10.2.6 Joint Sealant

A. Joint sealant shall be non-degradable for its particular application and be suitable
for use in the climatic conditions of Abu Dhabi with a minimum life expectancy of
15 years and shall have a proven track record of no less than 10 years under
similar climatic conditions. In the event that any defects occur within 10 years of
completion of the works, the Contractor, at the convenience of the Client, shall
arrange all repairs necessary to remedy the defects to the satisfaction of the Client
and at no cost to the Client.
op V1
B. Joint sealant for exposed joints shall be grey unless otherwise specified.
C. Joint sealants for use in all types of joints in water retaining structures and water
tight structures subjected to a sewage environment shall be polyurethane based.
C -
The polyurethane based sealant shall be a cold applied two part sealant...
y
C
D. Poly sulphide based sealant shall be a cold applied two part sealant. Poly sulphide
based sealant for use in expansion joints in water retaining structures and water
C
tight structures shall have a movement accommodation factor of at least 20%.
Q
E. The appropriate hardness of elastomeric sealants shall be determined in

consultation with the manufacturer, considering joint movement and exposure
conditions for the size of joint to be sealed. Any sealant exposed to traffic shall
have adequate strength and modulus of elasticity to resist damage by traffic.
F. Backing rod shall be a proprietary type recommended by the sealant

manufacturer and have a diameter 25% greater than the joint width.
G. Bond breaker tape shall be a proprietary type recommended by the sealant

manufacturer and shall be the full width of the joint.
10.3. Part3 Execution

10.3.1 Construction Joints
A. Provide water stops to construction joints in water retaining structures and
structures below ground water table.
B. Injection hose systems may be used in construction joints and shall be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions with resin being injected according
to manufacturer’s recommendations until resin is seen to exit the joint face.
C. Self-swelling water bars may be used in construction joints in lieu of conventional

water stops at the discretion of the Engineer.
D. If during the course of the Contract it should become apparent that the
Contractor’s methods of forming construction joints are not proving effective the
Engineer may order the Contractor to execute at the contractor’s expense such
PAGE 115
preventative measures as the Engineer may consider necessary to ensure the

water tightness of construction joints in further work.
10.3.2 Movement Joints

A. Incorporate water stops into all expansion and contraction joints of structures
which retain liquid or any structures below ground water table.
1. Do not use different types of water stop material in any single complete
installation.
2. Maintain water stops carefully in the position shown on the drawings. Support
the water stop on accurately profiled stop boards to create rigid conditions.
op V1
3. Install water stops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions without
displacing reinforcement.
4. Water stop splicing defects which shall be considered un acceptable shall
include but not be limited to:
C -
y
a.
C
Tensile strength less than 80% of parent section.
b. Misalignment of center bulb, ribs and fins by an amount greater than
1.5mm.
C
c. Bond failure at joint deeper than 1.5mm or 15% of material thickness
whichever is greater.
Q
d. Visible porosity in the welded joint.

e. Charred or burnt material.
f. Visible signs of splice separation when cooled splices are bent by hand
to a sharp angle.
10.3.3 Joint Sealant
A. The manufacturer’s technical representative shall be present when commencing
the installation of each type of sealant.
B. Sealants shall not be installed when extreme temperatures or heavy winds are
forecast during the curing period.
C. All joints to be sealed shall be formed and the joint mechanically abraded to
remove all traces of deleterious materials such as form oil or curing compounds
and also to remove any surface laitance from the sides of the joint.
D. Fix the joint filler to the required dimensions of the joint cross section to provide a
firm base for the joint sealant. Where the depth of joint between the concrete
surface and the water stop does not exceed500mm place filler in a single piece.
E. The base of the joint shall receive a backing rod or bond breaker tape in order to
provide the correct depth to width ratio and prevent 3 sided adhesion.
F. Carry out the sealing of movement joints only when adjacent concrete surfaces
are perfectly dry.
PAGE 116
G. The areas adjacent to the joint shall be protected using masking tape before the
primer is applied and until the joint sealing is complete.
H. The sides of the joint shall be primed with the relevant primer and the joint filled
with sealant after the primed surface has become tacky all in accordance with the
manufacturers recommendations particularly with regard to temperature during
application of sealant and subsequent curing.
I. Tool exposed surfaces so as to compress sealants to the appropriate profile for

the joint. Remove excess sealant promptly as the work progresses and clean the
adjoining surfaces as necessary.
op V1
J. The sealants shall be cured in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions to
obtain maximum bond to surfaces and durability at the earliest possible date.
K. The sealants shall be adequately protected during the remainder of the

construction period so that they will be without damage or deterioration upon
C -
completion of the works.
y
C
END OF SECTION
C
Q
PAGE 117
11. PREPARATION FOR RESURFACING CONCRETE

(SECTION 03721)
11.1.1 Scope
A. Preparation of concrete pavement surfaces for new pavement.
op V1
01300 Submittals
C -
y
C
02510 Asphalt Concrete Paving
C
02520 Portland Cement Concrete Paving
Q
03732 Rehabilitation Works
11.1.3 Mock-Up
B. Provide an area of representative length and width, illustrating preparation of

surface and concrete repair.
C. Locate where directed.
D. Mock-up may or may not remain as part of the Work.
11.1.4 Scheduling
A. Perform sandblasting, cleaning of work between 7 am and 10 pm.

11.2.1. Materials
A. Blasting Sand: suitable gradation

11.3.1 Examination
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
PAGE 118
11.3.2 Preparation
A. Prepare and protect adjacent work from damage.
11.3.3 Cleaning
A. Clean concrete surfaces of dirt or other contamination; wire brush using water,
rinse surface and allow drying.
B. Flush out cracks and voids with compressed air and water to remove laitance and
dirt.
C. High Pressure compressed air cleaning: Apply pressure to contaminated
op V1
surfaces.

A.
C -
Section 01400 - Quality Control: Field inspection and testing.
y
B.
C
Test concrete for calcium chloride content during the execution of the Work.
C
11.3.5 Schedule
A. Provide a work schedule by location and work activity.
Q
END OF SECTION
PAGE 119
12. REHABILITATION WORKS (SECTION 03732)

12.1.Part 1 General
12.1.1 Scope
A. This section specifies rehabilitation works for the existing structures and includes,
but is not limited to, the following:
1. General requirements
op V1
2. Repair materials
3. Typical surface preparation with fillers
4. Minor Surface Repairs with Mortars
5.
C -
Major Repairs with Micro-Concrete
y
6.
C
Concrete and rebar Replacement
7. Shotcrete Applications
C
8. Crack Injection
9. Repair of the deteriorated / contaminated concrete areas.
Q
10. Repair of the settled ground finishes, etc.

11. Cleaning and re-coating of steel cover, frames, steel ladders etc.
12. Re-coating mechanical pipes, fittings, etc.
13. Replacing the existing covers with new covers.
14. Rectification of water proofing to underground concrete.
15. Repairing / replacing the damaged handrails, gratings and chequered plates.
16. Rectification of disorders in finishing works, floor tiles, paints and coating.
17. Construction of suitable paving.

01300 Submittals
03300 Cast-in Place Concrete
03370 Concrete Curing
09900 Painting and Corrosion
12.1.3 References
PAGE 120
A Product manufacture, testing, and installation shall comply with the following
references, unless otherwise stated in the specification:
ACI 506 Guide to Shotcrete
ACI 506.2 Specification for Shotcrete
ACI 506.3 Guide to Certification of Shotcrete Nozzle men
ACI 506.4 Guide for the Evaluation of Shotcrete
ACI 548.1 Guide for the use of Polymers in Concrete
op V1
ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland cement
ASTM C94 Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM C876 Standard Method for Half-Cell Potentials of Uncoated
C - Reinforcing Steel in Concrete
y
ASTM C881
C Specifications for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding System for
Concrete
C
ASTM C882 Testing Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy Resin System
used with Concrete by Slant Shear
Q
BRE IP6: 81 Carbonation of concrete made with dense natural aggregates
BS 1881 Testing Concrete
BS 4550 Methods of testing cement
BS 4652 Zinc-rich priming paint (organic media)
BS 6319 Testing of resin compositions for use in construction
DIN 1045 Testing Concrete – Water permeability
B The latest edition or revision of the standards and codes of practices shall be
applied. In the event of any conflict or discrepancy arising between the standards
and the specifications requirements, the specifications shall overrule.
C An Affidavit shall be presented from the manufacturer certifying that the product
complies with specified standard. Whenever requested or specified, the contractor
shall submit to the Engineer test certificates, furnished by the supplier or
manufacturer of the materials, indicating compliance with the specified standards.
12.1.4 Definitions
A The following definitions shall pertain to words or phrases as utilized in this
section.
PAGE 121
1. “Micro-Concrete” is a mixture of Portland cement, water and suitably graded

aggregates proportioned to produce free flowing concrete without
segregation of the constituents.
2. “Mortars” are cementitious or chemical materials proportioned to produce
trowel consistency for vertical and overhead repairs.
3. “Fillers are cementitious or chemical materials utilized for repair of small air
holes or cavities.
4. “Injection Resins” are extremely fluid chemical materials utilized for crack
injection.
12.1.5 Preliminary, Temporary Works and General Requirements
op V1
A Product manufacture, testing and installation shall comply with the following
requirements, unless otherwise approved by the engineer:
1. Only specialist Sub-contractor thoroughly familiar with repair techniques shall
C -
carry out the repair works. During tender stage, the bidder shall specify his
y
C
sub-contractor for this work under the related Bid Documents.
a. The General Contractors staff shall not carry out concrete repair works.
C
2. Repair materials shall comply with the specified requirements.
Q
B Products and materials shall be from a manufacturer / supplier who operate a

quality system that is registered to ISO 9000 series.
C The Contractor shall carry out all the works deemed necessary by him to the
satisfaction of the Engineer, with the aim of ensuring the stability, safety and
solidity of the structures, the safety of his personnel, as well as ensuring the water
tightness of the concerned structures at all times necessary for the good
achievement of the rehabilitation works. The Contractor shall also provide
temporary access wherever the existing ones have been removed by him on
temporary basis.
D The Contractor shall erect a safe scaffolding and access to the concerned
elements to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
E The Contractor shall arrange for maintaining existing irrigation water supply to the
plantation/ green areas by providing temporary GRP tanks, pumps of adequate
flow capacity/head and necessary pipe work to bypass the existing reservoirs and
connection of temporary discharge pipe line to the distribution network at each
location, in coordination with Department of Municipalities and Agriculture / Public
Garden Directorate. These temporary arrangements shall remain in operation until
the reservoir has been satisfactorily rehabilitated/repaired and put back in service.
F The Contractor shall erect the temporary measures supports and propping in
order to prevent any structural failure or damage throughout the rehabilitation
works and protect the public, should work be in a public place.
PAGE 122
G The Contractor shall prepare working drawings and calculations as and when
necessary for temporary work method and the like.
H The Contractor shall take all the necessary precautions to protect all the
surrounding facilities.
I The Contractor shall repair or replace at his cost as directed by the Engineer, all
items damaged during the performance of the Works.
J The Contractor shall carry out all the necessary steps on the existing electro-
mechanical equipment and installations (lights, cables, switches, valves, pipes,
etc.) that impair the good achievement of the rehabilitation works, in order to
op V1
perform these works in accordance with the Contract Documents and to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. For this purpose, the Contractor shall coordinate with
the Department's representatives/ Consultant at all times in order to define the
best methods to do the temporary modifications on the electro-mechanical
C -
installations prior to any site works on a concerned structure and protect and
y
support temporarily the existing installations and piping while carrying out the
C
rehabilitation works.
C
K After the rehabilitation works are completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer on
a particular structure, the Contractor shall re-install to its original state the electro-
mechanical installations modified by him for the purpose of the rehabilitation
Q
works. Then the Contractor shall perform the necessary testing and
commissioning of these installations to the satisfaction of the Department/
Consultant.
L In case the rehabilitation works are carried out by the Contractor next to electro-
mechanical installations, The Contractor shall protect these installations from any
damage whatsoever and he shall ensure the good functioning of these
installations at all times to the approval of the Department/ Consultant. In this
respect, the repair of the concrete and other required civil works shall be done by
the Contractor wherever required by the Engineer, by keeping the equipment in
service and ensuring its complete protection and by ensuring a good working
condition of these equipment at all times to the satisfaction of the Department/
Consultant.
M The Contractor shall bear the cost of any damage to the piping / Electro-
mechanical equipment and other property and all related delays, penalties and
claims, whatsoever caused by the Contractor under this Contract. The Contractor
shall also be responsible of all the correction measures necessary to restore the
damaged installations to its original condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer /
Department.
N The Contractor shall get the approval of the Department/ Consultant on any
equipment he intends to use on site. The equipment shall comply with the
Department's safety and operational requirements.
PAGE 123
O The Contractor is deemed to have included in his offer the cost relevant to these
temporary works Department's safety and operational requirements, and site
restrictions.
P The contractor shall obtain the necessary Permits to Work from relative
Authorities / Engineer.
Q The Contractor shall carry out all the checking and tests deemed necessary by
him in addition to those specified in these specifications, with the aim of allowing
him defining and carrying out the temporary and permanent works to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
op V1
R The Contractor is deemed to have included in his prices the cost relevant to these
works, plus checking and tests.
S All the required tests in this project should be carried out by an independent
approved laboratory in the U.A.E, this laboratory is subject to the approval of the
C -
Engineer/Department.
y
C
T All materials to be incorporated in the permanent repair works shall be approved
by the Department/Engineer prior to any related site works. For these purpose two
C
original sets of each material's specifications, technical data, complete test report
as may be required by the Engineer, shall be submitted to the Engineer. The
Q
submittal shall be as per the Department materials committee procedures.
U The Contractor shall submit to the approval of the Engineer the repair procedure
of each defect and materials specifications prior to any site related works. The
proposed procedure of repair works shall be approved by relevant materials
system manufacturer.
V The specifications define the minimum requirements for involved materials,

applications and workmanship.
W The materials, workmanship and equipment shall comply in every respect with the
requirements of the specifications, relevant standards and materials
manufacturer's recommendations.
12.1.6 Submittals
A Product Approval
1. The contractor shall submit material approvals for all the materials, which are
proposed to be used in the contract, sufficiently in advance, to the Engineer,
prior to purchase, in order to verify compliance with the specifications.
2. All materials shall be brought to site in originally sealed packs, boxes, and
clearly indicating the following:
a. Name of manufacturer,
b. Suppliers name.
c. Product name.
PAGE 124
d. Product description.
e. Trade mark and denomination of the material,
f. Manufacturing and expiry dates,
g. Batch number.
h. Identification number of manufacture's batch,
i. Storing conditions.
j. Manufactures technical data.
k. Catalogues, diagrams and drawings
l. Application instructions.
op V1
m. Mix design (if applicable).
3. The technical specifications of each material/product shall give all the

necessary indications, in particular (as applicable):
C -
y
a. Designation of the product, sizes and components,
b.
C
Field of application and range of action, limitations
c. Shelf life, pot life,
C
d. Characteristics, properties and Codes/Standards used for same
characteristics,
Q
e. Quality system.
4. Any material used, which is not approved, shall be removed from the site and
the Contractor shall replace it at his own cost.
B Samples
1. Samples (applied) shall be supplied for at least the following products, or as

requested by the Engineer.
a. Fillers
b. Mortars
c. Coating
d. Grouts
e. Sealants
f. Aggregates
g. Cement
h. Water
i. Fiber
C Method Statement
1. The contractor shall provide separate method statements meeting the

requirements stated in relevant Sections, for at least the following activities,
or as requested by the Engineer.
PAGE 125
a. Grit Blasting, Typical Surface Preparation, all concrete repair methods

including rebar cleaning and coating.
b. Method of mixing and application of shotcrete.
c. Crack Application.
d. Coating Application
e. Grouting of rebar dowels.
D. Shop Drawings
op V1
1. The Contractor shall submit renovation drawings supported with structural
calculations to the Engineer for review and approval before commencing work
and shall allow for a (1) month as an approval period for each submission.
2. The contractor shall carefully check and verify all dimensions on the contract
C -
drawings and shall report all variations to the Engineer. All dimensions shall
y
C
be expressed in metric units.
3. Shop drawings shall be prepared to detail all members to be repaired (such

C
as floors, walls, soffits, beams, columns, exterior roof...etc.) and shall show
size, depth and type of all repairs.
Q
4. The Contractor shall prepare the Working Drawings as necessary for works
(temporary works, work methods, etc.).
5. Scales for shop drawings shall be as follows:
a. Details: 1:1, 1:5, 1:10, 1:20

b. Construction: 1:50, 1:100
c. Layout and Site Plan: 1:100 or 1:200
6. During the progress of the works, the Contractor shall submit all necessary
data, records, details and dimensions of the works as constructed and shall at
any time submit such documents/information to the Engineer as he may
require.
7. The preparation of these drawings shall be on "CAD" and submitted on disk

and on original A1 size sheets (4 prints) and drawn at a scale that will show
all information clearly. All dimensions shall be expressed in metric units. The
system of numbering shall be according to CSI-16 Division Master Format.
8. The approval of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his
responsibility under the contract for a successful and timely completion of the
work.
E Mock-up
1. The contractor shall prepare a mock-up meeting the requirements of section
01400 for at least the following installations or as requested by the Engineer.
a. Typical surface preparation (after grit blasting) and coating
application.
b. Shotcrete application (min. 10 m2).
PAGE 126
c. Crack injection (min. 3 m).

d. All concrete repair methods (1 m2).
e. Joint sealant replacement (1 m).
2. Contractor shall conduct pull-off tests on all repair and shotcrete applications as
directed by the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Client.
a. The minimum pull out strength shall be 2.0 N/mm2.

b. If agreed by the Engineer the test result may be considered
acceptable when the broken area from the pull-off test, consist of
more than 50 % of old concrete.
op V1
3. Samples (80cm x 80cm x 20cm) will be taken for shotcrete applications and
tested for porosity, compressive strength, water penetration and chloride ion
content as directed by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Client.
F
C -
As Built Drawings
y
C
The contractor shall maintain one set of “As Built” drawings. All approved changes
and all completed and approved work shall be recorded on these drawings. The
contractor shall maintain these drawings on a daily basis and provide them as
C
requested by the Engineer, or the Department. At the Completion of the contract
the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer one (1) complete “As Built” set of
Q
drawings of the entire Contract Area for approval 90 (30) days prior to the
Contract Completion date. Once the drawings have been approved the contractor
shall prepare and submit on CAD and PDF format three (3 CD/DVD), and on
original A1 size sheets (4 prints) signed and stamped by the contractor and
countersigned by the Engineer at final completion handing over.

A. “Inspection requests” shall be submitted to the Engineer during working hours a
minimum of forty-eight (48) hours prior to proceeding with the activities on site.
B. Prior to dispatch of any product and / or material from source the Contractor shall
opportunity to inspect and review / test the product and / or material prior to
delivery in accordance with relevant sections of the (GSCW) specification.

A. General
1. Delivery, storage and handling of products and materials shall be in

accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, Section of the (GSCW)
specification and the following provisions. Additional requirements may be
required as per manufactures recommendations and/or the directives of the
engineer.
B. Provisions
PAGE 127
2. Only nylon slings shall be allowed for lifting products. Steel chains, clamps or
cables shall not be allowed for lifting purpose, unless approved by the
Engineer.
3. Products shall be stored off the ground on timber blocks of sufficient size and
4. Where product manufacturer recommends storage under controlled

temperatures, the contractor must provide an enclosed, insulated, cool store
with recording instruments maintained at the proper temperature 24 hours a
day.
op V1
6. The Contractor shall inspect all products upon delivery to site and report any
C -
7. Any products damaged during delivery, storage and handling shall be marked
y
C
by the Contractor and set aside.
8. Proposals for repair of any damaged products shall be submitted in writing to

C
the Engineer for approval.
9. No repairs to damage products shall be attempted without Engineers approval.

Q
10. Any damaged products deemed unsuitable for repair by the Engineer shall be
removed from site and replaced at contractor’s expenses.
11. Products (such as primers, paints, protective membranes etc.) shall be

delivered in original sealed containers clearly labelled with manufactures
name, brand designation type and class and date of manufacture.
12.2.Part 2- Products
12.2.1 General
A. All products shall meet current (ISO) international design, standards and
manufacturing. These shall be suitable for use in extreme climatic conditions with
UV protection and other surface protection to international standards. All items will
be approved on a case-by-case basis.
B. The finish and colour of all products shall match the adjacent line product or be in
keeping with contract areas current theme as directed by the Engineer.
12.2.2 Epoxy Fillers

A. Epoxy fillers shall be two-component solvent free epoxy resin compounds,
suitable for repair of small cavities, offsets or imperfections.
B. All fillers shall be special purpose products manufactured in pre-measured

quantities for easy site mixing.
PAGE 128
C. Bonding agents and ancillary products shall be as recommended by the

D. Epoxy fillers shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 881: Type 1 Grade 3
Classes B & C.
12.2.3 Epoxy Repair Mortars

A. Epoxy or other chemical repair mortars shall be manufactured in pre-measured
components for easy site mixing.
B. Bonding agents and ancillary products shall be as recommended by the
op V1
C. The Epoxy Mortar shall have the following characteristics:
1. Non-toxic.
C -
y
2. Suitable for use in hot climates.
C
3. Minimum compressive strength of 50 N/mm2 at 7 days.
C
4. Approximate pot life of 45 min. at 40ºC.
Q
12.2.4 Cementitious Repair Mortars

A. Cementitious repair mortars shall be special purpose pre-bagged polymer
modified mortars requiring only the addition of water at site.
B. Cementitious repair mortars shall have the following characteristics:
1. Single component polymer modified.
3. High build mortar free of chlorides and nitrate ion.
4. Min. Compressive strength: 45 N/mm2 at 28 days (BS 6319 Pt. 7).
5. Water permeability when tested to DIN 1048 shall not exceed 10 mm.
6. Of alkaline nature, thus passive and non-corrosive to steel.
C. Bonding agents and ancillary materials shall be as recommended by the repair

material manufacturer, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
12.2.5 Rapid Setting Mortars
PAGE 129
A. Rapid Setting mortars for temporarily plugging leaks in running water shall be
special purpose pre-bagged cementitious mortars requiring only the addition of
water at site.
B. The product shall produce an initial set in approximately 1 minute.
C. A controlled rate of set must be provided to minimise risk of thermal cracking.
D. The product must be chloride free.
12.2.6 Micro-Concrete
A. Shall be supplied as a pre-bagged special purpose product requiring only the
op V1
addition of a pre-determined volume of water at site to a produce a mix of
predictable performance.
B. Micro-Concrete shall have the following characteristics:
1.
C -
A single component.
y
2.
C
Shrinkage controlled.
C
3. Free flowing concrete.
4. Min compressive strength: 60 N/mm2 at 28 days.

Q
5. High Flexural strength.
6. Free of chlorides and nitrate ion.
8. Free from corrosive effects.
C. Bonding agents and ancillary materials shall be as recommended by the repair

material manufacturer, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
12.2.7 Crack Injection Resins

A. Crack injection resins shall comply with the following:
1. Foaming agents shall be water reactive, solvent free, two-component

polyurethane injection resin.
2. Epoxy resins shall be two-component injection resin.
3. Polyurethane resin shall be two-component system, which forms a permanent

flexible compound.
4. Vinyl ester resin shall be a self-swelling compound (self-water grade).
12.2.8 Shotcrete
PAGE 130
A. Pre-bagged shotcrete shall be a single compound cementitious material suitable

for dry mix applications.
1. Maximum aggregate size 12.5 mm.

2
2. Min compressive strength: 35 N/mm at 28 days.
B. Bulk mixed shotcrete compliant with the recommendation of ACI 506.2 may be
utilized in lieu of pre-bagged shotcrete by the Engineer.
1. Aggregates shall meet the requirements in section 03305 except as modified
op V1
hereunder.
2. The combined grading shall be within the following limits, unless otherwise
agreed by the Engineer:
C - Table 12.2-1: Sieve Size and Passing
y
C
Sieve Size Percent Passing
C
12.50 mm 100
9.50 mm 90-100
Q
4.75 mm 70-85
2.36 mm 50-70
1.18 mm 35-55
0.60 mm 20-35
0.30 mm 8-20
0.15 mm 2-10

propagation.
a. The use of fiber shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s

instructions and as approved by the Engineer.
b. Prior to the approval of shotcrete, the Contractor shall carryout trials

mixes in the presence of the Engineer.
4. Minimum cement content shall be 415 Kg/m3.
a. Type of cement shall be ASTM Type I, unless otherwise approved by the

Engineer.
5. Minimum compressive strength shall be 35 N/mm2 at 28 days.
7. Chloride ion content is less than 0.10 % by weight of cement.
8. The temperature of the mix shall not be more than 32ºC.
PAGE 131
9. Shotcrete shall comply with the following ACI Standards except as modified in
this section:
a. ACI 506 - Guide to Shotcrete.
b. ACI 506.2 - Specification for Shotcrete.
c. ACI 506.3 - Guide to Certification of Shotcrete Nozzle men.
d. ACI 506.4 - Guide for the Evaluation of Shotcrete. 506.3.
e. ACI 548.1 - Guide for the use of Polymers in Concrete.
op V1
10. Prior to start of work each nozzle man shall be subject to approval by the
Engineer in accordance with ACI 506.3.
11. The Contractor shall spray shotcrete in approved molds for cutting cores as
directed by the Engineer for specified tests.
C -
y
12. The Contractor shall only be allowed to start the works after the Engineer has
C
approved the materials, mix design, nozzle men and the site procedures.
C
13. The finished surface shall be smooth, free of voids, cracks, honeycombing,
and suitable for the application of surface coatings or other finishes as
applicable.
Q
12.2.9 Grout
A. The grout shall be pre-bagged grout mix cement/sand requiring only the addition of
water at site. And have the following characteristic:
1. Non-shrinkage type.
2
2. Min compressive strength: 60 N/mm at 28 days.
3. High Flexural strength.
4. Free of chlorides and nitrate ion.
6. Free from corrosive effects.
12.3.Part 3 - Execution
12.3.1 Detailed Inspection Prior to Site Works
A. The Letter of Intent issued by the Engineer may include instructions to the
Contractor to carry out detailed inspection and/or testing on a proposed structure.
The Contractor shall carry out the detailed inspection and testing as per the Letter of
Intent.
After carrying out his detailed Inspection on a certain area, the Contractor shall
submit to the Engineer, the corresponding report and drawings detailing the findings
of the Inspection on this area within one week from the receipt date by the
Contractor of the Letter of Intent.
PAGE 132
The report shall include the as - existing conditions, drawings, photographs with all
details clearly shown to the approval of the Engineer.
In case the Letter of Intent includes instructions to the Contractor to carry out
concrete testing then the Contractor shall carry out these testing and submit to the
Engineer a report detailing the tests results and locations. All testing shall be
completed and the report submitted to the Engineer within two weeks from the
receipt date by the Contractor of the Letter of Intent.
The Engineer shall then, decide on the rehabilitation works to be performed on this
area, based on the findings of this Inspection (and as applicable, test results).
B. The inspection shall cover all the constructions. Internal and external structural
op V1
elements, the Contractor shall carry out his inspection for the internal elements after
emptying and cleaning the reservoir after taking all necessary/required security and
safety measures and using any safety equipment to the satisfaction of the
Department / Engineer.
C -
C. All surveys shall be completed and corresponding reports be submitted prior to
y
C
start the rehabilitation works. The Contractor's program of work shall consider and
illustrate these requirements.
C
D. All the site sampling and the in-situ and laboratory testing shall be performed by an
approved independent laboratory.
Q
E. The following sampling/testing may be used for the determination of the

contaminated / defective concrete areas when required by the Engineer:
1. For an area of concrete surface, one or more of the following tests are to be
done as may be required by the Engineer (Frequency of each test will be
defined by the Engineer):
a. Drilling and collecting dust samples, at the locations defined by the

Engineer, in three depth increments 0 to 30 mm, 30 to 70 mm, 70 to 100
mm, or in two depth increments 0 to 30 mm and 30 to 70 mm, for the
purpose of chemical tests.
b. Measuring the chloride ion content (as Cl¯) of an increment or increments

of collected dust samples, as required by the Engineer, in accordance
with the relevant British Standard.
c. Measuring the sulphates content (as SO3) of an increment or increments

of collected dust samples, as required by the Engineer, in accordance
with the relevant British Standard.
d. Half Cell Potential survey to be done over one m² at the locations defined
by the Engineer, including concrete cover thickness at break out
connection.
e. Cover meter to be used at random as required by the Engineer.
f. Measuring the carbonation depth at random at the same holes done for
the tests here above as required by the Engineer.
PAGE 133
2. As may be required by the Engineer, Drilling and collecting concrete cores and
determination of concrete compressive strength, cement content, and density
by testing including visual examination and photographs, in accordance with
relevant British Standard.
3. Sampling and Testing shall be carried out according to Internationally

recognized Standards, for example, the following Standards are applicable:
Compressive Strength Test of Drilled Concrete Core: BS 1881: Part 120:

1983
Concrete Dust Sampling: BS 1881: Part 124: 1988
op V1
Determination of Chloride Content: BS 1881: Part 124: Clause 10.2: 1988
Determination of Sulphates Content BS1881: Part 124: Clause 10.3: 1988
Half Cell Potential Test ASTM C 876
C -
y
C
Depth of Carbonation BRE IP6: 81
In general, British, American or DIN Standards are applicable.

C
F. When required by the Engineer to determine the areas of contamination / defective
concrete, the Engineer shall select the location of the tests for each step of the
Q
works. For each concerned structure, the Contractor shall give the Engineer a
minimum notice of seven days in advance in order to select the tests and sampling
locations.
G. The Engineer shall have the right to increase or decrease the type and / or the
frequency of tests as described here above, as deemed necessary by him for the
good achievement and completion of the works.
H. The Contractor shall only commence the rehabilitation works on a structural element
only after receiving the approval of the Engineer.
I. The Contractor will bear the full responsibility of the good quality and the performance
of the repairs; and therefore can increase the type and number of laboratory testing
specified elsewhere in the Tender Documents in order to satisfy himself with the
quality of the performed repair without any additional cost to the Department.

A. The Engineer shall keep the right to select the repair system for a certain concrete
area.
B. The Contractor shall perform the repair works on a certain concrete area / structural
element in strict accordance with the repair system selected by the Engineer for the
same area / element.
C. The Contractor shall follow the instructions of the Engineer on where and what to
start the repair with, on a certain area.
D. The concrete repair works shall include, but not limited to, the following:
PAGE 134
1. Treatment of the defective expansion joints.
2. Repair of the defective pipes crossing.
3. Injection of resin/chemical at leaking points/areas.
4. Treatment of concrete dead cracks, live cracks.
5. Repair of the deteriorated / contaminated concrete areas.
6. Repair of the settled ground finishes, etc.
E. The Contractor shall then, apply coating on the surface of the concrete wherever
op V1
F. In case the concrete at the bottom parts of a certain area is defective /

contaminated, the removal of concrete in this area shall extend below the ground
level to reach sound concrete or as may be directed by the Engineer in order to
C -
repair the extent of the defects.
y
C
12.3.3 Repair of Expansion Joints
C
A. The Contractor shall submit his method statement for repairing the defective
expansion joints and shall be supported with the manufacturer’s recommendations
to the approval of the Engineer as follow:
Q
1. Below liquid level: (external faces of liquid containing structures)
The following method of repair, or equivalent approved, shall be as follows:
a) Breaking the defective concrete from each side of the expansion joints, and
creating a reservation recess in concrete.
b) Sealing the liquid infiltration with rapid setting mortars.
c) Fixing of flexible sheeting with epoxy resin adhesive, which allows joint
sealing and movement of joints in more than one direction. This sheet shall
be minimum 2mm thick and a 25cm width.
d) Filling the joint with Sealant.
e) Reinstatement of the concrete with approved repair materials.
2. Above liquid level
a) The repair method of paragraph 1 above is to be applied excluding items b &

c and as follows:
 Breaking the defective concrete from each side of the expansion joints,
and creating a reservation recess in concrete.
 Filling the joint with sealant as may be required by the Engineer.
 Reinstatement of the concrete with approved repair materials.
PAGE 135
b) In case a certain concrete area is to be completely replaced, then the

Contractor shall:
 Construct the expansion joints in good manner as originally existing and

as may be directed by the Engineer.
 Fill the joints with suitable joint filler to the approval of the Engineer.
 Seal the new joints with sealant as may be required by the Engineer.
B. In case of steel corrosion at sides of expansion joints, treatment as specified in the

relevant sections should be done.
12.3.4 Crack Injection
op V1
A. The injection shall be made in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. The works shall be carried out by a qualified applicator approved by the material
C -
manufacturer and the Engineer.
y
C.
C
The Contractor shall treat the leakage areas (under moisture condition) with
injection.
C
D. Based on a diagnosis, the method statement of treatment should be set up by the
product Company or by an approved Agent.
Q
E. Crack injection shall be performed with one or more of the following resins as
1. Foaming agent to stop water leakage.

2. Epoxy resins for structural repairs.
3. Polyurethane resin.
4. Vinyl ester resin.
F. All injections shall be conducted by drilling holes at approximately 45º to the surface
in order to intersect the crack at the center of the member.
G. Crack injection shall typically start at the bottom of vertical surfaces and shall
continue upwards as resin is seen to exit indicator holes.
H. The above shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligation of good achievement of
the work.
12.3.5 Crack Filling (Surface)

A. The Contractor shall treat the cracks under dry condition by opening and filling
with epoxy filler.
B. Cracks shall be ground out and filled at the surface as directed by the Engineer.
1. Grinding shall be in the form of a “V” notch 10 mm wide.
PAGE 136
2. “V” shall be blown clean of all dust and filled to the surface with an approved
epoxy filler.
3. Indicator holes may be drilled through the filler as necessary to monitor crack
injection activities.
12.3.6 Repair of the Deteriorated / Contaminated Existing Concrete

A. The extent of removal in any concrete shall be approved by the Engineer, after the
Contractor has removed the deteriorated / contaminated concrete.
1. As a guide, the defective/contaminated concrete area shall be removed till the

exposure of a sound non-contaminated concrete and rebar (10cm beyond the
op V1
corroded length of the rebar).
2. As a guide, all loose and porous concrete shall be removed.
B. In case the concrete at any area shall be removed to a certain depth below the
C -
ground level as extent of repair / contamination then The Contractor shall also carry
y
out the following works:
C
1. Removal of soil,
C
2. Refilling with appropriate fill materials and compacting to the approval of the
Engineer,
Q
3. Reinstatement of ground finishes as originally existing (cement, tiles, etc.).
C. For concrete areas which are not showing visual signs of deterioration, the
Contractor, in addition to the scope of testing required by the Engineer, shall
prepare witnessing points (i.e. removal of area of 100x100 mm) and to expose the
rebar as directed by the Engineer, in order to check the soundness of this concrete
and the condition of reinforcement steel.
D. During the repairs, the Contractor shall provide the contraction and construction
joints as necessary and as may be directed by the Engineer without any additional
cost. These joints shall be sealed and shall be done and located in accordance with
the ACI Standards or equivalent, and subject to the approval of the Engineer.
E. Joint sealant shall be suitable for the intended use and in accordance with the ACI
Standards, or equivalent. The Contractor shall only start the removal of concrete
after acquiring the necessary approvals and temporary measures (scaffolding,
propping, safe access, etc.).
F. The Contractor shall not commence any step of the works without having obtained
the approval of the Engineer for the previous step. As a guide, the following steps
shall be approved by the Engineer:
1. Removal of soil, if required.
2. Treatment of the rebar (sandblasting, additional rebar, etc.)
3. Treatment of the backing.
4. Build-up of the repair works.
PAGE 137
5. Application of surface coating.
6. Any other required treatments.
12.3.7 Repair Systems

A. The Contractor shall use the repair system for a certain concrete area as found
suitable by the Engineer. For this purpose, one of the following repair systems shall
be used:
1. Cementitious repair mortar with bonding agents.
2. Shotcrete with special additives.
op V1
3. Concrete with suitably designed admixtures.
4. Prepacked free flowing micro-concrete.
5.
C -
Prepacked grout material.
y
6.
C
Repair with epoxy mortar
B. The Contractor shall then apply coatings on the surface wherever directed by the
C
Engineer.
Q
C. The materials used for repair should have the following properties:
1. Perfect bond with the backing, at least equal to the internal cohesion within the
backing.
2. Mechanical strengths, modulus of elasticity, compatible with the backing.
3. Special characteristics to withstand the environmental conditions.
12.3.8 Sand blasting

A. All exposed rebar shall be sand blasted to remove all dirt, fungus, laitance (weak
smooth layer), loose particles and other contaminants.
12.3.9 Concrete Removal

A. Remove the defective / contaminated concrete on a certain area to a depth to be
determined by the Engineer based on the inspection and laboratory test results
provided by the Contractor.
B. Concrete shall be chipped out and cut as directed by the Engineer.
C. All edges around areas to be chipped out shall be saw cut 10 mm deep.
D. Clean the surface from dust, unsound concrete, grease, oil and any other foreign
matter, by jetting of abrasive by air or water.
E. The breaking of the concrete shall not cause any damage to the concreted
structure.
PAGE 138
1. If reinforcement is encountered, the concrete shall be cut back at least

20 mm beyond the rebar, upon the Engineers instructions, regardless of the
concrete condition.
2. Weight of jack hammers shall not exceed 10 kg, unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer.
3. Taper edges to eliminate square shoulders at perimeter of cavities or at

abrupt changes in thickness.
12.3.10 Rebar Repair and Replacement

A. Any exposed rebar encountered during renovation shall be sand blasted to
op V1
remove all rust.
B. Heavily corroded rebar, exceeding 10% loss of cross section, (as determined by
the Engineer) shall be lapped with new rebar of the same size.
1.
C -
All new rebar shall be sand blasted in the same manner as repaired rebar.
y
2.
C
Heavily corroded rebar may be removed if sufficient lap is available with
acceptable rebar.
C
a. If sufficient lap length is not available, the Contractor shall drill and grout
rebar dowels as directed by the Engineer.
Q
3. Minimum cover on newly placed rebar shall be 40 mm, unless otherwise

4. Clear distance between newly placed rebar and existing rebar shall be 35 mm
for shotcrete applications.
12.3.11 Application of Epoxy Fillers

A. All cementitious surfaces shall have been sand blasted and thoroughly cleaned by
high-pressure air blast just prior to filler application.
1. Surface must be dry.
B. Mixing shall be according to manufacturer’s recommendations.
1. All components must be fully mixed.
C. Application shall be according to manufacturer’s recommendations over the entire

surface to smoothly fill all cavities, offsets, air holes and pinholes.
12.3.12 Application of Epoxy Mortars

Prior to start the repairs, and in view of prequalifying the proposed repair Epoxy Mortar
system, The Contractor shall apply this method over three representative areas
selected by the Engineer:
1. From each area, three pullout tests shall be performed by the Contractor to
determine the bonding strength between the old concrete and the Epoxy
Mortar.
PAGE 139
2. The rehabilitation works cannot start unless the above prequalification tests are
successful and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3. The Epoxy Mortar system is subject to the approval of the Engineer prior to any
related site works.
All concrete shall have been saw cut all round, chipped down to remove defective or
contaminated concrete and thoroughly cleaned by high-pressure air blast prior to mortar
application.
Rebar shall have been repaired or placed as directed by the Engineer.
All components must be fully mixed according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
op V1
Primer
1. Primer shall be utilized, if recommended by the epoxy mortar manufacturer.
2.
C -
Mixing and application shall be as recommend by the manufacturer.
y
Mortar Application
C
C
1. Mortar application shall be according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Q
2. All cavities shall be fully filled to the pre-existing surface level and troweled to
a smooth finish.
12.3.13 Application of Cementitious Mortars

A. Prior to start the repairs, and in view of prequalifying the proposed repair mortar
system, The Contractor shall apply this method over three representative areas
selected by the Engineer:
1. 3 cubes from each area shall be prepared and crushed for determination of
their compressive strength (BS 1881/BS 4550)
2. The contractor shall carry out penetration test in accordance to DIN 1048
3. From each area, three pull out tests shall be performed by the Contractor to
determine the bonding strength between the old concrete and the mortar.
4. The rehabilitation works cannot start unless the above prequalification tests
are successful and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
5. The repair mortar system is subject to the approval of the Engineer prior to
any related site works.
B. All concrete shall have been saw cut all around, chipped down to remove
defective or contaminated concrete and thoroughly cleaned by high-pressure air
blast just prior to mortar application.
C. Rebar shall have been repaired or placed as directed by the Engineer.
PAGE 140
D. All the components of the mortar system shall come from the same
manufacturer and shall be a complete and comprehensive repair system.
E. Mixing shall be according to the manufacture’s recommendations.
F. Primer
1. Suitable epoxy primer shall be utilized for all applications, unless

2. Mixing application of the primer shall be in strict accordance with

op V1
G. Mortar Application
1. Mortar application shall be according to the manufacturer’s

recommendations.
2.
C -
All cavities shall be fully filled to the pre-existing surface level and
y
C
troweled to a smooth finish.
3. Curing shall be conducted according to the manufacturer’s

C
recommendations.
12.3.14 Application of Micro-Concrete

Q
A. Prior to start the repairs, and in view of prequalifying the proposed Micro-
Concrete system, The Contractor shall apply this method over three
representative areas selected by the Engineer:
1. 3 cubes from each area shall be prepared and crushed for determination
of their compressive strength (BS 1881/BS 4550)
2. 3 Samples for water penetration to be tested in accordance to DIN 1048
3. From each area, three pull out tests shall be performed by the Contractor
to determine the bonding strength between the old concrete and the
mortar.
4. The rehabilitation works cannot start unless the above prequalification

tests are successful and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
5. The Micro-Concrete system is subject to the approval of the Engineer prior

to any related site works.
B. All concrete shall have been saw cut all around, chipped down to remove
blast just prior to mortar application.
C. Rebar shall have been repaired or placed as directed by the Engineer.
D. If necessary, formwork shall be erected according to section 03100.
1. Formwork shall be watertight.

E. Mixing shall be according to the manufacture’s recommendations.
PAGE 141
F. Primer
1. Suitable epoxy primer shall be utilized for all applications, unless

2. Mixing application of the primer shall be in strict accordance with

G. Placement
1. Micro concrete shall be placed according to manufacturer’s

recommendations.
op V1
2. All cavities shall be fully filled to the pre-existing surface level and
troweled to a smooth finish.
3. Curing shall be conducted according to the manufacturer’s

recommendations.
C -
y
12.3.15 Application of Shotcrete
C
A. Prior to any trial mixes, The Contractor shall submit to the approval of the
Engineer:
C
1. The mix design and the materials certificates of the shotcrete.
Q
2. All the technical data and tests results of the proposed admixtures materials.
3. The proposed site procedure including curing method.
B. All equipment used in the shotcrete process shall be in good working condition
and suitable for their intended purpose.
C. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with calibration certificates from an
independent party.
D. Prior to start the shotcrete works, each nozzle man will be subject to certification
by the Engineer in accordance with ACI 506.3R-91. The Contractor shall provide
all the necessary equipment/ materials/ personnel for the certification without
any additional cost.
1. Each nozzle man shall have at least five years’ experience in the Gulf Region.
2. Each nozzle man shall spray concrete in three wooden boxes 80x80x20 cm
each. The wooden boxes shall be installed in various positions as directed by
the Engineer. At least one of the boxes shall contain reinforcement steel:
a. 3 cores from each box shall be drilled, visually inspected and then tested
for the determination of the compressive strength, porosity and chloride
ion content.
b. One core from each box shall be drilled and tested for the determination of
the water penetration.
3. Each nozzle man shall spray concrete in three areas of 1m2 representative of
the concrete structure as defined by the Engineer, using the trial mixes as
PAGE 142
proposed by the Contractor:
a. Cores shall be drilled from each area and visually inspected by the
Engineer.
b. Three pull out tests from each area shall be carried out to check the bond
strength between the old and new concrete and its compliance with the
standards and specifications.
c. These areas will also be examined to verify the proposed curing method of
the shotcrete
E. All concrete shall have been saw cut all around, chipped down to remove
op V1
blast just prior to shotcrete application.
F. Rebar shall have been repaired or placed as directed by the Engineer.
C -
G. Concrete surface shall be thoroughly soaked with water prior to application of
y
C
shotcrete. Any excess water shall be removed.
H. Application shall be with dry mix only.

C
I. Do not place shotcrete when substrate or reinforcing temperature is above
38ºC.
Q
J. Spraying shall generally be at right angles to the surface and will generally start
at the bottom and work upwards on vertical surfaces
1. Screed boards, profile guides or stretched wires shall be used to maintain

proper thickness, and uniform surface profile.
2. Maximum thickness per layer shall be 50mm.
3. Application of subsequent layers shall be delayed for at least 1 hour.
K. The finish surface shall be lightly trimmed to profile and left rough to receive filler
or mortar.
L. Wet curing, according to Sections 03300 and 03370, shall commence

immediately upon finishing and shall continue for 7 days.
M. Control joints shall be provided at a maximum spacing of at least 3 meters or as

directed by the engineer.
12.3.16 Application of Grout

A. Prior to start the repairs and in view of prequalifying the proposed grout system,
the Contractor shall apply this method over two representative areas selected by
the Engineer:
1. 3 cubes from each area shall be prepared and crushed for determination of
their compressive strength (BS 1881/BS 4550).
2. 3 samples for water penetration to be tested in accordance with DIN 1048
PAGE 143
3. 3 pull out tests from each area shall be performed by the Contractor to
determine the bonding strength between the old concrete and the grout.
The rehabilitation works cannot start unless the above prequalification tests are
successful and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
B. The grout material is subject to the approval of the Engineer prior to any related site
works.
C. Curing shall be conducted according to the manufacturer’s recommendations, or as

may be directed by the Engineer.
D. The Contractor shall apply a bonding agent between existing concrete and the grout
op V1
in case the bond strength fails to meet the specified value of 1.5 N/mm2. The
bonding layer should be stable when exposed to water, and should form a
waterproof screen between the old concrete and the grout.

C -
y
A. In addition to the tests specified in previous paragraphs, The Contractor shall
C
perform the following laboratory tests and submit it to the Engineer for approval prior
to any site works; then The Contractor shall perform it during the work with the
C
specified frequency. These tests and frequency are given as a minimum
requirement. The Contractor is responsible for increasing the frequency and/or
performing other tests at his cost as deemed necessary by him to satisfy himself
Q
with the quality of the repairs and materials.
B. Surface tolerances for all repairs shall comply with Section 03300, unless otherwise
C. Minimum pull-off values for any repairs with any materials shall be 2.0 N/mm2.
2
1. One pull-off test shall be conducted for every 30 m of repairs.
D. Samples of shotcrete, micro-concrete, cementitious mortar and grout shall be taken

as follows unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
1. Shotcrete: two 80 x 80 x 20 cm box for 8 cores on daily basis
2. Micro-concrete: 8 cubes (150 mm) for every 10 bags.
3. Cementitious mortar: 8 cubes (150 mm) for every 10 bags.
4. Grout: 8 cubes (150 mm) for every 10 bags.
Testing shall be as follows:
1. Shotcrete:
a. Test 3 cores for compressive strength at 7 days and 3 cores at 28 days.

b. Dispose of samples when directed by the Engineer.
th
c. Conduct permeability test on every 15 samples or as directed by the
Engineer.
d. One core for chloride ion content
PAGE 144
e. One core for sulphates ion content
E. Micro-concrete, cementitious mortar and grout
1. Conduct compressive strength on 3 cubes and permeability on 3 cubes.
2. One cube for chloride ion content
3. One cube for sulphates ion content
F. Aggregates:
Table 12.3-1: Quality Control
op V1
Description Reference Frequency
(Per size & per sample)
Organic impurities ASTM C-40 Once every 1 month and at change of
C -
y
quarry.
Soundness
C ASTM C-88 Once every 6 months and at change of
quarry.
C
Fines ASTM C-88 1/day of use.
Clay, Friable particles ASTM C-142 1/Month
Q
Gradation ASTM C-117 1/Day of use

Moisture Content ASTM C-556 1/Week
Specific gravity ASTM C-128 Once every 1 month and at change of
quarry.
Alkali reactivity ASTM C-33 1/6 Months
G. Water:
Chemical analysis for

Sulphates & Chlorides ASTM D-512, 516 1/6 Months
H. Cement:
Chemical & Physical analysis ASTM C-150 1/6 Months + Mill certificate,
I. Steel:
Mill Certificate ASTM A-615 PER BATCH.
12.3.18 Surface Coating

A. Coating for concrete shall comply with the requirements of Section 09900.
B. The Contractor shall, as directed by the Engineer apply the coating on the existing
and/or the repaired concrete surface only after the repair works of the
deteriorated/defective concrete are completed, as specified and as may be
PAGE 145
12.3.19 Repair of Settled Elements

A. The main works will include:
1. Removal of the settled area / element (concrete, tiles, etc.).
2. Removal of the loose/unsuitable existing soil materials.
3. Filling / compacting beneath the concerned area with appropriate materials to

the approval of the Engineer.
4. Building a 10cm thick lean concrete below the base of the element as may be
deemed necessary by the Engineer.
op V1
5. Construction of a similar element, as originally existing and in accordance with
the general specifications.
6. Carrying out any other required treatments and as may be directed by the
C -
Engineer (joints, surface coatings...)
y
C
B. The Contractor is deemed to have satisfied himself with the principle of these repair
works and shall take all the necessary precautions and necessary works at his cost
C
including soil testing, soil replacement by a good quality fill materials etc., to ensure
the success of the repair works aiming at cancelling and remedying to the settlement
occurring in these elements.
Q
C. The connection joints between element and nearby construction, if existing, shall be
filled with a suitable joint material to the approval of the Engineer.
D. The Contractor shall prepare the shop drawings for these repair works to the
Engineer's satisfaction.
E. Any damages to the existing nearby constructions and installations shall be repaired
to the same quality of materials. The Contractor is deemed to have included in his
prices the cost of repair and/or replacement of any damaged items.
12.4.Part 4 - Structure Protection and Miscellaneous Works

12.4.1 General
A. Generally, the works concern the treatment of the structure related
protection/measures deficiencies, some finishes and other miscellaneous works.
Mainly, these works will include, but not limited to, the following:
1. Cleaning and re-coating of steel cover, frames, steel ladders etc. Repairing /
replacing the defective ones. Re-coating mechanical pipes, fittings, etc.,
wherever found necessary. Replacing the existing covers with new covers.
2. Suitable arrangements to prevent ground water entering the chambers /

manhole due to a low cover slab level.
3. Rectification of water proofing to underground concrete at inadequate

termination points and wherever damaged.
PAGE 146
4. Repairing / replacing the damaged handrails, gratings and chequered plates

as may be directed by the Engineer.
5. Rectification of disorders in finishing works: external floor tiles, external

paints.
6. Construction of suitable paving wherever needed/ instructed to the approval

of the Engineer and Department.
7. Employment of subcontractors/suppliers as nominated by the Department
B. Prior to start the work, the Contractor shall carry out a detailed inspection and
op V1
report all disorders for the Engineer's review and appropriate relevant instructions.
12.4.2 Rectification of Disorders in Finishes

A. Extent of the Works
C -
y
1.
C
These works concern the repair of the external floor tiles, internal and
external paints, coating of internal surfaces, etc. These works include also
the repairs of the defects in the supports of the concerned finishes.
C
B. Rectification Works:
Q
1. As a general guideline, these works are constituted of:
a. Removal of the defective / damaged finishing areas,
b. Treatment of the defects in the supports, as may be required (cracks,

de-bonded plaster, etc.),
c. Other necessary preparation as may be required by good practice,

materials specifications and/or by the Engineer.
d. Application of the finishes same as originally existing ones (quality and

type) in accordance with good practice and the relevant BS codes of
practice or equivalent.
e. Any works found necessary by the Engineer, to ensure the success of

the rectification works.
2. Fine cracks in concrete:
a. In general, such very fine cracks, if found necessary, can be treated by

opening and filling with cement slurry (with suitable adhesive) or treated
by opening and filling with appropriate mastic materials, or bonded by
the injection of epoxy, as directed by the Engineer.
3. Repair of settlements occurring in some ground finishes:
a. Breaking the settled area,
b. Removal of the debris,
PAGE 147
c. Filling with appropriate and approved materials,
d. Compacting by layers not exceeding 150mm,
e. Building a 10 cm thick lean concrete below the base of the element as

may be deemed necessary by the Engineer,
f. Reconstruction of the broken area, wherever required, as per the original

drawings and details,
g. Reinstatement of the finishing item, and
h. The damaged items (tiles, etc.) shall be removed from the site and
op V1
replaced by new similar ones of similar quality and type. The sound
items can be used after proper cleaning.
C. Particular Requirements
C -
1. Prior to start the works, the Contractor shall include the type of existing finishes
y
C
in his report to the Engineer's approval, for each construction.
2. All the defects in the supports (broken blocks, efflorescence, etc.) shall be
C
repaired prior to applying the finishes.
3. All defective and/or damaged finishes shall be removed till the support or ground
Q
according to the type of defect.
4. After cleaning the supports, the finishes as originally existing shall be laid again,
as defined in the particular and general specifications.
5. The removed finishing items, which can be used (tiles, etc.) shall be reused
again if not damaged. The damaged ones shall be removed from the site and
replaced by new ones of similar quality and type.
6. All the colors shall be as originally existing or as required by the Department /

Engineer.
7. All materials are subject to the Engineer's approval. For every material, a
complete relevant submittal shall be submitted for approval.
8. Prior to start the works, samples shall be prepared on site. These samples shall
be representative of all the cases of supports conditions. The number of sample
areas shall be determined by the Engineer.
9. The Engineer shall define the repair areas.
10. The Contractor shall obtain the written approval of the Engineer prior to starting
any sequence of the works.
11. The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the covering capacity of paints
according to the absorption of varying surfaces and shall allow in his prices
accordingly.
PAGE 148
12. The method and application of paints shall be sufficient to give solid cover in the
number of coats required.
13. The level requirements for the finished surface will be as per the General
Specifications. With this regard, the connection between the old and new
finishes shall be accordingly.
14. At the request of the Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out density tests
(minimum 90% of the Modified Proctor Test).
15. The Contractor shall include in his prices all the works described under this
section, as well as additional works judged necessary by the Engineer for the
good achievement of the works, including the supply of materials, the samples,
op V1
the applications, the preparation works, the treatment of defective and damaged
areas, the repair or replacement of items or area damaged by the Contractor
during the performance of the works, the additional treatment of the areas
where a difference in the color / shade occurs, etc.
C -
12.4.3 Rectification of Disorders in Waterproofing Works
y
C
C
1. Rectification of water proofing to underground concrete at termination points
and wherever damaged. This work covers all the areas encountered during
the performance of the project's rehabilitation works.
Q
2. These works include also the repairs of the defects in the supports of the
defective areas.
B. Rectification Works:
1. As a general guideline, these works are constituted of:
a. Removal of the defective / damaged waterproofing areas,
b. Treatment of the defects in the supports / repair of concrete as may be

required by the Engineer,
c. Other necessary preparation as may be required by the materials

manufacturer's specifications / recommendations,
d. Application of waterproofing system same as originally existing ones

(quality and type) in accordance with the specifications, good practice
and the relevant manufacturer's specifications,
e. Treatment of inadequate termination in accordance with good practice,

relevant code of practice, manufacturer's recommendations or as may
be required by the Engineer,
f. Any works found necessary by the Engineer, to ensure the success of

the rectification works.
C. Particular Requirements:
1. Prior to start the works, the Contractor shall include the type of existing
PAGE 149
waterproofing systems in his report to the Engineer's approval, for each

construction.
be representative of all the cases of supports conditions and waterproofing
systems. The number of sample areas shall be determined by the Engineer.
3. The Engineer will define the repair areas.
4. The Contractor shall obtain the written approval of the Engineer prior to start any
sequence of the works.
5. During all the works, the exposed termination of waterproofing to the
op V1
underground concrete shall be properly protected from rains and water
infiltrations to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
6. The support should be clean, sound, dry, dustless and degreased and as
required by the waterproofing manufacturer's specifications.
C -
y
C
7. All works related to the waterproofing system such as removing the electrical
accessories and raising it, etc. shall be done by the Contractor.
C
8. Jointing works shall be carried out with approved materials and in accordance
with good practice and manufacturer's specifications.
Q
9. The connection between the old and new waterproofing works shall be properly
done in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
10. All the termination details Aluminum flashing, sealant, etc. shall be done
properly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
11. The waterproofing works shall be performed by applicators approved by the

water proofing system manufacturer and in accordance with the manufacturer's
method and details.
areas, the repair or replacement of items or areas damaged by the Contractor
during the performance of the works, etc.
12.4.4 Construction of Pavement

1. These works concern the construction of new pavement around the
reservoirs or pumping stations as defined by the Engineer. These works shall
allow obtaining paved access to the desired locations.
2. The type of required works shall be defined by the Engineer and as may be
required by the Department.
B. Description of the Works:
PAGE 150
1. As a guideline, these works are constituted of:
a. Necessary soil cut / fill and preparation of the sub grade. This work will
include soil preparation as may be required by good practice, general
specifications, drawings, relevant standards and/or by the Engineer.
b. Construction of a new pavement as per relevant Sections, Department

Standard Design, and in accordance with codes of practices (ACI for
concrete works and BS for finishing works or equivalent).
c. Any works found necessary by the Engineer, to ensure the success of

the works.
op V1
C. Particular Requirements:
1. The Contractor shall visit all the constructions and ascertain himself of the
existing conditions of the reservoirs.
C -
y
C
be representative of all involved materials.
3. The area to be paved will be defined by the Engineer.

C
4. All materials to be used shall be to a high Standard and approved by the
Engineer.
Q
5. No site work shall be started before the Engineer's approval of the shop drawing
and materials.
6. The Contractor shall obtain the written approval of the Engineer prior to start any
sequence of the works.
7. At the request of the Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out density tests
(minimum 95% of maximum dry density). The number of the tests shall be to the
8. The level requirements for the finished surface will be as per the General
Specifications or approved standard.
areas, the repair or replacement of items or areas damaged by the Contractor
during the performance of the works, the additional treatment of the areas
where a difference in the appearance occurs, etc.
12.4.5 Other Protection and Miscellaneous Work

A Extent of the Works
1. These works concern mainly the protection of structure elements and other
elements such as steel cover and frames, handrails, gratings, checker plates,
steel ladders. These works shall be carried out to an approved Standard and
the materials to be used shall be of a high quality.
PAGE 151
2. The type of required works will be defined by the Engineer and as may be
required by the Department.
B Description of the Works

1. Miscellaneous Protection Works
As a guideline, the protection works include all works necessary for protection
purposes but not limited to the following:
a. Re-coating of steel cover and frames, handrails, gratings, checker

plates, pipes, steel ladders, etc.:
op V1
b. This shall be done by sandblasting / grit blasting the existing elements,
then application of a coating system which shall comply with the
requirements of the relevant Section. The elements to be re-coated shall
be defined by the Engineer.
2.
C -
Suitable Arrangements to Avoid Water from Entering the Structures
y
a.
C
These arrangements consist of raising the concrete top cover slab level
to a level that ensures that water coming from different sources (rain,
C
drains, irrigation, etc.) do not access inside the structure.
b. Raising existing slab/structure top level can be done either by

Q
construction of additional reinforced concrete after preparation of

existing surface to the approval of the Engineer (defective concrete, if
any, to be repaired) or by removal of existing slab (in case of slab) and
construction of a similar one at a higher level all as directed by the
Engineer.
c. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer's approval all the work
procedures and shop drawings prior to starting the site works.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 152
13. TESTING OF WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES

(SECTION 03800)
13.1.Part 1 General
13.1.1 Scope
A. This section of the specification gives the requirements for the methods and
evaluation criteria for testing water retaining/excluding concrete structures.
op V1
B. The Contractor shall test all concrete structures that are intended to be water
retaining/excluding which shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. Concrete tanks and reservoirs.

C -
y
2. Concrete channels.
3.
C
Concrete sumps.
C
4. Concrete underground chambers or structures subject to groundwater
infiltration.
Q
C. For water retaining structures, testing shall be carried out after application of any
interior protective coatings but prior to application of any exterior coatings or
membranes.
D. The cost of obtaining and the subsequent disposal of the test water shall be at the
Contractor’s expense.

section.
01300 Submittals.
03600 Concrete Protection and waterproofing systems.
13.1.3 Standards
A. All activities relating to this section of the specification shall comply with the following
BS 8007 Code of practice for design of concrete structures for retaining aqueous
liquids.
13.1.4 Submittals
A. The Contractor shall submit method statements to the Engineer for approval 4 weeks
in advance of commencing the site activity in accordance with Section 01300 of the
PAGE 153
1. Proposals for filling, testing and emptying of water retaining/excluding concrete

structures.
2. Proposals for repairing any leakage in accordance with the requirements of Section
03600 of the specification.
13.1.5 Water
A. Water used for testing shall be potable or irrigation water as agreed with the
Engineer.
13.1.6 Repair Materials
op V1
A. Materials for repairing any leaks or damp areas shall be in accordance with the
requirements of Section 03600 of the specification.
C -
y
13.2.1 General
C
A. Testing shall be in accordance with the requirements of BS 8007 and this section of
C
the specification.
13.2.2 Cleaning
Q
A. All water retaining/excluding structures shall on completion, be carefully cleaned to

the complete satisfaction of the Engineer.
B. All structures shall first be pumped dry and cleaned of all debris. The structure shall
then be brushed down on all internal faces with a stiff broom while still dry and swept
clean.
C. All associated pipe work shall be cleaned in accordance with the relevant
specification requirements.
13.2.3 Test Preparation

14. General
A. Testing shall not be undertaken until written approval has been obtained from the
Engineer.
B. Filling shall not take place earlier than 28 days after the casting of the final sections
of the structure, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer.
C. In the case of structures which are sub-divided into individual tanks, each individual
tank shall be tested separately, provided that the design of structure will sustain all
imposed loads.
D. All temporary bulkheads, cofferdams, pipe blank flanges and closed valves shall be
checked to see that they form a complete seal and if possible, they should be
observed during the actual test.
E. Backfilling against exterior walls shall not take place until the Engineer has given his
written approval.
PAGE 154
13.2.4 Test Procedure

A. After completion and cleaning of the structure and all associated pipe work, if any,
the Contractor shall fill the structure with potable water or irrigation water as
approved by the Engineer, at a rate of not more than 1m in 24 hours or as agreed
with the Engineer. The structure shall then be left filled for a stabilizing period of 7
days or as directed by the Engineer.
1. The water level shall be filled up to the maximum operational level.

2. Water shall be added during the stabilizing period to maintain the maximum
operational level.
3. The final water level for the test shall be the top water level or the operational
op V1
water level or as shown on the drawings.
4. Should any dampness or visible leakage occur at any stage the Contractor
shall immediately stop filling and investigate and repair the problem to the
satisfaction of the Engineer prior to continuation of the test.
C -
5. If emptied for repairs, the structure shall be refilled, as described above.
y
C
6. Before and during testing, flows in the structure under drainage, if any, shall
be monitored, measured and recorded. Each under drain shall be numbered
and observations reported by under drain number to facilitate analysis of the
C
data.
7. After stabilization, two shallow watertight evaporation trays 200 x 200 x
Q
150 mm deep shall be filled with 75mm of water and placed to float in the
structure.
a) The containers shall be positioned away from the sides of the structure
and any overhead members that may shield or shade the container.
b) The level of the water surface in the structure shall be measured at a
minimum of two locations to be agreed with the Engineer at the start of the
test. Commence the test and continue for a period of seven days, unless
c) Readings of water levels in the structure and trays shall be made and
recorded every 24 hours over this period.
d) At the end of the test period the leakage rate from the tank shall be
computed and corrected for evaporation.
8. The acceptance criteria shall be as follows:
a) If the average per day for the fall of water level in the structure over a test
period of 7 days minus the fall accounted for by evaporation does not
exceed 3mm the structure shall be deemed watertight.
B. The roofs of water retaining structures shall be watertight and shall be tested on
completion by flooding with 25mm minimum depth of water for a period of 24 hours.
1. The roof shall be considered satisfactory if no leaks or damp patches show on the
soffit.
2. Where it is not practicable to flood the roof an alternative form of testing shall be
agreed with the Engineer.
PAGE 155
13.2.5 Remedial Work

A. Notwithstanding the satisfactory completion of the 7-day test, any leakage, wet/damp
patches or sweating visible on the outside faces of the structure shall be repaired in
accordance with the requirements of Section 03600 of the specification. Surface
repairs will not be accepted.
B. Should the structure under test fail the above tests in any respect, the Contractor
shall:
1. Immediately take such steps as may be necessary to ascertain the nature and
positions of any defects or leakage.
op V1
2. Empty the structure and drain the roof surface.
3. Remedy the defects in a manner approved by the Engineer, employing staff or a firm
that are specialists in this type of work.
C -
C. When the remedial work has been completed in the manner approved by the
y
C
Engineer, the testing shall be repeated until a satisfactory test result is achieved.
D. If water leakage is severe, the Engineer may reject the entire structure.
C
E. Any costs incurred by the Contractor in remedial or replacement work necessary to
achieve a satisfactory test shall be entirely at the expense of the Contractor.
Q
13.2.1 Disposal of Water Used for Testing

A. The Contractor shall provide suitable means for disposal of water used for testing at
his expense, such that no damage results to facilities, structures or property.
B. These means of disposal of water shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer
and the local authorities.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 156
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
(VOLUME III)
DIVISION 04
MASONRY
DOCUMENT NO: 511

FIRST EDITION
DECEMBER- 2016
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Document No: 511

First Edition
December-2016
PO Box 20
the publisher
TABLE OF CONTENTS
List of Tables ............................................................................................................................... iv
1. MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT (SECTION 04100) ......................................................... 1
1.1. Part 1 General................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 References ................................................................................................................................ 1
1.1.2 Submittals .................................................................................................................................. 1
op V1
1.1.4 Delivery, Storage, and Handling ................................................................................................ 2
1.2. Part 2 Products ................................................................................................................................ 2
1.2.1 Materials .................................................................................................................................... 2
1.2.2 Mortar Colour ............................................................................................................................. 2
C -
y
1.2.3 Admixtures ................................................................................................................................. 2
1.2.4
C
Mortar Mixes .............................................................................................................................. 3
1.2.5 Mortar Mixing ............................................................................................................................. 3
C
1.2.6 Grout Mixes................................................................................................................................ 3
1.2.7 Grout Mixing............................................................................................................................... 3
Q
1.2.8 Mix Tests ................................................................................................................................... 4

1.3. Part 3 Execution ............................................................................................................................... 4
1.3.1 Examination ............................................................................................................................... 4
1.3.2 Preparation ................................................................................................................................ 4
1.3.3 Installation .................................................................................................................................. 4
1.3.4 Field Quality Control................................................................................................................... 4
1.3.5 Schedules .................................................................................................................................. 4
2. UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM (SECTION 04300) ....................................................................... 5
2.1 Part 1 General................................................................................................................................... 5
2.1.1 References ................................................................................................................................ 5
2.1.2 Submittals .................................................................................................................................. 6
2.1.4 Qualifications ............................................................................................................................. 7
2.1.6 Mock up ..................................................................................................................................... 7
2.1.7 Pre-Installation Conference ....................................................................................................... 7
2.1.8 Delivery, Storage, and Handling ................................................................................................ 8
2.1.9 Environmental Requirements .................................................................................................... 8
2.1.10 Coordination............................................................................................................................... 8
2.1.11 Protection ................................................................................................................................... 8
2.1.12 Extra Materials ........................................................................................................................... 9
2.2 Part 2 Products ................................................................................................................................ 9
PAGE I
2.2.1 Manufacturers - Concrete Masonry Units .................................................................................. 9

2.2.2 Concrete Masonry Units ............................................................................................................ 9
2.2.3 Reinforcement and Anchorage ................................................................................................ 10
2.2.4 Mortar and Grout...................................................................................................................... 10
2.2.5 Flashings.................................................................................................................................. 10
2.2.6 Accessories ............................................................................................................................. 11
2.2.7 Lintels....................................................................................................................................... 11
2.3 Part 3 Execution ............................................................................................................................. 11
2.3.1 Examination ............................................................................................................................. 11
2.3.2 General .................................................................................................................................... 11
op V1
2.3.3 Preparation .............................................................................................................................. 12
2.3.4 Coursing................................................................................................................................... 12
2.3.5 Placing and Bonding ................................................................................................................ 12
2.3.6
C -
Cavity Wall ............................................................................................................................... 14
y
2.3.7
2.3.8
C
Reinforcement and Anchorage ................................................................................................ 14
Masonry Flashings ................................................................................................................... 14
C
2.3.9 Lintels....................................................................................................................................... 14
2.3.10 Grouted Components .............................................................................................................. 15
2.3.11 Engineered Masonry ................................................................................................................ 15
Q
2.3.12 Control and Expansion Joints .................................................................................................. 17

2.3.13 Built-in Work ............................................................................................................................ 17
2.3.14 Tolerances ............................................................................................................................... 17
2.3.15 Cutting and Fitting .................................................................................................................... 17
2.3.16 Parging..................................................................................................................................... 17
2.3.17 Field Quality Control................................................................................................................. 18
2.3.18 Cleaning ................................................................................................................................... 18
2.3.19 Protection of Finished Work .................................................................................................... 18
2.3.20 Laying Exterior Walls ............................................................................................................... 19
2.3.21 Schedules ................................................................................................................................ 19
3. MEMBRANE ROOFING (SECTION 04400) .......................................................................... 20
3.1 Part 1 General................................................................................................................................. 20
3.1.1 Scope ....................................................................................................................................... 20
3.1.3 Standards................................................................................................................................. 20
3.1.4 Submittals ................................................................................................................................ 20
3.1.4.1. Products and Materials Approval ......................................................................................... 20
3.1.4.2. Method Statements .............................................................................................................. 21
3.1.4.3. Drawings .............................................................................................................................. 21
3.1.4.4. Samples ............................................................................................................................... 21
3.1.4.5. Mock-Up .............................................................................................................................. 21
PAGE II
3.1.5 Quality Control ......................................................................................................................... 21

3.1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling ............................................................................................... 21
3.1.7 Warranty .................................................................................................................................. 22
3.2 Part 2 Products .............................................................................................................................. 22
3.2.1 General Description ................................................................................................................. 22
3.2.2 Materials .................................................................................................................................. 22
3.3 Part 3 Execution ............................................................................................................................. 23
3.3.1 General .................................................................................................................................... 23
3.3.2 Installation ................................................................................................................................ 24
3.3.2.1 Light Weight Screed ............................................................................................................ 24
op V1
3.3.2.2 Waterproofing Membrane .................................................................................................... 24
3.3.2.3 Insulation Board ................................................................................................................... 24
3.3.2.4 Pre-cast Concrete Tiles ....................................................................................................... 25
3.3.3
C -
Flood Testing ........................................................................................................................... 25
y
C
C
Q
PAGE III
LIST OF TABLES
Table ‎2.3-1: Ties requirement for cavity walls ................................................................... 19
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE IV
1. MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT (SECTION

04100)
1.1. Part 1 General

1.1.1 References
ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.
op V1
ACI 530.1 - Specifications for Masonry Structures.
ASTM C5 - Quicklime for Structural Purposes.
ASTM C91 - Masonry Cement.
C -
ASTM C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete.
y
C
ASTM C144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
ASTM C150 - Portland cement.
C
ASTM C199 - Test Method for Pier Test for Refractory Mortar.
ASTM C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
Q
ASTM C270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry.

ASTM C387 - Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials, for Mortar and Concrete.
ASTM C404 - Aggregates for Masonry Grout.
ASTM C476 - Grout for Masonry.
ASTM C595 - Blended Hydraulic Cement.
ASTM C780 - Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and
Reinforced Unit Masonry.
ASTM C1019 - Method of Sampling and Testing Grout.
ASTM C1072 - Method for Measurement of Masonry Flexural Bond Strength.
ASTM C1142 - Ready-Mixed Mortar for Unit Masonry.
ASTM E447 - Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms.
ASTM E518 - Test Method for Flexural Bond Strength of Masonry.
IMIAC (International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council) - Recommended
Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.
1.1.2 Submittals
B. Include mix design indicate whether the Proportion or Property specification of
ASTM C270 is to be used, required environmental conditions, and admixture
limitations.
C. Samples: Submit two samples of mortar, illustrating mortar color and color
range.
PAGE 1
D. Reports on mortar: Submit reports indicating conformance of mortar to

property requirements of ASTM C270, component mortar materials to
requirements of ASTM C270 and test and evaluation reports to ASTM C780.
E. Reports on grout: Submit reports indicating conformance of component grout
materials to requirements of ASTM C476 and test and evaluation reports to
ASTM C1019.
F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified
requirements.
G. Submit premix mortar manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions
of Section 01300.
op V1
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1.
C -
y
C
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section
01600.
C
B. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness and
foreign matter.
Q
1.2.1 Materials
A. Portland cement for Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 150, Type I, or BS 12,
ordinary, none staining, sulphates resisting, without air entrainment, natural
color or white as required to produce the required color of mortar or grout.
B. Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 144 or BS 1200.
C. Fine Aggregates: For joints, less than 6 mm use crushed aggregate graded
with 100% passing the No. 16 sieve (1.18 mm).
D. White aggregates: Ground white stone or approved natural white sand.
E. Colored aggregates: Ground granite, marble or other stone as required to
match Engineer's sample
F. Plasticizer: ASTM C 207, Type S.
G. Water: Clean and potable, clear and free of deleterious materials salts, etc.
which would impair the work.
H. Bonding Agent: Where approved by the Engineer Epoxy based type.
1.2.2 Mortar Colour

A. Mortar Color: as selected by the Division.
1.2.3 Admixtures
A. Water Retaining/Reducing Admixtures: BS 5075 Part I or ASTM C 499 Type
PAGE 2
B, free from chlorides and compatible with cement. Do not use without prior
approval of Engineer.
B. Plasticizers: BS 4887, free from Chlorides and compatible with cement. Do
not use without prior approval of Engineer.
1.2.4 Mortar Mixes

A. Unit Masonry Mortar: ASTM C 270, except limited to the mix materials
specified herein-before in article 2.01 and the following cement/lime ratios by
volume; wherein sand (in damp condition) equals 2.1/4 to 3 times the sum of
the volumes of cement and lime:
1. Type M: Not more than 1/4 part lime per part Portland cement.
op V1
2. Type S: Not more than 1/2 part lime per part Portland cement.
3. Type N: Not more than 1 part lime per part Portland cement.
B. Pointing Mortar: ASTM C270, Type N using the material property specification
C -
y
with maximum 2 percent ammonium stearate or calcium stearate per cement
weight.
C
C. Stain Resistant Pointing Mortar: One part Portland cement, 1/8 part hydrated
C
lime, and two parts graded (80 mesh) aggregate, proportioned by volume.
Add aluminum tri-stearate, calcium stearate, or ammonium stearate equal to 2
percent of Portland cement by weight.
Q
D. Mortar for Glass Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, Type O using the material
property specification.
E. Pointing Mortar for Glass Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, Type O, using the
material property specification with maximum 2 percent ammonium stearate or
calcium stearate per cement weight, with silica sand aggregate.
1.2.5 Mortar Mixing

A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270 in
quantities needed for immediate use.
B. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process.
C. Add mortar color and admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and coloration.
D. If the mortar mix needed water, re-temper only within two hours of mixing.
E. Use mortar within time specified in manufacturer’s instructions, but not more
than two hours after mixing.
1.2.6 Grout Mixes

A. Mixed in accordance with ASTM C476 and to achieve 21 MPa strength
at 28 days; 200-250 mm slump.
1.2.7 Grout Mixing

A. Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in
accordance with ASTM C476.
PAGE 3
B. Where admixtures are approved, add in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions; mix uniformly.
1.2.8 Mix Tests

A. Test mortar and grout in accordance with Sections 01400 and 01410.
B. Testing of Mortar Mix: In accordance with ASTM C270.

1.3.1 Examination
op V1
A. Request inspection of spaces to be grouted.
1.3.2 Preparation
A.
C -
Where applicable and approved by the Engineer, apply bonding agent to
y
C
existing surfaces.
B. Plug clean-out holes with masonry units. Brace masonry for wet grout
pressure.
C
C. Openings for doors and windows should be framed with concrete.
Q
1.3.3 Installation
A. Install mortar and grout to requirements of Section 04300.
B. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids.
C. Do not install grout in lifts greater than 400 mm or two courses without
consolidating grout by Roding.
D. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout.
E. Remove excess mortar from grout spaces.

A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section
01400.
B. Test and evaluate mortar in accordance with ASTM C780.
C. Test and evaluate grout in accordance with ASTM C1019.
D. Test mortar and masonry units to ASTM C1072.
1.3.5 Schedules
Refer to Volume 3
END OF SECTION
PAGE 4
2. UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM (SECTION 04300)
2.1 Part 1 General

2.1.1 References
ANSI A41.1 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry.
ANSI A41.2 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Masonry.
ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.
op V1
ACI 530.1 - Specifications for Masonry Structures.
ASTM C34 - Structural Clay Load-Bearing Wall Tile.
ASTM C55 - Concrete Building Brick.
C -
y
ASTM C56 - Structural Clay Non-Load Bearing Tile.
C
ASTM C62 - Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale).
ASTM C73 - Calcium Silicate Face Brick (Sand-Lime Brick).
C
ASTM C90 - Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
ASTM C126 - Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay Facing Tile, Facing Brick, and Solid
Q
Masonry Units.
ASTM C129 - Non-Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
ASTM C 145 - Specification for Solid Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
ASTM C212 - Structural Clay Facing Tile.
ASTM C216 - Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale).
ASTM C 279 - Specification for Chemical Resistant Masonry Units.
ASTM C 331 - Specification for lightweight aggregates for structural concrete.
ASTM C315 - Clay Flue Linings.
ASTM C530 - Structural Clay Non-Load Bearing Screen Tile.
ASTM C652 - Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale).
ASTM C744 - Pre-faced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units.
IMIAC - International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council: Recommended Practices
and Guide Specification for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.
UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
BS 12 - Specification for Ordinary and Rapid Hardening Portland cement.
BS 877 - Foamed or Expanded Blast furnace Slag Lightweight Aggregate for
Concrete.
BS 890 - Building Limes.
BS 1200 - Building Sands from Natural Sources.
BS 5075 - Specification for Air Entraining - Part 2 - Admixtures
BS 6073 - Specification for Pre cast Concrete - Part 1 - Masonry Units.
PAGE 5
BS 6073 - Method for Specifying Pre-cast Concrete - Part 2 - Masonry Units.

American Concrete Institute (ACI)
"ACI Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures”
National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA), USA "TEK" Information Series.
2.1.2 Submittals
B. Submit manufacturer's printed literature indicating product specification and
installation instructions for each product required by this Section.
C. Submit manufacturer's certification that the following comply with the
op V1
requirements specified:
1. Portland Cement.
2. Masonry Cement OPC or SRC as required.
3.
C -
Hydrated Lime.
y
4.
C
Mortar Aggregates and sand.
5. Concrete Masonry Units (all types specified).
C
6. Reinforcing Bars. Etc.
7. Plasticizer.
Q
D. Submit, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, and

following the submittal of manufacturer's literature and data, 3 samples of
each unit masonry hereinafter listed. Samples will be reviewed for color and/or
texture only. Compliance with all other requirements, is the exclusive
responsibility of the Contractor. Samples to be submitted as follows:
1. Hollow concrete blocks; two of each size.
2. Solid concrete blocks; two of each size.
E. Submit Shop drawing indicating details of anchors, inserts, joints, connections
to adjoining work or materials. Also include elevations indicating setting out
and placement of all joints, openings, cut-outs, etc.
F. In addition to above, submit Shop Drawings for fabrication, bending and
placement of reinforcement bars for unit masonry work. Comply with ACI 315.
"Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures"
unless more stringent requirements are specified. Show bar schedules,
diagrams of bent bars, stirrup spacing, lateral ties and other arrangements
and assemblies as required for fabrication and placement of reinforcement for
unit masonry work.

A. Work is to be carried out by persons skilled in laying unit masonry.
B. Paint mixer drums white on outside and keep white.
C. Keep all equipment, used for mixing transporting and laying mortar, cool
D. Place a recording thermometer at each location of unit masonry work during
its construction.
PAGE 6
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified
in this section with minimum three years experience.

A. Requirements for fire-rated or lateral support conditions are to be regulated in
compliance with local building codes and are not necessarily fully defined on
the Drawings. Whenever a fire-rating is shown for a wall, use masonry units in
that wall complying with the requirements established by the local governing
authorities.
op V1
2.1.6 Mock up
A. Provide mock-up of masonry under provisions of Section 01400
B. Prior to the installation of unit masonry work, and preceding pre-installation
conference, provide a sample wall mock-up for all types of masonry units.
C -
y
C. Construct a masonry wall into a panel sized 2 m long by 1.5 m high, which
C
includes mortar and accessories, wall openings, flashings, wall insulation,
indicating the proposed range of color, texture and workmanship to be
C
expected in the completed work.
D. Locate where directed.
Q
E. Provide each sample wall panel using materials, together with bond and joint
tooling, shown or specified for final work. Provide special features as directed
for caulking and contiguous work.
F. Obtain acceptance of visual qualities of each sample panel before proceeding
with the final work.
G. Retain each sample panel mock-up during construction period as a standard
for judging completed masonry work. Do not alter, move or destroy mock-up
until work is completed.
H. Mock-up may or may not remain as part of the permanent work.
2.1.7 Pre-Installation Conference

A. Convene prior to commencing work of this section, under provisions of
Section 01039.
B. Prior to the start of each major type of masonry work, meet at the site and
review the installation procedures and coordination with other work. Meetings
shall include Contractor, Engineer and Major Material Manufacturers as well
as others whose work must be coordinated with the masonry work.
C. Ensure coordination between masonry work and concrete work such that all
inserts and flashing regrets required for the proper installation of masonry
work, are correctly pre-installed.
D Examine all parts of the supporting structure and the conditions under which
the masonry work is to be installed, and notify the Engineer in writing of any
conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not
proceed with the installation of masonry work until satisfactory conditions
have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
PAGE 7

A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section
01600.
B. Do not change brands or sources of supply for masonry materials during the
course of the work.
C. Deliver unit masonry materials, other than bulk materials, to site in
manufacturer's unopened containers, bundles, pallets or other standard
packaging devices, fully identified with name, type, grade, colour and size.
D. Protect all unit masonry material during shipment, storage and construction
against wetting and soilage or intermixture with earth or other types of
materials.
op V1
E. Take all necessary precautions to prevent all masonry items from chipping,
cracking or other damage during transportation, unloading and storage on
site. Damaged units will not be allowed to be installed.
F.
C -
Do not use metal reinforcing or ties having loose rust or other coatings that
y
will reduce or destroy bond.
G.
C
Outside storage of masonry units and reinforcement shall be on plank
platforms, off the ground, in dry locations.
C
H. Inspect for damage.

Q
A. Take all necessary precautions to keep mortar and blocks and other
materials cool and in particular:
1. Do not mix mortar or lay units while shade temperature is above 40°C, on a
rising thermometer or above 43°C, or on a falling thermometer.
2. Do not allow temperature of fresh mixed mortar to exceed 32°C. Take
suitable measures to ensure this.
3. Do not lay masonry units having a film of water on their surfaces.
4. The Contractor will be deemed to have allowed in his Tender for all steps
necessary for compliance with the above.
2.1.10 Coordination
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039.
B. Coordinate the masonry work with structural members veneer, installation of
window anchors, ties and anchor bolts. Etc.
C. The Work of this Section shall be completely co-ordinated with the work of
other sections. Verify dimensions and Work of other trades which adjoin
materials of this Section before the installation of items herein.
2.1.11 Protection
A. Protection during Progress of Work:
1. When the ambient air temperature is more than 30°C in the shade and the
relative humidity is less than 50% protect the masonry from direct exposure
to the wind and sun for 48 hours after installation.
PAGE 8
2. Protect partially completed unit masonry walls against weather when work
is not in progress, by covering top of walls with strong, waterproof, non-
staining membrane. Extend membrane at least 600 mm down both sides of
walls and anchor securely in place ensuring that there is free air flow
sufficient to prevent heat build-up.
B. Protection of Completed Work:
1. Keep completed walls clean and protect from staining. Use suitable corner
guards to protect the corners of exposed masonry walls.
2.1.12 Extra Materials

op V1
B. Provide 50 units of each size, colour and type of glazed pre-faced non-slip
wall and floor ceramic tiles.
2.2 Part 2 Products

C -
y
2.2.1 Manufacturers - Concrete Masonry Units
C
A. See Supplementary Conditions in Volume 1
C
2.2.2 Concrete Masonry Units
A. Provide load bearing or non-load bearing blocks as shown, complying with
Q
type classifications, weights, grades and curing requirements as hereinafter

specified and the following general requirements:-
1. Do not use blocks which have chips, cracks, voids, streaks, iron spots or
other substances which might stain exposed finished surfaces.
2. Obtain blocks from one manufacturer, cured by one process and of uniform
texture and colour, for each type required, for each continuous area and
visually related areas.
B. Non-Load Bearing Block Units: ASTM C 145, or BS 6073, Part 1 using
machine-expanded slag or shale aggregate complying with ASTM C 331, with
dry net concrete weight of not more than 1680 kg/cu. m. Grade N or the
equivalent grade of BS 6073 Parts 1 and 2.
C. Moisture Controlled Curing:
1. Cure blocks by low pressure steam curing at a pressure of 0.7 kg/cm 2.
Raise the curing temperature uniformly at not more than 0.56ºC per minute
from 30oC to 66ºC and allow the masonry units to cure for approximately 3
1/2 hours from initial set period. Thereafter keep the units moist for a period
of 7 days by means of a fine spray of water and then allow to air dry for 14
days. Allow an interval of not less than 3 hours between the forming of the
units and the curing process.
2. Cure blocks in a moisture-controlled atmosphere at normal temperature
and pressure, and limit moisture absorption to 35% of saturation at time of
delivery and until time of installation. Comply with ASTM Type I
classification.
D. Provide concrete block units with exposed faces of the manufacturer's
standard colour and texture, unless otherwise shown or specified.
PAGE 9
E. Size and Shape: Nominal modular size of 400 x 200 x 200 mm or 400 x 200 x
150 mm or 400 x 200 x 100 mm depending on specified wall thicknesses.
F. Provide special shapes wherever shown and wherever required to build
corners, lintels, jambs, control joints and expansion joints, and for other uses
where necessary to provide a complete installation in accordance with the
highest standard of workmanship.
2.2.3 Reinforcement and Anchorage

A. Horizontal Joint Reinforcement: Truss type welded wire units of 3 m lengths
with prefabricated corner and tee units. Fabricate from ASTM A 82 or BS
4482 cold drawn steel wire with deformed side rods and plain 9 gauge truss
rods, crimped if used in cavity wall construction. Provide width of between 37
op V1
and 50 mm less than wall thickness.
1. Fabricate with 9 gauge (3.7 mm) side rods, unless otherwise shown.
2. Provide units with a single pair of side rods, unless otherwise shown.
3.
C -
For use in interior partition walls, fabricate from mill galvanised wire.
y
4.
C
For use in exterior walls, hot dip galvanise after fabrication, with 458 g/sq.
m. (1.5 oz.), zinc coating; ASTM A 153, Class B-2 [BS 729, Table 1].
C
B. Vertical Reinforcement for Hollow Core blocks: Steel reinforcing bars
complying with ASTM A 615, intermediate grade, size as shown or specified
herein, free from mill scale and excess or loose rust deposits. Unless
Q
otherwise called for in the Design Drawings, provide two 12 mm diameter

bars in each block.
C. Provide bolts, straps, bars and rods of the type and size shown, but
fabricated from not less than 1.5 mm (16 gauge) sheet metal or 9 mm
diameter rod stock unless otherwise shown. Fabricate devices from steel hot-
dip galvanised to ASTM A123.
D. Unless otherwise called for in the Design Drawings, provide continuous 50 x
50 x 3 mm thick metal angle on both sides as wall head lateral support.
E. Restrain at vertical abutments with concrete with stainless steel wall starters
with integral ties for building in.
F. Strap Anchors: dovetail type fabricated from 22 mm wide x 1.5 mm (16
gauge) thick hot dipped galvanised to ASTM A123 flat steel bar, with 6 mm
upturned end or 12 mm dia. hole located within 12 mm of end. Anchor to
extend to within 37 mm of face of masonry units.
G. Wall Ties: Formed steel wire, No. 9 gauge, 3.7 mm thick, ‘Butterfly’ type
complying with BS1243 and hot dip galvanised to ASTM A123.
2.2.4 Mortar and Grout

A. Mortar and Grout: As specified in Section 04100
2.2.5 Flashings
A. Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in relevant Section
PAGE 10
2.2.6 Accessories
A. Joint Filler: compressible joint filler of closed cell PVC, SBR or Neoprene,
either solid or tube type, manufactured in compliance with the relevant
standards of proper dimension to serve as back-up for joint sealant at face of
masonry,
B. Preformed Control Joints: solid rubber "key section" joint filler (60 to 80 Shore
A durometer hardness) designed to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall.
Provide with corner and tee accessories, heat fused joints.
C. Do not use control joint filler at building expansion joints?
D. Joint Fillers: use approved material to meet the required fire rating.
op V1
E. Building Paper: asphalt saturated felt to comply with BS1521 Class A.
F. Wood Mailers: for wood mailers and similar items to be set into the masonry
work see other relevant sections of these specifications
G. Sealants: use approved sealant to meet the required fire rating (if any) and as
C -
specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
y
H.
C
Cavity Vents: Aluminium grilles; insect/mosquito resistant.
I. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent
C
materials.
2.2.7 Lintels
Q
A. Pre-cast Concrete Lintels: Concrete class A type with OPC, 40 MPa strength
at 28 days designed to suit wall openings.

2.3.1 Examination
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
B. Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and
located.
C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into
masonry work.
D. Report unsatisfactory conditions to Engineer and do not proceed until
rectified to satisfaction of Engineer.
2.3.2 General
A. Comply with the manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations for
the installation of each type of masonry product, unless otherwise shown or
specified.
B. Build masonry construction to the full thickness shown, except for single
wythe masonry walls which may be built to the actual thickness of the
masonry units, using blocks of nominal thickness shown.
C. Form chases and recesses as shown and as may be required for the work of
other trades. Do not chase hollow blocks. Do not cut horizontal or diagonal
chases in load bearing work. Provide not less than 200 mm of masonry
PAGE 11
between chase or recess and jamb of openings and between adjacent

chases and recesses.
D. Leave openings for equipment as shown or required to be installed at later
date. Complete masonry work after equipment is in place using materials
identical with those immediately adjacent to the opening.
E. Step back unfinished work for joining with new work; teething will not be
permitted. Before new work is started clean exposed surfaces of set
masonry, wet units lightly (if specified to be wetted), and remove loose blocks
and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.
F. Do not build in concrete blocks until at least 28 days after manufacture and
until they are fully cured.
op V1
G. Use running bond for all single-wythe masonry walls unless otherwise shown.
In multiple-wythe walls, bond wythes together with header blocks wherever
possible, unless otherwise shown. Where wythes cannot be masonry
bonded, use wire ties of the type and spacing shown, unless horizontal joint
reinforcing provides the tie between wythes. Where type and spacing of wire
C -
ties is not shown provide either continuous or individual type ties, installed so
y
C
that double wires will be spaced not more than 600 mm centres both
horizontally and vertically.
C
2.3.3 Preparation
A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other sections.
Q
B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in

place until building structure provides permanent bracing.
2.3.4 Coursing
A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and
horizontal joints of uniform thickness.
C. Concrete Masonry Units:
1. Bond: Stretcher
2. Coursing: The height shall be 200 mm, which equals to one unit and one
mortar joint.
3. Mortar Joints: Concave and slightly recessed externally
Flush internally
Raked where rendering to be applied
2.3.5 Placing and Bonding

A. Lay solid blocks with completely filled bed head and collar joints. Butter ends
with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and push into place. Do not slush head
joints. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are
not permitted.
B. Remove excess mortar as work progresses.
PAGE 12
C. Layup walls plumb and true with courses level and accurately spaced and
coordinated with other work. Variations from plumb, true or level of more than
1/800 in any direction are unacceptable.
D. Build bearing plates, masonry anchors, flashings, sleeves, door frames and
other miscellaneous items into masonry as work progresses. Fill hollow metal
frames adjoining masonry work solidly with mortar.
E. Provide anchoring devices of the type shown or of standard type if none are
shown. Anchor masonry work to all abutting structural members. Space
anchors 600 mm centres at vertical and overhead support locations, and 600
mm centres both ways behind masonry veneer work, unless otherwise
shown.
F. Maintain uniform joint width except for minor variations to maintain bond
op V1
alignment. Except for cavity wall construction leave no voids between blocks.
Slush and grout back joints against other work as blocks are pushed into
place.
G. Finish masonry walls which are concealed or to be covered with other
C -
materials with flush joints, unless otherwise shown.
y
H.
C
Tool exposed wall joints slightly concave, unless otherwise shown.
I. Interlock intersections and external corners.
C
J. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where
adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace.
Q
K. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight,
clean, un-chipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edge. Use
motor driven saw designed to cut blocks with clean sharp corners. Cut blocks
as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full
blocks without cutting wherever possible. Avoid the use of less than half size
blocks at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other locations. Do not use
chipped or broken blocks.
L. Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled, cement purging is
required, resilient base is scheduled, cavity insulation vapour barrier adhesive
is applied, or bitumen damp proofing is applied.
M. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a
control joint as indicated. If control joint locations are not shown, place joints
vertically, spaced at each structural column or joint between bays of the
building but in no case spaced more than 9 m. Also, place vertical joints at
points of natural weakness in the masonry work, including the following
locations:-
1. At locations where masonry wall height changes by more than 20%
2. Above expansion or control joints in the supporting structure.
3. Where end of masonry wall butts against supporting structure.
Form continuous control joints 10 mm wide across which build-in 40 mm wide x

200 mm long galvanized mild steel flats minimum 1.6 mm (16 gauge) thick at
each alternate course. Fill vertical joints with mortar except where wall is a fire
compartment wall when it shall be filled as described in other relevant Section of
the Specifications.
PAGE 13
2.3.6 Cavity Wall

A. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug
weeps.
B. Build inner wythe ahead of outer wythe to receive cavity insulation and
air/vapour barrier adhesive.
2.3.7 Reinforcement and Anchorage

A. Provide horizontal joint reinforcement and vertical reinforcement in all
masonry walls, unless specifically noted or specified to be omitted.
B. Space horizontal reinforcement 600 mm centres for interior walls and 400
op V1
mm centres for exterior walls unless otherwise shown or specified.
C. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 150 mm at ends and do not bridge control
and expansion joints with reinforcement except at wall openings.
D. Use matching prefabricated "T" and "L" sections of reinforcement at corners
C -
and wall intersections to provide continuity.
y
E.
C
Centre reinforcement in wall to provide a minimum mortar cover of 15 mm at
side rods.
C
F. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above
and below openings. Extend minimum 400 mm each side of opening.
G. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of
Q
walls.
H. Reinforce joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 400 mm centres.
2.3.8 Masonry Flashings

A. Extend flashings horizontally at foundation walls, above ledge or shelf angles
and lintels, under parapet caps, at bottom of walls and where instructed.
B. Turn flashing up minimum 200 mm and bed into mortar joint of masonry or
seal to concrete or otherwise required.
C. Lap end joints minimum 150 mm and seal watertight.
D. Turn flashing, fold, and seal at corners, bends, and interruptions.
2.3.9 Lintels
A. Provide masonry lintels wherever shown, and wherever openings in the
masonry of more than 300 mm are shown without structural steel or other
supporting lintels.
B. Unless otherwise shown provide one reinforcing bar for each 100 mm
thickness of wall, and use bars of adequate size in relation to opening width.
C. Do not splice reinforcing bars.
D. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position
within 1/2 inch (13 mm) of dimensioned position.
E. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.
F. Provide minimum lintel bearing at each jamb of 100 mm for openings which
do not exceed 1.8 m width.
PAGE 14
G. Pre-cast lintels, or form lintels in place with adequate temporary support.

H. Cure recast lintels thoroughly before handling and installing.
I. Allow masonry lintels to attain specified strength before removing temporary
supports.
J. In walls of concrete masonry units, provide specially formed U-shaped lintel
units, with reinforcing bars placed as shown. Fill with mortar or concrete
grout.
K. Steel lintels may be used with the approval of the Engineer. Provide sizes as
recommended by the manufacturer.
2.3.10 Grouted Components
op V1
A. Reinforce bond beam with minimum 2 nos. M bars, 25 mm from bottom web.
B. Reinforce pilaster with minimum 2 nos. M bars, placed 25 mm from each end.
C. Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters.
C -
y
D. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position
C
within 13 mm of dimensioned position.
E. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.
C
F. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 300 mm
either side of opening.
Q
2.3.11 Engineered Masonry

A. Lay masonry units with core cells vertically aligned and cavities between
wythes clear of mortar and unobstructed.
B. Place mortar in masonry unit bed joints back 6 mm from edge of unit grout
spaces, bevel back and upward.
C. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained
sufficient strength to resist displacement of masonry units and breaking of
mortar bond. Install shores and bracing, if required, before starting grouting
operations.
D. Place vertical reinforcing before grouting and either before or after laying
blocks, as required by job conditions. Support vertical reinforcing at intervals
shown. Where individual bars are placed after laying masonry, place wire
loops extending into cells as masonry is laid and loosens before mortar sets.
After insertion of reinforcing bar, pull loops and bar to proper position and tie
free ends.
E. Prior to grouting, clean and inspect grout spaces and close cleanout holes.
Remove dust, dirt, mortar droppings, loose pieces of masonry and other
foreign materials from grout spaces. Clean reinforcing and adjust to proper
position as required. Clean top surface of structural members supporting
masonry to ensure bond. After final cleaning and inspection, close cleanout
holes and brace closures as required to resist grout pressures.
F. Wet masonry unit surfaces in contact with grout just prior to grout placement.
G. Limit grout pours to sections which can be completed in one working day with
not more than one hour interruption of pouring operation. Place pour in lifts
which do not exceed 1.2 m. Allow not less than 30 minutes and not more
PAGE 15
than one hour between lifts of a given pour. Rod or vibrate each grout lift
during pouring operation.
H. When more than one pour is required to complete a given section of
masonry, extend reinforcing beyond masonry as required for splicing.
I. Grout spaces less than 50 mm in width with fine grout using low lift grouting
techniques and grout spaces 50 mm or greater in width with coarse grout.
J. After grouted masonry is cured, lay masonry units and place reinforcing for
second pour section before grouting. Repeat sequences if more pours are
required.
K. When grouting is stopped for more than one hour, terminate grout 38 mm
below top of upper masonry unit to form a positive key for subsequent grout
op V1
placement.
L. Use either low-lift or high-lift grouting techniques subject to the following
requirements.
M. Low-Lift Grouting:
C -
y
1. Place vertical reinforcing prior to laying of masonry. Extend above
C
elevation of maximum pour height as required to allow for splicing.
Support in position.
C
2. Lay masonry to maximum pour height. Do not exceed 1.2 m.
3. Pour grout using container with spout or chute.
Q
4. Place first lift of grout 400 mm or equivalent courses and rod for grout
consolidation. Place subsequent lifts in 200 mm increments and rod for
grout consolidation.
5. Place grout continuously; do not interrupt pouring of grout for more than
one hour.
6. Terminate grout pours within 37 mm of top course of pour.
N. High Lift Grouting:
1. Provide cleanout holes in first course at all vertical cells which are to be
filled with grout.
2. In double wythe walls, omit every second masonry unit in one of the
wythes for clean out and cell inspection purposes.
3. In double wythe walls, construct vertical grout barriers or dams between
the masonry wythes, with masonry units every 10 m maximum.
4. The units with one face shell removed and provide temporary supports for
units above, or use header units with concrete brick supports, or cut
openings in one face shell.
5. Construct masonry to full height of maximum grout pour specified, prior to
placing grout.
6. Limit grout pours to heights recommended by the National Concrete
Masonry Association (NCMA) for the type of blocks, reinforcing and grout
used in the work, but in no case exceed 3 m height.
7. Clean out masonry cells and cavities with compressed air, remove debris.
8. Request inspection of the cells and cavities. Allow 1 day advance notice
of inspection.
PAGE 16
9. After cleaning and cell inspection, seal openings with masonry units.
10. Pump grout into spaces. Maintain water content in grout to intended
slump without aggregate segregation.
2.3.12 Control and Expansion Joints

A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion
joints.
B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and
corner joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07900 for sealant performance.
op V1
D. Form expansion joint as detailed.
2.3.13 Built-in Work

A. As work progresses, install built-in door and window frames, anchor bolts,
C -
plates, and other items to be built-in the work and furnished by other
y
sections.
C
B. Install built-in items plumb and level.
C
C. Bed anchors of door and window frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame
voids solid with grout. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 300
mm from framed openings.
Q
D. Do not build in organic materials subject to deterioration.
2.3.14 Tolerances
A. Maximum Variation from Alignment of Columns: 6 mm.
B. Maximum Variation from Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1.6 mm.
C. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 6 mm/3 m) and 13 mm/6 m or more.
D. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 6 mm per story non-cumulative; 13 mm in
two stories or more.
E. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 3 mm/m; 6 mm/3 m; 13 mm/9 m.
F. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 3 mm/m.
G. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 6 mm.
2.3.15 Cutting and Fitting

A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, grounds and any other items.
Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and
location.
B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where
appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired.
2.3.16 Parging
A. Dampen masonry walls prior to Parging.
B. Scarify each Parging coat to ensure full bond to subsequent coat.
PAGE 17
C. Purge masonry walls in two uniform coats of mortar to a total thickness of 19

mm.
D. Steel trowel surface smooth and flat with a maximum surface variation of
1mm/m.
E. Strike top edge of Parging at 45 degrees.

A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section
01400.
B. Inspect and test all masonry work.
op V1
C. Inspect and test engineered masonry work.
D. Inspect and test purging work.
2.3.18 Cleaning
C -
y
A. During the completion of masonry installation and the tooling of joints,
C
enlarge any voids or holes and completely fill with mortar. Point up all joints
at corners, openings and adjoining work to provide a uniform, neat
appearance, properly prepared for the application of sealant compounds and
C
other work to follow.
B. All exposed work shall be cleaned without the use of acid. Cleaning shall not
Q
be done until mortar is thoroughly set and hard.

C. Before wetting wall, remove large particles of mortar by means of wood
scraper, or, if necessary, by means of chisel or wire brush.
D. Pre-soak the wall, saturating the masonry with clean water and flush off all
loose mortar and dirt.
E. Using a stiff fibre brush only, scrub down the wall with a solution of 0.25 litre
household detergent and 0.25 litre of tri-sodium phosphate dissolved in 4
litres of clean water.
F. Thoroughly wash off all cleaning solution, dirt and mortar crumbs using clean
pressurised water.
G. If after this cleaning procedure is completed, the wall or portion of the wall is
not clean, in the judgement of the Engineer, clean with an acid solution by
means and methods acceptable to the Engineer. If cleaned with an acid
solution, all sashes, metal lintels and other material shall be thoroughly
protected.
H. Particular care shall be taken to prevent smearing mortar on surfaces of
concrete masonry units. If mortar smearing occurs, it shall be removed while
soft, when possible; if dry and hard, it shall be removed by rubbing with a
small piece of concrete masonry. All mortar smears, drippings, etc.; on
expanded faces of concrete masonry units shall be removed.

A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500.
B. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed
external corners which may be damaged by construction activities.
PAGE 18
2.3.20 Laying Exterior Walls

A. In addition to requirements herein before specified the following shall apply to
the installation of exterior masonry walls:
1. Space horizontal joint reinforcing 400 mm centres in exterior walls, unless
otherwise shown.
2. Install regrets and nailers for flashings and other related work where shown
to be built into masonry work.
3. Provide flashings in masonry work as shown and extend details to corners
and intersections to provide complete waterproofing.
4. Keep cavity clean of mortar droppings in cavity wall construction. Strike
op V1
mortar joints flush as the work progresses.
5. Place wall ties in cavity work as the work proceeds and set with slope to
outer Wythe. Do not raise one Wythe more than 1350 mm above the other
where wire ties are used or 450 mm above the other where any other type
C -
of tie is used. Close cavities at openings and top.
y
6.
C
Provide ties 150 mm long for cavities up to 50 mm wide and 200 mm long
for cavities 56 - 100 mm wide.
7. Space ties in cavity as follows:
C
Table 2-1: Ties requirement for cavity walls
Q
Wythes of thickness
Cavity Width Spacing of Ties
(one or both)
Horizontal. Vertical.
mm mm mm
90 mm or more both wythes 50-75 900 450
2.3.21 Schedules
A. Exterior Wall: Composite masonry with an exterior Wythe bonded with wire
truss reinforcement to inner Wythe of interior concrete block masonry with 50
mm space for insulation.
B. Interior Partitions: Single Wythe concrete block units.
C. Interior firewalls: One and two hour walls of grout filled block masonry with
locations identified on Drawings.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 19
3. MEMBRANE ROOFING (SECTION 04400)

3.1 Part 1 General
3.1.1 Scope
This section of the specification gives the requirements for membrane roofing
systems.
op V1
The following sections of the specification shall be read in conjunction with this
section.
Section 01400 Quality control Section
C -
y
Section 01600
C Materials and equipment
3.1.3 Standards
C
Q
BS 3837-1 Expanded polystyrene boards. Boards and blocks manufactured from

expandable beads. Requirements and test methods.
BS 8217 Reinforced bitumen membranes for roofing. Code of practice
BS EN 1339 Concrete paving flags. Requirements and test methods.
3.1.4 Submittals

i. Manufacturer’s/supplier’s name.
ii. Product name/description.
iii. Manufacturer’s technical data.
iv. Manufacturer’s certificates of compliance with this section of the
specification.
v. Storage instructions.
vi. Application instructions.
vii. Screed mix design.
PAGE 20

A. The Contractor shall submit method statements to the Engineer for approval
be limited to:
i. Method of construction of membrane roofing system.
3.1.4.3. Drawings
op V1
i. Drawings showing details, dimensions, locations and installation
methods of roofing system including membrane, insulation, precast
concrete tiles, flashings and all accessories.
3.1.4.4. Samples
C -
y
A. Representative samples, as agreed with the Engineer, shall be submitted for
C
ii. Membrane.
C
iii. Insulation board.
iv. Precast concrete tiles.
v. Sealant.
Q
vi. Flashing.
3.1.4.5. Mock-Up
A. 3m X 3m mock-up of complete membrane roofing system shall be provided.

Engineer a minimum of 24 hours notice of carrying out the following activities
on site.
i. Commencement of installation of membrane roofing system.
D. Only specially trained personnel thoroughly familiar with the application of
membrane roofing systems shall carry out the work.

PAGE 21
ii. Delivery, storage and handling shall at all times be performed in a

iii. Products shall be stored at site in a temperature, humidity etc.
environment as recommended by the manufacturer.
iv. Deliver roofing materials in manufacturer’s unopened containers or
bundles fully identified with brand, type, grade, class and all other
qualifying information.
v. The Contractor shall visually inspect all products upon delivery to site


op V1
Proposals for repair of any damaged products shall be submitted in
3.1.7 Warranty C -
y
C
A. The manufacturer and the Contractor shall jointly guarantee the membrane
roofing system to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a
C
period of 10 years from the date of completion of the Works.
B. The Contractor shall furnish the Division with the manufacturer’s guarantee
Q
and warranty certificates for all materials and components used.

C. If the membrane roofing system is found to be defective during the warranty
period, the manufacturer and Contractor shall replace and/or repair the
membrane roofing system to the satisfaction of the Division at no cost to the
Division.
3.2 Part 2 Products

3.2.1 General Description
A. The roofing system shall be an inverted warm roof type comprising surface
protection as specified, laid on thermal insulation over single layer roofing
membrane applied to screeded concrete.
B. All roofing shall be in accordance with BS 8217.
3.2.2 Materials
A. Roof Screed
i. Roofs shall be screeded with
3
a lightweight cellular concrete having a
density of 1040 to 1120kg/m .
B. Roofing membrane
i. The roofing membrane shall be an impervious laminate comprising PVC
sheet and flexible self adhesive rubber/bitumen compound with a total
thickness of not less than 1.5mm and designed for single layer
application.
PAGE 22
ii. Primers and sealants shall be suitable for the water proofing membrane
and shall be obtained from the same manufacturer as the water proofing
membrane.
C. Thermal insulation
i. Thermal insulation shall be rigid boards of extruded closed cell expanded
polystyrene in accordance with BS 33837-1, special heavy duty grade,
Type A, minimum density of 24kg/m , of the thickness as shown on the
drawings and with interlocking edges.
ii. The thermal conductivity, k value, shall not be greater than
0.03Watts/mK.
D. Surface protection
op V1
i. The insulation layer shall be protected with precast concrete roofing tiles
to BS EN 1339 or as otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer.
 Tiles shall be cast under pressure and shall be 600 x 600 x 50mm
thick.
C -
y
 Tiles shall have keyed backs and be cured for a period of not less
C
than two days after the initial set by being totally immersed in a tank of
clean water after which they shall be stacked on edge for a period of
C
seven days and be kept moist by spraying with water.
 The finished surfaces of tiles shall be flat, smooth and plain, free from
projections or depressions and edges shall be sharp and true.
Q
E. Aluminium flashings
i. Aluminum flashings where required shall be formed from 22 gauge
aluminum sheet cut and bent to the required shape and screwed to
treated hardwood battens cast into the concrete coping or upstand with
aluminum screws.

3.3.1 General
A. Prior to the start of membrane roofing installation, a site meeting shall be held
to review the installation procedures and co-ordination with other work.
Meetings shall include Contractor, Engineer and material manufacturers as
well as others whose work must be co-ordinated with the membrane roofing
installation.
B. Before commencing installation of the roof waterproofing and insulation
system all construction work and installations above roof level shall be
completed as far as is practicable.
C. Surfaces to receive membrane roofing shall be free of projections, voids,
depressions, scale, efflorescence, loose material, laitence, oil, grease and
other foreign contaminants. No work shall commence until the surface has
been inspected and approved by the Engineer. For surfaces which are
unsuitable to receive membrane roofing, the Contractor shall repair these
surfaces to the approval of the Engineer.
D. Membrane roofing system shall be protected from damage during
construction period so that it will be undamaged at the time of completion.
PAGE 23
E. The building shall be protected from damage resulting from spillage, dripping
and dropping of materials.
F. Other work damaged during roofing membrane operations shall be repaired
and restored.
G. Materials shall be prevented from running into and clogging roof drains.
3.3.2 Installation
3.3.2.1 Light Weight Screed
A. The screed shall be laid in bays, square where possible to a maximum area
of 10m2. Each bay shall be formed between stop boards of the correct height
and cut on each side to the falls required.
op V1
B. Unless indicated otherwise the minimum fall shall be 1 in 200 and the
minimum thickness shall be 35mm.
C. The screed shall be trowelled with a wood float to true and accurate falls and
C -
cross falls up to the stop boards.
y
D.
C
The screed shall be allowed to cure thoroughly and any cracks occurring, due
to shrinkage shall be made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
E. A gap of 10mm shall be left between each screed bay for the full depth of the
C
screed. All gaps shall be thoroughly cleaned by brushing or blowing and filled
with cold bitumen upon completion of curing.
Q
3.3.2.2 Waterproofing Membrane

A. Surfaces to which the waterproofing membrane will be applied shall be
surface dry, smooth and free of dirt, grease or oil and shall be free from
holes, honeycombing and loose aggregate which prevent satisfactory
application of waterproofing membrane.
B. All surfaces to be waterproofed shall meet the approval of the Engineer
before application of water proofing membrane.
C. A coat of primer shall be applied over the light weight screed as
recommended by the membrane manufacturer. Primers shall not be applied
until the moisture content of the surface is less than 5% when measured with
an electronic moisture meter or other instrument approved by the Engineer.
D. All joints shall be overlapped to a minimum of 150mm and bonded in the
method suited to the membrane in accordance with the manufacturer's
printed instructions
E. At all angles, kerbs, parapets, pipes, etc., the roofing membrane shall be
reinforced by additional layers, to a minimum total thickness of 3mm, with
internal angle fillets provided, all as detailed on the drawings and in
accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
F. No storage of materials or trafficking by other trades shall take place on
areas of exposed roofing membrane until subsequent materials have been
laid.
3.3.2.3 Insulation Board
A. The roof area shall be examined to be overlaid with insulation.
B. The Contractor shall ensure that all membrane joints have been sealed and
terminations have been completed.
PAGE 24
C. The boards shall be laid with close butted and staggered joints and shall be
accurately cut and trimmed to fit kerbs, parapets, fillets, etc. Boards shall not
be bonded to the membrane.
E. The board shall be protected as work proceeds against prolonged exposure
to sunlight, damage and displacement before finished surface protection is
applied.
3.3.2.4 Pre-cast Concrete Tiles
A. All joints shall be uniformly straight, in line and level.
3.3.3 Flood Testing
op V1
A. The horizontal areas of waterproofing shall be tested prior to the installation
of insulation.
B. Testing shall be by flooding sections of the waterproofed area with a
minimum 50mm head of water for 48 hours.
C.
C -
Any area where leaks occur shall be drained, thoroughly dried, repaired and
y
C
then re-tested.
D. After completion of flood testing, remove all traces of water to the satisfaction
of the Engineer.
C
E. Installation of insulation board and concrete tiles shall not start until such time
as the membrane is leak free and has been accepted by the Engineer.
Q
END OF SECTION
PAGE 25
op V1
C -
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
y
C
(VOLUME III)
C
Q
DIVISION-05
METALS
DOCUMENT NO: 511

FIRST EDITION
DECEMBER- 2016
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Document No: 511

First Edition
December-2016
PO Box 20
the publisher
TABLE OF CONTENTS
List of Tables ............................................................................................................................... iv
1 METAL STRUCTURE STEEL WORKS (SECTION 05100) .................................................... 1
1.1 Part 1 General................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 Scope..................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.2 Related Documents................................................................................................ 1
1.1.3 Standards .............................................................................................................. 1
op V1
1.1.4 Submittals .............................................................................................................. 2
1.1.4.1 Products and materials approval. ........................................................................... 2
1.1.4.2 Method Statements ................................................................................................ 2
1.1.4.3 Drawings ................................................................................................................ 3
C -
y
C
1.1.4.4 Mock-Up ................................................................................................................ 3
1.1.5 Quality Control ....................................................................................................... 3
C
1.1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling .............................................................................. 4
1.1.7 Warranty ................................................................................................................ 4
Q
1.2 Part 2 Products ................................................................................................................................ 5

1.2.1 General .................................................................................................................. 5
1.2.2 Structural Steel ...................................................................................................... 5
1.2.3 Bolts Nuts and Washers ........................................................................................ 5
1.2.4 Welding Consumables ........................................................................................... 5
1.2.5 Grout ...................................................................................................................... 5
1.2.6 Protective Coatings ................................................................................................ 5
1.2.7 Materials Testing .................................................................................................... 5
1.3 Part 3 Execution ............................................................................................................................... 6
1.3.1 Fabrication ............................................................................................................. 6
1.3.2 Connections ........................................................................................................... 7
1.3.3 Welding .................................................................................................................. 7
1.3.4 Field Erection ......................................................................................................... 9
1.3.5 Erection Tolerances ............................................................................................... 9
1.3.6 Protective Coatings .............................................................................................. 10
1.3.7 Coating General Requirements ............................................................................ 10
1.3.8 Coating Inspection Requirements ........................................................................ 11
1.3.9 Coating Repair Requirements .............................................................................. 12
2 METAL – MISCELLANEOUS METAL WORKS (SECTION 05200) ...................................... 14
2.1 Part 1 General................................................................................................................................. 14
2.1.1 Scope................................................................................................................... 14
PAGE I
2.1.2 Related Documents.............................................................................................. 14

2.1.3 Standards ............................................................................................................ 14
2.1.4 Submittals ............................................................................................................ 15
2.1.4.1 Products and materials approval. ......................................................................... 15
2.1.4.2 Method Statements .............................................................................................. 15
2.1.4.3 Drawings .............................................................................................................. 16
2.1.4.4 Samples ............................................................................................................... 16
2.1.5 Quality Control ..................................................................................................... 16
2.1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling ............................................................................ 17
op V1
2.1.7 Warranty .............................................................................................................. 18
2.2 Part 2 Products .............................................................................................................................. 18
2.2.1 General ................................................................................................................ 18
2.2.2 Mild Steel Ladders ............................................................................................... 18
C -
y
2.2.3 Aluminium Ladders .............................................................................................. 19
2.2.4
C
Stairways ............................................................................................................. 19
2.2.5 Platforms and Walkways ...................................................................................... 20
C
2.2.6 Handrails .............................................................................................................. 21
Q
2.2.7 Grout .................................................................................................................... 21

2.3 Part 3 Execution ............................................................................................................................. 21
2.3.1 Pre-Fabricated Components ................................................................................ 21
2.3.2 Fabrication General.............................................................................................. 21
2.3.3 Installation ............................................................................................................ 22
2.3.4 Protective Coatings .............................................................................................. 23
2.3.5 Coating General Requirements ............................................................................ 23
2.3.6 Coating Inspection Requirements ........................................................................ 24
2.3.7 Coating Repair Requirements .............................................................................. 25
3 METAL FABRICATION (SECTION 05500) ........................................................................... 26
3.1 Part 1 General................................................................................................................................. 26
3.1.1 Related Documents.............................................................................................. 26
3.1.2 References .......................................................................................................... 26
3.1.3 Submittals for Review .......................................................................................... 28
3.1.4 Qualifications ....................................................................................................... 28
3.2 Part 2 Products .............................................................................................................................. 28
3.2.1 Materials - Steel ................................................................................................... 28
3.2.2 Materials - Stainless Steel .................................................................................... 28
3.2.3 Materials - Aluminium ........................................................................................... 29
3.2.4 Fabrication ........................................................................................................... 29
3.2.5 Fabrication Tolerances ......................................................................................... 29
PAGE II
3.2.6 Finishes - Steel .................................................................................................... 29

3.2.7 Finishes - Aluminium ............................................................................................ 30
3.3 Part 3 Execution ............................................................................................................................. 30
3.3.1 Examination ......................................................................................................... 30
3.3.2 Preparation .......................................................................................................... 30
3.3.3 Installation ............................................................................................................ 30
3.3.4 Erection Tolerances ............................................................................................. 30
3.3.5 Schedule .............................................................................................................. 31
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE III
LIST OF TABLES
Table1.3 1: Extent of Non Destructive Examination ........................................................................ 8
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE IV
1 METAL STRUCTURE STEEL WORKS (SECTION

05100)
1.1 Part 1 General

1.1.1 Scope
A. This section of the specification gives the requirements for the supply,
fabrication, erection and protective coating of structural steelwork.
op V1
section.
C -
y
01300
C
Submittals
C
1.1.3 Standards
Q
BS 4-1 Structural steel sections. Specification for hot rolled sections
BS 4190 ISO metric black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts.
Specification.
BS 4395 Specification for high strength friction grip bolts and associated
nuts and washers for structural engineering.
BS 5531 Code of practice for safety in erecting structural frames.
BS 5950 Structural use of steelwork in building.
BS EN 287-1 Qualification test of welders. Fusion welding. Steels.
BS EN 440 Welding consumables. Wire electrodes and deposits for gas
shielded metal arc welding of non-alloy and fine grain steels.
Classification.
BS EN 473 Non-destructive testing. Qualification and certification of NDT
personnel. General principles.
BS EN 970 Non-destructive examination of fusion welds. Visual
examination.
BS EN 1011 Welding. Recommendations for welding of metallic materials.
BS EN 1435 Non-destructive examination of welds. Radiographic
BS EN 1714 Non-destructive examination of welded joints. Ultrasonic
PAGE 1
BS EN 10204 Metallic products. Types of inspection documents.

BS EN 10210-1 -2 Hot finished structural hollow sections of non-alloy and fine
grain structural steels.
BS EN 14399 High-strength structural bolting assemblies for preloading.
ISO 1461 Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel
particles. Specifications and test methods.
ISO 2560 Welding consumables. Covered electrodes for manual metal
arc welding of non-alloy and fine grain steels. Classification
ISO 4624 Paints and varnishes. Pull off test for adhesion.
ISO 9934-1 Nondestructive testing. Magnetic particle testing. General
op V1
principles.
ISO 9000 series Quality management systems.
ISO 15609-1 Specification and qualification of welding procedures for
metallic materials. Welding procedure specification. Arc
C - welding
y
1.1.4 Submittals
C
C
Q
1. Manufacturer’s technical data and certificates of compliance with this
section of the specification for the following products, including
laboratory test reports and all other relevant data.
a. Each type of structural steel including certified copies of mill reports

covering chemical and physical properties, country and rolling mill of
origin, statement that the steel is new billet steel and that testing has
been carried out in accordance with approved international
standards.
b. Each type of high strength bolt including nuts and washers.

c. Each type of welding electrode.
d. Material mill test certificates shall comply with the requirements of
BS EN 10204.
e. Coating systems including preparation and application instructions.
be limited to:
PAGE 2
1. Steelwork fabrication including:

a. Welding procedure specifications together with corresponding
procedure qualification records in accordance with BS EN 15609-1.
b. Nondestructive testing procedures.
c. Repair welding.
d. High strength friction grip bolt connection tests.
2. Step by step erection sequences including intermediate surveys and

allowances for temperature.
3. Surface preparation and application of protective coating systems.
op V1
4. Repair procedures for protective coatings.
1.1.4.3 Drawings
C -
y
1.
C
Drawings including structural calculations for all structural steel
components and their connections showing:
C
a. Size and weight of members.
b. Type, size, location and extent of all welds and bolts and
Q
distinguishing between shop and field activities.

c. Field assembly and sequence of erection.
d. Location of shorings.
1.1.4.4 Mock-Up
A. Apply a complete coating system to a panel of the same material as that on
which the coating will be applied and submit for approval for each colour
specified.

Engineer a minimum of 24 hours’ notice of carrying out the following
activities on site.
1. Commencement of fabrication and erection of structural steelwork.
2. Application of protective coating.
D. Only qualified personnel thoroughly familiar with the fabrication, erection and
protection of structural steelwork shall carry out the work.
PAGE 3
E. All welders and welding operators shall pass a qualification test carried out in
accordance with BS EN 287-1.
F. Nondestructive testing operators shall be qualified in accordance with BS EN
473 and the qualification certificates shall be available for review and
G. As a minimum requirement the following inspection and test equipment shall
be used by the Contractor and shall always be available during all stages of
protective coating operations.
1. Hand held and contact thermometers.
2. Whirling hygrometer.
3. Dew point calculation charts.
op V1
5. Holiday detection test equipment.
6. Adhesion test equipment.
C -
y
C
C
1. All materials shall be legibly tagged by the manufacturer so that the
Q
material can be identified against the corresponding test certificate.

2. Delivery, storage and handling shall at all times be performed in a
3. Products shall be stored off the ground on timber blocks of sufficient
size and spacing to provide adequate support.
4. Products shall be stored at site in a temperature, humidity etc.
environment as recommended by the manufacturer.
5. Protect from damage or soiling by adjacent construction operations
and provide suitable separation between individual items to prevent
them coming into contact with each other.
6. All coating materials shall be kept in the manufacturer’s original
containers with labels and seals intact. Each container shall clearly
display the name of the coating manufacturer, colour, type of coating,
batch number and shelf life.
7. The Contractor shall visually inspect all products upon delivery to site
a. Any products damaged during delivery, storage and handling

shall be marked by the Contractor and set aside.
b. Proposals for repair of any damaged products shall be submitted

in writing to the Engineer for approval.
c. Any damaged products deemed unsuitable for repair by the

Engineer shall be removed from site and replaced.
1.1.7 Warranty
PAGE 4
A. The manufacturer and the Contractor shall jointly guarantee the completed
protective coating system to be free from defects in materials and
workmanship for a period of 10 years from the date of completion of the
Works.
B. The Contractor shall furnish the Division with the manufacturer’s guarantee
C. If the protective coating system is found to be defective during the warranty

protective coating system to the satisfaction of the Client at no cost to the
Client.
1.2 Part 2 Products
op V1
1.2.1 General
A. Materials of construction and corrosion protection measures shall be selected
C -
to ensure galvanic compatibility, corrosion resistance properties and structural
y
C
performance and shall be capable of providing a 50 year minimum design
service life.
C
1.2.2 Structural Steel
A. All structural steel sections shall conform to BS 4-1 and BS EN 10210. Steel
Q
grades shall be as specified on the drawings.
1.2.3 Bolts Nuts and Washers

A. Bolts, nuts and washers shall be in accordance with BS 4190 for black bolts
and BS 4395 for high strength friction grip bolts.
1.2.4 Welding Consumables

A. Welding consumables shall be in accordance with BS EN 440 and ISO 2560.
1.2.5 Grout
A. Grout for filling anchor bolt pockets and to the underside of base plates shall
be non-shrink grout, premixed, comprising of non-metallic aggregate,
cement, water reducing and plasticizing additives capable of developing a
minimum compressive strength of 50 N/mm² at 28 days.

A. All abrasives, solvents and coating materials shall be purchased only from
well-established manufacturers with at least 10 years’ experience of
supplying materials for use in environmental conditions similar to Abu Dhabi.
B. All materials for each coating system shall be supplied by the same
manufacturer.
C. Color shall be as approved by the Engineer.
1.2.7 Materials Testing
PAGE 5
A. The Contractor shall engage at his own expense an independent certified

testing laboratory approved by the Engineer to inspect high strength friction
grip bolted connections and welds and to perform all tests and submit test
reports to the Engineer as specified.
B. The Contractor shall submit evidence regarding the qualifications of the

proposed testing laboratory.
C. The Contractor shall provide the testing laboratory with the following:
1. Copies of all documents identified in Clause 1.04 above.
2. Representative sample pieces for testing.
3. Proper facilities such as scaffolding, temporary work platforms, hoisting
op V1
equipment etc. for inspection of the work.
D. Each bolting crew and welder shall be assigned an identifying symbol or mark
such that all shop and field connections are identified so that the testing
laboratory inspector can refer back to the crew or person making the
C -
connection.
y
C
E. Testing laboratory shall be responsible for conducting and interpreting the
tests and shall state in each report:
C
1. Whether or not the test specimens conform to all requirements of the
specification.
2. Any deviations therefrom.
Q
F. Access to locations where the materials for this Contract are being fabricated
or produced shall be provided to the Engineer and the testing laboratory for
the purpose of inspection and testing.
G. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any material, at any time before final
acceptance, which does not conform to all of the requirements of the
drawings and specifications.
H. Corrective measures, including additional and more complete testing, which

may result from these tests, shall be the Contractor's responsibility. All costs
of testing shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
I. Contractors shall co-ordinate and allow the necessary time for the testing
laboratory to complete all testing and inspections prior to application of
protection systems.

1.3.1 Fabrication
A. All fabrication shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of BS
5950 and the approved shop drawings.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for all errors and omissions in detailing, layout
and fabrication of structural steelwork.
C. Fabrication shall be carried out in the shop to the fullest extent possible with
connection and joint details designed and arranged to reduce field work to a
minimum.
PAGE 6
D. Components to be shipped loose shall be fabricated in the largest units’

possible compatible with safe handling.
1.3.2 Connections
A. As far as possible shop connections shall be welded. High strength friction
grip bolts may be used when welding is impracticable. Connections shall be
in accordance with BS 5950.
B. All mating surfaces of structural connections formed by friction grip bolting
shall be abrasive blast cleaned to a minimum degree of surface cleanliness
of Sa2½ and shall be immediately masked to prevent corrosion. The
masking shall not be removed until immediately prior to joint assembly.
op V1
C. Suitable mastic shall be used for sealing the friction grip joint to prevent the
ingress of moisture and corrosive materials.
D. Field connections shall be made with bolts to BS 4190 for ladders, stair
stringers, removable members and floor plates, platform framing and
C -
purlins. All other connections shall be made with high strength friction grip
y
bolts.
C
E. Not less than two bolts shall be used in end connections. Minimum size of
structural bolts shall be generally 20 mm diameter.
C
F. Bolt heads and nuts shall bear evenly on the surfaces of the members they
connect, using washers as appropriate. Bevel washers shall be furnished
Q
where the surface of a bolted part has a slope of more than 1 to 20 to

compensate for lack of parallelism. Washers shall be used under the heads
of all bolts and nuts.
G. Holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts shall be reamed. Drifting shall
not be allowed.
H. Torch cutting of holes shall not be permitted at any time.
1.3.3 Welding
A. Notwithstanding the requirements of ISO 15609-1 the following shall be
considered essential variables and shall require requalification of the
welding procedure
1. Any change in type of groove or any change from single sided to
double sided.
2. Any change of welding consumables from those used in the
qualification test.
3. Any change of more than 10% in the gas flow rate or any change in
the gas composition.
4. Any change greater than 15% in the specified arc voltage and welding
current.
B. If it is necessary to undertake a new welding procedure qualification the
Engineer shall be given the opportunity of witnessing the welding and
testing of the test plates. Each welding procedure qualification test shall be
subjected to 100% nondestructive examination no sooner than 24 hours
after completion of welding. Mechanical testing of the welding procedure
PAGE 7
qualification test pieces shall be carried out by an approved test laboratory.

The type and number of tests shall be in accordance with ISO 15609-1.
C. All welding consumables shall be subject to Engineer approval. Welding
consumables shall be used within the limits recommended by the
consumable manufacturer.
D. Welding shall be carried out in a sequence which will minimise distortion
and shrinkage stresses. Successive welding passes shall not stop and start
at the same point. Grinding of weld stop/starts prior to laying subsequent
passes shall be mandatory.
E. Each welding pass shall be visually inspected to ensure freedom from slag,
porosity or cracks before the start of the next pass. Any defects shall be
removed or repaired prior to the start of the next pass. On completion of the
op V1
weld the adjacent surfaces shall be cleaned of all spatter, slag, flux and
carbonaceous material.
F. All welds shall be visually examined over the full length of the weld in
accordance with BS EN 970 and the results of the examination shall be
C -
recorded. The acceptance criteria for visual examination shall be:
y
1.
C
The weld has no cracks.
2. Thorough fusion exists between adjacent layers of weld metal and
C
between the weld metal and base metal.
3. All craters are filled to the cross section of the weld.
Q
4. iv. The external weld reinforcement shall be of smooth even contour

with no excessive convexity or concavity.
G. The following nondestructive testing techniques shall be applied and shall
be performed a minimum 24 hours after completion of welding.
1. Radiography to BS EN 1435.
2. Ultrasonic inspection to BS EN 1714.
3. Magnetic particle inspection to ISO 9934.
H. The extent of nondestructive testing shall be as given in Table 1.3-1below.

I. Acceptance criteria shall be as specified in BS EN 1011.
J. Any proposed repair work shall be reported to the Engineer and repair shall
only proceed after authorization by the Engineer.
Table 1.3-1: Extent of Non Destructive Examination
Type of Weld Visual Radiography Ultrasonic Magnetic
Inspection Particle
Butt weld up to 50mm 100% 100% N/A 100%
Butt weld over 50mm 100% N/A 100% 100%
Tee joint full 100% N/A 100% 100%
penetration
PAGE 8
Tee joint partial 100% N/A N/A 100%
penetration
Fillet welds 100% N/A N/A 100%
1.3.4 Field Erection

A. Erection shall be to BS 5531 and BS 5950.
B. Erection of structural steelwork shall commence only after the foundation or
other structure over which steelwork is to be erected is inspected, checked
and approved by the Engineer.
op V1
C. The Contractor shall check foundations regarding level, alignment, etc., and
any necessary remedial work shall be performed well in advance of the steel
erection.
D. All fabricated steelwork shall be true and on its designed location with
C -
members plumb and level.
y
E.
C
Steel base plates shall be welded, shimmed or supported at the required
elevations, set level and true and left in a stable condition whilst waiting to be
C
grouted.
F. Temporary bracing shall be provided during erection of steel as required for
proper alignment and stability of the framing assembly. The bracing members
Q
shall be designed and located to carry all imposed loads to which the
structure may be subjected while construction operations are underway.
G. As erection progresses, the work shall be securely bolted, or welded, to
minimize all dead load, wind and erection stresses. Wherever material,
erection equipment or other temporary loads are carried on the steelwork
during erection, adequate provisions shall be made to minimize stresses
resulting from such loads.
H. Permanent bolting or welding shall be carried out only when correct
alignment is obtained and following inspection, checking and approval by the
Engineer. Not more than 20% of any steel structure shall be erected before
commencement of alignment and bolting.
I. Grouting of pockets and base plates
1. Grouting of pockets and under base plates shall be carried out only
after steelwork is level and plumb, and bases of stanchions and
columns are supported by steel shims. The space below base plate
and pockets shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to grouting.
2. Mixing and placing of grout shall conform to the manufacturer's
recommendations. Forms shall be used to retain the grout and the
surface finish attained shall conform to that of the structural surfaces
surrounding it. The grout shall be placed quickly and continuously
completely filling the void without segregation or bleeding.

A. Generally, the allowable tolerances shall be in accordance with BS 5950.
However, notwithstanding the tolerances mentioned in the above code the
following tolerances shall apply:
PAGE 9
1. Maximum deviation from intended line +6 mm in 6 m.

2. Maximum deviation of length of diagonal +6 mm in 6 m length.
3. Maximum deviation from verticality +3 mm in 6 m.
4. Maximum deviation from intended length of member with both ends
finished for contact bearing +1.5 mm.
5. Maximum deviation from intended length +3 mm.
B. All leveling and plumbing shall be carried out with the structure at its mean
temperature that is the temperature of the structure when it is completed and
in service. Suitable allowances shall be made for the difference in temperature
at time of erection and the mean temperature.
op V1
C. All measurements shall be taken on the theoretical centerline of the members.

A.
C -
All steelwork shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance with ISO 1461 unless
y
C
otherwise specified. With the exception of friction grip bolts threaded fasteners
including washers shall be hot dipped galvanized to give a minimum coating
weight of 305g/m2 of galvanized surface. The minimum zinc coating weight of
C
all other galvanized coatings shall be 610g/m2 of galvanized surface.
B. Hot dip galvanizing shall be carried out after completion of all welding, drilling,
Q
grinding and other fabrication activities associated with the items to be

galvanized. In particular welding of galvanized items after galvanizing is not
permitted. The zinc coating shall be uniform, clean and smooth.
C. All galvanized surfaces to receive coatings shall have corrosion products
removed by non-metallic inert abrasives and shall be thoroughly cleaned. The
surfaces shall be chemically etched with an approved mordant solution. The
etched surface shall uniformly darken to confirm etching has taken place.
D. Coating shall be an approved epoxy suitable for over coating galvanizing with
a minimum dry film thickness of 100 microns. For steelwork exposed to
sunlight a polyurethane acrylic finish coat with a minimum dry film thickness of
40 microns shall be applied.
E. Drying and over coating times shall conform to the coating manufacturer’s
recommendations. Sequential coatings shall be of contrasting colours so that
it can be readily identified when each stage of the work is completed.
F. Generally all liquid applied coatings shall be applied by airless spray. Brush
application of a stripe coat shall be used to ensure adequate film thickness at
corners, edges and welds etc.
1.3.7 Coating General Requirements

A. Prior to the application of coatings and periodically as work progresses the
services of the manufacturer’s technical representative must be provided at
the work site as often as deemed necessary by the Engineer to advise on all
phases of the work. This service shall be provided at no cost to the Client.
procedures and details not specified herein at no additional cost to the Client.
PAGE 10
C. The following conditions shall apply wherever coating work is being carried
out:
1. Sufficient lighting to the approval of the Engineer shall be provided
and used whenever work is in progress.
2. Forced draught ventilation to the approval of the Engineer shall be
provided and used whenever work is in progress.
3. Where appropriate adjacent surfaces shall be protected by the use of
drop cloths or other approved precautionary measures.
4. The manufacturer's recommendations concerning health and safety
shall be followed.
op V1
D. Contractor shall take all necessary measures to prevent damage to installed
C -
coating/membrane/lining/waterproofing from equipment, materials and
y
personnel until completion of the Works. Any damage resulting from the
C
Contractor’s operations shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at
the Contractor’s expense.
C
E. Air and surface temperatures shall be measured with air and contact
thermometers respectively. Relative humidity shall be measured with a sling
hygrometer.
Q
F. Accurate daily records shall be kept of air and surface temperatures, dew
point and relative humidity conditions and the times of commencement and
cessation of all phases of the cleaning, surface preparation and coating
operation. Air and surface temperatures, dew point and relative humidity shall
be measured prior to commencement of surface preparation and/or coating
and a minimum total of four sets of environmental readings shall be taken
during a normal working shift whilst blasting or coating is in progress. The
results shall be reported and recorded. Work shall not be undertaken unless
the results obtained are within the limits given below:
1. During rain or mist or when environmental conditions will cause
dust/sand to be deposited onto the surface.
2. When the environmental conditions are such that the surface is likely
to become damp or contaminated after surface preparation and
before coating or during coating.
3. When the surface temperature is less than 3°C above the surrounding
air's dew point.
4. When the air relative humidity is greater than 85%.
5. When the air or surface temperature is outside the temperatures
specified by the coating manufacturer.
6. At any time when the above conditions are likely to occur before the
coating is touch dry.
1.3.8 Coating Inspection Requirements
PAGE 11
A. All coated surfaces shall be visually examined to ensure they are free from
deleterious film defects such as runs, sags, wrinkling, pin-holes, holidays,
missed areas, blisters, cracking, dry spray and any other defects.
B. The dry film thickness of each coat and the total dry film thickness shall be
measured and all results recorded. One measurement shall be taken per
square metre of coated surface with additional measurements at changes in
section, corners and edges, and as directed.
C. Dry film thickness readings shall be measured by means of a suitable,
properly calibrated portable electronic thickness gauge with an accuracy of at
least + 10% of the actual thickness. As a general rule the dry film thickness
shall not exceed the thickness specified by more than 25%. Any deviation to
this figure shall be requested in writing supported by the coating
op V1
manufacturer's written assurances.
D. Coatings shall be subjected to 100% holiday detection after the final cure of
the coating system. The method of testing and test voltage shall be as
specified by the coating manufacturer. However, as a general rule, coatings
C -
less than 350 microns thick shall be tested with a low d.c. voltage sponge
y
tester. All other coatings shall be tested with a high voltage d.c. pin hole
C
detector; the test voltage shall be 4 volts per micron dry film thickness. All
defects found shall be clearly marked, repaired and retested. All results shall
C
be recorded and reported. The Contractor can be directed by the Engineer to
increase the test voltage for thicker coatings if the coatings are suspected of
having vacuoles or similar defects within the coating thickness.
Q
E. Coatings shall be subject to adhesion testing after the final cure of the coating
system. The adhesion shall be measured using an Elcometer pulloff adhesion
tester or equivalent to ISO 4624, or an alternative approved test method that
conforms to an internationally accepted standard. As this is a destructive test,
coating adhesion shall be measured on test plates of the same material as the
substrate being coated, which have been prepared and coated in an identical
fashion to, and at the same time as, the surfaces being coated. A test plate
shall be prepared for each item or for each batch of items if the total surface
area of coating does not exceed 25m². At least three adhesion tests shall be
carried out per plate. The results shall be recorded and reported. Minimum
adhesion strengths shall meet the requirements of the coating manufacturer. If
the adhesion test result on a test plate is below that specified for that
particular coating system, the entire item or batch of items shall be completely
re-prepared and recoated.
1.3.9 Coating Repair Requirements

A. Major damage, where areas of the steel surface have been exposed, shall
have the damage removed by spot blasting or grinding, taking care to
chamfer the edges of the coating.
B. If the damage is greater than 0.5% of the total coated surface of each item,
the coating shall be completely removed by blast cleaning and the item
recoated.
C. A suitable two-pack zinc rich epoxy primer acceptable to the Engineer shall be
used to repair the damaged galvanizing and build up the coating to the original
thickness. Repairs to the over-coating system shall be built up with the original
coatings, ensuring that the minimum total dry film thickness is reinstated. Dry
film thickness measurements shall be taken of each coat.
PAGE 12
END OF SECTION
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 13
2 METAL – MISCELLANEOUS METAL WORKS

(SECTION 05200)
2.1 Part 1 General
2.1.1 Scope
A. This section of the specification gives the requirements for the supply,
fabrication, erection and protective coating of miscellaneous metalwork such
as ladders, stairways, platforms, walkways and hand railing.
op V1
section.
01300 Submittals
C -
y
C
C
2.1.3 Standards
Q
BS 4592 Industrial type flooring, walkways and stair treads.
BS 5395 Stairs, ladders and walkways.
BS 6399 Loading for buildings.
BS EN 287-1 Qualification test of welders. Fusion welding.
Steels
BS EN 473 Nondestructive testing. Qualification and
certification of NDT personnel. General principles.
BS EN 10025 Hot rolled products of non-alloy structural
steels. Technical delivery conditions.
BS EN 10088 Stainless Steel. List of Stainless steels
BS EN 12020-1 Aluminum and aluminum alloys. Extruded
precision profiles in alloys EN AW-6060 and EN AW
6063.Technical conditions for inspection and delivery
BS EN10250-1 to-4 Open steel die forgings for general
engineering purposes.
BS EN 10255 Non-alloy steel tubes suitable for welding and
threading. Technical delivery conditions
BS EN 10296-2 Welded circular steel tubes for mechanical and
general engineering purposes. Technical delivery conditions.
Stainless steel
PAGE 14
BS EN 12373-1 Aluminum and aluminum alloys. Anodizing

Method for specifying decorative and protective anodic oxidation
coatings on aluminum.
ISO 1461 Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel
articles. Specifications and test methods.
ISO 4624 Paints and varnishes. Pull off test for adhesion.
ISO 15607 Specification and qualification of welding
procedures for metallic materials. General rules’;
ISO15609-1 Specification and qualification of welding
procedures for metallic materials. Welding procedure
specification. Arc welding’
op V1
ISO 9000 series. Quality management systems.
PD 970 Wrought steels for mechanical and allied engineering
purposes. Requirements for carbon, carbon manganese and alloy
hot worked or cold finished steels
C -
y
2.1.4 Submittals
C
C
Q
1. Manufacturer’s technical data and certificates of compliance with this
section of the specification for the following products, including
laboratory test reports and all other relevant data.
a. All items of miscellaneous metalwork including each type of

connection. Include internal and independent test certificates for
the properties claimed.
b. Coating systems including preparation and application

instructions.

be limited to:
1. Miscellaneous metalwork fabrication including:

a. Welding procedure specifications together with corresponding
procedure qualification records in accordance with ISO 15609-1.
b. Nondestructive testing procedures.
c. Repair welding.
PAGE 15
2. Step by step erection sequences for each item of miscellaneous

metalwork.
3. Proposals for fabricating large components in more than one piece.
4. Surface preparation and application of protective coating systems.
5. Repair procedures for protective coatings.
2.1.4.3 Drawings
op V1
1. Drawings including structural calculations for all miscellaneous
metalwork components and their connections showing:
a. Size, grade and weight of members.
C -b. Type, size, location and extent of all welds and bolts and
y
distinguishing between shop and field activities.
C
c. Field assembly and sequence of erection.
C
d. Location of shorings.
e. Field measurements where applicable.
Q
2.1.4.4 Samples
A. Representative samples, as agreed with the Engineer, must be submitted for
1. Ladders.
2. Stairways.
3. Platforms and walkways.
4. Hand railing.

on site.
1. Commencement of fabrication and erection of miscellaneous
metalwork.
2. Application of protective coating.
D. Only qualified personnel thoroughly familiar with the fabrication, erection and
protection of miscellaneous metalwork shall carry out the work.
PAGE 16
E. All welders and welding operators shall pass a qualification test carried out in
accordance with BS EN 287-1.
F. Nondestructive testing operators shall be qualified in accordance with BS EN
473 and the qualification certificates shall be available for review and
G. As a minimum requirement the following inspection and test equipment shall
be used by the Contractor and shall always be available during all stages of
protective coating operations.
1. Hand held and contact thermometers.

2. Whirling hygrometer.
op V1
3. Dew point calculation charts.
5. Holiday detection test equipment.
6. Adhesion test equipment.
C -
y
C
C
Q
1. All materials shall be legibly tagged by the manufacturer so that the material
can be identified against the corresponding test certificate.
3. Only nylon slings shall be allowed for lifting products.
4. Products shall be stored off the ground on timber blocks of sufficient size and
5. Products shall be stored at site in a temperature, humidity etc. environment as
7. Protect from damage or soiling by adjacent construction operations and
provide suitable separation between individual items to prevent them coming
into contact with each other.
8. All coating materials shall be kept in the manufacturer’s original containers
with labels and seals intact. Each container shall clearly display the name of
the coating manufacturer, colour, type of coating, batch number and shelf life.
9. The Contractor shall visually inspect all products upon delivery to site and
a. Any products damaged during delivery, storage and handling shall be
b. Proposals for repair of any damaged products shall be submitted in
c. Any damaged products deemed unsuitable for repair by the Engineer
PAGE 17
2.1.7 Warranty
A. The manufacturer and the Contractor shall jointly guarantee the completed
protective coating system to be free from defects in materials and
workmanship for a period of 10 years from the date of completion of the
Works.
B. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with the manufacturer’s guarantee
C. If the protective coating system is found to be defective during the warranty
protective coating system to the satisfaction of the Client and at no cost to
the Client.
op V1
2.2 Part 2 Products
2.2.1 General
C -
y
A. Materials of construction and corrosion protection measures shall be selected
C
to ensure galvanic compatibility, corrosion resistance properties and structural
performance.
C
B. Contact between dissimilar materials shall be prevented by the use of
suitable washers, bushes and bedding pads so as to avoid galvanic
reactions.
Q
C. Miscellaneous metalwork fabrications shall be manufactured from material

complying with the relevant provisions of the following standards.
1. Mild steel to BS EN 10025, grade S275JR. Mild steel tubular sections

shall be to BS EN 10255.
2. Stainless steel to BS EN 10088, equivalent to grade 316S31.
3. Stainless steel tubular sections shall be to BS EN 10296-2.
4. Aluminum shall be to BS EN 12020.
D. Following manufacture mild steel shall be hot dip galvanised in accordance

with ISO 1461 and aluminum shall be anodised in accordance with BS EN
12373-1 with a natural silver finish.
E. All abrasives, solvents and coating materials shall be purchased only from
well-established manufacturers with at least 10 years’ experience of
supplying materials for use in environmental conditions similar to Abu Dhabi.
All materials for each coating system shall be supplied by the same
manufacturer. Colour shall be as approved by the Engineer.
2.2.2 Mild Steel Ladders

A. The design of ladders shall be based on the requirements of BS 5395 and to
the loadings in BS 6399 unless specified otherwise. Construction shall be
fully welded unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
B. The stringers shall be fabricated from flat mild steel bars with minimum
dimensions of 65 mm by 10 mm and a clear width between stringers of 380
mm. Stringers shall be flanged and drilled for wall fixing at both ends.
PAGE 18
C. Ladders over 3 m long shall have additional intermediate wall fixings at a

minimum centre to centre of 2.5 m.
D. At the upper part of the ladders the stringers shall be either extended to
provide continuity with the adjacent handrails or formed into an extended loop
and returned and secured to the adjacent surface with the top of the loop
being 1.1m above surface level and the width between stringers being a
minimum of 600 mm.
E. Rungs shall be solid section mild steel with a minimum diameter of 20mm
and shall be spaced uniformly throughout at 230 mm to 250 mm centers and
shall be welded to the stringers.
F. Rungs shall have a non-slip tread pattern and be capable of withstanding a
point load of 5 kN applied at the centre or close to one end.
op V1
G. The minimum clearance behind the rungs to either walls or platforms shall be
225 mm. The top rung shall be at platform level and be in the form of a step
to close the gap between the ladder and platform.
H.
C -
Ladders rising more than 2.4 m above ground or platform level shall be fitted
y
with safety hoops with a diameter of 750 mm and spaced at uniform intervals
C
not exceeding 700 mm, with the top hoop fixed in line with the top rail of the
handrailing or where no handrailing is present with the top of the stringer
loop. At least three straps shall be fitted internally to the hoops, one of which
C
shall be at the centre of the back of the hoop with the other two equidistant
on either side. Each hoop shall be able to withstand both a tangential point
Q
load of 740 N and a vertical point load of 1200 N applied at any point in the
hoop.
I. All connections shall be constructed from the same material as the ladder.
J. An intermediate landing shall be provided where the rise exceeds 6m.
2.2.3 Aluminium Ladders

A. Aluminum ladders shall comply with the relevant provisions of Clause 2.2
above and the following particular requirements.
1. Stiles shall be of rectangular tube section with 25 mm diameter nonslip

double serrated tube section rungs.
2. Rungs shall be fixed through stiles with approved pattern clip rivets.
3. Curved stile returns on cat ladders shall be in aluminum sections
socketed into hollow stile risers.
2.2.4 Stairways
A. Stairways shall be in accordance with the requirements of BS 5395 assuming
a uniform distributed loading of 7.5 kN/m2 on the plan area.
B. The angle of rake of the stairway shall be between 30º and 50º.
C. The sum of twice the rise plus the going shall be between 550 mm and 650
mm and the clear width between stringers shall be 800 mm unless otherwise
specified.
D. The stair tread shall be open type of the same material design as for
platforms and walkways and shall satisfy the requirements of BS 4592.
Treads shall be non-slip with a bull nose edge.
PAGE 19
E. Minimum width shall be 800 mm.

F. Provide landings at least for every 16 risers. Landing panels shall match stair
treads.
G. All open sides of stairways and landings shall be protected by handrails.
2.2.5 Platforms and Walkways

A. Platforms and walkways shall be of open type flooring and to the
requirements of BS 4592.
B. Walkways shall be at least 800 mm clear width unless otherwise shown.
C. The open sides of all platforms and walkways shall be fitted with a 6 mm thick
op V1
and 150 mm high toe plate which shall be attached to the supporting
structure and not to the flooring panels.
D. Plank flooring shall be an assembly consisting of inverted channel
interlocking closed planks, not less than 14-gage galvanised sheet steel and
C -
shall have a perforated anti slip deck face. The planks shall be for heavy
y
duty use to withstand a uniformly distributed load of at least 7.5 kN/m².
C
Planks shall be erected on supports furnished and constructed by the
Contractor and shall be supplied in such lengths as are necessary to provide
C
a continuous clear-span platform between said supports.
E. Open bar grating shall be a non-slip rectangular galvanised mesh to BS
4592, heavy duty, serrated and capable of supporting more than one
Q
person. Minimum depth shall be 25 mm and minimum rectangular bar size

shall be 3 mm thick. Fixing to frames shall be by purpose made coated
galvanised cleats. Designed to carry a loading of 7.5 kN/m2 with deflection
limited to 0.2% of the span. Sized to be suitable for lifting by one man.
Gratings shall be neatly and accurately cut to clear structural members and
pipes. Openings shall be reinforced to provide required load carrying
capacity. Aluminum gratings shall be composed of interlocking extruded
sections bonded together. Minimum depth shall be 35 mm.
F. Chequer plate flooring shall be of the non-slip type, not less than 4 mm thick
for steel and 6 mm thick for aluminum excluding the raised pattern. Fixing to
frames shall be by way of countersunk stainless steel screws. Designed to
carry a loading of 7.5 kN/m2 with deflection limited to 0.2% of the span and
sized to be suitable for lifting by one man. All chequered plate shall be
continuously butt welded. Provide suitable reinforced coated galvanized
support steel latticework designed so that it has the same load carrying
capacity as the flooring.
G. Set planks, gratings and chequered plate flooring flush and supported using
frames and transverse supports anchored to the walls or on steel legs as
shown on the drawings to the approval of the Engineer. Fixed built in
pockets will not be acceptable.
H. Threaded connections shall be made so that the threads are concealed by
the fitting.
I. Fixings into concrete shall be by the use of coated galvanized fish tail
anchors preset into the concrete.
J. Welded joints shall be rigidly and continuously welded unless specified
otherwise. The face of welds shall be dressed flush and smooth. Exposed
joints shall be close fitting and jointed to be inconspicuous.
PAGE 20
2.2.6 Handrails
A. On stairways handrails shall be a minimum height of 850 mm above the
pitchline of the stairs. Intermediate rails shall be at maximum of 500 mm
above stairs. Standards shall not be greater than 1500 mm apart.
B. On platforms etc handrails shall be a minimum height of 900 mm.
Intermediate rails shall be at a maximum of 500 mm above platform level.
Standards shall not be greater than 1500 mm apart.
C. Mounting flanges shall be drilled for not less than 3 bolts with two bolts on a
line parallel to and on the walkway side.
D. Ends of handrails shall be rounded and supported by a newel.
op V1
E. Handrails shall be capable of withstanding a 1 kN horizontal load applied at
any point or 740 N/m lateral load along the top rail.
F. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and their
attachment to other work, except where otherwise indicated.
C -
G. Stainless steel fastenings should be used for anchoring railings.
y
H.
C
Curves shall be bent to a radius of not less than 100 mm.
I. Safety chains shall be 8 mm nominal size. Each chain shall withstand a
C
breaking force of 30 kN. Chain shall include swivel eye, snap hook and
eyebolt or staple as applicable.
Q
2.2.7 Grout
A. Grout for filling anchor bolt pockets and to the underside of base plates shall
be non-shrink grout, premixed, comprising of non metallic aggregate,
cement, water reducing and plasticising additives capable of developing a
minimum compressive strength of 50 N/mm2 at 28 days.

2.3.1 Pre-Fabricated Components
A. Components which do not fit at site will be returned to the shop for
adjustment. Galvanization or other protective coatings or treatments will not
be allowed to be punctured at site by allowing cutting, scraping, burnishing,
grinding or drilling. All such processes must have been completed before the
items were finished and delivered to site.
B. Do not cut, grind or drill components where such work affects the designed
appearance or strength.
C. All gaps including capillary gaps must be sealed by means of non shrinking
mastic or continuous welding to prevent corrosion.
2.3.2 Fabrication General

A. For the manufacture of miscellaneous metalwork which will be exposed to
view use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes
PAGE 21
including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and
roughness.
B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces
and straight edges.
C. Verify dimensions by accurate field measurements before fabrication.
D. Welded connections shall comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that do not cause distortion or cracking or
cause corrosion of the parent metal or of the weld. When welding metals
that become susceptible to corrosion in the heat affected region, normalise
the structure by an appropriate scheme of heat treatment.
2. Use the correct grade of weld material that will not discolour upon metal
op V1
finishing.
3. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and
C -
blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface
y
matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
C
5. Remove welding flux immediately.
6. At tee and cross intersections, ends of intersecting members shall be
C
contoured to fit each other and the joint welded all round.
7. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and
Q
blended so that no roughness or projections shows after finishing and

welded surface is contiguous with the contours of adjoining surfaces.
8. Weld corners and seams continuously.
E. For non-welded connections fabricate handrails and railing systems by
connecting members with railing manufacturer's standard concealed\
mechanical fasteners and fittings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate
members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
F. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1 mm, unless otherwise
indicated. Form bent-metal corners to the smallest radius possible without
causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.
G. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap components as indicated to receive finish
hardware, screws and similar items.
H. Close off all hollow sections of members that are exposed to the exterior by
continuous welded formed plates.
I. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water,
accumulation, penetration or dirt accumulation.
J. Perform cutting and drilling before metal finishing.
K. All steel surfaces that come in contact with exposed concrete or masonry
shall receive a protective coating of an approved heavy bitumastic trowelling
mastic or an approved mastic tape applied in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instruction prior to installation.
L. Where items are cast into concrete, back paint the contact areas with
bitumen paint before fixing.
2.3.3 Installation
PAGE 22
A. Set miscellaneous metalwork accurately in location, alignment and elevation

measured from established lines and levels.
B. Align handrails so that variations from level for horizontal members and from
parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members does not exceed 2
mm in 1m.
C. Adjust handrails and railing systems prior to anchoring to ensure matching
alignment at abutting joints.

A. All miscellaneous metalwork shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance with
ISO 1461 unless otherwise specified. The minimum zinc coating weight of
op V1
galvanized coatings shall be 610 g/m2 of galvanized surface.
B. Hot dip galvanizing shall be carried out after completion of all welding, drilling,
grinding and other fabrication activities associated with the items to be
galvanized. In particular welding of galvanized items after galvanizing is not
C -
permitted. The zinc coating shall be uniform, clean and smooth.
y
C
C. All galvanized surfaces to receive coatings shall have corrosion products
removed by non-metallic inert abrasives and shall be thoroughly cleaned. The
surfaces shall be chemically etched with an approved mordant solution. The
C
etched surface shall uniformly darken to confirm etching has taken place.
D. Coating shall be an approved epoxy suitable for over-coating galvanizing with
Q
a minimum dry film thickness of 100 microns. For miscellaneous metalwork

exposed to sunlight a polyurethane acrylic finish coat with a minimum dry film
thickness of 40 microns shall be applied.
E. Drying and over-coating times shall conform to the coating manufacturer’s
recommendations. Sequential coatings shall be of contrasting colours so that
it can be readily identified when each stage of the work is completed.
F. Generally all liquid applied coatings shall be applied by airless spray. Brush
application of a stripe coat shall be used to ensure adequate film thickness at
corners, edges and welds etc.
2.3.5 Coating General Requirements

A. Prior to the application of coatings and periodically as work progresses the
services of the manufacturer’s technical representative must be provided at
the work site as often as deemed necessary by the Engineer to advise on all
phases of the work. This service shall be provided at no cost to the Client.
procedures and details not specified herein and at no additional cost to the
Client.
C. The following conditions shall apply wherever coating work is being carried
out:
1. Sufficient lighting to the approval of the Engineer shall be provided and
used whenever work is in progress.
2. Forced draught ventilation to the approval of the Engineer shall be
provided and used whenever work is in progress.
PAGE 23
3. Where appropriate adjacent surfaces shall be protected by the use of

drop cloths or other approved precautionary measures.
4. The manufacturer's recommendations concerning health and safety
shall be followed.
D. Contractor shall take all necessary measures to prevent damage to installed
coating/membrane/lining/waterproofing from equipment, materials and
personnel until completion of the Works. Any damage resulting from the
Contractor’s operations shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at
op V1
the Contractor’s expense.
E. Air and surface temperatures shall be measured with air and contact
thermometers respectively. Relative humidity shall be measured with a sling
hygrometer.
C -
F. Accurate daily records shall be kept of air and surface temperatures, dew
y
C
point and relative humidity conditions and the times of commencement and
cessation of all phases of the cleaning, surface preparation and coating
operation. Air and surface temperatures, dew point and relative humidity shall
C
be measured prior to commencement of surface preparation and/or coating
and a minimum total of four sets of environmental readings shall be taken
during a normal working shift whilst blasting or coating is in progress. The
Q
results shall be reported and recorded. Work shall not be undertaken unless
the results obtained are within the limits given below:
1. During rain or mist or when environmental conditions will cause dust/sand
to be deposited onto the surface.
2. When the environmental conditions are such that the surface is likely to
become damp or contaminated after surface preparation and before
coating or during coating.
3. When the surface temperature is less than 3°C above the surrounding
air's dew point.
4. When the air relative humidity is greater than 85%.
5. When the air or surface temperature is outside the temperatures specified
by the coating manufacturer.
6. At any time when the above conditions are likely to occur before the
coating is touch dry.
2.3.6 Coating Inspection Requirements

A. All coated surfaces shall be visually examined to ensure they are free from
deleterious film defects such as runs, sags, wrinkling, pin-holes, holidays,
missed areas, blisters, cracking, dry spray and any other defects.
B. The dry film thickness of each coat and the total dry film thickness shall be
measured and all results recorded. One measurement shall be taken per
square metre of coated surface with additional measurements at changes in
section, corners and edges, and as directed.
C. Dry film thickness readings shall be measured by means of a suitable,
properly calibrated portable electronic thickness gauge with an accuracy of at
PAGE 24
least + 10% of the actual thickness. As a general rule the dry film thickness
shall not exceed the thickness specified by more than 25%. Any deviation to
this figure shall be requested in writing supported by the coating
manufacturer's written assurances.
D. Coatings shall be subjected to 100% holiday detection after the final cure of
the coating system. The method of testing and test voltage shall be as
specified by the coating manufacturer. However, as a general rule coatings
less than 350 microns thick shall be tested with a low d.c. voltage sponge
tester. All other coatings shall be tested with a high voltage d.c. pin hole
detector; the test voltage shall be 4 volts per micron dry film thickness. All
defects found shall be clearly marked, repaired and retested. All results shall
be recorded and reported. The Contractor can be directed by the Engineer to
increase the test voltage for thicker coatings if the coatings are suspected of
op V1
having vacuoles or similar defects within the coating thickness.
E. Coatings shall be subject to adhesion testing after the final cure of the coating
system. The adhesion shall be measured using an Elcometer pull off adhesion
tester or equivalent to ISO 4624, or an alternative approved test method that
C -
conforms to an internationally accepted standard. As this is a destructive test,
y
C
coating adhesion shall be measured on test plates of the same material as the
substrate being coated, which have been prepared and coated in an identical
fashion to, and at the same time as, the surfaces being coated. A test plate
C
shall be prepared for each item or for each batch of items if the total surface
area of coating does not exceed 25 m². At least three adhesion tests shall be
carried out per plate. The results shall be recorded and reported. Minimum
Q
adhesion strengths shall meet the requirements of the coating manufacturer. If

the adhesion test result on a test plate is below that specified for that
particular coating system, the entire item or batch of items shall be completely
re-prepared and recoated.
2.3.7 Coating Repair Requirements

A. Major damage, where areas of the steel surface have been exposed, shall
have the damage removed by spot blasting or grinding, taking care to chamfer
the edges of the coating.
B. If the damage is greater than 0.5% of the total coated surface of each item,
the coating shall be completely removed by blast cleaning and the item
recoated.
C. A suitable two-pack zinc rich epoxy primer acceptable to the Engineer shall
be used to repair the damaged galvanizing and build up the coating to the
original thickness. Repairs to the over coating system shall be built up with
the original coatings, ensuring that the minimum total dry film thickness is
reinstated. Dry film thickness measurements shall be taken of each coat.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 25
3 METAL FABRICATION (SECTION 05500)
3.1 Part 1 General

section.
01300 Submittals
op V1
3.1.2 References
C -
y
ANSI A14.3 Ladders, Fixed, Safety Requirements.
C
ANSI A202.1 Metal Bar Grating Manual for steel and Aluminium Gratings and Stair
Treads.
C
ASTM A36 Structural Steel
ASTM A53 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
Q
ASTM A 123 Zinc (Hot dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel products
ASTM A167 Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate.
ASTM A268 Stainless Steel Tubing for General Services.
ASTM A446 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanised) by Hot-Dip process, Physical
(Structural) Quality.
ASTM A484 Stainless and Heat-Resisting Bars, Billets and Forgings.
ASTM A500 Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing
in Round and Shapes.
ASTM A501 Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
ASTM A 510M Wire Rods and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel.
ASTM A525M Hot-Dip Press, Steel Sheet, and Zinc-Coated (Galvanised), General
Requirement.
ASTM B26 Aluminium-Alloy Sand Castings.
ASTM B85 Aluminium-Alloy Die Castings.
ASTM B108 Aluminium-Alloy Permanent Mould Casting.
ASTM B177 Chromium Electroplating on Steel for Engineering Use.
ASTM B209 Aluminium and Aluminium-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
ASTM B210M Aluminium-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes.
ASTM B211M Aluminium-Alloy Bar, Rod, and Wire.
ASTM B221M Aluminium-Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube.
ASTM B241 Aluminium-Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube.
PAGE 26
ASTM B483 Aluminium and Aluminium-Alloy Drawn Tubes for General Purpose
Applications.
ASTM E935 Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems
and Rails for Buildings.
BS 4 Part 1 Hot-rolled steel sections.
BS 729 Hot dip galvanised coatings on iron and steel articles.
BS 1449 Steel plate, sheet and strip.
BS 1470 Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for general engineering
purposes. Plate, sheet and strip.
BS 1474 Wrought Aluminium and Aluminium Alloys for General engineering
op V1
Purposes
BS 1615 Anodised Aluminium Alloy.
BS 3019 TIG welding.
BS 3571 Part 1 General recommendations for manual inert-gas metal-arc welding:
C -
y
Aluminium and aluminium alloys.
BS 3987
C
Anodic Oxide Coatings on Wrought Aluminium for External
Architectural Specifications
C
BS 4174 Self-tapping screws and metallic drive screws.
BS 4183 Machine screws and machine screw nuts. Metric series.
Q
BS 4186 Clearance holes for metric bolts and screws.

BS 4190 150 metric black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts.
BS 4320 Metal washers for general engineering purposes. Metric series.
BS 4360 Wieldable Structural Steel
BS 4592 Part 1 & 2 Expanded Metal Gratings.
BS 4848 Hot-rolled structural steel sections.
BS 5135 Metal arc welding of carbon and carbon manganese steel.
AWS A2.0 Standard Welding Symbols.
AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code.
AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code - Aluminium.
NAAMM A202.1Metal bar Grating Manual.
SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Steel Structures Painting
Manual.
FF-B-588 Metal Fabrications - US Federal Specifications.
FF-S-92 Metal Fabrications
FF-S-111 Metal Fabrications.
BS 1387 Steel tubes and tubular suitable for screwing to BS 21 pipe threads.
FF-S-325 Metal Fabrications.
FF-W-92 Metal Fabrications.
DIN 267 Bolts, Screws, Nuts, Self-Tapping Screws.
PAGE 27
DIN 1025 Hot rolled steel sections

DIN 1543 Hot rolled plates 3 to 150 mm thick.
DIN 4113 Aluminium in building construction.
DIN 17100 Steel for general structural purposes; Quality standards.
DIN 17440 Stainless steel.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing,
anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection
op V1
drawings, elevations, and details where applicable.
C. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate
net weld lengths.
C -
y
A.
C
Prepare Shop Drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural
Engineer experienced in design of this work.
C
B. Welders Certificates: Submit under provisions of Section 01300, certifying
welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the
previous 12 months.
Q
3.2 Part 2 Products

3.2.1 Materials - Steel
A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36, BS 4, DIN 1025, DIN 17100, BS 4360 (Gr. 43),
BS 4848.
B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B, ASTM A501, BS 1387.
C. Plates, Sheet: ASTM A283, ASTM A366, BS 1494, DIN 1543, zinc coated,
ASTM A526, BS 2989.
D. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B Schedule 40.
E. Fasteners: BS 4174.
F. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325/A307 galvanised to ASTM A153, BS
729 for galvanised components, BS 4183, BS 4186, BS 4190, BS 4320, DIN
267.
G. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded BS
3019/BS 5135.
H. Ladders: ANSI A14.3.
I. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: [SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide.
3.2.2 Materials - Stainless Steel

A. Stainless Steel forgings: ASTM A484, DIN 17440.
B. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A268.
C. Plates, Sheets: ASTM A480/480M.
PAGE 28
D. Bolts, Screws, Studs: ASTM F738M, Nuts, and Washers F836M.

G. Welding Materials: ASTM G 35.
3.2.3 Materials - Aluminium

A. Extruded Aluminium: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063, Temper T5. DIN 4113.
B. Sheet Aluminium: ASTM B209, BS 1470 Alloy, Temper.
C. Aluminium-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes: ASTM B210, Alloy 6063, Temper
T6.
D. Aluminium-Alloy Bars: ASTM B211, Alloy 6063 BS 1474, Temper T6.
E. Aluminium-Alloy Sand Castings: ASTM B26, Alloy.
op V1
F. Aluminium-Alloy Die Castings: ASTM B85, Alloy, Temper.
G. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Stainless steel ASTM F738M, Nuts, and Washers
F836M. Steel, galvanised to ASTM A153.
H.
C -
Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded BS
y
3571 - inert-gas metal-arc welding.
C
3.2.4 Fabrication
C
A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.
B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured to US Federal
Q
Specifications FF-B-558/FF-S-92/FF-S-111/FF-S-325/FF-W-92/DIN 18800

Part 7.
C. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds.
D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make
exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small
uniform radius.
E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts;
unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where
specifically noted otherwise.
F. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate
anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication,
except where specifically noted otherwise.
3.2.5 Fabrication Tolerances

A. Square ness: 3 mm maximum difference in diagonal measurements.
B. Maximum Offset between Faces: 1.5 mm.
C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1.5 mm.
D. Maximum Bow: 3 mm in 1.2 m.
E. Maximum Deviation from Plane: 1.5 mm in 1.2 m.
3.2.6 Finishes - Steel

A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.
PAGE 29
B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is
required.
C. Prime paint items with two coats.
D. Structural Steel Members: Galvanise after fabrication to ASTM A123/BS
729/DIN 50976. Provide minimum 380 g/sq. m galvanised coating. to ASTM
A525.
E. Non-structural Items: Galvanised after fabrication to ASTM A123/BS 729.
Provide minimum 380 g/sq. m galvanised coating.
F. Chrome Plating: ASTM B177, nickel-chromium alloy, polished finish.
3.2.7 Finishes - Aluminium
op V1
As per contract drawings

C -
y
3.3.1 Examination
A.
C
Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
C
3.3.2 Preparation
A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal and aluminium where site
welding is required.
Q
B. Supply steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry

with setting templates to appropriate sections.
3.3.3 Installation
A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain
true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent
attachments.
C. Field weld components indicated on drawings/shop drawings.
D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1 BS 3571 - Part 1 for
aluminium and aluminium alloys.
E. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.
F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop
primed/galvanised, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete.

A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 6 mm per story, non-cumulative.
B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment: 6 mm.
C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 6 mm.
PAGE 30
3.3.5 Schedule
The following Schedule is a list of principal items only. Refer to drawing details for
items not specifically scheduled. Schedule each fabrication separately. Describe
items, size, shape, materials, finish and other relevant information. The following
paragraphs and examples may assist in developing such schedules
a) Refer to Drawing details for schedule of principal items.
b) Telescopic Steel Columns: Steel, 75 mm diameter, 1.83 to 2.75 m; prime
paint finish.
c) Metal Hand railing and Fixings:
i. Constructed from hot-dip galvanised mild steel sections to BS 1387
op V1
and BS 4360 Grade 43A Stainless standard steel sections grade
316S16/Extruded Aluminium sections BS 1615/ASTM B221M and
B483M/DIN 4113 hollow circular horizontal rail sections secured by
grub screws to solid section vertical standards with minimum
external diameters of 30 mm and 40 mm respectively; complete
C -with mild steel/stainless steel toe boards, 100 mm high by 3 mm
y
C
thick positioned 10 mm above the platform level and securely fixed
to the standards.
ii. Minimum height of 1000 mm with an intermediate rail set at 500 mm.
C
The height shall be measured from the finished floor level to the
centre line of the top rail. Standards to be positioned not more than
Q
1500 mm centre to centre.

iii. Designed to withstand 740 Newton per meter run with the deflection
of the rails not exceeding 0.8% of their span between standards
and the standards 0.8% of their height.
iv. Mounting flanges to be drilled for not less than three bolts with two
bolts on a line parallel to and on the walkway side of the hand
railing.
d) Metal Stairways:
i. In accordance with BS 449 to carry a load of 750 kg per square
meter.
ii. Treads are to be open mesh fixed to the stringers, not direct to the
concrete.
iii. Sloping hand railing to be as above but with the top rail 850 mm
vertically above the line of pitch and standards spaced not more
than 1500mm measured parallel to the line of pitch.
e) Ladders, General:
i. Ladders shall be fabricated from aluminium as detailed on the
Drawings.
ii. Each rung shall be able to withstand a point load of 5000 N when
applied at the centre of the rung and when applied close to one
end.
iii. When supported horizontally over a span of 1.00 m with the climbing
face uppermost and with a load of 1000 N applied at the centre of
the span the ladder shall not deflect more than 15 mm at the point
of application of the load and shall show no permanent deflection
PAGE 31
after removal of the load. Each ladder fixing shall be capable of

withstanding shear and pull-out loads of 5000 N.
iv. Safety cages shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings or
where the distance between landings exceeds 4.50 m. These shall
be constructed of three flat vertical members supported by flat
hoops with a diameter of 750 mm. The hoops shall be at a
maximum of 700 mm centres and the first hoop shall be 2.40 m
above ground or platform level.
v. Each hoop shall be able to withstand both a tangential point load of
740 N and a vertical point load of 1200 N applied at any point on
the hoop. The maximum allowable deflection at the point of
application of the load shall not exceed 25 mm and there shall be
op V1
no permanent deflection of the hoops after removal of the load.
vi. An intermediate landing shall be provided where the rise exceeds
6.00 m.
f) Mild Steel Ladders: fabricated galvanised steel ladders shall be as follows:
C -
y
Not Used
C
g) Aluminium Alloy Access and Cat Ladders
i. Shall be generally 400 mm wide with rungs spaced at 250 mm
C
centres.
ii. Stiles shall be of rectangular tube section with 25 mm diameter non-
Q
slip double serrated tube section rungs.

iii. Rungs shall be fixed through stiles with approved pattern clip rivets.
iv. Curved stile returns on cat ladders shall be in aluminium sections
socketed into hollow stile risers.
v. Ladder feet shall be properly dowelled into floors and stiles shall be
fitted with fixing lugs for building in at a maximum of 500 mm
centres. All fixings shall be stainless steel.
vi. Extruded aluminium sections shall be anodised to AAMA 606.1/BS
1615 Grade AA25 with a natural silver finish.
vii. Contact between dissimilar materials shall be prevented by the use of
suitable washers bushes and bedding pads so as to avoid anodic
reactions.
h) Step Irons:
i. Step Irons shall be of stainless steel encapsulated in GRP and be of
the general purpose or pre cast concrete manhole pattern as
applicable.
i) Open Bar Grating and Chequer Plate Flooring:
i. Open Bar Grating: Non-slip rectangular mesh to BS. 4592. Fixing to
frames is by purpose made cleats.
ii. Chequer Plate Flooring - Non-slip type, not less than 10 mm thick
excluding the raised pattern. Fixing to frames is to be by way of
countersunk stainless set screws.
iii. Gratings and Plate Flooring: designed to carry a loading of 750kg per
sq. meter with deflection limited to 0.2% of the span and sized to
PAGE 32
be suitable for lifting by one man with cut outs to permit removal
without disturbing any of the installed electrical or mechanical plant.
Sized to provide clear access to the openings and trenches.
iv. Toe plates are to be provided around all cut outs.
v. Set Grating and Flooring flush and supported using frames and
traverse bars fixed to the walls. Fixed built in pockets will not be
acceptable.
j) Bumper Posts and Guard Rails: As detailed; prime paint galvanised finish.
k) Bollards: Steel pipe, concrete filled, crowned cap, as detailed; prime paint
galvanised finish.
l) Joist Hangers: Joist strap anchors, fabricated with minimum 8 mm gage mm
op V1
steel; galvanised prime paint finish.
m) Ledge and Shelf Angles, Channels and Plates Not Attached to Structural
Framing: prime paint/galvanised/natural finish as detailed.
C -
n) Lintels: As detailed.
y
C
o) Door Frames for Overhead Door Openings and Wall Openings: Channel
Angle and sections; prime paint finish.
p) Hoist way Divider Beams: Beam sections; prime paint finish.
C
Q
END OF SECTION
PAGE 33
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
(VOLUME III)
DIVISION 09
FINISHES
DOCUMENT NO: 511

FIRST EDITION
DECEMBER- 2016
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Document No: 511

First Edition
December-2016
PO Box 20
the publisher
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of Contents ............................................................................................................................................. i
List of Table....................................................................................................................................................... i
1. PAINTING AND CORROSION PROTECTION (SECTION 09900) .......................................................... 2
1.1. Part 1 General....................................................................................................................................... 2
1.1.1 Related Sections ....................................................................................................... 2
1.1.2 References ................................................................................................................ 2
1.1.3 Definitions .................................................................................................................. 3
op V1
1.1.4 System Description .................................................................................................... 3
1.1.5 Classification of Material Surfaces ............................................................................. 3
1.1.6 Submittals .................................................................................................................. 3
1.1.7 Qualifications of Suppliers and Applicators ................................................................ 4
C -
y
1.1.8 Regulatory Requirements .......................................................................................... 5
C
1.1.9 Mock-Up .................................................................................................................... 5
C
1.1.10 Delivery, Storage and Handling ................................................................................. 5
1.1.11 Environmental Requirements..................................................................................... 5
Q
1.1.12 Extra Materials ........................................................................................................... 5

1.2. Part 2 Products .................................................................................................................................... 6
1.2.1 Coating Material Classification. .................................................................................. 6
1.2.2 Equipment and Facilities ............................................................................................ 6
1.2.3 Protective Clothing .................................................................................................... 6
1.2.4 Health and Safety ...................................................................................................... 6
1.2.5 Fastenings ................................................................................................................. 6
1.2.6 Coating Systems ....................................................................................................... 7
1.3. Part 3 Execution ................................................................................................................................... 7
1.3.1 Examination ............................................................................................................... 7
1.3.2 Protection of Surfaces ............................................................................................... 7
1.3.3 Preparation ................................................................................................................ 7
1.3.4 Application ................................................................................................................. 7
1.3.5 Field Quality Control .................................................................................................. 7
1.3.6 Cleaning .................................................................................................................... 8
1.3.7 Preparation and Painting Schedules .......................................................................... 8
PAGE I
LIST OF TABLE
Table 1.3-1: Preparation and Coating Schedule for Metal & Concrete Surfaces .................. 8
Table 1.3-2: Preparation & Painting Schedule for Non-Metallic Surfaces............................ 11
Table 1.3-3: Colour Schedule ................................................................................................... 12
Table 1.3-4: Surface Preparations. .......................................................................................... 12
Table 1.3-5: Classification of Exposure Conditions. ............................................................... 13
Table 1.3-6: Coating Material Classifications .......................................................................... 14
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE I
1. PAINTING AND CORROSION PROTECTION

(SECTION 09900)
1.1. Part 1 General
Section 01039 - Co-ordination and Meetings
op V1
Section 01600 - Material and Equipment
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout
C -
y
1.1.2 References
C
ASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and
Related Products.
C
ASTM D2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood.
BS EN ISO 1461: Hot-dip galvanised coatings on fabricated iron and steel
Q
articles. Specifications and test methods.

BS1336: Knotting.
BS5493: Code of practice for protective coating of iron and steel structures
against corrosion.
BS6150: Code of practice for painting buildings.
BS7079 - Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and
related products.
DIN55928 - Corrosion protection of steel structures.
AWWA (American Water Works Association) - C204 - Chlorinated Rubber-
Alkyd Paint Systems for the Exterior of Above Ground Steel Water Piping.
AWWA (American Water Works Association) - D102 - Painting Steel Water
Storage Tanks.
NACE (National Association of Corrosion Engineers) - Industrial Maintenance
Painting.
NPCA (National Paint and Coatings Association) - Guide to US Government
Paint Specifications.
PDCA (Painting and Decorating Contractors of America) - Painting -
Architectural Specifications Manual.
SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Steel Structures Painting Manual.
SIS 05 900 - Rust grades for steel surfaces and preparation grades prior to
protective coating, Swedish Standard.
PAGE 2
1.1.3 Definitions
A. Conform to ASTM D16 relevant Standards for interpretation of terms used in
this Section. For the conventional terms used in the materials surface
classifications refer to paragraph 1.1.5 of this Section.
1.1.4 System Description

A. This specification covers the requirements for surface preparation, or
application of protective coatings to the following materials:
1. Mild Steel
2. Cast and Ductile Iron
op V1
3. Concrete
4. Other items
B. Surface preparation and corrosion protection coatings application shall be

C -
carried out to the requirements of this specification outlined in Section 09900
y
C
Tables 1.3-1 to 1.3-6, the relevant British, American and European
Standards, the Paint Manufacturer's recommendation and the Engineer's
requirements.
C
1.1.5 Classification of Material Surfaces
Q
A. The type of protective coating system required for any particular material will
depend on the environment to which it is exposed. Accordingly, for the
purposes of the works, four main classes with subclasses of environmental
exposure as identified and shown in Table 1.3-1 in this Section.
1.1.6 Submittals
B. The manufacturer shall submit the following:
1. A recommended system in accordance with tables 1.3-1 to 1.3-6 of this
Section
2. For each component of the system submit at least the following
i) Generic identification of polymer system along with tradenames
ii) Surface preparation requirements
iii) Acceptance of suitability for the environmental exposure condition.
iv) Measured exposure coronation values to the following:
(a) Bulk properties:

Non-volatile content by weight and by volume.
Viscosity (and viscometer used) (at 300C.)
Setting tendency
Sag resistance (at 300C.)
Specific gravity
(b) Applied coating film:
Hiding power
0
Tack-free and drying times (at 30 C.)
Wet film and dry film thicknesses
Over coating times (at 300C.)
PAGE 3
Wet edge times

(c) Cured or dried system
Adhesion to substrate
Intercoat adhesion
i) If relevant, flexibility ( Erichsen cupping, pull of test or other)

ii) If relevant, impact resistance (Falling ball, or other
iii) If relevant, gloss (specify angle of incident beam)
iv) Hardness, scratch resistance (identify test method)
v) If relevant, abrasion (Taber or other)
(a) Accelerated exposure and ageing tests
op V1
i) If relevant, weathering accelerometer (specify type)
(b) Scribed salt spray test
C -
y
i) If relevant, scribed outdoor panel test
C
(e) Chemical resistance test
C
i) At least 6 month immersion test where relevant.
3. For 2 pack materials.

Q
i) Pot life of pack sizes supplied at 300°C. Useable life of freshly mixed
components. Induction periods required before application
ii) Additional information
iii) Mixing and application instructions
iv) Health and safety data sheet in accordance with EU requirements
v) Thinning instructions
vi) Application data including equipment and nozzles and pressures to
be used
vii) Surface preparations
viii) Limiting conditions of use
ix) Storage instructions
1.1.7 Qualifications of Suppliers and Applicators

A. Coating manufacturers supplying to the work directly or through agents or
representatives shall have:
1. Research and development facilities (local or overseas) or else a
technological co-operation with a company or body with such
facilities, quality control facilities, equipment suitable for quality
production.
2. Test lab equipped to conduct all the tests required in the specification or
the use of external laboratories suitably equipped.
3. Technical service staff suitably qualified and knowledgeable of
applications and expected performances required by the specification.
Prior approval of the manufacturer supplying to the works shall be
obtained from the Engineer.
PAGE 4
B. Coating applicators shall have the following:

1. Purpose built facilities for the proper application of coatings
2. Equipment and facilities stated in Section 09900 clauses 2.1 and 2.2
3. If applying in in-situ conditions or at site.
i) The ability to provide and erect dust-free and sheltered booths at the
place of application
ii) The ability to set-up proper equipment and facilities at the place of
application in accordance with Section 09900 clauses 2.1 and 2.2.
op V1
A. UAE regulations on Health & Safety Requirements shall be confirmed.
1.1.9 Mock-Up
A. Not Used.
C -
y
1.1.10
C
Delivery, Storage and Handling
A. Provision under Section 01600 - Material and equipment: Transport, handle,
C
store and protection of products shall be followed.
B. Products shall be delivered to place of application in sealed and labelled
containers.
Q
C. Container labelling shall include manufacturer’s name, type of paint, brand

name, lot number, brand code, coverage, application instructions, surface
preparation, drying time, clean-up requirements, colour designation and
instructions for mixing and reducing.
D. Paint materials shall be stored at minimum ambient temperature of 150C and
maximum of 250C in a ventilated area, or as required by manufacturer’s
instructions and Health and Safety requirements.

A. Provisions under Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Environmental
conditions affecting products on site shall be followed.
B Lighting level of 860 lux measured mid-height at substrate surface shall be
provided.
C Exterior coatings shall not be applied during rain, sand storms, or when
relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product
manufacturer.
D All preparation and coatings at works shall be carried out under cover when
ambient temperatures are not greater than 350C and relative humidity below
85%.
1.1.12 Extra Materials

A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01700.
PAGE 5

1.2.1 Coating Material Classification.
A. See Section 09900 Table 1.3-6.
1.2.2 Equipment and Facilities

1. Compressors with air tanks
2. Pressure gauges and regulators
3. Air filters
op V1
4. Pressure hoses
5. Spray guns, tips and Nozzles
6. 2 component airless spray equipment
7. Dust free and well-lit spray booths or areas
C -
y
8.
C
Blasting equipment
9. High pressure water washers
C
10. Soap detergent, handwashing and shower facilities
11. Mechanical abraders, wire brushes, grinders
Q
12. Properly trained, experienced and skilled staff and inspectors.
All equipment shall be fit for use for the purposes specified or implied.
1.2.3 Protective Clothing

1. Overalls
2. Martindale masks, carbon filter masks
3. Air respirators
4. Protective goggles
5. Gloves, head covers
6. Blasting protective gear
7. Protective boots.
1.2.4 Health and Safety

A. Provision under Section 01540 shall be followed. Health and safety training
shall be provided to the staff.
1.2.5 Fastenings
A. Bolts, nuts and washers and other demountable fastenings of shall be mild
steel galvanised or stainless steel to BS970: Part 4 Grade 316S16. PTFE
washers and isolators shall be used when fitting, fastening or bolting
dissimilar metals.
PAGE 6
B. Fastenings of ferrous parts except high tensile shall be galvanised to BS EN

ISO 1461 or sherardized to BS4921. They shall be primed and painted
according to Table 9.01.
C. Electro-galvanised nickel cadmium plated fastenings shall not be coated.
1.2.6 Coating Systems

A. Refer to surface preparation and painting schedules, Table 1.3-5

1.3.1 Examination
op V1
A. The Contractor shall verify that surfaces are ready to receive coating
treatment in accordance with instructions issued by the manufacturer and to
this specification.
B.
C -
Surfaces scheduled to be finished shall be examined prior to commencement
y
C
of work. Conditions that may potentially affect proper application or spoilt
applications shall be immediately reported.
C. Shop-applied primer shall be examined and tested for compatibility with
C
subsequent coating materials.
D. Moisture content of surfaces shall be measured using an electronic moisture
Q
meter. Finishes shall not be applied until moisture readings are within ranges
given by coating manufactures. The following applies only as a guide.
1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 10%.

2. Concrete: 5%.
3. Wood: 15%.
1.3.2 Protection of Surfaces

A. All surfaces not subjected to the coating process shall be masked with proper
materials.
1.3.3 Preparation
A. All painting processes, methods, materials, systems, surface preparation,
equipment used, conditions under which application proceeds, staff utilised
and safe conditions shall have the prior approval of the Engineer.
1.3.4 Application
A. Products shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Finishes shall not be applied to surfaces that are not dry or contaminated.
C. Each coat shall be applied to uniform thickness.

A. Provisions under Section 01400 shall be followed.
PAGE 7
1.3.6 Cleaning
A. Provisions under Section 01700 Contract Closeout - Cleaning installed work,
shall be followed.
B. Waste material which may constitute a fire hazard shall be collected, placed
in closed metal containers and removed daily from site.
1.3.7 Preparation and Painting Schedules

A. The following Tables specify the preparation of surfaces, coating schedules,
systems and identification of exposure conditions.
Table1.3-1: Preparation and Coating Schedule for Metal & Concrete Surfaces
op V1
Exposure Preparation Primer Topcoats
Class Surfaces (Table 1.3-2) (Table 1.3-3) (Table 1.3-4) Total - min.
Dft
(Table
C -
y
1.3-5)
C
Mild Steel and Pickle & Hot Dip None None None
C
Ferrous Galvanize
'A' Metal Parts Grit Blast to Sa Select one from Select one from
Q
1
2 /2
Cast Iron and Profile 30m A.1.X to A.6.X B.1X, B.2.X 150µm
Cast Steel
1 coat 2 coats
DFT 50µm DFT 50µm per coat
Mild Steel and Pickle & Hot Dip None None None
steel Metal
Parts Galvanize
'B.1’ Grit Blast to Sa Select one from Select 1 from

1
2 /2
Cast Iron and Profile 80µm C.1.X to C.1.X D.1, D.2 550µm
Cast Steel
1 coat 2coats
DFT 50µm per DFT 250µm per

coat coat
Mild steel Galvanized None None None
'B.2’ 1.Grit blast to SA Select one from Select one from

1
2 /2
A1 to A6. B.1.X, B.3.X, C.2.X
profile or 30 µm TO C.4.X, C.6.X TO
PAGE 8
Dft
(Table
1-3-5)
C.7.X
'B.2’ Cast Iron and 2. Abrade and 1 coat 2 Coat 200µm

Cast Steel clean
DFT 50µm per DFT 75µm per coat
coat
op V1
'B.2’ Steel work and Pickle & Hot Dip None None None
Ferrous Metal Galvanize
Parts
Select one from Select one from
C -
y
'C.1’ Cast Iron and
Cast Steel
C Grit Blast to Sa
1
2 /2
A.4 to A.7 D.1to D.3 550µm
1 Coat 2 Coats
C
profile 80 µm DFT 50µm per DFT 250µm per
coat coat
Q
Mild steel Galvanized None None None
Select from Select from
A.6 C.8
'C.2’ Cast Iron and Grit Blast to Sa 1Coat 2 Coats 550µm

1
Cast Steel 2 /2
DFT 50µm per DFT 250µm per
Profile 80µm coat coat
Ductile and See note 1 Select one from

Cast Iron and
Cast Steel Grit Blast to SA * B.2 225µm
75µm
‘D.1’ 2 Coats
Concrete Clean and make None Select one from

Interior surface smooth
surfaces of free of blowholes, D.1 to D.3 500µm
Valve pits and voids.
Chambers 2 Coats
DFT 250µm
PAGE 9
Dft
(Table
1.3-5)
Select one from
C.8.Y,
Mild Steel, None 2 Coats

Ductile and
op V1
‘D.2’ Cast Iron Grit Blast to Sa DFT 250µm per
1
2 /2
1 coat 550µm
C -
y
B.6 1 Coat
C
DFT 50µm
C
Water Towers Select one from Select one from
Q
‘D.3’ Grit Blast to Sa A.5, A.6 C.2.X, C.3.X

1
2 /2
1 Coat 225µm
DFT 75µm
1 coat C.7.X /1 Coat /75µm
DFT 50µm
‘A’, ‘B’ & Steel Stairways Pickle & Hot Dip

‘C’ & Supporting Galvanize
Structures None unless otherwise specified
Bridge Rail and Pickle & Hot Dip

Pin Rack Rail Galvanize
Notes:
1. Use this table in conjunction with Tables 9.04, 9.05, 9.06 and the specification.
2. Blasting surface profiles tolerances 10 µm.
3. DFT (Dry Film Thicknesses) are minimums required.
4. A complete system shall be sourced from one supplier.

PAGE 10
Note 1.
* For information only - Coatings already applied at Cast Steel factory
1. External surface - 1 Coat zinc rich primer.
2. Internal Surface - Cement mortar lining.
Table 1.3-2: Preparation & Painting Schedule for Non-Metallic Surfaces
Surface Location Finish Particular Primer Final treatment

preparation
op V1
Soft Wood Interior Gloss Sand down 1 Coat pink 3 coats alkyd
(primer or primer
Unprimed) Exterior Gloss Sand down 1 coat pink 3 coats alkyd
primer
C -
y
Plaster
(including
Interior
C Flat Sand down 1 coat 2 coats emulsion
Plaster Exterior Gloss Sand down 1 coat alkali 2 coats alkyd
board)
C
resistant
primer
Interior Multi- Sand down 1 coat primer 1 coat multi-color
Q
color wall finish

Interior Flat - 1 coat 2 coats emulsion
emulsion
Cement Exterior Gloss - 1 coat alkali 2 coats alkyd
Rendering resistant
Concrete primer
(fair faced) Iµmersed Matt Wire brush 1 coat special 2 coats Epoxy
(Epoxy epoxy primer Coal Tar
Coal
Tar)
Exterior Sandte Stiff brush 1 coat 2 coats Sandtex
Brickwork x stabilizing
Solution
Interior Flat Zinc Chromate 1 coat 2 coats emulsion
spot primer to emulsion
Hardboard screw and nail
heads
Interior Gloss Zinc Chromate 1 coat 2 coats alkyd
spot primer to hardboard
screw and nail primer
heads
PAGE 11
Table1.3-3: Colour Schedule
Item Color
Floor tiles and skirting Grey and white sparkled
Duct covers (hardwood) Natural
Concrete steps, ramps and aprons Natural
Internal walls (painted) Stone
Internal walls (tiled) White eggshell
Ceilings Light grey
op V1
Cills (tiled) White eggshell
External walls (painted) Cream sandtex
External walls (Tyrolean) Cream cull mix
Internal doors Satin white
C -
y
Kicking and push strips Matte black
Door frames
C Clear varnish
Aluminum Satin silver anodized
C
GRP Stone
Q
Table 1.3-4: Surface Preparations.

All metals shall be high pressure washed to remove deposits of grease, oil, tar and other
residues.
Material Surface Preparation
Wood Not applicable
a. Cabinet finish Sand wood using 180 grit paper. Fill all holes,
treat knots, sand to flat and smooth finish. Sand
b. Gloss or matt paint finish or varnish
inter coating surfaces using 400 grit wet and dry
paper.
Mild Steel & Ductile Iron for low build Sand blast to SA21/2 to 25 to 35 microns profile
coatings.
Mild steel and Ductile Iron for high build Sand blast to SA21/2 to 70 to 90 microns profile
coatings
Stainless & Austenitic Steels No treatment unless specified
Anodized Aluminum & all other No treatment unless specified

non-ferrous metals
Galvanized Mild Steel 1. If fresh and unoxidised-sweep blast
2. If oxidized-high pressure water wash
PAGE 12
Table 1.3-5: Classification of Exposure Conditions.
Surfaces exposed to the atmosphere in Abu Dhabi
Class A 1. 1 meter above ground level
2. Exterior surfaces of equipment, fixtures and fittings installed outside or in

controlled atmospheres.
Class B Surfaces in permanent contact with mildly aggressive environment
1. with potable or recycled water
op V1
2. exterior surfaces of equipment, fixtures, and fittings installed in damp and
uncontrolled atmosphere
Surfaces in permanent contact with 100% relative humidity - aggressive.
Class C
C -
1. None immersed surfaces in enclosed containers, cavities and channels
y
C
containing water.
2. Non immersed surfaces with high abrasion, fretting corrosion e.g.

C
manhole covers
3. Exterior surfaces of items buried below the water table

Q
Surfaces in permanent contact with wet highly aggressive environments.
Class D 1. sewage, bacteria, organic matter H2S and in highly acid conditions
2. Seawater - e.g. outfall valves.
3. water towers
PAGE 13
Table1.3-6: Coating Material Classifications
Significance of notations & Meanings

1. X = low build (nominal to 70µm DFT per coat)
Y = high build (>150µm DFT per coat)
2. amines and amides may also mean their adducts
3. Zinc content of zinc rich primers shall mean at least 90% zinc: 10% binder in the dry film.
Other components shall not exceed 5% in the dry film.
A. Primers (X only)
1. Micaceous iron oxide (two pack)
op V1
2. Zinc phosphate epoxy (two pack)
3. Zinc chromate epoxy (two pack)
4. Zinc rich epoxy (50% zinc)
5. Zinc rich epoxy (90% zinc)
C -
6. Zinc silicate (90% zinc)
y
B.
C
Solvent based single pack (X or Y)
1. Chlorinated rubber
C
2. Bituminous
3. Vinyl
4. Moisture cure epoxy (X only)
Q
5. Moisture cure urethane (X only)

6. Self-polishing copolymer - antifouling (X only)
C. Solvent based two pack (X or Y)

1. Epoxy - Aromatic Amine
2. Epoxy - Aliphatic Amine
3. Epoxy - Cycloaliphatic Amine
4. Epoxy - Polyamide
5. Epoxy - Coal Tar Pitch (Amine or Amide)
6. Urethane - Aromatic Isocyanate
7. Urethane - Aliphatic Isocyanate
8. Glass reinforced - Epoxy Aromatic Amine
D. Solvent free (Y only)

1. Epoxy - Aromatic Amine
2. Epoxy - Aliphatic Amine
3. Epoxy - Cycloaliphatic Amine
4. Epoxy - Polyamide
5. Epoxy - Coal Tar Pitch
6. Urethane - Aromatic Isocyanate
7. Urethane - Aliphatic Isocyanate
E. Reactive solvent polyester (X or Y)

1. Vinyl - Polyester
2. Isophthalic - Polyester
3. Glass filled - Isophthalic Polyester.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 14
op V1
C -
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
y
C
(VOLUME III)
C
Q
DIVISION 11
PUMPS
DOCUMENT NO: 511

FIRST EDITION
DECEMBER- 2016
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Document No: 511

First Edition
December-2016
PO Box 20
the publisher
IRRIGATION SYSTEM - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS VOLUME III
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of Contents ............................................................................................................................................. i
1. COMPRESSED AIR (SECTION 11410) ................................................................................................... 1
1.1. Part 1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 Scope....................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.3 Standards ................................................................................................................................ 1
1.1.4 Submittals ................................................................................................................................ 2
op V1
1.1.4.1 Products and Materials Approval ............................................................................................. 2
1.1.4.2 Method Statements.................................................................................................................. 2
1.1.4.3 Working drawings. ................................................................................................................... 3
1.1.5
C -
Quality Control ......................................................................................................................... 3
y
1.1.6
C
Delivery, Storage and Handling ............................................................................................... 3
1.2. Part 2 Products........................................................................................................................................ 4
C
1.2.1 General Requirements ............................................................................................................ 4
1.2.2 After Cooler.............................................................................................................................. 5
Q
1.2.3 Air Receiver ............................................................................................................................. 5

1.2.4 Instrument Air Equipment ........................................................................................................ 6
1.3. Part 3 Execution ...................................................................................................................................... 7
1.3.1 Installation ................................................................................................................................ 7
1.3.2 Testing ..................................................................................................................................... 8
1.3.3 Spare Parts .............................................................................................................................. 8
2. PUMPS (SECTION 11423) ....................................................................................................................... 9
2.1. Part 1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 9
2.1.1 Scope....................................................................................................................................... 9
2.1.3 Standards ................................................................................................................................ 9
2.1.4 Submittals .............................................................................................................................. 10
2.1.4.1. Products and Materials Approval. .......................................................................................... 10
2.1.4.2. Method Statements................................................................................................................ 11
2.1.4.3. Working Drawings. ................................................................................................................ 11
2.1.5 Quality Control ....................................................................................................................... 11
2.1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling ............................................................................................. 12
2.2. Part 2 Products...................................................................................................................................... 12
2.2.1 General Requirements .......................................................................................................... 12
2.2.2 Split Case Pumps .................................................................................................................. 14
2.2.3 Submersible Pumps .............................................................................................................. 17
2.2.4 Horizontal End Suction Pumps .............................................................................................. 19
PAGE I
2.2.5 Protective Coatings ................................................................................................................ 20

2.2.6 Marking .................................................................................................................................. 20
2.3. Part3 Execution .................................................................................................................................... 20
2.3.1 Installation .............................................................................................................................. 20
2.3.2 Testing ................................................................................................................................... 20
2.3.2.1. Factory Tests ......................................................................................................................... 20
2.3.2.2. Site Acceptance Test ............................................................................................................. 21
3. SURGE SUPPRESSION (SECTION 11440) .......................................................................................... 23
3.1. Part 1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 23
op V1
3.1.1 Scope..................................................................................................................................... 23
3.1.2 Related Documents ............................................................................................................... 23
3.1.3 Standards .............................................................................................................................. 23
3.1.4 Submittals .............................................................................................................................. 25
C -
y
3.1.4.1.
3.1.4.2.
C
Products and Materials Approval ........................................................................................... 25
Method Statements................................................................................................................ 25
3.1.4.3. Working Drawings. ................................................................................................................ 25
C
3.1.5 Quality Control ....................................................................................................................... 26
3.1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling ............................................................................................. 26
Q
3.1 Part 2 Products...................................................................................................................................... 27

3.2.2 Surge Vessel ......................................................................................................................... 28
3.2.3 Compressors ......................................................................................................................... 30
3.2.4 Automatic Air Volume Control System .................................................................................. 30
3.2.5 Marking .................................................................................................................................. 31
3.2 Part 3 Execution .................................................................................................................................... 31
3.3.1 Installation .............................................................................................................................. 31
3.3.2 Testing ................................................................................................................................... 32
4. POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PUMPSETS (SECTION 11455) ............................................................... 33
4.1 Part 1 General ............................................................................................................................... 33
4.1.1 Related Sections .................................................................................................................... 33
4.1.2 References ............................................................................................................................ 33
4.2 Part 2 Products ............................................................................................................................. 33
4.2.1 Pump Performance................................................................................................................ 33
4.2.2 Design Specification .............................................................................................................. 34
4.2.2.1. General .................................................................................................................................. 34
4.2.2.2. Corrosion Protection .............................................................................................................. 34
4.2.2.3. Guarding ................................................................................................................................ 34
4.2.2.4. Hazardous area requirements: .............................................................................................. 34
4.2.2.5. Drive motors: ......................................................................................................................... 34
4.2.3 Peristaltic Pumps ................................................................................................................... 35
PAGE II
4.2.4 Progressive Cavity Pumps ..................................................................................................... 35

4.2.5 Ram Pumps ........................................................................................................................... 36
4.2.6 Rotary Lobe Pumping Units ................................................................................................... 36
4.2.7 Single Diaphragm Pumpsets ................................................................................................. 37
5. DISINFECTION (SECTION 11490) ........................................................................................................ 39
5.1 Part 1 General ............................................................................................................................... 39
5.1.1 Related Sections .................................................................................................................... 39
5.2 Part 2 Products ............................................................................................................................. 39
5.2.1 Disinfection Systems ............................................................................................................. 39
5.2.1.1. General .................................................................................................................................. 39
op V1
5.2.2 Gaseous Dosing .................................................................................................................... 39
5.2.2.1. General .................................................................................................................................. 39
5.2.2.2. Gas Storage........................................................................................................................... 40
5.2.2.3.
C -
Automatic Isolation ................................................................................................................ 40
y
5.2.2.4.
C
Isolation Valve ....................................................................................................................... 40
5.2.2.5. Actuator and Pneumatic System ........................................................................................... 40
C
5.2.2.6. Isolation Valve Connections .................................................................................................. 41
5.2.2.7. Isolation Valve Support .......................................................................................................... 41
Q
5.2.2.8. Tubular Guard Railing............................................................................................................ 41

5.2.2.9. Gas Headers.......................................................................................................................... 41
5.2.2.10. Pipework ................................................................................................................................ 42
5.2.2.11. Chlorine Drum Support Rollers .............................................................................................. 42
5.2.2.12. Cylinder Clamps .................................................................................................................... 42
5.2.2.13. Changeover Panel ................................................................................................................. 42
5.2.3 On Site Generation of Chlorine.............................................................................................. 46
5.2.3.1. General .................................................................................................................................. 46
5.2.3.2. Salt Saturators ....................................................................................................................... 47
5.2.3.3. Brine Feed ............................................................................................................................. 47
5.2.3.4. Electrolyser ............................................................................................................................ 47
5.2.3.5. Sodium Hypochlorite Storage ................................................................................................ 48
5.2.3.6. Sodium Hypochlorite Dosing ................................................................................................. 48
5.2.3.7. Pipework ................................................................................................................................ 48
5.2.3.8. Electrical Installation .............................................................................................................. 48
5.2.3.9. Transformer / Rectifier ........................................................................................................... 48
5.2.3.10. Control Panel ......................................................................................................................... 49
5.2.4 Ultra Violet (UV) Disinfection ................................................................................................. 50
5.2.4.1. General .................................................................................................................................. 50
5.2.4.2. Ancillary Equipment ............................................................................................................... 51
5.2.4.3. Instrumentation and Controls ................................................................................................ 51
5.2.4.4. UV System Testing ................................................................................................................ 52
PAGE III
5.2.4.5. Health and Safety .................................................................................................................. 52

5.2.4.6. Critical Spare Parts ................................................................................................................ 52
5.2.4.7. Data Recording and Storage ................................................................................................. 52
5.2.5 Analysers ............................................................................................................................... 52
6. LIFTING EQUIPMENT (SECTION 11620) ............................................................................................. 54
6.1 Part 1. General .............................................................................................................................. 54
6.1.2 Test Certification .................................................................................................................... 54
6.1.3 Fitness for Purpose ............................................................................................................... 55
op V1
6.1.4 Commissioning ...................................................................................................................... 55
6.1.5 Training .................................................................................................................................. 56
6.1.6 Storage .................................................................................................................................. 56
6.2 Part 2. Lifting equipment ............................................................................................................. 56
6.2.1
C -
Overhead Travelling Cranes .................................................................................................. 56
y
6.2.2
C
Overhead Runway Beams ..................................................................................................... 57
6.2.3 Lifting Blocks, Trolleys, Hooks, Ropes, Eyebolts, Shackles, Fall Arrest Systems. ................ 57
C
6.2.4 Lifting Davits and Sockets ..................................................................................................... 57
6.2.5 Lifting Chains. ........................................................................................................................ 58
Q
PAGE IV
1. COMPRESSED AIR (SECTION 11410)

1.1. Part 1 General
1.1.1 Scope
This section of the specification gives the requirements for compressors
materials, installation and testing used in irrigation systems.
op V1
The following sections of the specification shall be read in conjunction with these
sections.
C -
y
C
Section 2670 Steel Pipes
C
Section 11440 Surge Suppression
Q
Section 15980 Instrumentation Systems

Section 15985 Control Philosophy
1.1.3 Standards
The works, equipment and materials shall be designed, manufactured and
erected according to the following applicable codes, standards (in their latest
edition where not otherwise specified)
BS EN 1012-1 Compressors and vacuum pumps. Safety requirements. Air

compressors
BS 1092-1 Flanges and their joints. Circular flanges for pipes, valves,
fittings and accessories, PN designated. Steel Flanges
BS 1571 / ISO 1217 Methods for acceptance testing for air compressors &
exhausters
ISO 8573 Test methods for aerosol oil content
BS EN 286-1 Simple unfired pressure vessels designed to contain air or
nitrogen. Pressure vessels for general purposes
BS 1123 Fusible plugs for steam boilers and compressed air applications.
Specification
BS EN ISO 12944-1 Paints and varnishes. Corrosion protection of steel
structures by protective paint systems. General introduction
structures by protective paint systems. Classification of environments
PAGE 1

structures by protective paint systems. Design considerations
structures by protective paint systems. Types of surface and surface preparation
structures by protective paint systems. Protective paint systems
structures by protective paint systems Laboratory performance test methods
op V1
structures by protective paint systems. Execution and supervision of paintwork
BS EN ISO 14713-1 Zinc coatings. Guidelines and recommendations for the
protection against corrosion of iron and steel in structures. General principles of
design and corrosion resistance
C -
y
C
protection against corrosion of iron and steel in structures. Hot dip galvanizing
BS EN ISO 10675-1 Non-destructive testing of welds. Acceptance levels for
radiographic testing steel, nickel, titanium and their alloys
C
1.1.4 Submittals
Q

i. The manufacturers design calculations, complete and detailed specification
and test results of the proposed air compressors including manufacturer’s
certificates of compliance with this section of the standard specification.
ii. Should any details of the equipment be altered in any way during
manufacture from those proposed and approved by the Engineer, submit for
the Engineer's approval the revised details and test results.
the manufactured air compressors as soon as practicable after testing as
and in any case not later than the time of delivery of the equipment to the
site.

i. Procedures for handling, storage and installation of the equipment

cleaning and repair.
PAGE 2
ii. Testing procedures.


specification.
op V1
A. The Contractor/Manufacturer shall submit material test certificates for all valves
components in accordance with EN 10204, for the Owner/ Engineer approval
prior to manufacturing processes.
B. The equipment shall be visually inspected regarding dimensions, materials and
C -
workmanship by an inspector approved by the Engineer.
y
C
C. Prior to dispatch of any product and/or material from source the Contractor shall
C
D. Products and materials shall be from a manufacturer/supplier who operates a
Q

E. Manufacturers shall have a minimum of 5 years manufacturing experience with
the type of pipes and fittings being proposed.
F. To allow the Engineer to inspect the Works the Contractor shall give the
Engineer a minimum of 24 hours notice of carrying out the following activities on
site.
i. Installation of the equipment.
ii. Testing of the equipment
iii. A detailed statement for local application of coatings if requred.

with the manufacturer's recommendations, Section 01600 of the specification
and the following provisions:
ii. Equipment shall not come in contact with any sharp projections that may
cause damage to equipment during transportation loading and unloading.
Ensure that equipment is well secured during transit and adequately
supported. Do not allow equipment to overhang the end of a vehicle during
transportation.
iii. Ensure that equipment is protected from damage while being lifted. The
hooks used shall be padded.
iv. Store equipment on a flat level area and raised above the ground.
PAGE 3
v. Store joint materials and gaskets in a well ventilated place free from exposure
to sunlight and in their original pickings until they are needed.
B. The Contractor shall visually inspect all products upon delivery to site and report
any damage to the Engineer:

ii. Proposals for repair of any damaged products shall be submitted in
iii. Any damaged products deemed unsuitable for repair by the Engineer
op V1

C -
y
C
A. Equipment shall be the standard product of a manufacturer who is regularly
C
engaged in the design and construction of fully automatic air compression
system.
B. The compress air system shall include but not limited to:
Q
i. Two identical electric motor driven air compressor sets complete with air filter
and associated equipment.
ii. At least one aftercooler, water separator, oil separator, filter, air dryer and all
associated valves and fittings.
iii. Two suitably sized air receivers complete with all accessories including
pressure gauge, water separator, condensate drain valve, alarm and control
pressure switches, isolating, non-return and safety pressure release valves.
iv. All pipework, valves and controls for the complete system.
C. Compressors shall be provided on a duty/standby basis and shall be capable of

continuous automatic operation whilst requiring the minimum of maintenance,
and shall supply dry, oil free compressed air.
D. The air compressor shall have noise level limited to 80 dBA at 1 m distance. The
air compressor shall be fitted with acoustic enclosure, if necessary, to achieve
the noise level.
E. The compressors shall be air cooled and shall be suitable for indoor installation.
F. Compressors shall be designed to BS EN 1012-1and tested to BS1571.
G. Air compressor shall be sized based on approved surge study of the system. The
capacity of the compressors shall be chosen such that each air compressor is
designed for 100% air requirement of the entire system.
H. Compressors shall be rated to achieve the duty at optimum efficiency and may
be selected from one of the following types unless otherwise specified.
i. Reciprocating Single Stage
PAGE 4
ii. Reciprocating Multi Stage

iii. Rotary Screw
1.2.2 After Cooler

A. All types of compressor shall be fitted with an after cooler. These shall be of the
air cooled type comprising an air to air heat exchanger. The after cooler shall
cool the process air to a temperature of 10°C above ambient. The after cooler
shall be fitted with an automatic condensation drain which shall be provided with
a manual bypass.
op V1
B. Delivery lines from the Compressor Sets shall be fitted with the following
equipment:
i. Oil trap/filter prior to entry into the air receiver. The filter shall be fitted
with an auto drain and manual by pass
ii. C -
Adjustable safety valve (lockable).
y
iii.
C
A solenoid valve for unloading (dependent upon compressor size) for
applications where the compressor is directly coupled to a surge vessel.
C
iv. A no return valve.
v. A high efficiency coalescing oil filter (0.001 micron filtration).
Q
1.2.3 Air Receiver

A. Unless otherwise stated, one air receiver shall be provided, normally being
online, but with the capacity to be isolated from the system.
B. Air receivers shall be manufactured from fusion welded steel and shall comply
with BS EN 286-1 or equivalent for the appropriate pressure class.
C. Air receivers greater than 1000 litres capacity shall be designed and
manufactured in accordance with PD 5500 or equivalent.
D. Each integral air receiver shall have sufficient capacity to damp out air pulses
from the compressor and to prevent pressure drops on process valve actuations
and shall be sized based on approved surge study of the system.
E. The air receivers shall be connected such that the duty compressor delivers into
either or, if two air receivers are specified, both of the air receivers. Diaphragm
Isolation valves shall be provided for isolating either of the receivers from the
system.
F. The air receivers shall be suitable for floor mounting and shall be supplied with
two inspection ports. The inspection ports shall be of the elliptical type and
pressure sealed.
G. All instrument tapings shall be via suitable bosses welded to the tank structure.
The vessel shall be supplied with:
i. Pressure gauge.
ii. Pressure relief valve.
iii. Drain valve.
iv. Lifting lugs.
PAGE 5
H. The vessel shall be corrosion protected to give maintenance free service for a
period of 20 years minimum, as defined in BS EN ISO 12944/ BS EN ISO 14713
or equivalent and Section 9900.
I. Full certification in triplicate shall be supplied with the vessel. The vessel shall
also feature a stainless steel nameplate containing the following details:
i. The manufacturers name.

ii. The date of manufacture.
iii. The standard to which the vessel was built.
iv. The maximum design pressure.
op V1
v. The minimum design pressure where it is other than atmospheric.
vi. The design temperature
vii. The test pressure
J. The Contractor shall mark clearly respective safe working pressure in lettering
C -
not less than 80mm in height in gloss paint.
y
C
1.2.4 Instrument Air Equipment
C
General
A. The air distribution system design shall consist of a header ring main, which will
be sufficiently sized to minimize pipe losses, off which branch lines shall be taken
Q
to serve the equipment.

B. Moisture separators shall be incorporated into the ring main at suitable intervals
to reduce the moisture content of the compressed air. The separators shall be
equipped with an automatic drain trap facility. Automatic drain cocks shall be
provided, preceded by strainers, at low points in the system. Trace heating shall
be provided where necessary.
C. Branch lines shall be taken off the top of the header ring main to minimize the
risk of moisture ingress into the branch.
D. The branch lines shall be manufactured from stainless steel 1.4404 and shall
include an isolating valve which shall be located in an accessible position.
Air Filters
A. Two main airline filter units shall be provided, each unit comprising of a
duty/standby filter.
B. One filter unit shall be a pre-filter and shall be installed between the receiver and
the air dryer. The other shall be a main filter and shall be installed after the air
drier.
C. Each filter unit shall be supplied complete with isolating valves and lockable
bypass valve complete with padlock and key.
D. Pressure gauges shall be provided to indicate the differential pressure across
each filter.
E. The pre filter shall filter large particles from the air. Its purpose being to protect
the main filter and the air driers.
F. The main filter shall filter the air to a maximum particle size of 3 microns.
PAGE 6
Air Driers
A. Two air driers (1 Duty, 1 Standby) shall be provided and positioned before the
main filter.
B. Each dryer shall be capable of providing dry compressed air with a compression
dew point of 35°C minimum.
C. Absorption/Desiccant type driers shall be designed for continuous operation
having two absorption columns operating in a run and regeneration cycle
alternately. Switching and regeneration shall take place automatically.
Condensate draining shall also be automatic and the condensate shall be piped
to a suitable drain for disposal.
op V1
D. When specified in the particular specification, Refrigerated Driers shall be
provided, as a duty unit only and include integral filters for particle removal in
excess of 3 microns, fully hermetically sealed compressors and hot gas by-pass
for constant Dew point Control. A separate pressure switch shall be provided for
C -
fan and safety control.
y
C
E. The driers shall be arranged in parallel and isolating valves and a bypass shall be
provided. The bypass valves shall be lockable and a padlock and key shall be
provided. The bypass shall also contain a blank brass spade inserted between a
C
pair of flanges.
F. The air driers shall be controlled by a local wall mounted control panel. The
Q
incoming supply fuse switch shall be lockable in the OFF position. The panel
shall be supplied from the motor control center.
G. The duty air dryer regeneration shall only be permitted to run when the duty air
compressor is running. Visual indication shall be included on the control panel to
indicate whether the duty or standby dryer is running.
H. The air driers shall operate in conjunction with an air moisture monitor/alarm
panel located adjacent to the air driers control panel and include a moisture
sensor at the air sampling point. The high moisture alarm shall be signaled to the
plant interposing relay signals marshalling section to provide separate signals to
the MCC, Annunciator panel and Telemetry section.

1.3.1 Installation
A. Installation of the compressed air system shall be in accordance to
manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Contractor shall provide qualification details of the manufacturer's technical
expert to be assigned to the Contract. The technical expert shall have expertise,
transport, storage, handling, installation and testing of surge protection system
as appropriate.
C. The technical expert shall provide comprehensive technical assistance to the
Contractor throughout the Contract and regularly monitor the Contractor's
activities and report on shortcomings.
D. The Contractor shall provide copies of all instructions advice or reports given by
the manufacturer's technical expert to him. The technical expert shall
PAGE 7
immediately inform the Engineer of any omission, variations and detractions from
the specification.
1.3.2 Testing
A. The compressors shall be tested in accordance with BS 1571 or ISO 1217 at the
factory.
B. Each air receiver shall be tested in accordance with the relevant sections of BS
EN 286-1 at the factory.
C. The factory test of the compress air system shall include, but shall not limited to:
op V1
i. Hydrostatic test of the air receivers
ii. Mechanical running test of the compressors
iii. Noise measurement of compressors
C -
y
iv. Vibration measurement of compressors
v.
C
Functional tests of the compressors with simulation for all controls and
shutdown features.
C
vi. String test with surge vessels, air receivers and compressors which can be
provided on site as alternative but without additional cost to Client.
Q
D. The site tests shall include but shall not be limited to the following:
i. String test with surge vessels, air receivers and compressors.

ii. All welds shall be 100% visually tested prior to carrying out radiographic
testing.
iii. All welds shall be 100% radiographic tested in accordance with BS EN ISO
10675-1.
1.3.3 Spare Parts

A. The contractor shall supply spare parts for the compressed air system according
to manufacturer recommendation.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 8
2. PUMPS (SECTION 11423)

2.1. Part 1 General
2.1.1 Scope
This section of the specification gives the requirements for centrifugal pumps
materials and the installation and testing.
op V1
section.
C -
y
C
C
Q

Section 16070 Electrical Motors
2.1.3 Standards
All activities relating to this section of the specification shall comply with the
BS EN 1563 Founding. Spheroidal graphite cast iron.

used in water and drainage applications. Vulcanized rubber.
BS EN 1982 Copper and copper alloys. Ingots and castings
BS EN 1561 Founding. Grey cast irons
BS 1649 AIDC technologies. Operational aspects affecting the reading of bar
code symbols
BS EN 837-1 Pressure gauges Bourdon tube pressure gauges. Dimensions,
metrology, requirements and testing
BS EN 13835 Founding. Austenitic cast irons
BS ISO 281 Rolling bearings. Dynamic load ratings and rating life
intended for human consumption with regard to their effect on the quality of the
water Methods of test.
BS ISO 10816 Mechanical vibration. Evaluation of machine vibration by
measurements on non-rotating parts. General guidelines
PAGE 9
EN ISO 20361 Liquid pumps and pump units -- Noise test code -- Grades 2
and 3 of accuracy
BS EN ISO 9906 Rotodynamic pumps. Hydraulic performance acceptance tests.
Grades 1, 2 and 3
ISO 8501 Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and
related products
ISO 1940 Mechanical vibration -- Balance quality requirements for rotors in a
op V1
constant (rigid) state -- Part 1: Specification and verification of balance
tolerances
DIN 825 Nameplate, signs and labels – Dimensions
2.1.4 Submittals
C -
y
C
2.1.4.1.Products and Materials Approval.
C
Q
Contract programme allowing for ordering and approval times. Reference shall
also be made to Section 01600 of the specification on products and materials
approval. Information to be submitted shall comprise but not necessarily be
limited to:
i. Pump Technical Datasheet and for auxiliary equipment and

instrumentation.
ii. Pump and Motor Characteristic Performance curves head, efficiency
and shaft power and NPSHR values versus flow capacity.
iii. Parallel pumps operation curves shall be submitted with recorded
minimum & maximum flows for all pumps running (variable speed
pumps, curves must be submitted showing the performance at
minimum of four different speeds)
iv. Speed-torque curve, Speed – power factor curve, motor thermal
capacity, etc.
v. Detail general arrangement of the complete pump unit (pump and
motor) drawings showing dimensions, outlines, sectionals & 3D
exploded views, mechanical seals details, allowable forces and
moments, instruments P&ID etc.
vi. Motor water cooling system requirements, calculations and drawings
(if needed)
vii. Complete list of all necessary equipment.
viii. Complete catalogues of all equipment.
ix. List of recommended spare parts.
x. Details of any special tools required.
PAGE 10
xi. Compliance statement to pump specifications

xii. Installation instructions including alignment, grouting, connecting of
piping, etc. in English and Arabic (if available) in three copies.
xiii. Operating instructions and maintenance manual, illustrated spare
parts list, list of recommended spares for five years operation,
instructions for daily checking and Maintenance, troubleshooting
guide, lubrication and bearing schedule, one month before practical
completion (in English and Arabic)
xiv. As-built drawings hard and soft copies in AutoCAD platform.
op V1
xv. Quality control, inspection and test plan
xvi. Method statement for outer and inner surfaces coating as
recommended by the manufacturer
xvii. Certificate of compliance of the used non metallic materials with
C -
requrments of the BS6920.
y
C
2.1.4.2.Method Statements
C
01300 of the specification. These shall comprise but not necessarily be limited
Q
to:
i. Procedures for handling, storage and installation of pump including

2.1.4.3.Working Drawings.
specification.

A. The Contractor/Manufacturer shall submit material test certificates for all
valves components in accordance with EN 10204, for the Owner/ Engineer
approval prior to manufacturing processes.
B. The valves shall be visually inspected regarding dimensions, materials and
workmanship by an inspector approved by the Engineer. Valve bodies
shall be sound, free from cracks, indentations, spalling, scale, patching or
other defects detrimental to their use.
C. Prior to dispatch of any product and/or material from source the Contractor
shall notify the Engineer in writing in sufficient time to allow the Engineer
the opportunity to inspect and test the product and/or material prior to
delivery in accordance with Section 01400 of the specification.
PAGE 11
D. Products and materials shall be from a manufacturer/supplier who

operates a quality system which is registered to ISO 9000 series or
approved equal.
E. Manufacturers shall have a minimum of 5 years manufacturing experience
with the type of pipes and fittings being proposed.
F. To allow the Engineer to inspect the Works the Contractor shall give the
Engineer a minimum of 24 hours notice of carrying out the following
activities on site.
i. Installation
op V1
ii. Testing
C -
a) Delivery, storage and handling of products and materials shall be in
y
C
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, Section 01600 of
the specification and the following provisions.
C
ii. Pumps shall not come in contact with any sharp projections that may
Q
cause damage to the pipes and fittings during transportation loading

and unloading. Ensure that pumps are well secured during transit and
adequately supported. Do not allow pump to overhang the end of a
vehicle during transportation.
iii. Ensure that valves are protected from damage while being lifted. The
hooks used shall be padded.
iv. Store pumps on a flat level area and raised above the ground on
timber bearers.
exposure to sunlight and in their original packings until they are
needed.
b) The Contractor shall visually inspect all products upon delivery to site and

a) The pump covered by this specification shall be suitable for the specified
operation conditions and shall be designed and manufactured for a minimum
PAGE 12
service of 20 years plus minimum of three years of uninterrupted continuous

operation or 25,000 hours operation, whichever is later.
b) Low maintenance cost, reliability and trouble free operation shall be a prime
consideration when selecting the bid pumps.
c) The pumps, all accessories and materials, which are in contact with
transported medium, shall be suitable for handling desalinated and treated
water.
d) Each pump and associated equipment shall be arranged to permit easy
access for operation, maintenance and pump removal without interrupting
pumping operation. The Contractor shall confirm the proposed pump
op V1
arrangement when submitting the construction drawings.
e) Water velocity in pump suction and discharge nozzles shall not exceed 4 and
5 m/s respectively at maximum operating condition within pump operation
specified range.
C -
y
f) Flanges shall be raised face in accordance with EN 1092-2. The pressure
C
rating of the suction nozzle shall be same as the discharge nozzle rating.
Necessary tapings shall be provided on the suction and delivery flanges to
C
allow for installation of the pressure gauges.
Required allowable nozzle forces and moments shall be carefully determined
by the Contractor and Pump set manufacturer, by pipe-stress analysis
Q
software, taking into account the connected pipes and equipment.

The Contractor shall ensure that the installation is carried out properly at site
to limit the actual forces and moments on the pump nozzles within the
acceptable levels as stipulated by the manufacturer.
g) Generally, pumps shall be selected to have a stable head-capacity curve at
all flow rates, i.e. continuous rising type head with decreasing flow. Pump
duty points shall be selected to operate at their BEP within the system
operating range in different operating scenarios based on most severe
conditions.
h) The required net positive suction head NPSHR of the pumps, when operating
in single duty or as in most cases when operated in parallel, shall be at least
1.5 meters less than the available net positive suction head NPSHA.
The Contractor shall verify the NPSHA value prior to ordering of pumps and
submit relevant NPSH calculations confirming the pump satisfactory
performance in all operating conditions.
NPSH calculations shall be based on the least favorable operating conditions
(lowest atmospheric pressure, lowest level of water on the suction side of the
pumps and highest temperature of the fluid). Any deviation in the NPSHR of
the pumps shall be corrected at the Suppliers expense.
i) Vibration limit shall be in accordance with BS ISO 10816. The Contractor
shall specify allowable and preferred operating region.
Vibrations shall be measured during the performance tests and during the
test run phase of the transmission system.
All the rotating parts should be statically and dynamically balanced as per
ISO 1940 or other relevant standards.
PAGE 13
The Contractor is responsible to take necessary steps to remedy any

excessive vibrations.
j) Generally noise criteria shall be as per IEC EN 60034-9, EN ISO 20361 and
other relevant applicable standards.
The maximum permissible noise level at 1.0 m distance from the pump shall
be 85 dB (A). The Contractor shall take the necessary measures to fulfil the
environmental requirements outside the pump building
2.2.2 Split Case Pumps
op V1
A. The pump casing shall be made of high grade cast iron as per EN BS 1561
or BS EN 1561 as a minimum and be free of any blow holes and sand
pockets resulting from imperfect and defective castings. Inner surfaces of
casing which are in contact with the fluid shall be ideally shaped to match the
streamlines and be finished so that minimum head loss and favorable
C -
efficiency could be attained.
y
C
Pump casing shall withstand at least 1.5 the shut off pressure of the pump.
All pump casings shall have a minimum corrosion allowance of 3 mm unless

C
otherwise specified in the data sheets.
The casing shall be equipped with vent and drain connections with sufficient
Q
clearance as required without dismantling the pump, screwed type, and fitted
with removable cocks. The material of construction for the removable cocks
shall be stainless steel 1.4401.
All screw or bolt and nut seating in the casing should be machined and the
joint face of the pump casing should be sealed by means of flat gasket and
bolted together.
All auxiliary piping connected to the casing shall be made of stainless steel
1.4404.
Required allowable nozzle forces and moments shall be carefully determined

by the Contractor and Pump set manufacturers, by static pipe-stress analysis
software, taking into account the connected pipes and equipment.
The Contractor shall ensure that the installation is carried out properly at site
to limit the actual forces and moments on the pump nozzles within the
acceptable levels as stipulated by the manufacturer.
All component parts of the valve body i.e. bonnet and stem seal housing shall
be bolted together.
B. The impeller of pumps shall be double suction enclosed manufactured from

duplex stainless steel 1.4517 or equivalent and should exhibit excellent
corrosion resistance, abrasive-wear resistance, cavitation resistance, weld
ability and casting and machining properties.
The impeller vanes design shall be based on manufacture experience to
ensure hydraulic balance during all operating conditions.
PAGE 14
The proposed Impeller diameter shall not exceed 95% of the maximum
impeller diameter. Pumps impeller shall be one machined piece, where
practicable, and made as smooth as possible.
The impeller shall be fixed to the shaft using positive one piece key. The
impellers together with shaft shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
C. The pump shaft shall exhibit high tensile strength, endurance limit and
corrosion resistance. Pump shaft shall be made of stainless steel 1.4462 or
other approved material.
All pumps shall have suitable renewable shaft sleeves made from 1.4571 or
op V1
other proper equivalent material. Shaft shall not be in contact with water.
D. Radial and thrust bearings shall be of self-alignment antifriction maintenance

free type. Bearings shall be sized to offer a minimum L10 life of 100,000
hours when operating at any flow rate.
C -
y
C
Bearings shall be of grease lubricated and completely protected from water
ingress by appropriate means.
Bearing supports shall not be bolted type and shall be part of pump casing
C
only.
E. Removable wear rings shall be provided at pump casing and impeller.
Q
Material of the casing renewable rings shall be stainless steel bronze

whereas impeller wear ring shall be stainless steel 1.4571. Wear rings shall
be easily replaceable. Clearance within the rings shall be acceptable and
according to manufacturer standard or other approved standards. Casing ring
hardness shall exceed impeller ring hardness at least for 50 points of the
Brinell scale.
F. The couplings between motor and pump shall be of the flexible type. Each
coupling shall be provided with a removable coupling guard made of durable
material with a minimum wall thickness of 1.5 mm.
The coupling hubs on the shafts shall be designed for the easy maintenance.
A coupling design with high pressure removal and shrink fit hubs is not
permitted.
G. Pump motor complete arrangement shall be mounted on one corrosion-

resistant fabricated steel base plate to be secured to the foundation with
foundation bolts, or other equivalent, and should withstand the weight and
vibrations of the pump.
The design of base plate shall be confirmed by the Manufacturer of the
pumps and motors.
H. The shaft seals shall be of the mechanical type by an approved specialist

manufacturer.
The seals shall be designed and suited for both intermittent and continuous
running under all operating conditions. Lubricating and cooling water for the
seals shall be drawn from connections on the pump casings.
The sealing construction and design should enable the inspection and
removal of the seals without disturbing the pumps.
PAGE 15
The seal chamber size should be proper for all the well-known mechanical
seals. An inline filter must be used in in the flush line to prevent any foreign
material from entering the seal chamber.
I. Each pump shall be fitted with liquid filled type pressure gauges on the
suction and delivery sides complete with isolating corks and two way
manifold.
Pressure gauges shall be 6 inch (150mm) nominal diameter "Industrial"
bourdon type in accordance with BS EN 837-1 or equivalent. The suction
gauges shall be of compound type with vacuum figures calibrated in red.
op V1
The gauges shall be of robust construction, tropicalised with dust and damp
proof sealed brass cases or other approved non-corroding solid (not plated)
materials. The movements shall be of robust design, capable of withstanding
the degree of vibration shocks and pressure fluctuations normally
encountered with pump operation when protected by snubbers & 2 way
C -
y
manifold.
C
Where pressurized oil lubricated sleeve bearing are proposed, a dial type
temperature gauge shall be provided on shaft bearing. This shall be
C
waterproof and provided with two adjustable contacts for two stage alarm and
shut down.
Q
All gauges on a pump shall be visible from one position and shall be mounted
separately as a single panel with 1.4404 impulse line, fixed close to both
suction and discharge sides of the pump.
J. An air-release priming cock shall be fitted at the top of the casing volute on
each pump and the discharge piped to one of the shaft gland bowls.
The gland and body drains shall be collected in a drip-tray and the final
discharge shall be piped individually from each pump to the drainage channel
in the pump house. The drain pipes shall be in 25 mm nominal size heavy
wall copper or stainless steel tube fitted with couplings so as to facilitate
removal of any possible blockages.
K. Moving parts of pump including all shafts, couplings, and collars, projecting
key heads, gear wheels, chain drives and all other moving machinery shall be
guarded where necessary to give complete protection to operating personnel.
All set screws on revolving shafts shall be countersunk or suitably protected.
The guards shall be of an approved design and shall be fitted where

necessary with inspection doors.
All guards shall be arranged so that they can be removed without disturbing
the parts of the gears and equipment they protect.
Guards for shaft couplings shall comply with requirements not less than BS
1649.
L. Pumps suction and discharge end connections shall be flanged pipe joints
located on opposite sides of the lower casing, allowing removal of the rotating
assembly without disturbing the system piping connections.
PAGE 16
M. Pump motor shall be in accordance with Div 16 Section 16070 Electric

Motors.
N. The pumps and their auxiliaries shall be equipped with all instruments
required for safe and correct operation.
As a minimum the following shall be provided per pump:
 Bearing temperature (Local thermometers for all bearings)

 Local pressure gauges at suction and discharge
 Vibration monitoring system, in all axes
op V1
A central terminal box for the connection of all supervisory and auxiliary
equipment of the pump unit and the lubrication system (if any) shall be
foreseen.
C -
2.2.3 Submersible Pumps
y
C
a) Volute casings shall be cast iron as per BS EN 1561 or stainless steel 1.4462
and shall be free of any blow holes and sand pockets resulting from imperfect
C
and defective castings. Inner surfaces of casing which are in contact with the
fluid shall be ideally shaped to match the streamlines and be finished so that
minimum head loss and favorable efficiency could be attained.
Q
All screw or bolt and nut seating in the casing should be machined and the
joint face of the pump casing should be sealed by means of flat gasket and
bolted together.
b) Impellers shall be Ni-resist cast iron BS 3468, stainless steel 1.4462 or

approved equivalent. Impellers shall exhibit excellent corrosion resistance,
abrasive-wear resistance, cavitations resistance, weld ability and casting and
machining properties.
The impeller vanes design shall be based on manufacture experience to
ensure hydraulic balance during all operating conditions.
The proposed Impeller diameter shall not exceed 95% of the maximum
impeller diameter. Pumps impeller shall be one machined piece, where
practicable, and made as smooth as possible.
The impeller shall be keyed to the shaft such as it will not loosen or become
detached when the pump is rotating in the wrong direction. The impellers
together with shaft shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Impellers
shall not be trimmed unless approved by the Engineer.
c) The pump shaft shall exhibit high tensile strength, endurance limit and
corrosion resistance. Pump shaft shall be made of stainless steel 1.4462 or
other approved material.
The shaft shall be turned, round and polished and shall be key-seated for
securing the impeller.
d) The shaft shall rotate on grease lubricated bearings. The support bearing,
provided for radial forces, shall be a rolling bearing. The main bearings shall
consist of at least one roller bearing for radial forces and one angular contact
PAGE 17
ball bearing for axial thrust. Bearings shall be sized to offer a minimum L10
life of 100,000 hours with service intervals at 20,000 hours when operating at
any flow rate as per BS ISO 281 standard requirements.
Bearings shall be capable of taking the static weight of the rotating parts and
any thrust generated by the operation of the pump.
The upper bearing(s) shall be of the grease lubricated sealed for life type, the
lower bearing(s) shall be lubricated by the internal oil supply.
The bottom bearing(s) shall be of the angular contact ball bearing type in
combinations with roller bearing(s)
op V1
The lower bearing housing shall include an independent thermal sensor to
monitor the bearing temperature. If a high temperature occurs, the sensor
shall activate an alarm and shut the pump down.
C -
e) Each pump shall be provided with a positively driven dual, tandem
y
C
mechanical shaft seal system consisting of two seals, each having an
independent spring system. The seal material shall consist of wolfram carbide
WCCR (Corrosion resistant tungsten carbide) or approved equivalent. The
C
seals shall require neither maintenance nor adjustment and shall be capable
of operating in either clockwise or counter clockwise direction of rotation
without damage or loss of seal function. Should both seals fail and allow fluid
Q
to enter the stator housing, an alarm shall stop the pump before the fluid
come into contact with the lower bearings, or the stator. The outer primary
seal, located between the pump and seal chamber, shall contain one
stationary and one positively driven rotating corrosion resistant tungsten-
carbide ring or approved equivalent. The inner secondary seal, located
between the seal chamber and the seal inspection chamber shall be an
active seal. The inner seal shall contain one stationary and one positively
driven rotating corrosion resistant tungsten-carbide seal ring. The rotating
inner seal ring shall have small back-swept grooves laser inscribed upon its
face to act as a micro pump as it rotates, returning any fluid that should enter
the dry motor chamber back into the lubricant chamber. All seal rings shall be
individual solid sintered rings. Each seal interface shall be held in place by its
own spring system. The seals shall not depend upon direction of rotation for
sealing. Mounting of the lower seal on the impeller hub is not acceptable.
Shaft seals without positively driven rotating members or conventional double
mechanical seals containing either a common single or double spring acting
between the upper and lower seal faces are not acceptable. The seal springs
shall be isolated from the pumped media to prevent materials from packing
around them, limiting their performance.
Each pump shall be provided with a lubricant chamber for the shaft sealing
system. The lubricant chamber shall be designed to prevent overfilling and
shall provide capacity for lubricant expansion. The seal lubricant chamber
shall have one drain and one inspection plug that are accessible from the
exterior of the motor unit. The seal system shall not rely upon the pumped
media for lubrication.
In the case of a seal cavity, the area about the exterior of the lower
mechanical seal in the housing shall have cast in an integral concentric spiral
groove. This groove shall protect the seals by causing abrasive particulate
PAGE 18
entering the seal cavity to be forced out away from the seal due to centrifugal
action.
f) Removable wear rings shall be provided at pump casing and impeller.

Material of the renewable rings for casing shall be brass BS EN 1982.
Material of the renewable wear rings for impeller shall be stainless steel
1.4301 or the approved manufacturer’s standard. Wear rings shall be easily
replaceable. Clearance within the rings shall be acceptable and according to
manufacturer standard or other approved standards. Casing ring hardness
shall exceed impeller ring hardness at least for 50 points of the Brinell scale.
g) The pumps shall be equipped with all instruments required for safe and
op V1
correct operation.
As a minimum the following shall be provided per pump:
 Bearing temperature
C -
y

C Local pressure gauges at suction and discharge
 Vibration monitoring system
C
 Moisture monitoring system
A central terminal box for the connection of all supervisory and auxiliary
Q
equipment of the pump unit and the lubrication system shall be foreseen
For instrumentation requirements refer to Division 15 Section 15980

Instrumentation Systems.
h) Pump motor shall be in accordance with Division 16 Section 16070 Electric

Motors.
2.2.4 Horizontal End Suction Pumps

A. The pump and its driving motor shall be separate machines close coupled,
using flexible coupling to form an integral unit mounted on a suitable common
base plate and bolted together.
B. Shafts shall be of stainless steel 1.4462 or equivalent, adequately sized and
fitted with renewable sleeves where they pass through the sealing
arrangement. The lower section of any shaft drives shall be designed to be
readily removable to facilitate maintenance.
C. Bearing shall be oil or grease lubricated. Oil lubricated bearing shall be fitted
with a constant level oiler.
D. “V” ring seals shall be provided on the bearing housing.
E. Bearing housing shall be a separate component and not integral with the
casing to allow replacement of the bearings, seals and slaves without
removing the top half casing when fitted with a spacer coupling.
F. The impeller and side liners shall be manufactured from duplex stainless
steel.
G. Shaft seals shall be of the mechanical seal type. Coupling shall be of the
flexible spacer type. Pumps shall be factory assembled with the motor, but
PAGE 19
coupled pump / motor sets shall be mounted on a common base plate and
shall be realigned in the field after installation.

A. The external coating of the pump shall comprise two pack epoxy resin to a
minimum dry film thickness of 300 microns. The finish color shall be RAL
7035.
B. The internal part of the casing shall be coated with an approved two pack
epoxy coating system comprising primer, intermediate and finish coats which
shall be suitable for potable water. The total dry film thickness shall be not
op V1
less than 300 microns.
C. Epoxy coatings shall comply with BS 6920
D. The internal and external surfaces of the valve and the disc shall be blast
cleaned to SA 2.5, ISO 8501 standards.
C -
y
2.2.6 Marking
C
A. Each pump shall be identified by marking and labeling stainless steel
C
nameplate; plate dimensions shall be according to DIN 825 standard. The
nameplate shall be securely riveted in a readily accessible position on the
pump.
Q
2.3. Part3 Execution

2.3.1 Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions.
B. Verify dimensions of equipment to assure work will fit together properly and
conform to the arrangement shown on the drawings.
C. Accurately determine dimensions essential for proper location and orientation
of the equipment as per approved drawings.
2.3.2 Testing
2.3.2.1. Factory Tests

A. The Contractor/Manufacturer shall submit material test certificates for all
pump components in accordance with ISO 10474 3.1B certificate, for the
Owner/ Engineer approval prior to manufacturing processes.
The inspection requirements related to the material of construction of the
pumps shall include following as a minimum:
 Material checks (chemical composition and physical

properties);
 Casting defects and their classification;
 Non-destructive testing (NDT);
 Repairs procedures of castings and welding.
PAGE 20
B. The casings shall generally be hydro-tested to a pressure 1.5 times the duty
pressure, plus the suction pressure. However with low head pumps (5 bars
and below) the pumps casings shall be tested to 1.5 times shut-off head off
head plus the suction pressure.
C. Each pump/ motor set shall undergo performance test. Performance tests
shall be conducted with job motor and in accordance with BS EN ISO 9906.
The test curves shall be plotted at minimum of seven heads/flow rates ,
between zero flow and maximum continuous capacity, together with
efficiencies, NPSH, power etc.
D. Measured values shall be within acceptable tolerance in accordance to BS
op V1
EN ISO 9906. However for efficiency, negative tolerance is not acceptable.
E. The factory tests for each variable speed pump shall include, but shall not be
limited to:
 Mechanical running test;

C -
y

C String test with V.S.D.S. & job motor;
 NPSH(r);
C
 Discharge characteristics including power consumption &
efficiency;

Q
Water leakage measurements;

 Bearing temperature measurement;
 Noise measurement;
 Vibration measurement;
F. All instruments used during shop tests at manufacturer's premises shall be
calibrated by recognized laboratories. The calibration certificates shall not be
more than six month old and shall be inspected and certified prior to starting
the shop tests.
2.3.2.2. Site Acceptance Test

A. After complete installation and before commissioning, the Contractor shall
carry out site pump set tests in accordance with BS EN ISO 9906 Grade 1, to
be witnessed by The Owner/Engineer personnel, as well as pump and motor,
manufacturer's representatives.
B. The site tests for individual and parallel pump operation shall include but not
be limited to the following measured over the entire specified range:
 Rated flow
 Rated differential head
 Shut-off head
 Rated horsepower
 Vibration of the units
 Noise level
PAGE 21
 Water leakage measurements

 Bearing temperature measurements
C. The measured values shall be as indicated in the Guaranteed Design Tables

and in the pump set data sheets submitted by the Manufactures/Contractor.
D. Tolerance factors shall be in compliance with BS EN ISO 9906.
END OF SECTION
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 22
3. SURGE SUPPRESSION (SECTION 11440)

3.1. Part 1 General
3.1.1 Scope
A. This section of the specification gives the requirements for surge suppression
equipment materials, installation and testing thereof for irrigation systems.
op V1
The following sections of the specification shall be read in conjunction with
this section.
C -
y
C
Section 2630 GRP Pipes
C
Section 2640 Ductile Iron Pipes
Q
Section 2650 HDPE Pipes

Section 2660 uPVC Pipes
Section 11010 Compressed Air
Section 11423 Pumps
3.1.3 Standards
The works, equipment and materials shall be designed, manufactured and
erected according to the following applicable codes, standards (in their latest
edition where not otherwise specified)
ASME Sect. II Part C Welding Rods, Electrodes and Filter Metals.

ASME Sect. V Non Destructive Examination
ASME Sect. VIII Div. 1 – Latest Edition Pressure Vessels
ASME Sect. IX Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
API 5L Specification for Line Pipe
ASTM A 516 Specification for Plate Material
PAGE 23
ASTM A 105 Standard Specification for Forgings, Carbon Steel for

Piping Components
ASTM A106 Seamless Carbon Steel Pipes for High Temperature
ASTM A234 Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel
for Moderate and Elevated Temperature
ASTM A193 Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High
Temperature Service.
ASTM A194 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure
and High Temperature Service.
op V1
ANSI/ASME B16.9 Factory Made Wrought Steel Butt Welded
Fittings.
ANSI/ASME B16.10 Dimensions and Weights of Seamless and
Welded Steel Pipes
C -
y
BS EN 1993 The use of structural steel in building
C
BS EN ISO 1461 Hot dip galvanized coatings on iron and steel
articles
C
BS EN 10095 Heat resisting steels and nickel alloys
BS EN 10250-4 Open steel die forgings for general engineering
Q
purposes. Stainless steels

BS EN 10087 Free cutting steels. Technical delivery conditions for
semi-finished products, hot rolled bars and rods
BS EN 10083-1 Steels for quenching and tempering. General technical
delivery conditions
BS EN 10084 Case hardening steels. Technical delivery conditions
BS EN 10255 Non-alloy steel tubes suitable for welding and
threading. Technical delivery conditions
BS EN 10216-1 Seamless steel tubes for pressure purposes. Technical
delivery conditions
BS EN 10217-1 Welded steel tubes for pressure purposes. Technical
delivery conditions. Non-alloy steel tubes with specified room
temperature properties
BS 1092-1 Flanges and their joints. Circular flanges for pipes,
valves, fittings and accessories, PN designated. Steel Flanges
BS EN ISO 12944-1 Paints and varnishes. Corrosion protection of
steel structures by protective paint systems. General introduction
steel structures by protective paint systems. Classification of
environments
steel structures by protective paint systems. Design considerations
steel structures by protective paint systems. Types of surface and
surface preparation
PAGE 24

steel structures by protective paint systems. Protective paint systems
steel structures by protective paint systems Laboratory performance
test methods
steel structures by protective paint systems. Execution and supervision
of paintwork
BS EN ISO 14713-1 Zinc coatings. Guidelines and
recommendations for the protection against corrosion of iron and steel
op V1
in structures. General principles of design and corrosion resistance
BS EN ISO 14713-2 Zinc coatings. Guidelines and
recommendations for the protection against corrosion of iron and steel
in structures. Hot dip galvanizing
C -
y
BS EN ISO 10675-1 Non-destructive testing of welds. Acceptance
C
levels for radiographic testing. Steel, nickel, titanium and their alloys
3.1.4 Submittals
C
Q
a) In order to verify compliance with the specification the Contractor shall


a) The Contractor shall submit method statements to the Engineer for
i. Procedures for handling, storage and installation of the equipment

3.1.4.3. Working Drawings.

PAGE 25

a) The Contractor/Manufacturer shall submit material test certificates for all
b) The equipment shall be visually inspected regarding dimensions, materials

and workmanship by an inspector approved by the Engineer.
c) Prior to dispatch of any product and/or material from source the Contractor
op V1
d) Products and materials shall be from a manufacturer/supplier who

C -
approved equal.
y
C
e) Manufacturers shall have a minimum of 5 years manufacturing experience
C
f) To allow the Engineer to inspect the Works the Contractor shall give the
Q
activities on site.
i. Installation of the equipment.

ii. Testing of the equipment

a) Delivery, storage and handling of products and materials shall be in

ii. Equipment shall not come in contact with any sharp projections that
may cause damage to equipment during transportation loading and
unloading. Ensure that equipment is well secured during transit and
adequately supported. Do not allow equipment to overhang the end of
a vehicle during transportation.
iii. Ensure that equipment is protected from damage while being lifted.
The hooks used shall be padded.
iv. Store equipment on a flat level area and raised above the ground on
timber pallets or bearers.
PAGE 26
exposure to sunlight and in their original pickings until they are
needed.
b) The Contractor shall visually inspect all products upon delivery to site and

op V1
3.1 Part 2 Products

C -
y
C
a) The Contractor shall be responsible for a final assessment of the pressure
C
transients, based on the actual pump selection and final pipework design.
b) The Contractor shall undertake detailed analysis of the system at the
Q
detailed design stage, using a approved computer based hydraulic

transient analysis software package modeling the suppressed hydraulic
performance of the system. The final design of the surge suppression
equipment shall be determined using the modeling capabilities of the
software package.
c) A detailed surge analysis report shall be produced for each of the above
simulations. The form of the analysis and the report shall be such that it
can be reviewed by the Engineer. The cost of analysis shall be deemed to
have been included in the cost of the surge protection equipment.
d) Surge analysis modeling shall be undertaken by approved suitably
qualified and experienced specialists. The specialist shall be recognized by
a specialist hydraulic Institute.
e) The surge control system shall be designed to:
i. Limit maximum positive pressures in the delivery mains to the maximum
allowable surge rating for the pipe at all parts of the system.
ii. Limit minimum negative pressures in the suction & delivery mains to the
maximum allowable surge rating for the pipe at all parts of the system
(particularly important for uPVC, HDPE, GRP pipes).
iii. Prevent liquid column separation occurring where this is detrimental to
the system.
f) Surge control system performance shall be verified by field site tests at all
duty conditions. The Contractor shall provide a chart recorder and surge
measuring equipment to develop a permanent record for each duty tested.
g) Surge vessels shall be provided where either sewerage, potable water or
TSE pumping system pressure transients exceed the operating capabilities
PAGE 27
of the associated suction and delivery mains under electricity supply failure
conditions.
h) Surge vessels shall be designed in accordance with PD 5500 or
equivalent.
i) Due allowance shall be made to ensure all materials are compatible with
the medium being pumped and also compressed air.
j) The following options for surge suppression may be considered
i. bladder vessel
op V1
ii. damped reflux valves
iii. pump flywheel
k) Maximum surge pressures shall be controlled within the surge pressure

rating of the rising main pipe material.
C -
y
3.2.2 Surge Vessel
C
A. Surge vessels shall be fabricated from Carbon Manganese steel, and full
C
details shall be supplied by the Contractor. The vessel shall comprise two
domed ends with an intermediate cylindrical section. Vertical mounting is
preferred. Not less than two lifting lugs shall be provided for lifting of the
Q
complete vessel.
B. Corrosion Protection shall be in accordance with BS EN ISO 12944/ BS

EN ISO 14713 or equivalent and Section 9900.
C. The inlet and outlet pipework shall be designed to the same criteria as the
vessel terminating in flanged connections to BS1092 rated in association
with the pumping plant pipework. A drain line shall be provided complete
with isolating globe valve and flanged hose connection suitable for direct
coupling of a flexible 2" hose. The vessel shall be equipped minimum
flange nozzles for the following:
D. The following number of flanged nozzles shall be provided as minimum:
i. Safety pressure relief valve nozzle rated for not less than 150 %
working
ii. Water supply and discharge nozzle
iii. Access inspection manhole of suitable size
iv. Drain nozzle
v. Two level switch manifold
vi. Two level indicators. Calibrated level sight glass of the reflective type
covering the
vii. Full range of water level in the vessel and having top and bottom shut
off cocks hinged safety shutter and pressure/level calibrations carried
on a substantial engraved plate.
viii. Two air inlet nozzle
ix. Pressure gauge nozzle
PAGE 28
x. Level transmitter
xi. Solenoid air vent valve with isolation valve.
xii. Lifting lugs
xiii. Access ladder and platform,
xiv. Lifting lugs provided to enable handling of the vessel on site without
damage to the painted surfaces
E. The vessel shall be supplied complete with sight glass (es) and associated
fittings internal inspection port, manhole access, level control switches,
pressure gauges and safety pressure relief valves.
op V1
F. Support legs shall be thick section equal angle incorporating drilled feet for
levelling and bolting down of the vessel.
G. The Contractor shall supply two flanged entries for 20mm O.D. sight
glasses on the vessel having a minimum viewing length of 600 mm. The
C -
y
liquid level should be uninterrupted over the length. The maximum
C
operating pressure of the sight glass shall be higher than the design
pressure of the vessel. In the event of glass failure the vessel shall remain
pressurized.
C
H. The sight glass shall be provided with flanged bronze isolating valves
complete with ball check and displacement device, to prevent loss of liquid
Q
upon gauge breakage, plus drain cock. Site glasses shall be sun
protected.
I. The sight tube shall be protected with a stainless steel guard and all round
polycarbonate protector. When necessary the sight glass shall be
supported at the center from the surge vessel side wall.
J. Where applicable, an elliptical inspection port approximately 320 x 220mm

oval of the type that incorporates an internal "pull up" plate with self-
sealing joint tightened by exterior draw bolts on a port bar shall be
provided in the cylindrical section of the surge vessel below top water
level.
K. A man access hole of not less than 600mm internal diameter shall be
provided in the cylindrical section of the vessel to permit access from
ground level. This shall be covered with a suitable flange which shall be
bolted onto a fabricated flange on the manhole.
L. The man access flange cover shall be provided with a lifting swing davit
which shall incorporate a lifting screw, so that the whole flange cover may
be lifted up and then swung out from the entry port. The davit may be
fabricated onto the cylindrical wall of the vessel.
M. Service points shall be provided, four of these points shall be drilled and
tapped entries for level control switches, a further drilled and tapped entry
shall be required for the supply air and pressure gauge line and one other
entry point shall be provided with a flanged entry for the safety relief
valves. All entry points into the main access flange shall be bossed out to
suit the size of the tapping or hole.
N. A three way plug valve, with no neutral, shall be mounted on the main
access flange, with two in number safety relief valves mounted either side
PAGE 29
of the plug valve outlets. The safety valves shall be suitable for air/water
and rated for the pressures likely to be experienced. They shall be
adjustable and incorporate a manual lift device or wedge for testing
purposes.
O. A pressure gauge shall be mounted not less than 1m above floor level,
have a 100mm diameter face and be complete with isolating and a drip leg
drain.
P. All nuts and bolts for all flanges and fittings shall be stainless steel to BS
EN 10088.
Q. Gaskets shall be rubber insertion of other suitable Elastomer material
op V1
approved for use with sewerage or potable water (as applicable). Spiral
wound gaskets are not permitted.
3.2.3 Compressors
C -
A. Compressors shall be the oil-less piston type and shall be mounted
y
C
adjacent to the surge vessel. Compressors shall comply with the Section
11010 Section of the specification. Duty/standby compressors shall be
provided. Each compressor shall be capable of producing a volume of air
C
at the working pressure in conjunction with the surge vessel, be controlled
by two of the level probes mounted within the vessel, and have a capacity
of not less than 1 litre/second Free Air Delivery at ambient temperatures,
Q
humidity and pressure.

B. The compressors shall be of rugged design to provide a reliable and
efficient operation with a minimum of maintenance. In particular the
suction and discharge valves and pressure regulating system shall be
designed to guarantee a long and trouble free life. The compressor shall
be provided with air filtering, down-loading valve and the non- return valve
shall be fitted with resilient seats and be fitted directly to the surge vessel.
3.2.4 Automatic Air Volume Control System

A. The automatic air-volume control system, in conjunction with solenoid
valves, tank-mounted sensor probe and the air compressor units, shall
control the air/water ratio in the vessel, and maintain the air/water ratio
within a range compatible with the surge control system design. Remote
indication of excessive high or low water level in the tank shall be provided
brought out to electrical contacts for cabling by others.
B. An integral control panel shall be provided complete with all necessary
controls, relays, and time delay circuits, to fully control and actuate the air
add/vent solenoid valves. Solenoid valves shall be energized to open.
C. Solenoid valves for air service shall have forged brass or bronze bodies
with Teflon seats. Internal plungers, core tube, plunger spring, and cage
assembly shall be stainless steel 1.4404. Valve actuators shall be 240 volt
a.c. Seals shall be Teflon. Valves shall have a maximum operating
pressure and a maximum differential pressure of 2 MPa (290-psi).
Solenoid valves shall be energized to open.
PAGE 30
3.2.5 Marking
A. The Contractor shall mark clearly with their respective safe working
pressure in lettering not less than 80mm in height in gloss paint.
B. Each vessel shall be identified by marking and labelling stainless steel
nameplate. The nameplate shall be securely riveted in a readily accessible
position on the pump.
i. Name of manufacturer with address.

ii. Identification number.
op V1
iii. Client's Order number.
iv. Shell Thickness.
v. Corrosion allowance.
vi. Shell diameter.
vii. Head diameter.
C -
y
viii. Head thickness.
ix.
C
Head corrosion allowance.
x. Degree of x ray inspection.
C
xi. Tan length.
xii. Design Pressure.
xiii. Hydraulic Test Pressure.
Q
xiv. Weight.
xv. Length.
xvi. Inspection Date.
xvii. Inspectors initials.
xviii. S.W.P.

3.3.1 Installation
A. Installation of the surge suppression equipment shall be in accordance to
manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Contractor shall provide qualification details of the manufacturer's
technical expert to be assigned to the Contract. The technical expert shall
have expertise, experience and skills necessary for advising and
monitoring all aspects of transport, storage, handling, installation and
testing of surge protection system as appropriate.
C. The technical expert shall provide comprehensive technical assistance to
D. The Contractor shall provide copies of all instructions advice or reports
given by the manufacturer's technical expert to him. The technical expert
shall immediately inform the Engineer of any omission, variations and
detractions from the specification.
PAGE 31
3.3.2 Testing
A. The Contractor shall employ an approved Inspecting Authority for these
works in compliance with PD 5500 or equivalent.
B. The Contractor shall make provision for all the necessary work associated
with carrying out the Inspecting Authority' recommendations resulting
through the use of PD 5500 in assessing the design, manufacturing
procedure, documentation and testing of the vessel etc.
op V1
C. All welds shall be 100% visually tested prior to carrying out radiographic
testing.
D. All welds shall be 100% radiographic tested in accordance with All welds
shall be 100% radiographic tested in accordance with BS EN ISO 10675-1.
C -
y
C END OF SECTION
C
Q
PAGE 32
4. POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PUMPSETS

(SECTION 11455)
4.1 Part 1 General

op V1
C -
y
C
4.1.2 References
C
The pumpsets shall be in accordance with the requirements of BS EN ISO 14847.
Q
The safety requirements of the pumpset shall comply with BS EN 809.
4.2 Part 2 Products

4.2.1 Pump Performance
A. The Contractor shall state the following for each positive displacement pumpset.
i. Hydraulic performance.
ii. Efficiency.
iii. Absorbed power.
iv. Number of stages.
v. Maximum pump rotational speed.
vi. Power consumption at the guaranteed duty point.
B. Testing shall be in accordance with Section 15001: General M and E

requirements.
C. The Contractor shall supply full details of the site acceptance testing procedure
pertaining to the construction, commissioning and testing of the pumps with the
Tender.
D. The pumps shall be demonstrated to perform at the proposed organic loadings
and to achieve the required throughput and power consumption rates.
PAGE 33
4.2.2 Design Specification
4.2.2.1. General
A. The Contractor shall supply a general arrangement drawing of each pump set
with the Tender.
B. The pump unit shall be self-priming.
C. The Contractor shall state the maximum installation lift weight and also the
weights of all of the major components of the pump set with the Tender.
op V1
D. The pump set shall include clearly defined lifting points to allow safe, balanced
lifting.
E. The pump casing shall be designed to resist corrosion, abrasion and
mechanical shock loads imposed by constituents in the pumped liquid.
F.
C -
The pump noise emission shall be tested in accordance with BS EN 12639.
y
C
G. The minimum flange rating shall be PN16 in accordance with BS EN 1092.
H. The pump shall be supplied with an information plate with the following
C
information:
i. Pump unit supplier.
Q
ii. Pump unit type.

iii. Pump unit serial number.
iv. Flow rate at GDP (l/s).
v. Discharge pressure at the GDP (m).
vi. Operating speed at the GDP.
4.2.2.2. Corrosion Protection

A. Pump sets shall be in accordance with Section 15004: Corrosion Protection.
4.2.2.3. Guarding
A. Guarding shall be in accordance with BS EN 12100-1 and BS EN 953.
4.2.2.4. Hazardous area requirements:

A. The pumping installation shall be in accordance with Section 16680: ATEX
Guidelines.
4.2.2.5. Drive motors:

A. Drive Motors shall comply with Section16000: Electric Motors.
B. The pump shall be supplied with an information plate with the following
information:
i. Pump unit supplier.
ii. Pump unit type.
iii. Pump unit serial number.
PAGE 34
iv. Flow rate at GDP (l/s).

v. Discharge pressure at the GDP (m).
vi. Operating speed at the GDP.
4.2.3 Peristaltic Pumps

A. The hose shall be easily replaceable.
B. The Contractor shall state the lubricant type used for lubrication of the
shoes/rollers.
op V1
C. The rotor assembly shall incorporate a rotor and a number of easily replaceable
shoes or rollers.
D. If the rotor assembly employs shoes, then shimming shall be required.
E. The rotor shaft shall be joined to the motor shaft or the gearbox output shaft.
C -
F. The rotor shaft bearings shall have a minimum L10h bearing life of 50,000 hours
y
C
at GDP. Lubrication points for bearings, if required, shall be such that removal of
guarding is not required.
C
G. The gearbox shall be capable of transmitting the maximum output torque
generated by the motor and shall have a service factor of 1.5.
H. The gearbox shall have readily accessible oil fill and drain plugs.
Q
I. Transmission couplings shall have a service factor of 1.5.

J. The Contractor shall review the requirement for pulsation dampers on all pump
units.
K. An appropriate pressure relief device shall be fitted in the pump discharge
pipework.
L. Test specification: All pressure containing parts of the pump shall be tested
hydrostatically in accordance with BS EN 12162.
4.2.4 Progressive Cavity Pumps

A. The pump shall be capable of passing a 100mm diameter solid sphere.
B. The direction of rotation of the rotor shall be clearly and indelibly marked on
the casing with an arrow.
C. The inlet branch of the casing shall incorporate ports to allow the clearing of
blockages and to allow inspection of the rotor drive components.
D. The rotor shall be electrolytically chromium plated in accordance with BS 464,
and shall have a minimum coating thickness of 200microns at the rotor major
diameter.
E. The profile of the drive components shall be such as to avoid the
entanglement of fibrous material.
F. If coupling rods are used, the joints shall be sealed and shall not require
servicing.
PAGE 35
G. It shall be possible to fit a cartridge type mechanical seal to the pump (as a
replacement for a standard mechanical seal) without the need to modify the
seal housing.
H. It shall be possible to remove the mechanical seal without the requirement for
special tools.
I. If packed gland seals are installed, leakage collection facilities shall be
provided, including associated pipework.
4.2.5 Ram Pumps
op V1
A. Ram pumps shall be in accordance with BS EN ISO 16330.
B. Components in the body of the pump subject to wear shall be easily removable
for refurbishment or replacement.
C. All mating surfaces shall be accurately machined and be provided with deep
register, dowels and spigots where necessary to ensure alignment.
C -
y
D. The pump cylinder/barrel shall be supplied with a wear resistant coating.
E.
C
The Contractor shall state the coating details.
C
F. The Contractor shall state the sealing arrangement between the ram / pump
body.
G. If flushing or cooling of the pump seals are to be employed, the Contractor shall
Q
state the method to be supplied.

H. Seals shall be replaceable without removing the ram or connecting rod.
I. Valving: Double inlet and outlet valves shall be supplied.
J. Ball and flap valves shall be supplied with removable covers to facilitate the
replacement of worn valve components or to clear blockages.
K. Valves shall be designed to prevent chatter.
L. Ball valves shall be designed to create bias flow conditions.
M. The pump shall be driven by a dedicated hydraulically driven self contained
power unit.
N. The hydraulic power unit shall be factory assembled.
4.2.6 Rotary Lobe Pumping Units

A. The pumpset shall be in accordance with BS EN ISO 14847.
B. The pump unit shall be of twin rotor design with lobed rotors mounted on
separate parallel shafts, counter rotating within the pump casing.
C. Shaft rotation shall be synchronised to ensure that there is no contact between
lobes or lobes and casing.
D. The unit shall be designed to allow pumping in either direction with minimum
reversed flow of the pumped liquid.
E. The casing/housing shall include an access cover in the front of the casing to
allow easy access to the wetted parts. Front covers weighing over 25kg shall be
hinged or have lifting eyes fitted to allow safe lifting.
PAGE 36
O. Rotors shall be replaceable without the need to replace inlet outlet pipework and
the mechanical seals. Any special tools required to carry out this task shall be
supplied with the pump.
P. The rotors/shafts shall be marked to ensure correct installation/synchronisation
on re-installation.
Q. The pump unit shall incorporate mechanical type cartridge seals. Seal fixing
screws shall not make direct contact with the shafts.
R. The casing shall incorporate integrally cast mounting feet with machined faces.
S. The casing shall incorporate easily accessible oil filling and drainage points that
op V1
will allow in situ oil replacement/ replenishment. An oil level window/ sight glass
shall be supplied.
T. Shafts shall be one piece construction, machined all over.
U. Shafts shall be sized to accommodate all possible loads over the specified
C -
operating range of the pump. The first critical shaft speed shall be in excess of
y
C
the maximum shaft speed.
V. Shafts shall be individually withdrawable for maintenance.
C
W. Timing gears shall be precision manufactured involute form, spur(straight cut) or
helical gears. The gearbox shall be designed to accommodate any thrust forces
generated by the timing gears.
Q
X. The timing gears shall be supplied with a separate oil chamber to the bearings.
Y. All bearings shall have an L10h bearing life of 50,000 hours at GDP.
Z. Bearing housings shall be designed to prevent the ingress of dust and water.
AA. The maximum speed reduction allowable using belts/pulleys shall be 3:1.
BB. Belts shall have a minimum service factor of 1.5.
4.2.7 Single Diaphragm Pumpsets

A. The pumpset shall be in accordance with BS EN 16330.
B. The pump unit shall be self-priming and capable of dry running without damage.
C. The pump unit shall be designed so that the design assembly and the
diaphragm can be removed without disturbing the inlet/outlet pipework.
D. Components in the body/casing that may be prone to wear shall be easily
removable for refurbishment or replacement.
E. All mating surfaces shall be accurately machined and be provided with deep
register, dowels and spigots where necessary to ensure alignment.
F. Ball and flap valves shall be supplied with removable covers to facilitate the
removal of worn valve components or the removal of debris and blockages.
G. Valves shall be designed to prevent chatter. A method of adjusting the valve
response to hydraulic fluctuations in the system shall be supplied.
H. Ball valves shall be designed to create bias flow conditions.
PAGE 37
I. The pump gearbox shall incorporate easily accessible oil filling and drainage
points that will allow in situ oil replacement/ replenishment without excessive
spillage. A means of checking the oil level shall be supplied.
J. All bearings shall have an L10h bearing life of 50,000 hours.
K. An adjustable crank stroke facility shall be provided to allow for changes in flow
rate. If specialist tools are required to action this, then they shall be supplied
with the pump.
L. The connecting rod shall be spring loaded to prevent hydraulic lock and /or
cushion forces applied to the diaphragm due to solids trapped beneath it.
op V1
M. Solid connecting rods shall not be used.
N. The drive end of the connecting rod shall incorporate rolling element bearings.
Plain bearings shall not be used. The bearing shall be supplied with an
accessible lubrication point.
O.
C -
The pump shall be driven by a dedicated, self-contained, hydraulic power unit.
y
P.
C
The hydraulic system shall be a “single pass” “open loop” design.
Q. The hydraulic power unit shall be factory assembled and shall comprise the
C
following:-
i. Hydraulic system.
Q
ii. Electric motor.

iii. Base frame.
iv. A water or air blast oil cooler.
v. Control panel.
R. The hydraulic system shall include but not be limited to the following:-
i. An oil reservoir.
ii. A hydraulic pump.
iii. A valve stack with directional flow control valve.
iv. A pressure relief valve.
v. A full flow return filter and suction strainer.
vi. Hoses and hydraulic pipework.
S. All filter elements shall be easily accessible and replaceable.

T. The final connections between the pump and the hydraulic power unit shall be
by flexible hydraulic hoses.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 38
5. DISINFECTION (SECTION 11490)
5.1 Part 1 General

op V1
C -
y
5.2 Part 2
C
Products
C
5.2.1 Disinfection Systems
5.2.1.1. General
Q
Disinfection shall be by sodium hypochlorite system or Ultraviolet (UV) system unless

stated otherwise in the particular specification.
A. The installation shall be designed and installed to ensure total system safety and
to ensure that there is no risks to the health of employees and other persons that
will be present in the vicinity of the system.. Equipment to be installed in
hazardous areas shall comply with the specialist manufacturers design for this
purpose.
B. A mixed Chlorine Contact Stage shall be provided with a minimum of 30 minutes
contact at pH 5.0 to 9.0 at the peak flow rate for the works.
C. All equipment to be in accordance with Section 15004: Corrosion Protection.
5.2.2 Gaseous Dosing

5.2.2.1. General
A. Gaseous dosing systems shall comprise pressurized and liquefied gas drums or
cylinders complete with automatic changeover equipment, gas feeders and
solution injection. All gas dosing systems shall be based upon the vacuum and
remote injection principle.
B. The safety arrangements for installations handling chlorine in cylinders and
drums from 33kg to 1.1 Ton capacity shall comply with the advice within HS/G40
- Chlorine from drums and cylinders.
C. Site installation and commissioning teams shall be properly trained which should
include both 'off the job' and 'on the job' aspects. An emergency procedure shall
include how gas releases may be dealt with safely by site installation and
commissioning teams.
PAGE 39
5.2.2.2. Gas Storage

A. Depending on the gas consumption, liquefied gas shall be stored in either
cylinders or drums. All gas store rooms shall be provided with gas leak detection
appropriate to the gas being stored, and automatic ventilation equipment. Drum
stores shall be provided with automatic drum isolation valves, runway beams and
hoist mounted weighing equipment, together with a purpose designed drum
lifting beam.
B. All storerooms shall be constructed of fire resistant materials and shall be secure
from unauthorized persons. Drums shall be stored in a position where they are
not vulnerable to fire or heat radiation from an adjacent fire.
op V1
C. A separate chlorine bottle / drum store shall be provided adjacent to the chlorine
dosing equipment room.
5.2.2.3. Automatic Isolation
A.
C -
The discharge from drums shall be protected by an automatic isolation valve
y
C
system. The system shall either be a proprietary system, or it shall comply with
the following Clauses.
B. The automatic control of the isolation valve system shall be from the gas leak
C
detection equipment.
C. For gas leak testing purposes, a remotely mounted manual opening facility shall
Q
be provided for each isolation valve. These shall be spring return push buttons
with engraved labels "Press and Hold to Open Drum No 1 (No 2) Valve" and shall
be incorporated into a shutdown control panel (mounted in a safe area) with the
following features.
i. Lamp (Green)-Drum No 1 Valve Open.
ii. Lamp (Green)-Drum No 2 Valve Open.
iii. Hand/Off/Auto Selector-Drum No 1 Valve.
iv. Hand/Off/Auto Selector-Drum No 2 Valve.
v. Push Button-Press and Hold to Open Drum No 1 Valve.
vi. Push Button-Press and Hold to Open Drum No 2 Valve.
vii. Push Button-Reset System.
5.2.2.4. Isolation Valve

A. The valve shall be a two way PTFE taper plug valve suitable for use with dry
chlorine. The body shall be of LCB carbon steel and plug of monel metal.
5.2.2.5. Actuator and Pneumatic System

A. The automatic isolation valve shall be a spring return, giving fail safe operation.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the air supply to the valve. The supply
line shall incorporate a moisture trap and drain located as near as possible to the
electrically operated solenoid valves to be used for isolation valve control.
C. These valves shall operate from a 110 volt 50 Hz electricity supply and shall be
mounted outside the control box. Valve terminal enclosures shall be fully
shrouded and fitted with a propriety cable compression gland. Final connection to
PAGE 40
these valves shall be via short lengths of flexible multicore cable from an
adjacent termination box.
D. The air supply to the automatic isolation valves shall be suitably rated nylon
tubing supported in 25mm PVC conduit.
E. A sufficient length of tubing shall be provided adjacent to the automatic isolation

valve in order to facilitate maintenance and valve height adjustment.
5.2.2.6. Isolation Valve Connections

A. The connections to the automatic isolation valves shall be 2 No special elbows
op V1
with a 3/4" BSP female rotary union for connection to the existing drum valve and
a 3/4" BSP male taper for connection to the isolation valve. A 3/4" male/male
nipple shall be provided on the upstream side of the isolation valve for connection
to the gas header pipework system.
5.2.2.7. C -
Isolation Valve Support
y
A.
C
The pneumatically operated isolation valves shall be supported in a manner
which facilitates adjustment in three planes. In this way the pipework connections
C
adjacent to the valve will be relieved of the weight of the valve and actuator.
B. The method of support shall be clearly indicated in the tender return together with
Q
the method of adjustment.
5.2.2.8. Tubular Guard Railing

A. The Contractor shall supply and install a robust tubular guard rail to protect the
vulnerable valve and pipework arrangement on the discharge side of the drum
from swinging drums.
B. The framework shall be fabricated in mild steel tubular sections and painted in
accordance with Standard Specification Section 15004: Corrosion Protection.
C. The frame floor anchor plates and holding down bolts shall be designed to
withstand an impact from a swinging chlorine drum and the tenderer shall
indicate the size of tube, and floor plate size.
D. The guard railing may also be utilised for the support of the automatic isolation
valves.
5.2.2.9. Gas Headers

A. The Contractor shall provide a suitable manifold and header system to convey
gas from the cylinders via the changeover panel to the associated gas feeder.
B. The pipework shall include flexible connectors, isolating valves, interceptor traps,
gas filters and all necessary mild steel pipework.
C. On drum chlorine systems, a combined liquid trap and gas filter shall be provided
complete with a self-regulating heater.
D. Pipework and valves shall be designed and constructed to withstand the
pressure and corrosive nature of the gas. Welding, if used, shall be to the
relevant British Standard or equivalent for pipework conveying corrosive liquids
under pressure. Suitable isolating valves and couplings shall be provided to each
major item of plant to facilitate removal for maintenance. Pressure testing of the
PAGE 41
pipework and valves shall be carried out by the contractor to the approval of
ADSSC, and shall comply with the relevant British Standard or equivalent.
5.2.2.10. Pipework
A. The Contractor shall provide and install all pipework and valves etc. necessary
for the complete installation within the chemical dosing rooms.
B. All pipework shall be neatly laid and securely fixed in position. Similarly all valves
shall be securely fixed, clearly numbered and labelled in accordance with the
operating instructions.
C. Pipework shall be clean, dry and free from oil and grease and shall not be
op V1
cleaned with organic solvents.
5.2.2.11. Chlorine Drum Support Rollers

A. Drum installations shall be complete with drum rollers for drums that are in use
C -
y
and also in storage. and empty.
C
5.2.2.12. Cylinder Clamps
C
A. The multiple cylinder racks shall be provided with positive restraint clamps.
These clamps shall be either profile clamps or chain restraints which prevent
movement of the cylinders from the stored position.
Q
5.2.2.13. Changeover Panel

A. The Contractor shall supply an automatic changeover panel which will change
from duty gas supply to standby in the event of low pressure on the duty supply.
The changeover panel shall include duty/standby indication, bottle change
required, and the pressure of gas in the duty cylinder.
B. The changeover panel shall be mechanically operated and be complete with

pressure reducing valves to prevent re-liquifaction of the gas and changeover
valve block heater. The line between the changeover panel and the gas feeder
shall incorporate individual failsafe vacuum gas regulator valves.
Warning and Safety Notices
A. The Contractor shall provide and fix engraved Traffolyte labels with Green
lettering 20mm high on a Red background. Externally mounted labels shall be
provided with a stainless steel backplate for added support. The labels shall be:
i. External to the gas store.
WARNING CHLORINE AND SULPHUR DIOXIDE STORE. DO NOT
ENTER WHEN WARNING LIGHT AND ALARM IS ON
ii. Internal to the Gas Store, in a prominent location:
WARNING IF ALARM SOUNDS ALL PERSONNEL MUST VACATE

THIS DRUM STORE
B. The Contractor shall provide first aid advice in Arabic & English displayed as
detailed below, together with a resuscitation placard on Chlorine Gas
installations.
PAGE 42
First Aid Advice
First Aid - Chlorine and Sulphur Dioxide
op V1
A. Chlorine & Sulphur are toxic and highly irritating gases immediately affecting the
eyes, nose, throat and chest. Anyone so affected must be removed to fresh air
and medical treatment sought.
Emergency Treatment Notice
A.
C -
The notice shall contain:
y
i. Call the ambulance by telephoning 999, using the nearest telephone
C
at...................
ii. If breathing is weak or has ceased attempt to revive by mouth to mouth
C
resuscitation, combined with the administration of oxygen.
iii. Make the casualty comfortable, prop him up in a reclining position.
iv. Loosen the clothing around the neck and chest.
Q
v. Try to keep the casualty calm.

vi. If the casualty's skin or eyes are affected, drench the affected parts with
water.
vii. If the casualty's clothing is contaminated it should be removed.
Ventilation
A. Drum stores, bottle stores, Chlorinator rooms, Sulphonator rooms and
Ammoniator rooms shall all be provided with forced ventilation systems, design
to produce at least 6 volume changes of air per hour, and arranged to provide a
negative pressure within the rooms.
B. Automatic control of the extract fans shall be via the gas leak detection
equipment.
C. Manual control of the fans shall be provided from a safe area outside the rooms.
Manual control shall be available regardless of the action of the gas leak
detection equipment. The manual control shall be arranged so that it is not
possible for ventilation fans to be turned off when the automatic system is
calling for the fans to be turned on.
D. Extract grills and fans shall be positioned at a low level with the fan exhaust
arranged to discharge the vented gas away from pedestrian walkways and
roadways. If necessary, ducting to a point above building eaves level shall be
provided to achieve this, subject to approval by the ADSSC. Wet Scrubbing
systems to be installed in accordance with Standard Specification Section
15080: Odour Control.
E. Intake grilles shall be positioned at a high level and arranged so that the entire
contents of the room are fully replenished with fresh air when the extract fans
are running.
PAGE 43
Proportional Gas Feed Systems

A. Chlorine, Sulphur Dioxide and Ammonia shall be dosed via duty/standby gas
feeders, of the all vacuum/remote ejector principle.
B. The gas feeder shall dose gas automatically in proportion to flow, chlorine
levels, or residual chlorine values, whichever may be applicable.
Gas Feeder
A. Gas feeders shall be located such that access for maintenance is unobstructed.
Rear access is acceptable providing a minimum of 1 metre free space is
op V1
available for egress in emergencies.
B. The gas feeder shall incorporate the following features:
i. Positive Gas Shut Off - in the event of loss of vacuum, gas shall be
C -
prevented from entering the system.
y
ii.
C
High Level Vent -in the event of gas vent, gas shall be directed to a high
level external non-hazardous area.
C
iii. Vacuum Gauge - indicating system vacuum state.
iv. Flowmeter - indicating as flow thorough feeder.
Q
Motive Water
A. Motive water pumps shall be multi-stage, stainless steel, ring construction and
provided on a duty/standby basis. Pumps shall be provided complete with
isolation valves, reflux valves and delivery pressure gauges. Suction and
delivery pressure gauges shall be provided on each pump and downstream of
flow control valves where flow splitting is provided.
B. Ammoniator motive water systems shall be provided complete with base
exchange water softeners, complete with local salt saturator for regeneration or
from bulk salt saturators if employed at the site.
C. The water softener shall be dual auto-rotation element units complete with auto-
timers and regeneration controller.
Dosing Control
A. Microprocessor based process controllers shall provide automatic control,
changeover, monitoring and transmission facilities for disinfection control. The
unit shall not be susceptible to memory corruption during normal electrical
supply transients and shall be protected by a stabilised power supply.
B. The unit shall provide a continuous display of the actual chlorine residual and
also indicate set residual parameters on demand. A separate readout shall also
be provided to give operational data including alarm settings etc.
C. Each unit shall be provided complete with its own residual signal transmitter.
D. An integral printer shall provide the following status data on its respective
system, on demand or at pre set intervals.
i. Date.
ii. Time.
PAGE 44
iii. Residual chlorine levels.

iv. Water Flow.
v. Gas Flow.
vi. Alarm Conditions (high and low residual).
Analyser Cells
A. Each sampling point shall be selected by the Contractor who shall include in his
supply individual analyser cells. This unit shall be supplied with buffer pump and
containers together with pressure switches and sample/by pass facilities.
B. The filter shall be mounted outside the unit in a convenient location and in a way
op V1
which does not require dismantling of the access cover.
C. Sufficient buffer solution shall be provided for preliminary testing and tests
before completion.
D. The system shall provide for triple validation of the analyser cells and supply
C -
y
lines.
C
Gas Leak Detection Equipment
A. Drum stores, bottle stores, Chlorinator rooms, Sulphonator rooms and
C
Ammoniator rooms shall be provided with a gas sensing alarm system.
B. Each store/room shall be provided with sensors mounted in positions to achieve
Q
maximum effectiveness with Chlorine and Sulphur Dioxide sensors mounted at

a low level, and Ammonia sensors mounted at a high level. Multiple sensors
shall be provided in larger stores/rooms where single sensor may not effectively
sense all leaks.
C. Alarm control panels shall be mounted in a safe area outside the rooms, and
shall operate via an integral battery backup system. Where available, the
system may be powered from a central Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
system.
D. Alarm control panels shall incorporate:

i. A meter displaying the concentration of the gas leak in mg/l.
ii. Warning lamps or LED's for each gas sensor to indicate.
iii. 1st stage leak at 3.0 mg/l.
iv. 2nd stage leak at 10.0 mg/l.
v. Alarm/control contacts for.
vi. Controlling Drum Shutdown Systems (where applicable).
vii. Controlling Ventilation Fans.
viii. Controlling Door Access Warning Lamps.
ix. Signalling to Central Control Room or SCADA System.
x. Signalling to a Site Telemetry Outstation.
xi. Instrument fault lamp or LED and warning contact.
xii. Audible/visual warning device.
xiii. Power 'ON' or instrument 'HEALTHY' lamp or LED.
PAGE 45
E. The automatic Chlorine drum change-over system shall be arranged to change

from the duty drum to the standby drum when the 1st stage leak level of 3.0
mg/l is reached. Further drum changeover shall be inhibited until the system is
manually reset.
F. Chlorine drums shall be automatically isolated when the 2nd stage leak level of
10 mg/l is reached. Once isolated, drums shall remain isolated until the system
is reset and the drum automatic isolation valves manually re-opened. Operation
of the automatic isolation system shall initiate a works shut down.
G. Ventilation fans in the affected room shall automatically be switched ON when
the 1st stage leak level of 3.0 mg/l is reached. Ventilation fans in the affected
op V1
room shall automatically be switched OFF when the 2nd stage leak level of 10.0
mg/l is reached. If the leak level falls below the 1st stage leak level, the
ventilation fans shall continue to run on for 10 minutes before stopping.
H. Each access door to stores or rooms shall be provided with warning lamps to
C -
permit or prohibit entry. A green lamp shall indicate that it is safe to enter, at
y
C
leak levels below the 3.0 mg/l threshold: A red lamp shall indicate that a 1st or
2nd stage leak has been detected. Each lamp box colour shall be provided with
a minimum of two lamps so that a single lamp failure does not render the
C
indication in-operative.
I. Each building containing a store or room shall be provided with an external
Q
flashing/rotating beacon coloured RED and an audible warning device. The

audible device shall produce an output of 106dB(A) at 1 metre and shall remain
sounding until such time as the alarm is accepted/cancelled, and it shall self
cancel after 5 minutes. The flashing/rotating beacon shall remain operational
whilst 1st or 2nd stage leak persists.
J. The location of the external flashing/rotating beacon shall be such that it is
readily visible to persons entering the site via the main access route.
K. The performance of the works is to be assessed by analysis of samples taken
and analyzed by the Purchaser from the following points within the works.
i. Raw water - prior to any treatment.
ii. Pre-disinfection.
iii. Intermediate Disinfection.
iv. Post Disinfection
L. Samples are to be collected and shall be used for assessment of performance
against the requirements specified.
5.2.3 On Site Generation of Chlorine
5.2.3.1. General
A. Sodium hypochlorite generation, batching, dosing and dechlorination shall be
automatically controlled. The Transformer/Rectifier and control panel shall be
located in a separate room from the electrolyser and hypochlorite storage tanks
where mounted internally. The location of plant within the generation room shall
take into account local zoning restrictions.
B. Generation rooms shall be provided with either one full wall free air ventilator or
automatic forced extract air systems. High level ventilators shall be provided.
PAGE 46
5.2.3.2. Salt Saturators

A. Salt saturators shall be provided for the storage of fully saturated salt solution
(brine). The total storage capacity shall be not less than 1 months consumption
at maximum works output. The salt saturators shall be approved with regard to
FDA Regulations for use of non-toxic materials.
B. The saturators shall be rated for the peak salt consumption requirement of
overnight generation of sodium hypochorite and incorporate an internal suction
discharge limiter to prevent tracking of partially saturated salt solution. The units
op V1
shall be supplied and installed complete with the filter bed gravel and first salt fill
on foundations prepared by the Civil Contractor to the Contractors
requirements. The saturators shall be suitable for outdoor use.
C. The saturators shall include
i.
C -
Inlet and Outlet connection manifolds.
y
ii.
iii.
C
Tanker charging connection and manifold.
Overflow to drain.
iv. Vent pipe complete with dust arrester.
C
v. Upper and lower level manway inspection points.
vi. Shrouded inlet float valve.
vii. Surrounding bund of not less than 110% of the Saturator Volume.
Q
viii. Visual indication of salt level.
5.2.3.3. Brine Feed

A. Brine feed through the electrolyser to the hypochlorite storage tank shall be
provided on a duty/standby basis. Fixed speed, manually adjustable stroke
pumps shall be suitable for this application.
B. The feed line shall be fitted with a flow monitor and a sampling point for brine
testing. The contract shall include a salinity monitor for this purpose.
5.2.3.4. Electrolyser
A. Rating of the electrolysers shall be dependant on the requirement for generation
of sodium hypochlorite during the off peak period. Multiple electrolysers shall be
provided to achieve the required capacity. Standby shall be provided by either
one spare unit or 25% of the capacity which ever is the greatest, held in store at
the site.
B. The anode/cathode is a consumable item within the generation package.
Manufacturers offer a five year guarantee with regard to life consumed during a
five year cycle of operation. The Contractor shall transfer this guarantee to the
Purchaser which shall become effective from the date of the Take-Over. The
Contractor shall therefore ensure that the current density value is
commensurate with a five year cycle of operation.
C. The electrolysers shall be rack mounted such that access to all connections is
within view of maintenance staff. Disconnection and replacement shall be
possible without associated pipework disturbance.
D. Hydrogen release from the electrolysers shall be manifolded for transportation
with the sodium hypochlorite for high level discharge in the hypochlorite storage
PAGE 47
tank. The sodium hypochlorite feed line shall incorporate a flow switch, for
process shut-down in the event of low flow, a temperature switch for over
temperature shut down of the process and a sample point for sodium
hypochlorite sampling.
E. All equipment selected for use in a hazardous area shall have undergone an
appropriate conformity assessment procedure (CAP) to demonstrate
compliance with the essential health and safety requirements of European
Directive 94/9/EC (ATEX 95), as enacted in the UK by the Equipment and
Protective Systems Intended For Use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres
Regulations 1996 and the Equipment and Protective Systems (Amended)
Regulations 2001.
op V1
F. The water feed to the electrolyser shall be 'softened' as required via
duty/standby water softeners with automatic changeover.
G. A heat exchanger shall be included with the electrolyser to transfer heat
generated in the product to the incoming diluted brine solution in order to
C -
y
maximise the overall efficiency of the unit. Where this may not be sufficient, pre-
C
heating with an electric immersion heater shall be provided.
C
5.2.3.5. Sodium Hypochlorite Storage
A. The sodium hypochlorite storage tanks shall be provided on a duplicate basis.
Q
The capacity shall be sufficient for 48 hours consumption at the maximum works
output. The tank shall be suitable for external application and shall include
forced ventilation for hydrogen dispersion. The tank(s) shall be installed in
bund(s) of not less than 110% of the tank volume.
B. Duty/Standby ventilation fans shall be provided to supply air into the storage
tank for high level discharge with dispersed hydrogen from the gaseous space
above the stored liquid. Flow sensors shall monitor fan operation and shut down
the generation process in the event of low flow detection.
5.2.3.6. Sodium Hypochlorite Dosing

A. Dosing of sodium hypochorite shall be via duty/standby dosing pumps. Control
of the pumps shall be related to the flowrate through the works chlorine
disinfection requirements, and residual requirements.
B. Overall control of the whole system shall be by means of a programmable logic
controller (PLC) which shall be configured so that failure of the PLC shall not
result in danger to personnel or equipment.
5.2.3.7. Pipework
A. All pipework fittings and valves associated with the generation equipment shall
be rigidly fixed and supported, pipe routes over floor areas shall be adequately
protected against accidental damage.
5.2.3.8. Electrical Installation

A. The electrical installation shall be in accordance with Division 16 of this
specification.
5.2.3.9. Transformer / Rectifier
PAGE 48
A. A duty transformer/rectifier shall provide low voltage DC for the electrolyser. The
unit shall be free standing, the input shall be 415V, 3ph, a.c., output should not
be greater than 24V dc with full wave rectification.
B. The unit be in accordance with the specification Division 16 and be capable of
operation in ambient temperatures up to 40oC. Cooling shall be via natural
convection ventilation.
C. The rectifier shall include:
i. A DC voltmeter.
ii. A DC Ammeter.
op V1
iii. A DC Centre zero voltmeter.
iv. Lockable input isolator.
v. Main input contactor.
vi.
C -
On/Off push buttons.
y
C
vii. Hand/Off/Auto selector.
viii. Current level setting.
C
ix. Mains "on" lamp.
x. DC "live" lamp.
Q
xi. Hours run meter.
D. All status and alarms shall be provided at the signals and alarms marshalling
box.
5.2.3.10. Control Panel

A. A control panel shall be mounted adjacent to the Transformer/Rectifier to
provide overall system control. The panel shall be in accordance with Standard
Specification Section 16020 - Factory Built Assemblies of Switchgear and
Control Gear.
B. The Panel shall include indication and control equipment for the process.
C. In particular the following alarms shall be provided locally and at the signals and
alarms marshalling box:
i. Improper voltage.
ii. Rectifier failure.
iii. Protection voltage failure.
iv. Storage tank low level.
v. Low/high electrolyte temperature.
vi. Low electrolyte level.
vii. Low air flow.
viii. Bund flood.
ix. Low water flow .
x. Dosing control high and low residual.
PAGE 49
5.2.4 Ultra Violet (UV) Disinfection
5.2.4.1. General
A. UV disinfection is a system that uses ultraviolet light to kill micro-organisms,
including bacteria, viruses and other pathogens. Obviously, the UV light cannot
have any effect upon the micro-organisms in a given water stream if it is blocked
by solid material i.e. suspended solids. It can therefore clearly be seen that
firstly, ultraviolet disinfection cannot be guaranteed to be 100% effective, and
secondly that the effectiveness of the system is directly related to the
transmissivity (i.e. turbidity) of the medium. Ultraviolet disinfection has the
op V1
advantage of being a non-invasive method of disinfection. It has the
disadvantage of an instantaneous method of disinfection, i.e. there is no
residual effect and hence no guarantee that reinfection can be prevented. These
properties make ultraviolet disinfection particularly suitable for applications
where 100% disinfection is not considered essential and where the presence of
C -
a residual chemical would be deemed undesirable. These are generally the
y
C
preferences governing wastewater discharges to the marine and fluvial
environment, and thus ultraviolet is generally the preferred method of
disinfection for these applications.
C
B. The UV disinfection equipment shall be designed with modular duty/standby
facilities such that the failure of a particular UV module does not prevent full flow
Q
from the site.

C. The UV equipment shall be designed as to provide a minimum dose of 25
mWs/cm2. The design shall provide a calculation indicating how the
arrangement and number of the lamps has been determined and how the
design shall achieve this minimum dosage. The calculation shall take into
consideration the following
i. Lamp failure.
ii. Fouling.
iii. Turbidity.
iv. Water Transmissivity.
v. Presence of Organic materials.
vi. Presence of Inorganic materials.
vii. Presence of Fats, Oil and Greases (FOG).
viii. Total Suspended Solids.
ix. Particle size range.
x. Lamp submergence (High level and low level alarms).
xi. Measures to reduce flow surges.
xii. Flow monitoring.
xiii. Ageing of lamps.
xiv. Module design (particularly regarding required turbulence).
D. The design shall incorporate an automatic chemical cleaning system. Each lamp
shall also be provided with a dedicated wiping system. The cleaning system may
PAGE 50
be powered by compressed air or hydraulically. Where a compressed air system

is used duty/standby compressors shall be supplied, where a hydraulic system
is used duty/standby hydraulic power units shall be provided.
E. UV Disinfection shall only be used in situations where the treated sewage
effluent of a high and consistent quality. A UV installation shall allow for
turbidities below 1 NTU and transmissivities greater than 90% in a 10mm test
cell. The design basis shall be made clear at the time of detailed design.
F. The lamps shall have a guaranteed minimum lifetime based on maximum power
output. The UV system may be used intermittently or turned on permanently for
long periods. This parmeters shall be included within the system design.
op V1
G. The intensity of the UV light and the transmissivity of the wastewater stream
shall be monitored continuously. Adjustments to the system to improve the
effectiveness of the disinfection achieved shall be made with respect to this on-
line monitoring.
H.
C -
The intensity detector shall measure the magnitude and wavelength of the
y
actual UV dose emitted. The wavelength should be in the range of 240 –
C
290nm. A local readout of dose received should be provided.
I. A failure of the UV system to provide the minimum radiation dose shall cause an
C
alarm to be raised.
J. Each UV system shall have associated with it an in-line turbidity meter.
Q
K. Each UV channel shall be designed with a dedicated draindown facility to allow

for maintenance.
L. Ultraviolet disinfection systems contain delicate components (such as lamps)
and are vulnerable to relatively small solid particles. All uv systems should
therefore have in-line filters that screen the influent to the UV plant to 6 mm.
5.2.4.2. Ancillary Equipment

A. The design shall provide the lifting and analysis equipment required to maintain
the UV system.
5.2.4.3. Instrumentation and Controls

A. UV disinfection equipment shall be provided with a number of signals to external
devices. These shall include but not be limited to the following
i. PLC/logic common failure.
ii. Power failure.
iii. Healthy and Not Healthy alarms.
iv. Dose Provided.
v. System failed to start on plant start.
B. The UV system shall have the following controls as minimum

i. UV dose provided (per module/unit).
ii. Electrical power demand.
iii. UV module status (On/Off/Failed).
iv. Cleaning system status (On/Off/Failed).
PAGE 51
v. Alarm History (where PLC controlled).

vi. Hours run counter per module.
C. The design shall allow for manual control of the following:

i. Each module.
ii. Each wiping system (including compression or hydraulic units).
5.2.4.4. UV System Testing

A. The UV system shall be supplied with a separate Certificate of Conformity for
op V1
each new UV lamp provided. Each certificate shall indicate the maximum rated
output of the lamp and the rated UVC output.
B. At the time of commissioning a number of tests will be completed to confirm the
following
i.
C -
No Nitrate/Nitrite problems exist as a result of the UV operation.
y
ii.
C
Bacteriological kill-rate is being monitored.
iii. The specified UV intensity and doses is being achieved.
C
5.2.4.5. Health and Safety
Q
A. Where the design allows for maintenance and lamp replacement to be carried
out on operational units measures shall be in place to prevent operator
exposure to UV light and electrical hazards.
5.2.4.6. Critical Spare Parts

A. The design shall allow for the supply of spare lamps and associated support
fittings.
5.2.4.7. Data Recording and Storage

A. The design shall allow for the following to be recorded and stored:
i. Transmissivity.
ii. Intensity.
iii. UV Dose.
iv. Turbidity.
B. Readings shall be taken every 15 minutes. The data storage facility shall have
sufficient memory to store a minimum of 2 months data.
5.2.5 Analysers
A. Residual Chlorine analyzers are used to monitor the amount of free residual
chlorine in final effluent/irrigation water. Each residual Chlorine analyzer system
comprises of a sensor, transmitter, buffer solution and other accessories. The
analyzer should be provided with a flow regulating/isolation valve, sample flow
indicator (VA type) ‘Y’ strainer and associated pipework, skid mounted and
installed in a GRP enclosure. The analyzer shall have a maximum response
time of ten seconds for step change of 90%.
PAGE 52
B. The transmitter shall have a measurement accuracy of ±2%. These shall be

fields selectable from 0-0.5 to 0-20 mg/l. complete width. Automatic
compensation for temperature. They shall have an isolated 4-20 mA d.c.
output, and be suitable for surface mounting. The enclosure shall be protected
to IP66.
C. The sensor shall be of the Amperometric type sensor with flow through
installation, and be complete width with an internal temperature sensor for
automatic compensation. The sensor shall be complete with bottle of buffer
solution and interconnecting cable.
op V1
END OF SECTION
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 53
6. LIFTING EQUIPMENT (SECTION 11620)

6.1 Part 1. General
A. A schedule of lifting equipment shall be submitted by the Contractor.
B. The schedule shall be updated with the unique identification numbers issued by
op V1
the ADSSC and eventually with certificate reference numbers.
C. The Safe Working Load shall be marked clearly and indelibly on each lifting item
together with the unique identification number.
D. Suitable access shall be provided to allow for safe transfer of pumps or plant and
C -
y
equipment, to vehicle access for operational maintenance or repair purposes.
C
E. Lifting equipment shall be designed with a minimum safety factor of 1.5 with
respect to Safe Working Load.
C
F. Testing loads shall be 1.25 times the SWL
G. Lifting Equipment shall be installed for any of the following conditions:
Q
i. Where equipment above 25kg may need to be removed for operational

maintenance.
ii. Where the frequency for removal for maintenance is one or more times
per annum.
iii. Where the item of plant is considered to be critical.
6.1.2 Test Certification

A) There shall be one test certificate per item of lifting equipment.
B) Test certificates to be provided for site testing of all site installed equipment
and shall be carried out by a government authorised testing
authority/company.
C) The test certificate shall carry the following information.
i. Site name (as advised).
ii. Unique reference number.
iii. Serial number (where appropriate).
iv. Details of proof load tests (including any measurements taken for
deflection) and the examination conducted on the item certifying its
fitness for safe use.
v. (Where applicable) Length of lifting beams, span of cranes, radius of
davit/swing jib, etc.
D) In cases where an item is unsuitable for proof load testing, such as textile
slings, then the Contractor shall issue a certificate of conformity.
PAGE 54
E) All original certificates shall be sent to ADSSC within fourteen days of

completion of testing, unless agreed otherwise.
F) The unique Reference number shall be clearly marked on the equipment.
G) No lifting equipment shall be operated until full documentation including test
certificates have been received by ADSSC.
6.1.3 Fitness for Purpose

A. All equipment is to be of adequate strength, sound material, good construction
and suitable for the duty which it is to perform, taking consideration of:
op V1
i. Total maximum weight of the load to be lifted.
ii. The nature of the load to be lifted, and its principal dimensions which
affect the lifting operation. In particular, headroom, height of lift, transport
when suspended, manipulation of suspended load, centre of gravity,
C -
methods of attachment and external obstructions likely to be
y
C
encountered.
iii. Adverse environmental conditions, including extremes of temperature,
humidity, chemical attack and/or corrosive atmospheres.
C
iv. Frequency of use and average loadings to enable duty ratings to be
established.
Q
v. Ergonomic design: account shall be taken of operating positions,

working heights, reach distances etc so as not to place undue strain on
the user.
vi. Fabricated lifting equipment shall be galvanized and coated in
accordance with Section 15004: Corrosion Protection.
vii. The final paint coat shall be colored yellow with black markings.
viii. Consideration shall be also be given to the additional weight likely to be
carried & added to the load lifted, particularly;
ix. Breakout or frictional forces.
x. Sewage submersible, sludge pumps or mixers and stirrers, which may
be full of sewage or coated in solids or rags.
xi. Borehole pumps and associated pipework which may still contain water.
Permanent access shall be designed into the installation to facilitate
inspection and maintenance of those parts of the lifting equipment requiring
frequent attention. Where this is impracticable, means shall be provided to
attach temporary access. Access provision shall be subject to approval.
6.1.4 Commissioning
A. Before use, all new equipment shall be tested by the Contractor, who shall
issue the original Proof load Test Certificate/Certificate of Conformity to
ADSSC.
B. ADSSC is to be notified within a reasonable time before the intended date of
commissioning of an item of lifting equipment, to enable it to conduct its own
inspection.
PAGE 55
6.1.5 Training
A. Appropriate training shall be included by the Contractor for personnel likely to
use the lifting equipment. This shall take place during the commissioning
phase prior to handover. Where equipment is designed to be dismantled and
reassembled as part of its use, training shall cover that function.
6.1.6 Storage
A. Storage facilities for lifting equipment shall be designed into schemes in order
that any lifting equipment supplied as part of the scheme, when not in use,
op V1
can be stored in a safe manner and in an environment which will not result in
degradation of the equipment. The term 'storage' includes such things as
lockable cabinets, racks, and bins.
B. Weather protection shall be provided for electric hoist motors and hand chain
blocks where they are installed externally.
C -
y
6.2 Part 2.
C
Lifting equipment
6.2.1 Overhead Travelling Cranes
C
A. Where overhead travelling cranes are specified, the installation shall be to the
Q
following minimum standard.

B. The cranes shall be designed in accordance with BS2573.
C. Runway beams shall comply with the requirements of BS 2853. Cranes with
electrically powered motions shall comply with BS466: Class 2 Medium duty
operation unless otherwise specified. The term ‘crane’ shall be deemed to
include gantry rails, access maintenance platform, power collection, end stops
and all other items required for a complete installation.
D. Operation shall be from ground floor level or from the level of the lowest item
of plant. Hand chains shall loop 600mm above operating floor level, and shall
not require a force greater than 25kg to operate at maximum load. Electrical
control shall be by pendant push-button and shall be electrically and
mechanically interlocked to prevent inadvertent operation of opposing
controls. Wired pendants shall be supported independently of the electric
cable. The control voltage shall be low/safe. Inching facilities on all motions
shall be provided where accurate positioning of equipment is required.
Consideration shall be given to the provision of an emergency stop to be
included on the pendant.
E. Cranes shall be fitted with limit switches, and mechanical end stops to prevent
excess travel over hoisting/over lowering.
i. Overload switches and/or slipping clutches shall be fitted to prevent
overloading.
ii. Electrical motions shall have limit switches on all motions.
iii. All motors shall be of quick reversing type with electro-mechanical
brakes suitably sized for operation under the design conditions.
F. Festoon cables shall be used for all motions unless the downshop distance is
greater than 20m or usage is high, when a set of four shrouded conductors
PAGE 56
shall be used. In that case, the power collection equipment shall have
renewable contact pieces. Should the operating environment be particularly
aggressive, festoon cables for power collection shall be used. Two
padlockable crane supply isolators shall be fitted, one on the crane mounted
control panel and the second at ground level to isolate the supply to the
conductor rails. A "supply on" light shall be fitted on both isolators.
6.2.2 Overhead Runway Beams

A. Straight and curved overhead runway beams shall be designed in
accordance with BS 2853.
op V1
B. The maximum deflection of the runway beams shall not exceed 1/500 of the
span under the test load. All beams shall have an even and level running
surface particularly on the inside running flanges where travelling trolleys are
to be used. End stops shall be provided
C -
y
C
6.2.3 Lifting Blocks, Trolleys, Hooks, Ropes, Eyebolts, Shackles,
Fall Arrest Systems.
C
A. All lifting blocks, trolleys, hooks, ropes, eyebolts and shackles shall comply
with the latest relevant British Standard. This includes all eyebolts supplied
Q
with plant, e.g., motors and pumps.

B. All hooks (suspension and load) shall be fitted with safety catches. All hooks
on cranes and lifting blocks shall be fitted with swivel bearings. The hook block
shall incorporate fully guarded sheaves.
C. Lifting blocks can be either chain or wire rope units. All blocks shall be fitted
with sufficient chain or rope to allow the lifting hook to reach ground-operating
level. All chains and ropes shall have the 'loose' end securely fixed to the
lifting block. Chain units shall have a reliable braking and locking arrangement
on the hoisting mechanism. A chain box shall be fitted to hold the excess
chain. An over hoist device shall be fitted to all electric hoists.
D. Electric hoist equipment shall be installed for lifting applications with the
following conditions:
i. For plant & equipment above 1000 kg, with a lift height in excess of 3m.
ii. Where the operation of manual lifting equipment or chain blocks for a
single lift cannot be undertaken in 10 minutes.
iii. An electric traverse shall also be provided for electric hoist equipment
having a traverse distance in excess of 6m.
6.2.4 Lifting Davits and Sockets

A. The frame shall be galvanized steel or lightweight aluminum fabrication
designed to lift the specified Safe Working Load. Where possible, davits shall
be portable.
B. Where a winch is to be fitted, the operating handle shall be at a convenient
height for the operator, i.e. 1.1m above datum level, and the effort to turn it
with full load suspended shall not exceed 25kg force, if required the winch
PAGE 57
shall be geared to suit. A ratchet device shall be fitted and where the load
exceeds 25kgs, the winch shall be fitted with a braking device to prevent free
falling of the load when lowering.
C. A galvanized steel davit socket shall be provided with the davit where
specified. This shall be designed and fabricated such that the top face of the
socket shall be flush with the final finished surface level and covered with a
secured galvanized steel cover plate. Lugs shall be incorporated to prevent
rotation of the socket in the concrete. The davit socket shall incorporate a
drain hole to an adjacent chamber where possible.
D. Lightweight Aluminum davits are preferred for loads up to but not exceeding
op V1
500kg, the reach shall not exceed 1200mm.
E. Davits supplied for loads above 500kg, or with a reach exceeding 1200mm
shall be conventional steel design.
F. Standard socket diameter should be 65mm.
C -
y
G. For lightweight davits, no single part of the davit construction shall be greater
C
than 25kg in weight unless the davit is designed to be a permanent structure.
C
6.2.5 Lifting Chains.
A. Lifting chains shall be manufactured from marine quality grade 320 stainless
Q
steel as a minimum requirement.

B. Lifting chains shall be manufactured utilizing short links.
C. Lifting chains shall be suitable for use in sewage with pH values of 4.9 to 10.1.
D. Lifting chains shall be utilized when lifting large submersible pumps from wet
wells.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 58
op V1
C -
y
C
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
C
Q
(VOLUME III)
DIVISION 13
SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
DOCUMENT NO: 511

FIRST EDITION
DECEMBER- 2016
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Document No: 511

First Edition
December-2016
PO Box 20
the publisher
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of Contents................................................................................................................. i
1. Pipeline Construction by Non-Disruptive Method (Section 13122) ......................... 1
1.1. Part 1 General ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1.1 Scope .................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1.2 Related Documents ............................................................................................................. 1
1.1.3 Standards ............................................................................................................................ 1
1.1.4 Submittals ............................................................................................................................ 2
op V1
1.1.4.1. Products and Materials Approval .............................................................. 2
1.1.4.2. Method Statements................................................................................... 2
1.1.4.3. Drawings and Calculations ....................................................................... 3
C -
1.1.5 Quality Control ..................................................................................................................... 4
y
C
1.1.6 Delivery, Storage, and Handling .......................................................................................... 5
1.1.7 Safety .................................................................................................................................. 6
C
1.1.8 Investigation Requirements ................................................................................................. 7
1.1.9 Design Requirements .......................................................................................................... 8
Q
1.2. Part 2 Products ...................................................................................................................... 9

1.2.1 Equipment ........................................................................................................................... 9
1.2.1.1 Tunnelling Machine ................................................................................... 9
1.2.1.2 Thrust System ........................................................................................ 10
1.2.1.3 Tunnelling Shields for Pipe jacking ......................................................... 10
1.2.2 NDM Pipes ........................................................................................................................ 11
1.2.2.1 Composite GRP Jacking Pipes ............................................................... 11
1.2.2.2 Steel Casing Pipe ................................................................................... 12
1.2.2.3 Pipe Testing............................................................................................ 12
1.2.3 Joint Packing ..................................................................................................................... 12
1.2.4 Lubricating Fluid ................................................................................................................ 12
1.2.5 Joint Seal ........................................................................................................................... 13
1.2.6 Grout ................................................................................................................................. 13
1.3. Part 3 Execution .................................................................................................................. 13
1.3.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 13
1.3.2 Examination ....................................................................................................................... 13
1.3.3 Cavity Grouting .................................................................................................................. 13
1.3.4 Pits/Shafts ......................................................................................................................... 14
1.3.5 Tunnelling .......................................................................................................................... 15
1.3.6 Packing .............................................................................................................................. 15
1.3.7 Line and Level Control....................................................................................................... 16
Page I
1.3.8 Tolerances......................................................................................................................... 16
1.3.9 Drilling Fluid Tests ............................................................................................................. 16
1.3.10 Grouting ......................................................................................................................... 17
1.3.11 Monitoring Ground Surface Movement ......................................................................... 18
1.3.12 Pipe Testing .................................................................................................................. 19
1.3.13 Project Record Documents ........................................................................................... 19
op V1
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1-1: Bentonite Suspension Properties ...................................................................... 17

C -
y
C
C
Q
Page II
1. PIPELINE CONSTRUCTION BY NON-

DISRUPTIVE METHOD (SECTION 13122)
1.1. Part 1 General

1.1.1 Scope
This section of the specification gives the requirements for pipeline construction by
non-disruptive methods (NDM) and should be read in conjunction with the Pipe
Jacking Association of the UK publications and the Abu Dhabi Municipality guidelines
and requirements as referenced below.
op V1
section.
C -
y
Section 01300
C Submittals
C
Q

Section 03100 Concrete formwork
Section 03200 Concrete reinforcement
Section 03300 Cast in place concrete
Section 03600 Concrete protection and waterproofing
1.1.3 Standards
AASHTO HS20 44+100% - Surcharge loading.

BS 1377 Methods of test for soils for civil engineering purposes.
BS 5228-1 Code of practice for basic information and procedures for noise control.
BS 5228-2 Guide for noise control legislation for construction and demolition, including
road construction and maintenance.
BS 5911-1 Concrete pipes and ancillary concrete products. Specification for unreinforced
concrete pipes (including jacking pipes) with flexible joints
BS 5930 Code of practice for site investigations.
BS 6164 Code of practice for safety in tunnelling in the construction industry.
BS EN 681-1 Elastomeric seals. Material requirements for pipe joint seals used in
water and drainage applications.
PAGE 1
BS EN 1916 Concrete pipes and fittings, unreinforced, steel fibre and reinforced
Pipe Jacking Association, UK - Guide to best Practice for Installation of Pipe Jacks and
Micro tunnels.
Pipe Jacking Association, UK - An Introduction to Pipe Jacking and Micro tunnelling
design.
Abu Dhabi Municipality - Guidelines and Requirements for Planning and Design of Non-
Disruptive Road Crossings.
1.1.4 Submittals
op V1
A) In order to verify compliance with the specification the Contractor shall submit
C -
y
C
C
specification and test results of the proposed pipes and fittings required for
the Works including manufacturer’s certificates of compliance in
Q
accordance with Sections 02630, 02650 and 02660 of the specification.

Information shall be given for every diameter in each class of pipe.
manufacture from those proposed and approved by the Engineer, the
Contractor shall submit for the Engineer's approval the revised details and
test results.
iii. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the results of all quality control
tests carried out on the manufactured pipes and fittings as soon as
practicable after testing as and in any case not later than the time of
delivery of the relevant pipes and fittings to the site.
iv. The Contractor shall submit pipe manufacturer’s guarantee that the pipe
and its materials are suitable for its intended use.
v. Joint materials and gaskets.
vi. Concrete protection systems.
vii. The Contractor shall provide from the manufacturer a certificate of the
bentonite powder showing the properties of each consignment delivered to
the Site. He shall ensure that this certificate is available to the Engineer on
request. The properties to be given by the manufacturer are the apparent
viscosity range in pascal seconds and the gel strength range in Pascals for
solids in water.

A) The Contractor shall submit method statements to the Engineer for approval 4
PAGE 2
i. Geotechnical investigation report to include all information related to

geotechnical and geophysical investigation undertaken and
recommendations for tunneling technique to be adopted, excavation
support, and soil stabilization if required including grouting of cavities if
any.
ii. List of all equipment and resources and programme of work showing
allocation of equipment and resources.
iii. Typical shift performance report.
iv. Detailed step by step procedure describing how work will be carried out in
particular how the different aspects of pipe jacking are monitored, such as
angular deflection, jacking pressures, face pressures, packers etc. and
op V1
then managed so that the inter jacks are installed as required, deflection
controlled and jacking pressures minimized.
v. The Contractor shall submit independently authenticated test results to
demonstrate that the joint packing complies with the specification. Include
a graph of the stress/strain relationship over the range of conditions which
C -
will be encountered during the Works.
y
vi.
C
Method of excavation and removal.
vii. Methodology for correcting line and level.
C
viii. Support of existing services and adjacent structures.
ix. Safety arrangements for compliance with safety requirements.
Q
x. Arrangements for dealing with ground water, taking due regard to

controlling the loss of material and preventing settlement around
pits/shafts, pipe/pit interfaces and tunnel face.
xi. Dealing with different ground conditions.
xii. Locking pipe in position during insertion of the next pipe.
xiii. Sealing working shafts and reception pits during exiting and entering of
pipe.
xiv. Control of over break.
xv. Grouting of cavities where applicable.
xvi. Grout mix design and method of grouting.
xvii. Details describing the measures to be taken to avoid the development
and transfer of grout shrinkage or expansion stresses to the pipe and to
avoid any adverse chemical reaction between the pipe and the concrete,
grout or other materials comprising the pipeline.
xviii. Handling and fixing of the inner line pipe in the case of tunneling with
oversize casing pipes.
xix. Reuse/dumping of cuttings and slurry.
xx. Layout of monitoring points for detection of surface movement.
1.1.4.3. Drawings and Calculations

A) The Contractor shall submit drawings to the Engineer for approval in advance of
PAGE 3
i. Working drawings showing on plan and section the method of supporting

excavations.
ii. The location of all pits/shafts including those indicated as permanent
works in the design drawings, having due regard to existing services,
minimizing disruption to traffic and pedestrian movements and achieving
the required system layouts, as shown on the tender drawings.
iii. Foot print plans showing the working site areas at the thrust and reception
pits/shafts, control room, pipe storage area, crane age area, slurry tank,
generator etc.
iv. Plan showing proposed traffic and pedestrian diversion proposals around
all pits/shafts.
op V1
v. Details of entry and exit pipe seals and seal rings in pits/shafts.
vi. Longitudinal profiles from thrust to reception pits/shafts showing location of
pipe joints, location of existing services and surface levels.
vii. Calculations for thrust and reception pits/shafts which shall be designed to
C -
resist external soil and water pressure and stresses resulting from the
y
C
jacking machine.
viii. Calculations justifying allowable deflections at joints to limit damage to the
C
joint from eccentric loading under drive and sealing limits and to ensure a
completed pipeline with no visible leaks and within infiltration allowances.
ix. Pipe calculations showing capability of pipe to resist jacking and friction
Q
forces in the axial direction and earth, AASHTO HS20 traffic, and
surcharge loadings in the vertical direction.
x. Calculations for friction loads, face loads, interjects, jacking pressures etc.
for the complete system, including thrust walls, which demonstrate how the
pipes will be installed with no damage.
xi. Calculations giving predicted settlements along and adjacent to route of
pipeline.

A) Prior to dispatch of any product and/or material from source the Contractor shall
opportunity to inspect and test the product and/or Material prior to delivery in
B) Products and materials shall be from a manufacturer/supplier that operates a

C) To allow the Engineer to inspect the Works the contractor shall give the
on site.
i. Geotechnical investigation.
ii. Construction of thrust and reception pits/shafts.
iii. Undertaking each stage of NDM work.
PAGE 4
D) The Contractor shall ensure instrumentation is calibrated for each drive. He shall
provide a valid calibration certificate and ensure that the certificate is available
to the Engineer upon request.
E) The designer shall be an approved qualified Engineer experienced in the design

of this work or similar.
F) The installer shall be an approved company with specialized personnel in

performing the work with minimum 5 years’ experience in the application of non-
disruptive method of pipeline construction of projects of similar size.
i. All operators in the employment of the Contractor and his sub-contractor
shall be skilled and have a minimum 12 months experience in their
op V1
respective trades and in particular in operating a machine similar to the
machine used by the Contractor. Operators shall be subject to a
probationary period of three months.
ii. Curriculum Vitae of key personnel and operators shall be submitted for
approval by the Engineer and interviews may be taken at the discretion of
C -
the Engineer.
y
C
iii. The supervising operator who will perform the work for the Contract
duration shall have a minimum of 5 years’ experience of similar works.
C
G) Approval for method statements shall be obtained from the Engineer and the
concerned authorities including Abu Dhabi Municipality Road Section and Works
Department as appropriate prior to excavation.
Q
H) The Contractor shall enclose an undertaking Form with request for approval to
carry out the Works from the concerned authorities, including the Works
Department and the Abu Dhabi Municipality Roads Section, formally executed,
bearing the corporate seal and signed by the duly authorized signatory and
endorsed by the executing authority.

A) Delivery, storage and handling of products and materials shall be in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations, Section 016009 of the specification
and the following provisions.
i. Delivery storage and handling shall at all times be performed in a manner
to avoid product damage and be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
and unloading. Ensure that pipes and fittings are well secured during
transit and adequately supported along their length. Cover pipes and
fittings of plastic materials during transportation. Do not allow pipe to
slings positioned at a quarter of the pipe length from each end. Do not
allow the use of wire rope chains or unpadded forks or clamps on forklifts
to lift pipes.
iv. Store pipes and fittings on a flat level area and follow manufacturer’s
storing requirements
PAGE 5
 Stack pipes of different sizes and thickness separately.

 Do not allow stacked pipes to exceed 2m in height or as recommended
vi. Store GRP pipes and fittings under opaque cover and out of direct sunlight
at all times. Maintain a free flow of air around the pipes at all times.
vii. Store joint materials and gaskets in a well-ventilated place free from
exposure to sunlight and in their original packing until they are needed.
viii. The Contractor shall visually inspect all products upon delivery to site and
op V1
C -
y
C
C
B) Store the lubrication material in a manner recommended by the
supplier/manufacturer.
Q
1.1.7 Safety
A) The Contractor shall adopt safe working practices for tunneling in accordance
with provisions of BS 6164 and BS 5228: Parts 1 & 2.
B) The Contractor shall allow only authorized personnel access to the site.
C) The Contractor shall provide a Safety Officer, as per Section 01540, suitably
experienced in tunneling operations and with adequate authority to control and
implement safe working practices.
D) The Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable arrangements at site for
personnel including:
i. Telephone service.
ii. Telecommunication equipment between the control room and the working
crew.
iii. Approved gas detectors.
iv. First aid kit.
v. Emergency escape or breathing apparatus sets.
vi. Transport.
e) The Contractor shall provide a separate cage type ladder for each pit/shaft.
f) The Contractor shall fence the shafts/pits on all sides with close steel panels of
a minimum 1.8m in height equipped with orange safety warning lights. He shall
join the panels. The maximum space between the panels shall be 100mm, by
steel rods supported on concrete blocks.
PAGE 6
g) The Contractor shall provide adequate lighting and ventilation to the shafts/pits.
Except where otherwise necessary, electricity shall be 110 volts from a center
tapped to earth (CTE) supply and up to 220 volts with use of ELCB protection.
h) The Contractor shall provide an air-conditioned control room at the thrust
pit/shaft with sufficient space for a desk and chair for one inspector.
1.1.8 Investigation Requirements

A) The Contractor shall obtain existing utility information, and excavate trial pits to
locate and confirm services at pit/shaft locations and along the proposed
tunneling route as necessary. He shall obtain approval of utility authorities and
relevant Departments prior to the commencement of work.
op V1
B) The Contractor shall carry out all geotechnical site investigation including
ground water level monitoring, as considered necessary and as minimum at the
proposed pits/shafts locations and along the proposed tunneling route as
necessary.
C)
C -
The Contractor shall carry out a geophysical survey on a 10 meters wide strip
y
C
along the proposed tunneling route covering a depth range between ground
level and up to 5 meters below the invert of the proposed tunnel. The objective
of this survey is to detect any cavities or broken or collapsed subsurface strata,
C
so that any such cavities or strata can be treated to allow tunnel construction.
The general requirements and specification for the geophysical survey are as
follows:
Q
i. The survey shall be applicable to depths greater than 8m from existing

ground level to invert of pipe.
ii. The survey shall provide information on both lateral and vertical extent of
subsurface conditions together with the identification and classification of
the geophysical materials in the subsurface sequence within the targeted
depth of investigation. The information provided is to include details on
likely size, depth and character of the features interpreted.
iii. The geophysical survey and all associated works shall only be carried out
by specialist companies approved by ADM.
iv. Before commencement of the survey, the Contractor shall submit the
anticipated calibration work required to fully assess and interpret the
geophysical survey, and confirm his acceptance that the objectives of the
survey are achievable.
v. The geophysical survey technique to be used is that of resistivity imaging,
and shall be generally conducted as follows:
 Establish benchmarks and topographically survey and inspect routes for
interference.
 Undertake data acquisition and assess the data quality.
 Provide the preliminary resistivity section and preliminary interpretation
result and undertake drilling of boreholes required for the calibration of
the resistivity results.
 Provide precise interpretation of resistivity anomalies, supplement
interpretation with physical evidences, drilling of boreholes, borehole
logs and core photographs.
PAGE 7
 Provide a survey report with the final interpreted sections, color scale of
sections should be standardized.
 The location of anomalies/cavities shall be marked and flagged by the
Contractor at the exact location indicated by co-ordinates Easting and
Northing.
vi. One borehole in accordance with BS 5930 and BS 1377 for each 50
survey stations shall be included in the scope of geophysical survey in
order to be used by the Contractor for calibration/interpretation of the
survey results. Each borehole shall incorporate SPT at 1m intervals,
groundwater level, rotary drilled coring of solid strata and photographs of
cores.
op V1
vii. All basic data recording, preliminary and final interpretation and borehole
records shall be included in the NDM design report.
D) Notwithstanding the general requirements of Clause 1.8 above, soil conditions
and ground conditions shall constitute the Contractors risk and the Contractor
shall undertake such investigation as necessary to establish the sub surface
C -
y
conditions at no extra cost to DMAT.
C
C
A) The Contractor is responsible for the design of all pipes including all joints, the
thrust and reception pits/shafts including supports and thrust wall, the size of the
Q
pits/shafts to suit his method of construction and for the design of the jacking
system in general.
B) The Contractor shall ensure that the design of the thrust wall and any other
associated Temporary Works is such as to prevent damage to any part of the
Permanent Works or any immediately adjacent service or structure.
C) The Contractor shall design thrust and reception pits/shafts to allow the safe
operation of the plant, equipment and handling of the materials and to withstand
all loading imposed by ground pressure, superimposed loads from surface
structures and maximum proposed thrust force.
D) The Contractor shall design pipes to withstand the maximum axial thrust with a
factor of safety of 4 based on the full effective area and the ultimate
compressive strength of the pipe material.
F) Where GRP or similar material pipes with concrete surround are proposed, the
concrete surround shall be designed to withstand the maximum jacking force.
The design shall also ensure that the GRP or similar material pipe is not
subjected to any forces during installation.
F) The Contractor shall design pipe joints in conjunction with resilient packing that
avoids projections which could obstruct the travel of the pipe. He shall ensure
that the joints will be watertight under axial loading and at the permissible
deflection of the pipes.
G) Where it is proposed to construct certain section within larger diameter pipes
and grout the annular space:
i. Ensure that the difference between the external face of the inner pipe and
the internal face of the outer pipe is not less than 150mm and no more
than 250mm unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
PAGE 8
ii. The external pipe/sleeve may be of steel with full circumferential weld or
reinforced concrete pipe. In either case, the casing pipe and the grout shall
be regarded as sacrificial and the inner pipe shall be designed as a stand-
alone pipe, capable of withstanding installation and grouting forces and
soil, traffic and groundwater loads. Where pipe-brackets, spider clamps,
are used, rubber packers shall be placed between the steel brackets and
pipe.
H) The Contractor shall limit the dimensions of drive and reception pits/shafts to the
minimum required to construct the permanent works or to construct the
pits/shafts, whichever is larger.
I) The Contractor shall determine the excavated dimensions of the drive and
reception pits/shafts as required to suit the site conditions. Minimum pit/shaft
op V1
dimensions shall be used at all locations where utilities, roads or trees exist
adjacent to the required pit/shaft locations.
J) Where it is proposed to use a tail tunnel as the reaction surface the maximum
permitted thrust force shall not exceed the lesser of the following.
i. C -
The maximum permissible thrust force.
y
C
ii. 50% of the sum of the maximum forces recorded at the rigs used to
construct the tail tunnel if the over break has not been grouted up.
C
iii. If the over break to the tail tunnel has been grouted up, 100% of the sum
of the maximum forces recorded at the rigs used to construct the tail
tunnel.
Q
K) Any tail tunnel which has been used as a reaction surface shall pass the
specified water tightness test at a time not less than 14 days after the load has
been removed.
L) Lubricant fluid holes shall be threaded to enable plugs to be screwed into the
socket and withstand the external pressure. Non-return valves shall be fitted
where opening a hole would permit ground loss.
M) The Contractor shall confirm the tunneling route is clear from cavities or
obstructions or recommend and design for grouting of cavities and/or dealing
with obstructions.

1.2.1 Equipment
A) The Contractor shall use only NDM equipment that is appropriate for the
intended installation, site and ground conditions, length of drive, and other
relevant factors and can meet the contents of these specifications to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. It is envisaged that the NDM equipment will have
the following capabilities but the final choice of equipment will be the
responsibility of the Contractor to the approval of the Engineer.
1.2.1.1 Tunnelling Machine

A) Steerable and incorporating hydraulic rams to move the articulated head.
B) Designed to ensure no rotation or rolling during installation.
C) Remote controlled and can transmit information such as jacking force, face
pressure, length, roll, pitch, steering attitude, temperature, valves open or
PAGE 9
closed, cutter torque, rate of progress, slurry pressure, slurry flow, earth face
pressure to a microprocessor console on the surface from where the system is
operated.
D) Incorporates meters and gauges to measure the slurry flow and pressures.
E) Capable of operating under groundwater conditions as necessary with a
hydrostatic balance not less than 3m head of water.
F) Fitted with a calibrated laser target, robustly constructed and rigidly secured.
G) Guidance system shall be laser or an approved equivalent for the control of
tunnel alignment. The guidance system shall be mounted independently of the
thrust wall or machine jacking rig or anything else that may move during
operations.
op V1
1.2.1.2 Thrust System
A) The rig shall distribute the thrust to the pipes via a thrust ring and packing. The
jacks shall apply the thrust to the thrust ring by means of a symmetrical
C -
distribution. Interject stations shall be used where frictional resistance or other
y
C
causes would otherwise result in unacceptable thrust forces.
B) If used, spacer blocks shall be true and free from any distortions.
C
C) All thrust rings shall be true and free from any distortions and sufficiently stiff so
as to transfer the load from the jacks uniformly to the packing.
D) Other than at the shield, each group of jacks shall be interconnected to ensure
Q
that an evenly distributed load is applied to the thrust ring.

E) Fitted with automatic thrust recording equipment monitoring load cells
incorporated in each jack together with a pressure metering device.
1.2.1.3 Tunnelling Shields for Pipe jacking

A) Where considered necessary, the Contractor shall provide and maintain a shield
suitable for excavating in the ground conditions as envisaged by him and in
accordance with his chosen method of excavation.
B) In determining the type of shield and method of excavation to be used, the
Contractor shall take account of the need to ensure that the face of the
excavation is adequately secured at all times such that ground loss is kept to a
minimum and is controlled to prevent excessive ground loss. The shield shall be
removed on completion of the tunneling operation.
C) Rotating excavating heads fitted to shields shall be capable of rotating clockwise
and counter-clockwise.
D) The shield shall be equipped with steering jacks and such heads, ploughs and
copy cutters as may be required for adjusting the alignment of the pipes.
E) Multiple lubricant injection points shall be provided within the shield in order to
provide immediate ground support when necessary.
F) In case of manual excavation, the shield should be pushed into the soil. The
excavation should be limited to the soil falling inside the sleeve. No excavation
should protrude outside the shield face.
PAGE 10
1.2.2 NDM Pipes

A) Pipes for NDM works shall be one of the following, unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer:
i. Composite GRP pipe with reinforced concrete encasement.

ii. Steel casing pipe.
iii. Reinforced concrete jacking pipe or composite GRP pipe may also be
used as casing pipes.
B) The Contractor shall ensure that all pipes including cut lengths and all fittings
before dispatch from the pipe manufacturer's works are indelibly marked as
op V1
follows.
i. The manufacturer's name, initials, or identification mark.

ii. The nominal internal diameter in mm.
C -
iii. The length in m.
y
C
iv. Mark the classification i.e. pressure rating, stiffness.
C
hydraulic tests at the point of manufacturer.
Q
vii. Stencil in legible letters the pipe identification number on the inside and
sheets and documents relating to the manufacture delivery and testing of
that pipe.
1.2.2.1 Composite GRP Jacking Pipes

A) Composite GRP jacking pipes shall be manufactured from GRP pipes in
accordance with the requirements of Section 02630, and with reinforced
concrete encasement together with the following additional requirements.
i. Nominal length shall be 3m, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
ii. Joints and couplers may be altered as necessary to accommodate design
requirements.
iii. Minimum stiffness shall be 10,000 N/m².
iv. A vinyl-ester flow coat shall be placed on the entire exterior GRP surface.
B) Formwork, reinforcement, concrete and concrete placement, finishing and

curing shall be as specified in Sections 03100, 03200 and 03300 of the
specification, along with the additional requirements below:
i. Minimum concrete strength shall be grade C50, unless otherwise
ii. Grouting holes fitted as necessary.
iii. Lifting hooks or clamps fitted as necessary.
PAGE 11
1.2.2.2 Steel Casing Pipe

A) Steel casing pipe for pipe jacking shall comply with the following requirements,
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
i. Minimum wall thickness shall be 12mm.

ii. All joints shall be fully welded.
iii. All holes or openings shall be closed.
iv. Grouting spigots shall be fitted as necessary.
1.2.2.3 Pipe Testing
op V1
A) Quality control tests at the factory should include subjecting the pipe joints, at
maximum permissible deflection, to:
i. Internal hydrostatic pressure of 1.5 times the working pressure.
C -
ii. External pressure, vacuum, of 0.9bar.
y
B)
C
Unless independently authenticated test results acceptable to the Engineer are
available, two consecutive axial tests incorporating a 1º angular deflection with
C
the application of double the maximum permissible thrust force or, if greater, of
the greatest thrust force that the proposed thrust equipment can apply, shall be
successfully conducted without any visible crushing, cracking or spalling of the
Q
pipe being evident before any pipes will be accepted for use. The tests shall be
extended to record the loading at which any visible signs of failure become
evident and shall be carried out in an approved manner to simulate actual
working conditions. Pipes which have been submitted to the proof load test will
not be permitted for use in the permanent works.
1.2.3 Joint Packing

A) Joint packing material when subjected to the maximum permitted bearing
pressure shall have under dry conditions:
i. A restoration after 1 hour of at least 65% of the original thickness.
ii. A compression of at least 50% of the original thickness. Independently

authenticated test results to demonstrate that the packing complies with
the specification shall be submitted and shall include a graph of the
stress/strain relationship over the range of conditions which will be
encountered during the Works.
B) The material used for packing to withstand all imposed loading applied during
the installation of all pipes for each completed length without showing signs of
deterioration or distress.
1.2.4 Lubricating Fluid

A) It is envisaged that lubricating fluid shall be one of the following but the final
choice of fluid will be the responsibility of the Contractor to the approval of the
Engineer. Lubricating fluid shall generally be a polymer or bentonite based slurry
lubrication material. In suitable ground conditions water alone may be used. For
clay soils, non-aqueous lubricants shall be used.
PAGE 12
1.2.5 Joint Seal

A) The joint seal shall comprise one or more elastomeric rings complying with BS
EN 681-1.
1.2.6 Grout
A) As over break grouting Portland cement and water as determined by
geotechnical data and directed by the Engineer. Its nominal strength shall be at
least 20N/mm². Admixtures shall be used only if tests have shown to the
satisfaction of the Engineer that their use improves the properties of the grout,
e.g. by increasing workability or slightly expanding the grout.
op V1
B) As annular space filling a low strength grout or foam concrete shall be used and
placed at low pressures. The density of the mix shall be in the range of 900 to
1200kg/m³ and the free water/cement not greater than 0.6.
C) As cavities grouting Portland cement, Portland cement/sand or Portland

C -
cement/bentonite mortars as determined by ground investigation data.
y
C
C
1.3.1 General
Q
A) The Contractor shall confine surface operations to pits/shafts and the area
immediately adjacent to such shafts. He shall keep the working area to the
minimum practicable for the proper construction of the works.
B) The Contractor shall take any measures necessary to prevent damage or
deterioration of the soil reaction face during the construction of the temporary
and permanent works from whatever possible cause, such as ingress of water,
softening, corrosive soil or loss of fines from a granular soil.
1.3.2 Examination
A) The Contractor shall obtain existing utility information, and execute trial pits to
locate and confirm services at pit/shaft locations and elsewhere as required.
B) Pre construction photographs and pre construction grid survey of surface levels
along the length of the proposed tunnel shall be taken by the Contractor.
1.3.3 Cavity Grouting

A) In case cavities have been confirmed to exist along the tunneling route by
geophysical survey, such cavities shall be grouted.
B) Grouting of existing cavities where required shall be carried out by means of
drilling and pressure grouting of cement, cement/sand or cement/bentonite
mortar to fill in the cavities and open fissures. This work shall be designed,
carried out and tested by a specialized Contractor to a method statement
C) Boreholes shall be drilled vertically to the required depth below existing ground
levels. Grouting shall be completed from the base of the boreholes up to ground
PAGE 13
levels. Verification boreholes shall be drilled, water pressure tested and grouted
to assess the effectiveness of the treatment.
D) Drilling shall be executed using rotary drilling methods with a casing advancer
system to prevent borehole collapse in unconsolidated materials. Borehole
diameter shall be a minimum of 100mm.
E) Grouting shall be carried out in stages in accordance with the approved method
statement. Inflatable packs shall be used as necessary to isolate areas requiring
grouting and to enable pressure grouting. Grout shall be pumped through
flexible hoses or steel pipes to the grout hole location. Grouting pressure shall
be regulated up to a maximum of 2 bar unless ground conditions dictate
otherwise. Grout shall be introduced to the grout hole via a termite pipe placed
op V1
at the base of the borehole. The termite pipe shall not be removed until 100%
grout is observed and maintained at the grout hole surface.
1.3.4 Pits/Shafts
C -
y
A) It is envisaged that pits/shafts will be constructed as follows but the final design
C
will be the responsibility of the Contractor to the approval of the Engineer.
B) The Contractor shall select between using inter-locked sheet pile cofferdam or
C
reinforced concrete caisson as the most appropriate for the site conditions and
for the soil profile.
Q
C) All the joints between caisson rings shall be sealed with joint sealant and the
caisson grouted from outside in order to make it watertight.
D) Interlocked steel sheet piles shall be braced by suitable steel framing welded to
the sheet piles. No struts shall be used for bracing. The first set of bracing shall
be 0.5m from the ground surface.
E) The pit bottom shall be sealed with a concrete plug, which shall be placed
underwater and designed to resist water uplift as well as forces from the jacking
equipment to be installed in the pit.
F) A reinforced concrete wall shall be provided in the thrust pit to resist the jacking
force. A properly braced concrete wall shall be provided in the thrust and
reception pits in order to install the exit and entry rings.
G) If a portion of the pit is to be constructed in rock, then this portion may be

unsupported provided the rock layer is strong enough to safely resist all the
expected forces and stresses. Contractor shall prove this by testing and
calculation. Special precautions shall be taken to seal the interface between the
caisson or sheet piles and the rock so that it is water and soil tight. Rock faces
should also be treated if necessary to make them watertight.
H) The pits/shafts shall be maintained dry prior to commencing and throughout

tunneling works. Dealing with groundwater were required shall be carried out
carefully and slowly. The Contractor shall provide standby facilities.
I) Thrust wall shall be:
i. Perpendicular to the proposed line of thrust.
PAGE 14
ii. Sufficient to accept repeatedly the maximum permitted thrust force without
undue movement and without thrusting directly off any part of the
permanent works comprising any shaft, chamber or pumping station
unless this is specifically designed to withstand the thrust reaction.
iii. Not joined to the jacking rig base.
iv. Any void between the soil face used to provide a reaction to the thrust
force and the thrust wall filled completely with grout or concrete.
J) Entry and exit sealing rings shall be provided to ensure a watertight joint around
the pipe at all times.
op V1
1.3.5 Tunnelling
A) Before any particular tunneling commences, the Contractor shall provide
sufficient pipes, and, if required, provide intermediate jacking station assemblies
to ensure continuous operation.
C -
y
B) The Contractor shall carry out the tunnel construction using the recommended
C
accepted method to the satisfaction of the Engineer and to meet the contents of
these specifications.
C
C) The thrust force shall be limited to the maximum permissible as determined and
based on submitted and approved calculations.
D) Excavation rate shall not exceed the horizontal drive rate throughout the
Q
operation.
e) The Contractor shall prevent both subsidence and heave during all stages of the
setting up, tunneling operation and dismantling.
F) The Contractor shall remove slurry/excavated soil mixture properly from the
excavation, settle in a stilling basin and remove from the site to a suitable
location. Stock piling on site shall be avoided.
G) The Contractor shall maintain tunnel face support for balancing full earth
pressure and groundwater pressures.
H) Tunneling operation shall be run continuously between drive and reception
pits/shafts.
J) Cuttings spoil removal and cutter face operation is not permitted when the pipe
thrust is not being carried out.
K) The annular overbore voids around the outside of the pipe shall be filled to avoid
collapse and upward migration of the void prior to permanent grouting. Drilling
fluid injection overpressure shall be avoided.
L) Casing and carrier pipes: Carrier pipe sections shall be placed and joined
individually within the sleeve or mount on guide rails or trolleys in such a manner
as to transmit the pulling/pushing forces through the carriage and not through
the pipe.
1.3.6 Packing
A) Packing shall be cut to dimensions that ensure the full bearing width of the joint
is protected. The Contractor shall ensure that the initial thickness of the packing
is such that the final joint gaps achieved upon completion of the pipeline are a
minimum 8mm in width or in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s
PAGE 15
recommendations. The joint gap shall have a tolerance of between 6mm and
15mm depending on jacking forces.
B) Packing shall not be fixed over the full face of the pipe but stopped
approximately 10mm round edges.
C) Where there is no external pipe/sleeve, pipe installation shall continue until at
least one additional length of pipe beyond the limit of construction is exposed.
Where the pipe has failed, a second pipe shall be jacked through and inspected.
The condition of the exposed pipe and its exterior coating shall be inspected by
the Engineer. Where in the opinion of the Engineer the pipe or coating has been
damaged during installation, the Contractor shall submit a proposal, for review
by the Engineer, for demonstrating the adequacy of the pipeline installed.
op V1
D) Gaps in the joints between the pipes shall be sealed with an approved material.
1.3.7 Line and Level Control

A) The setting of the laser and target and the alignment of the tunnel relative to the
C -
laser beam shall be accurate and checked constantly.
y
B)
C
Where pipeline diameter allows, manual checking of line and level shall be
carried out by conventional theodolite and level techniques.
C
C) If the deviation exceeds the specified tolerance, work shall cease immediately
and the Engineer informed forthwith. The Contractor shall submit proposals to
rectify the deviation and work shall only recommence on the written instruction
Q
of the Engineer.
1.3.8 Tolerances
A) Lateral deviation of any part of the pipeline shall be not more than ±50mm.
B) Level deviation of any part of the pipeline shall be not more than ±20mm for
pipe diameter up to 1800mm and ±50mm for pipe diameter above 1800mm.
C) Maximum lipping between the edges of adjacent pipes shall be not more than
±5mm.
D) Ground movement shall be limited to the following:
i. Ground or roadway surface above the pipe centerline 3mm (unless the
Roads Authorities requirement is more stringent).
ii. Adjacent structures 3mm.
1.3.9 Drilling Fluid Tests

Control tests on the bentonite suspension shall be carried out using suitable
apparatus. The density of freshly mixed bentonite suspension shall be measured
daily as a check on the quality of the suspension being formed. The measuring
device shall be calibrated to read to within 0.005 g/ml. Tests to determine density,
viscosity, shear strength and pH value shall be applied to bentonite supplied to the
pipe bore. For average soil conditions the results shall generally be within the
ranges in Table 1-1 below.
PAGE 16
Table 1-1: Bentonite Suspension Properties
Property Test Method Range of Results
Density Mud density balance Less than 1.10g/ml
Viscosity Marsh cone method Fan 30 to 90s

viscometer
less than 0.020Pa-s
Shear strength Shear meter 1.4 to 10Pa
op V1
10 minute gel strength Fan viscometer 4 to 40Pa
pH pH indicator paper strips or 9.5 to 12

electrical pH meter
C -
Notes to Table 1-1
y
C
1) Where the Fan viscometer is specified, the fluid sample should be screened
by a 300 μm sieve before testing.
C
2) The Contractor shall propose the frequency of testing bentonite slurry and the
method and procedure of sampling for approval before the commencement of
Q
work. The frequency may subsequently be varied as required, depending on

the consistency of the results obtained, subject to approval.
3) Carry out tests until a consistent working pattern has been established,
account being taken of the mixing process, any blending of freshly mixed
bentonite suspension and previously used bentonite suspension, and any
process which may be used to remove impurities from previously used
bentonite suspension. When the results show consistent behavior, the tests
for shear strength and pH value may be discontinued, and tests to determine
density and viscosity shall be carried out as agreed with the Engineer. In the
event of a change in the established working pattern, tests for shear strength
and pH value shall be reintroduced for a period if required.
1.3.10 Grouting
A) Upon completion of a section the grout should be pumped through all lubrication
holes. The pressure and quantity of grout injected shall be calculated by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
B) Grouting shall begin at the lower holes systematically working from one end of
the pipe jack to the other. Where injection holes can be opened without loss of
ground, grout shall be pumped through the lower injection holes until it emerges
from the upper holes.
C) Grouting progress shall be continuously monitored to ensure there is no heave.
D) The carrier pipe and joints shall be protected from the possible adverse physical
or chemical effect of grout. Compressible material shall be wrapped around the
carrier pipe if required.
E A free venting standpipe of not less than 100mm diameter on the grout injection
feed shall be installed to restrict grouting pressures to a maximum of 1 bar.
PAGE 17
F) Lubrication holes shall be plug watertight on completion and good pipe lining or
coating shall be made. The pressure of the lubricant shall be maintained when it
is to be replaced by grout.
1.3.11 Monitoring Ground Surface Movement

A) The Contractor shall continuously monitor the ground surface adjacent to
structures and buried utilities and shall control activities such as excavation,
tunneling and dewatering to prevent movement and or damage to existing
structures.
B) Movement points shall be installed and monitored prior to any excavation

associated with the pipeline.
op V1
C) The optimum location for points to monitor existing structures shall be
determined and submitted to the approval of the Engineer.
D) Monitoring points shall be provided within the existing structures and on the road
C -
surface and submitted to the approval of the Engineer. Generally, monitoring
y
C
points along the road surface shall be located along the pipe centerline on each
side. The distance for the location of the monitoring points along the same line
shall be calculated to fall within the HS 20 wheel loads in each lane. Points on
C
existing structures shall be located approximately 500mm above the ground
surface. Location of settlement points in the vicinity of the pits/shafts will be
agreed with of the Engineer.
Q
E) All points shall be monitored with reference to benchmarks located outside the
area of influence of the Works. Monitoring shall demonstrate repeatability to
3mm.
F) The elevations of monitoring points shall be obtained as described below.

i. For monitoring points within 20m of the heading, after each advance of
5m.
ii. For monitoring points greater than 20m but less than 100m away from the
heading, daily.
iii. The monitoring point elevations shall be reported to the Engineer within 24
hours during the course of construction of the pipeline and related
pits/shafts.
G) Should surface movement occur greater than the specified limits, at any location
affected by the Works, the Engineer may require modification of the method or
sequence of the work or a shutdown of the work to make appropriate changes
in the construction operation. Changes required to keep surface movement
within the specified acceptable limits shall be made solely at the Contractor’s
expense.
h) Upon completion of the pipeline, monitoring of point elevations shall be

continued during the maintenance period as required by the relevant authority.
Findings shall be recorded and reported to the Engineer on a monthly basis. If
the specified limits are exceeded, they shall be reported immediately and a
proposal to rectify the road surface and prevent further settlement shall be
submitted.
PAGE 18
1.3.12 Pipe Testing

A) Infiltration test shall be conducted upon completion of the permanent
construction of the tunnel to verify the joints are water tight. The infiltration test
shall be carried out after dewatering is stopped and the groundwater has
attained normal levels. In the case of lined concrete pipes the leakage tests
shall be carried out after installation and before the liners of the successive
pipes are joined and sealed. After joining and sealing of the liners, there shall be
no evidence of a build-up of groundwater pressure at the joints of the concrete
pipe.
B) Man entry pipelines shall be visually inspected only. Any leaks to be repaired /
stopped.
op V1
C) Infiltration or pipe deflection is not permitted in sections of pipelines underneath
roads, paved areas and services.
D) In the event of the works failing the test, for whatever reason, the Contractor
C -
shall take such remedial action as is necessary to correct the deficiencies,
y
subject to the Engineer's approval of any methods proposed. The works shall be
C
re-tested until such time as the works pass the test.
C
A) The Contractor shall maintain and submit to the Engineer after each working
Q
shift a log which records the following:
i. Identification number of pipes installed during shift and name of

operator.
ii. Strata encountered.
iii. Position and orientation of the lead ten pipes.
iv. Forces used on both main and inter jack rams during driving of each
pipe.
v. Line and level.
vi. Roll of pipe jacking shield.
vii. Maximum rate of advance.
viii. Distance moved.
ix. Thrust from ground on face of machine.
x. Volume of lubricant used, location of injection and pressure at point of
injection.
xi. Volumes of material removed.
xii. Volumes of grout used, the points of injection and pressure at the points
of injection.
xiii. Cutter torque.
xiv. Slurry flow and pressure.
xv. Supply pressure.
xvi. Pitch of tunneling machine.
PAGE 19
xvii. Deflection angle.

xviii. Gas readings at the excavating face, oxygen, methane and hydrogen
sulphates.
xix. Gas readings in thrust pit.
xx. Level records of ground surface or road pavement.
xxi. Accident and stoppage, if any, with full explanation.
END OF SECTION
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 20
op V1
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
C -
y
C
C
(VOLUME III)
Q
DIVISION 15
ELECTRO MECHANICAL
DOCUMENT NO: 511

FIRST EDITION
DECEMBER- 2016
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Document No: 511

First Edition
December-2016
PO Box 20
the publisher
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of Contents ................................................................................................................. i
List of Figures .................................................................................................................. viii
LIST OF TABLES ................................................................................................................ IX
1. GENERAL M&E REQUIREMENTS (SECTION 15001) .............................................. 1
1.1 General ................................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Specifications and Standards .............................................................................................. 1
1.2.1 General ................................................................................................................................ 1
op V1
1.3 Tropicalisation ....................................................................................................................... 2
1.3.1 General ................................................................................................................................ 2
1.3.2 Climatic Conditions.............................................................................................................. 3
1.4 Electrical Equipment ............................................................................................................. 4
1.4.1
C -
Compliance ......................................................................................................................... 4
y
1.4.2
C
Installation ........................................................................................................................... 5
1.4.3 Noise ................................................................................................................................... 6
C
1.5 Plant and Equipment ............................................................................................................ 6
1.5.1 Resistance to Corrosion ...................................................................................................... 6
Q
1.5.2 Structural Steelwork ............................................................................................................ 7

1.5.3 Robustness ......................................................................................................................... 7
1.5.4 Rotating Assemblies ........................................................................................................... 8
1.5.4.1 Speeds ........................................................................................................................ 8
1.5.4.2 Couplings .................................................................................................................... 8
1.5.4.3 Shafts .......................................................................................................................... 8
1.5.4.4 Transmissions ............................................................................................................. 8
1.5.4.5 Vibration ...................................................................................................................... 9
1.5.4.6 Guarding Of Shafts...................................................................................................... 9
1.5.4.7 Bearings ...................................................................................................................... 9
1.5.4.8 Castings and Forgings ................................................................................................ 9
1.5.5 Stainless Steel................................................................................................................... 10
1.5.6 Aluminium Alloy ................................................................................................................. 10
1.5.7 Contact with Potable Water............................................................................................... 10
1.5.8 Special Tools ..................................................................................................................... 10
1.5.9 First Fill of Lubrication ....................................................................................................... 10
1.5.10 Lifting Equipment........................................................................................................... 11
1.5.11 Electrical Control Panels ............................................................................................... 11
1.5.12 Interface with Existing Plant .......................................................................................... 12
1.5.13 Concept of Plant Control ............................................................................................... 12
PAGE I
1.5.14 Modelling of Pumping Station Performance .................................................................. 12

1.6 Factory Acceptance Tests.................................................................................................. 13
1.6.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 13
1.6.2 Factory Built Assemblies (FBAS) ...................................................................................... 14
1.6.3 Pump sets ......................................................................................................................... 14
1.6.4 Electric Motors................................................................................................................... 15
1.6.4.1 General ...................................................................................................................... 15
1.6.4.2 Variable Frequency Drives (VFDS) ........................................................................... 15
1.6.5 Diesel Generators ............................................................................................................. 15
1.7 Commissioning ................................................................................................................... 17
op V1
1.7.1 Equipment Installation ....................................................................................................... 17
1.7.2 Site Acceptance Tests ...................................................................................................... 17
1.7.3 Training ............................................................................................................................. 19
1.7.4
C -
Pumpsets and Air Compressors ....................................................................................... 19
y
1.7.5
C
Electric Motors................................................................................................................... 20
1.7.6 Performance Testing of Processes ................................................................................... 21
C
1.8 Identification ........................................................................................................................ 22
1.8.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 22
Q
1.8.2 Nameplates ....................................................................................................................... 22

1.8.3 Tags .................................................................................................................................. 23
1.8.4 Stencils .............................................................................................................................. 23
1.8.5 Pipe Markers ..................................................................................................................... 23
1.8.6 Instruction Notices ............................................................................................................. 23
1.8.7 Safety Warning Signs and Notices.................................................................................... 24
1.8.8 Identification Colours ......................................................................................................... 24
1.8.9 Colour Schedule for Plant and Equipment ........................................................................ 24
1.8.10 Identification Colours for Plant And Equipment ............................................................ 25
1.8.11 Identification Colours for Pipelines ................................................................................ 26
1.8.12 Preparation .................................................................................................................... 26
1.8.13 Installation ..................................................................................................................... 26
1.8.14 Schedules ...................................................................................................................... 27
1.9 Warranty ............................................................................................................................... 27
1.9.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 27
2. STANDARD AND REGULATIONS (SECTION 15002) ............................................ 29
2.1 General Requirements ........................................................................................................ 29
2.2 Purpose of Standards ......................................................................................................... 29
2.3 International Standards ...................................................................................................... 30
2.4 International Regulations ................................................................................................... 31
PAGE II
2.5 Local Regulations ............................................................................................................... 31

2.6 ISO Standards...................................................................................................................... 31
2.7 IEC Standards ...................................................................................................................... 33
2.8 BS EN Standards ................................................................................................................. 39
2.9 BS Standards ....................................................................................................................... 54
2.10 PD Standards ....................................................................................................................... 68
2.11 CEN Standards .................................................................................................................... 68
2.12 ASTM Standards ................................................................................................................. 69
2.13 NEMA Standards ................................................................................................................. 77
2.14 ANSI Standards ................................................................................................................... 79
op V1
2.15 ASME Standards ................................................................................................................. 80
2.16 UL Standards ....................................................................................................................... 81
2.17 NFPA Standards .................................................................................................................. 82
2.18
C -
ATEX Standards .................................................................................................................. 82
y
2.19
C
AWS Standards ................................................................................................................... 82
2.20 AWWA Standards ................................................................................................................ 83
C
2.21 WIS Standards ..................................................................................................................... 83
2.22 DIN Standards...................................................................................................................... 83
Q
2.23 VDE Standards .................................................................................................................... 84

2.24 UK Engineering Standards ................................................................................................. 84
3. VALVES AND ACTUATORS (SECTION 15115) ..................................................... 85
3.1 General ................................................................................................................................. 85
3.1.1 Scope ............................................................................................................................ 85
3.1.2 Related Documents ........................................................................................................... 85
3.2 Standards ............................................................................................................................. 85
3.2.1 Submittals .......................................................................................................................... 86
3.2.1.1 Products and materials approval............................................................................... 86
3.2.1.2 Method Statements ................................................................................................... 87
3.2.1.3 Working drawings. ..................................................................................................... 87
3.2.2 Quality Control................................................................................................................... 87
3.2.3 Delivery, Storage and Handling ........................................................................................ 88
3.3 Products ............................................................................................................................... 88
3.2.1 General Requirements ...................................................................................................... 88
3.2.2 Gate Valves ....................................................................................................................... 89
3.2.3 Butterfly Valves ................................................................................................................. 90
3.2.4 Check Valves .................................................................................................................... 91
3.2.5 Air Valves .......................................................................................................................... 93
3.2.6 Flow Control Valves .......................................................................................................... 93
PAGE III
3.2.7 Pressure Relief Valves ...................................................................................................... 94

3.2.8 Pressure Reducing/ Sustaining Valves ............................................................................. 95
3.2.9 Protective Coatings ........................................................................................................... 96
3.2.10 Marking of Valves .......................................................................................................... 96
3.4 Actuators.............................................................................................................................. 96
3.3.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 96
3.3.2 Actuators, Electrical Motor Driven ..................................................................................... 97
3.3.3 Solenoid Valve Actuator .................................................................................................... 97
3.3.4 Gear Boxes ....................................................................................................................... 98
3.5 Execution ............................................................................................................................. 98
op V1
3.4.1 Installation ......................................................................................................................... 98
3.4.2 Testing ............................................................................................................................... 98
4. PIPE EXPANSION COMPENSATION (SECTION 15121)........................................ 99
4.1
C -
General ................................................................................................................................. 99
y
4.1.1
C
Scope ................................................................................................................................ 99
4.1.2 Related Documents ........................................................................................................... 99
C
4.1.3 Standards .......................................................................................................................... 99
4.1.4 Submittals .......................................................................................................................... 99
Q
4.1.4.1 Products and Materials Approval .............................................................................. 99

4.1.5 Quality Control................................................................................................................... 99
4.1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling ...................................................................................... 100
4.2 Products ............................................................................................................................. 100
4.2.1 General Requirements .................................................................................................... 100
5. PIPE SUPPORTS (SECTION 15140) ..................................................................... 102
5.1 General ............................................................................................................................... 102
5.1.1 Scope .............................................................................................................................. 102
5.1.2 Related Documents ......................................................................................................... 102
5.1.3 Standards ........................................................................................................................ 102
5.1.4 Submittals ........................................................................................................................ 103
5.1.4.1 Products and materials approval............................................................................. 103
5.1.4.2 Method Statements ................................................................................................. 104
5.1.4.3 Working drawings. ................................................................................................... 104
5.1.5 Quality Control................................................................................................................. 104
5.2 Products ............................................................................................................................. 105
5.2.1 Technical Definitions ....................................................................................................... 105
5.2.2 Materials .......................................................................................................................... 106
5.2.3 General Requirements .................................................................................................... 106
PAGE IV
5.2.4 Protective Coatings ......................................................................................................... 107

5.3 Execution ........................................................................................................................... 108
5.3.1 Installation ....................................................................................................................... 108
5.3.2 Testing ............................................................................................................................. 108
6. VIBRATION ISOLATION (SECTION 15245) ......................................................... 110
6.1 Part 1 General .................................................................................................................... 110
6.1.1 Scope .............................................................................................................................. 110
6.1.2 Related Documents ......................................................................................................... 110
6.1.3 Standards ........................................................................................................................ 110
6.1.4 Submittals ........................................................................................................................ 110
op V1
6.1.4.1 Products And Materials Approval ............................................................................ 110
6.1.5 Quality Control................................................................................................................. 111
6.2
C -
Part 2 Products .................................................................................................................. 111
y
6.2.1
C
General Requirements .................................................................................................... 111
7. INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS (SECTION 15980) ............................................. 113
C
7.1 Design Considerations ..................................................................................................... 113
7.1.1 General ............................................................................................................................ 113
Q
7.1.2 Selection of Equipment ................................................................................................... 114

7.2 Technical Requirements for Flow Instruments .............................................................. 115
7.2.1 Electromagnetic Flow Meter ............................................................................................ 115
7.2.1.1 General .................................................................................................................... 115
7.2.1.2 Flow Sensor ............................................................................................................ 116
7.2.1.3 Transmitter Unit ....................................................................................................... 117
7.2.2 Flow Switches ................................................................................................................. 118
7.2.3 Variable Area Flow Meter (Rotameter) ........................................................................... 118
7.2.4 Flumes and Weirs ........................................................................................................... 118
7.3 Technical Requirements for Pressure Instruments....................................................... 119
7.3.1 Pressure Gauges ............................................................................................................ 119
7.3.1.1 General .................................................................................................................... 119
7.3.1.2 Case ........................................................................................................................ 119
7.3.1.3 Pressure Sensing Element ...................................................................................... 119
7.3.1.4 Connection .............................................................................................................. 120
7.3.1.5 Pointer Movement ................................................................................................... 120
7.3.1.6 Pointer and Dial ....................................................................................................... 120
7.3.1.7 Safety Factor ........................................................................................................... 120
7.3.1.8 Accuracy.................................................................................................................. 120
7.3.1.9 Accessories ............................................................................................................. 120
PAGE V
7.3.2 Pressure Switches........................................................................................................... 120

7.3.3 Pressure Transmitters ..................................................................................................... 121
7.4 Technical Requirements – Level Instruments................................................................ 122
7.4.1 Level Gauges .................................................................................................................. 122
7.4.2 Level Switches ................................................................................................................ 123
7.4.3 Level Transmitter – Ultrasonic Type ............................................................................... 123
7.4.3.1 Sensor ..................................................................................................................... 123
7.4.3.2 Transmitter .............................................................................................................. 124
7.4.4 Level Transmitter – Hydrostatic Type ............................................................................. 125
7.4.4.1 General .................................................................................................................... 125
op V1
7.4.4.2 Design Features ...................................................................................................... 125
7.4.4.3 Materials .................................................................................................................. 125
7.4.4.4 Mounting .................................................................................................................. 125
7.4.4.5
C -
Enclosure Class ...................................................................................................... 125
y
7.4.4.6
C
Electronic Module .................................................................................................... 126
7.4.4.7 Measuring Range .................................................................................................... 126
C
7.4.4.8 Performance Requirements .................................................................................... 126
7.4.5 Level Transmitter – Radar ............................................................................................... 126
Q
7.4.5.1 General .................................................................................................................... 126

7.4.5.2 Design Features ...................................................................................................... 126
7.4.5.3 Sensor ..................................................................................................................... 126
7.4.5.4 Transmitter .............................................................................................................. 127
7.4.5.5 Materials .................................................................................................................. 128
7.5 Temperature Instruments ................................................................................................. 128
7.5.1 Platinum Resistance Thermometer (RTD) Elements For Pressure Vessels .................. 128
7.5.1.1 General .................................................................................................................... 128
7.5.1.2 Requirements .......................................................................................................... 128
7.5.1.3 Dimensions .............................................................................................................. 128
7.5.1.4 Mounting .................................................................................................................. 128
7.5.1.5 Materials .................................................................................................................. 128
7.5.1.6 Performance ............................................................................................................ 129
7.5.1.7 Transmitters ............................................................................................................ 129
7.6 Vibration Monitoring System ........................................................................................... 130
7.7 Water Quality Analysers ................................................................................................... 130
7.7.1 General ............................................................................................................................ 130
7.7.2 Transmitters .................................................................................................................... 131
7.7.3 Residual Chlorine ............................................................................................................ 132
7.7.4 Conductivity ..................................................................................................................... 133
7.7.5 PH Analyser .................................................................................................................... 133
PAGE VI
7.7.6 Turbidity........................................................................................................................... 133

7.7.7 ORP Analyser .................................................................................................................. 133
7.7.8 Analyser Rack ................................................................................................................. 133
7.8 Inspection and Testing ..................................................................................................... 134
7.8.1 Pressure Tests ................................................................................................................ 134
7.8.2 Instrument Calibration ..................................................................................................... 134
7.8.3 Cable Continuity and Insulation Resistance ................................................................... 134
7.8.4 Loop-Checking and Functional Testing .......................................................................... 135
7.8.5 Nameplates and Tagging ................................................................................................ 135
7.8.6 Labelling .......................................................................................................................... 135
op V1
8. CONTROL PHILOSOPHY (SECTION 15985)........................................................ 136
8.1 Pumping Stations .............................................................................................................. 136
8.1.1 Control Description .......................................................................................................... 136
8.1.2
C -
Process Control Interface ................................................................................................ 136
y
8.1.3
C
Process Control Operation .............................................................................................. 138
8.1.3.1 RTU / PLC / Relay Logic ......................................................................................... 138
C
8.1.3.2 Level / Float Control System ................................................................................... 138
8.1.3.3 Duty Selection ......................................................................................................... 140
Q
8.1.3.4 Run Time ................................................................................................................. 141

8.1.4 Typical Pumping Cycle When Remote Mode Selected .................................................. 141
8.1.4.1 Level Control ........................................................................................................... 141
8.1.4.2 Float / Probe Control ............................................................................................... 142
8.1.4.3 Pressure/Flow Control (for VFD Pumps Only) ........................................................ 143
8.1.5 Pump Availability ............................................................................................................. 146
8.1.5.1 Pump Failed to Start ............................................................................................... 146
8.1.5.2 Pump Available ....................................................................................................... 147
8.1.5.3 Discharge Pressure ................................................................................................. 147
8.1.5.4 Dry Well ................................................................................................................... 147
8.1.5.5 Other Indications ..................................................................................................... 147
8.1.5.6 Wet Well Alarms ...................................................................................................... 147
8.1.5.7 Low And High Pressure And Current Alarms .......................................................... 147
8.1.5.8 Analogue Alarms ..................................................................................................... 147
8.1.6 Telemetry – SCADA Interface ......................................................................................... 148
PAGE VII
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 8-1: Level Selection Flow Chart-Typical Process Control ....................................................... 140
Figure 8-2: Pressure Control Chart (for VFD pumps only) ................................................................. 144
Figure 8-3: Flow Control Chart (for VFD pumps only) ........................................................................ 145
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE VIII
LIST OF TABLES
Table ‎1-1: Climate Conditions ................................................................................................................. 3
Table 1-2:Electrical Equipment ............................................................................................................... 4
Table ‎1-3: Colour Scheme for Plant and Equipment ............................................................................ 24
Table ‎1-4: Colour Scheme .................................................................................................................... 24
Table ‎1-5: Identification Colours for Pipelines ...................................................................................... 26
Table ‎3-1: Gate Valve-Material ............................................................................................................. 89
Table ‎3-2: Butterfly Valve-Material ........................................................................................................ 90
Table ‎3-3: Check Valve-Material (DN≤300) .......................................................................................... 92
Table ‎3-4: Check Valve-Material (DN≥350) .......................................................................................... 92
Table ‎3-5: Air Valves - Material ............................................................................................................. 93
op V1
Table ‎3-6: Axial type flow control valve- Material.................................................................................. 94
Table ‎3-7: Diaphragm Control Valve-Material....................................................................................... 94
Table ‎3-8: Pressure Relief Valve- Material ........................................................................................... 95
Table ‎3-9: Pressure Reducing/Sustaining valve-Material ..................................................................... 95
Table ‎8-1: Typical Process Control I/O List- Multi-pump .................................................................... 136
C -
Table ‎8-2: Additional I/O signals specification .................................................................................... 137
y
C
C
Q
PAGE IX
1. GENERAL M&E REQUIREMENTS (SECTION

15001)
1.1 General
A) This document sets out the general standards and information requirements
for Mechanical, Electrical, Instrumentation and Control (ICA) Works.
B) All component parts of the Works, including procedures, practices and

services, shall unless otherwise stated in the contract, comply with the
provisions of this section or be subject to the written approval of DMAT. All
op V1
work undertaken and equipment supplied shall comply with all codes,
regulations, and specifications referred to throughout the contract documents.
C) Only new materials and equipment shall be used, unless otherwise

specified.
C -
y
C
D) Neither the contractual relationship, duties and responsibilities of the parties
in contract nor those of DMAT shall be altered by the contract documents by
C
E) Provisional positioning of new equipment shall be shown
diagrammatically on the tender drawings. Exact positioning of such
Q
equipment shall be agreed during the ‘Drawings for Approval’ stage of the
contract. Where equipment is to be installed into existing Works, the Contractor
shall ensure at the pre-tender visit that the provisional location is adequate
for the installation of the proposed plant and equipment, or indicate otherwise
in their tender return.
F) Unless otherwise stated, all minor civil engineering and building works
associated with the installation of plant and equipment into existing Works
shall be undertaken by the Contractor.
1.2 Specifications and Standards

1.2.1 General
A) All plant, equipment, systems, components, workmanship, working
practices, procedures and all other items and activities shall comply with
the quoted standards and regulations in Section 15002 of this specification
and as qualified and amended throughout this specification. Section 15002
covers the main standards and codes of practice. Some requirements will not
be covered by the above quoted standards, but regardless of whether or not
a particular standard is specified, all products and services shall comply with
any International ISO, IEC, BS EN, BS and ASME covering such items, as a
minimum, unless otherwise specified. Unless otherwise stated, ISO shall take
precedent over IEC, which shall take precedence over BS EN, which will take
precedence over BS, which will take precedence over all remaining
standards.
PAGE 1
DIVISION 15 - SECTION 15001 FIRST EDITION -DECEMBER 2016

B) Supportive technical literature shall be provided from manufacturers to show

that products comply with the specification. Where requested by DMAT, or
specified, the Contractor shall submit supporting test data to substantiate
compliance in conformity with specified standards, complete with a statement
from the manufacturer that original non-conformities have been observed,
and subsequently addressed to meet this specification.
C) All component parts shall be manufactured to a strict system of ‘Limits and

Fits’ and complete interchangeability of similar parts is required, where
international standardization of such parts is in place.
D) All references to codes, regulations, specifications and standards referred to

in the contract documents shall, unless otherwise stated, mean the latest
op V1
edition, amendment or revision of such reference standard in effect as of the
date of submission of these bid documents by the bidders.
E) Quoted reference standards referred to herein are deemed mandatory under

this contract unless conflicting with particular specifications contained herein.
C -
Products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus
y
C
standards, are also deemed mandatory, except when more rigid
requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.
C
F) Should specified reference standards conflict with contract documents, then
clarification shall be sought from DMAT before proceeding with the supply or
manufacture of plant and equipment.
Q
G) References to published standards shall be construed as reference to a

recognised equivalent standard.
1.3 Tropicalisation
1.3.1 General
A) All plant and equipment shall be designed for the Emirates of Abu Dhabi
climate.
B) Tropical grade materials shall only be used with the exception of the internals
of hermetically sealed equipment.
C) Iron and steel are in general to be painted in accordance with Section 09900.
D) Small iron and steel parts, other than stainless steel, of all instruments and
electrical equipment, the cores of electromagnets and the metal parts of
relays and mechanisms are to be treated in an approved manner to prevent
rusting. Cores etc., which are built up of laminations or cannot for any other
reasons be anti-rust treated, are to have all exposed parts thoroughly
cleaned and heavily enamelled, lacquered or compounded.
E) Unless suitably protected from the elements, the use of iron and steel
shall be avoided in instruments and electrical relays. Steel
screws shall be stainless steel, zinc, cadmium or chromium plated.
F) Instrument screws (except those forming part of a magnetic circuit) shall be

of brass or bronze. Springs shall be of stainless steel, brass, bronze or other
PAGE 2

non-rusting material. Pivots and other parts for which non- ferrous material is
unsuitable are to be of an approved stainless steel.
G) Fabrics, cork, paper and similar materials that are not subsequently to be
treated by impregnation are to be adequately treated with an approved
fungicide. Sleeving and fabrics treated with linseed oil or linseed oil
varnishes, are not to be used.
H) The use of wood in equipment is to be avoided as far as possible. When

used, woodwork is to be thoroughly seasoned teak or other approved wood
that is resistant to fungal decay and is to be free from shakes and warp, sap
and wane, knots, faults, and other blemishes. All woodwork is to be suitably
treated to protect it against the ingress of moisture and from the growth of
op V1
fungus and termite attack. All joints in woodwork are to be dovetailed or
tongued and pinned as far as possible. Metal fittings, where used, are to be
of a non-ferrous material or stainless steel.
I) Adhesives are to be selected to ensure they are impervious to moisture,
C -
resistant to mould growth and not subject to the ravages of insects. Synthetic
y
C
resin cement only is to be used for jointing wood. Casein cement is not to be
used.
C
J) The use of hygroscopic insulating materials shall not be permitted except
where immersed in oil or suitably sealed to prevent ingress of moisture.
Q
1.3.2 Climatic Conditions

A) Climatic conditions are harsh. The atmosphere can be very hot, laden with
salt and humid for long periods. The resulting combination is highly corrosive.
Sand storms and dust storms are frequent.
B) All equipment shall be derated for continuous operation under the ambient
conditions table below, and unless otherwise specified, performance
guarantees shall at these conditions.
All materials and equipment subject to certification by testing authorities etc,

shall be certified as being tested at these conditions.
The following maximum conditions shall be used for all designs:
Table 1-1: Climate Conditions
Element Value
Peak ambient shade temperature 55ºC
Temperature of metal surfaces in direct sunlight 90ºC
Relative Humidity 100%
Design Wind Speed 160km/hr
Altitude ≤1,000m
PAGE 3

C) Sun shading shall be supplied where necessary and where specified to

ensure that plant and equipment operates satisfactorily in the ambient
conditions stated above.
1.4 Electrical Equipment

1.4.1 Compliance
A. Electrical equipment shall comply with Abu Dhabi Water and Electricity
Authority (ADWEA) Regulations. The Contractor shall be responsible for
establishing the exact characteristics of all installed electrical equipment,
including fault levels and then ensuring this complies with the specific
regulatory requirements. The prevailing supply characteristics are as
op V1
follows:
i. High Voltage (HV): 11,000V, 3-phase, 3-wire, 50Hz.
ii. Low Voltage (LV): 415V, 3-phase, 4-wire, 50Hz.

C -
y
iii.
C
Voltage: ±10% at LV (from ADWEA).
iv. Frequency: ±3% Transient Disturbed Conditions (from ADWEA).

C
B. Typical system characteristics are as follows:
Table 1-2:Electrical Equipment

Q
Description 33kV 11kV 415V

Rated Service Voltage 33 11 415/240
Highest System Voltage 36 12.5 1000
Impulse Test Voltage 170 95 ----
Number of Phase 3 3 3
Design Fault level 31.5kA 25kA for 3 80kA for 1
Neutral Solidly Solidly

seconds Solidly
second
Earthed Earthed Earthed
C. The whole design shall comply with the necessary specifications,

statutory
requirements and codes of practices listed below:
i. Latest issue of Abu Dhabi Water and Electricity Authority (ADWEA) and
their associated group of companies’ regulations.
ii. Recommendations issued by the International Electro technical

Commission (IEC).
iii. Harmonised European and British Standards or equivalents.
PAGE 4

iv. BS 7671 IEE Wiring Regulations and associated Guidance Notes.
v. Recommendations issued by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics

Engineers standards (IEEE).
vi. Latest issue of the International Organisation for Standardisation (ISO)

especially for Quality, Health and Safety and Environment.
vii. The Emirates Telecommunications Corporation Limited (ETISALAT).
viii. General Directorate of Civil Defense.
1.4.2 Installation
op V1
A. The Contractor shall ensure that the installation is completed to the
highest standard of neatness, particularly with respect to the visible cable
runs and arrangement and alignment of apparatus and fittings, all of
which are to be agreed with DMAT prior to installation.
C -
B. Electrical equipment, components and accessories shall be
y
C
IEC/BSEN/BS certified for the purpose for which they accessories are
used.
C
C. Power ratings specified in the tender documentation or required for the
proposed equipment shall be in accordance with the best information
available to DMAT. Should any item of equipment proposed by the
Q
Contractor require a larger motor than that indicated within the tender, the
Contractor shall provide all appropriate control equipment, modifications
to existing motor control centres, starting equipment, feeder and branch
circuits and accessories as required to make the new installation
compliant to the specification without any additional cost to DMAT.
D. Where the Contractor is required to interface new electrical equipment

with existing equipment in existing enclosures or adjacent to existing
equipment, the Contractor shall field check the dimensions of existing
equipment, ratings, location of conduits, etc., and ascertain all existing
conditions and difficulties likely to be encountered in performing
suchwork.
Any interface between old and new equipment requires DMAT approval
at the detailed design stage of the contract.
E. The Contractor is responsible for the fixing of all switches, fuse
boards,switchgear, unit control panels, motor control centres, cables,
fittings, cable trays, accessories and all other items comprising the
electrical installation.
F. All fixings of electrical components to structures and supports shall be

made by means of stainless steel bolts, brass or stainless steel screws
with plastic rawl plugs or similar approved devices.
G. All holes for fixings into electrical compartments, cubicles, conduits and
supports are to be made neatly with a rotary drill. Percussion type tools
are not acceptable for the making of holes.
PAGE 5

H. No structural steel, timberwork or concrete is to be drilled for the support

of cables or fittings, unless indicated on the approved drawings, without
the prior approval of DMAT.
I. Electrical junction boxes in auxiliary control cable circuits for marshaling a

number of cables feeding to a common item of equipment shall be clearly
indicated on the drawings for approval or be subject to the approval of
DMAT.
J. Upon request, samples of the following electrical items shall be furnished

to DMAT prior to installation for approval:
i. A 600mm long section of each cable and/or wire to be used with

connectors, lugs, crimps, terminal blocks etc, as specified.
op V1
ii. Electrical back boxes, junction boxes, luminaries, switches,
sockets, push button station, telecommunication outlets with back
box, conduit, trunking, cable ducts etc.
1.4.3 Noise
C -
y
C
A) The sound levels generated from plant, equipment and the whole of the
installation with the envisaged maximum number of items of plant
running 'on load', shall be measured outside an envelope of one metre
C
radius from any items of plant, and shall not exceed 80 dB(A) at one metre.
The Contractor shall include for suitable sound attenuation, if needed, to
Q
better this level. This will apply in the audible frequency range 20Hz to
20kHz. Above 20kHz, the Contractor must state whether any fundamental
frequencies are generated in the ultrasonic region.
B) Before leaving the manufacturer's works, all major items of rotating machinery
shall be subjected to noise tests and test certificates shall be provided to
DMAT for approval.
1.5 Plant and Equipment

1.5.1 Resistance to Corrosion
A) All submerged moving parts, pins and spindles shall be of non-corrodible
metals. All parts in direct contact with chemicals shall be completely resistant
to corrosion or abrasion by those chemicals, and shall maintain their
properties without ageing, exposure to light or any other cause.
B) All materials utilised in the plant shall be the most suitable for the duty
concerned, shall be new and of first class commercial quality and be selected
to eradicate or reduce corrosion to a minimum. Steel items requiring
corrosion protection to be in accordance with Section 09900.
C) Particular attention shall be paid to material selection to minimize corrosion

due to atmospheric conditions, electrolytic action of dissimilar metals or any
other causes that may reasonably be associated with the overall
performance of the Works.
D) The use of organic materials shall be avoided whenever possible but where
they have to be used; they shall be treated to make them fire-resistant and
non-flame propagating.
PAGE 6

E) The use of wood is to be avoided wherever possible but where this has to be
used, all woodwork shall be treated to protect it against damage by fire,
moisture, fungus, bacteria or chemical effect.
F) Where, in the opinion of DMAT, during the maintenance period any moving
parts show signs of undue wear, chemical attack or unsuitability for the
purpose for which they are installed, they shall be replaced, at no cost to
DMAT, notwithstanding that they may otherwise be working in a satisfactory
manner.
1.5.2 Structural Steelwork

A) No structural steelwork, whether new or existing, shall be drilled for any
op V1
purpose without the written approval of DMAT.
B) The design of structural steel work to be in accordance with Section 05100

and shall be protected from corrosion as detailed in the Section 09900.
1.5.3 Robustness
C -
y
C
A) All equipment furnished shall be new, of best commercial quality and
guaranteed free from defects in materials, design, and workmanship. It shall
C
be the manufacturers’ responsibility to ascertain the conditions and service
under which the equipment will operate and to warrant such operation
trouble-free in service and meeting the specification.
Q
B) All equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance

with the best modern engineering and shop practice. Individual parts shall be
manufactured to standard sizes and gauges so that repair parts, furnished at
any time, can be installed in the field. Like parts of duplicate units shall be
interchangeable.
C) Iron castings shall be tough, close-grained grey iron, free from blowholes,
flaws or excessive shrinkage.
D) Except where otherwise specified, all structural and miscellaneous fabricated

steel used in items of equipment shall conform to the appropriate standards
specified. All structural members shall be considered as subject to shock or
vibratory loads.
E) All parts of the equipment shall be amply proportioned for all stresses that
may occur during fabrication, erection, and stalled, intermittent or continuous
operation.
F) Unless otherwise specified, stainless steel that will be submerged all or in

part during normal operation shall have a minimum nominal thickness of
6mm and be of at least Grade AISI 316L.
G) The Contractor shall provide DMAT two weeks’ notice of the start of
production of fabricated and cast items and shall provide the shop schedule
in order that DMAT can schedule shop inspections, if required.
H) The use of dissimilar metals in contact is to be avoided, but where

unavoidable they are to be selected such that the natural potential difference
between them does not exceed 250mV. Electro-plating or other treatment of
PAGE 7

contacting surfaces is to be employed as necessary to reduce the potential

difference to the desired limit.
1.5.4 Rotating Assemblies
1.5.4.1 Speeds
The preferred maximum rotation speed is 1,450rpm. In the case of optimum
selection requiring 3,000rpm drives, an alternative selection running at
1,450rpm (if possible) shall also be priced using duplicates of the tender
schedules and questionnaires
1.5.4.2 Couplings
op V1
Drive couplings shall be of the flexible type and be rated to transmit the
maximum motor power output. Couplings shall correct minor angular and
positional misalignment without allowing resultant "strain energy" stressing of
either driver or driven shaft. They shall be key located on each shaft and easily
removable.
C -
y
C
1.5.4.3 Shafts
Shafts shall be of high tensile steel or stainless steel. To reduce stress
C
concentrations, section changes on the shaft shall be properly radiused at the
root of any steps and keyways shall be internally radiused or gradually run out.
Q
The shaft shall have its first critical speed well above maximum operating
speeds.
1.5.4.4 Transmissions
A) All transmissions and couplings shall be erected true to line. They shall be
proportioned to transmit the required powers and to resist all forces, including
those caused by shock load and repetition or reversal of load that may be
imposed upon them in use.
B) Belt and chain drives shall be provided with separate independent means for
adjustment of tension and alignment.
C) Where fitted bolts, spigots or other means for precise location are not
employed in the assembly of the plant, locating dowels shall be fitted on
completion of erection and alignment. Fitted bolts shall be identified by
means of stainless steel tags installed under the bolt head.
D) Gearboxes shall be helical spur or worm and wheel reduction gear trains. A
gear case of robust cast iron construction shall be provided with a large
inspection cover, oil breather and oil level indicator for routine maintenance
and inspection.
E) Gearboxes shall be oil bath lubricated; the system being designed to ensure
that all the gears receive adequate lubrication, particularly with gearboxes
mounted on an inclined plane. All gearboxes shall be capable of being
emptied by gravity.
F) All gears shall be amply designed for both surface durability and bending
strength. Gearboxes shall be rated to match the maximum rated output of the
motors as specified and shall be capable of transmitting maximum motor
PAGE 8

torque in the partially-stalled condition.
G) Jacking screws shall be provided, where required, to enable gearboxes to be

accurately positioned in all three principal axes. Suitable support plates shall
be welded to the supporting steelwork to carry the gearboxes. The top
surface of the plates shall be machined after welding in position to ensure an
even bearing for the gearbox base plates. Allowances shall be made for
inserting shims (up to 1.5mm in thickness) between the support plates and
the gearbox base plates to ensure even support of the gearbox.
1.5.4.5 Vibration
Mechanical vibration levels at all duty point conditions shall be stated in the
equipment technical datasheets. All equipment shall be statically and
op V1
dynamically balanced to avoid vibration.
1.5.4.6 Guarding Of Shafts

A) All rotating shafts, couplings, gears, flywheels, bolts, drives, etc., shall be fully
C -
guarded with guards fixed to either the plant bedplate or motor stool,
y
whichever is appropriate. Couplings shall be totally enclosed by guards.
C
B) Shaft guards shall extend the whole length of shafting and include hinged
access doors at lubrication/inspection points for couplings, bearings, sliding
C
joints, chain drives, etc.
C) Apertures in guards shall not exceed 12mm diameter or 12mm square.

Q
D) For pump shafts, guards shall be made of perforated sheet steel, formed into
two semicircular halves. One half is to be rigidly bolted to the pump station
structure. The other half is to be fitted with the hinged access. Brackets and
securing arrangements for guards shall be of substantial construction. All
mild steel used in the production of guards, including bolts, nuts, washers
and brackets shall be hot dipped galvanised and finish painted to match the
pump and motor.
1.5.4.7 Bearings
Bearings shall be capable of taking all radial and axial loads resulting
through the normal and extreme conditions. Class of fit, bearing clearance
classification and L10 life shall be stated in the equipment technical schedules.
1.5.4.8 Castings and Forgings

A) Any remedial action that the Contractor proposes to utilise for the repair of
castings shall be submitted to DMAT for approval.
B) All major stress-bearing forgings shall be made to a standard specification

and be subject to internal examination, non-destructive tests for the detection
of flaws and heat treated for the relief of residual stresses. DMAT may
inspect forgings at the place of manufacture with a representative of the
Contractor.
C) All castings shall be of standard grey close grained to BS 1452 (or

equivalent) Grade 220 or better and be sound and free from defects, non-
metallic inclusions or blowholes. All non-machined surfaces shall be carefully
fettled and all foundry irregularities removed.
PAGE 9

1.5.5 Stainless Steel

Stainless steel shall have a resistance to atmospheric corrosion not less than
that provided by BS EN 1461 or equivalent Grade 316 S13 or by BS EN 100095
or equivalent Grade 316 S12, unless otherwise stated in this specification.
1.5.6 Aluminium Alloy

Aluminium structural supporting members shall be fabricated from HE-30-EP
aluminium alloy, as appropriate, for the sections, plate, sheet and other forms
employed.
op V1
1.5.7 Contact with Potable Water
All materials used in contact with potable water shall be approved by ADDC
under Statutory Water Regulations for use in connection with the Supply of
C -
Water for Drinking, Washing, Cooking and Food Purposes.
y
1.5.8 Special Tools
C
C
A) The Contractor shall provide one set of new and unused special tools (i.e.
those not obtainable from retail outlets) as part of the plant and equipment for
the maintenance of all plant included in the Contract. They shall be contained
Q
in a clearly labelled hardwood box with hasp and staple suitable for
padlocking.
B) Any special tool provided for the operation and maintenance of the Works
shall be supplied and handed over to DMAT. Prior to handover, DMAT and
Contractor shall examine the tools that have been used during plant erection
to ensure that they are not damaged and are in good condition.
C) Recommended tools, including any special tools, gauges, jigs or extractors

that may be required for maintenance of the Works shall be set out in the
appropriate technical schedule and be clearly referenced in the O&M Manual.
1.5.9 First Fill of Lubrication

A) An initial first fill of lubricant for cleaning purposes, and a second fill for oils,
greases, electrolyte and similar materials necessary for the correct setting to
work and operation of the plant shall be included in the Contractor's price.
B) The Contractor shall supply flushing oil for each lubrication system when an
item of plant is ready for preliminary running and a sufficient quantity of the
approved lubricants for setting to work for the commercial operation of the
plant for one year after the Takeover Certificate has been issued.
C) A complete schedule of recommended oils and other lubricants shall be

provided by the Contractor; the number of different types of lubricants being
kept to a minimum. Where possible, lubricants shall be chosen from those
manufactured and available in UAE and deviation from this being approved
by DMAT. In the case of grease-lubricated roller bearings for electric motors,
lithium-based greases are preferred.
PAGE 10

D) Where lubrication is effected by means of grease, a pressure system shall be

provided which does not require adjustment or recharging more than once
monthly. A grease system having a shorter period than monthly between
greasing is not acceptable. Lubrication must be provided to cope with the 30
days between replenishment. Where necessary for accessibility, grease
nipples shall be placed at the end of extension pipes and when a number of
such points can be grouped conveniently, the nipples shall be brought to a
battery plate mounted in a convenient position. "Hydraulic" button head
nipples, in accordance with BS 1486 or equivalent, shall be used for normal
grease.
E) Nipples shall be unpainted and be an alloy or brass or similar non-corrosive

material. Arrangements shall be provided to prevent bearings being overfilled
op V1
with either grease or oil. A grease gun shall be provided changed with the
first fill of grease.
F) When more than one special grease is required a grease gun for each
special type shall be supplied and permanently labelled.
C -
y
C
G) Oil sumps shall be fitted with oil level indicators of the sight glass type or,
where this is not practicable, with dipsticks. The indicators shall show the
level at all temperatures likely to be experienced in service. The normal
C
maximum and minimum levels at 20ºC shall be clearly visible in the sight
glass from the normal access floor to the particular item of plant.
Q
H) All lubrication systems shall be designed so as not to present a fire hazard

and particular care shall be taken to prevent leakage of lubricant.
I) All spare parts supplied shall be treated and packed for long storage in a
stores exposed to the local ambient conditions specified in Section 01600.
Each spare part shall be clearly marked or labelled on the outside of its
packing with its description and purpose and when more than one spare is
packed in a single case a general description of its contents shall be shown
on the outside and a detailed list enclosed.
1.5.10 Lifting Equipment

To be in accordance with Standard Specification Section 11620.
1.5.11 Electrical Control Panels

A) All electrical control panels shall be designed for standalone operation
conforming to the requirements described in Division 16 of the Specification.
B) MCCs shall be fully factory equipped, tested and tagged ready to interface
with communication devices such as telemetry, remote terminal units,
instrumentation and other microprocessor-based controllers as specified in
the extent of Works and other specification sections.
C) A complete system of interlocks and safety devices shall be provided, as

necessary, for the safe and continuous operation of all installed plant and
equipment in order to provide for the following:
i. Safety of personnel engaged in operation and maintenance of the plant.

These interlocks shall be mechanical.
PAGE 11

ii. Correct sequence of operation of the plant during start up and shutdown.
iii. Safety of the plant when operating under normal or emergency conditions.
iv. Interlocks and interlocking schemes that are preventative and not
corrective in operation. The design of the interlocks is subject to DMAT
approval.
v. Locks for interlocking purposes that are of the figure lock type (Castell
or equivalent approved). No spare or master key shall be provided.
vi. Change numbers that are to be arranged to ensure that there is no danger
of interchange with existing locks on other units.
op V1
1.5.12 Interface with Existing Plant
A) The Contractor shall ensure his equipment interfaces with any existing
equipment correctly, and that such interfaces do not affect the integrity of that
equipment, or invalidate any existing warranties or guarantees.
C -
y
C
B) The Contractor shall ensure that when interfacing with existing operational
plant and equipment the method of work employed and the timing of such
work will not disrupt the operation of the Works, unless otherwise agreed with
C
DMAT.
C) Each item of equipment, component or assembly shall have been proven in

Q
service in a similar application and under conditions no less than those

specified therein. References may be requested by DMAT to prove this at the
drawings for approval stage.
D) The equipment shall be compatible with the civil structure and with sufficient
space for safe and adequate operator access for O&M procedures.
1.5.13 Concept of Plant Control

A) The general concept of the plant control system shall be that of a fully
automatic works that will be manned only by exception. The plant shall be
capable of being operated across it’s range according to local or remotely
entered control set points or schedules on the HMIs and/or SCADA as
appropriate.
B) On mains power failure, the plant shall revert to a safe condition and a power
fail alarm shall be reported to SCADA. This “fail-safe” procedure must also
operate on failure of the standby generator (if installed).
C) On mains power recovery, after a pre-defined delay to allow stabilisation of

the supply, the plant shall automatically restart.
D) When PLC failure occurs (e.g. as detected by the Watchdog) the plant shall
revert to a safe condition.
1.5.14 Modelling of Pumping Station Performance

For pumping stations delivering flows in excess of 10m3/s, the Pump Supplier
shall cooperate with the Contractor to construct a fully operational 1/10th scale
model of the installation to determine the pumping station performance at a
PAGE 12

range of flows. The model shall be utilised to specifically determine the initiation of
eddy currents in the pumping station under all combinations of pump operations.
1.6 Factory Acceptance Tests

1.6.1 General
A) All products shall be works tested as required by the Specification and by
the manufacturer’s quality control procedures.
B) All products shall be subjected to inspection, examination and witness

testing by the DMAT or its representative unless waived by DMAT. The
Contractor shall inform DMAT of the date when the product(s) will be ready
op V1
for works inspection and witness testing.
C) Unless otherwise stated, DMAT shall witness the inspection and testing of
fabricated equipment and/or Factory Built Assemblies at the factory. The
Contractors and Manufacturers costs of such inspections and tests shall be
C -
borne by the Contractor, unless otherwise stated.
y
C
D) The Contractor shall notify DMAT 4 weeks prior to such tests, so that
preparation for travelling to the factory inspection and testing can be
C
arranged.
E) Prior to the witness test, the Contractor shall assure DMAT that the
Q
equipment requested for inspection and testing has already been thoroughly
tested by the manufacturer. Provisional Test Reports of such tests, showing
that the plant has past such tests shall be submitted to DMAT prior to the
works witness test.
F) Where tests and inspections have been completed to the satisfaction of

DMAT and when test certificates, tabulated and graphical results, etc. have
been checked, DMAT shall confirm acceptance. The plant shall not be
incorporated in the Works and made ready for delivery until this acceptance
has been received.
G) Successful works witness testing shall allow the manufacturer to deliver the
equipment to the site, but it does not constitute final acceptance or approval
of the equipment. Such approval will only be granted on successful
completion of final testing during commissioning tests of the installed
equipment.
H) If works tests are beyond the resources of the manufacturer, the Contractor
shall state another location for these tests to be conducted in the appropriate
tender technical schedules.
I) During the course of the contract, additional testing, or retesting may be

requested by DMAT to prove that the plant, equipment, product, material or
workmanship meets the specification. Such tests will be at no extra cost to
DMAT.
J) When required by the Specification or DMAT, testing of products shall be

undertaken by an independent organisation or national organisation.
K) Test results shall be submitted to DMAT for approval in accordance with the
PAGE 13

Submittals section of this specification.
L) The Contractor shall carry out tests as stated in the current appropriate
British Standard and/or Harmonised European standards or other approved
equivalent standard.
M) All test certificates, curves, supporting engineering calculations, drawings

and documentation, etc. shall be submitted to DMAT within two working
weeks from the date of completion of any witnessed tests.
N) Equipment that fails witness testing shall be subjected to retest. All costs
involve rearranging the test, including the DMAT costs, shall be borne by the
Contractor. An extension of time for the preparation and retesting will not be
op V1
allowed unless approved by DMAT.
O) Testing equipment and instruments used during witness testing shall have
been recently calibrated and comply with the appropriate testing standard
and safety regulations and/or requirements for the safety of the Plant and
C -
the men working thereon. The test equipment furnished by each Contractor
y
shall have a calibration tag of an acceptable calibration service.
C
1.6.2 Factory Built Assemblies (FBAS)
C
Testing of FBAs shall be in accordance with Section 16480.
1.6.3 Pump sets

Q
A) Pumpsets shall be subjected to a works test to ensure that they function

correctly, perform to the guaranteed duty, and are manufactured and
supplied to the specification.
B) For all pumpsets regardless of size, type test certificates shall be submitted
as indicative of the pumpset performance. Where such certified evidence is
not available, a letter of intent from the testing authority shall be submitted.
C) Each pump shall be statically and hydraulically tested at the works to a

pressure at least 50% greater than the maximum working pressure it will
incur on site. During the test, the pump shall show no signs of leakage or
failure of any components.
D) Each pump shall be tested with its own motor supplied from its soft starter or
variable speed controller at the manufacturer's premises to show the plant is
capable of achieving the guaranteed duty point values as detailed in the
Contract. Site conditions shall be simulated as near as possible, particularly
the suction conditions.
E) Pump characteristic curves shall be produced for the following:
i. Head/Quantity.
ii. Power Absorbed/Quantity.
iii. Overall Efficiency/Quantity.
iv. NPSH Required/Quantity.
PAGE 14

F) Contrary to ISO 9906: 2000, the overall efficiency of each combined motor-
pump derived in accordance with the tests shall not be less than that
guaranteed.
G) Cavitation tests, as detailed in ISO 9906: 2000, shall form part of the tests.
1.6.4 Electric Motors
1.6.4.1 General
A) General requirements for design, construction and installation of motors are
detailed in Section 16070.
B) Where required by the Contract, each motor shall be tested in accordance
op V1
with BS 4999 Part 143 or equivalent to ensure that it functions correctly and
is supplied to according to the specification.
C) When required by the Contract, basic tests shall be carried out and duplicate
tests carried out on all motors rated at 55kW and above. Routine check tests
C -
y
shall be carried out on all other motors.
C
D) Motors for use in potentially explosive atmospheres shall be tested in
accordance with ATEX or other similar Testing Organisation procedures.
C
E) Test certificates shall be provided to show details of the insulation
resistances, temperatures, load readings, power factors, efficiencies, slip
Q
values, starting performance and any other measurements taken during

tests.
F) Calibration certificates for instruments and testing equipment used for all
tests shall be provided.
1.6.4.2 Variable Frequency Drives (VFDS)

A) Testing of VFDs shall also be in accordance with Section 16483.
B) Where required by the Contract, motor driven plant, when supplied from a
variable speed controller or electronic soft starter, shall be tested with its
motor and variable speed controller or electronic soft starter. For pump
applications, the procedures described in ISO9906: 2000, BS 599 and BS
4999 or equivalent shall apply. The combined tests shall include:
i. A temperature rise test at rated output. In addition, where motorsare

supplied from variable speed controllers at the outputs that relate to the
maximum loss of cooling under harmonic generation.
ii. A measurement of starting current. When this test is carried out a reduced
voltage due to limitation of test plant, due allowance shall be made for the
effects of saturation when deducing the value at nominal voltage.
iii. A high voltage and insulation resistance tests and where required by the
Contract polarisation index.
1.6.5 Diesel Generators

A) Generator sets shall be in accordance with Section 16620 and be subject to
inspection and testing at works before despatch, with the Contractor giving a
PAGE 15

minimum of two working weeks notice to DMAT.
B) Alternators and diesel engines shall first be tested by the alternator

manufacturer and engine manufacturer respectively for each set supplied.
Such tests shall not be witnessed.
C) The complete diesel alternator set shall be tested with its own exhaust
system and alternator using a load bank resistor, with site conditions
simulated as near as possible. This test may be witnessed, and the
Contractor shall give a minimum of 4 weeks notice of this to DMAT.
D) The local control panel shall be visually inspected with routine and functional
tests carried out on control systems to ensure full compliance with the
op V1
specification.
E) Preliminary running checks and adjustments shall include the following:
i. Engine Start/Stop Controls.
ii.
C -
Engine Oil Pressure.
y
iii.
C
Nominal Frequency and Voltage.
C
iv. Oil and Water Leaks.
v. Undue Vibration.
Q
vi. Performance checks with the rated load applied to the alternator. Engine
speed and output voltage shall be adjusted to their rated values and
recorded, including overload capability checks and off load checks.
vii. Load Acceptance Tests carried out by applying a single step load of 60% of
the rated load.
viii. Speed Governing and Voltage Regulation tests from no load to 110%
load.
ix. Load Duration tests, with the rated load applied for one hour. During
the load duration tests, checks shall be undertaken for fuel, oil and water
leaks, and all parts of the plant investigated for excessive
temperatures.
x. Checks and tests, figures for voltage, frequency (or speed) load current,
oil pressure/temperature and coolant temperature shall be recorded. In
the case of the load duration tests, records shall be kept at 15-minute
intervals for the duration of the test. Insulation resistance values at the
end of the tests shall be recorded and compared with the values
recorded by the alternator manufacturer.
xi. When detailed in the particular specification, load testing shall be

undertaken utilising the connected load available at the site.
F) Once commissioning and setting to work procedures are complete and the
electricity supply is available, the manufacturer (or qualified representative in
UAE) shall attend site to perform tests before completion. Such tests shall
last one day and shall consist of simulating supply failure and the transfer of
load to the diesel alternator plant. Four simulations shall take place, with the
diesel alternator plant allowed to sustain the load for a minimum of four
PAGE 16

hours total throughout the day.
1.7 Commissioning
1.7.1 Equipment Installation
A) Tests shall be carried out to ensure that all equipment such as gearboxes,
shafts, couplings, chain and belt drives and motors are correctly aligned and
levelled before doweling and grouting takes place.
B) Before coupling bolts are inserted, alignment checks shall be carried out to
ensure that coupling concentricity and angularity are within the limits
recommended by the coupling manufacturer.
op V1
C) Before chains or belts are fitted, alignment checks shall be carried out to
ensure that chain wheels, guides and pulleys are aligned within the
manufacturers recommended tolerances.
D) On completion of the installation, before power is applied, and if viable,
C -
assemblies shall be manually rotated to ensure unobstructed and safe
y
operation.
C
E) Plant and process control systems and all associated electrical equipment
C
and control devices, shall be tested to demonstrate that the completed
system operates as specified and that all protection devices are working
correctly before the plant and equipment is put into operation.
Q
F) Unless otherwise agreed with DMAT, each manufacturer's technical

representative shall be present at the start of the operational demonstrations
to examine their equipment at the beginning and end of the tests, and will
supervise the start-up, calibration and adjustment procedures and other
services necessary for the correct testing of the installed equipment and
systems.
1.7.2 Site Acceptance Tests

A) Site acceptance tests shall commence after satisfactory completion, and
approval by DMAT, of the commissioning tests.
B) Site acceptance of plant and equipment may be dependent on the

completion of other contracts, operation of existing works, or a planned
commissioning schedule for complex works, as determined by DMAT.
C) Sewage treatment plant and sewage pumping stations shall be

commissioned with sewage or effluent, as applicable, and the Contractor
shall supervise the working of all necessary engineering and technical
supervision continuously to effect any adjustment that may be necessary. All
equipment and components of each system shall have successfully
completed the required operational demonstration before the system is
validation tested. Validation testing shall be undertaken in accordance with
the manufacturers’ instructions.
D) The whole of the Works and plant shall be tested over its whole working
range to demonstrate that it has been installed correctly and is safe and
reliable in operation under the specified conditions at site. Unless otherwise
specified, all plant and equipment shall run trouble free for a continuous
PAGE 17

period of fourteen days in automatic operation with no interruptions

except for normal maintenance or corrective work. Should the plant and
equipment not run trouble free or run outside the specified guaranteed
duties then the plant and equipment shall be adjusted by the Contractor
and the seven fourteen day tests shall be repeated until the plant and
equipment passes the test.
E) During the tests before completion all plant shall operate satisfactory.
Satisfactory operation shall mean operating safely at the guaranteed duty
and efficiency without adversely overheating, overloading, vibrating or
exceeding specified noise levels. During the tests simulated alarm
conditions and distressed operating conditions shall be simulated to test
plant control systems and protective devices for correct operation in either
op V1
adjusting system functions or causing safe plant and system shutdown.
If any defect is detected during the ‘Tests on Completion’ or during the

maintenance period (which shall be a period of 12 months or as defined by
the particular specification), the faulty equipment shall be rectified
C -
immediately by the Contractor at his expense. If the fault cannot be rectified
y
C
the Contractor must replace the defective equipment which must also be
proven to be free from defect.
C
F) All the Works shall be examined at the conclusion of the ‘Tests Before
Completion’ to establish that all the plant and equipment is free from
damage and undue wear. This inspection shall be considered as part of the
Q
‘Tests before Completion’. The plant shall be considered to have failed such
tests if there is any detectable damage or undue wear.
G) The Contractor shall correct all defects and malfunctions disclosed by tests
using approved methods and new materials for repairs as required and
within the time for tests specified in the Contract and at his expense and in
the time stipulated in the Conditions of Contract. If the fault cannot be
rectified, the Contractor must replace the defective equipment that shall also
undergo all the preceding tests.
H) All flow metering systems, liquid level/differential measuring systems,

pressure measuring systems, dissolved oxygen measuring systems,
chemical metering and mixing systems and any other metering or measuring
system shall be tested across their entire operating range, minimum through
average to maximum flows. Low-low and high-high level alarms and system
reaction shall also be tested where equipment or instruments are required to
react to such conditions.
I) Remotely controlled plant and equipment shall demonstrate suitable

operation both from local controls and remote controls. As a minimum, these
procedures shall include fully opened and fully closed positioning and shall
demonstrate the ability of each valve to hold the set position under operating
conditions throughout the specified operating range of the process.
J) Variable frequency Equipment shall demonstrate accurate response to

speed controlling devices and controls within the specified operating range.
During such tests, actual output shaft speed shall be validated by
mechanical measurement of shaft speed to compare actual speed with
equipment instruments.
PAGE 18

K) Instruments, gauges and other sensors and display devices forming part of
the completed installation shall be properly calibrated before the tests begin
and may be used to measure and record the test data. The Contractor shall
provide any other test equipment required for the duration of the tests.
L) The Site Acceptance Tests shall be carried out under the control of the
Contractor's staff and the supervision of DMAT.
M) The Contractor shall make all arrangements to conduct an Integrated Site

test. The preferable source of power to conduct the test shall be that
supplied by the Authority’s Electric Power Network. In the absence of a
delayed Authority’s Electric Power Network connection, the Contractor shall
arrange for a mobile generator to be used for the duration of the test. The
op V1
hire cost of such a generator shall be proven to be at competitive market
prices, and approved by DMAT before proceeding.
N) The Contractor shall prepare pre-commissioning and testing reports to

DMAT for approval prior to any site test to be witnessed by DMAT. The
C -
Contractor shall allow one week for DMAT to review such reports which shall
y
C
show that the plant and equipment has been installed correctly and given a
pre-run to show mechanical and electrical integrity.
C
1.7.3 Training
A) The Contractor shall provide training during the commissioning and Tests on
Q
Completion in the operating and maintenance of the plant and equipment for
up to five personnel. Training shall be undertaken using the services of
qualified personnel from the various system supplier/equipment
manufacturers. The training shall include instructions covering basic system
operation theory, routine maintenance and repair, safety, and "hands on"
operation of the equipment and associated materials. The training program
shall be submitted to DMAT fourteen days before the start of the tests before
completion for approval by DMAT.
B) Training shall include instructions covering basic system operation theory,

routine maintenance and repair, safety, and "hands on" operation of the
equipment and associated materials. The training program shall be
submitted to DMAT for approval fourteen days before the start of the ‘Tests
before Completion’.
C) Training shall be undertaken using the services of qualified personnel from

the various system supplier/equipment manufacturers.
D) Where specified, for particularly complex equipment and systems, the

Contractor and the vendor/manufacturer shall provide a quality control and
training programme for DMAT personnel to be held at suitable locations
outside the U.A.E. The programme shall be submitted to DMAT for approval
and be designed to provide training in the proper operations and
maintenance of the equipment and components.
1.7.4 Pumpsets and Air Compressors

A) Tests shall be carried out to ensure that pumps have been correctly evelled
and aligned before such units are grouted or doweled in position.
PAGE 19

B) Before the coupling bolts are inserted, alignment checks shall be carried out
to ensure that the coupling concentricity and angularity are within the limits
C) On completion of the installation a head/quantity specific power consumption

tests shall be carried out on each pump, singly, in pairs, three pumpsets in
parallel and four pumpsets in parallel as appropriate, and the results plotted
on suitable graph paper. The instruments to be used for these tests shall be
those installed on site as part of the contract.
D) The whole of the pumping installation shall be tested over its whole working
range to demonstrate that it has been erected correctly and is reliable in
operation under conditions at site. Unless otherwise specified, all plant shall
op V1
run for a continuous period of seven days automatic operation, with rotation
of standby pumpsets to give equal running times of the whole plant.
E) During the Tests on Completion all valves, pumps, compressors, etc. shall
operate satisfactorily. Satisfactory operation shall mean operating at the
C -
guaranteed duty and efficiency without adversely overheating, overload,
y
C
vibration or noise.
F) All of the Works will be examined at the conclusion of the Tests on

C
Completion to establish that all of the plant is reasonably free from damage
and wear.
Q
G) If any vibration is detected of the pumpsets during commissioning or during

the maintenance period the fault shall immediately be rectified by the
Contractor at his expense.
H) If the default cannot be rectified, the Contractor must replace the defective
pumpset with another new pumpset, which must also be proven to be
vibration free.
I) Pumps shall be tested to verify that the duty and efficiency is in accordance
with the manufacturer's works test data.
1.7.5 Electric Motors

A) Tests shall be carried out to ensure that motors have been correctly levelled
and aligned before grouted or doweling into position.
B) Before the coupling bolts are inserted, alignment checks shall be carried out
to ensure that the coupling concentricity and angularity are within the limit
C) Before the coupling bolts are inserted a rotation check shall be carried out to
confirm that the motor rotates in the desired direction. All safety procedures
shall be complied with prior to and during this test.
D) Before initial energising, testing shall include, but not be limited to the
following:
i. Insulation resistance tests.

ii. Polarisation index test (where required by the Contract or found
necessary due to low winding insulation levels).
PAGE 20

iii. Confirm that protection devices work correctly and give the appropriate
alarm and trip signals to the control equipment (winding temperature,
bearing temperature, vibration etc.).
1.7.6 Performance Testing of Processes

A) The Contractor shall employ the services of an approved independent
certified testing laboratory/laboratories to perform performance testing and
control testing of systems incorporated into the work or provide an on-site
laboratory as required.
B) DMAT reserves the right to directly employ services of an independent

testing agency or laboratory to perform specified testing.
op V1
The Employment of a testing agency or laboratory in no way relieves the
Contractor of his obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
C) Laboratories shall be accredited to a recognised international standard and

C -
y
shall submit a valid accreditation certificate to be approved by DMAT, before
C
the testing program is approved.
D) Testing Equipment shall be calibrated at reasonable intervals in accordance

C
with the manufacturer's recommendations.
E) Tests to verify compliance with the Contract requirements shall conform to

Q
the approved QC procedure and undertaken by the qualified personnel

specified in the Contract. Substitutions to the personnel specified in the
Contract shall be submitted to DMAT for approval, and shall be at least
equal in experience and qualifications to those specified in the Contract.
F) The Contractor shall promptly notify DMAT of any observed irregularities or

non-conformance of Work or Products during testing.
G) The Contractor shall perform additional tests, at no extra cost to the

Contract, as required by DMAT to prove full compliance of the performance
of the completed Works.
H) After each test, the Contractor shall promptly submit six (6) copies of a test
report to DMAT. The report shall include the following as a minimum:
i. Date issued.
ii. Project title and number.
iii. Name of inspector.
iv. Date and time of sampling or inspection.
v. Identification of product and specifications section.
vi. Location in the Project.
vii. Type of inspection or test.
viii. Date of test.
ix. Results of tests.
x. Interpretation of test results.
PAGE 21

xi. Conformance with Contract Documents.
1.8 Identification
1.8.1 General
A) Pipes, valves, pumps, compressors etc shall be colour coded. The coding
shall indicate the contents of the pipelines, purposes of the valves etc. and
show whether or not the fluids being handled are dangerous.
B) Tape banding of pipes of the appropriate colour shall be spaced at 3m
intervals and at every valve or junction. Direction of flow arrows shall be
provided together with process stream contents.
op V1
C) Lagged pipework shall be colour coded prior to lagging. Lagging surface
shall be continuously colour coded.
D) Stainless steel shall not have any paint system applied to its surface but
imperfections and heat-affected zones shall receive a suitable treatment to
C -
give a high quality, uniform surface appearance.
y
C
E) CE/UL labels shall be fixed on all electrical equipment, components and
accessories.
C
F) The Contractor shall provide and fix necessary diagrams and/or instructions,
notices for all systems. They shall be located adjacent to the appropriate
Q
items of Plant. Such notices shall be protected from the environment by

glass or clear plastic covers as approved by DMAT.
1.8.2 Nameplates
A) The Contractor shall supply and fix name and rating plate(s) to each item of
plant.
B) The plates shall be engraved or stamped with, but not limited to:
i. Manufacturer's name.
ii. Type and serial number of the Plant.
iii. Details of the loading and duty at which the item has been designed to
operate.
iv. Sufficient detail to allow the assembly to be readily identified in
correspondence and when ordering spare parts.
C) Additional information shall be engraved on the plate as specified in specific
sections of this specification.
D) A schedule of plant nameplates shall be provided at the detailed design

stage to enable these numbers to be allocated.
E) The plates shall be robust, weatherproof and resistant to cracking and

fracture.
F) Colour fast numbering and lettering, in block capitals and/or symbols, shall
not be less than 5mm high, engraved in both Arabic and English.
PAGE 22

G) The plates shall include a maintenance reference number obtainable from

DMAT, for the item of plant to which they are fixed.
H) All plates shall, where practicable, be mechanically fixed to plant. The use of
other fixings shall be subject to specific written approval of DMAT.
1.8.3 Tags
Metal Tags shall be of Stainless Steel with stamped letters; tag size shall be
minimum 40mm square with smooth edges.
1.8.4 Stencils
A) Stencils shall be produced with clean cut symbols and letters of the following
op V1
sizes:
i. 20-30mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 200mm long colour

field, 15mm high letters.
ii.
C -
40-50mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 200mm long colour
y
C
iii. iii. 65-150mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 300mm long
colour field, 30mm high letters.
C
iv. 200-250mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 600mm long colour
Q
v. Over 250mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 800mm long colour

vi. Ductwork and Equipment: 65mm high letters.
B) Stencil Paint shall be semi-gloss enamel, colours conforming to BS4800.
1.8.5 Pipe Markers

A) Pipe marking colours shall conform to BS4800.
B) Plastic pipe markers shall be factory-fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic,

preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information
indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed.
C) Plastic tape pipe markers shall be flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure
sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings.
D) Underground plastic pipe parkers shall be bright coloured continuously

printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 150mm wide by 4mm thick,
manufactured for direct burial service.
1.8.6 Instruction Notices

A) The Contractor shall supply all necessary diagrams and instructions and
notices for special systems.
B) All diagrams, instructions and notices shall be located and fixed adjacent to
the appropriate items of plant.
PAGE 23

1.8.7 Safety Warning Signs and Notices

A) Signs and Notices specifically required for Safety and Warning purposes
shall comply with the requirements of DMAT.
B) Any items of equipment that start automatically shall have permanent

warning signs affixed to them with the legend in English and Arabic stating
“Warning Equipment Automatic Starting, Isolate Elsewhere”.
1.8.8 Identification Colours

A) The following colours to BS 4800:1989 shall be used for mechanical and
electrical equipment.
op V1
B) For equipment not listed, the colour shall be agreed with DMAT.
1.8.9 Colour Schedule for Plant and Equipment
C -
Table 1-3: Colour Scheme for Plant and Equipment
y
C Colour description
Colour No. Bs 4800
(for guidance only)
C
1 00 A 05 Light Grey
10 B 17 Stone
Q
2
3 06 C 39 Mid Brown
4 06 D 43 Light Orange
5 00 E 53 Black
04 E 53 Red
6
7 08 E 51 Golden Yellow
8 18 E 51 Sky Blue
9 18 E 53 Mid Blue
Or RAL Alternative.
Table 1-4: Colour Scheme
Colour No. Ral 841 HR Colour description (for guidance only)
1 7035 Light Grey
2 7030 Stone Grey
3 8025 Mid Brown
4 2008 Light Orange
5 9005 Black
PAGE 24

6 3020 Red
7 1018 Zinc Yellow
8 5015 Sky Blue
9 5024 Mid Blue
1.8.10 Identification Colours for Plant And Equipment

A) Colour number from
Item no. 1 colour schedule
op V1
Pumps (Centrifugal) 7
Motors 9
Gearbox
C - 7
y
C
Couplings and flywheels 6
Base plates and Mounting Stools 1

C
Drive Shafting 6
Q
Diesel Engine 4
Alternator 9
Shaft and coupling guards SELF COLOUR
Exhaust Pipes POLISHED ALUMINIUM
Control, Switchgear, Distribution and Mimic Panels 8
Main Valve Handwheels 6
Lifting equipment, including rails, beams,
bogies, gantry girders, crab, blocks,
and control cabin if any. 7
Handrails, walkways and steel supporting structures 1
Open Mesh flooring SELF COLOUR
Daily Fuel Storage Tank 3
Bulk Fuel Storage Tank 3
Coolers for generators 5
Transformers 8
All other exposed Metalwork 9
PAGE 25

1.8.11 Identification Colours for Pipelines

A) All main and auxiliary service pipes and valves shall be painted in
accordance with the following schedule.
Table 1-5: Identification Colours for Pipelines
Fluid Colour description

BS 4800
(for guidance only)
Irrigation Light Green 14 E 51
Potable water Sky Blue 18 E 51
Air White
op V1
00 E 55
*Chlorine Yellow with danger bands 10 E 53*
Electrical Conduits Orange 06 E 51
Fuel oil Brown 06 C 39
C -
y
Lub.oil
C Light Brown 06 C 33
* Pipes carrying dangerous chemicals are to be banded at regular intervals and

C
at valves with danger symbol (Black 00 E 53) diagonal stripes on Yellow (08 E
51) background 150mm wide.
Q
1.8.12 Preparation
A) Surfaces shall be degreased and cleaned to receive adhesive for
identification materials.
B) Surface preparation shall be in accordance with Section 09900 for stencil

painting.
1.8.13 Installation
A) Nameplates shall be installed with corrosive resistant mechanical fasteners, or
adhesive. Sufficient adhesive shall be applied to ensure permanent
adhesion and shall be sealed with a clear lacquer.
B) Tags shall be installed with corrosion resistant chain.
C) Stencil painting shall be in accordance with Section 09900.
D) Plastic pipe markers shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.
E) Plastic tape pipe markers shall be installed completely around the pipe in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
F) Underground plastic pipe markers, shall be installed 150 to 200mm below

finished grade, directly above buried pipe.
G) Air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water
treatment devices shall be identified with plastic nameplates or stencil
painting. Small devices, such as in-line pumps, may be identified with tags.
PAGE 26

H) Control panels and major control components outside panels shall be

identified with plastic nameplates.
I) Thermostats relating to terminal boxes or valves shall be identified with

nameplates.
J) Valves in main and branch piping shall be identified with tags.
K) Air terminal units and radiator valves shall be identified with numbered tags.
L) Automatic controls, instruments, and relays shall be tagged and referenced

to control schematics.
M) Concealed or exposed piping shall be identified with plastic pipe markers,
op V1
plastic tape pipe markers or stencilled painting. Tags shall be used on piping
of 20mm diameter and smaller. Service, flow direction and pressure shall be
identified in clear view and aligned with axis of piping. Identification points
shall not exceed 6m intervals on straight runs including risers and drops.
They shall be adjacent to each valve and tee and be at each side of
C -
y
penetrations of structures or enclosures, and at each obstruction.
C
N) Ductwork shall be identified with plastic nameplates or stenciled painting. Air
handling units shall have an identification number and area served.
C
Identification shall be provided at air handling units, at each side of
penetrations of structures or enclosures, and at each obstruction.
Q
O) Ceiling tags shall be provided to locate hidden valves or dampers above T-

bar type panel ceilings. They shall be located in the corner of a panel closest
to the equipment.
1.8.14 Schedules
A) When identifying specific equipment, the Contractor will provide an
appropriate schedule.
The following may assist in developing such a schedule:
i. Equipment type.
ii. Identification size/colour.
iii. Background size/colour.
iv. Lettering.
1.9 Warranty
1.9.1 General
A) During the guarantee period, a warranty check of each system required to
be validation tested shall be performed twice by qualified technical
representatives of the various system manufacturers, including
manufacturers of equipment components within systems. Checks shall be
detailed and complete, requiring not less than 8 hours at the site, and shall
be performed under the observation and to the satisfaction of DMAT. All
costs for in-service checks shall be included in the Contract Price.
PAGE 27

B) The Contractor shall notify DMAT in writing at least ten days prior to the start
of each warranty check and obtain his approval of the proposed dates.
C) At the time of each warranty check, each qualified technical representative

shall review the O&M Manual and the pertinent operational and
maintenance problems encountered, and furnish technical advice and
recommendations to DMAT.
D) The initial warranty check shall be performed approximately six months after
final acceptance of the plant. The second warranty check shall be performed
within thirty days of the end of the contractual guarantee period.
E) The Contractor shall submit a written report of each warranty check, signed
op V1
by the appropriate manufacturer or his representative, to DMAT within ten
days following the check. The report shall describe the checking procedure
in detail, and shall restate all advice and recommendations given to DMAT.
END OF SECTION
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 28

2. STANDARD AND REGULATIONS (SECTION 15002)

2.1 General Requirements
A) The Contractor shall comply with all codes, regulations, specifications and
standards referred to throughout the contract documents and listed herein.
B) All references to codes, regulations, specifications and standards referred to

in the Contract documents and drawings shall, unless stated otherwise, mean
the latest edition, amendment or revision of such reference standard in effect
as of date of submission of these bid documents by the Tenders.
op V1
C) Obtain an original copy of the latest edition of all codes, regulations,
standards and technical literature referred to in the Contract documents and
the same shall be kept on the project site, properly indexed and maintained in
good order and readily available to DMAT at all times. Upon completion of the
C -
y
works the said codes, standards, etc., shall be handed over to DMAT.
C
D) Present an affidavit from the manufacturer certifying that the product complies
with the specified section. Where requested or specified, submit supporting
C
test data to substantiate compliance in conformity with specified standards
with a statement from the manufacturer that non-conformities have been
Q
observed.
E) Where a reference standard referred to herein is in the form of a

recommendation or suggestion, such recommendation or suggestion shall be
deemed to be mandatory under this Contract unless conflicting with the
particular specifications contained herein.
F) For products or workmanship specified by association, trade or other

consensus standards, the Contractor shall comply with the requirements of
the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are
required by applicable codes.
G) Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract documents, the

contractor shall request clarification from DMAT before proceeding.
H) References to published standards shall be construed as reference to a

recognized equivalent standard.
I) Neither the contractual relationship, duties and responsibilities of the parties

in Contract nor those of DMAT shall be altered by the Contract documents by
2.2 Purpose of Standards

A) Equipment, plant, materials, installation and systems, etc. proposed to be
used in the projects shall be strictly in compliance with all codes, regulations,
specifications and standards.
B) Standards shall be treated as a documented agreement with respect to the

technical specifications and shall be followed throughout as rules and
PAGE 29

guidelines to ensure that the equipment, plant, materials, installation and

systems, etc. are in accordance with the requirements of the specification.
C) To ensure that the proposed equipment, plant, materials, installation and

systems, etc. have been carefully examined by the Contractor that ensure
product full compliance with the those requirements specified in the basic
standards, product manufacturing standard, functional standards and quality
standards.
2.3 International Standards

A) All equipment, plant, materials, systems, components, workmanship, working
practices, procedures and all other items and activities shall comply with the
op V1
quoted standards and regulations in Section 11005 of this specification and
as qualified and amended throughout this specification.
B) Section 11005 covers the main standards and codes of practice that cover
the large majority of the contract requirements.
C -
y
C
C) Some requirements will not be covered by the above quoted standards, but
regardless of whether or not a particular standard is specified, all products
and services shall comply with any International ISO, IEC, BS EN, BS, PD
C
and ASME covering such items, as a minimum, unless otherwise specified.
D) Unless otherwise stated, ISO shall take precedent over IEC, which shall take
Q
precedence over BS EN, which will take precedence over BS, which will take
precedence over all remaining standards.
E) The following International Standards shall be used:
ISO International Organization for Standardization

IEC International Electro technical Commission
BS EN British Standards European Norm
BS British Standards
PD Published Documents
CEN European Committee for Standardization
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
ANSI American National Standard Institution
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
UL Underwriters Laboratories
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
ATEX Explosive Atmospheres Directive
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Society
WIS Water Industry Specification
PAGE 30

DIN German Institute for Standardization

VDE German Association for Electrical, Electronic & Information
Technologies
2.4 International Regulations

The following International Regulations shall be followed, where applicable:
“IEEE” Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

“IEE” Latest Edition of Institution of Electrical Engineers Wiring
Regulations
op V1
2.5 Local Regulations
The following Local Regulations shall be followed:
ADWEA
C - Abu Dhabi Water Electricity Authority
y
ADDC
C Abu Dhabi Distribution Company and other ADWEA Group
Companies
C
FEA Federal Environmental Agency
ETISALAT The Emirates Telecommunication Corporation Ltd.
Q
DCD The General Directorate of Civil Defense
2.6 ISO Standards
1 ISO 1167 Thermoplastics pipes, fittings and assemblies for the

conveyance of fluids
2 ISO 11922-1 Thermoplastics pipes for the conveyance of fluids.

Dimensions and tolerances. Part 1: Metric series
3 ISO 12944 Paints and varnishes. Corrosion protection of steel

structures by protective paint systems
4 ISO 15614-8 Specification and qualification of welding procedures for

metallic materials. Welding procedure test. Part 8: Welding
of tubes to tube-plate joints
5 ISO 161-1 Thermoplastics pipes for the conveyance of fluids. Nominal

outside diameters and nominal pressures. Part 1: Metric
series
PAGE 31

6 ISO 2045 Single sockets for unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U)

and chlorinated poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC-C) pressure pipes
with elastic sealing ring type joints. Minimum depths of
engagement
7 ISO 2048 Double-socket fittings for unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride)

(PVC-U) pressure pipes with elastic sealing ring type joints.
Minimum depths of engagement
op V1
8 ISO 2505 Thermoplastics pipes. Longitudinal reversion
9 ISO 2507 Thermoplastics pipes and fittings. Vicat softening
C - temperature
y
10 ISO 2531
C Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for
water or gas applications
C
11 ISO 3126 Plastics piping systems. Plastics components.
Q
Determination of dimensions
12 ISO 3127 Thermoplastics pipes. Determination of resistance to

external blows. Round-the-clock method
13 ISO 4065 Thermoplastics pipes. Universal wall thickness table
14 ISO 4179 Ductile iron pipes and fittings for pressure and non-pressure
pipelines. Cement mortar lining
15 ISO 4427 Polyethylene (PE) pipes for water supply
16 ISO 4633 Rubber seals. Joint rings for water supply, drainage and
sewerage pipelines. Specification for materials
17 ISO 5752 Metal valves for use in flanged pipe systems. Face-to-face
and centre-to-face dimensions
19 ISO 8179 Ductile iron pipes. External zinc-based coating
20 ISO 8180 Ductile iron pipelines. Polyethylene sleeving for site

application
PAGE 32

21 ISO 8501-1 Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints

and related products. Visual assessment of surface
cleanliness. Part 1: Rust grades and preparation grades of
uncoated steel substrates and of steel substrates after
overall removal of previous coatings
22 ISO 9000 Quality management systems. Fundamentals and

vocabulary
op V1
23 ISO 9001 Quality management systems – Requirements
24 ISO 9906 Rotodynamic pumps. Hydraulic performance acceptance
C - tests. Grades 1 and 2
y
C
2.7 IEC Standards
C
Q
1 IEC 60044-1 Instrument transformers - Part 1: Current transformers
2 IEC 60044-2 Instrument transformers - Part 2: Inductive Voltage

Transformers
3 IEC 60044-3 Instrument transformers - Part 3: Combined transformers
4 IEC 60044-5 Instrument transformers - Part 5: Capacitor voltage

transformers
5 IEC 60051-1 Direct Acting Indicating Analogue Electrical Measuring

Instruments and Their Accessories - Part 1: Definitions and
General Requirements Common to All Parts
6 IEC 60055-1 Paper-Insulated Metal-Sheathed Cables for Rated Voltages

up to 18/30 kV (with Copper or Aluminium Conductors and
Excluding Gas-Pressure and Oil-Filled Cables) Part 1: Tests
on Cables and their Accessories
7 IEC 60060 High-Voltage Test Techniques Part 1: General Definitions

and Test Requirements
PAGE 33

8 IEC 60076-1 Power Transformers - Part 1: General
9 IEC 60076-7 Power transformers - Part 7: Loading guide for oil-immersed

power transformers
10 IEC 60076-8 Power Transformers - Application Guide
11 IEC 60076-10 Power Transformers - Part 10: Determination of Sound
op V1
Levels
12 IEC 60076-11 Power transformers Part 11: Dry-type transformers
13 IEC 60079-0
C - Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General
y
C requirements
14 IEC 60079-1 Explosive atmospheres - Part 1: Equipment protection by

C
flameproof enclosures ‘d’
Q

pressurized enclosures ‘p’

powder filling ‘q’
17 IEC 60079-6 Explosive atmospheres - Part 6: Equipment protection by oil

immersion 'o'

increased safety 'e'
19 IEC 60079-10 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres - Part

10: Classification of hazardous areas

intrinsic safety 'i'

14: Electrical installations in hazardous areas (other than
mines)
PAGE 34


15: Construction, test and marking of type of protection 'n'
electrical apparatus

18: Construction, test and marking of type of protection
encapsulation 'm' electrical apparatus
op V1
25: Intrinsically safe systems
25 IEC 60079-26 Explosive atmospheres - Part 26: Equipment with equipment
C - protection level (EPL) Ga
y
26 IEC 60085
C Electrical insulation - Thermal evaluation and designation
C
27 IEC 60905 Loading Guide for Dry-Type Power Transformers
Q
28 IEC 60099-1 Surge Arresters - Part 1: Non-Linear Resistor Type Gapped

Surge Arresters for a.c. Systems
29 IEC 60137 Insulated bushings for alternating voltages above 1000 V
30 IEC 60204 Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines
31 IEC 60249 Protection against lightning - Part 1: General principles
32 IEC 60255 Measuring relays and protection equipment
33 IEC 60255-6 Electrical relays - Part 6: Measuring relays and protection

equipment
34 IEC 60265-1 High-Voltage Switches - Part 1: Switches for Rated Voltages

Above 1 kV and Less Than 52 kV
35 IEC 60255-1 Measuring relays and protection equipment - Part 1:

Common requirements
36 IEC 60269-1 Low-voltage fuses - Part 1: General requirements
PAGE 35

37 IEC 60269-4 Low-voltage fuses -Part 4: Supplementary requirements for

fuse-links for the protection of semiconductor devices
38 IEC 60282-1 High-Voltage Fuses - Part 1: Current-Limiting Fuses
39 IEC 60296 Fluids for electrotechnical applications Unused mineral

insulating oils for transformers and switchgear
op V1
40 IEC 60309-2 Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for industrial purposes -
Part 2: Dimensional interchangeability requirements for pin
and contact-tube accessories
41 IEC 60354
C - Loading guide for oil-immersed power transformers
y
42 IEC 60364-5-54
C Electrical installations of buildings - Part 5-54: Selection and
erection of electrical equipment - Earthing arrangements,
C
protective conductors and protective bonding conductors
Q
43 IEC 60439-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies - Part 1:

Type-tested and partially type-tested assemblies
44 IEC 60445 Basic and safety principles for man-machine interface,

marking and identification - Identification of equipment
terminals and conductor terminations
45 IEC 60446 Basic and safety principles for man-machine interface,

marking and identification - Identification of conductors by
colours or alphanumerics
46 IEC 60470 High-Voltage Alternating Current Contactors and Contactor-

Based Motor-Starters
47 IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
48 IEC 60623 Secondary Cells and Batteries Containing Alkaline or Other

Non-Acid Electrolytes - Vented Nickel-Cadmium Prismatic
Rechargeable Single Cells
49 IEC 60694 Common Specifications For High-Voltage Switchgear and

Controlgear Standards
PAGE 36

50 IEC 60695-11-10 Fire hazard testing - Part 11-10: Test flames - 50 W

horizontal and vertical flame test methods
51 IEC 60695-11-20 Fire hazard testing - Part 11-20: Test flames - 500 W flame
test methods
52 IEC 60871-1 Shunt capacitors for a.c. power systems having a rated
voltage above 1000 V - Part 1: General
op V1
53 IEC 60898-1 Electrical Accessories - Circuit-Breakers for Overcurrent
Protection for Household and Similar Installations - Part 1:
Circuit-Breakers for A.C. Operation
C -
y
54 IEC 60905
C Loading Guide for Dry-Type Power Transformers
55 IEC 60947-1 Low-volt switchgear & controlgear – Part 1

C
56 IEC 60947-2 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 2: Circuit-
Q
breakers
57 IEC 60947-3 Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - Part 3: Switches,

Disconnectors, Switch-Disconnectors and Fuse-
Combination Units
58 IEC 60947-5-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 5-1: Control

circuit devices and switching elements Electromechanical
control circuit devices
59 IEC 60947-6-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 6-1: Multiple

function equipment - Transfer switching equipment
60 IEC 60947-7-1 CORR 1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 7-1:

Ancillary equipment - Terminal blocks for copper conductors
CORRIGENDUM 1
61 IEC 61008-1 Residual current operated circuit-breakers without integral

overcurrent protection for household and similar uses
(RCCBs) - Part 1: General rules
62 IEC 61009 Residual current operated circuit-breakers with integral

overcurrent protection for household and similar uses
PAGE 37

(RCBOs)
63 IEC 61131 Programmable controllers - Part 1: General information
64 IEC 61131-3 Programmable controllers - Part 3: Programming languages
65 IEC 61175 Industrial systems, installations and equipment and

industrial products - Designation of signals
op V1
66 IEC 61346-1 Industrial Systems, Installations and Equipment and
Industrial Products - Structuring Principles and Reference
Designations Part 1: Basic Rules
C -
y
67 IEC 61386-1
C Conduit systems for electrical installations - Part 1: General
requirements
C
68 IEC 61537 Cable management - Cable tray systems and cable ladder
Q
systems
69 IEC 61558-1 Safety of power transformers, power supplies, reactors and

similar products - Part 1: General requirements and tests
70 IEC 61641 Enclosed low-voltage switchgear and controlgear

assemblies - Guide for testing under conditions of arcing
due to an internal fault
71 IEC 61666 Industrial systems, installations and equipment and

industrial products - Identification of terminals within a
system
72 IEC 61800-1 Adjustable Speed Electrical Power Drive Systems - Part 1:

General Requirements - Rating Specifications for Low
Voltage Adjustable Speed d.c. Power Drive Systems
73 IEC 61800-3 Adjustable Speed Electrical Power Drive Systems - Part 3:

EMC requirements and specific test methods
74 IEC 62040 Uninterruptible power systems (UPS)
75 IEC 62271-1 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 1: Common
PAGE 38

specifications
76 IEC 62271-100 High-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - Part 100: High

Voltage Alternating-Current circuit breakers
77 IEC 62271-102 High-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - Part 102:

Alternating current disconnectors and earthing switches
78 IEC 62271-105 High-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - Part 105:
op V1
Alternating Current Switch-Fuse Combustions
79 IEC 62271-200 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 200: AC

metal-enclosed switchgear and controlgear for rated
C -
y
voltages above 1 kV and up to and including 52 kV
C
80 IEC 62305 Protection against lightning
C
Q
2.8 BS EN Standards
1 BS EN 10025 Hot rolled products of structural steels. General technical

delivery conditions
2 BS EN 10025-2 Technical delivery conditions for non-alloy structural steels
3 BS EN 10084 Case hardening steels. Technical delivery conditions
4 BS EN 10088 Stainless steels
5 BS EN 10088-2 Stainless steels. Technical delivery conditions for

sheet/plate and strip of corrosion resisting steels for general
purposes
6 BS EN 10095 Heat resisting steels and nickel alloys
7 BS EN 1011-1 Welding. Recommendations for welding of metallic

materials. General guidance for arc welding
PAGE 39


materials. Arc welding of ferritic steels

materials. Arc welding of stainless steels

materials. Arc welding of aluminium and aluminium alloys
op V1
11 BS EN 10131 Cold rolled uncoated and zinc or zinc-nickel electrolytically
coated low carbon and high yield strength steel flat products
for cold forming. Tolerances on dimensions and shape
C -
y
12 BS EN 10137-1
C Plates and wide flats made of high yield strength structural
steels in the quenched and tempered or precipitation
hardened conditions. General delivery conditions
C
13 BS EN 10137-2 Delivery conditions for quenched and tempered steels
Q
14 BS EN 10137-3 Delivery conditions for precipitation hardened steels
15 BS EN 10142 Continuously hot-dip zinc coated low carbon steels strip and
sheet for cold forming. Technical delivery conditions
16 BS EN 10143 Continuously hot-dip coated steel sheet and strip.

Tolerances on dimensions and shape
17 BS EN 10162 Cold rolled steel sections. Technical delivery conditions.

Dimensional and cross-sectional tolerances
18 BS EN 10204 Metallic materials. Types of inspection documents
19 BS EN 10210-1 Hot finished structural hollow sections of non-alloy and fine

grain structural steels. Technical delivery requirements
20 BS EN 10210-2 Tolerances, dimensions and sectional properties
21 BS EN 10216-1 Seamless steel tubes for pressure purposes. Technical

delivery conditions
PAGE 40

22 BS EN 10217-1 Welded steel tubes for pressure purposes. Technical

delivery conditions. Non-alloy steel tubes with specified
room temperature properties
23 BS EN 10253-1 Butt-welding pipe fittings. Wrought carbon steel for general

use and without specific inspection requirements
24 BS EN 10255 Non-alloy steel tubes suitable for welding and threading.
op V1
Technical delivery conditions
25 BS EN 1074 Valves for water supply. Fitness for purpose requirements

and appropriate verification tests
C -
y
26 BS EN 1074-3
C Valves for water supply. Fitness for purpose requirements
and appropriate verification tests. Check valves
C
27 BS EN 1074-5 Valves for water supply. Fitness for purpose requirements
and appropriate verification tests. Control valves
Q
28 BS EN 1088 Safety of machinery. Interlocking devices associated with

guards. Principles for design and selection
29 BS EN 1092 Flanges and their joints. Circular flanges for pipes, valves,
fittings and accessories, PN designated
30 BS EN 1092-1 Flanges and their joints. Circular flanges for pipes, valves,
fittings and accessories, PN designated. Steel flanges
31 BS EN 1092-2 Flanges and their joints. Circular flanges for pipes, valves,
32 BS EN 1127-1 Explosive atmospheres. Explosion prevention and

protection. Basic concepts and methodology
33 BS EN 116000-1 Harmonized system of quality assessment for electronic

components. Generic specification: electromechanical all-or-
nothing relays. General
34 BS EN 116205 Harmonized system of quality assessment for electronic

components. Blank detail specification. Hermetically sealed
relays. For severe static environmental conditions
PAGE 41


relays. For severe mobile environmental conditions

relays. For severe airborne environmental conditions
op V1
37 BS EN 1171 Industrial valves. Cast iron gate valves
38 BS EN 12020-1 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded precision profiles

in alloys EN AW-6060 and EN AW-6063. Technical
C - conditions for inspection and delivery
y
39 BS EN 12020-2
C Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded precision profiles
in alloys EN AW-6060 and EN AW-6063. Tolerances on
C
dimensions and form
Q
40 BS EN 12162 Liquid pumps. Safety requirements. Procedure for

hydrostatic testing
41 BS EN 12163 Copper and copper alloys. Rod for general purposes
42 BS EN 12164 Copper and copper alloys. Rod for free machining purposes
43 BS EN 12165 Copper and copper alloys. Wrought and unwrought forging

stock
44 BS EN 12167 Copper and copper alloys. Profiles and rectangular bar for
general purposes
45 BS EN 12201-1 Plastic piping systems for water supply. Polyethylene (PE).

General

Pipes

Fitness for purpose of the system
48 BS EN 12288 Industrial valves. Copper alloy gate valves
PAGE 42

49 BS EN 12334 Industrial valves. Cast iron check valves
50 BS EN 12373-1 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Anodizing. Method for

specifying decorative and protective anodic oxidation
coatings on aluminium
51 BS EN 12385-1 Steel wire ropes. Safety. General requirements
op V1
52 BS EN 12390-8 Testing hardened concrete. Depth of penetration of water
under pressure
53 BS EN 124 Gully tops and manhole tops for vehicular and pedestrian
C - areas. Design requirements, type testing, marking, quality
y
C control
54 BS EN 12420 Copper and copper alloys. Forgings

C
55 BS EN 12464-1 Light and lighting. Lighting of work places. Indoor work
Q
places
56 BS EN 12570 Industrial valves. Method for sizing the operating element
57 BS EN 12573 Welded static non-pressurized thermoplastic tanks
58 BS EN 12639 Liquid pumps and pump units. Noise test code. Grade 2 and
grade 3 of accuracy
59 BS EN 1295-1 Structural design of buried pipelines under various

conditions of loading. General requirements
60 BS EN 12953-8 Shell boilers. Requirements for safeguards against

excessive pressure
61 BS EN 13101 Steps for underground man entry chambers. Requirements,

marking, testing and evaluation of conformity
62 BS EN 13190 Dial thermometers
63 BS EN 13566 Plastics piping systems for renovation of underground non-

pressure drainage and sewerage networks. General
PAGE 43

64 BS EN 13789 Industrial valves. Cast iron globe valves
65 BS EN 13811 Sherardizing. Zinc diffusion coatings on ferrous products.

Specification
66 BS EN 13835 Founding. Austenitic cast irons
67 BS EN 14020-1 Reinforcements. Specification for textile glass rovings.
op V1
Designation
68 BS EN 14020-2 Reinforcements. Specification for textile glass rovings.

Methods of test and general requirements
C -
y
69 BS EN 14020-3
C Reinforcements. Specification for textile glass rovings.
Specific requirements
C
70 BS EN 14118-1 Reinforcement. Specifications for textile glass mats
(chopped strand and continuous filament mats). Designation
Q

(chopped strand and continuous filament mats). Methods of
test and general requirements

(chopped strand and continuous filament mats). Specific
requirements
73 BS EN 14161 Petroleum and natural gas industries. Pipeline transportation

systems
74 BS EN 14181 Stationary source emissions. Quality assurance of

automated measuring systems
75 BS EN 1435 Non-destructive examination of welds. Radiographic

examination of welded joints
76 BS EN 14457 General requirements for components specifically designed

for use in trenchless construction of drains and sewers
77 BS EN 1452-1 Plastics piping systems for water supply. Unplasticized

poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U). General
PAGE 44


poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U). Pipes

poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U). Fittings

poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U). Valves and ancillary equipment
op V1
poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U). Fitness for purpose of the
system
C -
y
82 BS EN 1515-1
C Flanges and their joints. Bolting. Selection of bolting
83 BS EN 1561 Founding. Grey cast irons

C
84 BS EN 1562 Founding. Malleable cast irons
Q
85 BS EN 1563 Founding. Spheroidal graphite cast iron
86 BS EN 1677-5 Components for slings. Safety. Forged steel lifting hooks

with latch. Grade 4
87 BS EN 1714 Non destructive testing of welded joints. Ultrasonic testing of

welded joints
88 BS EN 1751 Ventilation for buildings. Air terminal devices. Aerodynamic

testing of dampers and valves
89 BS EN 1982 Copper and copper alloys. Ingots and castings
90 BS EN 20273 Fasteners. Clearance holes for bolts and screws
91 BS EN 287-1 Approval testing of welders for fusion welding. Steels
92 BS EN 288-1 Specification and approval of welding procedures for

metallic materials. General rules for fusion welding
93 BS EN 298 Automatic gas burner control systems for gas burners and
gas burning appliances with or without fans
PAGE 45

94 BS EN 40 Lighting columns. Definitions and terms
95 BS EN 440 Welding consumables. Wire electrodes and deposits for gas

shielded metal arc welding of non alloy and fine grain steels.
Classification
96 BS EN 473 Non-destructive testing. Qualification and certification of

NDT personnel. General principles
op V1
97 BS EN 485-1 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Sheet, strip and plate.
Technical conditions for inspection and delivery
98 BS EN 499
C - Welding consumables. Covered electrodes for manual metal
y
C arc welding of non alloy and fine grain steels. Classification
99 BS EN 50018 Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres.

C
Flameproof enclosure 'd'
Q
100 BS EN 50081 Electromagnetic compatibility. Generic emission standard
101 BS EN 50133-1 Alarm systems. Access control systems for use in security
applications. System requirements
102 BS EN 50170 General purpose field communication system
103 BS EN 50268-1 Common test methods for cables under fire conditions.
Measurement of smoke density of cables burning under
defined conditions. Apparatus
104 BS EN 50347 General purpose three-phase induction motors having

standard dimensions and outputs. Frame numbers 56 to 315
and flange numbers 65 to 740
105 BS EN 54-1 Fire detection and fire alarm systems. Introduction
106 BS EN 545 Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for
water pipelines. Requirements and test methods
107 BS EN 548 Resilient floor coverings. Specification for plain and

decorative linoleum
PAGE 46

108 BS EN 593 Industrial valves. Metallic butterfly valves
109 BS EN 598 Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for
sewerage applications. Requirements and test methods
110 BS EN 60255-6 Electrical relays. Measuring relays and protection equipment
111 BS EN 60034-1 Rotating electrical machines. Rating and performance
op V1
112 BS EN 60044-1 Instrument transformers. Current transformers
113 BS EN 60044-2 Instrument transformers. Inductive voltage transformers
C -
y
114 BS EN 60044-3
C Instrument transformers. Combined transformers
C
115 BS EN 60051 Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring
instruments and their accessories
Q
116 BS EN 60060 High voltage test techniques
117 BS EN 60073 Basic and safety principles for man-machine interface,

marking and identification. Coding principles for indicators
and actuators
118 BS EN 60076 Power transformers
119 BS EN 60076-5 Power transformers. Ability to withstand short-circuit
120 BS EN 60079 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres. General

requirements
121 BS EN 60079-10 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres.

Classification of hazardous areas
122 BS EN 60079-14 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres.

Electrical installations in hazardous areas (other than mines)
123 BS EN 60085 Electrical insulation. Thermal classification
124 BS EN 60099-1 Surge arresters. Non-linear resistor type gapped surge

arrestors for a.c. systems
PAGE 47

125 BS EN 60137 Insulated bushings for alternating voltages above 1000 V
126 BS EN 60146-1 Semiconductor convertors. General requirements and line

commutated convertors
127 BS EN 60204-1 Safety of machinery. Electrical equipment of machines.

General requirements
op V1
128 BS EN 60255-6 Electrical relays. Measuring relays and protection equipment
129 BS EN 60265-1 Specification for high-voltage switches. Switches for rated

voltages above 1 kV and less than 52 kV
C -
y
130 BS EN 60269-1
C Low-voltage fuses. General requirements
131 BS EN 60298-1 A.C. metal-enclosed switchgear and controlgear for rated

C
voltages above 1 kV and up to and including 52 kV
Q
132 BS EN 60309-1 Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for industrial purposes.

133 BS EN 60309-2 Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for industrial purposes.

Dimensional interchangeability requirements for pin and
contact-tube accessories
134 BS EN 60335-2- Household and similar electrical appliances. Safety.

40 Particular requirements for electrical heat pumps, air-
conditioners and dehumidifiers
135 BS EN 60439-1 Specification for low-voltage switchgear and controlgear

assemblies. Specification for type-tested and partially type-
tested assemblies
136 BS EN 60439-3 Specification for low-voltage switchgear and controlgear

assemblies. Particular requirements for low-voltage
switchgear and controlgear assemblies intended to be
installed in places where unskilled persons have access to
their use. Distribution boards

marking and identification. Identification of equipment
PAGE 48

terminals and conductor terminations

marking and identification. Identification of conductors by
colours or alphanumerics
139 BS EN 60470 High-voltage alternating current contactors and contactor-
op V1
based motor starters
140 BS EN 60529 Specification for degrees of protection provided by

enclosures (IP code)
C -
y
141 BS EN 60598-2-3
C Luminaires. Particular requirements. Luminaires for road
and street lighting
C
142 BS EN 60598-2- Luminaires. Particular requirements. Luminaires for
22 emergency lighting
Q
143 BS EN 60617-2 Graphical symbols for diagrams. Symbol elements,

qualifying symbols and other symbols having general
application
144 BS EN 60623 Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other

non-acid electrolytes. Vented nickel-cadmium prismatic
rechargeable single cells
145 BS EN 60669-1 Switches for household and similar fixed-electrical

installations. General requirements
146 BS EN 60694 Common specifications for high-voltage switchgear and

controlgear standards
147 BS EN 60702-1 Mineral insulated cables and their terminations with a rated
voltage not exceeding 750 V. Cables
148 BS EN 60742 Isolating transformers and safety isolating transformers.

Requirements
149 BS EN 60831 Shunt power capacitors of the self-healing type for a.c.
systems having a rated voltage up to and including 1kV
PAGE 49

150 BS EN 60871-1 Shunt capacitors for a.c. power systems having a rated
voltage above 1000 V. General
151 BS EN 60898 Specification for circuit-breakers for overcurrent protection

for household and similar installations
152 BS EN 60903 Live working. Gloves of insulating material
op V1
153 BS EN 60947-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear. General rules
154 BS EN 60947-2 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear. Circuit-breakers
155
C -
BS EN 60947-3 Low voltage switchgear and control gear. Switches,
y
C disconnectors, switch-disconnectors and fuse-combination
units
C
156 BS EN 60947-4 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear. Contactors and
motor-starters
Q
157 BS EN 60947-4-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear. Contactors and

motor-starters. Electromechanical contactors and motor-
starters
158 BS EN 60947-5-1 Specification for low-voltage switchgear and control gear.

Control circuit devices and switching elements.
Electromechanical control circuit devices
159 BS EN 60947-6 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear. Multiple function

equipment
160 BS EN 60947-6-1 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear. Multiple function

equipment. Transfer switching equipment
161 BS EN 60947-7 Specification for low-voltage switchgear and controlgear.

Ancillary equipment
162 BS EN 60947-7-1 Specification for low-voltage switchgear and controlgear.

Ancillary equipment. Terminal blocks for copper conductors
163 BS EN 60950 Safety of information technology equipment
PAGE 50

164 BS EN 61000 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
165 BS EN 61000-6 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Generic standards
166 BS EN 61000-6-1 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Generic standards.

Immunity for residential, commercial and light-industrial
environments
op V1
Immunity for industrial environments
C - Emission standard for residential, commercial and light-
y
C industrial environments
169 BS EN 61008 Residual current operated circuit-breakers without integral

C
overcurrent protection for household and similar used
(RCCBs).
Q
170 BS EN 61010-1 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for

measurement, control and laboratory use. General
requirements
171 BS EN 61131 Programmable controllers. General information
172 BS EN 61131-3 Programmable controllers. Programming languages
173 BS EN 61175 Industrial systems, installation and equipment and industrial

products. Designation of signals
174 BS EN 61810-1 Electromechanical elementary relays. General and safety

requirements
175 BS EN 61330 High-voltage/low-voltage prefabricated substations
176 BS EN 61346 Industrial systems, installations and equipment and

industrial products. Structuring principles and reference
designations. Basic rules
177 BS EN 61386-1 Conduit systems for cable management. General

requirements
PAGE 51

178 BS EN 61537 Cable management. Cable tray systems and cable ladder
systems
179 BS EN 61666 Identification of terminals within a system
180 BS EN 62040 Uninterruptible power systems (UPS)
181 BS EN 62271 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear
op V1
182 BS EN 62271- High-voltage switchgear and controlgear. AC metal-
200 enclosed switchgear and controlgear for rated voltages
above 1 kV and up to and including 52 kV
C -
y
183 BS EN
202
C
62271- High-voltage switchgear and controlgear. Part 202: High
voltage/low voltage prefabricated substation
C
184 BS EN 62305 Protection against lightning
Q
185 BS EN 671-1 Fixed fire fighting systems. Hose systems. Hose reels with
semi-rigid hose
186 BS EN 671-2 Fixed fire fighting systems. Hose systems. Hose systems
with lay-flat hose
187 BS EN 671-3 Fixed fire fighting systems. Hose systems. Maintenance of

hose reels with semi-rigid hose and hose systems with lay-
flat hose
188 BS EN 681 Elastomeric seals. Material requirements for pipe joint seals
used in water and drainage applications
189 BS EN 682 Elastomeric seals. Materials requirements for seals used in

pipes and fittings carrying gas and hydrocarbon fluids
190 BS EN 696 Fibre ropes for general service. Polyamide
191 BS EN 729 Quality requirements for welding. Fusion welding of metallic

materials
192 BS EN 809 Pumps and pump units for liquids. Common safety
requirements
PAGE 52

193 BS EN 837 Pressure gauges
194 BS EN 837-1 Pressure gauges. Bourdon tube pressure gauges.

Dimensions, metrology, requirements and testing
195 BS EN 953 Safety of machinery. Guards. General requirements for the

design and construction of fixed and movable guards
op V1
196 BS EN 970 Non-destructive examination of fusion welds. Visual
examination
197 BS EN ISO Small craft. Permanently installed fuel systems and fixed
10088
C - fuel tanks
y
198 BS EN
C
ISO Safety of machinery. Basic concepts, general principles for
12100 design
C
199 BS EN ISO Safety of machinery. Basic concepts, general principles for
Q
12100 -1 design. Basic terminology, methodology
200 BS EN ISO Safety of machinery. Permanent means of access to

14122-2 machinery. Working platforms and walkways
201 BS EN ISO Safety of machinery. Permanent means of access to

14122-3 machinery. Stairways, stepladders and guard-rails
202 BS EN ISO 1461 Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel
articles. Specifications and test methods
203 BS EN ISO Rotary positive displacement pumps. Technical

14847 requirements
204 BS EN ISO Specification and qualification of welding procedures for

15614 metallic materials. Welding procedure test
205 BS EN ISO Reciprocating positive displacement pumps and pump units.

16330 Technical requirements
206 BS EN ISO 4624 Paints and varnishes. Pull-off test for adhesion
207 BS EN ISO 5210 Industrial valves. Multi-turn valve actuator attachments
PAGE 53

208 BS EN ISO 5211 Industrial valves. Part-turn actuator attachments
209 BS EN ISO 6817 Measurement of conductive liquid flow in closed conduits.

Method using electromagnetic flowmeters
210 BS EN ISO 9906 Rotodynamic pumps. Hydraulic performance acceptance

tests. Grades 1 and 2
op V1
211 BS EN ISO 9934- Non-destructive testing. Magnetic particle testing. General
1 principles
2.9 BS Standards
C -
y
C
C
1 BS 1042 Measurement of fluid flow in closed conduits
Q
2 BS 1042-2 Measurement of fluid flow in closed conduits. Velocity area

methods
3 BS 1088 Marine plywood
4 BS 1203 Hot-setting phenolic and aminoplastic wood adhesives.

Classification and test method
5 BS 1247-1 Manhole steps. Specification for galvanized ferrous or

stainless steel manhole steps
6 BS 1387 Specification for screwed and socketed steel tubes and

tubulars and for plain end steel tubes suitable for welding or
for screwing to BS 21 pipe threads
7 BS 142 Electrical protection relays
8 BS 1449-1-1 Steel plate, sheet and strip. Carbon and carbon-manganese

plate, sheet and strip. General specification
9 BS 1452 Specification for flake graphite cast iron
PAGE 54

10 BS 1470 Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys

for general engineering purposes: plate, sheet and strip
11 BS 148 Specification for unused and reclaimed mineral insulating

oils for transformers and switchgear
12 BS 1486 Lubricating nipples
op V1
13 BS 1523 Glossary of terms used in automatic controlling and
regulating systems
14 BS 1560 Circular flanges for pipes, valves and fittings (Class
C - designated)
y
15 BS 1561
C Specification for silver anodes and silver salts for
electroplating
C
16 BS1571 Specification for testing of positive displacement
Q
compressors and exhausters
17 BS 1586 Methods for performance testing and presentation of

performance data for refrigerant condensing units
18 BS 159 Specification for high-voltage busbars and busbar

connections
19 BS 1615 Method for specifying anodic oxidation coatings on

aluminium and its alloys
20 BS 1640-3 Specification for steel butt-welding pipe fittings for the

petroleum industry. Wrought carbon and ferritic alloy steel
fittings. Metric units
21 BS 1646-1 Symbolic representation for process measurement control

functions and instrumentation. Basic requirements

functions and instrumentation. Specification for additional
basic requirements
PAGE 55


functions and instrumentation. Specification for detailed
symbols for instrument interconnection diagrams

functions and instrumentation. Specification for basic
symbols for process computer, interface and shared
display/control functions
op V1
25 BS 171 Power transformers
26 BS 1710 Specification for identification of pipelines and services
C -
y
27 BS 1804-3
C Specification for parallel steel dowel pins. Parallel and taper
types having screw threads for extraction purposes. Metric
series
C
28 BS 1881 Testing concrete
Q
29 BS 2035 Specification for cast iron flanged pipes and flanged fittings
30 BS 2048 Specification for dimensions of fractional horse-power

motors
31 BS 21 Specification for pipe threads for tubes and fittings where

pressure-tight joints are made on the threads (metric
dimensions)
32 BS 6244 Code of practice for stationary air compressors
33 BS 2562 Specification for cable boxes for transformers and reactors
34 BS 2573 Rules for the design of cranes
35 BS 2633 Specification for Class I arc welding of ferritic steel pipework

for carrying fluids
36 BS 2757 Method for determining the thermal classification of

electrical insulation
37 BS 2782-0 Methods of testing. Plastics. Introduction
PAGE 56

38 BS 2782-1 Methods of testing plastics. Thermal properties.

Flammability of a test piece 550 mm x 35 mm of thin
polyvinyl chloride sheeting (laboratory method)
39 BS 2782-2 Methods of testing plastics. Electrical properties.

Determination of effect of polyvinyl chloride compound on
the loss tangent of polyethylene
op V1
40 BS 2782-3 Methods of testing plastics. Mechanical properties. Complex
shear viscosity using a parallel-plate oscillatory rheometer
41 BS 2853 Specification for the design and testing of steel overhead
C - runway beams
y
42 BS 2971
C Specification for class II arc welding of carbon steel
pipework for carrying fluids
C
43 BS 302 Stranded steel wire ropes
Q
44 BS 3145 Specification for laboratory pH meter
45 BS 3169 Specification for first aid reel hoses for fire-fighting purposes
46 BS 3170 Specification for flexible couplings for power transmission
47 BS 3396-1 Woven glass fibre fabrics for plastics reinforcement.

Specification for loom-state fabrics

Specification for desized fabrics

Specification for finished fabrics for use with polyester resin
systems
50 BS 3416 Specification for bitumen-based coatings for cold

application, suitable for use in contact with potable water
51 BS 3532 Method of specifying unsaturated polyester resin systems
52 BS 3535 Isolating transformers and safety isolating transformers
PAGE 57

53 BS 3601 Specification for carbon steel pipes and tubes with specified
room temperature properties for pressure purposes
54 BS 3643 ISO metric screw threads
55 BS 3676 Switches for household and similar fixed electrical

installations
op V1
56 BS 3680 Measurement of liquid flow in open channels
57 BS 3680-4C Methods of measurement of liquid flow in open channels.

Weirs and flumes. Flumes
C -
y
58 BS 3692
C ISO metric precision hexagon bolts, screws and nuts.
Specification
C
59 BS 3749 Specification for E glass fibre woven roving fabrics for the
reinforcement of polyester and epoxy resins systems
Q
60 BS 381C Specification for colours for identification, coding and special

purposes
61 BS 3892 Pulverized-fuel ash
62 BS 3900 Methods of test for paints
63 BS 3939 Graphical symbols for electrical power, telecommunications

and electronics diagrams
64 BS 3958 Thermal insulating materials
65 BS 3958-4 Thermal insulating materials. Bonded preformed man-made

mineral fibre pipe sections
66 BS 3974-1 Specification for pipe supports. Pipe hangers, slider and

roller type supports
67 BS 3974-2 Specification for pipe supports. Pipe clamps, cages,

cantilevers and attachments to beams
68 BS 4 Structural steel sections
PAGE 58

69 BS 4-1 Structural steel sections. Specification for hot-rolled sections
70 BS 4027 Specification for sulfate-resisting Portland cement
71 BS 4079 Specification for textile reinforced rubber hydraulic hoses

and hose assemblies
72 BS 4211 Specification for permanently fixed ladders
op V1
73 BS 4343 Specification for industrial plugs, socket-outlets and couplers
for a.c. and d.c. supplies
74 BS 4360
C - Specification for weldable structural steels
y
C
75 BS 4409 Screw conveyors
C
76 BS 4449 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete. Weldable reinforcing
steel. Bar, coil and decoiled product. Specification
Q
77 BS 449 Specification for the use of structural steel in building
78 BS 4504 Circular flanges for pipes, valves and fittings (PN

designated)
79 BS 4504-3-3 Circular flanges for pipes, valves and fittings (PN

designated). Specification for copper alloy and composite
flanges
80 BS 4515 Specification for welding of steel pipelines on land and

offshore
81 BS 4549 Guide to quality control requirements for reinforced plastics

mouldings
82 BS 4568 Specification for steel conduit and fittings with metric threads
of ISO form for electrical installations
83 BS 4584 Metal-clad base materials for printed wiring boards
84 BS 4592 Industrial type flooring and stair treads
PAGE 59

85 BS 4592-1 Industrial type flooring and stair treads. Metal open bar
gratings. Specification
86 BS 4592-4 Industrial type flooring and stair treads. Glass reinforced

plastics (GRP) open bar gratings. Specification
87 BS 4607 Non-metallic conduits and fittings for electrical installations
op V1
88 BS 466 Specification for power driven overhead travelling cranes,
semi-goliath and goliath cranes for general use
89 BS 4662 Specification for boxes for the enclosure of electrical
C - accessories
y
90 BS 4675
C Mechanical vibration in rotating machinery
C
91 BS 4677 Specification for arc welding of austenitic stainless steel
pipework for carrying fluids
Q
92 BS 4678 Cable trunking
93 BS 476 Fire tests on building materials and structures
94 BS 476-7 Fire tests on building materials and structures. Method of

test to determine the classification of the surface spread of
flame of products
95 BS 476-22 Fire tests on building materials and structures. Methods for

determination of the fire resistance of non-loadbearing
elements of construction
96 BS 4800 Schedule of paint colours for building purposes
97 BS 486 Specification for asbestos-cement pressure pipes and joints
98 BS 4871 Specification for approval testing of welders working to

approved welding procedures
99 BS 4872 Specification for approval testing of welders when welding

procedure approval is not required
PAGE 60

100 BS 4921 Specification for sherardized coatings on iron or steel
101 BS 4994 Specification for design and construction of vessels and

tanks in reinforced plastics
102 BS 4999 General requirements for rotating electrical machines
103 BS 4999-101 General requirements for rotating electrical machines.
op V1
Specification for rating and performance

Classification of degrees of protection provided by
C - enclosures for rotating machinery
y
105 BS 4999-140
C General requirements for rotating electrical machines.
Specification for voltage regulation and parallel operation of
C
a.c. synchronous generators
Q

Specification for tests
107 BS 5000 Rotating electrical machines of particular types or for

particular applications
108 BS 5000-11 Specification for rotating electrical machines of particular

types or for particular applications. Small-power electric
motors and generators
109 BS 5000-99 Rotating electrical machines of particular types or for

particular applications. Machines for miscellaneous
applications
110 BS 50081 Electromagnetic compatibility. Generic emission standard
111 BS 5075 Concrete admixtures
112 BS 5139 Method of specifying general purpose polypropylene and

propylene copolymer materials for moulding and extrusion
113 BS 5150 Specification for cast iron gate valves
PAGE 61

114 BS 5153 Specification for cast iron check valves for general purposes
115 BS 5155 Specification for butterfly valves
116 BS 5158 Specification for cast iron plug valves
117 BS 5163 Valves for waterworks purposes
op V1
118 BS 5266 Emergency lighting
119 BS 5274 Specification for fire hose reels (water) for fixed installations
120 BS 5306
C - Code of practice for fire extinguishing installations and
y
C equipment on premises
C
121 BS 5306-1 Code of practice for fire extinguishing installations and
equipment on premises. Hose reels and foam inlets
Q
122 BS 5308 Instrumentation cables
123 BS 5308-2 Instrumentation cables. Specification for PVC insulated

cables
124 BS 5328 Concrete
125 BS 5395 Stairs, ladders and walkways
126 BS 5395-3 Stairs, ladders and walkways. Code of practice for the
design of industrial type stairs, permanent ladders and
walkways
127 BS 5446 Fire detection and fire alarm devices for dwellings
128 BS 5455 Specification for polyurethane coated nylon fabric for

mattress covers
129 BS 546 Specification for plugs made of resilient material
130 BS 5467 Electric cables. Thermosetting insulated, armoured cables

for voltages of 600/1000 V and 1900/3300 V
PAGE 62

131 BS 5480 Specification for glass reinforced plastics (GRP) pipes, joints
and fittings for use for water supply or sewerage
132 BS 5486-12 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies.

Specification for particular requirements of type-tested
miniature circuit-breaker boards
133 BS 5486-13 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies.
op V1
Specification for particular requirements of consumer units
134 BS 5489 Code of practice for the design of road lighting
135 BS 5512
C - Method of calculating dynamic load ratings and rating life of
y
C rolling bearings
136 BS 5514-4 Reciprocating internal combustion engines. Performance.

C
Speed governing
Q
137 BS 5518 Specification for electronic variable control switches (dimmer

switches) for tungsten filament lighting
138 BS 5588-9 Fire precautions in the design, construction and use of

buildings. Code of practice for ventilation and air
conditioning ductwork
139 BS 5720 Code of practice for mechanical ventilation and air

conditioning in buildings
140 BS 5733 Specification for general requirements for electrical

accessories
141 BS 5839 Fire detection and fire alarm systems for buildings
142 BS 5863 Analogue signals for process control systems
143 BS 5918 Code of practice for solar heating systems for domestic hot
water
144 BS 5950 Structural use of steelwork in building
145 BS 5950-1 Structural use of steelwork in building. Code of practice for
PAGE 63

design. Rolled and welded sections
146 BS 5970 Code of practice for thermal insulation of pipework and

equipment in the temperature range of -100°C to +870°C
147 BS 599 Methods of testing pumps
148 BS 6004 Electric cables. PVC insulated, non-armoured cables for

voltages up to and including 450/750 V, for electric power,
op V1
lighting and internal wiring
149 BS 6007 Electric cables. Single core unsheathed heat resisting

cables forvoltages up to and including 450/750 V, for
C -
y
internal wiring
C
150 BS 6121 Mechanical cable glands
C
151 BS 6177 Guide to selection and use of elastomeric bearings for
Q
vibration isolation of buildings
152 BS 6180 Barriers in and about buildings. Code of practice
153 BS 6207 Specification for mineral-insulated copper-sheathed cables

with copper conductors
154 BS 6220 Specification for junction boxes for use in electrical

installations with rated voltages not exceeding 250 V
155 BS 6231 Electric cables. Single core PVC insulated flexible cables of
rated voltage 600/1000 V for switchgear and controlgear
wiring
156 BS 6297 Code of practice for design and installation of small sewage
treatment works and cesspools
157 BS 6346 Electric cables. PVC insulated, armoured cables for voltages
of 600/1000 V and 1900/3300 V
158 BS 6399 Loading for buildings
159 BS 6399-1 Loading for buildings. Code of practice for dead and
PAGE 64

imposed loads
160 BS 6399-2 Loading for buildings. Code of practice for wind loads
161 BS 6399-3 Loading for buildings. Code of practice for imposed roof
loads
162 BS 6405 Specification for non-calibrated short link steel chain (grade
30) for general engineering purposes: class 1 and 2
op V1
163 BS 6436 Specification for ground mounted distribution transformers
for cable box or unit substation connection
C -
y
164 BS 6480 Specification for impregnated paper-insulated lead or lead
C alloy sheathed electric cables of rated voltages up to and
including 33000 V
C
165 BS 65 Specification for vitrified clay pipes, fittings and ducts, also
Q
flexible mechanical joints for use solely with surface water

pipes and fittings
166 BS 6500 Electric cables. Flexible cords rated up to 300/500 V, for use
with appliances and equipment intended for domestic, office
and similar environments
167 BS 6593 Code of practice for on-site non-mechanical jointing of plied

textile and steel reinforced conveyor belting
168 BS 6651 Code of practice for protection of structures against lightning
169 BS 6699 Specification for ground granulated blastfurnace slag for use
with Portland cement
170 BS 6730 Specification for black polyethylene pipes up to nominal size

63 for above ground use for cold potable water
171 BS 6739 Code of practice for instrumentation in process control

systems: installation design and practice
172 BS 6757 Methods of test for thermal performance of solar collectors
PAGE 65

173 BS 7079 Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints

and related products
174 BS 7226 Methods of test for performance of inlet air cleaning

equipment for internal combustion engines and compressors
175 BS 7273 Code of practice for the operation of fire protection

measures
op V1
176 BS 7288 Specification for socket outlets incorporating residual current
devices (S.R.C.D.s)
177 BS 7346
C - Components for smoke and heat control systems
y
178 BS 7405
C Guide to selection and application of flowmeters for the
measurement of fluid flow in closed conduits
C
179 BS 7430 Code of practice for earthing
Q
180 BS 750 Specification for underground fire hydrants and surface box
frames and covers
181 BS 7523 Specification for preformed cellular polyethylene (PE)

materials for the thermal insulation of pipework
182 BS 7671 Requirements for electrical installations. IEE Wiring

Regulations. Sixteenth edition
183 BS 7679 Plain bearings. Quality control techniques and inspection of

geometrical and material quality characteristics
184 BS 7735 Guide to loading of oil-immersed power transformers
185 BS 7772 Plain bearings. Measurement of wall thickness of thin-walled

half-bearings and thin-walled bushes
186 BS 7775 Penstocks for use in water and other liquid flow applications.
Specification
187 BS 7821 Three phase oil-immersed distribution transformers, 50 Hz,

from 50 to 2500 kVA with highest voltage for equipment not
PAGE 66

exceeding 36 Kv
188 BS 7844 Three-phase dry-type distribution transformers 50 Hz, from

100 to 2500 kVA with highest voltage for equipment not
exceeding 36 kV
189 BS 7919 Electric Cables. Flexible cables rated up to 450/750V, for

use with appliances and equipment intended for industrial
op V1
and similar environments
190 BS 8002 Code of practice for earth retaining structures
C -
y
191 BS 8004 Code of practice for foundations
C
192 BS 8007 Code of practice for design of concrete structures for
C
retaining aqueous liquids
Q
193 BS 8110 Structural use of concrete
194 BS 848-1 Fans for general purposes. Performance testing using

standardized airways
195 BS 848-5 Fans for general purposes. Special for mechanical safety
(guarding)
196 BS 8666 Scheduling, dimensioning, bending and cutting of steel

reinforcement for concrete. Specification
197 BS 88 Cartridge fuses for voltages up to and including 1000 V a.c.

and 1500 V d.c.
198 BS 89 Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring

199 BS 90 Specification for direct-acting electrical recording

200 BS 903 Physical testing of rubber
201 BS 921 Specification. Rubber mats for electrical purposes
PAGE 67

2.10 PD Standards
1 PD 5000 International Code of Practice for electronic documents and

e-business transactions as legally admissible evidence
2 PD 5500 Specification for unfired fusion welded pressure vessels
op V1
2.11 CEN Standards
No. STANDARD
C - DESCRIPTION
y
C
2 EN 1295-1 Structural design of buried pipelines under various
C
conditions of loading. General requirements
3 EN 1452-5 Plastics piping systems for water supply. Unplasticized

Q
poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U). Fitness for purpose of the

system
4 EN 22063 Metallic and other inorganic coatings. Thermal spraying.

Zinc, aluminium and their alloys
5 EN 25199 Technical specifications for centrifugal pumps. Class II
6 EN 287 Qualification test of welders. Fusion welding
7 EN 288 Specification and approval of welding procedures for

metallic materials
8 EN 50014 Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres.


Flameproof enclosure 'd'

Increased safety 'e'
11 EN 60085 Electrical insulation. Thermal classification
PAGE 68

12 EN 837 Pressure gauges
2.12 ASTM Standards

1 ASTM A 106 Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe

for High-Temperature Service
op V1
2 ASTM A 108 Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy,
Cold-Finished
C -
y
3 ASTM A 123 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)
C Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
C
4 ASTM A 135 Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded
Steel Pipe
Q
5 ASTM A 153 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron

and Steel Hardware
6 ASTM A 167 Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting

Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip
7 ASTM A 234 Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought

Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High
Temperature Service
8 ASTM A 242/A Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy

242M Structural Steel
9 ASTM A 252 Standard Specification for Welded and Seamless Steel

Pipe Piles
10 ASTM A 268 Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic

and Martensitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General
Service
11 ASTM A 269 Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded

Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service
PAGE 69

12 ASTM A 283 Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile

Strength Carbon Steel Plates
13 ASTM A 325 Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat

Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
14 ASTM A 36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
op V1
15 ASTM A 449 Standard Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and
Studs, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum
Tensile Strength, General Use
16 ASTM A 47
C - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings
y
17 ASTM A 48
C Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings
C
18 ASTM A 480 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat-
Rolled Stainless and Heat- Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet,
Q
and Strip
19 ASTM A 490 Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel,

Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
20 ASTM A 497 Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire

Reinforcement, Deformed, for Concrete
21 ASTM A 500 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and

Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and
Shapes
22 ASTM A 501 Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and

Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing
23 ASTM A 502 Standard Specification for Rivets, Steel, Structural
24 ASTM A 510M Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wire

Rods and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel [Metric]
25 ASTM A 514/A Standard Specification for High-Yield-Strength,

514M Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for
Welding
PAGE 70

26 ASTM A 525/A Standard Specification for General Requirements for

525M Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip
Process
27 ASTM A 529/529M Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-

Manganese Steel of Structural Quality
28 ASTM A 53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-
op V1
Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
29 ASTM A 563 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
30 ASTM A 568
C - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon,
y
C Structural, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and
Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for
C
31 ASTM A 572/A Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy
572M Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel
Q
32 ASTM A 591/A Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon and Alloy

591M Steel Mechanical Tubing
33 ASTM A 6 Standard Specification for General Requirements for

Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet
Piling
34 ASTM A 653/A Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated

653M (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
the Hot-Dip Process
35 ASTM A 666 Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked

Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar
36 ASTM A 795 Standard Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-

Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe
for Fire Protection Use
37 ASTM A 924/A Standard Specification for General Requirements for

924M Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
38 ASTM B 1 Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire
PAGE 71

39 ASTM B 108 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Permanent

Mold Castings
40 ASTM B 177 Standard Guide for Engineering Chromium Electroplating
41 ASTM B 2 Standard Specification for Medium-Hard-Drawn Copper

Wire
op V1
42 ASTM B 209 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Sheet and Plate
43 ASTM B 210M Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
C - Drawn Seamless Tubes [Metric]
y
44 ASTM B 211M
C Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Bar, Rod, and Wire [Metric]
C
Q
Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes
46 ASTM B221M Standard Specification for Aluminium and Aluminium-

Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes
[Metric]
47 ASTM B 228 Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded

Copper-Clad Steel Conductors

Aluminium Conductors, Coated-Steel Reinforced (ACSR)

Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube
50 ASTM B 251 Standard Specification for General Requirements for

Wrought Seamless Copper and Copper-Alloy Tube
51 ASTM B 26 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings
52 ASTM B 280 Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air
Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service
PAGE 72

53 ASTM B 3 Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire
54 ASTM B 308 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6

Standard Structural Profiles
55 ASTM B 32 Standard Specification for Solder Metal
56 ASTM B 42 Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe,
op V1
Standard Sizes
57 ASTM B 455 Standard Specification for Copper-Zinc-Lead Alloy

(Leaded-Brass) Extruded Shapes
C -
y
58 ASTM B 456
C Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of
Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus
Chromium
C
59 ASTM B 483 Standard Specification for Aluminium and Aluminium-
Q
Alloy Drawn Tube and Pipe for General Purpose

Applications
60 ASTM B483M Specification for Aluminium and Aluminium-Alloy Drawn

Tubes for General-Purpose Applications (Metric)
61 ASTM B 584 Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings

for General Applications
62 ASTM B 68 Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube, Bright

Annealed
63 ASTM B 75 Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube

Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft
65 ASTM B 85 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings
66 ASTM B 88 Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube
67 ASTM C 1071 Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining

Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material)
PAGE 73

68 ASTM C 1202 Standard Test Method for Electrical Indication of

Concrete’s Ability to Resist Chloride Ion Penetration
69 ASTM C128 Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density

(Specific Gravity), and Absorption of Fine Aggregate
70 ASTM C 150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement
op V1
71 ASTM C 476 Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry
72 ASTM C 494 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for

Concrete
C -
y
73 ASTM C 533
C Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and
Pipe Thermal Insulation
C
74 ASTM C 534 Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible
Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and
Q
Tubular Form
75 ASTM C 547 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation
76 ASTM C 581 Standard Practice for Determining Chemical Resistance

of Thermosetting Resins Used in Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
Structures Intended for Liquid Service
77 ASTM C 615M Standard Specification for Granite Dimension Stone
78 ASTM C 624 Method for Determination of The DIH Purity Of Nuclear

Graphite
79 ASTM C 636 Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling

Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In
Panels
80 ASTM C700 Standard Specification for Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra

Strength, Standard Strength, and Perforated
81 ASTM C 920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
82 ASTM C 921 Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of
PAGE 74

Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation
83 ASTM D1447 Standard Test Method for Length and Length Uniformity
of Cotton Fibers by Fibrograph Measurement
84 ASTM D 16-03 Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings,

Materials, and Applications
85 ASTM D 1784 Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
op V1
(PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Compounds
86 ASTM D 1785 Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

C -
y
Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120
C
C
Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series)
Q

Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40
89 ASTM D 2564 Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl

Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems
90 ASTM D 2581 Standard Classification System for Polybutylene (PB)

Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials
91 ASTM D 2584-68 Standard Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured

Reinforced Resins

Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings
93 ASTM D 2924-79 Standard Test Method for External Pressure Resistance

of “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-
Resin) Pipe
94 ASTM D 2992-71 Standard Practice for Obtaining Hydrostatic or Pressure

Design Basis for “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe and Fittings
PAGE 75

95 ASTM D 295 Standard Test Methods for Varnished Cotton Fabrics

Used for Electrical Insulation
96 ASTM D 2996 Standard Specification for Filament-Wound "Fiberglass"

(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe
97 ASTM D 3035 Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe

(DR-PR) Based on Controlled Outside Diameter
op V1
98 ASTM D 3262 Standard Specification for "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-
Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Sewer Pipe
99 ASTM D 3517
C - Standard Specification for "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-
y
C Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pressure Pipe
100 ASTM D 3681 Standard Test Method for Chemical Resistance of

C
“Fiberglass” (Glass–Fiber–Reinforced Thermosetting-
Resin) Pipe in a Deflected Condition
Q
101 ASTM D 3754 Standard Specification for "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-

Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Sewer and Industrial
Pressure Pipe
102 ASTM D 4060 Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of

Organic Coatings by the Taber Abraser
103 ASTM D 412 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and
Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension
104 ASTM D 638 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
105 ASTM D 695 Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of

Rigid Plastics
106 ASTM D 775 Drop Test Drop for Loaded Boxes
107 ASTM D 790 Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of

Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical
Insulating Materials
108 ASTM E 1 Standard Specification for ASTM Liquid-in-Glass
PAGE 76

Thermometers
109 ASTM E 580 Standard Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension

Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels in Areas
Requiring Seismic Restraint
110 ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning

Characteristics of Building Materials
op V1
111 ASTM F 708 Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers
2.13 NEMA Standards C -

y
C
C
1 NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
Q
2 NEMA BU 1 Busways
3 NEMA BU 1.1 General Instructions for Handling, Installation, Operation,

and Maintenance of Busway Rated 600 Volts or Less
4 NEMA DC 3 Residential Controls–Electrical Wall-Mounted Room

Thermostats
5 NEMA FB 1 Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit,
Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable
6 NEMA FG 1 Fiberglass Cable Tray Systems
7 NEMA FU 1 Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses
8 NEMA ICS 1 Industrial Control and Systems General Requirements
9 NEMA ICS 2.3 Instructions for the Handling, Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance of Motor Control Centers Rated Not More
Than 600 Volts
10 NEMA ICS 3 Industrial Control and Systems: Medium Voltage Controllers
PAGE 77

Rated 2001 to 7200 Volts AC
11 NEMA ICS 4 Terminal Blocks
12 NEMA ICS 6 Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures
13 NEMA KS 1 Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment

Switches (600 Volts Maximum)
op V1
14 NEMA LA 1 Surge Arresters
15 NEMA MG 1 Motors and Generators
C -
y
16 NEMA OS 1
C Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box
Supports
C
17 NEMA OS 2 Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box
Supports
Q
18 NEMA PB 1 Panelboards
19 NEMA PB 1.1 General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation, and

Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less
20 NEMA PB 2 Deadfront Distribution Switchboards
21 NEMA PB 2.1 General Instructions for Proper Handling, Installation,

Operation, and Maintenance of Deadfront Distribution
Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less
22 NEMA PE 1 Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS)—Specification and

Performance Verification
23 NEMA RN 1 Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized

Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit
24 NEMA ST 1 Specialty Transformers (Except General-Purpose Type
25 NEMA ST 20 Dry Type Transformers for General Applications
26 NEMA TC 14 Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) and
PAGE 78

Fittings
27 NEMA TC 2 Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit
28 NEMA TC 3 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC
Conduit and Tubing
29 NEMA TC 6 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct for

Underground Installations
op V1
30 NEMA TC 9 Fittings for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct for
Underground Installation
C -
y
31 NEMA TC 10
C PVC and ABS Plastic Communications Duct and Fittings for
Underground Installations
C
32 NEMA UC 2 Undercarpet Power Distribution Systems
Q
33 NEMA VE 1 Metal Cable Tray Systems
34 NEMA WD 1 General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices
35 NEMA WD 6 Wiring Devices - Dimensional Specifications
2.14 ANSI Standards
1 ANSI/IEEE C2 National Electrical Safety Code
2 ANSI C80.1 Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC)
3 ANSI C80.3 Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)
4 ANSI C80.5 Electrical Rigid Aluminium Conduit (ERAC)
5 ANSI C82.1 Ballasts for Fluorescence Lamp Specification
6 ANSI C82.4 Ballasts for High Intensity Discharge
PAGE 79

2.15 ASME Standards

1 ASME A 112.18.1 Plumbing Supply Fittings
2 ASME A 13.1 Scheme for the identification of piping systems
3 ASME A 112.19.3 Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential
op V1
Use)
4 ASME B 16.1 Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (Classes 25,
125, and 250)
C -
y
5 ASME B 16.11
C Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded
C
6 ASME B 16.18 Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings
7 ASME B 16.22 Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure
Q
Fittings
8 ASME B 16.25 Buttwelding Ends
9 ASME B 16.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Classes 150 and 300
10 ASME B 16.4 Gray Iron Threaded Fittings Classes 125 and 250
11 ASME B 16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Nps 1/2 Through Nps 24
Metric/ Inch Standard
12 ASME B 16.9 Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings
13 ASME B 31.2 Fuel Gas Piping
14 ASME B 31.5 Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components
15 ASME B 31.9 Building Services Piping
16 ASME B 36.1 Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
17 ASME B 40.1 Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments
PAGE 80

2.16 UL Standards
1 UL 33 Standard for Safety Heat Responsive Links for Fire-

Protection Service
2 UL 181 Standard for Safety Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors
op V1
3 UL 207 Standard for Safety Refrigerant-Containing Components
and Accessories, Nonelectrical
4 UL 262
C - Standard for Safety Gate Valves for Fire-Protection Service
y
C
5 UL 312 Standard for Check Valves for Fire-Protection Service
C
6 UL 393 Standard for Indicating Pressure Gauges for Fire-Protection
Service
Q
7 UL 404 Standard for Gauges, Indicating Pressure, for Compressed

Gas Service
8 UL 448 Standard for Safety Centrifugal Stationary Pumps for Fire-

Protection Service
9 UL 555 Standard for Safety Fire Dampers
10 UL 555S Standard for Safety for Smoke Dampers
11 UL 705 Standard for Safety Power Ventilators
12 UL 778 Standard for Motor-Operated Water Pumps
13 UL 1247 Standard for Safety Diesel Engines for Driving Stationary

Fire Pumps
14 UL 1478 Standard for Fire Pump Relief Valves
15 UL 96 Standard for Safety Lightning Protection Components
16 UL 96A Standard for Safety Installation Requirements for Lightning
PAGE 81

Protection Systems
17 UL 651A Standard for Safety Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and
HDPE Conduit
2.17 NFPA Standards
op V1
1 NFPA 70 National Electrical Code, USA
2 NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code, USA
C -
y
3 NFPA 72E
C Standard on the Automatic Fire Detectors
4 NFPA 72G Guide for the Installation, Maintenance and Use of

C
Notification Appliances for Protective Signalling Systems.
Q
5 NFPA 72H Guide for Testing Procedures for Local, Auxiliary, Remote
Station and Proprietary Protective Signalling Systems
6 NFPA 101 Life Safety Code
2.18 ATEX Standards
1 ATEX 95 Manufacturers Explosive Atmospheres Directive
2 ATEX 137 User Explosive Atmospheres Directive
2.19 AWS Standards
1 AWS A 2.4 Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing and Nondestructive

Examination
PAGE 82

2 AWS D 1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel
3 AWS D 1.2 Structural Welding Code - Aluminium
4 AWS D 1.4 Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel
2.20 AWWA Standards
op V1
1 AWWA C 110 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings for Water
2 AWWA C 151
C - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water
y
C
3 AWWA D 102 Coating Steel Water-Storage Tanks
C
Q
2.21 WIS Standards
1 WIS 4-52-01 Polymeric anti-corrosion (Barrier) coatings
2.22 DIN Standards
2 DIN 1999-2 Eurocode 9: Design of aluminium structures - Part 2:

Structures susceptible to fatigue; German version ENV
1999-2:1998
3 DIN 4113 Aluminium Constructions Under Predominantly Static

Loading
4 DIN 42531 Transformers; Bushings for Indoor and Outdoor Types;

Insulation Classes 10 N to 30 N, 250 A, Assembly
PAGE 83

5 DIN 43623 Three-Pole Fuse-Base Racks 660 V, 100 to 630 A, for

LVHRC Fuses, for Busbar Mounting
6 DIN 8074 High-Density Polyethylene (PE-HD) Pipes; Dimensions
2.23 VDE Standards
op V1
1 VDE 0875 (N) Electromagnetic compatibility – Specifications for household
C - appliances, power tools and similar electrical devices
y
C
C
2.24 UK Engineering Standards
Q
1 G5/4-1 Planning Levels for harmonic Voltage Distortion and the

Connection of Non-Linear Equipment to Transmission
Systems and Distribution Networks in the United Kingdom
2 G5/9 Recommendations for the connection of embedded

generating plant to the Public Electricity Suppliers
distribution systems
END OF SECTION
PAGE 84

3. VALVES AND ACTUATORS (SECTION 15115)

3.1 General
3.1.1 Scope
A) This section of the specification gives the requirements for valve materials
and the installation and testing for irrigation systems.
op V1
section.

C -
y
C
Section 15140 Supports and Anchors
C
3.2 Standards
Q
BS EN 1563 Founding. Spheroidal graphite cast iron.
BS EN 1171 Industrial valves. Cast iron gate valves
BS EN 558 Industrial valves. Face-to-face and center-to-face dimensions

of metal valves for use in flanged pipe systems. PN and Class designated valves
ISO 5752:1982 Metal valves for use in flanged pipe systems -- Face-to-face
and center-to-face dimensions
BS EN 1982 Copper and copper alloys. Ingots and castings
BS EN 12570 Industrial valves. Method for sizing the operating element
BS EN 593 Industrial valves. Metallic butterfly valves
BS EN 12334 Industrial valves. Cast iron check valves
EN 1074-1 Valves for water supply - Fitness for purpose requirements and
appropriate verification tests - Part 1: General requirements
appropriate verification tests - Part 2: Isolating valves
appropriate verification tests - Part 5: Control valves
PAGE 85

EN 12266-1` Industrial valves - Testing of valves - Part 1: Pressure tests,

test procedures and acceptance criteria - Mandatory requirements
EN 12266-2` Industrial valves - Testing of valves - Part 2: Tests, test

procedures and acceptance criteria – Supplementary requirements

used in water and drainage applications. Vulcanized rubber
op V1
intended for human consumption with regard to their effect on the quality of the
water Methods of test.
3.2.1 Submittals
C -
y
C
A) In order to verify compliance with the specification the Contractor shall
C
Q
i. Valves, gearbox and actuators Technical Datasheets.

ii. Drawings showing the exact dimensions of all valve components
including the distance between the valve and the actuator / hand-
wheel / gearbox.
iii. Material specification of all pressure and non-pressure carrying
components
iv. Complete list of all necessary equipment.
v. Complete catalogues of all equipment.
vi. List of recommended spare parts.
vii. Details of any special tools required.
viii. Compliance statement to specifications
ix. Installation and assembly instructions in English and Arabic (if
available).
x. Operating instructions and preventative/corrective maintenance
manual, illustrated spare parts list, instructions for daily checking and
Maintenance, troubleshooting guide in English and Arabic
xi. Quality control, inspection and test plan
xii. Method statement for outer and inner surfaces coating as
xiii. For each actuator, detailed technical sizing sheets includes : currents
at the specified voltage corresponding to locked rotor, maximum
PAGE 86

seating torque, average running load, and speed and full information
concerning actuator dimensions and weights shall be provided.
xiv. Certificate of compliance of the used nonmetallic materials with
requirements of the BS6920.

A) The Contractor shall submit method statements to the Engineer for
i. Procedures for handling, storage and installation of valves including
op V1
C -
y
C
A) The Contractor shall submit drawings to the Engineer for approval in
C
Q
A) The Contractor/Manufacturer shall submit material test certificates for all

B) The valves shall be visually inspected regarding dimensions, materials and

workmanship by an inspector approved by the Engineer. Valve bodies
shall be sound, free from cracks, indentations, spalling, scale, patching or
other defects detrimental to their use.
C) Prior to dispatch of any product and/or material from source the Contractor
D) Products and materials shall be from a manufacturer/supplier who

approved equal.
E) Manufacturers shall have a minimum of 5 years manufacturing experience

F) To allow the Engineer to inspect the Works the Contractor shall give the
activities on site.
i. Installation of the valves.

ii. Testing of the valves
PAGE 87


A) Delivery, storage and handling of products and materials shall be in

ii. Valves shall not come in contact with any sharp projections that may
cause damage to the pipes and fittings during transportation loading
and unloading. Ensure that valves are well secured during transit and
adequately supported. Do not allow valve to overhang the end of a
vehicle during transportation.
op V1
iii. Ensure that valves are protected from damage while being lifted. The
hooks used shall be padded. Use only nylon or reinforced fabric slings
and ropes if they are in direct contact valves.
iv. Store valves on a flat level area and raised above the ground on
C -
y
timber bearers.
v.
C
Store joint materials and gaskets in a well ventilated place free from
exposure to sunlight and in their original packings until they are
C
needed.
B) The Contractor shall visually inspect all products upon delivery to site and
Q

3.3 Products
A) Valves materials and coatings shall be suitable for their intended use, shall
be internally chemically resistant to the conveyed fluid and any gasses
produced by the fluid and shall externally be chemically resistant to the
surrounding environment.
B) All valves shall be flanged in accordance to BS EN 1092-2.
C) Valves shall be designed for nominal pressure of PN16 unless otherwise

specified.
D) Manually operated valves with a size ≥ DN 350 shall be provided with a

gearbox for easier operation unless otherwise specified.
E) Where valves are exposed to outdoor conditions adequate protection

covers against dust, sand, etc. for the rotating parts shall be provided.
PAGE 88

F) Valves shall be arranged for convenient operation from appropriate floor

level and shall be provided with extension spindles or gearing if necessary.
Where extension spindles are fitted, all the thrust when operating the valve
shall be taken direct on the valve body and all pedestals necessary shall
be mounted directly on the floor. Full manual or semi manual operated
valves installed at a height of more than 2 meter above floor or service
level shall be fitted with a chain operated wheel.
G) Valves materials shall be free from any defects, selected to confirm its
suitability and corrosion resistance for the long term use under the specific
operating conditions.
3.2.2 Gate Valves
op V1
A) Gate manufactured in accordance with BS EN 1171 / BS EN 558/ ISO
5752 Series 3 and 14. Gate valves shall be with inside screw, solid wedge
and shall be of non-rising stem type.
C -
B) All component parts of the valve body i.e. bonnet and stem seal housing
y
C
shall be bolted together.
Table 3-1: Gate Valve-Material

C
Item Material
Q
Body and flanges Ductile Iron GGG40 (EN GJS-400-15 EN-JS1030)

as per EN 1563.
Disc/ Wedge/gate GGG-40 (EN GJS-400-15 EN-JS1030) as per EN

1563
Stem Stainless steel 1.4404
Stem nut Replaceable gunmetal BS EN 1982
Seat/Facing of disc
Renewable bronze or Stainless steel 1.4404
or body
C) Gate valves shall be metal seating type. The valve bodies shall be fitted
with renewable gunmetal machined gate slides and the gates shall be with
renewable hard bronze shoes accurately machined to reduce sliding
friction.
For valves below 350mm diameter, resilient seat type shall be used.
Seat-rings shall be interchangeable. No lubrication of seating surfaces

shall be allowed.
D) Valve stems shall be machined stainless steel 1.4404 with a machine cut
robust trapezoidal or square form thread.
PAGE 89

Stem seals shall be of the stuffing box and gland form accessible for
maintenance without removal of the valve from service. Stem seals on
valves below 350mm diameter may be either stuffing box and gland or 'O'
ring type.
E) Lifting lugs shall be provided for all valves. Resting/mounting legs shall be
provided as necessary especially for valves above DN350.
F) Hand wheels shall be manufactured with forged steel or malleable iron,

unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer, marked “Open” and
“Closed” with arrow in appropriate directions. Size of the hand wheel shall
be in accordance with EN 12570.
op V1
The operating force shall be limited to 245N. A gearing shall be supplied
where necessary and if the operating force is greater than 245N. Valves
hand wheel shall incorporate a locking bracket for use with a padlock or
padlock and chain.
C -
G) Valves shall be capable of being locked in their operating and isolation
y
C
positions to prevent unauthorized use of the valves.
The valves shall be supplied complete with all the required joint
C
accessories, gaskets, bolts, nuts, washers, etc. for both flanges of each
valve.
Q
Valves assembling nuts, bolts, and washers for all types of joints shall be
stainless steel 1.440.
Valves external connection nuts, bolts, and washers for all types of joints
shall be mild steel with hot dipped zinc galvanized, minimum 50 micron
thick.
All bolt heads and nuts shall be hexagonal. Anchor bolts shall be furnished
with two nuts each.
3.2.3 Butterfly Valves

A) All butterfly valves shall be Double/Triple Offset type, with EPDM rubber
minimum Thickness 3mm, clockwise closing, manufactured and tested in
accordance with BS EN 593.
B) All component parts of the valve body i.e. bonnet and stem seal housing
shall be bolted together with proper rubber gasket.
Table 3-2: Butterfly Valve-Material
Item Material
Ductile Iron GGG40 (EN GJS-400-15 EN-JS1030) as per

Body and flanges
EN 1563.
Ductile Iron GGG40 (EN GJS-400-15 EN-JS1030) ) as per

Disc
EN 1563. It shall be of solid one piece casting (non-hollow)
PAGE 90

Disc Seal Steel Reinforced EPDM
Seat High-alloy weld overlay, micro finished
Gasket Rubber (cotton reinforced)
Self-lubricating PTFE or Zinc free bronze, with EPDM ‘O’

Shaft Bearing
ring seals
Shaft Stainless Steel 1.4462, 100% dry shaft design
Retaining Ring Stainless Steel 1.4571
op V1
C) The disk shall be designed to withstand the maximum pressure differential
across the valve in either direction of flow. The disk shall be contoured to
ensure the lowest possible resistance to flow and shall be suitable for
C -
throttling operation with minimum vibration. The disc closure seating shall
y
C
be in resilient type.
The valve disk shall rotate through an angle between 0° degree and 90°
C
degrees inclusive, from a fully opened or fully closed position and the
reverse. The butterfly valves shall be suitable for horizontal shaft
installation and shall be capable of satisfactory operation with the direction
Q
of flow in principle direction. Disc edges shall be machined with rounded

corners and shall be polished to a smooth finish and the seat shall be
designed so as to allow the valve disc to close at an angle normal to the
axis of the pipe. Adjustable mechanical stops shall be provided to prevent
over travel of the valve disc. The stops, shaft, and disc fixing shall be
capable of absorbing full operating torque, with a minimum design safety
factor of five.
D) The shaft shall be designed to withstand the maximum torque that will be
imposed by the operator. It may be in one piece or attached as two stub
ends on opposite sides of the disk. The means of attachments of the shaft
to the disk shall be by using fixings of pattern which precludes the
assembly becoming loose in operational service. Self-lubricating PTFE
(Poly Tetra Flouro Ethylene) or zinc free bronze faced bearings with EPDM
(Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer) 'O' rings seals shall be provided.
The sealing ring shall be attached to the disc edge circumference by a
retaining ring.
E) Lifting lugs shall be provided for all valves. Resting/mounting legs shall be
provided as necessary especially valves above 350 mm bore.
3.2.4 Check Valves

A) The design of the valve body shall be such that there is adequate
clearance around the back of the door to minimize jamming by rags and
debris. Stops shall be provided to limit the back lift of the disc and shall be
positioned to prevent fouling.
PAGE 91

B) Both disc and lever shall be positively and securely fixed to the hinge
pin/shaft. Grub screws pins (parallel to taper) or clamps will not be
acceptable. All internal fixing devices shall be of stainless steel. All nuts
and studs subject to vibration shall be fitted with spring washers or locking
tabs.
C) Check valves below the size DN 300 (inclusive) shall comply with BS EN
12334 standard requirement. Valves shall be swing, non-slam, and
noiseless type.
D) The valve (DN≤300) materials shall be as per below table:
Table 3-3: Check Valve-Material (DN≤300)
op V1
Item Material
Body, bonnet, weight and Ductile Iron GGG40 (EN GJS-400-15 EN-
C -
hinge JS1030) as per EN 1563
y
C
Flap/disc Ductile Ductile Iron GGG40 (EN GJS-400-15 EN-
JS1030) as per EN 1563
C
Sealing (for metal seated) Dezincification resistant brass
Q
Lever Carbon Steel
Shaft/Pin
Stainless steel 1.4404
E) Non return valves of sizes DN 350 and above shall be high dynamic,
spring loaded, non-slam, noiseless long pattern, metal seated type. The
design of the valve internal parts shall allow the disc to respond very
quickly to any flow changes. The helical spring(s) shall be fully shielded
from the process stream by the central flow diffuser. The metal to metal
sealing shall achieve tight shut off with 100% reliability.
F) The valve (DN≥350) materials shall be as per below table:
Table 3-4: Check Valve-Material (DN≥350)
Item Material
Body, bonnet, weight and hinge Ductile Iron GGG40 (EN GJS-400-15
EN-JS1030) as per EN 1563.
Disc ASTM A 351 CF 8m
Spring Dezincification resistant brass.
Seat Carbon Steel
PAGE 92

G) Lifting lugs shall be provided for all valves.
3.2.5 Air Valves

A) Air release valves shall be designed to meet the following conditions
automatically:
 Discharge air during charging of the pipework;
 Admit air during emptying of the pipework;
 Discharge air accumulated at local peaks along pipelines under normal

operating conditions.
op V1
Table 3-5: Air Valves - Material
Item Material
C -
y
Ductile Iron GGG40 (EN GJS-400-15 EN-
C
Body, cover and baffle
JS1030) as per EN 1563.
C
Stainless steel 13% chromium or light
Float alloy coated with EPDM or Polypropylene
disc.
Q
Guides, seats, bushings,

screws and other internals
Spindle Stainless steel 1.4404
B) Air release valve shall be combined with gate valves to allow dismantling of
air valve whilst the system is in operation. Gate valves shall fully comply
with Section 2.2 of this document.
3.2.6 Flow Control Valves

A) Flow control valves shall be diaphragm or axial flow non-diaphragm type.
B) The valves shall be capable of bubble tight sealing against 16 bar

operating pressure. The valve shall be manually operated with clockwise
hand wheel closing or hydraulically operated with manual closing feature.
Pressure drop across the valve should not exceed 0.10 bar when fully
opened at maximum specified flow rate.
C) The valve shall have positioner. Maximum allowable noise level shall be 70
dB at 1-meter distance.
D) If the control valves are electrically activated, then the actuator shall be
modulating type and can be complete with a positioner or electronic
controller to provide full programmable monitoring and control the flow.
PAGE 93

Table 3-6: Axial type flow control valve- Material
Item Material
Ductile Iron GGG40 (EN GJS-400-15 EN-JS1030)

Body
as per EN 1563.
Piston Stainless steel 1.4404
Piston ring Stainless steel 1.4404
Spindle Stainless steel 1.4404
op V1
Cage Stainless steel 1.4404
Cage ring Stainless steel 1.4404
C -
y
Stem
C Stainless steel 1.4404
Guide bushing Stainless steel 1.4404

C
Piston rod Stainless steel 1.4404
Q
Seat retaining bush Stainless steel 1.4404
Table 3-7: Diaphragm Control Valve-Material
Item Material
Ductile Iron GGG40 (EN GJS-400-15

Body
EN-JS1030) as per EN 1563
Trims Ported Guide & Seating Gunmetal to BS EN 1982
Seating on plunger Rubber
Plunger Ductile iron EN 1563, EN-GJS-400-15
Pilot parts (fittings) : Stainless Steel

Pilot Valves (control valves
1.4404
Indicating rod: Stainless Steel 1.4404
3.2.7 Pressure Relief Valves

A) Pressure relief / safety valves shall be installed wherever damages due to
excess pressure by malfunction or wrong operation can be expected. They
shall be of full lift type, spring loaded, angle pattern, factory adjusted
PAGE 94

pressure blow out set point secured and sealed, and discharge pipe shall
be provided where necessary in order to avoid any accident due to
unexpected blow out. The discharge pipe shall be as short as possible and
with a size double to the valve outlet.
B) The pressure relief valve shall be spring loaded angle pattern type and
shall be suitably rated for all working pressure and test delivery pressure.
C) The valve shall be located on the main discharge header and shall
modulate to relief access set point pressure back to the sump; it shall
maintain constant pressure in the system regardless of demand changes.
Table 3-8: Pressure Relief Valve- Material
op V1
Item Material
Body Ductile Iron GGG40 (EN GJS-400-15 EN-JS1030) as per EN 1563
Seat
C - Stainless steel 1.4571
y
Disc
C
C
Steam Stainless steel 1.4021
Bonnet Ductile Iron. GGG40 (EN GJS-400-15 EN-JS1030) as per EN 1563

Q
3.2.8 Pressure Reducing/ Sustaining Valves

A) The pressure reducing valve shall spring loaded type and shall be suitably
rated for all working and test delivery pressures.
B) The pressure drop through the valve shall not exceed 0.15 bar under full
flow.
C) The spring loading should be adjustable from 0.00 to operating required

pressure
Table 3-9: Pressure Reducing/Sustaining valve-Material
Item Material
Ductile Iron. GGG40 (EN GJS-400-15 EN-JS1030) as per EN

Body
1563
Seat Stainless steel 1.4571
Disc Stainless steel 1.4122
Steam Stainless steel 1.4021
Bonnet Ductile Iron GGG40 (EN GJS-400-15 EN-JS1030) as per EN 1563
PAGE 95


A) Valves shall be protected internally and externally with a factory applied
epoxy coating. The minimum dry film thickness of the coating shall be
300μm.
B) The internal and external surfaces of the valve and the disc shall be blast
cleaned to SA 2.5, ISO 8501 standards.
3.2.10 Marking of Valves

A) Each valve shall be identified by marking and labelling stainless steel
nameplate. The nameplate shall be securely riveted in a readily accessible
op V1
position on the valve.
B) The manufacturer’s nameplate shall contain at least the following

information in English language:

C -
Manufacturer’s name and/or trademark;
y

C
Manufacturing Standards Number;
 Serial No.;
C
 Material type;
 Size of valve in mm;
Q
 Hand wheel direction of rotating (if applicable);

 Pressure rating in bars;
 PN/Class designation;
 Year of manufacture;
 Arrow for direction of flow;
 Weights in kilograms;
3.4 Actuators
3.3.1 General
A) Valve actuators shall be provided for:
 Isolation valves > DN 350, function open / closed

 Control valves, function in accordance to process requirements
 Automatic operated valves, function open / closed
B) The valves shall be driven by electrical motors / gearbox or by electrical

magnets depending on process requirements. Following accessories shall
be provided for all types of valve actuators:
 Electrical position end switch, open / closed with local and remote
position indicator (with signals to the control panel)
PAGE 96

 Electrical intermediate position sensor for all types of process valves

with local and remote position indicator (with signals to the control
panel)
 Open / closed limit switches
 Torque overload switch with alarm signal to the control panel
 Local isolator switch and local operation switch
 End position run (NC or NO) in case of power failure (solenoid valves
only)
 End position run (NC or NO) in case of power supply after plant shut
down or power failure
op V1
 Interlock of suction valve actuators with the related pump operation (
closed suction valve shall not allow the pump to run)
C) Operating movement shall be:

C -
Continuous turn operation for gate valves, globe valves
y

C
Part turn operation for butterfly valves, ball valves
 Linear trust operation for control valves
C
Q
D) Grade of protection shall be
 IP 65 as standard
 IP 68 for submersible actuators (where flooding can be expected)
 Explosion proof EEx ed IIB T4 for installation in hazardous areas
E) The actuators shall be suitable for following ambient air temperature:
 +5 to + 55°C
 Relative humidity 100%.
3.3.2 Actuators, Electrical Motor Driven

A) Heavy duty industrial type actuators shall be provided with appropriate
gear and air cooled motor, including manual override device (hand wheel
or lever) and as per general requirements.
B) Closing / opening time shall be in accordance to the process requirements,

but shall not exceed 0.25 sec/mm hub.
3.3.3 Solenoid Valve Actuator

A) Heavy-duty industrial type actuators shall be provided, with direct acting
actuator, sealed by an EPDM diaphragm against the flow media, spring
loaded for reverse operation.
PAGE 97

3.3.4 Gear Boxes

A) Gear boxes shall be totally enclosed, of robust construction and shall be
suitable for continuous duty under ambient conditions. Long-life seals on
the input and output shafts shall be fitted up to prevent the escape of
lubricants and the ingress of dust and moisture. The gearbox housing shall
be of rigid high strength close-grained cast iron with a properly closing
cover. Eye bolts for lifting purposes shall be provided.
B) Oil level sight glasses shall be installed for easy viewing and ventilation
(breather), oil filling caps and drains shall be provided. Where applicable
gear boxes shall be equipped with a flexible coupling, including safe
guards, between the motor and the shaft of the gear box.
op V1
C) Lubrication of bearings etc. shall be by either splash or forced feeding
system. The lubricant used for the initial filling and specified in the
maintenance manual shall be adequate for prolonged operation without
overheating in the temperature specified.
C -
y
3.5 Execution
C
3.4.1 Installation
C
A) Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and
instructions.
Q
B) Verify dimensions of valves s to assure work will fit together properly and
conform to the arrangement shown on the drawings.
C) Accurately determine dimensions essential for proper location and

orientation of the valves.
3.4.2 Testing
A) Testing of the valves shall be in accordance with EN BS 1074 and BS EN
12266.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 98

4. PIPE EXPANSION COMPENSATION (SECTION

15121)
4.1 General
4.1.1 Scope
This section of the specification gives the requirements for pipe expansion
compensation. The Manufacturer's design shall satisfy the minimum requirements
set herein.
op V1
The following sections of the specification shall be read in conjunction with
this section.
C -
y
Section 2640
C Ductile Iron Pipes
C
Q
Section 11423 Pumps

Section 15140 Supports and Anchors
4.1.3 Standards
4.1.4 Submittals

a) In order to verify compliance with the specification the Contractor shall
products and materials approval.

a) The Contractor/Manufacturer shall submit material test certificates for all
components in accordance with EN 10204, for the Owner/ Engineer
PAGE 99

b) The equipment shall be visually inspected regarding dimensions, materials

and workmanship by an inspector approved by the Engineer.
c) Prior to dispatch of any material from source the Contractor shall notify the
Engineer in writing in sufficient time to allow the Engineer the opportunity
to inspect and test the product and/or material prior to delivery in
d) Products and materials shall be from a manufacturer/supplier who

approved equal.
e) Manufacturers shall have a minimum of 5 years manufacturing experience
op V1
with the type of materials being proposed for pipe support.
f) To allow the Engineer to inspect the Works the Contractor shall give the
activities on site.
C -
y
i.
ii.
C
Installation
Testing
C
a) Delivery, storage and handling of materials shall be in accordance with the
Q
manufacturer's recommendations, Section 01600 of the specification and


b) The Contractor shall visually inspect all materials upon delivery to site and

4.2 Products
a) The pipe work system must be sufficiently flexible to accommodate the
movements of the components as they expand. In order to reduce
expansion and contraction of the piping on acceptable level pipe supports
shall be designed to allow movement of the system.
b) Flexible pipe couplings are recommended at pump inlets/ outlets.
PAGE 100

c) Flexible joints shall be supported on both sides. Where larger forces are
expected, reinforced expansion bellow shall be used.
d) Flexible joints shall be suitable for loads resulting from equipment and
piping system under fully operational conditions (filled with water, etc.),
during hydraulic testing, and under unexpected transient events (water
hammer).
e) The design of the pipe support system and selection of the flexible joint
shall be based on the result of the final stress analysis
f) Expansion joints shall be flange to BS EN 1092.
op V1
g) Care is required during installation to ensure that the unit is installed at its
correct length so that it will only work within its specified limit. Any deviation
would have a detrimental effect upon bellows life.
h) Each expansion joint, together with its connections, is to undergo a
C -
hydrostatic test under a pressure at least equal to 1.5 the maximum
y
C
service pressure.
END OF SECTION
C
Q
PAGE 101

5. PIPE SUPPORTS (SECTION 15140)

5.1 General
5.1.1 Scope
This section of the specification gives the requirements for design, supply,
fabrication and installation of pipe supports. This specification applies to all
secondary pipe supports including pipe support attachments, components
restraints, pipe shoes and steel bracket for piping systems for piping systems
within pumping stations in accordance with ASME B31.3. Primary structural steel
op V1
or concrete pipe supports are not covered by this specification.

section.
C -
y
C
C
Q

Section 15121 Piping Expansion Compensation
5.1.3 Standards
MSS SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports – Materials, Design and

Manufacture
MSS SP-59 Pipe Hangers and Supports – Materials, Design and Selection
and Application
MSS SP-89 Pipe Hangers and Supports – Fabrication and Installation
BS 3974 Specification for pipe supports
BS4190 Isometric black hexagonal bolts, screws and nuts
BS 4320 Metal washers for general engineering purpose metric series
PAGE 102

BS EN 4063 Welding and allied process – Nomenclature of process and

reference numbers
BS EN 22553 Welded brazed and soldered joints – Symbolic representation
on drawings.
BS EN 10025 Hot-Rolled Products of non-alloy structural steels
BS EN 10113 Hot-Rolled products in wieldable fine grane structural steels
structures by protective paint systems. General introduction
op V1
structures by protective paint systems. Classification of environments
structures by protective paint systems. Design considerations
C -
structures by protective paint systems. Types of surface and surface
y
preparation
C
C
structures by protective paint systems. Protective paint systems
Q
structures by protective paint systems Laboratory performance test methods

structures by protective paint systems. Execution and supervision of
paintwork
protection against corrosion of iron and steel in structures. General principles
of design and corrosion resistance
protection against corrosion of iron and steel in structures. Hot dip galvanizing
BS EN ISO 10675-1 Non-destructive testing of welds. Acceptance levels for
radiographic testing Steel, nickel, titanium and their alloys
5.1.4 Submittals

PAGE 103

i. Detail general arrangement drawings of the pipe support showing

dimensions, outlines, sections, allowable forces and moments.
ii. Details of any special tools required.
iii. Compliance statement to specification
iv. Installation instructions including alignment, grouting, connecting of
piping, etc. in English and Arabic (if available) in three copies.
v. As-built drawings hard and soft copies in AutoCAD platform.
vi. Quality control, inspection and test plan
vii. Method statement for outer and inner surfaces coating
viii. Method statement for welding
op V1
A) The Contractor shall submit method statements to the Engineer for
C -
y
C
i. Procedures for handling, storage and installation of materials including
C
ii. Welding procedures
Q
iii. Testing procedures.

iv. A detailed statement for local application of coatings.

A) Contractor shall design and develop detailed drawings for the pipe
supporting, indicating all member sizes, materials, and fabrication details.
Pipe support locations shall be as indicated on the Piping Support Layout
Drawings approved by the Engineer based on the results of the piping
stress analyses. The Contractor shall submit drawings to the Engineer for
approval in advance of commencing the site activity in accordance with

pipe support components in accordance with EN 10204, for the Owner/
Engineer approval prior to manufacturing processes.
B) The pipe supports shall be visually inspected regarding dimensions,

materials and workmanship by an inspector approved by the Engineer.
C) Prior to dispatch of any material from source the Contractor shall notify the
Engineer in writing in sufficient time to allow the Engineer the opportunity
to inspect and test the product and/or material prior to delivery in
D) Products and materials shall be from a manufacturer/supplier who

approved equal.
PAGE 104

E) Manufacturers shall have a minimum of 5 years manufacturing experience

with the type of materials being proposed for pipe support.
F) To allow the Engineer to inspect the Works the Contractor shall give the
activities on site.
I. Installation
II. Testing

A) Delivery, storage and handling of pipe support materials shall be in
op V1

C -
y
C
B) The Contractor shall visually inspect all materials upon delivery to site and
C
Q

5.2 Products
5.2.1 Technical Definitions
Anchor Securing device to maintain in piping a point fixed both
in position and direction under the design condition
defined by temperature and loading
Guide Device used to restrict lateral movement
Axial Stop Device used to restrict lateral movement
Fixed Point Device used to restrict both axial and lateral movement
Resisting Support Device used as a weight support
Low Support Device for transferring the vertical load in the piping at
is lower extremity to foundation or other fixtures
Sleeper Type of support usually placed on the ground
PAGE 105

5.2.2 Materials
A) The structural steel used for pipe supports shall comply with BS EN10025
or approved equivalent.
B) Bolting materials shall be in accordance to BS 4190.Strenght designation

for bolts shall be 4.6 and for nuts 4.
C) Bolts grade 8.8 and nuts grade 8 shall be used for anchor supports and
supports for big diameter pipes where heavy loads are expected.
D) Washers shall comply with BS 4320.
op V1
E) Material of construction for pipe support element shall be suitable for
design temperature to which they are exposed.
F) Isolating material shall be provided between dissimilar materials when

used in environments where galvanic corrosion is possible.
C -
y
C
A) Pipe and equipment supports shall be situated at those points in the
C
building where provisions have been made for the load imposed. The
cutting of floor or roof beams or the reinforcement in slabs is not permitted.
Q
B) Piping attached to plant items shall be supported in such way that the
weight of the piping is not taken by the plant item. All supports shall be
shop fabricated.
C) Where possible supports shall be positioned near to joints and valves and
shall be located in order to facilitate easy maintenance.
D) Since certain parts of the building are constructed in reinforced concrete,

the position of all supports and anchors, and the resulting loads, shall be
defined early enough to allow appropriate provisions to be made. The
Contractor shall allow in his rates for cutting anchor holes etc. required for
the installation of the Plant.
E) Supports shall be designed for the load resulting from equipment and
piping system under fully operational conditions (filled with water, etc.),
during hydraulic testing, and under unexpected transient events (water
hammer).
F) All design and fabrication, including loads and allowable stresses, shall be
in accordance with the relevant codes and standards.
G) A stress analysis calculation shall be submitted to the Engineer. The

location of anchors, guides or restraints shall be based on the result of the
final stress analysis. Spring type hangers shall be selected to allow the
movements determined by the stress analysis.
H) The Contractor shall design, locate and provide all supplementary steel
required to properly secure and support all equipment and pipe supports
furnished.
PAGE 106

I) Designs, generally accepted as exemplifying good engineering practice,

using stock or production parts, shall be utilized wherever possible.
J) Accurate weight balancing calculations shall be made to determine the

required supporting force at each support location and the pipe weight at
each equipment connection.
K) Adequate provisions shall be made for supports that may be disconnected

during maintenance works.
L) Supports shall be designed to prevent transfer of excessive loads from

support to support or to equipment as the line expands or contracts.
op V1
M) Support components shall be attached in places only where they will not
damage other construction either during or after installation. Wall brackets
may be used where equipment / piping are adjacent to the wall or other
vertical surfaces suitable for support use.
C -
N) All large pipes and all long pipes shall have at least two supports each
y
C
arranged so that any length of pipe or valve or other device can be
removed without any additional temporary support.
C
O) Steel shall be of structural quality; perforated straps, wire, or chain shall
not be used.
Q
P) Support components connected to building structural steel shall be done

only by means of clamps or bolts’, welding is not permitted. Bolt holes shall
be drilled and not burned. Supports components connected to concrete
shall be by means of approved concrete stainless steel anchors only.
Q) Where the equipment / piping is subject to shock loads, such as thrust

imposed by the actuation of safety valves, isolation valves, etc. the support
design shall include provisions for shock absorbing devices of approved
design.
R) Selection of vibration control devices shall be part of the Contractor's work.

If vibration is encountered after the system is in operation, appropriate
vibration control equipment shall be installed by the Contractor on his own
costs.
S) Hangers shall be designed to prevent being disengaged by movement of

supported pipe.
T) All anchors and fasteners shall be made from corrosion resistant material
suitable for the designed and calculated load and suitable to that material
to be anchored

A) The external surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned, freed from rust and
grease, and provided with a coating system in accordance with BS EN ISO
12944/ BS EN ISO 14713 or equivalent and Section 9900.
PAGE 107

5.3 Execution
5.3.1 Installation
A) All supports which require welding to the primary steel work shall be
installed prior to painting. In-suit welding shall be minimized to the extent
possible.
B) Where the supports are adjustable, pipe work shall be jacked up to enable
the supports to be adjusted to the correct position.
C) Where rigid supports have no means for adjustment, packing shims shall
be used to ensure pipe resisting firmly on the support without any gap.
op V1
Packing shims shall be welded into position.
D) Pipe supports shall be fabricated to exactly match with the piping

configuration, Force shall not be used during erection to align pipe support
to pipe support location.
C -
y
C
E) Adequate provision of supports to heavy valves and heavy equipment shall
be ensured before pipe work is subject to pressure test.
C
F) All temporary supports shall be removed after the pipework has been
flushed and pressure tested.
Q
G) Galvanized steel shall not be in direct contact with stainless steel piping.
H) All supports to be of welded construction, unless otherwise approved.
I) All welds to be 6 mm continuous fillets, unless otherwise approved.
J) The sections and plates used for the fabrication shall preferably be shaped
by machining. Other methods may be employed provided an acceptably
smooth finish is obtained. Where welding is to take place, the edges and
surfaces shall be free from tears, slag, scale, or any other imperfection
likely to adversely affect the welding.
K) The Contractor’s procedure for welding pipe support attachments to the

pipe work shall be in accordance with Pipe Welding Specification.
L) Attachments to stress-relieved pipe or equipment shall be undertaken prior

to commencement of stress relieving. Any attachments made after stress
relieving shall be cause for repeat of the stress relieving procedures
M) Precautions shall be taken to ensure that the pipe wall is not penetrated
(so-called burn-through) when welding attachments.
5.3.2 Testing
A) The Contractor shall perform all inspection and testing in accordance with
the requirements of this Specification and the relevant codes. Such
inspection and testing shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
 Visual Inspection.
PAGE 108

 Dimensional checks.
 Non-destructive examination of critical welds such as attachments

to pressure piping.
END OF SECTION
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 109

6. VIBRATION ISOLATION (SECTION 15245)

6.1 Part 1 General
6.1.1 Scope
This section of the specification gives the requirements for vibration isolation. The
Manufacturer's design shall satisfy the minimum requirements set herein.
op V1
section.

C -
y
Section 2660
C
uPVC Pipes
C
Section 15121 Piping Expansion Compensation
Q
6.1.3 Standards
ISO7919 Series Mechanical vibration of non-reciprocating machines -

Measurement on rotating shafts and evaluation criteria
ISO 10816 Series Mechanical Vibration - Evaluation of machine vibration by
measurements on non-rotating parts
VDI 3842 Vibrations in piping systems
ANSI/HI 9.6.4 American National Standard for Rotodynamic Pumps -
Vibration Measurements and Allowable Values
DIN 45635 Measurement of Noise Emitted by Machines
6.1.4 Submittals
6.1.4.1 Products And Materials Approval

products and materials approval.
PAGE 110


components in accordance with EN 10204, for the Owner/ Engineer approval
prior to manufacturing processes.
B) The equipment shall be visually inspected regarding dimensions, materials and

workmanship by an inspector approved by the Engineer.
C) Prior to dispatch of any material from source the Contractor shall notify the
Engineer in writing in sufficient time to allow the Engineer the opportunity to
inspect and test the product and/or material prior to delivery in accordance with
op V1
D) Products and materials shall be from a manufacturer/supplier who operates a
E) Manufacturers shall have a minimum of 5 years manufacturing experience with
C -
the type of materials being proposed for pipe support.
y
F)
C
To allow the Engineer to inspect the Works the Contractor shall give the
Engineer a minimum of 24 hours notice of carrying out the following activities
C
on site.
i. Installation
Q
ii. Testing

A) Delivery, storage and handling materials shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations, Section 01600 of the specification and the
following provisions.
6.2 Part 2 Products

A) Rotating/oscillating parts shall be in static and dynamic balance. Any vibration
and noise caused by rotating and/or oscillating equipment, by flow velocity and
other operational functions, which are considered by the Engineer as irregular
or which are exceeding the manufacturer's recommendations, shall be rectified
by the Contractor. Rattling equipment, piping and squeaks in rotating/oscillating
equipment components will not be acceptable.
B) Vibration shall be measured as root mean square displacement RMS in [mm] at

the machine bearing houses and the valuation of vibration readings shall be in
accordance with standards listed in the Section 1.2 of this document. The
manufacturer shall determine the field vibration limits based on above
standards, subject of approval by the Engineer.
C) Vibration of the equipment is also related to the stiffness of the supporting

structure; therefore the structures' natural frequency shall be at least 25%
above or below the natural frequency (reed frequency) of the equipment unit.
PAGE 111

Operation of the equipment unit near or at its natural frequency must be

avoided.
D) Measurement and valuation of noise shall be in accordance with EN ISO

20361, DIN 45635 or approved equivalent.
E) Foundations, base plates and other supports for rotating / oscillating equipment
must be designed to be capable for absorbing, without any shift and without any
transfer to surroundings, the forces, torques, critical speed frequencies,
resonance, etc. caused by this equipment.
F) Transfer of vibration and noise from the rotating/oscillating equipment to the

connected pipe work, cabling, etc. and vice versa shall be avoided by
op V1
adequately designed measures.
G) The pump design, for directly coupled pumps and for pumps with the impeller
assembled directly at the motor shaft, shall be such that the natural vibration
frequency of the pump/motor set is at least 25% higher or lower than the
C -
operation vibration frequency when finally installed in the field.
y
C END OF SECTION
C
Q
PAGE 112

7. INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS (SECTION

15980)
7.1 Design Considerations
7.1.1 General
The CONTRACTOR shall, where possible, use one instrument manufacturer of
International standing for the supply of all similar instrumentation included in the
Contract and shall obtain the maximum uniformity of equipment.
op V1
The equipment shall be constructed to operate accurately and safely under the
operating conditions described or implied in this standard and the project
specifications, without undue strain, wear, heating, vibration, corrosion or other
C -
operating troubles.
y
C
All parts shall be made accessible and capable of convenient removal. Parts subject
to wear shall have adequate means of adjustment and replacement.
C
Parts subject to substantial temperature changes shall be designed and supported to
Q
permit free expansion and contraction without causing fluid leakage, harmful
distortion or misalignment.
The CONTRACTOR shall design all the transmitters, receiving instruments and
electrical control devices to have one (1) standard signal range. Analogue signals
shall be one of four types:
 Thermocouples–ISA Type E (chromel – constantan).

 RTD's-100 ohm Platinum.
 Electric Control Signals, 4 - 20 mA with HART, Profibus or Foundation
Fieldbus as required by the SCADA Communication System
 Special volts, 1 – 10 VDC (only inside control panels).
Conservative electronic design is required. All components shall be suitable for use
at less than 60% rating unless specified approval for otherwise is obtained, or if the
device will not function at the low values of energy, as in the case with lights.
Where more than one device utilizes the same measurement or control signal, the
transmitter or other signal source shall be fully equipped to provide all signal
requirements. The system shall be arranged so that failure or any recorder, indicator,
control component, etc. shall not open the signal loop nor cause loss or malfunction
of signal to other devices using the same signal. The design shall permit removal
from service of any indicating or recording device without upsetting the control
systems or requiring readjustment.
PAGE 113

All instrument parts (such as Bourdon tubes, pressure capsules, bellows, etc.) in
contact with water with high salt content or brine, shall be fabricated from Monel or
Alloy 20.
Dissimilar metals, where galvanic action may occur, shall be electrically insulated.
All pipe threads shall be protected by Teflon tape. (First 3 threads shall be left bare).
Locally mounted instruments shall be provided to indicate pressure, temperature,

liquid levels, etc., where necessary for maintenance, local monitoring and control
valve bypass operation shall be provided.
op V1
Laser engraved I.D. tags made of Stainless Steel and clearly showing the instrument
identification/tag number as shown in the P&ID drawings, make, model, order codes,
accuracy, pressure ratings, instrument range, operating range, etc. shall be
C -
permanently affixed to all instruments. The Contractor shall submit for approval full
y
C
details required for each instrument tag in the form of drawings which show the tag
plate dimensions, material, label fonts height, type, etc. I.D. tags shall be affixed to
C
instruments by stainless steel ties or chains. Where use of stainless steel is
unsuitable as in the case of Chlorine Store, Chlorinator Room, etc. the I.D. tags shall
be embossed or engraved type non-metallic material and affixed by UV stabilized
Q
nylon ties.
7.1.2 Selection of Equipment

During engineering/procurement, the instruments, materials and systems, shall be
properly selected to provide suitable, reliable and fail safe instrumentation, requiring
only a minimum of maintenance; moreover, the variety in type shall be held to a
minimum. Use shall be made of exclusively new and modern materials suitable for
the intended purpose. The selection of equipment shall be subject to approval of
ADM/ENGINEER.
Samples (where requested) and documents of selected equipment shall be

submitted to ADM/ENGINEER for approval.
All instruments shall be suitable for continuous operation at the ambient

temperatures and humidity.
Every precaution shall be taken in the installation of the instruments to protect them
and their electronic components against the extremely harsh weather condition
prevailing in the Abu Dhabi. All instruments selected shall be suitable for tropical
conditions and resistant to corrosion.
Transmitters shall be suitable for field installation, and when mounted outside - shall
be housed in sunshades to protect them against direct sun radiation.
PAGE 114

The process and instrument connections of pressure gauges, transmitters and

switches should be to DIN, NPT or BSP standards as specified in the project data
sheets. In general, the process & instrument connections of pressure gauges,
pressure transmitters and pressure switches should be to ½” NPT M.
Panel mounted instruments shall be suitable for flush mounting.
Generally, indicators shall have dials with white facing and bear black figures and
graduations.
The selection of materials for wetted parts of instruments, including equipment such
op V1
as orifice plates, switches floats, etc. shall be compatible with the process media and
operating pressures.
The material and rating of the instrument piping shall, in general, conform to the
relevant piping specification. The choice of other materials shall be considered in
C -
y
special cases.
C
Mercury-containing instruments shall not be used.
C
Instruments shall have suitably threaded openings to accommodate the required
cable gland.
Q
All instrument transmitters shall be installed in easily accessible and dry locations.
Instruments and transmitters susceptible to ingress of water shall be rated to IP68
grade of protection.
Transmitters shall be of the latest technology with setting/calibration key pad and
local digital display
7.2 Technical Requirements for Flow Instruments

7.2.1 Electromagnetic Flow Meter
7.2.1.1 General
The flow meter shall comprise of a flow sensor and a transmitter unit. The flow
sensor and the transmitter shall be supplied either as an integral unit or shall be
remotely mounted from the flow sensor, subject to ADM/ENGINEER approval unless
otherwise specified on the Instrument Datasheet.
The flow meter shall be of the electromagnetic type utilizing pulsed DC excitation and
shall be microprocessor based.
The flow meter dimensions shall be in metric units. The flow meter shall be calibrated
at the factory to its actual flow range in m³/hr as specified in the data sheets. A
PAGE 115

factory calibration certificate shall be provided with the meter.
Accuracy shall be equal or better than ±0.2% of reading (actual flow rate) at flow
velocity >1 m/s with repeatability within ±0.1% of flow rate.
The flow meter shall have on-site validation capability for sensor and transmitter. This
either comes through built-in feature within the meter’s advanced electronics or by a
dedicated field portable validator connected to the meter under test with or without
cable.
7.2.1.2 Flow Sensor
op V1
The flow sensor tube shall be manufactured from AISI 304, AISI 316 stainless steel
or Die cast Aluminium with a non-conductive hard rubber or Neoprene liner to
withstand process temperatures up to 60 ºC. The liner material shall be abrasive
resistant and approved for potable water use by WRC-UK or equivalent
C -
y
internationally recognized authority.
C
There shall be 2 nos. of measuring electrodes with built-in reference electrode. The
C
reference electrode shall ensure potential equalization between the sensor and the
fluid and proper grounding of the installation. Electrode material shall be SS 316L or
Q
Hastelloy.
Flow meters shall have facility to detect the empty pipe condition either by additional
sensor, flow sensors or other methods / technologies subject to approval. The
method shall be elaborated in material submittal for review & approval by ADM /
Engineer.
The end connections of the flow tube shall be flanged to ISO 7005-2
PN10/PN16/PN25 as indicated in the data sheet to suit project piping specifications.
The flange material shall be of stainless steel or carbon steel with Zinc / Aluminium
alloy coating or other material subject to ADM approval.
The input impedance shall be 1015 ohms or greater so that electrode fouling does
not affect signal and electrode seal integrity. The sensor data shall be stored in a
built-in EPROM module.
The flow sensor shall be provided with robust powder coated Die cast Aluminium or
Steel housing, certified to IP68 of IEC 60529 for remote transmitter version only and
IP67 for integral transmitter version. The manufacturer shall provide necessary type
test certificates for the enclosure. It shall be possible to validate the instrument on
site without removal of the sensor for ease of fault diagnosis and maintenance.
The interconnecting special cable shall be supplied from the manufacturer of the flow
meter and the length shall be as specified in the project data sheets. In general, a
PAGE 116

minimum of ten (10) metres of interconnecting cable between sensor and the remote
transmitter unit shall be included in the scope of supply of the Bidder.
7.2.1.3 Transmitter Unit

The transmitter unit shall be either integral with the flow sensor or remotely mounted
to suit the application requirements and subject to ADM/ENGINEER approval unless
otherwise specified on the Instrument Datasheet.
The transmitter unit shall be microprocessor based, of modular design and shall be
easily configurable through integral keypads. The electronics shall be of modular
construction for ease of maintenance and future expandability.
op V1
The transmitter shall be provided with alpha-numeric illuminated display for rate of
flow and totalized flow indication. The data storage shall be on EEPROM to preserve
data on power failure without battery backup. The unit shall have high
C -
y
electromagnetic compatibility according to IEC 801/VDE 0843 and NAMUR
C
recommendations. The unit shall also withstand an insulation test up to 1800V for 2
sec.
C
The transmitter shall be housed in a robust Steel or die-cast aluminium enclosure
Q
with IP67 protection for both remote versions and the integral type.
The unit should have good resistance to shock and vibrations and withstand
acceleration up to 2g/2h per day, 10-100 Hz (complete system).
The unit shall be provided with extensive self-diagnostics for operational security with
resulting error messages enunciated at the alarm output.
The transmitter shall power the flow sensor with low frequency DC excitation to
provide enhanced zero stability. Routine zeroing is not acceptable.
The unit shall be able to operate on power supplies in the range of 85V to 260V AC
or 24 V DC.
All inputs and outputs shall be galvanically isolated from the power supply, the
measuring circuit and each other.
The following outputs shall be available and configurable by the user:
 Analogue, 4-20 mA signal proportional to flow rate or two independent field

configurable 4-20 mA analogue signals output.
 Profibus, Foundation Fieldbus, HART or equivalent communication port as
required by the SCADA Communication System.
 Active / Passive (open collector) selectable to Pulse/Frequency output.
 Status configurable for limit values, end value switching, empty pipe
PAGE 117

detection, flow direction over ranging or instrument fault.
The unit shall have a range ability of 1000:1 to measure fluid velocities from
10mm/sec. to 10m/sec. with a specified accuracy.
The transmitter unit shall be suitable for operation in an ambient temperature range
of 0 to 55 ºC.
7.2.2 Flow Switches

Flow switches shall be of paddle or vane type with high quality snap acting
hermitically sealed double pole double throw (DPDT) switch with gold plated contacts
op V1
rated for 5 A at 240V AC.
Flow switches shall be generally used for ON-OFF signal transmission.
Housing shall be dust and weather tight protected to IP66 (min) and materials of
C -
wetted parts shall be aluminium bronze alloy, Monel, 316L SS or similar as specified
y
C
in the project data sheets.
Electrical connection shall be via M20 x 1.5 with weather proof cable glands to suit
C
the connecting cable.
Q
Alternative types of flow switches with electronic technology may also be proposed
by Contractor and shall be subject to ADM/ENGINEER approval.
7.2.3 Variable Area Flow Meter (Rotameter)

Rotameters shall have borosilicate glass metering tube, stainless steel 316 float and
wetted Parts to BS 970, scale shall have black markings on white background with a
nominal length of 250 mm. Graduation units shall be as specified in the Project
Specification. Process connections shall be flanged. Accuracy shall be 2% and 10:1
range ability. Glass tube shall be easily removable for cleaning.
7.2.4 Flumes and Weirs

Venturi flumes or sharp crested weirs shall be used for open channel flow
measurement, complete with ultrasonic level transmitters.
The ultrasonic level transmitters shall be provided with built-in flow rate and totalised
flow indication.
The sensor shall be positioned at a height that equates to the maximum water level
plus the transducer blanking distance, wherever this is practicable. If the sensor is to
be positioned at a higher location that causes reduction of the system accuracy
approval of ADM is required prior to the commencement of the installation.
In general flumes shall be designed to BS 3680 Part 4C. Other standards may be
PAGE 118

accepted subject to ADM/Engineer approval.
Rectangular flumes shall be moulded in one piece with 5mm thick walls, reinforcing
ribs and internal removable blocking to prevent distortion during shipment.
Staff gauge of 50mm width by full depth with 1mm increments shall be provided. The
staff gauge shall be recessed into flume wall.
Flumes shall be self-supporting and cast in reinforced concrete channel without

additional internal or external supports.
7.3 Technical Requirements for Pressure Instruments
op V1
7.3.1 Pressure Gauges
7.3.1.1 General
C -
y
The gauges shall be circular dial, industrial type and be of the safety pattern design.
C
The pressure gauges shall be of `BOURDON TUBE' type with concentric scale in
C
accordance with BS 1780 and additional requirements specified below.
7.3.1.2 Case
Q
The gauges shall be suitable for direct mounting. The nominal size shall be 150 mm.
The range shall be as per data sheet. While selecting the maximum range it should
be ensured that the normal operating pressure is at approximately 60% of the range.
The case material including blow-out plate shall be stainless steel. A full blow-out
device shall be fitted to the back of the pressure gauge case, to prevent the pressure
in the gauge from exceeding 0.3 bar g (30KPa) in case of tube rupture.
The blow-out back plate shall be provided with a flexible compensation facility and
sealing ring, both made of a hydrocarbon resistant synthetic rubber.
The window shall be of shatterproof glass.
The case shall be suitable for liquid filling according to IEC-60529, IP65 protection.
The case shall be glycerine (glycerol) filled if the pressure gauge installation is
susceptible to vibration.
7.3.1.3 Pressure Sensing Element

The pressure sensing element shall be of minimum AISI 316 SS Bourdon tube
welded to AISI 316 shank and tube end piece. Both welds shall be full argon-arc
welds (TIG weldings) and shall be made with the use of AISI consumables. The
PAGE 119

Bourdon tube shall be placed at least 7 mm inside the shank.
7.3.1.4 Connection
The gauges shall have a bottom connection as specified. Connection size shall
preferably be ½ inch NPT (M).
7.3.1.5 Pointer Movement

The movement shall be of corrosion and wear-resisting material e.g. stainless steel.
7.3.1.6 Pointer and Dial
op V1
A stainless steel flexible pointer stop on the dial shall be provided.
7.3.1.7 Safety Factor

Pressure containing parts shall be designed with a safety factor of 4 to 1.
C -
y
7.3.1.8 Accuracy
C
Accuracy of the gauge shall be better than +1% of full scale deflection.
C
7.3.1.9 Accessories
Q
Each gauge shall be supplied with a gauge cock and a sample cock, which shall be
fitted between the gauge and the discharge pipe according to the approved primary
connection diagram. In addition, a pulsation damper / snubbers shall be supplied with
each gauge if mounted in highly pulsating process and discharge side of pumps.
7.3.2 Pressure Switches

The pressure-sensing element may be of the Bourbon tube, spiral, helical, bellows or
diaphragm type, depending upon the application requirements. The pressure sensing
element shall be of AISI 316 SS. Pressure switches shall withstand the maximum
pressure of the system to which it is connected. In addition, over range protection, (at
least 1.3 times the maximum scale reading), shall be included for all instruments.
Gauge protectors shall be included wherever required to withstand maximum surge
pressure. The Vendor shall indicate the proof pressure for the proposed model in the
material submittal.
Set point for pressure switches shall be adjustable throughout the operating range.
Pressure switches shall have ½" NPT (M) process connection.
Pressure switches shall generally be used for "ON-OFF" applications with an

adjustable set point and a differential gap with a reference or calibrated scale. The
switch type shall be snap action DPDT, rated for 5 A at 240V AC or 1 A 30V DC. The
switch shall also be hermetically sealed with gold plated contacts. Degree of
protection shall be IP65 or better.
PAGE 120

7.3.3 Pressure Transmitters

Pressure transmitters shall be of the direct sensing type with the sensing element as
per manufacturer's standard. The diaphragm shall be hermetically welded to the
measuring element assembly, which shall be suitable for the operating temperature
limits of 0 to 55 ºC unless otherwise specified.
The transmitter shall be of a smart type with modular design and capacitive sensor.
The measuring element shall be able to withstand a temporary/permanent
overpressure to at least 33% of the specified range limits without calibration shift.
All wetted parts and the diaphragm shall be compatible with the process fluid and
shall be of minimum AISI 316 or ceramic. The measuring assembly fill fluid shall be
op V1
silicon oil, unless otherwise specified and non-toxic certificate shall be provided for
filling fluid. Alternatively dry capacitance sensor shall also be acceptable.
PTTE gaskets shall be applied as a standard, unless otherwise specified. The bolts
C -
and nuts shall be high tensile stainless steel ASTM A564 - T630 - H1150 unless
y
C
The transmitter enclosure class shall be to IP67 of IEC 60529, as a minimum.

C
The process connection shall be ½" NPT (M) and the electrical signal cable entry
Q
connection shall be M20 x 1.5 metric, unless otherwise specified in the data sheet.
Unused electrical connections shall be plugged off with a recessed head screw in
compliance with the specified electrical safety requirements. The screw material shall
be of stainless steel for stainless steel enclosures. The signal cable termination
points shall of the screw type.
The transmitter output signal shall be 4-20 mA with Hart protocol, Profibus,
Foundation Fieldbus or equivalent as required by the SCADA Communication
System.
The transmitter power supply voltage shall be 24 VDC, for two-wire transmission
system with a minimum power supply voltage of 12.5 VDC.
The transmitter electronics shall be microprocessor based. Printed circuit board(s)

should be of replaceable modular construction, shall be hermetically sealed or
protected by a corrosion-resistant coating (tropicalized) and vibration-free supported
in case of plug-in type circuit boards.
Signal wiring terminals and electronics shall be housed in separate compartments, so

that the electronics remained sealed during electrical connection of the transmitter to
the signal cable.
The electronics system shall be provided with a reverse polarity protection circuit.
Zero and span shall be non-interacting, easily and continuously accessible. The
external adjustment(s) should be provided with an environmental protection cover. It
PAGE 121

shall be possible to calibrate the transmitter locally through dedicated push buttons
for zero and span with digital accuracy.
The transmitter shall be provided with integral digital indicator with scale identical to
the calibrated range as indicated in the instrument data sheet.
The performance of the transmitter shall be as follows:
 The transmitter accuracy including combined effect of linearity, hysteresis and

repeatability shall be equal to or better than ±0.1% of calibrated span.
 The dead band shall be equal to or better than ±0.05% of span.
 Stability (not including temperature or pressure effect) shall be better than
op V1
±0.1% of the minimum span per 30 days or ±0.2% of URL for one year.
The total dynamic effect of the temperature including span and zero error:
 At maximum span - equal or less than ±1.5% of the span

C -
y
 At minimum span - equal or less than ±4.5% of the span, unless
C
otherwise specified
C
The total effect of the radio frequency interference's shall be equal or less than 0.1%
of the output span, with the transmitter enclosure cover in place. The transmitter shall
be provided with EMI/RFI integral transient protection also when the cover has been
Q
removed. The protection level shall be as per NAMUR recommendations and EMC
directive compliance.
7.4 Technical Requirements – Level Instruments

7.4.1 Level Gauges
Local level gauges for the surge vessels and reservoirs shall be of the direct reading
magnetic type where a permanent magnet mounted in a float drives a series of bi-
coloured magnetic flaps. The two colours of the flaps shall be bright and clearly
different in order to provide clear visibility of the level from a distance. Accumulation
of sand and dust shall not impede reading. A small permanent magnet shall be
attached to each flap to ensure that the flaps remain in a given position even when
severe vibration occurs. The float shall be concentric magnetic design with
unsupported sections to provide a strong and uniform magnetic field. The external
mounted float guiding tube / chamber shall be of 304 SS and the float shall be AISI
316 SS. The housing of the flaps shall be dust and watertight. A graduated scale
made of stainless steel with 1 cm division shall be fixed adjacent to the float guiding
tube/chamber.
Only one (1) level gauge shall preferably be used on a vessel. If, however, two (2) or
more level gauges are required, they shall be installed in such a way that the visible
lengths overlap by at least 100 mm.
PAGE 122

The level gauges shall be fitted with field adjustable snap acting micro switches for
high and low level alarms. The alarm contacts shall be gold plated and rated for 5 A
at 240 V AC. The switch enclosure shall be weather proof to IP65. Electrical
connections shall be M20 x 1.5 with cable glands.
7.4.2 Level Switches

Level switches shall be Ultrasonic type, float or displacer operated and shall have
high quality snap-acting double pole double throw micro switch type.
op V1
Level switches shall be of pack-less construction; there shall be minimum moving
parts in the liquid. The float and sleeve shall be made of 316 SS and mounted inside
a flanged external cage / float chamber. The float chamber shall be provided with
side / side flanged connection of size 2 inch ANSI 150 lbs RF.
C -
y
Alternatively horizontal float type magnetic switches will be considered according to
C
the service conditions.
C
Housings shall be weatherproof to IP67. Body materials shall be aluminium bronze
alloy. Wetted parts shall be 316 SS / Monel or similar approved.
Q
The switching element shall be hermetically sealed snap acting micro switch rated for
5 A at 240 V AC with gold plated contacts. Each switch shall be provided with DPDT
contact arrangements. The switch enclosure shall be weather proof to IP-67 of IEC
60529. Cable entry shall be M20 x 1.5.
7.4.3 Level Transmitter – Ultrasonic Type

The level sensor shall operate on the Ultrasonic principle. The unit shall comprise of
a sensor and a field mounted Transmitter unit, interconnecting cable and accessories
such as sensor flanges, mounting frame, alignment unit and protective cover as
required for a complete installation.
7.4.3.1 Sensor
The sensor shall be suitable for a measuring range as per the process data sheet.
The probe shall be provided with a built-in temperature sensor for the compensation
of sound velocity.
The sensor shall be flange mounted on top of the storage tank and supplied with a
mounting flange or threaded. For easy mounting and accurate positioning of the
sensor an alignment unit shall also be supplied, if required by the application (i.e.
when process connection is threaded).
The sensor housing shall be of polypropylene (PP) and shall be certified to IP68
enclosure class.
PAGE 123

The sensor shall operate satisfactorily under ambient and operating temperature
limits of 0 ºC to 55 ºC, a relative humidity of 0 to 100% RH and maximum operating
pressure of 2 Bars (absolute).
The following accessories shall be supplied with the sensor unit:-
 All weather Protective Cover

 Interconnecting cable between the sensor and transmitter (as required by the
application). The cable shall be supplied from the manufacturer of the
instrument.
7.4.3.2 Transmitter
op V1
The transmitter unit shall be of single channel version suitable for field mounting
compatible with the Ultrasonic Level Sensor on the storage tanks.
The unit shall be microprocessor based and of modular construction. The operation
C -
y
shall be based on intelligent software using fuzzy logic for echo analysis and
C
rejection of sporadic reflections, interference echoes and multiple reflections.
C
The transmitter enclosure shall be certified to IP67 of IEC-60529.
The unit shall be provided with a keypad on the front panel to be used for
Q
configuration purposes together with an illuminated LCD display and bar graph
segment display for level in steps of 10% or better.
Configurations shall be carried out by the use of standard operating matrix and the
time required for starting minimized by the use of pre-set operating parameter values.
Data storage shall be in EEPROM non-volatile memory to avoid requirement of
battery backup. A keypad locking facility to prevent unauthorised access to program
changes shall be provided.
The unit shall be suitable for operation in a temperature range of 0 ºC to 55 ºC with

95% average RH.
The outputs shall be programmable through the keypad and the input, outputs and
power supply shall be electrically isolated from one another.
I. Analogue, 4-20 mA signal proportional to level

II. Profibus, Foundation Fieldbus, HART or equivalent communication port as
The unit shall operate on a power supply of 24 V DC or 240 V AC.
The measuring uncertainty shall be within 0.2% for maximum measuring span.
A 2 inch mounting post of galvanized steel along with mounting screws and nuts and
PAGE 124

an aluminium all-weather cover for the protective housing shall be supplied with each
transmitter.
7.4.4 Level Transmitter – Hydrostatic Type
7.4.4.1 General
The transmitter shall comprise a hydrostatic pressure sensor suitable either for
mounting on a flange or for insertion through a roof opening by means of a
connecting cable. This specification is based on the latter application, which requires
the most stringent features. The flanged type shall generally follow the same
specification as Pressure Transmitters.
op V1
7.4.4.2 Design Features
The hydrostatic pressure sensor shall comprise a measuring cell mounted in a
stainless steel probe tube fitted with a stainless steel diaphragm. The diaphragm
C -
shall be protected by a fine mesh metal grid and a protective cover. The probe tube
y
C
shall be filled with silicon oil which shall transmit the hydrostatic pressure of the liquid
column to deflect a silicon diaphragm with a thin film strain gauge. Contractor shall
provide non-toxicity certificate for the filling fluid. Variations in pressure on the
C
surface of the liquid shall be compensated by an air tube passing through the
connecting cable to the other side of the silicon diaphragm. The transducer should
Q
have an over pressure rating of at least 4 times nominal pressure. A durable conical
cable sealing shall be fitted on the probe tube with a moisture barrier on the pressure
compensation line for long term stability. In case of failure the sensing module shall
be replaceable.
7.4.4.3 Materials
Sensor Tube : AISI 316L Stainless Steel
Diaphragm : AISI 316L Stainless Steel
Gasket : Viton
Cable : Polyethylene insulated and bound with stainless steel webbing
7.4.4.4 Mounting
The probe and cable shall be mounted by stainless steel pressed clamps. The
diameter of the sensor shall be less than 30 mm to facilitate easy insertion and
withdrawal from the roof opening.
7.4.4.5 Enclosure Class

The cable and probe shall be certified for IP68 and housing/connection box to a
minimum of IP65. The probe shall be suitable for operation up to a process
temperature of 55 ºC.
PAGE 125

7.4.4.6 Electronic Module

The electronics shall be microprocessor based and completely potted with compound
to protect them from moisture damage. The unit shall provide a 4-20mA two wire
signal output linearly proportional to level change. The change in output shall be
insignificant for terminal voltage variations from 12 to 30 V DC and for a load
resistance of 0 to 800 ohms. The sensor shall be provided with integral over-voltage
protection of at least 10 kV to prevent short transient voltage peaks from damaging
the electronics unit. The unit shall have an electromagnetic compatibility of 10 V/m.
Zero and span adjustment shall be possible digitally through push buttons on the
enclosure.
op V1
7.4.4.7 Measuring Range
The unit shall have a measuring range as specified in the data sheet.
7.4.4.8 Performance Requirements

C -
y
Accuracy: ±0.25% of full scale
C
Repeatability: 0.1% of full scale
C
Hysteresis: 0.1% of full scale
Minimum Overpressure resistance: 10 times
Q
7.4.5 Level Transmitter – Radar
7.4.5.1 General
The sensor shall comprise a downward looking time-of-flight radar antenna suitable
for mounting on a flange through a roof opening.
7.4.5.2 Design Features

The level sensor shall operate on the time-of-flight method by measuring the distance
from a reference point to the water surface in the reservoir. Radar impulses shall be
emitted by an antenna and reflected off the water surface and received again by the
radar system. A microprocessor based transmitter shall evaluate the signal and
identify the level echo caused by the reflection of the radar impulse at the water
surface. In order to achieve very high accuracy level of ±1mm, the installation shall
be stable and the radar beam shall not suffer interference from columns/beams in the
reservoir. Hence the location of the mounting shall be chosen carefully on the
reservoir roof.
7.4.5.3 Sensor
The sensor shall be suitable for the measuring range as per the process data sheet.
The antenna shall be selected to counter the effects of condensation. The sensor
shall be flange mounted on top of the reservoir and supplied with a mounting flange.
The sensor housing shall be of stainless steel and shall be certified to IP68 enclosure
class. The sensor shall operate satisfactorily under ambient and operating
PAGE 126

temperature limits of 0 ºC to 55 ºC and a relative humidity of 0 to 100% RH.
The following accessories shall be supplied with the sensor unit:-

 All weather Protective Cover
 Interconnecting cable between the sensor and transmitter (for remote
transmitter models). The cable shall be supplied from the manufacturer of the
instrument.
7.4.5.4 Transmitter
The transmitter unit shall be either integral to the sensor or separately mounted. The
transmitter housing material shall be made of die-cast aluminium. Enclosure class
op V1
shall be according to IP67 of IEC 60529, as a minimum.
The electrical signal cable entry connection shall be M20 x 1.5 metric, unless
otherwise specified in the data sheet. Unused electrical connections shall be plugged
C -
off with a recessed head screw in compliance with the specified electrical safety
y
C
requirements. The screw material shall be of stainless steel for stainless steel
enclosures. The signal cable termination points shall of the screw type.
C
shall be based on intelligent software to calculate the water level with very high
Q
accuracy based on the radar echo and capable of analysis and rejection of sporadic
reflections, interference echoes and multiple reflections.

95% average RH.

PAGE 127

an aluminium all-weather cover for the protective housing shall be supplied with each
transmitter for remote type.
7.4.5.5 Materials
Sensor Horn : AISI 316L Stainless Steel
Flange : AISI 316L Stainless Steel
7.5 Temperature Instruments

7.5.1 Platinum Resistance Thermometer (RTD) Elements For
op V1
Pressure Vessels
7.5.1.1 General
C -
This specification covers sheathed platinum resistance elements for temperature
y
C
measurements in pressure vessels.
7.5.1.2 Requirements
C
Resistance thermometer shall consist of an outer metal sheath, containing a sensing
element of annealed platinum resistance wire. The resistance and connecting wires
Q
shall be electrically insulated from the outer sheath by compacted magnesium oxide
or suitable alternative compatible with the RTD operating temperature. The sheath
end closure by seal welding shall be impervious to gases and liquids. Cracks, holes
or defects penetrating the wall shall not be permitted. The tip shape is optional,
rounded, flat or conical; the other end shall be hermetically sealed, suitable for an
operating temperature of minimum 60 C, to prevent the ingress of moisture. The
sealed end of the element shall be provided with flange in accordance with DIN
43734 or as specified in the data sheets, for terminal block and/or transmitter
mounting and spring loaded screws for adjustment. A positive means of preventing
strain on the connecting wires emerging from the sheath material shall be provided.
Terminals shall be suitable for solid wires or wire pins of maximum 1.2 mm diameter.
RTD elements shall be offered in 3-wire duplex configuration. For 3-wire
configuration the lead wire terminals shall be color coded red, red, and white.
7.5.1.3 Dimensions
The sheath shall have a nominal outside diameter of 6 mm ±0.1 mm.
7.5.1.4 Mounting
The probe shall have a flanged connection to the pressure vessel flange.
7.5.1.5 Materials
Sensing element shall be annealed platinum, sheath shall be austenitic stainless
PAGE 128

steel or high nickel alloy tubing, grade determined subject to the limit of the operating
temperatures.
Insulating material within the sheath shall be compatible with the platinum resistance
thermometer operating temperature. Hermetically sealing compound shall be
compatible with the environmental conditions specified in the purchase order.
Connecting wire joining materials shall withstand the RTD maximum operating
temperature.
7.5.1.6 Performance
The platinum resistance thermometer performance shall be in accordance with the
op V1
requirements of IEC 60751, Pt 100 elements, having a resistance of 100 ohms at 0
ºC and a temperature coefficient of 0.003851 ºC-1.
The resistance tolerance shall comply with Class A according to IEC 60751, where
C -
Class A tolerance (ºC) is 0.15 + 0.002 [t]. Where [t] = modulus of temperature in
y
C
degrees Celsius without regard to sign.
The insulation resistance of the compacted ceramic material shall have a minimum
C
resistance of 100 MΏ at ambient temperature (15-35 ºC) and a relative humidity of
minimum 80%, with an applied 10 to 100V DC voltage in accordance with IEC 60751.
Q
Any decrease in insulation resistance at elevated temperatures shall be in

accordance with IEC 60751.
7.5.1.7 Transmitters
The transmitter shall be of a smart type with modular design and compatible with 3-
wire RTD sensor. The transmitter shall be attached directly to the sensor assembly.
The transmitter housing material shall be made of die-cast aluminium. Enclosure
class shall be according to IP67 of IEC 60529, as a minimum.
The electrical signal cable entry connection shall be M20 x 1.5 metric, unless
otherwise specified in the data sheet. Unused electrical connections shall be plugged
off with a recessed head screw in compliance with the specified electrical safety
requirements. The screw material shall be of stainless steel for stainless steel
enclosures. The signal cable termination points shall of the screw type.

The transmitter electronics shall be microprocessor based. Printed circuit board(s)
should be of replaceable modular construction, shall be hermetically sealed or
protected by a corrosion-resistant coating (tropicalized) and vibration-free supported
PAGE 129

in case of plug-in type circuit boards.

Signal wiring terminals and electronics shall be housed in separate compartments, so
that the electronics remained sealed during electrical connection of the transmitter to
the signal cable.
The electronics system shall be provided with a reverse polarity protection circuit.
Zero and span shall be non-interacting, easily and continuously accessible. The
external adjustment(s) should be provided with an environmental protection cover.
The performance of the transmitter shall be as follows:
 The transmitter accuracy including combined effect of linearity, hysteresis and
op V1
repeatability shall be equal to or better than ± 0.1 ºC.
 The dead band shall be equal to or better than ± 0.05% of span.
 Stability (not including temperature or pressure effect) shall be better than
±0.1% of the reading or 0.1 ºC, whichever is greater, for 24 months.
C -
y
The total effect of the radio frequency interference's shall be equal or less than 0.1%
C
of the output span, with the transmitter enclosure cover in place. The transmitter shall
be provided with EMI/RFI integral transient protection also when the cover has been
C
removed. The protection level shall be as per NAMUR recommendations and EMC
directive compliance.
Q
7.6 Vibration Monitoring System

Vibration transducers shall be selected based on the recommendation of the
equipment vendor. The transducer selected shall be reliable, accurate and well
proven in similar applications elsewhere. A compatible vibration monitor to match the
transducer selected shall be included along with the interconnecting cables between
the sensor and the monitoring unit. The monitoring unit shall be provided with its own
power supply unit and relay contact outputs for alarm and trip.
The unit should feature a bar graph display with graduated scale for vibration and
LED's for status, alarm & trip indications. The monitor shall be supplied with all the
mounting accessories. The monitor shall also be provided with PROFIBUS interface
to SCADA Communication System
7.7 Water Quality Analysers

7.7.1 General
The Contractor shall propose one vendor for all the Water Quality Analysers in order
to have uniformity of design, calibration procedures and one point of contact for after
sales services requirements. The vendor selected shall have proven local capability
to provide sufficient professional service throughout the lifetime of the system.
Sampled water shall be drawn from the locations as shown on the drawings and
routed via sampling pipes to the Water Quality Analyser room.
PAGE 130

All sensor transmitters shall be located near the sensors on ground level or on
walkways where they are easily accessible. Sufficient sensor cable lengths shall be
provided to allow connection of sensors to transmitters.
7.7.2 Transmitters
shall be based on intelligent software to allow conversion of the sensor signals,
temperature (where required) to accurate readings.
The transmitter enclosure shall be certified to IP67 of IEC-60529.
op V1
C -
y
C
C

Q
95% average RH.

Transmitters shall be modular single or dual channel controller that works with digital
sensors and analog sensor modules. They shall be microprocessor-based and allow
replacement of digital and analogue sensors connected to the controller by
unplugging and plugging sensors as necessary.
Combination transmitters shall be acceptable for multiple connections of the same

quality sensor, e.g. two pH sensors or two conductivity sensors, etc.
Parameter-specific controllers that do not allow changing of parameter configurations

in the field are unacceptable.
an alluminium all-weather cover for the protective housing shall be supplied with
each field mounted transmitter.
PAGE 131

7.7.3 Residual Chlorine

The analyser unit shall consists of flow cells, sensors, transmitter, associated
pipework, valves, cabling, etc. all factory pre-fitted on a stainless steel back panel.
The sensor shall measure Total Chlorine which is Free Chlorine plus Combined
Chlorine.
The unit shall have a pH sensor to correct for changes in the pH based on the
pH/Free Chlorine disassociation curve.
The sensor shall be a three electrode amperometric type whereby the anode is split
into two parts to provide stable measurement and longer electrode life. The
measuring electrode shall be gold, the reference electrode shall be silver with silver
op V1
halide and the counter electrode shall be stainless steel. The method of
measurement shall be reagent-free and continuous in accordance with US EPA
Method 334.0.
C -
The sensors shall be digital type which allows plug and play capability whereby they
y
C
can be calibrated in the lab and plugged into the controllers at the analyser racks
without any additional calibration, settings, software configurations, etc.
C
The analyser unit shall have self-diagnostics alerts to advise on servicing
requirements due to changes in process and warn of pH and chlorine calibration
Q
deviations. A non-contacting sample flow sensor shall be incorporated to provide

alarm for insufficient flow. All warning shall be easily configurable.
The sensor characteristics shall be as follow:

 Measurement range: 0 to 10ppm
 Lower limit of detection: 90ppb
 Resolution: 0.001ppm
 Accuracy:
- Free Chlorine: ±3% of reference test (DPD Method) at constant pH
less than 7.2 (±0.2 pH Unit)
- Free Chlorine: ±10% of reference test (DPD Method) at stable pH less
than 8.5 (±0.5 pH Unit from the pH at calibration)
- Total Chlorine: ±10% of reference test (DPD Method) at stable pH less
than 8.5 (±0.5 pH Unit from the pH at calibration)
- Total Chlorine: ±20% of reference test (DPD Method) at stable pH
greater than 8.5
 Repeatability: 30ppb or 3%, whichever is greater
 Response times: 140 seconds or less for 90% change at a stable temperature
and pH
 Total chlorine: 100 seconds or less for 90% change at a stable temperature
and pH.
 Sampling time: Continuous
 pH range of sample: 4 to 9 (integrated pH sensor to be provided for
PAGE 132

correction)
 Sample temperature: 5 ºC to 45 ºC (internal temperature compensation to be
provided)
7.7.4 Conductivity
The measuring principle of the sensor shall be based on induction and conduction.
An alternating magnetic field generated in a primary coil shall induce a current in the
process media. Whereby, the strength of the induced current will be proportional to
the ion concentration and thus the conductivity of the media. The current flow in the
media shall generate another magnetic field in a secondary coil which is then
measured to determine the conductivity.
op V1
7.7.5 PH Analyser
The sensor shall have an electrode with a glass membrane which supplies an
electrochemical potential dependent upon the pH value of the medium. This potential
shall be generated by the selective penetration of positive hydrogen ions (H+)
C -
through the outer layer of the membrane which causes an electrochemical boundary
y
C
layer with an electrical potential. The measured value of the electrical potential gives
a measure of the pH. A reference electrode shall be provided as well.
C
7.7.6 Turbidity
The turbidity measurement shall be based on the measurement of light scattered by
Q
suspended particles when a light beam is shone through the medium. The amount of
scatter gives a measurement of the turbidity of the medium.
The sensors shall use a dual-beam infrared/scattered light photometer to measure

turbidity. An LED light source shall transmit a beam of infrared light into the medium
at an angle to the probe face. The scattered light shall be detected by a pair of
photoreceptors in the sensor face.
A backscatter photoreceptor shall be provided to accurately measure suspended

particles.
7.7.7 ORP Analyser

The sensor shall have an electrode which supplies or accepts electrons. The
electrochemical potential developed as a result of the accumulation of charge will be
equal to the reduction potential of the medium. The measured value of the electrical
potential gives a measure of the ORP. A reference electrode shall be provided as
well.
The accuracy of measurement shall be better than ±0.5% of the measured value.
The range of the sensor shall be as indicated in the Instrument Data Sheet.
The ingress protection of the sensor shall be IP68.
7.7.8 Analyser Rack

Analyser racks shall be completely factory assembled units whereby all sensors,
sensor holders, flow cells, piping, isolation/control/pressure reducing valves, cabling,
PAGE 133

transmitters, etc. are pre-installed by the manufacturer in the factory.
The racks shall be floor standing units with ready field connection points for samples
piping, drain, flushing water, signal/data cables termination junction box, power
cables junction box, etc. Field piping and cabling shall be kept to a minimum. All
power, control and signal cables from the transmitter units shall be neatly routed to
junction boxes mounted on the rear of the rack in separate PVC cable
conduits/trunkings, i.e. power cables, control cables and signal cables shall not be
mixed in the same conduit/trunking. Racks requiring field wiring to
transmitters/sensors will not be accepted. All field wiring shall be carried out at
junction boxes only. Each transmitter unit shall be provided with a fused power switch
op V1
above the transmitter unit.
The complete rack including frames, back panel, stiffeners, tundish, etc. shall be
stainless steel construction. All piping and valves shall be PVC. Cable junction boxes
shall be die-cast aluminium. All bolts, nuts, cable conduit and pipe brackets/holders
C -
y
shall be stainless steel.
C
Racks which are more than 3 meters in length shall be transported to the site as
C
separate shipping units and assembled at site by the instrument vendor.
7.8 Inspection and Testing

Q
The Inspection Data Sheets for each instrument shall be prepared by the
CONTRACTOR and submitted for approval.
CONTRACTOR shall submit to ADM/ENGINEER a detailed Inspection and Test Plan

(ITP) for approval with all activities and acceptance criteria.
7.8.1 Pressure Tests

Instrument process piping up to the first block valve shall be tested with the piping or
equipment to which it is connected.
For remote installations, testing of the lead line from the first block valve up to the
secondary block valve at the instrument can be done simultaneously, provided the
instrument is blocked off from the source of pressure and vented to atmosphere.
7.8.2 Instrument Calibration

All the instruments shall be function tested on-site after installation. The test report
format shall be submitted to ADM/ENGINEER and approval should be sought from
ADM/ENGINEER before proceeding with the work. The test equipment's to be used
shall have better accuracy than the instrument and should have a test certificate from
independent certified testing authority, which is currently valid. The factory calibration
certificate of each instrument shall be submitted to ADM/ENGINEER prior to
installation.
7.8.3 Cable Continuity and Insulation Resistance
PAGE 134

All the cables laid shall be thoroughly checked for continuity and insulation resistance
before energising. The cable continuity and insulation resistance report shall be
recorded in formats to be prepared by the CONTRACTOR and approved by
ADM/ENGINEER.
7.8.4 Loop-Checking and Functional Testing

Loop checking and functional testing shall be done by the CONTRACTOR and
witnessed by ADM/ENGINEER. The procedures and results of the loop checks shall
be recorded in formats to be prepared by the CONTRACTOR and approved by
ADM/ENGINEER.
7.8.5 Nameplates and Tagging
op V1
Laser engraved I.D. tags made of Stainless Steel and clearly showing the instrument
identification/tag number as shown in the P&ID drawings, make, model, order codes,
accuracy, pressure ratings, instrument range, operating range, etc. shall be
permanently affixed to all instruments. The Contractor shall submit for approval full
C -
details required for each instrument tag in the form of drawings which show the tag
y
plate dimensions, material, label fonts height, type, etc. I.D. tags shall be affixed to
C
instruments by stainless steel ties or chains. Where use of stainless steel is
unsuitable as in the case of Chlorine Store, Chlorinator Room, etc. the I.D. tags shall
be embossed or engraved type non-metallic material and affixed by UV stabilized
C
nylon ties.
Q
7.8.6 Labelling
All field-mounted junction boxes shall be provided with nameplates. Titles on
nameplates shall be as per approved panel shop drawings which shall incorporate
the approved numbering/tagging system.
The material of the nameplate shall be laminated white plastic with black engraved
text in upper case.
The nameplates shall be fixed to the mounting plate, the mounting bracket or the
junction boxes door/cover with industrial glue, stainless steel (type AISI 316), M4
bolts and nuts, self-tapping screws or pop-rivets, subject to ADM/ENGINEER
approval.
Note: Fixing arrangements for nameplates installed on junction boxes provided with
'protection', for e.g. Type IP65, shall not adversely affect the type of protection.
The CONTRACTOR shall design and requisition mounting brackets for instruments
and/or components such as manual-operated switches, displacer-type level
instruments and those for temperature measurements, etc. which are not installed on
a mounting plate.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 135

8. CONTROL PHILOSOPHY (SECTION 15985)

8.1 Pumping Stations
8.1.1 Control Description
This control philosophy is specifically written for multi-pump pumping stations,
utilizing the installed analogue level detection system. This normally consists of
continuous level measurement with a float or conductivity probe system as a
backup in the event of a failure of the continuous level measurement system.
8.1.2 Process Control Interface
op V1
The process control system utilizes the available I/O as listed below (refer to
particular specification for project-specific I/O list) to monitor and control the pump
station.
C -
Typical Process Control I/O List for multi-pump Control
y
C
(No Of Pumps may be different on different sites)
Table 8-1: Typical Process Control I/O List- Multi-pump

C
Name Type State Description
Q
415V Healthy Digital In N/O Power healthy indication
RTU Mains
Digital In N/O RTU Power healthy indication
Healthy
Pump control healthy and in

Pump Available Digital In N/O automatic mode. One input for
each pump.
Pump fault indication. One input

Pump Fault Digital In N/O
for each pump.
Pump running indication. One

Pump Running Digital In N/O
input for each pump.
Local/Remote
Digital In N/O OFF = Local, ON = Remote
Selection
High Level Digital In N/O Battery-backed high level float
Duty Start Level Digital In N/O Start float for each start level.
Duty Stop Level Digital In N/O Stop float for each stop level.
PAGE 136

Low Level Digital In N/O Low level float
Start pump. One output for each

Pump Run Digital Out -
pump
RTU OK/Remote Digital Out - RTU Healthy and in remote
Test battery Digital Out - Battery test output
Station Well Level Analogue In 4-20mA Station well level
Pump current signal. One input for

Pump Current Analogue In 4-20mA
op V1
each pump.
Station discharge
Analogue In 4-20mA Station common discharge pressure
pressure
C -
Analogue Out - Not Connected
y
C
Extra I/O may be connected at some sites and is listed in the following for the purpose of
C
guidelines only. The list is not exhaustive, as there may be specific I/O identified. Refer to a
particular specification for a site specific detailed I/O List.
Q
Table 8-2: Additional I/O signals specification
Name Type State Description
3.3kV Healthy Digital In N/O Power healthy indication
11kV Healthy Digital In N/O Power healthy indication
Standby generator Standby generator running

Digital In N/O
running indication
Standby generator
Digital In N/O
fault Standby generator fault alarm
Dry well flood Digital In N/O Dry well flood indication
Dry well pump

Digital In N/O
fault Dry well pump faulty indication
Dry well pump

Digital In N/O Dry well pump running indication
running
Pump Discharge Pump discharge pressure. One input

Analogue In 4-20mA
Pressure for each pump
PAGE 137

Flow Analogue In 4-20mA Flow indication
Conductivity Analogue In 4-20mA Conductivity (salinity) indication
8.1.3 Process Control Operation

8.1.3.1 RTU / PLC / Relay Logic
a) The pumping station shall run in either ‘Local’ or ‘Remote’ operation. When
selected to run the pumping station in Local mode, the operator will have two
options, the first is to operate the pumps through hard-wired Relay Logic -
Float/Level Control (minimum requirements i.e. start/stop of the pumps
op V1
through float/level control) and the second is to operate the pumps through
the Programmable Logic Controller - Float/Level Control (full requirements).
b) The PLC shall be programmed to take over the plant control automatically
through an Error Relay should there be a failure/fault in the RTU when the
C -
Local/Remote Switch was positioned at Remote.
y
C
c) When selected to run the pumping station on Remote Mode, the RTU shall
control the operation of the pumps in either Level or Float mode, and the local
C
controls shall become inoperative.
d) The RTU OK/Remote Relay is driven by one of the RTUs outputs and is used
Q
by the RTU to take control of the pumping station. The relay is energised to
take control of the station by disconnecting the local pump run controls. This
is a failsafe operation and in the event that the RTU fails, the relay de-
energises and local controls resume.
e) The RTU will also turn the relay off (resorting to local hardwired controls) if
local controls are to be used instead of RTU control. The remote/local
selector switch at the station is used to select local control.
f) Pump duty selection and any other local selection systems are used for local
control only. Master station pump duty selection is used for RTU control only.
8.1.3.2 Level / Float Control System

a) When the level probe is healthy and the operator selects level control, the
RTU will use the level control system. The level control system uses multiple
levels to control the operation of the pumps. The levels are indicated in the
particular requirements and shall be to the approval of DMAT.
b) The level control system derives the control levels in the process controller by
comparing the current well level with the pre-set levels. Operator input, via
the SCADA, defines these pre-set levels. If no levels (or incorrect levels) are
entered, the process controller will use the default, pre-set levels until the
operator enters new correct levels. Once the wet well control levels are set,
the control signals are activated and are then used in the same way as the
wet well float signals.
c) If the level probe is faulty or the operator has selected float control, the RTU
PAGE 138

control mode station will be under the float control system. When in float
control, the RTU by default will control the station in the same way that the
existing float switches control the station or as described specifically for a
particular pumping station.
d) The Contractor shall propose the Control Philosophy and Functional Design
Specifications (FDS) during the submittal stage for DMAT approval prior to
proceeding with the programming of the RTU.
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 139

op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Figure 8-1: Level Selection Flow Chart-Typical Process Control
8.1.3.3 Duty Selection

A) The operator can select either individual pump duty selection, or cyclic duty
selection. Assuming a 4-pump pumping station, the pump selected as Duty 1
will start at the lowest cut-in level whilst the pump selected as Duty 2 will start at
the next higher cut-in level, then Duty 3 pump will start at the next higher cut-in
level and the pump selected as Duty 4 will start at the highest cut-in level. This
PAGE 140

sequence is used regardless of the number of pumps, but for example, a 2-

pump station will not have Duty 3 or Duty 4 float switches or levels configured.
B) If cyclic duty is selected, then the duty selection will be rotated/altered each
time a pump stops. The next pump to start is the next in the duty list; the next
pump to stop is the pump that has been running longest. For a 2-pump station,
the duty cyclic duty list will be 1-2, then 2-1. For a 3-pump station, the cyclic
duty list will be 1-2-3, then 2-3-1 and then 3-1-2.
C) If any pump has a fault or is unavailable, it is not included in the duty list. If a
pump fails, then the next pump in the list is started immediately and the faulted
pump is taken out of duty.
op V1
8.1.3.4 Run Time
Every pump has a maximum run-time of 12 hours. When one has run continuously
for 12 hours the RTU will stop the pump. If a pump is still required to run at the
station, the next pump in the duty list will be called.
C -
y
C
8.1.4 Typical Pumping Cycle When Remote Mode Selected
8.1.4.1 Level Control
C
A) This type of control compares the actual wet well level against pre-set start and
stop levels for each duty pump. During normal operation, the RTU will activate
the Duty 1 pump (if available) when the wet well level exceeds the Duty 1 Start
Q
parameter and stop the pump when the level falls below the Duty 1 Stop
parameter.
B) If the ‘Maximum Pumps to Run’ parameter is 1, then only one pump may be
running at a time, regardless of the number of pumps at the station. If the wet
well level rises above Duty 2 Start level, the Duty 1 pump will be stopped and
the Duty 2 pump will run. The Duty 2 Start level will be configured in the master
station as “Standby Level” alarm.
C) If the ‘Maximum Pumps to Run’ parameter is 2 then up to two pumps may be
running at a time, regardless of the number of pumps at the station. If the wet
well level rises above Duty 2 Start level, the Duty 2 pump will be activated (if
available) and will stop at Duty 2 Stop level.
D) If the ‘Maximum Pumps to Run’ parameter is 3 then up to three pumps may be
running at a time. This configuration can only be used for 3- and 4-pump
stations. If the wet well level rises above Duty 3 Start level, the Duty 3 pump will
be activated (if available) and will stop at Duty 3 Stop level.
E) If the ‘Maximum Pumps to Run’ parameter is 4 then up to four pumps may be
running at a time. This configuration can only be used for 4-pump stations. If the
wet well level rises above Duty 4 Start level, the Duty 4 pump will be activated
(if available) and will stop at Duty 4 Stop level.
F) A fixed time delay of 10 seconds must elapse after the start of one pump and
the start of the next pump. This is to prevent two pumps from starting together
and minimises potential overload conditions. In addition, at the completion of a
pumping cycle, a programmable delay is activated. This is to prevent excessive
operations of the pump units.
G) If ‘Cycle’ duty is selected by the operator then, the duty pump is rotated to
PAGE 141

ensure even operation of the pump units. In this mode, each Start signal is sent
to the next pump in the Duty list and each Stop signal is allocated to the
longest-running pump.
H) In any station where there is a standby pump, the operation of the standby
pump will generate an alarm back to the master station.
8.1.4.2 Float / Probe Control

In this mode, the pumps are controlled as per the Level Control with the following
clarifications.
a) The inputs are direct signals from float/probe switches, as opposed to derived
points from the comparison of level set points with the actual wet well level, as
op V1
in ‘Level Control’. However, there may not be a separate ‘Stop’ device for each
pump, in which case a common ‘Stop’ signal is mapped to the individual logic
Stops. This mapping produces a pump start and stop philosophy that is
identical to that of the level control.
C -
b) During normal operation, the RTU will activate the Duty 1 pump (if available)
y
C
when the wet well level triggers the Duty 1 Start float switch and stop the pump
when the level falls to trigger the Duty 1 Stop float switch.
c) If the ‘Maximum Pumps to Run’ parameter is 1, then only one pump may be
C
running at a time regardless of the number of pumps at the station. If the wet
well level triggers the Duty 2 Start float switch, the Duty 1 pump will be stopped
Q
and the Duty 2 pump will run. The Duty 2 Start float switch signal will also
transmit an alarm back to the master station.
d) If the ‘Maximum Pumps to Run’ parameter is 2 then up to two pumps may be
running at a time regardless of the number of pumps at the station. If the wet
well level triggers the Duty 2 Start float switch, the Duty 2 pump will be activated
(if available) and will stop when the Duty 2 Stop float switch is triggered.
e) If the ‘Maximum Pumps to Run’ parameter is 3 then up to three pumps may be
running at a time. This configuration can only be used for 3- and 4-pump
stations. If the wet well level rises to trigger the Duty 3 Start float switch, the
Duty 3 pump will be activated (if available) and will stop when the level drops to
trigger the Duty 3 Stop float switch.
f) If the ‘Maximum Pumps to Run’ parameter is 4 then up to four pumps may be
running at a time. This configuration can only be used for 4-pump stations. If the
wet well level rises to trigger the Duty 4 Start float switch, the Duty 4 pump will
be activated (if available) and will stop when the level drops to trigger the Duty 4
Stop float switch.
g) A fixed time delay of 10 seconds must elapse after the start of one pump and
the start of the next pump. This is to prevent the two pumps from starting
together and minimises potential overload conditions. In addition, at the
completion of a pumping cycle, a programmable delay is activated. This is to
prevent excessive operations of the pump units.
h) If Cycle duty is selected by the operator then the duty pump is rotated to ensure
even operation of the pump units. In this mode, each Start signal is sent to the
next pump in the Duty list and each Stop signal is allocated to the longest-
running pump.
PAGE 142

Standby Pump Operation
For all modes of operation, if a duty pump is not available or faulted, the next pump
in the duty list will be activated instead as a standby.
8.1.4.3 Pressure/Flow Control (for VFD Pumps Only)

a) In this mode the pumps shall work on flow or pressure control depending on
the requirement with high flow override protection. The high flow override shall
be provided to protect the pumps from going into run out condition. The
discharge flow shall be based on the downstream demand at the receiving
reservoir or the discharge pressure shall be selected to achieve the required
pipeline Hydraulic Grade Line.
op V1
b) Once the pump(s) start, the PID control loop which resides in the Control
System shall ramp up the speed until the measured flow or pressure equals the
Set Point flow or pressure. The Control System will measure the discharge flow
or pressure and control the speed and number of the pumps in service to
C -
maintain the flow or pressure at set point.
y
C
c) The flow or pressure set point of the pumps shall be based on the forecasted
demand of the downstream pumping station.
C
Q
PAGE 143

Figure 8-2: Pressure Control Chart (for VFD pumps only)
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 144

Figure 8-3: Flow Control Chart (for VFD pumps only)
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 145

8.1.5 Pump Availability

Availability of the system pumps to the control system operation depends upon
several factors. These are:
A) 415V a.c. Healthy is OK.

This signal is derived from the phase failure relays within the MCC. The control
program will monitor this signal and disable operation of all systems upon any
loss of this signal. The signal must be active for ten
(10) seconds before the control program will flag that the power is available (to
ensure continuity of supply).
op V1
B) Local/Remote in REMOTE position.
‘Remote’ must be selected so that the RTU has control of the station.
C) Pump not remotely INHIBITED.
C -
The pump must not be inhibited from remote control by the operator. Pump
y
C
Inhibit disables operation of the pump by making it unavailable to the process
control system.
C
D) Pump AVAILABLE.
The pump unit must be selected in ‘AUTO’ and have healthy supply to be
Q
available to the control system.
E) Pump not in FAULT.

The pump unit must not be in fault to be available to the control system.
F) Pump not FAILED TO START.

The pump unit must not have an existing “failed to start” alarm to be available to
the control system.
8.1.5.1 Pump Failed to Start

i. The RTU will monitor the pump to ensure that the pump is running when it is
called by the pump run output. If the pump running signal is not present within
30 seconds (default value) of when the pump is called to run, it will be flagged
as “pump failed to start”.
ii. The time delay shall be adjustable and operator configurable.
iii. If a pump has failed to start, the two options to reset the fault are:
iv. Locally, if the pump is selected out of ‘Automatic’, the “pump failed to start” flag
will be cleared. Selecting the pump back into
v. ‘Automatic’ will then make the pump available for automatic control again.
vi. Alternatively, the operator can clear the “pump failed to start” flag on the
SCADA system.
PAGE 146

8.1.5.2 Pump Available

The pump available SCADA signal will be removed if a fault condition is present for
that pump.
8.1.5.3 Discharge Pressure

Some stations have a common discharge pressure transmitter while others have a
transmitter for every pump. To allow for this the I/O points will be mapped to the
appropriate logic within the RTU.
8.1.5.4 Dry Well
op V1
At stations with a dry well, the fault status and running status of the drainage pumps
will be monitored and the dry well flooded status will be alarmed. The flooded status
of valve/flow meter chambers shall be alarmed, unless specifically not required by
the particular specification.
C -
8.1.5.5 Other Indications
y
C
For stations where gas detection is fitted, the RTU will show an indication of
conductivity when instrumentation is fitted. Where flow meters are fitted the
C
instantaneous flow, accumulated flow and yesterday’s accumulated flow will be
displayed.
Q
8.1.5.6 Wet Well Alarms

A) Additional to the float alarms, the level transmitter generates the following
alarms:
i. High Level: wet well is at a high level – this is an alarm condition.
ii. Low Level: wet well is at a low level – this is an alarm condition.
B) Note that the high level and low level alarms from both floats and level
transmitters DO NOT influence the control in any way. They are included for
alarming purposes only.
C) A low low level alarm signal is also generated from the level transmitter to
indicating dry level. This signal influences the control system and cuts-off all
running pumps. A manual reset, from either the SCADA station or locally, is
required to clear the fault after restoration of the healthy condition.
D) A dedicated float switch for pumps dry run protection shall also be included in
the control scheme in addition to the setting of low low-level signal in the level
transmitter to protect the pumps running dry.
8.1.5.7 Low And High Pressure And Current Alarms

The RTU will monitor the discharge pressure and pump current after the pump has
started to check for low and high pressure and low and high current respectively.
8.1.5.8 Analogue Alarms

All analogue alarms have a global dead band, which is applied to all of the alarm set
points. It is initially set to 5% but may be changed via the SCADA. Dead band is
important to minimise change of state reporting when the analogue is around the
PAGE 147

alarm set points.
8.1.6 Telemetry – SCADA Interface

The Contractor shall ensure that the RTU vendor coordinates with DMAT to create,
configure and upgrade the existing SCADA system to provide reporting of a new
pumping station status to the Control Room, and also allows remote control of the
pump station.
END OF SECTION
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 148

op V1
C -
y
C
C
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
Q
(VOLUME III)
DIVISION-16
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
DOCUMENT NO: 511

FIRST EDITION
DECEMBER- 2016
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Document No: 511

First Edition
December-2016
PO Box 20
the publisher
IRRIGATION SYSTEM -TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS VOLUME III
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of Contents ................................................................................................................. i
1. CIRCUIT BREAKERS (SECTION 16030) .................................................................. 1
1.1 General ................................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Low Voltage ACB .................................................................................................................. 1
1.3 Low Voltage MCCB ............................................................................................................... 4
1.4 MCB ........................................................................................................................................ 4
op V1
1.5 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers (ELCB Or RCCB) ............................................................. 5
1.6 Residual Current Breaker With Over current Protection (RCBO) .................................... 5
1.7 Source Tests .......................................................................................................................... 5
2.
C -
DISCONNECT SWITCHES (SECTION 16040) .......................................................... 7
y
2.1
C
Fuse Switches ....................................................................................................................... 7
2.2 Isolator ................................................................................................................................... 8
C
2.3 Fuses ...................................................................................................................................... 8
2.4 Changeover Switch ............................................................................................................... 8
Q
2.5 Transfer Switch ATS/MTS/Bypass....................................................................................... 9

2.6 Source Tests ........................................................................................................................ 10
3. MOTOR STARTERS (SECTION 16050) .................................................................. 11
3.1 General ................................................................................................................................. 11
3.2 Direct on Line Full-Voltage Motor Starter ......................................................................... 11
3.3 Star/Delta (S/D) Reduced-Voltage Motor Starter .............................................................. 11
3.3.1 5.5kw – 11.0kw Inclusive .............................................................................................. 11
3.4 Soft Starters ......................................................................................................................... 12
3.4.1 15.0kw and above ......................................................................................................... 12
3.5 Contactors ........................................................................................................................... 14
4. ELECTRICAL MOTORS (SECTION 16070) ............................................................ 16
4.1 General ................................................................................................................................. 16
4.2 Duty ...................................................................................................................................... 17
4.3 Motor Enclosures ................................................................................................................ 17
4.4 Motor Cooling ...................................................................................................................... 18
4.5 Motor Windings ................................................................................................................... 18
4.6 Thermal Protection.............................................................................................................. 19
4.7 Anti-Condensation Heaters ................................................................................................ 19
4.8 Terminal and Terminal Boxes ............................................................................................ 19
4.9 Submersible Motor Cables ................................................................................................. 20
PAGE I
4.10 Bearings ............................................................................................................................... 20

4.11 Noise Levels ........................................................................................................................ 21
4.12 Paint Finish .......................................................................................................................... 21
5. TRANSFORMERS (SECTION 16080) ..................................................................... 22
5.1 Distribution Transformers – Dry Type (Cast Resin) ........................................................ 22
5.1.1 General .......................................................................................................................... 22
5.1.2 Design and Construction ............................................................................................... 22
5.1.2.1 Rating ..................................................................................................................... 22
5.1.2.2 Voltage Ratio .......................................................................................................... 23
5.1.2.3 Temperature Rise .................................................................................................. 23
op V1
5.1.2.4 Connections ........................................................................................................... 23
5.1.2.5 Off Circuit Tappings ............................................................................................... 23
5.1.2.6 Impedance Voltage ................................................................................................ 23
C -
5.1.2.7 Noise Level ............................................................................................................ 23
y
C
5.1.2.8 HV and LV Winding ................................................................................................ 23
5.1.2.9 Suppression of Harmonic Voltages ........................................................................ 24
C
5.1.2.10 Magnetic Circuit ................................................................................................... 24
5.1.2.11 Core Assembly ..................................................................................................... 24
Q
5.1.2.12 Cable Terminations .............................................................................................. 24

5.1.2.13 Internal Earthing Arrangement ............................................................................. 25
5.1.2.14 Earthing Terminal ................................................................................................. 25
5.1.2.15 Transformer Housing ............................................................................................ 25
5.1.2.16 Emergency Loading ............................................................................................. 25
5.1.3 Capitalisation of Losses ................................................................................................ 25
5.1.4 Inspection and Testing .................................................................................................. 26
5.1.5 Accessories ................................................................................................................... 26
5.1.5.1 Winding Temperature Monitoring System.............................................................. 26
5.1.5.2 Dimensions ............................................................................................................ 26
5.1.5.3 Corrosion Protection .............................................................................................. 26
5.1.5.4 Name Plates ........................................................................................................... 26
5.2 Distribution Transformers – Oil Immersed Air Cooled.................................................... 27
5.2.1 General .......................................................................................................................... 27
5.2.2 System Characteristics ................................................................................................. 28
5.2.3 Design and Construction ............................................................................................... 28
5.2.3.1 Type ....................................................................................................................... 28
5.2.3.2 Rating ..................................................................................................................... 28
5.2.3.3 Voltage Ratio .......................................................................................................... 28
5.2.3.4 Temperature Rise .................................................................................................. 28
5.2.3.5 Connections ............................................................................................................ 28
PAGE II
5.2.3.6 Off Circuit Tappings ............................................................................................... 29

5.2.3.7 Impedance Voltage ................................................................................................ 29
5.2.3.8 Duty Under Faults .................................................................................................. 29
5.2.3.9 Tank ....................................................................................................................... 29
5.2.3.10 Finish And Coatings ............................................................................................. 29
5.2.3.11 Cooling ................................................................................................................. 30
5.2.3.12 Flux Density ......................................................................................................... 30
5.2.3.13 Windings .............................................................................................................. 30
5.2.3.14 Bushing, Terminals and Cable Boxes for Ground-Mounted Transformers.......... 30
5.2.3.15 Fittings .................................................................................................................. 31
op V1
5.2.4 Additional Specification for Pole-Mounting Transformer ............................................... 31
5.2.4.1 Mounting Arrangement........................................................................................... 31
5.2.4.2 HV Terminals ......................................................................................................... 31
C -
5.2.4.3 LV Cable Box ......................................................................................................... 31
y
C
5.2.4.4 Dimensions ............................................................................................................ 31
5.2.5 Emergency Loading ...................................................................................................... 32
C
5.2.6 Inspection and Testing .................................................................................................. 32
5.2.7 Transformer Load and No-Load Losses ....................................................................... 32
Q
5.2.8 Capitalisation of Losses ................................................................................................ 33

5.2.9 Operation and Maintenance Manual ............................................................................. 33
6. LIGHTING AND SMALL POWER (SECTION 16090) .............................................. 34
6.1 Lightning .............................................................................................................................. 34
6.2 Portable Plant ...................................................................................................................... 35
6.3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................... 35
6.4 Distribution Boards ............................................................................................................. 36
6.5 Socket Outlets ..................................................................................................................... 37
6.6 Switches ............................................................................................................................... 37
6.7 Emergency Lighting ............................................................................................................ 38
7. CABLES AND WIRES (SECTION 16110) ............................................................... 39
7.2 XLPE-Insulated Power Cables ........................................................................................... 40
7.3 PILC and PVC/SWA/PVC Power Cables ............................................................................ 40
7.4 PVC INSULATED WIRING CABLES ................................................................................... 40
7.5 Instrumentation Cables ...................................................................................................... 41
7.6 Rubber Insulated Cables .................................................................................................... 41
7.7 Building Wire ....................................................................................................................... 41
7.8 Cabinet Wire ........................................................................................................................ 41
7.9 Non-Metallic Sheathed Cable ............................................................................................. 41
PAGE III
7.10 Direct Burial Cable .............................................................................................................. 41

7.11 Armoured Cable .................................................................................................................. 42
7.12 Metal Clad Cable.................................................................................................................. 42
7.13 Source Tests on Cables ..................................................................................................... 42
7.14 Field Tests on Cables ......................................................................................................... 42
7.15 Cabling Methods ................................................................................................................. 43
7.16 Cable Trench Work.............................................................................................................. 46
7.17 Cable Segregation ............................................................................................................... 47
7.18 Wiring Methods ................................................................................................................... 48
7.19 Installation ........................................................................................................................... 49
op V1
8. CONDUIT SYSTEMS (SECTION 16111) ................................................................. 50
8.2 Metal Conduit....................................................................................................................... 50
8.3
C -
PVC Coated Metal Conduit ................................................................................................. 50
y
8.4
C
Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit .................................................................................. 50
8.5 Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) ........................................................................................ 51
C
8.6 Non-Metallic Conduit .......................................................................................................... 51
8.7 Installation ........................................................................................................................... 51
Q
9. SURFACE RACEWAYS (SECTION 16112)............................................................. 53

9.2 Surface-Mounted Metal Raceway ...................................................................................... 53
9.3 Surface-Mounted Non-Metal Raceway .............................................................................. 53
9.4 Multi-Outlet Assembly ........................................................................................................ 53
9.5 Wireway ................................................................................................................................ 54
9.6 Installation ........................................................................................................................... 54
.01 UNDERFLOOR DUCTS (SECTION 16113) ............................................................. 55
10.2 Underfloor Ducts ................................................................................................................. 55
10.3 Trench Ducts ....................................................................................................................... 56
10.4 Service Fittings.................................................................................................................... 56
10.5 Installation ........................................................................................................................... 56
11. CABLE TRAYS (SECTION 16114) .......................................................................... 58
11.2 Ladder-Type Cable Tray ..................................................................................................... 58
11.3 Trough-Type Cable Tray ..................................................................................................... 58
11.4 Solid-Bottom-Type Cable Tray........................................................................................... 59
11.5 Channel-Type Cable Tray ................................................................................................... 59
11.6 Fibreglass Ladder-Type Cable Tray .................................................................................. 60
PAGE IV
11.7 Fibreglass Trough-Type Cable Tray .................................................................................. 60

11.8 Fibreglass Solid-Bottom-Type Cable Tray ....................................................................... 60
11.9 Fibreglass Channel-Type Cable Tray ................................................................................ 61
11.10 Warning Signs ................................................................................................................. 61
11.11 Installation ....................................................................................................................... 61
12. UTILITY COLUMNS (SECTION 16115) ................................................................... 63
12.2 Materials ............................................................................................................................... 63
12.3 Components ........................................................................................................................ 63
12.4 Accessories ......................................................................................................................... 63
op V1
12.5 Fabrication ........................................................................................................................... 63
12.6 Installation ........................................................................................................................... 64
13. DUCT BANKS (SECTION 16118) ............................................................................ 65
13.1
C -
General Requirements ........................................................................................................ 65
y
13.2
C
Rigid Steel Conduit ............................................................................................................. 65
13.3 Plastic Conduit .................................................................................................................... 65
C
13.4 Plastic Duct .......................................................................................................................... 65
13.5 Reinforced Resin Conduit .................................................................................................. 65
Q
13.6 Draw Pits .............................................................................................................................. 65

13.7 Manholes .............................................................................................................................. 66
13.8 Accessories ......................................................................................................................... 66
13.9 Duct Bank Installation ........................................................................................................ 66
14. UNDERCARPET CABLE (SECTION 16125) ........................................................... 68
14.2 Flat Conductor Power Cable .............................................................................................. 68
14.3 Undercarpet Telephone Cable ........................................................................................... 68
14.4 Under carpet Data Cable .................................................................................................... 69
14.5 Optical Fibre Under carpet Cable ...................................................................................... 69
14.6 Installation ........................................................................................................................... 69
14.7 Field Tests............................................................................................................................ 70
15. BOXES (SECTION 16130) ....................................................................................... 71
15.2 Outlet Boxes ........................................................................................................................ 71
15.3 Floor Boxes.......................................................................................................................... 71
15.4 Pull and Junction Boxes .................................................................................................... 71
15.5 Installation ........................................................................................................................... 72
16. WIRING DEVICES (SECTION 16140) ..................................................................... 74
PAGE V
16.2 Wall Switches ...................................................................................................................... 74

16.3 Wall Dimmers....................................................................................................................... 74
16.4 Socket Outlets ..................................................................................................................... 74
16.5 Industrial Plugs and Sockets ............................................................................................. 75
16.6 Wall Plates ........................................................................................................................... 75
16.7 Floor-Mounted Service Fittings ......................................................................................... 75
16.8 Poke-Through Fittings ........................................................................................................ 76
16.9 Access Floor Box ................................................................................................................ 76
16.10 Cords and Caps ............................................................................................................... 76
16.11 Installation ....................................................................................................................... 77
op V1
16.12 Mounting Height of Wiring Devices............................................................................... 77
16.13 Field Tests........................................................................................................................ 78
17. PILOT DEVICES (SECTION 16149) ........................................................................ 79
17.1
C -
General ................................................................................................................................. 79
y
17.2
C
Push Buttons ....................................................................................................................... 79
17.3 Selector Switches................................................................................................................ 79
C
17.4 Pilot Lights (Indicators) ...................................................................................................... 80
17.5 Remote Push Button Stations ........................................................................................... 80
Q
17.6 Enclosed Emergency and Safety Switches ...................................................................... 80

18. SMALL ENCLOSURES (SECTION 16160) ............................................................. 82
18.2 Hinged Cover Enclosures .................................................................................................. 82
18.3 Cabinets And Junction Boxes ........................................................................................... 82
18.4 Terminal Blocks................................................................................................................... 83
18.5 Installation ........................................................................................................................... 83
19. EARTHING AND BONDING (SECTION 16170) ...................................................... 84
19.2 Lightning Protection System ............................................................................................. 84
19.3 Earthing System Description ............................................................................................. 84
19.4 Rod Electrodes .................................................................................................................... 85
19.5 Active Electrodes ................................................................................................................ 85
19.6 Mechanical Connectors ...................................................................................................... 85
19.7 Sizing Of Earth Conductor ................................................................................................. 85
19.8 Earth Pit Components ........................................................................................................ 85
19.9 Earthing System Installation .............................................................................................. 85
19.10 Field Tests........................................................................................................................ 88
20. SUPPORTING DEVICES (SECTION 16190) ........................................................... 89
PAGE VI
20.2 Construction ........................................................................................................................ 89

20.3 Installation ........................................................................................................................... 90
21. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION (SECTION 16195)................................................ 91
21.2 Nameplates and Labels ...................................................................................................... 91
21.3 Wire and Cable Markers ..................................................................................................... 92
21.4 Interconnecting Cabling Identification (ICA) .................................................................... 92
21.5 Underground Warning Tape ............................................................................................... 93
21.6 Installation ........................................................................................................................... 93
22. PACKAGE UNITSUBSTATION (SECTION 16311) ................................................. 94
op V1
22.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS............................................................................................... 94
22.1.1 Scope ............................................................................................................................ 94
22.1.2 System Characteristics ................................................................................................. 94
22.1.3
C -
Reference Standards .................................................................................................... 94
y
C
22.1.3.1 HV switchgear: ..................................................................................................... 94
22.1.3.2 Transformer .......................................................................................................... 95
C
22.1.3.3 LV Equipment ....................................................................................................... 95
22.1.3.4 Complete Package Substation .............................................................................. 95
Q
22.1.4 Alternative Codes and Standards ................................................................................. 95

22.1.5 Precedence of Codes And Standards ........................................................................... 95
22.2 Design and Construction ................................................................................................... 95
22.2.1 General Arrangement and Layout ................................................................................. 95
22.2.1.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................ 95
22.2.1.2 Lay Out ................................................................................................................. 96
22.2.1.3 Electrical Connection ........................................................................................... 96
22.2.1.4 Earthing Arrangement .......................................................................................... 97
22.2.1.5 Internal Lighting .................................................................................................... 97
22.2.1.6 Ventilation ............................................................................................................ 97
22.2.1.7 Access To Unit ..................................................................................................... 97
22.2.1.8 Noise Level .......................................................................................................... 97
22.2.1.9 Mounting Arrangement......................................................................................... 97
22.2.1.10 Lifting Lugs .......................................................................................................... 97
22.2.2 11KV Ring Main Unit (RMU) ......................................................................................... 98
22.2.2.1 General ................................................................................................................ 98
22.2.2.2 Rating ................................................................................................................... 98
22.2.2.3 11kv Switchgear ................................................................................................... 98
22.2.2.4 Interlocks .............................................................................................................. 99
22.2.2.5 Locks .................................................................................................................... 99
PAGE VII
22.2.2.6 Cable Terminations .............................................................................................. 99

22.2.2.7 Fault Current Indicator ....................................................................................... 100
22.2.2.8 Accessories ........................................................................................................ 100
22.2.3 Transformer ................................................................................................................. 100
22.2.4 Duct Type / Flange Connected Distribution Feeder Pillar ........................................... 100
22.2.4.1 General .............................................................................................................. 100
22.2.4.2 Supports ............................................................................................................. 101
22.2.4.3 Cables, Glands And Lugs ................................................................................... 101
22.2.4.4 Use Ways And Fuses.......................................................................................... 101
22.2.5 Details of Equipment ................................................................................................... 101
op V1
22.2.5.1 Busbars .............................................................................................................. 101
22.2.5.2 Incoming Unit ..................................................................................................... 101
22.2.5.3 Ammeters ........................................................................................................... 102
C -
22.2.5.4 Voltmeter ............................................................................................................ 102
y
C
22.2.5.5 Earth Bar ............................................................................................................ 102
22.2.5.6 Wiring ................................................................................................................. 102
C
22.2.5.7 Base Plate .......................................................................................................... 102
22.2.5.8 Nuts and Bolts .................................................................................................... 102
Q
22.2.5.9 Ratings ............................................................................................................... 102

22.2.6 Package Unit Housing ................................................................................................. 103
22.2.6.1 Metallic Housing ................................................................................................. 103
22.2.6.2 Floor and Roof ................................................................................................... 103
22.2.6.3 Walls................................................................................................................... 103
22.2.6.4 Doors .................................................................................................................. 103
22.2.6.5 Cable Entries ...................................................................................................... 104
22.2.7 Inspection and Tests ................................................................................................... 104
22.2.7.1 HV Switchgear ................................................................................................... 104
22.2.7.2 Transformer ........................................................................................................ 104
22.2.7.3 LV Switchgear .................................................................................................... 104
22.2.7.4 Complete Package Substation ........................................................................... 104
22.2.8 Documentation and Engineering Data ........................................................................ 105
23. 11KV SWITCHGEAR (SECTION 16346) ............................................................... 107
23.1 General Requirements ...................................................................................................... 107
23.1.1 Scope and Certification Requirements........................................................................ 107
23.1.2 Systems and Fault Levels ........................................................................................... 107
23.1.3 Temperature Rise........................................................................................................ 107
23.1.4 General Arrangement and Construction ..................................................................... 108
23.1.4.1 Type of Switchgear ............................................................................................. 108
23.1.4.2 Busbars .............................................................................................................. 109
PAGE VIII
23.1.4.3 Low Voltage, Local Control, Protection and Metering Compartment ................. 109
23.1.4.4 Circuit Breaker ................................................................................................... 112
23.1.5 Floor Inserts ................................................................................................................ 117
23.1.6 Voltage and Current Transformers.............................................................................. 117
23.1.6.1 Voltage Transformers (VTS) .............................................................................. 117
23.1.6.2 Current Transformers (CTS) .............................................................................. 117
23.1.6.3 Voltage Transformer And Current Transformer Secondary Terminals .............. 117
23.1.7 Cable Boxes ................................................................................................................ 118
23.1.8 Earthing of Metal Parts ................................................................................................ 118
23.1.9 Heater .......................................................................................................................... 118
op V1
23.1.10 Instruments.................................................................................................................. 119
23.1.11 Small Wiring ................................................................................................................ 119
23.1.12 Labels .......................................................................................................................... 119
23.1.13
C -
Secondary MCBS ........................................................................................................ 119
y
23.1.14
C
11KV Voltage Detector ................................................................................................ 119
23.2 Specification for 11kv, 4 Panel Switchgear .................................................................... 119
C
23.2.1 Configuration ............................................................................................................... 119
23.2.2 Feeder Control Panel .................................................................................................. 120
Q
23.2.3 Transformer Control Panel .......................................................................................... 120

23.2.4 Protective Relays and Ammeters ................................................................................ 120
23.2.4.1 Feeder Control Panel ......................................................................................... 120
23.2.4.2 Transformer Control Panel ................................................................................. 120
23.2.5 Additional Equipment .................................................................................................. 121
23.2.5.1 Earthing Gear to be Supplied with Switchgear .................................................. 121
23.3 Special Tools ..................................................................................................................... 122
23.4 Inspection and Testing ..................................................................................................... 122
23.4.1 Type Tests ................................................................................................................... 122
23.4.2 Routine Tests .............................................................................................................. 123
23.5 Engineering Data ............................................................................................................... 123
24. PFCC (SECTION 16411) ....................................................................................... 124
24.1 General ............................................................................................................................... 124
24.2 Unit Capacitors .................................................................................................................. 124
24.3 Detuned Reactors/Harmonic Filters ................................................................................ 125
24.4 Power Factor Regulator .................................................................................................... 125
24.5 Field Tests.......................................................................................................................... 126
25. FACTORY BUILT ASSEMBLIES (SECTION 16480) ............................................. 127
25.1 MCC, LV Switchboards and Control Panels ................................................................... 127
25.1.1 Design and Construction ............................................................................................. 127
PAGE IX
25.1.2 Test Specifications and Certifications ......................................................................... 128

25.1.2.1 Type Tests ......................................................................................................... 128
25.1.2.2 Routine Tests ..................................................................................................... 128
25.1.3 Form of Construction ................................................................................................... 129
25.1.4 Degree of Protection ................................................................................................... 129
25.1.5 Fault Level (Short-Circuit Rating) ................................................................................ 129
25.1.6 Service Conditions ...................................................................................................... 130
25.1.7 Environmental Conditions ........................................................................................... 130
25.1.8 Temperature Rise........................................................................................................ 130
25.1.9 Clearance and Creepage Distances ........................................................................... 130
op V1
25.1.10 Site Considerations ..................................................................................................... 130
25.1.11 Mounting ...................................................................................................................... 131
25.1.12 Cubicle ........................................................................................................................ 131
25.1.13
C -
Doors and Covers ....................................................................................................... 131
y
25.1.14
C
Components Mounting ................................................................................................ 132
25.1.15 Bolts, Nuts and Screws ............................................................................................... 132
C
25.1.16 Control Supply ............................................................................................................. 132
25.1.17 Cubicle Heater ............................................................................................................. 133
Q
25.1.18 Future Extensions ....................................................................................................... 133

25.1.19 Switching Devices and Components........................................................................... 133
25.1.20 Busbars ....................................................................................................................... 133
25.1.21 Gland Plates ................................................................................................................ 134
25.1.22 Cableways and Terminations ...................................................................................... 134
25.1.23 Panel Earthing ............................................................................................................. 134
25.1.24 Small Wiring and Terminal Blocks .............................................................................. 135
25.1.24.1 Types ............................................................................................................... 135
25.1.24.2 Terminations .................................................................................................... 136
25.1.24.3 Manner of Installation ....................................................................................... 137
25.1.24.4 Ferruling and Marking ...................................................................................... 137
25.1.25 Cable Connections ...................................................................................................... 137
25.1.26 Protective Devices....................................................................................................... 137
25.1.27 Interlocking .................................................................................................................. 137
25.1.28 Protection Relays ........................................................................................................ 138
25.1.29 Markings and Identifications ........................................................................................ 138
25.2 Accessories ....................................................................................................................... 138
25.3 Source Tests ...................................................................................................................... 138
26. MOTOR PROTECTION RELAYS (SECTION 16481)............................................. 141
26.1 General ............................................................................................................................... 141
26.2 Electronic Motor Protection Relay (Empr) ...................................................................... 141
PAGE X
26.2.1 General ........................................................................................................................ 141

26.2.2 Protection Features ..................................................................................................... 141
26.2.3 Measurements............................................................................................................. 142
26.2.4 Programmable Ranges ............................................................................................... 142
26.3 Thermal Overload Relay ................................................................................................... 143
26.4 Thermistor Relay ............................................................................................................... 143
26.5 Moisture and Mechanical Seal Leakage Protection Relay ............................................ 144
26.6 Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB) ........................................................................... 145
26.7 Source Tests ...................................................................................................................... 145
27. MCC (SECTION 16482) ......................................................................................... 146
op V1
27.1 General ............................................................................................................................... 146
27.2 Incomer Sections .............................................................................................................. 146
27.3 ATS And MTS Panel .......................................................................................................... 147
27.4
C -
Metering Control Section for Incomers .......................................................................... 147
y
27.5
C
Generator Hook-Up ........................................................................................................... 147
27.6 KWH Meter Section ........................................................................................................... 147
C
27.7 Busbar Chamber ............................................................................................................... 148
27.8 Outgoing Sections ............................................................................................................ 148
Q
27.9 Small Power and Lighting Distribution Section ............................................................. 148

27.10 Common Control Section ............................................................................................. 148
27.11 Telemetry Section ......................................................................................................... 149
27.12 Drawings and Documentation ..................................................................................... 150
28. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (SECTION 16483) ............................................ 151
28.2 Configuration, Control and Protection............................................................................ 152
28.3 Operating Characteristics ................................................................................................ 154
28.4 Source Tests ...................................................................................................................... 155
28.5 Field Tests.......................................................................................................................... 155
29. LUMINAIRES (SECTION 16510) ........................................................................... 157
29.1 General ............................................................................................................................... 157
29.2 Description ......................................................................................................................... 157
29.3 Emergency Lighting Units ................................................................................................ 158
29.4 Exit Signs ........................................................................................................................... 158
29.5 Luminous Ceilings ............................................................................................................ 159
29.6 Site Lighting ....................................................................................................................... 159
29.7 Fluorescent Ballasts ......................................................................................................... 160
29.8 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Ballasts ......................................................................... 160
29.9 Obstruction Lights ............................................................................................................ 160
PAGE XI
29.10 Helipad Lighting ............................................................................................................ 160

29.11 Lighting Poles................................................................................................................ 160
29.12 Accessories ................................................................................................................... 161
29.13 Illumination Level .......................................................................................................... 161
29.14 Installation ..................................................................................................................... 161
29.15 Field Tests...................................................................................................................... 163
30. UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) (SECTION 16611) ........................ 164
30.2 Main Features .................................................................................................................... 164
30.3 Main Protections ............................................................................................................... 164
op V1
30.4 Construction ...................................................................................................................... 165
30.5 Monitoring .......................................................................................................................... 165
30.6 Measurements ................................................................................................................... 165
30.7
C -
Source Quality Control and Tests ................................................................................... 166
y
31.
C
BATTERY AND BATTERY CHARGER (SECTION 16612) ................................... 167
31.1 General ............................................................................................................................... 167
C
31.2 Batteries ............................................................................................................................. 167
31.3 Battery Chargers ............................................................................................................... 168
Q
31.4 Source Quality Control and Tests ................................................................................... 169

32. DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM (SECTION 16620) ............................... 170
32.2 Engine ................................................................................................................................ 171
32.2.1 General ........................................................................................................................ 171
32.2.2 Fuel ............................................................................................................................. 171
32.2.3 Lubrication ................................................................................................................... 171
32.2.4 Cooling ........................................................................................................................ 171
32.2.5 Governor ..................................................................................................................... 171
32.2.6 Instrumentation............................................................................................................ 172
32.2.7 Base plate ................................................................................................................... 172
32.2.8 Barring Gear ................................................................................................................ 172
32.2.9 Protection Devices ...................................................................................................... 172
32.2.10 Drip Trays .................................................................................................................... 172
32.2.11 Starting ........................................................................................................................ 172
32.2.12 Engine Silencing.......................................................................................................... 173
32.2.13 Attenuation Louvres .................................................................................................... 173
32.2.14 Room Mounted Plant – Connections to Builders Work ............................................... 174
32.3 Fuel Storage Systems ....................................................................................................... 174
32.3.1 Bulk Storage Tank ....................................................................................................... 174
PAGE XII
32.3.2 Daily Service Tank ...................................................................................................... 174

32.4 Alternator ........................................................................................................................... 175
32.4.1 Ratings ........................................................................................................................ 175
32.4.2 Duty ............................................................................................................................. 175
32.4.3 Design ......................................................................................................................... 175
32.4.4 Stators ......................................................................................................................... 175
32.4.5 Rotors .......................................................................................................................... 176
32.4.6 Excitation ..................................................................................................................... 176
32.4.7 Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR) .......................................................................... 176
32.4.8 Earthing ....................................................................................................................... 177
op V1
32.5 Control Panel(S) ................................................................................................................ 177
32.5.1 General ........................................................................................................................ 177
32.5.2 Automatic Mains Failure Control ................................................................................. 177
32.5.3
C -
Control Wiring.............................................................................................................. 178
y
32.5.4
C
Protection Devices ...................................................................................................... 178
32.5.5 Instrumentation............................................................................................................ 178
C
32.5.6 Annunciator System .................................................................................................... 178
32.6 Earthing .............................................................................................................................. 179
Q
32.6.1 General ........................................................................................................................ 179

32.6.2 Parallel Operation........................................................................................................ 179
32.7 Electromagnetic Compatibility ........................................................................................ 180
32.8 Control Philosophy ........................................................................................................... 180
32.8.1 Engine Starting ............................................................................................................ 180
32.8.2 Engine Stopping .......................................................................................................... 180
32.8.3 Shutdown Modes......................................................................................................... 180
32.8.4 Emergency Stop .......................................................................................................... 181
32.9 Multi-Generator Operation ............................................................................................... 181
33. LIGHTNING AND SURGE PROTECTION SYSTEM (SECTION 16670) ................ 182
33.2 Design and Construction Features ................................................................................. 182
33.3 Monitoring .......................................................................................................................... 182
34. POWER MONITORING (SECTION 16681) ............................................................ 184
34.1 General ............................................................................................................................... 184
34.2 Features ............................................................................................................................. 184
34.3 Measurements ................................................................................................................... 184
35. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (SECTION 16721) ............................................................ 186
35.2 Design Basis ...................................................................................................................... 186
PAGE XIII
35.3 Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection Control Panel ............................................................ 187
35.4 Initiating Devices ............................................................................................................... 188
35.5 Signalling Appliances ....................................................................................................... 189
35.6 Auxiliary Appliances ......................................................................................................... 189
35.7 Fire Alarm Wire and Cable ............................................................................................... 189
35.8 Fire Alarm Wire and Cable Colour Code ......................................................................... 189
35.9 Installation ......................................................................................................................... 189
35.10 Field Tests...................................................................................................................... 190
36. SECURITY ACCESS SYSTEMS (SECTION 16727) .............................................. 191
op V1
36.2 Access Control System .................................................................................................... 191
36.3 Video Surveillance System .............................................................................................. 191
36.4 Security Access Control Panel ........................................................................................ 191
36.5
C -
Accessories ....................................................................................................................... 192
y
36.6
C
Installation ......................................................................................................................... 192
36.7 Field Tests.......................................................................................................................... 192
C
37. CLOCK SYSTEMS (SECTION 16731) ................................................................... 193
Q
37.2 Master Clock Unit .............................................................................................................. 193

37.3 Analogue Indicating Clocks ............................................................................................. 193
37.4 Digital Indicating Clocks .................................................................................................. 194
37.5 Indoor Bells........................................................................................................................ 194
37.6 Outdoor Bells ..................................................................................................................... 195
37.7 Horns .................................................................................................................................. 195
37.8 Buzzers ............................................................................................................................... 195
37.9 Installation ......................................................................................................................... 195
37.10 Field Tests...................................................................................................................... 195
38. TELEPHONE SERVICE, PATHWAYS AND WIRING (SECTION 16741) .............. 196
38.2 Pathways ............................................................................................................................ 196
38.3 Telephone Termination Backboards ............................................................................... 197
38.4 Telephone Termination Cabinets .................................................................................... 197
38.5 Telephone Wire and Cable ............................................................................................... 197
38.6 Installation ......................................................................................................................... 197
39. INTERCOM SYSTEMS (SECTION 16760) ............................................................ 199
39.2 System Description ........................................................................................................... 199
39.3 Equipment Characteristics ............................................................................................... 200
PAGE XIV
39.4 Direct Connected, Keyed Master Intercom Station ....................................................... 200

39.5 Central Control Master Intercom Station ........................................................................ 201
39.6 Intercom Control Unit ....................................................................................................... 201
39.7 Speaker / Microphone Intercom Units ............................................................................ 202
39.8 Installation ......................................................................................................................... 203
39.9 Field Tests.......................................................................................................................... 203
40. CONTROL PROTECTION AND MEASUREMENT (SECTION 16902) ............... 204
40.1 General ............................................................................................................................... 204
40.2 Relays ................................................................................................................................. 204
40.3 Timers ................................................................................................................................. 205
op V1
40.4 Hour Run Meter ................................................................................................................. 205
40.5 Control Power Transformer ............................................................................................. 206
40.6 Instruments ........................................................................................................................ 206
40.7
C -
Current Transformers (CTS) ............................................................................................ 207
y
40.8
C
Voltage Transformers ....................................................................................................... 207
40.9 Protective Devices ............................................................................................................ 208
C
40.10 Earth Leakage Relay (ELR) .......................................................................................... 208
41. PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS (SECTION 16903) ...................................... 209
Q

41.1.1 Scope .......................................................................................................................... 209
41.1.2 Manufacturer’s Standards ........................................................................................... 209
41.1.3 Design And Manufacture ............................................................................................. 209
41.1.4 Training ....................................................................................................................... 209
41.2 Reference Standards ........................................................................................................ 209
41.3 Environmental Conditions ............................................................................................... 210
41.4 PLC Hardware .................................................................................................................... 210
41.4.1 General ........................................................................................................................ 210
41.4.2 Parts Interchange ........................................................................................................ 211
41.4.3 Power Supply .............................................................................................................. 211
41.4.4 Central Processing Unit (CPU) ................................................................................... 211
41.4.5 Serial Communication Port ......................................................................................... 212
41.4.6 Real Time Clock .......................................................................................................... 212
41.4.7 Visual Diagnostics ....................................................................................................... 212
41.4.8 Input Modules .............................................................................................................. 213
41.4.9 Output Modules ........................................................................................................... 213
41.4.10 PLC System Failure .................................................................................................... 214
41.5 PLC Software ..................................................................................................................... 215
41.5.1 General ........................................................................................................................ 215
PAGE XV
41.5.2 Handheld Programmer ................................................................................................ 215

41.5.3 Windows-Compatible Software ................................................................................... 216
41.5.4 Instruction Set ............................................................................................................. 216
41.5.5 System Security .......................................................................................................... 217
41.6 Display Unit ........................................................................................................................ 217
41.7 PLC System Documentation ............................................................................................ 218
41.8 Factory Acceptance Tests ................................................................................................ 218
41.9 Pre-Installation Tests ........................................................................................................ 219
41.10 Installation ......................................................................................................................... 219
41.11 Field Tests ......................................................................................................................... 220
op V1
42. REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT (SECTION 16904)...................................................... 221
42.1 General ............................................................................................................................... 221
42.2 RTU Hardware.................................................................................................................... 221
42.3
C -
RTU Software ..................................................................................................................... 221
y
42.4
C
Digital Input ........................................................................................................................ 222
42.5 Digital Output..................................................................................................................... 222
C
42.6 Analogue Input .................................................................................................................. 222
42.7 Analogue Output ............................................................................................................... 222
Q
42.8 Future Expansion .............................................................................................................. 222

42.9 Data Recording and Storage ............................................................................................ 223
42.10 Alarm and Events.............................................................................................................. 223
PAGE XVI
LIST OF TABLE
Table ‎4-1: MCR Ratings .......................................................................................................................................................... 16
Table 5-1: Transformer Load & No Load Losses ..................................................................................................................... 33
Table 7-1: Field Tests on Cable ............................................................................................................................................... 43
Table22-1: Feeder Pillar Rating ............................................................................................................................................. 102
Table 29-1: Illumination Levels .............................................................................................................................................. 161
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE XVII
1. CIRCUIT BREAKERS (SECTION 16030)

1.1 General
A) The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of Section 15001: General M&E
Requirements.
B) Each low voltage Circuit Breaker (CB) shall be suitable for controlling loads as
indicated and shall confirm to IEC 60947-2 Utilisation Category B or other
approved equivalent standard for 415V 3-phase 50Hz 4-wire operation.
C) All low voltage circuit breakers shall be housed in MCCs/Control
Boards/Cubicles, which comply with the requirements of Section 16480: Factory
op V1
Built Assembly (FBA).
D) Unless specified otherwise, each incoming CB shall be sized as follows:
i. 800A and above shall be a 3- or 4-pole (as applicable) drawout

C -
electrically operated motor-driven Air Circuit Breaker (ACB).
y
ii.
C
Above 160A but below 800A shall be a 3- or 4-pole (as applicable)
drawout, electrically operated motor-driven Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
(MCCB).
C
iii. Up to and including 160A shall be a 3- or 4-pole (as applicable) Plug-in
type manually-operated Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB).
Q
iv. MCCB rated up to and including 125A 3-pole with Neutral link when used
as a means of kWh metering cut-out for ADDC shall be manually-operated
fixed type.
E) Unless specified otherwise, each outgoing CB shall be sized as follows:

i. Above 800A shall be a 3-pole drawout electrically-operated motor- driven
ACB.
ii. Above 250A, but less than or equal to 800A, shall be a 3-pole drawout,
manually-operated MCCB.
iii. Up to and including 250A shall be a 3-pole Plug-in type manually- operated
MCCB.
F) 3-pole circuit breakers shall be provided with a separate Neutral link, where
necessary.
G) All low voltage ACB/MCCBs shall be rated for continuous duty at 415V 3-phase
50Hz with minimum short circuit capacity 50KA for 1 second.
1.2 Low Voltage ACB

A) ACB’s shall be provided with electrical and mechanical ON/OFF/TRIP
indications.
B) Electrically-operated ACB’s shall be provided with a manually-operated handle
for charging the spring mechanism allowing the breaker to operate manually in
the event of a failure of the motor mechanism.
PAGE 1

C) The ACB shall be provided with built-in Over current, Short Circuit and Earth
Fault protection having the following characteristics:
i. Adjustable long time delay current setting between 50–200% with variable
tripping time characteristics.
ii. Adjustable short time delay current setting 200–800% with variable tripping
time characteristics.
iii. Instantaneous tripping for heavier over current applications adjustable from
400–1,600% of the base current.
iv. Adjustable earth fault trip current setting 20–80% with variable tripping time
characteristics.
op V1
D) The ACB shall provide three positions:
i. Service position – for opening and closing main and auxiliary contacts.
ii. Test position – for opening main contacts but closing auxiliary contacts.
C -
iii. Isolated position – for opening all main and auxiliary contacts.
y
C
iv. An indicator shall clearly show these positions and a mechanism to allow
locking of the ACB in any position.
C
E) The ACB shall be provided with interlocks to ensure that:
i. It cannot be plugged in or isolated when it is closed.
Q
ii. It cannot be closed until it is fully plugged in or completely isolated.

iii. It cannot be closed in the ‘Service’ position without completing the auxiliary
circuits between the fixed and moving positions.
iv. Only one incoming supply can be energised at any one time where more
than one supply is available.
v. Mechanical interlocking shall be provided to prevent withdrawing or inserting
of the ACB when it is in ON position. Any attempt to do so shall
automatically trip the ACB.
F) The with draw able part of the ACB shall be effectively connected to Earth
through scraping contacts that shall make before and break after the main and
auxiliary contacts.
G) The moving contacts, comprising of main and arcing contacts, shall be of the
spring loaded self-aligning type. They shall be so arranged that arcing contacts
make before and break after the main contacts.
H) Individual shutters for busbar and circuit spouts shall be provided to
automatically operate as the truck is racked in and out. When closed the
shutters shall effectively prevent any contact with either the busbar or the circuit
connections and shall seal the spouts against the ingress of dust. The shutters
shall to be coloured and painted in bold characters with “BUSBARS (red) or
“CIRCUIT” (yellow) as appropriate in Arabic and English. Provision shall be
made to lock each shutter in the closed position.
I) A purpose-designed, separate earthing device shall be provided to earth either
the cable box or the busbar side of the ACB. Single function earthing shall be
arranged so that it shall only be possible to earth non- current carrying
PAGE 2

conductors.
J) The ACB shall include the following as a minimum:
i. 8NO/8NC auxiliary contacts.
ii. Arc chutes.
iii. Folding extension rail.
iv. Charging handle.
v. Open and Close push buttons.
vi. Trip indicator.
vii. Spring charge motor.
op V1
viii. Spring charge indicator.
ix. Breaker position indicator mechanically and electrically.
x. Microprocessor-based protection and management unit that provides the
following control and monitoring features:
C -
y
• Over current protection.
•
C
Short circuit protection.
• Earth fault protection.
C
• Neutral protection.
• Thermal memory.
Q
• Alarm logging.
• Field selectable Manual or Auto reset.
• Microprocessor malfunction watchdog.
• Programmable input/outputs.
• Load monitoring.
• Operation counter.
• Serial communication by employing Modbus protocol.
xi. Carriage/Lifting Truck if an ACB exceeded 25kg in weight (One carriage

only for each site/project regardless of number of breakers provided).
xii. Shunt trip and under-voltage release.
K) The ACB shall include facility to test the ‘Trip Circuit Healthy’ mechanism.
L) ACB’s shall be designed and constructed such that inspection, maintenance
and replacement of the main fixed and moving contacts shall be easily possible
on site. Manufacturer's detailed instructions shall be incorporated in the
maintenance manuals. ACB’s requiring their complete return to the
manufacturers for service shall not be acceptable.
M) When used with transformer protection relays, the ACB shall be provided with
an inter trip relay to trip the associated upstream HV circuit breaker on
operation of the transformer protection device.
N) The ACB shall trip when the associated upstream HV circuit breaker trips.
PAGE 3

O) For each ACB, test certificates shall be submitted from the Association of Short-
circuit Testing Authorities (A.S.T.A.) or Keuring van Electrotechnische
Materialen, Arnhem (K.E.M.A).
1.3 Low Voltage MCCB

A) An MCCB shall be provided with electrical and mechanical ON/OFF/TRIP
indication when used as an incomer and be certified to at least the same fault
level (Icu) as that of the busbar systems. MCCB’s shall have the following
minimum features:
i. Mechanical indication of the circuit breaker when opened, closed and
tripped.
op V1
ii. Quick break and quick make trip-free switching mechanisms so as not to
withhold the contacts closed against short circuits and abnormal currents.
iii. Facility for padlocking without the use of loose components.
iv. At least one unused volt-free changeover auxiliary contact, wired down to
C -
outgoing terminals, for remote indication.
y
v.
C
Adjustable Magnetic and Thermal inverse time delay protective device to
protect against sustained overloads and instantaneous tripping under heavy
overloads and short circuits. An additional facility shall be provided to
C
prevent unauthorised adjustment of thermal and magnetic settings.
vi. Shunt trip and/or under voltage release, as applicable.
Q
B) Each MCCB shall be housed in a separate compartment with the operating

handle door interlocked when used as an incomer, feeder or starter, so that
access can only be gained to the compartment with the MCCB in the OFF
position. Padlocking shall be provided in the OFF position only. When the
MCCB is used for control transformers, distribution or ICA compartments, the
handle shall be internally mounted with appropriate shrouding and warning
labels.
C) Each MCCB shall be complete with 2 N/O and 2 N/C spare auxiliary contacts
(10A, 240V rating) in addition to those required for the Contract.
D) Each MCCB used as an incomer or feeder shall have facilities for electrical as
well as mechanical interlock.
E) Each incoming MCCB shall be provided with electrical and mechanical

interlocking scheme to ensure that only one incoming supply can be energised
at any one time where more than one supply is available.
1.4 MCB
A) Each MCB shall be suitable for the type of load it feeds. It shall comply with IEC
60898 and shall include the following minimum features:
i. Magnetic and thermal trip elements.

ii. Trip-free mechanisms.
PAGE 4

B) The minimum short circuit rating of the MCB shall be 10KA, unless shown
otherwise on the relevant single line diagrams.
1.5 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers (ELCB Or RCCB)

A) Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers (ELCB’s) shall have tripping characteristics
appropriate to the application and provide discrimination with other series
devices. ELCB/RCCB shall comply with IEC 61008-1.
B) Current-operated ELCB’s shall provide accidental protection by interrupting
dangerous contact with the voltage that may be present in the faulty electrical
equipment and/or wiring as a result of frame faults, weaker insulation resistance
or misuse.
op V1
C) The ELCB shall also provide a high degree of protection against earth leakage,
fires and electric shock.
D) The ELCB protecting socket outlet shall have a rated residual operating current
of 30mA with an operating time not exceeding 40msec. All other areas
protected by ELCB shall have operating current as indicated on the relevant
C -
y
drawings. The ELCB shall isolate all live conductors.
C
E) Switching and isolation devices incorporating RCD’s shall be selected to
provide current and time discrimination with upstream and downstream
C
protective devices.
1.6 Residual Current Breaker With Over current

Q
Protection (RCBO)
A) Each RCBO shall comply with IEC 61009.
B) RCBO units shall be provided for final circuits supplying socket outlets, outdoor
lighting, heating circuits and other small loads.
C) The units shall have trip sensitivity of 30mA or as indicated on the relevant
drawings.
1.7 Source Tests

A) Provide testing and analysis covered under Section 15001: General M&E
Requirements.
B) All circuit breakers shall be subject to the following witness tests to BS EN

60947 or other approved equivalent standard for voltages up to and including
1,000 Volts.
i. Routine tests including HV pressure test, millivolt drop tests and mechanical
tests.
ii. Operation of dc closing coil and satisfactory closing of the circuit breaker
with the voltage on the coil between 85% and 110% of its rated voltage.
iii. Satisfactory shunt opening and shunt closing of the circuit breaker with the
trip coil energised between 50% and 110% of its rated voltage.
iv. Interchange ability of identically equipped with drawable circuit breakers and
PAGE 5

checking of all mechanical and electrical interlocks.

v. Current injection tests as described under Section 16020: Factory Built
Assembly (FBA).
vi. Type Test Certificates giving records of performance for identical circuit
breakers shall be provided.
END OF SECTION
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 6

2. DISCONNECT SWITCHES (SECTION 16040)

2.1 Fuse Switches
A) The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of Section 15001: General M&E
Requirements.
B) Fuse switches, where specified, shall comprise flush/surface mounted heavy-
duty composite air break switches and fuse units complying with BS EN 60947-3
and fitted with fuses to BS EN 60269 and shall be rated and equipped as
detailed. Composite units shall be contained within an enclosure of metal and
shall be fitted with an earthing terminal or equivalent to enable the enclosures to
op V1
be earthed irrespective of any means of connection such as is provided for
attaching armouring or other metallic covering of the cable supplying the
composite unit.
C) Fuse switch shall be capable of making, carrying and breaking current under
C -
normal circuit condition, which may include specified operating overload
y
conditions and also carrying for specified time currents under specified circuit
C
conditions such as those of short circuit.
D) The switch breaking capacity shall be related to AC 23 utilization category or
C
other approved equivalent standard for 415V 3-phase 50Hz 4-wire operation for
use on specified fault level and for service and site climatic conditions as
described in Section 16480: Factory Built Assembly (FBA).
Q
E) BS EN 60269 compliant HRC fuses shall be provided as a mean of over

current/overload protective device to protect the switch. The maximum rated
current of the fuse with regard to the prospective short circuit current in the actual
circuit shall be mentioned.
F) The fuse shall be connected after the switch so that a short circuit will not occur
in the fuse-combination, thus for an expected fault to take place after the
combination fuse switch unit
G) In the event of a fault this combination shall provide protection, permitting
switching without, for example contact welding and preventing separation of main
contacts in case of fault occurring during running.
H) The combination fuse switch unit shall be housed in an enclosure so constructed
that the cover cannot be opened until the switch is fully opened and the
construction shall be such that when the cover is opened a competent examiner
can override the interlock and operate the switch. After such operation the cover
shall be prevented from closing with the switch position indicator in a false
position.
I) Switches shall be provided with mechanical ON/OFF indicators and operating
handles.
J) Means shall be provided for locking the switch in the OFF position only.
K) The combination fuse switch unit shall be fitted with 2NO + 2 NC auxiliary
contacts wired to the terminals.
PAGE 7

2.2 Isolator
A) The switch when used alone as explained above as an isolator shall confirm to
the utilization category AC23 and shall fully comply with the requirement
specified for isolating functions specially the isolating distance in accordance with
the applicable standard.
B) An isolator shall be capable of opening and closing the circuit ON-LOAD with full
voltage applied across the terminals.
C) The isolator shall be capable of carrying currents under normal circuit conditions
and carrying for specified time currents under abnormal conditions such as those
of short-circuit.
D) All other features of the isolator shall be same as specified above for combination
op V1
fuse switch unit.
2.3 Fuses
A) These shall be selected according to the application and be suitable for the type
C -
of load they feed, for example motor starting, cable protection, protection for the
y
C
semiconductor devices, control transformer protection etc.
B) Fuses shall be sized according to the condition under which they will operate
C
such as normal, small sustained overload, heavy overload etc. in order to
consider the operating characteristics accordingly.
C) The fuse shall either include a suitable fuse carrier or it shall be capable of
Q
isolation. If the fuse carrier is included it shall be such that when it is being
withdrawn normally or when it is completely withdrawn the operator is completely
protected from accidental contact with any live metal of its fuse link, fuse contacts
and fixed contacts.
D) Fuse/links shall be fixed inside cubicles with sufficient spacing to facilitate easy
fuse/link withdrawal.
E) If the fuse is capable of isolation it shall be so interlocked with the switch that
isolation is complete before the fuse enclosure can be opened further. The switch
shall be prevented from closing while the fuse-cover is open.
F) All fuses shall be of HBC/HRC cartridge type to BS 88/BS EN 60269.
G) Fuse holders and fittings shall be made of moulded plastic insulating material of
an approved make. Ceramic materials will not be accepted. Fuse fittings shall be
fully shrouded and it shall be possible to change the fuses without danger of
contact with live metal.
H) Fuse fittings shall have basic sizes of 16, 32, 63, 100 and 200A and the fuse
holders shall be able to accept fuse links of that rating on any BS rating down to
the next basic size.
I) A mechanical indication device shall be built into the fuse to indicate
operation/fail status.
2.4 Changeover Switch

A) A changeover switch, where specified, shall be provided in accordance with BS
EN 60947-3. It shall be manually operated multipole type suitable to provide
PAGE 8

changeover and safety isolation between two low voltage power supplies rated
415V 3-phase 4-wire 50Hz under load conditions.
B) The switch breaking capacity shall be related to AC 23 utilization category or
other approved equivalent standard for 415V 3-phase 4-wire 50Hz operation for
C) The changeover switch shall be periodically maintained to ensure proper
operation and system reliability.
2.5 Transfer Switch ATS/MTS/Bypass

A) A transfer switch, where specified, shall be provided in accordance with BS EN
op V1
60947-6.
B) The transfer switch shall be of the withdraw able type allowing easy removal of
the switch for maintenance and without disconnecting the power cables.
C) ATS/MTS functions shall be mechanically and electrically interlocked to ensure
C -
proper sequence of operation.
y
C
D) Bypass switch contacts to close only during the bypass isolation operation.
Bypass of the load to either normal or emergency power source with complete
isolation of the ATS shall be possible regardless of the status of the ATS.
C
E) The switch breaking capacity shall be related to AC 23 utilization category or
other approved equivalent standard for 415V 3-phase 4-wire 50Hz operation for
Q
F) The ATS, MTS and Bypass Isolation switch shall be provided from a single
manufacturer.
G) A visual indication shall be provided to indicate ATS/MTS/Bypass position.
H) The ATS shall incorporate adjustable 3 Phase under- and over-voltage and
frequency sensing on normal and emergency source.
I) Whenever there is a voltage dip of 80% or below in any phase of the normal
source or frequency displacement of 2Hz from the nominal for a maximum period
of 10 seconds (field adjustable) a contact shall close to initiate starting of the
engine generator.
J) Upon emergency source reaching required power supply of 415V 3-Phase 50Hz
±5%, the load shall be transferred to the emergency source after a
programmable set time delay.
K) When the normal source has been restored to 90% or more of the rated voltage
on all phases, the load shall be retransferred to the normal source after a
programmable set time delay.
L) Upon restoration of the normal source to full voltage and frequency, the
generator will continue to run unloaded for about 5 to 10 minutes programmable
and then shutdown. The generator shall now be ready for next operation
automatically in case of failure of a normal source.
M) It may be possible that the generator fails during running on load; retransfer
under such condition to normal source shall be made instantaneously upon
restoration of proper voltage and frequency.
PAGE 9

N) The transfer function shall be achieved through purpose designed

microprocessor based controller equipped with LCD digital display and a
keypad/touch pad for parametering.
O) Auxiliary contacts wired to terminal shall be provided to indicate normal and
emergency source availability.
P) A periodic NO-LOAD test on Transfer switches shall be conducted and logged.
2.6 Source Tests

A) Provide testing and analysis covered under Section 15001: General M&E
Requirements.
B) All Switches shall be subject to the following witness tests to BS EN 60947 or
op V1
other approved equivalent standard for voltages up to and including 1000 Volts:
i. Routine tests including H.V. pressure test, millivolt drop tests and
mechanical tests.
ii. Functional tests
iii.
C -
Current injection tests as described under Section 16480 FBA
y
iv. Type Test Certificates giving records of performance for identical circuit
C
breakers shall be made available.
C
END OF SECTION
Q
PAGE 10

3. MOTOR STARTERS (SECTION 16050)

3.1 General
A) The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of Section 15001: General
M&E Requirements.
B) Starter components shall form part of a Motor Control Centre (MCC) described
under Section 16480: Factory Built Assembly (FBA) and Section 16482: Motor
Control Centre (MCC) and as such circuit connections, protection devices and
the like shall comply with BS EN 61439-1.
C) Starters and their components shall provide Type 2 Co-ordination to BS EN
op V1
60947-4-1. They shall be so arranged to provide easy access to all
components for maintenance purposes.
D) Starter shall be damp-proof and dust-proof with a minimum Ingress Protection
(IP) rating of IP 54.
C -
y
E) Motor starters shall be rated to carry full load current of its rated duty at its most
C
severe load conditions.
F) All starters shall be selected for Utilisation Category AC3 duty and be capable
C
of at least 15 starts per hour at 100% full load torque.
G) The starting method employed to start the motors shall be as described herein,
Q
unless specified otherwise on relevant contract drawings.

H) Standalone Unit Control Panels, where supplied by a manufacturer of
Packaged Type Plant, shall confirm to the requirements specified herein.
I) All starters shall be provided with phase failure and phase reversal protection.
3.2 Direct on Line Full-Voltage Motor Starter

Up To 4.0 KW Inclusive
‘Direct-on-Line’ (DOL) starters shall be designed to start and accelerate the motor
to normal speed and provide overload protection to the motor and its associated
power circuit by switching off the motor by disconnection of the supply. The
reversing full-voltage DOL starter shall be similarly designed, as required.
3.3 Star/Delta (S/D) Reduced-Voltage Motor Starter

3.3.1 5.5kw – 11.0kw Inclusive
A) Star/Delta starters shall be designed to start and accelerate a 3-phase motor
in such a way that the stator windings are connected in ‘Star’final running.
B) The S/D starter shall provide suitable overload protection by disconnection of
the supply to the motor.
C) The transition from Star to Delta must occur when the motor is approaching full
speed in Star. The transition time between the Star and Delta contactors shall
be adjustable to ensure that the Star contactor is opened before the Delta
contactor is closed.
PAGE 11

D) The motor shall have 6 terminals in the junction box of the motor with a
shorting strip to facilitate Star/Delta starting.
E) Resisting torque during starting shall be less than 1/3rd of the maximum rated
motor torque.
F) Closed-transition type S/D starters shall include wire-wound porcelain core
resistor banks of sufficient thermal rating to allow three consecutive starts of
30 seconds starting period followed by a 15 minutes rest and another 30
seconds starting period. Resistance values shall be chosen to give high
starting current with low transients current. Starter compartments incorporating
resistor banks shall be ventilated as necessary.
3.4 Soft Starters
op V1
3.4.1 15.0kw and above
A) A solid state, microprocessor-based, reduced-voltage soft starter shall consist
of six silicon-controlled full-wave rectifiers, two rectifiers per phase connected
C -
back-to-back in reverse configuration.
y
C
B) Soft starts shall be employed to reduce the voltage across the motor terminals
during the starting process resulting in reduced torque from the motor. The
C
voltages across the motor to be increased and decreased progressively in
such a way that facilitate a step less start and stop of a motor.
C) The soft start shall be provided with one isolation contactor to provide positive
Q
isolation from the Mains and one bypass contactor to bypass the soft start
power section when the motor is up to speed.
D) The starter shall be equipped with metal oxide varistor-type surge suppressors
across the SCR to protect against voltage transients and resistor/capacitor
snubber network to protect against false firing of the SCR.
E) A temperature sensor shall be embedded to the heat sink of each SCR to
protect the soft start from over-temperature condition.
F) Any failure in the soft starter shall be indicated on the cubicle door through
LCD display or LED indicator without requiring to open the door.
G) The soft start shall be supplied factory-configured ready to commission,
without requiring any parameter adjustment or reconfiguration at site.
H) The soft start shall have the following protective feature as minimum:
i. Over-temperature.
ii. Overload.
iii. Jam.
iv. Stall.
v. Phase loss.
vi. Phase reversal.
vii. Shorted SCR.
I) The softstart shall have the following control features as a minimum:
PAGE 12

i. Kick Start 0-85% locked rotor torque – 0 to 2s.

ii. Ramp Start 0-85% locked rotor torque – 1 to 60s.
iii. Current-Limit Start 0-85% locked rotor current – 1 to 60s.
iv. Soft Stop – 0 to 60s.
J) The soft start shall be provided with high-speed fuses as recommended.
K) Each starter shall be housed in a separate compartment equipped with the
following:
Refer also to the relevant Specification for complete details of individual
components.
i. 1No. Triple-pole MCCB externally-operated through a door-mounted
op V1
handle interlocked with the cubicle door, with built-in shunt trip coil-
operated through a field-mounted emergency push button and panel-
mounted Earth Leakage Sensor (ELS).
ii. 1No. Thermal Overload Relay or Digital Electronics Motor Protection
C -
Relay (EMPR) to provide protection of motors against under voltage, over
y
C
voltage, undercurrent, over current, phase sequence, phase imbalance,
phase loss, earth leakage etc.
iii. 1No. Set of AC3 duty contactors, as required according to the starter type,
C
size and configuration.
iv. 1No. Set of auxiliary relays and timers required to provide the necessary
Q
indication, control logic sequence and functional requirements.

v. 1No. 240/110V 50Hz double-wound single-phase centre-tap transformer
with earth screen of suitable capacity to supply all control circuit and pilot
devices requirements.
vi. 1No. anti-condensation heater (off when starter contactor is closed). The
heater shall be separately fused and controlled by a hygro stathaving
setting range (50-100%) that operates when the preset value of %RH
exceeds the dew point.
vii. 1No. Thermistor relay for starters controlling motors 30kW and above or
as recommended by the plant/motor manufacturer or where specified
separately.
viii. 1No. Moisture/Mechanical seal leakage protections relay as
recommended by the plant manufacturer or where specified separately.
ix. 1No. Door-operated TEST/NORMAL push button located inside the
starter compartment wired through auxiliary contact of the MCCB for the
purpose of conducting live functional tests to the control circuit whilst the
main MCCB is isolated. (Delete this function where inappropriate, subject
to the approval of the Engineer).
x. 1No. Set of main motor terminals and auxiliary terminals as required for
remote controls and indications wherever applicable.
xi. 1No. Set of volt-free terminals (digital and analogue) as required for the
Telemetry RTU located in a separate MCC section sized sufficient to
accommodate free-issue RTU together with associated hardware as per
PAGE 13

the detail furnished in the RTU section described under section

Instrumentation’s, Controls and Automation (ICA).
xii. Intrinsically-safe barriers protection shall be provided for signals wired to
terminals for field-mounted equipment located in potentially-explosive
atmospheres containing gasses such as H2S and Methane.
xiii. The following equipment shall be mounted on the door of each starter
cubicle as a minimum, unless specified elsewhere:
• 1No. Ammeter fitted with suppressed scale and RED pointer to read
and monitor motor running and starting current.
• 1No. Green pilot lamp to indicate "SUPPLY ON".
• 1No. Red pilot lamp to indicate "MOTOR RUNNING”.
op V1
• 1No. Amber pilot lamp to indicate "MOTOR FAILED”.
• 1 No. "HAND/OFF/AUTO" selector switch.
• 1 set "START/STOP" push buttons.
• C -
y
1No. Lamp test push button.
•
C
1No. externally-operated overload reset push button, if required.
• 1No. 6-digit hours run meter to count total operating time of the
C
motor. It shall be of the non-reset table type.
• 1No. Digital counter for counting accumulated number of starts. It
Q
shall be of the non-resettable type.

• A separate indication lamp to indicate each motor fault condition.
• A common fault indication shall be provided for all fault conditions.
The indication lamp shall be provided on the door of dedicated
common control compartment. Additionally, a set of wired terminals
shall be provided to hook-up flashing light on the building roof.
• Other pilot devices for control and indications as described under
Section 16149: Pilot Devices shall be provided accordingly.
• Components not described herein but necessary to meet the
requirement of the User Requirement Specification (URS) shall be
included.
3.5 Contactors
A) Contactors shall confirm to standard BS EN 60947-4-1 Utilisation Category
AC-3, type tested and ASTA-certified to achieve Type 2 Co-ordination.
B) All power and control wires terminated on the contactor terminals shall be
easily accessible from the front.
C) Contactor design shall allow for inspection of the main contacts and operating
mechanism for servicing and maintenance without disconnecting the power
cables.
D) Terminals used for power and control circuit wiring must provide IP2X
protection as minimum with the starter compartment door opened.
E) Contactor shall be 3- or 4-pole according to the application requirements.
PAGE 14

F) When selecting contactors for Power Factor Correction Capacitors and

Lighting duty, they must confirm and tested to the duty in accordance with the
relevant standard.
END OF SECTION
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 15

4. ELECTRICAL MOTORS (SECTION 16070)

4.1 General
A) Motors shall comply with the provisions of Section 15001: General M&E
Requirements.
B) Motors shall comply with the appropriate part of BS 4999 and BS 5000 or
equivalents. Motors for use in all categories of potentially explosive
atmospheres, as defined in BS EN 60079 (IEC 60079) or equivalent, shall
have the appropriate ATEX or other similar Testing Organisation Certification.
Copies of the certificates shall be submitted.
op V1
C) Unless otherwise required by the Contract, motors shall be suitable for use on
a 415V (± 6%) 3 phase, 50Hz (± 3%), or where specified 240V, 1-phase, 50Hz
electricity supply system.
D) Motors shall be of low loss, energy efficient, high efficiency squirrel cage
C -
induction type.
y
C
E) Vibration levels of the installed motor, in the coupled state, shall not exceed
the vibration levels laid down in the manufacturer’s standard documentation -
Vrms.
C
F) All motors shall be capable of starting 15 times per hour. The motor current
shall not exceed 8 times full load current.
Q
G) Where motors are driving a pump fitted with a flywheel, then mechanical
protection shall be provided through a sheer pin arrangement built into the
flywheel.
H) The Maximum Continuous Rating (MCR) of each motor is defined in Table
4-1. This reserve power requirement shall be added to the calculated power
prior to any other adjustment, e.g. high ambient temperatures at Site.
Table 4-1: MCR Ratings
Application Up to 75kW drive Above 75kW drive
An over-rating of 15% higher than the maximum power at any point on the Q-H curve shall be
All pump motors considered for all fixed speed and electrical variable speed pumps to cater for fitting of the largest
impeller for the selected pump at the rated duty point, for deterioration in pump efficiency, etc.
(excluding
positive
displacement An over rating of 15% higher than the maximum power rating at any point or the Q-H curve shall be
type) considered for all hydraulic variable speed driven pumps to cater for the requirements mentioned in
(I) above. This service factor shall be in addition to the losses through the hydraulic coupling.
Positive
displacement
25% above max. duty requirements
pumps and
compressors
PAGE 16

4.2 Duty
A) Motors shall be selected to satisfy the performance requirements of the
particular application and with any relevant ADWEA starting current
restrictions.
B) Motors shall be capable of continuous operation under all duty conditions at:
i. Maximum brake power absorbed by the driven load not less than that
stated in Table 4-1 above.
ii. Maximum rated torque without adverse effect or overheating.
C) Where flywheels are fitted to the main pump set, the motors shall be capable
of starting and driving the pumps under these conditions.
op V1
D) Motor characteristics shall allow starting of the motor by employing variable
frequency drive and/or electronic soft starters, ensuring compatibility at all
points in the operating range and derated accordingly with particular attention
being given to the following:
i. C -
Heating carried by harmonics in the non-sinusoidal waveform produced
y
C
by the inverter or soft starter.
ii. Reduced cooling at low motor speeds due to the reduced effectiveness of
C
the cooling fan.
E) Rating plate information, as detailed in BS 4999 Part 101 or equivalent, shall
be embossed on a metallic, corrosion-resistant rating plate fixed to the motor
Q
casing.
F) The motor and all components shall be rated and braced to withstand the
maximum prospective fault level at the point of installation as detailed by the
Contract.
G) Unless required by the Contract, motors shall have a maximum speed
corresponding to 4-pole construction at 50Hz. Where super synchronous
operation is required, full details of the motor capability at maximum speed
shall be advised.
4.3 Motor Enclosures

A) Motor enclosure shall be selected from BS EN 60034-5 as follows:
i. For submersible applications, the enclosure shall be IP68 and be capable
of being continuously submersed to a depth of at least 2 metres greater
than the maximum immersion depth of the application. Where such
motors are to be installed in an area designated as potentially explosive it
shall have the appropriate ATEX/CENELEC or other similar Testing
Organisation Certification. Copies of the Certificates shall be submitted.
ii. For indoor applications the enclosure shall be to IP54 of BS EN 60034-5.
Immersible pumps that are to be installed in dry wells shall be to IP68 of
BS EN 60034-5.
iii. For outdoor application the enclosure shall be to IPW55 of BS EN 60034-
5. A certificate shall be issued by the manufacturer certifying the motor
suitability for the outdoor application, in the service conditions as
described under the general section of this specification.
iv. For high voltage motors the enclosure shall be protected to IP55 of BS
PAGE 17

4999 Part 105.

B) Unless stated otherwise, stator frames shall be of cast iron, foot and flange
mounted as required by the Contract. Aluminium frames are permitted for
2.2kW motors and smaller only. Ductile stainless steel frames shall be used,
when specified in the particular specification, for aggressive sewage
conditions, and shall be of grade 316L minimum.
i. Lifting facilities shall be provided on all motors.
ii. Submersible motors shall be protected by a tandem mechanical seal
arrangement. Lip seals are not permitted. The Contractor shall provide
complete data on the seal materials, seats, faces etc., and ensure
suitability for the medium being sealed, i.e. oil chamber, oil and
supernatant.
op V1
iii. On pumps greater than 22kW, the mechanical seal performance shall be
by monitoring equipment to detect the following:
 Moisture within the oil chamber. 

C -
Moisture/water or oil within the motor casing. 
y

C
Temperature rise of the hydraulic driven end bearing. 
 Loss of oil from the oil chamber. 
C
4.4 Motor Cooling
Q
A) Non-submersible motors shall be air cooled to IC 41 of BS EN 60034-6.

B) Cooling of submersible motors shall be provided by one of the following
methods with the Contractor supplying and installing all of the necessary
equipment:
i. By the casing – provided that the application meets the manufacturer’s
requirements for heat dissipation.
ii. Water jacket utilising a separate water system as the cooling medium.
This cooling method is not permitted for sludge pumps.
iii. Water jacket utilising filtered effluent as the cooling medium. An
application of this type requires DMAT approval.
C) Immersible motors may be fan cooled.
4.5 Motor Windings

A) Motor windings shall be copper and treated to render them impervious to
moisture, saline atmospheres, acid/alkaline fumes, oil and grease. They shall
be adequately braced to prevent movement of coils during all conditions of
service and be insulated throughout to Class F of BS EN 60085 or equivalent
with a temperature rise limit of Class B. This provision shall be in addition to
any adjustments necessary for site ambient temperatures.
B) Motors operating voltage and connection type shall be clearly stated on the
motor nameplate.
C) For high voltage motors, the stator windings shall use a modern synthetic resin
insulation system based on mica glass tape continuously wound on the coils to
PAGE 18

give a void-free homogeneous structure. The end windings shall be securely

braced to prevent harmful movement arising from electro-magnetic and
mechanical forces. The rotor bars shall be securely keyed into the rotor. The
rotor shall be shrunk and keyed onto the shaft.
4.6 Thermal Protection

A) Class II thermal protection as defined in BS 4999 Part 111 or equivalent shall
be provided on motors rated at 11kW and above and on all motors used with
variable frequency/variable speed drives. A minimum of 3No. PTC
thermistors shall be incorporated in each motor.
B) Refer to Sections 16480: Factory Built Assembly; 16482: Motor Control
Centre and 16050: Starters for the type of motor protection.
op V1
C) On motors rated at 55kW and above, two sets of thermistors shall be
provided, one for alarm and one for trip functions. Additional continuous
temperature monitoring shall be provided for motors rated above 250kW.
D) On submersible pump motors, thermostats and/or thermistors shall be
C -
y
included, but preferably thermistors, as appropriate to the design. Where
C
thermostats or thermistors are used in explosion proof designs, the devices
must be of the same type used to obtain the potentially explosive hazardous
area motor certification.
C
4.7 Anti-Condensation Heaters
Q
All three phase motors, (except for submersible motors, or single phase motors
less than 2.2kW), shall be fitted with anti-condensation heaters of an appropriate
size to maintain the temperature of the windings 5ºC above ambient.
4.8 Terminal and Terminal Boxes

A) Terminal boxes shall be cast iron and shall be designed to accept XLPE or
PVC armoured cable as detailed in the Contract. On non-submersible motors,
terminal boxes shall be mounted on the right hand side when viewed from the
driving end of the motor, unless otherwise required by the Contract.
B) The motor stool base where appropriate shall be drilled at works vertically
below the terminal box gland for the passage of the cables and the edges of
the hole slightly countersunk or the hole bushed.
C) Terminals shall be stud-type, substantially designed, anchored to a carrier
terminal block and insulated from the motor frame. Terminals shall be
identified in accordance with BS 4999 Part 108 or equivalent. A separate
earth stud shall be included on each terminal box. Heater terminals shall be
shrouded.
D) Adequate space and glanding arrangements shall be provided, particularly on
smaller motors requiring glanding and terminating of steel wire armoured
cable for star/delta starting, anti-condensation heating and thermistor winding
protection devices.
E) Where a common terminal box is used for main, heater and thermistor cable
terminations, a permanent warning label shall be fixed to the terminal box
cover. In addition, heater and thermistor cable terminations shall be clearly
PAGE 19

marked to identify their separate functions and operating voltages.

F) Terminal box covers shall be gasketted to provide a degree of protection
equivalent to or better than that of the motor.
G) For Ex'd' flameproof motors, terminal boxes may employ Type 'e' increased
safety protection, utilising indirect cable entry to the flameproof enclosure.
However, this must be of the same type used to obtain the potentially
explosive hazardous area motor certification. 3.3kV motor cable termination
boxes shall be high fault level type, with segregated phases, pressure relief
diaphragm and sealing chamber.
4.9 Submersible Motor Cables
op V1
A) Submersible motors shall be complete with lengths of flexible cable for Power,
Signalling and Protection purposes. Cables shall be suitable for the duty, be
constructed in accordance with BS 7919 (or equal approved) with oil and
weather resistant, non-abrasive chloroprene rubber or equivalent sheathing.
B) Each cable shall be a minimum of 8 metres long or as otherwise required by
C -
y
the Contract, and be rated in accordance with the cable routing details. As a
C
minimum, cables shall be continuously rated to carry the motor full load
current when laid in a classified area to the approval of ADWEA. The cable
shall be 3 cores only and factory fitted according to the connection of the
C
motor winding.
C) Flexible cables for use in potentially explosive atmospheres shall be identical
Q
to those types used to obtain the potentially explosive hazardous area

combined motor/cable certification. Where protection cables are part of an
intrinsically safe circuit the outer sheath shall be coloured blue.
D) Jointing of cables is not acceptable.
4.10 Bearings
A) The motors shall run in ball and/or roller bearings and the weight of the motor
shall be carried by thrust bearings incorporated in the motor body.
B) Maximum life bearings with oil seals shall be fitted to both drive end and non-
drive end bearing housings to prevent ingress of solid particles and liquids.
Bearings shall be in accordance with BS EN ISO 12100.
C) Bearings shall be grease lubricated and be fitted with a means for replenishing
the grease and a relief device for disposal of excess grease. Hydraulic button
head grease nipples in accordance with BS 1486 Part 2 or equivalent shall be
provided and be extended, where necessary, such that they are located at the
top of the frame. Re-greasing points shall be located for ease of access.
D) Bearing temperature monitoring facilities shall be provided on submersible
motors over 100kW and on non-submersible motors over 150kW.
E) Sealed-for-life bearings shall not be used except for small motors.
F) Where required, large machines shall be provided with insulated bearings to
prevent bearing failure due to circulating rotor currents.
PAGE 20

4.11 Noise Levels

Unless otherwise required by the Contract, noise levels (Sound Power Levels
dB(A)) of the motors shall be in accordance with BS EN 60034-9.
4.12 Paint Finish

The intrnal and external paint finish shall comply with Section 09900.
END OF SECTION
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 21

5. TRANSFORMERS (SECTION 16080)

5.1 Distribution Transformers – Dry Type (Cast Resin)
5.1.1 General
A) The scope covers 1,000kVA and 1,500kVA dry-type cast-resin transformers,
complete with all necessary accessories. Larger transformers may be used
with the approval of DMAT.
B) The transformers shall be designed and manufactured, as appropriate, to the
following:
op V1
i. IEC 60076-11 (Dry-type power transformers).
ii. BS 2562 (Specification for cable boxes for transformers and reactors).
iii. BS EN 50541 (Three-phase dry-type distribution transformers 50Hz,
C -
from 100 to 2500kVA with highest voltage for equipment not exceeding
y
36kV – General Requirements)
C
iv. The Latest Abu Dhabi Distribution Company (ADDC) specifications.
C
C) It is mandatory for manufacturers to have valid ISO 9000 series Certification
issued by an Internationally Recognised Agency of West Europe, USA or
Japan and should have been tested in a "Recognised Independent Testing
Q
Laboratory" as per the relevant IEC standards, including "Short Circuit

Withstand Tests".
D) The Manufacturer shall have documented supply record of similar
transformers working satisfactorily in the same climatic and service conditions
for the last five (5) years as a minimum prerequisite to submit their offer.
E) The transformers shall be installed in a non-air-conditioned room without any
forced ventilation duty at the specified ambient conditions.
F) The Contractor shall submit technical specifications of the transformer and
associated switchgear and cables together with shop drawings to ADWEA for
approval prior to the manufacturing of the equipments. A duly stamped and
approved copy by ADWEA shall be submitted to the engineer at site for record
prior to the commencement of any work.
G) The Contractor shall ensure supervision and certification of the testing of
transformers and associated HV/MV switchgear and cables at site by
ADWEA's engineers.
5.1.2 Design and Construction

5.1.2.1 Rating
The normal rating specified shall be the continuous rating inside the housing under
the maximum specified temperature and humidity in Abu Dhabi. The transformers
shall be designed for the following withstand voltages:
i. Power Frequency Withstand Voltage 38kV
PAGE 22

ii. Impulse Withstand Voltage 95kV
5.1.2.2 Voltage Ratio

The rated (no load) voltage ratio of the transformer on normal tapping shall be
11000/433 Volts.
5.1.2.3 Temperature Rise

The permissible temperature rise for the HV and LV windings shall correspond to
the type of insulation used. The maximum temperature rise (by resistance) of the
transformer while carrying its full rated current continuously at any tapping shall be
less by ten (10) K than the standard limit of IEC 60076-11 Table IV.
op V1
5.1.2.4 Connections
The transformer shall conform to BS EN 60076 (IEC 60076) with a Vector Group
reference Dyn11 with a fully rated neutral. The interface lead links shall be moulded
in resin. All the terminals shall be clearly and permanently marked.
C -
y
5.1.2.5 Off Circuit Tappings
C
a) The transformer shall be equipped with an off-circuit tap changer
having a range of ±5% in 5 steps each of 2.5% which operated by an
C
off-circuit tapping switch, with a clearly marked position indicator.
b) The connected links shall be of high quality and the connections shall
pass the Short Circuit test and not be affected by transformer vibration.
Q
5.1.2.6 Impedance Voltage

The Impedance Voltage of dry type (cast resin) transformers shall be 4% when
sized 630kVA or less or 6% if 800kVA or greater.
5.1.2.7 Noise Level

The noise level shall not exceed 70dB. The transformer shall be installed inside
residential commercial buildings and be securely anchored to noise-reducing
support blocks.
5.1.2.8 HV and LV Winding

A HV and LV windings shall be of high-grade electrolytic copper and be
encapsulated in glass fibre or quartz-reinforced epoxy resin. Encapsulation of
the winding shall be achieved by vacuum impregnation at an elevated
temperature and shall be free of bubbles and voids.
B The coil assemblies shall be acoustically insulated from each other and from
the base frame. The winding must not absorb any humidity during long storage
period (exceeding one year) in atmospheric conditions of Abu Dhabi.
C The insulation material used shall be self-extinguishing when ignited by direct
flame or arc. No toxic gases shall form during heating and/or burning. When
subjected to a continuous bolted short-circuit on the LV terminals, the
transformer shall not explode or expel molten material.
D Authorised test certificate from recognised testing laboratories shall be made
available for DMAT approval prior to commencement of manufacture.
PAGE 23

E The ageing properties of the insulation materials shall be sufficiently high to

compare the life expectancies of these transformers to oil-filled transformers.
5.1.2.9 Suppression of Harmonic Voltages

The transformer shall be designed with particular attention to the suppression of
harmonic voltages, particularly the third and fifth, so as to eliminate wave form
distortion and any possibility of high frequency disturbances, inductive effects or of
circulating currents between the neutral points at different transforming stations
reaching such a magnitude as to cause interference with communication circuits.
5.1.2.10 Magnetic Circuit

The design of the magnetic circuit shall be such so as to avoid static discharges,
op V1
development of short circuit paths within itself or to the earthed clamping structure
and the production of flux components at right angles to the plane of the
laminations which may cause local heating.
5.1.2.11 Core Assembly

C -
y
A The core shall be constructed of the best quality low-loss cold-rolled grain-
C
oriented steel laminations insulated on both sides. The flux density in any part
of the core shall not exceed 1.6 Tesla. Limbs and yokes shall preferably be
C
shaped and assembled with minimum use of steel bolts. Laminations should
be jointed, compressed and braced to minimise stray losses and noise.
B The assembled core shall be braced in suitable steel frames that make up the
Q
base-frame and the lifting facilities for complete transformer. The core
assembly shall enable the removal of the coils in the field, if required. c)
Suitably dimensioned lifting guying and pulling eyes shall be provided for easy
moving of the unit. The base frame shall be skid-mounted with relocatable
wheels.
C The entire core assembly shall be covered with a resin-based lacquer for
corrosion protection before the coils are mounted.
5.1.2.12 Cable Terminations

A The transformer housing shall be fitted with cable boxes suitable for bottom
entry cable termination.
B The HV cable terminals shall have palm and holes suitable for terminating
95mm2 3-core, copper, XLPE-insulated, tape and wire screened, double steel
tape armoured and PVC served cable. The LV Cable terminals shall be
suitable for terminating 630mm2 single-core, copper, AWA cable, 2- and 3-
core/phase for 1,000kVA and 1,500kVA transformers respectively in addition
to the core(s) for the neutral.
C The transformer shall be supplied complete with dry-type heat-shrinkable
termination kits along with all the necessary cable lugs, grip type glands, etc.
Cable support shall be provided in such a way as to relieve the strain on the
cable termination.
D The HV cable box shall not be detachable and shall be bottom entry only.
E The LV cable box shall have removable gland plates so entry can be achieved
from the bottom as well as the top.
PAGE 24

F The tap changing link shall be provided on a separate mounting plate rather
than on the cast resin HV winding so as to avoid any burning of the links and
resin arising out of loose
5.1.2.13 Internal Earthing Arrangement

A All metal parts of the transformer, with the exception of the individual core
laminations, core bolts and associated individual clamping plates shall be
maintained at the same fixed potential.
B The top main core clamping structure shall be connected to the enclosure by a
copper strap. The bottom clamping structure shall be earthed by a suitable
method. Details shall be submitted.
op V1
5.1.2.14 Earthing Terminal
Provision shall be made to connect external earthing conductors at positions close
to the bottom of the enclosure at two points. Earthing terminals shall be adequately
sized to receive the external earthing conductor/strip.
C -
y
5.1.2.15 Transformer Housing
C
A The transformer shall be housed in a protective zinc-coated steel housing with
sufficient ventilation to offer a degree of protection of IP20 minimum. The
C
complete unit (transformer and housing) shall form one movable and liftable
unit.
Q
B Adequate ventilation shall be provided through vermin-proof louvers and the

unit shall be fitted with plain bi-directional rollers. The perforated bottom plate
shall have sufficient clearance from the floor level to guarantee sufficient flow
of natural air ventilation.
C A Hand hole shall be provided with transparent cover to reach the tap
changers. The cover shall be operable with special key/tool only. A danger
sign with cautionary notice in both “ARABIC” and “ENGLISH” shall be affixed
on the cover.
D A Temperature Indicator and Alarm shall be provided in an easy-to-access
location. Facility shall be provided to connect a remote alarm to the unit.
5.1.2.16 Emergency Loading

The transformer shall be able to operate under emergency loading conditions as
per IEC 60905.
5.1.3 Capitalisation of Losses

A) The transformer iron and copper losses shall be capitalised and added to the
tender prices to determine the overall economical price for evaluation purpose
using the following capitalised value per kW for iron and copper losses: i. Iron
losses = UAE Dirhams 13,000/kW. ii. Copper losses = UAE Dirhams
5,000/kW.
B) If the tests of the completed transformer show that the actual losses exceed
the guaranteed values, the excess losses shall be valued in accordance with
the above formula for each transformer and shall be deducted from the money
due to the contractor as performance penalties. No tolerance will be allowed
PAGE 25

on the figures stated in the technical schedules.
5.1.4 Inspection and Testing

Inspection and Testing shall be in accordance with Section 15001: General M&E
Specification.
5.1.5 Accessories
Transformers shall be equipped with all the accessories deemed necessary for
proper operation and meeting IEC 60076-11, plus those required by the particular
specification. Additional available accessories shall be quoted as optional.
5.1.5.1 Winding Temperature Monitoring System
op V1
a) As a minimum, each transformer shall have solid-state winding
temperature monitoring elements installed in the low-voltage windings.
They shall initiate an alarm whenever the maximum absolute winding
temperature is reached.
C -
b) The temperature monitoring device provided shall have 2 (two)
y
C
potential-free contacts for trip/alarm. The temperature calibration shall
be matched with the insulation classification and shall be used in
conjunction with the winding temperature indicator.
C
5.1.5.2 Dimensions
Q
Transformers shall be installed indoors in areas of limited space. Transformers of

compact design are preferred.
5.1.5.3 Corrosion Protection

Surface preparation and painting of transformers and enclosure shall be suitable
for the environmental conditions of Abu Dhabi.
5.1.5.4 Name Plates

a) Nameplates shall be of Steel/Aluminium and must be attached
permanently to the transformer where they can be read from the
ground.
b) Nameplate information as called for by IEC 60076-11 is required. This
includes:
i. Type of Transformer.
ii. Applicable Specifications.
iii. Manufacturers Name.
iv. Serial Number.
v. Year of Manufacture.
vi. Number of Phases.
vii. Rated Power.
viii. Rated Frequency.
ix. Rated Voltage.
PAGE 26

x. Rated Current.
xi. Vector Group.
xii. Impedance Voltage at Rated Current.
xiii. Type of Cooling.
xiv. Total Mass.
c) Additional information, either on the same or on an additional

nameplate, is required as follows:
i. Graphic representation of winding.
ii. Connections and Terminal Designations.
op V1
iii. Temperature Rise of Windings at Rated Load.
iv. Design Ambient Temperature.
v. No Load and Load Losses.
vi.
C -
Contract Reference.
y
C
d) A Standard Danger and Warning Sign in both Arabic and English with
the DMAT logo shall be fixed to the transformer in a prominent
C
location.
5.2 Distribution Transformers – Oil Immersed Air

Q
Cooled
5.2.1 General
A) The Scope covers the design, manufacture and testing of the following: i.
500kVA, 1,000kVA, 1,500kVA, 2,000kVA and 2,500kVA 11/0.433kV Oil-
immersed ground-mounted Power Distribution Transformers. Larger
transformers may be used with the approval of DMAT. ii. 100kVA, 200kVA
11/0.433kV Pole-Mounted Transformers. All transformers shall be complete
with all necessary accessories.
B) The transformers shall be designed and manufactured, as appropriate, to the
following:
i. IEC 60076 (Power Transformers)
ii. BS 7735, IEC 60354 (Guide to loading of Oil-immersed power
transformers).
iii. BS 2562 (Specification for cable boxes for transformers and reactors).
iv. BS 7821 (Three phase oil-immersed distribution transformers, 50Hz,
from 50 to 2500kVA with highest voltage for equipment not exceeding
36kV. General requirements and requirements for transformers with
highest voltage for equipment not exceeding 24kV).
v. BS 6436 (Specification for ground mounted distribution transformers for
cable box or unit substation connection).
vi. BS EN 61330 (High-voltage/low-voltage prefabricated substations).
PAGE 27

vii. BS 148, IEC 60296 (Specification for unused and reclaimed mineral
insulating oils for transformers and switchgear).
viii. The Latest Abu Dhabi Distribution Company (ADDC) specifications.
C) All transformers shall be fully Type Tested, including Short Circuit Test in
KEMA, ASTA or any other recognised Western European independent testing
laboratory.
D) It is mandatory for manufacturers to have valid ISO 9000 series Certification
issued by an Internationally Recognised Agency of West Europe, USA or
Japan and should have been tested in a "Recognised Independent Testing
Withstand Tests".
op V1
E) The Manufacturer shall have documented supply records of similar
transformers working satisfactorily in the same climatic and service conditions
for the last five (5) years as a minimum prerequisite to submitting their offer.
5.2.2 System Characteristics

C -
y
The system characteristics are defined in Section 15001: General M&E
Requirements.
C
C
5.2.3.1 Type
Q
The transformer shall be hermetically sealed, ONAN naturally cooled, outdoor skid-
mounted, oil-immersed, core type and shall comply in general with the requirement
of BS EN 60076 / IEC 60076 except that the temperature rise shall not exceed
50°C of winding by resistance and 40°C of oil by thermometer.
5.2.3.2 Rating
The transformer rated kVA shall be the continuous steady load rating under the
specified temperature and humidity.
5.2.3.3 Voltage Ratio

The rated (no load) voltage ratio of the transformer on normal tapping shall be
11000/433 Volts.
5.2.3.4 Temperature Rise

The transformer shall be capable of carrying full rated current continuously under
the maximum specified ambient temperature at any tapping, without the
temperature rise of oil in the hottest region exceeding 40°C, as measured by
thermometer and of the winding not exceeding 50°C, as measured by resistance.
Calculations demonstrating the above shall be submitted with the offer.
5.2.3.5 Connections
The transformer shall conform to BS EN 60076 (IEC 60076), be connected Delta
Star with a Vector Group Reference Dyn11. The Neutral terminal shall be brought
out and be fully rated in all cases.
PAGE 28

5.2.3.6 Off Circuit Tappings

The transformer shall be equipped with an off-circuit tap changer having a range
of ±5% in 5 steps of 2.5% each operated by an off-circuit tapping switch, with
clearly marked position indicator. Locking facilities shall be provided such that the
lock can be inserted only when the switch is on a definite tap position.
5.2.3.7 Impedance Voltage

Typical impedance voltage of the transformer shall be as follows:
i. 500/200/100kVA = 4.75%
ii. 1,000kVA = 4.75%
op V1
iii. 1,500kVA = 5.50%
iv. 2,000kVA = 6.00%
v. 2,500kVA = 6.55%
5.2.3.8
C -
Duty Under Faults
y
C
The transformer shall be capable of sustaining a three phase symmetrical short
circuit on the LV side with power maintained on the HV side without damage or
distress for three seconds. A Short circuit test certificate performed on a similar
C
transformer in a recognised independent testing laboratory shall be provided. Any
offer not accompanied with such certificates will be rejected.
Q
5.2.3.9 Tank
The core and winding assembly shall be contained within a tank of welded sheet
steel construction. It shall be hermetically sealed with a bolted tank cover. All
flanged joints shall incorporate gaskets to prevent entry of water or loss of oil. All
transformers shall be subject to an oil leakage test. The following details shall be
submitted:
A Tank type.
B Maximum internal withstand pressure of the transformer and details of
pressure relief device provided.
C If recycling of transformer oil is recommended, complete details of re-cycling
and refilling.
D Complete recommended method of maintenance for the design life of the
transformer.
5.2.3.10 Finish And Coatings

The transformer tank and its accessories shall be adequately protected against
corrosion. The tank shall be sand blasted and then immediately zinc sprayed,
followed by a zinc chromate based primary paint and two coats of durable oil and
weather resisting paint. The final coat of paint shall be of silver colour.
The inside of tanks shall be coated with oil-resisting varnish or paint so that the oil
cannot come into contact with tank metal at any point. Alternative methods of
protection may also be considered. Details shall be submitted with the offer.
PAGE 29

5.2.3.11 Cooling
Cooling of the transformer shall be by natural circulation of oil through banks of
plain external cooling tubes. Panel-type radiator or corrugated tanks are also
acceptable provided they withstand the specified test pressure.
5.2.3.12 Flux Density

The core shall be constructed of the best quality low-loss, cold-rolled grain-oriented
steel laminations. The flux density in any part of the core shall not exceed 1.6 Tesla
at normal voltage and frequency.
The core plates shall be insulated from one another to reduce the core loss to a
minimum and the core shall be held together by bolts and clamping plates all of
op V1
which shall be adequately insulated
The completed core shall be provided with lifting eyes to facilitate its removal from
the transformer tank and shall be adequately braced and supported to prevent
movement during transit or service.
C -
5.2.3.13 Windings
y
C
The maximum current density in both HV and LV windings shall not exceed
1,600A/in2 (2.48A/mm2). All windings shall be fully insulated for power frequency
C
test voltages of 38kV and impulse test voltage of 95kV. Insulation shall be Class ‘A’
to BS EN 60085 (IEC 60085). Aluminium winding is not acceptable.
Q
5.2.3.14 Bushing, Terminals and Cable Boxes for Ground-Mounted

Transformers
The HV and LV Cable Box shall be mounted on the sides of the tank with
horizontal bushings arranged for cables approaching vertically from below.
A Bushings shall be replaceable without having to open the tank cover. Bushings
and terminations shall be capable of withstanding the voltages applied during
the winding test. Due attention shall be given to LV terminal bushings where
connected to a flange-type distribution feeder pillar.
B The 11kV cable box shall be designed for air-insulated dry type termination
suitable for 3-core XLPE, double steel tape armour, PVC-served, from 50-
95mm2 copper cable according to the transformer rating.
C Clearances between the phases and phase to earth shall be liberally designed
to allow cable core crossing in the box. Bushings and terminations shall be
adequate for the winding tests.
D Each transformer shall be supplied with complete heat shrinkable termination
kits with all necessary cable lugs, compression cable gland and clamps, etc.
The cost of such kits is deemed to be included in the tender price.
E The LV connection from the transformer to the Substation LV Distribution
Board (if applicable) shall comprise 3No. single core copper 630mm2 XLPE,
AWA PVC-served cables per phase for a 1,500kVA transformer in addition to
the core(s) for the neutral. The exact details of the cable shall be handed over
to the successful tenderer.
F The LV Cable Box for a 200kVA transformer shall be suitable for 2No. 4-core
240mm2 copper cable terminations.
PAGE 30

G The cable boxes on the transformer shall be suitable for this arrangement and
shall be complete with all necessary fittings, crimp type straps, tapes, etc.
5.2.3.15 Fittings
In addition to Standard Fittings as per BS EN 60076 (IEC 60076), the transformer
shall be fitted with the following:
i. Rating Plate.
ii. Terminal Marking Plate.
iii. Lifting Lugs.
iv. Earthing Terminal for Tank.
op V1
v. Tank Filling and Draining Valve.
vi. Oil Level Indicator.
vii. Dial-type Thermometer with maximum reading pointer and two adjustable
Multi-contacts for Alarm and Trip.
C -
y
viii. Pressure Relief Device.
ix.
C
Jacking Lugs.
x. Skid and rollers (rollers shall be supplied for 1,500kVA transformers and
C
above).
5.2.4 Additional Specification for Pole-Mounting Transformer

Q
5.2.4.1 Mounting Arrangement

The transformer shall be supplied complete with base channels suitable for
mounting on cross arm channel.
5.2.4.2 HV Terminals
HV bushing shall be rated for 22kV insulation level. The outdoor bushing shall be
as per 20 NF 250 according to DIN 42531. The bushing and fittings shall not be
affected by the sulphurous atmosphere conditions on site, humidity, dust, sand acid
or alkaline fumes.
HV bushings shall be fitted with two gap type adjustable arcing horns. Each gap set
at 30mm and adjustable gap range shall be 45-80mm.
5.2.4.3 LV Cable Box

The transformer shall have an LV cable box as specified under Clause 2.3.14 and
be designed to receive a 4-core 240mm2 copper cable or as specified under
Clause 2.3.14. Clamps shall be provided on the body of the transformer to support
the cable in position and to relieve strain on the bushing.
5.2.4.4 Dimensions
The transformers shall have standard proportional dimensions. The bushing for
ground-mounted transformers shall be mounted on the sides of the tank to reduce
the overall height of the transformers. In any case, the height shall not exceed
1,900mm for 1,500kVA and 1,000kVA transformers.
PAGE 31

5.2.5 Emergency Loading

The transformer shall operate under emergency loading conditions as per IEC
60076-7 with transformer winding hot spot temperature not exceeding 140°C after
thermal equilibrium has been reached at rated load.
5.2.6 Inspection and Testing

Inspection and Testing shall be in accordance with Section 15001: General M&E
Specification. It shall include the following: Type and Routine Tests shall be carried
out in accordance with BS EN 60076 (IEC 60076). The tests shall be applied in the
presence of DMAT or a nominated representative.
op V1
A) Routine Tests:
i. Measurement of Winding Resistance.
ii. Voltage Ratio Measurement.
C -
y
iii. Check of Voltage Vector Relationship.
C
iv. Measurement of Impedance Voltage and Load Losses.
v. Measurement of No-Load Loss and Current.
C
vi. Insulation Resistance Measurement.
vii. Separate - Source Voltage withstand Test.
Q
viii. Induced Over-Voltage withstand Test.

ix. External Construction Inspection.
x. Check of Oil Leakage.
All transformers shall be tested for oil leakage when completely assembled. The oil
pressure shall be equivalent to a level of four metres of oil above normal oil and
shall be applied for a period not less than 6 hours.
B) Type Tests:
i. Temperature Rise Test on the transformer.
ii. The Impulse withstand test on the transformer shall be applied on the
HV winding leg only and shall be in accordance with BS EN 60060
(IEC 60060) and BS EN 60076 (IEC 60076).
C) Short Circuit Test:

i. A Short Circuit test need not be performed, if already performed on a
similar transformer. A Type Test Certificate shall be made available.
5.2.7 Transformer Load and No-Load Losses

The acceptable maximum losses at 75°C and rated voltage, full site-rated load and
main tap shall be as shown below. Tenders having transformers with losses
exceeding the following values will not be considered:
PAGE 32

Table 5-1: Transformer Load & No Load Losses
Site Rating Losses in kW
kVA No Load Load @ 750 C
2,500 2.85 25.0
2,000 2.25 23.8
op V1
1,500 1.65 20.6
1,000 1.34 12.5
C -
500 0.9 7.15
y
200
C 0.40 3.8
C
100 0.28 2.0
Q
Tolerance for total losses shall be +10%, and for component losses it shall be
+15% of each component loss, provided the tolerance for total losses is not
exceeded.
5.2.8 Capitalisation of Losses

If the actual losses as verified by tests of any transformer exceed the maximum
permissible values, but within allowable tolerance, the excess losses will be
capitalised as per the following values and will be deducted from the monies due to
the Contractor:
i. Iron Losses = UAE Dirhams 13,000/kW.
ii. Copper Losses = UAE Dirhams 5,000/kW.
If the actual losses exceed the allowable tolerance, the transformer may be
rejected or the capitalised value of the excess losses will be deducted from the
contract price using the above formula.
5.2.9 Operation and Maintenance Manual

Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall comply with the requirements of Section
15001: General M&E Specification and Section 01300.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 33

6. LIGHTING AND SMALL POWER (SECTION

16090)
6.1 Lightning
A) All items described within this section shall comply with the provisions of
Section 15001: General M&E Requirements.
B) Lighting installations shall be designed to provide the illumination levels to suit
the site orientation. They shall conform to CIBSE or some other national
approved standard.
op V1
C) Lighting levels shall be measured at a plane 1,000mm above finished floor
level (or above walkway levels in pump chambers and dry wells if applicable).
Two-way switching shall be provided for areas where access may be gained
via two physically separate doors.
C -
D) The Contractor shall prepare lighting layout drawings providing sufficient
y
details to enable duct requirements to be ascertained prior to the casting of
C
roof beams and columns. Lighting conduits shall be concealed and/or
surface-mounted on ceilings and walls as per the requirements as specified.
C
Conduits in tiled areas shall be concealed only beneath the tiles.
E) Lighting fittings shall be complete with all supports, suspensions, flexible
cables, pendants and plugs. They shall be connected to the main circuit
Q
wiring with 105°C heat resisting flexible cables of a minimum conductor size
of 1.5mm². Silicon rubber insulated cables shall be used wherever necessary
as per the instructions/approval of the DMAT.
F) Break joint rings shall be used in conjunction with batten holders ceiling roses
or back plates mounted onto a flush installation.
G) Earthing of all pendant or semi-pendant fittings shall be by a separate core in
the connecting flex or cable securely bonding the earth terminal on the fitting
to the glanded joint of interconnecting cables. The use of pendant chains or
the conduit support tubes as a means of earthing is prohibited.
H) Standard fluorescent lighting fittings shall have two suspension or fixing
points.
I) All lamp holders for flexible pendants shall be of the all insulated-skirted
pattern with cord grips and for batten- or wall-mounting shall be of similar
pattern. All lamp holders shall be of the bayonet cap pattern.
J) The point box suspensions and other parts of the lighting fittings shall be
erected at times to suit the building programme for decoration. The glassware
diffusers shade lamps and tubes shall not be fitted until all building work is
complete.
K) All fittings shall be left clean inside and outside ready for use. All fluorescent
fittings shall be suitable for instant start. All ballasts shall be suitable for 240V,
single-phase 50Hz supply and quick start type and power factor corrected.
L) All fluorescent tubes shall be of an approved manufacture and standard
white. They shall be suitable for the lighting fittings in which they are installed
and of the correct voltage. Diffusers on fluorescent fittings shall be
PAGE 34

polycarbonate.
M) All incandescent lamps shall be of an approved manufacture with metal coil
filament gas filled pearl in all standard sizes with standard caps to suit the
fittings in which they are installed.
N) The Contractor shall supply and install all lamps for the entire lighting fitting
installation and shall replace all burned out lamps up to the issue of the Final
Acceptance Certificate.
O) Emergency lights shall be wall-mounted twin lamp units arranged to give at
least 4 hours illumination in the event of mains power supply failure and shall
meet the specifications as described hereinafter.
P) Control gear of lighting fitting shall be suitable for prolonged and continuous
op V1
service in accordance with the service conditions as described under Section
15001: General M&E Requirements.
Q) Lighting poles shall be hot dipped galvanised. Other accessories, such as
foundations, cut-outs and control gear, shall be in strict compliance with
ADWEA standards and their associated companies’ regulations.
C -
y
C
R) Internally-mounted light fittings not liable to splashing shall have a minimum
of IP54. Internally mounted fittings liable to splashing and all externally
mounted fittings shall have be IP65 or better with an exception of control gear
C
compartment having a minimum of IP42 or better.
6.2 Portable Plant

Q
A) Hand lamps shall be: fitted with a wire cage; 24V 40W lamp and 10
metres of 3-core tough, rubber-sheathed cable with plug suitable for low
voltage socket outlets.
B) Weatherproof portable floodlights shall be 500W, 110V, 50Hz complete with a
10-metre pole of adjustable height. The Contractor shall furnish the detail of
wiring and installation on the workshop drawings for DMAT review/approval
prior to the work.
C) Transformer shall be adequate capacity double wound step down with 240V,
50Hz, single-phase primary and 110V and 24V tapping on the secondary side
with earthed centre tap. Transformers shall be complete with primary and
secondary fuses and housed in a weatherproof enclosure complete with
carrying handle and 20 metres of cable complete with fused plug.
6.3 Wiring
A) Wiring shall be installed using PVC cable to BS 6004 or equivalent, enclosed
in high-impact PVC conduit or steel conduit.
B) Wiring may also be carried out where necessary in high-impact PVC or
metal trunking to BS 4678 subjected to the prior approval from DMAT.
C) The minimum copper conductor size used shall meet current ADWEA and
their associated company’s standards.
D) The use of junction boxes between fittings shall be kept to a minimum an d
where practicable all connections shall be made at the fitting.
E) Junction boxes shall be rectangular pattern and where possible their
PAGE 35

position shall be hidden from immediate view. They shall still be

accessible.
F) Circuit wiring shall not be connected directly onto the terminals of lighting
fittings but shall be made off in point boxes consisting of a standard box
containing shrouded pinch screw connectors to which connections shall
be made to the light fitting by heat resistant flexible cables to 105°C.
6.4 Distribution Boards

A) Three-phase distribution boards shall be of the totally enclosed metalclad
pattern, manufactured in accordance with BS EN 60439 and as described
under Section 16480: Factory Built Assembly.
op V1
B) Three-phase distribution boards and single-phase consumer units shall be
manufactured by using manufacturer standard type-tested pan assemblies
facilitating plug-in fixing and removing of the MCB/RCCB/MCCB’s.
C) The minimum IP rating for single-phase consumer units installed indoors
shall be IP42.
C -
y
C
D) Combined busbar’s and row type arrangement of MCB’s and RCCB’s inside
distribution boards and consumer units are not permitted under any
circumstances.
C
E) The enclosure shall be made from zinc-coated mild steel formed to a clean
line and complete with a lockable, hinged cover with gasket. Removable
plates with conduit knockouts shall be provided at top and bottom.
Q
F) All distribution boards shall be complete with a Residual Current Circuit

Breaker with a tripping current of 30mA/100mA/300mA as appropriate.
G) Selection of the appropriate circuit breaker type (i.e. MCB/RCCB/ELCB/
MCCB etc.) and their breaking capacity, design and application shall be in
accordance with Section 16030: Circuit Breakers.
H) Distribution boards shall incorporate combinations of single pole and neutral
and triple-pole Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB’s) as required. All circuit
breakers shall be rated and have the same number of phases as the circuit
from which it is fed.
I) Doors shall be fitted with gaskets and be easily removable to preserve the
finish and simplify installation. Distribution boards shall be arranged for top
and bottom cable entry and be provided with an ample cable termination
plate and chamber to enable cables to be neatly glanded.
J) Distribution boards shall be wall- or floor-mounted and, where specified,
incorporate on-load isolators which shall be ‘front of panel’ operated with
ON/OFF indicator and be capable of being padlocked in the OFF position.
K) Each bank of MCB’s shall be clearly identified with its appropriate phase
colour code. The mounting framework for the banks of MCBs shall be easily
removable to simplify installation. Adequate phase barriers and shields
shall be fitted to ensure that after installation and wiring all bare terminals
and wires are covered to prevent accidental contact with live conductors
during the normal procedure of resetting of MCB’s.
L) All distribution boards shall be complete with MCBs manufactured in
accordance with BS EN 60898 to afford "close" over-current protection to
PAGE 36

circuits as defined by BS 7671.

M) All neutral bars shall have a separate terminal for each MCB within the
distribution boards.
N) Termination of the circuit cables at distribution boards shall be neat. Slack
shall be left at each MCB bank or neutral bar to enable the complete
assembly to be removed for inspection without disconnection. Neutral
conductors shall be connected to the bar in the same order as the phase
conductor to the MCB.
O) Each distribution board shall be complete with a permanent circuit
identification chart preferably fixed to the interior of the front door. This chart
shall be permanently and legibly completed as circuits are completed with
the circuit description and the MCB rating.
op V1
P) Painting of distribution boards shall be subject to the approval of DMAT.
Q) Distribution boards shall be properly earthed by connecting an earthing
conductor from the main distribution earth busbar to the internal earth
connector stud.
C -
y
6.5 Socket Outlets
C
A) Internally-mounted socket outlets shall be connected to a ring circuit of
C
minimum wire size 2.5mm² PVC insulated.
Ratings shall be as follows:
Q
i. Radial circuits for served area up to 20m² shall be provided with

minimum wire size of 2.5mm² PVC insulated.
ii. Radial circuits for served area between 20 and 50m² shall be provided
with minimum wire size of 4mm², PVC insulated.
iii. The maximum rating of a ring circuit shall be 30A feeding a floor space of
between 50m² and 100m².
B) All socket outlets shall be of the shuttered type to comply with BS 1363 and
shall accept 13A square pin plugs. All socket outlets shall be switched, flush
mounting and supplied with one spare plug per socket.
C) Fused connection units shall be to BS 5733 or equivalent. The appropriate
size fuse for the equipment being controlled shall be fitted.
D) The Contractor shall prepare detailed load schedules and drawings in
accordance with ADWEA's regulation specially pertaining to sizing of wires,
colour codes, phase orientation, protective conductors (ECC), short circuit
protective devices (SCPD) maximum rating, distance between the sockets in
case of dissimilar phase orientation, maximum rating of the ring circuit in
conjunction with sizing of wires, SCPD, distance etc. for review and approval
by DMAT prior to commencement of work at site.
6.6 Switches
A) Internally-mounted switches shall be of the "multiple phase" type with the
switches arranged in multi-gang boxes where applicable.
B) Externally-mounted switches shall be weatherproof to suit site conditions,
PAGE 37

manufactured from polycarbonate and fully protected.

C) Flush-mounted switches shall be of the grid switch pattern with matt chrome
finish covers complete with heat cured powder lacquer finish.
D) Special care shall be taken to ensure that all switches are securely fixed truly
vertical and that flush mounted switches are flush with the wall finish so that
the overlapping cover plates seat onto the rims of the boxes.
6.7 Emergency Lighting

A) Emergency lighting shall provide illumination levels in accordance with
BS5266 or equivalent.
B) Emergency lights shall be wall-mounted, twin lamp units arranged to give at
op V1
least 4 hours or more illumination in the event of mains power supply failure.
C) The composite unit shall include integral maintenance-free sealed nickel
cadmium battery, battery charger and battery status indicator. A lamp test
facility shall be included.
C -
D) Emergency light units shall be connected to a dedicated electrical circuit
y
C
separate from all other lighting or small power supplies.
E) The wiring shall be carried out in a separate and independent conduit system
C
from other system circuits. A steel conduit system with compression-type
fittings shall be used in dry areas where the conduit is not liable to be subject
to damage. Rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be used in damp/wet areas
Q
and areas where conduit is liable to be subject to damage.

F) Junction boxes containing emergency power system wiring, circuits and
conductors shall have red covers and marked “EM” in white letters.
G) Emergency lighting shall be provided in transformer, generator, electrical and
mechanical rooms, including remote panels’ location (e.g. fire alarm panels,
distribution boards in corridors, valve chambers, dry well etc.).
END OF SECTION
PAGE 38

7. CABLES AND WIRES (SECTION 16110)

B) All LV cables shall be 600/1000V-grade copper single/multi cores.
Manufacturers test certificates shall be submitted to DMAT prior to the
installation of the cables.
C) Where a neutral conductor is required, it shall be in the form of a core of the
same section as the other cores, i.e. separate neutral cables are not permitted.
op V1
D) The Contractor shall ensure that each cable is of sufficient rating for its normal
and fault conditions in accordance with the requirements of BS7671.
E) Cables shall be sized and installed in accordance with BS 7671 and for direct
C -
buried cable ERA publication 69-30.
y
F)
C
The Contractor shall submit appropriate details and supporting calculations for
each cable, sized to meet the particular application for DMAT review and
approval.
C
G) The Contractor shall be responsible for measuring the length of cable required.
H) Each cable shall be supplied in a suitable length and be continuous throughout
Q
its run. Through joints shall not be permitted without written permission from
DMAT.
I) The earthing conductor shall be of adequate cross sectional area and be either
one core of a multicore cable or a separately run single-core cable. The use of
conduit and water pipes in any part of the earth continuity conductor shall not be
permitted.
J) The Contractor shall supply and install all necessary cable glands and sealing
boxes required to complete the installation. All materials used in the
manufacturing of the glands etc. shall have no deleterious effect on the cable
core or armouring and shall not be susceptible to corrosion.
K) The cores of each cable shall be taken directly to the terminals of the equipment
to be connected. Cable ends shall be sealed in suitable chambers bolted to
terminal boxes. Compression glands with armour clamps where required are to
be supplied as an integral part of switchboards, distribution boards, switches,
motor starters and similar equipment, unless otherwise stated.
L) The general routeing of cables shall be indicated on the Drawings but the final
routes and duct locations shall be agreed with DMAT before any work in
connection with the cable installation is commenced.
M) All cables shall be installed strictly in accordance with the requirements of the
latest issue of Abu Dhabi Water and Electricity Authority (ADWEA) and/or their
associated group companies’ regulations.
N) All cables used shall bear the manufacturer's original guarantee and all cables
shall be delivered to Site in their original wrappings. The Contractor shall obtain
the permission of DMAT before any wrappings removed or cables are installed.
PAGE 39

O) The Contractor shall ensure that no more than one phase will occur at switch
lighting or power outlets where these outlets are less than 2.5m apart unless
guarded by a wall partition or other barrier. If this is impracticable, the
Contractor shall obtain the advice of DMAT before proceeding.
P) The cable and core wiring scheme colour shall conform to BS 7671.
Q) A minimum length of 250mm tails shall be left on all cables at outlet positions for
connection of the lighting fittings or other apparatus fed by the outlet.
R) The installation of multi-core and single core cables or bunching of cables in
conduit is to be carried out on the assumption that such cables will carry
alternating current.
S) Excessive bunching of small cables in large conduits will not be permitted and
op V1
the Contractor shall not exceed the requirements of BS7671.
T) The Contractor shall include for terminating each cable in a pressure operated
mechanically crimped leg terminal or terminal socket.
U) Copper conductors shall be stranded for sections 4mm² and over.
C -
y
V) Connectors and glands e.g. split bolt type, solderless pressurised type; split type
C
and compression type etc. used in conjunction with cables shall confirm to BS
6121 and meets ADWEA regulations.
C
7.2 XLPE-Insulated Power Cables
A) XPLE-insulated and sheathed galvanised steel wire armour cable with an overall
Q
PVC sheath (XLPE/SWA/PVC) shall conform to BS 5467. They shall be of

approved manufacture of 600/1000V and/or 1900/3300V grade with copper
conductors.
B) They shall not be used in sustained wet environments.
C) All such cables shall be terminated with mechanical glands in accordance with
BS 6121, which shall be of a type to provide adequate mechanical support by
locking on the armour and shall at the same time give high earth continuity.
7.3 PILC and PVC/SWA/PVC Power Cables

A) High voltage cables shall be three-core 8700/11000V grade and be
manufactured to BS 6480 (IEC 60055-1).
B) PVC insulated and sheathed galvanised steel wire armour cable with an overall
PVC sheath (PVC/SWA/PVC) shall conform to BS 6346. They shall be of
approved manufacture of 600/1000V grade with copper conductors.
C) All such cable shall be terminated with mechanical glands in accordance with BS
6121, which shall be of a type to provide adequate mechanical support by
locking on the armour and shall at the same time give high earth continuity.
7.4 PVC INSULATED WIRING CABLES

PVC insulated wiring cables shall comply with BS 6004 and BS 6346 and be
600/1000V grade. The cable used shall not be less than 1.5mm² cross-
sectional area.
PAGE 40

7.5 Instrumentation Cables

A) Instrumentation, Control and Automation cables (Analogue/Digital) shall be in
accordance with BS 5308 Part 2 or equivalent. Reference shall also be made to
Section 15980.
B) The use of multicore cables to BS 6346 or equivalent shall be permitted for
cables containing digital signals only, in a “low noise” environment where the
use of screened cable is not warranted.
7.6 Rubber Insulated Cables

Rubber insulated cables shall be EPR-insulated, Niplas sheathed,
flexible,450/750V grade, with tinned annealed copper conductors in accordance
op V1
with BS 6007. Where used in submersible applications, the cable shall be
brought directly out of the water in one unjointed run.
7.7 Building Wire

A)
C -
Electrical wiring used in buildings shall be selected as appropriate to the
y
C
applications with specific type insulation for installing in raceways (conduits and
trunking).
C
B) Single conductor PVC-insulated wires and cables (non-armoured) shall be to BS
6004 and meets Abu Dhabi Water and Electricity Authority (ADWEA)
regulations.
Q
C) Conductor used shall be copper, rated at 600V, PVC-insulated at 70°C.
7.8 Cabinet Wire

A) Electrical wires used in cabinets, enclosures, control panels, factory built
assemblies and junction boxes etc. shall be selected as appropriate to the
applications with specific type heat resistant insulation to 105°C.
B) Conductor used shall be copper, rated at 600V PVC-insulated.
C) Wire colours shall be as described in Sections 16480: Factory Built Assembly
and 15001: General M&E Requirements.
7.9 Non-Metallic Sheathed Cable

A) These cables shall be factory assembled having two or more insulated
conductors with outer sheath of moisture-resistant, flame retardant, non- metallic
material.
B) NFPA 70, Type NMC or other approved standard to meet ADWEA
regulations.
7.10 Direct Burial Cable

A) Underground feeder and branch circuit cable that is similar to non- metallic
sheathed cable but approved for direct burial shall be used.
B) NFPA 70, Type UF or other approved standard to meet ADWEA regulations.
C) Insulation Temperature Rating: 70°C for PVC and 90°C for XLPE.
PAGE 41

D) Underground Warning Tape shall be used. It shall be 100mm wide plastic tape,
coloured yellow with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines.
7.11 Armoured Cable

A) Fabricated assembly of insulated conductors in a flexible metal enclosure, used
for branch circuits and feeders.
B) NFPA 70, Type AC or other approved standard to ADWEA regulations.
C) Copper conductor.
D) Insulation Voltage Rating – 600V.
E) Insulation Temperature Rating and Material: 70°C for PVC and 90°C for XLPE.
op V1
F) Conductor Assembly covering shall be lead for cables conforming to NFPA
standards and Steel Wire Armouring (SWA) or Aluminium Wire Armouring
(AWA) for cables to British Standards.
7.12 Metal Clad Cable

C -
y
A)
C
Factory assembly of one or more conductors each individually insulated and
enclosed in a metallic sheath of interlocking tape or a smooth or corrugated
tube.
C
B) NFPA 70, Type MC or other approved standard to meet ADWEA
regulations.
Q
C) Insulation Temperature Rating and Material: 70°C for PVC and 90°C for XLPE.
D) Armouring shall be aluminium for single core cables and galvanised steel wire
for multicore cables.
7.13 Source Tests on Cables

A) Test certificates shall be provided for each drum and/or cable length.
They shall include:
i. High voltage insulation pressure test, between cores, each core to
earth, metallic sheath or armour as applicable.
ii. Insulation resistance test.
iii. Core continuity and identification.
iv. Conductor resistance test.
7.14 Field Tests on Cables

A) Inform DMAT prior to testing of the cables and be responsible for liaising with
any other contractor to whose equipment the cables may be terminated to
ensure that all parties concerned are aware of the impending tests, to guarantee
the safety of personnel and that the isolation of any equipment has been
completed. Any special isolation or preparation required to be carried out before
cable testing can be completed will be carried out by the Contractor responsible
for that equipment. All tests shall be carried out by the Contractor and witnessed
by DMAT.
PAGE 42

B) Provide test equipment and apply (after isolation) in the presence of DMAT, the
following maximum test voltages on all cables between cores, cores and sheath
and cores and armour (lower test voltages may be used by agreement):
Table 7-1: Field Tests on Cable
Test voltage
Cable type and grade
Between any core and
Between cores
sheath
PILC 20,000V grade 55,000V 33,000V
op V1
PILC 11,000V grade 30,000V 17,500V
PILC 6,600V grade 11,000V 9,000V
PILC 3,300V grade 9,000V 5,000V

C -
y
MULTICORE
PILC
C
3,300V grade - 5,000V
single core
C
PVC/SWA/PVC 3,300V 11,250V 6,500V [Between core and
grade (BS 6346 Annex K) armour]
Q
XLPE/SWA/PVC 3,300V 11,250V 6,500V [Between

grade (BS 5467 Annex K) core and armour]
PVC/SWA/PVC 1,000V 3,500V 3,500V [Between core and

grade armour]
(BS 6346 Annex K)
XLPE/SWA/PVC 3,500V 3,500V [Between

core and armour]
1,000V grade
(BS 5467 Annex K)
C) Demonstrate correct phasing of cores in all cables throughout the works and test
the insulation of all cables, both between the cores and between the cores and
earth, during installation with a 500V insulation tester.
7.15 Cabling Methods

A) All cables shall be run on trays or brackets either secured to walls, ceilings and
building structures or run in ducts and trenches. Tray installations shall be in
accordance with Section 16114: Cable Trays.
PAGE 43

B) All cable hangers, cleats, saddles, brackets and similar supporting devices shall
be of an approved type and of adequate strength for the cables they are
supporting. They shall be treated to withstand site conditions without corroding.
C) Every cable whether in or out of sight shall be neatly run vertically, horizontally
or parallel to adjacent walls, beams or other structural members.
D) Spacing of clips, saddles and cleats shall be such to prevent sagging of the
cable at all times during their installed life.
E) Cables run in indoor trenches shall be segregated and run on trays or brackets
secured to the trench wall. No cables shall be run on the bottom of these
trenches.
F) Where cables are surface run on the external faces of structures or above
op V1
ground level suitable protection from the radiation of the sun shall be provided
by means of covers or canopies.
G) Protection covers or canopies shall be of an approved design, securely fixed to
the structure or ground and be fully ventilated.
C -
H) Where more than one cable is to be terminated at an item of equipment,
y
C
particular care should be taken to ensure that all cables to that equipment are
routed from a common direction and each is terminated in an orderly and
symmetrical fashion.
C
I) Each cable shall be permanently identified at each end by its cable number.
Cable markers shall comprise oval markers with semi-rigid black PVC carrier
strip and shall be fixed axially by means of two PVC- covered aluminium strips
Q
with buckles.
J) Permanent, corrosion-resistant identification labels shall also be installed on
cables at each and every entry and exit points of buried ducts, exists and entry
to any structure and in such other positions as are necessary to identify and
trace the route of any site cable. The use of punch type adhesive labels
(Dymotape or similar) shall not be permitted.
K) All power shall be connected to main switchboards and other items of plant so
that the correct phase sequence and phase colour coding are preserved
throughout the system. All such cables shall be identified with phase colours for
3- and 4-wire systems and blue and brown for single phase. On rotating plant
where to achieve the required direction of rotation it is not possible to connect
the phase cores to the appropriately identified terminals then special core
ferrules shall be fitted to identify each core with the terminal to which it is finally
connected.
L) Control cables shall have individual cores identified by means of suitable
permanent ferrules bearing the same numbers at both ends.
M) Core identification shall occur at every point of termination using an approved
system of ferrule markers. Numbering shall read from the terminal outwards on
all cores. At those points of interconnection between wiring where a change of
number cannot be avoided double ferrules shall be provided on each wire. The
change of numbering shall be shown on the wiring diagrams of the equipment at
which the change is made.
N) Where the termination of control cable cores or the supervision of termination of
cores is specified as being the responsibility of another contractor (e.g. the
PAGE 44

termination of certain control and instrumentation cables), any necessary

temporary means of core identification shall be agreed with that contractor.
Should the Contractor propose to use junction boxes in auxiliary control cable
circuits for marshalling a number of cables feeding to a common item of
equipment full details shall be given to DMAT, and the Contractor shall only
proceed after receipt of DMAT’s written approval. Any such junction box shall
be of the wall- mounting pattern with double terminals with cores ferruled and
identified in accordance with the system schematic and cable diagrams.
O) Cables entering or leaving ducts shall be sealed. Power and control cables shall
be sealed where they enter and leave ducts at all points and in cable chambers
including intermediate pulling chambers. The sealing compound shall exhibit the
following properties:
op V1
i. Adheres to all metal surfaces, unplasticised, PVC, polyethylene and
glazed earthenware and to cable sheath materials.
ii. Unaffected by water.
iii. Withstands at least 14kPa (2psi) air pressure for a minimum of 15
C -
minutes.
y
C
iv. Withstands up to 5kPa (0.5 metre head) water pressure for 30
minutes.
C
v. Self-supporting, non-setting and removable.
vi. Accommodates movement due to settling, subsidence or vibration.
Q
vii. Vermin proof.

P) The sealing compound shall be packed into the annulus to a depth at least equal
to the diameter of the sleeve.
Q) Where the water table is identified as a problem the use of a sealing compound
that adheres to wet surfaces shall be utilised.
R) A cable transit system shall be used where positive sealing is required against
fire, gas or liquid. The system shall have been tested and approved by BS 476
or equivalent by the Fire Insurer’s Research and Testing Organization (FIRTO)
or other national testing organisation.
S) The Contractor shall be responsible for temporarily sealing all cable ducts into
structures during the installation stage to prevent accidental flooding of the
structures.
T) Wherever it is necessary to remove the PVC sheath of a cable (e.g. at a joint),
the minimum length necessary shall be removed and the exposed copper
sheath or armouring adequately covered by a PVC tape or sleeve or other
suitable means.
U) All HV cables shall be terminated with air-insulated dry-type terminations. The
Contractor shall supply complete heat shrinkable termination kits of an approved
make with cable lugs, compression cable gland and clamps etc.
V) PVC or XLPE insulated cables shall be terminated with glands in accordance
with BS6121 and be of the type to provide adequate support to the cable by
under- and over-locking on to the cable armouring, giving a high earth continuity.
Each cable gland shall be supplied and installed complete with brass earthing
tape and a PVC gland shroud, to provide an effective seal on both the cable
PAGE 45

oversheath and gland. Each cable gland shall be fitted with an appropriate fibre
washer in order to maintain the IP rating.
W) All cable conductors shall be terminated in suitable copper lugs or brass
thimbles which shall be attached to the conductors by use of a pneumatic
crimping machine using the correct crimping dies for each size of cable core.
X) All cables shall be delivered on robust cable drums with cable ends treated to
form an effective seal. When a cable is cut from a drum, the cable end left on the
drum shall be immediately sealed in an approved manner to prevent the ingress
of moisture.
7.16 Cable Trench Work
op V1
A) Excavation and backfilling of cable trench work shall be carried out by the
Contractor.
B) The Contractor shall supply and lay the sand bedding, cables, sand blinding,
cable cover tiles and marking tape. He shall also supply and lay cable route
C -
marker posts after the backfilling and top soiling has been carried out.
y
C
C) Sanding and laying of all cables shall satisfy the following:
i. Cable depths shall be assessed from the finished ground level
C
unless otherwise directed by DMAT.
ii. HV cables shall be laid at a depth of 1,000mm.
Q
iii. LV cables shall be laid at a depth of 600mm.

iv. HV and LV cables may be run in the same trench but shall be
staggered. However, where necessary to pass through ductwork,
cables shall be laid vertically above each other with the HV cables at
the lowest level with a good sand blinding forming the sand bedding for
the LV cables.
v. Before laying in cables, the Contractor shall inspect the trench to
ensure that the bottom is of a smooth and firm contour and free from all
sharp materials or obstructions.
vi. Cable bedding within the trenches shall be formed by a 200mm sand
layer.
vii. Cables shall be laid with adequate separation and shall be “snaked” to
avoid tension during backfilling operations and subsequent settlement.
viii. Before sanding and backfilling, all laid cables shall be inspected by
DMAT with a further inspection following sanding and tiling but before
backfilling.
ix. After cables have been laid, they shall be covered by a further 200mm
of sand, which shall be well tamped around the cables. Mechanical
pruners shall not be used for this work.
x. Install warning tape along entire length of direct buried cable, within
75mm of grade.
xi. After sanding, cable cover tiles shall be placed in position to overlap the
cables by a minimum of 50mm either side of the cables.
PAGE 46

xii. The Contractor shall carry out backfilling and shall ensure that cable
cover tiles are undisturbed and that large rocks, stones and the like are
eliminated from backfill spoil.
xiii. After backfilling, the Contractor shall reinstate to finished ground level
and lay in position the necessary cable route markers at a maximum of
10m apart and at any change in direction.
D) The Contractor shall provide cable route markers to the approval of DMAT and
engraved “Electricity Cables”, or other suitable legend, with the appropriate
voltage.
7.17 Cable Segregation
op V1
A) Only conductors carrying signals of the same instrumentation signal category
shall be contained within any one multi-core cable.
B) In each instrumentation signal category, a further segregation is required to
ensure that conductors forming part of an intrinsically safe circuit are contained
within multi-core cables reserved solely for such circuits.
C -
y
C
C) High integrity signals, such as data transmission or critical shutdown signals
shall be contained in separate cables.
D) ICA/Telemetry cables sharing a cable tray, duct or route with power cables shall
C
be avoided. Power cables are defined as a.c. cables above 50V with a 10A
rating. Where this is not practicable, a minimum maintained separation between
cables should be provided in accordance with Table 7-2.
Q
E) Where the maximum current exceeds 100A or the voltage exceeds 650V, the
minimum segregation shall be 1,200mm. For higher ratings, the segregation
shall be progressively increased: e.g. 2,000mm from a 33kV cable.
F) Where the length of an enforced parallel run between power and ICA/Telemetry
cables is greater than 500 metres, a progressive “pro- rata” increase in the
segregation distance shall apply.
G) The segregation distances shall be maintained by positive means and shall
apply to both aboveground and belowground installations.
H) Where a crossover between power and ICA/Telemetry cables is unavoidable,
cables shall be arranged to cross at right angles. The number of crossovers
shall be kept to a minimum.
I) Where cable installations are of a restrictive nature, such as entries into
buildings, panels etc., relaxation of the minimum segregation distance
requirement from a power cable(s) is acceptable following approval from DMAT.
The minimum segregation distance shall then be the distance determined by the
length of the parallelism at the restrictive section of the installation.
J) Where a manufacturer’s installation specification requires greater segregation
than detailed in Table 7-2, such as for data highway cables etc., the Contractor
shall comply with the manufacturer’s segregation specification.
PAGE 47

Table 7-2: Cable Segregation
Distance over which parallelism Minimum segregation distance requirement (in

exists between signal and power mm)
cables in metres power cable Instrumentation signal classification category to
BS 6739
Cat. 2 Cat. 3
Maximum 0 to <3 50 50
current 10A at any 3 to <10 100 100

phase voltage up to
250V ac or dc 10 to <25 100 150
op V1
25 to <100 150 200
Maximum current
0 to <3
100 <250 100
200 150
250
50A
3 to <10 150 200
at any
C -
y
phase voltage up to
C 10 to
250 to <100
< 500 200
250 250
300
650V ac 100 to <3
<250 275 350
Maximum 0 to 175 250
C
current 3 to <10 200 300
250 to <100
< 500 350 450
Q
100A at any phase 10 to 250 450

voltage up
100 to <250 350 525
to 650V ac
250 to < 500 500 650
7.18 Wiring Methods

A) Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Only use building wire in type of conduit
specified in Section 16111: Conduit System.
B) Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Only use building wire in type of conduit
specified in Section 16111: Conduit System.
C) Above Accessible Ceilings: Only use building wire in type of conduit specified in
Section 16111: Conduit System.
D) Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Only use armoured cable with jacket.
E) Exterior Locations: Only use building wire in type of conduit specified in Section
16111: Conduit System or indicated on the Drawings.
F) Underground Installations: Only use armoured cable with jacket.
G) The selection of braided cable for use with Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs) is
defined in Section 16483: Variable Frequency Drives.
PAGE 48

7.19 Installation
A) Install cable in accordance with the NECA "Standard of Installation", BS7671 or
other national standard as directed by DMAT.
B) Solid conductor may be used for small power and lighting feeders and branch
circuits 2.5mm² and smaller subjected to the approval of DMAT.
C) Use stranded conductors for control circuits.
D) Use conductor not smaller than 2.5mm² for power and lighting circuits.
E) Use conductor not smaller than 1.5mm² for control circuits.
F) Pull all conductors into conduit and trunking at same time.
op V1
G) Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wires 25mm² and larger.
H) Support cables above accessible ceiling, using cable trays and plastic cable ties
to support cables from the structure. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels.
I) Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panel boards.
J) C -
Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
y
K)
C
Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full capacity of conductors with no
perceptible temperature rise.
C
L) Terminate aluminium conductors if any with tin-plated aluminium-bodied
compression connectors only. Fill with anti-oxidant compound before installing
conductor.
Q
M) Use suitable reducing connectors or mechanical connector adapters for

connecting aluminium conductors to copper conductors.
N) Use proprietary insulated connectors for copper conductor splices and taps.
PAGE 49

8. CONDUIT SYSTEMS (SECTION 16111)

B) Conduit sizes shall be selected to allow sufficient capacity of cables to be
installed in accordance with BS 7671.
C) A minimum of 25% of free usable space shall be allowed for any future
installation of cables.
op V1
D) Conduits shall confirm to requirements as specified in BS 7671, BS EN 61386-
1 (IEC 61386-1), BS 4607 and ANSI/IEEE C2 2002 or other equivalent
standard as applicable.
E) Minimum size of conduit shall be 20mm unless specified otherwise.
C -
F) The maximum size of conduits installed in a slab above Grade level crossing
y
C
each other shall be 20mm.
G) Conduits installed in concrete or underground shall be a continuous length (i.e.
no junction boxes) of thick-wall non-metallic type conduit.
C
H) Where conduits are installed outdoors above Grade, it shall be of rigid steel or
aluminium type or intermediate metal conduit.
Q
I) Thick-wall non-metallic conduit shall be used for installations in wet and damp
locations.
J) Thick-wall non-metallic conduit shall be used for installations in concealed dry
locations.
K) Rigid steel or aluminium conduit shall be used for installations in exposed
locations.
8.2 Metal Conduit

A) Rigid Steel Conduit shall comply with the requirements as specified in ANSI
C80.1, BS EN 61386-1 (IEC 61386-1) or other approved standard.
B) Rigid Aluminium Conduit shall comply with the requirements as specified in
ANSI C80.5, BS EN 61386-1 (IEC 61386-1) or other approved standard.
C) Fittings and Conduit Bodies shall comply with the requirements as specified in
ANSI/IEEE C2 2002, BS EN 61386-1 (IEC 61386-1) or other approved
standard.
8.3 PVC Coated Metal Conduit

A) Rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating of 0.1mm thick shall comply with
the requirements as specified in NEMA RN 1 or other approved standard.
B) Fittings and Conduit Bodies shall comply with the requirements as specified in
ANSI/NEMA FB 1, BS EN 61386-1 (IEC 61386-1) or other approved standard.
8.4 Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit

A) Flexible metal conduit shall be of interlocked steel or aluminium construction.
PAGE 50

B) Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be of interlocked steel or aluminium

construction with PVC jacket.
C) Fittings and Conduit bodies shall comply with the requirements as specified in
8.5 Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)

A) Electrical metallic tubing shall be constructed of galvanized tubing confirming
to ANSI C 80.3.
B) Fittings and Conduit Bodies shall comply with the requirements as specified in
op V1
8.6 Non-Metallic Conduit
A) Non-metallic conduit shall conform to NEMA TC 2; Schedule 80 PVC, BS
4607 or other approved standard.
B) Fittings and Conduit bodies shall comply with the requirements as specified in
C -
NEMA TC3 or other approved standard.
y
C
8.7 Installation
C
A) Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." or other
National Standard or Code of Practice to the approval of DMAT.
Q
B) Conduit systems shall be appropriately sized and installed in accordance with

the manufacturers’ instructions.
C) Conduit shall be attached to buildings, structures and surfaces following the
requirements of Section 16190: Supporting Devices.
D) Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.
E) Conduit shall be arranged in parallel and perpendicular to walls to maintain
headroom and present a neat appearance. Adequate clearance shall be
maintained from other services.
F) Conduit shall be installed above accessible ceilings parallel, where
appropriate.
G) All junction boxes shall be accessible.
H) Conduit routed in and under slabs shall be point-to-point.
I) Install no more than the equivalent of two 90° bends between boxes. Use
conduit bodies when making sharp changes in direction, as around beams.
Use factory elbows and a hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate elbows for
metal conduit larger than 50mm size.
J) Provide appropriate fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where
the conduit crosses seismic, control and expansion joints.
K) Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit.
L) The conduit system shall be suitably protected against ingress of dirt and
moisture. To avoid moisture traps, provide junction boxes fitted with drains at
low points in the conduit system.
M) The conduit system shall be appropriately ventilated.
PAGE 51

N) Conduits shall be run independently of cosmetic building facades, such as

false ceilings.
O) All horizontal runs shall be supported at no more than 900mm intervals, whilst
vertical runs shall be supported at no more interval than 1,200mm. Where
directional changes occur, support shall be provided at no more than 150mm
either side of the bend.
P) Expansion couplers shall be used in surface installations where straight runs
exceed 8 metres.
Q) Standard junction or adaptable boxes shall be provided at all junctions and at
sharp changes of direction in addition to any special positions where they are
required on Site. Inspection couplers may be used in long runs to facilitate
drawing in cables.
op V1
R) Fixing to surfaces of walls shall be by means of spacer bar saddles securely
fixed by screws. Where conduits are concealed or laid in structural floors they
shall be held in position with substantial fixings of make and pattern to be
approved by DMAT.
C -
y
S) Conduit shall be installed such as to permit complete rewiring without the need
C
to remove false ceiling or carry out builders work.
T) No single conduit serving phased socket outlets lighting points and switches
C
shall contain power from more than one phase.
U) Where the conduit system terminates at any equipment requiring a non-rigid
connection, a flexible conduit shall be installed of the PVC or PVC- sheathed
Q
metallic type fully watertight with purpose made connection adapters.

V) Each flexible connection shall include not less than 400mm length of flexible
conduit, and a separate earth conductor shall be run within the conduit
connected to the earth terminals in the equipment and the fixed conduit run.
The flexible conduit shall not be used as an earth continuity conductor.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 52

9. SURFACE RACEWAYS (SECTION 16112)

A All items described within this section shall comply with the provisions of Section
B Surface-mounted raceways shall confirm to requirements of BS 7671, NFPA 70
(National Electrical Code, U.S.A) or other equivalent standard, as applicable.
C Trunking sizes shall be selected to allow sufficient capacity of cables to be
installed in accordance with ADWEA regulations and BS 7671, as applicable.
op V1
D The surface finish of the raceway shall match with other equipment, as
appropriate.
E The design, type and layout of the surface runway installation shall be subject to
DMAT approval prior to installation.
C -
y
9.2 Surface-Mounted Metal Raceway
C
A) The surface-mounted metal raceway assembly shall comprise of a metal base
and cover to form a raceway intended for surface mounting, except in very small
C
sizes. The cover shall be removable to allow wire installation after the raceway
has been installed as a complete system.
Q
B) The surface-mounted metal raceway shall be constructed of sheet metal

channel with fitted cover.
C) The minimum size of the surface metal raceway shall be 50×50mm.
D) All accessories shall be chosen from the manufacturer's standard range. e) All
accessories shall be complete with removable covers.
9.3 Surface-Mounted Non-Metal Raceway

A) Surface-mounted non-metal raceways shall comprise of a moulded or extruded
non-metallic base and cover.
B) The surface-mounted non-metal raceway shall be constructed of heavy-duty
rigid unplasticised PVC channel with fitted cover. The material shall be self-
extinguishing and be unaffected by the effects of sunlight and/or water.
C) The minimum size of the surface metal raceway shall be 50×50mm. d) All
accessories shall be chosen from the manufacturer's standard range. e) All
accessories shall be complete with removable covers.
9.4 Multi-Outlet Assembly

A) The multi-outlet assembly shall comprise of a surface metal raceway with
receptacles. Receptacle devices may be pre-wired, in which case they are to be
regularly spaced.
B) The multi-outlet assembly shall be constructed of sheet metal channel with fitted
cover and/or with pre-wired receptacles, where specified.
C) Covers and accessories shall be provided, as necessary.
PAGE 53

D) Spacings between receptacles shall be 150, 300 or 450mm.

E) The colour of receptacle shall be subject to the approval of DMAT.
F) All accessories shall be chosen from the manufacturer's standard range.
9.5 Wireway
A) Wireways shall be narrow sheet metal enclosures, rectangular in cross section,
with hinged or removable covers for housing and protecting electric wires and
cable.
B) Wireways shall be general purpose, oil-tight and dust-tight or rain-tight type to
an IP rating suitable for the installation.
op V1
C) Knock-outs shall be as per manufacturer standard.
D) Wireways shall be provided with screwed covers complete with full gasketing.
E) Fittings shall be lay-in type with removable top, bottom, and side; captive
screws. A drip shield shall be included, where specified.
C -
y
9.6 Installation
C
A) Surface-mounted raceways shall be installed to the requirements of BS 7671,
C
NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code, U.S.A) or other equivalent standard, as
applicable and to the satisfaction of DMAT.
B) Ground and bond raceway and wireway as described under Section 16170:
Q
Earthing and Bonding.

C) Provide circuit cable clamps at no greater than 500mm intervals for raceways
installed in vertical runs.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 54

10. UNDERFLOOR DUCTS (SECTION 16113)

B) Underfloor ducts shall confirm to the requirements as specified in BS 7671 or
NFPA 70 or other equivalent standard, as applicable.
C) Underfloor ducts shall conform to the requirements of ADWEA regulations, as
applicable.
op V1
D) The Contractor shall provide drawings clearly showing locations and
arrangements of ducts, service fittings, junction boxes and branch circuiting.
E) Fittings shall be supplied and installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
C -
y
10.2 Underfloor Ducts
C
A) Where applicable, sheet metal raceways shall be designed to be embedded in
a concrete slab. Concealed underfloor duct systems, whether buried within or
C
laid flush on a concrete slab, shall have suitable openings to facilitate the
installation of service fittings.
Q
B) Steel ducts shall be provided with a corrosion-resistant finish.

C) Configuration of the ducting shall be one or two level systems as specified
using ducts in parallel runs.
D) Underfloor ducting shall be selected from the standard range of the
manufacturer. The nominal size shall be 38×76mm. Larger sizes shall be
used, as appropriate. Services shall include:
i. 240V power – standard size.
ii. Telephone – extra-width size.
iii. Computer data – extra-width size.
iv. 415V standard or extra-width size, as specified.
E) Fabricate distribution lengths with standard height preset inserts on 610mm
centres or provide pre-cut 32mm diameter holes on 610mm centres as
specified. Close with flat metal screw plugs.
F) Rectangular or round cover and trim single level junction boxes with adjustable
height shall be used, or as specified. Internal barriers, conduit and duct
entrances and extension rings shall be provided as required.
G) Rectangular or round cover and trim two level junction boxes with adjustable
height shall be used, or as specified. Separate enclosures shall be used for
each service to allow feeder ducts to cross under distribution ducts. Conduit
and duct entrances and extension rings shall be provided as required.
H) Junction Box Cover Plate shall conform to one of the following, as specified:
i. Tile trim plate flush with finished floor.
PAGE 55

ii. Smooth cover plate flush with concrete floor.

iii. Carpet trim holders of proper depth.
I) Supports shall be adjustable and be finally positioned before placement of the
concrete topping.
J) Duct markers shall be used. They shall have corrosion resistant marker
screws, with suitable labelling.
10.3 Trench Ducts

A) Underfloor raceways shall be provided with removable covers flush with the
concrete slab.
op V1
B) Steel trench ducts shall be provided with a corrosion resistant finish.
C) Adjustable compartment dividers shall be provided.
D) Supports shall be adjustable and be finally positioned before placement of the
concrete topping.
C -
E) Cover plates shall conform to one of the following as specified:
y
C
i. 6.4 mm thick steel removable cover plates with gasket joints.
C
ii. Smooth cover plate flush with concrete floor.
iii. Recessed cover plate with tile trim.
Q
10.4 Service Fittings

A) Pedestal Convenience Receptacle shall have satin aluminium housing with
stainless steel device plate in one duplex, two duplex or back-to-back
configurations.
B) Flush Cover Convenience Receptacle shall be of aluminium or brass in duplex
with flap or threaded opening.
C) Pedestal Communication Outlet shall have satin aluminium housing with
stainless steel device plate having one bushed opening 25mm inside
diameter.
D) Flush Cover Communication Outlet shall be of aluminium or brass with
stainless steel device plate having 54×25mm combination threaded opening.
E) Pedestal Communication Fitting shall have satin aluminium housing with
stainless steel device plate having one duplex convenience receptacle with
one bushed opening, 25mm inside diameter.
F) Flush Cover Communication Fitting shall be of aluminium or brass with
stainless steel device plate having 54×25mm combination threaded opening.
10.5 Installation
A) Locate duct in structural slab or concrete topping as specified.
B) Provide expansion fittings with suitable bonding jumper where duct crosses
building expansion joints.
C) Terminate ducts for power service in bottom of the panel board or wireway
using suitable fittings. Terminate in a junction box for extension of the conduit
PAGE 56

to panel board.
D) Terminate ducts for telephone service 50mm above floor in telephone closet or
in the bottom of the telephone cabinet using suitable fittings.
E) Terminate ducts for data services in bottom of data services cabinet using
suitable fittings.
F) Level cover plates flush with finished concrete floor.
G) Place rectangular plates square with wall lines.
H) Securely hold junction boxes and ducts in place during installation to avoid
floating or other movement.
I) Earth and bond duct under provisions of Section 16170: Earthing and
Bonding.
op V1
J) Install underfloor duct with tops of preset inserts below finished floor line.
K) Place a schedule on the inside of cover plate of each junction box indicating
distance to first insert in each direction, measured from the centre of the box.
Use self-adhesive labels for the schedule.
L) Use blank ducts in permanent corridors, passages or lobbies for connecting
C -
parallel ducts less than 1.8m apart for feeder duct from cabinet or panel board
y
C
to the first junction box.
M) Join duct lengths using combination support couplers where practicable.
Provide additional supports at intervals of greater than 1.5m, within 750mm
C
each side of junction boxes, and as close as practicable to elbows, bends and
terminations.
Q
N) Install inserts within 30mm of the edge of junction boxes. Align inserts on
same centres for all services.
O) Do not extend inserts into special floor finishes, such as terrazzo, marble or
wood.
P) Install a duct marker in each insert adjacent to a junction box, at end of each
duct run, on both sides of permanent partitions, and on both sides of change
of direction of a duct. Install markers flush with finished floor material. In
carpeted areas, install marker screws level with carpet backing.
Q) Install surface service fittings after installation of floor finishes. Cut floors as
necessary following the duct manufacturer's recommendations. Replace
damaged floor construction and finish as required.
R) Install trench duct trims flush with cover plates; maintain covering of factory-
applied tape for protection.
S) Terminate ducts for X-ray circuits at wall: interface with wall duct provided
under Section 16112: Surface-mounted Raceways (Trunking).
T) Clean ducts and fittings of debris and dust before installing wire and cable.
U) Pull wire and cable from outlet insert toward junction boxes.
V) Install branch circuit conductors continuously between junction box and the
farthest fitting. Do not cut conductor to make connections to receptacle
devices.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 57

11. CABLE TRAYS (SECTION 16114)

B) Cable tray shall confirm to requirements as specified in BS 7671, NFPA 70 or
other equivalent standard as applicable.
C) Cable tray specification shall be in accordance with ADWEA regulations.
D) The Contractor shall provide drawings clearly show locations of trays, service
op V1
fittings, junction boxes, and branch circuiting arrangements.
E) The type of tray chosen shall be appropriate for the area in which it is installed,
e.g. chemical storage and dosing areas shall not use galvanised tray.
C -
11.2 Ladder-Type Cable Tray
y
C
A) Definition: Two longitudinal side rails connected by individual cross members
(rungs).
C
B) Description: NEMA VE 1, BS EN 61537 (IEC 61537) specified or other
approved standard, ladder type tray.
Q
C) Material: Galvanised steel, stainless steel, aluminium or heavy duty uPVC are
permitted.
D) Finish: ASTM A 123 or other approved standard, hot dipped galvanised after
fabrication for steel trays. Painted with specified colour epoxy or PVC coated as
specified. The material shall be self-extinguishing and non-inflammable and be
unaffected by sunlight or water. It shall be suitable for continuous ambient
temperature of 65°C.
E) Permitted Inside Width: 150, 300, 450, 600, 750 or 900mm.
F) Permitted Inside Depth: 75, 100, 125, or 150mm.
G) Straight Section Rung Spacing: 150, 225, 300 or 450mm.
H) Inside Radius of Fittings: 300, 600 or 900mm.
I) Standard manufacturer's clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer
plates, blind ends, barrier strips, connectors and grounding straps shall be used.
J) Covers: Flanged or Non-flanged as specified, solid or ventilated and flush or
raised cover as specified.
K) Bond trays carrying LV cables to earth with 6mm² PVC insulated copper single
core cable, 25×3mm copper tape if carrying HV cables.
11.3 Trough-Type Cable Tray

A) Definition: Two longitudinal side rails connected by closely spaced rungs or
ventilated bottoms.
B) Description: NEMA VE 1 or BS EN 61537 (IEC 61537) specified or other
approved standard, trough type tray.
PAGE 58

C) Material: Galvanised steel, stainless steel, aluminium or heavy-duty uPVC are

permitted.
specified. The material shall be self-extinguishing and non-inflammable and
shall be unaffected by sunlight or water. It shall be suitable for continuous
ambient temperature of 65°C.
F) Permitted Inside Depth: 75, 100, 125, or 150mm. g) Inside Radius of Fittings:
300, 600 or 900mm.
G) Standard manufacturer's clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer
op V1
H) Covers: Flanged or Non-flanged as specified, solid or ventilated and flush or
C -
11.4 Solid-Bottom-Type Cable Tray
y
C
A) Definition: Two longitudinal side rails connected by corrugated or reinforced
solid bottom.
C
approved standard, solid bottom cable tray.
Q
permitted.
F) Permitted Inside Depth: 75, 100, 125, or 150mm.
G) Inside Radius of Fittings: 300, 600 or 900mm.
H) Standard manufacturer's clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer
I) Covers: Flanged or Non-flanged as specified, solid or ventilated and flush or
11.5 Channel-Type Cable Tray

A) Definition: Single piece formed into channel. The bottom may be solid or with
ventilation openings.
approved standard, solid bottom or ventilated bottom type cable tray as
specified.
permitted.
PAGE 59

E) Permitted Inside Width: 75 or 100mm.
F) Outside Depth: As specified or indicated.
G) Inside Radius of Fittings: 300, 600 or 900mm as specified or indicated.
H) Standard manufacturer's clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer
I) Covers: Flanged, solid or ventilated cover as specified.
op V1
11.6 Fibreglass Ladder-Type Cable Tray
A) Description: NEMA FG 1 specified or other approved standard, ladder type tray.
B) Material: Fibreglass.
C -
C) Permitted Inside Width: 150, 300, 450, 600, 750 or 900mm.
y
C
D) Permitted Inside Depth: 75, 100, 125, or 150mm.
E) Straight Section Rung Spacing: 150, 225, 300 or 450mm.
C
F) Inside Radius of Fittings: 300, 600 or 900mm.
G) Standard manufacturer's clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer
Q
H) Covers: Flanged or Non-flanged as specified, solid or ventilated and flush or
11.7 Fibreglass Trough-Type Cable Tray

A) Description: NEMA FG 1 specified or other approved standard, trough type tray.
C) Inside Width: 150, 300, 450, 600, 750 or 900mm.
D) Inside Depth: 75, 100, 125 or 150mm.
E) Inside Radius of Fittings: 300, 600 or 900mm.
F) Standard manufacturer's clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer
G) Covers: Flanged or Non-flanged as specified, solid or ventilated and flush or
11.8 Fibreglass Solid-Bottom-Type Cable Tray

A) Description: NEMA FG 1 specified or other approved standard, solid bottom
cable tray.
C) Permitted Inside Width: 150, 300, 450, 600, 750 or 900mm.
D) Permitted Inside Depth: 75, 100, 125 or 150mm.
PAGE 60


G) Covers: Flanged or Non-flanged as specified, solid or ventilated and flush or
11.9 Fibreglass Channel-Type Cable Tray

A) Description: NEMA FG 1 specified or other approved standard, solid bottom or
ventilated as specified, channel type cable tray.
op V1
C) Permitted Inside Width: 75 or 100mm.
D) Outside Depth: As specified or indicated.
C -
y
C
G) Covers: Flanged, solid or ventilated cover as specified.
C
11.10 Warning Signs
Engraved Nameplates: 13mm black letters on yellow laminated plastic nameplate,
Q
engraved with the following wording:

WARNING!
DO NOT USE CABLE TRAY AS WALKWAY, LADDER OR SUPPORT. USE ONLY
AS MECHANICAL SUPPORT FOR CABLES AND TUBING!
11.11 Installation
A) Install metallic cable tray in accordance with NEMA VE 1 or BS EN 61537 (IEC
61537) or other approved standard and local regulations as approved by DMAT.
B) Install fibreglass cable tray in accordance with NEMA FG 1 or other approved
standard and local regulations as approved by DMAT.
C) Trays shall be installed using supporting devices that comply with Section
16190. Provide supports at each connection point, at the end of each run, and
at other points to maintain spacing between supports of 1200mm maximum.
D) Use expansion connectors where required.
E) Provide fire-stopping to maintain the fire rating of an area when passing cable
tray through fire-rated elements.
F) Ground and bond cable tray under the provisions of Section 16170.
i. Provide continuity between tray components.
ii. Use anti-oxidant compound to prepare aluminium contact surfaces before
assembly.
iii. Provide specified cross section copper equipment grounding conductor
through entire length of tray; bond to each component.
iv. Connections to tray may be made using mechanical or exothermic
PAGE 61

connectors.
G) Where specified, install warning signs at 1,500mm centres along cable tray,
located to be visible.
H) All cable tray changes in direction or level shall be made via sets and
adequately sized angles to provide support to the cables.
I) Large single core cables of the same circuit shall be laid and mounted in
purpose-made trefoil cleats.
END OF SECTION
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 62

12. UTILITY COLUMNS (SECTION 16115)

B) Utility Columns shall confirm to requirements as specified in BS 7671, NFPA 70
or other equivalent standard as applicable.
C) Utility Columns specification shall be in accordance with ADWEA regulations as
applicable.
op V1
arrangements of columns, service fittings, junction boxes, and branch circuiting.
12.2 Materials
C -
A) Main Body: Steel or Aluminium.
y
C
B) Cover Plates: Steel, Aluminium or Plastic.
12.3 Components
C
A) Convenience Receptacle Configuration. Receptacles in accordance with
Section 16140. Furnish 4 per column or as specified.
Q
B) Telephone Connector: To meet Etisalat requirements. Furnish 2 per column or

as specified.
C) Data Communications Connector: As specified. Furnish 1 per column or as
specified.
D) Foot: Suitable for floor finish as specified or indicated.
E) Provide concealed top clamp to fasten pole to inverted "T" grid ceiling
suspension member.
12.4 Accessories
A) Trim plates for closing ceiling opening.
B) Flexible cable assembly with connector for branch circuit connections.
12.5 Fabrication
A) Wire utility column with specified cross section copper conductor to outlet box
attached to top of pole. Include flexible cable assembly with connector for
connection to branch circuit.
B) Allow for installation of specified pair telephone cable. Size for specified number
of cables with connectors. Furnish connectors.
C) Allow for installation of specified pair data communication cable. Size for
specified number of cables with connectors. Furnish connectors.
D) Provide full-sized opening or knockout for connection of 25mm² conduit as
specified at top of pole.
PAGE 63

E) Finish: Manufacturer's standard specified colour enamel with wood grain vinyl
accent strips where specified.
12.6 Installation
A) Install utility columns plumb and fasten supports to structure.
B) Make wiring connections to branch circuit outlets using flexible conduit under
provisions of Section 16111.
C) Bond equipment grounding conductor and body of pole to branch circuit
equipment grounding conductor under the provision of Section 16170.
D) Neatly cut openings in ceiling panels. Install trim plate.
op V1
END OF SECTION
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 64

13. DUCT BANKS (SECTION 16118)

A) The Contractor shall provide drawings clearly showing the locations and
arrangements of duct banks, draw pits and manholes.
B) The Contractor shall provide calculations clearly showing that the size and
number of ducts proposed are sufficient for the cable installation.
C) 25% spare ducts shall be provided, in additional to that needed for the
installation, between draw pits or not less than two spare ducts.
op V1
D) Power cables shall be installed in separate ducts from control and
instrumentation cables.
13.2 Rigid Steel Conduit

C -
A) Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1 or other approved standard.
y
C
B) Fittings: NEMA FB 1 or other approved standard, steel.
13.3 Plastic Conduit

C
A) Rigid Plastic Conduit: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 or 80 PVC or as specified, with
fittings and conduit bodies to NEMA TC 3 or other approved standard.
Q
B) Rigid Plastic Underground Conduit: UL 651A, Type A PVC; UL 651A, Type EB

PVC; High-density polyethylene, Schedule 40 or Fibreglass-reinforced epoxy as
specified or indicated.
13.4 Plastic Duct

A) Plastic Utilities Duct: NEMA TC 6; PVC or ABS Type EB or DB as specified or
other approved standard.
B) Plastic Utility Duct Fittings: NEMA TC 9 or other approved standard.
C) Plastic Communications Duct and Fittings: NEMA TC 10, Type EB or DB as
specified or other approved standard.
13.5 Reinforced Resin Conduit

A) Conduit and Fittings: NEMA TC 14, Type SW or HW as specified or other
approved standard.
B) Joining Method: Tapered bell and spigot joints, Threaded joints or Saw-cut
system as specified.
13.6 Draw Pits

A) Draw pits shall be sufficiently sized to allow cables to be pulled through them
and their associated ducts without causing damage by exceeding the minimum
bending radius of a cable. Sharp changes of direction of cables at drawpits shall
be avoided.
B) The base section of each drawpit shall include 75mm deep x 350mm round
PAGE 65

sump with cast sleeve and two 25mm ground rod openings.
C) The top section of each drawpit shall include 1000mm diameter or other
approved size and shape grooved opening for frame and cover. Each cover
shall be marked ‘ELECTRIC’ or ‘TELEPHONE’ or as directed by DMAT to
indicate the utility.
D) Duct Entry Provisions: Single duct knockouts, Window knockouts or Windows
with plastic duct terminators and diaphragms.
E) Duct Size: 100 or 150mm.
F) Cable Pulling Irons: Use galvanised rod and hardware. Locate opposite each
duct entry. Provide watertight seal.
G) Cable Rack Inserts: Minimum load rating 365kg or as specified. Locate at
op V1
specified or indicated distance on centre.
H) Cable Rack Mounting Channel: 38 x 19mm or approved size steel channel,
1.2m or specified length. Provide cable rack arm mounting slots 38mm or at
standard centres.
C -
y
I) Cable Racks: Steel channel, 38 x 19 x 350mm or other approved size, with
C
fastener to match mounting channel.
J) Cable Supports: Porcelain, Maple or other approved type clamps and saddles.
C
13.7 Manholes
Q
A) Manholes shall be designed and constructed in accordance with Specification

02607.
13.8 Accessories
A) Underground Warning Tape: 100 mm wide plastic tape, detectable type,
coloured yellow with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines
shall be laid over the centre of each 300mm of the ducts, 150mm below ground
level.
13.9 Duct Bank Installation

A) The depth of cover in soft ground shall be a minimum of 500mm above the
crown of the duct.
B) Install duct with minimum slope of 100mm per 25 m . Slope duct away from
building entrances.
C) The maximum length of a straight duct run between drawpits shall be 100m.
D) During installation, cut the duct square and de-burr the cut ends. Insert duct to
shoulder of fittings and fasten securely. Join non-metallic duct using adhesive
and fittings recommended by the manufacturer.
E) Install no more than equivalent of one 90° bend between pull points.
F) Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where
required.
G) Terminate duct at manhole entries using end bell.
H) Stagger duct joints vertically in concrete encasement 150mm minimum.
PAGE 66

I) Use suitable separators and chairs installed not greater than 1200mm on
centres.
J) Band ducts together before backfilling or placing concrete.
K) Securely anchor duct to prevent movement during concrete placement.
L) Provide minimum 75mm or other specified concrete cover at bottom, top and
sides of duct bank.
M) Provide a suitable pull string installed in each empty duct.
N) Swab duct. Use suitable caps to protect installed duct against entrance of dirt
and moisture.
op V1
END OF SECTION
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 67

14. UNDERCARPET CABLE (SECTION 16125)

B) Under-carpet cable shall confirm to requirements as specified in BS 7671,
NEMA UC 2 – Under Carpet Power Distribution Systems, NFPA 70 or other
equivalent standard as applicable.
C) The specification shall be in accordance with latest edition of local and
international regulations e.g. ADWEA, Etisalat, NEMA, ASTM, BS etc.
op V1
arrangements of fittings. This shall include detailed routing and termination
arrangements.
C -
14.2 Flat Conductor Power Cable
y
C
A) Definition: Flat power cable assembly listed for installation under modular
carpet.
C
B) Description: Copper conductors, number of circuits per cable as specified.
Provide isolated ground conductor where specified.
Q
C) Bottom Shield: Abrasion resistant PVC plastic, corrosion-resistant steels or

copper as specified.
D) Top Shield: Corrosion resistant steel or copper as specified.
E) Transition Box: Recessed or surface, wall-mounted type as specified.
F) Provide manufacturers standard transition connectors and fittings, tap and
splice connectors, crimping and notching tools, and adhesive. Furnish isolated
ground adapter for isolated ground circuits where specified.
G) Combination Outlet Fitting: Low profile, direct connecting receptacle
combination fitting with blank for telephone or data cable as specified.
H) Power Outlet Fitting: low profile, direct connecting receptacle fitting.
I) Fitting Finish and Colour: Smooth plastic, colour to match building finish to the
approval of DMAT.
14.3 Undercarpet Telephone Cable

A) Conductors: Flat conductor cable, number of pairs as specified.
B) Cable Termination: Connector or modular plug as specified.
C) Bottom Shield: Abrasion resistant PVC plastic, corrosion-resistant steels or
D) Transition Box: Recessed or surface, wall mounted type as specified.
E) Provide manufacturers standard transition connectors and fittings, tap and
splice connectors, crimping tools, and adhesive.
F) Telephone Outlet Fitting: low profile or regular profile as specified.
PAGE 68

G) Fitting Finish and Colour: Smooth plastic, colour to match building finish to the
approval of DMAT.
14.4 Under carpet Data Cable

A) Data Cable: Flat coaxial conductor cable or as specified.
B) Bottom Shield: Abrasion resistant PVC plastic, corrosion-resistant steel or
C) Impedance: 50, 75 or 90Ω ±5Ω or as specified.
D) Transition Box: Recessed or surface, wall mounted type.
E) Provide manufacturers standard transition connectors and fittings, tap and
op V1
F) Data Cable Outlet Fitting: low profile or regular profile as specified.
G) Fitting Finish and Colour: Smooth plastic, colour to match building finish to the
approval of DMAT.
C -
y
C
14.5 Optical Fibre Under carpet Cable
A) Description: Jacketed optical fibre cable with low-profile construction, suitable
C
for installation under modular carpet.
B) Optical Fibres: 62.5/125 or other approved graded index, specified number of
fibres per cable.
Q
C) Characteristics: 6.0 dB/km attenuation at 850nm wavelength, 100MHz/km

bandwidth or as specified.
D) Provide manufacturers standard transition connectors and fittings, tap and
E) Data Cable Outlet Fitting: low profile or regular profile as specified.
F) Fitting Finish and Colour: Smooth plastic, colour to match building finish to the
approval of DMAT.
14.6 Installation
A) Use manufacturers’ standard cutting and notching tools.
B) Clean, sweep, and vacuum floor slab.
C) Verify the existing conditions prior to beginning work.
D) Verify that floor surfaces are properly prepared according to flat conductor cable
manufacturers’ recommendations.
E) Install connectors for telephone and data cables. Co-ordinate configuration and
arrangement with installed systems.
F) Install flat conductor cable in an area when construction traffic has been
restricted and floor surfaces are ready for modular carpet installation.
G) Do not permit traffic over flat conductor cable before modular carpet is installed.
Provide appropriate barriers and covers.
PAGE 69

14.7 Field Tests

A) Inspect and test flat conductor power cable, flat conductor telephone and data
cable for continuity and short circuits before energising.
B) Energise cable before installing modular carpet to check for proper functionality.
C) Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, or other approved standard as
directed by DMAT.
END OF SECTION
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 70

15. BOXES (SECTION 16130)

B) Boxes shall confirm to requirements as specified in BS 7671, BS 6220, NFPA
70 or other equivalent standard, as applicable.
International regulations e.g. ADWEA, Etisalat, NEMA, ASTM, etc.
op V1
D) The Contractor shall provide drawings clearly showing locations and fixing
arrangements for each box.
15.2 Outlet Boxes

C -
A) Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes shall comply with NEMA OS 1, BS 4662, BS 5733 or
y
C
B) For boxes supporting luminaries, they shall be rated for the combined weight of
equipment supported; include 13mm male fixture studs, where required.
C
C) Non-metallic Outlet Boxes shall comply with NEMA OS 2, BS 4662, BS 5773 or
Q
D) Cast Boxes shall comply with NEMA FB 1, Type FD or other approved standard.
Aluminium or cast ferro-alloy shall be used, as specified. Suitable gasket covers
shall be provided by the box manufacturer.
E) Outlet boxes in hazardous area applications shall be rated accordingly.
15.3 Floor Boxes

A) Floor Boxes shall comply with NEMA OS 1 or other approved standard. They
shall be fully- or semi-adjustable, 38mm deep, unless specified otherwise.
B) They shall be made from cast metal or formed steel as specified.
C) They shall be round, rectangular or octagonal shaped as specified.
15.4 Pull and Junction Boxes

A) Sheet Metal Boxes shall comply with NEMA OS 1 or other approved standard.
B) Junction Boxes shall comply with Section 16160.
C) Surface-mounted cast metal boxes shall comply with NEMA 250, Type 4 or 6 as
specified; flat-flanged, surface mounted junction box:
i. Material: Galvanised cast iron or cast aluminium as specified.
ii. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket and stainless steel
cover screws.
D) Buried cast metal boxes shall comply with NEMA 250, Type 6 as specified;
outside or inside flanged and recessed cover box for flush mounting.
i. Material: Galvanised cast iron or cast aluminium as specified.
PAGE 71

ii. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket and stainless steel
cover screws.
iii. Cover Legend: "ELECTRIC”.
E) Fibreglass hand holes: Die-moulded glass fibre hand holes.

F) Cable Entrance: Pre-cut 150×150mm cable entrance at centre bottom of each
side.
G) Cover: Glass fibre weatherproof cover with non-skid finish.
H) Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations and surface-
mounted cast metal box elsewhere.
op V1
15.5 Installation
A) Install boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation" or other
approved standard to meet ADWEA Regulations.
B) Set wall-mounted boxes at elevations convenient to accommodate mounting
heights. C -
y
C
C) All electrical boxes are to be shown on location drawings in approximate
locations unless dimensioned otherwise. The box location can be adjusted up to
C
3m if required to accommodate site needs.
D) Maintain headroom and present a neat mechanical appearance.
Q
E) Install pulls boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in
unfinished areas only.
F) In inaccessible ceiling areas, install outlet and junction boxes no more than
150mm from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaries.
G) Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements.
H) Co-ordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters,
benches and backsplashes.
I) Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaries positioned as shown on reflected ceiling
plan.
J) Align adjacent wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar
devices.
K) Use flush-mounting outlet box in finished areas.
L) Locate flush-mounting boxes in masonry walls to require cutting of masonry unit
corner only. Co-ordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.
M) Do not install flush-mounting boxes back-to-back in walls; provide minimum
150mm separation instead.
N) Provide minimum 600mm separation in acoustic-rated walls.
O) Secure flush-mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately
position to allow for surface finish thickness.
P) Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush-mounting outlet boxes between studs.
Q) Install flush-mounting boxes without damaging wall insulation or reducing its
effectiveness.
R) Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet boxes.
PAGE 72

S) Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires.

T) Support boxes independently of conduit.
U) Use gang boxes where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use
sectional boxes.
V) Use gang boxes with plaster rings for single device outlets.
W) Use cast outlet boxes in exterior locations.
X) Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on grade; formed steel boxes are
acceptable for other installations.
Y) Set floor boxes level.
op V1
END OF SECTION
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 73

16. WIRING DEVICES (SECTION 16140)

B) Wiring Devices shall confirm to requirements of BS 7671, NEMA WD 1, NEMA
WD 6, NFPA 70 or other equivalent standard, BS EN 60669-1, BS 5518, BS
1363, BS 546, BS 7288, etc., as applicable.
international regulations e.g. ADWEA, Etisalat, NEMA, ASTM, etc.
op V1
arrangements of fittings. This shall include detailed routing and termination
arrangements.
C -
16.2 Wall Switches
y
C
A) General duty plate switch of the grid switch pattern to BS EN 60669-1.
B) Finish: White with matt chrome finishes cover.
C
C) Ratings: To match branch circuit and load characteristics.
D) Enclosure: Exterior switches shall be of weatherproof design to suit location and
Q
shall comply with BS EN 60529.
16.3 Wall Dimmers

A) Description: Fused dimmer switch of the grid switch pattern to BS 5518.
B) Finish: White with matt chrome finishes cover.
C) Voltage: 240V.
D) Power Rating: To match the designed load.
E) Accessory Wall Switch: To match dimmer appearance.
16.4 Socket Outlets

A) Switch socket outlets 13A.
i. Where externally-mounted: Switch socket outlets manufactured from tough
polycarbonate to BS 1363 and sealed weatherproof design to suit location.
To be complete with weatherproof plug.
ii. Where internally-mounted: flush Switch socket outlets of the grid switch
pattern to BS 1363 with matt chrome finish.
B) Switch socket 15A outlets shall be ‘round pin’ to BS 546 with matt chrome finish.
C) Residual Current Device (RCD)-protected switch socket outlets to BS 7288 with
30/100/300/500mA (as applicable) tripping current to meet ADWEA regulations.
Externally mounted units shall use a sealed, weatherproof design to suit the
location.
D) Line jack telephone and handset outlets approved for use with
PAGE 74

telecommunication systems provided by Emirates Telecommunication

Corporation (Etisalat).
E) Colour: Wiring devices shall be white with matt chrome finish covers with heat-
cured powder lacquer finish.
F) Industrial sockets shall be equipped with switch and fuse carrier rated 16A,
415V 3-phase, 5-pin, provided with plug top of the same make to conform to BS
4343 or approved equal standard.
16.5 Industrial Plugs and Sockets

A) All items described within this section shall comply with the provisions of Section
op V1
B) Plug and Sockets, wherever specified, shall be of Industrial type confirming to
BS EN 60309-2 (IEC 60309-2).
C) Sockets shall be mounted on the panels/enclosures/junction boxes as applicable
and be supplied with appropriate plugs.
C -
D) The maximum rating of the plugs and sockets used shall be 125A.
y
E)
C
Plug pins and socket contacts shall be of the self-cleaning and calibrated type
manufactured from solid brass.
C
F) External screws and springs shall be made of non-corrodible material.
G) Plugs, connectors and sockets bodies shall be manufactured from high-impact,
Q
self-extinguishing, durable and stable engineering plastics; resistant to chemical

reaction including hydro-chemicals, acids, dangerous gases and salines, etc.
H) Moulding material, wherever used in the plugs and sockets, shall be free from
PVC, Cadmium and Halogen.
I) Plugs and sockets shall be colour coded so that the voltage that at which they
are operating can easily be identified.
J) The design of plugs and sockets shall ensure that only the correct plug can be
inserted in each socket.
K) Plugs and sockets used for generator connections shall be of appliances INLET
type.
L) Plug and sockets shall be designed to provide IP67 rating.
16.6 Wall Plates

A) Decorative Cover Plate: matt chrome blank plate with heat-cured powder
lacquer finish.
B) Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketted cast metal or tough polycarbonate to
meet minimum IP 54 enclosure rating.
16.7 Floor-Mounted Service Fittings

A) Pedestal Switch Socket Outlets:
i. Switch socket outlets to BS 1363.
ii. Housing: Satin aluminium or as specified.
iii. Device Plate: Stainless steel or as specified.
PAGE 75

B) Flush Cover Switch Socket Outlets:

i. Switch socket outlets to BS 1363 with flush covers.
ii. Material: Aluminium or brass as specified.
C) Pedestal Communication Outlet: i). Housing: Satin aluminium or as specified. ii).
Device Plate: Stainless steel or as specified.
D) Flush Cover Communication Outlet: Brass or aluminium as specified.
E) Pedestal Combination Fitting:
i. Housing: Satin aluminium or as specified.

ii. Device Plate: Stainless steel or as specified.
op V1
F) Flush Cover Combination Fitting: Brass or aluminium finishes as specified.
G) Protective Ring: Brass or aluminium finishes as specified.
H) Split Nozzle: Brass or aluminium finishes as specified.
I)
C -
Carpet Ring: Brass or as specified.
y
C
16.8 Poke-Through Fittings
C
A) Description: Assembly comprising service fitting, poke-through component, fire
stops and smoke barriers, and junction box for conduit termination.
Q
B) Fire Rating: 3 hours or as specified.

C) Service Fitting:
i. Type: Pedestal or flush as specified.
ii. Housing: Satin aluminium or as specified.
iii. Device Plate: Stainless steel or plastic as specified.
16.9 Access Floor Box

A) Description: Sheet metal box suitable for mounting in access floor system.
B) Size: To suit service outlets specified.
C) Cover: Impact resistant plastic with finish to match surrounding building finish to
the approval of DMAT.
D) Switch socket outlet: As specified.
E) Communications Outlet: As specified.
F) Data Socket: As specified.
16.10 Cords and Caps

A) Attachment plugs shall be constructed to match receptacle configuration at
outlet provided for equipment.
B) Cord construction shall be suitable for connected load, and rating of branch
circuit over-current protection to the approval of DMAT.
C) Make electrical connections in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D) Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquid-tight
PAGE 76

flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.

E) Make wiring connections using wire and cable with insulation suitable for
temperatures encountered in heat producing equipment.
F) Provide switch socket outlet where connection with attachment plug is indicated.
Provide cord and plug where field-supplied attachment plug is indicated.
G) Provide suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet
boxes and equipment connection boxes.
16.11 Installation
A) Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation" or other standards as
directed by DMAT.
op V1
B) Ensure that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for
connection to wiring devices.
C) Ensure that openings in access floor are in proper locations.
C -
D) Install devices are plumb and level.
y
C
E) Install switches with ON position down.
F) Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating
C
for ganging as instructed by the manufacturer.
G) Do not share neutral conductors on the load side of dimmers.
Q
H) Install socket outlets with earthing pole on top.

I) Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding
conductor.
J) Install decorative plates on switch, socket outlet and blank outlets in finished
areas.
K) Connect wiring devices with screw terminals.
L) Install galvanised steel plates or tough polycarbonate cover plates on outlet
boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas and above accessible ceilings.
M) Install protective rings or split nozzle as specified on active flush cover service
fittings.
N) Co-ordinate installation of access floor boxes with access floor system
O) Co-ordinate the installation of wiring devices with underfloor duct service fittings.
16.12 Mounting Height of Wiring Devices

A) Install wall switch 1,400mm above finished floor level.
B) Install socket outlet 400mm above finished floor level.
C) Install socket outlet 150mm above counter level (if fitted).
D) Install dimmer 1,400mm above finished floor level.
E) Install telephone jack 400mm above finished floor level.
F) Install telephone jack for side-reach wall telephone to position top of telephone
at 1,400mm above finished floor level.
G) Install telephone jack for forward-reach wall telephone to position top of
PAGE 77

telephone at 1,200mm above finished floor level.
16.13 Field Tests

A) Inspect each wiring device for defects.
B) Test each device/circuit in accordance with BS 7671 or other equivalent
standard.
END OF SECTION
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 78

17. PILOT DEVICES (SECTION 16149)

17.1 General
B) Pilot devices shall confirm to BS EN 60947-5.1. They shall be round in shape,
22mm diameter and be suitable for mounting on a cubicle door.
C) Pilot devices shall have two main parts: the Operator and the ‘snap-on’ contact
block. The mounting between a cubicle door and the Operator shall be
achieved through a ‘snap-on’ flange.
op V1
D) Pilot devices shall be designed to provide a minimum protection of IP65 when
installed in the enclosures. Terminals shall be protected to IP2X.
17.2 Push Buttons

C -
y
C
A) Push buttons shall comply with the following unless otherwise specified in the
particular requirements:
i. Standard design.
C
ii. Mushroom type where specified.
iii. Non-illuminated.
Q
iv. Anodised Aluminium Bezel.

v. 1N/O+1N/C configuration (as a minimum).
vi. RED button for STOP function.
vii. GREEN button for START function [Recessed type].
viii. Mushroom RED for EMERGENCY STOP function.
ix. BLACK button for Manual RESET function.
x. GREY button for LAMP TEST function.
xi. Push buttons for other functions, where applicable, shall be subject to the
approval of DMAT.
17.3 Selector Switches

A) Selector switches shall comply with the following unless otherwise specified in
the particular requirements:
i. Standard design.
ii. Lever type cam operated.
iii. Twist Release/Push-Pull/Key type where specified and/or approved by
DMAT.
iv. Non-illuminated.
v. Anodised Aluminium Bezel.
vi. Number of positions to suit the required logic.
PAGE 79

vii. BLACK colour.

viii. 1N/O+1N/C configuration (as a minimum).
17.4 Pilot Lights (Indicators)

A) Indicators shall comply with the following specifications unless specified
otherwise in the particular requirements:
i. Low voltage transformer latch type 110V 50Hz Primary.
ii. Bulbs shall be long-life neon types rated at least 10% higher than the rating
of the voltage provided.
iii. RED colour for RUN/ON indication.
op V1
iv. GREEN colour for STOP/OFF indication.
v. AMBER colour for TRIP/FAULT indications.
vi. WHITE colour for SUPPLY AVAILABLE indication.
C -
vii. BLUE colour for SUPPLY ON indication.
y
C
viii. Indicators for other conditions, where applicable, shall be subject to the
approval of DMAT.
C
ix. The pilot light Operator shall be designed to facilitate the simple removal of
a bulb from the front of the unit without requiring any tool.
x. LEDs are not permitted unless forming a built-in feature of a standalone
Q
product/controller to indicate operation status.
17.5 Remote Push Button Stations

A) Remote push button stations, where specified, shall comply with the following
specifications:
i. IP66 metal/thermoplastic enclosure for standard applications.
ii. IP68 metal/thermoplastic enclosed pilot devices when used in dry well
installation (submersible pumps) subject to flooding shall be suitable for the
Hazardous Area classification of the dry well. The devices shall be located
above the top of the motor cooling valve assembly.
iii. Suitable for panel and base mounting. Pilot devices used shall conform to
this specification. Their IP rating shall be at least IP65 or that of the
enclosure, whichever is greater.
17.6 Enclosed Emergency and Safety Switches

A) Emergency and safety switches where specified shall confirm to BS EN 60947-
3,
B) Utilization Category AC23 and comply with the following specifications:
i. IP65 metal/thermoplastic enclosure suitable for installation (e.g. Hazardous
Area classified, if needed, etc.).
ii. Visible operating handle with marking OFF/ON positions.
iii. Lockable in the ‘Off’ position by use of padlocks.
iv. Suitable for base/wall mounting.
PAGE 80

v. The breaking capacity shall be more than the largest circuit it breaks.
vi. The emergency switch shall have a red handle on a yellow background
END OF SECTION
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 81

18. SMALL ENCLOSURES (SECTION 16160)

B) Small enclosures, cabinet and junction boxes shall confirm to the requirements
specified in BS 7671, BS EN 60947-4-1, NEMA 250, NEMA ICS 4, NFPA 70 or
other approved equivalent standards, as applicable.
International regulations e.g. ADWEA, Etisalat, NEMA, ASTM, etc.
op V1
D) The Contractor shall provide drawings clearly showing locations and fixing
arrangements of each enclosure.
E) The use of small enclosures, cabinets and junction boxes shall be limited to
C -
enclosing terminal blocks and low voltage (not exceeding 415V) electrical field
y
devices e.g. transmitters, sensors, switches, sockets etc., excluding main motor
C
control and switchgear.
C
18.2 Hinged Cover Enclosures
A) Construction shall be of galvanised steel of minimum thickness 2mm.
Q
B) The covers shall have a lift-off hinge held closed by lockable car-type handles.
Doors shall close onto neoprene or soft rubber sealing strips held in place
mechanically.
C) The interior shall be suitable for mounting terminal blocks and electrical
components as appropriate. The backboard finish shall be white enamel.
D) The finish of the enclosure shall be in accordance with Section 16480: Factory
Built Assembly (FBA).
E) The enclosure shall be at least IP 54 or greater depending on the application.
18.3 Cabinets And Junction Boxes

A) Construction shall be of galvanised steel of minimum thickness 2mm.
B) The Cabinet/Junction box shall be sized to suite equipment requirements and to
allow easy access to all internal components.
C) The interior shall be suitable for mounting terminal blocks and electrical
components as appropriate. The backboard finish shall be white enamel.
D) The front shall have a lift-off hinge held closed by lockable car-type handles.
Doors shall close onto neoprene or soft rubber sealing strips held in place
mechanically.
E) Junction boxes with a bolted cover enclosing small quantities of terminals are
permitted subject to the approval of DMAT.
F) Knockouts: To suit conduit and circuiting arrangements.
G) Internal metal barriers shall be provided to separate wiring of different systems
and voltages.
PAGE 82

H) The finish of the enclosure shall be in accordance with Section 16480: Factory
Built Assembly (FBA) or the manufacturers’ standard.
I) The enclosure shall be at least IP 54 or greater depending on the application.
18.4 Terminal Blocks

A) Terminal Blocks: IEC 60947-7-1 or BS EN 60947-7-1: Terminal blocks for copper
conductors.
B) Power Terminals: Unit construction type with closed back and tubular pressure
screw connectors, rated 600V.
C) Signal and Control Terminals: Modular construction type, suitable for channel
mounting, with tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 600V.
op V1
D) Provide ground bus terminal block, with each connector bonded to enclosure.
E) Special terminals: e.g. disconnect type, diode type, fuse type etc. according to
the application requirements or as directed by DMAT, shall be provided.
C -
y
18.5 Installation
C
A) Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation" and other standards as
directed by DMAT.
C
B) Enclosures and boxes shall be installed plumb and anchored securely to a wall or
other appropriate structure. They shall be supported at each corner in
Q
accordance with Section 16190: Supporting Devices.

C) Remove dirt, dust and debris from the enclosure upon completion.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 83

19. EARTHING AND BONDING (SECTION

16170)
B) The Earthing system shall confirm to requirements as specified in IEC 60364-
5-54, BS 7430, BS 7671, NFPA 70 National Electrical Code or other approved
equivalent standard.
op V1
C) The specification shall be strictly in accordance with latest edition of ADWEA
Regulations.
D) The Contractor shall provide suitable drawings and calculations clearly
showing the earthing locations and arrangements.
C -
y
C
19.2 Lightning Protection System
A) The lightning system shall be designed and installed in accordance with BS EN
C
62305 (IEC 62305).
19.3 Earthing System Description

Q
A) To maintain high operational availability of electrical installation.

B) To eliminate the problems often caused by undesired potential difference
between different parts of an installation leading to malfunctioning, damage to
installation and human lives.
C) To provide segregated earthing system as follows:
i. Electronic earth "Clean Earth".
ii. Electrical safety earth and panels steelwork earth "Dirty Earth".
iii. Telephone system earth.
iv. Lightning protection system earth.
D) The earthing system shall be designed to include the following as a minimum:

i. Preventing voltage discharge to earth.
ii. Protecting persons and property.
iii. Protection against occurrence of over voltages due to transients and
spikes.
iv. Protection against discharge of static electricity.
v. Protection against lightning.
vi. Protection against stray currents.
vii. Facilitating supervision and measurement.
PAGE 84

19.4 Rod Electrodes

A) Material: Copper or Copper-clad steel as specified.
B) Diameter: 19mm or as specified.
C) Length: 3,600mm or as specified.
D) Electrodes shall be provided with hardened tips and caps to avoid distortion
when being driven into the ground.
19.5 Active Electrodes

A) Description: Metallic salt-filled copper tube electrode.
op V1
B) Shape: Straight or L-shaped as specified.
C) Length: 2,400mm or as specified.
D) Connector: U-bolt pressure plate.
C -
19.6 Mechanical Connectors
y
C
A) Material: Bronze.
C
19.7 Sizing Of Earth Conductor
A) The earth conductor for protective earthing and system earthing shall be sized
Q
to carry fault current for as long as it takes to disconnect the fault without
sustaining damage or causing any damage to nearby objects.
B) The sizing requirements for installations with system voltages up to 1,000V
shall confirm to ADWEA regulations.
C) For installations with system voltages exceeding 1,000V that involves short
circuit currents and tripping times that may impact upon the supplying electrical
distribution system consult ADWEA for their requirements.
19.8 Earth Pit Components

A) Earth pit: DN300×600mm concrete pipe with belled end or preformed concrete
chamber with minimum dimensions of 300×300×600mm deep. The top of the
chamber shall be at finished ground level.
B) Pit Cover: Cast iron or concrete with legend "EARTH" embossed on cover and
to be furnished with recessed lifting hook.
C) For test purposes, earth pit shall contain a disconnecting link for the earth
electrode it contains, the head of which shall be within the disconnection
chamber. The disconnecting link shall be of tinned copper, be not less than the
connecting strip cross sectional area and have a generous contact area.
D) Disconnecting bolts, nuts, locknuts and washers shall be made from phosphor
bronze.
19.9 Earthing System Installation

A) Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve specified resistance
to ground.
PAGE 85

B) Where an earth resistance of 1Ω or less is not obtainable, a borehole with a

main electrode extended and installed deep enough to reach the water table
or permanent moisture level shall be used.
C) No soil conditioner agent or conductive cement shall be permitted for
reducing soil resistivity.
D) Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to the reinforcing steel
in the foundation footing. Bond all reinforcing steel together.
E) Bond together metal sidings not attached to the grounded structure and
bond to ground.
F) Bond together reinforcing steel and metal accessories in pool and fountain
structures.
op V1
G) Install transient suppression plate where indicated.
H) Install earth grid under access floors where indicated. Construct grid of
38×4mm bare copper tape installed on 600mm centres both ways. Bond
each access floor pedestal to grid.
C -
y
I) Bond together each metallic raceway, pipe, duct and other metal object
C
entering the space under access floors. Bond to underfloor ground grid. Use
a 35mm² copper conductor.
C
J) Provide isolated grounding conductor for circuits supplying solid state
devices, personal computers and other sensitive electronic equipment as
directed by DMAT.
Q
K) Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor

within each feeder and branch circuit trunking. Terminate each end on
suitable lug, bus or bushing.
L) Earth bars and earthing equipment shall be provided for each earthing
system and all main earth electrodes, earthing leads, neutral earth
connections, etc., shall be connected to them.
M) The main earthing conductors shall comprise tinned copper tapes of hard-
drawn, high-conductivity copper strip.
N) Earthing conductors shall be adequately sized for the maximum fault current
and in no case shall be smaller than:
i. 50×6mm for High Voltage equipment.
ii. 38×4mm for Low Voltage equipment.
iii. Half the size of phase bar for Factory Built Assemblies.
O) Each earth bar shall be provided with compression type cable lug size16
mm² CSA on both ends.
P) Safety earth shall be connected to a 6mm² earthing stud.
Q) Instruments cabinets, junction boxes and marshalling boxes used for
housing special terminals for instruments interconnection wiring shall be
earthed on one end only to the instrument screen earth.
R) The non-conducting metalwork of all electrical equipment shall be effectively
earthed. Electric drives rated at 7.5kW and above shall be provided with an
earth conductor comprising tinned copper tape of 25×3mm minimum cross
section connected to the main earth system.
PAGE 86

S) On drives of less than 7.5kW, a separate insulated copper cable may be

used for earthing purposes providing the total impedance of earth continuity
system do not exceed 1Ω.
T) Cable armouring or the sheath shall NOT be used as the earth conductor.
Earthing shall be provided by means of a separate, insulated, PVC-
sheathed, copper cable whose insulation is green or green/yellow. It shall
follow the same route as the supply cable and be taped to it at regular
intervals. Alternatively, an integral earth conductor shall be provided as an
additional core within a multicore cable.
U) The lead sheath and/or armour wires on main cables shall be solidly bonded
and earthed to provide additional earth paths. Particular care shall be taken
on cable termination boxes to ensure the cable sheath and armour is
op V1
adequately bonded to the associated item or plant.
V) All connections to the earth tape and any joints in the run of the tape shall be
tinned, riveted, sweated and electrically continuous. The minimum overlap
of any connection shall be equal to the width of the larger of the two tapes.
C -
When less than four rivets are used, they shall be located diagonally across
y
the joint. Final earth connections to motors shall be made by a bolted copper
C
disconnection link to facilitate removal of the motors without the need for
bending the tape. Links shall be located for ease of inspection and testing.
C
W) Earth tapes shall be fixed by means of non-ferrous spacer saddles, drilling
of the conductors is not permitted.
Q
X) Earth conductors within buildings shall be run in ducts or on the underside of

control room floors where possible.
Y) Conduit or trunking shall not be used for earth continuity, but all conduit or
trunking shall be connected to earth. Flexible conduits shall have an
additional external earth connection adequately bonded at both ends.
Z) Where conduit and/or trunking is used to connect equipment not separately
bonded to the earthing system a separate internal earth conductor shall be
run, securely bonded directly to the respective equipment by means of a
separate recognised earth terminal.
AA) Particular care shall be taken to ensure earth continuity across items of
equipment situated within a cable run. Should the design of such equipment
not give an adequate and lasting continuity through its structural body, then
additional earthing and conductors shall be provided to independently bond
the cable sheaths together.
BB) Joints and terminal boxes in underground cables (if approved by DMAT)
shall be bridged by tinned copper of adequate cross section, bonded to the
cable sheath.
CC) Where armoured cables are installed, the armouring shall be bonded to
earth using suitable glands with earthing tails.
DD) Where MICC cables are installed, the outer copper sheath MAY be used as
the earth conductor. MICC/PVC cables shall not be buried directly in the
ground but shall be installed in a non-metallic pipe or tray appropriate to
the application
EE) Substation and generator station systems shall be separately earthed and
shall not be interconnected. Groups of electrodes shall be adequately
spaced apart from each other.
PAGE 87

FF) Each group shall comprise one or more interconnected earth electrodes,
driven to a depth of 2,000mm below the summer water table and with heads
located at a depth to suit the disconnecting chamber position.
GG) The Contractor shall be responsible for any rock drilling necessary for the
installation of the earth electrodes, for the supply and installation of the
concrete disconnecting chamber, and the provision of any chemicals
required to assist in obtaining a satisfactory earth.
HH) The earth electrode interconnection shall be an electrically unbroken ring
using PVC-insulated stranded copper conductor earthing cable sweated to
the test links. The cable be adequately sized and of sufficiently low
resistance to carry the maximum fault current for the clearing time of the
protective equipment without undue temperature rise.
op V1
II) Each group of earth electrodes shall be connected to the station earthing
system by two PVC-insulated stranded copper conductor earthing cables.
The cables shall be sweated to opposite ends of the earth ring and to two
different points on the station earthing system.
JJ)
C -
Groups of earth electrodes shall generally be located as close to the building
y
C
housing the switchgear as practical, and where two groups are required they
shall be located at opposite ends of the building.
KK) The complete earthing system shall be protected against damage by
C
corrosion where necessary.
LL) Interface grounding and bonding with site grounding system and the
Q
lightning protection system.

MM) Provide earth seals for all penetration through waterproof membrane.
19.10 Field Tests

A) Field tests shall be carried out in accordance with Section: 15001 General
M&E Requirements and BS 7671 (or equivalent).
B) The contact resistance of earth electrode for protective or system earthing shall
be monitored to the extent considered necessary with regards to the safety.
C) The resistance shall be checked during commissioning and after any
modifications that might adversely affect the contact resistance.
D) The results of measurements shall be documented for examination. The check
measurements shall be catered for by incorporating test terminals between
earth electrodes and earthing conductors.
E) The resistance of any point in the earth continuity system to the main earth
mass shall not exceed 1Ω.
F) Test results so obtained shall meet ADWEA Regulations and contractor shall
be responsible for obtaining written approval from ADWEA certifying the
installation in compliance with their regulations.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 88

20. SUPPORTING DEVICES (SECTION 16190)

B) Supporting devices shall conform to the requirements of BS 7671, NFPA 70 or
other approved equivalent standard as applicable.
C) The specification shall be strictly in accordance with latest edition of ADWEA
regulations.
op V1
D) All supporting devices shall be used for the specific purpose for which they were
manufactured and satisfactorily support the weight of the equipment, raceways,
assemblies and sub-assemblies etc.
E) The Contractor shall provide appropriate drawings clearly showing the type,
C -
nature, location and arrangement of fixing arrangements.
y
20.2 Construction
C
A) Manufactured Supporting Devices include: Raceway supports, clevis hangers,
C
riser clamps, conduit straps threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze
hangers, wall brackets, and spring steel clamps.
Q
B) Power-Driven Threaded Studs shall not be used unless specifically approved by

DMAT.
C) Supports:
i. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to
carry the loads of equipment and conduit. Consider the weight of wire in
conduit when selecting the appropriate supports.
ii. The strength of each support shall be adequate to carry present and future
load multiplied by a factor of at least four. Where this determination results in
a safety allowance of less than 100kg provide additional strength until this
minimum value is achieved.
iii. Walls of lightweight construction shall be reinforced with strut before hanging
electrical equipment.
D) Anchors and Fasteners:

i. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast insert system, expansion
anchors, powder-actuated anchors and preset inserts as specified.
ii. Steel Structural Elements: Use beams clamps or welded fasteners as
specified.
iii. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors
iv. Hollow masonry, Plaster and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts and
hollow wall fasteners.
v. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors and preset inserts.
vi. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
PAGE 89

vii. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.

E) Finishes: Supports, support hardware and fasteners shall be protected with zinc
coating or with treatment equivalent corrosion resistance using approved
alternative treatment, finish or inherent material characteristic. Products for
outdoor use shall be hot-dip galvanised after fabrication.
20.3 Installation
A) Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B) Provide anchors, fasteners and supports in accordance with NECA “Standard of
Installation” and other standards as directed by DMAT.
C) Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment and conduit.
op V1
D) Do not use spring steel clips and clamps.
E) Obtain permission from DMAT before using powder-actuated anchors.
F) Obtain permission from DMAT before drilling or cutting structural members.
C -
G) Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members
y
C
or use hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength
and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.
C
H) Install surface-mounted cabinets and control panels with minimum of four
anchors.
I) In wet and damp locations, use stainless steel channel supports and stainless
Q
steel hardware to stand cabinets, enclosures and factory built assemblies.

J) Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and control
panels recessed in hollow partitions.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 90

21. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION (SECTION

16195)
B) Identification shall be provided on all equipment, e.g. control panels, MCC,
controllers, raceways, boxes and conductors, devices, etc. in accordance with
BS EN 61346 (IEC 61346), BS EN 61666 (IEC 61666), BS EN 61175 (IEC
op V1
61175) and BS EN 60445 (IEC 60445) standards or other applicable standards
to the approval of DMAT.
C) All labels shall be permanent and be machine generated.
D) NO HANDWRITTEN OR NON-PERMANENT LABELS SHALL BE ALLOWED.
C -
E) Prior to making any label or nameplate for the purpose of identification, the
y
C
Contractor shall submit a detailed schedule indicating nameplate size, lettering
size, colour, material and actual nameplate information for DMAT review and
approval.
C
F) All external labels, nameplates, operational and warning signs shall be provided
in Arabic and English.
Q
G) Material used in making the engraved labels shall be of highest quality suitable
for the environmental and climatic conditions as specified in Section 15001:
General M&E Requirements.
H) Critical devices such as disconnect switches, service feeders and branch circuit
protective feeders shall be legibly labelled to indicate its purpose and point of
origin. The legibility distance shall not be less than 1,500mm.
I) Identification nameplates shall be provided in addition to the manufacturer's
equipment nameplates as required by NEMA, BS, IEC or UL.
J) Warning signs and instruction labels wherever needed shall be provided in
accordance with local regulations of ADWEA, Etisalat, Civil Defence, etc.
K) The Contractor shall clearly show locations and fixing arrangements of
nameplates and labels on suitable drawings.
21.2 Nameplates and Labels

A) Equipment identification nameplates shall be provided for all electrical equipment
including, but not limited to Switchgear, control panels, switchboards, transfer
switches, disconnect switches, transformers, generators, power factor capacitors,
fixed equipment, motor starters, MCC, etc.
B) Sub-classification labels shall be provided for all emergency power system,
junction boxes and pull boxes.
C) External labels shall be clear perspex rear-engraved in Arabic and English with
chamfered edges fixed with stainless steel screws with nuts and flat and lock
washers.
D) Internal labels shall be multi-layered plastic to an approved design engraved in
PAGE 91

Arabic and English, fixed with stainless steel screws.

Alternatively, a purpose-made DIN rail may be used for fixing labels as approved
by DMAT.
E) Adhesive labels shall not be permitted.
F) Internal components labels shall have circuit designations correlated with the
drawings.
G) Labels shall not be attached to trunking covers or other readily removable items.
H) Low and medium voltage equipment enclosures, vaults, doors and fences shall
be provided with "DANGER KEEP OUT" warning sign, showing the appropriate
operating voltage.
op V1
I) Disconnect switches and emergency devices shall have "CAUTION" warning
signs as directed by DMAT.
J) In addition, the following shall be provided for equipment housed on/within a
Control Panel/MCC/BBA, etc.:
C -
y
i. Title labels for electrical distribution and all other control equipment, panels
etc.
C
ii. Function labels for door-mounted equipment.
C
iii. Identification labels for all internal components.
iv. Identification labels for all protective devices (e.g. fuse/MCB type, rating).
Q
v. Title labels for Communication equipment.

vi. Compartments with doors and covers not electrically interlocked to an isolator
shall be provided with an external label - “DANGER, LIVE TERMINALS” with
flash and voltage in red letters on white background in Arabic and English.
vii. Function description label for group of terminal blocks.
K) The letter size shall be such that the wording is clearly legible, and it shall be to
the approval of DMAT.
21.3 Wire and Cable Markers

A) This document shall be read in conjunction with Section 16110: Cables and
Wires.
B) Description: Interlocking ferrules of white insulating material engraved in black.
Letters and symbols to BS EN 60445 (IEC 60445) shall be used for control wiring
and flameproof cable tags for appropriate cable group.
C) Legend:
i. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on
drawings.
ii. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on schematic and
interconnection diagrams on drawings.
21.4 Interconnecting Cabling Identification (ICA)

A) Each horizontal cable from instrumentation, transmitter, controller, etc.
PAGE 92

termination blocks or patch panel if any to an outlet box shall be labelled at both
ends.
B) Tags shall be consecutively numbered so that no two cables have the same
identification number.
C) In addition, the cable tag shall indicate the reference of location where the
associated outlet is located and the device is installed.
21.5 Underground Warning Tape

A) Description: 100mm wide plastic tape, detectable type, coloured yellow with
suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines e.g. 0.6/1KV, 11KV etc.
B) Description: 200mm wide plastic tape, detectable type, coloured yellow with
op V1
suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines e.g. 0.6/1KV, 11KV etc.
21.6 Installation
A) Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.
C -
y
B) Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines.
C
C) Secure nameplate to equipment front as specified.
C
D) Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panel board that is recessed in
finished locations.
E) Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape. Install one tape
Q
per trench at 150mm below finished grade.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 93

22. PACKAGE UNITSUBSTATION (SECTION

16311)
22.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
22.1.1 Scope
a) All items described within this section shall comply with the provisions of Section
b) The scope of works covers design, manufacture and supply of 11/0.415kV
Package Type Unit Substation for operation on the Abu Dhabi Distribution
op V1
Company (ADDC) 11kV Distribution Network.
c) The 11kV switchgear shall be designed and manufactured to BS EN 60694 (IEC
60694), BS EN 62271-200 (IEC 62271-200) or other approved standards to meet
the latest ADDC specifications.
C -
d) It is deemed mandatory for the manufacturer to have valid ISO 9000 series
y
C
Certification issued by an Internationally Recognised Agency of West Europe, USA
or Japan and should have been tested in a Recognised Independent Testing
Laboratory as per the relevant IEC standards, including "Short Circuit Withstand
C
Tests".
e) The manufacturer shall have documented supply record of similar equipment
working satisfactorily in the same climatic and service conditions for the last five (5)
Q
years as a minimum prerequisite to submit their offer.

f) The equipment shall be installed in a non air-conditioned room without any forced
ventilation duty at the ambient conditions specified in Section 15001: General M&E
Requirements.
In addition, the substation shall be capable of withstanding the effects of direct
solar radiation at the installed locations. The temperature of metal surfaces
exposed to direct solar radiation and the air temperature inside non-ventilated
metal enclosures shall be regarded 90°C, with the additional effect of any internal
heating.
22.1.2 System Characteristics

The characteristics of the system are defined in Section 15001: General M&E
Requirements.
22.1.3 Reference Standards

22.1.3.1 HV switchgear:
a) IEC 62271-1 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Common
specifications
b) IEC 62271-200 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear. AC metal-enclosed
switchgear and controlgear for rated voltages above 1kV and up
to and including 52kV
c) IEC 62271-102 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear. Alternating current
disconnectors and earthing switches
d) IEC 60529 Classification of Degree of Protection provided by Enclosures.
PAGE 94

22.1.3.2 Transformer
A) IEC 60076 Power Transformers. BS 171
B) IEC 60137 Insulated bushings for alternating voltages above 1000V
C) IEC 60296 Fluids for electrotechnical applications. Unused mineral
insulating oils for transformers and switchgear
D) IEC 60076-7 Guide to loading of oil-immersed power transformers
E) IEC 60076-10 Power transformers. Determination of sound levels
22.1.3.3 LV Equipment
A) BS EN 60947-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear. General rules
op V1
B) IEC 60044-3 Instrument transformers. Combined transformers
C) IEC 61439 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies.
D) IEC 60269-4 Low-voltage fuses. Supplementary requirements for fuse- links
for the protection of semiconductor devices
C -
y
E) (BS 88-4)
C Cartridge fuses for voltages up to and including 1000 V a.c. and
1500 V d.c.
C
22.1.3.4 Complete Package Substation
A) BS EN 62271-202 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear. Part 202:
High voltage/low voltage prefabricated substation
Q
22.1.4 Alternative Codes and Standards

The Contractor may propose alternative codes and standards provided it is
demonstrated that they give an equivalent degree of quality those referenced
above. Acceptability of any alternative is at the discretion of DMAT.
22.1.5 Precedence of Codes And Standards

a) In case of conflict between this specification and any of the referenced Codes and
Standards, the following order of precedence shall apply:
i. This Specification.
ii. Referenced Codes and Standards.
iii. Acceptable Alternative Codes and Standards.
b) The Contractor shall note that compliance of the manufacturer with the provision of
this specification does not relieve him of his responsibility to supply the equipment
and accessories of proper design, electrically and mechanically suited to meet the
operating guarantees at the specified service conditions.
22.2 Design and Construction

22.2.1 General Arrangement and Layout
22.2.1.1 Configuration
a) The Unit Type Substation shall consist of a fully SF6 Insulated 11kV Ring Main Unit
(RMU) with an 11/0.433kV 2,000, 1,500, 1,000 or 500kVA hermetically-sealed
PAGE 95

transformer and a 415/240V Distribution Feeder Pillar.

b) All the equipment shall be outdoor type, interconnected, factory assembled as an
integral unit, mounted upon a galvanised steel base frame, housed in an approved
vandal-proof and Aluzinc metallic housing, ready for placing into position upon a
prepared surface.
c) Lifting lugs shall be provided so that the completely assembled package substation
may be lifted without damage. The design shall be such that the roof shall be
removable to allow easy lifting of any major part of the unit. The metallic ceiling
shall be of a double roofing system to diminish heating due to solar radiation.
d) The transformer, LV and MV compartments shall be completely separated by
Aluzinc steel sheets. The transformer shall be located in the middle of the
substation while the MV and LV compartments are located at both ends of the
op V1
substation adjacent to the corresponding bushing of the transformer. The barrier
between the MV switchgear and the transformer shall be provided with a pressure
relief flap.
e) A small door to access the transformer tap changer and the thermometer shall be
C -
provided on either LV or HV separator.
y
C
f) The surface colour of HV and LV Switchgear, Transformer and Housing shall be
RAL 7032 light grey.
C
g) The Unit shall be delivered fully assembled and tested.
22.2.1.2 Lay Out

Q
The layout shall enable all electrical, operating and maintenance work to be carried
out with ease and without difficulty. The activities listed below shall be easily
executed and access to carry out such activities shall be considered during the
design stage.
Components Activity
• Reading Name Plate Details.

Transformer • Termination of 11kV Cable.
• Tap Changer Operation.
• Oil Sampling and Re-filling.
• Switchgear Operation.
HV Switchgear • HV Testing.
• Jointing of cable and connections.
•
• Fuse Changing.
LV Panel • Load reading on each phase of LV using a Clip-on
Ammeter.
All Components • Easy Removal and Replacement.
22.2.1.3 Electrical Connection

a) Electrical connections to the transformer shall be so designed that they may be
disconnected and reconnected at site to facilitate the removal of any major
component of the unit.
b) The inter-connection between 11kV Switchgear and Transformer Terminals
Bushings shall be by means of 95/70mm² single-core, XLPE-insulated, copper
PAGE 96

cable with plug-in type connection, of an acceptable make.

c) The connection between transformer LV bushing and the feeder pillar shall be by
means of flexible copper busbars passing through an air-insulated duct/flange.
22.2.1.4 Earthing Arrangement
a) Each unit substation assembly shall be provided with a copper earth bar of
minimum size 40x6mm to which the transformers’ LV neutral and metal frames of
all items: HV switchgear, transformer and feeder pillar shall be connected. Two
earth terminals shall be provided for connection to the external earthing system.
b) All substation metalwork, including transformer tank, cable screens, feeder pillar,
doors and any internal structural steelwork shall be securely bonded together.
op V1
c) The metalwork earthing terminal shall be provided in an accessible position, the
position of which shall be shown on the appropriate tender drawing, and shall be
approved by DMAT.
d) Two bolted (removable) links shall be provided in the LV feeder pillar between the
C -
transformer neutral and neutral busbar and between the neutral bar and the earth
y
bar.
C
22.2.1.5 Internal Lighting
C
HV, LV and Transformer compartments shall each be fitted with appropriate
lighting, controlled via a door-operated switch.
Q
22.2.1.6 Ventilation
Adequate ventilation for natural circulation of air shall be provided to keep the
inside temperature within the limit. Ventilation apertures shall be suitably screened
and louvered to prevent the entry of vermin, dust and other foreign bodies.
22.2.1.7 Access To Unit

Access to the unit shall be by double-hinged and triple-latched doors fitted on
opposite sides of the package unit, and at least one door fitted on one side of the
transformer compartment.
22.2.1.8 Noise Level

The noise level of the completely assembled package substation shall not exceed
70db(A) @ 1m in accordance with IEC 60076-10. The package substation shall be
checked after assembly to ensure that no rattling of individual components can
occur.
22.2.1.9 Mounting Arrangement

The package substation shall not require the casting of a concrete plinth at site.
Site preparation shall be limited to levelling only.
22.2.1.10 Lifting Lugs

Lifting lugs shall be provided so that the completely assembled package substation
may be lifted without damage. The lifting lugs shall be designed to carry the weight
of the substation complete with transformer and switchgear. Lifting spread beams
shall be supplied with the units as required.
PAGE 97

22.2.2 11KV Ring Main Unit (RMU)

22.2.2.1 General
a) The RMU shall consist of two fault-making and load-breaking Ring Circuit Switches
(Feeder Control) and one Tee Off circuit breaker for Transformer Protection, all
equipped with “ON”, “OFF” and “EARTH” position, SF6 Insulated connected to
common Busbars and contained in a common tank.
b) The entire unit shall be mounted on a skid base capable of being moved and
hauled as a single unit. The unit shall be “NON-EXTENSIBLE” type metal enclosed
and suitable for outdoor installation.
c) The switchgear shall be sealed for life and be less than IP54. The spring
mechanisms shall be of long-life corrosion-resistant material and dust proof. The
op V1
galvanised and powder-coated sheet steel housing and the cable connection
compartments shall provide long life protection against corrosion.
22.2.2.2 Rating
C -
a) The continuous current rating of the unit shall be as follows:
y
i.
C
Feeder Control Switch 400A.
ii. Transformer Circuit Breaker 200A.
C
b) The unit shall be rated as follows:
i. Rated short time current 20kA for 1 second.
Q
ii. Rated Making current 50kA.

iii. Insulation level 22kV.
iv. Power frequency withstand voltage 28kV for 1 minute.
v. Impulse withstand voltage 75kV.
22.2.2.3 11kv Switchgear

i Feeder Control Unit:
The Feeder Control Switches shall be load-breaking fault-making SF6 insulated

having independent manual anti-reflex feature in the operating mechanism/handle.
Integral means shall be provided for cable earthing and cable testing.
Disconnection of cables for testing purpose is not acceptable.
ii Transformer Control Unit:
The Transformer Control Unit shall be a fault-making and fault-breaking Tee Off
circuit breaker. The vacuum/SF6 circuit breaker shall be equipped with OC/SC and
E/F protective relay that shall not require auxiliary power and shall be adjustable to
suit different transformer capacities. The CB shall have a trip coil connected to the
high-high temperature switch of the transformer to protect the transformer against
over loading. Details of the tripping mechanism, tripping characteristics of the relay
and the applicable settings shall be submitted with the offer.
iii Operating Mechanism
The operating mechanism of the switches shall be arranged for spring-assisted

hand operation, whereby the speeds of make and break are independent of the
operator. A MOTORISED OPERATING MECHANISM WITH THE ADDITIONAL
PAGE 98

POSSIBILITY OF REMOTE OPERATION SHALL BE OFFERED AS AN OPTION.

iv Indicators
Clear indicators showing “ON”, “OFF” and “EARTH” shall be provided.

v Test Facilities
Each switch shall be provided with facilities for applying high voltage tests and
injection current tests on the ring main cable connected to the switch and this shall
be effected by insertion of a three phase test plug when the switch is in the 'EARTH
ON' position, to become effective when the switch is in the 'OFF' position. The
testing facilities shall provide for the attachment of test connection external to the
switch equipment and shall be capable of withstanding the test requirements of IEC
op V1
62271-200. Three phase testing devices suitable for use with any of the switches
shall be provided. Each testing device shall be enclosed in a suitable lockable
container marked with the contents. Test access covers shall be provided with
locking facilities
C -
22.2.2.4 Interlocks
y
C
a) Interlocks of the mechanical, positively-driven type shall be provided to prevent the
following operations:
i. Inadvertent operation of a switch directly from the 'ON' position to the
C
'EARTH ON' position.
ii. Opening of the testing access when the switch equipment is in any other
Q
than the 'EARTH ON' position.

iii. The testing device being inserted or withdrawn when the switch equipment is
in any other than the 'EARTH ON' position.
iv. The movement of the switch from the 'EARTH ON' to the 'OFF' position with
the testing access open and the testing device removed.
v. The movement of the switch to the 'ON' position when the testing access is
open, whether or not the testing device has been inserted.
vi. Operation of the switch from 'ON' to 'OFF' or the switch or fuse-switch from
the 'EARTH ON' to 'OFF' immediately after the achievement of the 'ON' or
'EARTH ON' positions respectively.
vii. Operation of the switch from “EARTH ON” to “OFF” immediately after
achievement of the 'EARTH ON' position.
viii. Application of the earth links while the switch is in the 'ON' position.
ix. The switch is being moved to the 'ON' position while earth links are applied.
22.2.2.5 Locks
The operating mechanism shall be lockable at each position with padlocks, having
5mm diameter hasp with 25mm clearance. The padlock need not be supplied. An
Operating handle shall be supplied with each unit.
22.2.2.6 Cable Terminations

a) Cable boxes for ring circuits shall be suitable for accommodating 3-core XLPE-
insulated, PVC-sheathed, galvanised steel tape-armoured and PVC-served cable
with copper conductors over the range of 185mm² to 240mm².
PAGE 99

b) Heat-shrinkable termination kits, of an acceptable make, shall be supplied with the

box. They shall be designed for air insulated dry type heat shrinkable termination.
The design shall provide sufficient space for crossing of cores without damage to
core insulations, Cable glands and unit.
c) For transformer control switch, plug-in type terminations suitable for 70mm² single
core cable shall be supplied.
22.2.2.7 Fault Current Indicator

a) Through-fault current indicators with core-balance transformer (associated with the
one of the feeders) shall be supplied. They shall be supplied fixed flush-mounted
on units facing glass windows on the package unit access door, in such a way that
they can be seen without opening the door.
op V1
b) The through fault current indicator shall operate on the passage of fault current
through its core-balance C.T. The indicator shall be clearly visible from ground
level. The unit shall be of the manual reset type.
22.2.2.8 Accessories
C -
y
A) Each unit shall be supplied with the following accessories:
i.
C
Voltage Indicator lamps fixed on the front of the panel for both feeder
switches.
C
ii. Plug-in Voltage Indicator for phase comparison.
iii. Test Plugs with each batch of 10 (ten) Units.
Q
22.2.3 Transformer
Transformers shall comply with Section 16080.
22.2.4 Duct Type / Flange Connected Distribution Feeder Pillar

22.2.4.1 General
a) The 415/240V Distribution Feeder Pillars shall be metalclad with NH Size 3 load
break, 3 x 1-pole switching strip fuse-ways to DIN 43623, with positive operation
contact and downward connections at the bottom of the fuse-way.
b) Insertion of NH-type fuse cartridge shall be completely safe. Guides of high
thermally-stable insulating material shall be provided to ensure adequate protection
against accidental contact. Under all the circumstances, the fuse blade shall pass
through the wraparound / insulated arc chutes before the contact is made. All the
strip fuseways shall have their live terminals shrouded to avoid accidental contact
at the time of replacing fuse. The fuse strips shall have interphase barriers and
blank labels for feeder identification.
c) The metallic enclosure shall be of sheet steel with thickness not less than 3mm and
shall be galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461 or other equivalent standard. The feeder
pillar then shall be painted in accordance with acceptable standards.
d) The equipment offered shall have been tested at a recognised testing Laboratory
up to 46kA RMS for one second. A short-circuit test certificate should be included
in the submittal.
e) Adequate ventilation is to be provided by means of vermin and dust proof louvers.
PAGE 100

22.2.4.2 Supports
Each distribution feeder pillar shall be attached to the transformer by a suitably
designed and approved busbar trunking with duct/flange. The neutral connection
shall be insulated from the frame and brought out to a separate terminal. The
weight of the feeder pillar shall be carried on its own support and not on the busbar
trunking.
22.2.4.3 Cables, Glands And Lugs

a) All cable glands and lugs shall be suitable for termination of armoured 240mm² 4-
core copper cable using brass compression type glands. Cross sectional details of
the cable will be supplied to the successful contractor.
b) The earth tag of each gland shall be connected to the earth bar with tinned copper
op V1
flexible earthing braid of adequate cross section having at lest 50% of that of the
phase conductor of the cable to be connected. Each cable gland shall be
supported on a removable gland plate. The glanding arrangement shall fully ensure
earth continuity through the cable armour.
C -
c) Cable clamps shall be provided at the bottom of the feeder pillar to hold the cables
y
in position. d) All the cable lugs for copper cable shall be tinned copper
C
compression type.
22.2.4.4 Use Ways And Fuses

C
a) The use ways shall be 3No. single-pole switchable load-break strip fuse-ways 630A
Size 3 rating to IEC 60269-4.
Q
b) All fuses shall be NH low-loss type Grade 3 as per IEC 60269-4. All fuses shall be
400A rated. Only VDE marked or ASTA certified fuse links are acceptable. The
operating time/current characteristics shall be supplied with the offer.
c) A blank circuit label to be provided on each unit. Each Strip Fuse unit shall have 3
robust transparent hinged covers to retain the fuse firmly and for single pole
switching operation. The cover shall be latched in the closed position to prevent it
from falling out when the fuse is not fitted. Preferably, each cover shall have a neon
indicator showing a blown fuse (but not the absence of a fuse).
d) The Unit shall have high-making capacity. Closing on the fault shall be safe for both
the Operator and the equipment. In addition, the strip fuse ways shall have
insulating base, fuse carrier, insulating caps and terminals covers insulating
protectors in the fuse links to avoid accidental contacts.
22.2.5 Details of Equipment

22.2.5.1 Busbars
The busbars shall be hard-drawn, high-conductivity, tinned copper and rigidly
supported. They shall be positioned to give maximum access and be colour coded
for identification by shrinkable insulating tube.
22.2.5.2 Incoming Unit

One incoming unit with hook-operated slow-make and break-off load-hinged
isolating switch blade on each phase for control of the transformer. Switch blades
shall be fitted with contact tightening clamps. It shall be possible to leave the
incoming isolators open ‘LIVE’ with the door closed. On each phase, a current
transformer shall be provided for operation of instrumentation.
PAGE 101

22.2.5.3 Ammeters
Three single-phase ammeters, with instantaneous elements plus maximum current
demand indicators of the thermal type, shall be supplied. They shall be suitable for
operation from the current transformers specified.
22.2.5.4 Voltmeter
a) One Voltmeter 0-500V with phase selector switch shall be supplied.
b) The maximum demand indicator voltmeters and selector switch shall be mounted
on an instrument panel. In addition, three potential test terminals shall be included
and mounted on the panel.
22.2.5.5 Earth Bar
op V1
a) An earth bar, not less than 50mm x 10mm, shall be provided at the bottom and
secured to give a positive electrical connection. In addition, two 12mm earth
terminals shall be provided on the pillar shell and connected to the earth bar.
b) A detachable link between neutral and earth bar shall also be provided.
C -
y
22.2.5.6 Wiring
C
Wiring shall be minimum 2.5mm² stranded copper conductor, 600V tropical grade
C
heat-resistant PVC-insulated.
22.2.5.7 Base Plate

Q
The Base Plate of the feeder pillar shall be supplied with knockout holes. The gland
plate of the feeder pillar shall be so positioned to allow a convenient bend radius on
the outgoing cable(s).
22.2.5.8 Nuts and Bolts

All necessary nuts and bolts for cable lugs, spacers, etc., shall be supplied fitted
with the feeder pillar.
22.2.5.9 Ratings
The feeder pillar rating for different package units shall be as follows:
Table22-1: Feeder Pillar Rating
Particulars 2000kVA 1500kVA 1000kVA 500kVA 200kVA
Phase and Neutral

3,200A 2,500A 1,600A 800A 400A
Rating
Minimum Bus Bar Size 2,000mm² 1,600mm² 1,000mm² 500mm² 300mm²
Number of Outgoing
9 9 8 6 3
Unit Strip (Fuse Way)
Provision for further

additional Strip Fuse 1 1 1 1 1
Way
PAGE 102

22.2.6 Package Unit Housing

22.2.6.1 Metallic Housing
a) The Housing shall be made of ALUZINC steel sheets having a thickness not less
than 2mm corrosion proof. The base frame shall be made of hot dip galvanised
steel sheets of minimum thickness 4mm and the four corner columns/posts shall be
made of hot dip galvanised steel sheets of minimum thickness 3mm.
b) The transformer, low voltage and MV compartments are completely separated by
ALUZINC steel sheets. The steel provides strength while the aluminium and zinc
alloy coating provides protection against corrosion due to harsh environment
condition.
c) The metallic housing shall be of adequate strength to withstand transportation and
op V1
handling stresses. The weight of the unit will be an important consideration. A
detailed painting system and dimensional drawing shall be submitted with tender.
d) The metallic ceiling shall be of a double roof system as a provision to diminish
heating due to solar radiation. The opening at the lower and upper sides of the roof
C -
allows air circulation.
y
C
e) The degree of protection at the transformer compartment shall not be IP23 while
the degree of protection at the LV and MV compartments shall not be less than
IP43.
C
22.2.6.2 Floor and Roof
Q
The roof shall have a lightweight design with lifting hooks for easy removal of the
roof during transformer removal or any major part of the unit. The diminish heating
due to solar radiation.
22.2.6.3 Walls
The housing shall be made of ALUZINC steel sheets having a thickness not less
than 2mm corrosion proof. The basic frame of the kiosk shall be made of
galvanised steel structure, on which the housing is fixed. The steel four corner
posts of the substation shall enhance the strength of the whole assembly.
22.2.6.4 Doors
a) Double-leaf doors shall be made of ALUZINC steel sheet, framed and panelled
type. They shall be fixed on opposite sides of the package unit (LV & MV
Compartments), and on both sides of the transformer compartment.
b) The doors shall be provided with stainless steel/brass hinges and provided with
internal stoppers to limit the opening to 120°. The edges of the doors shall be bent
on both sides to assure they fit properly to the door jambs to prevent misalignment.
All doors’ gaskets shall be of superior quality and capable of withstanding the
severe climatic conditions.
c) Doors shall be fitted with a central handle with a 3-point cam. The handle shall be
fitted with a cylindrical lock. The cam assembly with lever shall be made of non-
corroding metal.
d) The cylindrical lock shall be suitable for master key no. AWG V/1, made by Messrs.
Josiah Parkers and Sons, Union Works, Gower Street, Willen Hall West Midlands
WV13, U.K., England. Alternatively, lock of a make with the same specification and
suitable for master key already in use with ADDC is acceptable.
PAGE 103

22.2.6.5 Cable Entries

The substation shall be designed to receive cables entering horizontally below
ground level. Adequate provision shall be made to seal the cable entries against
ingress of water.
22.2.7 Inspection and Tests

The equipment shall be subject to inspection and testing during manufacture and
after completion by DMAT in accordance with Section 15001: General M&E
Requirements. In addition, the following shall be carried out:
22.2.7.1 HV Switchgear
a) Type Tests
op V1
i. Dielectric Tests.
ii. Temperature Rise Tests.
iii. Making and Breaking Tests.
C -
y
iv. Rated Peak Withstand Current and Rated Short Time Current Tests.
C
v. Operation & Mechanical Endurance Tests.
C
b) Routine Tests
i. Power Frequency Voltage Tests.
Q
ii. Voltage Test on Auxiliary Circuits.

iii. Measurement of Resistance of main Circuits.
iv. Operation Tests.
22.2.7.2 Transformer
Testing of transformers shall be in accordance with Section 16080: Transformers.
22.2.7.3 LV Switchgear
a) Type Tests
i. Dielectric Tests.
ii. Rated Making and Breaking Capacity Tests.
iii. Rated Fused Short Circuit Current Tests.
iv. Mechanical Endurance Tests.
v. Electrical Endurance Tests.
vi. Temperature Rise Test. (Details of Testing Procedure to be submitted.)
b) Routine Tests:
i. Operation Tests.
ii. Dielectric Test.
22.2.7.4 Complete Package Substation

a) Type Tests
All the type tests shall be made on a complete package substation:
PAGE 104

i. Insulation level on the package substation.

ii. Temperature rise (Heat and Run Test)
iii. Earthing circuits withstand to rated peak and short time currents.
iv. Functional Tests.
v. Degree of protection.
vi. vi. Enclosure withstand against mechanical stresses.
b) Routine Tests
Routine tests shall be made on each complete package substation:
i. Voltage Test on Auxiliary Circuits.
op V1
ii. Functional Test
iii. Verification of correct wiring
NOTE:
C -
y
Verification of the Type Tests is not required if already performed earlier on similar
C
unit. In such case, Type Test Certificates shall be included in the submittal.
22.2.8 Documentation and Engineering Data

C
The Contractor shall submit all technical descriptions, data sheets, catalogues and
other supporting material with the offer to enable DMAT to fully evaluate the
Q
proposal with regards to its compliance with the contract specifications and Section
The following shall be submitted as a minimum:
a) All technical schedules, duly filled-in and signed.
b) Copies of Type Test Certificates for 11kV Switchgear, Transformers etc.
c) Proof of Manufacturer’s compliance with the requirement of ISO 9000 and its
relevant parts or its approved equivalent National Standard as Certified by an
Independent Inspection Agency.
d) All the drawings, technical information, calculations and other supporting
documents.
e) For the RMU:
i. General arrangement of the unit showing all important dimensions, together
with mountings/accessories.
ii. Details of HV Cable Terminations.
iii. Details of Fault Current Indicator.
iv. Operation and tripping characteristics of the Transformer Control Unit.
v. Details of Painting and Anti Corrosion Protection for exterior of the unit.
f) For the Distribution Transformer:

i. Documentation shall be in accordance with Section 16080: Transformers.
g) For Duct Type/Flange Connected Feeder Pillar
PAGE 105

i. Details of Strip Fuse Way.

ii. Characteristics of HRC Fuses.
iii. Drawing Showing the Internal Arrangement of Feeder Pillar.
h) For Duct Type/Flange Connected Feeder Pillar

i. Construction details of the Housing.
i) For Duct Type/Flange Connected Feeder Pillar

i. Details Summary of Deviations from the Contract Specification.
ii. Brochures and Catalogues for Standard Unit.
op V1
iii. Applicable Design Specification.
iv. Lists of Accessories included.
END OF SECTION
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 106

23. 11KV SWITCHGEAR (SECTION 16346)

All items described within this section shall comply with the provisions of Section
23.1.1 Scope and Certification Requirements

A) This specification covers the design and manufacture of 11kV metalclad
switchgear for ring main applications, complete with all accessories.
B) Switchgear shall be designed and manufactured to IEC 62271-200 or other
op V1
approved standards to meet the latest Abu Dhabi Distribution Company
(ADDC) specifications.
C) It is mandatory for manufacturers to have valid ISO 9000 series Certification
issued by an internationally-recognised agency in Western Europe, USA or
C -
Japan, and should have been tested in a "Recognised Independent Testing
y
C
Withstand Tests".
D) The Manufacturer shall have documented supply record of similar switchgear
C
working satisfactorily in the same climatic and service conditions for the last five
(5) years as a minimum prerequisite to submit their offer.
Q
E) Evidence of type testing, together with copies of test certificates from a

recognised independent short-circuit testing station covering the equipment
offered, shall be submitted. The type-test evidence shall show that the circuit
breakers have been tested in their cubicles and that all current carrying parts of
these cubicles (busbars, isolating connections, current and voltage
transformers, cable termination chambers, etc.,) have been included for all
tests required by the relevant IEC standard.
F) If additional independent type testing is required to fully comply with IEC
recommendations, the additional time required for full type testing shall not
relieve the Contractor of his obligations to complete the Works within the
Contract time for completion. Additional type testing, if required, shall be
performed at no extra cost to DMAT and the Contractor shall in addition bear all
costs in connection with the witnessing of such tests by DMAT.
G) The switchgear shall be installed in a non-air-conditioned room without any
forced ventilation duty at the ambient conditions specified in Section 15001:
23.1.2 Systems and Fault Levels

The characteristics of the DMAT System are defined in Section 15001: General
M&E Requirements.
23.1.3 Temperature Rise

A) Each current carrying component of the equipment supplied shall be capable of
continuous operation at the specified ratings without exceeding the maximum
temperature rises stated in the appropriate IEC recommendations, based on
the site ambient conditions.
B) The Contractor shall submit the Technical Data Sheets duly filled and certified
PAGE 107

stating permissible overload rating for the switchgear operating under

emergency conditions, together with the duration and ambient temperature for
which it applies.
23.1.4 General Arrangement and Construction

23.1.4.1 Type of Switchgear
A) All switchgear shall be of the metalclad (compartmental design) air-insulated
indoor type complying with IEC 62271-200, unless specified to the contrary in
the Specification.
B) The switchgear shall be of the self-supporting bolted construction type with all
equipment installed inside vertical steel structures, suitably sub-divided into
op V1
individual compartments for:
i. Busbars.
ii. Circuit Breaker.
iii. Cable Connection.
iv. VT.
C -
y
v. Low Voltage, Local Control, Protection and Metering Compartment.
C
C) The 11kV switchgear shall be equipped with one set of three phase-insulated
busbars. The circuit breakers shall be "VACUUM" and have approved means of
C
isolation and circuit and busbar earthing. It shall also incorporate earthing
facilities for each set of busbars, achieved by either suitably interlocked
earthing switches/devices or other approved method.
Q
D) The equipment shall be dust-proof, rodent- and insect proof. It shall be capable
of robust operation in the ambient conditions of Abu Dhabi.
E) Provision shall be made for electric heaters to prevent condensation,
particularly when the equipment is out of service. The IP class of enclosure
protection shall be IP4W.
F) The switchgear shall be designed for automatic pressure relief in case of
pressure build up due to arcing, at the same time ensuring that escaping gases
are clear off the operating personnel in the front and rear of the switchgear. Any
device for pressure relief shall, under normal service, shall be absolutely
vermin-, dust- and damp-proof. Test evidence to verify the design will be
required.
G) Complete protection shall be provided against approach to live parts or contact
with internal wiring parts. Particular attention shall be paid to drive linkages,
bushings, earth bars and the like to ensure that the enclosure classification is
not reduced when these ‘pass through’ compartments.
H) Cast iron shall not be used for any part that may be subjected to mechanical
shock. Materials, wherever possible, shall be non-hygroscopic and non-
flammable. Insulating materials shall have a high resistance to tracking.
I) The switchgear shall be suitable for mounting on a concrete floor. All necessary
fixing bolts and rails shall be provided with the switchgear.
J) Circuit breakers shall be mounted in moving portions in the form of wheeled
carriages with horizontal isolation from the fixed busbars and outgoing circuit
connections. It shall be possible to remove the circuit breaker completely from
the panel without using any external device.
PAGE 108

K) Circuit breakers of the same type and current rating shall be interchangeable,
electrically and mechanically, but it must be impossible to interchange
equipment of different current ratings.
L) Adequate clearances and surface creepage distances shall be provided to
ensure satisfactory performance under service conditions.
M) In order to make the type of switchgear compatible with the arrangements
familiar to DMAT, the switchgear shall incorporate a set of busbars which shall
be contained in a separate busbar chamber positioned physically above the
cable box. The plug and socket contacts of the unit shall therefore be:
i. Busbar contacts uppermost.
ii. Circuit contacts lowest.
op V1
N) Suitable potential indicators shall be provided on the cable side to indicate live
cable conditions. Details of the indicators provided shall be furnished in the
technical proposal for acceptance/approval of DMAT.
23.1.4.2 Busbars
C -
y
C
A) Busbars shall be air-insulated, hard-drawn, high-conductivity copper bars.
B) Busbars shall be arranged in sections to permit future extensions and/or
deletion. The method of extension is to be clearly defined and shown on
C
suitable drawings. Provision shall be made for extending the busbar at either
end without any need for cutting or drilling of the busbar.
Q
23.1.4.3 Low Voltage, Local Control, Protection and Metering

Compartment
A) General Arrangement
i. The low voltage equipment compartment, provided as part of the
switchgear and mounted on the feeder switchgear panels, shall be
completely metal enclosed and provided with a separate front access
door suitable for installation of indicators and control devices, including
protective relays for 11kV switchgear. If protective relays are mounted
inside this compartment, it shall have a door with a window to allow the
observation of relays provided within. Wiring to door-mounted
equipment shall be run inside flexible conduit, suitably mounted to
prevent stressing of the conductors when opening the door to its
extreme stop.
ii. Relays shall be of approved type and comply generally with the
requirements of IEC 60255, or other approved standard, and be
contained in dustproof, moisture-proof, flush-mounted cases with
transparent fronts and semi-gloss black bezels. They shall be provided
with breathers.
iii. Two test plugs to suit each different type of relay case or test socket
shall be provided for each switchboard or suite of relay panels. The test
plugs shall have terminals for both the relay and wiring side
connections, which shall accept both wires and plug connectors, and
be complete with lengths of flexible cable for connection to a portable
relay test set. These plugs shall be stored in the key cabinet specified
elsewhere in this document.
PAGE 109

iv. All relays shall be so arranged that any dust that may have collected in
or upon the case shall not fall on the relay mechanism when opening
the case.
v. Auxiliary relays shall also be mounted in dustproof cases.
vi. All protective relays shall be provided with a name and data plate to
approved standard, which shall include the ratios of the associated
current and/or voltage transformers.
vii. All metal bases and frames of relays shall be earthed, except where
the latter must be insulated for special requirements, and an earth
terminal shall be provided on the back of the relay case.
viii. Each relay that initiates tripping shall be provided with a trip isolation
op V1
facility, which shall be integral with the relay such that the tripping has
to be isolated prior to withdrawal of the relay from its case.
ix. All relays which are connected to complete either the tripping circuit of
a circuit breaker or the coil circuit of an auxiliary tripping relay shall be
provided with approved operation indicators, which, whenever possible,
C -
y
shall be of the mechanically-operated type. Indicators shall also be
C
provided on such additional relay elements as will enable the phase of
the fault condition to be identified.
C
x. Each indicator, whether of the electrically-operated or mechanically-
operated type, shall be capable of being reset by hand without opening
the relay case and it shall not be possible to operate the relay when
Q
resetting the operating indicator. Each indicator shall be so designed

that it cannot show before the relay has completed its operation.
Indicators shall not reset during a failure of auxiliary power to the relay.
xi. It shall not be possible to operate any relay by hand without opening
the case.
xii. Unless otherwise specified, the current circuit for the relays shall be
suitable for 1A 50Hz and voltage circuit shall be rated for 63.5V 50Hz
(phase to neutral) or 110V, 50Hz (phase to phase).
xiii. The maximum ac fault voltage across any two points of a current circuit
shall not exceed 3,000V peak and non-linear resistors shall be
included, if necessary, to achieve this limitation.
xiv. If bolts or nuts are so placed as to be inaccessible with an ordinary
spanner, not less than 2 suitable special spanners shall be provided.
xv. All calculations to determine relay settings and adequacy of CT and VT
rating shall be submitted to DMAT for approval. In the event that the
rating of the VT or CT proposed is insufficient to accommodate the
connected burden in accordance with this specification, the Contractor
shall supply the CT and VT with the necessary increased capacity at no
extra cost.
xvi. The Contractor shall install only protection relays and equipment that
are supported by guaranteed works routine test certificates issued by
the manufacturers.
xvii. The Contractor shall provide electrical protection relay schedules to
include manufacturer, type designation, characteristic details and
ranges and actual protection settings to be used, on a per circuit basis.
PAGE 110

xviii. All relays offered shall have been fully type tested in accordance with
the appropriate standards and shall have had satisfactory operational
service. Full data relating to these requirements shall be submitted with
the specification. Unless otherwise stated, it will be assumed that relay
equipment offered, has been type tested, or if not tested, that the
tendered price includes for such tests.
B) Flag Indicator Relays
Trip flag indication relays shall be current operated and operate in series with
the appropriate tripping relay.
C) Alarm flag indication relays shall be shunt operated.
D) Indicating Lamps
op V1
Normally-energised indicating lamps shall be employed for 'ON', 'OFF' and
'TRIP' indications of a circuit breaker. They shall be energised from the 50V d.c.
supply for switching station switchgear.
A common switch shall be provided in an approved location so that all ‘normally
C -
lit’ indicating lamps can be switched off.
y
C
Indicating lamps fitted into the fascias of switch and instrument cubicles or
panels shall be adequately ventilated. They shall be easily removed and
replaced from the front of the panel by manual means not requiring the use of
C
extractors.
The bezel of metal or other approved material holding the lamp glass shall be
Q
of an approved finish and be easily removable from the body of the fitting to
permit access to the lamp and lamp glass. The lamps shall be clear and fit into
an accepted standard form of lamp holder. The rated lamp voltage should be
10% in excess of the normal running auxiliary supply voltage, whether a.c. or
d.c. Alternatively, low voltage lamps with series resistors will be acceptable.
Indicating lamp glasses shall, unless otherwise specified or approved conform
to the following standard colour code:-
Colour Class of Indication Examples
Red or Closed position Circuit Breaker or contactor energised

Operative
Green Opened position Circuit Breaker or contactor unenergised
White Lamp normally alight Healthy or normal condition e.g. voltage

healthy, trip supply healthy and
equipment in normal service. Also safe
conditions i.e. busbar or circuit dead in
synchro schemes.
Amber Action necessary Alarm indication on which faulty or

abnormal condition e.g. transformer over
temperature, charger fail, circuit breaker
tripped due to fault etc.
Blue Indication of operation of Springs charged, tap changer in progress

circuit breaker closing, other etc.
equipments and those, which
PAGE 111

operates intermittently.
Yellow Local or remote control Position of selector switch, circuit breaker

etc
The colour shall be in the glass and not an applied coating. The different
coloured glasses shall be interchangeable. Transparent synthetic materials
may be used instead of glass, provided it can be shown that such materials
have fast colours and are completely suitable for operating in Abu Dhabi. Fuses
shall be provided in indication circuits. The variety of indicating lamps provided
op V1
shall be rationalised to reduce maintenance and spares requirements.
E) Fuses and Links
Fuses and links shall be in accordance with Section 16040: Disconnect
Switches and the following:
i.
C -
Fuses shall be of the high rupturing capacity cartridge type (rewireable
y
C
type fuses will not be accepted). Fuse holders shall be designed to lock the
cartridge firmly into position without the use of screw clamping devices.
ii. ii. Carriers and bases for 16A fuses shall be coloured green and those for
C
6A fuses shall be black. Link carriers and bases shall be white or another
distinctive colour. Miniature Circuit Breakers may be offered in lieu of fuses
in ac circuits. All colours shall be subject to the approval of DMAT.
Q
23.1.4.4 Circuit Breaker

A) Circuit Breaker Making and Breaking Capacities
Each circuit breaker shall be capable of making and breaking short-circuits
faults as specified in the specification, specification schedules and all in
accordance with IEC 62271-200.
B) Vacuum Circuit Breaker
Vacuum Circuit Breakers with totally enclosed and maintenance-free contact
systems will be accepted. They shall incorporate contacts designed to ensure a
long contact life at all currents up to the rated making and breaking current
switching conditions.
Contact material having low current chopping levels is preferred to minimise the
occurrence of excessive over-voltages when switching. If additional devices are
required to limit over-voltages caused during switching to a safe level, these
shall be supplied and the details given in the Schedule of Particulars.
Contact material properties shall be such that the specified dielectric strength
across opened contacts is obtained at all times.
Transmission of high mechanical stresses to the vacuum enclosure during
operation shall be reduced to the minimum possible by the use of resilient
mountings. Features to prevent the application of abnormal stresses to the
flexible seals shall be incorporated.
Means for measurement of contact wear without major dismantling shall be
incorporated and an appropriate gauge provided.
The details of any vacuum monitoring facilities shall be stated in the Schedules
of Particulars.
PAGE 112

It shall be possible to remove any one vacuum bottle from any one phase
without having to remove the vacuum bottle on other two phases.
C) Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanisms
Circuit breaker operating mechanisms shall be of the 240V a.c. motor wound-
spring type.
It shall be possible to charge the spring with the circuit breaker in either the
"Opened" or "Closed" positions. It shall not be possible for the circuit breaker to
close unless the spring is fully charged. A visual indicating device, preferably
mechanical, shall be provided to indicate the state of the spring. The device
shall indicate "SPRING CHARGED" when the spring is in a condition to close
the circuit breaker and "SPRING FREE" when the spring is not in a condition to
close the circuit breaker. If a charged spring is released when the circuit
op V1
breaker is closed, the circuit breaker shall not open and neither shall such
operation result in damage. Indication lamps to indicate spring charged shall be
provided where specified.
The mechanism shall be fitted with a local manual spring release, preferably a
C -
push button, shrouded to prevent inadvertent operation and provided with
y
C
means for padlocking.
Operation counters shall be fitted to all circuit-breaker mechanisms.
C
Motor charging of the spring mechanism shall be fitted with an a.c. motor.
Recharging of the mechanism operating spring shall be commenced
immediately and automatically upon completion of each circuit breaker closure.
Q
An emergency hand-operated charging device shall be supplied.

A contact shall be provided to initiate a "Breaker Alarm" if the operating spring
is not recharged within a predetermined time.
The operating mechanism shall be designed so that the circuit breaker is free to
open immediately the trip coil is energised. A direct acting mechanical trip via
an emergency button shall be provided on each breaker.
Means shall be provided for the manual operation of all circuit breakers for
maintenance purposes.
An approved, positively-driven, mechanically-operating indicator shall be
provided to show whether the circuit breaker is opened or closed.
In the event of failure to latch in the closed position, it shall not be possible for
the circuit breaker to open except at normal speed. Means shall be provided for
slow closing of the circuit breaker for maintenance purposes. It shall not be
possible to use this device when the circuit breaker is in the service position. An
approved arrangement shall be provided to prevent repeated reclosures in the
event of a permanent ‘close’ signal being present.
It shall not be possible, without the use of tools, to gain access to the tripping
toggle or any part of the mechanism, which would permit defeat of the
mechanical tripping feature.
It shall not be possible to render the electrical protection-tripping feature
inoperative by any mechanical locking device.
It shall be possible to complete the closing, tripping and interlock circuits when
the circuit breaker is isolated in order to permit operation for tests purposes.
The interlocks of the circuit breaker when in the isolated position shall be
arranged to prevent interference with associated interlocks on circuits in
PAGE 113

service.
D) Circuit Breaker Isolating Features
The circuit breaker shall be connected to the busbars and feeder circuit through
plug and socket type isolating devices. The devices shall be ‘off load’ type but
be suitable for operation whilst the busbars or feeder circuits are live.
The following circuit breaker positions shall be provided:
i. Isolated (or Maintenance).
ii. Test.
iii. Service.
Mechanical indication shall be provided to show the position of the circuit
op V1
breaker. Such indications shall be visible from the front of the equipment at all
times. In each operating position, the circuit breaker shall be positively
registered in its housing before the circuit breaker can be closed or opened.
E) Interlocks
C -
y
All mechanical interlocks shall be of the preventive type and be arranged to
C
prevent maloperation of the equipment if the interlock is defeated. The interlock
shall be effective at the point where hand power is applied so that stresses
cannot be transferred to parts remote from that point.
C
Electrical interlocks shall also function to prevent the closing operation of the
circuit breaker.
Q
Clearly labeled mechanical interlocks shall be provided which are designed to

prevent:
i. A closed circuit breaker from being withdrawn from or inserted into the
isolating contacts.
ii. Tripping by attempted isolation.
iii. The closing of a circuit breaker except when correctly located in the service
or test positions.
iv. A circuit breaker being closed in the service position when the secondary
circuits between the fixed and moving portions are not completed.
Additional operational interlocking shall be to the approval of DMAT. All
interlocking associated with circuit or busbar earthing shall be mechanical.
F) Main Earthing Devices
Each item of switchgear shall be provided with means for connecting the circuit
and the busbars to the main earth bar of the equipment for maintenance
purposes.
The earthing connections and devices shall have instantaneous peak and short
time current ratings equivalent to that of the circuit breakers.
In addition to any other requirement, one portable earthing device for each
panel shall be provided. The cost of these earthing facilities shall be included in
the price of the respective switchgear.
Full details of the method of earthing shall be submitted by the manufacturer.
Such earthing shall be achieved by the following means:
PAGE 114

i. For cable feeder circuit earthing: By fixed earthing switches fitted into the
cable box portion of the panel. The earth switch shall be mechanically
interlocked to prevent closure unless the circuit breaker is fully withdrawn
from the unit or secured into the isolated position. It shall not be possible to
move the circuit breaker into the service position with the earth switch
closed.
ii. For busbar earthing and transformer circuit earthing: By earthing trucks
fitted with circuit breakers or approved earthing switches. Interlocks shall
be provided such that it shall not be possible to install an earthing truck into
the panel unless all circuit breakers associated with the busbar or circuit to
be earthed are withdrawn from their units or secured onto the isolated
positions.
op V1
It shall not be possible to move the circuit breakers associated with the
earthed busbar into their service position with the busbar earth switch
closed.
One busbar earthing truck and one transformer circuit earthing truck shall
C -
be provided for each busbar voltage specified.
y
C
When the earthing truck device is in use, the automatic features of the
appropriate shutter shall be maintained and it shall be possible for the other
shutter to remain locked closed.
C
Busbars could be alternatively earthed by the use of circuit breaker.
When a circuit breaker is used for earthing, means other than locking shall
Q
be provided to ensure that the electrical tripping of the circuit breaker is

rendered inoperative when closed. It shall not be possible to return the
equipment to the service location and to reclose the circuit breaker without
first cancelling the means provided to render the electrical tripping
inoperative.
G) Safety Shutters
A set of mechanical shutters shall be provided to cover each three-phase group
of isolating contacts. The shutters shall be fully closed when the circuit breaker
is in the isolated position.
Each set shall be capable of being individually operated and individually
padlocked in the closed position.
The shutters shall open automatically by means of a positive drive initiated by
the movement of the circuit breaker or voltage transformer carriage.
The closing operation shall also be automatic, either by positive drive or by two
independent means, each capable of operating the shutter alone.
When padlocked closed, the shutter shall completely shroud the stationary
contacts and it shall not be possible to force the shutters, or part of the shutter,
to gain access to the stationary contacts.
To facilitate testing, means other than locking shall be provided for securing the
shutters in the opened position. However, such means shall be automatically
cancelled and the automatic operation of the shutters restored upon
reconnection of the circuit breaker or voltage transformer to the fixed isolating
contacts.
It shall not be possible to touch by bare hand the busbar and cable circuit
PAGE 115

contacts even if the shutters are removed manually. This is essential to accord
adequate protection for the operator against accidental contact with live parts.
Busbar shutters shall be painted signal red, colour 537 in BS 381C and shall be
clearly and indelibly labelled "BUSBARS" in large white letters. The circuit
shutters shall be painted lemon colour 355 in BS 381C but shall not be lettered.
On bus section and bus coupler units, both sets of shutters shall be painted
signal red and labelled "BUSBARS". In addition, an arrow shall be painted in
white on each shutter pointing towards the busbar with which the shutter is
associated.
Voltage transformer spout shutters shall comply with the above depending on
the connection (busbar or circuit) of the VT.
op V1
Provision or access shall be made for lubricating the mechanical linkages.
All shutters shall be metallic and of an approved thickness and shall be
effectively earthed.
H) Isolating Contacts for Secondary Circuits
C -
y
Means shall be provided for connecting the secondary circuit on the moving
C
portion with those on the fixed portion of the equipment. These connections
shall be maintained for all positions of the circuit breaker. A set of self-aligning
contacts shall be provided in the secondary connections between the fixed and
C
moving portions to permit ready disconnection in the event of complete
withdrawal of the moving portion of the equipment.
Q
Secondary circuits on the moving portions of circuit breaker equipment of equal

current rating shall be identical in order to permit interchangeability.
I) Locks and Padlocks
Padlocks shall be provided on the switchgear for locking the withdrawing gear
of the circuit breaker, the safety shutters (locks to be coloured red) and the
access doors to marshalling compartments or other live parts of the switchgear
regularly opened during maintenance. All locks shall be of approved type and
every lock shall be a different change. Locks and keys shall be permanently
identified with details to the approval of DMAT. Three ordinary keys for each
lock shall be supplied.
Each circuit shall be provided with a lock for each of the following functions:
i. Locking the circuit breaker in the isolated position.
ii. Locking the circuit breaker control switch.
iii. Locking each of the circuit and busbar shutters.
Six (6No.) master keys shall also be provided for the substation where
applicable. Circuit breaker control and control selector switches shall be
provided with integral locking devices of approved design complete with 3 keys
per each switch. Control switches shall be lockable in the neutral position only.
Suitable, wall-mounting, metal-cased key cabinets shall be included in the
Contract, one for each item of switchgear. They shall have labelled hooks or
other receptacles and be of sufficient size to house all keys and padlocks
supplied with the switchgear. The cabinets shall be wall mounted and shall
match the switchgear in colour and finish. Provision shall also be made in each
key box for storage of permit books and danger boards. There shall be four
PAGE 116

danger boards each 250×200mm provided under the Contract. The inscriptions
shall be approved by DMAT.
23.1.5 Floor Inserts

A) Where metal inserts or rails are required in the floors for constructing the
switchboard or guiding the circuit breakers into position, they shall be included
in the Contract.
B) It shall be possible to remove/install the circuit breakers from/into the fixed
portion without the aid of special portable ramps or the like.
23.1.6 Voltage and Current Transformers

23.1.6.1 Voltage Transformers (VTS)
op V1
All voltage transformers shall be single-phase units and be of the ‘withdrawable’
carriage-mounted type with plug-in contacts. Means shall be provided for locking
the voltage transformers in the service or withdrawn position. Shutters shall be
fitted to the spouts, which shall open and shut automatically by the insertion or
C -
withdrawal of the voltage transformer. The secondary winding and carriage earth
y
C
connection shall be made before it is possible to make the primary connections.
23.1.6.2 Current Transformers (CTS)

C
A) It is intended to use ac series tripping for the circuit breaker to eliminate the
need for a substation battery. Consequently, the current transformers supplied
must be closely matched to the protection relays and breaker trip-coils to
Q
ensure satisfactory overall performance. Tenderers/The Contractor shall submit

detailed calculations to prove that the equipment can operate over the whole
ranges of possible fault currents and relay settings. The electrical relays shall
be designed in accordance with IEC 60255.
B) CTs shall comply with BS EN 61869-2 (IEC 61869-2), be cast resin insulated,
and be so rated and designed that they shall not sustain any damage due to
through fault currents expected on the system.
C) The secondary of all CTs shall be 1A. d) Each CT shall be as follows:
i. Ratio: As specified.
ii. Rated Continuous Thermal Current: The current transformer shall be
carrying twice the maximum rated primary continuously.
iii. Rated Output: Outputs shall be matched to the requirement of relays,
ammeters and trip coils selected.
iv. Accuracy Class: 1 or better (as appropriate).
v. Rated Accuracy Limit factor: 20.
vi. Rated Short Time Thermal Current: 25kA.
vii. Rated Time: 1 second.
viii. Quantity: One per phase.
23.1.6.3 Voltage Transformer And Current Transformer Secondary

Terminals
A) VT and CT secondary wiring shall be routed via local isolation and short-
circuiting links which can either be separately mounted or be integral with
terminal blocks. These links shall facilitate isolation of the VT secondary circuit
PAGE 117

and short-circuiting of CT secondary circuits. The outgoing side of these links

shall have a disconnecting feature to allow isolation of the burden for testing
purposes. It shall not be possible to disconnect the VT/CT secondary earth
connections via these links. The links shall also allow ratio change of dual-ratio
current transformers.
B) The above features shall all be possible without disconnecting any wiring from
the terminal blocks and links and without isolation of the primary circuit and
shall be in addition to any testing features required on relay panels.
23.1.7 Cable Boxes

A) Cable boxes shall be adequately sized to accommodate air-insulated heat-
shrinkable type terminations.
op V1
B) The minimum distance between the lower end of the cable socket and the
inner face to which the gland is bolted shall be that required to effect the
necessary clearances in compliance with the requirements of the heat shrink
cable terminations used and in any case not less than 450mm. Above this
face, there shall be no projection that restricts the spreading of the cores of the
cable.
C -
y
C
C) The cable box shall be positioned below the busbar chamber and shall
completely enclose the cable above the switchgear room floor.
C
D) Cable glands shall be suitable for 11kV, 3-core, XLPE, Double Steel Tape
Armour, PVC-served cables, of size range 95 to 240mm² copper.
Q
E) Gland plates, unless otherwise specified, shall have glands pointing vertically
downwards.
F) Each panel shall be supplied complete with a suitable heat shrinkable
termination kit of an acceptable make; including cable lugs, support glands,
etc. The kit shall be suitable for 95mm² for Transformer Control Panel and
185/240mm² for Feeder Control Panel.
23.1.8 Earthing of Metal Parts

A) All metal parts of the switchboard and integral earthing features shall be
directly connected to a copper earth bar, which shall run along the full length of
the switchboard.
B) The cross sectional area of the earth bars shall be as specified and sufficient
to carry the rated short time withstand current of the switchgear for the time
specified.
C) The frame of draw-out circuit breakers and earthing trucks shall be
automatically connected to the switchboard earth bar through substantial plug
type contacts.
23.1.9 Heater
Each compartment shall be provided with a suitably rated heater for operation from
240V ac supply and arranged for cutting in when the breaker is “OFF” or
“ISOLATED”. This is to prevent condensation on breaker bushing, spout
insulations, etc. An additional Hygrostat relay shall also be provided in the cable
compartment.
PAGE 118

23.1.10 Instruments
Dial type, switchboard pattern, flush-mounting, moving-iron voltmeters and
ammeters shall be provided.
23.1.11 Small Wiring

A) All wiring shall be 2.5mm² Copper Conductor, 600V tropical grade PVC-
insulated heat-resistant type. All small wiring shall be suitably terminated with
circuit numbers.
B) Trip circuit shall have an additional ferrule coloured red and marked “TRIP”.
Each circuit identification number shall be suffixed with the panel identification
letter.
op V1
C) All terminals shall be provided with suitably-rated terminal studs. Exposed
terminals shall be suitably enclosed by detachable covers.
D) The trip circuit cables shall be coloured BLACK. Current transformer
secondary wires shall be adequately sized for the burden involved in each
case.
C -
y
23.1.12 Labels
C
The panel of each item of switchgear shall have a blank circuit label approximately
300×80mm mounted on the front of the panel in a prominent position. The labels
C
shall be made of suitable engraving material approximately 2mm thick, white
surfaces with black engraving. Small black labels of similar material shall be
Q
mounted on the rear of the panels. The circuit names will be engraved at site to the
approval of DMAT.
23.1.13 Secondary MCBS

A) LV Control Circuit shall be protected by MCBs. All necessary MCBs shall be
supplied and they shall be fitted with clearly legible labels indicating the circuit.
They shall be grouped according to their function.
B) Labels shall indicate the current rating of the MCB and code symbols.
23.1.14 11KV Voltage Detector

Each feeder control panel shall include One 11kV single-phase voltage detector
with two glow discharge lamps to indicate circuit “ALIVE”. The voltage detector
(capacitor type) to be connected in the L2 (Black) phase on the circuit side. The
glow discharge lamps shall be located on front of the panel.
23.2 Specification for 11kv, 4 Panel Switchgear

23.2.1 Configuration
A) 4-panel switchgear for a ring main application shall comprise of two
Transformer Control Panel and two Feeder Control Panels. The first and the
last panel shall be for Feeder Control and the centre panels for the
transformer. The protection relays shall use an ac series tripping.
B) Indication shall be supplied from the station auxiliary supply through a single-
phase 240V 50Hz step down transformer. The transformer circuits shall be
equipped with Protective Relays. No protection shall be provided for Feeder
Circuits, but one feeder panel shall be equipped with a Through Fault Current
Indicator.
PAGE 119

23.2.2 Feeder Control Panel

Each Feeder Control Panel shall include, as a minimum:
i. One 11kV/25kA, 3-phase Vacuum Circuit Breaker of the rating specified.
ii. One 11kV Voltage Detector connected in L2 (Black) phase on the circuit side,
with two glow discharge circuit ALIVE, indicating lamps mounted on front
panel.
iii. One cable box for 11kV, 3-core XLPE, double steel tape armoured, PVC
sleeved cable size as specified with a heat shrinkable cable termination kit.
iv. Dry type heat shrinkable termination complete with cable lugs, glands and
accessories.
op V1
v. One set of core balance transformer and through fault indicator relay.
(Applicable for one panel only.)
23.2.3 Transformer Control Panel

Each 11kV/433V transformer control panel shall include, as a minimum:
C -
y
i.
C
One 11kV/25kA, 3-phase Vacuum Circuit Breaker of the rating specified.
ii. Three current transformers of current ratings specified.
C
iii. One cable box for 11kV, 3-core XLPE, double steel tape armoured, PVC
sleeved cable size as specified.
iv. Dry type heat shrinkable termination complete with cable lugs, glands and
Q
Accessories.
v. One set of over current and earth fault relays.
vi. One ammeter of specified scale connected on L2 (Black) phase.
23.2.4 Protective Relays and Ammeters

23.2.4.1 Feeder Control Panel
A) No protective relays or ammeters are to be provided on feeder circuits.
‘Through Fault’ Current Indicator, energised from a core-balance CT, shall be
provided on the outgoing feeder circuit. The indicator shall be mounted on the
front of the panel.
B) The indication shall re-set manually, when the ac supply is restored to the
substation.
23.2.4.2 Transformer Control Panel

A) The transformer to be protected shall be rated 11/0.433kV, Dyn11.
B) Two over-current and one centre-element earth fault relays shall be provided
which have normal inverse definite-minimum time lag (IDMT) characteristics
complying with BS EN 60255 (IEC 60255) and their curves shall be such as to
give tripping after three seconds for ten times current setting, when a time
multiplier setting of 100% is applied.
C) The over-current relay shall have IDMT current settings ranging from 50% to
200% in steps of 25%. The earth fault relay shall have an IDMT current setting
range from 20% to 80% in steps of 10%. The time setting ranges for both
over-current and earth fault IDMT relays shall preferably be continuously
PAGE 120

variable from 0 to 1.0 or as an alternative, with steps of at least 0.01 from 0.05
to 1.0.
D) Each over-current and earth fault relay shall be supplemented with an

instantaneous element, which shall be capable of tripping in less than 40ms,
when twice the current setting is flowing.
E) The over-current instantaneous element shall have pick-up setting range of 8

to 32 times nominal. The earth fault instantaneous element shall have a pickup
setting range 4 to 16 times nominal.
F) Operations indicators shall be fitted to each relay. The instantaneous elements

and IDMT elements shall have separate indicators.
op V1
G) No dc control voltage shall be used. Consequently, ac series tripping is to be
performed under fault conditions. With this series tripping arrangement, it is
common to require three trip coils. It is essential that the performance of the
CT relay circuit and trip coils are co-ordinated, so that the scheme operates
C -
satisfactorily. Auxiliary equipment such as resistors and chokes shall be
y
C
provided where necessary to limit over-voltage and over-current effects.
H) The Contractor shall submit calculations to prove that the relay scheme is
C
adequately designed. They shall take into account the variation of trip coil
impedance with plunger position and that the relay scheme is capable of
operating over the range from minimum earth fault relay setting to circuit
Q
breaker fault rating.
I) Type tests shall be carried out in the presence of DMAT for the performance of
the relay/CTs./trip coil under full fault condition (The test is exempted if
performed already on a similar unit). Any limitations on the operating range of
the relay shall be clearly stated.
J) One ammeter, connected to the centre phase, shall be provided on these

panels. It shall have one pointer, which is activated by a thermal element, and
another acting instantly. The thermal pointer shall move a resettable maximum
demand indicator. The ammeter shall be scaled to suit the applications
requirements and be capable of taking twice rated current continuously without
suffering damage.
23.2.5 Additional Equipment

23.2.5.1 Earthing Gear to be Supplied with Switchgear
A) Each item of switchgear shall be provided with 3-phase set of earthing gear
required for the earthing of switchgear through the circuit breaker of the circuit
being earthed. All extensions plugs shall be fully insulated.
B) The earthing device shall be fully interlocked to prevent danger to personnel
and damage to equipment. The earthing devices shall be supplied separately
in suitable wooden cases, with fixing and operational instructions permanently
fixed in the lids of the cases. Full details of the earthing equipment shall be
submitted with the tender.
PAGE 121

23.3 Special Tools

A) All special tools, levers, removable door handles, portable earthing devices,
test plugs and the like which are required for operational purposes to ‘rack in’
or remove circuit breakers, voltage transformers and to facilitate earthing,
testing and day-to-day operations of the works shall be provided in a lockable
cabinet.
B) All cabinets shall be wall-mounted with one provided for each switchboard.
Each tool shall be secured within the cabinet in a fully labelled manner and
identified such that it will be obvious it a tool or device has been removed from
the cabinet.
C) Full lists of special tools and devices shall be to the approval of DMAT and
op V1
shall include any special operational tool and devices listed elsewhere in the
specification. These shall include in the main, but not necessary be limited to
the following:
i. 1 set of 3-phase primary test plugs, fully insulated to facilitate insulation
and primary injection testing.
C -
y
ii.
C
1 portable manually-attached flexible clamp-on type earthing device for
each of switchgear. (Feeder, transformer, bus section).
iii. 1 set - Manual slow closing device.
C
iv. Special removable door keys as appropriate.
Q
23.4 Inspection and Testing

A) The equipment will be subject to inspections by Inspector appointed by
ADWEA and the representative of DMAT during manufacture and after
completion in accordance with Section 15001: General M&E Requirements.
B) The inspections may also be carried out by an ADWEA approved independent
inspecting authority nominated by DMAT.
C) All required materials for the inspection and testing, as well as all testing
equipment shall be supplied by the Contractor and shall be included in the unit
prices.
23.4.1 Type Tests

A) The Contractor shall submit type test certificate from an internationally
recognised authority acceptable to the client as evidence that the circuit
breaker with panel has been successfully tested to relevant IEC
Recommendation, BS EN on its own structure, complete with isolating
features, with vent outlets forming part of the unit and with the main connected
and busbars. The certificate shall include the test results and circuit breaker
performance during the tests.
B) Full type test certificate shall be made available to DMAT at the time of
inspection. DMAT may require certain type tests to be repeated at the
Supplier’s expense, if it is found that the offered equipment substantially differs
in design and construction with the type test unit. Such tests shall be
performed at Supplier’s expense.
C) The following type tests shall be carried out in accordance with BS/IEC on one
complete Switchboard in the presence of DMAT’s representative:
PAGE 122

i. Power Frequency Voltage Tests.

ii. Mechanical Operation Tests.
iii. Voltage Tests on Auxiliary Circuit.
iv. Polarity Tests.
v. Sequence Tests.
vi. Temperature Rise Tests.
23.4.2 Routine Tests

Routine tests shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant BS/IEC standards in
the presence of DMAT's representative.
op V1
23.5 Engineering Data
The following shall be submitted with the offer:
C -
A) All technical schedules duly completed and signed.
y
C
B) All drawings and information called for by this Inquiry, including:
i. General arrangement of the switchgear showing all important
dimensions, together with mountings/accessories.
C
ii. Details of Circuit Breaker(s).
iii. Details of HV Cable Box with Bushing.
Q
iv. Details of LV Cable Box with Bushing.

v. Earthing Arrangement.
vi. Details of all the CTs and relays included.
vii. Single Line Diagram of the completed switchgear.
C) Detailed summary of deviations from the tender specification (if any).

D) Brochures and catalogues for standard equipment.
E) Applicable design specifications.
F) Lists of accessories included in the bid.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 123

24. PFCC (SECTION 16411)

24.1 General
B) Power Factor Correction Capacitors (PFCC) shall be provided to improve the
overall power factor of the plant/equipment to 0.93 lagging (or better) to meet
latest ADDC regulations.
C) PFCC shall be designed and manufactured for automatic centralised operation
for site-wide Power Factor compensation by employing multiple steps. It shall
op V1
be contained within a standalone Factory Built Assembly (FBA) in a minimum
Form 2 Enclosure as described under Section 16480.
D) The enclosure shall be of equal height of the associated MCC and located
adjacent to it or at other suitable location within the MCC room.
C -
y
E) The PFCC enclosure shall be fitted with forced ventilation fan and louvres as
C
necessary. The IP rating when fitted with forced ventilation shall be at least
IP43.
C
F) The PFCC equipment shall be disconnected whenever the associated MCC is
fed by a generator set.
Q
G) The PFCC enclosure shall be sized to accommodate an additional spare step of

equal rating for future use.
H) Internal wiring within the PFCC enclosure shall be fire-retardant to 105ºC.
I) The design of the PFCC shall take into account any harmonic filter installations
connected to the same power distribution system so as to avoid any LC
resonance with these and any upstream transformer reactances.
24.2 Unit Capacitors

A) Power Factor Correction Capacitors shall be self-healing type confirming to BS
EN 60831.
B) The PFCC shall be modular in design, highly reliable, dry, self-healing and use
a metallised polypropylene film element, fully encapsulated in plastic housing.
C) Capacitors shall have low losses (typically less than 0.5 watts per kVAr),
D) Capacitors shall be fitted with overpressure disconnect device and a wire-
wound discharge resistor sized to automatically discharge the capacitor to less
than 50V in less than one minute.
E) Capacitors shall be used with capacitor-rated duty contactors specifically
designed for switching of capacitive current.
F) Each capacitor step shall be protected by quick-disconnect type fuseswitch
fitted with recommended HRC fuses disconnecting all the 3 phases
simultaneously.
G) HRC fuses shall have built-in blown fuse indicator feature.
H) Capacitors shall be designed to carry 135% of rated current and 110% of rated
PAGE 124

voltages continuously at 50ºC.
24.3 Detuned Reactors/Harmonic Filters

A) Where required by the particular specification, the Contractor shall provide anti-
resonance detuned reactors or filters deemed necessary to reduce the
harmonic content in accordance with ADDC Regulations.
B) International standards describing techniques for limiting harmonics are:
i. IEEE 519-1992 Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic
Control in Electrical Power Systems’, or
ii. ‘Engineering Recommendation G5/4-1 (Planning levels for harmonic
voltage distortion and connection of non-linear equipment to transmission
op V1
and distribution networks in the UK)’.
They shall be used, as appropriate, to ensure compliance with ADDC
Regulations.
c) Where Converters, Inverters or other significant contributors to harmonics are

C -
being installed, their anticipated additional harmonic content shall be summated
y
C
with those of the existing load. Should the totals exceed those stipulated in
ADDC Regulations the following shall be undertaken:
C
i. A survey, before the commencement of any installation activities, to
determine the actual existing background harmonic levels present on site.
ii. A design exercise to assess the likely harmonic contributions of the new
Q
equipment together with those of the existing equipment.

iii. Suitable harmonic corrective devices, if required, shall be designed, sized
and installed to reduce the Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) to within
allowable limits.
iv. A failure of, or maintenance on, a single corrective harmonic device shall
not cause the THD to rise to a point that the integrity of the system is
challenged.
v. After completion of all installation activities, a further harmonic survey to
determine the actual harmonic levels present on site to confirm the THD is
within allowable limits.
24.4 Power Factor Regulator

The minimum number of capacitor switching steps shall be four (4) as far as
practically possible for smaller rating capacitor banks and between 6 to 12 steps
for others. The capacitors’ kVAr shall be so chosen to provide maximum
programming flexibility such as switching sequence 1:2:2:2, 1:1:1:1 etc. in order
to maintain the power factor within the set limits for most of the operating time.
An alphanumerical LCD, microprocessor-based automatic power factor correction
regulator shall be provided to control steps and display measurement of the
following:
i. Power Factor.
ii. Number of steps connected.
iii. Step connection and disconnection time.
PAGE 125

iv. Actual current.

v. Reactive current.
vi. Active power.
vii. Reactive power.
viii. THD voltage.
ix. Alarm conditions as listed below.
The regulator shall have built-in alarm relay for remote indication and following
alarm conditions locally:
i. Low power factor.
op V1
ii. Abnormal power factor.
iii. Leading power factor.
iv. Overcurrent.
v. Overtemperature.
C -
y
vi. Overvoltage.
C
vii. THD high.
C
viii. Capacitor overload etc.
The regulator shall provide facility to manually energise/de-energise capacitor steps

Q
for the purpose of testing and verification of the required/set power factor.
24.5 Field Tests

A) The PFCC assembly shall be tested at site during commissioning as described
under Section 15001: General M&E Requirements.
B) The results so obtained shall be verified with the actual requirements and
ADWEA Regulations. Modifications if any shall be carried out at no extra cost to
ADSSC.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 126

25. FACTORY BUILT ASSEMBLIES (SECTION

16480)
25.1 MCC, LV Switchboards and Control Panels
A) The LV Assembly shall be a ‘Type Tested Assembly’ (TTA) in accordance with
the requirements of BS EN 61439-1 and BS EN 61439-2 (IEC 61439-2) and
designed in the form of floor-standing multi-cubicle type units containing
modularised incoming and outgoing compartments. There shall be a separate
op V1
section for busbars and cables. All functional units’ incoming and outgoing
cable terminations shall be housed in a separate compartment.
B) Each Factory Built Assembly (FBA) shall consist of number of cubicles of
equal height and depth and mounted side by side to form a composite board of
C -
uniform appearance.
y
C
C) Each FBA shall be front access only (unless specified otherwise) and
constructed such that doors and covers are flush with one another and aligned
to a common vertical plane. They shall be manufactured out of mild steel
C
coated with Alu Zinc having the following thickness:
i. Plinth/bed frame: 3mm

Q
ii. Frames: 2mm

iii. Covers and Doors: 2mm
iv. Mounting plate: 3mm
v. Gland Plate: 3mm
D) Each FBA shall be Alum-zinc coated for the frames and internal subdivision,
galvanized for the transverse section and epoxy polyester powder-coated to
BS 4800 Shade 18 E 51 Blue with a minimum thickness of 0.075 mm. The
mounting plate within each cubicle shall be White (OO E 55 to BS 4800).
E) Plastic components used in the FBA shall be halogen-free, flame-retardant,
self-extinguishing as per IEC 60695.
F) All major components/systems of the FBA shall be from a single manufacturer
(for example: the enclosure, busbar system, soft starters, contactors,
overloads, etc.).
G) All items required for the project should also be from a single manufacturer.
(for example: feeder pillars, sub-main distribution boards, final distribution
boards, consumer units, etc).
H) The FBA manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years of experience in
designing, manufacturing, project management, quality control, testing and
support during commissioning at site of the types of equipment required by the
Contract.
PAGE 127

25.1.2 Test Specifications and Certifications

25.1.2.1 Type Tests
A) Each FBA shall be Type Tested by an independent and internationally
recognised testing authority such as ASTA/KEMA in accordance with Clause
8.2 of BS EN 61439-1 and BS EN 61439-2. The following 7 tests must be
conducted and supported by the relevant certification:
i. Verification of temperature rise limits.
ii. Verification of dielectric properties.
iii. Verification of short-circuit withstand strength.
iv. Verification of effectiveness of the protective circuit.
op V1
v. Verification of clearances and creepage distances.
vi. Mechanical operations test.
vii. Verifications of the degree of protection (IP Rating).
C -
y
C
B) Should there be modification to any components of the LV Assembly, then
NEW Type Tests shall to be carried out and supported by relevant Type Test
Certification.
C
C) A table showing Factory Built Assembly (FBA) to BS EN 60439-1 giving Type
and Characteristics and Form of Internal Separation is given elsewhere in the
Specification.
Q
25.1.2.2 Routine Tests

A) The LV Assembly shall be Routine Tested at a place of assembly in
accordance with Clause 8.3 in BS EN 60439-1 to ensure all material and
workmanship free from faults. Tests to be carried out on all new ‘as delivered’
Assembly and its transport/shipping sections. The following tests must be
conducted and supported by the relevant Factory Tests certifications:
iv. All mechanical parts, lifting arrangement.
v. Wiring, cabling and termination details.
vi. Dimensional details.
vii. Components specifications.
viii. Internal and external supports and structure.
ix. Engineered drawings, documentation and application development
software.
x. Operational test and sequence of operation.
xi. Primary and secondary current injection test on all protective devices.
xii. Checking of electrical continuity of all protective circuits.
xiii. Dielectric test.
xiv. Insulation resistance test.
xv. All other tests as recommended by the manufacturer.
xvi. Additional tests as instructed by DMAT.
PAGE 128

NOTE: The performance of routine tests so conducted at the manufacturer’s

works shall not relieve the supplier/manufacturer of LV Assembly of the
obligation of repeating all tests at site upon completion of the installation.
A) Each FBA shall comply with the requirements of IEC 61641 for resistance to
accidental arcs due to an internal fault, and shall have been tested by the
above internationally recognised testing authority. The tests shall be supported
by relevant certification.
25.1.3 Form of Construction

A) The LV Assembly shall be manufactured in fixed execution providing Form 4b
Type 6 and/or Type 7 segregation unless specified elsewhere in the
specification/contract documents.
op V1
B) The LV Assembly shall have internal separation by means of metallic or non-
metallic partitions or barriers.
C) All internal components within a compartment/cubicle, including withdrawable
C -
starters, shall be provided with a degree of protection to IP2X as a minimum,
y
whereas it shall be provided to IP4X between adjacent functional units to
C
prevent contact with live parts.
D) Electrical continuity between the exposed conductive parts of the LV Assembly
C
and protective circuits of the installation shall be ensured to provide protection
against indirect contact by using protective circuits.
Q
E) Protective circuits throughout the installation shall be so designed that makes it

impossible to break the protective path with the removal of any component
from the LV Assembly.
F) All outgoing circuit protective conductors shall have a separate terminal of
adequate size duly identified.
G) The LV Assembly shall be designed to give the highest importance to
accessibility, especially when in service/fully powered, so allowing easy
viewing for inspection and operation, replacement of fuses and extension of
additional functional units, etc.
H) The LV Assembly shall be constructed to facilitate a vermin-proof installation.
25.1.4 Degree of Protection

A) The LV Assembly shall be designed, manufactured and tested to IP54 in
compliance with the requirements of IEC 60529, to ensure the avoidance of:
i. Unintentional contact with hazardous live parts.
ii. Ingress of water or moisture.
iii. Ingress of solid foreign bodies and dusts.
B) Where equipment within a FBA requires forced ventilation (e.g. VFDs, UPSs
or other large watt-loss devices) then external fans and louvers shall be used
as recommended by the manufacturer and the IP rating shall be reduced from
IP54 to IP43.
25.1.5 Fault Level (Short-Circuit Rating)

A) The LV Assembly shall be designed and type tested to withstand a fault
PAGE 129

current of 50 kA for 1 second symmetrical. Additionally, they shall be type

tested for safe containment of an internal arcing fault, which will check the
capability of the steel structure to withstand the forces associated with the arc,
and ensure safety and integrity of the assembly for continuous use.
B) This is to establish that in the event of internal arcing, the enclosure of LV
Assembly together with internal partitions and/or barriers withstands the
pressure and temperature arising from internal arcing associated with short
circuit current and thus provides protection for persons in front of or within the
close proximity of the LV Assembly.
C) The LV Assembly shall be designed and equipped with properly sized circuit
breaker and or fused disconnect switch as specified to provide selective short-
circuit co-ordination, so that faults are cleared without disturbing other circuits.
op V1
25.1.6 Service Conditions
A) The LV Assembly shall be designed for indoor installation, except where
specifically specified for outdoor installation. It shall be designed to operate
C -
satisfactorily in accordance with the climactic conditions specified in Section
y
C
B) Unless otherwise specified, temperatures up to 75ºC and RH up to 100% shall
apply during transport, storage and installation. Equipment subjected to these
C
extreme service conditions without being operated shall not suffer irreversible
damage when operated under normal specified conditions.
Q
25.1.7 Environmental Conditions

The LV Assembly shall normally be located indoors in service conditions as
specified above. However, external equipment associated with the LV Assembly,
such as field instruments, sensors and pilot devices, may be installed in highly
corrosive gaseous environments that could adversely affect the proper operation
of the devices. In such circumstances, special measures shall be adopted to
prevent corrosion and the subsequent rise in resistance, which may lead to
temporary or permanent interruption of the control circuit.
25.1.8 Temperature Rise

A) The temperature rise in LV Assembly shall not be allowed to damage internal
components, connectors, wires, terminals, etc. When the equipment is in
normal service no live part shall become subjected to high temperature, which
may cause overheating so increasing the risk of internal arcing accidents.
B) Extreme care shall be taken during the design period to ensure the external
surface remains below the temperature at which inadvertent contact may
cause burns.
25.1.9 Clearance and Creepage Distances

Clearances and creepage distances in the LV Assembly shall be based on rated
‘impulse withstand’ voltage in accordance with BS EN 61439-1 and BS EN 61439-
2 to ensure that the equipment designed is capable of withstanding without failure
under specified test conditions.
25.1.10 Site Considerations

A) The maximum height of the FBA, including plinth, etc., shall be not greater
PAGE 130

than 2,400mm above the finished floor level.

B) The minimum depth of the FBA shall be not less than 300mm.
C) Site safety and maintenance considerations shall be taken into account during
the design of the FBA. Considerations shall include:
i. Clear floor space of at least 1,000mm shall be provided to the front and
rear of the FBA.
ii. In order to provide an unobstructed exit route, a clear path of not less
than 500mm shall be provided in front of the FBA when cubicle doors are
fully opened. Cubicle doors shall close towards the exit from the building
enclosing the FBA.
iii. Provision of sufficient space to allow cubicle doors to open fully without
op V1
fouling other items of equipment or other open doors.
iv. Limiting the size and weight of assembly sections to those imposed by
transportation, site access and permitted levels of site floor loading.
v. Clear floor space of at least 1,000mm shall be provided either side of the
C -
y
FBA to cater for its possible future extension.
C
25.1.11 Mounting
C
A) Floor
i. Floor-mounted assembles shall either be provided with an integral plinth
or a separate rolled mild steel channel bed frame at least 50mm high.
Q
ii. Fixing shall be by not less than four holding down bolts per assembly
section, located around the periphery of the section. The fixing shall not
be visible from outside the section but be readily accessible from within.
B) Post/Column
i. Fixings shall be provided outside the enclosure. The back of the
enclosure shall not be drilled to accept fixings.
25.1.12 Cubicle
A) The type of cubicle construction shall be multi-compartment, unless specified
otherwise.
B) A multi-cubicle assembly shall be designed to provide fully segregated self-
contained compartments. Each cubicle/compartment shall have its own door.
C) Power Factor Correction Panels, skid-mounted panels and other wall-/floor-
mounted panels and distribution boards shall be constructed to Form 2b Type
2 segregation.
D) All cubicles shall be provided with a means of ensuring that equipment can be
adequately isolated for maintenance purposes without interrupting essential
loads that may continue to operate whilst maintenance is being undertaken.
25.1.13 Doors and Covers

A) Doors shall be adequately sized to accommodate readily and neatly all
mounted equipment. They shall open at least 120°, be rigidly constructed,
suitably braced and provided with at least two substantial hinges that shall be
captive when the door is closed.
PAGE 131

B) Each door shall be provided with chromium plated ‘T’ type catches, at least
one of which shall be lockable.
C) Doors shall be fixed to the frame by continuous stainless steel hinges over
their entire height.
D) Locking combinations shall be provided as specified. Three keys for each key
type shall be provided on individual key rings having identifying nametag
details.
E) Where the need for padlocking facilities is identified by DMAT, padlocks will
be supplied and fitted.
F) Equipment shall not be mounted on covers. Covers shall not weigh more than
30kg, and any cover over 7.5kg shall be provided with a means of supporting
op V1
the lower edge when its securing bolts are being inserted or removed.
G) Removable back covers shall be provided.
H) Each door shall be provided with an internal welded earthing stud earth-
bonded to the FBA main earth bar.
C -
y
I) Neoprene gaskets used for sealing panel door covers and for door-mounted
C
instruments shall be of highest quality to avoid deterioration due to H2S and
Methane gas intrusion.
C
J) Doors and covers giving access to potentially live conductors shall be
provided with prominent warning labels in both English and Arabic.
K) Doors on outdoor FBAs shall be retained in the opened position by the
Q
provision of adequately fixed stays.
25.1.14 Components Mounting

A) Each cubicle/compartment shall be provided with removable steel backplate
located clear of the cubicle rear panel.
B) All components, other than door-mounted, shall be located on the backplate by
bolting into tapped holes or by using self-tapping screws. Nuts used for
securing components shall be captive.
C) Rail-type fixings may be used where appropriate. Components shall not be
mounted on any other surface.
D) No components shall be located within the FBA at a height greater than
2,000mm or less than 500mm above finished floor level.
E) It shall be possible to replace and maintain any component without first
removing other components.
25.1.15 Bolts, Nuts and Screws

A) All bolts, nuts, screws and washers used in the construction of the assembly
shall be stainless steel Grade 316L.
B) Bolts and nuts for cover fixing shall be captive and provided with protective
washers to prevent damage to paintwork.
C) Floor fixing bolts shall be manufactured from stainless steel Grade 316L.
25.1.16 Control Supply

A) Unless specified otherwise, control supplies shall be 110V ac derived from a
PAGE 132

transformer within each cubicle/compartment of the FBA, fused on its primary

and secondary windings, with a removable Neutral link in the secondary circuit.
B) Auxiliary supplies such as 24V a.c./d.c., 110V ac, 240V ac, etc. are specified in
the relevant individual components’ specification.
25.1.17 Cubicle Heater

Each compartment shall be provided with a separately fixed compartment heater
rated 240V ac. Apart from those in motor starter compartments, the heaters shall
be controlled by means of individual “OFF/AUTO” switches. Auto operation shall
be by means of adjustable panel-mounted humidistat covering the range of
humidity envisaged. Each circuit shall be fused and powered from common supply
tapped from the main bus in the Main Incomer section of the LV Assembly.
op V1
25.1.18 Future Extensions
The LV Assembly shall be designed for ready extension at each end. The end
sections of busbars and associated steelwork shall be suitably prepared for future
C -
connections.
y
C
25.1.19 Switching Devices and Components
Refer to the relevant sections of Division 16.
C
25.1.20 Busbars
Q
A) Busbars shall be electro-tinned high-conductivity 99.9% Copper, with a

continuous current rating of specified amperes plus 20% at the specified
service conditions.
B) The mechanical and dielectric strength of busbars and supports shall be
capable of withstanding the worst conditions of electrical surge that can occur
in the installation.
C) Busbars shall be fully insulated and sleeved by using high temperature grade
heat shrinkable Brown/Black/Grey/Blue coloured PVC sleeving throughout its
length or by means of providing secondary insulation. Moulded PVC shrouds
shall be provided over joints.
D) All three phases and the neutral busbars shall be of same size enclosed in a
separate chamber. The earth busbar shall be of half the size of phase busbar
running throughout its length. ADWEA’s latest regulations for busbar sizes
shall be considered to verify and comply with the requirements in full.
E) The main horizontal busbars shall be housed in a separate chamber located
on the top of the FBA. Busbars located elsewhere shall be accepted at the
discretion of DMAT after verifying site location, available space and
considering other factors necessary for ease of operation and maintenance of
the FBA.
F) Vertical busbars shall be fully encapsulated enclosed in a separate chamber
within its own cubicle, located approximately 350–400mm from the front of the
column.
G) Busbars connections shall be identified by phase colour marking and
adequately supported by suitable supports designed to withstand the full fault
capacity as specified herein.
PAGE 133

H) Connections from the main busbars to MCCBs controlling main motor starters
and outgoing distribution feeders shall be via solid copper busbars and NOT
cables.
I) Bolted copper busbar links shall be provided where specified and shall be
used for maintenance purposes only. The link section shall be easily
accessible from the front or top of the board and shall have a lockable cover.
Provision for storing the links nuts and bolts shall be made in the switchboard.
25.1.21 Gland Plates

A) Gland plates shall be selected and installed to enable glanding to occur in
accordance with BS 6121 (relevant parts) and be fitted at least 300mm above
finished floor level.
op V1
B) Gland plates and cable boxes shall minimise the effects of eddy currents and
be suitable for the type of cable used. Single core cable gland plates shall be
made of non-magnetising material.
C) For cable sizes 300mm² and above insulated glands shall be fitted.
C -
y
D) Gland plates shall be rust proofed and provided with a welded and bonded
C
earthing stud, and adequately sized to accommodate present and known
future cabling requirements. Access to both sides of each gland plate when it
is in position shall be possible from within the assembly. Cables shall enter at
C
the top or bottom of the assembly.
E) All cables shall be adequately supported prior to entry to the assembly.
Q
Particular care shall be taken with large, bottom-entry cables such that their
weight is not unduly transferred to the gland plate.
F) Space shall be provided to accommodate cable glands of appropriate size for
incoming and outgoing circuits. All gland plates and trays shall be adequately
earthed.
25.1.22 Cableways and Terminations

A) Cableways shall be provided to ensure that apart from inter-connections no
cable routed to one cubicle shall pass through any other cubicle.
B) Terminals for outgoing connections shall be located at a low level in the
compartment adjacent to the cable gland trays. Direct termination on
equipment such as Distribution Board Fuses or Miniature Circuit Breakers
(MCBs) is not acceptable.
C) All live terminals shall be fully shrouded by using high-grade high-temperature
material.
D) Cable disconnecting links shall be provided where specified and be used for
maintenance purposes only. The links shall be labelled ‘ISOLATING LINK’ and
the circuit or cable reference shall be quoted.
25.1.23 Panel Earthing

A) Within each assembly, all metal parts of equipment supplied other than those
forming part of an electric circuit shall be bonded to the earth bar. Metalwork
may be used for this purpose if earth continuity conductors are fitted at all joints
and other discontinuities and those connections to metalwork are made using
welded or bolted stud.
PAGE 134

B) The following metal parts shall be provided with euipotential bonding connected
to earth busbar system by using yellow/green earth cable of at least 6mm².
i. Gland plates.
ii. Gland covers.
iii. Side sheets.
iv. Top barriers.
v. Intermediate barriers.
vi. Top covers.
vii. End covers.
op V1
viii. Rear covers.
ix. Front covers.
x. Cable boxes.
xi. Doors and bolted front covers.
C -
y
xii. Horizontal busbar barriers.
C
25.1.24 Small Wiring and Terminal Blocks
C
25.1.24.1 Types
A) Wiring shall generally be of the multi-stranded high temperature to minimum
Q
105ºC flexible PVC insulated, 600/1000V single-core stranded copper type

cable to BS EN 6231.
B) The minimum cross sectional area of the wire used shall be 1.5mm² for control
circuit and 2.5mm² for power circuit.
C) Colour coding shall be:
i. Brown - Phase L1 of a three-phase circuit
ii. Black - Phase L2 of a three-phase circuit
iii. Grey - Phase L3 of a three-phase circuit
iv. Blue - Neutral
v. Green and Yellow - Earth/Protective conductors
vi. Grey - 110V ac
vii. White - 60V dc
viii. Purple - <50V ac
ix. Brown - Current Transformers
PAGE 135

Identification of conductors and auxiliary circuit shall be in accordance with BS

EN 60445.
25.1.24.2 Terminations
A) All wiring shall have crimped terminations with only one wire being held by any
one crimp. Crimped lugs shall be of the insulated type without conductor
exposure between the crimp and wire insulation.
B) The type of crimp used shall be appropriate for the type of terminal to which it
connects.
C) Terminations shall be neatly arranged leaving adequate length for one
termination.
op V1
D) All terminal blocks for the connection of small wiring shall comprise shrouded
anti-tracking moulding of melamine phenolic or comparable material with
provision for securing conductors.
E) Termination shall be achieved by either by high tensile screws and clamps, or
alternatively in the case of small telephone type conductors by solder tag
C -
connection.
y
C
F) Terminal blocks shall be arranged to facilitate easy access to both terminals
and wiring ends. Connections for outgoing circuits to auxiliary pilot cables shall
C
be provided with test links.
G) Removable rail terminals shall be provided for all wiring, mounted at an angle
to provide ease of access. Centre-disconnecting link type terminals shall be
Q
provided for analogue signal circuits, external control devices and all
alarm/telemetry signals. Sufficient, suitably sized earth terminals and end
stops shall also be provided.
H) The gap between gland plates and associated terminals shall be such that
conductors can be safely manipulated and connected without damage.
Terminals shall face the door of a cubicle for ease of connection.
I) Barriers shall be provided on all terminal banks, to group terminals into logical
divisions. Power terminals of different phases shall be barriered from each
other and separated from control terminals.
J) In all cases, care shall be taken to ensure that terminals are easily accessible
after all wiring and plant cabling has been installed and terminated. All
connections shall be made on the front of terminal blocks.
K) No more than two conductors shall be connected to one side of a terminal.
Outgoing cables shall be wired so that all assembly wiring is connected to one
side only.
L) The terminal numbers, voltage grouping and terminal block layout shall
correspond precisely with wiring diagrams so that quick and accurate
identification of wiring can be made.
M) All terminals shall show the circuit wire number reference.
N) A separate, dedicated Telemetry/RTU section shall be provided in the MCC
cubicle equipped with all terminals duly wired and located in the side or on the
top of the compartment interior leaving maximum room for the free-issued fully
wired and tagged RTU complete with all associated hardware mounted on a
backplate.
O) The MCC vendor shall coordinate with the RTU vendor through the Contractor
PAGE 136

to confirm the size of the free-issued RTU on a backplate. The MCC vendor
shall install interconnection wiring between the RTU and the MCC accordingly.
25.1.24.3 Manner of Installation

A) Wiring shall be neatly laid and run in limited compression insulated cleats,
insulated straps, or where more than ten wires follow the same route, in plastic
slotted-sided trunking with clip-on covers. Where trunking is used, the effective
overall cross-sectional area of cables shall not be greater than 70% of the
trunk cross sectional area.
B) Wiring to items of equipment mounted on hinged doors or subject to movement
shall run in helical binding or flexible conduit, being securely anchored at both
ends; leaving ample slack to prevent wiring strain.
op V1
C) Holes in steelwork through which cables pass shall be protected using
grommets or bushes, suitable for the size of hole.
D) Cables used for control, extra low voltage and instrument signal transmission
likely to be affected by interference shall be screened and/or separated from
C -
each other and from heavy current power cables. The separation distance
y
C
shall ensure that the resultant electrical noise is insufficient to cause any form
of malfunction of associated equipment or give false readings.
C
25.1.24.4 Ferruling and Marking
All wiring shall be identified at each end by means of glossy plastic ferrules
showing the wire number as on the schematic diagrams. Ferrules shall be colour-
Q
coded, ‘Z’ type and indelibly marked.
25.1.25 Cable Connections

A) Where single core cable is to be accommodated, a non-magnetic gland plate
shall be provided.
B) Undrilled gland plates shall be provided for the reception of conduits and
threaded glands. Boxes and glands shall be within the cubicles except where
otherwise approved.
C) Prior to manufacture, the Contractor shall confirm cabling termination
requirements with DMAT.
25.1.26 Protective Devices

The Contractor shall provide all protective devices as described in the relevant
sections of the specifications.
25.1.27 Interlocking
A) Mechanical interlocking shall be provided where required. All electrical
interlocking shall be of the double interlocked type having separate permissive
and prohibitive interlocks. Thus, to allow a device to operate there must be an
absence of prohibitive signals and a presence of permissive signals from the
remaining devices in the interlocked system i.e. fail safe.
B) Suitable equipment shall be provided mechanically to prevent a device being
manually operated when a prohibitive signal from another part of the
interlocked system is present.
PAGE 137

25.1.28 Protection Relays

A) Suitable protection relays and associated devices shall be provided. All
switchboard relays shall be of the ‘withdrawable’ pattern in dust-proof cases
and shall comply with BS 142 or other approved equal standard.
B) Secondary injection tests shall be easily possible by means of purpose-made

voltage and/or current plug-in type test terminal blocks which automatically
open circuit or short circuit the integral voltage transformers or current
transformers respectively and provide terminations for the test supply.
Disconnection of any permanent wiring is not acceptable.
25.1.29 Markings and Identifications
op V1
A) All components, devices, switches etc. mounted inside the LV Assembly must
be clearly marked identifying the circuits and their protective devices.
B) The material used for making internal labels shall be white traffolyte. These
labels shall be engraved and fixed on a separate dedicated rail screwed on to
C -
the components’ mounting plate.
y
C
C) All external labels/name plates shall be clear perspex rear-engraved in both
English and Arabic. They shall affixed with stainless steel screws.
C
D) Labels fixed or glued directly on to the component mounting plate or PVC
trunking or on top of a component is not permitted under any circumstances.
E) Abbreviations used for the designation of the components must be identical
Q
with those in the wiring schematic drawings.

F) All relevant drawings and related documents must be kept in the drawing
pocket in one of the compartment and supplied together with the LV
Assembly.
The Neutral conductor in the main circuit and Protective Earth (PE) shall be readily
distinguishable by shape, colour, marking and location
25.2 Accessories
For each Factory Built Assembly, the Contractor shall supply the following:
A) 1No. Rubber Mat extending the full length of the FBA plus 1 metre.
i. Rubber mats shall be specifically manufactured for electrical purpose to
BS 921. They shall be made of solid natural or synthetic rubber insulating
materials. The mat shall be solid and not perforated having a minimum
thickness of 10mm.
B) 1No. pair of electrical grades rubber gloves to BS EN 60903.
C) 1 No. notice in both English and Arabic advising treatment for a person
suffering from electric shock.
A wall-mountable lockable key box complete with tags and numbering for all keys
used on the FBA.
25.3 Source Tests

A) The whole Assembly shall be witness tested as integral units for a complete
sequence of operation and as laid down in BS EN 61439-1 and BS EN 61439-
PAGE 138

2 and based on the completeness of the circuits in the final manufacturer’s

works.
B) Testing of the Factory Built Assembly shall include the following:
Each new or refurbished FBA shall be subject to routine tests to detect
faults and workmanship in accordance with BS EN 61439-1 and BS EN
61439-2. Standard assemblies and/or products used within the Assembly
shall also be subject to the tests at the manufacturer’s works who
supplied the products.
Routine tests shall include:
i. Inspection of the Assembly including wiring:
op V1
The effectiveness of mechanical actuating elements, interlock, locks etc.
shall be checked. The conductors and cables shall be checked for proper
laying and the devices for proper mounting. A visual inspection is also
necessary to ensure that the prescribed degree of protection, creepage
and clearances are maintained.
C -
All termination types and connections specially the screwed connections
y
C
shall be checked for adequate contact.
Each FBA, such as a Motor Control Centre for pumping stations and
C
treatment plants, unit-mounted standalone control panels etc., shall be
inspected thoroughly and tested at manufacturer's works to verify the
electrical operation in accordance with the control philosophy by
Q
simulating site conditions.

The manufacturer shall submit the process flow diagram together with
cause and effect diagrams for the Assemblies involving complex control
schemes, interlocks, sequence controls, etc.
The tests conducted on the Assembly at the manufacturer's works shall
be repeated as an integrated test on site with all field devices and
interfaces present.
The manufacturer shall submit, in advance, the testing procedure to
DMAT for approval prior to conducting the tests.
ii. Dielectric Test
Each FBU shall be subjected to dielectric tests as described in BS EN
61439-1 and BS EN 61439-2. All electrical components of the assembly
shall be connected for the test, excluding those designed for lower test
voltage and currents, e.g. measuring instruments.
Anti-interference capacitors installed between the live and exposed
conductive parts shall be capable of withstanding the test voltage without
being disconnected from the circuit.
iii. Checking and Measurement of protective circuits
Protective measures with regard to protection against direct and indirect
contact shall be checked as per BS EN 61439-1 and BS EN 61439-2.
Note: The performance of the routine tests conducted at the

manufacturer's works does not relieve the Contractor installing
the Assembly at site of the duty of checking it during
commissioning and site acceptance test.
PAGE 139

iv. Primary and Secondary injection tests undertaken to ensure correct

operation of the current operated protection relays and direct acting coils.
This shall be over their full range settings.
v. Balanced Earth fault stability tests by primary current injection. Care must
be taken to reproduce accurately the burdens of inter-connecting cables.
A further test to ensure correct polarity must be made after assembly.
vi. Tests on auxiliary relays at normal operating voltage by operation of
associated remote relays.
vii. Correct operation of sequencing and control circuits at normal operating
voltage by operation of local control switches, and simulation of operation
from remote control positions.
op V1
C) The Assembly shall not leave the manufacturers’ works until the witness tests
have been duly approved and stamped by DMAT and written permission is
obtained for their dispatch to site.
C -
y
C END OF SECTION
C
Q
PAGE 140

26. MOTOR PROTECTION RELAYS (SECTION

16481)
26.1 General
26.2 Electronic Motor Protection Relay (Empr)

26.2.1 General
op V1
A) The Electronic Motor Protection Relay (EMPR) shall be an intelligent electronic
device that is user-friendly, user-configurable and capable of controlling the
motor manually or automatically.
C -
B) B The EMPR shall be CE marked and conform to BS EN 60947-1.
y
C
C) C An EMPR with LCD display shall be provided in the MCC for each sewage
pump motor starter regardless of the rating of the pump and for non-sewage
pump drives above 11kW. It shall be mounted on the cubicle door, feature
C
function keys and be a minimum of IP54.
D) D Non-sewage pump drives up to 11kW inclusive may be provided with an
Q
ambient compensated bi-metal type thermal overload relay.

E) E The EMPR shall have built-in RS485 communication port utilising Modbus
RTU protocol for serial communication with other devices on the network.
F) F The EMPR shall be supplied with software, user manual and interconnecting
cables.
G) G The EMPR shall be provided with user-friendly software, Windows-based
communication, to allow easy access to all features with pull-down menus.
26.2.2 Protection Features

A) The protection features shall include the following as minimum:
i. Overload protection.
ii. Overcurrent protection.
iii. Overvoltage protection.
iv. Undervoltage protection.
v. Undercurrent protection.
vi. Phase sequence.
vii. Phase imbalance.
viii. Phase loss.
ix. Earth leakage.
x. Earth fault.
xi. Thermistor broken.
PAGE 141

xii. Open contactor.

xiii. Locked rotor.
26.2.3 Measurements
A) Motor current sensing shall be through external 5A or 1A current transformer.
The following measured values shall be displayed:
i. RMS current of each phase.
ii. RMS voltage.
iii. Earth leakage current.
iv. Continuous monitoring of thermal capacity of the motor.
op V1
v. Thermal capacity used during start.
vi. Power factor of the motor.
vii. Motor kW.
viii.
C -
Phase unbalance.
y
ix.
C
Parameter settings.
x. Percentage of FLC of the motor.
C
xi. Adjustable delayed start/stop.
xii. Maintenance log.
Q
B) The EMPR shall be capable of registering all trip commands and log trip and
pre-trip metering values for reporting and printing purposes.
26.2.4 Programmable Ranges

A) Overload – Shall be based on the calculation of accumulated I²t value and
selected thermal capacity curve. The tripping time shall be 0-10 seconds
adjustable.
B) Locked Rotor – To trip the motor within 1 to 5 seconds when the running current
exceeds the stalled rotor trip level of 1.5 to 5.0 × FLC.
C) Phase unbalance – Should there be a phase current unbalance of greater than
15% lasting for 5 seconds an alarm shall be generated. If the condition is true
for 10 seconds or more a trip shall occur.
D) Ground fault – The ground fault shall be measured as a percentage of primary
range of current transformer. The setting range for the ground current shall be
0.1 to 1.0 × ground fault CT primary current. An adjustable delay time of 0-30
seconds shall allow preventing nuisance alarm from momentary surges. It
should be possible to make the alarm setting below the trip level to indicate early
warning insulation breakdown.
E) Thermistor/Over-temperature – The EMPR shall be capable of accepting PTC
and NTC sensors. Thermistor level shall be selectable for both alarm and trip
conditions with an adjustable time delay of 0-5 seconds.
F) Undercurrent shall be adjustable between 10 and 100% of motor FLC with a
time delay of 0-30 seconds.
PAGE 142

26.3 Thermal Overload Relay

A) The thermal overload relay, where specified, shall be of bimetallic inverse time-
lag type, and be used with a contactor in the starter circuit enabling switching
device to open both control and power circuit (fully isolating the power to the
motor terminal box) when the current in the relay exceeds a predetermined
value.
B) The thermal overload relay shall fully comply with the requirement of BS EN
60255-8.
C) The thermal overload relay shall be simple and robust suitable for direct
contactor mounting, or if mounted separately shall be used with manufacturer-
supplied links and associated attachment.
op V1
D) The thermal overload relay shall be designed to include ambient temperature
compensation feature from –20ºC to +65ºC; so eliminating the need for
calibration in the field during operation.
E) The thermal overload relay shall provide the following protections:
C -
y
i. Overcurrent/Overload.
ii.
C
Single phasing/Phase failure.
F) The thermal overload relay shall have MAN/AUTO field convertible ‘Reset’
C
button located on top of the relay for resetting of the relay after trip. Additionally,
a facility shall be provided on the door of the starter compartment to reset the
relay if so required/specified.
Q
G) The thermal overload relay shall have two characteristics: one when the relay bi-
metals are in cold state that will break the contacts of the relay within 810
seconds; and the other when in hot state the contacts breaking shall be reduced
to approximately one third of the tripping time as indicated for the cold
characteristics. The tripping time may be allowed to vary depending upon the
starting of the motor such as normal/heavy-duty
H) The thermal overload relay shall have been type tested and ASTA certified to
achieve Type 2 Co-ordination in accordance with BS EN 60947.
26.4 Thermistor Relay

A) All motors, where recommended by the manufacturer or 30kW and above, shall
be protected against excessive temperature, poor cooling, high ambient
temperature, high starting frequency etc. by thermistors.
B) Thermistors shall be of PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) type made of
platinum wire Pt100 having resistance of 100Ω at 0ºC. They shall be embedded
in the stator winding/slot and the leads of the elements brought out to a separate
terminal block located within the junction box of the motor.
C) Thermistors shall have a tamper-proof pre-set point and a fast response time.
D) Thermistor relays shall include the following features:
i. Tamperproof.
ii. Rapid responding.
iii. UL/CSA recognised component.
iv. Elimination of nuisance trips.
PAGE 143

v. Field-proven Klixon (or similar) design.

vi. Requiring no field adjustment.
vii. Allows full use of motor rating.
viii. Directly senses winding over-heating.
E) Thermistor relays shall also protect the motor against the following conditions:
i. Locked rotor.
ii. Running overload.
iii. Single phasing.
iv. Voltage unbalance.
op V1
v. High motor ambient temperature.
vi. Blocked ventilation.
F) Thermistors shall be connected to a separate control unit to enable tripping of

C -
the motor through the starter contactor upon change of thermistor resistance
y
C
beyond a pre-determined value.
G) The wiring of the relay module shall be arranged such that the condition latches
C
and inhibits starting of the pumps even after the temperature sensors have
cooled and re-closed the circuit. A facility shall be provided in the motor control
centre to reset the control circuit manually.
Q
H) In addition to the sensing of winding temperature by the thermistor, means shall

be provided to monitor the bearing temperature wherever recommended by the
motor manufacturer.
26.5 Moisture and Mechanical Seal Leakage Protection

Relay
A) All sewage pump motors shall be provided with dedicated moisture and
mechanical seal leakage protection relay, as recommended by the manufacturer
and/or as indicated in the Particular Specification.
B) Moisture sensing probes shall extend into the oil chamber located between the
lower (outer) and upper (inner) seals to detect the presence of moisture on
failure of the outer seal.
C) The probes shall also detect water in the motor chamber and provide a warning
prior to the water reaching the bearing or wound stator assemblies. The sensor
leads shall be connected to a moisture relay equipped with alarm contacts for
indication.
D) The moisture detection relay shall be supplied by the pump motor manufacturer
and to be free-issued by the Contractor to the Motor Control Centre Vendor,
together with detailed schematic diagrams and work instructions pertaining to
the mounting and location of the relay.
E) The Motor Control Centre vendor shall strictly adhere to the wiring practices and
works instructions as provided by the manufacturer.
PAGE 144

26.6 Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB)

A) An Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB) shall be provided as recommended by
the manufacturer and/or as indicated in the Particular Specification.
B) The ELCB shall confirm to BS EN 61008.
C) The ELCB shall have the following main features, as a minimum:
i. Immunity from nuisance tripping.
ii. Protection against direct and indirect contact.
iii. Continuous monitoring of the leakage current.
iv. Capable of operating under all unbalanced phase conditions.
op V1
v. Alarm contact with fail-safe operation.
26.7 Source Tests

A) Provide testing of Motor Protection Relays as described herein and covered
C -
under provisions of Section 15001: General M&E Requirements.
y
C
B) All Motor Protection Relays shall be witness tested as integral units forming part
of the Factory Built Assembly for a complete sequence of operation and as laid
C
down in BS EN 61439-1 and BS EN 61439-2.
C) Secondary injection tests to ensure correct operation of the current and voltage
operated protections over their full range of settings. d) Software simulation test
Q
where applicable shall be demonstrated to prove the satisfactorily operation of

the protection devices.
D) The complete assembly shall not leave the manufacturer’s works until the same
have been duly approved and stamped by DMAT and written permission is
obtained for their dispatch to site.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 145

27. MCC (SECTION 16482)

27.1 General
A) Motor Control Centres (MCCs) and Main Distribution Boards (MDBs) shall
be considered as key elements of the electrical installation in pumping
stations. The satisfactorily functioning of the entire installation is largely
dependent on them.
B) This specification to be read in conjunction with Section 15001: General
M&E Requirements, Section 16480: Factory Built Assembly (FBA) and any
other relevant section of the specification:
op V1
C) The MCC shall be designed to perform in harsh conditions providing a high
level of reliability that attribute to:
i. Minimal failure.
ii.
C -
No dangerous fault.
y
iii.
C
All time availability.
iv. Easy accessibility.
C
v. Local/Remote control and monitoring.
vi. Improved periodic maintenance and check.
Q
The motor controls, contactors, power monitors, transformers, control and

monitoring devices, instruments and electrical connections etc. shall be
selected from the list of approved vendors to guarantee overall availability.
27.2 Incomer Sections

Each Incomer section shall consist of:
A) 4-Pole ACB/MCCB.
B) 3-Pole MCCB with solid Neutral link as DMAT cut-out for Incomer up to
100A.
C) 1No. Voltmeter 96×96 mm, 240º scale for Mains voltage indication.
D) 1No. 7-position Voltmeter Selector Switch.
E) Power Monitor.
F) Phase failure/phase sequence for sensing Mains failure. The trip contact
wiring to be carried out to isolate all motive loads excluding main
G) Pumps (dedicated control as part of EMPR protection device) in the event of
phase failure or phase reversal condition.
H) Lightning protection (for Mains only).
I) Auto/Manual changeover for MCC with two or more incomers (See Metering
Section below).
J) Trip circuit healthy test facility in case of a circuit breaker is logically
designed to trip on fault through externally mounted protection devices e.g.
IDMT (Inverse Definite Minimum Time relay), UV relay etc.
PAGE 146

K) Control fuses.
L) Opened/closed/tripped indicating lamps.
M) Terminals etc.
27.3 ATS And MTS Panel

A separate, standalone ATS and MTS panel, located within the MCC room, shall
be provided as specified. The MCC in this case shall have one incomer circuit
breaker only and the same shall be powered by a common feed coming from the
ATS and MTS panel.
The changeover function shall be automatic from Mains to Generator upon
failure of power and from Generator to Mains upon restoration of power.
op V1
27.4 Metering Control Section for Incomers
A) All meters shall be of door-mounted type.
C -
B) A separate metering section shall be included in order to accommodate
y
analogue meters, power monitor, control relays, timers, PLC, selector
C
switches, push buttons, indicating lamps etc. as necessary for the
interlocking scheme of the incomers.
C
C) An auto/manual changeover scheme shall be included for two or more
incomers, unless specified otherwise. It shall be fully wired and factory
tested.
Q
Detailed drawings shall be prepared during the design stage and the same to be
submitted to DMAT for approval prior to manufacturing.
27.5 Generator Hook-Up

A) Pumping stations that require a temporary mobile generator shall be
provided with Appliance Inlet socket outlet as described under Section
16140.
B) The appliance inlet shall be used for generators up to 125A and be housed
in a weatherproof junction box fixed and located outside the MCC room.
C) The junction box shall have a detachable gland plate at the bottom
facilitating easy connection and disconnection of generator cable. A
generator rated above 125A shall be provided with solid copper links.
27.6 KWH Meter Section

A) A separate section shall be provided to house the Authority
(ADWEA/ADDC) calibrated kWh meter. The Contractor shall ensure the
kWh meter specifications are in line with the requirements of ADWEA. The
kWh meter shall be calibrated and properly sealed before installing and
wiring in the MCC.
B) The kWh meter shall be direct reading type for loads up to and including
100A powered through a separate 100A (maximum rating) 3-pole with solid
Neutral link, fixed type manually-operated MCCB housed within the kWh
meter section.
C) The kWh meter section door shall have the facility to padlock the door by
PAGE 147

the Authority. The Contractor shall provide the padlock and three keys as
approved by DMAT.
D) An ATS and MTS standalone panel, where specified, shall be provided with
Authority kWh meter on the panel. Where this is the case, no kWh meter
shall be installed in the MCC.
E) For loads in excess of 100A, the kWh meter shall be CT-operated.
F) Ratings of current transformers (CTs) approved by ADWEA and their
associate company ADDC are:
i. 200/5A.
ii. 300/5A.
op V1
iii. 1000/5A.
iv. 2000/5A.
v. 2500/5A.
vi. 3200/5A.
C -
y
C
G) The Contractor shall ensure that where CT-operated analogue meters are
specified they are provided with calibrated meter scale to match the primary
ampere rating of the current transformer.
C
27.7 Busbar Chamber
Q
Busbar selection and configuration shall be as described under Section 16480.
27.8 Outgoing Sections

A) Component selection and sizing shall be in accordance with the Section
16480.
B) One spare equipped feeder section (MCCB only) per MCC shall be provided
as a minimum. The rating shall be subject to the approval of DMAT.
C) One spare unequipped feeder section per MCC shall be provided as a
minimum.
27.9 Small Power and Lighting Distribution Section

A) Wall-mounted Lighting and Small Power Distribution Boards with
combinations of MCB, ELCB, RCBO as necessary shall be provided in the
MCC Room.
B) The specifications, selection and sizing of these breakers shall be in
accordance with particular requirements, load schedule and relevant
specification sections.
27.10 Common Control Section

A) The Common Control Section shall consist of the following controls and
instruments as a minimum (for guidance purpose only), subject to the
approval of DMAT:
i. Non-door interlocked MCCB.
ii. 24V d.c. regulated power supply.
PAGE 148

iii. 24V d.c. NiCad battery.

iv. 24V d.c. NiCad battery charger.
v. Power distribution MCBs for field instrumentation.
vi. Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) – Refer to Section 16903 for
details.
vii. HMI/SCADA where specified – Refer to Section 15985 for details.
viii. Pressure and Level Indicators – Refer to Section 15980 for details.
ix. Sounder completes with auto cut-off time and mute push button as
specified in the particular requirements.
x. Flashing beacon light mounted on the MCC building roof as specified in
op V1
the particular requirements.
xi. Local/Remote selector switch.
xii. Float/Level selector switch.
C -
xiii. Pumps duty/standby selector switch.
y
C
xiv. Push buttons for lamp test, fault-reset etc.
xv. Status indicating lamps.
C
xvi. Control relays, timers and control fuses as required according to the
logic plus 20% as spares wired to terminals.
Q
xvii. Intrinsically Safe barriers, as required.

xviii. Hygrostatically controlled anti-condensation heater.
xix. Standard and special terminals to suit the applications requirements.
xx. Terminal Kiosk (A separate partitioned terminals arrangement clearly
labelled identifying IN/OUT). All wires to field devices and the telemetry
section must be routed through terminal kiosk.
xxi. A suitably designed control circuit to operate the pumps by employing
float/level control techniques during manual transfer of fuel from the
bulk tank to daily tanks as a precaution to avoid flooding where
applicable. The Contractor shall submit detailed proposal for approval
by DMAT.
27.11 Telemetry Section

A) The telemetry section shall consist of the following controls as minimum for
guidance purpose only subject to the approval of DMAT and shall be factory
wired on a backplate and be free issue to the MCC vendor:
i. Non door interlock MCCB.
ii. 24 V D.C. Ni Cd battery.
iii. 24 V D.C. Ni Cd battery charger.
iv. Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) – Refer to Instrumentation & Control
Section for specifications.
v. Modem – Refer to Instrumentation & Control Section for
specifications.
PAGE 149

vi. Interposing relays.

vii. Hygrostatically controlled Anti-condensation heater.
viii. Terminals, control fuses and surge protection etc.
B) All starter compartments, common control compartment and other
compartments equipped with controls and monitoring devices within the
Motor Control Centre, standalone control panels, separate terminal kiosks
and unit mounted control panels shall be provided with hygrostatically
controlled anti-condensation heaters.
C) Selection and sizing of the component shall be in accordance with the
requirements laid down in the particular specification and Section 16480.
op V1
27.12 Drawings and Documentation
A) The following shall to be submitted together with the MCC drawings for
review and approval by DMAT prior to start of manufacturing and before
commencement of any work at site.
i. C -
Short circuit calculations.
y
ii.
C
Voltage drop calculations.
iii. Power Factor Correction Capacitors (PFCC) calculations.
C
iv. Load schedules
v. Lighting and Small Power socket layout of the MCC Room.
Q
vi. Cables, conduits and ducting layout of the MCC Room.

vii. Cable trenches and earth pits associated with the MCC.
viii. Fire detection and fire alarm of the MCC Room.
ix. Telephone sockets, JN Box, conduits, duct, manhole etc. in or close to the
MCC Room.
x. Instruments loop diagrams.
xi. Terminals interconnection drawings.
xii. Detailed drawings and supporting documentations for other vendors
supplied panels and devices e.g. telemetry RTU etc.
xiii. Proforma testing and calibration procedures.
xiv. Proforma Installation, Operation and Maintenance procedures/ manuals.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 150

28. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (SECTION

16483)
B) Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) shall be of solid-state, static voltage source
type, using minimum 32-bit microprocessor or the latest available, digital sine
wave approximation Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) type suitable for the
op V1
applications, controlling mainly pumps with variable torque characteristics.
C) The VFD shall confirm to CE compliance and UL approved to Standard 508C.
D) The VFD and associated control equipment shall be housed within a cubicle
forming part of the relevant Factory Built Assembly (FBA) such as a MCC. A
C -
standalone control panel, however, may be provided depending on the design
y
and application that requires special ventilation arrangements and due to
C
space constrains within the MCC cubicles. If so, the detailed technical proposal
shall be submitted for DMAT review and approval.
C
E) The VFD shall be of proven design to provide high pump efficiency, high
availability, minimum maintenance, substantial energy reduction, and longer
bearing and seal life at reduced speeds.
Q
F) The VFD shall control pump speed by employing advanced torque control
techniques and auto tuning that measure and set all constant and critical
parameters of the motor automatically.
G) The VFD cubicle shall be considered as a starter with the addition of a VFD
with display unit and a keypad, and therefore shall comply with the
requirements of Section 16482 and Section 16050.
H) The Contractor shall provide a properly matched pump-motor-cable-drive
system for the specific duty operating in conjunction with VFD considering
load–torque characteristics, kW rating, efficiency, thermal capacity, power
factor improvement, EMI mitigation, etc. This shall include the use of braided
and armoured field cable, if required by the VFD manufacturer.
I) Braided cable shall be used with VFDs, in any event, if the cable length
exceeds 100m or the cable passes near a source of large electromagnetic
interference (such as a large motor or HV cables).
J) If required, the VFD shall incorporate output reactors to negate the effects of
cable capacitance and ensure correct operation of the VFD.
K) The pump driving motor speed shall be variable between maximum speed at
full load and at any intermediate speed down to a tenth of fullconstant torque
availability at any speed with a starting torque of 1.5 times full load torque at
maximum speed. The VFD shall be capable of supplying the motor
continuously at any frequency.
L) The VFD shall utilise a full-wave bridge design incorporating diode rectifiers or
semi-controlled bridge consisting of diodes-thyristors combination or 6-
pulse/12-pulse converters (whichever satisfy regulations pertaining to reduced
harmonics distortion) or the latest available technology.
PAGE 151

M) A dc link choke-smoothing reactor shall be included to limit fault throughput.

N) Thyristors shall be chosen to have a rating of 2.5 times the normal peak
working voltage. A capacitor/resistance network shall suppress voltage peak
transients for every thyristor and excessively high rates of change of voltage
(dv/dt) shall be limited by a "snubber" network. Voltage spikes, which may be
detrimental to any solid-state component or relay, shall be suppressed by
suitable networks.
O) Thyristors shall be capable of maintaining continuously 10% in excess of the
current imposed by the maximum load conditions, and be protected against
current overloads caused by malfunction of components or circuitry within the
inverter or external loads. Over current protection and rate of current rise (di/dt)
in the thyristors shall be controlled by electronic current limiting devices, which
op V1
shall cause trip current circuits to operate.
P) Thyristor heat sinks shall be provided with thermostats, which shall effect
tripping in the event of excessive temperatures occurring.
Q) Printed circuit boards shall confirm to IEC 60249, or other approved equivalent
C -
standard, and connections by multi-way sockets suitably treated to avoid high
y
C
resistances being formed between the plug and socket.
R) Anti-condensation heaters shall be provided complete with a hygrostat type
switch with reasonable setting range (50-100%), which operates when the
C
preset value of %RH exceeds above dew point. The heaters shall have
OFF/AUTO control on the cubicle front door and not be in operation when the
Q
VFD is functioning.
S) The harmonics reflected in the incoming electricity supply from the VFD shall
not exceed the limits set by the ADWEA. The Contractor shall be responsible
for liaison with the ADWEA to ensure full compliance with their requirements.
T) Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) shall be limited to lowest level under 5% as
per G5/4-1 in order not to create stresses and resultant problems for the plants
distribution systems. It may therefore be necessary to ADWEA and/or G5/4-
1/IEEE 519.
U) It will be necessary to conduct field test to measure the harmonics with all
VFDs regardless of whether filters, reactors, chokes etc. are installed or not. If
the drives do not meet the specified performance, the Contractor shall provide
an acceptable solution at no extra cost.
V) The VFD shall be selected based on the following criteria:
i. User-friendly – allowing the operator to configure the VFD at site with ease.
ii. Uniform motor running at all speeds.
iii. Power factor close to unity regardless of the speed of the motor.
iv. High overall system efficiency.
v. No increase of noise in the motor.
vi. Prevents nuisance tripping due to failure of supply for a short duration.
28.2 Configuration, Control and Protection

The VFD shall:
A) Have a self-diagnostic feature on power-up to validate memory, analogue
PAGE 152

reference, communication link and dynamic breaking (if any) and control
power, etc.
B) Allow manual and automatic speed control. A dedicated built-in detachable
keypad with LCD display shall be provided.
C) Be suitable derated to operate continuously at the ambient climatic
conditions specified in Section 15001: General M&E Requirements.
D) Have the provision to hook-up local and remote emergency stop push
buttons to ensure effective direct stopping of the drive in case of emergency
without causing any damage to the VFD.
E) Be protected against short circuit between output phases and ground,
analogue outputs and logic circuit.
op V1
F) Have UL listed solid state I²t protection and a Class 10, or equivalent,
overload protection as per BS EN 60947 meeting Type 2 Coordination.
Semiconductor fuses providing the required protection may be permitted to
use as approved by DMAT.
C -
G) Have a dedicated microprocessor-based electronic motor protection system,
y
C
as described under Section 16481: Motor Protection Relay shall be provided
for the protection of the motor.
H) A design that includes an SCR heat-shrink construction for heat transfer.
C
I) Have a programmable fold back function that will sense a controller/motor
overload condition and fold back the frequency to avoid a fault condition.
Q
J) Include semiconductor Metal Oxide Varistors (MOVs), or other approved

equivalent method, for protection against voltage surges.
K) Have the following features built in: PID; auto start; multiple pump control;
reverse run protection and restart after instantaneous power failure.
L) Self-configure to the Mains operating voltage and frequency.
M) Upon power up, first check availability of connected motor and then update
its memory by storing the new data, compare the data, auto tune by
optimising the operating characteristics and run the motor.
N) Be factory configured and preset requiring minimal site adjustment during
commissioning.
O) Have an output frequency controllable between 0–120Hz.
P) Have an ac presettable fault current limiting facility provided to ensure that
when a setting is exceeded voltage and frequency are automatically
controlled.
Q) Facilitate field adjustment of the following parameters as minimum:
i. Motor acceleration 0-600 seconds.
ii. Motor deceleration 0-600 seconds.
iii. Voltage to frequency ratio boost in proportion to load torque.
iv. Compensation for motor slip from 0-5% with varying load torque.
v. Minimum frequency set control.
vi. Maximum frequency set control.
vii. Presentable current limit facility.
PAGE 153

R) Retain and record run and fault status with a minimum 8 last faults
conditions.
S) Be provided with inputs and outputs, as a minimum, user configurable for
interface with a third-party control system and remote connection, as follows:
i. 1 No. Analogue Input 4-20mA.
ii. 1 No. Analogue Output 4-20mA.
iii. 1 No. Analogue Input 0-10V dc.
iv. 1 No. Analogue Output 0-10V dc.
v. 3 No. Discrete Input.
vi. 2 No. Discrete Output.
op V1
T) Be provided with communication interface and facility to integrate the
operation of the system. The communication protocols e.g. Profibus,
Modbus, etc. shall be compatible with other system equipments such as
PLC, RTU, etc.
C -
y
C
U) Be provided with a detachable LCD display unit with 3-metre cable length
suitable for mounting on the cubicle door. The VFD shall allow the program
stored in one drive to copy in another drive by using the display unit and
C
supplied software. The interconnecting cable and associated accessories,
together with a user manual, must accompany the VFD.
V) The Contractor shall furnish details of the specific installation and cable
Q
length to the VFD manufacturer and obtain, in writing, the recommended

size, type and specification of power and control cables used between the
VFD and the motor.
W) Be provided with additional control and accessories, if any deemed
necessary to meet the operating logic, as described in the particular
requirement.
X) Include protective feature(s) not listed in the specification but recommended
by the manufacturer in order to avoid damage to VFD/Motor.
Y) Be capable of being equipped with a multicore power cable that is armoured,
braided, cross-bonded and XLPE insulated.
28.3 Operating Characteristics

The VFD Shall:
A) Convert 415V 3-Phase 50Hz power to an adjustable voltage and frequency
for controlling the speed of the pump. The output voltage shall vary
proportionally with the output frequency to maintain a constant volts/hertz
value up to a nominal frequency. Above nominal frequency, the output
voltage shall remain constant.
B) Closely approximate actual sine wave current throughout the speed range of
the drive.
C) Have a frequency resolution of 0.01Hz.
D) Not be sensitive to line notching from other VFD(s) operating nearby.
E) Be capable of passing through a momentary power outage of 3 cycles
without causing the drive to trip.
PAGE 154

F) Have an adjustable IR compensation (voltage boost) control capable of

providing 100% starting torque from the motor. The control shall be
adjustable and provide the additional voltage only at the frequency range
required starting the motor.
G) Automatically restart after a power loss.
H) Continuously monitor its output current and frequency, and should the drive
be operating in current limit or below 10Hz for 10 seconds (stall condition) the
VFD will shut down.
I) Allow site configuration of the parameters to match the applications’
requirements.
J) Have the capability to avoid up to five critical operating ranges.
op V1
K) Be capable of operating at 97% or more efficiency at full load.
L) Operate at a power factor of >96%.
M) Be capable of operating with output open-circuited.
C -
N) Be capable of regenerating power from the motor to the DC bus for
y
C
controlled deceleration. The maximum deceleration rate shall be determined
by the losses in the drive system and be constant and independent of motor
speed.
C
28.4 Source Tests
Q
A) The VFD shall be functionally tested with a motor connected to assure proper
operation at service and climatic conditions as specified in Section 15001:
B) Certified factory test report listing all tested parameter and protective features
together with testing procedure shall be submitted for DMAT review prior to
the DMAT witness test.
28.5 Field Tests

A) System validation tests shall be performed as described under Section
B) The integrated site test on VFD, motor and all other associated devices shall
be conducted to verify the input and output current, voltage, frequency,
power factor, acceleration and deceleration rate, etc. in accordance with the
equipment’s operating characteristics.
C) The VFD shall be tested at different operating conditions by adjusting
parameters (25, 50, 75 and 100%).
D) The power system shall be tested for harmonics, line notching and for
RFI/EMI in cable circuits and in the air.
E) Tests shall be performed during normal plant operation and during operation
with the emergency generator, if appropriate.
F) The test results so obtained shall be used to calculate the Total Harmonic
Distortion (%THD) and compare the same with IEEE 519, G5/4 and ADWEA
regulation.
G) The manufacturer's engineer shall conduct all tests on site.
PAGE 155

H) Upon completion of site test, a duly signed report listing all tests and checks
together with all supporting documents and drawings, where applicable, shall
be submitted by the Contractor to DMAT for review prior to inviting DMAT to
witness the tests.
END OF SECTION
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 156

29. LUMINAIRES (SECTION 16510)

29.1 General
B) Installation of luminaires shall confirm to requirements as specified in BS
7671, NFPA 70 - or other equivalent standard, as applicable. Indoor lighting
installations shall comply with BS EN 12464-1 and the requirements of
CIBSE.
C) The installation shall be designed to avoid light pollution beyond the site
op V1
boundary and upwards into the surrounding atmosphere.
D) Material used in the manufacturing of the luminaires shall be of highest
quality suitable for the environmental and climatic conditions as specified in
C -
y
E) Acrylic diffusers shall be treated by an anti-static agent.
C
F) Lead-lag ballast, 3-phase configuration shall be used for group of luminaires
to avoid a stroboscopic effect.
C
G) Only manufacturers’ standard luminaires shall be provided.
H) Fully detailed drawings and information shall be provided giving dimensions,
Q
ratings, material, finish, application requirements and performance data,

support locations and details for ceiling suspension and fixing arrangements
of all luminaires.
I) Externally-mounted light fittings shall be IP65 or better, with the exception of
the gear compartment which shall be a minimum of IP42.
J) The Contractor shall properly calculate and ensure that the luminance ratio
throughout the visual field is kept within the desirable limits and the
directional quality of the supplementary light has been considered.
K) The design, selection and erection of electrical installations associated with
lighting systems in explosive gas atmospheres shall comply with BS EN
60079-14. Equipment intended for use within hazardous areas shall be
suitably ‘ATEX’-rated commensurate with the classification of the hazardous
area.
L) This specification shall be read in conjunction with Section 16090.
29.2 Description
A) ‘Troffer’ or ‘Downlight’ type luminaires shall be used. The ballast lamps shall
be installed by the manufacturer or their trained and authorised personnel.
B) The luminaire enclosure shall comprise: prismatic acrylic lens, pattern 12,
clear glass or polycarbonate diffuser.
C) Gasketing shall be provided between enclosure and frame and between
frame and luminaire housing.
D) Photometric Control Elements: Anodized specular aluminium reflector.
E) Photometric Performance: Minimum coefficient of utilisation 0.65 at room
Page 157

cavity ratio of 2 with ceiling-wall-floor reflectance of 70%-50%-20%

F) Installation Conditions: Wet, Damp or Enclosed and Gasketted.
G) Mounting: Ceiling surface, Recessed in grid ceiling, Pendant or Wall
mounting.
H) Ballast: Manufacturer's standard, matched to lamp characteristics.
29.3 Emergency Lighting Units

A) Emergency lighting luminaires shall comply with BS EN 60598-2-22.
B) Description: Self-contained incandescent or fluorescent type, as specified,
emergency lighting unit.
op V1
C) Battery: 6V or 12V, nickel-cadmium type as per manufacturer's standard, with
4-hour back-up capacity.
D) Battery Charger: Dual-rate type, with sufficient capacity to recharge
discharged battery to full charge within twelve hours.
C -
E) Lamps: Compact fluorescent, 12W minimum sealed beam type in nickel or
y
C
chrome plated steel housing.
F) Remote Fixtures: Match lamps on unit.
C
G) Housing: Steel with grey or bronze hammer tone finish and vinyl wood grains
or white plastic front panel as specified.
Q
H) Indicators: Lamps to indicate AC ON and RECHARGING; Voltmeter to

indicate battery voltage where specified.
I) TEST switch: Transfers unit from external power supplies to integral battery
supply. j) Electrical connection: 1800mm cord with plug cap, NEMA WD 6,
Type 5-15 configuration or conduit connection or as specified or indicated.
29.4 Exit Signs

A) Description: Exit sign fixture, suitable for use as emergency lighting unit,
where specified.
B) Housing: Extruded aluminium or Sheet steel as specified.
C) Face: Conform to one of the following:
1 Translucent glass or plastic face with red or green letters on white
background.
2 Aluminium or Steel stencil face with red or green letters.
D) Directional Arrows: Universal type for field adjustment.

E) Mounting: Universal, for field selection.
F) Battery: 6V or 12V as per manufacturer's standard, nickel-cadmium with 4-
hour back-up capacity.
G) Battery Charger: Dual-rate type, with sufficient capacity to recharge
discharged battery to full charge within twelve hours.
H) Lamps: Manufacturers standard or as specified.
Page 158

29.5 Luminous Ceilings

A) Description: Exposed or Concealed as specified; suspension luminous
ceiling system.
B) Support Grid: Steel, heavy duty, double wall, lock joint, with aluminium cap,
25mm wide or extruded aluminium, heavy duty, lock joint, 25 or 51mm wide
as specified.
C) Grid Finish: White, Black, Gold, Light bronze or as specified colour; painted
or anodized finish as specified.
D) Luminous Panels: Conform to one of the following:
i. 3.2, 5.1 or 5.7mm thick as specified, flat acrylic panel, clear, white, silver tint
op V1
or specified colour, with square, octagonal, conical or prismatic, smooth or
ribbed finish.
ii. 0.5mm thick formed vinyl or acrylic panel as specified, pattern.
iii. 13mm thick acrylic plastic or aluminium eggcrate louvre with 13mm square,
C -
round, octagonal, straight sided or parabolic shaped cells, white, silver, gold
y
finish.
C
29.6 Site Lighting
C
Road and street lighting shall comply with BS EN 60598-2-3 and BS 5489.
A) Description: Roadway or Area flood-type luminaires.
Q
B) Size: Manufacturer’s standard.

C) Material: Extruded aluminium housing with cast aluminium bracket.
D) Enclosure: Clear glass or other approved material with gasketting between
enclosure and frame and between frame and luminaire body.
E) Photometric Control: Anodized specular aluminium reflector.
F) Photometric Performance: IES RP-8 or other approved standard.
i. Vertical Light Distribution: Short, Medium or Long.
ii. Lateral Light Distribution: Type I, Type I: four way, Type II, Type II: four way,
Type III, Type IV or Type V.
iii. Control above Maximum Candlepower: Cut off, Semi-cut off or Non-cut off.
G) Installation Conditions: Wet, Outdoor or Damp Location or Enclosed and

gasketted.
H) Mounting: Provide pole mount bracket or wall mounting.
I) Ballast: Manufacturer's standard, matched to lamp characteristics, rated
240V.
J) Lamp: Specified number of each, rated specified watts, mercury vapour,
metal halide, high pressure sodium or low pressure sodium type as specified,
coated or clear lamp.
K) A photocell shall be provided where appropriate.
L) An MCB shall be provided for each lighting pole.
Page 159

29.7 Fluorescent Ballasts

A) Description: ANSI C82.1 or other approved standard, high power factor type
electromagnetic ballast, suitable for lamps specified complete with high
frequency control gear.
B) Provide low-temperature ballast suitable for lamps specified.
C) Design verification: Certify ballast design and construction by Certified
Ballast Manufacturers.
29.8 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Ballasts
op V1
A) Description: ANSI C82.4 or other approved standard, mercury vapour, metal
halide, low pressure sodium or high pressure sodium lamp ballast as
specified, suitable for lamp specified.
B) Design verification: Certify ballast design and construction by Certified
C -
Ballast Manufacturers.
y
C
29.9 Obstruction Lights
C
A) Flashing Red Beacon Lights: weatherproof duplex type.
B) Red Obstruction Lights: singles or doubles as specified.
Q
C) High Intensity White Obstruction Lights: as specified.

D) Medium Intensity White Obstruction Lights: as specified.
29.10 Helipad Lighting

Perimeter Lights, Landing Direction Lights, Approach Direction Lights and
Floodlights with elevated fixtures, semi-flush fixtures, sensors etc. or other approved
type with yellow filters where specified in the particular requirements.
29.11 Lighting Poles

A) Lighting columns shall comply with the relevant parts of BS EN 40.
B) Material and finish shall conform to one of the following as specified:
i. Steel with prime finish for field painting.
ii. Aluminium with natural, bronze or anodized finish as specified.
iii. Concrete with exposed aggregate finish.
iv. Fibreglass with bronze or other specified finish.
v. Steel hot dip galvanised.
C) Section shape and dimensions: round, tapered round, square or other
specified shape material and finish.
D) d) Height: typically 7,500mm.
E) Base: Breakaway, non-breakaway, transformer or direct embedded type as
specified.
Page 160

F) Accessories: Handhole, Anchor bolts.

G) Foundation for the lighting pole to be approved by DMAT.
29.12 Accessories
A) Photoelectric Cell: Twistlock spring base, specified volt, watts and range.
B) Provide weatherproof outlet box, with receptacle to receive photoelectric cell,
where required or directed by DMAT.
C) Flasher Unit: suitable for flashing lights at rate of 40 flashes per minute or to
meet the requirements of Department of Civil Aviation, Abu Dhabi.
D) Lamps: one or two each as specified.
op V1
E) Ballast: 240V; high power factor electronic ballast.
F) Lamp Shields: translucent acrylic or polycarbonate panel as specified;
provide for each lampholder.
G) Mounting: surface or pendant as specified.
C -
y
C
29.13 Illumination Level
A) The illumination level shall be in accordance with 5th Edition of IES lighting
C
handbook, CIBSE, or other applicable standards to the approval of DMAT.
B) Below is a table showing illumination levels for guidance purpose only to
Q
enable the Contractor to size the luminaires closest to the requirements at

the tender stage.
Table 29-1: Illumination Levels
Location Lux
Offices – regular office work 300
General lighting – Entrances, stairways, landing, corridor, 200

lobby etc
Electrical Battery, pumps, cable, switchboard MCC, 200

Valve, Generator, transformer rooms etc.
Store Rooms 150
Control Rooms 500
Emergency Lighting 3
29.14 Installation
A) Install suspended luminaires and exit signs using pendants supported from
swivel hangers. Provide pendant length required suspending luminaires at
indicated height.
Page 161

B) Support luminaires larger than 600×1,200mm size independent of the ceiling

framing.
C) Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan.
D) Install surface-mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align
with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement.
E) Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface-mounted luminaires on grid ceiling
directly from building structure. Provide auxiliary members spanning ceiling
grid members to support surface-mounted luminaires. Fasten surface-
mounted luminaires to ceiling grid members using bolts, screws, rivets, or
suitable clips.
F) Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below.
G) Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to
op V1
meet regulatory requirements for fire rating.
H) Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place.
I) Install wall-mounted luminaires, emergency lighting units and exit signs at an
appropriate height to the approval of DMAT.
C -
y
J) Connect luminaires, emergency lighting units and exit signs to a dedicated
C
power outlet, separate from all other lighting and small power branch circuit
outlets. The type of wiring used shall be appropriate for the temperature
conditions within the luminaire.
C
K) Bond luminaires, metal accessories and metal poles to the branch circuit
equipment earthing conductor. Provide a supplementary earthing electrode
Q
at each pole where specified.

L) Locate luminaires to achieve an even luminance of the ceiling luminous
elements.
M) Install suspension system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
as supplemented in this section.
N) Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM E580 to meet seismic
loading requirements.
O) Install fire rated system in accordance with UL "Fire Resistance Directory and
Building Material Directory" specified Design No. requirements.
P) Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and
conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of
face plane of adjacent members.
Q) Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers,
reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span
the extra distance.
R) Install edge moulding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using
longest practical lengths. Mitre corners. Provide edge mouldings at junctions
with other interruptions.
S) Form expansion joints as detailed. Form to accommodate ±25mm
movement. Maintain visual closure.
T) Co-ordinate with civil contractor for the construction of concrete bases for
lighting poles, ceiling elements and supports and other work as necessitated.
U) Install poles plumb. Provide shims or double nuts as specified to adjust
plumb. Grout around each base.
V) Install Obstruction Lighting in accordance with the requirements of
Page 162

Department of Civil Aviation, Abu Dhabi.

W) Install photocell unit on receptacle base wherever needed.
29.15 Field Tests

A) Test and operate each luminaires after installation. Inspect for improper
connections and operation.
B) Measure illumination levels to verify conformance with performance
requirements in accordance with the design. Additional lighting shall be
installed at no cost to DMAT where lighting levels fail to meet either the
op V1
design or the minimum levels described in Clause 14 of this document.
C) Take measurements during night sky, without moon or with heavy overcast
clouds effectively obscuring the moon.
D) Inspect and test obstruction lighting equipment in accordance with the
C -
requirements of Department of Civil Aviation, Abu Dhabi.
y
C
END OF SECTION
C
Q
Page 163

30. UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)

(SECTION 16611)
B) The UPS shall be designed and manufactured “standalone” for automatic
operation. It shall comply with BS EN 60950 (IEC 60950) and BS EN 62040
(IEC 62040).
C) The UPS shall be designed to supply clean, uninterrupted power to the loads
op V1
and facilitate removal of most components such as spare parts, PCB and
sub-assembly from the front.
D) The design of UPS shall take account of continuous load capacity, de-rating
for non-linear loads and ambient temperature conditions.
C -
E) The UPS shall be sized to supply all instrumentation and control equipment,
y
C
including but not limited to, control and computer room hardware, mimic,
annunciation, telecommunication systems and emergency lighting etc.,
where applicable.
C
30.2 Main Features
Q
A) The UPS shall consist of a fully controlled rectifier charger, battery bank,
inverter, static bypass and manual bypass capable to providing safe and
secure power supply for a minimum period of 8 hours.
B) The UPS shall include the following features, as a minimum:
i. Optimal quality of the output voltage.

ii. Transient over-voltage and spike protection.
iii. Voltage variation and mains failure protection.
iv. Frequency variation protection.
v. True single-phase regulation.
vi. Low noise.
vii. Low THD (not to exceed G5/4-1 limits).
viii. PC connectivity for parametering.
ix. Serial communication by employing Modbus protocol.
30.3 Main Protections

A. The UPS shall include the following protection, as a minimum:
i. Input over-voltage.
ii. Load short circuit.
iii. Over-temperature.
iv. Surge protection.
PAGE 164

v. Noise protection.
vi. Battery deep discharge protection.
30.4 Construction
A) The charging circuit shall provide regulated DC voltage fed to the inverter
and batteries. The rectifier shall employ fully controlled thyristors, consisting
of an anti-mains harmonic feedback filter (RFI), rectifier bridge and a
smoothing inductor designed to eliminate residual ripple.
B) The batteries shall be stationary and sealed lead acid types, mounted and
cabled in a matching cabinet or racks. The batteries shall be protected from
deep discharging by automatically switching off the UPS in the event of
op V1
battery voltage reaching its lowest limit.
C) The inverter shall have built-in IGBTs (Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors)
and the voltage output shall be regulated by PWM (Pulse Width Modulation).
The inverter output shall be ‘short-circuit’-proof.
C -
D) The static bypass shall be a thyristor-switch, switching the mains over to the
y
C
UPS output. In normal operation, the inverter output is switched to the UPS
output while the bypass is blocked.
E) The inverter shall sustain 125% overload for 10 minutes and 150% overloads
C
for 1 minute. After a delay and if the overload persists, the inverters shall
switch-off and transfer the load automatically to the bypass without a break.
Q
F) Automatic re-transfer to the inverter shall be blocked if a transfer to the mains

was initiated six times within one minute or in case of non-synchronisation of
the inverter with the mains.
G) The UPS shall be provided with a manually controlled bypass switch that
enables the load to be fed directly from the mains by fully isolating the
rectifiers in case of malfunctioning, servicing and periodic maintenance.
30.5 Monitoring
A) The following status monitoring indications shall be provided on the UPS, as
a minimum:
i. Rectifier charger ON.
ii. Load on inverter.
iii. Load on bypass.
iv. Alarm.
v. Boost charge.
30.6 Measurements
A) The following measurements shall be available in the UPS, as a minimum:
i. Inverter output voltage.
ii. Inverter output frequency.
iii. Inverter output current.
iv. % Load.
PAGE 165

v. Voltage across battery terminals.

vi. Charging current of battery.
vii. Discharge current of battery.
viii. Rectifier input voltage.
ix. Rectifier input current.
x. Bypass voltage.
xi. Bypass frequency.
B) The UPS shall have a separate volt-free changeover contact indicating a

‘Common Fault’ condition, wired to the terminals for connection to the
op V1
Remote Terminal Unit (RTU).
30.7 Source Quality Control and Tests

A) The UPS to be tested at manufacturer’s works as described under Section
C -
y
C
B) The integrated functional test at the manufacturer’s works shall be conducted
by employing load banks to verify most if not all of the conditions stated
above. The tests shall be witnessed by DMAT prior to acceptance.
C
C) The UPS shall not leave the manufacturer’s works until the same have been
duly approved and stamped by DMAT and written permission is obtained for
Q
its dispatch to site.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 166

31. BATTERY AND BATTERY CHARGER

(SECTION 16612)
31.1 General
B) Batteries and their associated chargers shall be used as back-up power
sources for uninterruptible and bump less operation of controls,
instrumentation, alarm and monitoring equipment.
op V1
C) Where alternate ac supplies are available, provide for taking the supply to the
battery charger from either source (e.g. from either side of the bus-section
switch) with facilities for automatic changeover from one source to the other
in the event of failure of the supply system.
C -
D) The battery and charger unit shall be housed in the Common Control Section
y
of the Motor Control Centre as described in Section 16480.
C
E) A separate, sheet steel, floor-standing, Form 2 compartment, having
adequate ventilation and separate compartments for the batteries (lower
C
compartment) and chargers (upper compartment), with associated control
and protection devices and accessories, may be used in a standalone
capacity for large units where it is difficult to accommodate within a dedicated
Q
section of the Motor Control Centre.

F) When used as standalone, access to the batteries shall be via lockable,
hinged doors, and to the chargers via removable covers.
G) Batteries and charger units shall be suitable for the intended service under
the prevailing climate and environments conditions in Abu Dhabi as specified
in Section 15001: General M&E Requirements.
H) At the discretion of DMAT, for pumping stations of capacity of less than
200kW capacity, they may be provided with a simplex battery charger with all
functionality except float and boost charge.
31.2 Batteries
A) Nickel Cadmium sealed batteries shall be used confirming to BS EN/IEC
60623.
B) Batteries shall be maintenance-free long-life Nickel Cadmium sealed type
with a nominal output of 24V, and be of adequate capacity to maintain full
operation of the relevant load plus an additional 20% for a period of 4 hours
during mains failure, assuming a normal charge condition at the start of the
mains failure.
C) All batteries shall be protected from mechanical damage and any accidental
electric shorting. They shall be supplied in banks sized for easy handling. All
interconnections shall be included. Batteries shall notbe housed above
charger units or any other equipment and shall be so ventilated that gases do
not permeate into adjacent equipment.
PAGE 167

31.3 Battery Chargers

A) Battery chargers shall confirm to BS EN 60146-1.
B) Battery chargers, complete with associated controls, shall be provided and
mounted on its own chassis and housed in one section of the MCC,
standalone panel or in a separate enclosure, as applicable.
The front panel for each charger unit shall include:
i. 1No. “ON/OFF” Mains switch.
ii. 1No. Lamp to indicate “A.C. Supply On” (White).
iii. 1No. Charger Ammeter.
op V1
iv. 1No. Lamp to indicate “Boost Charge” (Red).
v. 1No. Lamp to indicate “Float Charge” (White).
vi. 1No. Lamp to indicate “Charger Failed” (Amber).
vii. 1No. Lamp test push button.
C -
y
C
Each charger unit shall also be provided with:
i. 1No. “Float/Boost” selector switch, mounted internally.
C
ii. 1No. Set of a.c. supply fuses.
iii. 1No. volt-free contact for ‘Charger Failed’ alarm.
Q
iv. 1No. volt-free contact for ‘Low dc Output Voltage’ alarm.

v. 1No. volt-free contact for ‘Loss of dc Output Voltage’ alarm.
vi. 1No. dc Output voltmeter, scaled to indicate regions of “Low”, “Normal” and
“High” output voltages, by the use of different coloured sectors.
vii. 1No. dc Output switch.
viii. 1No. dc Output Ammeter.
ix. 1No. set of full capacity rated output dc terminals and fuses.
C) Suitable means shall be provided, to the approval of DMAT, to protect the

batteries from deep discharge and over-charging.
D) In the event of failure of the charger, the batteries shall ensure operation of
controls, instrumentation, alarm and monitoring equipment for at least 4
hours. A separate relay contact shall be provided to indicate “Critical Alarm
Condition – Charger Fail".
E) The charger shall be of the constant potential type, and be designed to
regulate the charger output voltage to within ±1%.
F) The dc terminal voltage shall be regulated such that under “Float” or “Boost”
charge condition, the dc voltage does not rise more than 10% above
nominal.
G) The charger unit shall be provided with both short circuit and reverse polarity
functions.
H) The charger, when selected to “Float”, shall be capable of restoring the
battery to 75% capacity within 8 hours.
PAGE 168

I) Under “Boost” conditions, the charger shall be capable of restoring a fully

discharged battery to 75% capacity within 5 hours.
J) A wiring diagram, identifying all outgoing terminals, components and fuses,
shall be fixed inside the cubicle. A warning label in both Arabic and English
shall also be affixed along with appropriate maintenance and safety
instructions.
31.4 Source Quality Control and Tests

A) The charger unit to be tested at manufacturer’s works as described under
B) A suitable integrated functional test, including a discharge test at the full
op V1
rated load for 4 hours, shall be conducted at the manufacturer’s works to
ensure satisfactorily operation of the equipment. The tests shall be witnessed
by DMAT prior to acceptance.
END OF SECTION
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 169

32. DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM

(SECTION 16620)
B) This specification applies to emergency/standby diesel alternator sets
operating at low voltage. Where the application is for a base load set,
additional requirements shall be as stated in the particular specification.
op V1
C) Each set shall be a self-contained fully automatic diesel engine-driven
alternator arranged to start automatically in the event of mains failure and to
shut down automatically on restoration of the mains supply. Where required
by the contract, alternator shut down and restoration of the mains supply may
be achieved manually, not automatically, and in accordance with Section
C -
16040: Disconnect Switches.
y
C
D) In the event of failure of the mains supply, the alternator shall provide
sufficient power to start and continuously run the items of plant normally
C
supplied from the mains.
E) Each engine shall be capable of operating at 10% overload for one hour in
any twelve hours in ambient conditions defined in Section 15001: General
Q
M&E Requirements.
F) The system shall incorporate:
i. Mains failure sensing of the non-essential supply.

ii. Start delay timer to prevent unnecessary starting on transient conditions in
the mains electricity supply.
iii. Minimum run timer.
iv. Stop delay timers to delay transfer to mains operation and to provide "off-
load" running for a cooling down period.
v. Manual and automatic circuitry to prevent parallel operation with the
electricity mains supply.
vi. For multiple set installations, manual and automatic circuitry to prevent
alternator(s) being connected in parallel until voltage and frequency are
stable and within pre-set limits.
G) The whole of the diesel alternator assembly shall be statically and

dynamically balanced during manufacture and as a composite unit.
H) All exposed moving parts of the unit and ancillaries shall be fully guarded so
as to prevent accidental contact and shall be constructed to facilitate removal
for inspection and maintenance.
I) The plant shall be finished in accordance with Section 09900.
J) The Contractor shall supply the first fill of engine oil and coolant including
antifreeze, required for the commissioning and tests before completion of the
alternator set.
PAGE 170

K) The Contractor shall supply the first fill of fuel oil for the Bulk Storage Tank.
L) The plant shall be capable of running unattended and continuously for a
minimum period equivalent to the specified capacity of the bulk storage tank.
32.2 Engine
32.2.1 General
A) The engine shall be a diesel engine, water-cooled, pressure lubricated, of the
naturally aspirated or turbocharged version, four-stroke direct injection type.
B) The engine speed shall not exceed 1,500rpm at maximum load.
C) Engine auxiliaries shall be 'essential dependent auxiliaries'.
op V1
D) Turbochargers shall be of the axial-turbine type driven by the engine exhaust
gasses and directly coupled to the compressor supplying engine combustion air.
32.2.2 Fuel
C -
y
A) Enclosed in-line fuel injection pumps shall be provided with a diaphragm type
fuel lift pump.
C
B) Final filtration of the fuel oil shall be by a single filter with disposable element.
C
32.2.3 Lubrication
Q
A) Wet sump lubrication shall be provided with forced feed to all working parts, and
where appropriate shall employ an oil cooling arrangement.
B) A full flow oil filter with disposable element shall be provided, mounted in a
readily accessible position. The system shall incorporate full flow filtration with
bypass valve to continue lubrication in the event of filter clogging. Bypass valves
located in the disposable filter assembly are not acceptable.
C) The engine oil sump level shall be capable of being measured and additional oil
added when necessary without stopping the engine.
32.2.4 Cooling
A) Engine cooling shall be by means of water with a fan assisted glycol filled
radiator or heat exchanger of the pressurised type, preferably mounted on the
engine base plate. The water jacket temperature shall be thermostatically
controlled.
B) When the set is on standby duty, a thermostatically controlled electric heater in
the water jacket circuit shall maintain the engine temperature at a nominal 32ºC
minimum.
32.2.5 Governor
A) A governor of class A1 accuracy to BS 5514 Part 4: or equivalent shall be
provided. The governor shall:
i. Govern the engine speed to limits that shall allow synchronisation with any
other set to be easily and readily achieved.
ii. Provide a hand control capable of adjusting the engine speed to ±5% above
and below the rated speed.
PAGE 171

iii. Shut down the engine if the rated speed is exceeded to an extent that could
cause damage to the engine.
32.2.6 Instrumentation
A) The following engine instrumentation shall be provided local to the set:
i. Lubricating oil pressure gauge.
ii. Water temperature gauge.
iii. Fuel oil pressure gauge.
32.2.7 Base plate
op V1
The alternator set shall be mounted on anti-vibration mountings on a fabricated steel
base plate of the skid type. Anti-creep devices shall be fitted to the mountings.
32.2.8 Barring Gear

Means of manually turning the engine for service purposes shall be provided by
C -
means of access to the flywheel or other purpose-designed system for the particular
y
C
manufacturer's engine.
32.2.9 Protection Devices

C
A) The engine shall be fitted with automatic shutdown devices that will
automatically shut down the engine on the occurrence of one of the following
Q
fault conditions:
i. High engine temperature.
ii. Low lubricating oil pressure.
iii. High lubricating oil temperature.
iv. Engine over speed.
v. Low fuel level.
vi. Low coolant level in radiator.
vii. Low oil level.
B) The engine shall lock out in the event of one of the above faults occurring.
C) The devices shall be fitted with a separate set of normally-open contacts to trip
the alternator changeover contractor or circuit breaker when the automatic
shutdown devices operate. In addition, the prime mover shall be shut down by
means of a fuel valve that shall be energised to open.
32.2.10 Drip Trays

All fuel oil equipment shall be provided with drip trays to prevent leakage of fuel oil
fouling the concrete floor. Drip trays shall be removable for draining and cleaning.
32.2.11 Starting
A) Starter batteries of the sealed lead acid type shall be provided and mounted on
the base frame. They shall be capable of carrying out six successive starting
attempts at 20ºC without recharging. For generators sized 2MVA or above,
pneumatic starting is permissible.
PAGE 172

B) The automatic starting system shall be so arranged that following three abortive
attempts to start the diesel engine, it shall be locked out with a manual override
and a “failure to start” alarm raised.
C) Battery charging shall be from a mains-powered battery charger of the constant
potential self-regulating type located on the diesel set. When the set is running,
battery charging shall be via an engine-driven charging alternator having the
capability of boost charging the batteries.
D) The battery charger shall be automatically disconnected from the batteries prior
to the set being requested to start in either the automatic or manual mode.
E) The batteries and terminals shall be completely enclosed, but not sealed, in a
robust wooden box complete with lid.
op V1
F) Manual/Auto control selection, applying to both start and stopping functions,
shall be provided.
32.2.12 Engine Silencing
C -
A) The engine exhaust system shall comprise absorptive type silencers and the
y
complete exhaust pipe work system from the engine manifold to the
C
atmosphere. The silencer shall be within the confines of the alternator room. All
connections shall be flanged and gasketted, complete with all necessary support
brackets, grade 316L stainless steel expansion bellows, weathering devices,
C
fixtures and fittings.
B) Pipe work shall be finished in black heat-resistant paint and lagging within the
Q
building shall be 50mm thick preformed mineral wool insulation retained by

grade 316L stainless steel. The insulation shall be clad in 20 S.W.G. Stucco
embossed aluminium sheet, retained by self-tapping screws or aluminium pop
rivets.
C) The silencers shall be mounted within the plant room with exhausts protruding
through the side wall of the building.
32.2.13 Attenuation Louvres

A) Ventilation arrangements shall be such that under "Mains Healthy" conditions
when the plant is standing by, wind, windborne sand and rain cannot enter the
plant room in quantities that would adversely affect the plant and its operation.
B) The inlet and outlet air apertures shall be supplied with noise attenuators to
reduce the external noise level to 80dBA @ 1m. All apertures shall be
weatherproof, fitted with bird guards and manufactured in 16-gauge galvanised
mild steel, stainless steel or anodised aluminium.
C) The engine outlet from the radiator shall be ducted in flexible material to the
room outlet louvre that shall be sized to give the required attenuation and
produce a back pressure which does not stall the engine fan. The maximum
radiator air flow restriction shall be 0.5 inches of water (1.25 Pa).
D) Ventilation shall be such that internal room temperatures are limited to 60°C for
an outdoor ambient air temperature described in Section 15001: General M&E
Requirements.
E) Dampers shall be provided to prevent the ingress of wind, rain and sand when
the plant is standing by under "Mains Healthy" conditions. Outlet dampers may
be gravity operated, but where inlet louvres are offered then actuated dampers
PAGE 173

shall be fitted to the inside face of the louvre/alternator assembly.
32.2.14 Room Mounted Plant – Connections to Builders Work

A) Ducting must be finished with a mating flange and the material of the duct shall
be extended in the form of a spigot beyond the flanged connection and into the
builders work.
B) Joints between mating flanges and companion rings or hardwood frames shall
be fitted with a sealing gasket.
C) Penetrations through walls and floors must be carefully detailed and angle
frames provided, if necessary, to act as a retaining for packing, to prevent noise
and vibration or to accommodate movement due to expansion.
D) Where ducts penetrate external walls and floors a flange suitable for flashing
op V1
must be fixed and sealed to the duct and wall.
E) A suitable cravat is to be provided with the skirt extending below the flashing. If
any welding is carried out the entire section must be galvanised after
manufacture.
C -
y
C
32.3 Fuel Storage Systems
32.3.1 Bulk Storage Tank
C
A) Bulk tanks shall be fabricated by a metal arc welding process using weldable
structural steel.
Q
B) Welders shall be qualified in accordance with the requirements of the

appropriate section of the British Standard.
C) The tanks shall be complete with inlet pipe-work, outlet pipe-work, drain valves,
vent pipes, lifting eyes, support feet, earthing boss and local level indication
complete with local audible high level alarm and alarm accept button. Level
indication shall also be transmitted to the instrumentation control panel and be
available for connection to a telemetry outstation. The tank shall be bunded; the
bund sized to accommodate 110% of the contents of the tank.
D) Pipe-work shall be carbon steel to BS 3601 or equivalent grade S320 and the
minimum wall thickness shall be 2.9mm.
E) The pipe-work shall have the minimum number of joints and joints shall be
flanged to PN16 specification.
F) A hand-operated self-priming hand pump shall be provided for pumping out the
bund in the fuel store. The pump shall be fixed to the outside of the fuel store
wall and the suction pipe and 3m of flexible discharge hose shall be provided.
G) Unless otherwise required by the Contract, the capacity of the Bulk Storage
Tank shall be equivalent to five days running at full load.
H) The design of the fuel system shall conform to the requirements of ADNOC
specification and the Civil Defence Authorities specification.
32.3.2 Daily Service Tank

A) A daily service tank shall be provided with an 8-hour full load capacity.
B) Local level indication and a low level switch signal shall be provided.
PAGE 174

C) Provision shall be made to trip the diesel alternator sets at a predetermined low
level in the daily service tank.
D) A manual pump shall be provided to facilitate the filling of the daily service tank
either from the Bulk Tank or from drums and shall be complete with flexible hose
and connections to the tank.
E) Pipe-work between the daily service tank and the engine pipe-work shall be
copper and a manual shut off valve shall be provided.
F) The fuel return pipe-work shall run to the bulk tank.
G) Fuel transfer from the Bulk Storage Tank to the Daily Service Tank shall be via
an electric pump, manual start with automatic Stop at high level in the Daily
Service Tank and automatic Stop at low level in the Bulk Storage Tank.
op V1
32.4 Alternator
32.4.1 Ratings
C -
Alternators shall be in accordance with the relevant sections BS 4999 or equivalent
y
C
and PD 5000 or equivalent and shall have a maximum continuous rating compatible
with that of the driving diesel engine, for the required output.
C
32.4.2 Duty
A) The alternator duty shall be in accordance with type S1 of BS 4999 Part 101 or
Q
equivalent.
B) The alternator, in conjunction with the excitation system shall operate in a
suitable manner at all loads up to the maximum continuous rating and shall, if
required, operate satisfactorily in parallel with other units connected to the
system.
C) The alternator shall be capable of running continuously with the negative phase
sequence current specified, subject to the rated currents not being exceeded in
any one phase.
32.4.3 Design
A) The alternator shall be of the brushless, self-exciting type being internally star
connected with the three ends of the line side stator windings and star
connections brought out to one terminal box.
B) The enclosure shall be IP 21 of BS 4999: Part 105 or equivalent.
C) The alternator shall be fitted to the driving diesel engine by a spigoted or
dowelled flange so as to take one unit, thus eliminating all need for further
alignment.
D) The alternator shall be designed to have a factor of safety at 20% over-speed, of
not less than 1.5 based upon the 0.2% proof stress.
E) The alternator critical speed shall be well above the normal speed and shall be
preferably at least twice the over-speed.
32.4.4 Stators
A) All end windings shall be firmly supported so as to prevent any appreciable
movement under conditions that may occur during operation owing to a direct
PAGE 175

short circuit across the terminals at normal voltage, or equivalent forces due to
inaccuracy in synchronising. All packing blocks and supports in the end windings
shall be adequately secured.
B) Stator insulation shall be Class H to BS EN 60085 or equivalent and be finished
with an oil, moisture and fungus proof varnish.
C) Stator winding anti-condensation heaters shall be provided for use at 110V 1-
phase 50Hz.
32.4.5 Rotors
A) The rotor design shall avoid the use of an excessive number of small parts.
B) Fully interconnected pole face damping windings shall be incorporated.
op V1
C) Rotor insulation shall be Class H to BS EN 60085 or equivalent and be finished
with an oil-, moisture- and fungus-proof varnish.
D) The rotor shall be supported by a single bearing with the Drive End of the rotor
coupled to the diesel engine coupling.
C -
y
32.4.6 Excitation
C
A) The alternator shall have a complete excitation system capable of providing an
adequate range of excitation and it shall permit an adequate margin of stability
C
under all steady and transient load conditions.
B) The excitation system shall be capable of supplying, without damage to any
Q
component, the ceiling level of the system for a period of five seconds with the
equipment at normal operating temperature.
C) The exciter shall be integral to the alternator and totally enclosed and shall
incorporate field forcing to give up to 2.5 times full load current steady state.
32.4.7 Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR)

A) Automatic voltage control equipment shall be provided employing a fast
response continuously acting electrical regulating device that shall be
responsive to the alternator line-to-line voltage and any other signal necessary
to maintain steady state and transient stability. The equipment shall be complete
with a changeover switch.
B) The regulator shall operate independently of any other machine in the station
and, when required by the Contract, quadrature droop parallel running
compensation shall be provided.
C) A hand-operated setting regulator shall be included and shall be capable of
adjusting the voltages between 85% at no-load (cold) up to 110% at full load.
The equipment shall be capable of maintaining the alternator terminal voltage at
±2.5% of the preset value over the whole load range of the machine.
D) When an alternator load of 60% rated load at rated power factor is repeated, the
regulator equipment shall be capable of limiting the alternator momentary
overvoltage to grade VR 2.23 of BS 4999: Part 140 or equivalent.
E) Machine mounted AVR’s shall use anti-vibration mountings and shall be easily
accessible for maintenance and adjustment. Electrical connections to the AVR
shall be taken through a multi-way plug and socket.
F) The line voltage waveform shall be a continuous wave shape within the
PAGE 176

permitted limits of BS 5000: Part 99 or equivalent having not more than 2% total
harmonic content.
32.4.8 Earthing
A) A suitably labelled earth terminal shall be fitted on the alternator frame external
to the terminal box for bonding to the generator set earth bar.
B) The terminal box and gland plate shall be bonded to the alternator frame.
32.5 Control Panel(S)

32.5.1 General
op V1
A) Each diesel alternator set shall include a control panel for control of the diesel
alternator plant. The panel(s) shall be mounted within the Diesel Alternator Plant
Room. The panel(s) shall be interconnected with the Main Switchboard/Motor
Control Centre.
B)
C -
The control panel shall be Form 2, designed and manufactured in accordance
y
with Section 16480.
C)
C
The enclosure shall be pre-coated with phosphate chemical to provide added
protection against corrosion.
C
D) The enclosure shall be provided with hinged doors for easy access.
E) A facility shall be provided to automatically control the generator set by a remote
Q
signal in conjunction with the auto transfer switch as described in Section 16 of

this specification.
F) Microprocessor-based control, with an alphanumeric LCD display, shall be
provided.
G) Set-mounted control panels are preferred, unless size prohibits this on larger
sized diesel alternator plant.
32.5.2 Automatic Mains Failure Control

A) The basic control system shall be automatic start on mains failure with automatic
shutdown on restoration of a healthy mains supply. The Control Panel(s) shall
incorporate:
i. Isolation, fuse and link for incoming electricity supply.
ii. Frequency meter.
iii. AC output voltmeter and ammeter.
iv. Output voltage adjustment.
v. Moulded Case Circuit Breaker for the alternator.
vi. Start Delay Timer (adjustable).
vii. Three (minimum) attempts to start, at preset intervals.
viii. Minimum Run Timer (adjustable).
ix. Run on (on-load) timer (adjustable).
x. Mains restoration timer (adjustable)
xi. Run on (off-load) timer (adjustable).
PAGE 177

xii. Hand/off/auto/test function selector switch.

xiii. Charger for engine batteries.
xiv. Alternator and Engine Heater supplies and controls.
xv. Hand controls (i.e. start/stop pushbuttons) for use in the "Hand" position of
the H/O/A/T switch in (i) above.
xvi. Ventilation fan/louvre controls.
xvii. Fuel transfer pump controls (if required).
xviii. Engine run time meter.
xix. The specification section “SWITCH” for auto/transfer function shall apply
for load transfer and changeover.
op V1
32.5.3 Control Wiring
Control wiring shall be heat and oil resistant, flexible and run in suitable conduit.
32.5.4
C -
Protection Devices
y
A)
C
The alternator shall be fitted with the following protection devices:
i. Overload.
C
ii. Earth fault.
iii. Stator winding high temperature.
Q
iv. Reverse power (where required).
32.5.5 Instrumentation
A) The control panel shall be fitted with the following instruments:
i. Tachometer or frequency meter.
ii. Hours run counter.
iii. Ammeter and selector switch.
iv. Voltmeter and selector switch.
32.5.6 Annunciator System

A) The following indications shall be incorporated into each diesel alternator set
control panel:
i. Mains Normal (white).
ii. Mains On Load (white).
iii. Generator on Load (green).
iv. Charger "ON" (white).
v. Engine Heater "ON" (white).
vi. Alternator Heater "ON" (white).
vii. High Oil Temperature (yellow).
viii. Fire Detected (yellow)
PAGE 178

ix. High engine temperature (yellow).

x. Low Water Level (yellow).
xi. Low Oil Level (yellow).
xii. Low lubricating oil pressure (yellow).
xiii. Overspeed (yellow).
xiv. Alternator Overload (yellow).
xv. Earth Fault (yellow).
xvi. Stator Winding High Temperature (yellow).
xvii. Reverse Power (where required) (white).
op V1
xviii. Day Tank Low Level (yellow).
xix. Bulk Tank Low Level (yellow).
xx. Battery Charger Failed (yellow).
C -
xxi. Engine Start Failure (yellow).
y
C
xxii. Emergency Stop Actuated (red).
B) Provision shall be made for a minimum of three spare annunciator ways and any
C
further alarms and initiating devices that are considered essential for the
safeguard of the plant shall be included.
Q
C) Volt-free contacts shall be provided for each of the above conditions for
connection to remotely mounted monitoring systems. Volt-free contacts shall be
marshalled at a single location within the panel.
D) A lamp test circuit shall be provided to enable all indication lamps on the alarm
and instrument cubicle to be tested.
E) The alarm and control devices shall be wired in completely separate circuits,
each circuit having independent fuses connected to the incoming dc supply to
the panel. A no-volt relay shall be supplied across the control circuit to initiate a
'Control Circuit Failure' alarm.
32.6 Earthing
32.6.1 General
A) The generator earthing system shall comprise the following items, as a
minimum:
i. A suitably-rated and labelled generator set earth bar made of high
conductivity solid copper with a minimum size of 300 x 25 x 6mm.
ii. A separate earth electrode system.
iii. Conductors connecting the generator set earth bar to: the electrode system;
the metallic pipes of all incoming services; exposed conductive parts and
any extraneous conductive parts.
B) Neutral conductors shall be fully rated and adequately identified by location.
32.6.2 Parallel Operation

When used for parallel operation with the incoming Mains power supply, the earthing
PAGE 179

of the generator shall comply with ADWEA requirements using G 59/1 (UK
Recommendations for the Connection of Embedded Generating Plant to the
Regional Electricity Companies' Distribution Systems) or similar specification to the
approval of DMAT.
32.7 Electromagnetic Compatibility

A) The sound level shall comply with EC Regulation 2001/14/EC.
B) The magnitude of the conducted and radiated noise voltages and fields at any
frequency in the range of 150kHz to 150MHz shall not exceed the limits defined
in BS EN 50081 and VDE 0875 level n, or equivalent.
32.8 Control Philosophy
op V1
A) The generator set shall be designed to be fail-safe, such that failure of any
essential components/systems shall generate an alarm and, if necessary, shut
down the generator set.
B)
C -
When the generator set is stopped, apart from during a fault condition, it shall
y
C
automatically reset in readiness for the next starting sequence.
C) No Alarm or shutdown shall isolate the control panel display.
C
D) Alarms shall continue to be displayed until manually reset.
32.8.1 Engine Starting

Q
A) The solenoid valve in the fuel delivery pipework adjacent to the engine and (if
motorised) the air inlet louvers in the generator set enclosure shall open.
B) The control system shall allow a maximum of three attempts to start the engine
with the specified cranking and dwell regime. If the engine fails to start after the
third attempt, the control system shall initiate a lock out and generate a “failed to
start” alarm on the control panel.
32.8.2 Engine Stopping

A) The engine shall continue to run off load after any on load run for a preset
period (cooling run), adjustable between 0 and 20 minutes.
B) After the cooling run has finished, the solenoid valve in the delivery pipework
adjacent to the engine and (if motorised) the air inlet louvers in the generator set
enclosure shall close.
C) If the control system is run in “Manual “ mode, pressing the engine “STOP”
pushbutton shall override the cooling run timer and stop the engine immediately.
32.8.3 Shutdown Modes

A) The generator set shall automatically shut down (or starting shall be inhibited)
under the following fault/alarm conditions. Restarting the generator set shall not
be possible unless the fault/alarm is manually reset at the Control Panel.
i. Low oil pressure.
ii. High coolant temperature.
iii. Low coolant level.
iv. Engine speed low/high.
PAGE 180

v. Output frequency low/high.

vi. Output voltage low/high.
vii. E Stop operated.
viii. Engine started to fail.
ix. Overload and short circuit.
x. Service tank low low fuel level.
xi. Storage tank low low fuel level.
xii. Generator set bund filling alarm.
xiii. Fire shut off valve operation.
op V1
B) The control system shall incorporate protection hold off systems to inhibit shut
off modes such as low oil pressure and engine under speed/alternator under
frequency during the engine start up sequence.
32.8.4
C -
Emergency Stop
y
A)
C
Operation of an emergency stop pushbutton on the control panel shall cause the
generator set output circuit breaker (if provided) and the incoming generator set
circuit breaker on the MCC/Changeover panel to open and the generator set
C
and all auxiliary plant to stop immediately, in all operational modes.
B) Resetting the emergency stop pushbutton shall not cause the generator to re-
Q
start.
C) Only, when the “Emergency stop operated” alarm has been physically reset on
the control panel, shall the generator be re-started.
32.9 Multi-Generator Operation

A) Generators used in multiple synchronous operation shall comply with BS 4999-
140.
B) Where a number of alternators operate in parallel with each another, the star
point of only one machine shall be earthed to avoid the risk of circulating third
harmonic currents. Arrangements shall be made for automatic transfer of star
point earth to another machine if the selected machine is tripped. Coupling of
the machine neutrals during parallel operations shall be advised by the
Contractor.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 181

33. LIGHTNING AND SURGE PROTECTION

SYSTEM (SECTION 16670)
B) The Mains incomers of all Factory Built Assemblies (FBAs) such as
Motor Control Centres, LV Distribution Boards and Control Panels etc.,
as described by Section 16480, fed from "ADWEA-supplied Feeder
op V1
and/or Transformer, Package Substation and Generator Sets" shall be
provided with Lightning and Surge (Over-voltage) protection units to
protect the equipment against over-voltage generated by spikes and
electrical switching events.
C) The protection device shall confirm to BS EN 60099-1 (IEC 60099-1)
C -
and shall be rated for High Exposure Level as defined in the BS EN
y
C
62305 (IEC 62305) series of standards.
33.2 Design and Construction Features

C
A) The protector shall be so designed and field proven that it shall neither
interfere nor restrict the systems normal operation. It shall not
Q
i. Corrupt the normal mains power supply

ii. Break or shutdown the power supply during operation
iii. Have an executive earth leakage current
B) Protection shall be rated for a peak discharge current of no less than 10kA
(8/20-microsecond waveform).
C) The protector shall limit the transient voltage to below equipment
susceptibility levels. Unless stated otherwise, the peak transients let-
through voltage shall not exceed 600V for protectors with a nominal
working voltage of 240V when tested in accordance with the BS EN 62305
(IEC 62305) series of standards.
D) The peak transient let-through voltage shall not be exceeded for all
combinations of conductors:
i. Phase to Neutral
ii. Phase to Earth
iii. Neutral to Earth
33.3 Monitoring
A) The protector shall have continuous indication of its protection status. The
following conditions shall be monitored International standards describing
techniques for limiting harmonics are:
i. Full protection present.
ii. Reduced protection – replacement required
PAGE 182

iii. No protection – failure of protector

B) Remote indication of status shall be possible via volt-free contacts
C) Status indication shall provide warning of protection failure between all
combinations of conductors, including neutral to earth. This shall prevent a
potentially dangerous short circuit between the Neutral and Earth going
undetected for some time.
END OF SECTION
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 183

34. POWER MONITORING (SECTION 16681)

34.1 General
A) The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of Section 15001: General
M&E Requirements.
B) The Power Monitor (PM) shall be a true RMS digital instrument, with LCD
display, capable of controlling and measurement of highly non-linear loads
accurately and able to detect voltage-based disturbances.
C) The LCD unit, complete with integral function keys, shall be minimum IP54
and be mounted locally on the Incomer cubicle door.
op V1
D) The PM shall be ‘CE marked’ and confirm to BS EN 61010-1.
E) The PM shall register all measured values and log current and previous
measured values for reporting and printing purposes.
C -
F) The PM shall be supplied with software, user manual and associated
y
C
interconnecting cables.
G) The PM shall be provided with user-friendly software program (fully supported
by the latest edition of a Windows®-based operating system) allowing easy
C
access to all features with pull-down menus.
Q
34.2 Features
The Power Monitor shall include the following features as a minimum:
i. True RMS measurement of current and voltage.
ii. Control and measurement of highly non-linear loads.
iii. Capable of detecting voltage-based disturbances.
iv. Interface capability with PLC/RTU/Circuit Breaker.
v. Provide interface with Power Factor Correction Control equipment.
vi. RS-485 port.
vii. Modbus communication protocol.
viii. DNP3.0 Communication protocol.
ix. Web-enabled Ethernet capability.
x. Measurement of Harmonics.
xi. Monitoring of disturbances in the power supply network.
xii. Continuous sampling at 128 times per cycle.
xiii. Trending analysis for historical data collection.
xiv. Sequence of events.
34.3 Measurements
The following parameters shall be displayed on the LCD:
i. RMS current of each phase.
PAGE 184

ii. RMS voltage L1-L2-L3-N.

iii. Average System Voltage (Vav).
iv. Average System Current (Iav).
v. Real Power (kW).
vi. Reactive Power (kVAr).
vii. Apparent Power (kVA).
viii. Power Factor (cosØ).
ix. Peak demand.
x. Frequency (Hz).
op V1
xi. Temperature (T).
xii. THD Current (%Ithd.)
xiii. THD Voltage (%Vthd).
C -
xiv. K-factor100.
y
C
END OF SECTION
C
Q
PAGE 185

35. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (SECTION 16721)

B) Fire Alarm Systems shall comply with the requirements as specified in BS
7671, NFPA 70, 72, 101 or other applicable standards to the approval of
DMAT.
C) The design of the fire detection and alarm systems shall comply with BS
5839-1. Individual components of the system shall comply with BS 5839, BS
op V1
EN 54, BS 5446 and BS EN 14604.
D) Mineral-insulated copper sheathed cables with copper conductors shall
conform to BS 6207.
C -
E) The fire alarm and detection system shall be designed, installed and
y
commissioned by a specialist contractor having a minimum of five years
C
documented experience and suitably certified by Department of Civil
Defence, Abu Dhabi.
C
35.2 Design Basis
Q
A) The basis of the design for all systems shall be Type M as defined by BS 5839
(i.e. the provisio n of manual break glass alarm units, supplemented by
automatic detection to meet the required level of property or life protection.
B) In properties where manning levels are low, or there are no permanent
personnel present on site, automatic fire detection shall be provided to level P2.
In these cases the following areas shall be considered for automatic fire
detection:
 Control Rooms
 Computer Rooms
 UPS / Battery Room
 HV Rooms
 Switch Rooms
 MCC Cabinets
 C.H.P Plants
 Boiler Rooms
 Flammable Materials Stores (if integral with other buildings)
 Laboratories
 Telecom Rooms
 Standby Generators
 Lift Motor Rooms and Lift Shafts
C) Where properties are permanently manned or have a high density of population,
PAGE 186

automatic fire detection shall be provided to level L3 as a basic minimum (i.e.

escape routes only), but may be upgraded to L2 if the following facilities exist on
the site: -
i. Meeting / Training Rooms.
ii. Canteens / Restaurants.
iii. Visitor Centres.
35.3 Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection Control Panel

A) Control Panel: Modular construction with flush- or surface wall-mounted
enclosure as specified.
op V1
B) Power supply: Adequate to serve control panel modules, remote detectors,
remote annunciators, door holders, smoke dampers, relays, and alarm signalling
devices. Include battery-operated emergency power supply with capacity for
operating system in standby mode for specified hours followed by alarm mode
for 10 minutes.
C -
C) System Supervision: Component or power supply failure places system in ‘fault’
y
mode.
C
D) Initiating Device Circuits: Supervised zone module with alarm and ‘fault’
C
indication; occurrence of single ground or open condition places circuit in ‘fault’
mode but does not disable that circuit from initiating an alarm.
E) Indicating Appliance Circuits: Supervised march time signal module, sufficient
Q
for signal devices connected to system; occurrence of single ground or open

condition places circuit in ‘fault’ mode but does not disable that circuit from
signalling an alarm.
F) A Municipal Trip Circuit and Switch shall be supplied, with the following output
connections:
i. Connection to local energy shunt trip.
ii. Parallel telephone circuit.
iii. Municipal master fire alarm box.
iv. Remote station transmitter.
v. Future use.
G) Remote Station Signal Transmitter: Electrically supervised digital alarm
communicator transmitter, capable of transmitting alarm and fault signals over
telephone lines to central station receiver:
H) Auxiliary Relays: Provide sufficient SPDT auxiliary relay contacts for each
detection zone to provide necessary functions specified.
I) Provide FAULT ACKNOWLEDGE, DRILL and ALARM SILENCE switch.
J) Fault Sequence of Operation: System or circuit trouble places system in fault
mode, which causes the following system operations:
i. Visual and audible fault alarm indicated by zone at fire alarm control panel.
ii. Visual and audible fault alarm indicated at remote annunciator panel.
iii. Fault signal transmitted to municipal connection, remote station or central
station as specified.
PAGE 187

iv. Manual acknowledge function at fire alarm control panel silences audible
trouble alarm; visual alarm is displayed until initiating failure or circuit
trouble is cleared.
K) Alarm Sequence of Operation: Actuation of initiating device places circuit in
alarm mode, which causes the following system operations:
i. Sound and display local fire alarm signalling devices with march time
signal.
ii. Transmit non-coded or zone-coded signal as specified to municipal
connection, remote station equipment or central station as specified.
iii. Indicate location of alarm zone on fire alarm control panel and on remote
annunciator panel as specified.
op V1
iv. Transmit signal by zone to building smoke removal system.
v. Transmit signals to building elevator control panel to initiate return to main
floor or alternate floor.
vi. Transmit signal to building mechanical systems to initiate shutdown of fans
C -
y
and damper operation.
vii.
C
Transmit signal to release door hold-open devices by zone.
L) Alarm Reset: System remains in alarm mode until manually reset with key-
C
accessible reset function; system resets only if initiating circuits are out of alarm
mode
Q
M) Lamp Test: Manual lamp test function causes alarm indication at each zone at
fire alarm control panel and at annunciator panel.
N) Drill Sequence of Operation: Manual drill function causes alarm mode operation
as described above.
35.4 Initiating Devices

A) Manual Station: Semi-Flush or surface-mounted as specified, coded or non-
coded type as specified, single action or double action as specified, manual
station with break-glass rod. Provide manufacturer's standard back box.
B) Spot Heat Detector: Fixed temperature or Combination rate-of-rise and fixed
temperature rated degrees, and temperature rate of rise of specified degrees
per minute.
C) Ceiling-mounted Smoke Detector: NFPA 72E, BS 54 or other approved
standard, ionization type, photoelectric type or High Performance Optical type
with adjustable sensitivity, plug-in base, auxiliary relay contact, integral thermal
element rated specified temperature and visual indication of detector actuation.
Provide two-wire detector with common or four-wire detector with separate
power supply and signal circuits.
D) Duct-mounted Smoke Detector: NFPA 72E, BS 54 or other approved standard,
ionization type or photoelectric type as specified with auxiliary SPDT relay
contact, key-operated NORMAL-RESET-TEST switch, duct sampling tubes
extending width of duct, and visual indication of detector actuation, in duct-
mounted housing. Provide two-wire detector with common or four-wire detector
with separate power supply and signal circuits.
E) Flame Detector: NFPA 72E, LPCB listed or other approved standard, ultraviolet
or infrared radiation type.
PAGE 188

35.5 Signalling Appliances

A) Alarm Bells: NFPA 72G or other approved standard, electric vibrating or single
stroke, 200 or 250mm bell with operating mechanism behind dome. Sound
Rating: 81dB @ 3m or as specified. Where appropriate, provide integral strobe
lamp and flasher with red lettered "FIRE" on white lens.
B) Alarm Lights: NFPA 72G or other approved standard, strobe lamp and flasher
with red lettered "FIRE" on white lens.
C) Alarm Horn: NFPA 72G or other approved standard, surface, flush or projector
type as specified, fire alarm horn. Sound Rating: 87dB @ 3m. Where
appropriate, provide integral strobe lamp and flasher with red lettered "FIRE" on
white lens.
op V1
D) Remote Annunciator: Provide supervised remote annunciator including audible
and visual indication of fire alarm by zone, and audible and visual indication of
system trouble. Install in flush or surface wall-mounted enclosure as specified.
E) Municipal Master Box: As specified.
C -
y
C
35.6 Auxiliary Appliances
A) Door Release: Door closer as specified or magnetic door holder with integral
C
diodes to reduce buzzing. Coil voltage: As specified.
35.7 Fire Alarm Wire and Cable

Q
A) Fire Alarm Power Branch Circuits: Mineral Insulated Copper sheathed cables to
BS 6207.
B) Initiating Device and Indicating Appliance Circuits: Mineral Insulated Copper
conductor (MICC) cable to BS 6207.
35.8 Fire Alarm Wire and Cable Colour Code

A) Provide fire alarm circuit conductors with insulation colour coded as follows:
i. Power Branch Circuit Conductors: Brown for phase, Blue for neutral and
Green and Yellow for earth.
ii. Initiating Device Circuit: Brown, Blue.
iii. Detector Power Supply: Brown, Blue or as specified
iv. Signal Device Circuit: Blue positive, white negative or as specified.
v. Door Release: Brown, Blue or as specified.
vi. Municipal Trip Circuit: Orange, Orange or as specified.
vii. Municipal Fire Alarm Loop: Black, White or as specified.
35.9 Installation
A) Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B) Install manual station with operating handle 1.4m above finished floor level.
Install audible and visual signal devices 2.3m above finished floor level.
C) Use 1.5mm² minimum size conductors for fire alarm detection and signal circuit
conductors. Install wiring in cable.
PAGE 189

D) Mount end-of-line device in control panel or box with last device or separate box
adjacent to last device in circuit as specified.
E) Mount outlet box for electric door holder to withstand 40kg pulling force.
F) Make conduit and wiring connections to door release devices, sprinkler flow
switches, sprinkler valve tamper switches, fire suppression system control
panels, duct smoke detectors and other devices as specified.
G) Automatic Detector Installation: Conform to NFPA 72E, BS 5839 or other
approved standard as directed by DMAT.
35.10 Field Tests

A) Field inspection and testing will be performed as described in Section 15001:
op V1
B) Test in accordance with NFPA 72H, BS 5839 or other approved standard as
directed by the Engineer and Department of Civil Defence, Abu Dhabi.
C) The manufacturer's representative or their certified technician to supervise
C -
installation, adjustments, final connections, system testing and commissioning.
y
C END OF SECTION
C
Q
PAGE 190

36. SECURITY ACCESS SYSTEMS (SECTION

16727)
B) Security access systems shall comply with the requirements of BS 7671, NFPA
70 or other applicable standards to the approval of DMAT.
C) The security access system shall comply with BS EN 50133-1.
op V1
D) The security access system shall be provided to control access to building and
selected areas using encoded cards or coded keypads as specified.
E) The Contractor shall provide suitable drawings and equipment details clearly
showing the security access system details for approval.
C -
y
F) The security access system shall be designed, installed and commissioned by a
C
specialist contractor having a minimum of five years documented experience in
Abu Dhabi.
C
36.2 Access Control System
Q
A) The access control system(s) shall consist of remote sensors and control device
installed at designated door(s).
B) The sensor and control device(s) shall be connected to the field monitoring and
control panel(s) for the purpose of monitoring and controlling door(s).
36.3 Video Surveillance System

A) The video surveillance system(s) shall render colour images and consist of
appropriately placed video camera(s), monitor(s) and remote recording and
control devices.
B) The images from this camera(s) shall be monitored and recorded locally within
the building by employing intelligent supervisory, control and data acquisition
systems.
C) Outputs from security devices and video motion detectors shall be utilised to
alert personnel and initiate alarm mode action in monitor equipment for security
related activity.
D) The position, type and quantity of building lighting fixtures shall be coordinated
to enhance the production of these video images.
E) The entire security access system shall be supported by a UPS system
complying with Section 16611.
36.4 Security Access Control Panel

A) Provide the necessary hardware required to support the specified number of
controlled and monitored security doors, intrusion systems, and article protection
systems etc.
PAGE 191

B) Furnish and install field monitoring control panel(s) in communication closets or

communication gateway rooms to the approval of DMAT.
C) The control panel shall be suitably IP rated with mechanical key locking hinged
cover, back panel and passive ventilation sized appropriately for the application
and supplied equipment.
36.5 Accessories
A) Provide encoded card or key reader, encoded card or key controller, key pad
unit and locking devices etc. as specified.
B) Provide manufacturer certified cabling system.
op V1
36.6 Installation
A) Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B) Use 1.5 mm2 minimum size conductors for detection and signal circuit
conductors. Install wiring in conduit or cable as specified.
C -
y
C) Make conduit and wiring connections to door hardware devices furnished and
C
installed in accordance with Sections 16111 and 16110 respectively.
C
36.7 Field Tests
A) Field inspection and testing shall be as described in Section 15001: General
Q
M&E Requirements.
B) The manufacturer's representative or their certified technician to supervise
END OF SECTION
PAGE 192

37. CLOCK SYSTEMS (SECTION 16731)

B) Clock systems shall comply with the requirements as specified in BS 7671,
NFPA 70 or other applicable standards to the approval of DMAT.
C) The clock system shall be provided for time standard signal for indicating
clocks, time period audible and visual signals and control functions for interior
and exterior lighting if any, heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems as
op V1
specified.
D) The clock system shall be configured to be synchronous-wired, minute-impulse
or carrier current as specified.
C -
E) The Contractor shall provide appropriate system wiring diagrams and technical
y
details showing each device and wiring connection for the entire installation.
C
F) The clock system shall be designed, installed and commissioned by a
C
Abu Dhabi.
37.2 Master Clock Unit

Q
A) Description: Programmable master clock for maintaining standard time and

transmitting time, correcting, and program control signals.
B) Front Panel Time Display: Digital.
C) Battery Powered Standby: 24 hours or as specified.
D) Timing Reference: 50Hz line frequency, temperature-compensated crystal
oscillator, accurate to within 3 seconds per month or as specified.
E) Correction Schedule: Once per hour or as specified.
F) Selectable Program Schedules: 6 or as specified.
G) Program Cycle: 7-day, 24-hour, with automatic holiday operation or as
specified.
H) Program Event Duration: Specified number of seconds.
I) Program Memory: Non-volatile.
J) System Indicating Clock Capacity: Number of specified units.
K) System Control Relay or Output Capacity: Specified numbers of circuits rated
10A each; provide manual override for each.
L) Enclosure: Surface or Recessed as specified.
37.3 Analogue Indicating Clocks

A) Description: Round or square analogue indicating clock, synchronous motor
type as specified.
PAGE 193

B) Finish and Colour: Black colour hands on white colour face background,
stainless steel, steel or plastic housing as specified with specified colour finish,
flush, semi-flush or surface type as specified. Provide double-face units where
indicated.
C) Voltage: 240V, 50Hz.
D) Size: 250 or 300mm as specified.
E) Combination Housing: Provide cut outs to accommodate the following
additional devices:
i. 200mm size speaker and matching transformer. Provide speaker grille.
ii. Volume control pad.
op V1
iii. Light switch.
iv. Intercom call switch.
v. Thermostat.
F)
C -
Backbox: Include integral receptacle.
y
C
37.4 Digital Indicating Clocks
C
A) Description: Digital clock with illuminated liquid crystal or light-emitting diode
display as specified.
B) Finish and Colour: Red colour digits on black colour background, steel or
Q
plastic housing as specified with specified colour finish, flush, surface or semi-
flush type as specified.
C) Voltage: 240V, 50Hz.
D) Size: 65 or 100mm as specified.
E) Combination Housing: Provide cut outs to accommodate the following
additional devices:
i. 200mm size speaker and matching transformer. Provide speaker grille.
ii. Volume control pad.
iii. Light switch.
iv. Intercom call switch.
v. Thermostat.
F) Backbox: Include integral receptacle.
37.5 Indoor Bells

A) Description: Electric vibrating or single stroke bell as specified with operating
mechanism behind dome.
B) Size: 200 or 250mm as specified.
C) Sound Rating: 81dB @ 3m or as specified.
D) Accessories: Guard.
PAGE 194

37.6 Outdoor Bells

A) Description: Electric vibrating bell in weatherproof enclosure.
B) Size: 200 or 250mm as specified.
C) Sound Rating: 81dB @ 3m or as specified.
D) Accessories: Guard.
37.7 Horns
A) Horn: Surface, Flush or Projector type horn as specified.
B) Sound Rating: 87dB @ 3m or as specified.
op V1
37.8 Buzzers
A) Buzzer: As specified.
37.9 Installation
C -
y
A)
C
Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B) Install devices furnished under other sections into combination housings.
C
37.10 Field Tests
Q
A) Field inspection and testing will be performed as described in Section 15001:

B) The manufacturer's representative or their certified technician to supervise
END OF SECTION
PAGE 195

38. TELEPHONE SERVICE, PATHWAYS AND

WIRING (SECTION 16741)
B) Pathways and wiring shall generally comply with the requirements as
specified in BS 7671, NFPA 70 or other applicable standards to the approval
of DMAT.
op V1
C) Backbone Pathway shall conform to EIA/TIA 569 or other approved standard
using conduit, sleeves or slots as indicated.
D) Horizontal Pathway shall conform to EIA/TIA 569 or other approved standard,
using raceway, backboards, and cabinets as indicated.
C -
E) The Contractor shall provide a telephone service entrance pathway,
y
C
constructed from either rigid steel conduit, non-metallic conduit, plastic duct
or reinforced resin conduit as specified from the point of telephone utility
connection to the building service terminal backboard or termination cabinet
C
as specified.
F) The Contractor shall provide suitable cable trays, raceways, boxes and
Q
supporting devices in accordance with Sections 16114, 16112, 16130 and

16190 respectively.
G) The Contractor shall comply with latest standard and regulation of the
ETISALAT and plan the installation incorporating the changes envisaged in
the future facilitating no modification when installing the telecommunication
equipments.
H) Voice and data telecommunications cabling shall not be run adjacent and
parallel to power cabling, even for short distances. For low voltage
communication cables, a minimum 125mm distance is required from any
fluorescent lighting fixture or power line over 2kVA and up to 600mm from
any power line over 5kVA.
I) In general, telecommunications cabling shall be routed away from large
motors, generators, transformers etc.
i. Note: Please check the current regulations issued by ETISALAT on
recommended distances in respect of Electromagnetic Interference.
J) The Contractor shall be responsible for coordination with the relevant
authority for insuring minimal disruption of existing telemetry, telephone and
data communications facilities and networks, if any.
38.2 Pathways
Pathways extend between the telecommunications closet and the work area. The
Contractor shall exercise the most appropriate option of pathway to the satisfaction
and approval of DMAT. Available Options are:
A) Under floor Duct: Single- or dual-level rectangular ducts embedded in greater
than 70mm concrete flooring.
PAGE 196

B) Flush duct: Single-level rectangular duct imbedded flush in greater than

25mm concrete flooring.
C) Cellular Floor: Pre-formed hollows, or steel-lined cells, are provided in
concrete, with header ducts from the telecom closet arranged at right angles
to the cells.
D) Trench duct: A wide, solid tray, sometimes containing compartments, and
fitted with a flat top (with gaskets) along its entire length. It is embedded flush
with the concrete finish.
E) Access Floor: Modular floor panels supported by pedestals – used in
computer rooms and equipment rooms.
F) Plenum/Ceiling: Bundled cables, suspended above a false ceiling, fan out to
op V1
drop through walls or along support columns to baseboard level.
G) Conduit: To be considered only when outlet locations are permanent, device
density low and flexibility (future changes) is not required.
H) Cable Trays: Options include channel tray, ladder tray, solid bottom,
C -
ventilated and wireway.
y
I)
C
Perimeter Pathways: Options include surface raceway, recessed, moulding
and multi-channel (to carry separate power and lighting circuits).
C
38.3 Telephone Termination Backboards
A) Material: Totally insulated or metal plate as specified.
Q
B) Size: To suit equipment specified.
38.4 Telephone Termination Cabinets

A) Cabinet Boxes: Galvanised steel with removable end walls. Dimensions to
suit equipment specified. Provide totally-insulated or metal backboard inside
cabinet for mounting telephone termination devices.
B) Cabinet Fronts: Steel, flush or surface type as specified with concealed
hinge, double doors and flush lock.
C) Finish: As approved by ETISALAT.
38.5 Telephone Wire and Cable

A) Backbone Cable: To meet Etisalat requirements.
B) Main Switchboard Cable: To meet Etisalat requirements.
C) Telephone Workstation Cable: To meet Etisalat requirements.
38.6 Installation
A) Install wire and cable in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in
accordance with EIA/TIA 568 or other approved standard.
B) Support raceways, backboards and cabinets as described under Section
16112.
C) Install termination backboards and cabinets plumb, and attach securely to
building wall at each corner. Install cabinet trim plumb.
PAGE 197

D) Install recessed cabinets flush with wall finishes, and stub 5 empty 25mm
conduits to accessible location above ceiling or below floor as specified at
each location.
E) Install pull-wire or polyethylene pulling string in each empty telephone
conduit over 3m in length or containing a bend.
F) Ground all cable tray, conduit and boxes back to nearest equipment ground.
G) Mark all backboards and cabinets with the legend "TELEPHONE" and any
other markings required to meet Etisalat requirements.
END OF SECTION
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 198

39. INTERCOM SYSTEMS (SECTION 16760)

B) Intercom Systems shall comply with the requirements as specified in BS 7671,
NFPA 70 or other applicable standards to the approval of DMAT.
C) Signalling and communication circuits shall be solid state.
D) The system shall utilise microprocessor components for all signalling and
op V1
programming circuits and functions. Program memory shall be non-volatile or
protected from erasure from power outage of short duration as specified.
E) Signal and voice circuits shall be low voltage not to exceed 48V.
F) The Contractor shall provide suitable drawings and equipment details clearly
C -
showing the intercom system details for approval.
y
C
G) Certify that the type wire/cable, conduit, duct etc. being proposed are
recommended by the intercommunication manufacturer and will provide a total
system free of undesirable effects.
C
H) The intercom system shall be designed, installed and commissioned by a
Q
Abu Dhabi.
39.2 System Description

A) Description: Private voice communication between locations.
B) Configuration: Direct-connected keyed, single conversation path central control,
multiple conversation path central control or automatic dial selector intercom
system as specified.
C) System Capacity: One master station; specified number of speaker/microphone
stations.
D) Conversation Paths: Two or as specified.
E) System Capacity: Four lines, two trunks or as specified.
F) Sequence of Operation: To meet one of the following sequences:
i. Master selects any other master, any speaker/microphone station, all other
masters and speaker/microphone stations, and zones of masters and
speaker/microphone stations, zoned by groups of two or as specified
simultaneously. Incoming calls from remote station are annunciated by light
and momentary audible signal.
ii. Master selects any or all remote stations by entering one, two or three digit
number as specified associated with that station or all call. Only the
selected station can communicate.
iii. Master selects any or all remote stations by entering one, two or three digit
number as specified associated with that station or all call.
Speaker/microphone station selects any master station by entering one, two
or three digit number as specified associated with that station.
PAGE 199

iv. Any station calls any other station by dialling the one, two or three digit
number as specified associated with that station.
G) Interconnection with Public Telephone System: Dial one or specified digit

number associated with outgoing line for interconnection with no restriction or
with local calls only allowed as specified.
39.3 Equipment Characteristics

A) System Performance Standards: The total system shall meet the following
performance standards:
Function Characteristics
op V1
Audio Gain 10dB minimum @ mid-range (SPL)
Signal to Noise (S/N) ratio 35dB minimum
C -
y
B)
C
Electrical and Environmental:
Function Characteristics
C
Input Voltage 240V ±10%
Q
Frequency 50Hz
Operational Temperature Zero to 50°C
Humidity 0 to 100% RH
39.4 Direct Connected, Keyed Master Intercom Station

A) Master intercom unit can be Desk-, Surface-, wall-, recessed wall- or Console-
mounted as specified.
B) Nominal Size: To suit equipment requirements.
C) Intercom Amplifier: To suit equipment requirements.
D) All-Call Amplifier: To suit equipment requirements.
E) Speaker Sensitivity: 92dB.
F) Input Sensitivity: Provide adequate input sensitivity to deliver rated amplifier
output when no more than 10 dynes per square centimetre impinge on
speaker/microphone.
G) Handset: Standard moulded plastic telephone handset with 1.5m long
permanently coiled cord.
H) Minimum Controls and Indicators:
i. POWER ON-OFF selector switch and indicator lamp.
ii. Selector switch for each master, remote stations all call, and each zone call.
iii. Lighted annunciator lamp for each master and speaker/microphone station.
iv. Audible signal for incoming calls.
PAGE 200

v. CALLED STATION BUSY indicator lamp.

vi. Speaker disconnects by lifting handset.
vii. VOLUME control for listen volume level only.
viii. PRIVACY switch.
ix. TALK/LISTEN switch.
x. Mark each control and indicator with legible and permanent engraved
nameplates.
I) Sequence of Operation:
i. Remote selector switches connect Master directly to remote stations.
op V1
ii. Manual momentary switch with sustained TALK position or voice-actuated
electronic switch sets TALK/LISTEN mode as specified.
iii. Incoming calls actuate annunciator lamp and momentary buzzer and are
amplified without master selection of calling station.
C -
iv. Privacy switch turns off microphone.
y
C
39.5 Central Control Master Intercom Station
C
A) Master intercom unit can be desk-, surface-, wall-, recessed wall- or console-
Q
C) Handset: Standard moulded plastic telephone handset with 1.5m long

permanently coiled cord.
D) Minimum Controls and Indicators:
ii. Ten digits, silent operating touch key pad.
iii. Lighted annunciator lamp for each master and speaker/microphone station.
iv. Audible signal for incoming calls.
vi. SYSTEM BUSY indicator lamp.
vii. Speaker disconnect by lifting handset.
viii. VOLUME control for listen volume level only.
ix. PRIVACY switch.
nameplates.
39.6 Intercom Control Unit

A) Intercom control unit can be Surface-, Wall-, Recessed wall- or Console-
C) Construction: As specified.
D) Intercom Amplifier: To suit equipment requirements.
PAGE 201

E) All-Call Amplifier: To suit equipment requirements.

F) Input Sensitivity: Provide adequate input sensitivity to deliver rated amplifier
output when no more than 10 dynes per square centimetre impinge on
speaker/microphone.
G) Sequence of Operation:
i. Intercom Control Unit connects calling station to remote stations.
ii. Manual momentary switch with sustained TALK position or Voice-actuated
electronic switch as specified sets TALK/LISTEN mode.
amplified at called station.
op V1
39.7 Speaker / Microphone Intercom Units

A) Unit can be Desk-, Surface-, Wall-, Recessed wall- or Console-mounted as
C -
specified.
y
B)
C
Nominal Size: To suit equipment requirements.
C) Construction: As specified.
C
D) Sensitivity: 92dB @ 1W input, 3.3m on axis of speaker or as specified.
E) Handset: Standard moulded plastic telephone handset with 1.5m permanently
Q
coiled cord.
F) Controls and Indicators:
ii. Call in switch for one or specified number of master stations. Ten digits,
silent operating key pad.
iii. Lighted annunciator lamp for incoming call.
iv. Recurring audible signal for incoming call.
vi. Speaker disconnect by lifting handset.
vii. VOLUME control for listen volume level only.
viii. PRIVACY switch.
ix. TALK/LISTEN switch.
nameplates.
G) Sequence of Operation:
i. Master selector switches connect unit directly to master stations.
ii. Manual momentary switch with sustained TALK position, Voice-actuated
electronic switch or master station sets TALK/LISTEN mode as specified.
amplified.
PAGE 202

39.8 Installation
A) The Contractor shall install the intercom system in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and in a manner that complies with the requirements
of ADWEA, ETISALAT, Civil Defence or other applicable local regulations etc.
B) Back-up power supplies (e.g. batteries) shall be installed in the central
equipment cabinet or in a metal box adjacent to the central equipment cabinet.
The front cover of the metal box shall have a hinge and be equipped with a snap
lock, or equal.
C) The manufacturer's representative or their certified technician to supervise
op V1
39.9 Field Tests
A) Perform operational test on completed installation to verify proper operation.
B) Replace equipment, components and wiring to eliminate audible noise, clicks,
pops, or hum when system is in standby or operation.
C -
y
END OF SECTION
C
C
Q
PAGE 203

40. CONTROL PROTECTION AND

MEASUREMENT (SECTION 16902)
40.1 General
40.2 Relays
A) All auxiliary relays shall mainly comply with BS EN 116000-3, BS EN 61811-
op V1
1, BS EN 61812-1 and BS EN 116205/6/7.
B) Where similar relays have different operating voltages and/or different
contact configurations, they shall be of non-interchangeable voltage at
nominal operating temperature and shall not ‘drop-out’ at greater than 60% of
C -
the nominal coil voltage.
y
C
C) Relays shall be fully encapsulated and be of the plug-in type, with terminals
protected to a minimum of IP2X.
C
D) Plug-in relays shall be fitted with transparent dust-proof covers. External
connections shall be by screw clamp terminals that are easily accessible with
the relay in position.
Q
E) Relays shall include provision for manual operation.

F) The pin configuration of the relay shall be printed on the casing and on the
bases in order to ensure correct pin alignment.
G) Relays shall be suitable for operation on a nominal 110V ac/dc, 24V ac/dc or
other voltage as specified or deemed necessary for the safe operation of the
devices connected using auxiliary relays. Preference shall be given to relay
coils operating at low voltage. 240V ac relay coils shall not be used.
H) Relays shall be suitable for operation at plus 10% and minus 20% of their
nominal rated voltage.
I) The contacts configuration shall be either normally opened/normally closed
or changeover contact combinations.
J) The contact material used in the relay for general logic design shall be Silver
Cadmium Oxide (AgCdO). Specific applications requiring extra low switching
current shall have GOLD Flash contacts for minimal voltage drop across the
contacts.
K) It is not permitted to use mixed voltages on the different contacts of a relay. If
necessary, additional relays shall be used to separate the voltages.
L) Relays Coil shall be vacuum impregnated to ensure satisfactorily operation
for the Abu Dhabi climatic conditions as specified.
M) Relays shall be mounted on DIN Rail.
N) Relays shall be secured to their bases by retaining bar or clip to prevent
malfunction due to the relay being loosened in its base.
O) Care shall be taken to ensure that relay contacts and associated wiring are
suitably fused protected.
PAGE 204

P) All type of relays shall have a means of visual indication, e.g. light emitting
diode (LED) or neon bulb, mounted within their clear covers connected
directly across the relay coil to indicate when the relay is energised. These
indicators shall be easily seen when the relay compartment door is opened.
Q) A permanent means of identification shall be affixed to both relay and base in
line with the circuit diagram reference.
R) Where remote supply voltages are used, a warning label engraved in English
and Arabic shall be fitted, clearly identifying the source of supply.
S) The relay shall be designed for minimum 1 Million mechanical operation and
200,000+ electrical operations at rated load.
40.3 Timers
op V1
A) Timers shall be plug-in or surface-mounting types; solid state microprocessor
based employing CMOS IC technology.
B) Timers shall be suitable for operation on a nominal 110V ac, 24V ac/dc or
C -
other voltage as specified or deemed necessary for the safe operation.
y
C
Preference shall be given to timers operating at low voltage. 240V ac timers
shall not be used.
C) Timers shall have linearly calibrated scales, in units of time, each scale
C
division being a maximum of 5% of full scale. Repeat accuracy shall be within
0.5% of full scale.
Q
D) Timers shall be provided with “energised” and “timed out” indicators.

E) Plug-in timers shall be fitted with transparent dust-proof covers. External
connections shall be by screw clamp terminals that are easily accessible with
the timer in position.
F) Timers shall be secured to their bases by retaining bar or clip to prevent
malfunction due to the relay being loosened in its base.
G) The pin configuration shall be printed on the casing of the timer and on its
associated bases in order to ensure correct pin alignment.
H) Timer shall be provided with a 10A rated output relay with DPDT contacts.
I) Unless specified otherwise, timers shall be provided for circuits that require
‘delay on’ operate, ‘delay on’ release, and star-delta starting of a 3-phase
induction motor.
J) Multifunction timing relays, programmable where specified, shall be provided
to the satisfaction of DMAT.
K) The use of pneumatic timers, motor driven timers and other special timers
shall be avoided unless specifically mentioned in the particular requirements
and the same shall be subjected to the review and approval by DMAT.
40.4 Hour Run Meter

A) There shall be two counters provided for each motor.
B) One counter shall be non-resettable ‘hours run’ meter, rotating disc type for
measuring total operating period (accumulative) of a motor. The minimum
size shall be 48×48mm. The counting capacity shall be 99,999.99 hours. The
colour of the decimal digits shall be red while the colour of other digits shall
PAGE 205

be white.
C) The second counter shall be provided for counting TOTAL (accumulative)
number of start of a motor. This shall be of non-resettable, electronic type
with permanent memory retention arrangement and LCD display to indicate
the number of start of a motor.
40.5 Control Power Transformer

A) The control power transformer shall be double-wound by using the screen
between the windings; designed and manufactured to IEC 61558, centre-
tapped and earthed via a removable bolted earth link, minimum capacity
100VA/50Hz, 415/240/110V and/or 240/24V as per the requirement of the
application.
op V1
B) The control power transformer shall be selected based on the application
requirements feeding mix-up of low and high inrush inductive control and
measuring devices and resistive devices (e.g. motorised valves, solenoid
valves, contactors, timers, PLC, pilot devices, instruments, controllers,
C -
indicators and sensors etc.).
y
C
C) The control transformer shall have the following features:
i. Vacuum impregnated windings.
C
ii. Low-inrush current torch-proof termination.
iii. Easy access to fixing holes.
Q
iv. Legible and easily accessible rating label/plate.
40.6 Instruments
A) All indicating instruments, e.g. Ammeters, Voltmeters, kW Meter, Frequency
Meter, Power Factor Meter etc. wherever specified, shall be of 240°scale,
flush mounted and of the same appearance throughout.
B) They shall comply with BS 89 (EN 60051/IEC 60051) and built to industrial
grade accuracy not exceeding 0.5% for all instruments except kWh meter,
which shall be as per ADWEA regulations. They shall be sealed against
ingress of moisture and dirt and shall be hermetically sealed or tropicalised.
C) Instruments shall have an external zero adjustment and have black bezels.
They shall be positioned at easily readable height not exceeding 2,000mm
above finished floor level.
D) Meters shall be fitted with an adjustable RED pointer indicating the normal
circuit rating of the associated plant, equipment or drive.
E) Instruments shall have a square front appearance, dimensions of 96 x 96mm
for measuring the parameters of a plant or equipment’s total connected load.
Dimension 72×72mm size meters are permitted for individual loads.
F) Ammeters used to measure current in the motor circuit shall have
suppressed scale (minimum 5 times the full load current of the motor) to
indicate the maximum starting current. Ammeters shall be selected such that
the ampere reading under normal running load is approximately 70 to 80% of
their rated scale.
G) All meters shall have factory-calibrated scale to match the connected load. It
is not permitted to use any label whereby the operator needs to recalculate
PAGE 206

the actual measured parameter by computing the value from the label.
H) Motors rated at full load current 10A and below shall be provided with direct
reading type Ammeters and those exceeding 10A shall be connected via
Current Transformers (CTs).
I) Kilowatt-hour meters, together with associated CTs, shall be arranged to
register 3-phase 4-wire unbalanced loads. The kWh meter shall be provided
in accordance with the requirement of ADWEA.
40.7 Current Transformers (CTS)

A) CTs shall comply with BS EN 60044-3 (IEC 60044-3) and shall be suitably
rated and designed to carry out appropriate function (e.g. metering or
op V1
protection) as specified in the particular requirements.
B) The secondary current of current transformer shall be 5A unless specified
otherwise. 1A CTs where necessary, shall be subjected to the review and
approval by DMAT.
C -
C) CTs used in metering circuits shall be to Class 1.0 or better. CTs for
y
C
protection circuits shall be to Class X.
D) CTs shall be of cast resin type.
C
E) The minimum Short Time Current Rating shall be 3 seconds.
F) Identification labels giving type, ratios, accuracy, limit factor, rating, output
and serial numbers shall be fitted. Duplicate rating labels are to be fitted on
Q
the exterior of the mounting chambers suitably located to enable reading

without removal of any cover.
G) CTs shall be bar primary type or ring type as appropriate to the application.
The Contractor to clearly identify in his submittal the type of CT used for a
particular application. This shall be subjected to the review and approval by
DMAT.
H) One secondary terminal of each current transformer shall be earthed through
a removable link at the switchgear.
I) Secondary wiring of the current transformer shall be terminated on shorting
type terminal block. The supplier of equipment (FBA) shall ensure shorting of
CT secondary wiring through the terminals prior to the shipment of the
equipments.
40.8 Voltage Transformers

A) Voltage transformers used in conjunction with instrumentation where
specified shall be of the isolatable type with a 3-phase 110V secondary.
B) The transformers shall be epoxy resin and comply with BS EN 61869-3 (IEC
61869-3).
C) The primary and secondary windings shall be protected by HRC fuses.
D) The connections between the fuses and the primary conductors shall be
adequately rated to withstand the short circuit rating of the Switchgear.
E) In the case of HV, automatically operating shutters shall be provided to
conceal the HV orifices when the transformer is withdrawn. A padlock with
non-interchangeable key shall be provided for the shutter.
PAGE 207

40.9 Protective Devices

Application-specific protective devices, where provided, shall generally comply with
BS EN 60255-6 (IEC 60255-6). The Contractor shall submit detailed engineering
calculations and co-ordination studies for the protective devices so proposed for
DMAT review and approval prior to the commencement of any work undertaken.
40.10 Earth Leakage Relay (ELR)

A) An Earth Leakage protection system shall comprise of two components:
i. Core Balanced Current Transformer (CBCT) Earth Leakage Relay (ELR).

ii. The CBCT may be designed in ring or rectangular shape to suit mounting
op V1
on conductors / cables or busbars as appropriate.
B) The information from the CBCT shall be first registered in the amplifier circuit
and continuously monitored. Whenever the leakage exceeds the preset
value, a relay is operated to trip the main circuit breaker.
C -
C) The ELR shall have the following facilities:
y
i.
C
It shall confirm to BS EN 60947-2.
C
ii. Be of the adjustable type suitable for mounting on a compartment door.
iii. A residual operating current range: 0.03 to 2A.
Q
iv. A time delay of 0 to 1 second.

v. Immunity from nuisance tripping.
vi. Protection against direct and indirect contact.
vii. Provide continuous monitoring of the leakage current.
viii. Be capable of operating under all unbalanced phase conditions.
ix. Alarm contact with fail-safe operation.
x. LED Status indications.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 208

41. PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS

(SECTION 16903)
41.1.1 Scope
A) The Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) shall be provided as described
herein which will receive discrete and analogue inputs.
B) Through the use of IEC 61131-3 compliant programming languages such as
Ladder Diagram, Functional Block Diagram, Structured Text, Instruction List
op V1
or Sequential Function Chart etc., it shall control discrete and analogue
output functions, perform data handling operations and communicate with
external devices.
41.1.2 Manufacturer’s Standards

C -
y
C
A) The manufacturer shall have fully operational ISO9001 certification issued by
an internationally recognised agency for "Quality Systems Model for Quality
Assurance in Design/Development, Production, Installation and Servicing."
C
B) The manufacturer shall submit properly documented record of supply of
similar equipment working satisfactorily in similar climatic and service
conditions for the last 10 years. This shall be the minimum prerequisite to
Q
propose such equipment.

C) The manufacture shall, in addition to the above, also submit a written
authenticated statement to provide ‘after sales’ support services, including
that of availability of spares, for a minimum period of 10 years from the date
of completion of commissioning of the entire project.
D) The system shall comply with the Machinery Directive BS EN 60204 (IEC
60204).
41.1.3 Design And Manufacture

A) The PLC and the entire corresponding components together with
accessories, interconnecting cables and associated connectors used within
the contract shall be supplied by the same manufacturer.
B) All products shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with
recognised UL, CSA, IEC and CE mark industrial standards. The system shall
be operational during and after testing.
41.1.4 Training
A) The manufacturer or its authorised representative shall provide complete
technical training during the project execution phase and after
completion of the project, as directed by DMAT. This shall include
headquarters or local training, regional application centers, and local or
headquarters technical assistance.
41.2 Reference Standards

In addition to the standards described above, the PLC equipment shall confirm to
the requirement of the following:
PAGE 209

A) BS 7671: Requirements for electrical installations. IEE Wiring Regulations.

B) BS EN 61131 (IEC 61131): Programmable Controllers.
C) BS EN 50170: General purpose field communication system.
D) ISBN 0 86341 233 5: Guidelines for the Documentation of Computer Software
for Real-line and Interactive Systems for real time and interactive systems.
E) ISBN 0 11 883906 3: Programmable Electronic Systems in Safety Related
Applications: General Technical Guidelines.
41.3 Environmental Conditions

All components of the PLC system, except HMI terminals and programming
op V1
workstations, shall conform to the environmental specifications defined in Section
15010.
41.4 PLC Hardware

41.4.1 C -
General
y
C
A) The PLC system shall comprise of a Central Processor Unit (CPU),
input/output (I/O) modules, serial interface modules and programming units.
C
The PLC shall be of modular construction with plug-in I/O cards with facility to
install expansion racks/modules when necessary. The system shall include
25% spare capacity in hardware and memory for future modifications.
Q
B) The PLC shall be supplied complete with a laptop programming and

diagnostic device plus all necessary leads and programming software and
manuals.
C) A compact version and/or fixed I/O type PLC shall be considered at the
discretion of DMAT depending upon the application requirements. The
tenderer shall note this is applicable to physical I/O counts only. The compact
version CPUs specification shall meet all other communication parameters.
D) The PLC control equipment shall be housed in the Common Controls Section
of an MCC and shall be fed by a non-door interlocked MCCB. A separate
signal marshalling section shall be provided to accommodate all input and
output signals to the Common Controls and Telemetry sections.
E) The equipment shall accept status and analogue (4-20mA) signals from both
field- and panel-mounted instrumentation. Analogue inputs shall be scanned
into a 12 bit binary (minimum) analogue to digital converter with buffered
inputs.
F) The PLC power supply shall be 24V d.c., 110V a.c. as specified.
G) The equipment shall be maintained in operation during a period of mains
failure drawing power from the battery or UPS system for a minimum back-up
time of 8 hours.
H) If required by the particular specification, a HMI/Text Display Unit as specified
shall be provided, as a permanently connected means of accessing set points
and timer settings.
I) The HMI shall be pre-programmed to provide a basic graphical display of the
process. Real-time numeric display of process variables and alarm messages
shall be available. All process control functions shall be accessible for the
PAGE 210

operator from the HMI. The application program shall be stored in Non-
volatile Memory.
J) A schematic block diagram for an overview of the PLC system and general
arrangement in the MCC section indicating the location and proposed
placement shall be submitted for DMAT approval.
K) The Contractor shall ensure that while submitting his proposal the PLC
systems selected provides high availability and high level of integrity.
L) Applications requiring dual-redundant PLCs (Hot Standby) shall be specific to
the project and shall be covered under particular requirements.
41.4.2 Parts Interchange
op V1
A) The PLC controller family shall have a high degree of interchange capability.
The power supply, battery, EEPROM Chips, Handheld programmer should all
operate equally well regardless of the CPU being used.
B) The system shall incorporate a modular design using plug-in assemblies with
C -
pin and socket connectors.
y
C
C) It shall be possible that all assemblies and sub-assemblies performing similar
functions shall be interchangeable.
C
D) The system design shall accommodate the replacement of assemblies without
having to disconnect field wiring, removable connectors shall be used to
connect field wiring to the individual circuit board assemblies.
Q
E) All major assemblies and sub-assemblies, circuit boards and devices shall be
identified using permanent labels or markings, each of which indicates the
manufacturer’s catalogue number, product manufacturing date code, UL and
CSA certifications together with CE marked symbol.
41.4.3 Power Supply

A) The power supply unit shall be modular in design, compatible with main CPU
and expansion racks allowing easy on-site replacement in the event of failure.
B) The power supply shall contain an isolated, internal 24V d.c. power source for
I/O modules requiring 24V d.c. power.
C) The power supply unit shall contain a battery compartment for installing a long-
life lithium battery to protect programming CMOS RAM memory. The battery
power transfer shall be bumpless.
D) The battery shall be capable of supporting the memory for a period of
minimum one year without having power applied to the system. The low
battery condition shall be alarmed.
E) This battery shall be replaceable while power is applied to the PLC.
41.4.4 Central Processing Unit (CPU)

A) The Central Processing Unit shall be a modular type capable to solve
application logic, store the application program, store numerical values related
to the application processes and logic and interface to the I/O cards.
It shall need no additional modules to provide at least the following advanced
programming features:
PAGE 211

i. PID.
ii. Math.
iii. Double Precision math.
iv. Logical functions.
v. Subroutines.
vi. High-speed counter function.
vii. Data Array Move.
viii. Indirect Addressing.
B) The user application program shall be stored in Random Access Memory
op V1
(RAM) or a combination of RAM and Electronically Erasable and
Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM).
C) The user application program scan time, on average, shall be no greater than
50ms for logic and integer processing. Where three-term control (PID) and
floating-point data processing is required, the application scan time shall be no
C -
y
greater than 100ms.
C
D) The CPU shall contain a built-in Ethernet (IEEE802.4) port, 10BaseT, where
necessary and required by the application. The port shall support
C
simultaneous communications for programming, PLC-to-PLC exchanges
through programming, and Host/SCADA communications from PCs.
Q
41.4.5 Serial Communication Port

A) RS232 Serial communication ports shall be provided to facilitate the following:
i. Connect the programmer for PC-compatible programming
software.
ii. Connect the handheld Programmer to the PLC.
iii. Connect to one of the wide variety of third-party operator
interfaces utilising an ‘open architecture’ software protocol.
iv. Provide RS-422 signals with RS-485 compatibility. The
characteristics of this port shall be software configurable and
shall be modem compatible.
41.4.6 Real Time Clock

A) All PLCs shall be additionally programmed, where required by DMAT, to
perform alarm and event logging incorporating a real-time clock (RTC). The
RTC shall have stability better than 1 second per day.
B) The RTC shall be protected against power failure for a minimum of 200 hours.
Timing shall continue throughout any power failure.
C) The use RTC functions within the PLC other than time dependent control and
logging shall be kept to a minimum. The use of constant frequency bits,
reserved within the PLC data areas, shall be used for general timing
applications.
41.4.7 Visual Diagnostics

A) Status of low or dead battery and the diagnostic status of the discrete I/O
PAGE 212

modules containing fuses shall be indicated.

B) A red LED shall be illuminated (fail safe) to indicate fuse healthy condition. The
LED shall extinguish to show the presence of a blown fuse condition.
C) The diagnostics shall provide information on the configuration and CPU,
memory, communications and I/O status.
D) The processor shall maintain the states of up to 128 discrete system
diagnostic bits to be read by a host or incorporated as contacts into the ladder
program for customised diagnostic routines.
E) Faults may be cleared by the user by way of a programmer. Provision shall be
made by way of passwords to protect these faults from unauthorised clearing.
F) When an I/O fault occurs, the processor shall report the location of the fault,
op V1
the condition the address and the circuit number if appropriate.
G) The processor function shall have the capability to time-stamp system faults
for future references.
41.4.8
C -
Input Modules
y
C
A) Digital Input (DI) cards shall be 16-point (maximum per card), 24V d.c., signal
source type, with individual screw terminal connections. Where space
C
restrictions or high-density signal requirements are apparent, 32-point 24V d.c.
DI cards may be used with the approval of DMAT.
B) All DI cards shall be capable of accepting a volt-free contact signal, the source
Q
voltage shall be regulated 24V d.c. and be derived from the PLC panel.
C) Where the input from an external source is not volt-free then suitable isolation
devices shall be provided in order to prevent cross-connection of different
supplies. This device may be an interposing relay or optical-isolator. For
frequencies of operation greater than 30 operations/hour, the use of
electromechanical devices shall not be permitted. All interface/isolation
devices shall provide visual indication of signal state.
D) All input modules shall be segregated into groups, which relate to 24V d.c.
supply commons. Where different supplies are apparent in input connections,
these shall be segregated in accordance with supply common grouping.
E) Input signals from 'DUTY' equipment shall not be allocated to the same input
module as signals from 'STANDBY' equipment performing the same function.
F) Analogue Input (AI) cards shall be capable of converting 4, 8 or 16 channels of
inputs in the range of 4-20mA.
G) Resolution of the converted analogue current input signal shall be at least 12
bits binary.
H) All analogue signals shall be updated each scan into a dedicated area of data
registers.
I) The conversion speed for all analogue current input channels shall be within 2-
10ms.
41.4.9 Output Modules

A) Discrete Digital Output (DO) a.c. output modules shall have separate and
independent commons allowing each group to be used on different voltages.
PAGE 213

B) Discrete a.c. outputs, where used, shall be provided with an RC snubber

circuit to protect against transient electrical noise on the power line.
C) Discrete a.c. outputs shall be suitable for controlling a wide range of inductive
and resistive loads by providing a high degree of inrush current (10x the rated
current).
D) Discrete Digital Output (DO) d.c. output modules shall be available with
positive and negative logic characteristics in compliance with the IEC industry
standard.
E) Discrete d.c. output modules shall be provided with a maximum of eight output
points in two groups, with a common power input terminal per group.
F) Discrete d.c. output modules shall be compatible with a wide range of load
op V1
devices, e.g. motor starters, valves and indicators, etc.
G) The current rating of the relay output shall be capable of supplying the load
according to the applications.
H) The analogue voltage output module shall be capable of converting digital data
C -
to analogue outputs in the range of -10 to +10 volts.
y
I)
C
Resolution of the converted output signal shall be minimum 12 bits.
J) All analogue signals shall be updated each scan into a dedicated area of data
C
registers.
K) The analogue voltage outputs shall be configurable to default to 0mA, 4mA or
‘hold last’-state in the event of a CPU failure.
Q
L) Output signals to 'DUTY' equipment shall not be derived from the same output
module as 'STANDBY' equipment performing the same function.
M) Digital outputs used for a.c. inductive loads shall be fitted with arc suppression
devices as close to the load as is practicable.
N) Means shall be provided to allow the disconnection of outputs causing unsafe
movements or actions without removing power from the PLC Processor or
inhibiting program execution.
41.4.10 PLC System Failure

A) Hardware ‘Watchdog’ relays shall be provided, driven by digital outputs from
the PLC, to detect major PLC processor fault, I/O error and low battery fault.
Watchdog relay(s) shall be hard-wired to the RTU.
B) The PLC shall include facilities to retain the last state of the output modules at
the time of the PLC failure. This shall be achieved by means of hardware or
software.
C) Failure of an extension or remote rack, sub-system or remote PLC, or
communications between units, shall set each bit of the input memory image
at a safe state such that failure will not cause unwanted movements or actions
to occur.
D) If required by the contract, a ‘Hot standby’ processor shall be provided to
automatically and bumpless takeover processor functions in case of primary
processor failure.
E) Power (a.c. and d.c.) for I/O shall be distributed by the use of suitably rated
MCBs. Separate MCBs shall be provided for the followings:
PAGE 214

i. PLC and I/O rack power supplies.

ii. External networking or communication, etc., if any.
iii. Analogue d.c. power supplies.
iv. Digital 24V d.c. power supplies.
v. Digital 110V d.c. Input Modules.
vi. Digital 110V d.c. Output Modules
41.5 PLC Software

41.5.1 General
op V1
A) PLC Software shall be developed within the BS EN 61131-3 (IEC 61131-3)
environment. The application program shall be developed by using a software
package that conforms to this standard.
B) Standard IEC libraries of Functions and Function Blocks shall be used when
C -
writing application software.
y
C) All software shall be suitably documented to include the following as a
minimum:
C
i. Suitable comments.
C
ii. Function description.
Q
iii. Symbolic addressing local data areas.

iv. Symbolic addressing global data areas.
v. Descriptions of all constants.
vi. List of cross-references.
D) The PLC shall be suitable to employ a minimum of two programming devices

for development of application programs, a small hand-held device with back-
lit LCD readout and a software programming package running on a PC-
compatible laptop or desktop computer.
E) On-line and off-line, CPU and I/O configuration and application program
development shall be achieved with a PC-compatible computer and
programming and documentation software.
F) Both the PC-compatible computer and the hand-held programmer shall be
connectable to the PLC via a built-in serial communication port. The serial
communication port shall provide RS-422 signals with RS-485 compatibility.
G) In addition to the serial communications, the PC-compatible computer shall be
connectable to the PLC via Ethernet TCPIP supporting the SRTP application
protocol.
H) The programming devices shall have access to the application program, the
CPU and I/O system configurations, all registers, CPU and I/O status, system
diagnostic relays, and I/O over-ride capabilities.
41.5.2 Handheld Programmer

A) The Handheld Programmer shall provide 4 modes of operation: Program,
Data, Configuration, and Protect.
PAGE 215

B) The Handheld Programmer shall be powered by the connected PLC, without

the need of any external auxiliary power.
C) Program mode shall provide the capability to enter an application program,
monitor an existing program or make on-line changes.
D) Data mode shall provide the capability to monitor all of the reference tables
and make word changes to this data.
E) Configuration mode shall provide the capability to configure and monitor the
connected Input/Outputs.
F) Protect mode shall provide the capability to select password protection
options.
G) The Handheld Programmer shall be capable for online connectivity
op V1
H) The Handheld Programmer shall be capable of reading, writing and comparing
the contents of RAM and EEPROM.
41.5.3 Windows-Compatible Software

C -
y
A) Windows-compatible software shall provide the capability of reading, writing,
C
and verifying the configuration and program with a diskette backup.
B) The software shall provide on-line help information throughout its execution
C
paths.
C) The software shall allow development of programming, storing the program to
the PLC, monitor program and reference address status while the PLC is in
Q
Run or Stop mode.

D) The software shall be ‘User friendly’ to generate printouts of the program for
documentation purposes, selectable to print various options e.g. printing of
complete program with instruction for each rung, the reference list, reference
description, reference address and tables, etc.
E) The software shall have built-in modem connection capabilities.
F) The programming software shall support bumpless run mode storage of the
program to the CPU.
G) The software shall have provisions for importing and exporting tag names,
comments and descriptions in an .xls format.
41.5.4 Instruction Set

A) The programming language shall be BS EN 61131-3 (IEC 61131-3) compliant.
B) The CPU shall be capable of solving an application program whose source
format shall be relay ladder diagram. The language shall support relay, timers
and counters, arithmetic, relational, bit operation, data move, conversion, and
control functions etc.
C) The CPU shall be capable of solving an application program whose main
program format is in Sequential Function Chart (SFC) with underlying code in
relay ladder diagram.
D) Control functions shall be provided to limit program execution, an immediate
I/O update of all or a portion of the inputs or outputs for one scan while the
program is running, or to update I/O during the program in addition to the
normal I/O scan.
PAGE 216

E) Additionally, the function shall provide a mean to read inputs into memory
auxiliary to the true input table, and execute outputs from discrete memory
alternate to the true output table.
F) A method for structuring the ladder program shall be provided with the use of a
JUMP Function. This will cause the program execution to jump to a specified
location in the logic targeted by the location of the LABEL function.
G) Diagnostic and fault detection requirements shall typically include I/O data
corruption, single bit RAM failures, power supply failures, processor failures
and I/O bus failures.
H) Hot standby systems where specified shall detect and report failures of all
critical components so that appropriate control actions may be taken. All
components that acquire or distribute I/O data or that are involved in execution
op V1
of the control logic solution are considered critical components. A fault in the
active unit shall cause a switch of control to the backup unit. Refer to the
particular section for detailed specification pertaining to ‘Hot Standby’ systems,
if specified.
C -
y
41.5.5 System Security
C
A) The CPU shall have a memory protect key switch together with passwords to
provide different levels of access privilege for the PLC when the programmer
C
is in On-line.
41.6 Display Unit

Q
A) The standalone panel mounted Display Unit shall be serially interfaced with
the PLC within the MCC for local control and monitoring function that meets or
exceeds the requirement stated below.
B) The display unit shall be back-lit with touch screen LCD coloured, high
performance pixel graphics flat panel capable of providing process information
by using variety of communication protocols via Modbus, Profibus, DH-485,
DeviceNet, DH+ etc.
C) The following features are the minimum the display unit must be capable of
supporting:
i. Remote downloads (via network, gateway etc.).
ii. Screen Security.
iii. Built-in alarm functionality with enhanced alarming capability.
iv. Floating point file support.
v. Touch pad buttons.
vi. Universal Language Support.
vii. Bar and trend graph.
viii. Real-time clock.
ix. ASCII input and display.
x. Ethernet/IP Communication.
xi. Expandable Application Memory.
xii. Windows-based configuration software.
PAGE 217

xiii. Serial port for PLC communication.

xiv. Serial port for Printer.
xv. Minimum resolution 240×128 pixel.
xvi. Suitable for 240V a.c. / 110V a.c. / 24V d.c.
xvii. UL Listed.
xviii. CE marked.
41.7 PLC System Documentation

A) PLC documentation shall be supplied in accordance with Section 16670:
Documentation format.
op V1
41.8 Factory Acceptance Tests
A) The FAT shall demonstrate the following:
C -
a) Compliance with the requirements of the User Requirement Specification
y
(URS) and the duly approved Functional Design Specifications (FDS).
C
b) Ensure compatibility of interconnected equipment, the proving of their
interconnections and the interchange ability of modular items, plus
C
operational/failure mode testing and recovery from failure.
c) The FAT shall be conducted using suitable and duly approved simulation
Q
equipment to ensure satisfactorily operation of the PLC.

d) Test the complete PLC system, including the full control scheme, as follows:
Operational/failure modes shall be demonstrated using the following simulation
devices:
Digital Inputs Make/break switches
Digital Outputs Indicator lights or relays
Analogue Inputs Potentiometers and current sources, etc
Analogue Outputs Analogue or digital meters
Where other method of simulation or signal forcing is proposed, such as

software simulation code, this shall be approved by DMAT prior to conducting
the tests.
e) Interfaces to other equipment where applicable, e.g. as data links to other
PLC systems, communication links, variable speed drives, electronic motor
protection systems, power monitor and RTU telemetry systems etc. shall be
tested using equipment of the same type.
f) If the interface equipment is supplied by other vendors then arrangements
shall be made, by the Contractor, to conduct an integrated test at one of the
manufacturer's works in the presence of both suppliers.
g) Testing of software and communications diagnostics as applicable.
h) Submit a test report incorporating all changes in the control system, faults
found, solutions provided and software and documentation changed.
PAGE 218

41.9 Pre-Installation Tests

A) All equipment shall be subjected to a pre-installation test.
B) All equipment shall be visually inspected before installation to ensure that no
obvious damage has occurred during transit and storage. Where relevant
ranges, duty, labelling etc., shall also be checked.
C) Pre-Installation tests do not require detailed test procedures or documentation
unless equipment is designed for installation on an existing and functioning
site. Witness / Approval of pre-Installation tests shall be at the discretion of
DMAT.
41.10 Installation
op V1
A) Input/output modules shall be provided with adequate cabling support to avoid
strain on the termination headers.
B) The I/O wiring shall be loomed to allow for the removal of the individual I/O
card header complete with the attached wiring. For each I/O module, the
C -
header shall be clearly identified as to which module it relates.
y
C
C) PLC I/O wiring shall be wired directly to terminal blocks. Terminal blocks shall
be installed to display a logical physical order coinciding with the associated
C
PLC input identification order.
D) Each wiring termination between I/O modules and incoming/outgoing terminals
shall be identified with the relevant alphanumeric I/O address.
Q
E) Provide appropriate protection against lightning and/or power surges to protect

electronic devices and telecommunication links against surges induced in
signal and power lines. The protection device shall be such that the limiting-
level shall not interfere with the normal operation of the system and shall be
below the electronic device's surge withstanding rating.
F) Provide IS barriers in the panel wired to the low voltage/low current signals
(level, pressure transmitters etc.) present in the in the non-safe area (i.e.
hazardous areas, perhaps containing Methane and H2S).
G) I/O wiring shall be minimum 0.75mm2 stranded copper conductors (24/0.2mm),
PVC insulated to withstand 300/450V and BASEC approved and
manufactured to BS 6500 Table 19 or equivalent. Where high-density modules
are used then suitably rated multi-core cables may be used.
H) Where 110V a.c. signal switching is utilised Input/output ‘Source’ switching
characteristics shall be maintained.
I) 25% spare capacity or one spare module of each type utilised, whichever is
the greater, shall be provided for each PLC system.
J) Sufficient chassis slots (rack-mounted PLC system) with empty I/O module
shall be provided to allow for a 25% future expansion.
K) Plastic trunking used for I/O wring shall have sufficient capacity to allow the
spare I/O slots to be fully wired. The trunking shall not be filled to greater than
70% before the spare slots have been wired.
L) Sufficient spare terminal mounting rail shall be installed to allow the future
wiring of the spare I/O modules to outgoing terminals.
M) All unused I/O on installed modules shall be terminated.
PAGE 219

N) I/O modules shall be designed for 1,500V isolation between the field wiring
and the system backplane.
41.11 Field Tests

The Contractor shall demonstrate the following:
A) The tests conducted at works shall be repeated upon completion of installation

of the hardware including all cables, operator interfaces if any and peripherals
devices, field instruments and before any plant is connected.
B) The performance of the system under test shall be compared with test reports,
technical schedule and tables to ensure that it meets the requirement of the
specifications in full.
op V1
C) The first time test at site if possible shall be conducted whilst the plant remains
in a 'dry' state, i.e. without any water being present.
D) After satisfactory completion of the 'dry run test’, the system shall be tested
after the introduction of the water and with all plant equipment available.
C -
y
E) An up to date copy of each system software and the system documentation
C
shall be available at site for the duration of the site-testing programme.
F) An Operational and Hardware/Software log shall be maintained.
C
G) Emergency stop and safety circuits shall be hardwired. They shall be tested to
ensure that such circuits are non-dependent on the PLC software for
Q
protection of their associated site equipment.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 220

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS VOLUME III
42. REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT (SECTION 16904)

42.1 General
a) All items described within this section shall comply with the provisions of Section
b) The RTU shall be microprocessor-based equipment having a proven track record
within the water industry.
c) The RTU shall be constructed for ease of maintenance and repair and shall be a
robust modular construction.
d) The RTUs shall be housed in enclosures with IP 65.
op V1
42.2 RTU Hardware
a) Each RTU shall be able to receive analogue and digital inputs from the field,
C -
perform input signal processing and alarm checking perform algorithms control and
y
output to valves and other instruments.
C
b) Each RTU together with its associated control and accessories shall be mounted
and wired on a backplate.
C
c) The RTU shall be fully factory tested by the vendor.
Q
d) The RTU shall be provided to the MCC vendor for mounting in the MCCs dedicated
RTU/Telemetry control section. All dimensions and wiring requirements shall be co-
ordinated by the Contractor, MCC vendor and RTU vendor accordingly.
e) The RTU shall be provided within a standalone enclosure (IP65) if circumstances

dictate that it cannot be fitted in the MCC.
f) The RTU shall be an intelligent device capable of handling data collection, logging,
report by exception, current data retrieval and pump sequence control programs.
g) Each RTU shall be sized for controlling the specified input/outputs and future
expansion.
h) The program and data held within memory shall remain intact and error free if all
external power is removed from the RTU for a minimum period of one year.
i) The Contractor shall supply batteries for each RTU with sufficient capacity to
maintain full power to the RTU for 8 hours, after a power failure. The UPS system
shall be integral to the RTU.
j) The modem used for PSTN communications shall be of a type approved by Etisalat
and be fitted with a surge diverter.
42.3 RTU Software

a) The RTU shall be capable of processing information locally before transmitting it to
the master station.
b) Total internal scan time interval for all inputs and outputs in an RTU shall not
PAGE 221

exceed 1 s.
c) There shall be two pairs of alarm settings for each analogue input, one an alarm
warning of a possible fault, the other warning that the input is outside a valid range
of readings.
d) The RTU shall operate on a report by exception basis.
e) The RTU shall be capable of executing sequential control logic. Programming of
sequential control shall be by means of vendor supplied high level function block
language or ladder diagram format as part of an integrated package.
f) The RTU’s shall have standalone capability, able to continue monitoring equipment
and executing control loops if the communication link to the master station fails. In
the event of such a failure the RTU shall log all alarms and required analogues until
all the total memory is filled. When the communication link is restored the RTU will
op V1
automatically upload the logged data to the data archiving system.
g) The Contractor shall program the RTU’s fully under this Contract. It shall be
possible to modify the programs remotely by downloading from the Engineers
terminal.
C -
y
42.4 Digital Input
C
a) The Digital Inputs at the RTU shall be voltage-free and earth-free contacts.
C
b) Digital inputs may be single point, double point or multi-point. Interpretation of
states for single or double point inputs shall be configurable.
Q
42.5 Digital Output

a) The Digital Outputs at the RTU shall comprise of volt-free relay contact outputs
configured to either normally-opened or normally-closed in the de-energised state.
b) The rating of the relay contact shall be minimum 200mA at 24V dc for an inductive
load, or 2A at 240V, 50Hz ac for a resistive load. The relay’s operation shall be
rated at a minimum of 106 operations.
c) Each digital output shall be configurable between continuous and pulse modes.
42.6 Analogue Input

a) The RTU’s Analogue Inputs shall be 4-20mA DC.
b) The overall conversion accuracy measured from the RTU terminals shall be linear
and better than 0.15% of full scale.
42.7 Analogue Output

a) The RTU’s Analogue Outputs shall be 4-20mA DC.
b) Each analogue output shall be capable of withstanding indefinitely short-circuiting
or open circuiting and be provided with transient protection.
42.8 Future Expansion

a) The system hardware, application software and database shall be sized to
accommodate a total of 10 % increase in signal capacity overall and up to 25%
increase in an individual RTU.
b) Sufficient plug in modules shall be provided and wired to terminals ready to accept
future signals of up to 10 % or a minimum of one module, for each RTU.
PAGE 222

42.9 Data Recording and Storage

a) Analogue Variables
Sufficient capacity shall be provided to store, in a fully tagged form, the

instantaneous, maximum, minimum and averaged value of each analogue, as well
as pulse inputs at each RTU.
b) Events
The memory capacity of the RTU shall be sufficient to store all events and alarms.
The memory shall be sized to allow a minimum of 20 events and alarms per input
and output from each RTU with a minimum of 1,000 events and alarms per 24
hours. 7 days of storage shall be available at each RTU. When the event and alarm
storage is 80% full, the RTU shall contact the corresponding control centre to
op V1
transfer the stored data.
c) Profiles
It shall be possible to store daily analogue profiles for alarm purposes for 25% (with
C -
a minimum of two) of the analogue inputs at the RTU.
y
C
d) Data and Event Tagging
C
Data and events for local storage and subsequent transmission from the RTU shall
be tagged with the time and date at the RTU.
Q
e) Alarm Tagging
Each alarm shall be tagged in its originating RTU with a source identifier and the
time and date of occurrence. Likewise, the time and data of the alarm returning to
normal shall also be recorded in the RTU for use in the corresponding control
centre.
42.10 Alarm and Events

The ADM SCADA System shall be able to detect/generate the following types of alarms at
the RTUs:
a) Status Alarms
Each change to status or derived status shall generate an event, which can be
reported as an alarm. It shall be possible to assign a separate time delay to each
status point for which an event has to persist before being reported as an alarm.
This delay shall be configurable from 0 to 900 seconds.
b) Analogue Value Alarms
Each analogue shall have a minimum of four thresholds or limits. If an analogue or

derived value transgresses any one of these limits, an event shall be generated
which shall be able to be reported as an alarm. Each threshold transgress shall be a
separate alarm e.g. high high, high, low, low low.
PAGE 223

c) Profile Alarms
Profile alarms shall be provided to test analogue values against flow/irrigation

profiles, i.e. a series of thresholds variable with time. The facility shall test analogue
values (e.g. a level) against a profile of thresholds and shall report alarms when the
value transgresses the threshold after a value and time dead band period.
d) Rate of Change Alarms
It shall be possible to define an alarm on any of the following:

i. Rate of rise.
ii. Rate of fall.
iii. No change, i.e. an instrument has failed and is not responding to process
op V1
conditions.
iv. Rate of change alarms shall also be definable for pulse count values.
e) Alarm Suppression
C -
The system shall have the capability to prevent the occurrence and subsequent
y
C
reporting of “nuisance” and spurious alarms.
RTU’s shall record failed attempts at communications with a corresponding control
C
centre. This data shall be part of the RTU data polled by the corresponding control
centre and used to report and record communications failures to the System
Manager.
Q
f) Mains Failure
In the event of a mains failure and after expiry of the battery backup, the RTU
operating software shall provide an orderly shutdown of the RTU.
Upon restoration of the supply, the RTU shall restart in an orderly and operationally
safe manner without intervention.
The RTU shall also send an appropriate message to the corresponding control
centre.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 224

op V1
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
C -
y
C
(VOLUME III)
C
DIVISION -17
Q
OTHERS
DOCUMENT NO: 511

FIRST EDITION
DECEMBER- 2016
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Document No: 511

First Edition
December-2016
PO Box 20
the publisher
TABLE OF CONTENTS
List of Table .................................................................................................................................... i
List of Figures ................................................................................................................................ i
1 GENERAL OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (SECTION 17000) ................................... 2
1.1. Part 1 General .................................................................................................................... 2
1.1.1 Related Sections........................................................................................................ 2
1.1.2 Quality Assurance ...................................................................................................... 2
op V1
1.1.3 Performance Requirements ....................................................................................... 2
1.1.4 Initial Establishment and Transitional Arrangements .................................................. 3
1.1.5 Operations and Maintenance Methodology ................................................................ 3
C -
y
1.1.6
C
Use of Existing Employer Facilities for Operations & Maintenance ............................ 4
1.1.7 Initial Inspection and Survey ...................................................................................... 4
C
1.1.8 Range of Responsibility ............................................................................................. 4
1.1.9 Operations & Maintenance Irrigation Control Centre (ICC) System ............................ 5
Q
1.1.10 Response to Incidents ............................................................................................... 5

1.1.11 Standby ..................................................................................................................... 5
1.1.12 Emergency Incidents and Recording System ............................................................. 5
1.1.13 Ordering of Repair Work / Job Sheets ....................................................................... 6
1.1.14 Communications ........................................................................................................ 6
1.1.15 Contract Area Asset Survey – Existing Condition ....................................................... 6
1.1.16 Climate ...................................................................................................................... 7
1.1.17 De-Rating Due to the Climatic Conditions .................................................................. 7
1.1.18 Hazardous Areas ....................................................................................................... 7
1.1.19 Uniform, Vehicle Livery and Identification .................................................................. 8
1.2. Part 2 Products .................................................................................................................. 8
1.2.1 Materials .................................................................................................................... 8
1.3. Part 3 Execution ................................................................................................................ 9
1.3.1 Consumables, Parts and Materials ............................................................................ 9
1.3.2 Operations & Maintenance Equipment ....................................................................... 9
1.3.3 Operations & Maintenance......................................................................................... 9
1.3.4 Specific Operations & Maintenance Tasks ................................................................. 9
1.3.5 Field Quality Control ................................................................................................ 10
PAGE I
1.3.6 Inspections .............................................................................................................. 10

1.3.7 Repairs .................................................................................................................... 10
1.3.8 Investigations & Tracing Pollutions .......................................................................... 11
1.3.9 Work Order .............................................................................................................. 11
1.3.10 Damage to Public Property ...................................................................................... 12
1.3.11 Contractor’s Representative ..................................................................................... 12
1.3.12 Performance Review & Audit ................................................................................... 12
1.3.13 Acceptance & Handover Inspection ......................................................................... 13
op V1
1.3.14 Defects Found During Asset Survey ........................................................................ 15
1.3.15 Disposition of Existing Utilities ................................................................................. 15
2 GIS STANDARDS (SECTION 17100) ............................................................................... 16
2.1
C -
Part 1 General .................................................................................................................. 16
y
2.1.1
C
Introduction .............................................................................................................. 16
2.1.2 Scope ...................................................................................................................... 16
C
2.1.3 Purpose ................................................................................................................... 16
2.2 Part 2 Data Model Design................................................................................................ 17
Q
2.2.1 Overview.................................................................................................................. 17
2.2.2 Data Layer Convention ............................................................................................ 17
2.2.3 GIS Data Standards ................................................................................................. 18
2.2.4 Data Quality Assurance ........................................................................................... 19
2.2.5 Projections & Co-Oordinate Systems ....................................................................... 21
2.2.6 Metadata Standards................................................................................................. 21
2.3 Part 3 Irrigation Network Geo-database Data Model Structure .................................... 22
2.3.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 22
2.3.2 Irrigation Network Data Model Structure .................................................................. 22
2.3.3 Network Components .............................................................................................. 22
2.4 Part 4 Model For Irrigation Network ............................................................................... 24
2.5 Part 5 References ............................................................................................................ 24
2.6 Part 6 Data Submission................................................................................................... 24
2.6.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 24
2.6.2 Data Uploading to Server ......................................................................................... 25
3 CAD STANDARDS (SECTION 17110) ............................................................................. 26
3.1 Part 1 General .................................................................................................................. 26
3.1.1 Purpose ........................................................................................................................................... 26
PAGE II
3.1.2 Application ....................................................................................................................................... 26

3.1.3 Standards ......................................................................................................................................... 26
3.2 Part 2 Cad Templates ...................................................................................................... 27
3.2.1 General ............................................................................................................................................. 27
3.2.2 Electronic Templates ........................................................................................................................ 27
3.2.3 Drawing Borders and Title Block ...................................................................................................... 27
3.3 Part 3 Filing And Storage Of Drawings .......................................................................... 27
3.3.1 Filing and Storage ............................................................................................................................ 27
3.3.2 Electronic Copies ............................................................................................................................. 28
op V1
3.3.3 Folder Name: Project Number and Title .......................................................................................... 28
3.3.4 Sub Folder Name ............................................................................................................................. 28
3.3.5 Sub Folder Structure ........................................................................................................................ 28
3.3.6 Collaborative Working ...................................................................................................................... 28
C -
y
3.3.7 Hardcopies ....................................................................................................................................... 28
3.4
C
Part 4 Drawing Development .......................................................................................... 29
3.4.1 Drawing Files Numbering System .................................................................................................... 29
C
3.4.2 Model File (Xref) Naming ................................................................................................................. 30
3.4.3 Drawing Title Blocks and Signatures ............................................................................................... 30
Q
3.4.3.1 Title Block Completion ............................................................................................. 30

3.4.3.2 Signatures ............................................................................................................... 31
3.4.4 Global Origin and Orientation........................................................................................................... 31
3.4.5 Units ................................................................................................................................................. 32
3.4.6 Drawing Sizes .................................................................................................................................. 32
3.4.7 Scales ............................................................................................................................................... 32
3.4.8 Key Plan ........................................................................................................................................... 33
3.4.9 Drawing Notes .................................................................................................................................. 33
3.4.10 General Notes .................................................................................................................................. 33
3.4.11 Reference Files ................................................................................................................................ 33
3.4.12 Drawing Revision ............................................................................................................................. 34
3.4.12.1 Revision Clouds and Triangles ................................................................................ 34
3.4.12.2 Revision Description ................................................................................................ 34
3.4.13 Drawing Register and Transmittal Record ...................................................................................... 34
3.4.14 Checking and Approval of Drawings ............................................................................................... 34
3.5 Part 5 Cad Standards ...................................................................................................... 35
3.5.1 Drawing set up ................................................................................................................................. 35
3.5.2 Lines ................................................................................................................................................. 35
3.5.2.1 Line Types ................................................................................................................................ 35
3.5.2.2 Plotted Line Weights ................................................................................................................ 35
PAGE III
3.5.3 Text .................................................................................................................................................. 36

3.5.4 Dimensioning.................................................................................................................................... 36
3.5.5 Standard Symbols and Blocks ......................................................................................................... 36
3.5.6 Hatching ........................................................................................................................................... 36
3.5.7 Colours ............................................................................................................................................. 36
3.5.8 Layering ........................................................................................................................................... 37
4. APPENDIX ........................................................................................................................ 38
4.1 APPENDIX – A : Data Submission Standard Workflow................................................. 38
4.2 APPENDIX – B : DMAT AutoCAD/GIS Data Submission Technical
Specifications.............................................................................................................................. 44
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE IV
LIST OF TABLE
Table ‎2-1: Positional Accuracy Specifications ...................................................................................... 20
Table ‎2-2: List of Feature Classes within Irrigation Network Geodatabase ......................................... 22
Table 3-1: Drawing Title Block Rev History .......................................................................................... 31
Table 3-2: Thickness for pens shall follow the table below: .................................................................. 36
LIST OF FIGURES
op V1
Figure2- 1: Example of Points, Lines and Polygons in a Spatial Database .......................................... 18
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE I
1 GENERAL OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

(SECTION 17000)
1.1. Part 1 General
Section 01090 - Reference Standards
Section 01400 – Quality Control
op V1
A. The contractor shall perform services to the best industrial practice in terms of
delivery, efficiency, workmanship, housekeeping, maintenance, planning and
control.
B. The contractor shall base systems and procedures on the requirements of the
C -
latest version of EN 29002 (BS5750, Part 2) or alternative QA system approved by
y
the Division.
C
C. The contractor shall establish a Quality Control Programme in accordance with
Section 01400.
C
D. The contractor shall appoint approved, suitably qualified, experienced and trained
personnel, as required, to form a core team to perform the services.
Q
E. The contractor shall provide for any absences to ensure continuous operation of
the services with the same level of competency.
F. The contractor shall maintain sufficient manpower in the core team to perform the
services. He shall notify for approval any reduction in size proposals to the
Division/Engineer based on objective evidence that the services can be provided
in accordance with Contract requirements.
G. The contractor shall appoint a Safety Officer in accordance with Section 01540.
H. The contractor shall appoint a suitably independent, impartial, qualified,
experienced and trained QA/QC Engineer responsible for ensuring execution of
the Works in accordance with agreed quality system requirements required by
Section 01400.
I. The contractor shall communicate any changes to appointed personnel in
sufficient time for approval of replacement by Division.
J. The Division reserves the right to approve or otherwise any proposed personnel
appointments.
K. The contractor shall ensure all personnel are fully familiarised with the
requirements of the operation and maintenance to be provided, the landscape and
irrigation assets, site safety regulations and statutory requirements and Division
procedures.
1.1.3 Performance Requirements

A Due to the importance of providing the Abu Dhabi Island with the public service of
maintaining the irrigation system it cannot be over-emphasised that Operations and
Maintenance Contracts place an immense responsibility on the part of the
PAGE 2

Contractor. He shall under this contract provided such services in an optimal manner
for the maintenance of the irrigation system for the betterment of the people of Abu
Dhabi and the environment as a whole. At all times the Contractor will reflect the
Mission statement of DMAT.
B Utmost importance shall be given to providing the continuity of the services with
minimal interruption of irrigation water flows to soft landscape and maintaining safety.
C The Contractor shall take care in carrying out its operations and functions to prevent
pollution of the environment. If there is any escape of matter which may be construed
as a pollution of the environment the Contractor shall immediately put in hand
whatever procedures it considers necessary or as otherwise it agreed with the
Division/Engineer, to limit and alleviate the effects of the pollution. The Contractor
shall immediately inform the Division/Engineer and any other known affected party, of
op V1
the incident and of the measures taken to limit the effects of the pollution.
D The Contractor should be aware that any surface flooding of property or pollution of
the environment is viewed most seriously by the Division. Any of the above incidents
directly attributed to the negligent actions of the Contractor will be viewed very
C -
seriously. The Division reserves the right to make good the affected area/premises
y
from any such incident at the cost of the Contractor.
C
1.1.4 Initial Establishment and Transitional Arrangements
C
The Contractor shall make arrangements in advance of the commencement of the
Contract period to become familiar with the contract area, soft landscape areas,
irrigation assets other assets, maintenance schedules, location of sites requiring
Q
regular maintenance, records, files and correspondence, written directives and

guidance issued by the Division and all other matters.
1.1.5 Operations and Maintenance Methodology

A. The requirements of the Operations & Maintenance Contract cover the operations
and maintenance of the irrigation network and to minimise the overall cost to the
Division.
B. The contractor shall adopt a co-ordinated and planned operations and
maintenance policy for the contract with the aim of providing a cost effective
service whilst providing on-going security of service and assurance as to the
operation of the asset. The contractor shall adopt the DMAT’s mission statement
to provide effective service that enhances and beautifies the environment for the
benefit of the public.
C. The contractor shall base operation management on sound planning, good
communications and good working relationships between all parties concerned.
D. The contractor shall optimise the operation and maintenance system with the help
of accurate records and management science.
E. The contractor shall achieve the following;
1. Optimum control of resources,
2. Best cost management and auditability,
3. Planned and pre-emptive response to emergencies and complaints,
4. Operate assets at optimum performance at all times and with the least
nuisance to the public,
PAGE 3

5. Planned and pre-emptive operation and maintenance program.

6. Schedule complex, fast moving work loads
7. Maintenance of the assets at peak efficiency at all times and with the least
nuisance to the public
1.1.6 Use of Existing Employer Facilities for Operations &

Maintenance
A. The Division will allow the Contractor the use of their existing facilities for
operations & maintenance purposes.
1.1.7 Initial Inspection and Survey
op V1
A. The Contractor shall inspect / survey and report on the irrigation network. This will
include:-
1. Submitting a program of inspections / surveys for approval by the Engineer
2. The inspection survey shall identify the operation and maintenance
C -
requirements.
y
3.
C
The contractor shall use the survey to amend, verify apparent inaccuracies to
existing records and drawings and to direct the surveying phases of the
C
Contract area.
4. The contractor shall provide all information gained during the initial inspection
and survey to the Engineer compatible with Landscape Management System
Q
(LMS).
1.1.8 Range of Responsibility

A. The Contractor’s responsibility for irrigation ends at the delivery point for all soft
landscape, (ie the bubbler for an individual plant). The Contractor’s responsibility
for irrigation works includes items found to be on site after the initial survey phase
which might not listed.
B. In cases where the Services require that the Contractor enter private, military or
government properties, he must be escorted by the Engineer. The range of
responsibility includes, but is not limited to, the following:-
1 New Assets
When new items/assets, such as irrigation pipe work, are added within the
contract area, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for those assets
and update the asset survey information as per AIMS’ Asset Manual. He shall
inform the Engineer and provide all changes.
2 New Sites
When new sites or locations are added to the Contract area, the Contractor
shall assume full responsibility for those assets at the completion of the
project. New construction sites remain the responsibility of the appointed
contractor until the handover at the FAC completion of the project.
3 Repair & Upgrade of Items/Assets
Where repairs are required but the facilities are not within the Contractor’s
permanent resources then in such cases the Contractor is allowed to engage a
‘third party’ service. The Contractor shall obtain appropriate approvals from the
PAGE 4

Division/Engineer and manage the engagement and ensure that the Division
quality standards are met against such works.
1.1.9 Operations & Maintenance Irrigation Control Centre (ICC)

System
A. The Contractor shall be expected to understand and help maintain the ICC which
the Contractor will have access to for control and maintenance of the contract area
24 hours a day via RTU’s remote connection or from his designated access point
agreed with the Engineer.
1.1.10 Response to Incidents
op V1
A. The Contractor will receive reports of breakdowns and faults that will require him
to send staff to a particular site, both during normal working hours and outside
normal working hours. The response to these call-outs will be determined by the
Engineer, and the Contractor notified. Unless otherwise stated, he will be required
to have staff on site within two hours of receiving the call.
B.
C -
The contractor shall respond to the instruction to attend an incident within the
y
C
Target Response Time (TRT) of two (2) hours.
C. The contractor shall provide and maintain a single point of contact outside normal
C
working hours.
D. The contractor shall ensure the use of suitable communication equipment which
can interface with the Division’s existing telecommunications system.
Q
F. The contractor shall provide sufficient manpower and resources to deal with
reactive operations & maintenance tasks during normal working hours, for the full
period of the Contract, without affecting programmed routine operations &
maintenance tasks.
G. The contractor shall provide sufficient manpower and resources to complete the
reactive operations & maintenance work in a reasonable amount of time. If in the
opinion of the Division/Engineer, the Contractor has been found to have failed in
his duties to complete the work, then the Division reserves the right to rectify the
defect or defects using a third party, at the Contractor’s expense.
1.1.11 Standby
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for attending to incidents both during and
outside normal working hours. A ‘Standby System’ shall be provided to the
approval of the Engineer so that any incident can be attended within the
prescribed Target Response Time (TRT).
1.1.12 Emergency Incidents and Recording System

A. The Engineer, the Division or ICC, on instructing the Contractor to attend an
incident, shall confirm that it is an emergency and shall state the target response
time.
B. The contractor shall submit a report for each incident attended and forward to the
Engineer by the end of the next working day.
C. Where the incident requires an immediate verbal report to the Division/ Engineer,
the contractor shall ensure that all reasonable steps are taken to contact the
PAGE 5

Division/ Engineer’s nominated member of staff as soon as possible and in any

event within 1 hour of the Contractor's first attendance on site.
D. The contractor shall report ALL emergencies to the Engineer / LCMT as soon as
possible, including severe flooding situations and any incidents likely to result in
substantial costs.
E. On receipt of the instructions to attend an emergency incident, the contractor shall
mobilise staff and other resources as may be required for rectifying the fault within
a reasonable amount of time.
F. For emergency incidents of a serious nature, the contractor shall expedite all work
as far as possible by providing all available staff and resources rectify the fault.
G. The contractor shall inform the Engineer of exceptional circumstances preventing
op V1
immediate attendance at an incident and rectification of defect within the
target response time. The Division/Engineer may then, at their discretion,
withdraw the order and make alternative arrangements with the cost borne
by the contractor.
1.1.13 C -
Ordering of Repair Work / Job Sheets
y
C
A. All major and emergency repair work must be agreed and confirmed by the
Engineer in advance so that the relevant orders can be placed with the Contractor.
C
B. The contractor shall submit a signed Job Sheet on completion of each item of
ordered work.
Q
C. Each Job Sheet shall be in duplicate form and shall provide the following
information:
1. Name of installation
2. Details of work carried out and date of work
3. Order No.
4. Start and finish times for each member of staff
5. Remarks and comments
6. Materials and parts used
D. On satisfactory completion of each job, the Engineer will sign and return to the
Contractor one copy of the Job Sheet.
1.1.14 Communications
A. The contractor shall establish and maintain a suitably equipped communications
facility for the purpose of receiving reports from the Engineer and for relaying the
necessary instructions to the relevant staff all in accordance with Section 01590 -
Offices, Buildings and Facilities.
1.1.15 Contract Area Asset Survey – Existing Condition

A. At the commencement of the contract, the contractor shall conduct a survey
(phase one) of all the irrigation networks assets and all equipment and
infrastructure.
B. The contractor shall prepare and produce a detailed report of all items / assets
and their condition including photographs.
PAGE 6

C. The contractor shall agree with the Engineer the condition of all items / assets
being taken over.
D. The contractor shall prepare a detailed list of work required for all items/assets
which need refurbishment / replacement.
E. The contractor shall prepare a detailed schedule of all routine operational work,
and agree with the Division / Engineer the scheduling.
1.1.16 Climate
A. All equipment and materials used shall in all respects be suitable for the climatic
conditions of the Emirate of Abu Dhabi. The following maximum conditions shall
be used for all design.
op V1
Maximum peak ambient
shade temperature : 55oC
Maximum daily average

C -
y
C
ambient shade temperature : 50oC
Maximum yearly average

C
ambient shade temperature : 35oC
Maximum temperature of
Q
metal surfaces in direct
sunlight : 85oC
Maximum Relative humidity : 100%
B. In damp situations and wherever exposed to the weather, precautions shall be

taken against corrosion of metal work, cable armour conduit and the like.
1.1.17 De-Rating Due to the Climatic Conditions

A. All electrical equipment including cables shall be de-rated for continuous operation
in an ambient temperature of 50oC (80oC have to be expected in enclosures
exposed to sunlight or installed in non-air conditioned areas) in accordance with
the appropriate regulations.
B. All materials and equipment which are subject to certification by testing authorities
etc. shall be certified as being tested at 50oC ambient.
1.1.18 Hazardous Areas

A. Conditions:
1. Wet wells with limited ventilation are classed as Zone 1 hazardous areas
(BS 5345).
2. Wet wells with forced ventilation may be classified as Zone 2. However,
consideration should be given to the consequences of ventilation on power
failure.
PAGE 7

3. Dry wells will normally be classified as Zone 2 areas, if forced ventilated

available.
4. The areas immediately around bulk diesel oil storage tanks are classified
as Zone 2 hazardous areas, containing hydrocarbon gases.
5. Consideration must therefore be given to the type of equipment installed in
these environments. Electrical and ICA equipment must be rated for the
appropriate zone requirement. Fan motors must be rated for Zone 1 use,
unless the Contractor can demonstrate there is no risk whatsoever of
methane gas being present.
B. All electrical equipment must be BASEEFA certified (or equivalent).
C. Any environment(s) in which explosive or poisonous gases are present, presents a
op V1
potential safety hazard. The Contractor must select and install equipment which
will provide a safe working installation.
1.1.19 Uniform, Vehicle Livery and Identification
C -
A. All operatives directly engaged in the provision of services shall wear uniform and/
y
or protective clothing to the general approval of the Engineer. All operatives
C
working in the public eye must have a standard uniform that associated them with
the Contractors Company. The expectation is to have all workers dressed of a
C
good standard reflecting a high quality service which the Contractor, the Engineer,
DMAT and the public can recognise. A methodology/philosophy statement shall be
submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer to address this vision.
Q
B. All vehicles and plant in provision of services shall be maintained in a clean and
proper condition. Vehicle must clearly display the name of the Contractor and his
contact telephone and fax numbers, on both sides of the vehicles.
C. All Contractor’s staff, including drivers, team leaders, foremen, engineers, etc.
directly engaged in the provision of services shall carry an ID card, to the approval
of the Engineer, and produce it upon request by a customer or other interested
party. Contractor shall provide the necessary resources required for preparation
and issue of ID Cards and submit a sample for approval by the Engineer.

1.2.1 Materials
A. All materials, including irrigation items and all spare parts and cleaning products,
used shall be approved by the Division and shall generally be as specified by the
manufacturer of the item/asset on which they are to be used, provided they
comply with the specification and environmental conditions.
B. The Contractor shall obtain lubricants from a reputable

manufacturer/supplier approved by the Engineer.
C. The Contractor shall use the appropriate grade or type of lubricants recommended
by the equipment manufacturer.
D. The Contractor shall store lubricants as recommended by the manufacturer
bearing the name and the grade or type of the lubricant.
E. Lubricants that have become contaminated by dust, sand, grit, water or in any
other way shall not be used in the Works.
PAGE 8


1.3.1 Consumables, Parts and Materials
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for supply of all consumables used in the
provision of the Services.
B. Lists of spare parts and materials supplied by DMAT may be made available, at
their discretion.
1.3.2 Operations & Maintenance Equipment

A. All equipment used in hazardous areas must be intrinsically safe and certified as
explosion proof by BASEEFA or other equal approved.
op V1
B. Portable electrical equipment shall be 110V or less.
C. All lifting equipment provided by the Contractor shall have a current test certificate
in accordance with the relevant legislation and be clearly marked with the safe
working load.
C -
y
D. Equipment used for raising or lowering staff shall be of an approved type
C
specifically designed for that purpose.
1.3.3 Operations & Maintenance

C
A. All irrigation pipe work shall be operated and maintained in a manner that assures
a clean, healthy, trouble free and safe working environment for the operator as
Q
well as the public.

B. The Contractor shall routinely inspect for physical damage or defect, repair any
damage and eliminate the cause.
C. The Contractor shall execute a routine preventive maintenance plan designed to
prevent service interruptions and protect the Division’s assets within the contract
area.
D. The Contractor shall immediately investigate all complaints, and promptly correct
faulty or dangerous conditions.
E. The Contractor shall record and maintain all item/asset data and information in a
format compatible with the Division’s computerised Landscape Management
System (LMS), as detailed in Section 17100.
F. The Contractor shall consider the public and personnel safety in all operations, at
all times.
G. The Contractor shall use signage approved by the Engineer to inform the public of
abnormal or non-scheduled works that may affect residents, visitors, the Division
or others to take notice. Signage shall be shown in prominent areas.
H. The Contractor shall recognise public ownership; perform all functions
courteously, efficiently and professionally.
1.3.4 Specific Operations & Maintenance Tasks

A. The Contractor shall carry out reactive maintenance task as required or as
B. The Contractor shall carry out specific operation and maintenance and cleaning
PAGE 9

tasks in accordance with the specifications.

A. The Contractor shall attend weekly site working meetings and additional meetings
as required to review the Works operational and maintenance procedures and for
planning purposes.
B. The Contractor shall submit formal O&M reports as per frequencies agreed with
the LCMT and in accordance with all specified and relevant sections i.e. Section
2850.
C. Where statutory testing of an asset, after repair, is applicable, the Contractor shall
ensure Test Certification is traceable to the asset’s unique identification, contains
Test Data and Results referencing the Acceptance/Inspection Criteria and is
op V1
authorised by a competent person responsible for the test.
D. NON-ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
The Contractor shall at all times be staffed and equipped and shall have sufficient
C -
spare items/parts to perform non-routine or unscheduled maintenance activities.
y
Unscheduled maintenance activities are defined as any activity, which is required
C
to sustain the proper and continued operation of any system, but are not at the
time included in the Contractor’s maintenance program.
C
The Contractor shall identify and meet all maintenance requirements irrespective
of these requirements being specified. Such activities identified should be
Q
included in the Contractor’s Computer Maintenance Management System.
1.3.6 Inspections
A. The Contractor shall provide regular checks and inspections of known problem
areas in a fashion that assures that the inspection services enables satisfactory
operation and maintenance of the contract area.
B. The contractor shall inspect all irrigation pipe work and associated infrastructure in
accordance with the specifications.
C. The Contractor shall physically inspect all valves and valve chambers within the
contract area to see if there are leakage/defects occurring, on a regular basis.
1.3.7 Repairs
A. Repairs are defined as the replacement or rectification of failed or partially failed
items/ assets.
B. Control is defined as containment in a manner that allows further work to be
postponed if required until the Division or various sub-contractors can arrive at the
Site and complete the repair of immediate problem.
C. The Contractor is required to perform all tasks necessary to control leaks and
floods regardless of whether the repair is considered routine or emergency and
react within the required TRT.
D. The Contractor’s responsibility towards emergencies includes any type of repair,
staff, materials, equipment and expertise required to completely control the leak or
damage as defined previously, however, cost against these shall be reimbursed
by the Division to the Contractor at the Division agreement as a result of
inspection.
PAGE 10

1.3.8 Investigations & Tracing Pollutions

A. The Contractor shall, on receipt of a pollution report, investigate pollution incident
reports and take all necessary actions to preclude further pollution.
B. The Contractor shall locate the source(s) of pollution which occur repeatedly and
are not caused by known deficiencies.
C. The Contractor shall maintain full records of all pollution incidents for inspection,
by Division/Engineer, including details of location, catchments, areas involved,
action taken, bodies notified, etc. Surveys shall be carried out using best practice
and full records kept, amendments shall be made to records and the findings shall
be reported to the Division/Engineer together with recommendations for further
investigations or action, as appropriate.
op V1
1.3.9 Work Order
A All repair work, including major/emergency and minor must be agreed and/or
confirmed by the Engineer in advance so that the relevant orders can be placed
with the Contractor. Work Orders shall be allocated priorities depending on
C -
situation and circumstances, thus:-
y
C
1. Emergency Work (Priority 1)
2. Major Work (Priority 2)
C
3. Minor Work (Priority 3)
Q
B Work Orders shall provide all the necessary information required to estimate, plan,
prepare, schedule, execute and cost the work done.
C The Contractor shall submit a signed Work Order on completion of each item of
ordered work. All Work Orders shall include location plan clearly identifying the
area of work
D Each Work Order shall be in duplicate form and shall provide, but not limited to, the
following information:-
1. Asset ID
2. Area /Location of work
3. Nature of problem/failure
4. Work Type
5. Work Order No./Ref.
6. Work Order priority
7. Details of work carried out and date of work, including start/finish times
8. Start and finish times for each member of staff, including names and rates
9. Personnel, materials, parts and items used
10. Location plan of area and extent of work attached
11. Remarks and comments
E On satisfactory completion of each job, the Engineer will sign and return to the
Contractor one copy of the Work Order.
PAGE 11

1.3.10 Damage to Public Property

A. The Contractor shall inform the Division/Engineer immediately regarding any
damage to the assets for issuance of violation notice to those causing the above.
1.3.11 Contractor’s Representative

A. The day to day provision of the services and the relationship with the Division /
Engineer shall be managed by the Contractor’s Representative, Contract
Manager, who shall be based at and work from a location agreed by all Parties.
B. Any appointment of a person to be designated as the Contractor’s Representative
or other person appointed by the Contractor to represent the Contractor’s
Representative shall be subject to the Engineer’s prior written consent. The
op V1
Contractor shall consult generally with the Division/Engineer in relation to the
appointment or removal of the Contractor’s Representative.
C. The Parties shall procure that their respective Representatives will liaise
throughout the period of this Contract to ensure that the Services are provided in
accordance with the specifications.
C -
y
1.3.12
C
Performance Review & Audit
A. The Division/Engineer may periodically review the Contractor’s performance in
C
discharging its obligations under this Contract. A Performance Review may be a
review of the Contractor’s performance generally or of a specific area of its
activity, and may be undertaken by the Division/Engineer’s staff.
Q
B. The Contractor shall co-operate fully with the Division/Engineer in any review
carried out and shall provide such facilities as the Division/Engineer shall request.
The Contractor shall make available to the Division/Engineer such records
(including computerised records), plans, correspondence, returns, explanations
and other information that the Division/Engineer may require and answer
questions or provide explanations thereon.
C. The Division/Engineer shall notify the Contractor in writing of any instance where it
appears to the Division/Engineer that the Contractor has failed to carry out
satisfactorily its obligations and duties under this Contract.
D. The Contractor shall comply as soon as practicable with any instruction given by
the Division/ Engineer pursuant to (C) immediately above.
E. If in the opinion of the Division/Engineer, the Contractor fails to act with due
diligence in taking the necessary action or complying with instructions given
pursuant to (C) above, the Division/Engineer may give a Notice of Default in
writing to the Contractor specifying the failure and the instructions given in
connection therewith. The Notice of Default shall remain in force for three months
during which time the Division/Engineer and the Contractor shall jointly monitor the
performance of the Contractor in complying with the Division’s requirements in this
regard.
F. If the Contractor continues to fail to act with due diligence upon the requirements
of the Division/Engineer during the three month period of the Notice of Default, the
Division may at the end of the period give three months notice in writing to the
Contractor to terminate this Contract in whole or in part.
PAGE 12

G. Without prejudice to the requirements of (C), (D), (E) and (F) above if in the
opinion of the Engineer the failure of the Contractor to fulfil its obligations whether
negligently or otherwise, is such that the effect is to:-
1. Put at risk the health or safety of:-
i) the public, or
ii) the employees of the Contractor, or
iii) the employees of Division, or
iv) the employees of the Consultant, or
2. Deprive the Division of management information required by such dates as

may be specified in or determined under the provisions of this contract.
op V1
The Division may give a Notice of Default in accordance with (E) immediately above,
PROVIDED THAT where in the opinion of the Engineer the Contractor has failed
to fulfil any of its obligation under this Contract and has thus given rise to one or
more of the effects referred to above on more than one occasion the Division may
C -
give three months’ notice in writing to the Contractor to terminate this Contract, in
y
whole or in part.
C
H. The Contractor shall allow the Division/Engineer (or its Accountants) to inspect its
accounting and other records including but not limited to health and safety, quality
C
assurance, time records, sub-contractors and any other records, relating to this
Contract and the Services without notice during normal hours. The
Q
Division/Engineer may take copies of the records and the books of account which
it shall keep confidential. The Contractor shall co-operate fully with the
Division/Engineer in providing such facilities as the Division/Engineer shall
request.
I. The Division Representative or his nominee shall be entitled at any time to
inspect, examine, test or witness the performance of the Services or any part of
them. Such inspection or examination shall not release the Contractor from any
obligation or liability under this Contract.
J The Division/Engineer may require the Contractor to develop a number of Key

Performance Indicators (KPI’s) as part of the Performance Review and Audit
requirement. These KPI’s shall be reviewed monthly. Performance percentage
deviations / targets shall be set and monitored for the monthly review’.
1.3.13 Acceptance & Handover Inspection

A. Acceptance
1. The Division shall have sixty (60) days to respond, clarify and negotiate the
condition of the Contract area and assets, as described in the Contractor’s
Initial Survey Report. The Division’s written response shall serve as the basis
of the original asset condition. If the Division does not respond within the time,
the asset will be deemed to be in condition as described in Contractor’s
preliminary analysis report unless the Division responds in letter for a request
in time to verify the report.
2. However, in the event that either party does not agree with other party’s
evaluation of the contract area and the asset condition, then a mutual
PAGE 13

agreement, between Division and Contractor, based upon inspection results

shall be carried out to finalize the conditions of the contract area and assets.
3. The Contract also requires the Contractor to return/handover the contract area
and the assets at the end of the Contract period in the same condition they are
described in the above mentioned acceptance procedure. All irrigation assets
shall be in good condition minus normal wear and tear.
B. Hand-Over
1. Physical and financial responsibility for the services remains with the Division
for the first 30 days after the asset inspection and familiarization period has
commenced. If the Division, the Contractor and the Engineer unanimously
agree that a full transfer of responsibility from the Division to the Contractor is
op V1
feasible, practical and appropriate then the Hand-over of responsibility shall be
effective from the 31st day after commencement on asset inspection or a date
agreed on by both parties.
C -
2. If, for any reason whatsoever, the Division and the Engineer do not agree that
y
the transfer is feasible, practical and appropriate on the 31st day after the asset
C
inspection period begins, then the Hand-over shall be postponed in fourteen
(14) day increments until such agreement is reached. At the end of sixty (60)
days after the commencement of the asset inspection period begins, the Hand-
C
over shall be deemed complete with or without unanimous agreement.
Q
C. Hand-Over Of New Assets at Existing Sites or New Sites

1. The Division may add new items/assets to the contract area. During
construction of the various items, liability belongs to the construction contractor.
After the construction of the facilities is substantially and satisfactorily
complete, the Division will, in consultation with the Construction Engineer,
issue a Partial Acceptance Certificate (PAC). Prior to issuance of the PAC, the
Division, the O&M Contractor, the Construction Engineer and the construction
contractor will conduct and witness validation tests for every single equipment
item, process and system in the facility and inspect all items to be handed over.
If these validation tests prove that the facility is substantially and satisfactorily
complete and functional, and that only minor defects or malfunctions remain,
the Division may at its discretion issue the PAC.
2. The O&M Contractor can be present during the handing over and
commissioning of works. During these inspections the O&M Contractor is
required to provide written documentation of all notes, observations and
concerns about the item/asset being handed over. The Division may add all or
some of the O&M Contractor’s notes, observations and procedures to the
acceptance snag list. The Division’s Representative shall notify both the
Division and the O&M Contractor as to his recommendations vis a vis the
Division’s and O&M Contractor’s respective contributions to the snag list.
3. In case the O&M Contractor fails to participate in inspection, testing, validation

and acceptance procedures deemed necessary by the Division/Engineer then it
shall be interpreted by the Division that the O&M Contractor has accepted the
new item/asset without qualification.
4. The Construction Contractor will be responsible for the completion of the
acceptance snag list during the first two (2) months of the warranty period. Any
PAGE 14

defects that develop during this period would be updated by the O&M
Contractor for resolution by the Division/Engineer and the Construction
Contractor. The warranty period is generally 365 days and is formally
completed by the issue of a Full Acceptance Certificate (FAC) by the Division
to the Construction Contractor
D. Inventory, Spare Parts, Materials and Facilities

1. The Division shall provide to the Contractor the available existing assets
inventory of equipment, tools, materials, supplies, O&M manuals and spare
parts available with the DMAT. The Contractor shall, within thirty (30) days of
signing the Contract, prepare a written listing of the quality and condition of the
same.
op V1
2. The Division shall then have thirty (30) calendar days to verify and accept the
Contractor’s list.
3. In the event of failure of Division to verify and accept the Contractor’s list within
thirty (30) days, the inventory and condition of all equipment, tools, materials,
C -
supplies and spare parts shall be ‘Adopted and Accepted’ according to
y
Contractor’s list.
C
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for assessing and evaluating continuously
as to which items and materials must be on hand in ‘advance’ to meet and
C
emergency / routine maintenance work so as to avoid development of critical
situations in case of accidental or emergency conditions.
Q
1.3.14 Defects Found During Asset Survey

A. Where defects are found during this Contracts asset survey period, and the
defects are caused by a third party, the Contractor shall manage the defects on
behalf of the Division. However, the Contractor will not start execution for repair of
such repair work until the Division has ascertained liability and confirmed their
wish to proceed with such repair work.
1.3.15 Disposition of Existing Utilities

A. Before commencing any excavation work, the Contractor shall obtain from the
various utilities, the Division and Consultants, the location of any existing utilities
on the Site. Active utilities on the Site shall be carefully protected from damage,
relocated or removed as required by the work. When an active utility line is
exposed during excavation, its location and elevation shall be plotted in the record
drawings and both the Engineer and the utility owner notified in writing.
B. Inactive or abandoned utilities encountered during excavation may be removed,
plugged or capped. The location of such utility shall be noted on the record
drawings and reported in writing to the Engineer.
C. Active utility lines damaged during the course of excavation shall be repaired or
replaced as determined by the Engineer at the Contractor’s expense. Immediately
an active utility line is damaged the Contractor shall notify the Engineer and the
utility owners by telephone and followed in writing by fax and/or letter.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 15

2 GIS STANDARDS (SECTION 17100)

2.1 Part 1 General
2.1.1 Introduction
A This section details the requirements of GIS standards necessary for supplying
GIS digital data relating to Irrigation Network.
op V1
2.1.2 Scope
A This section of the Irrigation Manual will address the key standards required for
GIS relating to Irrigation Networks. It will provide comprehensive requirements for
GIS data submissions to DMAT in relation to Irrigation Networks. The key
C -
components covered will be data quality assurance, data model structure,
y
references to relevant DMAT documentation and data submission requirements.
C
This report will not duplicate existing GIS data models that have previously been
created by ADM; they will be referenced for the user to consult.
C
2.1.3 Purpose
Q
A The purpose of this section of the Irrigation Manual is to provide clear guidance for
documenting GIS standards that should be adhered to when amending, creating
and manipulating GIS data related to Irrigation networks for DMAT. This section
defines the core data attributes that must be documented for each feature class.
By establishing a minimum standard, DMAT is creating a foundation for facilitating
and improving the following activities:
1- Creating, managing, and updating consistently structured tabular
databases.
2- Aggregating, analyzing, and sharing core tabular and spatial data across
ADM.
3- Developing and enhancing data management, analysis, and reporting
systems.
4- Sharing data sets and analyses with key stakeholders.
5- Integrating data across ADM.
B This report formally shows the Irrigation Network Geodatabase that is used by
DMAT. This Section has been presented in the following sub sections:
Sub Section 1 Introduction

Sub Section 2 Data Model Design
This sub section includes describing the GIS data standards
(international and local) which have been considered, the
Quality Control and Assurance considerations, Projections and
Coordinate system and Metadata Standards.
PAGE 16

Sub Section 3 Irrigation Network Geodatabase Data Model Structure

This sub section sets out the Irrigation Network Geodatabase
schema details which include comprehensive Feature Classes,
Tables and Domains information.
Sub Section 4 Model for Irrigation Network Geodatabase
This sub section provides detailed Model diagram of the
Irrigation Network Geodatabase.
Sub Section 5 References
This sub section provides details on GIS references used for
the Irrigation Network Geodatabase.
op V1
Sub Section 6 Data Submission
This sub section sets out the requirements for data submission
to DMAT using AIMS.
2.2 C -
Part 2 Data Model Design
y
C
2.2.1 Overview
C
A Data modelling is a method used to define and analyze data requirements needed
to support the business processes of an organization. Data modelling defines not
just data elements, but their structures and relationships between them. Data
Q
modelling techniques and methodologies are used to model data in a standard,

consistent, predictable manner in order to manage it as a resource.
B The Environmental Systems Research Institute (ESRI) has established a set of

best practices geodatabase designs for various application domains. These
database design models are intended to help GIS users rapidly become
productive with the geo database and share what really works among users and
our developer communities. ESRI also ensures that Arc GIS data models
implement relevant standards as they evolve. ESRI also monitors and participates
in many standards-based efforts at the International Organization for
Standardization (ISO), Open GIS Consortium (OGC), Federal Geographic Data
Committee (FGDC), Geospatial One-Stop, and American National Standards
Institute (ANSI).
C An Arc GIS data model uses commonly adopted spatial representations (e.g.
points, lines, and polygons), classifications, and map layer specifications that can
be implemented in any GIS. Each data model specifies the commonly used
integrity rules for key data layers and feature classes. ArcGIS data models can be
widely adopted regardless of the system architecture.
2.2.2 Data Layer Convention

A Feature Dataset – A Feature Dataset is a collection of related Feature Classes
that share a common coordinate system. Feature Datasets are used to spatially or
thematically integrate related Feature Classes. Their primary purpose is for
organizing related Feature Classes into a common dataset for building a topology,
a network dataset, a terrain dataset, or a geometric network.
PAGE 17

B Feature Class - Feature Classes are homogeneous collections of common

features, each having the same spatial representation, such as points, lines, or
polygons, and a common set of attribute columns, for example, a line feature class
for representing road centre lines. The four most commonly used Feature Classes
in the geo database are points, lines, polygons, and annotation (the geo database
name for map text).
C Figure2- 1 illustrates how GIS is used to represent four datasets for the
same area: (1) manhole cover locations as points, (2) sewer lines, (3) parcel
polygons, and (4) street name annotation.
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Figure2- 1: Example of Points, Lines and Polygons in a Spatial Database
D Feature - A Feature is a representation of a real-world object on a map. For

example in Figure2- 1 the Feature Class represents streets. The Features
within this Feature Class would typically be the differentiation of the streets (i.e.
drive, avenue, road, etc.).
E Subtype – Subtypes are used for categorizing data. By defining a subset of

features within a feature class or objects within a table. For example an Irrigation
Pressure Main Pipe Feature Class could be categorized into five subtypes:
Pressure Main, Gravity Main, Local Supply Line, Abandoned Line and Other Line.
F Domain - Domains represent a list or range of valid values for attribute columns,
constraining the input values to validate data entry. These rules control how the
software maintains data integrity in certain attribute columns.
2.2.3 GIS Data Standards

A. International Standards - ISO is a worldwide federation of national standards
bodies. It is responsible for promoting the development of standards to facilitate
the international exchange of goods and services. The ISO, Technical Committee
211 (ISO/TC 211) is dedicated to developing and deploying standards relating to
geographic information/geomatics, also known as the ISO 19100 series. Whilst the
PAGE 18

core standards are conceptual, they provide a solid foundation for the
development of technological implementations.
B. The Open GIS Consortium (OGC) works closely with ISO/TC 211. OGC is an
international consortium of businesses, governments and universities that
develops publicly available geo-processing specifications, or Open GIS®
Specifications. These support interoperable solutions that "geo-enable" the
internet, wireless and location-based services, and mainstream Information
Technology (IT). They also empower technology developers to make spatial
information and services more accessible to users. Open GIS® Specifications
often relate to technology implementations, including definition of interfaces; with
some being formalized as ISO 19100 standards.
C. The United States Federal Geographic Data Committee (FGDC) actively provides
op V1
international leadership in implementing spatial data standards through
sponsorship of international bodies such as ISO and OGC. The World Wide Web
Consortium (W3C) develops standards for interoperable technologies that enable
the delivery of geospatial information on-line.
C -
D. Standards in Abu Dhabi - DMAT have reviewed a number of documents that have
y
C
been internally published as well as some made available from external agencies.
These documents include:
C
1- Abu Dhabi Municipality, AD-DMAT. (2013). DMAT AutoCAD / GIS Data
Submission Technical Specifications. Draft. Abu Dhabi
Q
2- Abu Dhabi Municipality, Town Planning Section, Spatial Data Directorate.

(2009). Provisional Specifications for Geo-Spatial Data Submission (Set of
documents) Version 3.0. Abu Dhabi.
3- Department of Municipal Affairs (DMA). (2012). Municipality Asset Management

Framework, Asset Classes. Version 3.0. Abu Dhabi.
4- ADSIC (2009). AD-SDI Data Content Standard, Utility - Irrigation - Working

Draft. Abu Dhabi.
5- ADSIC (2009). AD-SDI Data Content Standard, Metadata. Abu Dhabi.

6- ADSIC (2010). AD-SDI Data Standard Spatial Reference System - Working
Draft. Abu Dhabi.
7- Urban Planning Council (UPC) (2010). GIS Section, Spatial Data Submission
Specifications and Data Model, Version 4.0.1.
2.2.4 Data Quality Assurance

A This process details the Quality Control (QC) procedures that are to be carried out
on GIS data created prior to submitting to DMAT. The process described should
be applied to all GIS data submitted to the Irrigation Network Geodatabase so that
the quality of this data can be assured. Specific details of ADM specifications for
digital data submissions are documented in the following document (Abu Dhabi
Municipality, Town Planning Section, Spatial Data Directorate, 2009).
B Data Format - The data should be checked to make sure is has been received in
the relevant format for quality checking. The data that is supplied should be
PAGE 19

submitted in either GML (.gml), Shapefile (.shp), Geo database (.gdb), TAB file
(.tab) or AutoCAD 3d (.dwg) file.
C Positional Accuracy - Positional accuracy measures how well each spatial objects’
position in the database matches reality. Positional error can be introduced in
many ways these errors can be random, systematic, and/or cumulative in nature.
Errors to look out for are incorrect cartographic interpretation, through insufficient
densification of vertices in line segments, or digital storage precision
inadequacies. Positional accuracy must always be qualified because the map is a
representation of reality. The following positional accuracies need to be achieved
when submitting digital data to DMAT as specified by (Abu Dhabi Municipality,
Town Planning Section, Spatial Data Directorate, 2009).
Table 2-1: Positional Accuracy Specifications
op V1
Area 1 – City Area 2 – Township, Area 3 – Area 4 – Deserts,
(Abu Dhabi villages, settlements, Farmland sand dunes,
City). industrial areas and scattered mountain areas
defined development populated areas, and other areas
C - areas. areas with not populated.
y
scattered
As built XY < 20 cm
C XY < 20 cm 90%
buildings.
XY < 1.5 m 90% XY < 15 m 90%
surveys 90% Level, < 12 Level, < 12 cm std. Level, < 90 cm Level, <9 m std.
C
cm std. dev. dev. std. dev. dev.
Height not Height not required
Height: < 35 cm Height: < 35 cm 90% required
Q
90% level, < 19 level, < 21 cm std.

cm std. dev. dev.
Vector X, Y < 19 cm X, Y < 25 cm X, Y : one meter X, Y : 10 meters

base std. dev. std. dev. std. dev. std. dev.
map data
Height : < 19 Height : < 30 cm std.
cm std. dev. dev.
For details of specific geographic areas covered by each area description please refer to (Abu Dhabi Municipality,
Town Planning Section, Spatial Data Directorate, 2009).
D Data Validity - Validity measures the attribute accuracy of the database. Certain
attributes will have a defined domain and range. The domain is the set of all legal
values for the attribute. The range is the set of values within which the data must
fall. It is detailed by ADM that any digital data submitted shall fully represent the
physical situation in the field at the day of delivery and be correctly geo-
referenced.
E Referential Integrity - The referential integrity measures the associativity of the
related tables based upon their primary and foreign key relationships. Primary and
foreign keys must exist and must be associated with sets of data in the tables
given predefined rules for each table.
F Data Completeness - Completeness means the data adheres to the database
design. All data must conform to a known standard for table structure, precision,
projection and other data model specific requirements.
G Naming Convention - The naming conventions applied to all data submitted to
must match the Feature Class names and attribute names listed in the data
catalog (Abu Dhabi Municipality, Town Planning Section, Spatial Data Directorate,
PAGE 20

2009). All data submissions must match the naming conventions for both the layer
name and attribute names as given in the data catalog.
H Topological / Logical Consistency - It is important that some basic topological rules
are enforced whilst creating and maintaining existing data. These rules should be
followed to ensure ease of translating from CAD to GIS formats. The following
rules must be followed as documented in (Abu Dhabi Municipality, Town Planning
Section, Spatial Data Directorate, 2009).
1 All areas (polygons) shall be closed.
2 Where two curves logically join, intersecting features within the same layer
shall be snapped. In the delivered data, a snap shall be indicated by data
having exactly the same coordinate values.
3 Loose ends (overshoots, undershoots) shall occur only when logically
op V1
consistent.
2.2.5 Projections & Co-Oordinate Systems

A For the territory of Abu Dhabi Emirate the following datum’s and projections are
used:
C -
y
C
1 Horizontal datum – The horizontal datum for geographical data is: WGS84
(ITRF2000.0). The observation of the control network and topographic surveys
are based on the reference points of the National Geodetic Control Network
C
obtained from the Military Survey Department and/or Abu Dhabi Municipality.
2 Vertical datum – Mean Sea Level (orthometric heights) according to the
Q
definitions of Military Survey Department for National Network.
3 Projection – Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM), Zone: 39 N or 40 N.
4 For non-3D data, delivery in geographic coordinates will be accepted.
5 The units of measurement for digital data submitted to ADM should either be
in meters with cm resolution or decimal degrees with 7 decimal degrees digits, or
in degrees, minutes and seconds with 4 decimals digits on the second.
B Transformation parameters for converting Nahrwan 1967 datum to WGS84 ITRF
2000 have been established by ADM and must be used for any such conversion.
These are available in document (Abu Dhabi Municipality, Town Planning Section,
Spatial Data Directorate, 2009).
2.2.6 Metadata Standards

A Metadata is data about data (ISO 19115, 2003). Metadata for spatial data includes
information that describes its subject matter; how, when, where, and by whom the
data was collected; availability and distribution information; and its projection,
scale, resolution, and accuracy. Metadata and the issue of data lineage will be
handled in several different ways.
B Metadata standards as set out in (ADSIC, AD-SDI Data Content Standard,
Metadata, 2009) provide a standard specification of core metadata elements for
use when describing geographic information resources. These elements are listed
below:
1 Horizontal and Vertical Datum.
2 Coordinate type, and units of measurements (Spherical, Plane, Units).
3 Projection and zone if applied.
PAGE 21

4 Type of data source (Acquisition method).

5 Data Source (Originating entity, and Project).
6 Period of acquisition (Dates).
2.3 Part 3 Irrigation Network Geo-database Data Model

Structure
2.3.1 Introduction
A This sub section details the Irrigation Network Geodatabase attributes, structure
and provides reference to relevant documents.
B Documenting the Irrigation Network geodatabase design is important. A series of
op V1
UML diagrams are used to represent the key design concepts and to document
the specifications of geodatabase elements. This section provides a short
overview for of various geodatabase elements.
2.3.2 Irrigation Network Data Model Structure

C -
y
C
A The structure of the Irrigation Network Geo-database can be found in the following
documents:
1 Specifies detailed descriptions of each Feature Class, with details of
C
geometry, attribute fields and domains (Abu Dhabi Municipality, 2013).
2- Provides Conceptual Data Model (defines how the physical reality in the field
Q
is mapped into the data model) diagrams for Irrigation (drawing 22) (Abu Dhabi
Municipality, Town Planning Section, Spatial Data Directorate, 2009)
3 A list of the network components (Feature Classes) that form the Irrigation
Network Geodatabase can be found in sub section 2.3.3.
2.3.3 Network Components

A The following network components are defined within the Irrigation Network Geo-
database as Feature Classes. In total there are 40 Feature Classes, as listed in
below tableError! Reference source not found.. Further detailed descriptions
and attribute information for these network components can be found in (Abu
Dhabi Municipality, 2013).
Table 2-2: List of Feature Classes within Irrigation Network Geodatabase

Feature Class Name Feature Type
IR_PullBox Point
IR_ControllerRTU Point
IR_SprayHead Point
IR_InLineDripSystem Point
IR_Bubblers Point
IR_MotorisedValveAssembly Point
IR_QuickCouplingValveAssembly_DoubleSlot Point
PAGE 22

IR_QuickCouplingValveAssembly_Single Point
IR_Sprinklers Point
IR_StrainerAngles Point
IR_Valve Point
IR_FlowMeter Point
IR_PumpingStation Point
IR_EffluentStorageReservoir Point
IR_ValvePullBoxes Point
IR_Junction Point
op V1
IR_UnknownEnd Point
IR_AirValve Point
IR_SpecialPurposeChamber Point
IR_Hatchbox C - Point
y
IR_WashoutChamber
C Point
IR_AccessOnlyChamber Point
C
IR_CappedEnd Point
IR_SluiceValve Point
Q
IR_NonReturnValve Point
IR_IsolatingValve Point
IR_PressureRegulatingValve Point
IR_ButterflyValve Point
IR_CentralControlSystem Point
IR_Fitting Point
IR_SolenoidValveAssembly Point
IR_EndFlushValveAssembly Point
IR_ThrustBlock Point
IR_Actuator Point
IR_ControlCablesConduit Line
IR_IrrigationPressureMain Line
IR_PumpStationStructure polygon
IR_FittingPoly polygon
IR_ReservoirStructure polygon
IR_DripEmitters polygon
IR_ValveChamber polygon
PAGE 23

2.4 Part 4 Model For Irrigation Network

A An Irrigation Logical Model has been developed for DMAT. This is a logical data
model of how the GIS data is organized from a computer system perspective a
copy of which can be found in Appendix A.
B UML Data Model (offers a standard way to visualize a system's database schema)
diagrams for Irrigation have been created by the Spatial Data Directorate (drawing
22) (Abu Dhabi Municipality, Town Planning Section, Spatial Data Directorate,
2009) with a further revision (drawing 29) (Abu Dhabi Municipality, Town Planning
Section, Spatial Data Directorate, 2011).
op V1
2.5 Part 5 References
Abu Dhabi Municipality. 2013. Standards for Submission of Storm Water and Irrigation
Network Data. Town Planning Sector, Spatial Data Directorate. Abu Dhabi : s.n., 2013.
C -
Abu Dhabi Municipality, Town Planning Section, Spatial Data Directorate. 2009.
y
Provisional Specifications for Geo-Spatial Data Submission (Set of documents) Version
C
3.0. Abu Dhabi : s.n., 2009.
Abu Dhabi Department of Muncipal Affairsand Transport (AD DMAT). 2013. DMAT
C
AutoCAD / GIS Data Submission Technical Specifications. Abu Dhabi : s.n., 2013.
ADSIC. 2009. AD-SDI Data Standard Spatial Reference System - Working Draft. Abu
Q
Dhabi : s.n., 2009.

Department of Municipal Affairs. 2012. Municipality Asset Management Framework,
Asset Classes. Abu Dhabi : s.n., 2012. Version 3.0.
ISO 19115. 2003. Geographic Information - Metadata. 2003.
ROLTA India Limited. 2010. DMAT: Abu Dhabi, Data Management System for
Irrigation and Storm Water Networks - Detail Design Document. Abu Dhabi : s.n., 2010.
2.6 Part 6 Data Submission

2.6.1 Introduction
A The process of data submission is shown in Appendix A for receiving new and
updated data to DMAT. The submission of spatial data can be supplied in two
formats.
1 Supplying AutoCAD files and associated MS Office Access file (for attributes)
correctly formatted using a unique identifier as the handle within AutoCAD.
Details of AutoCAD format, structure and how the AutoCAD should be organized
is detailed in the following document, (Abu Dhabi Department of Muncipal
Affairsand Transport (AD DMAT), 2013).
2 Supplying a populated Irrigation Network Geo-database, as supplied by ADM

to ensure identical structure and attributes are maintained. Details of the
structure and requirements for each Feature Class can be found in (Abu Dhabi
Municipality, 2013).
PAGE 24

2.6.2 Data Uploading to Server

A DMAT will provide the appropriate web link to enable contractors to upload
requested deliverables for approval.
END OF SECTION
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 25

3 CAD STANDARDS (SECTION 17110)

3.1 Part 1 General
3.1.1 Purpose
DMAT requires substantial numbers of drawings to be produced from numerous
sources. This Section sets out the standards that shall be followed when preparing
these drawings. The purpose of this Section is to ensure that all drawings are
op V1
produced digitally in a consistent manner. The objective is to attain a uniform
standard of presentation in the hardcopy output across entire projects, regardless
of the drawing’s consultant and to ensure that digital CAD files are structured
correctly.
C -
Disciplined application of CAD will have a major impact on the project’s efficiency
y
C
by enhancing clarity, readability, and ease with which drawings can be viewed,
manipulated and shared among the participants within a project and ultimately by
the DMAT CAD System.
C
No deviation from these standards shall be permitted without the written consent of
DMAT.
Q
3.1.2 Application
Standards defined herein shall apply to all consultants producing drawings for
DMAT.
3.1.3 Standards
In addition to the requirements of this Section, drawings shall be prepared in
accordance with the requirements of the following principle codes of practice and
standards:
I. ISO 128 Technical drawings -- General principles of presentation
II. ISO 5455 Technical drawings -- Scales
III. ISO 5457 Technical product documentation -- Sizes and layout of drawing
sheets
IV. ISO 7200 Technical product documentation -- Data fields in title blocks and
document headers
V. ISO 13567 Technical product documentation -- Organization and naming of
layers for CAD
VI. ISO 14617 Graphical symbols for diagrams
VII. ISO 15081 Agricultural equipment -- Graphical symbols for pressurized
irrigation systems
VIII. ISO 80000 Quantities and units
IX. BS 1192 Collaborative Production of Architectural, Engineering and
Construction Information
PAGE 26

The version of standards and regulations shall be the latest version. Where a
situation occurs which is not covered by this Section, consultants shall check with
DMAT for clarification.
Any deviation from standards set in this Section to suit specific needs must be
defined and recorded within project specific documentation.
3.2 Part 2 Cad Templates

3.2.1 General
Certain types of drawing/model file are not directly used for coordination purposes
or master plan updates, and in these cases there is some relaxation in the
expected levels of CAD Standards compliance. However, all drawings must be
op V1
CAD Standard compliant to a reasonable and practical level.
3.2.2 Electronic Templates

New drawings shall be created using Template/Seed files established for the
C -
y
project. Template/Seed files may contain the following settings:
C
1- Global Origin (if available)
C
2- Working units (if available)
3- View names
Q
4- Level/Layer standards
5- Line and text conventions
6- Dimension styles
7- Drawing Border and Title block
8- System variables
3.2.3 Drawing Borders and Title Block

Standard drawing borders and title blocks shall be established for the project and in
general, be attached as a reference file within the active drawing file. The drawing
border shall be attached at origin 0,0 in Paper Space.
Title block fields shall be completed by updating attribute block/data fields

contained within the active drawing.
3.3 Part 3 Filing And Storage Of Drawings

3.3.1 Filing and Storage
The project’s CAD database is defined in two parts:
1- Organizational – The physical location of drawing files on the CAD

System.
2- Content – The elements that make up a specific drawing file.
The Organizational structure shall be modeled using the Operating System folders
and files. Therefore it must be implemented identically on all CAD systems.
PAGE 27

The Content shall be modeled directly in the CAD system using the layering and file
referencing facilities of the system as described in this Section.
3.3.2 Electronic Copies

Drawings officially issued shall be in PDF format, unless a specific request from
DMAT is received for the native CAD file format. (i.e. DWG or DGN). The preferred
format for record copies of issued drawings shall be in PDF format.
As-built drawings shall be submitted also in native CAD file format. Any plot
configuration source files (i.e. CTB file in AutoCAD) that enable DMAT to correctly
plot the drawing shall accompany any issue of CAD files in their native format. (i.e.
DWG).
op V1
3.3.3 Folder Name: Project Number and Title
Project drawings and associated CAD data must be stored within the folder
structure devised for the project. Project data shall be stored in a specific folder
named by the project number and title. The project number and title shall be
C -
approved by DMAT.
y
C
3.3.4 Sub Folder Name
C
CAD data shall be stored in a specific sub folder named “CAD”.
3.3.5 Sub Folder Structure

Q
The following folders are the minimum required for the storage of CAD data.
Additional folders may be created as appropriate to meet the needs of the project.
1- CURRENT - storage of current Active drawing file
2- PDF - storage of CAD drawing files in PDF format
3- XREF - storage of externally referenced files and Image files
4- SUPPORT - storage of project specific CAD support files.
5- TEMPLATES - storage of project drawing Template/Seed files
6- BLOCKS - storage of Project specific blocks/cells
Project folders shall not have spaces or punctuation marks (i.e. commas, full stops,
etc.) included in the folder/file name.
3.3.6 Collaborative Working

Where a number of consultants from different sources have input into the same
project, the directory structure shall be mapped identically at all locations.
3.3.7 Hardcopies
Hardcopies shall indicate the date/time & filename at the time of plotting.
PAGE 28

3.4 Part 4 Drawing Development

3.4.1 Drawing Files Numbering System
1- Drawing files numbering system must be submitted to DMAT for approval. It is
required to ensure that all files created on a project can be identified quickly,
accurately and without ambiguity. Ownership, location, type of file and a unique
number are all of paramount importance when identifying the content of a CAD file.
2- It is generally more appropriate to separate the CAD elements of a design into
separate “model” or “design” files. A Model file is generally defined as the file
containing the project elements in 2D or 3D CAD format, drawn at true scale (i.e.
1:1). A Finished Drawing file is the CAD file set up to represent the paper output
including a drawing border and annotations, often produced at paper size.
op V1
3- The drawing files numbering system shall follow the next naming convention:
Field 1: Project (unlimited characters)

C -
y
Recommended / Mandatory
C
A numeric code related to the project or job number.
Field 2: Discipline (2 char max)
C
Q
This is a simple list of single or double character codes identifying the owner of the
file.
Field 3: Zone
Optional
The location of the CAD file when a project is split into separate areas, buildings or
phases.
Field 4: View (1 char)
View explains the orientation of a file’s contents – whether it is a plan, elevation,
etc.
Field 5: Level (2 char)
Used to identify the floor or section reference
Field 6: Content
This is a simple description or Uniclass code denoting the type of information stored
in the file.
Field 7: Sequential Number
Optional
Used to denote a file’s option or version.
Field 8: File Extension
PAGE 29

The file extension is used by the computer’s operating system to denote the
application that controls or is used to open a file.
General Notes
1- Only use letters A-Z, numbers 0-9 for all fields of file naming.
2- A single period character "." should be used to separate the file name from
the extension. This character should not be used anywhere else in the file
name.
3- All fields should be separated by a hyphen character “-” to distinguish
between the fields and aid comprehension. The use of spaces is not
allowed.
4- An “x” should be used if the contents of a file do not refer a single specific
View or Level and it is decided that the fields should still be used to
op V1
maintain identical file name lengths.
5- The project code may either be the project number or a coordinated
reference specified by DMAT.
6- The exact order of the standard fields may be adjusted to suit each
project’s requirements, provided it is approved by DMAT.
C -
y
3.4.2
C
Model File (Xref) Naming
1- To facilitate easy identification of reference files and to avoid conflict with
C
layering inside AutoCAD, reference files shall begin with an identification
code denoted by the letter ‘X’.
Q
3.4.3 Drawing Title Blocks and Signatures

3.4.3.1 Title Block Completion
Drawing Title
I. The drawing title shall consist of a maximum of four lines of center justified
fields.
II. Each drawing shall have both a unique drawing number and drawing title.
III. The top line shall identify the specific area, or section within the contract or
may be left blank where no such sections exist
IV. The second and third line shall identify the content or purpose of the drawing
V. Where several drawings depict similar detail and no other qualifications are
available for distinguishing between them, the distinction shall be made by
labeling each drawing consecutively with sheet numbers, such as “SHEET 1
OF 5”, “SHEET 2 OF 5” etc. in the fourth line.
Status
I. The issue STATUS box shall be completed describing the current status of
the drawing:
a- PRELIMINARY ONLY – Not to be used for Construction
b- FOR TENDER ONLY – Not to be used for Construction
c- ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
d- AS BUILT
II. The Original Size field shall determine the original size of the drawing prior to
any plotted reduction i.e. A1.
PAGE 30

3.4.3.2 Signatures
I. The Author, Checker and Approver boxes shall include the first name initial
and the full last name of the person who performed or was responsible for
the major portion of the work for the current issue.
II. All initial issues of drawings and all subsequent Revision issues shall bear
hand-written signatures of the Author, Checker and Approver of the drawing
placed in the Current Issue Signature boxes.
III. The revision history column shall contain the Issue number, Revision
description and date of issue only. The date shall be in year 2000 compliance
DD MM YY format. i.e. 25 FEB 05. The months shall be abbreviated as
shown in Table 3-1.
op V1
Table 3-1: Drawing Title Block Rev History
Abbreviation Month Abbreviation Month
JAN January JUL July
FEB February AUG August
C -
y
MAR March SEP September
APR
C April OCT October
MAY May NOV November
C
JUN June DEC December
3.4.4 Global Origin and Orientation

Q
I. All plans and profiles having a relationship with mapping grid or levels shall
be drawn maintaining the relationship between the CAD coordinate system
and map coordinate system adopted for the project. All coordinates and
levels stated on drawings shall be based on the coordinate system adopted
for the project.
II. To ensure correct relationship with the project’s coordinate system, CAD
systems shall set a global origin common to valid Easting and Northings of
the coordinate system adopted for the project.
III. The coordinate system may be based on a local grid or a national grid
system. Where national grid co-ordinates are used, this shall be referred to
as “REAL WORLD” co-ordinates within CAD.
IV. Detail drawings and files not directly related to the global coordinate system
may use a local coordinate system.
V. General Arrangements and site plans having a relationship to a coordinate
system shall incorporate a 50m, 100m or 500m grid system as appropriate
to scale, and grid lines shall be noted with northing and easting values.
VI. Where co-ordinates are noted they shall be displayed with the easting first
then northing e.g. E 322100 N 565200.
Orientation
I. All plans relating to world coordinates shall include a North Point, which
shall be correctly orientated in accordance with the specific drawing view. In
PAGE 31

general, this north arrow should be placed at the upper right corner of the
plan and indicate true North.
II. Alignment drawings shall be arranged such that chainage increases from
left to right and generally parallel to the x-axis of the drawings.
3.4.5 Units
I. All units shall follow the System International (SI) convention and all linear
dimensions shall be in millimeters (mm). Deviation: Survey levels and
chainage can be in meters (m) and decimals of a meter.
II. In general all drawings shall be drawn using ONE DRAWING UNIT = 1
MILLIMETRE.
op V1
III. Topographical/mapping/civil plans shall be drawn using ONE DRAWING
UNIT = 1 METRE.
IV. Within Plan and Profile drawings, where the longitudinal section is required
to be drawn at a different vertical scale to the horizontal scale, the
C -
horizontal axis shall be drawn at real scale (1 UNIT = 1 METRE) and the
y
vertical axis shall be scaled to suit E.G. HORIZONTAL SCALE = 1:500
C
VERTICAL SCALE = 1:100.
C
3.4.6 Drawing Sizes
i. Drawing sizes shall conform to the International Standards Organization (ISO).
Q
Sizes (in mm) are as follows:

a) A0 – 1189 x 841
b) A1 – 841 x 594
c) A2 – 594 x 420
d) A3 – 420 x 297
e) A4 – 297 x 210
ii. In general all drawings shall be produced at the preferred A1 original size. The
use of A0 size drawings shall be avoided wherever possible.
iii. Each group or set of drawings shall use only one drawing size unless
situations make this impractical.
3.4.7 Scales
i. Drawings shall be drawn to scale. Standard metric scales shall only be used.
Deviation: schematics, isometrics or other indicative graphical elements.
ii. The number of different scales on a drawing shall be kept to a minimum.
Where different scales exist, each scale shall be specified under the title of the
area of the drawing to which it applies and noted in the Title Block field.
iii. Where a single scale is used on a drawing, it shall be specified within the title
block only. The scales selected shall depend on the object area and shall be
large enough to permit easy and clear interpretation of information and ensure
clarity of prints on the original as well as reduced copies i.e. A3 versions of A1
drawings.
PAGE 32

iv. Where different scales are used for horizontal and vertical dimensions, such
as in Profiles within Plan and Profile drawings, each scale shall be clearly
indicated on the drawing.
v. When the drawing or parts of a drawing are not drawn to scale, NTS (Not to
Scale) shall be specified under the title of the area of the drawing to which it
applies. Should the entire drawing be drawn not to scale NTS shall be placed
in the space provided for the drawing scale on the Title Block.
vi. Graphic scale bars shall be provided on all drawings and shall be placed in the
lower right hand corner of the drawing above/adjacent to the title block as
appropriate.
3.4.8 Key Plan
op V1
i. Where layout plans are produced on a number of drawings to cover the extent
or section of the project a Key Plan shall be included on each sheet, clearly
indicating the section of the works under consideration.
3.4.9
C -
Drawing Notes
y
i.
C
Notes shall be kept to a minimum on a drawing without compromising the
intent of the design. Complicated notes shall be avoided.
C
3.4.10 General Notes
i. Where notes are extensive and repeated on several drawings, a General
Q
Notes Drawing shall be provided which consolidates all notes. Deviation from
these notes on a particular drawing may be permitted, provided this
amendment is shown in the Notes section of the drawing.
ii. Where a General Notes Drawing is used, the first note on each applicable
drawing shall contain the following statement:
“1. FOR GENERAL NOTES, REFER TO DRAWING NO. XXX “
3.4.11 Reference Files

The following rules shall apply to the handling of project reference files:
i. Where CAD data is to be shared between drawings the use of reference files
is to be adopted.
ii. Active drawing files attached as reference files shall not be allowed.
iii. Unused reference files shall be detached upon completion of drawings.
iv. The number of reference files on a project shall be kept to a minimum.
v. Reference files shall be inserted on unique layer that does not conflict with the
general content of the drawing. (i.e. layer Z_XREF in AutoCAD)
vi. Xref layer to be locked to avoid accidental selection/manipulation.
vii. Where applicable images are to be scaled and located so that geometry within
them matches the project co-ordinate system.
viii. In general, reference files shall be attached with the “SAVED PATH” option
switched off.
PAGE 33

ix. Reference files shall be “CLIPPED” within the Active drawing file to ensure that
only the design data relevant to the drawing is displayed.
x. In the case of completed and final ‘AS-BUILT’ drawings, it is recommended
and encouraged that where appropriate, consideration is given to the binding
of all reference files into the active drawing, creating a single CAD file of
drawing data.
xi. Reference files issued externally or shared between departments shall indicate
revised areas with a REVISION CLOUD and TRIANGLE. A revision history
shall be maintained within the reference file.
3.4.12 Drawing Revision

3.4.12.1 Revision Clouds and Triangles
op V1
i. All revisions on the body of the plotted drawing shall be clearly identified by a
revision cloud and triangle with the exception of drawings produced at the
Preliminary stage.
ii. Each area in which a revision occurs shall be ringed with a cloud and marked
C -
with an equilateral triangle containing the current revision letter.
y
iii.
C
Clouding and revision triangles denoting the previous revision shall be
removed.
C
3.4.12.2 Revision Description
i. A concise description of each approved and issued revision shall be entered
Q
into the revision-description column. The description shall be as informative as

practical. Where a drawing has been completely redrawn, this shall be
indicated as such in the revision description.
ii. Words such as “GENERALLY REVISED,” “MINOR REVISIONS,” or other
broad descriptions shall not be used as revision descriptions.
iii. Drawings that are issued under specific Submissions or Milestones sets shall
have clear, consistent revision description that states the purpose of the
submission e.g. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION.
iv. The earliest revision descriptions shall be deleted when there is no space to
include the current revision within the revision column.
3.4.13 Drawing Register and Transmittal Record

i. The contractor shall maintain a register where transmittal of drawings and their
revisions are recorded.
3.4.14 Checking and Approval of Drawings

The following verification checks shall be conducted on all CAD drawing files
produced prior to issue to DMAT:
i. CAD format correct.

ii. Drawing border format correct.
iii. Title block correctly filled out
iv. Filename correct
PAGE 34

v. Date/time & filename indicated on drawing

vi. Working Units correct
vii. Global Origin correct.
viii. Text size and font correct & consistent
ix. Orientations correct
x. Layer structure correct.
xi. Elements on the correct layers/levels
xii. Line weights and colours correct
xiii. Reference file attachment paths correct.
op V1
xiv. All reference file levels/layers correctly on or off
xv. All unused reference files that are not displayed to be detached
xvi. A list mapping CAD filenames to drawing numbers correct and included with
issue as applicable.
C -
y
xvii. All unused and unnecessary elements in a CAD file shall be removed. i.e.
C
Unused blocks, line types, text and dimension styles should be purged from
the drawing.
C
xviii. CAD Filenames mapped to the equivalent drawing number listed within the
transmittal.
Q
xix. Approval of drawings will follow Section 01300 Submittals.
3.5 Part 5 Cad Standards

3.5.1 Drawing set up
i. New drawings shall be created using electronic templates as stated in
Section 2.2.
3.5.2 Lines
3.5.2.1 Line Types
i. The line types shall be set for each layer. The plotted appearance of line
types shall be consistent across all drawings.
3.5.2.2 Plotted Line Weights

i. In general line weights should be:
a) 0.13 mm Gray
b) 0.18 mm Red
c) 0.25 mm White
d) 0.35 mm Yellow
e) 0.50 mm Magenta
f) 0.70 mm Blue
g) 1.00 mm Green
PAGE 35

ii. Thickness for pens shall follow the table below:
Table 3-2: Thickness for pens
Description Line thickness in mm

Out Line 0.20 or 0.25
Hidden Line 0.00 or 0.05
Center Line 0.10 or 0.15
Note 0.18 or 0.20
Thin Line 0.00 or 0.05
Reference Line 0
op V1
Hatch Line 0
Color-9 to 256 0
Dimension line
C -
Leader Line with Arrows 0
y
Text
C 0.18 or 0.20
3.5.3 Text
C
i. The text height adopted for a project shall be consistent across all drawings
unless situations make this impractical.
Q
ii. The preferred text height for general text and notes is 2.5mm. Deviation:
Minimum 3.5mm text height is to be used on A0 size.
iii. Sloping, italic, and elaborate fonts are not permitted.
iv. The clear space between lines of text shall be 0.5 x the upper case height.
v. All text shall be left justified. Deviation: Titles shall be center justified.
3.5.4 Dimensioning
i. Automated dimensioning commands within CAD software programs shall be
used for creation and editing of dimensions
ii. The editing of dimension values via basic text editing commands is not
permitted.
iii. Dimensions shall be associative and placed on their own unique layer / level
3.5.5 Standard Symbols and Blocks

i. Within CAD standard symbology graphics are created on layer ‘0’ with color,
line type and line weight set ‘by block’
ii. Discipline specific symbols/blocks shall follow ISO standards where available.
3.5.6 Hatching
i. All hatching created shall be associative and placed on its own unique
layer/level.
3.5.7 Colours
i. In CAD files the color shall be assigned “BY LAYER”. Deviation: standard
blocks.
PAGE 36

3.5.8 Layering
i. Layer names shall follow ISO 13567 standard.
END OF SECTION
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 37

4.APPENDIX
4.1 APPENDIX – A : Data Submission Standard
Workflow
4.2 APPENDIX – B : DMAT AutoCAD/GIS Data

Submission Technical Specifications
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PAGE 38
APPENDICES FIRST EDITION -DECEMBER 2016

op V1
Appendix A
C -
y
C
Data Submission Standard Workflow
C
Q
PAGE 39

op V1
C -
y
C
C
Consultant/ Contractor
Q
prepare final DD for
approval
Final As-built Data submit Final DD review for

to DMAT for approval approval by DMAT Data loading to AIMS
with signed approval form Project Manager/ Division system
from AM team Manager
op V1
C -
y
Asset Data Submission
C
by Consultant/
Contractors
C
Q
prepare final Data for
approval
Final As-built Data submit Final submission review

to DMAT for approval for approval by DMAT Data loading to AIMS
with signed approval form Project Manager/ Division system
from AM team Manager
op V1
C -
y
C
by Consultant/
Contractors
C
Q
prepare final Data for
TPD (NOC)
Final As-built Data submit

to TPD (NOC) for Data loading to AIMS
TPD (NOC) Approval
approval with signed system
approval from AM team
op V1
C -
y
by Consultant/
C
Contractors as per new
contract (Continuously)
C
Q
prepare final approval
from DMAT O&M
Head
Final Updated Data

submit to O&M DMAT
Data loading to AIMS
for approval with signed O&M Head Approval
system
approval form from AM
team
op V1
C - Appendix B
y
C
C
DMAT AutoCAD/GIS Data Submission Technical Specifications
Q
PAGE 44

Date Jan 2014
REV 01
DMAT AutoCAD/GIS Data Submission Technical Specification PAGE 1 to 576
op V1
C -
DMAT AutoCAD/GIS Data Submission
y
C
Technical Specifications
C
Q
Date: 26-01-2014
Table of Contents
1. Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 4
Background ............................................................................................................................... 4
Objective ................................................................................................................................... 4
Intended users ........................................................................................................................... 5
Assumption ............................................................................................................................... 5
Abbreviations ............................................................................................................................ 5
op V1
References ................................................................................................................................. 5
2. Drawing Standards, File Formats and media Requirements ..................................................... 7
Coordinate System .................................................................................................................... 7
File Formats .............................................................................................................................. 7
C -
y
Overall Digital Standards for Submission ................................................................................ 7
C
Map Orientation ........................................................................................................................ 8
Digital File Media ..................................................................................................................... 8
C
Note to Contractors/Consultants ............................................................................................... 9
Metadata Requirements for Data Submissions ....................................................................... 10
Q
Topology ................................................................................................................................. 11
3. Data Model and Domains ....................................................................................................... 12
4. CAD Drafting Rules ............................................................................................................... 13
These should be avoided in CAD files.................................................................................... 13
Other matters to be taken into consideration .......................................................................... 15
5. CAD and Geodatabase Feature Classes/Layers and Attributes .............................................. 16
5.1 Hard landscape Layers ............................................................................................................ 17
5.2 Soft landscape Layers ............................................................................................................. 21
5.3 Irrigation Network Layers....................................................................................................... 22
6. Storing Attributes Information into MS Access Database Tables .......................................... 24
6.1 Extracting Entity Handle in AutoCAD ................................................................................... 25
6.2 Insert Assets’ Attributes in MS Access Database ................................................................... 27
6.3 Hard landscape Attributes ....................................................................................................... 28
6.4 Irrigation Network Attributes ............................................................................................... 398
6.5 Soft Landscape Attributes ..................................................................................................... 532
7. Bulk load tool........................................................................................................................ 570
Digital Map Formats ............................................................................................................. 570
Vector Formats Supported .................................................................................................... 570
AutoCAD" Drawing Files (DWG)........................................................................................ 570
GIS Software Choices ........................................................................................................... 571
7.1.1..................................................................................................................................... ESRI GIS software:
.............................................................................................................................................. 571
Bulk-Loading Workflow....................................................................................................... 571
7.1.2...........................................................................Steps for converting CAD to Geodatabase format:
.............................................................................................................................................. 571
Error Detection ..................................................................................................................... 573
Loading Intermediate Geodatabase to ArcSDE Geodatabase............................................... 573
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
1. Introduction
Background
Municipal Services for the Emirate of Abu Dhabi are provided by the Department of Municipal
Affairs (DMA) through its three municipalities namely Municipality of Abu Dhabi City (ADM), Al
Ain Municipality (AAM) and Western Region Municipality (WRM). The storm water and irrigation
network in the Island and the Eastern Region is a key responsibility of the ADM. The development
of up-to-date and complete geo-database of the above mentioned network is a key goal for ADM.
ADM has engaged many agencies, external consultants and contractors for designing,
construction or modifying the storm water and irrigation network in Abu Dhabi. The external
op V1
contractors/consultants submit plan, design, construction and as-built drawings of the networks
from inception through to completion
Unless these submissions are standardized in terms of formats and minimum contents, the
C -
authorities will not be able to consolidate and make full use of the submitted data for regulatory,
y
C
planning, implementation and operation purposes. It is in this context that these standards are
prepared. The rules and standards outlined in this document need to be followed during all
geospatial storm water and irrigation network data submissions to ADM. Data not structured as
C
outlined below may be rejected by the ADM.
Contact Information:
Q
For further information relating to the content of this document, please contact:
To be filled
Objective
The objective of this document is to produce a Spatial Data Submission Standard for incoming
designs as per the prescribed GIS data model.
As a part of this objective, this document is prepared to offer a Standard for storm water and
irrigation network data submissions. It will explain rules that need to be followed for the data to
be submitted. The main purpose of these standards is to ensure compatibility and exchange of
digital spatial data between the contractors/consultants and the Municipality of Abu Dhabi City.
This will ensure that data submitted and approved is fully compliant with ADM /
DMAT Geodatabase model, attribute, positional accuracy and topology and can be easily
integrated and updated into the GIS database.
It is expected to ensure easier data translation, common language, ease of data storage, common
medium of information exchange, drawings and data can be transferred and integrated with
other applications and data is compatible between various projects.
The following sections focus on the Geospatial Data Submission needs of the Municipality and
cover the following, but not limited to points:
 Data formats
 Topology Rules
 Cartography rules
 Attribute data
 data submission media/methods
 Illustrations and examples where applicable
 Required positional accuracies (horizontal and vertical)
 File naming convention
Intended Users
op V1
The intended users of these standards are those who will be preparing and submitting drawings
related to Irrigation and Storm-water network to the Municipality. These will include, but not
limited to, the following:
 Consultants,
 Contractors,
C -
 Construction companies
y
C
 Municipality Staff involved in receiving and processing the data
 Project staff such as engineers, draftsperson, etc.
 Any others identified by the Municipality
C
Assumption
Q
The implementation of standards requires that contractor is very well aware of the
AUTOCAD/GIS data creation procedures and general map creation standards.
Abbreviations
2D/3D Two Dimension (X, Y) / Three Dimension (X,Y,Z)
ADM Municipality of Abu Dhabi City
CAD Computer Aided Drafting
DWG Drawing format file from GIS
ESRI Environmental System research Institute (GIS File format)
GIS Geographic Information System
UTM Universal Transverse Mercator
WGS World Geodetic System
IRI Internal Road and Infrastructure - ADM
DMAT Department of Municipal Affairs and Transport
References
Following documents are referred
 Abu Dhabi Municipality, Town Planning Section, Spatial Data Directorate. (2009). Provisional
Specifications for Geo-Spatial Data Submission (Set of documents) Version 3.0. Abu Dhabi.
 Department of Municipal Affairs (DMA). (2012). Municipality Asset Management Framework,
Asset Classes. Version 3.0. Abu Dhabi.
 ADSIC (2009). AD-SDI Data Content Standard, Utility - Irrigation - Working Draft. Abu Dhabi.
 ADSIC (2009). AD-SDI Data Content Standard, Metadata. Abu Dhabi.
 ADSIC (2010). AD-SDI Data Standard Spatial Reference System - Working Draft. Abu Dhabi.
 Urban Planning Council (UPC) (2010). GIS Section, Spatial Data Submission Specifications and
op V1
Data Model, Version 4.0.1.
C -
y
C
C
Q
2. Drawing Standards, File Formats and media Requirements
Data related to Storm water and Irrigation networks data should be submitted in Autocad and
GIS formats as detailed in later sections.
Coordinate System
All AutoCAD Map data should be Geo-referenced to the following Municipality of Abu Dhabi City
Standard Coordinate Reference Systems.
op V1
Projection Parameter Value
Projection Type Universal Transverse Mercator
Longitude of Origin 51:00:00:00 d:m:s (Zone 39) 57:00:00:00 d:m:s (Zone 40)
Latitude of Origin 0:00:00.000 d:m:s
C -
y
False Easting 500,000.000 m
False Northing
Scale Factor
C 0.000 M
0.999600
C
Geodetic Datum WGS84
Ellipsoid WGS84 (Standard parameters)
Equatorial Radius 6378137.000 m
Q
Polar Radius 6356752.314 m
Eccentricity 0.0818191908426215
Flattening 0.00335281066474746
Flattening Inverse 298.257223563002
Units & Precision
Projection Units, Format Meters, Easting/Northing, Precision 3
Height Units Meters, Precision 3
Vertical Datum and Heights
Vertical Datum Ras Al Ghumys
Height Type Orthometric
Undulation Model Average Undulation
Average Undulation 0.000 m
File Formats
Overall Digital Standards for Submission
The Municipality of Abu Dhabi City requires all the submissions related to Storm water and
Irrigation network to be submitted in two dimension (2D) AutoCAD MAP 2000 and above or in
ESRI personal/file geodatabase format.
If the submission is in AutoCAD Map format, the drawing file must have Feature Layer and Object
data as given in this document. If the submission is in ESRI personal geodatabase format, the
Feature Class names and table structure of the data should comply with the details provided
in this document. They should have no loss of drawing entities or features that can result from
standard translation procedures when being translated from other formats. All DWG files and
drawing entities submitted must be able to be manipulated using standard AutoCAD Map
drafting procedures.
Map Orientation
All mapping data submitted (model space) in DWG and GIS format should not be rotated and is to
be delivered in a non-rotated orientation.
Digital File Media
op V1
File naming standards enable translation between data formats while ensuring that names are
valid for each particular format.
File names should contain only alphanumeric characters (ie. letters, numbers). Underscores “_”
are allowed.
C -
y
File names should be entirely in lowercase.
C
No spaces, dashes, underscores or special characters will be used.
File names should not exceed more than 50 characters.
C
The name should be ‘Contract_’
Parent folder indicating
followed by the contract number.
the Contract Number
Q
Example ‘Contract_218’
The parent folder should
contain Subfolders
‘datasubmitted’
‘supportdocs’
‘datasubmitted’ folder
Data should be submitted in the
should contain
appropriate folder depending on
subfolders ‘asbuilt’,
the type of submission.
‘planned’ & ‘proposed’
The data needs to delivered in

appropriate folder depending on
Each subfolder should the format of submission
contain subfolders caddwg: for CAD submission in
‘caddwg’, gisMDB’ AutoCAD Map format
gisMDB: for GIS submission in ESRI
personal geodatabase format
‘supportdocs’ folder
should contain Supporting documents like
subfolders ‘documents’, scanned files, images, photographs
‘metadata’. ‘photos’, in the appropriate sub directories
‘scannedimages’
Common abbreviations should be used where applicable. The file names should be named
appropriately to contain the Contract number and content of the file.
Example of file in AutoCAD MAP (DWG) format: contract_290_stormwaternw.dwg

Example of file in Geodatabase (MDB) format: contract_290_irrigationnw.mdb
The digital data shall be submitted in CD ROM or DVD media. This shall include documentation
describing the files contained on the CD/DVD ROM and the Submission Form for the Data. The
Submission form is provided as Appendix II.
The data identification label shall contain:
op V1
a. Contract number
b. Name of Project
c. Date of submission
d. Company name
C -
e. Spatial Data submission format (AutoCAD MAP DWG, ESRI SHP with version number)
y
C
f. Other support information format
The proposed directory structure within the DVD/CD ROM shall be as follows:
C
All scanned data and image documents submitted to the ADM will be checked. The compliance
Q
check process will generally include the following activities:
 The data will be checked for correct topology, connectivity and rules as mentioned in section
TOPOLOGY.
 Images and Scanned documents will be reviewed for the image resolution. Any deficiencies
will be noted.
 Images and Scanned documents will be reviewed for correct rotation. Any deficiencies will be
noted.
 Images and Scanned documents will be reviewed for visual clarity and readability. Any
deficiencies will be noted.
 Images and Scanned documents will be reviewed for required professional seals, signatures,
etc. Any deficiencies will be noted.
If any submittal fails the process, the submittal, along with the deficiency report, will be returned
to the originator for re-submission.
Note to Contractors/Consultants
Contractors / Consultants are instructed to collect the Base map data and Planning data from the
Spatial Data Division, Town Planning Sector, Municipality of Abu Dhabi City for the area in which
their project is located.
All survey measurements shall be based on the Geodetic Control Points or the GPS Reference
services provided by the Spatial Data Division, Town Planning Sector, Municipality of Abu Dhabi
City. The specifications document title ‘Geodetic Specifications for surveys prepared by
Department of Municipal Affairs, Abu Dhabi should be followed for all field surveys. This
document is under preparation at the time of finalization of this report.
Field data collection depends on accurate, timely and validated information. Data collected in
the field using GPS should follow the Spatial Reference Information as defined in this document.
Field data collection should be performed using survey class GPS instruments and Total-stations.
GPS instruments should be dual frequency receivers and survey measurements of field objects
could be done using RTK mode with the base on a known control point. Alternatively, field data
could be collected using GPS through the Virtual Reference Stations of the Municipality of Abu
Dhabi City. Details of the mode and subscriptions could be obtained from the Municipality of Abu
Dhabi City. The survey should be performed using acceptable methods that ensure the
results/output obtained comply to the accuracy requirements as specified in this document.
op V1
o Make and Model of GPS Units
o Accuracy of GPS Unit
o Collection Method
o Collection Date
C -
o Spatial Reference System
y
o
o
o
Datum
Control Points used C
Feature classes collected using this technique
C
The above information along with other details should be made available as metadata, described
Q
in later section. The Mapping accuracy should follow the following:
Horizontal Accuracy in Abu Dhabi Island: ± 10 centimeters
Horizontal Accuracy in Abu Dhabi Mainland: ± 20 centimeters
Vertical Accuracy in Abu Dhabi Island: ± 20 centimeters
Vertical Accuracy in Abu Dhabi Mainland: ± 30 centimeters
Metadata Requirements for Data Submissions
Metadata is data about data (ISO 19115, 2003). Metadata for spatial data includes information
that describes its subject matter; how, when, where, and by whom the data was collected;
availability and distribution information; and its projection, scale, resolution, and accuracy.
Metadata and the issue of data lineage will be handled in several different ways.
Metadata standards as set out in (ADSIC, AD-SDI Data Content Standard, Metadata, 2009)provide
a standard specification of core metadata elements for use when describing geographic
information resources. These elements are listed below:
 Horizontal and Vertical Datum.

 Coordinate type, and units of measurements (Spherical, Plane, Units).
 Projection and zone if applied.
 Type of data source (Acquisition method).
 Data Source (Originating entity, and Project).
 Period of acquisition (Dates).
Topology
Topology describes the spatial relationships between the geographic features and implements
through a set of validation rules, ensuring high quality of data. It allows data management and
integrity. Topology allows controlling the geometric relations between the features and
maintaining their geometric integrity. Topology can be built for any vector spatial data type and
certain data conditions will prevent topology from being built without corrective editing. It allows
GIS professionals to answer questions about adjacency, connectivity, proximity, and coincidence.
Therefore, topology is necessary for the data sets submitted to the ADM. Identifying the
potential uses of datasets will help determine which topological relationships are required for
op V1
error checking, advanced analysis, and the associations maintained within datasets. To create
and maintain topology, the following must be met irrespective of the type of data format
submission (AutoCAD MAP DWG or ESRI SHP).
 Closed Polyline must close without overshoots or undershoots.
C -
y
 Polylines, closed polyline and points must not be duplicated.


C
Polyline must not self overlap.
Point must not overlap.
C
 Polyline must be a single part – An individual polyline feature such as a
IR_IrrigationPressureMain, SW_StormwaterMain Line should not appear as a series of non
Q
connected segments.
 Polyline should end with node, cannot be hanging.
 In some features, overlap between Polygon and point permissible (Example
IR_ReservoirStructure (Polygon) can have IR_EffluentStorageReservoir and other Valve
feature classes inside polygon).
The rules for each Feature Class / feature class are described in detail in later sections.
3. Data Model and Domains
The various Domains and the permissible code lists are also given in Appendix III. The final data
model and the relationship between various tables are shown in Appendix IV.
The data submitted to the Municipality as per the standards described in this document will be
migrated into this data model in the GIS relational database implemented for this purpose.
Sample data template in AutoCAD Map (CAD Format DWG) and ESRI personal geodatabase is also
provided along with this document.
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
4. CAD Drafting Rules
To enhance the conversion of CAD files into GIS, it is recommended to follow the drafting rules
herein upon CAD drawing.
Draw line from Upstream to Downstream locations which is needed in determining the
1
Flow direction in ArcGIS
A polygon should be drawn as one closed polyline (polygon) and not as a set of polylines or
2
lines.
In polygons, avoid the use of shading (hatching). When converted to GIS, the shade would
3
op V1
be converted to a set of lines.
Lines should be drawn as simple straight polylines. Should avoid the use of arrows or any
4 other symbol. Lines should be drawn as simple continuous lines. No complex line types
should be used.
Add one Service Point per Building for future use. Connect this Service Point to the
C -
5
Inspection Manhole through a Service Line (subtype of house connection).
y
C
Split lines in the following cases:
 Intersection with Manhole
 Intersection with discharge chamber such us overflow
C
6
 Presence of fitting (TEE, Reducer…) or valve or meter
 Intersection with tank
Q
 Changing in pipe characteristic such diameter or material.
Don’t split the line in case of intersection with structure which is not a part of the
7
geometric network such us valve chamber
Any additional Data required by the contractor to product his maps, will used in executing
8 the work, should be drawn in other layers than those mentioned in the Table…. These
layers will not be loaded to GIS.
These should be avoided in CAD files

 Open Polygon
To Represent a Polygon in ArcGIS. Create closed polygons using AutoCAD snapping and use
closed polylines that will be interpreted directly by ArcGIS as areas.
Use Access files to Link Lines and Points for Attribute Definitions. Unique identifier for lines
and points must be their handle.
 Self-Intersecting Polygon
op V1
 Duplicate Vertices
C -
y
C
C
Q
 The use of cloud and text
 Area representation by annotation

Other matters to be taken into consideration
1. Create all Objects with a Single Data System with Consistent Geometric Type: For example,
when drawing linear gravity pipes use all linear features and avoid using objects that will be
interpreted by ArcGIS as points or areas.
2. Do not Create a Point Symbol using Crossed Lines, or Crossed Lines and Circle because ArcGIS
will see the data as two lines or two lines and a polygon. Use just a dot to represent the point
symbol.
3. Connect Lines at Intersections using Snapping Tools. For example, when drawing gravity pipe
op V1
network, all lines should be snapped together to ensure that they are going to be snapped in
ArcGIS otherwise the flow of sewage will stop at any unsnapped location.
C -
y
C
C
Q
5. CAD and Geodatabase Feature Classes/Layers and Attributes
Organize Data by CAD Layer: For example, when drafting the gravity pipes for any given area, one
can decide to draw all the gravity pipes in a single CAD layer called Gravity Pipe. Lines drawn may
represent trunk or subsidiary gravity pipes. However, in GIS, we need to distinguish between
all of these different types of gravity pipes for that we put each type in a layer For AD DMAT
it is recommended to use different layers for each subtype in order to have structured layers
for all feature classes along with their subtypes.
 Layers in AD DMAT AutoCAD drawing files must be defined as

follows:
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
6. Hard landscape Layers
GIS Feature Class Name AutoCAD Layer Name Geometry Type Comments
MotorManager MotorManager Point

SwitchesSockets SwitchesSockets Point
GardenLight GardenLight Point
BoosterTransformer BoosterTransformer Point
LiftingDavit LiftingDavit Point
FertilizerInjectionSystem FertilizerInjectionSystem Point
SignBoard SignBoard_CommercialSignBoard Point
op V1
SignBoard SignBoard_GardenSignBoard Point
SignBoard SignBoard_InstructionSignBoard Point
SignBoard SignBoard_StreetSignBoard Point
ShelterPicnicTable_Point ShelterPicnicTable_Point Point
GeneratorRoomStructure GeneratorRoomStructure Point
C -
Generator Generator Point
y
Fodder Fodder Point
WaterFeature
StreetLight
C
WaterFeature
StreetLight
Point
Point
C
AirCompressor AirCompressor Point
Lighting Lighting Point
PlaygroundEquipElecMech PlaygroundEquipElecMech Point
Q
DrinkingCooler DrinkingCooler Point
Bench Bench Point
Sensor Sensor Point
BoreholeCasingScreen BoreholeCasingScreen Point
Nozzle Nozzle Point
FlagPole FlagPole Point
Pump Pump Point
Clock Clock Point
Motor Motor Point
Bin Bin Point
PublicArt PublicArt Point
BBQ BBQ Point
BatteryCharger BatteryCharger Point
StorageTank StorageTank Point
VariableFrequencyDrive VariableFrequencyDrive Point
TrainCrossingSecurityGate TrainCrossingSecurityGate Point
AirBlower AirBlower Point
SoftStarter SoftStarter Point
FireAlarmSystem FireAlarmSystem Point
StarDeltaStarter StarDeltaStarter Point
ParkEntranceCounter ParkEntranceCounter Point
Toilet Toilet Point
SurgeProtection SurgeProtection Point
OfficeFurniture OfficeFurniture Point
ConductivityAnalyser ConductivityAnalyser Point
Speaker Speaker Point
Alternator Alternator Point
Engine Engine_Diesel Point
Engine Engine_Other Point
PicnicTable PicnicTable Point
Membrane Membrane Point
DrinkingFountain DrinkingFountain Point
FloatSwitches FloatSwitches Point
HydrostaticLevelSensor HydrostaticLevelSensor Point
MainControlCentre MainControlCentre Point
Ancillary_Building_POINT Ancillary_Building_POINT Point
CommunicationCablesPoint CommunicationCablesPoint Point
Gantry Gantry Point
op V1
AmenityStructure_Point AmenityStructure_Point Point
SwitchBoardControlPanel SwitchBoardControlPanel Point
UltraSonicLevelSensor UltraSonicLevelSensor Point
FencePoint FencePoint Point
FountainStructure_Point FountainStructure_Point Point
C -
Cable_Point Cable_Point Point
y
MainContactor
PressureTransmitter
Bollards
C
MainContactor
PressureTransmitter
Bollards
Point
Point
Point
C
LighteningProtection LighteningProtection Point
Breaker Breaker_ACB Point
Breaker Breaker_MCB Point
Q
Breaker Breaker_MCCB Point
BoosterStationStructure BoosterStationStructure Point
SupplyExtractFan SupplyExtractFan Point
GatePoint GatePoint Point
EarthingSystem EarthingSystem Point
PlaygroundEquipNonMech PlaygroundEquipNonMech Point
OverheadCrane OverheadCrane Point
PumpControlPanel PumpControlPanel Point
PressureGauge PressureGauge Point
PlanterBox PlanterBox Point
SurgeVessel SurgeVessel Point
ShadeStructure_POINT ShadeStructure_POINT Point
Shelter_POINT Shelter_POINT Point
Filter Filter_Catridge Point
Filter Filter_Genset Point
Filter Filter_Intake Point
Filter Filter_Sand Point
FeederPillar FeederPillar Point
TelemetryScada TelemetryScada Point
Valve Valve_ AirRelease Point
Valve Valve_FlapValve Point
Valve Valve_NonReturn Point
ControlPanel ControlPanel Point
CapacitorBank CapacitorBank Point
ProgrammableLogicController ProgrammableLogicController Point
AirConditioningSystem AirConditioningSystem Point
BoundaryWall BoundaryWall Line
CommunicationCables CommunicationCables Line
TrainTrack TrainTrack Line
Cable Cable Line
AccessRoad AccessRoad Line
ConcreteEdge ConcreteEdge Line
WellPipe WellPipe Line
Gate Gate Line
RetainingWall RetainingWall Line
BikeRack BikeRack Line
Fence Fence Line
op V1
FreeStandingWall FreeStandingWall Line
PicnicTablePoly PicnicTablePoly polygon
GeneratorRoomStructurePoly GeneratorRoomStructurePoly polygon
GroundCover GroundCover polygon
BBQPoly BBQPoly polygon
C -
Beach Beach polygon
y
Shelter
FountainStructure
AmenityStructure
C
Shelter
FountainStructure
AmenityStructure
polygon
polygon
polygon
C
ShadeStructure ShadeStructure polygon
FeedTray FeedTray polygon
RubberPad RubberPad polygon
Q
Pasture Pasture polygon
SandyArea SandyArea polygon
Aquarium Aquarium polygon
Footpath Footpath polygon
MainControlCentrePoly MainControlCentrePoly polygon
WaterTray WaterTray polygon
AncilliaryBuildings AncilliaryBuildings polygon
ShelteredPicnicTable ShelteredPicnicTable polygon
StorageTankPoly StorageTankPoly polygon
WeatherStation WeatherStation polygon
BuildingStructure BuildingStructure polygon
Tiles Tiles polygon
PublicArtPoly PublicArtPoly polygon
OfficeFurniture_Poly OfficeFurniture_Poly polygon
PlaygroundEquipElecMech_Poly PlaygroundEquipElecMech_Poly polygon
LightingPoly LightingPoly polygon
Toilet_Poly Toilet_Poly polygon
BoosterStationStructurePoly BoosterStationStructurePoly polygon
FeederPillar_Poly FeederPillar_Poly polygon
ValvePoly ValvePoly polygon
AccessRoad_Poly AccessRoad_Poly polygon
Parks Parks polygon
SwimmingPoolStructure SwimmingPoolStructure polygon
PlaygroundSurface PlaygroundSurface polygon
PlatformWalkways PlatformWalkways polygon
StoneGravelArea StoneGravelArea polygon
ConcreteSurface ConcreteSurface polygon
TreePlanter TreePlanter polygon
AnimalShelter AnimalShelter polygon
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
7. Soft landscape Layers
FeaturePlant FeaturePlant Point
Palm Palm Point
Tree Tree Point
Shrub Shrub Point
LawnGrassEdge LawnGrassEdge Line
Hedge Hedge Line
TreePoly TreePoly polygon
LawnGrass LawnGrass polygon
op V1
FeaturePlantPoly FeaturePlantPoly polygon
PalmPoly PalmPoly polygon
ShrubPoly ShrubPoly polygon
Hedge_Poly Hedge_Poly polygon
ForestArea ForestArea polygon
C -
SeasonalFlowers SeasonalFlowers polygon
y
C
C
Q
8. Irrigation Network Layers
IR_PullBox IR_PullBox Point
IR_ControllerRTU IR_ControllerRTU Point
IR_SprayHead IR_SprayHead Point
IR_InLineDripSystem IR_InLineDripSystem Point
IR_Bubblers IR_Bubblers Point
IR_MotorisedValveAssembly IR_MotorisedValveAssembly Point
IR_QuickCouplingValveAssembly IR_QuickCouplingValveAssembly_DoubleSlot Point
IR_QuickCouplingValveAssembly IR_QuickCouplingValveAssembly_Single Point
op V1
IR_Sprinklers IR_Sprinklers Point
IR_StrainerAngles IR_StrainerAngles Point
IR_Valve IR_Valve Point
IR_FlowMeter IR_FlowMeter Point
IR_PumpingStation IR_PumpingStation Point
C -
IR_EffluentStorageReservoir IR_EffluentStorageReservoir_AboveGround Point
y
IR_ValvePullBoxes
C
IR_EffluentStorageReservoir_BelowGround
IR_EffluentStorageReservoir_SemiBuried
IR_ValvePullBoxes
Point
Point
Point
C
IR_Junction IR_Junction Point
IR_UnknownEnd IR_UnknownEnd Point
IR_AirValve_Other Point
Q
IR_AirValve IR_AirValve_Release Point
IR_AirValve_Unknown Point
IR_AirValve_Vent Point
IR_SpecialPurposeChamber IR_SpecialPurposeChamber Point
IR_Hatchbox IR_Hatchbox Point
IR_WashoutChamber IR_WashoutChamber Point
IR_AccessOnlyChamber IR_AccessOnlyChamber Point
IR_CappedEnd IR_CappedEnd Point
IR_SluiceValve IR_SluiceValve Point
IR_NonReturnValve IR_NonReturnValve Point
IR_IsolatingValve_Ball Point
IR_IsolatingValve IR_IsolatingValve_Butterfly Point
IR_IsolatingValve_Gate Point
IR_IsolatingValve_Other Point
IR_PressureRegulatingValve IR_PressureRegulatingValve Point
IR_ButterflyValve IR_ButterflyValve Point
IR_CentralControlSystem IR_CentralControlSystem Point
IR_Fitting IR_Fitting Point
IR_SolenoidValveAssembly IR_SolenoidValveAssembly Point
IR_EndFlushValveAssembly IR_EndFlushValveAssembly Point
IR_ThrustBlock IR_ThrustBlock Point
IR_Actuator IR_Actuator Point
IR_ControlCablesConduit IR_ControlCablesConduit Line
IR_IrrigationPressureMain_AbandonedLine Line
IR_IrrigationPressureMain IR_IrrigationPressureMain_GravityMain Line
IR_IrrigationPressureMain_LocalSupplyLine Line
IR_IrrigationPressureMain_OtherLine Line
IR_IrrigationPressureMain_PressureMain Line
IR_VentPipe IR_VentPipe Line
IR_PumpStationStructure IR_PumpStationStructure polygon
IR_FittingPoly IR_FittingPoly polygon
IR_ReservoirStructure IR_ReservoirStructure polygon
IR_DripEmitters IR_DripEmitters polygon
IR_ValveChamber IR_ValveChamber polygon
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
9. Storing Attributes Information into MS Access Database Tables
Attributes Information are structured and organized as per the “AD DMAT Simplified
Access Database Template.mdb” database where one column must have the AutoCAD entity
handle for each object inside the drawing.
It should be noted that a table is created for each Feature Class which contains the
attributes collected for each feature class of the AD DMAT GDB or layer of the AD DMAT CAD file;
The process of storing attributes in MS Access Database consists of two steps as follows:
op V1
 Step1 – Extract Entity Handle in AutoCAD (Handle#) for each asset drawn
 Step2 – Insert a record for each Asset in the correspondent MS Access Database Table using
the Handle# as the key link to AutoCAD
C -
y
C
C
Q
10. Extracting Entity Handle in AutoCAD
Entity handle can be extracted from AutoCAD using the command “List object” as shown in the
two figures below. In order for AutoCAD draftsman to extract the handle information of a certain
point or polyline, he should first select the object and then type in the command button “List”.
Then, a list containing information will be populated whereby the handle number is copied into
the specified record in the Access database. As an example, in case one is drawing a Subsidiary
Pipe, first the draftsman should draw the pipe according to the real flow and then select the pipe
and type “List” in the command button to get the handle in order later on to take the handle
number and insert it into the Access database related record in the Subsidiary Gravity Pipe form
and finally insert all information relating to the Pipe in the same Access record.
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Select the polyline or the

point and then type list and
hit enter to get the handle
number
Figure 1: Extracting Entity Handle in AutoCAD

op V1
Handle is equal
to 105 for the
C -
y
selected feature
C
C
Q
Figure 2: Figure showing line information (length, handle, color, area, etc.)
11. Insert Assets’ Attributes in MS Access Database
AD DMAT assets drawn in AutoCAD using the drafting rules described before and organized
into CAD layers as per the correspondent Data Model must have their attributes values stored
in an MS Access Database (enclosed with this document) using the Handle# as the key link
between the graphics and attributes entities.
An Access Database (including tables) is provided to simplify the data entry of the
required attributes supported by a set of valid values as per AD DMAT standards. Some of
the required information must be entered as per the tables below.
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
12. Hard landscape Attributes
Motor Manager
Field Name Type Values Allowed

HANDLE_NO String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
ASSET_CODE String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
Filled with this format 99/99/9999, start with day 99,
then month 99, then the year 9999
CONSTRUCTION_DATE Date “9” is only numbers
op V1
INSPECTED_BY String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
INSPECTION_DATE Date “9” is only numbers
Values to Fill Description
C -
y
BH Beach
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
MAIN_ASSET_NAME String - 2 WR Water Resource

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
CONDITIONS Integer 5 Not Operational
FEATURE_ID Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
CMMS_ITEM_ID Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
DP Diesel Power Station
SUB_ASSET_NAME String - 2 FN Fountain
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
IN Irrigation Network
PU Pedestrian Underpass
PI Pivot Irrigation System
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SN Stormwater Network
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
Water Purification Plant
C
WP Well
UNIQUE_ID Double Filled with number Ex. 123
Q
CONTRACTNO String - 15 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
ASSET_CATEGORY String - 2 HL Hard Landscape
TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
MODEL String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
SERIAL_NO String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
CATALOG_NO String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
CURRENT_RAGE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
DWG_REFERENCE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
SUPPLIER String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
MANUFACTURER String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
REMARKS String - 255 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
HANDOVER Double Filled with number Ex. 123
OM_CONTRACTNO String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
Switches Socket

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
SUB_ASSET_NAME String - 2 GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
GardenLight

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
FUNCTION String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
LIGHT_STYLE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
LIGHT_NUMBER Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
WATTAGE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
LIGHT_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
BoosterTransformer

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
CAPACITY String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
TAPCHANGER_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
COOLING_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
VOLT_RANGE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
LiftingDavit

op V1
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
WORKING_LOAD Double Filled with number Ex. 123
JIB_LENGTH Double Filled with number Ex. 123
LIFT_HEIGHT Double Filled with number Ex. 123
ROTATE_ANGLE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
PLATE_DIAMETER Double Filled with number Ex. 123
RATED_POWER Double Filled with number Ex. 123
RATED_SPEED Double Filled with number Ex. 123
RATED_VOLT Double Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
FertilizerInjectionSystem


op V1
C -
y
BH Beach
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
BRAND String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
DRUM_CPTY Double Filled with number Ex. 123
CONN_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
MATERIAL_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
E Electrical
MECHANISM String - 2 M Mechnical
CATEGORY Varchar2 Values to Fill Description

A High Criticality
B Moderate Criticality
C Low Criticality
Z Unknown
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
SignBoard

op V1
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor

AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
SUB_ASSET_NAME String - 2 DP Diesel Power Station
FN Fountain
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
op V1
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
C SD
SW
Surface Drainage
Swimming Pool
C
PP Water Purification Plant
WP Well
Q

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
SUBTYPE Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
STYLE_SHAPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
MATERIAL String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
ASSET_LENGTH Double Filled with number Ex. 123
HEIGHT Double Filled with number Ex. 123
THICKNESS Double Filled with number Ex. 123
FIXATION String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
ASSET_WIDTH Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
ShelterPicnicTable_Point

op V1
1 Excellent
2 Good
C -
3 Fair
y
CONDITIONS
C
Integer
4
5
Poor
Not Operational
C
Q
ASSET_WIDTH Double Filled with number Ex. 123

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
ONM_COMMENTS String - 255 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123

BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
MAIN_ASSET_NAME String - 50 FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
op V1
WR Water Resource

AH Animal Husbandry
C -
BS Booster Station
y
C CS
DP
Civil Structure
Diesel Power Station
C
FN Fountain
GT Generator Room
Q
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
SW Swimming Pool
SUB_ASSET_NAME String - 5 WP Well
SITEID String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
ASSET_TYPE String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
LENGTH_MM String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
WIDTH_MM String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
BASE_MATERIAL String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
BASE_HEIGHT String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
MANUFACTURE String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
ORIG_FID Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
GeneratorRoomStructure

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
ASSET_AREA Double Filled with number Ex. 123
ASSET_HEIGHT Double Filled with number Ex. 123
ROOF_SLAB_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
INTERNAL_SURFACE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
EXTERNAL_SURFACE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
DOOR_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
NO_DOORS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
WINDOW_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
NO_WINDOWS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Generator

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
SYMBOL_ROTATION Double AH Animal Husbandry

BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
ASSET_CATEGORY String - 2 WR Water Resource
BRAKE_HP String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
ENGINE_SPEED Double Filled with number Ex. 123
COOLING_SYSTEM String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
ALTERNATOR String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
op V1
RATED_OUTPUT String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
CAPACITY String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
C -
y
RATED_CURRENT
VOLTAGE
C
String - 50
String - 50
Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
C
FREQUENCY String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
Q
TYPE1 String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
Fodder

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
SYMBOL_ROTATION Double Filled with number Ex. 123
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
SCIENTIFIC_NAME String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
COMMON_NAME String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
LOCAL_NAME String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
WaterFeature

op V1
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
AVERAGE_LEVEL String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
ASSET_THICKNESS Double Filled with number Ex. 123
LIGHTING_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
NO_LIGHTS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
NO_NOZZLES Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
StreetLight

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
FUNCTION String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
LIGHT_STYLE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
WATTAGE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
POLE_HEIGHT Double Filled with number Ex. 123
POLE_MATERIAL String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
AirCompressor


op V1
C -
y
BH Beach
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor

AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
op V1
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
C SD
SW
Surface Drainage
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q


BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
FLOW_RATE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
DISCHARGE_PRESSURE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
SPEED Double Filled with number Ex. 123
OUTLET_SIZE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Lighting

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

A Amenity
L Landscape
FUNCTION String - 2 F Fence
WATTAGE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
BASE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
op V1
FIXATION String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
PAINT String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
NO_OF_BULBS String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
LIGHT_COVER String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
C -
POLE_HEIGHT Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
y
LIGHT_STYLE
C
String - 40 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
C
Q
PlaygroundEquipElecMech

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Play
FUNCTION Integer 2 Sport
MAX_FREEFALL_HEIGHT Double Filled with number Ex. 123
USER_AGE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
ELECTRICAL_OPERATION String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
FUNCTION1 String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
DrinkingCooler

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
WATERTAP_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
NO_WATERTAP Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Bench

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
FOUNDATION String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
FIXING String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
PAINTING String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Sensor

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
RANGE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
POWER_SUPPLY Double Filled with number Ex. 123
TRANSMITTER_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
TRANSMITTER_MODEL_NO String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
TRANSMITTER_CATALOGUE_NO String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
DISPLAY_UNIT_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
DISPLAY_UNIT_MODEL_NO String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
DISPLAY_UNIT_POWER_SUPPLY String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
op V1
MEASUREMENT_UNITS String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
C -
y
C
C
Q
BoreholeCasingScreen

Filled with this format 99/99/9999, start with day 99, then
month 99, then the year 9999
op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
Filled with number Ex. 123
NOMINAL_DIAMETER Double
NOMINAL_PRESSURE Double
ASSET_LENGTH Double
MATERIAL_TYPE String - 20
DWG_REFERENCE String - 20
SUPPLIER String - 20
MANUFACTURER String - 50
REMARKS String - 255
ASSET_DEPTH String - 50
OM_CONTRACTNO String - 50
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Nozzle

ASSET_CODE String - 50
INSPECTED_BY String - 20
op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
FEATURE_ID Integer
CMMS_ITEM_ID Integer
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
UNIQUE_ID Double
Q
SYMBOL_ROTATION Double
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
NOZZLE_SIZE Double
OPERATING_PRESSURE Double
DISCHARGE_PRECIPITATION_RATE Double
RADIUS_THROW Double
TRAJECTORY_ANGLE Double
POP_UP_HEIGHT Double Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
FlagPole

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
FEATURE_ID Integer
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
STYLE String - 20
PULLEY_TYPE String - 20
PULLEY_MANUFACTURER String - 50
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Pump

Filled with this format 99/99/9999, start with day 99, then month
99, then the year 9999
op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
FLOW_RATE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
HEAD String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
SUCTION_SIZE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
DISCHARGE_SIZE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
TYPE String - 50
op V1
OM_CONTRACNO String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
C -
y
C
C
Q
Clock

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
FEATURE_ID Integer
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
MODEL String - 20
SERIAL_NO String - 20
GRADATION String - 20
DISPLAY_UNIT_TYPE String - 20
DISPLAY_UNIT_POWER_SUPPLY String - 20
CLOCK_STRUCTURE String - 20
op V1
STYLE String - 20
FUNCTION String - 20
SIZE_MM Integer
HEIGHT_MM Integer
C -
FIXINGS String - 20
y
C
C
Q
Motor

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
RATED_CURRENT Double
RATED_POWER Double
SPEED Double
VOLTAGE Double
IP String - 20
INSULATION_CLASS String - 20
MODEL String - 40
op V1
TYPE String - 25
C -
y
C
C
Q
Bin

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
ASSET_LENGTH Double
ASSET_WIDTH Double
ASSET_HEIGHT Double
HEIGHT_GROUND Double
POST_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PublicArt

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
STYLE String - 20
PUBLIC_INTERACTION String - 20
ASSET_LENGTH Double
ASSET_WIDTH Double
ASSET_HEIGHT Double
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
BBQ

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
FEATURE_ID Integer
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
STYLE String - 20
TRAY_LENGTH Double Filled with number Ex. 123
TRAY_WIDTH Double Filled with number Ex. 123
TRAY_THICKNESS Double Filled with number Ex. 123
BASE_HEIGHT Double Filled with number Ex. 123
TRAY_MATERIAL String - 20
BASE_MATERIAL String - 20
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
BatteryCharger

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
MODEL String - 20
CAPACITY String - 20
NO_CELLS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
CELL_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
VOLTAGE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
StorageTank

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
CONTRACTNO String - 15
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
ASSET_VOLUME String - 50
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
VariableFrequencyDrive

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
MODEL String - 20
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
TrainCrossingSecurityGate

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
AirBlower

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
FEATURE_ID Integer
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
MODEL String - 20
FLOW_RATE Double
OUTLET_SIZE Double
SPEED Double
DISCHARGE_PRESSURE Double
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
SoftStarter

op V1
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
FEATURE_ID Integer
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
MODEL String - 20
CATALOG_NO String - 20
CURRENT_RATING String - 20
VOLTAGE_RANGE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
FireAlarmSystem

op V1
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
FEATURE_ID Integer
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
MODEL String - 20
NO_ZONES Integer
NO_HEATDETECTORS Integer
DETECTOR_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
NO_SMOKEDETECTORS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
SMOKEDETECTOR_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
NO_BELLS Integer
BELL_SIZE Double
NO_CALLPOINTS Integer
NO_FLASHER Integer
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
StarDeltaStarter

op V1
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
FEATURE_ID Integer
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
MODEL String - 20
AMPERE_RATING Double
CTRL_VOLTAGE Double
SC_CAPACITY Double
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
ParkEntranceCounter

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
FEATURE_ID Integer
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
Toilet

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
FEATURE_ID Integer
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
ROOF_SLAB_TYPE String - 20
INTERNAL_SURFACE String - 20
EXTERNAL_SURFACE String - 20
ASSET_LENGTH Double
ASSET_WIDTH Double
ASSET_HEIGHT Double
ASSET_AREA Double
NO_WINDOW Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
PLUMBING_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
NO_TOILET Integer
op V1
NO_WASH_BASINS Integer
NO_BIDETS Integer
C -
y
HANDOVER
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
Double
String - 50
C
Q
SurgeProtection

op V1
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
ASSET_VOLUME Double
ASSET_DIAMETER Double
ASSET_HEIGHT Double
WORKING_PRESSURE String - 20
MODEL String - 30
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
OfficeFurniture

op V1
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
FEATURE_ID Integer
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
MAKE String - 20
MODEL String - 20
NO_FURNITURE Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
ConductivityAnalyser

op V1
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
MODEL String - 20
RANGE String - 20
POWER_SUPPLY String - 20
TRANSMITTER_TYPE String - 20
TRANSMITTER_MODEL_NO String - 30
TRANSCATALOG_NO String - 30
DISPLAY_UNIT_MODEL_NO String - 20
op V1
MEASUREMENT_UNITS String - 20
C -
y
C
C
Q
Speaker

op V1
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
MODEL String - 20
FIXATION String - 20
AMPLIFIER_FEEDER String - 20
MIKE String - 20
NO_HORNE Integer
MATERIAL String - 50
BASE String - 50
op V1
POLE_HEIGHT String - 50
PAINT String - 50
NUMBER_OF_SPEAKERS String - 50
C -
y
C
C
Q
Alternator

op V1
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
MODEL String - 20
RATED_POWER Double Filled with number Ex. 123
MAINBRAKER_CPTY String - 20
MAINBREAKER_TYPE String - 20
RATED_SPEED Double
VOLTAGE Double
FREQUENCY Double
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Engine

op V1
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
BRAKE_HP String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
ENGINE_SPEED Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
COOL_SYSTEM String - 20
AGENT String - 20
TYPE Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PicnicTable

op V1
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Membrane

op V1
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
MODEL String - 20
DIAMETER Double
ASSET_LENGTH Double
INLET_PRESSURE Double
OUTLET_PRESSURE Double
RECOVERY String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
INLET_PORT Double
OUTLET_PORT Double
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
DrinkingFountain

op V1
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
ASSET_LENGTH Double
ASSET_WIDTH Double
ASSET_HEIGHT Double
WATERTAP_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
NO_WATERTAP Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
FloatSwitches

op V1
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
FEATURE_ID Integer
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
MODEL String - 20
NO_SWITCHES Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
VOLTAGE String - 10
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
HydrostaticLevelSensor

op V1
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
MODEL String - 20
RANGE String - 20
POWER_SUPPLY String - 20
DISPLAYUNIT_TYPE String - 20
DISPLAYUNIT_NO String - 20
DISPLAY_POWERSUPPLY String - 20
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
MainControlCentre

op V1
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
MCC_TYPE String - 20
MAKE_MODEL String - 20
ASSET_DEPTH Double Filled with number Ex. 123
CURRENT_RATING_MAIN_INCOMER String - 20
STANDBY_GENERATOR_INCOMER_SIZE String - 20
STANDBY_GENERATOR_TYPE String - 20
AUTO_CHANGEOVER_AVAILABILITY String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
NO_OF_FEEDERS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
FEEDER_TYPE String - 20
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Ancillary_Building_POINT

ASSET_CATE String - 254
INSP_BY String - 254
INSP_DATE String - 254
TYPE_STON String - 254
op V1
MAT_TYPE String - 254
ROOF_SLAB String - 254
INTE_SURF String - 254
C -
EXT_SURF String - 254
y
STAIR_TYP
DOOR_TYPE
C
String - 254
String - 254
C
NUM_OF_DOO Double Filled with number Ex. 123
WINDOW_TYP String - 254
Q
TYP_OF_LIG String - 254
NUM_OF_LIG String - 254
NUM_OF_ROO Double Filled with number Ex. 123
ASSET_CONDITION Small Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
ASSET_ID_CODE String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
MAIN_ASSET_NAME String - 2 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
SUB_ASSET_NAME String - 2 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
FEATURE_ID Small Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
CMMS_ITEM_ID Small Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
ASS_ID_COD String - 254
CONST_DATE String - 254
LENGTH_M String - 254
WIDTH_M String - 254
HEIGHT_M String - 254
NUM_OF_WIN String - 254
CONDITIONS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
AREA_M2 String - 254 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
CommunicationCablesPoint

ID Double Filled with number Ex. 123
ASSET_CATEGORY String - 5
MAIN_ASSET_NAME String - 50
op V1
C -
y
INSPECTION_DATE
SZE
CDate
String - 50
“9” is only numbers
C
INSOLATION String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
FEATURE_ID Double Filled with number Ex. 123
Q
CONDITIONS String - 255 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
COMMUNICATION_PROTOCOL String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
CABLE_COLOR String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
GMROTATION Double Filled with number Ex. 123
SUB_ASSET_NAME String - 2
Gantry

ID Integer
ASSET_CATEGORY String - 10 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
op V1
CONDITIONS Small Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
Filled with this format 99/99/9999, start with day 99, then month 99,
then the year 9999
C -
y
INSPECTED_BY
C
then the year 9999
C
Q
HEIGHT String - 50
DIAMETER String - 50
TYPE_VALVES String - 50
DIA_VALVE String - 50
DIAMETER_PIPE String - 50
REMARKS Small Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
AmenityStructure_Point

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
FEATURE_ID Integer
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
UNIQUE_ID Double
Q
ASSET_LENGTH Double
ASSET_WIDTH Double
ASSET_HEIGHT Double
ASSET_AREA Double
STAIR_TYPE String - 20
DOOR_TYPE String - 20
NO_TOILETS Integer
NO_BIDETS Integer
NO_SHOWERS Integer
LIGHT_TYPE String - 20
NO_LIGHTS String - 20
REMARKS String - 80
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
SwitchBoardControlPanel

op V1
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
MODEL String - 20
CURRENT_RATING Double Filled with number Ex. 123
ENCLOSURE_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
NO_FEEDERS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
UltraSonicLevelSensor

AT_TAYPE String - 50
AS_MANUFACTURER String - 50
AS_SUPPLIER String - 50
ASSET_ID_CODE String - 50
op V1
ASSET_OVERALL_CONDITION String - 50
AT_ASSET_CATEGORY String - 50
AT_CONSTRUCTION_DATE String - 50
C -
AT_INSPECTED_BY String - 50
y
AT_INSPECTION_DATE
CONTRACT_NO
C String - 50
String - 50
C
Q
MAKE_MODEL_NEW String - 50
RANGE_NEW String - 50
POWER_SUPPLY_NEW String - 50
DISPLAY_UNIT_POWER_SUPPLY_NEW String - 50
FencePoint

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
CONDITIONS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
C -
y
MATERIAL_TYPE
FUNCTION
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
ASSET_LENGTH String - 50
ASSET_HEIGHT String - 50
Q
POST_DIA String - 50
POST_SIZE String - 50
FIXING String - 50
PAINTING String - 50
UNIQUE_ID Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
TOPWIRE_SIZE Integer
MIDWIRE_SIZE Integer
BOTTOMWIRE_SIZE Integer
WIRE_TYPE String - 20
POST_TYPE String - 20
GATE_TYPE String - 20
NO_GATE Integer
GATE_HEIGHT Integer
GATE_WIDTH Integer
NO_BARBWIRE Integer
POST_DIAMETER Integer
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
FountainStructure_Point

INSPECTION Date “9” is only numbers
INSPECTED_ String - 254
CONSTRUCTI String - 254
op V1
MATERIAL_T String - 254
ASSET_LENG Double Filled with number Ex. 123
C -
ASSET_WIDT Double Filled with number Ex. 123
y
THICKNESS
ASSET_AREA
C
String - 254
Double
C
AVG_LVL String - 254 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
Q
NO_LIGHTS Double Filled with number Ex. 123
NO_NOZZLES Double Filled with number Ex. 123
NO_NOZZELS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
CONSTRUCTION_DATE Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
INSPECTION_DATE Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
ASSET_LENGTH Integer
ASSET_WIDTH Integer
ASSET_THICKNESS Integer
Cable_Point

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
CABLE_SIZE String - 20
C -
y
DWG_REF
MANUFACTURER
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
Q
TYPE String - 50
FEATURE_ID Double Filled with number Ex. 123
CONDITIONS String - 255
MODEL String - 50
GMROTATION Double Filled with number Ex. 123
ASSET_TYPE String - 50
ORGID String - 20
SITEID String - 20
ID Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
AREA_NAME String - 50
STREET_NAME String - 50
ASSET_PICTURE String - 50
COMMENTS String - 255
ASSET_ITEM_NO Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
POLYGON_NUM String - 50
SECTOR_NUMBER String - 50
ZONE_NUMBER String - 50
N1 String - 50
E1 String - 50
GEOMETRY String - 255
CABLE_SIZE_1 Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
CONTRACT_NO String - 50
C -
y
C
C
Q
MainContactor

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
MODEL String - 20
AMPERE_RATE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
CNTR_VOLTAGE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
SC_CAPACITY Double Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PressureTransmitter

op V1
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
MODEL String - 20
INSTRUMENT_RANGE String - 20
DISPLAY_UNIT_MODEL_NO String - 20
DISPLAY_CATALOGNO String - 20
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Bollards

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
STYLE String - 20
BASE String - 20
HOOK String - 20
FIXATION String - 20
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
LighteningProtection

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
MODEL String - 20
NO_AIRTERMINAL Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
NO_EARTHINGPTS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Breaker

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
AMPERE_RATING String - 20
WITHDRAW_TYPE String - 20
CHARGING_TYPE String - 20
SC_CAPACITY Double Filled with number Ex. 123
CTRL_VOLTAGE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
TYPE String - 50
C -
y
C
C
Q
BoosterStationStructure

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
RAMP_TYPE String - 20
RAMP_MATERIAL String - 20
ASSET_LENGTH Double
ASSET_HEIGHT Double
ASSET_WIDTH Double
ASSET_AREA Double
LADDER_TYPE String - 20
NO_LADDERS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
ROOF_SLAB_TYPE
MATERIAL_TYPE
C
String - 255
String - 255
C
Q
SupplyExtractFan

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
FEATURE_ID Integer
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
SEF_TYPE String - 20
MODEL String - 20
FLOW_RATE Double
DISCHARGE_PRESSURE Double
SPEED Double
SEF_CURRENT Double
VOLTAGE Double
POWER Double
op V1
TYPE String - 5
C -
y
C
C
Q
GatePoint

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
ASSET_HEIGHT Double
ASSET_WIDTH Double
CORNERPOST_SIZE Double
RAIL_WIRE_SIZE Double
NO_PANELS Integer
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
EarthingSystem

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
FEATURE_ID Integer
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
MODEL String - 20
EARTH_RESISTANCE String - 20
NO_EARTHINGPTS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PlaygroundEquipNonMech

op V1
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
FEATURE_ID Integer
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

P Play
FUNCTION String - 2 S Sport
TYPE String - 20
ASSET_LENGTH Double
ASSET_WIDTH Double
ASSET_HEIGHT Double
MAX_FREEFALL_HEIGHT Double
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
OverheadCrane

op V1
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
WORKING_LOAD String - 20
SPAN Double Filled with number Ex. 123
LIFT_HEIGHT Double Filled with number Ex. 123
LONG_TRAVEL Double Filled with number Ex. 123
TROLLEY_MANUFACTURER String - 50
TROLLEY_MODEL String - 20
TROLLEY_NO String - 20
TROLLEY_POWER Double
TROLLEY_SPEED Double
TROLLEY_VOLTAGE Double
HOIST_MANUFACTURER String - 50
HOIST_MODEL String - 20
op V1
HOIST_NO String - 20
HOIST_POWER Double
HOIST_SPEED Double
HOIST_VOLTAGE Double
C -
LONGTRAVEL_MANUFACTURER String - 50
y
LONGTRAVEL_MODEL
LONGTRAVEL_NO
CString - 20
String - 20
C
Q
PumpControlPanel

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
LIGHT_STYLE String - 20
WATTAGE String - 20
HEIGHT_POLE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
POLE_MATERIAL String - 20
ASSET_DEPTH Integer
op V1
ASSET_HEIGHT Integer
ASSET_WIDTH Integer
C -
y
C
C
Q
PressureGauge

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
MODEL String - 20
INSTRUMENT_RANGE String - 20
LUBRICATION_FLUID String - 20
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PlanterBox

ASSET_AREA String - 255
CMMS_ITEM_ID Small Integer
op V1
CONDITIONS Small Integer
then the year 9999
C -
y
INSPECTED_BY
C
then the year 9999
C
Q
ASSET_WIDTH String - 50
SurgeVessel

ASSET_OVERALL_CONDITION String - 50
AT_ASSET_CATEGORY String - 50
op V1
AT_CONSTRUCTION_DATE String - 50
AT_INSPECTED_BY String - 50
AT_INSPECTION_DATE String - 50
AT_MANUFACTURER String - 50
C -
AT_MATERIAL String - 50
y
AT_SUPPLIER
AT_TYPE
CString - 50
String - 50
C
Q
VOLUME_NEW String - 50
THICKNESS_NEW String - 50
FEATURE_ID Small Integer
ShadeStructure_POINT

INSP_DATE String - 254
LENGTH_M Double
op V1
WIDTH_M Double
HEIGHT_M Double
NUM_OF_COL Double
C -
TYPE_OF_LI String - 254
y
NUM_OF_LI
FOUND_MAT
C
String - 254
String - 254
C
FOUND_THI String - 254
Q
CONDITIONS Small Integer
INSPECTION_DATE Integer
UNIQUE_ID Integer
ASSET_WIDTH Integer
ASSET_AREA Integer
NO_COLUMNS Integer
FOUNDATION_MATERIAL String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
FOUNDATION_THICKNESS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
NO_OF_BENCH_SEATS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
ROOFSLAB_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
AREA_M2 Double Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Shelter_POINT

LENGTH_M String - 254
WIDTH_M String - 254
op V1
HEIGHT_M String - 254
NUM_OF_COL String - 254
TYPE_OF_LI String - 254
C -
NUM_OF_LI String - 254
y
FOUND_MAT
FOUND_THI
C
String - 254
String - 254
C
TYPE String - 254
Q
ASS_ID_COD String - 254
CONST_DATE String - 254
INSPECTION Integer
ASSET_LENG Integer
ASSET_WIDT Integer
ASSET_HEIG Integer
ASSET_AREA Integer
NO_COLUMNS Integer
NO_LIGHTS Integer
FOUNDATION Integer
ASSET_WIDTH Integer
op V1
FOUNDATION_THICKNESS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
AREA_M2 String - 254 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
C -
y
C
C
Q
Filter

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
FEATURE_ID Integer
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
FILTER_SIZE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
MEDIA String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
INLET_PORT String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
OUTLET_PORT String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
op V1
TYPE Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
C -
y
C
C
Q
FeederPillar

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
MODEL String - 20
ASSET_WIDTH Double
ASSET_HEIGHT Double
ASSET_DEPTH Double
ENCLOSURE_TYPE String - 20
NO_FEEDERS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
TelemetryScada

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
FEATURE_ID Integer
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
MODEL String - 20
NO_DIGINPUTS Integer
NO_DIGOUTPUTS Integer
NO_ANALOGINPUTS Integer
NO_ANALOGOUTPUTS Integer
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Valve

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
1 Excellent
y
C 2
3
Good
Fair
C
4 Poor
Q
FEATURE_ID Integer
UNIQUE_ID Double
SYMBOL_ROTATION Double
SUBTYPE Integer
NOMINAL_DIA Double
WORK_PRESSURE Double
LENGTH Double
UPSTREAM_PRESSURE String - 20
SETPT_PRESSURE String - 20
DWG_REF String - 20
TYPE String - 50
NO_OF_VALVES Integer
ASSET_DIAMETER Integer
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
ControlPanel

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
MODEL String - 20
ENCLOSURE_TYPE String - 20
NO_OF_FEEDER Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
DRAWING_REFERENCE String - 20
SERIAL_NUMBER String - 20
WELL_TANK_NO String - 20
POLE_MATERIAL String - 20
HEIGHT_POLE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
WATTAGE String - 20
C -
ASSET_DEPTH Double
y
ASSET_WIDTH
ASSET_HEIGHT
C
Double
Double
C
RATED_POWER String - 50
Q
CapacitorBank

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
MODEL String - 20
CAPACITY String - 20
VOLTAGE Double
NO_STAGES Integer
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
ProgrammableLogicController

op V1
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
MODEL String - 20
NO_DI Integer
NO_AI Integer
NO_DO Integer
NO_AO Integer
op V1
VOLTAGE String - 10
C -
y
C
C
Q
AirConditioningSystem

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
MODEL String - 20
COOL_CAPACITY Double
POWER_INPUT Double
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
BoundaryWall

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
ASSET_LENGTH Double
ASSET_HEIGHT Double
ASSET_THICKNESS Double
PANEL_LENGTH Double
NO_COLUMNS Integer
NO_PANELS Integer
GATE_TYPES String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
NO_GATES Integer
GATE_HEIGHT Double
GATE_WIDTH Double
op V1
NO_LIGHT Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
TOPWIRE_PROTECT String - 20
AVERAGE_LEVEL String - 20
C -
y
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
C
Q
CommunicationCables

op V1
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor

AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
op V1
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
C SD
SW
Surface Drainage
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q

BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
CABLE_TYPE String - 20
SIZE_CORE String - 20
INSULATION_TYPE String - 20
COMMUNICATION_PROTOCOL String - 20
CABLE_COLOUR String - 20
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
TrainTrack

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
Cable

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
UNIQUE_ID Double
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
MODEL String - 20
CABLE_SIZE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
AccessRoad

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
FEATURE_ID Integer
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
ASSET_LENGTH Double
ASSET_WIDTH Double
ASSET_AREA Double
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
ConcreteEdge

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
ASSET_LENGTH Double
ASSET_WIDTH Double
ASSET_AREA Double
WellPipe

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
NOMINAL_DIAMETER Double
ASSET_LENGTH Double
CLASS String - 20
Gate

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
ASSET_LENGTH Double
ASSET_HEIGHT Double
ASSET_WIDTH Double
CORNERPOST_SIZE Double
RAIL_WIRE_SIZE Double
NO_PANELS Integer
HANDOVER Double
NO_HINGES String - 255 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
RetainingWall

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
HEIGHT_HPOINT Double Filled with number Ex. 123
HEIGHT_LPOINT Double Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
BikeRack

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
ASSET_LENGTH Double
ASSET_HEIGHT Double
BIKE_SPACES_NO Integer
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Fence

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
ASSET_LENGTH Double
ASSET_HEIGHT Double
TOPWIRE_SIZE Double
MIDWIRE_SIZE String - 50
BOTTOMWIRE_SIZE String - 50
WIRE_TYPE String - 20
POST_TYPE String - 20
GATE_TYPE String - 20
NO_GATE Integer
GATE_HEIGHT Double
GATE_WIDTH Double
NO_BARBWIRE Integer
POST_DIAMETER Double
op V1
POST_HEIGHT String - 50
MIDWIRE_SIZE1 String - 50
C -
BOTTOMWIRE_SIZE1 String - 50
y
ASSET_AREA
SUBTYPE
C
Integer
Integer
C
MIDWIRE_SIZE_1 String - 50
BOTTOMWIRE_SIZE_1 String - 50
Q
POST_SIZE String - 50
FreeStandingWall

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PicnicTablePoly

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
GeneratorRoomStructurePoly

op V1
1 Excellent
2 Good
C -
3 Fair
y
CONDITIONS
C
Integer
4 Poor
5 Not Operational
C
FEATURE_ID Integer
Q
UNIQUE_ID Double
TYPE String - 20
ASSET_WIDTH String - 255
ASSET_HEIGHT String - 255
NO_DOORS String - 255
NO_WINDOWS String - 255
WINDOW_TYPE String - 255
ROOFSLAB_TYPE String - 255
ONM_COMMENTS String - 255
SITEID String - 50
NO_AC_UNIT String - 50
CONRACTNO String - 50
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
GroundCover

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
SCIENTIFIC_NAME String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
LOCAL_NAME String - 25 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
BBQPoly

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
STYLE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
TRAY_LENGTH Double Filled with number Ex. 123
TRAY_WIDTH Double Filled with number Ex. 123
TRAY_THICKNESS Double Filled with number Ex. 123
TRAY_MATERIAL String - 20
BASE_MATERIAL String - 20
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Beach

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
SURFACE_MATERIAL String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
Shelter

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
NO_COLUMNS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
FOUNDATION_THICKNESS Double Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
FountainStructure

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
ASSET_LENGTH Double
ASSET_WIDTH Double
ASSET_AREA Double
NO_NOZZELS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
FLOWER_STATUE String - 20
RING_MATERIAL String - 20
op V1
PEDESTAL_OF_FLOWER String - 20
C -
y
C
C
Q
AmenityStructure

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
ASSET_LENGTH Double
ASSET_WIDTH Double
ASSET_HEIGHT Double
ASSET_AREA Double
op V1
NO_TOILETS Integer
NO_BIDETS Integer
NO_SHOWERS Integer
C -
y
NO_LIGHTS
REMARKS
C
String - 20
String - 255
C
Q
ShadeStructure

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
ASSET_LENGTH Double
ASSET_WIDTH Double
ASSET_HEIGHT Double
ASSET_AREA Double
NO_COLUMNS Integer
FOUNDATION_THICKNESS Double Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
FeedTray

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
ASSET_LENGTH Double
ASSET_WIDTH Double
ASSET_VOLUME Double Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
RubberPad

op V1
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
ASSET_LENGTH Double
ASSET_WIDTH Double
UPPER_SURFACE_MATERIAL String - 20
LOWER_SURFACE_MATERIAL String - 20
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Pasture

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
FEATURE_ID Integer
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
SCIENTIFIC_NAME String - 20
COMMON_NAME String - 20
LOCAL_NAME String - 20
ASSET_AREA Double
CLEAR_TRUNK_HEIGHT Double
CANOPY_DIAMETER Double
NO_TREES Integer
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
SandyArea

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
SURFACE_MATERIAL String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
Aquarium

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
Footpath

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
SURFACE_TYPE String - 20
ASSET_LENGTH Double
ASSET_WIDTH Double
ASSET_AREA Double
JOINT_TYPE String - 20
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
MainControlCentrePoly

CONSTRUCTION_DATE Date Filled with number Ex. 123
INSPECTION_DATE Date Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
C -
FA Facilities
y
C FM
FO
Farm
Forest
C
GR Garden
HP Hospital
Q
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GT Generator Room
SUB_ASSET_NAME String - 2 GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
op V1
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
SW Swimming Pool
C -
y
UNIQUE_ID
C Double
WP
Well
C
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
MCC_TYPE String - 20
MAKE_MODEL String - 20
CURRENT_RATING_MAIN_INCOMER String - 20
STANDBY_GENERATOR_INCOMER_SIZE String - 20
STANDBY_GENERATOR_TYPE String - 20
AUTO_CHANGEOVER_AVAILABILITY String - 20
NO_OF_FEEDERS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
WaterTray

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
AncilliaryBuildings

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Stone Cave
TYPE Integer 2 Dark Ride
ASSET_LENGTH Double
ASSET_WIDTH Double
ASSET_HEIGHT Double
ASSET_AREA Double
STAIR_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
op V1
NO_ROOMS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
C -
y
OM_CONTRACTNO
DOOR_TYPE
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
Q
ShelteredPicnicTable

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
StorageTankPoly

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
WeatherStation

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
BRAND String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
MATERIAL_STATION String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
ET ET
CAPABILITY_WATER String - 3 RH RH
INSTALL_TYPE String - 20
SENSOR_MEASUREMENTS String - 20
L Local
LOGGING String - 2 R Remote
HANDOVER Double
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
BuildingStructure

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
INT_SURFACE String - 20
EXT_SURFACE String - 20
ASSET_LENGTH Double
ASSET_WIDTH Double
ASSET_HEIGHT Double
ASSET_AREA Double
WINDOW_TYPE String - 20
LIGHTING_TYPE String - 20
op V1
NO_LIGHTS Integer
NO_ROOMS Integer
STRUCTURE String - 255
C -
y
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
C
Q
Tiles

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
COLOUR String - 20
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PublicArtPoly

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
STYLE String - 20
PUBLIC_INTERACTION String - 20
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
OfficeFurniture_Poly

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
y
MODEL
SERIAL_NO
C
String - 20
String - 20
C
NO_FURNITURE String - 50
Q
PHYSICAL_DAMAGE String - 50
MAKE String - 50
PlaygroundEquipElecMech_Poly

op V1
C -
y
CONSTRUCTION_DATE Date
C Filled with this format 99/99/9999, start with day 99, then month
C
Q
FUNCTION Small Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
MAX_FREEFALL_HEIGHT Double Filled with number Ex. 123
ELECTRICAL_OPERATION String - 20
TYPE String - 20
LightingPoly

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

A Amenity
L Landscape
FUNCTION String - 2 F Fence
WATTAGE String - 20
REMARKS_NEW String - 300
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Toilet_Poly

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
NO_WINDOW Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
NO_TOILET Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
NO_WASH_BASINS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
NO_BIDETS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
C -
y
REMARKS
HANDOVER
C
String - 255
Double
C
Q
BoosterStationStructurePoly

op V1
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
TYPE String - 20
RAMP_TYPE String - 20
RAMP_MATERIAL String - 20
LADDER_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
op V1
C -
ROOF_SLAB_TYPE String - 255 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
y
MATERIAL_TYPE
C
C
Q
FeederPillar_Poly

ID Integer
op V1
C -
y
SERIAL_NO
FUNCTION_
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
ASSET_HEIGHT String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
ASSET_DEPTH String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
Q
CURRENT_RATING String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
NO_FEEDERS String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
FEEDER_TYPE String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
then the year 9999
then the year 9999
INSPECTED_DATE Date “9” is only numbers
ASSET_WIDTH String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
ValvePoly

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
y
MODEL
SERIAL_NO
C
String - 20
String - 20
C
NOMINAL_DIA String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
NOMINAL_PRESSURE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
Q
WORK_PRESSURE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
ASSET_LENGTH String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
UPSTREAM_PRESSURE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
SETPT_PRESSURE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
DWG_REF String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
COMMENTS String - 255 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
AccessRoad_Poly

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Parks

GARDEN_NAME String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
1 Public
2 Ladies
op V1
GARDEN_USAGE Small Integer 3 Family
PHOTO_ID String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
NORTHING Double Filled with number Ex. 123
C -
EASTING Double Filled with number Ex. 123
y
LOCATION_AREA_NAME
ZONE
C String - 50
Integer
C
SECTOR Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
Q
1 Yes
UNDEROMCONTRACT Small Integer 2 No
OMCONTRACT String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
CONSULTANT String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
CONTRACTOR String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
START_DATE Date “9” is only numbers
END_DATE Date “9” is only numbers
CONSTRUCTION_CONTRACT_NO String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
1 Yes
JOGGING_TRACK Small Integer 2 No
JOGGING_LENGTH Double Filled with number Ex. 123
JOGGING_WIDTH Double Filled with number Ex. 123
1 Yes
BIKE_TRACK Small Integer 2 No
BIKE_LENGTH Double Filled with number Ex. 123
BIKE_WIDTH Double Filled with number Ex. 123
Values to
Fill Description
1 Garden
2 Park
3 Pocket Park
4 Open Space
5 Jogging Path
op V1
GARDEN_TYPE Small Integer 6 Others

1 Open
C -
GATE_TYPE Small Integer 2 Close
y
SECURITY_GUARDS
C String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
C
1 Yes
ENTRANCE_FEES Small Integer 2 No
Q
GARDEN_AREA Double Filled with number Ex. 123
FENCE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
GROUND_COVER_AREA Double Filled with number Ex. 123
NO_OF_TREES Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
NO_OF_PALMS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
SHRUBS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
FOUNTAINS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
PLAYGROUNDS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
PLAYGROUND_TOTAL_AREA Double Filled with number Ex. 123
ELECTRICAL_PLAYING_EQUIPMENT Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
MECHANICAL_PLAYING_EQUIPMENT Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
ELECTRICITY_CONSUMPTIONS Double Filled with number Ex. 123
FOOTPATH Double Filled with number Ex. 123
BUILDINGS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
RESTURANTS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
CAFETARIAS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
TOILETS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
NO_OF_ANNUAL_VISITORS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
1 Estimated
SOURCE_OF_ANNUAL_VISITORS Small Integer 2 Ticket Sales
POTABLE_WATER_CONSUMPTIONS Double Filled with number Ex. 123
1 Toilet
2 Cafetarias
3 Fountain
4 Drinking
5 Office
op V1
POTABLE_WATER_USAGE_AREA Small Integer 6 DMAT Building
TSE_WATER_CONSUMPTION Double Filled with number Ex. 123
1 Irrigation
C -
y
TSE_WATER_USAGE_AREA Small Integer 2 Fountain
WELL
OTHER
C Double
Double
C
HARDSCAPE_AREA Double Filled with number Ex. 123
BENCH Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
Q
DRINKING_COOLER Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
BOLLARDS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
GARDEN_LIGHT Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
PUBLIC_ART Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
SHELTER Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
SIGN_BOARD Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
AIR_CONDITIONING_SYSTEM Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
BBQ Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
BIN Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
TILES Double Filled with number Ex. 123
GATE Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
BUBBLERS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
DRIP_EMMITERS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
IRRIGATION_FITTING Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
IRRIGATION_PIPE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
IRRIGATION_VALVE Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
SPRINKLERS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
RESERVIORS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
VALVE Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
SPRAY_HEAD Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
SOFTSCAPE_AREA Double Filled with number Ex. 123
HEDGES Double Filled with number Ex. 123
SEASONAL_FLOWERS Double Filled with number Ex. 123
LAWN_GRASS Double Filled with number Ex. 123
GROUND_HEDGES_SHRUBS_COVER Double Filled with number Ex. 123
1 Yes
ANIMALS Small Integer 2 No
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
SwimmingPoolStructure

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
CANOPY_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
FILL_FREQUENCY String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PlaygroundSurface

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
FEATURE_ID Integer
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
UNIQUE_ID Double
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PlatformWalkways

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
LADDER_WIDTH Double Filled with number Ex. 123
LADDER_COULER String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
LADDER_LENGTH Double Filled with number Ex. 123
RUNG_SPACE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
LADDER_MATERIAL String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
SURFACE_TYPE String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
AREA String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
op V1
THICKNESS String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
JOINT_TYPE String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
C -
y
C
C
Q
StoneGravelArea

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
FILTER String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
HEIGHT String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
NO_STONES String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
ConcreteSurface

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
FEATURE_ID Integer
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
then the year 9999
CONTRACTNO String - 15 “9” is only numbers
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
TreePlanter

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
AnimalShelter

then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
BH Beach
y
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
ROOF_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
SUPPORTS_TYPES String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
NO_SUPPORTS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
FENCE_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
WASTE_DISPOSURE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
13. Irrigation Network Attributes
IR_PullBox

op V1
0 0
1 1
2 2
C -
3 3
y
STATE
UNIQUE_ID
C Integer
Double
4
5
4
5
C
Q

1 Handedover
2 New
HANDOVER Integer 3 Planned
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
MAIN_ASSET_NAME String - 2 ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
WR Water Resource

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
op V1
4 Poor
C -
y
AH Animal Husbandry
C BS
CS
Booster Station
Civil Structure
C
FN Fountain
Q
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
SW Swimming Pool

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
ASSET_CATEGORY String - 2 IR Irrigation
HL Hard Landscape
BOX_SIZE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
ASSET_SIZE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
A High Criticality
C Low Criticality
C -
y
CATEGORY String - 20 Z Unknown
SERVICE_AREA_ID C
String - 20 Identifies the service area which the Asset belongs to
C
MAINT_OWNERSHIP String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
Q
IR_ControllerRTU

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New
then the year 9999
then the year 9999
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
op V1
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
C -
y
C FN
GT
Fountain
Generator Room
C
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
Q
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
SW Swimming Pool

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
NO_STATIONS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
POWER_IPREQ String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
N Nema
ENCLOSURE_TYPE String - 2 R Rating

W Wall
INSTALL_TYPE String - 2 M Mounted
op V1
SERVICE_AREA_ID String - 20 Identifies the service area which the Asset belongs to
C -
y
C
C
Q
IR_SprayHead

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New
then the year 9999
then the year 9999
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
op V1
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
C -
y
C FN
GT
Fountain
Generator Room
C
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
Q
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
SW Swimming Pool

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
OPERATING_PRESSURE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
NOZZLE_SIZE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
DISCHARGE_RATE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
RADIUS_THROW Double Filled with number Ex. 123
POPUP_HEIGHT Double Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
A High Criticality
C Low Criticality
C -
y
SERVICE_AREA_ID
MAINT_OWNERSHIP
C
String - 20
String - 20
Identifies the service area which the Asset belongs to

C
Q
IR_InLineDripSystem

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
C
1 Handedover
2 New
Q
then the year 9999
then the year 9999
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
CONDITIONS Integer Values to Fill Description

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
5 Not Operational
op V1
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
C -
y
FN Fountain
C GT
GU
Generator Room
Guard Room
C
HL Hard Landscape
Q
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
SW Swimming Pool

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
DRIP_LINE_MATERIAL String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
PRESSURE_RATING Double Filled with number Ex. 123
INST_SUBSURFACE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
EMITTER_SPACING String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
DISCHARGE_FLOWRATE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
P Pressure
MECHANISM_TYPE String - 2 C Compensating
C -
y
C
C
Q
IR_Bubblers

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New
then the year 9999
then the year 9999
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
op V1
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
C -
y
C FN
GT
Fountain
Generator Room
C
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
Q
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
SW Swimming Pool

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
NO_BUBBLERS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
OPERATING_PRESSURE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
S Stream
FLOW_TYPE String - 2 U Umbrella

P Pressure
op V1
MECHANISM_TYPE String - 2 C Compensating
C -
y
C
C
Q
IR_MotorisedValveAssembly

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
C
1 Handedover
2 New
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
5 Not Operational
op V1
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
C -
y
FN Fountain
C GT
GU
Generator Room
Guard Room
C
HL Hard Landscape
Q
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
SW Swimming Pool

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
ASSET_DIAMETER Double Filled with number Ex. 123
F Flanged
T Threaded
JOINT_TYPE String - 2 O Other
op V1
A High Criticality
C Low Criticality
C -
y
MAINT_OWNERSHIP C
C
Q
IR_QuickCouplingValveAssembly

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
CString - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
op V1
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
C -
y
C FN
GT
Fountain
Generator Room
C
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
Q
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
SW Swimming Pool

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
A High Criticality
C Low Criticality
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
IR_Sprinklers

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New
then the year 9999
then the year 9999
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
op V1
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
C -
y
C FN
GT
Fountain
Generator Room
C
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
Q
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
SW Swimming Pool

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
ROTOR_SIZE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
NO_SPRINKLERS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
NOZZLE_SIZE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
RADIUS_THROW Double Filled with number Ex. 123
TRAJECTORY_ANGLE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
POPUP_HEIGHT Double Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
A High Criticality
y
C B
C
Moderate Criticality
Low Criticality
C
Q
IR_StrainerAngles

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New
then the year 9999
then the year 9999
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
op V1
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
C -
y
C FN
GT
Fountain
Generator Room
C
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
Q
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
SW Swimming Pool

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
DIAMETER Double Filled with number Ex. 123
S Self
C Cleaning
SP Spin
FUNCTION String - 2 O Other
END_CONN String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
op V1
F Flanged
T Threaded
C -
y
FILTER_CARTRIDGES String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
BASKETS
MANUFACTURER
C
String - 20
String - 50
C
STAINER_SIZE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
PORT_SIZE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
Q
A High Criticality
C Low Criticality
IR_Valve

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New
then the year 9999
then the year 9999
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
op V1
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
C -
y
C FN
GT
Fountain
Generator Room
C
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
Q
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
SW Swimming Pool

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
VALVE_SIZE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
VALVE_NUMBER Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
COATING String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
COULER String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
op V1
A High Criticality
C -
C Low Criticality
y
CATEGORY
SERVICE_AREA_ID
C
String - 2
String - 20
Z Unknown
C
Q
IR_FlowMeter

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
C
1 Handedover
2 New
Q
then the year 9999
then the year 9999
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
5 Not Operational
op V1
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
C -
y
FN Fountain
C GT
GU
Generator Room
Guard Room
C
HL Hard Landscape
Q
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
SW Swimming Pool

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation

1 Normal
TYPE Integer 2 Electro
3 Vortex
4 Other
F Flanged
op V1
T Threaded
C -
y
C Values to Fill
A
Description
High Criticality
C
C Low Criticality
Q
IR_PumpingStation

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New
CHEMICALS_USED String - 10 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
CONSUMER_AC_NO_P String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
CONSUMER_AC_NO_W String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
CUR_TRANS_TYPE String - 30 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
DELIVERY_HEAD Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
DEOD_CAP String - 6 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
DEOD_TYPE String - 30 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
DESIGN_HS_LEVEL Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
1 Yes
2 No
ELECTRIC_SUB Integer 3 Unknown

1 Yes
2 No
EMER_WORK_FAC Integer 3 Unknown

1 Yes
FIRE_ALARM_EQUIP Integer 2 No
3 Unknown
HT_LT_SUPPLY String - 8 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
1 Yes
2 No
IC_A_PROG_MAIN Integer 3 Unknown
INVERT_DEPTH Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
IP_RATING String - 6 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
LIFTING_CAP String - 4 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
then the year 9999
LIFTING_L_I_DATE Date “9” is only numbers
C -
y
C 1
2
Daily
Weekly
C
3 Monthly
4 Quarterly
Q
5 Six Monthly
6 Annually
7 Planned Preventative Maintenance (PPM)
8 Not Applicable
LIFTING_MAIN_FREQ Integer 9 Other
LIFTING_MANUF String - 30 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
LIFTING_NUMBER String - 2 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
1 Yes
2 No
LIFTING_PROG_MAIN Integer 3 Unknown
LIFTING_TYPE String - 30 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
then the year 9999
MAC_L_I_DATE Date “9” is only numbers
1 Yes
2 No
MAC_PROG_MAIN Integer 3 Unknown
Small
NO_OF_PUMPS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
NO_OF_SETS String - 2 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
Small
OV_VOLT_PROT_DEV Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
Small
OXYGEN_PLANT_CAP Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
OXYGEN_PLANT_TYPE String - 25 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
then the year 9999
LAST_REFURB_DATE Date “9” is only numbers
PM_DIAM_LENGTH String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
PO_BOX_NO String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
op V1
PRES_TRANS_TYPE String - 30 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
Small
PROGRAMMED Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
PS_TOTAL_HEAD Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
C -
y
RAT_MAIN_INCOMER String - 30 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
SAL_METER_TYPE
TELEPHONE_FAX_NO
C
String - 20
String - 20
C
1 Sleeve
Q
2 Patch
3 Local Lining
4 Replacement Pipes
5 Bandseal Coupling
6 Joint Encapsulation
7 Other
TYPE_OF_REPAIR Integer 8 Not Applicable
then the year 9999
DATE_OF_REPAIR Date “9” is only numbers
DISCHARGE Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
1 Electromagnetic Flow Meter
2 Orifice Flow Meter
3 Rotar Flow Meter (Variable Area)
4 Pitot Tube Flow Meter
5 Duppler Flow Meter
6 Open Channel Venturi Flume
FLOW_MONITOR_TYPE Integer 7 Other
METHOD_OF_FIXING String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
FLOW_MONITOR_LOC String - 35 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
WATER_TABLE Integer Values to Fill Description
1 Above_Pipeline
2 Below_Pipeline
3 Varies
4 Not_Known

1 OK
2 Worn
op V1
3 Stuck
4 Rocking
5 Broken (New Needed)
6 Needs Reseating
C -
y
COVER_CONDITION Integer 7 Other
GRID C
C
B Booster
L Lift Station
Q
S Submersible
W Wet/Dry Well
E Ejector
PUMP_STATION_TYPE String - 2 O Other

V Valve
HPP Hand Operated Penstock
MP Motorised Penstock
OR Orifice Plate
FA Float Actuated Device
PS Pumps
SY Syphon
FLOW_CONTROL_TYPE String - 5 O Other

Horizontal axis
1
Vertical axis
2
Split case
3
Vertical Turbine
4
Submersible
5
Submersed Borehole
6
Diesel
TYPE Integer 7
Tractor
8
Other
9
TOTAL_CAPACITY Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
ULT_DAILY_CAPACITY Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
AVE_DAILY_CAPACITY Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
MIN_DAILY_CAPACITY Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
1 Yes
2 No
DISS_OXYGEN_INSTAL Integer 3 Unknown
C -
y
1 Yes
EMERGENCY_OVERFLOW
C
Integer
2
3
No
Unknown
C
1 Yes
Q
2 No
PROV_OF_OVER_PUMP Integer 3 Unknown

1 Temporary
2 Permanent
TYPE_OF_OVER_PUMPING Integer 3 Not Applicable

1 Yes
2 No
SALINITY_SAMPLE_PT Integer 3 Unknown

1 Yes
2 No
TELEMETRY_LINKED Integer 3 Unknown
TELEMETRY_TEL_NO Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
Small
MAX_DAY_HOURS_RUN Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
Small
AVE_DAY_HOURS_RUN Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
Small
MIN_DAY_HOURS_RUN Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
STANDBY_GEN_TYPE Integer Values to Fill Description
1 Fixed
2 Mobile

1 Yes
2 No
PROV_STANDBY_INCOM Integer 3 Unknown
Small
CAPACITY_OF_PSI Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
Small
TOTAL_INSTALLED_POWER Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
SERIAL_NUMBER String - 15 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
C -
1 Yes
y
SURGE
C
Integer
2
3
No
Unknown
C
1 Central
Q
2 Split
3 Window Type
4 None
AIR Integer 5 Other
Small
NO_OF_AC_UNITS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
1 Wall Mounted
2 Downward Mounted
3 Channel Mounted
4 Wall/Thimbel Mounted
PENSTOCK_TYPE Integer 5 Other

1 Yes
2 No
MACERATOR Integer 3 Unknown
SCREEN_TYPE String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
1 Yes
2 No
DISCHARGE_CHAMBER Integer 3 Unknown
CTRL_PANEL_MANUFAC String - 35 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
CTRL_PANEL_TYPE String - 30 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
1 Yes
2 No
PROGRAM_LOGIC_CTRL Integer 3 Unknown
op V1
1 Float Switch
2 Level Probes
3 Ultrasonic Unit
4 Capacitance Probe
C -
y
5 Hydrostatic Head
LEV_CTYPE C
Integer
Values to Fill
6 Other
Description
C
1 Fixed
2 Travelling Crane
Q
3 Davits
4 Traveller Block
CRANE_HOIST_TYPE Integer 5 Other
String -
REMARKS 255 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
A High Criticality
C Low Criticality
IR_EffluentStorageReservoir

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New
RESERVOIR_SIZE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
1 Steel
2 Reinforced Concrete
3 GRP
RESERVOIR_MATERIAL Integer 4 Other

1 Underground
2 Above Ground
RESERVOIR_POSITION Integer 3 Semi Buried

1 Effluent Distribution Centre (EDC)
RESERVOIR_TYPE Integer 2 Local Irrigation Reservoir (LIR)

1 Rectangular
2 Square
3 Circular
RESERVOIR_SHAPE Integer 4 Other
REHAB_TECHNIQUE String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
DT Double Triangular
CU Circular
ST Single Triangular
RT Rectangular
SQ Square
COVER_SHAPE String - 2 XX Other
op V1
A 545 mm x 370 mm
B 550 mm x 550 mm
C 600 mm x 600 mm
C -
y
D 610 mm x 610 mm
C E
F
675 mm x 675 mm
700 mm x 700 mm
C
G 750 mm x 600 mm
H 750 mm x 750 mm
Q
I 900 mm x 600 mm
J 900 mm x 900 mm
1220 mm x 675
K mm
1800 mm x 675
L mm
M 500 mm
N 600 mm
O 700 mm
P 800 mm
Q 900 mm
COVER_SIZE String - 5 R Other
Small
NUMBER_OF_PUMP Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
1 Water Booster
2 Sludge Pump
3 Submersible
4 Horizontal Centrifugal
5 Vertical Centrifugal
6 Archemedian Screw
7 Dry Mounted Submersible
PUMP_TYPE Integer 8 Dosing Pump
1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
STEPS_LADDER_COND String - 3 5 Not Operational
op V1
1 GRP
2 Galvanised Mild Steel
3 Aluminium
STEPS_LADDER_MAT Integer 4 Other
C -
y
C S
L
Step Irons Present
Ladder Present
C
B Both Steps and Ladder
X Other Means of Access
Q
STEPS_OR_LADDER String - 2 N None

1 Sleeve
2 Patch
3 Local Lining
4 Replacement Pipes
5 Bandseal Coupling
7 Other
A High Criticality
C Low Criticality
IR_ValvePullBoxes

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New
then the year 9999
then the year 9999
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
op V1
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
C -
y
C FN
GT
Fountain
Generator Room
C
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
Q
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
SW Swimming Pool

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
TENSILE_STRENGTH Double Filled with number Ex. 123
IP_RATING Double Filled with number Ex. 123
VP_SIZE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
A High Criticality
op V1
C Low Criticality
C -
y
C
C
Q
IR_Junction

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New

1 T Junction
2 Y Junction
3 Saddle
4 Radial Tee
TYPE_OF_JUNCTION Integer 5 Channel Drain Junction
A High Criticality
C Low Criticality

IR_AirValve

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New

1 Single
2 Double
VALVE_TYPE Integer 3 Other
CLOSE_VALVE_TIME Small Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
A Clockwise
C Anti-Clockwise
D Down
CLOSING_DIRECTION String - 2 O Other
NUMBER_OF_TURNS Small Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
1 Yes
2 No
OVERFLOW_VALVE Integer 3 Unknown

O Open
C Closed
NORMAL_POSITION String - 2 P Part Closed
1 Manual
2 Automatic
3 Geared
4 Actuated Remote
VALVE_OPERATION Integer 5 Other
op V1
PRESSURE_RATING String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
UPSTREAM_PRES String - 8 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
DOWNSTREAM_PRES String - 8 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
C -
y
1 GRP
SEALING_PLATE_MAT C
Integer
Values to Fill
2 Not Applicable
Description
C
1 Yes
2 No
Q
FLOW_METER Integer 3 Unknown

1 Yes
2 No
CUT_OFF_WALL Integer 3 Unknown
then the year 9999
NUMBER_OF_REPAIRS Small Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
1 Sleeve
2 Patch
3 Local Lining
4 Replacement Pipes
5 Bandseal Coupling
7 Other
MODEL_NUMBER String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
VALVECHAMBER_ID Double Filled with number Ex. 123
ASSET_CATEGORY String - 2 Values to Fill Description
C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
HL Hard Landscape
then the year 9999
op V1
then the year 9999
C -
y
C BH
CE
Beach
City Entrance
C
FA Facilities
FM Farm
Q
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
op V1
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
C -
y
SD Surface Drainage
C SW
PP
Swimming Pool
C
WP Well
Q
F Flanged
T Threaded
A High Criticality
C Low Criticality
IR_Hatchbox

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
C
1 Handedover
2 New
Q

CU Circular
RT Rectangular
SQ Square

1 Yes
2 No
COVER_HINGE Integer 3 Unknown

1 Yes
2 No
COVER_LOCKABLE Integer 3 Unknown

H Heavy
MH Medium Heavy
M Medium
COVER_DUTY String - 3 L Light
S Super Heavy Duty
XX Other

CI Cast Iron
DI Ductile Iron
SI Spun Iron
ST Steel
op V1
WO Wood
COVER_MATERIAL String - 2 GI Grey Iron

A 545 mm x 370 mm
C -
y
B 550 mm x 550 mm
C C
D
600 mm x 600 mm
610 mm x 610 mm
C
E 675 mm x 675 mm
F 700 mm x 700 mm
Q
G 750 mm x 600 mm
H 750 mm x 750 mm
I 900 mm x 600 mm
J 900 mm x 900 mm
1220 mm x 675
K mm
1800 mm x 675
L mm
M 500 mm
N 600 mm
O 700 mm
P 800 mm
Q 900 mm

SS Single Seal
DS Double Seal
LF Loose Fitting
RS Rubber Seal - Screwed Down
NA Not Applicable
COVER_SEAL String - 2 XX Other
COVER_CONDITION Integer Values to Fill Description

1 OK
2 Worn
3 Stuck
4 Rocking
6 Needs Reseating
7 Other
op V1
1 Solid
COVER_TYPE Integer 2 Grate
C -
then the year 9999
y
SURVEY_DATE Date “9” is only numbers
SURVEYED_BY C
C
S Satisfactory
A Action Required
Q
U Urgent Action Required
Z Unknown
BENCHING_CONDITION String - 3 N/A Not Applicable

S Satisfactory
A Action Required
Z Unknown
CHANNEL_CONDITION String - 3 N/A Not Applicable
SILT_DEPTH Small Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
1 Sleeve
2 Patch
3 Local Lining
4 Replacement Pipes
5 Bandseal Coupling
7 Other
CUT_OFF_WALL Integer Values to Fill Description
1 Yes
2 No
3 Unknown

Y Rodent Present
N No Rodent
RODENT String - 2 Z Unknown
op V1
1 GRP
SEALING_PLATE_MAT Integer 2 Not Applicable
C -
y
C CBH
CBS
CGRP
Concrete Blocks (Hollow)
Concrete Blocks (Solid)
Concrete with GRP Lining
C
CO Concrete (pre-cast/insitu)
CR Concrete Rings
Q
CS Concrete Segments
GRP GRP
U UVPC
CHAMBER_MATERIAL String - 5 X Other
CHAMBER_LENGTH Small Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
CHAMBER_WIDTH Small Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
CHAMBER_DIAMETER Small Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
CHAMB_LINER_THICK String - 25 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
FLOW_DEPTH_IN_CHAM Small Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
S Satisfactory
A Action Required
Z Unknown
CHAMBER_CONDITION String - 3 N/A Not Applicable

N None
R Reducing Slab
T Taper
SOFFIT_TYPE String - 2 X Other
1 Yes
2 No
SUMP Integer 3 Unknown
DESIGN_TEST_PRESS String - 8 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
DESIGN_WORK_PRES String - 8 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
HATCHBOX_MATERIAL Small Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
HATCHBOX_DIAMETER Small Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
1 Tyton
2 Bolted Gland
C -
y
3 Couplings
C 4
5
Coupling - Viking Johnson
Sleeve
C
6 Spigot - Socket
7 Spigot - Socket - Rubber Ring
Q
8 Spigot - Socket – Morta
9 Spigot - Socket - Tie Bar
10 Socket Fusion Welding
11 Clay
12 Flanged
13 Polypropylene Sleeve
14 Fixed Collar; Rolling
15 Push-Fit
16 Butt Welded
17 Welded Sleeve
18 Rebated Joints
19 Ogee Joints
20 Anchor Gasket
21 Tie Bar
22 Bell - Spigot Adhesive Joint
23 Rubber Seal Joints
24 Bell - Spigot Joints
25 Locked Joints
26 Repair Clamps
27 Stepped Coupling
JOINT_TYPE Integer 28 GRP Lamination
29 Double Bell Coupling
30 VJ Flange Adapter
31 Flange Joint
32 Bolted Fusion Welding
33 Teekay Pipe Coupling
34 Strub Flex Coupling
35 Other
op V1
NO_OF_CHAM_COVERS Small Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
NUMBER_OF_BOLTS Small Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
PIPE Small Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
C -
y
C A
B
High Criticality
C
C Low Criticality
Q
IR_WashoutChamber

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New

CU Circular
RT Rectangular
SQ Square

1 Yes
2 No

1 Yes
2 No

H Heavy
MH Medium Heavy
COVER_DUTY String - 3 M Medium
L Light
S Super Heavy Duty
XXX Other

CI Cast Iron
DI Ductile Iron
SI Spun Iron
op V1
ST Steel
WO Wood
C -
y
A 545 mm x 370 mm
C B
C
550 mm x 550 mm
600 mm x 600 mm
C
D 610 mm x 610 mm
E 675 mm x 675 mm
Q
F 700 mm x 700 mm
G 750 mm x 600 mm
H 750 mm x 750 mm
I 900 mm x 600 mm
J 900 mm x 900 mm
1220 mm x 675
K mm
1800 mm x 675
L mm
M 500 mm
N 600 mm
O 700 mm
P 800 mm
Q 900 mm

SS Single Seal
DS Double Seal
LF Loose Fitting
NA Not Applicable
1 OK
2 Worn
3 Stuck
4 Rocking
6 Needs Reseating
op V1

1 Solid
C -
y
SURVEY_DATE
SURVEYED_BY
DateC
String - 30
then the year 9999
C
S Satisfactory
Q
A Action Required
Z Unknown

S Satisfactory
A Action Required
Z Unknown
1 Sleeve
2 Patch
3 Local Lining
4 Replacement Pipes
5 Bandseal Coupling
7 Other
1 Yes
2 No

Y Rodent Present
N No Rodent
op V1

1 GRP
C -
y
C Values to Fill
CBH
CBS
Description
Concrete Blocks (Hollow)
Concrete Blocks (Solid)
C
CGRP Concrete with GRP Lining
Q
CR Concrete Rings
GRP GRP
U UVPC
B Bad Ground
CHAMBER_CONDITION String - 3 G Good Ground

N None
R Reducing Slab
T Taper

1 Yes
2 No
A High Criticality
C Low Criticality
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
IR_AccessOnlyChamber

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New

CU Circular
RT Rectangular
SQ Square

1 Yes
2 No

1 Yes
2 No

H Heavy
MH Medium Heavy
COVER_DUTY String - 3 M Medium
L Light
S Super Heavy Duty
XXX Other

CI Cast Iron
DI Ductile Iron
SI Spun Iron
op V1
ST Steel
WO Wood
C -
y
A 545 mm x 370 mm
C B
C
550 mm x 550 mm
600 mm x 600 mm
C
D 610 mm x 610 mm
E 675 mm x 675 mm
Q
F 700 mm x 700 mm
G 750 mm x 600 mm
H 750 mm x 750 mm
I 900 mm x 600 mm
J 900 mm x 900 mm
1220 mm x 675
K mm
1800 mm x 675
L mm
M 500 mm
N 600 mm
O 700 mm
P 800 mm
Q 900 mm

SS Single Seal
DS Double Seal
LF Loose Fitting
NA Not Applicable
1 OK
2 Worn
3 Stuck
4 Rocking
6 Needs Reseating
op V1

1 Solid
C -
y
SURVEY_DATE
SURVEYED_BY
DateC
String - 30
then the year 9999
C
S Satisfactory
Q
A Action Required
Z Unknown

S Satisfactory
A Action Required
Z Unknown
CBH Concrete Blocks (Hollow)
CBS Concrete Blocks (Solid)
CR Concrete Rings
GRP GRP
U UVPC
S Satisfactory
A Action Required
op V1
Z Unknown
C -
y
S Step Irons Present
C L
B
Ladder Present
Both Steps and Ladder
C
X Other Means of Access
STEPS_OR_LADDER String - 2 N None
Q
S Satisfactory
A Action Required
Z Unknown
STEPS_LADDER_COND String - 3 N/A Not Applicable

1 GRP
2 Galvanised Mild Steel
3 Aluminium
STEPS_LADDER_MAT Integer 4 Other

S Satisfactory
A Action Required
Z Unknown
SAFETY_CHAIN_COND String - 3 N/A Not Applicable

S Satisfactory
A Action Required
SAFETY_RAIL_COND String - 3 U Urgent Action Required
Z Unknown
N/A Not Applicable

N None
R Reducing Slab
T Taper
op V1
1 Yes
2 No
C -
y
C Values to Fill
S
A
Description
Satisfactory
Action Required
C
Z Unknown
Q
SIDE_ENTRY_COND String - 3 N/A Not Applicable

SIDE_ENTRY_HEIGHT Small Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
SIDE_ENTRY_WIDTH Small Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
1 Sleeve
2 Patch
3 Local Lining
4 Replacement Pipes
5 Bandseal Coupling
7 Other
1 Yes
2 No

Y Rodent Present
RODENT String - 2 N No Rodent
Z Unknown

1 GRP
GAS String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
1 Yes
op V1
2 No
INFILTRATION Integer 3 Unknown
C -
y
C A
B
C
High Criticality
Low Criticality
C
Q

IR_CappedEnd

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New

1 Cap End
2 Blank Flange
PIPE_END_TYPE Integer 3 Other
TYPE_OF_FITTING String - 30 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
A High Criticality
C Low Criticality
IR_SluiceValve

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New

1 Single
2 Double
A Clockwise
C Anti-Clockwise
D Down
1 Yes
2 No

O Open
C Closed
1 Manual
2 Automatic
3 Geared
4 Actuated Remote
op V1
C -
y
1 GRP
SEALING_PLATE_MAT C
Integer
Values to Fill
2 Not Applicable
Description
C
1 Yes
2 No
Q

1 Yes
2 No
then the year 9999
1 Sleeve
2 Patch
3 Local Lining
4 Replacement Pipes
5 Bandseal Coupling
7 Other
A High Criticality
C Low Criticality
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
IR_NonReturnValve

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New

1 Single
2 Double
A Clockwise
C Anti-Clockwise
D Down
1 Yes
2 No

O Open
C Closed
1 Manual
2 Automatic
3 Geared
4 Actuated Remote
op V1
C -
y
1 GRP
SEALING_PLATE_MAT C
Integer
Values to Fill
2 Not Applicable
Description
C
1 Yes
2 No
Q

1 Yes
2 No
then the year 9999
1 Sleeve
2 Patch
3 Local Lining
4 Replacement Pipes
5 Bandseal Coupling
7 Other
CATEGORY String - 2 Values to Fill Description

A High Criticality
C Low Criticality
Z Unknown
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
IR_IsolatingValve

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New

1 Single
2 Double
A Clockwise
C Anti-Clockwise
D Down
1 Yes
2 No

O Open
C Closed
1 Manual
2 Automatic
3 Geared
4 Actuated Remote
op V1
C -
y
1 GRP
SEALING_PLATE_MAT C
Integer
Values to Fill
2 Not Applicable
Description
C
1 Yes
2 No
Q

1 Yes
2 No
then the year 9999
1 Sleeve
2 Patch
3 Local Lining
4 Replacement Pipes
5 Bandseal Coupling
7 Other
ASSET_CATEGORY String - 2 Values to Fill Description
C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
HL Hard Landscape
then the year 9999
op V1
INSPECTION_DATE Date
C -
y
BH Beach
C CE
FA
City Entrance
Facilities
C
FM Farm
FO Forest
Q
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
PRESSURE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
F Flanged
T Threaded
A High Criticality
C Low Criticality
IR_PressureRegulatingValve

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New

PRV Pressure reducing
PSV Pressure sustaining
QRV Quick relief (pressure
relief)
FCV Flow control
PCV Pump control
GPV Other
VALVE_TYPE String - 3
A Clockwise
C Anti-Clockwise
D Down
1 Yes
2 No
NORMAL_POSITION String - 2 Values to Fill Description

O Open
C Closed
P Part Closed
1 Manual
2 Automatic
op V1
3 Geared
4 Actuated Remote
C -
y
DOWNSTREAM_PRES C
C
1 GRP
Q

1 Yes
2 No

1 Yes
2 No
1 Sleeve
2 Patch
3 Local Lining
4 Replacement Pipes
5 Bandseal Coupling
7 Other
C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
op V1
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
C -
y
INSPECTED_BY
C
C
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
SUB_ASSET_NAME String - 2 AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
op V1
PG Playground
C -
y
PS Pump Station
C RS
SL
Reservoir
Soft Landscape
C
SD Surface Drainage
Q
SW Swimming Pool
WP Well
F Flanged
T Threaded
A High Criticality
C Low Criticality
IR_CentralControlSystem

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New
then the year 9999
then the year 9999
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
op V1
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
C -
y
C FN
GT
Fountain
Generator Room
C
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
Q
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
SW Swimming Pool

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
OPERATING_SYSTEM String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
SOFTWARE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
COMM_PROTOCOL String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
INTERFACE_UNIT String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
ASSET_LANGUAGE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
ARCHITECTURE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
COMP_SYS_CONFIG String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
op V1
A High Criticality
C Low Criticality
C -
Z Unknown
y
CATEGORY String - 2
SERVICE_AREA_ID
MAINT_OWNERSHIP
C
String - 20
String - 20
C
Q
IR_Fitting

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New
then the year 9999
then the year 9999
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
op V1
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
C -
y
C FN
GT
Fountain
Generator Room
C
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
Q
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
SW Swimming Pool

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
FITTING_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
FITTING_SIZE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
FITTING_NO String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
COLOUR String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
op V1
A High Criticality
C -
C Low Criticality
y
CATEGORY
SERVICE_AREA_ID
C
String - 2
String - 20
Z Unknown
C
Q
IR_SolenoidValveAssembly

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
op V1
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
C -
y
C FN
GT
Fountain
Generator Room
C
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
Q
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
SW Swimming Pool

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
A High Criticality
op V1
C Low Criticality
C -
y
C
C
Q
IR_EndFlushValveAssembly

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
op V1
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
C -
y
C FN
GT
Fountain
Generator Room
C
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
Q
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
SW Swimming Pool

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
ASSEMBLY_TYPE String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
A High Criticality
op V1
C Low Criticality
C -
y
C
C
Q
IR_ThrustBlock

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New
ASSET_REFERENCE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
1 Al Batteen_Zone 1
2 Al Khathem_Mainland
3 Al Marfa_External
4 Al Samha_Mainland
5 Al Shahama_Mainland
6 Al Sila_External
7 Al Zafran_Zone 2
8 Baniyas_Mainland
9 Dalma Island_External
10 Ghayati - Bida Zayed_External
11 International Airport_Mainland
12 Meena Zayed_Zone 1
13 Mussafah_Zone 6
14 Other_Not Known
15 Swaihan_Mainland
16 Umm Al Nar_Mainland
AREA_ZONE Integer 17 Zayed City Liwa-Baynoona_External
then the year 9999
DATE_DIGITISED Date “9” is only numbers
DIGITISED_BY String - 15 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
13 IR_EffluentStorageReservoir
15 IR_FlowMeter
26 IR_IrrigationPressureMain
op V1
24 SW_Inlet
39 SW_PetrolInterceptor
51 SW_Stormwatermain
54 SW_SpecialPurposeChamber
C -
y
FACILITY_ATTACHED_TO Integer 29 SW_ManholeChamber
DRAWING_NUMBER
C
then the year 9999
C
Q
1 Sleeve
2 Patch
3 Local Lining
4 Replacement Pipes
5 Bandseal Coupling
7 Other

S Surface Water
I Irrigation
T Trade Effluent
SWO Surface Water Overflow
IO Irrigation Overflow
WW Waste Water Treatment
OX Oxygen Injection

U Under Construction
C Commissioned
OPERATIONAL_STATUS String - 3 A Abandoned
O Out of Commission
TMP Temporary
PLN Planned
EXT Existing and in Use
EXF Existing but not in Use
AS Access
OT Other
op V1
A Horizontal
THRUST_BLOCK_TYPE String - 5 B Vertical
DEGREE_OF_BEND String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
C -
y
IRPRESSUREMAINID Double Filled with number Ex. 123
REMARKS C
C
A High Criticality
Q
C Low Criticality
IR_Actuator

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
op V1
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
C -
y
C FN
GT
Fountain
Generator Room
C
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
Q
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
SW Swimming Pool

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
SWITCHBOARD_CONTROL_PANEL String - 3 Values to Fill Description
RS RESERVOIR
PS PUMP STATION
BS BOOSTER STATION
IN IRRIGATION NETWORK
FN FOUNTAINS
op V1
POWER Double Filled with number Ex. 123
IP_RATING String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
VOLTAGE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
C -
y
MANUFACTURER
REMARKS
C
String - 20
String - 255
C
A High Criticality
Q
C Low Criticality
IR_ControlCablesConduit

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New
then the year 9999
then the year 9999
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
op V1
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
C -
y
C FN
GT
Fountain
Generator Room
C
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
Q
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
SW Swimming Pool

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
PIPE_MATERIAL String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
A High Criticality
op V1
C Low Criticality
C -
y
C
C
Q
IR_IrrigationPressureMain

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New
C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
MAIN_ASSET_NAME String - 2 FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
WR Water Resource
op V1
1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
C -
y
4 Poor
CONDITIONS
CMMS_ITEM_ID
C
Integer
Integer
5 Not Operational
C
AH Animal Husbandry
Q
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
SW Swimming Pool

PIPE_TYPE Integer 1 Solid Pipe
2 Perforated Pipe

LDPE
1
MDPE
2
HDPE
3
PVC
4
Asbestos
op V1
5
Carbon steel
6
Stainless steel
7
GRP
8
C -
Other
PIPE_MATERIAL Integer 9
y
C Values to Fill Description
C
1 Class L
2 Class M
3 Class H
Q
4 1.0
5 2.5
6 6.0
7 10
8 16
PIPE_CLASS Integer 9 Other
1 Sleeve
2 Patch
3 Local Lining
4 Replacement Pipes
5 Bandseal Coupling
7 Other
REPAIR_LOCATION Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
AREA_SERVED String - 40 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
M Main Distribution
S Secondary Distribution
L Local Distribution
T Transmission
IRRIGATE_PIPE_FUNC String - 2 W Washout
op V1
Pressure Main
1
Gravity Main
2
Local Supply Line
3
C -
Abandoned Line
4
y
SUBTYPE
C
Integer
Values to Fill
5
Other Line
Description
C
1 Tyton
2 Bolted Gland
Q
3 Couplings
4 Coupling - Viking Johnson
5 Sleeve
6 Spigot - Socket
7 Spigot - Socket - Rubber Ring
8 Spigot - Socket – Morta
9 Spigot - Socket - Tie Bar
10 Socket Fusion Welding
11 Clay
12 Flanged
13 Polypropylene Sleeve
14 Fixed Collar; Rolling
15 Push-Fit
16 Butt Welded
17 Welded Sleeve
18 Rebated Joints
19 Ogee Joints
20 Anchor Gasket
21 Tie Bar
22 Bell - Spigot Adhesive Joint
JOINT_TYPE Integer 23 Rubber Seal Joints
24 Bell - Spigot Joints
25 Locked Joints
26 Repair Clamps
27 Stepped Coupling
28 GRP Lamination
29 Double Bell Coupling
30 VJ Flange Adapter
op V1
31 Flange Joint
32 Bolted Fusion Welding
33 Teekay Pipe Coupling
34 Strub Flex Coupling
C -
y
35 Other
DESIGN_TEST_PRES
DESIGN_WORK_PRES
C
String - 8
String - 8
C
1 Yes
Q
2 No
EXFILTRATION Integer 3 Unknown
MAN_TEST_PRES String - 8 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
AVG_DEPTH Double Filled with number Ex. 123
PN String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
PIPE_MANUFACTURER String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
PIPE_SUPPLIER String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
NO_VALVECHAMBERS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
MARKERPOST_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
NO_MARKERPOSTS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
PSTN_FEED String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
RESERVOIR_FEED String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
OLD_IPID Double Filled with number Ex. 123
CATEGORY String - 2 A High Criticality
C Low Criticality
Z Unknown
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
IR_VentPipe

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New
ASSET_REFERENCE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
1 Al Batteen_Zone 1
2 Al Khathem_Mainland
3 Al Marfa_External
4 Al Samha_Mainland
5 Al Shahama_Mainland
6 Al Sila_External
7 Al Zafran_Zone 2
8 Baniyas_Mainland
9 Dalma Island_External
10 Ghayati - Bida Zayed_External
11 International Airport_Mainland
12 Meena Zayed_Zone 1
13 Mussafah_Zone 6
14 Other_Not Known
15 Swaihan_Mainland
16 Umm Al Nar_Mainland
AREA_ZONE Integer 17 Zayed City Liwa-Baynoona_External
then the year 9999
DATE_CONST_INSTALL Date “9” is only numbers
then the year 9999
LAST_INSPECT_DATE Date “9” is only numbers
1 Daily
2 Weekly
op V1
3 Monthly
4 Quarterly
5 Six Monthly
6 Annually
C -
y
7 Planned Preventative Maintenance (PPM)
MAINT_FREQUENCY
C
Integer
8
9
Not Applicable
Other
C
REG_MAINT_TYPE String - 25 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
then the year 9999
Q
DATE_DIGITISED Date “9” is only numbers
DIGITISED_BY String - 15 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
13 IR_EffluentStorageReservoir
15 IR_FlowMeter
26 IR_IrrigationPressureMain
24 SW_Inlet
39 SW_PetrolInterceptor
51 SW_Stormwatermain
54 SW_SpecialPurposeChamber
FACILITY_ATTACHED_TO Integer 29 SW_ManholeChamber
DRAWING_NUMBER String - 25 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
then the year 9999
1 Sleeve
2 Patch
3 Local Lining
4 Replacement Pipes
5 Bandseal Coupling
TYPE_OF_REPAIR Integer 6 Joint Encapsulation
7 Other
8 Not Applicable

U Under Construction
C Commissioned
A Abandoned
O Out of Commission
op V1
TMP Temporary
PLN Planned
EXT Existing and in Use
EXF Existing but not in Use
C -
y
AS Access
OPERATIONAL_STATUS C
String - 3 OT
Values to Fill
Other
Description
C
S Surface Water
I Irrigation
Q
T Trade Effluent
SWO Surface Water Overflow
IO Irrigation Overflow
WW Waste Water Treatment
OX Oxygen Injection

A Survey Information
B As Built Drawings
D Other Sources
LOCATION_CONF_FLAG String - 2 C Old_TPD
NOMINAL_DIAMETER Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
PIPE_MATERIAL String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
1 Column
2 Surface_Grill
3 Pipe
VENTING Integer 4 Other
CATEGORY String - 2 A High Criticality
C Low Criticality
Z Unknown
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
IR_PumpStationStructure

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New
then the year 9999
then the year 9999
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
op V1
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
C -
y
C FN
GT
Fountain
Generator Room
C
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
Q
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
SW Swimming Pool

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
SLABCOVER_TYPE String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
COVERFRAME_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
op V1
C -
AIR_VENT String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
y
TELEMETRY
CUTIN_PRESSURE
C
String - 20
String - 20
C
PUMP_START_LVL String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
PUMP_STOP_LVL String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
Q
CTRL_RESERVOIR String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
A High Criticality
C Low Criticality
IR_FittingPoly

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New
then the year 9999
then the year 9999
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
op V1
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
C -
y
C FN
GT
Fountain
Generator Room
C
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
Q
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
SW Swimming Pool

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
FITTING_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
FITTING_SIZE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
MAKE_MODEL String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
FITTING_NO String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
COLOUR String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
op V1
A High Criticality
C -
C Low Criticality
y
CATEGORY
SERVICE_AREA_ID
C
String - 2
String - 20
Z Unknown
C
Q
IR_ReservoirStructure

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New
then the year 9999
then the year 9999
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape
1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
op V1
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
C -
y
C FN
GT
Fountain
Generator Room
C
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
Q
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
SW Swimming Pool

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
CAPACITY Double Filled with number Ex. 123
AVG_DEPTH Double Filled with number Ex. 123
AVG_TOP_SLEVEL Double Filled with number Ex. 123
AVG_GLEVEL Double Filled with number Ex. 123
WALL_THICKNESS Double Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
OVERFLOW_DIA Double Filled with number Ex. 123
INLET_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
INLET_SOURCE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
OUTLET_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
C -
OUTLET_SOURCE String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
y
LADDER
AIR_VENT
C
String - 20
String - 20
C
TSE
Q
1
Desalinated
2
Ground water
3
Mixed
WATER_TYPE Integer 4
INLET_DIA String - 255 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
OUTLET_DIA String - 255 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123

Steel
1
Reinforced Concrete
2
GRP
3
Other
MATERIAL_TYPE Integer 4

A High Criticality
C Low Criticality
RESERVOIR_POSITION Integer 1 Underground
2 Above Ground
3 Semi Buried

1 Effluent Distribution Centre (EDC)
RESERVOIR_TYPE Integer 2 Local Irrigation Reservoir (LIR)

1 Rectangular
op V1
2 Square
3 Circular
RESERVOIR_SHAPE Integer 4 Other
C -
y
C
C
Q
IR_DripEmitters

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
C
1 Handedover
2 New
Q
then the year 9999
then the year 9999
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
5 Not Operational
op V1
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
C -
y
FN Fountain
C GT
GU
Generator Room
Guard Room
C
HL Hard Landscape
Q
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
SW Swimming Pool

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
DRIP_SIZE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
NO_EMITTERS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
OUTLET_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
BODY_TYPE String - 50 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
OPERATING_PRESSURE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
PRESSURE_COMP String - 10 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
op V1
A High Criticality
C Low Criticality
C -
Z Unknown
y
CATEGORY String - 2
SERVICE_AREA_ID
MAINT_OWNERSHIP
C
String - 20
String - 20
C
Q
IR_ValveChamber

0 0
1 1
2 2
op V1
3 3
4 4
STATE Integer 5 5
C -
y
CONTRACTNO
OM_CONTRACTNO
C
String - 50
String - 50
C
1 Handedover
Q
2 New

CBH Concrete Blocks (Hollow)
CBS Concrete Blocks (Solid)
CR Concrete Rings
GRP GRP
U UVPC
S Satisfactory
A Action Required
Z Unknown
1 Yes
2 No

CU Circular
op V1
RT Rectangular
SQ Square
C -
y
C 1
2
Yes
No
C

Q
1 Yes
2 No

H Heavy
MH Medium Heavy
M Medium
L Light
S Super Heavy Duty
COVER_DUTY String - 5 XXX Other

CI Cast Iron
DI Ductile Iron
SI Spun Iron
ST Steel
WO Wood

A 545 mm x 370 mm
COVER_SIZE String - 5 B 550 mm x 550 mm
C 600 mm x 600 mm
D 610 mm x 610 mm
E 675 mm x 675 mm
F 700 mm x 700 mm
G 750 mm x 600 mm
H 750 mm x 750 mm
I 900 mm x 600 mm
op V1
J 900 mm x 900 mm
1220 mm x 675
K mm
1800 mm x 675
L mm
C -
M 500 mm
y
C N
O
600 mm
700 mm
C
P 800 mm
Q 900 mm
Q
R Other

1 OK
2 Worn
3 Stuck
4 Rocking
6 Needs Reseating

SS Single Seal
DS Double Seal
LF Loose Fitting
NA Not Applicable

1 Yes
2 No
1 GRP

N None
R Reducing Slab
T Taper
op V1

Y Rodent Present
N No Rodent
C -
y
C Values to Fill
1
Description
Sleeve
C
2 Patch
3 Local Lining
Q
4 Replacement Pipes
5 Bandseal Coupling
7 Other
S Satisfactory
A Action Required
Z Unknown

S Satisfactory
A Action Required
Z Unknown
SURVEYED_BY String - 30 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
then the year 9999
SURVEY_DATE Date “9” is only numbers
C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
op V1
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
C -
then the year 9999
y
INSPECTED_BY C
C
then the year 9999
Q
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
FA Facilities
FM Farm
FO Forest
GR Garden
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
SUB_ASSET_NAME String - 2 AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GT Generator Room
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
op V1
PG Playground
C -
y
PS Pump Station
C RS
SL
Reservoir
Soft Landscape
C
SD Surface Drainage
Q
SW Swimming Pool
WP Well
AVG_TOPSLVL Double Filled with number Ex. 123
COVER_LEVEL Double Filled with number Ex. 123
BOTTOM_LEVEL Double Filled with number Ex. 123
LADDER String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
COVER_FRAMENO String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
MARKER_POST String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
GRAB_BAR String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
AIR_VENT String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
A High Criticality
CATEGORY String - 2 C Low Criticality
Z Unknown
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
14. Soft Landscape Attributes
FeaturePlant

CONSTRUCTION_DATE Date then the year 9999 . “9” is a number between 0..9
op V1
INSPECTION_DATE Date then the year 9999 . “9” is a number between 0..9
BH Beach
C -
y
CE City Entrance
C FA
FM
Facilities
Farm
C
FO Forest
GR Garden
Q
HP Hospital
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
ASSET_CATEGORY String - 2 AH Animal Husbandry
SI Single
GR Group
CR Climber
HG Hanging
RK Rockery
PURPOSE String - 2 AQ Aquatic
OVERALL_LENGTH Double Filled with number Ex. 123
NO_PLANTS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Palm

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
FO
Facilities
Farm
Forest
C
GR Garden
HP Hospital
Q
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation

FO Forest
FR Fruit
TYPE String - 3 ORM Ornamental
M Male
GENDER String - 2 F Female
DATE_PALM_VARIETY Date then the year 9999 . “9” is a number between 0..9
FRUIT_SEASON Integer Values to Fill Description
1 Early
2 Intermediate
3 Late
OVERALL_HEIGHT Double Filled with number Ex. 123
CLEAR_TRUNK_HEIGHT Double Filled with number Ex. 123
CANOPY_DIAMETER Double Filled with number Ex. 123
NO_TREES Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Tree

CONSTRUCTION_DATE Date 99, then the year 9999 . “9” is a number between 0..9
op V1
INSPECTION_DATE Date 99, then the year 9999 . “9” is a number between 0..9
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
FO
Facilities
Farm
Forest
C
GR Garden
HP Hospital
Q
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation

FO Forest
FR Fruit
VARIETY String - 20
CALLIPER_1M_TRUNK_HEIGH
T Double Filled with number Ex. 123
String -
REMARKS 255 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
NO_TREES Double Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Shrub

Filled with this format 99/99/9999, start with day 99, then month 99, then
CONSTRUCTION_DATE Date the year 9999 . “9” is a number between 0..9
op V1
INSPECTION_DATE Date the year 9999 . “9” is a number between 0..9
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
FO
Facilities
Farm
Forest
C
GR Garden
HP Hospital
Q
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q
C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
SI Single
GR Group
CR Climber
HG Hanging
RK Rockery
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
LawnGrassEdge

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
FO
Facilities
Farm
Forest
C
GR Garden
HP Hospital
Q
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
1 YES
EDGE Integer 2 NO
MATER_TYPE String - 10 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
ASSET_WIDTH Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
ASSET_LENGTH Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Hedge

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
FO
Facilities
Farm
Forest
C
GR Garden
HP Hospital
Q
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
TreePoly

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
FO
Facilities
Farm
Forest
C
GR Garden
HP Hospital
Q
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation

FO Forest
FR Fruit
VARIETY String - 20
CALLIPER_1M_TRUNK_HEIGHT Double Filled with number Ex. 123
String - Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
REMARKS 255
NO_OF_GOOD String - 50
NO_OF_NOTOPERATIONAL String - 50
NO_OF_FAIR String - 50
NO_OF_POOR String - 50
OTHERS String - 50
ARAK Double Filled with number Ex. 123
ARTA Double Filled with number Ex. 123
CASUARINA Double Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
CATAPA Double Filled with number Ex. 123
CHICO Double Filled with number Ex. 123
CITRUS Double Filled with number Ex. 123
CODRIA Double Filled with number Ex. 123
C -
DAFLAH Double Filled with number Ex. 123
y
DAMAS
DODONAEA
CDouble
Double
C
FICUS Double Filled with number Ex. 123
GASORIN Double Filled with number Ex. 123
Q
GHAF Double Filled with number Ex. 123
GRAF_MERIA Double Filled with number Ex. 123
GUAFA Double Filled with number Ex. 123
HENNA Double Filled with number Ex. 123
HIBISCUS Double Filled with number Ex. 123
HOPBUSH Double Filled with number Ex. 123
JAM Double Filled with number Ex. 123
JAMBOZA Double Filled with number Ex. 123
JATROPHA Double Filled with number Ex. 123
JAMOUN Double Filled with number Ex. 123
JOHANAMIYA Double Filled with number Ex. 123
KAFOOR Double Filled with number Ex. 123
LANTANA Double Filled with number Ex. 123
LIMON Double Filled with number Ex. 123
LOZE Double Filled with number Ex. 123
MANGO Double Filled with number Ex. 123
MORINGA Double Filled with number Ex. 123
MOROKH Double Filled with number Ex. 123
NARGIL Double Filled with number Ex. 123
NEEM Double Filled with number Ex. 123
PONGAMIA Double Filled with number Ex. 123
ROMAN Double Filled with number Ex. 123
SABAR_HIND Double Filled with number Ex. 123
SALAM Double Filled with number Ex. 123
SAMAR Double Filled with number Ex. 123
SIDER Double Filled with number Ex. 123
TALAH Double Filled with number Ex. 123
TAMAR_HIND Double Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
TECOMA Double Filled with number Ex. 123
TEEN Double Filled with number Ex. 123
TEEN_BENGA Double Filled with number Ex. 123
TOOT Double Filled with number Ex. 123
C -
ZAYTOON Double Filled with number Ex. 123
y
AREA 255 C
String -
String -

C
NO_OF_EXCELLENT 255
POTTED_PLA 255
Q
DEAD_TREES 255
ALIVE_TREES 255
EMPTY_TREES 255
NO_TREES String - 50
LawnGrass

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
FO
Facilities
Farm
Forest
C
GR Garden
HP Hospital
Q
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
FeaturePlantPoly

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
FO
Facilities
Farm
Forest
C
GR Garden
HP Hospital
Q
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
SI Single
GR Group
CR Climber
HG Hanging
RK Rockery
OVERALL_LENGTH Double Filled with number Ex. 123
NO_PLANTS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
PalmPoly

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
FO
Facilities
Farm
Forest
C
GR Garden
HP Hospital
Q
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation

FO Forest
FR Fruit
DATE_PALM_VARIETY Date then the year 9999 . “9” is a number between 0..9
1 Early
2 Intermediate
FRUITING_SEASON Integer 3 Late
CLEAR_TRUNK_HEIGHT Double Filled with number Ex. 123
DEADTREE String - 80
EMPTYPETS String - 80
OMITTEDTREE String - 80
op V1
OMITTEDPETS String - 80
AREASQM String - 100
C -
GENDER String - 10
y
C
C
Q
ShrubPoly

op V1
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
C -
FA Facilities
y
C FM
FO
Farm
Forest
C
GR Garden
HP Hospital
Q
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GT Generator Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
op V1
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
SW Swimming Pool
C -
y
UNIQUE_ID
C
Double
WP
Well
C
Q
C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation

SI Single
GR Group
CR Climber
HG Hanging
RK Rockery
NO_SHRUBS Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
C -
y
C
C
Q
Hedge_Poly

op V1
C -
y
COMMON_NAME
LOCAL_NAME
ASSET_LENGTH
C
String - 50
String - 50
String - 20
C
Q
ORGID String - 20
SITEID String - 20
AREA_NAME String - 50
STREET_NAME String - 50
ASSET_PICTURE String - 50
COMMENTS String - 255
ASSET_ITEM_NO Small Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
POLYGON_NUM String - 50
SECTOR_NUMBER String - 50
ZONE_NUMBER String - 50
COMMENTS_DATA String - 255
TYPE String - 50
ASSET_LENGTH_1 Double Filled with number Ex. 123
ForestArea

op V1
BH Beach
C -
CE City Entrance
y
C FA
FM
FO
Facilities
Farm
Forest
C
GR Garden
HP Hospital
Q
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GU Guard Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
op V1
RS Reservoir
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
C -
y
SW Swimming Pool
C PP
WP
Well
C
Q

C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
GAZELLE_TYPE String - 20 Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
GAZELLE_NO Integer Filled with number Ex. 123
AGE_DISTRIBUTION String - 20
FODDER_REQ String - 20
MEDICAL_REQ String - 20
SeasonalFlowers

op V1
BH Beach
CE City Entrance
C -
FA Facilities
y
C FM
FO
Farm
Forest
C
GR Garden
HP Hospital
Q
IC Inter-Change
ME Median
PA Palace
ST Streetscape

1 Excellent
2 Good
3 Fair
4 Poor
AH Animal Husbandry
BS Booster Station
CS Civil Structure
FN Fountain
GT Generator Room
HL Hard Landscape
PG Playground
PS Pump Station
RS Reservoir
op V1
SL Soft Landscape
SD Surface Drainage
SW Swimming Pool
C -
y
UNIQUE_ID
C
Double
WP
Well
C
Q
C Civil
E Electrical
M Mechanical
SL soft Landscape
IR Irrigation
S Single
CONFIGURATION String - 2 G Group

S Summer
W Winter
SEASON String - 2 P Perennial
Tables to be provided
ASSET_MASTER_TABLE

ASSET_ID NUMBER Filled with number Ex. 123
op V1
ZONE_NO String - 15
ZONE_NAME String - 50
ASSET_NAME String - 150
C -
y
CONSTRUCTION_DATE
C
DATE
then month 99, then the year 9999 . “9” is a number
between 0..9
C
then month 99, then the year 9999 . “9” is a number
Q
INSPECTION_DATE DATE between 0..9
ASSET_COMMENTS String - 1000
ASSET_RATING String - 50
ASSET_REM_LIFE String - 50
ASSET_CONDITION String - 15
EASTING_PT String - 200
NORTHING_PT String - 200
ELEVATION_PT String - 50
ASSET_COST NUMBER Filled with number Ex. 123
ASSET_USE String - 500
ASSET_IMPORTANCE String - 500
ASSET_CRITICAL String - 25
ASSET_AGE String - 25
CONSULTANT_NAME String - 250
LAYER_NAME String - 200
MAPTAB_NAME String - 100
ASSET_UNIT String - 100
ASSET_QUANTITY NUMBER Filled with number Ex. 123
ASSET_TYPE String - (100) Filled with either letters or number Ex. ABC123
15. Bulk load tool
Bulk load tool is an application that gives Abu Dhabi Department of Municipal
Affairs and Transport(AD DMAT) with the ability to load contracts data coming
from their assigned contractors and put the workflow on how the loading should
be carried out based on define standards and on a developed tool to make it as
per Geodatabase Data Model approved by AD DMAT. This workflow will allow
reading a specific variety of vector GIS formats. While there are many transfer
formats for vector, there are almost no transfer formats for final map project files
op V1
(e.g. .mxd, .map extensions). There are usually ways to export project files to a
transfer format, but these ways almost always result in lost data/information.
C -
Digital Map Formats
y
C
The term file format refers to the logical structure used to store information in a
GIS file. File formats are important in part because not every GIS software
C
package supports all formats.
Q
Almost every GIS has its own internal file format. These formats are designed for
optimal use inside the software and are often proprietary. They are not designed
for use outside their native systems. Most systems also support transfer file
formats. Transfer formats are designed to bring data in and out of the GIS
software, so they are usually standardized and well documented.
Vector Formats Supported

Many GIS applications are based on vector technology, so vector formats are the
most common. They are also the most complex because there are many ways to
store coordinates, attributes, attribute linkages, database structures, and display
information. The following are the data formats allowed by the contractors briefly
described below.
AutoCAD" Drawing Files (DWG). DWG is the internal, proprietary format used in
AutoCAD® software, which is a computer-aided design/drafting (CAD) program.
Despite its proprietary nature, there are a number of ways to store attribute
information in DWG files. The emerging standard is one that uses Extended Entity
Data (EED) to link attributes, but many others are possible. However, the lack of
one standard for linking attributes can cause problems when data is transferred
between systems.
GIS Software Choices
This solution will focus on using the following software’s and libraries to develop
the bulk-loading tool.
ESRI GIS software:
 ArcGIS Desktop “ArcEditor License”

 FME Desktop “ESRI License”
op V1
 Microsoft Access
C -
y
Bulk-Loading Workflow
C
C
In general perspective CAD data needs to be loaded as per current structure in
Geodatabase Data Model
Q
Steps for converting CAD to Geodatabase format:
Step1: Begin Metadata Documentation
Record all information available regarding the CAD drawing's author, technician, source,
name, scale, date, surveyor, coordinates, extents, layer names and descriptions, horizontal
level of accuracy, etc. This information should then be recorded in the subsequent GIS
metadata document, following Federal Geographic Data Committee (FGDC) guidelines.
Much of this information may be shown in the drawing's title block or notes.
This will include the following information
The drawing contains the following information:

 Company name, address, and phone number.
 The name and internal reference number for the drawing.
 The location of the drawing (address, town, state).
 The date the drawing was completed.
 The time period the drawing represents.
 Sources of original survey or other sources that informed the CAD drawing.
 The coordinate system, scale, and direction of the drawing.
Step2: Add CAD files to ArcGIS Dataview

CAD drawings can be immediately displayed in ArcGIS. This step does not create GIS
data; it only displays CAD data in the GIS dataview.
In ArcMap, add the CAD .dwg file to be converted, using the Add Data button. When
browsing for the CAD file, two files of the same name will appear. The first, displayed as
a light-blue icon, is a “CAD feature data set”, which will convert the CAD file into point,
polyline, polygon, and annotation objects (Polygons are created from CAD's closed poly-
lines. Annotation is created from CAD text). The second, displayed as a white icon, is the
op V1
simple CAD line drawing. In this file, text and polygons will read as line work only, and
there will be no associated attributes for any objects.
C -
y
C
Step3: Make Sure of the Coordinate System
In some cases, the original CAD drawing was created using a defined coordinate
C
system but ArcGIS is not recognizing it. ArcGIS have the tools, which will allow
you to define the coordinate system as it’s coming from the contractor.
Q
The coordinate that must exists on the data is “WGS_1984_UTM_Zone_40N”

other than that it will be rejected.
Step4: Check on the mapping structure to match CAD standards
Layers are organized to contain only the objects, which pertain to the layer, with
no extraneous objects or stray elements.
The values of these fields should match the one agreed in the CAD-Geodatabase
documentation.
The CAD should be checked to be maintained with the agreed list of attributes that should
be provided in Access format, taking into account the structure of fields in the Access, like
number, text, date, others.
CAD File
FME
Workbench Intermediate
Script Geodatabase
Access File
The linking of fields will be matched by using CAD generated attribute value called
Handle number.
Bulk-Loading tool will perform the following operation
 Check the existence of CAD and Access file for each contract
 Summary report of number of features in CAD and number of features in Access
and how many possible joins and dis-joins
 Summary report of number of features in CAD and number of features in Asset
op V1
Master table stored in Access
 Make sure of the existence of critical fields like “Asset Code”, “Unique ID”,
“Related Asset ID”, etc. those fields that will be used in the relationship process
C -
 Make sure that the relationship is one to one record between CAD feature and
y

C
Access file and one to one with the Asset Master Table
Match the filtering data with the correct empty schema of the database model
C
“Intermediate Geodatabase” and perform the load using FME Workbench script.
 Load data from CAD and Access as per the filters, geometry, domains and
Q
subtypes
 Load the Asset Master table to the Intermediate Geodatabase
 Generate report explaining number of features read and number of features written.
Error Detection
 Detect the difference in Geometry structures, as points cannot be loaded to

polygon features. Report will be generated automatically from FME.
 Detect the difference in Attribute structures, as text attributes cannot be loaded to
number attributes. Report will be generated automatically from FME.
 Detect the difference in formats, as date should be written in specific way other
than that it will be rejected. Report will be generated automatically from FME.
 Domains should follow the standards, if new values entered they will be loaded but
not recognized by the system till modified in model or in value
Loading Intermediate Geodatabase to ArcSDE Geodatabase

FME
Intermediate Workbench ArcSDE
Geodatabase Script Geodatabase
This
op V1
will be a more like straight forward stage as the intermediate Geodatabase will be an identical
schema to final production ArcSDE Geodatabase all layers explained before in the CAD
conversion will be loaded using FME workbench script to the final ArcSDE Geodatabase but
these steps should be taken before the loading starts
C -
y
 C
Make sure that data is not registered as versioned, in case its registered then data must be
changed to un-versioned state
C
 Irrigation network must be deleted, loading cannot be performed is network features exists,
network must be deleted and created manually.
Q
 Storm network must be deleted, loading cannot be performed is network features exists,
network must be deleted and created manually.
 Make sure no one is connected to the database during the loading process
 Make sure of taking a backup of database and Geodatabase before the loading of data
 Maintain FME script for history tracking of how many features read and how many are
written

WA-725-3 - Irrigation Manual (Volume III) Technical Specifications

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

WA-725-3 - Irrigation Manual (Volume III) Technical Specifications

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Q

Document No: TR-511

TOC PAGE I FIRST EDITION - DECEMBER 2016

ABBREVIATION PAGE II FIRST EDITION - DECEMBER 2016

ABBREVIATION PAGE III FIRST EDITION - DECEMBER 2016

SRC Sulphate Resisting Cement concrete

Section 01025 - Measurement and Payment.

Section 01027 - Applications for Payment.

Section 01028 - Modification Requirements.

Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.

New Numbering System

1.1 (SECTION 01019) Part 1 General

1.1.1 Related Sections

Section 01025 - Measurement and Payment.

Section 01028 - Modification Requirements.

Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.

DOCUMENT NO: 511

Document No: 511

2.1.6 Non-Payment for Rejected Products ............................................................................................3

4.1.9 Correlation of Contractor Submittals ............................................................................................8

6.1.6 Handing Over Inspection/Meeting ..............................................................................................11

8.1.7 Survey Requirements .................................................................................................................17

9.1.12 ASTM Standards ........................................................................................................................37

11.1.1 Related Sections .........................................................................................................................49

11.1.19 Manufacturer's Field Reports......................................................................................................57

13.1.2 Photography ...............................................................................................................................66

14.3.1 Examination ................................................................................................................................72

16.1 Part 1 General ...................................................................................................................................80

17.1.4 Temporary Heating .....................................................................................................................85

18.1.8 Impact on Environment and Services .........................................................................................91

18.1.26 Power Operated Tools ..............................................................................................................100

19.3.8 Mud from Site Vehicles .............................................................................................................105

21.1.9 Noise Control ............................................................................................................................108

22.2.2 Barriers .....................................................................................................................................113

23.2.4 Safety Notice Board ..................................................................................................................119

24.3.4 Removal ....................................................................................................................................124

26.1.2 Commissioning of Systems ......................................................................................................130

28.1.1 Quality Assurance .....................................................................................................................136

1. CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS (SECTION

Section 01027 - Applications for Payment.

Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.

1.1.3 Compensation for Damage to Property

B. If the Contractor fails to reinstate private property affected by the Works

1. Arrange for the work to be completed by others,

2. Make payments to the owners and occupiers.

1.2 Part 2 Products

DIVISION 01 - SECTION 01019 FIRST EDITION - DECEMBER 2016

2. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (SECTION

Section 01027 - Applications for Payment.

2.1.3 Measurement of Quantities

2.1.5 Defect Assessment

2.1.6 Non-Payment for Rejected Products

1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable.

5. Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work unless otherwise

directed by the Division.

6. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected Products.

2.2 Part 2 Products

2.3 Part 3 Execution

3. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT (SECTION

Section 01028 - Modification Requirements

Section 01300 - Submittals: Submittal procedures.

3.1.3 Preparation of Applications

B. The Contractor shall execute certification by signature of authorised officer.

3.1.4 Submittal Procedures